B 001 001 132

MODERN
ELECTRONIC
ORCUfTl
REFERENCE
MANUAL
John Markus
With over 3600 diagrams, this is the
largest collection of electronic circuits
ever assembled in one reference
volume. Save hours — even days — of
research and design time by referring to
this data bank of circuits of all kinds,
use-tested in a wide variety of industrial
as well as hobby applications. When
searching for needed circuits simply
look here for the very best in pre-
designed integrated circuits and solid-
state devices.
This invaluable manual contains an
entire library shelf of data culled from
important electronics application
journals and application notes of the
past several years. Organized and
indexed for convenient reference, it
provides the values of all significant
components to facilitate adaptation to
another application — and offers sug-
gestions inconcise abstracts for making
such revisions. It even includes a cita-
tion at the end of each abstract that
gives the exact location in the original
source for those who find what they
want and seek additional performance
or construction details.
One hundred and three chapters
provide circuits ranging from the basic
workhorse circuits for modern amplifiers
to the latest circuits for microprocessor
data transmission and electronic game
applications. For example, the manual
includes . . .
audio control circuits • audio
measuring circuits • automotive
circuits • burglar alarm circuits •
capacitance measuring circuits •
cathode-ray circuits • clock signal
circuits • contact bounce sup-
pression circuits • fiber-optic cir-
cuits • fire alarm circuits • flasher
circuits • frequency counter circuits
• frequency synthesizer circuits •
game circuits • instrumentation
circuits • lamp control circuits •
medical circuits • memory circuits •
microprocessor circuits • motor
control circuits • music circuits •
noise circuits • protection circuits •
(continued on back flap)
9
MODERN
ELECTRONIC
CIRCUITS
REFERENCE
MANUAL
BOOKS by JOHN MARKUS
COMMUNICATIONS CIRCUITS READY-REFERENCE
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MANUAL
ELECTRONICS DICTIONARY
ELECTRONICS PROJECTS READY-REFERENCE
ESSENTIAL CIRCUITS REFERENCE GUIDE
GUIDEBOOK OF ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS
MODERN ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS REFERENCE MANUAL
POPULAR CIRCUITS READY-REFERENCE
SPECIAL CIRCUITS READY REFERENCE
For more information about other McGraw-Hill materials, call 1 -800-2-McGraw in the United States. In
other countries, call your nearest McGraw-Hill office.
MODERN
ELECTRONIC
CIRCUITS
REFERENCE
MANUAL
Over 3,630 modern electronic circuits, each complete
with values of all parts and performance details,
organized in 103 logical chapters for quick
reference and convenient browsing
JOHN MARKUS
Consultant, McGraw-Hill Book Company
Senior Member, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
McGRAW-HILL BOOK COMPANY

New York St. Louis San Francisco Auckland Bogota Hamburg
London Madrid Mexico Montreal New Delhi
Panama Paris Sao Paulo Singapore Sydney Tokyo Toronto
Library of Congress Cataloging in Publication Data
Markus, John, date.

Modern electronic circuits reference manual.
“Over 3630 modem electronic circuits, each complete

with values of all parts and performance details,
organized in 103 logical chapters for quick reference
and convenient browsing.”

Includes bibliographical references and indexes.
1. Electronic circuits — Handbooks, manuals, etc.
2. Integrated circuits — Handbooks, manuals, etc.
I. Title.
TK7867.M345 621.3815'3 79-22096

ISBN 0-07-040446-1
Copyright © 1980 by McGraw-Hill, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed

in the United States of America. No part of this publication may be
reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form
or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher.
91011121314 KPKP 99876543210
The editors for this book were Tyler G. Hicks and Joseph Williams
and the production supervisor was Sally Fliess. It was set in Univers
65 by University Graphics, Inc.
Printed and bound by The Kingsport Press.

Contents
Preface ix
vii 33. Frequency measuring 776
71. Pulse generator circuits ... 760
Abbreviations used circuits
Semiconductor symbols used xiii 34. Frequency modulation 371 73. Regulated power supply
Addresses of sources used XV circuits 383 809
1.
Amplifier circuits 15i 35. Frequency multiplier 74. Regulator circuits 827
2. Antenna circuits circuits 75. Remote control circuits . . . 858
3. Audio amplifier circuits . . . 32 36. Frequency synthesizer 399 866
406 76. Repeater circuits
4. Audio control circuits 52 circuits 77. Resistance measuring
5. Audio measuring circuits 70 37. Function generator circuits 416 circuits 873
435
6. Automatic gain control 76 38. Game circuits 881
444 78. Sampling circuits
circuits 39. IF amplifier circuits 79. Servo circuits 890
7. Automotive circuits 81
92 40. Instrumentation circuits 452 913
80. Signal generator circuits . . 897
8. 41. Integrator circuits 468
Battery-charging circuits . . 101 81. Single-sideband circuits
9. Burglar alarm circuits 42. Intercom circuits 473 82. Siren circuits 922
10. Capacitance measuring 43. Keyboard circuits 479
489 928
83. Squelch circuits
circuits 112 44. Lamp control circuits 84. Staircase generator 933
11. 122
Cathode-ray circuits 45. Limiter circuits 495
499 circuits
12. Clock signal circuits 130
46. Logarithmic circuits 85. Stereo circuits 940
13. Code circuits 141
47. Logic circuits 507 86. Sweep circuits 949
14. Comparator circuits 161
48. Logic probe circuits 516 87. Switching circuits 956
15. Contact bounce suppression 49. Medical circuits 523 88. Switching regulator
circuits 170 983
50. Memory circuits .... 533 964
16. Converter circuits — analog- 51. Microprocessor circuits ... 544 89. Tape recorder circuits ....
to-digital 174 52. Modulator circuits 558 90. Telephone circuits 1008
997
17. Converter circuits — DC to 53. Motor control circuits .... 91. Teleprinter circuits
188 1024
DC 54. Multiplexer circuits 567
582 92. Television circuits
18. Converter circuits — digital- 55. Multiplier circuits 595 93. Temperature control
198 1039
to-analog 56. Multivibrator circuits 605 circuits
19. Converter circuits — 57. Music circuits 94. Temperature measuring
205
general 58. Noise circuits 622 circuits 1049
219 1064
20. Converter circuits — radio 637 95. Test circuits
59. Operational amplifier
21. Counter circuits 234 circuits 644 1081
22. Current control circuits . . . 244 60. Optoelectronic circuits 660 97. Touch-switch circuits 1101
248 1108
23. Data transmission circuits 61. Oscillator circuits — AF .... 668 98. Transceiver circuits 1123
24. Digital clock circuits 261 62. Oscillator circuits — RF .... 679 99. Transmitter circuits
25. Display circuits 277
63. Phase control circuits 696
703 100. Voltage-controlled oscillator
26. Fiber-optic circuits 299 64. Phonograph circuits circuits 1151
27. Filter circuits — active 305
65. Photoelectric circuits 711
715 101. Voltage-level detector 1158
28. Filter circuits — passive 333 66. Photography circuits circuits
722
29. Fire alarm circuits 338 67. Power control circuits .... 102. Voltage measuring circuits 1166
735
30. Flasher circuits 343 68. Power supply circuits 1186
103. Voltage reference circuits
31. Frequency counter circuits 352 69. Programmable circuits 744 Author index 1203
1195
32. Frequency divider circuits 365
70. Protection circuits 754 Subject index
V
Preface
Over 3,630 practical modern electronic circuits are arranged here in 103 logical
chapters for convenient browsing and reference by electronics engineers, tech-
nicians, students, microprocessor enthusiasts, amateur radio fans, and experi-
menters. Each circuit has type numbers or values of all significant components,
an identifying title, a concise description, performance data, and suggestions for
other applications. At the end of each description is a citation giving the title of
the original article or book, its author, and the exact location of the circuit in the
original source.
This fourth in a series of state-of-the-art reference volumes illustrates dra-
matically the accelerated trend to integrated circuits that has taken place since
publication of “Guidebook of Electronic Circuits” in 1974. About half of the
applications now use ICs, and tube circuits have become a distinct rarity. This
trend becomes even more evident when comparing circuits with those in the
first and second books of the series, “Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits” and
Electronic Circuits Manual.’ The four books supplement each other and to-
gether provide a total of over 13,300 different practical circuits at a cost of only
about 1 cent per circuit. The collection can serve as a basic desktop reference
library that will match retrieval speeds of computer-based indexing systems
while providing in addition the actual circuit diagrams.
The circuits for this new book were located by cover-to-cover searching of
back issues of U.S. and foreign electronics periodicals, the published literature
of electronics manufacturers, and recent electronics books, together filling well
over 100 feet of shelving. This same search would take weeks or even months,
at a large engineering library, plus the time required to write for manufacturer
literature and locate elusive sources.
Engineering libraries, particularly in foreign countries, have found these
circuit abstracts to be a welcome substitute for the original sources when facing
limitations on budgets, shelving, or search manpower. As further evidence of
their usefulness in other countries, some of the books have been translated into
Greek, Spanish, or Japanese.
Entirely new chapters in this book, further emphasizing evolution of the
industry in recent years, include Clock Signal, Fiber-Optic, Game, Keyboard,
Logic Probe, Microprocessor, Programmable, Switching Regulator, and Touch-
Switch Circuits. Significant new circuits appear in chapters found also in pre-
vious books, particularly for Automotive, Burglar Alann, Digital Clock, Fire
Alarm, Flasher, Frequency Counter, Frequency Synthesizer, Instrumentation,
Intercom, Lamp Control, Medical, Memory, Motor Control, Music, Power Con-
trol, Protection, Siren, Stereo, and Telephone Circuits.
viii
To find a desired circuit quickly, start with the alphabetically arranged table
of contents at the front of the book. Note the chapters most likely to contain the
desired type of circuit, and look in these first. Remember that most applications
use combinations of basic circuits, so a desired circuit could be in any of several
different chapters. Scope notes following chapter titles define the basic circuits
covered and sometimes suggest other chapters for browsing.
If a quick scan does not locate the exact circuit desired, use the index at the
back of the book. Here the circuits are indexed in depth under the different
names by which they may be known. Hundreds of cross-references in the index
aid searching. The author index will often help find related circuits after one
potentially useful circuit is found, because authors tend to specialize in certain
circuits.
Values of important components are given for every circuit because these
help in reading the circuit and redesigning it for other requirements. The de-
velopment ofa circuit for a new application is speeded when design work can
be started with a working circuit, instead of starting from scratch. Research and
experimentation are thereby cut to a minimum, so even a single use of this cir-
cuit-retrieval book could pay for its initial cost many times over. Drafting errors
on diagrams are minimized because any corrections pointed out in subsequently
published errata notices have been made; this alone can save many frustrating
hours of troubleshooting.
This book is organized to provide a maximum of circuit information per
page, with minimum repetition. The chapter tide at the top of each right-hand
page and the original title in the citation should therefore be considered along
with the abstract when evaluating a circuit.
Abbreviations are used extensively to conserve space. Their meanings are
given after this preface. Abbreviations on diagrams and in original article titles
were unchanged and may differ slightly, but their meanings can be deduced by
context.
Mailing addresses of all cited original sources are given at the front of the
book, for convenience in writing for back issues or copies of articles when the
source is not available at a local library. These sources will often prove useful
for construction details, performance graphs, and calibration procedures.
To Joan Fife, student at the University of Santa Clara, goes credit for typing
the complete manuscript directly from dictation while correcting this author’s
grammar and punctuation practices of yesteryear and even catching technical
oversights. Handling of hyphenation, abbreviations, and citations was entirely
her responsibility, along with final editing, markup for the printer, and
production of the index.
To the original publications cited and their engineering authors and editors
should go major credit for making possible this fourth encyclopedic contribution
to electronic circuit design. The diagrams have been reproduced directly from
the original source articles, by permission of the publisher in each case.
John Markus
Abbreviations Used
A CRO farad
ampere cathode-ray F
AC oscilloscope
alternating current degree Fahrenheit
AC/DC AC or DC CROM memory
control and read-only FET field-effect transistor
A/D FIFO
analog-to-digital first-in first-out
frequency
ADC CRT cathode-ray tube FM
analog-to-digital
center tap
converter CT modulation
A/D, D/A analog-to-digital, or CW continuous wave 4PDT
four-pole double-
digital-to-analog D/A digital-to-analog throw
ADP automatic data DAC digital-to-analog 4PST
FS four-pole single-
processing converter throw
AF audio frequency dB decibel fullkeying
scale
AFC dBC
automatic frequency C-scale sound level
control in decibels frequency-shift
FSK foot
AFSK audio frequency-shift dBm decibels above 1 mW ft
keying dBV decibels above 1 V
DC ft/s
ft/min foot per minute
AFT automatic fine direct current
tuning DC/DC foot per second
DC to DC
AGC automatic gain DCTL direct-coupled FA/ hp square foot
frequency-to-voitage
control transistor logic
diac FA/, V/F frequency-to-voltage,
Ah diode AC switch
ampere-hour DIP frequency
ALU arithmetic-logic unit dual in-line package or voltage-to-
AM amplitude DMA direct memory G
modulation access
G-M tube henry
AM/FM AM or FM DMM GHz
digital multimeter Geiger-Mueller tube
AND giga- (109)
type of logic circuit DPDT h hour
gigahertz
double-pole double-
AVC automatic volume throw H
DPM high frequency
control digital panel meter HF
HFO
b bit DPST high-frequency
double-pole single-
BCD binary-coded decimal throw oscillator
BFO DSB 1C
beat-frequency double sideband horsepower
oscillator DTL diode-transistor logic Hz hertz
b/s DTL/TTL DTL or TTL
bit per second ft2
integrated circuit
C °C capacitance; DUT device under test IF intermediate
frequency
capacitor DVM
DX digital voltmeter
degree Celsius; distance reception; IGFET insulated-gate FET
IMD
degree Centigrade distant intermodulation
CATV cable television EAROM electrically alterable distortion
CB citizens band ROM IMPATT
impact avalanche
CCD charge-coupled EBCDIC transit time
extended binary- inch
device coded decimal in
CCTV closed-circuit interchange code in/s
I/O inch per second
television ECG electrocardiograph
cm centimeter ECL emitter-coupled logic square inch
input/output
CML EDP infrared
current-mode logic electronic data IR
CMOS complementary MOS processing
CMR EKG electrocardiograph JFET junction FET
common-mode k
kilo-
kilohm(103)
(,000 ohms);
rejection EMF electromotive force K
CMRR common-mode EMI electromagnetic kelvin
rejection ratio interference kA kiloampere
square centimeter EPROM erasable PROM kb kilobit
cm2
coax coaxial cable ERP effective radiated keV kiloelectronvolt
kilohenry
COHO coherent oscillator kH
COR carrier-operated
relay educational kHz kilohertz
ETV power
television km kilometer
COS/MOS electronvolt in2kilovolt
complementary- kV
EVR
symmetry MOS eV electronic video kilovoltampere
recording
(same as CMOS) kVA
kW kilowatt
CPU central processing EXCLUSIVE-OR kWh kilowatthour
type of logic circuit
unit L inductance; inductor
EXCLUSIVE-
CR cathode ray NOR LASCR
type of logic circuit light-activated SCR
IX
X ABBREVIATIONS
NMOS N-channel MOS

LASCS light-activated SCS
LC NOR QRP radio
low-power amateur
inductance- NPN type of logic circuit
capacitance negative-positive- R resistance; resistor
RAM memory
LCD liquid crystal display negative random-access
LDR NPNP
light-dependent negative-positive-
resistor negative-positive
NRZ RC
LED light-emitting diode nonreturn-to-zero resistance-
LF low frequency NRZI capacitance
radio frequency
nonreturn-to-zero- RFI
RF
LIFO inverted radio-frequency
last-in first-out
Im lumen nanosecond
ns interference
LO local oscillator NTSC National Television
RGB red/green/blue
logamp logarithmic amplifier Recording Industry
RIAA
LP long play System
Committee Association of
LSB least significant bit nV nanovolt America
nW RLC
LSI nanowatt
large-scale
OEM original equipment resistance-
integration
m opamp manufacturer inductance-
meter; milli- (10 3) RMS capacitance
M mega- (1 06); meter operational amplifier root-mean-square
(instrument); read-only memory
type of logic circuit ROM revolution per
motor POR
mA rpm
milliampere P minute
pico- (10
peak; 12)
positive
Mb megabit PA picoampere resistor-transistor
MF RTL
medium frequency public address logic
millihenry PAL radioteletype
mH phase-alternation
line RTTY
MHD PAM
magnetohydro- return-to-zero
dynamics pulse-amplitude second
MHz modulation s
megahertz PC
mile SAR
RZ
mi printed circuit successive-
mike PCM
microphone pA approximation
minute pulse-code
min modulation register
surface acoustic
mm PDM SAW wave
millimeter
pulse-duration Subsidiary
modem modulation
modulator- PEP SCA
demodulator peak envelope power Communications
mono monostable Authorization
picofarad scope
MOS oscilloscope
metal-oxide PF power factor
semiconductor phonograph silicon controlled
PIN SCR
MOSFET metal-oxide phono rectifier
positive-intrinsic-
semiconductor PIV negative silicon controlled
SCS
FET peak inverse voltage
PLL S-meter switch
MOST metal-oxide PM phase-locked loop signal-strength
semiconductor permanent magnet; meter
transistor pF phase modulation
PMOS P-channel MOS signal-to-noise
MPU PN S IN
microprocessing unit signal-to-noise ratio
ms millisecond positive-negative
PNP SNR single-pole double-
MSB most significant bit positive-negative- SPDT throw
MSI medium-scale PNPN SPST
positive single-pole single-
integration positive-negative-
throw
square meter positive-negative
SSB single sideband
P-P potentiometer small-scale
micro- (10 6) SSI
microampere peak-to-peak
m2 integration
/nA microfarad PPI plan-position slow-scan television
indicator SSTV
microhenry PPM
pot shortwave
a*f SW
micrometer parts per million; shortwave listener
fiH SWL
/im microprocessor pulse-position
modulation SWR standing-wave ratio
microsecond synchronizing
/J.P preamp
microvolt preamplifier
IAS PRF pulse repetition T
microwatt sync
/aV frequency TC temperature
mV
Ia\N millivolt tera- (1012)
coefficient
PROM THD
MVBR multivibrator PRR programmable ROM total harmonic
mW milliwatt pulse repetition rate distortion
n PSK picosecond transmit-receive
phase-shift keying TRF
TR
N nano- (10~9) tuned radio
negative PTT frequency
nA nanoampere PUT push to talk
triac
NAB National Association programmable UJT triode AC
of Broadcasters PWM picowatt semiconductor
NAND type of logic circuit pulse-width
modulation TTL switch
nF nanofarad transistor-transistor
nH nanohenry logic
Q quality factor
ps
pW
ABBREVIATIONS xi
TTY volt
teletypewriter V
VA VSWR
TV television voltage standing-
voltampere wave ratio
TVI television VAC volts AC VTR videotape recording
interference VCO
voltage-controlled VTVM
vacuum-tube
TVT television typewriter oscillator voltmeter
TWX VDC
teletypewriter volts DC VU volume unit
V/F
exchange service voltage-to-frequency VVC
universal VFO voltage-variable
UART variable-frequency
asynchronous oscillator VXO capacitor
variable-frequency
receiver- VHF very high frequency
VLF crystal oscillator
transmitter very low frequency w watt
UHF ultrahigh frequency VMOS
vertical metal-oxide Wh watthour
UJT unijunction semiconductor WPM
transistor VOM words per minute
WRMS watts RMS
UPC volt-ohm-
universal product milliammeter Ws wattsecond
code VOX voice-operated Z
UPS uninterruptible transmission impedance
VRMS
power system volts RMS
Abbreviations on Diagrams. Some foreign publica-

tions, including Wireless World, shorten the abbre-
viations for units of measure on diagrams. Thus, fx
after a capacitor value represents ûF, n is nF, and p
is pF. With resistor values, k is thousand ohms, M is
megohms, and absence of a unit of measure is ohms.
For a decimal value, the letter for the unit of measure
is sometimes placed at the location of the decimal
point. Thus, 3k3 is 3.3 kilohms or 3,300 ohms, 2M2 is
2.2 megohms, 4/x7 is 4.7 /xF, 0/xl is 0.1 /xF, and 4n7
is 4.7 nF.
Semiconductor Symbols Used
DIODES:
(Q -0- 0
E = EMITTER
0
B = BASE
C= COLLECTOR
GA== GATE
ANODE
PNPN
RECTIFIER ZENER TUNNEL THYRECTOR
DIODE VARACTOR
DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE K = CATHODE
D = DRAIN
■C S= SOURCE
TRANSISTORS: N-CHANNEL MT = MAIN TERMINAL

NPN N-CHANNEL N-CHANNEL N-CHANNEL N-CHANNEL N-CHANNEL
^
D
G
-C S V >— /-Bl G
'€1 PNP P-CHANNEL
°
P-CHANNEL
Ei<JV2
P-CHANNEL P-CHANNEL P-CHANNEL P-CHANNEL
V 1— / B1 G
BIPOLAR FET DEPLETION- ENHANCEMENT-
UJT
MOSFET MODE MODE
MOSFET MOSFET
POWER CONTROL DEVICES:

OPTOELECTRONIC DEVICES'-
A " iMTi
GK \
K G PHOTO
TRIAC LED OR PHOTO LASCR
SCS SUS DIAC
SCR DIODE
LASER TRANSISTOR
IK
The commonest forms of the basic semiconductor acteristics, terminal connections, and such critical rat-
symbols are shown here. Leads are identified where ings as voltage, current, frequency, and duty cycle,
appropriate, for convenient reference. Minor varia- must of course be taken into account if experimenting
tions in symbols, particularly those from foreign without referring to substitution guides.
sources, can be recognized by comparing with these Semiconductor, integrated-circuit, and tube sub-
symbols while noting positions and directions of solid stitution guides can usually be purchased at elec-
arrows with respect to other symbol elements. tronic parts supply stores.
Omission of the circle around a symbol has no Not all circuits give power connections and pin
significance. Arrows are sometimes drawn open in- locations for ICs, but this information can be obtained
stead of solid. Thicker lines and open rectangles in from manufacturer data sheets. Alternatively, brows-
some symbols on diagrams have no significance. Ori- ing through other circuits may turn up another circuit
entation ofsymbols is unimportant; artists choose the on which the desired connections are shown for the
position that is most convenient for making connec- same IC.
tions to other parts of the circuit. Arrow lines outside When looking down at the top of an actual IC,
optoelectronic symbols indicate the direction of light numbering normally starts with 1 for the first pin
rays. counterclockwise from the notched or otherwise
On some European diagrams, the position of the marked end and continues sequentially. The highest
letter k gives the location of the decimal point for a number is therefore next to the notch on the other side
resistor value in kilohms. Thus, 2k2 is 2.2K or 2,200 of the IC, as illustrated in the sketches below. (Actual
ohms. Similarly, a resistance of 1R5 is 1.5 ohms, 1M2 positions of pins are rarely shown on schematic
is 1.2 megohms, and 3n3 is 3.3 nanofarads. diagrams.)
Substitutions can often be made for semiconduc-
tor and IC types specified on diagrams. Newer com-
ponents, not available when the original source arti-
cle was published, may actually improve the
performance of a particular circuit. Electrical char-
xiii
Addresses of Sources Used
In the citation at the end of each abstract, the title of Harris Semiconductor, Department 53-35, P.O. Box 883,
a magazine is set in italics. The title of a book or report Melbourne, FL 32901
is placed in quotes. Each source title is followed by Hewlett-Packard, 1501 Page Mill Rd., Palo Alto, CA 94304
the name of the publisher of the original material, Howard W. Sams & Co. Inc., 4300 West 62nd St., Indian-
plus city and state. Complete mailing addresses of all apolis, IN 46206
sources are given below, for the convenience of read- IEEE Publications, 345 East 47th St., New York, NY 10017
Instruments
19089 b Control Systems, Chilton Way, Radnor, PA
ers who want to write to the original publisher of a
particular circuit. When writing, give the complete Kilobaud, Peterborough, NH 03458
citation, exactly as in the abstract.
McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1221 Avenue of the Americas, New
Books can be ordered from their publishers, after York, NY 10020
first writing for prices of the books desired. Some Modern Electronics , 14 Vanderventer Ave., Port Washing-
electronics manufacturers also publish books and ton, NY 11050
large reports for which charges are made. Many of the Motorola Semiconductor Products Inc., Box 20912, Phoe-
books cited as sources in this volume are also sold by nix, AZ 85036
bookstores and by electronics supply firms. Locations Milliard Limited, Mullard House, Torrington Place, Lon-
of these firms can be found in the YELLOW PAGES don WC1E 7HD, England
of telephone directories under headings such as National Semiconductor Corp., 2900 Semiconductor Dr.,
Santa Clara, CA 95051
“Electronic Equipment and Supplies” or “Television Optical Electronics Inc., P.O. Box 11140, Tucson, AZ 85734
and Radio Supplies and Parts.” Popular Science, 380 Madison Ave., New York, NY 10017
Only a few magazines have back issues on hand Precision Monolithics Inc., 1500 Space Park Dr., Santa
for sale, but most magazines will make copies of a spe- Clara, CA 95050
cific article at a fixed charge per page or per article. (1ST, American Radio Relay League, 225 Main St., New-
When you write to a magazine publisher for prices of ington, CT 06111
back issues or copies, give the complete citation, ex- Radio Shack, 1100 One Tandy Center, Fort Worth, TX
actly as in the abstract. Include a stamped self-ad- 76102
dressed envelope to make a reply more convenient. Raytheon Semiconductor, 350 Ellis St., Mountain View, CA
94042
If certain magazines consistently publish the
types of circuits in which you are interested, use the RCA Solid State Division, Box 3200, Somerville, NJ 08876
Howard W. Sams & Co. Inc., 4300 West 62nd St., Indian-
addresses below to write for subscription rates.
apolis, IN 46206
73 Magazine, Peterborough, NH 03458
American Microsystems, Inc., 3800 Homestead Rd., Santa Siemens Corp., Components Group, 186 Wood Ave. South,
Clara, CA 95051 Iselin, NJ 08830
Audio, 401 North Broad St., Philadelphia, PA 19108 Signetics Corp., 811 East Arques Ave., Sunnvvale, CA
BYTE, 70 Main St., Peterborough, NH 03458 94086
Computer Design, 11 Goldsmith St., Littleton, MA 01460 Siliconix Inc., 2201 Laurelwood Rd., Santa Clara, CA 95054
CQ, 14 Vanderventer Ave., Port Washington, L.I., NY Sprague Electric Co., 479 Marshall St., North Adams, MA
11050 01247
Delco Electronics, 700 East Finnin, Kokomo, IN 46901 Teledyne Philbrick, Allied Drive at Route 128, Dedham,
Dialight Corp., 203 Harrison Place, Brooklyn, NY 11237 MA 02026
EDN, 221 Columbus Ave., Boston, MA 02116 Teledyne Semiconductor, 1300 Terra Bella Ave., Mountain
Electronics, 1221 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY View, CA 94040
10020 Texas Instruments Inc., P.O. Box 5012, Dallas, TX 75222
Electronic Servicing, 9221 Quivira Rd., P.O. Box 12901, TRW Power Semiconductors, 14520 Aviation Blvd., Lawn-
Overland Park, KS 66212 dale, CA 90260
Exar Integrated Systems, Inc., 750 Palomar Ave., Sunny- Unitrode Corp., 580 Pleasant St., Watertown, MA 02172
vale, CA 94086 Wireless World, Dorset House, Stamford St., London SE1
Ham Radio, Greenville, NH 03048 9LU, England
XV
MODERN
ELECTRONIC
CIRCUITS
REFERENCE
MANUAL
CHAPTER 1
Amplifier Circuits
Includes general-purpose RF amplifiers covering various portions of spectrum

from DC to 2.3 GHz at outputs up to 230 W,+ some with voltage-controlled
vcc
gain, for pulses as well as video and other RF signals. See other chapters in
book for RF amplifiers having specific applications.
0.25—400 MHz CASCADE — Three hybrid mod-

ules in cascade provide gain of 43.5 dB with flat-
ness of ±1 dB over frequency range. Circuit
draws 44 mA from 12-VDC supply. Modules 1
and 2 are Motorola MWA110, and module 3 is
MWA120. All capacitors are 0.018 g F. R1 and R2
are IK, and R3 is 300 ohms. — "Wideband Hybrid

Amplifiers," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1978, DS
5712.
CMOS/BIPOLAR VOLTAGE FOLLOWER— Com- bandwidth of 50 kHz. Slew rate is about ply D/A converters. — B. Furlow, CMOS Gates in
bination oftwo 4007 CMOS gate packages and 30 V//*s, and settling time is 2 /xs. Requires only Linear Applications: The Results Are Surpris-
one CA3083 transistor package provides gain of single +15 V supply. Can be driven to within 1 42-48. ingly Good, EDN Magazine, March 5, 1973, p
about 75 dB as voltage-follower amplifier and mV of ground. Interfaces well with single-sup-
1
2 MODERN ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS REFERENCE MANUAL
+8V
input
AC WITH IMMUNITY TO LARGE DC OFFSET—

CAPACITIVE-LOAD EMITTER-FOLLOWER— cuit works equally well with pulses, square Designed to amplify from about 250 kHz down
Overcomes problem that develops with trailing waves, and sine waves. Transistors need not be to low frequencies in presence of large DC input
edges of pulses when emitter-follower using matched. Reverse polarity of supplies to use offsets. Main NE540L amplifier has gain of 101,
NPN transistor is driving heavily capacitive PIMP transistors. Useful for driving long coax while NE536T has DC gain of unity and forms
load. Extra transistor is used to dump capacitor lines or logic from high-impedance source, part of low-pass network that applies DC input
charge when emitter-follower stops conducting without inversion.— H. L. Morgan, Emitter Fol- offset as common-mode voltage to inverting
at trailing edge of input waveform. Pulse trail- lower's Fall Time Is Independent of Load, EDN input of main amplifier. — A. Royston, Low Fre-
ing edge thus tends to cut off Q, and saturate Magazine, Feb. 5, 1977, p 105. quency A.C. Amplifier, Wireless World, May
1976, p 80.
lower transistor so it discharges capacitor. Cir-
+ 24V
BASIC FEEDBACK AMPLIFIER — Combination of both AF and RF response, capacitors shown can
unipolar and bipolar transistors gives desirable be paralleled by small ceramic or Mylar units. If
amplifying features of each solid-state device. FET and bipolar are selected for high transcon-
Circuit can be optimized for RF or AF by adjust- ductance and high gain-bandwidth product,
ing coupling, feedback, and emitter bypass ca- overall voltage gain can be 20 or more for fre-
pacitor values. Changes in feedback affect dis- quencies up to several megahertz. — I. M. Gott-
tortion, frequency response, and gain stability. lieb, A New Look at Solid-State Amplifiers, Ham
To optimize for RF, reduce capacitor sizes. For Radio, Feb. 1976, p 16-19. SMALL-SIGNAL AMPLIFIER— Combines fea-
tures of virtual-earth and high-input-impedance
0.15i/H 180 amplifiers economically for such applications as
a record amplifier, and provides several times
+ 6V
the gain of a virtual-earth amplifier alone. — D.
Rawson-Harris, Small Signal Amplifier, Wire-
less World, Feb. 1977, p 45.
SUMMING/SCALING VIDEO— With Motorola

MC1552G video amplifier connected as shown,
summation of input signal currents is accom-
13 W at 160 MHz — Circuit uses Siliconix VMP-4 frequencies up to as high as 600 MHz.— RF plished at pin 4 through input resistors whose
power MOSFET to provide 11 -dB gain with 26- Power MOSFET Outputs 13 W at 160 MHz with values are chosen to give desired scale factor. —
V supply, or 14 dB with 36-V supply. Broadband High Gain, No Breakdown, EDN Magazine, June "A Wide Band Monolithic Video Amplifier," Mo-
design permits operation over wide range of 20, 1976, p 144-145. torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1973, AN-404, p 9.
AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 3
500 kHz TO 500 MHz — Two-stage general-pur-

pose wideband small-signal amplifier provides
nearly 14-dB gain at 150 MHz when inserted in
50-ohm transmission line with no tuned circuits
at input or output. Noise figure with optimum
source resistance is about 3 dB at 150 MHz. Am-
plifier iscapacitively coupled common-emitter
cascade. Capacitors make low-frequency gain
begin dropping off below about 2 MHz. Increas- PARAPHASE PHASE INVERTER— Uses 180° quency response referred to 1 kHz is flat within
ing all capacitors to 0.01 /rF will lower frequency phase difference between source and drain out- 3 dB from 50 Hz to 50 kHz, when using 1-meg-
response to about 200 kHz. — R. Rhea, General puts of Siliconix U183 FET to convert AF input
ohm output load. — R. P. Turner, "FET Circuits,"
Purpose Wideband RF Amplifier, Ham Radio, to push-pull output without transformer. Volt- Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, 2nd
April 1975, p 58-61. age gain in each half of circuit is about 0.8. Fre-
Ed., p 29-30.
230-W WATER-COOLED — Used to excite mag- scribes cooling arrangement and circuit opera- senting 0.25 ohm) are wound from resistance
netic specimens in frequency range of 0 to 110 tion in detail and gives suitable preamp circuit
wire since they must carry large currents. Out-
kHz at outputs up to 12 A. Output stage uses for driving inputs of BCY89 dual transistor. De- put impedance of circuit is less than 0.5 ohm,
two complementary pairs of emitter-followers signed for 32-VDC supply, which connects to for matching to low-resistance load. — I. L. Ste-
connected so each pair forms half of bridge, top and bottom horizontal buses on diagram. fani and R. Perryman, Liquid-Cooled Power Am-
using MJ4030 and MJ4033 Darlingtons Feedback circuits are drawn in heavy lines. Re- plifier, Wireless World, Dec. 1974, p 505-507.
mounted on liquid-cooled heatsinks. Article de- sistors in series with Darlingtons (0R25, repre-
2304-MHz PREAMP — Narrow-band stage using

Fairchild MT-2500 bipolar transistor gives gain
of 6 to 9 dB and noise figure of 2.5 to 4.5 dB.
Cavity resonators at both input and output give
excellent frequency selectivity. Similar circuit
can be used with Fairchild MT-4500, FMT-4005,
or equivalent newer stripline-type transistors.
RFC1 is 3 turns and RFC2 is 5 turns, air-wound
with No. 26 enamel by using No. 52 drill as man-
drel. Coupling strips on base and collector of
transistor are 0.25-mm brass shim stock. Article
gives construction and tune-up details, along
with alternate design for HP-35821 E and HP-
35862E transistors using coupling loops. 10K
pot is used only during tune-up. — N. J. Foot,
Narrow-Band Solid-State 2304-MHz Preampli-
fiers, Ham Radio, July 1974, p 6-11.
+ ISV
MULTIPURPOSE MODULE — Flexible circuit

using FET to drive bipolar transistor has -3 dB
points at 100 Hz and 0.6 MHz. Components are
noncritical and can be changed considerably in
value to optimize gain, frequency response,
power output, or power consumption. Load
presented to FET is primarily input resistance of
bipolar transistor, about 1000 ohms, which
gives voltage gain of 4 for FET.— I. M. Gottlieb,
A New Look at Solid-State Amplifiers, Ham
Radio, Feb. 1976, p 16-19.
IMPEDANCE CONVERTER— Used to match 10- quency counter. Voltage gain is exactly 0.5. Fre- Load, EDN Magazine, March 5, 1973, p 87 and
megohm input impedance to 50-ohm transmis- quency response is from DC to 20 MHz and can
89.
AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 5
+ /5V
FET-BIPOLAR SOURCE FOLLOWER— Used

where source follower with high output-volt-
age swing and voltage gain close to unity is re- 200-MHz CASCODE— JFETs give low cross- JFET. Neutralization is not needed. — "FET Da-
quired. Circuit has constant-current bias supply.
Combination of unipolar and bipolar transistors ",
modulation, large signal-handling ability, and
AGC action controlled by biasing upper cascode
tabook," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36.
gives desirable amplifying features of each
solid-state device. — I. M. Gottlieb, A New Look
at Solid-State Amplifiers, Ham Radio, Feb. 1976,
p 16-19.
R,
R3
R<
RS
R9
VIDEO AMPLIFIER — AGC capability of Motorola
MC1590G makes it highly suitable for wideband
video amplifier applications. Voltage gain is
R2.R7 3.09k, 1% about 25 dB up to 50 MHz for 100-ohm load and
Q,.Q4 : 2N3931 45 dB up to 10 MHz for IK load. Several circuits
510, 1%
Q2 : 2N3563 100k, 1% can be cascaded to increase gain, using capa-
Ik, 1%
Q3 : 2N3773 RVR6 citive coupling. — B. Trout, "A High Gain Inte-
5k, 1%
D, IN 759 10k, 5% grated Circuit RF-IF Amplifier with Wide Range
C, : 100 pF AGC," Motorola, Phoenix, A2, 1975, AN-513,
330, 5%
HIGH-VOLTAGE BUFFER — Circuit shown for I, is proportional to l„ and output voltage V„ is

£iA723 voltage regulator permits use as high- proportional to l2 and V N.— G. Niu, Single Op
voltage and high-current buffer in linear appli- Amp Implements High-Voltage/Current Buffer,
cations. Power dissipation of output transistor EDN Magazine, Oct. 5, 1977, p 96 and 98.
Q3 is only limiting factor. I, is proportional to V,N,
p9.
2k 390 20k WIDEBAND VARIABLE GAIN— FET serves as

gain-controlled device in feedback loop of Op-
tical Electronics 9906 opamp. Resistive T net-
work has SD201 MOS transistor as ground leg,
with resistor values chosen so transistor is elec-
trically close to summing junction, automati-
cally limiting total signal voltage. Resulting ar-
rangement ofvoltage-controlled feedback and
compensation gives variable-gain amplifier
with good linearity and constant wideband
width for all gain levels. — "Wideband Variable
Gain Amplifier," Optical Electronics, Tucson,
AZ, Application Tip 10277.
-isv
CASCODE — Combination of unipolar and bi-

polar transistors gives desirable amplifying fea-
UNITY-GAIN VOLTAGE FOLLOWER— Mea- dashed components to simple voltage-follower tures of each solid-state device. Ideal for use
sured gain is 0.9997 V/V with an error of ±0.1% with tuned circuits in audio, video, IF, and RF
design gives near-perfect performance. — C. An-
over ±1.5 V swing. Circuit has infinite input dren. The Ideal Voltage Follower, EEE Maga- applications. — I. M. Gottlieb, A New Look at
impedance and zero bias current. Addition of zine, Jan. 1971, p 63-64. Solid-State Amplifiers, Ham Radio, Feb. 1976,
p 16-19.
HIGH-Z PREAMP — Provides up to 20 megohms

of input impedance and has essentially flat re-
sponse from 10 Hz to 220 MHz. Q3 serves as
emitter resistor for Q2, and emitter-follower Q4
reduces loading. Input impedance is further in-
creased byadding optional components shown
in dashed lines. Transistors are 2N2188,
SK3005, GE-9, or HEP-2.— Circuits, 73 Maga-
zine, Feb. 1974, p 102.
10-dB GAIN AT 0.01-100 MHz— High-gain

wideband untuned general-purpose amplifier
uses Fairchild 2N5126 or equivalent transistors
in direct-coupled circuit. Design is stable for
both power supply and temperature variations.
Gain is adjusted with R„ with maximum of 38
to 44 dB and maximum output of about 1 V P-P.
Will drive low-level transistor circuits having
load of about 1000 ohms. If several amplifiers
are used in series for higher gain, shielding is
required. Applications include amplification of
pulsed light signals detected by photodiode. Cx
can be 100-pF mica. — A. B. Hutchison, Jr., Gen-
eral Purpose Wide Band Amplifier, CQ, May
1972, p 22-23.
+vcc AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 7
BIAS SUPPLY FOR CLASS AB— Two-transistor

supply using PNP silicon transistor as amplified
diode variable-voltage source gives improved-
performance transistor RF power amplifier op-
erating inclass AB linear mode. Transistortypes
are not critical. Output impedance of bias
source is about 1 ohm, and output voltage
changes only up to 3'/i% for ±2.5 V change in
input voltage Vcc. — C. P. Bartram, Bias Supply
for R.F. Power Amplifiers, Wireless World, April
1976, p 61.
*ISV
SO -OHMS
1-36 MHz DISTRIBUTED — Provides 18-dB gain
over entire frequency range without use of spe- OUTPUT
cial ferrite transformers. Gain contribution of
each transistor, in phase with amplified wave as
it passes down artificial transmission line, adds
to that of other transistors. Capacitors marked
with asterisks are low-inductance ceramic
types such as Erie Redcap. Delay-line inductors
L are 12 turns No. 24 closewound on 'e-inch di-
ameter Lucite rod, and U2 units are 7 turns. Can
be used as preamp for frequency counter and as
auxiliary for other test equipment. Article cov-
ers construction, heatsinking of transistor, and
testing. — H. Olson, Wide-Range Broadband
Amplifier, Ham Radio, April 1974, p 40-44.
- 300
C (chip) 1
T, T„2
1
RFC1 =
L (ad|ust)
7 turns
nH
pF
L 2= 42 (ad)ust) coil diameter
6.3 mm
3~ 8 nH
C (chip) wire diameter
0.8 mm
rfc2 =
c 4 — 130 (chip)
3 turns on ferrite bead
pF
c 5= 750
6= 22 PF C?= 0.68
118-136
AiF MHz BROADBAND — Designed for low- DIFFERENTIAL PAIR— Conventional differential
level amplitude modulation system. 50-ohm amplifier circuit provides differential-mode gain
line transformers are wound with copper ribbon of 96, common-mode input resistance of 500
on ferrite core to give 4:1 ratio. Design and con- megohms, CMRR of 106 dB, and current-source
struction procedures are covered.
^F Transistor is output resistance greater than 1 gigohm. Article
Motorola 2N6083, rated 30 W for 4-W input. — B. gives design equations. — R. C. Jaeger and G. A.
Becciolini, "Impedance Matching Networks Ap- Hellwarth, Differential Cascode Amplifier Offers
plied to R-F Power Transistors," Motorola, Unique Advantages, EDN Magazine, June 5,
Phoenix, AZ, 1974, AN-721, p 17. 1974, p 78 and 80.
R2
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED GAIN— 2N5457 FET

acts as voltage-variable resistor between differ-
ential input terminals of opamp. Resistance var-
iation is linear with voltage over several de-
cades of resistance, to give excellent electronic
gain control. Values of resistors depend on
opamp used. — "FET Databook," National Semi-
conductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36.
give maximum possible reduction in input ca-

HIGH INPUT IMPEDANCE— Simple JFET input pacitance. Used as unity-gain AC amplifier. —
circuit is operated as source follower with "FET Databook," National Semiconductor,
bootstrapped gate bias resistor and drain to Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36.
100 W FOR DC TO 500 kHz — Circuit using Op-

tical Electronics opamps has high input imped-
ance, high gain capability, and 100-W output
capacity without use of transformers, for high-
fidelity audio circuits, cathode-ray deflection
circuits, and servosystems. Output currents up
to 10 A require heavy output wiring, large
power-supply bypass capacity, and heavy com-
mon ground point. Load is in feedback loop of
opamp. Constant-current drive for load makes
impedance matching to loudspeaker unneces-
sary—"A High Gain 100 Watt Amplifier," Op-
tical Electronics, Tucson, AZ, Application Tip
10205.
+ I5V
* VARIABLE CAPACITANCE <0.5-1.0pF) ADJUSTMENT

FOR EQUAL 3-dB BANDWIDTH AT AMPLIFIER
OUTPUTS, TERMINALS 10 AND 12. 20-dB VIDEO — Simple circuit having gain of 20
dB provides 3-dB bandwidth of 20 MHz for
20-MHz WIDEBAND— RCA CA3040 1C is con- "Linear 1C Principles, Experiments, and Proj- CA3100 bipolar MOS opamp. Total noise re-
nected for single-ended input and balanced out- ects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, ferred to input is only 35 pVRMS.— "Circuit
put, with no resonant circuits. Gain is above 30 p 162-163 and 168. Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," RCA Solid State Di-
dB over wide frequency range. — E. M. Noll, vision, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 12.
AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS +J2V 9
CONSTANT OUTPUT IMPEDANCE— Pulse out- 2N2904 output transistors, circuit delivers 200
COLLECTOR TAP AT CENTER
put stage gives output range from millivolts to mA with 20-ms rise and fall times. — W. A. Palm,
OUTPUT TAP AT 1-3/4 TURNS'
10 V P-P across 50 ohms while optimizing wave- Pulse Amplifier Varies Amplitude, EDN Maga-
form characteristics of output pulse. With zine, Aug. 5, 1978, p 76. 50-MHz POWER — Developed for use with 50-
MHz microtransistor crystal oscillator, using ad-
ditional GE microtransistor for boosting RF out-
put to about 75 mW. Article covers construction
with microcomponents and gives other micro-
transistor circuits for low-power amateur radio
3 dB BANDWIDTH = i5 MHz
use and possible bugging applications. — B.
CLG * 20 dB
Hoisington, Introduction to "Microtransistors,"
73 Magazine, Oct. 1974, p 24—30.
) OUTPUT TO
TERMINATED
son
TRANSMISSION
LINE
DELIVERS FOLLOWING PEAK

VOLTAGES TO 50 ft LINE
IMHi 8 V
2MH; 5 V
GAlN«2
4 MHz 2 V 0dB -15
^
V
8 MHz i I V
20-dB VIDEO LINE DRIVER — RCA CA3100 MHz. Upper frequency limit for unity gain is
wideband opamp and power transistor output about 38 MHz. — "Linear Integrated Circuits and
stage together provide gain of 20 dB at video MOS/FET's," RCA Solid State Division, Somer-
frequenciesfor driving 50-ohm line. Peak output ville, NJ, 1977, p 225-227.
voltage ranges from 8 V at 1 MHz to 1 V at 8
r"
+30
VIDEO ATTENUATOR— FETs in T attenuator

provide optimum dynamic linear range for at-
tenuation ofvideo signals with ganged 1-meg-
ohm pots. If complete turnoff is desired, atten-
uation greater than 100 dB can be obtained at
PREAMP FOR 0.5 Hz TO 2 MHz— Provides 1 1-dB 10 MHz by using appropriate RF construction to
gain over entire frequency range, with input minimize leakage. ON resistance of transistor
impedance of 32 megohms. Q3 is GE-2 or HEP- (between drain and source) is less than 30
52, and other transistors are SK3020 or HEP- ohms. — "FET Databook," National Semicon-
ductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-26—6-36.
VCC-+18V
clamping of baseline level of fast positive-going tion. Pulse widths at input are less than 100 ns,
digital pulses with constantly changing duty with transition time under 15 ns and duty cycle
cycle when capacitively coupled into level-sen- ranging from 2 to 50%. Diodes are HP 2800 se-
sitive circuits. Uses HA-2535 opamp. Diode D2 ries. For clamping sine or triangle AF waves,
clamps negative output swing of opamp to opamp can be 741. — D. L. Quick, Clamp Speeds
about 0.3 V, preserving amplifier recovery time Restoration of AC-Coupled Base Lines, EDN
in preparation for clamping next input transi- Magazine, Sept. 5, 1975, p 76.
20k 1% STABILIZED BIAS — Simple voltage-feedback

loop stabilizes bias on direct-coupled FET and
bipolar transistor stages. Arrangement uses
constant-current source Q2 to maintain stable
bias voltage on base of Q3. By choosing proper
resistor values, DC voltage feedback from emit-

ter of bipolar is made to control constant-cur-
rent value. Any change in drain current pro-
duces opposite change in constant-current
value, for stabilizing bipolar. Article gives de-
sign equation. — H. T. Russell, DC Feedback Sta-
bilizes Bias on FET/Bipolar Pair, EDN Magazine,
Nov. 15, 1970, p 51.
POLARITY-IGNORING VOLTAGE FOLLOWER— input to voltage follower through D,. Output

Absolute-value circuit is basically voltage fol- voltage is thus absolute value of input volt-
lower A, whose input is positive regardless of age.— R. J. Wincentsen, Absolute Value Circuit
polarity of V,N. With positive input, inverting Uses Only Five Parts, EDN Magazine, Nov. 1,
amplifier Az is disconnected by D,. With nega- 1972, p 44.
tive input, inverting amplifier applies positive
HIGH-IMPEDANCE VIDEO — Compound series-

feedback circuit using FET at input provides
RF DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER— Uses RCA used. Unmarked resistors are on 1C. — D. high input impedance and stable wideband gain
CA3028A linear 1C to provide power gain of DeMaw, Understanding Linear ICs, QST, Feb. for general-purpose video amplifier applica-
about 32 dB at frequencies up to about 120 MHz. tions.— "FET Databook," National Semicon-
1977, p 19-23.
Values of tuned circuits depend on frequency ductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36.
AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS II
+ 9V
2.5-MHz BANDWIDTH LOW-NOISE— Paralleled

transistors meet noise requirements of appli-
cations such as hot-wire anemometry for mea-
suring gas flow and temperature, wherein typ-
ical signal voltages are as small as 1 V peak
over frequency range of 100 Hz to 200 kHz. Two
feedback paths are used, one to provide low DC
gain and stabilize bias voltages and the other
for independent adjustment of AC gain. Design
bandwidth is 7 Hz to 2.5 MHz. — J. A. Grocock,
Low-Noise Wideband Amplifier, Wireless
World, March 1975, p 117-118.
50-dB BROADBAND VIDEO— RCA CA3018 four-

transistor array is connected as two pairs of
common-emitter emitter-follower combina-
tions, with two feedback loops providing high
DC stability. One path goes from emitter of Q3
back to input, and other goes from collector of
Q4 to collector of Q1. Values of Cl, C2, and C3
give low-frequency cutoff (3 dB down) of 800 Hz.
Upper cutoff is 32 MHz. — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C
Principles, Experiments, and Projects," Howard
W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 165-168 and
174.
RC-COUPLED DIFFERENTIAL— Input signal is

applied to base of first differential amplifier and
push-pull output is obtained from pins 8 and 10
for transfer to inputs of second 1C. Feedback is
transferred through RC combination back to pin
6 of first 1C. Gain is varied with AGC voltage ap-
plied to pin 2 of first 1C. Gain is over 60 dB with
flat response from 100 Hz to 100 kHz. — E. M.
Noll, "Linear 1C Principles, Experiments, and
Projects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
1974, p 89-91.
SHUNT
PEAKING COIL
FET CASCODE VIDEO— Use of 2N5485 FETs

gives very low input loading, with feedback re-
duced almost to zero. Bandwidth of amplifier is
limited only by load resistance and capaci-
tance.— "FET Databook," National Semicon-
40-265 MHz VMOS — Wideband power amplifier 4 turns No. 22 twisted-pair on Indiana General ductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36.
using Siiiconix Mospower FET in negative-feed- F625-9Q2 toroid core. Avoid static charges until
back circuit has flat gain within 0.5 dB over en- transistor is soldered into circuit. — E. Oxner,
tire operational range of 40 to 265 MHz. Use 6 Mospower FET as a Broadband Amplifier, Ham
to 8 turns of No. 30 on 'A-W 1-megohm resistor Radio, Dec. 1976, p 32-35.
for LI (not commercially molded choke). T1 is
• 15V
HIGH 2
OUTPUT
LOW Z
OUTPUT
70-dB VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED GAIN— Ampli-

fier Q, uses current source Q2 as emitter resistor
to provide correct current bias for class A op-
eration. Coupling through 1 50-/i F capacitor to SUMMING AMPLIFIER— Uses RCA CA3018
silicon diode string D,-Ds provides variable re- four-transistor array as current-mirror triad
sistance needed to achieve variable gain. Sim- with low-impedance buffered output, to serve
ple differential amplifier Q3-Q„ adjusts forward as high-performance summing amplifier. Mea-
bias of diodes to change their forward resis- sured harmonic distortion is less than 1% at
tance. Increasing positive control voltage from voltage gains up to 50 and with output swing
0 to 4.5 V changes voltage gain from -74 dBm of 10 V P-P. High output impedance of 51 kil-
to about -4 dBm with respect to 0-dBm input ohms can be buffered by Q2 connected as emit-
signal.— N. A. Steiner, Voltage-Controlled Am- ter-follower—W. G. Jung, Monolithic-Triad
plifier Covers 70 dB Range, EDN Magazine, Current Summer, EDNIEEE Magazine, July 1,
March 5, 1975, p 72 and 74. 1971, p 52.
13
AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS
V+ ^ 20 V
168-MHz BANDPASS — Gain stage provides

gain of 6 dB from 162 to 174 MHz. Skirt slope
immediately outside passband decreases at 80
db/MHz. Uses dispersive-design surface-acous-
tic-wave bandpass filter with 168-MHz center
frequency, 7% bandwidth, and extremely steep
skirt response. Parallel inductor at collector ter-
minal matches capacitance of acoustic-wave
device, and tapped inductor matches output
terminal of filter to 50 ohms. Used in spread-
spectrum communication receiver. Article cov-
ers design and construction of filter on quartz
substrate. — T. F. Cheek, Jr., R. M. Hays, Jr., and
C. S. Hartmann, A Wide-Band Low-Shape-Fac-
tor Amplifier Module Using an Acoustic Sur-
face-Wave Bandpass Filter, IEEE Journal of
Solid-State Circuits, Feb. 1973, p 66-70.
CASCODE RF/IF— Uses half of Signetics 511

transistor array to provide voltage gain of about
10 over bandwidth of 2 MHz with output volt-
age swing of 12 V P-P. Design procedure is
given. Circuit provides excellent isolation be-
tween input and output. — "Signetics Analog
Data Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977,
p 746-747.
WIDEBAND BUFFER — Low input capacitance of

2N5485 FET makes compound series-feedback
60-MHz NARROW-BAND— Signetics NE510/51 1 ohms is 300 mVRMS. Circuit is easily tuned. — buffer serve as wideband unity-gain amplifier
transistor array provides bandwidth of 0.5 MHz
"Signetics Analog Data Manual," Signetics, having high input impedance. — "FET Data-
for 3 dB down and noise figure of 7 dB for power Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 749. book," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
gain of 30 dB. Maximum output swing across 50
CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36.
80 MHz WITH INPUT PEAKING— Response of 1974, p 91-92.

CA3040 video 1C is extended beyond 80 MHz in
simple circuit that includes adjustable input
peaking coil. Response is flat within 3 dB to well
below 1 MHz, for gain of about 32 dB. — E. M.
Projects," Howard W. Sams. Indianapolis, IN,
1974, p 163 and 169.
DIFFERENTIAL CASCODE — Direct-coupled

single-stage amplifier with differential input
and output can be used in one or more stages
of high-performance amplifiers. Bipolar-JFET
cascode arrangement offers significant increase
in common-mode input resistance and CMRR as
compared to conventional differential pair, with VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED OPAMP— CA3080A
little or no degradation of other performance operational transconductance amplifier uses
parameters. Differential-mode gain is 1 16, com- bridge to provide automatic temperature com-
mon-mode input resistance is greater than 100 pensation ofgain that is controlled by voltage
gigohms, CMRR is greater than 160 dB, and cur- between 0 and +10 V applied toopamp A3. With
rent-source output resistance is greater than 1 values shown, input and output signal-handling
gigohm. Article gives design equations. — R. C. range is ±10 V. Once balanced, circuit provides
Jaeger and G. A. Hellwarth, Differential Cascode linear gain control up to four decades. — W. G.
Amplifier Offers Unique Advantages, EDN Mag- Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard W.
azine, June 5, 1974, p 78 and 80. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 455-456.
CHAPTER 2
Antenna Circuits
Includes circuits for measuring and adjusting VSWR, field strength, earth
conductivity for grounds, and impedance, as well as antenna motor controls,
radio direction finders, sferics receiver, active antennas, RF attenuators,
remote antenna switching systems, RF magnetometer, and far-field signal
sources for tuning beam antennas. See also Receiver, Transceiver, and
Transmitter chapters.
CR1, CR2 — Light-emitting diode. Motorola 1 200 ohms, 1 0 mA; contact rating 1 A; U1 , U2, U5 - CMOS quad NAND-gate 1C,
type MLED600 or equiv. 125 V ac; Radio Shack 275-003 or equiv. RCA CD-401 1 A or equiv.
CR3-CR6, incl. — Silicon signal diode, 1N914 Q1-Q5, incl. — Silicon npn transistor, 2N3904 U3 - CMOS quad NOR-gate 1C, RCA CD-
or equiv. 4001 A, or equiv.
or equiv. U4 — Timer 1C, 555 or equiv.
K3-K5, incl. — Switching relay, 12V dc, RV 1 — Varistor, GE 750 or equiv.
DELAYED BRAKE — Protects antenna rotator on in other direction. For about 3-s delay in timer rotor system. Article covers construction and
high tower from damage by delaying brake ac- U4, use 2.2 megohms for R and 1 jxF for C in- installation, including modifications needed in
tion automatically after rotation and by disa- stead of values shown. RV1 is commonly listed control unit. — A. B. White, A Delayed Brake Re-
bling direction-selector switches so antenna as V150LA20A by GE. S3-S5 are original brake lease for the Ham-ll, QST, Aug. 1977, p 14-16.
system coasts to stop before rotation can begin release and direction switches in CDE Ham-ll
15
LADDER ATTENUATOR — Inserted in series

with receiving antenna to provide 5 steps of at-
tenuation for comparing performance of anten-
nas or preamps. Resistors are V»-W composition
with 5% tolerance. — D. DeMaw, What Does My
S-Meter Tell Me?, QST, June 1977, p 40-42.
ROTATOR ROTATOR
TWO-ROTATOR CONTROL— Low-cost Alliance double torque for handling medium-size 20- cle covers wiring and bench-testing of rota-
C-225 TV antenna rotator and Alliance K22A ro- meter amateur radio antennas. One arm of tors.— F. E. Gehrke, Antenna Rotator for Me-
tator with control box are used with single tran- bridge is 520-ohm wirewound pot in which dium-Sized Beams, Ham Radio, May 1976, p 48-
sistorized-bridge control circuit. Rotators op- wiper position is proportional to heading. Arti-
erate in tandem on same shaft to provide
SI.
ANTENNA CIRCUITS 17
oov
ANTENNA ROTATOR — Two-opamp Wheat- tenna. Circuit will operate with supply ranging
stone bridge provides positive and negative from 15 to 28 VDC. Offset null controls for
error signals to give proportional control for 24- opamps use 10K pots. Article describes opera- Telfer, An Aerial Rotator Servo, Wireless World,
VDC motor used for remote positioning of an- tion and adjustment of circuit in detail. — D. J. April 1975, p 177-181.
DVM FOR SWR — Converts voltage output from Requires regulated 5-VDC logic supply at 1 A for racy of digital reading is better than 0.1% over
analog computer to drive for 3-digit LED display digital display, along with ±15 V supplies for 0-8 V range. — T. Mayhugh, The Automatic SWR
of standing-wave ratio. Circuit uses Precision logic. Article gives alignment procedure. Accu- Computer, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1974, p 86-87.
Monolithics D/A converter A1MDAC-100CC-Q1.
160-METER LOOP-PREAMP— Shielded 5-foot

square loop and single preamp pull signals out
of noise when propagation conditions make
other antennas unsatisfactory. Operating volt-
age is supplied through coax feeder. R1 isolates
signal energy from ground, and C2 keeps DC
voltage out of receiver input. Nulls are off broad
side of loop. — B. Boothe, Weak-Signal Recep-
tion on 160 — Some Antenna Notes, QST, June
1977, p 35-39.
TO
FAR-FIELD TRANSMITTER — Provides far-field

signal source for tuning Yagi and other beam
antennas used on amateur radio frequencies.
Q1 is Pierce oscillator operating in fundamental
mode of 7.06-MHz crystal to permit field-
strength measurements at 14.12, 21.18, and
28.24 MHz for 20-, 15-, and 10-meter bands. An-
tenna uses two 5-foot lengths of wire con-
nected as dipole. T1 is Amidon core T50-2 with
22 turns on primary and 20 turns center-tapped
on secondary. T2 is same core with 22-turn pri-
mary and 5-turn secondary. — G. Hinkle, Closed
Loop Antenna Tuning, 73 Magazine, May 1976,
p 32-33,
VSWR METER — Simple, easily transported

VSWR meter consists of high-gain amplifier,
narrow-bandwidth (100-Hz) selective amplifier
tuned to 1000 Hz, and variable-gain output am-
plifier driving low-cost VU meter. Ideal for null-
ing-type VSWR measurements. Draws only
about 6 mA from 9-V transistor battery. Closing
SI increases gain about 100 times for low-level
readings. R1 sets U1B to 1000 Hz, while R2 sets
reference on VU meter. — J. Reisert, Matching
Techniques for VHF/UHF Antennas, Ham Radio,
July 1976, p 50-56.
+ 9 TO +20V
ANTENNA CIRCUITS 19
! T,
SELF-EXCITED SWR BRIDGE— Portable bridge

has built-in signal sources for each band from
80 through 10 meters, for tuning antenna on
tower before transmission line is connected.
Oscillators are crystal controlled at desired an-
tenna tune-up frequencies. Separate oscillators
for each band simplify switching problems, so
only supply voltage from J, and oscillator out-
puts to meter circuit need be switched. Current
drain from 9-V battery is maximum of 12 mA.
R,, and R1S should be closely matched, while R19
and R20 should have 5% tolerance. — T. P. Hulick,
An S.W.R. Bridge with a Built-In 80 Through 10
Meter Signal Source, CQ, June 1971, p 64-66,
68, and 99.

Q,-Qj-RCA 40245. T3 — Pri. : 20 t. #36
core as TV
e. Sec.: 5 t. #36 e. Same
Si — 2 pole 6 position subminiature rotary
switch. (Centerlab PA-2005). Yi, Y2, Y3 — Overtone crystals for 1 0, 1 5 and
20 meter bands respectively. HC-6U
holders.
T t — Pri.: 1 1 t. #36 e. Sec.: 3 t. #36 e. on Y4, Ys— 40 and 80 meter crystals respectively
Indiana General CF-101 Q2 toroid. in HC-6U holders.
T 2 — Pri . : 1 6 t. #36 e. Sec.: 4 t. #36 e. Same
core as Ti .
POWER SUPPLY DECOUPLING
22mh
SWR COMPUTER — Automatically computes (VFIN) and reverse (VR!N) voltages as convention- critical resistors during alignment. — T. May-
standing-wave ratio in 50-ohm coax feeding an- ally measured for SWR checks. Requires regu- hugh, A Digital SWR Computerl, 73 Magazine,
tenna and delivers analog voltage for driving lated ±15 VDC supply at 40 mA. Article gives Nov. 1974, p 80-82, 84, and 86.
meter or digital display. Inputs are forward construction details and covers adjustment of
Cl, C2 — 39- and 10-pF silver micas in
C3 —parallel.
5-pF silver mica.
C4 - 250-pF straight-line-wavelength RF BRIDGE FOR COAX — Simplifies adjustment
variable (Hammarlund MC-250M). of vertical antenna for 40, 80, and 160 meters.
C5 — 365-pF miniature variable
(Archer-Allied 695-1000). SI in add-on LC unit switches coil for desired
CR1 — Germanium diode. band. Values of C1-C4 and standard resistor R1
J1 , —J2,Phono
J3 J4, J5jack.
— Coaxial receptacle. give range of 10 to 150 ohms for measurement
LI — 15 turns No. 24 enamel of radiation resistance. Meter can be from 50 to
close-wound on Miller 66A022-6 200 n A full scale if 500 mW of power is available
form (purple slug).
L2 — 30 turns like LI . as signal source. For shorter-wavelength bands,
L3 — 63 turns like LI, but change resistance in parallel with J1 to 5600
scramble-wound. ohms and omit C6. LI for 10 meters should then
SI — 2-pole 3-position wafer switch.
have 3^ turns No. 18 spaced to occupy 'k inch
on Miller 4200 coil form . L2 (1 5 meters) is 6 turns
No. 16 enamel closewound on similar form. L3
(20 meters) is 11 turns No. 14 enamel on Miller
66A022-6 form. — J. Sevick, Simple RF Bridges,
QST, April 1975, p 11-16 and 41.
ATTENUATOR
3d B 6dB 12dB 20dB 20dB
5-STEP ATTENUATOR — Applications include

comparing performance of various receiving an-
tennas and measuring gain of preamp used
ahead of receiver. Dashed lines represent re-
quired shield partitions. All resistors are Vi-W
composition with 5% tolerance. — D. DeMaw,
What Does My S-Meter Tell Me?, QST, June
1977, p 40-42.
RF AMPLIFIER
80-METER DIRECT-CONVERSION— Portable re- tor provides 20-kHz tuning range with R9, ade- to lug 9 of T1. ON/OFF switch is not needed. LI
ceiver with directional ferrod antenna and ver- quate for the frequency used — 3.566, 3.585, is 22 turns No. 28 enamel wound over two 10
tical sense antenna was developed for radio 3.635, or 3.680 MHz. T1 is subminiature auto- x 95 mm ferrite rods taped together. Q1-Q6 are
foxhunting at 1975 Boy Scout World Jamboree transformer with 8-ohm and 2000-ohm sec- NPN high-frequency small-signal transistors. —
in Norway, in competitions for locating four tions, for 8-ohm headphones. For high-imped- N. K. Holter, Radio Foxhunting in Europe, QST,
low-power crystal-controlled transmitters hid- ance headphones, connect headphone jack J1 Nov. 1976, p 43-46.
den along 4-km course. Varactor-tuned oscilla-
ANTENNA CIRCUITS
21
3-ANTENNA REMOTE SWITCHING— Single RF positive half-waves from 12-VAC supply oper- SWR TO 500 MHz — Permits measuring stand-
feed line serves for feeding transmitter power ate relay K1 through CR1 and CR3, so antenna ing-wave ratio well above limits of many inex-
to tower and selecting desired one of three an- b' is energized. With SI at c, K2 is energized pensive indicators. For transmitters up to 2 W,
tennas. With SI at a, neither K1 nor K2 is ener- through CR4 and CR2 forfeeding c'.— U. H. Lam- coupling loop L1-L2 can be about 1 inch long.
gized. RF energy then passes through cable to mere, A Remote Antenna Switch, QST, Aug. For high-power transmitters, loop length can be
antenna terminals a' and GND. In position b. 1974, p 41-43. reduced to about 'k inch. — W. E. Parker, UHF
SWR Indicator, 73 Magazine, June 1977, p 68-
70.
,
HOIST MOTOR
REMOTE CONTROL
K1, K2 — Dpdt, 10-A, 1 24-V contacts, 320-ohm
coil (Automatic Electric PG 24809-B1 1.) 54 - Part of K3.
A1 — Three-cup anemometer (Taylor Instrument K3 - Meter relay, 100 mA (Weston No. S46707).
Corp. No. 14077Q). R2, text.
R3 — Approximately 12,000 ohm, 1-watt; see 55 -Spdt, bottom limit switch (Microswitch No.
CR2-CR5, incl. — Silicon diode 100 PRV 1 A
T1 - BZE6-2RN).
1 1 7-V primary, 24-v secondary, 300 mA
CR6, CR7 - 1 N69. SI - Spst (JBT No. MS-35058-22).
FI - 3.2 A, Slo-Blo. U1 - Bridge rectifier assembly (Bradley Labs.
S2, S6 - Dpdt center off (JBT. No. 35059-27).
DS1 — Neon indicator. No. C014E4F).
S3 - Dpdt normally off (JBT No. MS-35059-30).
WIND-ACTIVATED CONTROL— Anemometer speed and raise it again when wind drops well energized, motor reverses and raises tower. —
feeding meter relay energizes control relay for below danger level. When only K1 is energized, J. Bernstein, The Tower-Guard System, QST,
antenna-tower hoist motor, to lower tower au- motor rotates in tower-lowering direction. Dec. 1974, p 25-28.
tomatically when wind exceeds preset safe When K1 and motor-reversing relay K2 are both
DS1 — 100-watt light bulb.

R1 — 14.6 ohms (5 watt).
Probes — 5/8-inch dia (iron or copper);
D = 12 inches. V2
V1
spacing, d = 18 inches; penetration depth,
Earth conductivity = (21) x

(millimhos/meter).
EARTH CONDUCTIVITY— Simple AC measure-

ment technique gives 25% accuracy, adequate
for siting amateur radio antennas and designing
Cl — 140-pF variable. L5 — 12 turns No. 26 enam. wound on T-25-12 radial ground systems. Measured values will
C2 — 15-pF variable. core.
range from 1 to 5 millimhos per meter for poor
L6 — 1 turn No. 26 enam.
CR1, CR2 — 1 N914 or equiv.
LI — 34 turns No. 24 enam. wound on an L7 — 1 turn No. 18 enam. wound on T-25-12 core. soil, 10-15 for average soil or fresh water, 100
Ml — 50 or 100 IdA dc.
Amidon T-68-2 core, tapped 4 turns from for very good soil, and 5000 for salt water. — J.
ground end. R2 — 10,000-ohm control, lin,ear taper. Sevick, Short GrOund-Radial Systems for Short
L2 — 12 turns No. 24 enam. wound on T-68-2 51 — Rotary switch, 3 poles, 5 positions, 3
core. sections. Verticals, QST, April 1978, p 30-33.
L3 — 2 turns No. 24 wound at ground end of L2. 52 — Rotary switch, 1 pole, 4 positions.
L4 — 1 turn No. 26 enam. wound at ground end of 53 — Dpst Toggle.
L5. U1 - /iA741 .
LINEAR FIELD-STRENGTH METER— Has suffi- about 40 to 60 MHz, while L7 and C2 cover 130
cient sensitivity for checking antenna patterns to 180 MHz. Band-switched circuits avoid use of
and gain while positioned many wavelengths plug-in inductors. At most sensitive setting of
from antenna. Can be used remotely by con- S2, Ml will detect signals from pickup antenna
necting external meter at J2. LI is tuned by Cl as weak as 100 fx\/. — L. McCoy, A Linear Field-
for 80 or 40 meters. For 20, 15, or 10 meters, L2 Strength Meter, QST, Jan. 1973, p 18-20 and 35.
is switched in parallel with LI. L5 and C2 cover
FOUR-POSITION MOTOR SWITCH— Single RF S2 is closed, positive half-waves start B1. Once now, B1 drives to next position and stops. If S2
feed line also carries DC for 3-V permanent mag- started, motor runs until cam opens S5; if S2 is held down, switching continues. Meter Ml
net DC motor B1 atop antenna tower, driving S3 has not yet been released, motor continues run- and CR7 identify position of switch. R1-R4, in
and S4 for remote switching to antennas a, b, ning on positive and negative half-waves. Diode range of IK to 10K, are chosen to give % 'k. *k,
c, and d. Diagram shows switches set for feed bridge CR1-CR4 makes motor rotate in only one and full deflection of meter. Motor drives switch
to antenna a, with no drive applied to B1 since direction for either drive polarity. If S2 is re- through 2860:1 reduction gears taken from
cam C has opened microswitch S5. CR5 and CR6 leased, before S5 opens, motor stops. 6-V 1-A alarm clock. All diodes are 50-PIV 1-A silicon
are now connected in series with opposite po- lamp DS1 comes on dimly when S2 is closed such as 1N4001. — U. H. Lammers, A Remote
larity, so neither positive nor negative half- and brightens when S5 closes. If S2 is released Antenna Switch, QST, Aug. 1974, p 41-43.
waves from 12-VAC supply can drive motor. If
ANTENNA CIRCUITS 23
160-METER PREAMP WITH FERRITE LOOP—

Ferrite-rod antenna is combined with 16-inch
wire rod to give cardioid radiation pattern for
low-noise 160-meter antenna system. Preamp
using MPF102 FETs has gain of 25 dB. LI is 48
turns No. 14 enamel spread to 4.5 inches on 0.5-
inch Amidon ferrite rod 7 inches long. L2 is 6-
turn link wound over center of LI . L4 and L5 are
each 50 turns No. 26 enamel on T80-2 pow-
dered-iron toroid cores, with 6 turns for links L3
and L6. — D. DeMaw, Low-Noise Receiving An-
tennas, QST, Dec. 1977, p 36-39.
ANTENNA
8" TO 48"
CAPACITIVE ANTENNA — Combination of short

whip antenna and broadband amplifier gives
antenna covering entire range of 3 to 30 MHz
without frequency selectivity. Q1 is 2N3819 FET
source follower driving three-transistor ampli-
fier using 2N918, 2N6008, or other 200-MHz 20-
V NPN transistors to provide 30-dB gain. Circuit
rolloff starts at 3 and 35 MHz. High gain of am-
plifier makes combination simulate quarter-
wave whip over entire frequency range. — R. C.
Wilson, The Incredible 18" All-Band Antenna, 73
Magazine, March 1975, p 49-50.
Receiver
NOISE BRIDGE — Used with communication re- All transistors are 2N5129 or equivalent 2N5137
ceiver to measure impedance at antenna ter- or 2N5220. T ry different transistors until highest
minals or at end of transmission line, as re- noise output is obtained. Toroid core for trans-
quired for adjusting antenna matching and former is3A-inch Indiana General CF102. Quad-
loading devices for desired impedance at spe- rifilar winding has 4'A turns of four No. 28 injection during troubleshooting in AF or RF cir-
cific frequency. Consists of diode-connected enamel wires twisted together, wound on core cuits, and as noise source for aligning RF cir-
transistor broadband-noise generator, 3-stage and connected as on diagram. Noise bridge can cuits.— J. J. Schultz, An Improved Antenna
noise amplifier, and toroid transformer bridge. also serve as wideband noise source for signal Noise Bridge, CQ, Sept. 1976, p 27-29 and 75.
SHORT LENGTH OF .12 TURNS 24 AWG

COAXIAL CABLE / ON FERRITE RING
TRANSMITTER \
AERIAL
LOGARITHMIC WATTMETER— Single meter are point-contact germanium rated at 80 PIV.

scale covers 1-1000 W, with equally spaced di- Article gives construction details. Ground coax
visions for 1, 10, 100, and 1000. This log scale across forward-biased 1N4002 silicon PN junc- braid at one end only. Ferrite ring is 0.5-inch
makes it possible to measure very low reflected tion diode is proportional to logarithm of cur- Mullard FX1596 or equivalent. — P. G. Martin,
powers and very high forward powers simul- rent through it. For 50-ohm line, use 220 for R2 Some Directional Wattmeters and a Novel SWR
taneously with same percentage accuracy. and 27 for R3 and R4. For 75-ohm line, corre- Meter, 73 Magazine, Aug. 1974, p 17, 19-21,23-
Basis of operation is that voltage dropped sponding values are 180 and 33. Detector diodes 24, and 26.
1-kHz MODULATOR FOR VHF SOURCE— Used

with 144- MHz signal generator driving VSWR
bridge, for measuring and matching VHF anten-
nas. R1 adjusts frequency of NE555 timer used
in place of customary MVBR. Series-pass tran-
sistor increases output of MVBR about 2 dB. —
J. Reisert, Matching Techniques for VHF/UHF
Antennas, Ham Radio, July 1976, p 50-56.
C1-C3, incl. — Miniature 365-pF variable

Radio Shack No. 272-1341 or equiv.). (Archer/
CR1 — IN34A or equiv.
LI — '15 turns No. 24 enam. wire, close-w
ound on
1/4-inch ID form. Remove form afte.
winding.
*-2 28 turns No. 24 enam. wire on Amidon
T-50-6 toroid core. Tap 7 turns from
each end
(Amidon Associates, 12033 Otsego
St N
Hollywood, CA 91607.)
L3 — 28 turns No. 24 enam. wire on Amidon
T-50-2
from L2 toroid
end. core. Tap at 5, 10 and 15 turns
L4 — 36 turns No. 24 enam. wire on Amidon

T-68-2 toroid core. Tap at 6, 12 and 18 turns
from L3 end.
Ml text.
- 0 to 1-mA dc meter, 1-1/2 inches square. See
R1-R3, incl.
tolerance. — 51-ohm, 2-watt, 5-percent
R4 — Miniature 10,000-ohm control, audio or

linear taper suitable.
TRANSMATCH — Tapped variable inductance J1 (5 W maximum), and adjust R4 for full-scale frequency to be used. Repeat procedure with
and three broadcast tuning capacitors are easily reading of Ml. Next, connect 50-ohm resistive antenna or feed line in place of dummy load,
preadjusted to match low-power (QRP) trans- load between CR1-R1 junction and ground. using smallest inductance that gives SWR of 1.
mitter to antenna for SWR of 1 in commonly Meter reading should now drop to zero, indi- After completing adjustments, set SI to 3 to
used amateur bands. Resistance bridge is used cating null at 50 ohms. Move 50-ohm dummy bypass bridge for normal transmitter opera-
only for initial determination of correct settings load to J2, set SI at 2, and adjust settings of Cl, tion.— D. DeMaw, A Poor Ham's QRP Trans-
for Cl, C2, C3, and S2 at each band to be used. C2, and C3 for zero deflection of meter. Note match, QST, Oct. 1973, p 11-13.
Set SI at 1, feed peak output of transmitter to settings, then repeat for each other transmitter
ANTENNA CIRCUITS 25
+ 40 dB AMPLIFIER OSCILLATOR
+ I2V TO + 12 V
V/F CONVERTER — Voltage developed across S-
meter Is amplified by 741 opamp having gain of
40 dB, so full-scale voltage of 100 mV becomes
10 V at opamp output. This drives modulation
input of 555 timer connected as free-running
oscillator. Nominal 1-kHz output increases in
frequency as drive current is reduced; con-
versely, drop in frequency corresponds to
stronger signal at S-meter. Developed for use as
audible guide when tuning Yagi and other beam
antennas for amateur radio operation. — G. Hin-
kle, Closed Loop Antenna Tuning, 73 Magazine,
Mav 1976, p 32-33.
SPEAKER
8 OHM
0.2 pW TO 10 mW — Accurate low-power watt-

meter uses small lamps as barretters for mea-
suring RF power up to 10 mW from 1 to 500
MHz. Applications include measurements of an-
tenna gain, local oscillator frequency, VSWR,
and filter response. Subminiature T-3/4 RF sen-
sor lamps operate in bridge circuit with R1, R2,
and R3. Voltage difference between bridge legs
is amplified by opamp U1 . Bridge current driver
Q1 supplies current for balancing bridge. Equi-
librium voltage of 3.5 V at VB Is fed to metering
circuit including U2. Article covers calculation
of values for calibration resistors R4-R10, which
range from 5.715 to 7192 ohms. — ). H. Bowen,
Accurate Low Power RF Wattmeter for High Fre-
quency and VHF Measurements, Ham Radio,
Dec. 1977, p 38-43.
CONTROL
30MF
VR3 iOph
r 6
I LI M I I
raTj (mot)-
v VR2
~5oV~ 5 5
“ 26 V VwX 0+ 14 V ITCH 500
1 Pol „
300
3QSL (
-rr 50 V 4
LU 3
Z 0,4V
3
♦+' ^VW- 2 — lirmt] (mot)
1 POTENTIOMETER
Nfl.2V
K2B R2
R8
?8 T ROTOR
| «0
44
2W v
to motor for proper direction, and drops out

when antenna reaches desired heading. One
relay is used for each direction of rotation.
Opamp is connected in differential-input mode
that responds only to difference voltage be-
tween wipers of pots R7 and R8. Polarity of
opamp output depends on polarity of input volt-
age difference. CR3 and CR4 energize K1 or K2
depending on polarity of error signal. R9 and R3
serve to balance voltage difference remaining
ANTENNA ROTATOR — Developed for use with ing. Uses 12-VDC 1000-ohm 1-A relays, Tl when R7 and R8 are at travel limits. R9 also nulls
CDE TR-44 antenna control using low-voltage SN7274IL opamp U1, and wirewound 360° ro- offset present when there is no input to U1. Ac-
AC motor having pot for bearing indication. Cir- tation command pot R7 operating from 14-V
curacy isabout 5°. Diodes are 100-PIV 0.5-A sil-
cuit eliminates need for holding control handle regulated supply of original control. When R7 is icon.— K. H. Sueker, Automating the TR-44 An-
In position until antenna reaches desired bear- set to desired new heading, relay applies power tenna Rotor, QST, June 1973, p 28-30.
SI - A
FIELD STRENGTH AT 7 MHz — Operates from

single dry cell. Meter can be calibrated in deci-
bels with Hewlett-Packard 606A or equivalent
signal generator. Jack permits remote meter-
ing. LI is 5 turns, and L2 is 30 turns wound on
Amidon T68-2 core. — R. W. Jones, A 7-MHz Ver-
tical Parasitic Array, QST, Nov. 1973, p 39-43
and 52.
3- I I
4- 2 1
INSTANT VSWR BRIDGE— Modified 190B Tek- age at position 1 of SI equals reflected voltage
tronix constant-amplitude signal generator Is at position 2. Article gives chart for finding
combined with 50-ohm resistance bridge to VSWR. Step-by-step procedure for modifying
give stable high-accuracy instrument for mea- signal generator Is given.— D. Sander, Make An-
suring voltage standing-wave ratio as guide for tenna Tuning a Joy, 73 Magazine, May 1978, p
tuning antennas. Range is 160 meters through 134-136.
10 meters. Trim Rx so incident or forward volt-
V TIMING
CIRCUIT
ANTENNA POSITION CONTROL— 1C logic pro- position, wiper voltages of pots are equal. that drives motor and brake release relays.
vides automatic brake release and positive po- When R9 is set to new position, voltage differ- Timer prevents jamming of circuit by operator
sition control for commercial Ham-M antenna ence is amplified by error amplifier U2. Com- error. — P. Zander, Automatic Position Control
rotator. Regulated power supply drives bridge parators U3 and U4 determine rotation direc- for the HAM-M Rotator, Ham Radio, May 1977,
having position-sensing pot R8 in rotator and tion needed for rebalance and deliver logic
R9 in control box. When antenna is in desired circuits to timing circuit (also given in article)
p 42-45.
ANTENNA CIRCUITS 27
ji
FIELD-STRENGTH METER — Useful for antenna

experiments and adjustments in amateur bands
from 160 to 10 meters. Increasing size of pickup
antenna increases sensitivity. Far-field mea-
surements are made with alternate input cir-
cuit, in which reference dipole or quarter-wave
wire cut for frequency of interest is connected
to input link. Diodes are 1N34A germanium or
METHOD equivalent. Ml is 50 fx A. Table gives values of
160 M 40 M 15 M 10 M tuned-circuit components for six amateur
Band SOM 20 M
10 10 bands. — D. DeMaw, A Simple Field-Strength
15
LlOxH) 100 (Nom.) 25
25 (Nom.) 10 (Nom.) 2.2 (Nom.) 1.3 (Nom.) Meter and How to Calibrate It, QST, Aug. 1975,
0.5 (Nom.
C2 (pF) 25 15
100
C3 (pF) 100 68 47
4403 4303
47
Miller 4409 4407
4406
4404 p 21-23.
Coil 68
- un
MODULATION MONITOR — Provides off-the-air Gain
monitoring of RF signals up to 200 MHz by rec-

tified detection of AM signals and by slope de-
tection ofFM signals. Can also be used as signal
tracer, audio amplifier, or hidden-transmitter lo-
cator. High-gain audio amplifier has low-noise
cascode input stage and output stage driving
headphone or loudspeaker. S, selects RF signals
detected by D, or AF applied to J2. L, is 4 turns
No. 18 for monitoring 75-150 MHz. Will also
monitor VHF transmissions from pilot to
ground stations while in commercial aircraft,
using 24-inch wire antenna near window and
earphone. Passive-type receiver is safe in air-
craft because it has no oscillators that could in-
terfere with navigation equipment. — W. F. Spli-
chal, Jr., Sensitive Modulation Monitor, CQ,
Jan. 1973, p 59-61.
UNOER TEST
)TO UNIT
Cl, C2 small capactive tab required for balance

C3, C4 0.001 llF (small disc ceramic or chip capacitor)
CR1 1N82A or equivalent germanium diode
Jl, J4 UG-290A/U BNC connector
J2, J3 UG-58/U type-N connector Q MULTIPLIER FOR LOOP — Improves perfor-
Rl, R2 47 to 55 ohms, matched mance of loop antenna on 40, 80, and 160 me-
R3
51 ohms, V4-watt carbon composition ters. Feedback control is obtained with adjust-
R4, R5
R6 10k ohms, V4-watt carbon composition able single-turn loop L3 coupled to LI, and
100k ohms, V4-watt carbon composition receiver input is taken from L2. L3 is rotated
within field .of LI to adjust amount of regener-
VSWR BRIDGE — Works well through 450 MHz to difference appears at J4. Impedance values ation, optimize circuit Q, and make directional
for measuring and matching VHF and UHF an- can be from 25 to 100 ohms, although circuit is null more pronounced. Article gives loop con-
ten as. Ifidentical load impedances are placed designed for optimum performance at 50 struction details. Ground lower end of 100K re-
at J2 and J3, signals at opposite ends of R3 are ohms. — J. Reisert, Matching Techniques for sistor toprovide ground return for FET. — K. Cor-
equal and in phase and there is no output at J4. VHF/UHF Antennas, Ham Radio , July 1976, p nell, Loop Antenna Receiving Aid, Ham Radio ,
50-56.
If impedances are different, output proportional
May 1975, p 6&-70.
14 AMIDON T SO- 2
TURNS/WINDING HEP 802
NO. 2 8 WIRE
LOOP PREAMP — Loop for lower-frequency am-

ateur bands is connected to gate of HEP802 FET
and output to receiver is taken from FET source.
Cl is two-gang variable capacitor from old
broadcast radio, with stators in parallel to give
RF NOISE BRIDGE — Improves accuracy and 600 pF. Article gives loop data for 40, 80, and 1 60
measurement range for impedance measure- communication receiver) set to desired fre- meters and for high end of broadcast band. For
ments from 3.5 to 30 MHz, particularly resistive quency, reference impedances (250-ohm non- 40 and 80 meters, use 18-inch square loop with
and reactive components of high-frequency an- inductive pot and 360-pF variable capacitor) are 2 turns spaced V* inch. Ground lower end of
tennas. Accuracy is 3 ohms RMS. Wideband adjusted for deepest possible null. Value of un- 100K resistor to provide ground return for
noise, generated in zener followed by three- known impedance is then equal to parallel com- FET. — K. Cornell, Loop Antenna Receiving Aid,
transistor amplifier, is injected into two legs of bination of references. Article covers construc- Ham Radio, May 1n75, p 66-70.
bridge in equal amounts by toroidal trans- tion and calibration. — R. A. Hubbs and A. F.
former having quadrifilar windings. With un- Doting, Improvements to the RX Noise Bridge,
known impedance connected and detector {any Ham Radio , Feb. 1977, p 10-20.
' ff
IN38B
6 pF
TO RF
OUTPUT
(COAX -.0047
^
CONNECTOR) rb :.0047 gF
RF OUTPUT INDICATOR— Designed for use On lower bands (80-40 meters), use 7 or 12 pF
with amateur radio transmitters. Pot is adjusted instead— Novice Q 8i A, 73 Magazine, Holiday
for maximum desired indication on band used. issue 1976, p 20.
RADIATED-FIELD METER — Gives quick check of
For 20—10 meters, 6-pF capacitor is adequate. overall transmitter performance, including an-
tenna system. Meter can be 1 mA, but 0-200 /xA
or 0-50 /xA will be more sensitive. The longer
the reference antenna used, the greater will be
the sensitivity of the meter. Keep lead lengths
Cl as large as possible, consistent with good oscillator L2 15 turns no. 28 (0.3mm) on Amidon T-25-12 toroid
starting (100 pF typical) core
FB ferrite bead
LI L3.L4 4 turns no. 24 (0.5mm), Vx" (6.5mm) inside diameter,
Vt" (6.5mm) long
9 turns no. 24 (0.5mm) on Amidon T-37-12 toroid
core; tapped 3 turns from cold end 72-MHz, 5th-overtone, series-mode crystal
144 MHz FOR VSWR BRIDGE— Modulated sig- crystal oscillator is followed by doubler stage. attenuation between generator and load. Use
nal source provides 10-mW CW output and 5- Oscillator runs continuously while doubler is regulated power supply or batteries. — J. Rei-
mW modulated output at modulation fre- keyed with simple ON/OFF square-wave keying. sert. Matching Techniques for VHF/UHF Anten-
quency of 1000 Hz. Spurious and harmonic out- Freedom from load variations is obtained with nas, Ham Radio, July 1976, p 50-56.
puts are 40 dB below desired output. 72-MHz double- tuned output filter providing up to 6-dB
ANTENNA CIRCUITS 29
ACTIVE ANTENNA — Uses tuned loop with rel-

atively low Q for broadband operation over one
amateur band, phase-coupled by FET to 10-inch
vertical sensing antenna to give unidirectional
reception pattern. Loop is tuned to either 80 or
40 meters by trimmer capacitor at its base. Out-
put of loop is coupled to another 3N142 FET
used as source follower, to isolate output of
loop from heavy loading effect of 50-ohm trans-
mission line going to receiver. Performance is
comparable to that of full-size quarter-wave
vertical antenna on 40 meters. Battery source
can be used because drain is only about 2 mA. —
J. J. Schultz, An Experimental Miniature An-
tenna for 40 to 80 m, 73 Magazine, June 1973,
p 29-32.
PROTECTION FOR QRP TUNING— Simple resis-

tive SWR bridge provides dummy load, relative
power output indicator, and safe method of tun-
ing transmitter without destroying transistors
because of mismatched load. Input divider R1-
R4 has total resistance of 50 ohms, using 1 2-W
composition resistors, for dissipating transmit-
ter output when SI is in TUNE position. Ml in-
dicates relative power applied to this load. An-
tenna is connected through Transmatch, and
antenna tuner is adjusted for minimum deflec-
tion or lowest SWR. R5 isolates transmitter
from antenna. With SI in OPERATE position. Ml
indicates relative power output into antenna. —
A. S. Woodhull, Simplified Output Metering
Protects QRP Transmitters, QST, April 1977, p
57.
TO
CHANNEL
EW
CRT- 1 1
CRT-IO
10-kHz SFERICS RECEIVER— Developed to and tracking of tornadoes. Signals from crossed biguity in oscilloscope pattern. — R. W. Fergus,
measure direction and strength of atmospheric loop antennas feed deflection amplifier of CRO. A Ham Radio Severe Weather Warning Net, 73
electromagnetic radiation (sferics) associated Article covers problems involved and gives cir- Magazine, Sept. 1974, p 27-30, 32, 34-36, and
38-39.
with severe weather conditions, for detection cuit for sense amplifier that resolves 180° am-
RF MAGNETOMETER — Measures RF radiation

and current distribution for antennas, transmis-
sion lines, ground leads, building wiring, and
shields. Can also be used as sensitive portable
field-strength meter. Will indicate orientation of
field. High-Q circuit is tunable from 1.8 to 150
MHz for indicating frequency of fields produced
by RF harmonic. Applications include detecting
reradiation from rain gutters, metal fencing,
towers, and guy wires that are distorting an-
tenna field patterns, and detecting radiation
from ground leads, appliance power cords, and
hidden building wiring. When used as probe,
will accurately pinpoint leakage of RF energy
2
from joints, holes, or slots in shielded enclo-
C2— 5-1 20 mmf variable capacitor. Millen
3 d. fer rod. sures. Operation is similar to absorption-type
#20100. rit
e
—
C4, C5, C4 — .0047 mf tubular or disc ceramic wavemeter, except that pickup coil is electro-
capacitor. d. fer rod statically shielded by slotted aluminum IF trans-
ri .
—
C7— 1.8-2. 2 me— 250 mmf tubular ceramic L4 — 26-70te me — 7 t. #22 air-wound, self- former can to eliminate capacitive coupling. In-
or mica capacitor. ductor iswound on ferrite coil to give very high
Cj— 2. 2-3. 2 me— 1 00 mmf tubular ceramic or supporting, 1 /4" i.d.
L5 — 60-150 me— 2 t. #22 air-wound, self- Q as pickup element. — W. M. Scherer, An R. F.
mica capacitor. Magnetometer and Field Strength Meter, CQ,
supporting, 1/4" i.d. with 3/16" spacing
L)— 3. 2-8. 5 me— 22 t. #22on4>/2" X 1/4" between turns, spread or squeezed as
needed to cover v.h.f. range. April 1971, p 16-20.
‘d. ferrite rod— see text.
6.3
-17
me
DIRECTIONAL WATTMETER— Gives 10% — accu- 16 SHORT LENGTH OF 12 TURNS 24 AWG
1 4- 70 MHz. Full-t. #
racy between about 100 kHz and 38 22
m — o n 1
scale values of ranges are 1, 10, 100, eand 6 t 1000 " I
.# . X
W. Low resistance in secondary circuit of cur- 22 1/4
on "
rent transformer is split into two equal parts, so 5/8
"
sum and difference voltages are available at I.
X
1/4
ends of secondary. Meters then indicate for- "
ward and reflected power values. For 50-ohm
line, use 220 for R2 and 27 for R3 and R4. For 75-
ohm line, corresponding values are 180 and 33.
Detector diodes are point-contact germanium
rated at 80 PIV. Article gives construction de-
tails. Ground coax braid at one end only. Ferrite
4ecring is 0.5-inch Mullard FX1596 or equiva-
lent.— P. G. Martin, Some Directional Wattme-
ters and a Novel SWR Meter, 73 Magazine, Aug.
1974, p 17, 19-21, 23-24, and 26.
PIN DIODE ATTENUATOR — Designed for inser- current is small. NPN transistor Q1 provides transformer) can be grounded. CR1 and CR2 are
tion between antenna and input of any HF re- over 100 mA as current source to PIN diode. Q1 germanium diodes. Article also gives circuit of
ceiver to improve adjacent-channel selectivity is driven by AGC circuit through JFET buffer Q3. IF system using cascaded 9-MHz crystal filters
by providing attenuation ahead of mixer for en- AGC voltage is derived from top of audio gain to improve selectivity further and provide over-
tire tuning range. Hewlett-Packard 5082-3379 control in receiver for rectification, with 200 all AGC control range of 70 dB. — M. Goldstein,
PIN diode has very low impedance when con- mVRMS at input of opamp U1 giving maximum Improved Receiver Selectivity and Gain Control,
ducting and very high impedance when bias attenuation. Center tap of T1 (any small AF Ham Radio, Nov. 1977, p 71-73.
ANTENNA CIRCUITS 31
FIELD-STRENGTH METER — Easily assembled

(or checking performance of amateur radio
transmitter and its antenna system. — Circuits,
73 Magazine, Jan. 1974, p 128.
BROADBAND NOISE AMPLIFIER— Developed back loops are introduced between driver and
for use with antenna noise bridges for mea- final amplifier. Use transistors specified, be-
surements at 20 meters. Provides 35 to 50 dB cause substitutions may cut overall gain by 10
additional gain, not entirely constant over use- to 20 dB. — A. Weiss, Noise Bridge, Ham Radio, ANT
ful range of 1.8 to 30 MHz. Three strong feed- May 1974, p 71-72.
SHORT LENGTH OF 12 TURNS 24 AWG
TUNED RADIATED-FIELD METER— Provides

quick check of transmitter performance and ap-
proximate check of frequency. Values for LI and
Cl are chosen to cover desired frequency range.
Meter can be 1 mA or 200 /xA. Keep lead lengths
SWR METER — Gives direct measurement of R3 and R4. For 75-ohm line, corresponding val- short. — E. Hartz, Is My Rig Working or Not?, 73
standing-wave ratio on transmission line, in- ues are 180 and 33. Detector diodes are point- Magazine, Oct. 1976, p 56-57.
dependent ofabsolute power levels and of fre- contact germanium rated at 80 PIV. Article gives
quency. Voltages of 1N4002 silicon diodes are construction details and calibration curve. Fer-
proportional to logarithms of their currents, rite ring is Mullard FX1596 or equivalent, with
which in turn are proportional to forward and 0.5-inch outside diameter. Ground coax braid at
reflected voltages. Meter scale is nonlinear, one end only. — P. R2G. Martin, Some Directional
with maximum sensitivity as SWR approaches Wattmeters and a Novel SWR Meter, 73 Mag-
1:1. For 50-ohm line, use 220 for R2 and 27 for azine, Aug. 1974, p 17, 19-21, 23-24, and 26.
Ri
56S2 cr2 56H

W\
‘ 1N60 or
1N34A/,
similar REF r IN 34 A/
similar
1N60 or'
= .001
.001:
FIELD-STRENGTN METER— Developed for tun-
ing all types of antennas, from mobile whips to
four-element quads. Avoids shielding and other
problems of switched T pads for calibrated at-
tenuator byfirst detecting RF, then attenuating
DC output. Technique has added advantage
that circuit is no longer frequency-sensitive. To
DUAL-RANGE RF WATTMETER— Uses circuit cover 13-24 MHz, L2 is 11 turns spaced out to
which is not frequency-sensitive, so calibration about 1 inch, with 2 turns over top for LI. D1 can
can be accurate over wide frequency spectrum. be any diode such as 1N34. RI serves as cali-
Ranges are 0-1 and 0-10 W. L2 is T-50-2 toroid brated attenuator, with R2 in series giving 0-dB
wound almost full with No. 28 enamel, leaving point at junction. Article covers construction
only room for 2-turn link L,. C, and C2 are 3-20 watts FORWARD with watts REFLECTED — A. and operation. — J. L. Ilrffe, An Amplified, Cali-
pF trimmers. Article covers calibration and use Weiss, The Silk-Purse In-Line Wattmeter, CQ, brated, Signal Strength Meter, 73 Magazine,
and gives table for reading SWR by comparing May 1977, p 50-52 and 74-75. June 1973, p 85-86.
CHAPTER 3
Audio Amplifier Circuits
Includes preamps for all types of inputs and AF amplifiers with power outputs
up to 90 W and bandwidths up to 50 kHz, most using transistors with or
without opamps and ICs. Circuits include variety of methods for reducing
distortion and eliminating switching transients. See also Audio Control,
Receiver, and Stereo chapters.
500-OHM INPUT — Simple audio amplifier hav-

ing high gain, low noise, and excellent temper-
ature stability can be used as mike booster, first
AF amplifier stage in receiver, or for other
preamp applications. With values shown, cir-
cuit will amplify down to about 10 Hz. To in-
crease low-frequency cutoff for speech ampli-
fier, reduce C2 to 1 1‘ F or less. — E. Dusina, Build
a General Purpose Preamp, 73 Magazine, Nov.
1977, p 98.
OUTPUT
COMPLEMENTARY-SYMMETRY AMPLIFIER— tion. Bases of output transistors are fed in par- J. Carr, Solid-State Audio: A Review of the Lat-
Simplified version of circuit takes advantage of allel, with loudspeaker connected to common est Circuitry and General Troubleshooting Pro-
fact that PNP and NPN transistors require sig- terminal of transistors. Drawback is difficulty of cedures, Electronic Servicing, Aug. 1971, p 38-
nals of opposite polarity to perform same func- locating matched PNP and NPN transistors. — J. 43.
32
AUDIO AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 33
-VC
C
HAMMER DRIVER — Signetics 540 power driver

handles either push-pull or single-ended induc-
tive loads such as relays, solenoids, motors, and
electric hammers. In push-pull connection
shown, load is driven in either positive, nega-
tive, or both arms of output. Either output can
be selected by appropriate choice of input pulse
30-W — Designed for use with active filter cross- high-frequency channel, C3 and C4 are 10 /j.F.
Article includes circuit for active filter net- polarity. Supply can be ±5 to ±25 V. — "Signet-
over networks for three loudspeakers. For low- ics Analog Data Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale,
est-frequency channel, C3 is 150 /iF and C„ is 50 work.— D. C. Read, Active Filter Crossover Net- CA, 1977, p 764.
/iF. For middle channel, C3 and C, are 25 j*F. For works, Wireless World, Dec. 1973, p 574-576.
Vs
3.5-W BRIDGE AMPLIFIER — Bridge connection ply. With 6-V supply and 4-ohm load, maximum tenths of a volt of each other. — "Audio Hand-
of National LM388 power opamps provides 3.5 power is 1 W. Coupling capacitors are not re- book," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
W to 8-ohm loudspeaker when using 12-V sup- quired since output DC levels are within several CA, 1977, p 4-37-4-41.
7
LOW-COST 30-W — Economical compromise

gives 30 W into 8-ohm load at 0.1% distortion
(mainly second harmonic) and hum level of —50
dBW. Article covers design and operation of cir-
cuit in detail. — P. L. Taylor, Audio Power Am-
plifier, Wireless World, June 1973, p 301-302.
■MO
TIS97
TIS97
C\
70-dB GAIN WITH 1.5 V — Operates from single
penlight cell at current drain of 0.5 mA. Ideal as
self-contained unit inserted in microphone
© © (0 rH
06
cable. Q2-Q4 form 70-dB voltage amplifier. Q5

is detector, and Q6 is emitter-follower driving
AGC transistor Q1 . 3-dB bandwidth is about 100
Hz to 8 kHz. Full output is about 200 mVRMS,
while low output terminal is 1 mVRMS. — C. n 7
Hall, Low-Voltage Audio AGC Amplifier, Ham —O HI OUTPUT
Radio, Dec. 1973, p 32-34.

Vcc
f yv
io p
F
■
:«
(+12 TO +20V)
IOk
> 2 W WITH 1C — Uses Motorola MFC9020 audio
power amplifier to give maximum output of
about 2 W for 16-ohm loudspeaker. Used in au-
0.1
topatch system for FM repeater. — R. B. Shreve,
A Versatile Autopatch System for VHF FM Re-
peaters, Ham Radio, July 1974, p 32-38.
OUTPUT
rs 16 OHMS)
AUTO RADIO AMPLIFIER — Circuit shown per-

mits operation of Signetics NE540 power driver
from single-polaritY 12-V supply of auto. Bipolar
supplies for differential inputs of 540 are
achieved by returning inputs to half of available
supply or 6 V. Load is AC coupled because am-
plifier has DC gain of 1, and amplifier output is
therefore 6 VDC. 39-ohm supply resistors are
selected for minimum crossover distortion. —
"Signetics Analog Data Manual," Signetics,
Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 764.
HIGH-GAIN 1C WITH TRANSISTOR— High input

impedance of RS741C opamp permits use with
any general-purpose crystal microphone. R2 is
volume control, and R3 controls gain and fre-
quency response of 1C. Power transistor stage
drives loudspeaker directly, without output
transformer. — F. M. Mims, "Integrated Circuit
Projects, Vol. 6," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX,
1977, p 79-88.
POWER AMPLIFIER WITH ERROR TAKEOFF—

Voltage proportional to distortion is amplified
for use in reducing nonlinear distortion at out-
put, in circuit developed for use as single-ended
power amplifier. Power Darlingtons are M J4000
and MJ4010, and both opamps are 741. Preset
5K pot is adjusted initially for minimum distor-
tion. Article gives theory of operation and de-
sign equations. — A. M. Sandman, Reducing
Amplifier Distortion, Wireless World, Oct. 1974,
p 367-371.
HEADPHONE AMPLIFIER— Can be used with

FM tuner in place of more expensive audio am-
plifier. For stereo, use one LM386 circuit for each
channel. Can be mounted directly on head-
phones ifweight of battery is not objectiona-
ble.— J. A. Sandler, 11 Projects under $11, Mod-
em Electronics, June 1978, p 54-58.
35 W — Signetics 540 drives complementary being amplified to level that might damage
output transistors to give high output current loudspeaker circuit. Power limiting is provided
for driving 8-ohm loudspeaker. Feedback is ad- by placing resistor network around output
justed togive AC gain of 40 dB. Gain rolls off to stage. — "Signetics Analog Data Manual," Sig-
unity at DC to prevent DC offset voltages from R2 netics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 762-763.
R3
► 15 V I MEG
I0K
PREAMP WITH TEST TONE — Built around Sig- bridge tone oscillator, depending on position of microphone, to give audio input voltage. Sec-
netics N5558V dual opamp or equivalent Mo- SI. Frequency is determined by values of Cl, C2, ond opamp is active low-pass filter with 3.3-kHz
torola MC1458CP2, National LM1458, or Texas R4, and R5. Silicon signal diodes form nonlinear cutoff, rolloff of 12 dB per octave, and voltage
Instruments SN72558P. First half of opamp is control element. Adjust R6 until oscillator out- gain of 10. — H. Olson, An 1C Mike Preamp That
used either as gain stage for increasing voltage put at TP1 is 10 V P-P. FET provides constant Doubles as a Tone Generator, 73 Magazine,
level of carbon microphone or as AF Wien- current through variable resistance of carbon March 1974, p 45 and 47-48.
HEADPHONE OPAMPS— Dual low-noise 4558 R. J. Apfel. Power Op Amps — Their Innovative 1-W CLASS B — Audio application of CA3020A
opamp provides gain and reduces system noise Circuits and Packaging Provide Designers with wideband power amplifier provides 1-W output
and distortion, while 759 power opamp sup- More Options, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977, p to loudspeaker load through AF output trans-
plies output power of 0.7 W into 16-ohm load 141-144. former with 10% total harmonic distortion. Vcc,
with less than 0.1% total harmonic distortion. — is 9 V, and Vcc2 is 12 V. With CA3020, both sup-
ply voltages are 9 V and maximum power out-
put is 550 mW. Sensitivity is 35-45 mV. — "Lin-
ear Integrated Circuits and MOS/FET's," RCA
Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p
105.
46-dB GAIN — Single National LM386 power

amplifier provides gain of 200 V/V at maximum
output power of 250 mW for 12-V supply. Op-
tional 0.05-/uF capacitor and 10-ohm resistor
suppress bottom-side oscillation occurring dur-
ing negative swing into load drawing high cur-
rent.— "Audio Handbook," National Semicon-
ductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-30-4-33.
CROSSOVER FOR 20-Hz SUBWOOFER— Used order Butterworth (18 dB per octave) networks HIGH INPUT IMPEDANCE— Use of JFET as iso-
at channel outputs of stereo system when re- providing 20-Hz cutoff along with 100-Hz cross- lator boosts input impedance of opamp to 22
producing music down to 20 Hz as synthesized over. Response of subwoofer should extend megohms for low-frequency input signals.
by electronic function generators. Active cross- one octave above crossover. One advantage of Impedance drops to 3.9 megohms as frequency
over network drives subwoofer (low-bass loud- active crossover is freedom from transient in- increases to about 20 kHz. Overall gain of circuit
speaker) connected in bridged-center configu- termodulation distortion. — W. J. J. Hoge, is about 45 dB when using 18-V supply. —
ration, for handling sounds below range of Switched-On Bass, Audio, Aug. 1976, p 34-36, "Audio Handbook," National Semiconductor,
normal woofer. Crossover consists of third- 38, and 40. Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-21-4-28.
2-W MONITOR — Fairchild 759 opamp provides

1-W AF output when supply is ±9 V and loud-
speaker is16 ohms, and 2 W with ± 15 V and 32-
ohm loudspeaker. Use heatsink. Gain is 20 for
with response rolled off at 15 kHz

by Cl. —shown,
’w vs - *isv values W. Jung, An 1C Op Amp Update, Ham
Radio, March 1978, p 62-69.
60 W WITH DC-COUPLED OUTPUT— Q6 is Mo-

torola MJE6044 complementary Darlington
output transistor, and Q7 is MJE6041. Q1 and
Q2 are MD8002 dual transistor, Q3 is MPS-A56,
Q4 is MPS-A13, and Q5 is MPS-A06. For 8-ohm
loudspeaker, supply is ±36 V with 6.2K for R4,
430 ohms for R5, and 33K for R7. Output center
voltage must be maintained at OVDC to ensure
maximum signal swing and prevent DC voltage
from acting on loudspeaker. Frequency re-
sponse is10 Hz to 50 kHz for -1 dB points. Same
circuit is used with different components for
other powers down to 15 Wand for 4-ohm loud-
speaker.— R. G. Ruehs, "15 to 60 Watt Audio
Amplifiers Using Complementary Darlington
Output Transistors," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
1974, AN-483B, p 5.
+ 15 V
50-kHz BANDWIDTH — Three transistor pairs in boost current-handling capability about 2.5 kHz for 3 dB down. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Lin-
CA3600E array are parallel-connected with out- times. Use of feedback gives closed-loop gain ear ICs," RCA Solid State Division, Somerville,
put stage of CA3130 bipolar MOS opamp to of 48 dB. Typical large-signal bandwidth is 50 NJ, 1977, p 12.
60 W WITH AC-COUPLED OUTPUT— Uses Mo-

torola complementary Darlington output tran-
sistors, with MJE6044 for Q5 and MJE6041 for
Q6. For 8-ohm loudspeaker, Q1 is MPS-A06, 02
is MPS-A56, 03 is MPS-A13, and Q4 is MPS-A06.
Supply is 72 V. R5 is 220 ohms, and R7 is 68K.
Same circuit is used with different components
for other output powers down to 15 W and for
4-ohm loudspeaker. Frequency response is 20
Hz to 50 kHz for -1 dB points. — R. G. Ruehs,
"15 to 60 Watt Audio Amplifiers Using Comple-
mentary Darlington Output Transistors," Mo-
torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974, AN-483B, p 3.
OUTPUT
CASCODE AMPLIFIER — Uses two sections of

RCA CA3028A linear 1C (U1A is not used). Pro-
O AF
vides power gain of about 40 dB. Unmarked re-
sistors are on 1C. — D. DeMaw, Understanding
Linear ICs, QST, Feb. 1977, p 19-23.
-0+9V
HIGH OUTPUT CURRENT— Uses CA3094A pro-

grammable opamp as driver stage for two par-
allel-connected transistors of CA3183AE array
to develop 100-mA average AF current (peaks
up to 300 mA) through 75-ohm load. Diode-con-
nected transistors D,-D3 in array provide tem-
perature compensation for output tran-
sistors.— "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs,"
RCA Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977,
pll.
ERROR TAKEOFF REDUCES DISTORTION—

Nonlinear distortion is reduced in single-ended
amplifier by producing voltage proportional to
distortion and amplifying this error voltage in
such a way that it can be used to reduce distor-
tion at output. Circuit uses 741 opamps and
MJ4000 power Darlington transistors. Tech-
nique overcomes basic limitation of negative
feedback wherein feedback loop gain decreases
as frequency increases. Article also gives vari-
ation of circuit more suitable for power ampli-
fier, and describes circuit operation in detail. —
A. M. Sandman, Reducing Amplifier Distortion,
Wireless World, Oct. 1974, p 367-371.
Url
BALANCED OUTPUT WITH OPAMPS— Low-
cost amplifier provides low-impedance bal-
anced output from unbalanced signal output of
preamp. Response is flat from 10 to 20,000 Hz,
and distortion less than 0.1% at 800 Hz into 600-
ohm load. Gain is 20 dB. Other opamps, such as
LM307 or 747 (dual 741) can also be used. — K.
D. James, Balanced Output Amplifier, Wireless
World, Dec. 1975, p 576.
ELECTROSTATIC HEADPHONES— Uses

LM3900N four-opamp 1C and two transistors to
step up headphone output signal of AF power
amplifier sufficiently to drive pair of electro-
static headphones without introducing exces-
sive distortion. Total harmonic distortion at 1
kHz is 1% at 300-V peak-to-peak output, and
drops to 0.1% at 50-V output. — N. Pollock, Elec-
trostatic Headphone Amplifier, Wireless World,
July 1976, p 35.
♦ 15V
LOW-NOISE TRANSFORMERLESS PREAMP—

Noise performance of balanced microphone
preamp is improved with instrumentation am-
plifier configuration of three opamps. Each half
of LM387A is wired as noninverting amplifier.
LM387A serves to amplify low-level signals
while adding as little noise as possible, leaving
common-mode rejection for LF356. — "Audio
Handbook," National Semiconductor, Santa
Clara, CA, 1977, p 2-37-2-40.
5-W CLASS A — Three-transistor feedback loop

gives excellent DC stability, while arrangement
of two capacitors and resistor feeding loud-
speaker keeps these capacitors properly polar-
ized as AF output voltage swings above and
below zero level. — R. H. Pearson, Novel 5-Watt
Class A Amplifier Uses Three-Transistor Feed-
back Circuit, Wireless World, March 1974, p 18.
1-W NONINVERTING— Motorola MC1554 1C op- 1-W NONINVERTING WITH SPLIT SUPPLY—
erates from single supply and uses capacitive Motorola MC1554 1C is connected for operation
coupling to both source and load, for voltage from ±7 V to provide voltage gain of 9 over fre-
gain of 9 with frequency response (-3 dB) from quency range (-3 dB) of 40 to 22,000 Hz. Input
200 to 22,000 Hz. Input impedance is 10K, and impedance is 10K, and total harmonic distortion
total harmonic distortion is less than 0.75%. is less than 0.75%. Use external heatsink. —
Use external heatsink. — "The MC1554 One- 'The MC1554 One-Watt Monolithic Integrated
Watt Monolithic Integrated Circuit Power Am- Circuit Power Amplifier," Motorola, Phoenix,
AZ, 1972, AN-401, p 2.
plifier," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1972, AN-401, p
2.
Ri
BATTERYLESS MICROPHONE PREAMP— Tran-

sistor and two components can be mounted in
microphone housing. R2 is added to existing
amplifier to provide operating voltage for
preamp, while C2 feeds preamp signal to input
of amplifier. — W. H. Jarvis, Line-Powered Mi-
crophone Pre-Amp, Wireless World, Dec. 1976,
p 43.
60 W— Combination of National LM391 audio

driver 1C and discrete power transistors pro-
vides 60-W output for loudspeaker at very low
distortion. 1C output can swing ±40 V. Total har-
monic distortion of circuit is under 0.05%. — P.
Franson, Consumer-Product IC's — New Offer-
ings Trigger an Explosion in Markets Old and
New, EDN Magazine, Nov. 5, 1977, p 54-65.
•HIGH-FREQUENCY GROUND
••INPUT GROUND ALL GROUNDS SHOULD BE TIED TOGETHER

•"SPEAKER GROUND ONLY AT POWER SUPPLY GROUND.
50°C/W HEAT SINK ON BD348 AND BD349
3.9°C/W HEAT SINK ON BD350 AND BD351
DIRECT-COUPLED PUSH-PULL — Provides high-

quality sound at ample volume for car radio,
operating from 9.3-V regulated supply. Push-
pull emitter-follower stages are connected to
give symmetrical low output impedance on
both positive and negative portions of audio
waveform. Input transistor Tr, provides tem-
perature compensation, while driver Tr2 pro-
vides temperature-compensated bias and max-
imum symmetrical voltage swings to output
stages. — G. Kalanit, Low Voltage Audio Ampli-
fier, Wireless World, Oct. 1976, p 74.
43
AUDIO AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS
+9 to 18v. 560
out
FET PREAMP WITH TONE CONTROLS— Devel-

oped for use with simple 2-W audio amplifier 3-W DIFFERENTIAL — Upper Motorola MCI 554
when testing very low-level output circuits and power amplifier is connected in standard con-
microphones. Will not load circuit to which figuration for noninverting gain of 9, while
input is connected. Optional bass/treble tone lower 1C has inverting gain of 9 to give effective
controls are included. — J. Schultz, An Audio overall voltage gain of 18. Input impedance of
Circuit Bread D,boarder's Delight, CQ, Jan. 1978, upper amplifier is 10K while that of lower am-
p 42 and 75. plifier isIK, with unequal input coupling capac-
itors providing required match of frequency re-
input up to 50V output sponses. Differential output connection allows

+ O up to 2A output voltage swing to exceed power-supply
A -H—
1S420 voltage. — 'The MC1554 One-Watt Monolithic
Integrated Circuit Power Amplifier," Motorola,
Phoenix, AZ, 1972, AN-401, p 4.
C, . C2 CURRENT CONTROL FOR POWER SWITCH—

Circuit makes power supply current increase
gradually from zero when supply is turned on,
200 ti* to eliminate transients that sometimes cause
working alarming loudspeaker thumps in audio sys-
4n 100V
tems. Current through silicon power diode D, is
controlled by voltage on C,, which charges up
after closing of switch with time constant
C,R,R2/(R, + R2). When switch is opened, run-
down of supply current is controlled by dis-
charge of C. through R2. Article also covers use
of two current control circuits in tandem for
handling higher loads. — P. J. Briody, Power
Supply Delayed Switching, Wireless World,
March 1975, p 139-141.
+ 28V
10-W CLASS A — Highly stable circuit uses eas-

ily obtainable components. Transistortypes are
not critical. Short-circuit protection is provided
by constant-current source D,-Tr2-Tr5-Tr„. Out-
put transistors Tr5 and Tr6 require heatsinks ca-
pable of dissipating at least four times rated
output power. D, and Tr2 should be in thermal
contact. — A. H. Calvert, Class A Power Ampli-
fier, Wireless World, June 1976, p 71.
adjust to make point X half the supply voltage (if necessary)

+15V
TRANSFORMERLESS BALANCED-INPUT MI-

CROPHONE PREAMP — Uses FET-input opamp
to amplify differential signals while rejecting
common-mode signals. Gain is set at 52 dB by
-50 V ratio of R3 to R,. Input resistors R, and R2 are
made large compared to source impedance
while being kept as small as possible, for opti-
(15mA quiescent current)
mum balance between input loading effects
long-tailed pair without tail. For positive sig- and low noise. Good compromise value is 10
CLASS B WITHOUT TAKEOVER DISTORTION— nals, Tr,-Tr4 become active and behave as super times source impedance for R, + R2. — "Audio
Circuit uses two transistor triplets in output emitter-follower, while Tr, with Tr„-Tr6 serve for Handbook," National Semiconductor, Santa
stage, with quiescent current set at 15 mA by negative signals. One advantage of circuit is low Clara, CA, 1977, p 2-37-2-40.
Tr7 which serves as constant-current source. For output impedance. — N. M. Visch, A Novel Class
small signals, Tr, and Tr4 can be regarded as B Output, Wireless World, April 1975, p 166.
40V
75 W WITH CURRENT LIMITING— Signetics input. 1C includes built-in short-circuit protec- stage boost power to 75 W for driving loud-
NE541 high-voltage power amplifier provides tion, with additional protection provided by ex- speaker load. — "Signetics Analog Data Man-
current gain of 90 dB from 20 Hz to 20 kHz and ternal current limiting. Transistors in output ual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 765.
output levels up to 20 VRMS from 300-mVRMS
♦24 V
POWER OPAMPS IN BRIDGE— Bridge configu- Article covers incorporation of protective con-
ration istheoretically capable of 4 times power trols in single module with dual opamps. — E. R.
output of conventional quasi-complementary Buehler and B. D. Schertz, Fault Protection of
or complementary-symmetry amplifier. Use of Monolithic Audio Power Amplifiers in Severe SINGLE-ENDED MICROPHONE PREAMP—
bridge circuit in automotive AM/PM stereo re- Environments, IEEE Transactions on Consumer Noise performance is -69 dB below 2-mV input
ceiver requires suitable protection of modules. Electronics, Aug. 1977, p 418-423. reference point. Use metal-film resistors for R2
and Rs. Total harmonic distortion is less than
0.1%. Gain is set by ratio of R4 to R2 and is 52
dB. — "Audio Handbook," National Semicon-
■vw
R1
2M
IOmH
90 W PER CHANNEL — Combination of LM143

Li*
high-voltage opamp and current booster can
provide up to 90 WRMS into 4-ohm loudspeaker
or 70 WRMS into 8-ohm loudspeaker. Circuit
features include short-circuit and overload pro-
tection along with harmonic distortion below
0.1% at 1 kHz. Transistors Q1-Q4 should be on
common Thermalloy 6006B or equivalent heat-
sink.— "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," National
Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-127,
p 6—7.
12 W WITH BOOSTER TRANSISTORS— At sig-

nal input levels below 20 mW, National LM378
opamp supplies load directly through 5-ohm re-
sistor up to current peaks of about 100 mA.
Above this level, booster transistors are biased
on by load current through same resistor to in-
crease output power. Transistors and opamp
must have adequate heatsinks.— "Audio Hand-
book," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
CA, 1977, p 4-42-4-43.
HIGH-GAIN JFET — Simple two-JFET circuit pro-

vides gain of 500 at low power. Reducing drain
current increases gain at sacrifice of input dy-
namic range.— "FET Databook," National Semi-
= 500 typical
BRIDGE AMPLIFIER — National LM377 dual

INPUT
power amplifier is used in bridge configuration
to drive floating load that can be loudspeaker,
servomotor, or other device having impedance
of 8 or 16 ohms. Maximum output is 4 W at gain
of 40 dB, with 3-dB response extending from
about 20 Hz to above 100 kHz.— "Audio Hand-
CA, 1977, p 4-8-4-20.
10k 22V
5 W WITH OPAMP — Simple circuit including

volume control has low harmonic distortion.
Higher allowable operating voltage of LM384
opamp gives higher output power, but heatsink
ERROR ADD-ON REDUCES DISTORTION— 4-29.required. — "Audio Handbook," National
is
Based on fact that error at output of upper Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-28-
opamp also appears at input of this opamp.
Error signal is taken from this input for lower
opamp, where it is amplified by opamp and Dar-
lington for addition to output of upper Darling-
ton. Article gives design equations and inti-
mates that open-loop gain improves at 12 dB
per octave as compared to conventional 6 dB.
Applications include reduction of loudspeaker
distortion which cannot be handled by negative
feedback. — A. Sandman, Reducing Distortion
by 'Error Add-On,' Wireless World, Jan. 1973, p
32.
12-W OUTPUT — Uses CA3094B programmable nals are mixed in 4:1 ratio. Location of tone con- thermal compensation. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA
opamp to drive complementary-symmetry trols in feedback network improves signal-to- Linear ICs," RCA Solid State Division, Somer-
noise ratio. Hum and noise are typically 700 /iV ville, NJ, 1977, p 11.
power-output transistors. Intermodulation dis-
tortion isonly 0.2% when 60-Hz and 2-kHz sig- (83 dB down) at output. Transistor Q, provides
4.5-W CLASS B — Milliard TDA2610 drives 15-

ohm loudspeaker with total harmonic distor- 1-W INVERTING — Uses Motorola MC1554
tion of less than 1%. Supply is 28 V ± 10%. Net- power amplifier to provide voltage gain of 35
work C2-R1 ensures stability with inductive with components shown. Output voltage swing
load. — "Audio Power Amplifier TDA2610," Mul- is 12 V P-P into 12-ohm load. For response down
lard, London, 1976, Technical Note 35, TP1541. to low audio frequencies (below 100 Hz), large
value of C is required, such as 1 /iF. Input can be
direct-coupled at sacrifice in output offset, but
this can be corrected by properly biasing pin 1
or terminating it in about 250 ohms. Upper fre-
quency limit for -3 dB is about 22,000 Hz.—
"The MC1554 One-Watt Monolithic Integrated
Circuit Power Amplifier," Motorola, Phoenix,
AZ, 1972, AN-401, p 3.
to left hand amplifie
FEED-FORWARD CORRECTION— Circuit re- Article describes operating principle in detail. procedures, and thermal problems during en-
duces distortion caused by nonlinearity of out- Circuit shown gives application to commercial tire life of amplifier. — P. J. Walker, Current
put power transistors by deriving error com- amplifier (Quad 405), in which midfrequency Dumping Audio Amplifier, Wireless World, Dec.
ponent that bypasses these transistors. distortion is only about 0.005%. Features in-
1975, p 560-562.
Technique used is known as current dumping. clude elimination of adjustments, alignment
49
+v
LOW-NOISE OPAMP PREAMP— Circuit com-

bines noise features of discrete design with sim-
plicity and high open-loop of 1C opamp such as
741. Transistors can be 2N3708, BC109, or
equivalent. Output impedance is low enough to
5-W 1C — RCA 1C includes preamps, power am- should be placed as close as possible to pin 10. drive headphones directly. — D. R. Hedgeland,
plifier, and integral heatsink. CA3131 has inter- C6 sets 46-dB closed -loop gain point at 200 kHz. Op-Amp Pre-Amp, Wireless World, Dec. 1972,
nal feedback network that maintains 48-dB C7 equalizes gain for positive and negative sig-
gain, while CA3132 requires external feedback nal swings. C9 sets low-frequency response of
network including R1 and R2 connected be- amplifier. Recommended supply voltage is 24
tween pins 6 and 16. Input 1000-pF capacitor is VDC. — E. Noll, Audio-Power Integrated Cir- p 575.
required if input has open circuit. Electrolytic Cl cuits, Ham Radio, Jan. 1976, p 64-66.
50 mW FLAT TO 30 kHz — Power amplifier PREAMP IN MIKE— Common-source FET flat from 200 Hz to over 100 kHz. Drain is 200 pA
achieves push-pull output with single transis- preamp and 15-V battery fit into Turner 350C only when push-to-talk is pressed, giving long
tor. Both transistors should be germanium such hand mike for boosting output of ceramic ele- battery life. — G. Hinkle, Self-Powered Mike
as 2N404, SK3004. or HEP-253.— Circuits, 73 ment 20 dB. Frequency response of preamp is Preamp, 73 Magazine, Nov. 1976, p 65.
Magazine, Feb. 1974, p 100.
24V
ULTRALOW-NOISE PREAMP — Provides gain of

1000 over bandwidth of 20 Hz to 10 kHz, oper-
ating from 24-V supply and 600-ohm source
impedance. Design procedure is given. Total
IMPEDANCE BUFFER — Complementary-tran- ±12 V. — "The Linear and Interface Circuits Data wideband noise voltage is 43.7 pV, and wide-
sistor output stage provides required low Book for Design Engineers," Texas Instruments, band noise figure is 2.83 dB. — "Audio Hand-
impedance for driving headphones from Dallas, TX, 1973, p 4-41. book," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
SN72310 voltage-follower opamp. Supply is
CA, 1977, p 2-15-2-19.
Vs vs BRIDGE AMPLIFIER — Two opamps are used in

bridge configuration to provide twice the volt-
age swing across loudspeaker load for given 18-
V supply, increasing power capability to about
twice that of single amplifier. To eliminate ex-
cessive quiescent DC voltage across load, non-
polarized capacitor can be used in series with
load or 1-megohm pot can be connected be-
tween pins 1 of opamps with position of moving
arm adjusted to balance offset voltage. Com-
ponents shown with dashed lines are added for
stability with high-current load. — "Audio Hand-
CA, 1977, p 4-21-4-28.
0.1 Vs
BASS BOOST — Compensates for poor bass re-

sponse of loudspeaker by use of external series
RC circuit between pins 1 and 5, paralleling in-
ternal 5K
1 resistor of opamp. 6-dB effective bass
boost is obtained if resistor is 15K, and lowest
value for stable operation is 10K if pin 8 is left
open. — "Audio Handbook," National Semicon-
CURRENT-CONTROLLED SWITCHING— Addi- of amplifier, is opened to initiate charging of down times are a few seconds each. Article also
tion of current control to 40-V regulated power 8OO-/1F capacitor that allows gradual buildup of gives simpler current control circuit suitable for
supply for audio amplifier eliminates switch-on output current. Similar transient suppression use with unregulated supplies. — P. J. Briody,
transients that sometimes cause alarming loud- occurs when switch is closed to initiate current Power Supply Delayed Switching, Wireless
speaker thumps. Switch S, which can be either run-down as set is turned off. Run-up and run- World, March 1975, p 139-141.
relay or third pole on standard ON/OFF switch
+ 24V
+24 V
51
MIC
INPUT
INVERTING AC AMPLIFIER— Provides gain of 40

dB when using 24-V supply and input imped-
ance greater than 10K. Low-frequency perfor-
mance is flat to 20 Hz. Design procedure is
given. — "Audio Handbook," National Semicon-
BALANCED-INPUT MICROPHONE PREAMP— giving 0-dBm output for nominal 2-mV input.
Use of two wires for microphone signal and Noise performance is -86 dB below 2-mV input
separate wire for ground keeps hum and noise level, and rejection of common-mode signals is
at minimum. Signal wires are twisted together 60 dB. — "Audio Handbook," National Semicon-
in shield acting as ground. Net gain is 52 dB, ductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 2-37-2-40.
is flat from 10 Hz to over 50 kHz for outputs up pull. Input transistor can be any in Philips cuits in detail. — S. Berglund, Transistor Driver
to 15 W, and total harmonic distortion for full BFQ10-16 family or equivalent replacement for Valve Amplifiers, Wireless World, April 1976,
power output at 15 kHz is only 0.25%. Output such as Siliconix E401. Article gives many suit-
p 36-40.
CHAPTER 4
Audio Control Circuits
Includes variety of tone controls, compressor, expander, compandor, clipper,

mixer, clamp, automatic level control, click suppressor, attenuator, equalizer,
speech filter, noise squelch, logic-controlled gain, voice- or tone-controlled
relays, active crossover, and switching gate circuits for audio1/Jtsignals.
C9 See also
Audio Amplifier, Filter, Receiver, and Stereo chapters.
HI-FI COMPRESSOR — One section of Signetics force clamp diodes D3 and D, limit output sponding expander used for playback of re-
NE570 dual compandor is used with external swings to about 7 V P-P. Limiting action pre- corded material should have same value for
opamp for compression of large input signals in vents overloading of succeeding circuit such as rectifier capacitor C9 as is used in compressor. —
high-fidelity audio system. To prevent overload tape recorder. Circuit includes input compen- "Signetics Analog Data Manual," Signetics,
by sudden loud signal when compressor is op- sation network required for stability. Corre- Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 804.
erating at high gain for small signals, brute-
52
AUDIO CONTROL CIRCUITS 53
♦ 12-15 V
PREEMPHASIS AT 1500 Hz — Single-transistor

peaking filter is combined with low-noise RF-
protected preamp stage to improve speech in-
telligibility for any type of modulation. Effec-
tiveness is most noticeable with deep bass
voice, where soft peak around 1500-2000 Hz
improves speech intelligibility. Can also serve
as audio-type CW or SSB filter. — You Can
Sound Better with Speech Pre-Emphasis, 73
Magazine, Feb. 1977, p 42-43.
COMPRESSOR/LIMITER — High-fidelity circuit phase-splitter driving precision rectifiers IC2and scribes circuit operation and adjustment in de-
uses voltage-controlled attenuator to increase 1C,. Final part of circuit defines attenuation time tail. Trs is BC184L or equivalent. — D. R. Self,
attenuation of input signal in response to volt- constants; R26 sets attack time and R27 decay High-Quality Compressor/Limiter, Wireless
age of control loop. Designed for use in modern time. R2e can range from 0 to 1 megohm and R27 World, Dec. 1975, p 587-590.
CONSTANT AF LEVEL — Provides constant out-

put level even though input may vary between
50 mV and 6 V, for distribution to tone decoders
of autocall system used to monitor simplex or
repeater channel to which amateur radio re-
ceiver istuned. Positive terminal of electrolytic
C3 must go to pin 6 of 741. — C. W. Andreasen,
Autocall '76, 73 Magazine, June 1976, p 52-54.
SWITCH POSITIONS
Ai 748 or 301 -=r ground
ja compress
A2 to Ag 741
• O normal
O expand
nd
grou
L s,gnal
X circuit PANNING MIXER POT — Circuit gives best pos-

sible approach to sine law so A2 = B2 is constant
for all positions of wiper. Calculated error is less
than 1 dB over full range of wiper. Use wire-
wound potto minimize crosstalk. — J. Dawson,
Single Gang
1976, p 78. Pan-Pot, Wireless World, Feb.
+ 5V
COMPANDER WITH 100-dB RANGE — Simple sential for accurate power-law compansion. AUDIO SWITCHING GATE— Can be used with
square-law circuit preserves dynamic range of LED can be glued with clear epoxy to matched programmed channel selectors, as required in
virtually any input signal when recorded by or- photocells. Use silicon signal diodes such as music synthesis for controlling audio signals by
dinary tape recorder. Suitable for speech sig- 1N914, 1N4148, or 1S44. Inexpensive photocells means of TTL levels. DC offset at output is neg-
nals as well as for recording or playback in noisy such as Vactec VT-833 gave suitably low dis- ligible when gate is off, simplifying design of
environments. Opamp A, should have sepa- tortion. Article gives performance characteris- subsequent stages. Use logic 1 (+5 V) to open
rately decoupled supply. Switching provides tics and operating details. — J. Vanderkooy, gate, and logic 0 (0 V) to close it.— L. Cook, An-
compression during recording and expansion Wideband Compander Design, Wireless World, alogue pGate93.
with No Offset, Wireless World,
Feb. 1975,
during playback. Tracking of photocells is es- July 1976, p 45-49.
55
AUDIO CONTROL CIRCUITS
CLIPPER — Provides speech clipping at RF level

for SSB transmitters. Based on use of two Am-
perex 455-kHz IF crystal filters having 4-kHz
rated bandwidth, in place of costly conventional
sideband filters. Miller 8902-B IF amplifier mod-
ule simplifies wiring. Diode balanced modulator
at upper left can use individual 1N63 or 1N914
diodes, or RCA CA-3019 hex diode array that
also provides diodes for RF clipper. Audio input
can be taken from speech compressor of re-
ceiver, or separate audio amplifier can be added
to boost AF level. Same diode types are used in
product detector for final SSB signal, lower
right, which is diode ring demodulator taking
injection voltage from carrier oscillator. Article
tells how pin 8 on IF module (not connected in-
ternal y) isbridged to solder line between link
output of last IF transformer and AM detector
diode, and gives+20V
other construction details. — J.
J. Schultz, Inexpensive RF Speech Clipper, 73
Magazine, Sept. 1974, p 61-64 and 66.
, O
LINEAR 1 :4 VOLUME EXPANDER— Gain varies

automatically with strength of input signal,
being lowest for weak signals. Resistors R3 and
R4 modify linear control curve to give log curve
desired for audio systems. Overall gain of circuit
is about 0 dB at midrange of expansion. Lower
pair of LM324 quad opamp sections function as
full-wave precision linear peak detector. For
stereo, only upper part of circuit needs to be
duplicated for second channel. — "Linear Appli-
cations, Vol. 2," National Semiconductor, Santa
Clara, CA, 1976, AN-129, p 7.
SET TO (10V
V+
EXPANDER — Uses Signetics dual-channel com-
pandor 1C; 571 has lower inherent distortion
and higher supply voltage range (6-24 V) than
571 (6-18 V). Values shown are for 15-V supply
with either 1C. Gain through expander is 1.43
V,N. where V,N is average input voltage. Unity
gain occurs at RMS input level of 0.775 V, or 0
dBm in 600-ohm systems. — W. G. Jung, Gain
Control 1C for Audio Signal Processing, Ham
Radio, July 1977, p 47-53.
SWITCHING-CLICK SUPPRESSOR— Correction

network shown can be inserted in audio chan-
nel of mixing console without producing tran-
sients or level changes. Although Baxandall net-
work is shown, switching technique is
applicable to other filters. With S, normally
open and S: normally closed, circuit operation
is normal. If switch positions are simultane-
ously reversed, response remains flat regard-
less ofpositions of bass and treble pots, center-
frequency gain remains unchanged, and phase
shift is unchanged. There is then no transient
interruption of AF signals. Switching clicks can-
not occur because there is no direct current in
the network.— J. S. Wilson, Click-Free Switch-
ing for Audio Filters, Wireless World, Jan. 1975,
p 12.
FULL-WAVE RECTIFIER
velope isfiltered out by active RC high-pass fil-

SPEECH PROCESSOR — Can improve signal ter U8 having 50-Hz cutoff, with exactly unity transmitter input through low-pass filter U12
strength and intelligibility of voice signals up to gain above cutoff. Filtered signal goes to ex- having sharp cutoff above 3 kHz to eliminate
6 dB without unpleasant changes in fidelity. ponential amplifier U9-U10 and is then multi- unwanted high-frequency energy. CR1-CR4 are
Used between microphone and input of AM or plied by correct sign information in U14. Sign 1N914 or other matched silicon diodes. T1 is
SSB transmitter. Based on separation of signal information is obtained by hard-limiting input 250-mW audio transformer. Article gives con-
envelope from constant-amplitude carrier that voice signal with diode clipper CR5-CR6. Re- struction and adjustment details. — J. E. Kauf-
together make up voice signal. After logamp U6 sulting square-wave output is multiplied by sig- mann and G. E. Kopec, A Homomorphic Speech
separates components of speech waveform, en- nal from UJT in U14. Processed signal goes to Compressor, QST, March 1976, p 33-37.
COMPRESSOR/LIMITER — Developed for use

with microphone in public-address systems.
Bandwidth is 15 Hz to 25 kHz. R, sets threshold
voltage and compression law. Output of
CA3130 inverting opamp is made as large as
possible before being applied to rectifier and
low-pass filter, to minimize effects of diode non-
linearities and capacitor leakage. Low-pass fil-
ter gives required fast attack time of about 500
/ns and long decay time of about 1 min. — M. B.
Taylor, Speech Compressor/Limiter, Wireless
World, May 1977, p 80.
R2 «14
THREE-INPUT MIXER— Motorola MC3401P or

National LM3900 quad opamp serves for three
input amplifiers each having adjustable gain
above about 10 ,0 0 ohms. Common outputs

range of 1 to about 11 and input impedance
I feed fourth opamp section connected as high-

impedance amplifier. Maximum overall gain for
mixer-amplifier is about 300. Use well-filtered
9-15 V supply or battery capable of supplying
25 mA. — C. D. Rakes, "Integrated Circuit Proj-
ects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1975,
p 21-22.
CLICKLESS LEVEL-CONTROL ATTENUATOR—

Uses two Precision Monolithics DAC-76 D/A
converters to eliminate gain-change transients
while providing exponential control of audio
signal level. Maximum (all Is) gain is unity from
either input to output, while differential input
to output gain is +6 dB. Control range is 78
dB. — W. Jung and W. Ritmanich, "Audio Appli-
cations for the DAC-76 Companding D/A Con-
verter," Precision Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA,
1977, AN-28, p 4.
.
AF LEVEL CONTROL — AD533J analog multi-

plier used in its divide mode provides measure
of automatic level control to compensate for
variations in loudness occurring from micro-
phone to microphone in public-address system.
Divider output is first rectified and compared
with -15 V reference. Difference is then inte-
grated and fed into denominator of divider-con-
nected AD533J as control signal Vx. Average AC
output is held within 1% of 7 V. — R. Frantz, An-
alog Multipliers — New 1C Versions Manipulate
Real-World Phenomena with Ease, EDN Maga-
zine, Sept. 5, 1977, p 125-129.
Cl
C2
'r
cio
A33 • * r2B <
< 300 H <
< R27 <

LM381 47k '
i— 1!—
1 ♦ 0.022pF
P~T fo 32(Hz)
0 033 rC5 4
10yF 0.01 IpF
0 047 0 047 0 27
— r-v C3 'T' t-4 <*■
125 0.0056mF
0.0027pF
250
0.0015/lF
64 680 pF
Ik 330 pF
500
' 1 ALL RESISTORS V.W, :5% 2k 160pF
4
2 POTS ARE LINEAR TAPER
4k
3. LM349 Vqc = *15V (PIN 41, 82 pF
43pF
V£E ■ -15V (PIN 11) OECOUPLED
WITH 0 1WF CAPS
16k
4 CAP TOLERANCE *10%
ROOM EQUALIZER — Ten-octave equalizer is sulting noise at some center listening point in octaves. High end can then 8k be rolled off or low
combined with pink-noise generator in such a room being equalized. Amplified output of mi- end boosted to suit personal preference. Ad-
way that all but one octave band can be crophone drives VU meter where arbitrary level justments are readily repeated when furniture
switched out, with pink noise passed through is established for one filter section. Other filter is changed in room. Table gives values of C, for
remaining filter to power amplifier and loud-
speaker. Microphone with flat frequency re- Qv
sections are then switched in one at a time and
adjusted to give same VU reading. Equalizer
2-59. octave. — "Audio Handbook," National
each
Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 2-53-
sponse over audio band is used to pick up re- settings then give flat room response for all ten
COMPRESSOR — Circuit has unity gain at 0.775

VRMS input and complementary input/output
characteristic. Voltage gain through compres-
sor is square root of 0.7/V1N, where VIN is average
input voltage. Uses Signetics dual-channel
compandor 1C; 571 has lower inherent distor-
tion and higher supply voltage range (6-24 V)
than 571 (6-18 V). — W. G. Jung, Gain Control 1C
for Audio Signal Processing, Ham Radio, July
1977, p 47-53.
CONSTANT 1 8-V AF FOR SSB— Uses Motorola

MFC6040 voltage-controlled amplifier 1C having
13-dB gainjand maximum of 90-dB gain reduc-
tion. Q1-Q2 form microphone preamp, Q4 is
AGC detector/amplifier for 1C, and Q3 is output
buffer. With 500-ohm dynamic microphone,
output remains constant at 1.8 VRMS. — L. No-
votny, Speech Compressor, Ham Radio, Feb.
1976, p 70-71.
ASYMMETRICAL ACTIVE CROSSOVER— High-

pass and low-pass active filters using National
LF356 opamps are asymmetrical about 500-Hz
crossover point. Sum of filter output voltages
is always constant and equal to unity. Rolloff of
low-pass filter is only -6 dB per octave, as com-
pared to -18 dB per octave for high-pass fil-
ter.— "Audio Handbook," National Semicon-
FOR SINGLE SUPPLY

+ 30 v 20 dB FLAT POSITION GAIN
BASS/TREBLE BOOST/CUT — Using linear and

log pots with tone control network in feedback
path of CA3140 bipolar MOS opamp, circuit pro-
vides 20-dB gain in flat position and ± 1 5 dB bass
and treble boost and cut at 100 and 10,000 Hz.
Output is 25 V P-P at 20 kHz and is -3 dB at 24
kHz from 1-kHz reference. Optional connection
for ± 15 V supply is also shown. — "Circuit Ideas
for RCA Linear
Somerville, NJ, ICs,"
1977, RCA
p 10. Solid State Division,
TONE CONTROL NETWORK
HIGH-ON LOGIC CONTROL— Uses Signetics

NE571 or NE570 analog compandor. When con-
trol input is high, CR1 is off and current devel-
oped by Rga,n flows into rectifier input, allowing
audio to be amplified. Gain is unity (or other
nominal value chosen by changing value of R3)
for control inputs greater than 3 V. Switching is
abrupt, with full attenuation below 1.5 V. Nar-
row transition width and nominal DC center of
1 .8 V allow direct control from CMOS, TTL, DTL,
or other positive logic. Supply voltage should
be stable. — W. G. Jung, Gain Control 1C for
Audio Signal Processing, Ham Radio, July 1977,
p 47-53.
+ 15 V
LOW-ON LOGIC CONTROL— Uses Signetics

NE571 or NE570 analog compandor. Gain is de-
termined bycurrent developed through RGA,N in
conjunction with internal 1.8-V voltage refer-
ence. When control input is low, normal current
flows through RGain- When control signal is high,
CR1 is forward-biased, interrupting current
flow, and output is attenuated. — W. G. Jung,
Gain Control 1C for Audio Signal Processing,
Ham Radio, July 1977, p 47-53.
AUDIO CONTROL CIRCUITS
61
TONE CONTROL FOR OPAMP— Provides up to dB of treble boost or cut at 20 kHz. Turnoverfre- "Signetics Analog Data Manual," Signetics,
20 dB of bass boost or cut at 20 Hz and up to 19 quency Is 1 kHz. Opamp can be 531 or 301. — Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 638-640.
SPEECH FILTER — High-pass and low-pass fil-

ters in cascade provide corner frequencies of
300 and 3000 Hz for limiting audio bandwidth to
speech frequencies. Rolloff beyond corners is
—40 dB per decade. Input-to-output gain is 1. —
"Audio Handbook," National Semiconductor,
Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 2-49-2-52.
IMPROVED BAXANDALL CONTROL— Uses sep- effect for bass and R21 for treble. Circuit has cuit in detail. — M. V. Thomas, Baxandall Tone
arate "effect" controls for bass and treble to unity gain with controls set flat. Article gives Control Revisited, Wireless World, Sept. 1974,
limit maximum degree of boost and cut obtain- response curves and describes operation of cir-
able from bass and treble controls. R1s controls
p 341-343.
VOX WITH SPEECH COMPRESSION— Turns on

transmitter automatically when operator be-
gins speaking into microphone. Circuit
switches back to receiving condition automat-
ically at end of message. 1C can be LS370 or
equivalent such as LM370 or SC370. Amount of
compression is adjusted with 10K pot, for re-
ducing gain of 1C automatically to maintain rea-
sonably constant audio output at pin 8 despite
different voice levels at microphone. — E. M.
Projects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
1974, p 344-347.
COMPRESSOR — Keeps output voltage con-

stant as long as input signal is kept above AF
threshold level. Opamp is MC3340P. — Circuits,
73 Magazine, Holiday issue 1976, p 170.
RESISTORS -MINIATURE I/4W. 3 OR 10%

Cl .C5.C6.C7- ELECTROLYTIC , 16V WKG
C3 - ELECTROLYTIC . 25V WKG
Bcioec C6 - ELECTROLYTIC , 6V WKG
C2- TYPE C280 (MULLARD)
C3
R2
R1
INPUT LOW-PASS FILTER
442K C2 > 150 HF
?R5
VOICE 10K 0.1 pF 10% CVSD ENCODER
IN y Cl R3 R4 <5%
1500
AUDIO IN
-VW vW-f- +
0.47 aF 10%
XC6 U1 U2 U3
470pF
PIN 4 PIN 4 PIN
U3 4
+VDD * U2 /i
Ul, U2, U3, HARRIS HA-4741 QUAD OP AMP
CAPACITORS IN pF UNLESS OTHERWISE
U1 STATED
R6 —
10>V— vW RESISTORS 1/20 WATT
>R7
CAP. TOL. 1% UNLESS OTHERWISE
> 1 10K PIN 11
PIN 11 STATED
1
2.2 pF PIN 11 RES. TOL. 1% UNLESS OTHERWISE
10V >R8 STATED
GND-Vjjs S110K :
>~Sr~ Rll
OUTPUT LOW-PASS FILTER
84.5K
AUDIO FILTERS FOR SNR MEASUREMENT— back to voice. Supply required for opamp sec- down more than 45 dB from 3.8 kHz to 100
Used in checking performance of Harris HC- tions is ±15 V. Response of input filter is down
kHz. — "Linear & Data Acquisition Products,"
55516/55532 half-duplex modulator-demodula- 3 dB at 3 kHz and is down 20 dB at 9 kHz. Re- Harris Semiconductor, Melbourne, FL, Vol, 1,
tor systems for converting voice signals into se- sponse of output filter is flat up to 3 kHz and 1977, p 5-10.
rial NRZ digital data and reconverting that data
SOUND-OPERATED RELAY — Output of about

1 .8 mVRMS from crystal or ceramic microphone
will energize relay when sensitivity control R4
is at maximum. First two stages form high-gain
RC-coupled AF amplifier, output of which is rec-
tified by silicon diode XI . DC voltage developed
across diode is applied to gate of Siliconix U183
FET which acts as DC amplifier driving Sigma 5F
or equivalent relay. To adjust, short microphone
terminals, set R4 for maximum sensitivity, then
adjust RIO until relay opens. — R. P. Turner, "FET
Circuits," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
1977, 2nd Ed , p 111-113.
SYMMETRICAL ACTIVE CROSSOVER— Pro-

vides - 18 dB per octave rolloff (third order) and
maximally flat (Butterworth) characteristics for
crossover frequency of 500 Hz. Uses National
LF356 opamps in high-pass and low-pass filters
and same opamp as buffer having low driving
+V
impedance required by active filters. Power
supplies are ±15 V. Design equations are
+15V _15V
-V Q, - Q6: RCA CA3045
THUMPLESS CONTROL — Five-transistor circuit

for audio amplifier applications eliminates
thumping sounds that can sometimes be heard
when level of input signal changes suddenly.
Differential amplifier Q,-Q2, with R, in emitter-
current control circuit, eliminates thump. Con-
trol input acts on identical transistors Q3-Q„
which make transconductance of differential
WIDEBAND AF LEVEL CONTROL— AD531 ana- pair Q,-Q2 vary in direct proportion to control
log multiplier can hold output to 3 V P-P ± 2% voltage. Fifth transistor in array, Q5, is used as
for inputs from 0.4 to 6 V P-P, at frequencies output signal buffer. Amplifier gain is 30for con-
from 30 Hz to 400 kHz. Opamp type is not criti- trol voltage of 15 V. — P. Brokaw, Automatic
cal.— R. Frantz, Analog Multipliers — New 1C Gain Control Quells Amplifier Thump, Electron-
Versions Manipulate Real-World Phenomena
ics, Jan. 10, 1974, p 131-132; reprinted in "Cir-
with Ease, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977, p 125-
129. cuits for Electronics Engineers," Electronics,
1977, p 46-47.
+ I5V
2-8 OHM
OUTPUT
MALE-FEMALE VOICE SWITCH— Circuit devel-

oped by NASA engineers to improve intelligi- SPEECH FILTER — Pair of Bessel-type high-pass
bility of voice communication during Apollo filters removes undesired components created
moon shots passes only the three portions of by peak clipping during audio signal processing.
the speech spectrum required for clear speech: Developed for use with automatic level control
300—400 Hz and 2500-3000 Hz for both sexes applications of NE571 analog compandor. — W.
and 900-1700 Hz formates or 1100-1900 Hz for G. Jung, Gain Control 1C for Audio Signal Pro-
females. Pot adjusts null to about 600 Hz. Circuit cessing, Ham Radio, July 1977, p 47-53.
improves readability of weak DX voice signals
in noise. — J. Fisk, Circuits and Techniques, Ham
Radio, June 1976, p 48-52.
3 41 R!
TWO-CHANNEL PANNING — Provides smooth

and accurate panoramic control of apparent
microphone position between two output
channels, as often required in mixing consoles
at recording studios. Requires only single linear
pot. At each extreme of pot, gain is unity for one
channel and zero for other. With pot centered,
gains for both channels are -3 dB. R2 depends
on supply voltage used, which can be from 9 to
30 V. — "Audio Handbook," National Semicon-
CASCODE TONE CONTROL — Circuit raises 100- shown give maximum bass boost or cut at 50 BC114, BC184, or equivalent. — J. N. Ellis, High
mV input signal level to 1 V for driving power Hz with R,9 and maximum treble boost or cut at Quality Tone Control, Wireless World, Aug.
amplifier and uses cascode arrangement to im- 10 kHz with R20. Tr2 can be BC15, BC214, BC309, 1973, p 378.
prove S/N ratio of tone control network. Values or equivalent. Other transistors can be BC109,
C2
Cl
OCTAVE EQUALIZER — Provides ten bands of
c, tone control, separated by one octave in fre-
I
quency, with independent adjustment for each.
Used to compensate for unwanted amplitude-
(DUPLICATE ABOVE FOR
A TOTAL OF 10 CIRCUITS. frequency or phase-frequency characteristics of
SUBSTITUTING APPROPRIATE audio systems. Values of C, and C2 for each cir-
CAP VALUES F ROW TABLE
2 17 1.) cuit are given in table. With control R2 in flat po-
sition, circuit becomes all-pass with unity gain.
Moving R2 to full boost gives bandpass charac-
teristic, and moving in other direction to full cut
|— it— |
' 4kHz
^
gives band-reject or notch filter. For stereo,
240pF
100k T R1 — _« , 0.01 pF
0.018pF
fo (Hz] Q.18/2F identical equalizer is needed for other
32
125 0.1 ||F 0 0047/jF channel. — "Audio Handbook," National Semi-
0 047pF 0.0022pF conductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 2-53-2-59.
8kHz 64
0.022pF
250 0.0012pF
1 ALL RESISTORS ’AW. 5%. 0.01 2/uF
2 POTS ARE LINEAR TAPER
16kH; 500
3. PIN 4 CONNECTED TO VCC = *15 V, Ik 0.0056pF 270pF
PIN 11 CONNECTED TO VeE = -15V.
DECOUPLED WITH 0 1 pF CAPS AT 2k 0.0027/jF
EACH QUAD OP AMP
0.001 5pF 150pF
4 CAP TOLERANCE -10V. 4k
680 pF 68 PF
240pF
16k
8k + 15V
24pF
AUTOMATIC LEVEL CONTROL— Uses Signet-

ics NE570 or NE571 analog compandor to pro-
vide automatic level control for audio signal
processing, to give constant high percentage
modulation despite varying input levels. Op-
tional resistor Rx varies threshold of level reg-
ulation. Widest range of gain control is obtained
with R* open. When resistor value is lowered,
larger input signal is required for full output.
Peak-level clipping with pair of reverse paral-
leled LEDs controls overshoots on speech by
limiting RMS output to 2.2 V P-P. Ry regulates
clipped amplitude — W. G. Jung, Gain Control
ICfor Audio Signal Processing, Ham Radio, July
1977, p 47-53.
10k 100k 10k
v+
TONE CONTROL WITH HIGH INPUT IMPED-

ANCE— Use of 2N5458 JFET ahead of opamp
feedback-type tone control provides high input
impedance and low noise characteristics for
high-fidelity audio applications. — "FET Data-
CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36.
BOOST BASS CUT
REFERENCE
BOOST TREBLE CUT -3 dB AT 70 kHz FROM I kHz
TONE CONTROL NETWORK 0 dB FLAT POSITION GAIN
FOR DUAL SUPPLIES
BAXANDALL TONE CONTROL— Utilizes high

FOUR-CHANNEL MIXER— All four sections of slew rate, high output-voltage capability, and
RCA CA3048 quad differential amplifier are uti- high input impedance of CA3140 bipolar MOS
lized in linear mixer providing gain of 20 dB for opamp to provide unity gain at midband along
each channel. Designed for use with load of 10K with bass and treble boost and cut of ± 15 dB at
or larger. All inputs are high impedance. — E. M. 100 and 10,000 Hz. Optional connection for ±15
Noll, "Linear 1C Principles, Experiments, and V supply is shown below. — "Circuit Ideas for
Projects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, RCA Linear ICs," RCA Solid State Division, So-
1974, p 173 and 179. merville, NJ, 1977, p 10.
+ 3.6V
HI-FI EXPANDER — Used in playback of material minimum total harmonic distortion when using tone-burst input. — "Signetics Analog Data
that has been recorded with overload-prevent- input of 0 dBm at 10 kHz. Adjust DC shift pot Rs Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p
804-805.
ing compressor. External opamp is used for after this, for minimum envelope bounce with
high slew rate. Adjust distortion trimpot R9 for
68 kft
AUDIO-OPERATED RELAY— Addition of two

general-purpose transistors to 555 timer gives
audio-triggered relay that can be used for au-
tomatic recording of output of channel-moni-
toring radio receiver or data from any audio link.
Adjustable time delay R keeps control circuit
actuated up to 5 s (determined by R and C) to
avoid cycling relay during pauses in speech or
dropouts in data. Q1 is NPN, and Q2 is PNP. At-
60-dB RANGE FOR AUDIO— JFET acts as volt- of 0.4 s. Output is about 1 .4 V P-P over entire 60- tack time equals very short pull-in time of 5-V
age-controlled resistor in peak-detecting con- dB range. — N. Heckt, Automatic Gain Control reed relay K. Adjust 10K input pot just below
trol loop of 741 opamp. Input range is 20 mV to Has 60-Decibel Range, Electronics, March 31, point at which K pulls in when there is no audio
20 V, with response time of 1-2 ms and delay 1977, p 107. input. — R. Taggart, Sound Operated Relay, 73
Magazine, Oct. 1977, p 114-115.
DIFFERENTIAL-AMPLIFIER CLIPPER— Provides

gain as well as precise symmetrical clipping for
improving intelligibility of speech fed into radio
transmitter. Circuit reduces dynamic range of
energy peaks to bring them closer to average
energy level. When inserted in series with mi-
crophone, use of clipper gives at least 6-dB in-
crease in effective power. Signals are passed up
to certain amplitude but limited above this
level. — B. Kirkwood, Principles of Speech Pro-
cessing, Ham Radio, Feb. 1975, p 28-34.
for portable FM scanners and two-way walkie-

talkie radios can be turned off by noise or by
control signal to minimize battery drain. When
15V o squelched, LM388 opamp-transistor-diode
r msb
array draws only 0.8 mA from 7.5-V supply.
Diodes rectify noise from limiter or discrimina-
o tor of receiver, producing direct current that
turns on Q, and thereby clamps opamp off. Volt-
DIGITAL
INPUTS age gain is 20 to 200, depending on value used
for R,. Power output without squelch is about
0.5 W for 8-ohm loudspeaker. — "Audio Hand-
REF 5 16 CA, 1977, p 4-37-4-41.
5kR 1i2 ; + 10V R3 II 0)
+cOUT AC
R2 20K12 |
*
AC
-v<v- 5KI2
DC
o
INPUT DAC 76
-5V MAX O- A1 6
-15V •OP 02 GENERAL PURPOSE

+15V
6 6 OP 16 FAST SETTLING
OP 01 LOWEST DISTORTION
FOR 78dB CONTROL RANGE, USE PIN 1 AS LSB

(AS SHOWN!. FOR 72dB CONTROL RANGE. USE
PIN 9 AS LSB. GROUND PIN 1.
TWO-QUADRANT EXPONENTIAL CONTROL— can be either 72 or 78 dB, depending on pin con- changes, use clickless attenuator/amplifier (also
Decibel-weighted control characteristic of Pre- nections used. 8-bit word control input can be given in application note). — W. Jung and W.
cision Monolithics DAC-76 D/A converter interfaced with standard TTL-compatible mi- Ritmanich, "Audio Applications for the DAC-76
matches natural loudness sensitivity of human croprocessor outputs. To avoid annoying out- Companding D/A Converter," Precision Mono-
ear, to provide much greater useful dynamic put transients during large or rapid gain lithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, AN-28, p 2.
range for controlling audio level. Control range
R6
68
lOOmv
22k
AF COMPRESSOR — Developed for use in com-

munication receiver where signals vary so
CLAMPING WITH OPAMPS— Circuit is used greatly that even modern AVC systems cannot
after stage of AC amplification to clamp mini- level all signals. Circuit is AVC that sets maxi-
mum level of signal voltage to 0 V for signals mum audio level which will not be exceeded.
having amplitudes between 10 mV and 10 V. Uses one FET as series attenuator controlled by
With 250-^F electrolytic for C, sinusoidal wave- DC voltage derived from audio output. R3 per-
forms between 3 and 10,000 Hz are clamped mits adjustment of compression level. — C. E.
with little distortion. Overall gain is unity. — C. Richmond, A Receiver Audio Compressor, CQ,
B. Mussell, D.C. Level Clamp, Wireless World, June 1970, p 35 and 86.
Feb. 1975, p 93.
TONE-DRIVEN RELAY— LM567 tone decoder

will respond to frequency between 700 and
Cl 1500 Hz, determined by setting of 10K pot.
When input of 100 mVRMS at preset frequency
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED ATTENUATOR— arrives, output of 1C goes low and energizes
Used to control low-level audio signals with relay through transistor. Tone can be obtained
variable DC voltage of ±3 V. Control pot can be from audio oscillator or telephone Touch-Tone
remotely located. Highest possible output is pad. Relay contacts can be used to turn desired
equal to input level, occurring when gate bias device on or off.— J. A. Sandler, 9 Easy to Build
is set close to pinchoff value. Output is mini- Projects under $9, Modern Electronics, July
mum when gate bias is zero. — E. M. Noll, "FET 1978, p 53-56.
W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 2nd Ed., 1975, p 258-
260.
EQUALIZER — Designed for use between input ment details stress importance of eliminating ceeds 0.9 V. U1 thus operates in linear mode at
jack and microphone of amateur transmitter, to ground loops and RF feedback. U1 is voltage- maximum gain until output voltage exceeds 0.9
keep bandpass response between limits of controlled amplifier in feedback loop, with 741 V, when voltage is applied to U1 and gain of 1C
about 200 and 3100 Hz. Circuit also provides opamp U2 as compression detector. U2 is is reduced. — R. Tauber, The Equalizer, QST,
measure of volume compression, improving biased so output is almost at ground, and no March 1977, p 18-20.
transmitter efficiency. Construction and adjust- feedback voltage is applied until input to U2 ex-
♦20V
FOUR-CHANNEL MIXER— Combines AF signals

from one to four sources into single audio signal
for input of LM381 opamp that serves also as
preamp. Shield mixer circuit and use shielded
cable for all input leads to avoid pickup of 60-Hz
field by high-gain opamp. Increasing supply
voltagefrom minimum of 9 V boosts output sig-
nal voltage. — J. A. Sandler, 9 Easy to Build Proj-
ects under $9, Modem Electronics, July 1978,
p 53-56.
SWITCH
SELECTOR
NOISELESS AUDIO SWITCH— Deglitched cur-

rent-mode switch using JFET can be placed di-
rectly on printed-circuit board instead of front
panel, to minimize hum pickup and crosstalk.
JFET allows transition time of drive to be ad-
justed with series resistorR and shunt capacitor
QUAD GAIN CONTROL — Combination of Na- mum output. Temperature sensitivity of FET C to provide noiseless switching of AF signals.
tional AM97C11 quad FET and LM324 quad can be reduced by using silicon resistor for Diode type is not critical. Any number of
opamp gives tracking gain control having 40-dB opamp feedback resistor R1. — "FET Databook," switches can be ganged. —Santa
National Semiconductor, "Audio Handbook,"
Clara, CA, 1977,
range. Bandwidth is 10 kHz minimum, and S/N National Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977,
ratio is better than 70 dB for 4.3-VRMS maxi-
p 6-39-6-46.
p 2-62.
CHAPTER 5
Audio Measuring Circuits
Includes S-meters and VU meters, along with circuits for measuring AF

distortion and flutter, peak program meter tester, and clipping-point indicator.
See also Frequency Measuring and Frequency Multiplier chapters.
* 18V
FLUTTER METER — Signetics 561 N PLL detects

frequency variations in 3-kHz tone recorded on
magnetic tape for test purposes. Frequency of
VCO in 561 N is set to nominal 3 kHz with 5K pot.
Demodulated output is AC coupled to amplifier
having high input impedance. Either CRO or
true RMS voltmeter can be used to make RMS
flutter readings. To calibrate circuit, feed in 3-
kHz tone from oscillator and measure output
level shift when frequency is offset 1%. — "Sig-
netics Analog Data Manual," Signetics, Sunny-
vale, CA, 1977, p 860.
2. 2 mAj^
12 V -
ON-OFF ^
0-50 DC
= RANGES MICROAMMETER
A. 20-200 Hz
B. 200-2000 Hz
C. 2-20 kHz put of device is fed to AF input of distortion to successively lower ranges for accurate read-
meter. After setting S2 to appropriate fre- ing of voltage at null. Record residual null volt-
HARMONIC-DISTORTION METER— Used to quency range, close SI, set S3 at A, set S4 at age as E2. Percentage distortion is then IOOEj/
measure total harmonic distortion of audio am- appropriate voltage range, and adjust R1 for Ev — R. P. Turner, "FET Circuits," Howard W.
plifier, component, or network. Pure sine-wave full-scale meter deflection. Record this voltage Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 147-
signal is applied to device under test, and out- as E,. Set S3 to B, tune C3 for null, then set S4 ISO.
70
AUDIO MEASURING CIRCUITS 71
1C DRIVE FOR VU METER — Used in high-quality

stereo cassette deck operating from AC line or
battery. Meter rectifier bridge is in feedback
loop of opamp, to give highly linear AC/DC con-
version with flat frequency/amplitude response
and short voltage rise time at low cost. Article
gives all other circuits of cassette deck and de-
scribes operation in detail. — J. L. Linsley Hood,
Low-Noise, Low-Cost Cassette Deck, Wireless
World, Part 1— May 1976, p 36-40 (Part 2— June
1976, p 62-66; Part 3— Aug. 1976, p 55-56).
Vcc
ADD-ON S-METER — Although designed for use
with Clegg FM-27B 2-meter FM receiver, circuit
can be readily adapted to other receivers. Am-
plifier brings low-level 455-MHz IF signal up to
level suitable for driving meter. For other IF,
such as 10.7 or 11.7 MHz, capacitor values
should be changed accordingly. Any NPN tran-
sistor with beta of 30 or more at IF value can be
used. Diodes can be any type. Supply should be
regulated but can be 7-14 V. Output of diode
detector will vary from 0 to 1 V at nominal
impedance of 20K; for best result, meter with
20- to 50- /xA movement can be used. — M. Stern,
FM-27B S-Meter, QST, Dec. 1976, p 35.
CLIPPING-POINT INDICATOR— Uses LED to in-

dicate when clipping distortion begins in 50-W
power amplifier. Display circuit is referenced to
negative supply, making detection level inde-
pendent of supply variation; circuit thus works
equally well for instantaneous, music, or con-
tinuous overloads. T r. is normally turned hard
on and Tr2 is off. When overload makes collec-
tor-emitter voltage of lower amplifier output
transistor approach saturation, Tr, begins to
turn off and C, charges through D, so LED turns
on. Attack time is chosen to make single 3-ms
overload transient visible. — J. Dawson and K.
Northover, L.E.D. Clip Indicator, Wireless
World, Jan. 1976, p 60.
O -38V
ZERO
ADJUST
ADDING S-METER — Circuit works well with

most all-band receivers. Q1 may also be SK-
3011, NR5, TR-10, or DS75. Q2 may also be HE-
1, SK-3005, or TR-06. Value of 1.2-megohm
input resistor may need to be adjusted depend-
ing on AVC voltage, to prevent strong signals
from overloading meter. — Novice Q & A, 73
-15V
LEDs DISPLAY VU PEAKS — Exponential coding pled by sample-and-hold input circuit. A/D con- drive 8-bit RS latch using 74279 chips, updated
of Precision Monolithics DAC-76 D/A converter verter isclocked at 500 kHz and completes con- every 25 ms by 40-Hz display multiplex clock. —
is used to good advantage in peak-reading VU version every 18 /us, which is fast enough to W. Jung and W. Rrtmanich, "Audio Applications
indicator with logarithmic weighting, driving track audio signals. 4 most significant magni- for the pDAC-76
AN-28, Companding D/A Converter,"
LED display. Input audio is converted by DAC- tude bits drive 3205 1-of-8 decoder which is en- Precision 6.Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1977,
76, CMP-01 comparator, and 2502 successive- abled by most significant bit. Resulting eight
approximation A/D converter after being sam- output levels, separated by 3-dB increments.
* 12V TV
HO *I5VDC
1-mA S-METER — Amplifier designed for 1-mA

meter movement consists of two-stage voltage
amplifier driving meter rectifier. FET input pro- 5-mA S-METER — Circuit designed for 5-mA
vides high impedance to detected audio and meter movement uses two-stage voltage am-
minimizes loading and distortion problems. 02 plifier Q1-Q2 with emitter-follower output Q3
is common-emitter voltage amplifier with sim- serving as impedance-matching stage. AF input
ple positive-pulse rectifier for meter. Cl filters for S-9 reading is 25-30 mV P-P and forfull scale
rectified audio signal. AF input for S-9 reading is 50-60 mV P-P. Frequency response is 500 Hz
is 25-30 mV P-P and for full scale is 50-60 mV to 10 kHz. — M. A. Chapman, Solid-State S-Me-
P-P. Frequency response is 500 Hz to 10 kHz. — ters. Ham Radio, March 1975, p 20-23.
M. A. Chapman, Solid-State S-Meters, Ham
Ci = 1 20 pF
AUDIO-FREQUENCY METER— Covers 0-100

kHz in four ranges. Meter reading is indepen-
dent of signal amplitude from 1 .7 VRMS upward
and independent of waveform over wide range.
Linear response means only one point need be
calibrated in each frequency range. Circuit uses
two overdriven FET amplifier stages in cascade.
Square-wave output of last stage is rectified by
XI and X2. Deflection of meter depends only on
number of pulses per second passing through
meter so is proportional to pulse frequency.
»M"'VRMS
Battery drain is 1.4 mA — R. P. Turner, "FET Cir-
300t,V cuits," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977,
2nd Ed , p 129-131.
40 d e
D 3%
LEVEL DETECTOR — Circuit lights green LED if

signal at output of audio preamp exceeds 1 V
peak for predetermined period. Red LED comes
on when tone-control stage at output of
preamp is on verge of clipping. VU meter driver
circuit is also provided. Entire circuit must be
duplicated for other stereo channel. Article de-
scribes circuit operation in detail and gives all
associated circuits used in high-performance
audio preamp. D, is 1N914; red LED is TIL209 or
equivalent; green LED is TIL211. — D. Self, Ad-
vanced Preamplifier Design, Wireless World,
Nov. 1976, p 41-46.
Fundamental
plus
MEASURING AF DISTORTION— Passive high-
pass 1-kHz filter is used with audio millivolt-
meter to improve accuracy of distortion mea-
surements for low-impedance sources at 1 kHz.
Filter removes low-frequency noise from input
signal and compensates for loss of harmonic
frequency. Applications include setting bias and
recording levels of tape recorder. Adjust R, for
best null, then adjust R2 and value of C to equal-
ize responses at harmonics. — J. B. Cole, Passive
Network to Measure Distortion, Wireless
World, Jan. 1978, p 60.
AF VOLTMETER — Although not calibrated on

absolute basis, either 3 dB or 10 dB of attenua-
tion can be switched in with SI for measuring
purposes. Internal adjustments are made easily
by tacking 51-ohm resistor temporarily across
input, then driving input with step attenuator
fed with audio power at -10 dB by generator
having 50-ohm pad in its output. CR1-CR4 are
1N914. — W. Hayward, Defining and Measuring
Receiver Dynamic Range, QST, July 1975, p 15-
21 and 43. Ri5
PEAK PROGRAM METER TESTER— Used with response of program meter to tone bursts. bration and use. — E. T. Garthwaite, Tone Burst
5-kHz audio oscillator to produce tone bursts of Transistors Tr3 and Tr4 form mono with Generator for Testing P.P.Ms, Wireless World,
Aug. 1976, p 53.
1.5, 5, 10, and 100 ms, as required for checking switched timing capacitors. Article covers cali-
input signal has dropped out, with duration of tennas using that repeater. Repeater receiver and D provides tone output for feed to audio
60 ms. Pitch of tone varies inversely with signal must have S- meter, as in RCA CA3089E receiver, amplifier and loudspeaker. Unlabeled transis-
strength; highest pitch of 3500 Hz thus repre- output of which can be fed to terminal A of cir- tors can be any medium-gain small-signal NPN
sents weak signal, and 350-Hz pitch corre- cuit. Switch changes output from S-meter to and PNP silicon, comparable to European BC107
sponds to strongest input signal. Can be used audible encoder. Input B goes to squelch, C goes and BC177. — F. Johnson, Audible S-Meter for
to check performance of transmitters and an- to +12 V source that is on when receiver is on. Repeaters, Ham Radio, March 1977, p 49-51.
CHAPTER 6
Automatic Gain Control Circuits
Includes circuits providing automatic control of gain for one or more stages in
AF, RF, IF, video, or balanced modulator sections of receivers. See also
Amplifier, IF Amplifier, and Receiver chapters.
AGC WITH MANUAL CONTROL— Used in 1.8-2

MHz communication receiver having wide dy-
namic range. R3 serves as manual IF gain con- T 3
TO
trol. R2 provides gain variation from 6 to 40 dB PRI
for AGC amplifier. Delay is about 1 s. Input is

taken from primary of transformer that drives
product detector of receiver, and AGC output
goes to CA3028A IF opamp. Two-part article
gives all other circuits of receiver. — D. DeMaw,
His Eminence — the Receiver, QST, Part 2 — July
1976, p 14-17 (Part 1— June 1976, p 27-30).
transmission gate off when gain must be re-

AGC WITH CMOS LOGIC — First stage U2, using U, is used as three-stage high-gain audio am- duced. Audio output is about 2.5 V P-P for inputs
CD4007AE, is wired as two-line demultiplexer plifier in which first two stages have low-pass of 2 mV and greater. — K. H. Fleischer, Turn Dig-
with only one output acting as transmission filtering for stability. AGC voltage, developed ital CMOS IC's into a Low-Level AGC Amplifier,
gate. Gain is lower in first stage to reduce noise. from audio output, is fed back to U2 to turn EDN Magazine, Oct. 5, 1 977, p 99.
76
AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL CIRCUITS 77
FET GIVES 30-dB GAIN RANGE— Only 1-V

change in gate-source voltage of FET changes
HANG AGC — Provides very fast attack time impedance, as witn FET IF system. With 1C or voltage gain over full range. Possible drawback
with no AGC pop. Diodes are 1N914. When volt- bipolar IF amplifier, use low-impedance driver. is harmonic distortion due to unbypassed emit-
age across R1 0-C8 decays below that across R9- T1 is audio transformer with 10K primary and ter degeneration. — "Low Frequency Applica-
C7, 03 conducts and clamps AGC bus to ground. 2K secondary (Radio Shack 273-1378). — D. Ste- tions of Field-Effect Transistors," Motorola,
AGC threshold is determined by value of RT/ be- vens, Solid-State Hang AGC, QST, July 1975, p Phoenix, AZ, 1976, AN-51 1A, p 8.
tween 100K and 470K. AGC line must have high 44.
OUTPUT
TWO-DECADE RANGE — Output is maintained that determines gain of A,. A2 and diodes form Gain Control Operates over Two Decades, Elec-
at 0.2 V for inputs from 40 mV to 4.1 V. Voltage- full-wave rectifier. Developed for use in radar tronics, Aug. 16, 1973, p 99-100; reprinted in
controlled JFET serves as variable control ele- seeker device to prevent overload of amplifier "Circuits for Electronics Engineers," Electron-
ment. Comparator A3 produces error voltage as target gets closer. — C. Marco, Automatic ics, 1977, p 44-46.
78
LOW PHASE SHIFT — Voltage-controlled ampli-

fier has less than 3° phase shift over gain-control
range of 40 dB at frequencies up to 10 MHz, as
required for AGC circuits. Current generator Q2
controls gain of wideband resistance-coupled
amplifier Q1. Gain of Q1 increases linearly with Po (dBm) ADJUST
amplitude of positive control voltage on base of
02. — A. H. Hargrove, Simple Circuits Control
Phase-Shift, EDN Magazine, Jan. 1, 1971, p 39. 30-MHz AGC LOOP — Low-pass filter serves as splitter ensures that detector also operates at
loop giving closed-loop bandwidth of at least 5 -15 dBm. Article gives design equations and
kHz. Loop operates in square-law region of de- performance curves.— R. S. Hughes, Design Au-
tector diode. Inputs to IF amplifier are in range tomatic Gain Control Loops the Easy Way, EDN
from -60 dBm to -10dBm, and AGC action pro- Magazine, Oct. 5, 1978, p 123-128.
vides 30-MHz IF output of —15 dBm. Power
AUDIO AGC USING FET — DC control voltage

0.1
obtained from key signal point in audio ampli-
fier is applied to gate of FET to vary bias. Gain
of stage varies inversely with gate bias voltage.
0.1 When control voltage is 0 V, voltage gain of
stage is 10 and maximum undistorted output
6
AF OUTPUT signal is 1 VRMS. When control voltage is 6
6
AF INPUT VDC, output is reduced to 0.5 mVRMS, giving
0
O
better than 90-dB range for AGC control.— R. P.
Turner, "FET Circuits," Howard W. Sams, Indi-
anapolis, IN, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 39-40.
CONTROL- VOLTAGE INPUT
decreasing stage gain. Input transformer is

50—54 MHz RF-AGC AMPLIFIER — Developed for AGC control resembles bipolar cascode circuit wound on small toroid core. Range of AGC volt-
6-meter SSB transceiver to give minimum of 15- using differential pair with current source, al- age is 0-1.2 V. — A. Borsa, High-Performance
dB power gain, low noise figure, and good sig- though operation does not involve changing RF-AGC Amplifier, Ham Radio, Sept. 1978, p 64-
nal-handling capability when AGC is applied. amplifier bias level. With increasing AGC volt- 66.
79
AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL CIRCUITS
+6V
+ 6V
CONTROL WITH EXTERNAL DIODE— External CONTROL AT LOW GAIN LEVELS— Diode is
resistances normally used with Motorola used as variable impedance in voltage-divider
MC1552 video amplifier are replaced by 1N914 network at input of video amplifier to provide
or equivalent diode so gain of amplifier is de- AGC at lower gain levels than could be handled
termined by AGO current through diode. Ar- with more conventional external-diode circuits.
rangement gives wide range of gain control, but Voltage gain for Motorola MC1552 decreases
lowest obtainable level of gain is normal un- from about 50 for 1-mA AGC control current to
modified gain of amplifier. Same circuit can be about 20 for 8 mA. For MC1553 high-gain video
used with MC1553 high-gain video amplifier. — amplifier, gain drops from 400 at 1 mA to 25 at
"A Wide Band Monolithic Video Amplifier," Mo- 8 mA. — "A Wide Band Monolithic Video Ampli-
torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1973, AN-404, p 10. fier," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1973, AN-404, p 1 1 .
AGC LOOP FOR MOSFETs — Used at output of

9-MHz IF amplifier in commercial receiver to di-
vide desired control-voltage magnitude and
swing for FT0601 MOSFETs in IF strip. MOSFETs
are biased by 2.1-V zeners in source leads in
FETs, to drive gate-2 voltage sufficiently nega-
tive for full AGC action. — G. Ricaud, Modifying
the W1CER/W1FB AGC Loop for Use with MOS-
FET l-F Amplifiers, QST, June 1977, p 47.
RESISTANCES ARE IN OHMS ',

k-1000. M-1000 000.
WIDEBAND AGC AMPLIFIER — Combination of tude of AC input signal, for varying gain of bal- out attenuation. — "Signetics Analog Data Man-
592K opamp and MC1496K balanced modulator anced modulator. Unbalancing carrier input of ual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p709-710.
gives DC output signal proportional to ampli- modulator makes signal pass through with-
Rf 10 k
POSITIVE PEAK DETECTOR— CA3100 bipolar clips negative half-cycles, so output of transis-
AGC AMPLIFIER — FET used in conjunction with MOS opamp is connected as wideband nonin- tor is proportional only to positive input
opamp permits varying of gain by changing verting amplifier to provide essentially constant peaks. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," RCA
ratio of R, to Rin. Offset voltage in output due to gain for wide range of input frequencies. Diode Solid State Division, Somerville. NJ, 1977, p 16.
input bias currents is minimized by placing FET
in parallel with 5.1K resistor between nonin-
verting leg of opamp and ground, so resistance
varies with changes of R,„. — "Low Frequency
Applications of Field-Effect Transistors," Mo-
torola, Phoenix, A Z, 1976, AN-51 1A, p 9.
SQUELCH
AGC WITH FET — FET serves as nonlinear ele- input signal so FET input is less than 25 mV for voltage of FET. — R. D. Pogge, Designers' Guide
ment in fast-acting instrumentation circuit han- inputs up to 2 VRMS. Article covers design and to: Basic AGC Amplifier Design, EDN Magazine,
dling wide range of signals. R, and R2 attenuate performance. Gain is almost linear with gate Jan. 20, 1974, p 72-76.
CHAPTER 7
Automotive Circuits
Includes capacitor-discharge, optoelectronic, and other types of electronic

ignition, tachometers, dwell meters, idiot-light buzzer, audible turn signals,
headlight reminders, mileage computer, cold-weather starting aids, wiper
controls, oil-pressure and oil-level gages, solid-state regulators for alternators,
overspeed warnings, battery-voltage monitor, and trailer-light interface. For
auto theft devices, see Burglar Alarm chapter.
TO IGNITION
SOLID-STATE AUTO REGULATOR— Replaces

and outperforms electromechanical charging-
voltage regulator in autos using alternator sys-
tems. Prolongs battery life by preventing un-
dercharging or overcharging of 12-V lead-acid Co
battery. Uses LM723 connected as switching
regulator for controlling alternator field current.
FIELD
R2 is adjusted to maintain 13.8-V fully charged I alternator
voltage for standard auto battery. Article gives I WINDING
construction details and tells how to use exter-
Q4
nal relay to maintain alternator charge-indica- C,N
tor function in cars having idiot light rather than
charge-discharge ammeter. Q1 is 2N2063A
(SK3009) 10-A PNP transistor. — W. J. Prud-
homme, Build Your Own Car Regulator, 73
Magazine, March 1977, p 160-162.
? ? T T U/D
23 22 2' 2° Eo vs |
CD4527
SPEED
CLK CD4510
OUT
(MPH)
CASC CLK
C S Q, Q2 Q3
E,n st
CLK CD4511
CD4527
£ LI ?
23 22
OUT MOST SIGNIFICANT BITS
CD4527
n
FLOW
CLK
. A 7-SEGMENT
OUT CLK
(GAL/HR)
a
f2 LED DISPLAYS
CASC CD4527
8
MPG
C S
CASC
ST OUT a)
-L 21
E,»
1 ST1 J 2°
LEAST SIGNIFICANT BITS

2°
MILEAGE COMPUTER — Fuel consumption in Circuit uses rate multiplier to produce output mounted in series with fuel line, feeds clock
2’
miles per gallon is continuously updated on 2- pulse train whose frequency is proportional to input of other rate multiplier. — G. J. Summers,
digit LED display. Entire system using CMOS ICs 2J Miles/Gallon Measurement Made Easy with
product of the two inputs. Output rate is time-
can be built for less than $25 including gas-flow averaged. Speed sensor, mounted in series with23 CMOS Rate Multipliers, EDN Magazine, Jan. 20,
sensor and speed sensor, sources for which are speedometer cable, feeds speed data to CD4527
given in article along with operational details. 1976, p 61-63.
rate multiplier as clock input. Gas-flow sensor,
2°
21
22
81
MODULATOR
DIODE
PARAMETRICS
400075 SCHOTTKY
DIODE OR EOUIV
10.5-GHz RADAR DETECTOR— Picks up CW
Doppler traffic radar signals in X-band region at
10.525 GHz and alerts speeding driver with
audio tone. Article also tells how traffic radars
work. By adding 10.5-GHz oscillator, same cir-
cuit can be used in 10.5-GHz amateur radio band
for communicating with other cars using this
band. Dimensioned diagram of hom is given. —
S. M. Olberg, Mobile Smokey Detector, 73 Mag-
azine, Holiday issue 1976, p 32-35.
SPEED TRAP — Time required for auto to acti-

vate sensors placed measured distance apart on
driveway or road is used to energize relay or
alarm circuit when auto exceeds predetermined
speed, if speed limit chosen is 15 mph, set de-
tectors 22 feet apart for travel time of 1 s. Sen-
Cl*
sors can be photocells or air-actuated sole-
noids. For most applications, R1 can be
1-megohm pot. Transistor type is not critical.
Values of R2 and C2 determine how long alarm
sounds. — J. Sandler, 9 Projects under $9, Mod-
ern Electronics, Sept. 1978, p 35-39.
HEADLIGHT REMINDER — Uses basic oscillator ground car, B1 is omitted and power for oscil- nected directly to high side of voice coil of car
consisting of 02 and Q3 arranged as collector- lator istaken from dashboard panel lights since radio loudspeaker without affecting operation
coupled astableMVBR. Power is taken from col- they come on simultaneously with either park- of radio. Almost any NPN transistors can be
lector of Q1 which acts as switch for Q2 and Q3. ing lights or headlights. If ignition key is turned used. Changing values of R4 and R5 changes fre-
With SI closed and S2 open, oscillator operates. on, Q1 saturates and disables Q2-Q3. With ig- quency of reminder tone. — H. F. Batie, Versatile
Closing S2 saturates Q1 and stops oscillator. nition off but lights on, Q1 is cut off and oscil- Audio Oscillator, Ham Radio, Jan. 1976, p 72-
When used as headlight reminder for negative- lator receives power. Audio output may be con- 74.
83
AUTOMOTIVE CIRCUITS
HEADLIGHTS-ON ALARM — Designed for cars in lights are on, transistor bias is removed so tran-
which headlight switch is nongrounding type, sistor iseffectively open and full 12 V is applied
providing 12 V when closed. When both light to buzzer through 240-ohm resistor until lights
and ignition switches are closed, transistor is are turned off. — R. E. Hartzell, Jr., Detector
saturated and there is no voltage drop across it Warns You When Headlights Are Left On, BDN
to drive buzzer. If ignition switch is open while Magazine, Nov. 20, 1975, p 160. ELECTRIC-VEHICLE CONTROL— SCR1 is used in
combination with Jones chopper to provide
smooth acceleration of golf cart or other electric
vehicle operating from 36-V on-board storage
battery. Normal running current of 2-hp 36-V
series-wound DC motor is 60 A, with up to 300
A required for starting vehicle up hill. Chopper
and its control maintain high average motor
current while limiting peak current by increas-
ing chopping frequency from normal 125 Hz to
as high as 500 Hz when high torque is re-
quired.— T. Malarkey, You Need Precision SCR
Chopper Control, New Motorola Semiconduc-
tors for Industry, Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, Vol. 2,
No. 1, 1975.
CD IGNITION — Uses master oscillator — power

amplifier type of DC/DC converter in which two
sections of triple 3-input NAND gate serve as 10-
kHz square-wave MVBR feeding class B PNP/
NPN power amplifier through two-gate driver.
Remaining two gates are used as logic invert-
ers. Secondary of T1 has 15.24 meters of No. 26
in six bank windings, with 20 turns No. 14 added
and center-tapped for primary. T2 is unshielded
iron-core RF choke, 30-100 #iH, with several
turns wound over it for secondary. When main
20-A SCR fires, T2 develops oscillation burst for
firing sensitive gate-latching SCR. Storage ca-
pacitor energy is then dumped into ignition coil
primary through power SCR. — K. W. Robbins,
CD Ignition System, 73 Magazine, May 1974, p
17 and 19.
-(-battery TACH/DWELL METER— Built around SN7402 cedure for engines having 4, 6, and 8 cylinders;
NOR-gate 1C. Requires no internal battery; re- select maximum rpm to be indicated, multiply
quired 5 V is obtained by using 50 ohms for R3 by number of cylinders, then divide by 120 to
in zener circuit shown if car battery is 6 V, and
get frequency in Hz. — N. Parron, Tach-Dwell
300 ohms if 12 V. Article gives calibration pro- Meter, Wireless World, Sept. 1975, p 413.
+12VO
ignition
supply
NEGATIVE GROUND
VERSION
J
contact
original
capacitor
breaker
HEADLIGHT REMINDER — Photocell energizes

circuit at twilight to remind motorist that lights
should be turned on. Indicator can be LED con-
nected as shown or relay turning on buzzer for
more positive signal. Circuit can be made au-
tomatic byconnecting relay contacts in parallel
with light switch, provided delay circuit is
added to prevent oncoming headlights from
killing circuit. Mount photocell in location
where it is unaffected by other lights inside or
outside car. — J. Sandler, 9 Projects under $9,
Modern Electronics, Sept. 1978, p 35-39.
TRANSISTORIZED BREAKER POINTS— Uses pletely eliminating wear on points. Values are:
Texas Instruments BUY23/23A high-voltage Tr2 2N3789; Tr3 (for positive ground version)
transistors that can easily withstand voltages 2N3055; D,-D4 1N4001; Ds 18-V 400-mW zener;
up to about 300 V existing across breaker points R, 56 ohms; R; 1.2 ohms; R3 10 ohms; C600VDC
of distributor in modern car. Circuit serves as same size as points capacitor. Article covers in-
electronic switch that isolates points from stallation procedure. — G. F. Nudd, Transistor-
heavy interrupt current and high-voltage back- Aided Ignition, Wireless World, April 1975, p
swing of ignition coil, thereby almost com- 191. TO BATTERY AND
ALTERNATOR OUTPUT
VIA FIELD RELAY AND
IGNITION SWITCH
VOLTAGE REGULATOR— Timer and power V, timer is turned on and Darlington pair con- ics Analog Data Manual, " Signetics, Sunnyvale,
Darlington form simple automobile voltage reg- ducts. Separate adjustments are provided for CA, 1977, p 731.
ulator. When battery voltage drops below 14.4 preset turn-on and turnoff voltages — "Signet-
AUTOMOTIVE CIRCUITS
85
BATTERY MONITOR — Basic circuit energizes

LED when battery voltage drops to level set by
10K pot. Any number of additional circuits can
be added, for reading battery voltage in 1-V
steps or even steps as small as 0. 1 V. Circuit sup-
plements idiot light that replaces ammeter in
most modern cars. LED type is not critical. — J.
Sandler, 9 Projects under $9, Modem Electron-
ics, Sept. 1978, p 35-39.
tronic Ignition improves cold-weather starting opening of breaker points is followed by contin-
ability of engines in arctic environment by pro- uous series of sparks at rate of about 200 per
viding more than one spark per combustion second as long as points stay open. — D. E.
cycle. Circuit uses UJT triangle-wave generator Stinchcomb, Multi-Spark Electronic Ignition for
TONE GENERATOR
HIGH-SPEED WARNING— Audible alarm tone tions are performed by sections of LM2900quad must be adjusted for number of cylinders, gear
generator drives warning loudspeaker to sup- Norton opamp. A1 amplifies and regulates and axle ratios, tire size, etc. 10-pF capacitor
plement 2-digit speed display that can be set to spark-coil signal. A2 converts signal frequency connected to A3 can be increased to prevent
trip when vehicle speed exceeds 55-mph legal to voltage proportional to engine speed. A3 triggering of alarm when increasing speed mo-
limit. Engine speed signal is taken from primary compares speed voltage with reference voltage
mentarily while passing another car. — "Linear
of spark coil. Switch in transmission activates and turns on output transistor at set speed. A4
Applications, Vol. 2," National Semiconductor,
circuit only when car is in high gear. All func- generates audible tone. Circuit components Santa Clara, CA, 1976, LB-33.
BUZZER FOR IDIOT LIGHT — Provides audible

supplement to engine-monitoring indicator
lamps that are often difficult to see in daylight.
Uses 2N5434 JFET to provide delay of about 7
s each time ignition switch is turned on, to allow
for peaceful starting of car and normal buildup
of oil pressure when lamp is monitoring oil-
pressure and engine-temperature sensors. En-
tire circuit can be mounted inside plastic hous-
ing of unused or disconnected dashboard
warning buzzer in late-model car.— P. Clower,
Audio Assist Gives "Idiot Lights" the "Buzz,"
EDN Magazine, June 20, 1976, p 126.
OIL-PRESSURE DISPLAY — Red, yellow, and

green LEDs give positive indication of oil pres-
sure level on electronic gage console developed
for motorcycle. Transducer converts oil pres-
sure to variable resistance RT which in turn var-
ies bias on transistors. LEDs have different for-
ward voltages at which they light, so proper
selection of bias resistors ensures that only one
LED is on at a time to give desired indication of
oil pressure. — J. D. Wiley, Instrument Console
Features Digital Displays and Built-In Combo
Lock, EDN Magazine, Aug. 5, 1975, p 38-43.
* 12V
TAB SCR
POLYPAKS
92CUI730
OR SIMILAR
A K G
WIPER CONTROL — Operates wipers automati-
SN487I cally at intervals, as required for very light rain
UNIJUNCTION or mist. Changing 560K resistor to 500K pot in
TRANSISTOR
series with 100K fixed resistor gives variable
control of interval.— Circuits, 73 Magazine, July
1977, p 34.
DIODES - I AMP PLASTIC
RESISTORS - 1/2 WATT
15
DISTRIBUTOR-POINT TACHOMETER— 555 When 1C times out, meter current stops for re- vide visible indication of engine speed. — "Sig-
timer receives its input pulses from distributor mainder of duty cycle. Integration of variable netics Analog Data Manual," Signetics, Sunny-
points of car. When timer output (pin 3) is high, duty cycle by meter movement serves to pro- vale, CA, 1977, p 724-725.
meter receives calibrated current through R6.
AUTOMOTIVE CIRCUITS 87
FRONT OR REAR LH FRONT OR REAR RH PUSH TO

TURN SIGNAL LAMP TURN SIGNAL LAMP
TO STEERING COLUMN OIL-LEVEL GAGE — Permits checking crankcase

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
oil level from driver's seat. Sensor consists of
light-conducting Plexiglas rod attached to dip-
AUDIBLE TURN SIGNAL— Gives 3500-Hz audi- stick, with lamp L, at top of rod and phototran-
ble tone each time turn-signal light flashes on, sistor Q, mounted at add-oil mark on dipstick,
to warn driver that signal has not been turned about 'k inch below bottom of rod. At normal oil
off when making less than right-angle turns. level, oil attenuates light between Q and bot-
Schematic shown is for 12-V negative-ground tom end of rod, making phototransistor resis-
systems. For 6-V negative-ground systems, cut tance high. Pushing test switch makes C,
values of R1 and R2 about in half. For positive- charge and saturate Qz long enough to activate
ground systems, reverse connections to diodes UJT AF oscillator Q3 and give short tone veri-
and Sonalert. R1 and R2 are 2.7K 0.5 W. D1 and fying that lamp is not burned out and gage is
D2 can be any general-purpose small-current working. When oil is low, enough light reaches
silicon diode. SA is Mallory SCI. 5 Sonalert. — A. Q, to keep Q2 saturated after C, charges, giving
Goodwin, Turn Signal Reminder, 73 Magazine, continuous tone as long as switch is pushed. —
Holiday issue 1976, p 166. L. Sveiund, Electronic Dipstick, EEE Magazine,
Nov. 1970, p 101.
problems created by timing drift and distribu-

OPTOELECTRONIC IGNITION— Combination of tor-shaft play. Sensor head is small enough to pacitor-discharge electronic ignition circuit in
low-cost point-source LED and high-sensitivity fit most distributors. Article gives dimensioned detail. Leads to sensor do not require shield-
phototransistor forms optical sensor for posi- drawings for shutter design and sensor mounting.— H. Maidment, Optical Sensor Ignition
tion of cam in distributor. Technique eliminates ing, and describes operation of associated ca- System, Wireless World, Nov. 1975, p 533-537.
DIGITAL TACHOMETER — Pulses from auto en-

gine points or other pickoff are filtered before
feed to 3130 CMOS opamp used as comparator
to complete conditioning of input. Pulses are
then fed through 4046 PLL to divide-by-N
counter that is set for number of cylinders in
engine (60 for four cylinders, 45 for six, and 30
for eight). Output frequency is then counted for
0.5 s to get engine or shaft speed in rpm. — D.
Lancaster, "CMOS Cookbook," Howard W.
Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 366-367.
REGULATOR FOR ALTERNATOR— Simple and

effective solid-state replacement for auto volt-
age regulator can be used with alternator in al-
most any negative-ground system. Circuit acts
as switch supplying either full or no voltage to
field winding of alternator. When battery is
below 13 V, zener D1 does not conduct, Q1 is
off, Q2 is on, and full battery voltage is applied
to alternator field so it puts out full voltage to
battery for charging. When battery reaches 13.6
V, Q1 turns on, Q2 turns off, alternator output current. Circuit can also be used with wind-dri- Regulator? Never!, 73 Magazine, Holiday issue
is reduced to zero, and battery gets no charging ven alternator systems. — P. S. Smith, $22 for a 1976, p 103.
LEFT TURN
BRAKE RIGHT-TURN RUNNING-LIGHT
COMMAND COMMAND 12 V COMMAND COMMAND
AUTO-TRAILER INTERFACE FOR LIGHTS— plitude of turn signal, which flashes about 2 canceled. Developed for new cars in which sep-
Low-cost transistors and two relays combine times per second. Values are selected to hold arate turn and brake signals are required for
brake-light and turn-indicator signals on com- relay closed between flash intervals; if capaci- safety. — M. E. Gilmore and C. W. Snipes, Dar-
mon bus to ensure that trailer lights respond to tance is too large, brake signal cannot imme- lington-Switched Relays Link Car and Trailer
both commands. C, and C2 charge to peak am- diately activate trailer lights after turn signal is Signal Lights, Electronics, Aug. 18, 1977, p 116.
AUTOMOTIVE CIRCUITS
CAPACITOR SERVES AS IGNITION BATTERY— 89

Developed for use with capacitor-discharge ig-
nition systems to provide independent voltage
source for ignition when starting car in very cold
weather. Before attempting to start car, S, is set
to ON position for energizing DC-to-DC con-
verter for charging C, with DC voltage between
200 and 400 V. Starter is now engaged. If volt-
age of storage battery drops as starter slowly
turns engine over, C, still represents equivalent
of fully charged 12-V storage battery that is ca-
pable of driving ignition system for almost a
minute. — W. Stalzer, Capacitor Provides Artifi-
cial Battery for Ignition Systems, EDN Maga-
zine, Nov. 15, 1972, p 48.
WIPER-DELAY CONTROL— 555 timer provides positive-ground autos. Delay time can be varied J. Okolowicz, Synchronous Timing Loop Con-
selectable delay time between sweeps of wiper between 0 and 22 s. Timer uses feedback signal trols Windshield Wiper Delay, Electronics, Nov.
blades driven by motor in negative-ground sys- from cam-operated switch of motor to synchro- 24, 1977, p 115 and 117.
tem. Article also gives circuit modification for nize delay time with position of wiper blades. —
R3 270
RPM-LIMIT ALARM — Used with capacitor-dis- MVBR mode. Resulting positive pulse from 555 with four-cylinder engine, 0.047 /iF for six cyl-
charge ignition system to provide tachometer fires control SCR through D6 and C6. When con- inders, and 0.033 /iF for eight cylinders. LED
output along with engine speed control signal. tacts dose, D2 isolates C, to reduce effect of con- across breaker contacts can be used for setting
When breaker contacts open, C, charges and tact bounce. With values shown, for speed limit static timing. — K. Wevill, Trigger Circuit for
turns Tr, on, triggering 555 timer used in mono between 8000 and 9000 rpm, use 0.068 1> F for C4 C.D.I. Systems, Wireless World, Jan. 1978, p 58.
LOW-EMISSION CD — Solid-state capacitor-dis- rpm the discharge lasts for one cycle or 300 /is M2 connected as mono that provides gate drive
charge ignition system improves combustion because at higher speeds the power cycle has pulses for SCR. Article describes operation of
efficiency by increasing spark duration. For 8- shorter times. Circuit uses 555 timer M, as 2-kHz circuit in detail and gives waveforms at points
cylinder engine, normal CD system range of 180 oscillator, with Q,-Q3 providing drive to Q„-Q5 a-i. — C. C. Lo, CD Ignition System Produces Low
to 300 /is is increased to 600 /is below 4000 rpm . and T, for converting battery voltage to about Engine Emissions, EDN Magazine, May 20,
Oscillation discharge across ignition coil pri- 400 VDC at output of bridge rectifier. When dis- 1976, p 94, 96, and 98.
mary lasts for two cycles here, but above 4000 tributor points open, Q7 turns on and triggers
AUTOMOTIVE CIRCUITS 91
TACHOMETER — Intech/Function Modules A-

8402 operating in frequency-to-voltage con-
verter mode serves as automotive tachometer
having inherent linearity and ease of calibra-
tion. Converter operates asynchronously,
which does not affect accuracy when driving
analog meter. — P. Pinter and D. Timm, Voltage-
to-Frequency Converters— 1C Versions Perform
Accurate Data Conversion (and Much More) at
Low Cost, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977, p 153-
157.
Cl— 50ufd @
25v electroly-
C2 — tic capacitor
lufd @25v
electrolytic ca-
Rl— 50,000-
ometer
pacitorpotenti-
ohm
R2—
ohm 33,000-
resistor
R3 — 100-ohm
resistor
DR4135)
—— diode
47-ohm re-
sistor
(Moto. HEP
Q — 2N1671B
unijunction
transistor
SCR — SCR
SCR-03)
(Inter. Rect.
ture toggle
S — SPST minia-
switch
TIMER FOR WIPER — Provides automatic one- in parallel with slow-speed contacts of wiper finish sweep and shut off. It is these terminals
shot swipes at preselected intervals from 2 to dashboard switch. With wiper switch off and ig- of switch that are connected to points A and B
30 s for handling mist, drizzle, or splash from nition on, short two switch terminals at a time
of control circuit. — V. Mele, Mist Switch — It's
wet road. Circuit shorts out homing switch in- to find pins that start wiper. When blades begin for Your Windshield Wipers, Popular Science,
side windshield-wiper motor, which is usually moving, remove jumper; blades should then Aug. 1973, pi 10.
CHAPTER 8
Battery-Charging Circuits
Includes constant-voltage, constant-current, and trickle chargers operating

from AC line, solar cells, or auto battery. Some circuits have automatic
charge-rate control, automatic start-up, automatic shutoff, and low-charge
indicator.
9.6 V AT 20 mA — Developed to charge 200-mAh

nickel-cadmium batteries for two transceivers
simultaneously. Batteries will be fully charged
in 14 hours, using correct 20-mA charging rate.
Zener diode ensures that voltage cannot exceed
safe value if battery is accidentally discon-
nected while under charge. Diode types are not
critical. — D. A. Tong, A Pocket V.H.F. Trans-
ceiver, Wireless World, Aug. 1974, p 293-298.
TRIAD
F 21 A
LM319D dual comparator U2 to sense end-of- is provided for U2. D1-D5 are 1N4002 or HEP- HEP-S0015. — H. Olson, Battery Chargers Ex-
charge battery voltage and provide protection R0051. D6 is 2N682 or HEP-R1471. BR1 is Mo- posed, 73 Magazine, Nov. 1976, p 98-100 and
against shorted or reversed charger leads. Final torola MDA980-2 or HEP-R0876 12-A bridge. 102-104.
92
BATTERY-CHARGING CIRCUITS 93
10V
NICKEL-CADMIUM CELL CHARGER— Charges

four size D cells in series at constant current,
with automatic voltage limiting. BC301 transis-
tor acts as current source, with base voltage
stabilized at about 3 V by two LEDs that also
serve to indicate charge condition. Other tran-
sistor provides voltage limiting when voltage
across cells approaches that of IK branch of
voltage divider. Values shown give 260-mA
charge initially, dropping to 200 mA when Vc
reaches 5 V and decreasing almost to 0 when Vc
reaches 6.5 V. — N. H. Sabah, Battery Charger,
Wireless World, Nov. 1975, p 520.
12-V FOR NICADS — Produces constant current

with simple transistor circuit, adjustable to 15
or 50 mA with switch and R1 . Zener limits volt-
age at end of charge. Developed for charging 10-
cell pack having nominal 12.5 V, as used in many
transceivers. — H. Olson, Battery Chargers Ex-
posed, 73 Magazine, Nov. 1976, p 98-100 and
102-104.
OHMITE
CHARGING SILVER-ZINC CELLS— Used for ini-
tial charging and subsequent rechargings of
sealed dry-charged lightweight cells developed
for use in missiles, torpedoes, and space appli-
cations. Article covers procedure for filling cell
with potassium hydroxide electrolyte before
placing in use (cells are dry-charged at factory
and have shelf life of 5 or more years in that con-
dition). Charge current should be 7 to 10% of
rated cell discharge capacity; thus, for Yardney
HR-5 cell with rated discharge of 5 A, charge at reaches 2.05 V. If used only for battery charging. Will Silver-Zinc Replace the Nicad?, 73 Mag a-
350 to 500 mA. Stop charging when cell voltage large filter capacitor can be omitted. — S. Kelly, zine, Holiday issue 1976, p 204-205.
BULK NICAD CHARGER — Can handle up to 20

AA bank C bank D bank
AA cells, 20 C cells, and 20 D cells simultane-
1 20 cells 1 20 cells 1 20 cells
ously, with charging rate determined sepa-
rately for each type. Single transformer and full-
wave rectifier feed about 24 VDC to three sep-
arate regulators. AA-cell regulator uses 100-
ohm resistor to vary charge rate from 6 mA to
above 45 mA. C-cell charge-rate range is 24 to
125 mA, and D-cell range is 60 to 150 mA. Bat-
teries of each type should be about same state
of discharge. Batteries are recharged in series
to avoid need for separate regulator with each
cell. Trickle-charge switches cut charge rates to
about 2% of rated normal charge (5 mA for 500-
mAh AA cells). Transistors are 2N4896 or equiv-
alent. Use heatsinks. All diodes are 1N4002. — J.
J. Schultz, A Bulk Ni-Cad Recharger, CQ, Dec.
1977, p 35-36 and 111.
CONNECT TO + 1 3V
POS. TERM OF
SOLAR-POWER BACKUP— If solar-cell voltage

drops 0.2 V below battery voltage, circuit is
powered by storage cell feeding through for-
ward-biased OA90 or equivalent germanium
diode. When solar-cell voltage exceeds that of
battery, battery is charged by approximately
constant reverse leakage current through
+
diode. Battery v can be manganese-alkaline type
or zinc-silver oxide watch-type cell. — M. Had-
ley, Automatic Micropower Battery Charger,
Wireless World, Dec. 1977, p 80.
array to provide active elements required for of battery)

driving indicators serving as aural and visual switch.— "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs,"
warnings of low charge on nicad battery. LED RCA Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977,
remains on until circuit is reset with pushbutton
p9.
12 V AT 8 A — Charging circuit for lead-acid stor-

age batteries is not damaged by short-circuits
or by connecting with wrong battery polarity.
Battery provides current for charging Cl in PUT
relaxation oscillator. When PUT is fired by Cl,
SCR is turned on and applies charging current
to battery. Battery voltage increases slightly
during charge, increasing peak point voltage of
PUT and making Cl charge to slightly higher
voltage. When Cl voltage reaches that of zener
D1 , oscillator stops and charging ceases. R2 sets
maximum battery voltage between 10 and 14 V
during charge. — R. J. Haver and B. C. Shiner,
'Theory, Characteristics and Applications of the
Programmable Unijunction Transistor," Moto-
rola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974, AN-527, p 10.
has been charged to desired level of 9 V. Circuit

THIRD ELECTRODE SENSES FULL CHARGE— ficient to provide reliable shutoff signal for can be modified for other charging voltages.
Circuit is suitable only for special nickel-cad- charger under all conditions of temperature and Silicon switching transistor can be used in place
mium batteries in which third electrode has cell variations.— D. A. Zinder, "Fast Charging of more costly thyristor. — P. R. Chetty, Low Bat-
been incorporated for use as end-of-charge in- Systems for Ni-Cd Batteries," Motorola, Phoe- tery Voltage Indication, Wireless World, April
dicator. Voltage change at third electrode is suf- nix, AZ, 1974, AN-447, p 7. 1975, p 175.
IkJ
B A T T E R Y - C H A R G IN G CIRCUITS 95
'X,
]
ti
12.6V l
300mA i ' C106Y1
\!L_
82V
+ l
125p.
equipment
>-
CR1, CR2 — General-purpose silicon diodes, 1N914
or equiv. LED INDICATES LOW VOLTAGE— LED lights
Q1 — Radio Shack RS2025 transistor. Should be
UfJ
mounted on heat sink. when output of 9-V rechargeable battery drops
below minimum acceptable value of 8.3 V, to
*-SEE TEXT indicate need for recharging. Can also be used
with transistor radio battery to indicate need for
NICAD CHARGER — Switch gives choice of two junction of Q1 has 0.6-V drop, for net drop of 0.6 replacement. Zener is BZY85 C8V2 rated at 400
constant-current charge rates. With 10 ohmsfor V across R1 or R2. Dividing 0.6 by desired charge mW, with avalanche point at 7.7 V because of
R1, rate is 60 mA, while 200 ohms for R2 gives rate in amperes gives resistance value. — M. Al- low current drawn by circuit. LED can be Hew-
3 mA. Silicon diodes CR1 and CR2 have com- terman, A Constant-Current Charger for Nicad lett-Packard 5082-4440. — P. C. Parsonage, Low-
bined voltage drop of 1.2 V and emitter-base Batteries, QST, March 1977, p49. Battery Voltage Indicator, Wireless World, Jan.
1973, p 31.
D3
12-V AUTOMATIC— Circuit of Heathkit GP-21 not standard value, so may be obtainable only
automatic charger is self-controlling (Q1 and in Heathkits. D1 , D2, and D7 should all be on one LED TRICKLE CHARGER — Constant-current
Q2) and provides protection against shorted or heatsink. — H. Olson, Battery Chargers Exposed, characteristic of National NSL4944 LED is used
reversed battery leads (Q3 and Q4). Zener D8 is 73 Magazine, Nov. 1976, p 98-100 and 102-104. to advantage in simple half-wave charger for
batteries up to 6 V. — "Linear Applications, Vol.
2," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA,
1976, AN-153, p 2.
NICAD CHARGER FOR AUTO— Voltage doubler quency of NE555 as MVBR is 1.4 kHz. Charging NICAD ZAPPER — Simple circuit often restores
provides at least 20 V from 12-V auto battery, current is set at 50 mA for charging ten 500-mAh dead or defective nicad battery by applying DC
for constant-current charging of 12-V nicads, nicads. — G. Hinkle, Constant-Current Battery overvoltage at current up to 10 A for about 3 s.
using NE555 timer and two power transistors. Charger for Portable Operation, Ham Radio, Longer treatment may overheat battery and
Doubled voltage drives source current into April 1978, p 34-36. make it explode. — Circuits, 73 Magazine, July
three-terminal current regulator. Switching fre- 1977, p 35.
CR2
AUTOMATIC SHUTOFF — Prevents overcharg-

SOLAR-POWER OVERCHARGE PROTECTION— ing and dryout of battery under charge by shut-
Voltage regulator is connected across solar-cell ting off automatically when battery reaches full-
array as shown to prevent damage to storage charge voltage. Accepts wide range of batter-
battery by overcharging. Series diode prevents ies. Choose rectifying diodes and triacs or SCRs
array from discharging battery during hours of to handle maximum charging current desired.
darkness. Regulator does not draw power from For initial adjustment, connect fully charged
battery, except for very low current used for battery and adjust charge-stop pot until am-
voltage sampling. Battery can be lead-calcium, meter just drops to zero. — Circuits, 73 Maga-
zine, July 1977, p 34.
gelled-electrolyte, or telephone-type wet cells.
For repeater application described, two Globe
Union GC12200 40-Ah gelled-electrolyte batter-
ies were used to provide transmit current of
1 .07 A and idle current of 12 mA. — T. Handel and
P. Beauchamp, Solar-Powered Repeater De-
sign, Ham Radio , Dec. 1978, p 28-33.
200 W
IIOVLAMP (FOR 3A CHARGE RATE)
BASIC 12-V CHARGER— Uses 200- W lamp as
current-limiting resistor in transformer primary
circuit. Serves in place of older types of chargers
using copper-oxide or tungar-bulb rectifiers. —
H. Olson, Battery Chargers Exposed, 73 Maga-
zine, Nov. 1976, p 98-100 and 102-104.
12V BATTERY
MURALITES
JT'
1. "R" NECESSARY IF LED IS

EMPLOYED. 220 OHMS WILL
PROVIDE NOMINAL BRIGHTNESS
NOTE :
2. OUTPUT (PIN 3) WILL SUPPLY
200 mA TO LOAD.
NICAD MONITOR — Uses two comparators, flip-

flop, and power stage all in single NE555 1C.
When battery voltage drops below 12-V thresh-
old set by R1 and R2 for 15-V transceiver bat-
tery, one comparator sets flip-flop and makes
output at pin 3 go high. 1C then supplies up to
200 mA to LED or other indicator. For other bat-
tery voltage value, set firing point to about
three-fourths of fully charged voltage. Since
ness varies with charging current. Reference battery voltage will show biggest drop when
14-V MAXIMUM — Circuit accurately limits peak voltage supply does not drain battery when transmitting, connect monitor across transmit
output voltage to 14 V, as established by zener power supply is disconnected.— "Circuit Ideas supply only so as to minimize battery drain. —
connected between terminals 3 and 4 of for RCA Linear ICs," RCA Solid State Division, A. Woerner, Ni-Cad Lifesaver, 73 Magazine,
CA3094A programmable opamp. Lamp bright- Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 19. Nov. 1973, p3&-36.
B A T T E R Y - C H A R G IN G CIRCUITS 97
NICAD CHARGER — Developed for recharging

small nickel-cadmium batteries used in hand-
held FM transceivers. Field-effect transistors
serve as constant-current sources when gate is
shorted to source. Practically any N-channel
JFET having drain-to-source current of 8-1 5 mA
will work. FETs shown were measured individ-
ually and grouped to give desired choice of 15-
or 50-mA charging currents. — G. K. Shubert,
FET-Controlled Charger for Small Nicad Batter-
ies, Ham Radio, Aug. 1975, p 46-47.
NICAD CHARGER — Pot is adjusted to provide 25% of maximum. For 10-V 1-Ah battery, set
10% above rated voltage (normal full-charge voltage at 1 1 V and current below 250 mA. — G.
voltage) while keeping charging current below E. Zook, F.M., CQ, Feb. 1973, p 35-37.
D7
0- 10a.
e
NOTE: D5
’ All on one heat sink
Dg
Ds
2N682*
■AA/V To
Q2
1N4002
4.7K
battery
— N—
<D — °*
25mf _[_♦
25v.T 2N3393 IN 4002
1 w.
Z12.8
> 1K
12-V CHARGER — Heath GP-21 charger uses it on for part of half -cycle and charge battery. D7 shorting of output leads. Special 12.8-V zener
SCR as switch to connect and disconnect bat- stays on until voltage across it drops to zero. can be replaced by selected 1N4742 and for-
tery at 120-Hz rate. Voltage at anode of SCR D7 When battery has charged to 13.4 V, charging ward-biased 1N4002. — H. Olson, We Don't
goes positive each half-cycle, putting forward stops automatically. Rest of circuit protects Charge Nothin' but Batteries!, CQ, Feb. 1976, p
25-28 and 69.
bias on base of Q through 1.8K resistor so Q, against battery polarity reversal and accidental
passes current through D5 to gate of D7 to turn
18-V MONITOR — Circuit turns on LED when

±18 V battery pack discharges to predeter-
mined low level, while drawing less than 1 mA
when LED is off. Zener is reverse-biased for nor-
UJT CHARGER FOR 12 V— Keeps 12-V auto turns ratio and about 20 ohms resistance, or can mal operating range of battery. When lower
storage battery fully charged, for immediate be regular SCR trigger transformer. UJT relax- limit is reached, zener loses control and Q, be-
standby use when AC power fails. Power trans- ation oscillator stops when upper voltage limit comes forward-biased, turning on LED or other
former secondary can be 14 to 24 V, rated at for battery is reached, as set by pot R6. If oscil- signal device to indicate need for replacement
about 3 A. Two-gang rotary switch gives choice lator fails to start, reverse one of pulse trans- or recharging. — W. Denison and Y. Rich, Battery
of three charging rates. Pulse transformer T2 is former windings. — F. J. Piraino, Failsafe Super Monitor Is Efficient, yet Simple, EDN Magazine,
small audio transformer rewound to have 1:1 Oct. 5, 1974, p 76.
Charger, 73 Magazine, Holiday issue 1976, p 49.
FLASHING LED FOR LOW BATTERY— Devel- supply. Instrument must then be plugged into IC2, so blink clock (such as low-frequency TTL-
oped for use in portable battery-operated test AC line for recharging of batteries. Voltage level oscillator) makes LED flash. Audible alarm
instrument to provide visual indication that de- across B, (nominally 32.5 V) is sensed by R,-R„ is optional.— R. T. Warner, Monitor NiCad's
pletion level has been reached for series ar- and D,. When level drops 24.1 V, opamp com- with This Low-Battery Detector, EDN Maga-
rangement of 24 nickel-cadmium cells provid- parator output goes positive and enables gate zine, April 20, 1976, p 1 12 and 114.
ing 32.5 VDC for regulator of bipolar 11-V
BATTERY-CHARGING CIRCUITS 99
rh
CONSTANT-CURRENT NICAD CHARGER— 2 V (overhead voltage). Changing R1 varies

Constant current is obtained from voltage reg- charging current. If R1 is 50 ohms and V is 5 V,
ulator byfloating common line and connecting constant current is 50 mA through nicad being
R1 from output to common terminal. Regulator charged. — G. Hinkle, Constant-Current Battery
then tries to furnish fixed voltage across R1. Charger for Portable Operation, Ham Radio,
Input voltage must be greater than full-charge April 1978, p 34-36. SOLAR-ENERGY CHARGER— Single solar cell
battery voltage plus 5 V (for 5-V regulator) plus on bright day delivers 0.5 V at 50 mA, so three
cells are used in bright sun to recharge second-
ary cell. Switch permits use of additional solar
cells on cloudy days. Solar cells can be Radio
Shack 276-128. — J. Rice, Charging Batteries
with Solar Energy, QST, Sept. 1978, p 37.
NICAD CHARGER — Regulated charger circuit twice supply voltage multiplied by current-limit
will handle variable load from 1 to 18 nicad cells. value. If charging 450-mAh penlight cells,
Current-limiting action holds charging current charge current is 45 mA and transistor should
within 1 to 2 mA of optimum value (about one- be 2 W. — A. G. Evans, Regulated Nicad Charger,
tenth of rated ampere-hour capacity) from 0 to 73 Magazine, June 1977, p 117.
24 V. Q1 should have power rating equal to
to charge 12-V 3-Ah gelled-electrolyte battery status that maintains 2.2 V per cell or 13.2 V for dashed line is added to standard regulator to
such as Elpower EP1230A at maximum of 0.45 battery. Circuit is constant-voltage regulator meet special charging requirement. Article cov-
A until battery reaches 14 V, then at constant with current limiting as designed around Na- ers operation and use of circuit in detail. — H.
voltage until charge current drops to 0.04 A. tional LM305H, with PNP/NPN transistor pair to Olson, Battery Chargers Exposed, 73 Magazine,
Charger is then automatically switched to float increase current capability. Circuit above Nov. 1976, p 98-100 and 102-104.
NICAD CHARGE CONTROL— Prevents double- lamp NE, should now come on. Momentary
charging if someone forgets to turn off 24-h pushbutton switch S is pushed to energize relay
time clock after recommended 16-h charge pe- K and start charge. When timer goes off, K re-
riod. Nicad devices with built-in chargers are leases to end charge. — M. Katz, Battery Charge
plugged into jacks J,-J3, and timer dial is ad- Monitor, CQ, July 1976, p 27.
vanced until clock switch is triggered. Neon
4 VOLT 40 m A
tSYLVAMA 4 £S>
GELLED-ELECTROLYTE BATTERIES— Con- series-connected zeners. Output voltage is 13.8

stant-voltage charger for Globe-Union 12-V V for float charging and 14.4 V for fast charg-
gelled-electrolyte storage batteries can provide ing.— E. Noll, Storage-Battery QRP Power, Ham
either fast or float charging. Constant voltage Radio, Oct. 1974, p 56-61.
is maintained by series power transistor and
CHAPTER 9
Burglar Alarm Circuits
For auto, home, office, and factory installations. Sensors include contact-
making, contact-breaking, photoelectric, infrared, Doppler, and sound-
actuated devices that trigger circuit immediately or after adjustable delay for
driving alarm horn, siren, tone generator, pager, or silent transmitter. Some
circuits have automatic shutoff of alarm after fixed operating time as required
for auto alarms in some states. See also Protection (for electronic door locks)
and Siren chapters.
FIVE-INDICATOR ALARM— Single five-transis-

tor 1C uses NPN structures on P-type substrate
as PNPN silicon controlled switches having
common connection for anode (substrate).
Relay serving as anode load is energized for ac-

tuating alarm if any of the SCS pushbutton
switches is closed. Corresponding lamp is en-
ergized to identify door or window at which
sensor switch has been closed by act of in-
truder. Alarm remains on until reset by inter-
rupting power supply. Power drain on standby
is negligible because SCSs act as open circuits
until triggered, permitting use of batteries for
supply. Two or more ICs may be added to get
more channels. — H. S. Kothari, Alarm System
with Position Indication, Wireless World, Feb.
1976, p 77.
+I2VDC
SCR LATCH — Turns on mobile transceiver or

other mobile equipment when power is applied,
if external circuit is broken when equipment is
stolen. Transmitter will then put unmodulated
carrier on air even with PTT switch discon-
nected or off, for tracing with radio direction
finder. If added components are carefully con-
cealed in equipment and new external wiring is
worked into existing wiring harness, few
thieves will be able to locate trouble. External
wires are run under dash so thief must cut them
ENTRY-DELAY ALARM— First 555 timer pro- about 60 s under control of timer U2. Alarm pe- to get out equipment. PTT relay should have
vides delay of about 20 s after triggering by sen- riod was set short to attract attention without protective diode. SCR is 100 PIV, 1 A, but HEP
sor before alarm bell is energized, to allow thief unduly annoying neighbors. — J. D. Arnold, A R1003 or R1217 can also be used. — E. Noll, Cir-
to be caught inside house or give owner time to Low-Cost Burglar Alarm for Home or Car, QST, cuits and Techniques, Ham Radio, April 1976, p
40-43.
enter and shut off alarm. Alarm then rings for June 1978, p 35-36. 101
102
ALARM
RELAY
ALARM-SIGNAL DETECTOR— Texas Instru-

ments SN75454B dual peripheral positive-NOR
driver energizes alarm relay when alarm signal
is received from any one of four different alarm
transducers — 'The Linear and Interface Cir-
cuits Data Book for Design Engineers," Texas
Instruments, Dallas, TX, 1973, p 10-66.
+ 15V c,
AURAL INDICATOR — Provides attention-get-

ting chirp sound, warble, or continuous tone
when turned on by high input from burglar-
alarm sensor circuit. Second section of 556
timer provides optional frequency modulation
of basic tone to give warbling effect. Chirp is
achieved by gating tone oscillator on only dur-
ing high states of warble oscillator. Aural sen-
sitivity ismaximum in range of 1-2 kHz, set by
value of Rb.— W. G. Jung, "1C Timer Cookbook,"
Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 232-
235.
ALARM DETECTOR— National DS75454 dual

peripheral NOR driver operating from single 5-
V supply energizes alarm relay when one of
alarm transducers for either section delivers
logic signal as result of intruder action. — "In-
terface Databook," National Semiconductor,
Santa Clara, CA, 1978, p 3-20-3-30.
103
► 12
BURGLAR ALARM CIRCUITS
+ 12
CAR DOOR APPROX OUTPUT

TO BELL
SWITCH IOm A
RELAY
SILENT ALARM — When thief opens car door,

relays K, and K3 activate tone-modulated trans- CAR-THEFT ALARM — Alarm remains on even if
mitter, which can be any legal combination of signal from car door switch or other sensor is
power, frequency, and antenna. A few milli- only momentary, so relay is wired to be self-
watts ofpower should be adequate. Thief hears latching until keyswitch SI is turned off. Use
nothing, but owner is alerted via portable re- hood locks or hood-opening sensors to prevent
ceiver tuned to transmitter frequency. Trans- thief from disabling alarm by cutting battery
mitter remains on about 15 s (determined by R3 cable. Circuit includes time delay of 6 s for en-
and C, ) after door is closed until NE555 times tering car and shutting off alarm, to avoid need
out and removes power from transistor. Use for external keyswitch. Sonalert makes loud
any NPN transistor having adequate current rat- tone during 6-s delay period to remind driver
ing for relay. If alarm is provided with its own that alarm needs to be turned off. At end of 6 s,
battery and whip antenna, it cannot be disabled Sonalert stops and much louder bell is ener-
from outside of car. — A. Day, Soundless Mobile gized to further discourage intruder. — J. Paw-
Alarm, CQ, April 1977, p 11. lan. The Smart Alarm, 73 Magazine, June 1975,
p 37-41.
12 V
DELAYED ALARM — When normally closed arm / gize alarm circuit. Now, as long as all door for owner to enter car, and hom is sounded un-
disarm switch is opened, first section of NE556 switches are closed, PNP transistor is kept off less owner closes arm/disarm switch within
dual timer starts its timing cycle. After delay to because pin 9 is high. When any door switch is delay time. — "Signetics Analog Data Manual,"
allow for entry or exit, pin 5 goes low to ener- opened, transistor turns on after normal delay Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 724-725.
FAIL-SAFE TIMED ALARM — Horn comes on

about 30 s after intruder closes door switch by
opening car door. Delay is produced by NE555
timer to allow driver to close door after entering
or leaving. Thief must keep door open to get leg
room for removing equipment under dash.
Diodes are 50-PIV 1-A silicon. K1 has 12-V coil.
Alarm is set at all times. SI is normally closed
pushbutton type in door jam. Opening SI starts
timer, and closing it resets alarm. — R. S.
Harvey, Junk Box Foils Thieves, QST, Sept.
1977, p 50-51.
Clock register
470n
2 out of 10 latches
Display flashing oscillator and display drivers
MULTIPLEXED BURGLAR ALARM— Multiplex- based on 4017 decade counter having 10 indi- opamp converts sensor line current to logic lev-
ing technique provides for detection of state of vidual outputs, to give signals in 10 time slots. els for clocking by master 401 7 to control 1 0 out-
up to 10 sensors, with immediate identification Power supply rail is used to reset counter. Clock put latches and display driver. Two consecutive
and location of activated sensor. Only one pair line is eliminated by switching supply line as sensor-open signals are required to activate
of wires runs from control unit to paralleled re- square wave. Sensor indication line is elimi- alarm, minimizing false alarms by interference
mote sensor circuits, one of which is shown at nated by detecting power supply current drain. pulses. — R. J. Chance, Multiplexed Alarm,
upper right. Each sensor location uses different Control unit uses oscillator and shift register to Wire/ess World, Nov. 1978, p 73-74.
output from one to zero. Multiplexer circuit is generate clocking waveforms. 3900 quad
105
R,
v+
+9V, BURGESS 246
• R, o
• 10 Mil
100 kn
D,
V +
S, X
nr-
R
Reset
TH
1 N91 ^ TR 556
A, OUT IS A FAIL-SAFE FEATURE
A Output:
C, 9 _ Alarm
__ DIS CIRCUIT-BREAKING ALARM — Operates from
GND
small 9-V battery, making it independent of AC
power failure. Opening of switch or equivalent
2^F breaking of foil conductor removes ground from
base of transistor, to energize alarm. — Circuits,
73 Magazine, April 1973, p 132.
xr
Tamper
Switches
WINDOW-FOIL ALARM — Combination of effect; S, must be closed momentarily after re-

power-up mono MVBR and latch, using both storing sensor circuit to turn alarm off. Circuit
sections of 556 timer, drives output line high includes 22-s power-up delay that prevents trig-
when sensor circuit is opened at door or win- gering of alarm when it is first turned on. — W.
dow switch or by breaking foil on glass. Once G. Jung, "1C Timer Cookbook," Howard W.
alarm is triggered, reclosing of sensor has no Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 231-232.
LOW-CURRENT INTRUDER ALARM— Use of sunlight and backgrounds intermittently illu- RL only when incident radiation is changed by
programmable /xA776 opamps reduces standby minated bysun. Low-cost mirror is used instead movement of intruder in monitored space. —
current of infrared alarm to 300 *iA, permitting of lens to concentrate infrared radiation on de-
"Ceramic Pyroelectric Infrared Detectors," Mul-
operation from small rechargeable cells. Detec- tector. Rdis chosen to make input to first opamp lard, London, 1978, Technical Note 79, TP1664,
tor is Mullard RPY86 that responds only to between 2 and 6 V. Circuit energizes alarm relay
wavelengths above 6 fim, making it immune to
SI RESET SWITCH
NORMALLY CLOSED
(OPTIONAL)
LIGHT-INTERRUPTION DETECTOR— Use of tude is not quite enough to start regenerative

SCR as regenerative amplifier rather than as action of SCR. Reduction in light then increases LATCHING ALARM — Closed-circuit alarm
switch gives extremely high sensitivity to very resistance of photoresistor enough to raise drawing only 130 /iA of standby current from
slight reductions in light reaching photoresis- level of gate pulses for SCR, starting regenera- battery is turned on by opening sensor switch
tor. Requires no light source or accurately tive amplification that energizes relay. Use Mal- or cutting wire. Automatic latching contacts on
aligned light-beam optics. In typical application lory SC-628P Sonalert which produces pulsed relay prevent burglar or intruder from deacti-
as burglar alarm, light shining through window 2500-Hz sound. With S2 open, alarm stops vating alarm by resetting sensor switch. Relay
from streetlight provides sufficient ambient il- when changes in light cease. With S2 closed, is Radio Shack 275-004. Sensor can be foil strip
lumination so any movement of intruder within alarm is latched on and SI must be opened to around window subject to breakage. — F. M.
10 feet of unit will energize Sonalert alarm. Sen- stop sound. — R. F. Graf and G. J. Whalen, "The Mims, "Transistor Projects, Vol. 3," Radio
sitivity control R4 is adjusted so SCR receives Build-lt Book of Safety Electronics," Howard W. Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1975, p 75-86.
positive pulses from AC line, but their ampli- Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1976, p 7-12.
* 10nF capacitors C5,C9, and C13 should be connected

as close as possible between pins 4 and 7 of ICs
A For 60Hz use 27kQ for R21, R23, and I2kfi for R22
MICROWAVE DOPPLER INTRUSION ALARM— combines reflected energy with sample of os- controlled switch TR3 that makes contacts of
Muilard CL8960 X-band Doppler radar module cillator signal. Transmitted frequency is 10.7 reed relay open for about 1 s. Relay action is re-
detects movement of remote target by moni- GHz. Doppler change is about 31 Hz for relative peated as long as intruder is in monitored area.
toring Doppler shift in microwave radiation re- velocity of 0.45 m/s (1 mph) of relative velocity Report covers circuit operation in detail. — J. E.
flected from target. Module consists of Gunn between object and module, giving AF output
Saw, "Microwave Doppler Intruder Alarms,"
oscillator cavity producing energy to be ra- for velocities up to 400 mph. Filtered AF is ap- Muilard, London, 1976, Technical Information
diated, mounted alongside mixer cavity that plied through diode pump to trigger of silicon 36, TP1570, p 6.
BURGLAR ALARM CIRCUITS 107
ATTACH LEAD TO
'MOUNTING SCREW
OR METAL BODY To other circuits,

OF SI
if used.
(MV5020 or equiv.)
VISUAL INDICATOR — When circuit is activated

by high output of burglar alarm circuit, 555
timer operating as very low frequency MVBR
NOTE: TOUCHING MOUNTING SCREW Of SI AND CASE Of S2 makes LED, flash on and off during alarm con-
COMMUTATES SCR BY MOMENTARILY ENERGIZING 01 dition. Alternate connection of LED, to V+ holds
LED, on for standby while flashing it during
HOTEL-ROOM ALARM — Alarm mounted in shown by dashed line in order to silence alarm. alarm. Oscillator output is also available for
flashlight-shaped cylinder is positioned on floor Once silenced, SI can be opened to disconnect other uses if desired. Indicator can be located
inside hotel room in such a way that it is latch so alarm can be moved. Other applications
remotely from alarm.— W. G. Jung, "1C Timer
knocked over by intruder opening door. Mer- include protection of unattended luggage. Cl is Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
cury switch S2 then triggers SCR and activates 0.1 jiF, R1 is 1 megohm, R2 is IK, R3 is 39K, and
1977, p 232-235.
Mallory SC-628P pulsed Sonalert alarm. Circuit S2 is mercury element removed from GE mer-
latches on and can be turned off only by use of cury toggle switch.— R. F. Graf and G. J.
Darlington-amplifier touch switch. Connection Whalen, 'The Build-lt Book of Safety Electron-
from base of Darlington to positive terminal of ics," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1976, p
battery must be made through fingertips as 19-24.
5-min SHUTOFF — Vehicle Intrusion alarm shuts not affected by subsequent opening or closing Q1 and relay, as well as automatic shutoff delay.
off automatically in about 5 min after being trig- of doors. System uses two CMOS CD4001AE Article gives construction details and layout for
gered, as required by law in some states. Drain quad two-input NOR gates for switching logic. printed-circuit board.— W. J. Prudhomme, Ve-
on battery is negligible until alarm is set off by IC1 provides sensor interface, latch, and entry/ hicle Security Systems, 73 Magazine, Oct. 1977,
intruder. Once triggered, operation sequence is exit time delays. IC2 provides output through
p 122-125.
CURRENT-DRAIN SENSOR— Current drawn by

dome light when door is open or by ignition
when turned on triggers current-sensing stages
Q1 and Q2 to start 555 timer and apply power
to horn relay. Initial 15-s delay in sounding horn
allows owner to enter car and open hidden
switch SI to deactivate alarm. If SI is not
opened during delay interval, horn sounds for
about 90 s, then circuit automatically resets it-
self. C5 and R5 control duration of initial 15-s
delay. C2 and R4 control total time that horn
sounds. — R. F. Graf and G. J. Whalen, "The
Build-lt Book of Safety Electronics," Howard W.
ENABLE ALARM
incorporate multiple time delays to improve

convenience and effectiveness of auto intrusion to allow driver to get back in car again and dis- how circuit works and gives detailed instruc-
alarm. R1C1 gives 30-s delay for arming alarm able alarm. R3C3 turns off alarm in 300 s and re- tions for installation and connection to door and
after it is turned on by switch concealed inside sets alarm system for next intrusion. Car horn trunk switches. — G. Hinkle, Give the Hambur-
car, to let driver get out of car. R2C2 gives 15-s is pulsed 60 times per minute, so alarm would glar Heart Failure, 73Magazine, Feb. 1977, p 36-
delay before alarm sounds after door is opened. not be confused with stuck horn. Article tells
+9V
37.
INTRUDER ALARM — Input is from Mullard ment of intruder in monitored space. Mirrors width is 0.3-10 Hz. First trigger, having thresh-
RPY86 infrared detector responding to wave- rather than lenses concentrate incident radia- old of about 1 V, drives second trigger through
lengths above 6 jum, making it immune to sun- tion on detector because mirrors do not require diode pump to energize alarm relay when in-
light and backgrounds intermittently illumi- high-quality surface finish. Preamp is followed truder is present. — "Ceramic Pyroelectric In-
nated by sun. Output signal is produced only by two amplifier stages, with R10 varying gain frared Detectors," Mullard, London, 1978, Tech-
nical Note 79, TP1664, p 8.
when incident radiation is changed by move- of second stage between 10 and 100. Band-
109
WIRE-CUTTING ALARM — SCR normally acts as

open circuit in series with 12-VDC alarm relay
strategic locations in home trips alarm that reaches about 90 VDC, it fires neon and C3 dis- because grid is made negative by voltage di-
sounds loud bell and flashes bright light on and charges into gate of SCR. Full line voltage is vider consisting of 100K in series with 500
off. Sensor shorts control winding of K1, allow- then applied to lamp and bell plugged into load ohms. If ground on 500-ohm resistor is re-
ing K1 to drop out and apply line voltage to outlets. When C2 drops below holding current, moved, as by removal of tape player or CB set
alarm circuit. One AC path is through D5 which SCR turns off during next AC cycle and load from car by thief, gate becomes more positive
rectifies AC for energizing DC latch relay K2 to goes off until neon fires again. Setting of 5K pot and SCR conducts, to energize relay, sound
short sensor lines even though initiating sensor R4 gives range of 15-80 flashes and horn pulses horn, and make headlights shine brightly. Ad-
has opened. Simultaneously, AC is applied to per second. To stop alarm, open SPST switch ditional triggering SCRs or alarm switches can
diode bridge having SCR between DC legs. C2 momentarily.— R. F. Graf and G. J. Whalen, be added as shown outside of dashed area for
starts charging through R2 and R4, and C3 'The Build-lt Book of Safety Electronics," How- basic alarm. — A. Szablak, Another Burglar
charges through R3. When voltage across C3 ard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1976, p 75-80. Alarm, 73 Magazine, May 1974, p 45-46.
SOUND-ACTIVATED SWITCH— Can be used as

sensor for burglar alarm or for turning on sur-
veillance tape recorder to monitor conversa-
tions. R8is adjusted to give desired sensitivity
at which A2 triggers switch Q, to provide 200-
mA load current and turn on indicator LED. First
section of LM339 quad comparator serves as
amplifier and detector providing gain of 100.
Second comparator compares DC output of first
with reference level selected by R8. — D. R. Mor-
gan, Sound Turns Switch On, EDN Magazine,
Aug. 5, 1978, p 82 and 84.
ALARM DRIVES PAGING BEEPER— Complete mitter operating around 147 MHz, 100-W elec- for Motorola Pageboy II cigarette-pack-size
protection of vehicle is provided by multiplicity tronic siren, and power horns. Closing of con- pager receiver. Article describes construction,
of door-switch, mat-switch, vibration, motion, tacts in any sensor grounds common input operation, and installation in detail and gives
and other sensors connected to common sen- (assuming keylock switch has been closed to complete circuit of pager. — J. Crawford, Build
sor input of alarm switching circuit that controls arm circuit by applying +12 V), applying power a Beeper Alarm, 73 Magazine, Oct. 1977, p 68-
radio pager, 1-W GE Voice Command II trans- to siren and pager system. Range is about 1 mi 77.
DOPPLER BURGLAR ALARM— Small radar of circuit and gives sources (British) for parts
transmitter operating at 10.687 GHz fills pro- and construction kits. Opamps are SN72748 or
tected area with radio waves. Waves reflected equivalent, IC3 is /tA723 or equivalent, Tr,-Tr3
from stationary objects are ignored by receiver, are ZTX500 or equivalent, Tr4-Tr6 are ZTX302 or
while waves undergoing Doppler shift in fre- equivalent, Tr7 is 3055, D,-Ds are 1N4001 or
quency by reflection from moving object such equivalent, D9-D,0 are 1N914, SCR, is TIC44 or
as intruder are selectively amplified for trigger- equivalent, Z,-Z2 are BZY88-C8V2, relay is 18-V
ing of alarm. Single waveguide section is di- with IK coil, Doppler module is Mullard CL8960
vided into two cavities, each having Gunn or equivalent, and self-oscillating mixer for re-
diode; transmitter cavity feeds points A and B ceiver is Mullard CL8630S or equivalent. Alarm
+12 V
BURGLAR ALARM CIRCUITS 111
SCR
BEEPER — Intermittent alarm using 555 timer OPEN/SHORT/GROUND ALARM— Pin 6 of

can be set to energize horn, lights, or other sig- CA3094 1C is high for no-alarm condition. When
naling device at any desired interval when any one sensor line is open, is shorted to other
tripped. When used on auto, sound cannot be line, or is shorted to ground, output of 1C goes
mistaken for stuck horn. Choose SCR rating to low and resulting output current serves for ac-
handle current drawn by relay and timer. If
tivating alarm system. — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C
alarm draws less than 200 mA, relay is not
needed. — W. Pinner, Alarm! Alarm! Alarm!, 73 W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 316-317.
Magazine, Feb. 1976, p 138-139.
115V RTN
1 1 5Vac sw2
TRIPPED
INDICATOR
OTHER
ENTRY
POINT
SWITCHES I- -0-—0-
'6— i-*
-*r— -O'
o-'-'OL-i-
SW,
ALARM
ARM
I
LATCH-ON ALARM — Alarm cannot be shut off
for 12 s, with delay provided by 1C, connected
as mono, even if trip condition is immediately
removed. Developed for home, garage, and even when AC power fails. Circuit is latched AUDIO
l-lkHz)
auto burglar alarm systems having any number through contacts of K,. On standby, battery ALARM TRIPPED
of trip switches. Circuit is self-resetting after drain is zero. — J. D. Long, Burglar Alarm Is Ef-
OUTPUT
delay interval, has high resistance to false fective, yet Simple and Inexpensive, EDN Mag-
alarms other than direct entry, and operates azine, Dec. 20, 1974, p 50-51.
CHAPTER 10
Capacitance Measuring Circuits

Timers, bridges, dip meters, counters, phase-locked loops, and
microprocessors drive meters, digital displays, or audible indicators giving
values of capacitors.
10 pF TO 1000 DIGITAL— Uses 555 timers as gives good accuracy without use of crystal os- Build Accurate Capacitance Meter, Electronics,
free-running oscillators, one for gating and dilator.— W. H. Wang, Low-Cost Oscillators May 26, 1977, p 127 and 129.
112
CAPACITANCE MEASURING CIRCUITS 113
ICI4-74400 PIN 14 - ♦ 5 V PIN 7- GND
1 pF TO 1 ix F — Presents instantly in digital form

the value of unknown capacitor, in ranges of 1-
9999 pF and 1-999.9 nF. Four digits are dis-
played, with leading-zero suppression and ov-
erflow indicator. Accuracy is better than 0.1%
of full range ± 1 digit for higher values in both
ranges. Mono MVBR IC21 produces pulse
whose length is directly proportional to value
of Cx plus about 980-pF total in CF. This pulse
enables gate IC14D whose output goes to
counter. Oscillator Q2, buffer Q3, dividers IC15
and IC16, and gates IC14 together give 40-MHz
(range 1) or 400-kHz (range 2) pulses that are
counted while IC21 holds IC14D open. Article
covers construction in detail. — I. M. Chladek,
Build This Digital Capacity Meter, 73 Magazine,
Jan. 1976, p 70-78.
OSC. DIVIDER CHAIN
C WITH VOM — TTL-derived square-wave gen-

erator U1 charges unknown capacitor Cx to
about 3.5 V at 285 kHz when using 1 50-pA scale
of Heath MM-1 volt-ohm-milliammeter, to give
150-pF full-scale range. Larger values of capac-
itance are read by decreasing frequency with
7490 decade dividers. Use Mallory PTC401 for
CR1-CR4. T1 is 6.3-VAC filament transformer. S2
restores normal VOM functions. Article gives
design equations. — K. H. Cavcey, Read Capaci-
tance with Your VOM, QST, Dec. 1975, p 36-37.
5 pF TO 1 fJ F — Consists of an oscillator using

two gates from CD4011 quad NAND gate, sep-
arated from diode rectifier by another NAND
gate. Increasing oscillator frequency gives more
pulses per second and higher integrated meter
reading. Each meter range is linear, so value of
5-pF capacitor can be read on lowest range.
Diodes are 1N34 or equivalent. R1 is 12K, and
R2-R6 are 50K trimpots set to values shown in
table. R7 is 5K, and R8 is 10K trimpot. B1 is 9-V
transistor battery. Article covers construction
and calibration with known capacitors. — E.
Landefeid, Build a Simple Capacitance Meter,
73 Magazine, Jan. 1978, p 164-165.
Range Frequency
R C
0-100 pF 1 100 kHz
15k
0-1000 pF 100 pF
31k 5 pF 112 kHz
1 500 pF 1 1.2 kHz
.01 uF 36k
.1 uF 45k .012 uF 1.170 kHz
45k
1 uF .1 uF 109 Hz
NEGATIVE BUFFER
CLOCK CAPACITANCE INTEGRATOR OFF
O S3
2 section B (high-capacitance mode)

C (leakage mode)
CAPACITOR TESTER — Portable instrument mode C
measures capacitance values to 2500 gF and mode A mode B
leakage current with up to 8 V applied. Timer S2 1-pole, 5-position 0.25
2.5
U1 operates as clock providing about 350 neg- A 0.0001
ative-going pulses per second to trigger timer B 0.001
U2 and unclamp test capacitor so it charges 25.0
C 0.01 leakage
through switch-selected resistor to half of sup-
ply voltage. U2 then resets, discharging capac- D 0.1 250.0
2500.0
itor through pin 7. During charge, pin 3 of U2 is E 1.0
high (about 8 V) and duration of high state is SPST (test)
S3
directly proportional to capacitance. Resulting
rectangular waveform is applied to unity-gain waveform and is therefore proportional to ca- es. Article covers construction, cali-
buffer opamp U3 that feeds meter through cal- pacitance. Table gives switch functions. Mode bration, and use.—
/tF P. H. Mathieson, Wide-
ibrating trimpot R6. Meter deflection is propor- B uses larger clock timing capacitor to permit Range Capacitance Meter, Ham Radio, Feb.
tional to average value of rectangular output measuring larger capacitance values, for total 1978, p 51-53.
fF
DIGITAL WITH 100:1 RANGE— Frequency

counter operated in period mode serves as
readout for Optical Electronics 3329 voltage-to-
frequency converter. Unknown capacitance is
connected as external timing capacitance for 1C,
so output period of 1C is directly proportional to
unknown capacitance. To calibrate, connect
known C and adjust R1 for correct reading on
digital frequency counter. With values shown,
1 nF gives period of 1 ms. — "Low Cost Capaci-
tance Measurement," Optical Electronics, Tuc-
son, AZ, Application Tip 10262.
DIRECT-READING FIVE-RANGE— Covers 1 pFto

1 //F in five ranges, using easily available com-
ponents. Trigger source is free-running pulse
generator using programmable UJT Q1 and in-
verter-amplifier Q2 to produce narrow -12 V
output pulse at constant frequency of about 500
Hz. For trigger pulse, NE555V timer connected
as mono MVBR initiates output pulse whose
width increases with value of capacitor under
test. Meter reads average value of pulse wave-
form and may be calibrated directly to read ca-
pacitance. Range resistors should be 5% or bet-
ter. 10K trimpot in series with meter serves for
initial calibration. Zero-adjustment pot is
needed only for lower ranges. Use zener-regu-
lated supply to provide 12 V at up to 50 mA. Full
type number of Q1 is A7T6028; 2N6027, 2N6028,
2N6118, and HEP S9001 are similar. Single
0.0025-/xF capacitor can be substituted for two
0.005-^F units in series. — C. Hall, Direct-Read-
ing Capacitance Meter, Ham Radio, April 1975,
_n_n_ H JlJ
_ Bp 32-35. DISPLAY . n
IN4004
($) © © ©
TO E| |c COMMON
^
TENS
7447
1C power connections
741
7408
7474
7492
14+
7447
7490
10-1 14+
1-99,900 n F — Circuit converts charging time of 60-Hz timing waveform is now applied to sine- verting input, 741 output
16+ goes positive and
7+
unknown capacitor to capacitance value shown wave squaring circuit using two sections of stops counter. Article describes circuit opera-
on 3-digit display. S-1 is shown in OFF position, 7408 AND gate. This starts 7490 counters. tion in detail. Range switch gives scaling factors
5+
with unknown capacitor shorted. When S-1 is Zener-regulated +9 V is applied to Cx through of 1, 10, 100, and 1000.— 5+ A. S. Joffe, Now— a
changed to other position for start of test, Cx is selected range resistor. When charging voltage Digital Capacity Meter!, 73 Magazine, May
10-
connected to measuring circuit through range of capacitor exceeds reference voltage on in-
switch S-2 and 741 opamp used as comparator. 1978, p 58-60.
4-
Capacitor
FIVE RANGES UP TO 1 fiF — Direct-reading

meter gives capacitance values in five ranges,
all using same 0-100 scale on 100-juA meter.
Operates from three penlight cells. To calibrate,
connect known capacitor to jack, close S2, and
adjust trimmer pot for each range in turn to give
correct indication of capacitor value on
meter. — C. Green, Build This Easy Capacitor
Meter, Modern Electronics, Aug. 1978, p 78-79.
ADAPTER FOR COUNTER — Converts counter moves short-circuit from unknown capacitor Cx corresponds to capacitor value. Cl is 18 pF, R1
into digital capacitance meter for measuring and enables gate U2C. Capacitor charges ex- is 860K, R2 is 100K, R3 is 86K, R4 is 10K, R5 is
values down to around 5 pF with better than 1% ponentially through R1 and R2 (range 1) to volt- 8.6K, R6 is IK, and U2 is 7400 quad NAND
accuracy. Three ranges give full-scale values of age at which threshold comparator at U 1 makes gate. — R. F. Kramer, Using a Frequency Counter
99,999 pF, 0.99999 /iF, and 9.9999 juF. Positive- flip-flop change state, shorting Cx and disabling as a Capacitance Meter, QST, Aug. 1977, p 19-
going count-enable command from frequency gate U2C. During charge time, 1-MHz pulses are 22.
counter, applied to point A of gate U2A, reapplied to counter input. Counter reading then
CHECKING BY SUBSTITUTION— Uses 1-MHz

crystal oscillator with fixed-tuned tank circuit
L1-C2 link-coupled to resonant measuring cir-
cuit consisting of L4, C4, C5, and unknown ca-
pacitance. Simple RF voltmeter is connected
across measuring circuit as resonance indica-
tor. C4 and C5 have calibrated dials reading di-
rectly inpicofarads. LI is Miller 20A224RBI slug-
tuned unit adjusted to 250 /*H. L4 is Miller
41A685CBI adjusted to 60 /x H. Links L2 and L3
are 2 turns each. To use, close SI, set C5 to max-
imum, and adjust C4 for peak deflection of Ml.
Connect unknown capacitance to XX with
shortest possible leads, retune C5 to resonance, from maximum reading to get value of un- Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, 2nd
then subtract this capacitance reading of C5
known capacitor. — R. P. Turner, "FET Circuits,"
Ed., p 140-142.
D S G
BOTTOM VIEWS
01 ,Q2 AND 03
Cl, C4, C5 — 220 mF. 16 V, Sprague 1N759 or equiv. 53 — Dpdt momentary toggle switch, Alco no.
227G016CG or equiv. D8 — 3/16-in. red LED, Motorola MLED50 or MTA206T or equiv.
C2 — 22 16 V, Sprague 226G016AS equiv. (II on pc board). 54 — Dpdt toggle switch, Alco no. MTA206P
or equiv. FI — 1/2- A pigtail fuse, Buss MDV 1/2 A, 250
or equiv.
C3 — 130-pF disk, Sprague 1CC0G131X0100C4 T1 — 12.6-V, 100-mA power transformer,
or equiv. J 1 , J2 — 5-way binding post. (Radio Shack Mouser no. 81PG120. Mounting centers
1-13/16 inch.
D1 — Silicon small-signal diode, 1N914 or package
V. no. 274-661 includes red and black
equiv. posts.) U1 — Dual operational amplifier, National
D2, D3 — Silicon rectifier diode, 200 V, 1 A; Q1, Q2, Q3 — N -channel JFET, 2N5486 or Semiconductor type LM1458. Inter-
1N4003 or equiv. changeable with 1C type 5558.
D4, D7 — Zener diode, 6.2 V, 400 mW, SI,equiv.
S2 — 2-pole, 6-position rotary switch, CTS U2 — Linear 1C operational amplifier, RCA
1N753 or equiv. no. T206 or equiv.
D5, D6 — Zener diode, 12.0 V, 400 mW, type CA3130.
R AND C ADAPTER FOR DVM— Self-contained tions on switches are provided for special mea- positive to negative, C2 stops charging. Voltage
circuit provides four ranges of capacitance (0- suring requirements such as temperature sen- across C2, proportional to value of unknown C,
1, 10, 100, and 1000 /xF) and four ranges of re- sing, antenna elevation indication, and rain- is then fed to DVM. Article covers construction
sistance (0-1, 10, 100, and 1000 kilohms) when gage measurements. For capacitors, constant- and calibration. — R. Shriner, New Tasks for the
used with QST combination digital voltmeter current source Q1 charges capacitor linearly. Digital Voltmeter, QST , March 1978, p 19-22.
and frequency counter. Auxiliary range posi- When charging voltage makes U1A switch from
118
BRIDGE FOR 25 pF TO 10 ftF — Uses five refer-

ence capacitors, one for each range. Linear pot
VR1 serves for balancing. High-resistance head-
phones indicate null, and capacitor value is then
read from setting of VR1. Scale ofVRI is marked
for 100 to 10,000 pF for C2 range and 0.01 to 1
LINEAR SCALE — Wide frequency range and
A*F for C4 range. Scale values are multiplied or
high output current of 555 timer contribute to
divided for other ranges. Calibration is carried
linearity of operation as capacitance meter.
out on C2 range, using known capacitor values.
Timer is connected as astable MVBR with fre-
Tone oscillator can use almost any pair of tran-
quency determined by values used for R», RB,
sistors, one NPN and the other PNP. — F. G.
and C,. When timer output is high, unknown
Rayer, Adrift over Your C's?, 73 Magazine, capacitance Cx is charged almost to Vcc. When
March 1976, p 106-107.
timer goes low, Cx discharges through D,. Use
- UNKNOWN
--)! C 100 kHz for 100-pF full-scale reading, 10 kHz for
1 nF, 1 kHz for 10 nF, and down to 1 Hz for 10
6-DIGIT VALUES — Digital capacitance meter and counter accumulates 1-/X s pulses from crys- segment output data for display. Position A of
provides display of capacitance values from 1 pF tal clock. When capacitor charge voltage SW1 is starting point, B stores data in counter
to 999999 pF (1.0 yiz.F). Start-measurement reaches threshold of count-inhibit line for display after capacitor measurement, and C in-
switch drains charge from capacitor under counter, contents of counter are displayed as itiates measurement. Display includes leading-
measurement and diverts constant-current capacitance value. Circuit uses Mostek
zero suppression. — J. Garrett. What's Your gF7.
source to ground. Capacitor begins charging. MK50395N six-decade counter that provides 7- 73 Magazine, Dec. 1978, p 234-235.
999p
RANGE R c
100 pF
xl pF 1 0k var. (Cl)
X10 pF .001
xl 00 pF (C2>
.01
10 (C3)
x.001 .1 (C4) PERFECT CAPACITOR — Simple circuit shown
1 (C5)
x.01 provides equivalent of perfect no-loss 1000-pF
(C6) capacitor at frequencies below about 100 kHz.
x. 1
Principle can be used to construct fixed-fre-
PLL CAPACITANCE METER — Based on fact that values of R and C selected by rotary switch SI, quency capacitance standards for use in high-
alternating current floating through capacitor to give six linear scales: 0-10 pF, 10-100 pF, accuracy capacitor bridge. All capacitors are sil-
depends on applied voltage, frequency, and ca- 100-1000 pF, 1000 pF to 0.01 juF, 0.01-0.1 gF, ver mica. If mounted in oven, stability can be 1
pacitance value. Circuit uses square wave for and 0.1-1 gF. Accuracy is about ±5%. Meter is PPM and residual phase-angle difference from
charging capacitor to full voltage, then mea- 100 ijiA. Use small signal diodes. — S. Shields, pure Tcapacitance
r4 only 1 microradian. — B. J.
sures current flow as linear function of capaci- How Many pF is That Capacitor, Really?, 73 Frost,1977,
Dec. "No p Loss"
80, Capacitor, Wireless World,
tance. LM78L15 provides regulated 15 V for Magazine, March 1978, p 48-50.
LM566 PLL VCO. Frequency of VCO depends on
iw3b
R14 J
LED3 •//
rm
]
+12 V
‘i. L
47r> 470n 4î7
>Rl2
Rl5
BCY70
[rV
270 >
2k2
f
I
J , 100k
>270
*
S
'
lR21
Switch Positions f
START
REFORM ON/OFF
M RANGE
N O P Q |
Sw,
I| Sw3
3,000 300 30 3 03,u §
1 Sw2
ELECTROLYTICS WITH REFORMING— Auto- age current is high because of incomplete re- is being charged during measuring cycle. Article
matic tester for electrolytics applies voltage for forming. Tone from loudspeaker indicates end covers construction and calibration in detail. 1C,
about 15 s to repolarize dielectric before mea- of 15-s reforming period. Green LED, indicates is SN74123N, IC3 is SN74121N, and IC„ is
surement ismade. This provides sufficient re- reforming process is ready to start. Red LED, in- SN7413N. — A. Drummond-Murray, Electrolytic
forming for test purposes, using 12 V through dicates excessive current is flowing during re- Capacitor Tester, Wireless World, May 1977, p
47-49.
1200 ohms, but test should be repeated if leak- forming. LED3 flashes to indicate test capacitor
RESISTOR SCALE
R2 - IOOK X IOO pF
R3 -IOK X IOOO pF
R4 - IK X .01 pF
RS - IOOa. X .1 pF
ALL RESISTORS -I/2W, 3% or bFttpr C BY GRID DIP — Values of unknown capaci-

tances up to about 1000 pF can be measured
0.0001 TO 1 /aF IN FOUR RANGES— Simple with simple circuit used with grid-dip oscillator.
bridge uses AF voltage from Cordover CPO-4 Coil L can be 6 turns of stiff wire. To calibrate,
code practice oscillator module, fed through close variable capacitors Cl and C2 fully, tune
transistor output transformer connected in re- for dip, and note dip frequency at pointer posi-
verse for impedance matching. Earphones tion of C2. Now connect known capacitors up
serve as null detector, but amplifier can be to 1000 pF one by one to CX, retune C2 for dip,
added for greater sensitivity or CRO used. Only and mark capacitor value on C2 dial. Close C2,
one scale need be calibrated, using known val- then repeat calibration for Cl while using
ues of capacitors. — W. P. Turner, Build a Basic smaller capacitors up to 50 pF. — F. G. Rayer,
Bridge, 73 Magazine, Nov. 1974, p 95. GDO to Find C, 73 Magazine, Aug. 1974, p 35.
8-I4VDC
0.5-pF TO 0.001/iF COMPARATOR— Provides

audio-tone comparison of built-in reference ca-
pacitor to unknown capacitor connected be-
tween test clips. Frequency of tone is about 8
khlz for 0.5 pF, dropping to 100 Hz as capacitor
value goes up to 0.001 /aF. Larger capacitor val-
ues merely turn LED on and off; 0.1 gf gives
flashing at about 5 Hz. Any NPN audio or switch-
ing transistor can be used in place of MPS6512.
Suggested reference values for capacitor bank
are 0.7, 3, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 330, 470, 680, and
820 pF. — W. Pinner, The Capacitor Comparator,
73 Magazine, March 1977, p 49.
-vcc
COMPUTERIZED METER— With 4.7 megohms

for R, simple 555 timer circuit used in conjunc-
tion with computer measures capacitors in five 5V
ranges from below 100 pF to 0.1 /aF For larger R
range, resistor value can be changed. Article in-
cludes BASIC software suitable for 8080-based from port out
systems, including calibration program based
on known values of capacitance. 555 mono
MVBR is triggered under control of computer
output port bit, with count being made while
mono is timing out. Count is averaged over ten
, , TO port in
triggerings, then multiplied in computer by cal-
ibration factor to give capacitance value. Any
desired type of output indicator can be used. —
J. Eccleston, Computerized Capacity Meter, 73
Magazine, July 1978, p 88-89.
m
OPTIONAL BATTERY CONNECTION (EXTERNAL POWER!

f D1 DUAL TIMER MEASURES C— One section of U1
(two 555s in single package) is connected as
oscillator that serves as trigger for other section
(U1B). Ratio of R1 and R2 determines length of
pulse generated during each oscillation cycle,
while Cl and same resistors set frequency at
about 500 Hz. U1B produces predetermined-du-
ration output pulse for each start pulse regard-
less of starting pulse length. Pulse duration is
set by R4-R7 and external capacitor being mea-
sured. Smaller capacitor in given range pro-
duces shorter output pulse from U1B mono
MVBR. Average pulse power increases with
pulse length and increases meter reading lin-
early so capacitance value is indicated directly.
Values shown give ranges of 1000 pF, 0.01 \xf,
0.1 juF, and 1 /lF full-scale. R10 serves as cali-

bration resistor for all three higher scales. D1 is
50-PIV or higher silicon power-type diode, and
D2 is 1 N914 or equivalent. — D. A. Blakeslee, An
Inexpensive Capacitance Meter, QST, Sept.
1978, p 11-14 and 37.
RANGE SWITCH POSITION
lOOpF lOOOpF .01 pF 0.1 pF I.OpF
on fact that output pulse width of 555 timer var- train is linear function of pulse width. DC meter is adjusted for zero meter reading when push-
ies linearly with value of timing capacitance then reads capacitance values linearly. Decade button ispressed, without test capacitor. — C.
used. If timer is triggered with constant fre- capacitance ranges are obtained by switching Hall, Simplified Capacitance Meter, Ham Radio,
quency, average DC value of resulting pulse value of timing resistor. Trimpot for each range Nov. 1978, p 78-79.
CHAPTER 11
Cathode-Ray Circuits
Includes probe circuits, preamps, deflection amplifiers, 2-channel and 4-
channel trace multipliers, triggered sweep, dynamic focus correction, B-H and
Lissajous pattern generators, time-mark generator, and TV typewriter circuits.
See also Game, Power Supply, Sweep, and Television chapters.
Y AMPLIFIER FOR CRO — Combines advantages

of differential output stage and high-impedance
JFET input stage. Silicon input diodes provide
crude overload protection for input, while Tr2
acts with Tr, for level-shifting as well as ampli-
fying. R,is used to set quiescent output voltage
of Tr2 at about 15 V; this setting is critical, and
may require multiturn pot. Article gives setup
procedures. — G. A. Johnston, Deflection Am-
plifier for Oscilloscopes, Wireless World, April
1975, p 175.
Rl?
CURRENT AMPLIFIER— Used in FET curve

tracer to amplify drain current passing through
R14 sufficiently to give required Y output for os-
cilloscope. Uses SN72741P opamp as difference
amplifier. Article gives other circuits of curve
tracer and calibration procedure. — L. G. Cuth-
bert. An F.E.T. Curve Tracer, Wireless World,
April 1974, p 101-103.
ramp output
(to drain)
RANGE
FREQUENCY
SCOPE PREAMP — Extends vertical sensitivity
X 10 D.C. 100 KHZ
range of scope or VOM at minimum cost. Volt-
X 100
age at output is in phase with input. Switch
D.C. 10 KHZ
across C gives choice of AC or DC operation.
D.C.
Output Voltage P.P.
Table gives frequency and output voltage lim-
10 KHZ
its. Input impedance is about 500 kilohms. — G.
100 KHZ 28V Coers, High-Gain AC/DC Oscilloscope Amplifier,
27V EDNIEEE Magazine, Feb. 1, 1972, p 56.
3V
122
123
CATHODE. RAY CIRCUITS
+ 12V to + 18V
TRACE QUADRUPLER — Designed for use with

DC oscilloscopes. Constant-current UJT oscil-
lator produces linear sawtooth for triggering
Schmitt trigger and serving as horizontal sweep
voltage. Frequency is varied by switching ca-
pacitors, and can be up to about 100 kHz. Emit-
ter-follower may have to be added to UJT out-
put to prevent loading of timing capacitors by
low impedance of Schmitt trigger. Used to
quadruple maximum time-base frequency of
oscilloscope. — J. A. Titus, Trace Quadruplet,
Wireless World, Oct. 1972, p 479.
Y AMPLIFIER WITH 10-MHz BANDWIDTH— Rise should be from 50-ohm source to achieve full
time is 40 ns. Tr1-Tr4 form constant-current tail, bandwidth. Other complementary small-signal
with Tr5 improving linearity. T r, and Tr7 are com- transistors rated above 200 V can be used — B.
plementary emitter-followers, as also are Tr, J. Frost, Wideband Y Amplifier for Oscilloscope,
and Tr9, for feeding deflection plates. Input Wireless World, June 1976, p 71.
Ramp
Ve r t i ca I
DYNAMIC FOCUS CORRECTION— Provides

sum of squares of vertical and horizontal posi-
tion voltages, as required forfocus correction in
high-resolution flat-face magnetically deflected
CRT. Circuit uses Optical Electronics 5898 four-
quadrant analog multipliers to give required
squared outputs, along with 9831 opamp hav-
ing comparable bandwidth. Input summing re-
sistors for horizontal and vertical deflection am-
plifiers are chosen for compatibility with
amplifiers being used. Select current-sampling
resistors to generate 10-V peak signal. — "Dy-
namic Focus Correction with Analog Function
Modules," Optical Electronics, Tucson, A Z, Ap-
plication Tip 10127. Ramp
Hor i zontal
t
Curren Sampling
Res i s tor
+ 15V
±7 VDC OFFSET — High-impedance current

FROM
VIDEO source CL, provides desired Ievel shift for AC sig-
nals in video circuit whose DC level controls in-
DETECTOR tensity of CRT. Input and offset signals are fed
to base of Q3 which drives complementary-sym-
metry emitter-follower Q,-Q2. For values
shown, level can be shifted about ±7 VDC. — P.
B. Uhlenhopp, Variable DC Offset Using a Cur-
rent Source, EDNIEEE Magazine, Aug. 15, 1971,
CATHODE DRIVE FOR CRT — Cascode connec- code configuration eliminates Miller capaci-
tion of 2N4091 JFET and 2N3742 bipolar tran- tance problems of JFET, allowing direct drive
sistor provide full video output for cathode. from video detector. — "FET Databook." Na-
Gain is about 90. M-derived filter using stray ca- tional Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p p 46.
pacitances and variable inductor blocks 4.5- 6-26-6-36.
MHz sound frequency from video amplifier. Cas-
CMOS analog switch controlled by 50-kHz clock Frequencies above 500 Hz are best viewed in of CRO— "Analog Switches and Their Applica-
allows display of four input signals simultane- alternate mode with clock frequency of 200 Hz. tions," Siliconix, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 7-63-
ously on single-trace oscilloscope. Adapter is One of inputs is used to trigger horizontal trace 7-66.
125
CATHODE-RAY CIRCUITS
ELECTROSTATIC-DEFLECTION AMPLIFIER—
Combines frequency response of cascode am-
plifier with linearity of long-tailed pair fed by
constant current. Adjust R for 3 mA through
each load resistor. Output transistors require
small heatsinks. — G. A. Johnston, Deflection
Amplifier, Wireless World, Nov. 1973, p 560.
TO MEMORY ADDRESS BUS
TO VIDEO
COMBINER
10K WINKING CURSOR
FROM ONE PULSE
PER CHARACTER
A
LOG If BLINKER SOURCE
7. 5 Hz
TUT
READ PULSE
o TO SCREEN READ
-5 -V SUPPLY INPUT
CMOS LOGIC +5-V.
AND WRITE SIGNALS
4r . +5-V SWINGS
*■ OPTIONAL LOGIC
V SYNC NOT NEEDED IN

TRANSLATORS-
GND SOME SYSTEMS
access, and writing during vertical interval for
displaying 512 characters per page on TV
CURSOR FOR TV TYPEWRITER— Complete screen. External 7.5-Hz source is required to screen. — D. Lancaster, 'TV Typewriter Cook-
CMOS logic cursor and update system is shown
make underline cursor flash to indicate position book," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1976,
for system using RAM memory, direct memory at which next character will be entered on p 128-129.
OPTOISOLATOR FOR PROBE— Offsets need for

potentially dangerous practice of floating oscil-
loscope with respect to ground. Also permits
simultaneous display of two voltages with cor-
rect polarity on double-beam oscilloscope
when one of them is floating. Texas Instru-
ments TIL112 optocoupler used has bandwidth
of about 30 kHz. Three ranges give choice of 1 : 1 ,
10:1, and 100:1 input attenuation. Set RV2 to
bias phototransistor of optocoupler to center of
its linear range (about 4.5 V between pins 4 and
5), then set RV to give unity input/output ratio
on range 1. RV3 is set to give zero DC output
when input terminals are shorted, but can be
omitted if zeroing of output level is unneces-
sary.— A. F. Sargent, Simple C.R.O. Input Isolat-
ing Probe, Wireless World, Feb. 1976, p 76.
1N914 0R 1N4148
TV INTERFACE FOR TYPEWRITER— Video input
circuit for black and white transistor TV receiver
permits feeding video output of TV typewriter
to video driver in set, for producing character or
game display on TV screen. Use of direct cou-
pling eliminates shading effect or changes in
background level as characters are added.
Diodes provide 1.2-V offset in positive direction
so in absence of video the video driver is biased
to blacker-than-black sync level of 1.2 V. With
white video input of 2 V, driver is biased to usual
3.2 V of white level. Hot-chassis TV sets can
present shock hazard. — D. Lancaster, "TV Type-
writer Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indian-
apolis, IN, 1976, p 190.
COLOR FOR TV TYPEWRITER— Uses 3.579545- phase and delayed color outputs go to 1-of-8 horizontal sync pulse so set can lock and hold
MHz crystal oscillator to drive string of CMOS data selector whose output is determined by on reference color burst. Sine-wave output
buffers forming digital delay line. Output delays code presented digitally to its three color select chrominance signal is cut down to about one-
caused by propagation times in each buffer can lines. Selector drive logic must return to 000 fourth of maximum video white level. — D. Lan-
be used directly or can be trimmed to specific (reference phase) immediately before, during, caster, "TV Typewriter Cookbook," Howard W.
colors by varying supply voltage. Reference and for at least several microseconds after each Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1976, p 205-206.
1
CATHODE-RAY CIRCUITS 127
47k 47k
ELLIPTICAL PATTERN — Connection shown

B-H LOOP DISPLAY — Low-cost dual opamp cir- deriving vertical deflection input representing gives Lissajous-type elliptical pattern on CRO
cuit allows display of hysteresis loop on cali- flux B. Article gives design equations and de- from ordinary AF signal generator. Modulation
brated XY oscilloscope. Two windings are tails of circuit operation and use. — D. A. Zinder, can be added to either vertical or horizontal feed
placed on core to be tested, with opamp of flux- X-Y Oscilloscope Displays Hysteresis Loop of for CRO. — Novice Q & A ,73 Magazine, March
measuring system connected to secondary forv+ Any Core, EDN Magazine, Feb. 5, 1975, p 54-55. 1977, p 187.
TO
68k
SCOPE
HIGH-Z PROBE — Provides about 1200-megohm

input impedance to CRO, with unity gain. Pot
r CMOS Inverters
TIME-MARK GENERATOR — Produces precisely adjusts equalization at higher frequencies. Q1
spaced output pulses suitable for calibrating n + 1, where n is number programmed into A, can be U 1 1 2, 2N2607, 2N4360, orTIM12. Q2can
CRO time bases. Can be programmed in binary (1 to 255 for 2240 and 1 to 99 for 2250). Circuit be 2N706, 2N708, 2N2926, 2N3394, or HEP 50.—
by using 2240 for A, or in BCD by using 2250. can be programmed electronically by micropro- Circuits, 73 Magazine, March 1974, p 89.
Use crystal oscillator or other high-accuracy ces or ifdesired. — W. G. Jung, "1C Timer Cook-
source for external clock. Time interval of out- book," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977,
put pulse is equal to clock width multiplied by
RIO
p 218-220.
+ 9 V (FROM OSCILLOSCOPE
50 K
circuits, to provide one horizontal sweep of level. When input signal rises above trigger perfect ramp voltage. All diodes are 1N914. Q1
cathode-ray beam each time circuit is triggered level, output of opamp swings to -V and makes is any PNP switching transistor. — W. J. Prud-
by input signal pulse. Non inverting input of 741 output of 555 timer go high, allowing output homme. Trigger Your Oscilloscope, Kilobaud,
opamp is connected to vertical amplifier of CRO, capacitor to charge at constant current through
Aug. 1977, p 34-38.
■
+ 300V
ELECTROSTATIC-DEFLECTION AMPLIFIER—
Circuit develops equal-amplitude but opposite-
polarity sawtooth outputs when sawtooth
input is applied to gates of Q1 and 02. Q1 is con-
nected as common-source amplifier for apply-
ing opposite-polarity sawtooth to gate of 03.
Polarity at output of 03 then becomes same as
that of input, increased to amplitude suitable
for deflection plates of CRT. Sawtooth at output
of 02 has opposite polarity. Circuit values are
chosen to balance gain so both outputs have
same magnitude. — E. M. Noll, "FET Principles,

Experiments, and Projects," Howard W. Sams,
Indianapolis. IN, 2nd Ed.. 1975. p 229-230.
+300V DC
DEFLECTION-PLATE AMPLIFIER— Resistive col-

lector network of symmetrical differential am-
plifier isreplaced by constant-current source to
improve slew rate of deflection amplifier driving
capacitive load such as deflection plates of elec-
trostatic cathode-ray tube. Q, and Q2 are iden-
tical current sources. Network Q^CRrOy-Re-R,
forms current source for Q,. Q; is used as 6.2-V
zener diode. — W. Peterson, Current Sources Im-
prove Amplifier Slew Rate, EEE Magazine, Nov.
1970, p 102.
VERTICAL
GAIN /CAL
VOLTAGE RANGE
I AMPLIFIER
TO VERTICAL
DIFFERENTIAL VERTICAL AMPLIFIER— Uses each connected in single-gate configuration.

large signals without overloading. — "Linear In-
two RCA 40841 dual-gate FETs in vertical input Circuit is designed for frequencies up to 500
tegrated Circuits and MOS/FET's," RCA Solid
stage of solid-state oscilloscope, with gates of MHz. Wide dynamic range permits handling of State Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 435-436.
129
CATHODE-RAY CIRCUITS
SIGNAL
NO. I
HIGH-Z CRO PREAMP — Darlington circuit pro- 350 kHz. Originally designed to boost input to
vides extremely high input impedance (over 2.2 CRO, but can be adapted to many other appli- VDC
megohms). With input shorted, noise level is 78 cations requiring high gain, low noise, and high
dB down as read at output with VTVM. Linearity input impedance. — J. Fisk, Circuits and Tech- SIGNAL SWITCHER — Two-tube electronic
is within 1.5% for inputs from 100 /iV to 1 mV, niques, Ham Radio, June 1976, p 48-52. switch serves in effect to provide simultaneous
and frequency response is ±2 dB from 100 Hz to presentation of two different signals on CRO
screen by switching signals alternately to ver-
tical input at rate fast enough so both displays
are seen. — Novice Q 8i A, 73 Magazine, March
1977, p 187.
f\T\j
FROM ■ 1M
VERTICAL
AMPLIFIER 1
‘Vcc o
SENSITIVITY
, ADJUST
■ 100K
TRIGGER
— ADJUST
_ LEVEL
TRIGGERED SWEEP FOR CRO — Combination of

555 timer and standard opamp minimizes cost
of adding triggered sweep to oscilloscope not
having this feature. Timer is triggered by apply-
ing vertical-amplifier signal through opamp, in-
itiating charging of sweep capacitor C. When pacitor discharges to form retrace of sweep. —
capacitor voltage reaches control voltage of "Signetics Analog Data Manual," Signetics,
timer (0.33 Vcc), flip-flop in timer resets and ca- Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 726.
CHAPTER 12
Clock Signal Circuits

Covers circuits for generating clock pulses at frequencies ranging from 1 Hz to
well above 30 MHz for use in digital circuits of multiplexers, memories,
counters, shift registers, microprocessors, videotape recorders, and digital
cassette recorders.
60-Hz CLOCK OUTPUT FROM 555— Basic 555

timer 1C produces constant 60-Hz rectangular
output for use as noninterruptible free-wheel-
ing clock source. C, introduces filtered 60-Hz
power-line reference component across C, at 2
V P-P. This signal overrides normal timing ramp
of 555, causing it to act as amplifier or Schmitt
trigger. When AC line power fails, C, resumes
normal function as timing capacitor for 60-Hz
astable MVBR. Circuit can easily be adjusted for
other reference frequencies. — W. G. Jung, Take
a Fresh Look at New 1C Timer Applications, EDN
Magazine, March 20, 1977, p 127-135.
p p
_r _r _r
D 0 D 0
1/2 1/2
7474
11 c 0
74 74
—
A r
E
1 c 0
B CLOCK _J~
r
C
r
p B P
D 0 D 0
1/2 F
1/2
74 74 7474
IO
<t o H L
1/6 7404
i
sured by use of debouncing latch using pair of

7400 gates. VCC is +5 V. — E. E. Hrivnak, House
FOUR-PULSE BURST — Generates burst of four ifications can produce any desired number of Cleaning the Logical Way, 73 Magazine, Aug.
clock pulses each time switch is pressed. Mod- pulses in burst. Reliability of pulse count is en-
1974, p 85-90.
130
CLOCK SIGNAL CIRCUITS 131
SQUARE-WAVE CLOCK — One section of Harris

HA-4900/4905 precision quad comparator gives
excellent frequency stability as self-starting
TWO-PHASE CLOCK TO 1 MHz— Signetics 555 cillation. 7473 flip-flop controls phase that is fixed-frequency square-wave generator for
timer is used as oscillator to generate nonover- switched on through 7402 NOR gates. Article clock applications. R and C, determine fre-
lapping clock pulses as required for most two- gives timing waveforms and equations. Maxi- quency, and R2 provides regenerative feedback.
phase dynamic MOS memories and shift regis- mum operating frequency is 1 MHz. — G. Schlitt, For higher precision at frequencies up to 100
ters. Duty cycle is determined by values of ex- Monolithic Timer Generates 2-Phase Clock
kHz, crystal maybe used in place of C, . — "Linear
ternal resistors RA and RB which, together with Pulses, EDN Magazine, Aug. 1, 1972, p 57.
& Data Acquisition Products," Harris Semicon-
timing capacitor C, determine frequency of os- ductor, Melbourne, FL, Vol. 1, 1977, p 2-96.
quired for dynamic (refresh request and refresh held high and phase 2 low for at least one full line is brought high by slow memory controller.
grant) and slow (memory ready) memories. Re- clock cycle. Refresh grant signal is high to in- All transistors are MPQ6842. — "Microprocessor
fresh control circuit uses MC7479 dual latch, dicate to dynamic memory system that refresh Applications Manual "(Motorola Series in Solid-
MC7404 hex inverter, and pair of 10K pull-up recycle exists. If memory ready line is low when State Electronics), McGraw-Hill, New York, NY,
sistors. Irefresh
f request state is low when sam- sampled on leading edge of phase 2, phase 1 is
1975, p 4-57-4-58.
100
CENTERING CLOCK SIGNAL— Circuit gener-

ates DC bias across complementary outputs of
Motorola MC10131 flip-flop for optimum oper-
ation with emitter-coupled logic (10,000 series).
Bias is independent of state of flip-flop, which
uses toggle frequency of about 150 MHz. Article
covers applications for other flip-flops and
counters requiring maintenance of best toggle
frequency over wide temperature range. — T.
Balph and H. Gnauden, Build a Clock Bias Circuit
for ECL Flip-Flops, EDN Magazine, May 5, 1976,
p 116.
GLITCH CORRECTOR — Circuit shown prevents

TTL devices from seeing two clock pulses when
output of 555 timer has glitch on falling edge at
about 0.8 V. — J. Magee, Glitch, 73 Magazine,
Jan. 1976, p 10.
VARIABLE WIDTH AND PRF— Low-cost pulse Switched bank of six capacitors can be used in- giving pulse having same frequency as that of
generator uses versatile dual monostable 1C to stead, to give on or off times ranging between input signal. VR, sets trigger level. Suitable reg-
provide clock pulses that can be varied in width 100 ms and 100 ns, as given in table. With switch ulated 5-V supply circuit is also shown. — J. Gar-
over wide range by changing sizes of two ex- in external position, on-time mono is driven by rett, Pulse Generator, Wireless World, Feb.
1976, p 78.
ternal capacitors and adjusting 47K linear pots. three transistors connected as Schmitt trigger
l_ !
Ready
100 pf
Memory
jdn
T 1 T2 T 1 T2 CD -CM>
-w-
02 Bus 02
MC8602 Q
CD
c _
1 /Jf Cer
EDGE DETECTOR— Half of 9014 quad EXCLU-

~Q
C
SIVE-OR gate serves for generating output
pulse for both low-to-high and high-to-low tran-
sitions of input signal. Used for regenerating
clock in self-clocking pulse-width modulation
transmission system. Circuit acts as frequency
doubler for square-wave input. With 1000 pF for
C, output pulse width is 70 ns; for 200 pF, width
is 30 ns; and when C is 0, width is 10 ns. — Cir-
cuits, 73 Magazine, Aug. 1974, p 99.
1 ni Cer
ADJUSTABLE CLOCK WITH MEMORY READY—

Additional timing resistor is switched in or out
of MC8602 pulse-width generator for phase-2
clock to provide memory-ready feature along
with variable clock frequency for MC6800 mi-
croprocessor. Selection of timing resistors for
phase 1 and phase 2 permits generation of all
combinations of phase 1 , phase 2, and stretched
phase 2 pulse widths. All transistors are
MPQ6842. — "Microprocessor Applications
Manual" (Motorola Series in Solid-State Elec-
tronics), McGraw-Hill, New York, NY, 1 975, p 4-
61.
320 kHz FOR CALCULATOR — Two low-cost TTL V and -7.2 V. NAND gates of ICs are connected available as soon as supply voltage is applied. —
ICs generate 320- kHz clock signals for electronic to form free-running multivibrator, with self- T. J. Terrell, Clock Generator for Electronic Cal-
desk calculator. Output swings between +7.2 starting gate C ensuring that clock waveform is culators, Wireless World, Dec. 1975, p 575.
1N4001
1-Hz CLOCK WITH BATTERY BACKUP— Circuit

normally produces output pulses at 1-s inter-
vals with basic accuracy corresponding to that
of power-line frequency. Programmable 8260
timer operates as divide-by-60 counter produc-
ing output swing compatible with TTL or 5-V
CMOS loads. With backup power applied to OR
gate 0,-02, circuit operates reliably at 1 s over 0 V
supply range of 5-15 V. Power drain is mini- -5 V •
mized at ±5 V. — W. G. Jung, "1C Timer Cook-

book," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977,
p 214-215.
WATCH-CRYSTAL TIMER— When used with

standard 4.194-MHz watch crystal, Intersil 7213
crystal-controlled timer generates outputs of 1
pulse per second and 1 pulse per minute, using
internal divider chain. CMOS dynamic and static
dividers keep power dissipation under 1 mW
with 5-V supply. — B. O'Neil, 1C Timers — the
"Old Reliable" 555 Has Company, EDN Maga-
zine, Sept. 5, 1977, p 89-93.
1 MHz 50 1 2% Duty Cycle
CLOCK FOR MC6800 — Produces nonoverlap-

ping complementary 5-V clock outputs as re- MPU 02 and
quired for phase 1 and phase 2 clock inputs of DBE
microprocessor. Oscillator can be any source
having maximum frequency of 1 MHz with TTL
levels and 50% duty cycle, such as Motorola
K1100A. MC3000 and MC3001 TTL gates are
chosen for their speed and drive characteristics.
All transistors are MPQ6842. — "Microprocessor
D>
Applications Manual" (Motorola Series in Solid-
State Electronics), McGraw-Hill, New York, NY,
1975, p 4-1— 4-6.
RC CLOCK — Simple TTL clock generator is suit-

able for most TTL systems. Requires only half
. 1 tii Ceramic
of hex inverter package and three passive com-
ponents. Clock frequency depends on value of
C: 200 pF gives 5 MHz; 1600 pF gives 1 MHz;
0.018 fiF gives 100 kHz; and 0.18 p.F gives 10
kHz. — Circuits. 73 Magazine, Aug. 1974, p 99.
ADJUSTABLE CLOCK FOR MPU— Two MC8602

cross-coupled mono MVBRs with individual
pulse-width adjustments are used as clock os-
cillator to provide frequency flexibility for ex-
perimentation with data throughput, real-time
operation with interrupts, and diagnosis of sys- MPU 02 and
DBE
tem timing problems. Required nonoverlapping
clock pulses for phases 1 and 2 are generated by
propagation delays through MVBRs. Transistor
pairs used for drivers are MPQ6842. — "Micro-
processor Applications Manual" (Motorola Se-
ries in Solid-State Electronics), McGraw-Hill,
New York, NY, 1975, p 4-5-4-10.
CRYSTAL-CONTROLLED TIMER— Intersil 7209

crystal oscillator provides buffered CMOS out-
put capable of driving over five TTL loads at any
crystal frequency up to 10 MHz. Used in appli-
cations requiring high-accuracy buffered timing
signals for system clocks. — B. O'Neil, 1C Tim-
ers— the "Old Reliable" 555 Has Company, EDN
Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977, p 89-93.
for symmetrical complementary-output clock ing positive-going pulses used to trigger divide- tures.— M. Eaton, Symmetrical CMOS Clock Is
having good temperature and supply stability. by-2 flip-flop U3-U4. Circuit will operate over Inexpensive, EDN Magazine, March 20, 1974, p
Gates U and U2 form astable oscillator produc- wide range of supply voltages and tempera- 80 and 83.
+5V
800-Hz CLOCK FOR CASSETTE RECORDER-

565 PLL is set for free-running at 800 Hz with no
input. When data pulses extracted from FSK re-
FROM corded data on cassette tape are fed in, clock is
FSK synchronized to data and stays in sync for up to
DETECTOR
seven Os in succession. — "Signetics Analog
p 859-860.
OUTPUT
FROM mA710
800 H z CLOCK
60-Hz GLITCH-FREE CLOCK — Circuit generates

complementary gated 60-Hz clock pulses that
are always wider than 2 gs, without glitches
even if gate is enabled or disabled during clock
pulse. Accuracy depends on stability of power-
line frequency. — R. I. White, Gated 60 Hz Clock
Avoids Glitches, EDNIEEE Magazine, Nov. 1,
1971, p 52.
*5 V
DRIVER FOR 24 MOS REGISTERS— With input

of clock pulses preshaped to width of about 150
ns, circuit shown will generate 17-V 1.5-A clock
signal required for driving 1024-bit serial MOS
memories or shift registers. Article traces op-
eration of circuit. All diodes are 1N3064. — R. D.
5 O
Hoose and G. L. Anderson, Clock Driver for MOS

Shift Registers, EDNIEEE Magazine, Dec. 15,
1971, p 56-57.
2.5-kHz CLOCK — Requires only 3-mW power to

generate fast 15-V two-phase rectangular
pulses with 100-ns widths and 20-ns rise and fall
times. Suitable for many MOSFET shift regis-
ters. Uses two D13T1 programmable UJT oscil-
lators, each having four-transistor driver stage
using 2N2369 transistors. Oscillators are cross-
synchronized by 130-pF capacitor. Timing and
bias networks of UJTs set pulse repetition fre-
quency.— G. A. Altemose, Low-Power Two-
Phase Clock, EDNIEEE Magazine, May 15, 1971,
p 49.
OSCILLATOR
TWO-PHASE CLOCK FOR 8080— Crystal oscil-
OUTPUT
lator operating at twice desired clock frequency
uses pi network R,-C,-X,-C2 providing 180°
phase shift required for positive feedback to
FF, OUTPUT
input of oscillator G,. D flip-flop FF in divide-by-
2 configuration generates one phase, while
NOR gate G2 generates other phase from basic
oscillator by masking out every other cycle. G3
merely provides enough propagation delay on
second phase to prevent overlap with first
o; phase. Crystal should be below 3 MHz. — D. M.
Risch, 8080 CMOS Clock Uses Two IC's, EDN
Magazine, Jan. 5, 1977, p 50.
(a) ^ n n r
138
Gi 8 G2 FAIRCHILD 9016
82
r2 HEX INVERTER
TWO-INVERTER COLPITTS— Simple low-cost

clock uses two inverters in LC circuit. G, oper-
ates as Colpitts oscillator, with C setting feed-
back level and 1,-0;, setting frequency. Low DC
resistance path through Rt, R.., and L, provides
high negative DC feedback around G, and
biases it into linear region. G2 squares output of
G, to appropriate TTL levels. For values shown,
output period is 1.2 jus and rise and fall times
are under 20 ns — C. A. Herbst, TTL Inverter
Makes Stable Colpitts Oscillator, EDNiEEE Mag-
azine, May 15, 1971, p 50.
2 102't)
TWO-SPEED CLOCK — Creates alternative slow logic 1 gives slow cycles. Processor cycle is
clock cycle for MOS Technology 6502 processor maintained for 1 /us for fast memory access, but
on KIM-1 microcomputer card under control of cycle is automatically stretched to 2 /us for
SPEED SELECT line generated by slow memo- slower 2102s. — Y. M. Gupta, True Confessions:
ries. Control logic of 0 gives fast cycles, while How I Relate to KIM, BYTE, Aug. 1976, p 44-48.
+5V
+12V
TWO-PHASE CLOCK FOR 8080— Typical clock level translation in combination with 32-MHz Buy or Build? EDN Magazine, Sept. 20, 1975, p
53-55.
design for Intel 8080 microprocessor system crystal to generate two-phase 12-V clock wave-
uses carefully designed logic sequence and form.— S. G. Brannan, /uP Clock Generators —
139
CLOCK SIGNAL CIRCUITS
DC From D,
BATTERY BACKUP POWER— Provides 60-Hz

square-wave output for driving electronic
timekeeping circuits from battery during AC
power failure. 555 timer is connected as square-
wave astable MVBR normally locked to incom-
ing 60-Hz power frequency. R, should be
trimmed for zero beat with 60-Hz source. When
primary power fails, reference voltage disap-
pears and effect of C, on frequency is mini-
mized. 555 now oscillates at frequency deter-
mined by R, and C„ which is 60 Hz. Use 6-V
battery. — W. G. Jung, "1C Timer Cookbook,"
Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977; p 201-
203.
*c, C,. Choose R, for > 1/3 V-f- p-p across C,.
vcc
SYNCHRONIZER — For each switch closure, cir-

cuit produces one output pulse that is one clock
period wide, synchronized with clock. When
switch is closed, debouncing latch using 7400
gates goes high and makes flip-flop B high. Next
clock pulse makes flip-flop C high and resets CLOCK
p
flip-flop B. At next clock pulse, flip-flop C goes
low to complete cycle of operation.— E. E. Hriv-
nak. House Cleaning the Logical Way, 73 Mag-
azine, Aug. 1974, p 85-90.
_r _r _r
A
rn
FF
FF
B
C
1 r
C
J~
TO
OC (STROBE)
GATING
CIRCUITS
C (NOT CLOCK) PLEX
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
8 MULTI-
C (CLOCK)
counts, and displaying result. — M. A. Chapman,

10-Hz CLOCK — Stable and accurate clock is meter receiver as part of digital display system
High Performance 20-Meter Receiver with Dig-
generated by high-precision 100-kHz crystal os- that shows frequency of received signal after ital Frequency Readout, Ham Radio , Nov. 1977,
cillator and decade divider chain. Used in 20- counting HFO, LO, and BFO outputs, summing
p 56-65.
CLOCK FOR REGULATED SUPPLY— Single RCA

CD4009A serves as clock generator and mono
for driving regulated power supply having fold- Cp
back current-limiting protection. Rtc and C,c are
major frequency-determining components. Rs
SIGNAL
should be made equal to or greater than 2Rtc.
Article gives equation for period T of oscillator,
VTR CLOCK — Locked oscillator using only two- which ranges from about 2.2 to 2.5 times
input NAND gate and 555 tinier provides logic RtcCtc. — J. L. Bohan, Clocking Scheme Improves
clock signal for videotape recorder. Vertical Power Supply Short-Circuit Protection, EDN
sync signal, stripped from video information re- Magazine, March 5, 1974, p 49-52.
corded on tape, is used as control signal. C, con-
trols locking range for free-running frequency of
555. When C2 is charging (555 output is high), R2
and D, determine time constant T,. During dis-
charge of C2, D, is reverse-biased and discharge
time constant T2 is determined by R3 and R„. —
L. Saunders, Locked Oscillator Uses a 555
Timer, EDN Magazine, June 20, 1975, p 114.
CLOCK 14 PROVIDES THE

INPUT) 1 4 BIT BINARY COUNTER ADDRESS
DURING
<
FOUR-PHASE CLOCK — Provides expandable 3- JPUTi 11 EACH OF WHICH
4 OVERLAPPING
bit binary output and four overlapping clock
- D~ CLOCK
pulses for each unique binary output. A-output WHEN REQUIRED L
A PULSES OCCUR
of 7493 binary counter is used along with clock
input to form four-phase overlapping clock TO NEXT COUNTER'’
function. Article includes timing diagram that
shows sequence of output pulses. Developed 1 /6 7404 1/6 7404
INVERTER
for use in addressing multiplexers, ROMs, and
7408
other digital units. — B. Brandstedt, Clock Pulse INVERTER %■
Generator Has Addressable Output, EDN Mag-
azine, Dec. 15, 1972, p 42. GATES
54-PHASE CLOCK
Vv 'T:
OUTPUTS
AND-
boosts temperature stability to 0.05%/°C and differentiates output signal of oscillator Urllz and 83.
CHAPTER 13
Code Circuits
Covers Morse-code circuits as used in amateur, maritime, and other CW

communication applications for keyers, monitors, code generators and
regenerators, decoders, practice oscillators, CW filters, and call-letter
generators. For circuits capable of handling CW along with other types of
modulation and for circuits handling other types of codes, see also Filter, IF
Amplifier, Keyboard, Memory, Microprocessor, Single-Sideband, Receiver,
Transceiver, and Transmitter chapters.
At- AMH
DETECTOR Mr uu i r-u i
EXCEPT AS INDICATED, DECIMAL
VALUES OF CAPACITANCE ARE

IN MICROFARADS 1 JiF I ; OTHERS
ARE IN PICOFARADS I pF OR jjrF);
kRESISTANCES ARE000IN
*1000. M = 1000 OHMS',
POLY- POLYSTYRENE
I I -PC V
68k
MAIN TUNING
, 5000
CR1 - CR3, iricl. — High-speed switching L3 — Radio Shack type 273-101 rf choke. L8 - Radio Shack type 273-102 rf choke.
diode (Radio Shack type 276-1620). A/W- wire wound
L4 — 4 turns insulated hookup Q1 , RS-2035).
Q5 — JFET (Radio Shack type
over cold end of L3.
J1 — RCA-type phono jack.
J2 — 1 /4-inch phone jack. L5 - 5 turns insulated hookup wire wound Q2 - Q4, incl. — Transistor (Radio Shack type
over ground end of L7. 276-1617).
J3, J4 — Binding post.
LI — 3 turns insulated hookup wire wound L6 — 4 turns insulated hookup wire wound T1 — Audio transformer (Radio Shack type
273-1378).
over (ground) end of L2. adjacent to high end of L7.
L2 - Radio Shack type 273-101 rf choke. L7 - Radio Shack type 273-101 rf choke with T2 273-1380).
— Audio transformer (Radio Shack type
Tap at 4 turns above ground end. six of the original turns removed.
40-METER DIRECT-CONVERSION— Simple, 02 that drives 2-stage AF amplifier having peak regulator powers VFO circuit for good fre-
foolproof circuit design uses discrete compo- response at about 650 Hz for most comfortable quency stability. Receiver will tune any 100-kHz
nents mounted on printed-circuit board shaped CW listening. VFO uses Armstrong or tickler- segment of 40-meter band. — J. Rusgrove, The
to fit in oval herring can. Single 7-MHz RF stage feedback circuit, with CR1 and CR2 connected Herring-Aid Five, QST, July 1976, p 20-23.
and voltage-tuned VFO feed product detector as voltage-variable-capacitance diodes. Zener
141
MORSE-CODE SET — National LM3909 flasher

1C is connected as tone oscillator that simulta-
neously drives loudspeakers at both sending
and receiving ends of wire line used for Morse-
code communication system. Single alkaline
penlight cell lasts 3 months to 1 year depending
on usage. Three-wire system using parallel tel-
egraph keys eliminates need for send-receive
switch. Tone frequency is about 400 Hz. — "Lin-
ear Applications, Vol. 2," National Semiconduc-
tor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-154, p 5-6.
CQ ON TAPE — Frequently used code message

such as amateur radio CQ call is recorded by
keying audio oscillator with desired message
and picking up oscillator output with micro-
phone of end less-loop cassette or other tape re-
corder. Rewound recording is played back Vcc
through single-transistor stage connected as

shown for driving keying relay of transmitter.
Circuit requires shielding. — Circuits, 73 Maga-
zine, July 1977, p 34. 1C legend
KEYER WITH MEMORY— Includes sidetone os- completed. Gates A, B, and C form gated MVBR. audio sidetone. K, is B & F Enterprises ERA-
cillator and dash-dot memory along with vari- Gates D, E, O, and P serve to complete charac- 21061 SPST reed relay. Supply can be 9-V bat-
able speed, automatic spacing, and self-com- ters. JK flip-flops FF, and FFZ, D flip-flop FF3, and tery.— T. R. Crawford, A Low-Power Cosmos
pleting dots and dashes. If dot paddle is pressed gates F, G, and L provide character-shaping re- Electronic Keyer in Two Versions, CQ, Nov.
and released while keyer is generating dash, dot quired for dash-dot memory using gates M, N,
1975, p 17-24.
is generated with correct spacing after dash is and RS flip-flop FF„. Gates J and K generate
143
CODE CIRCUITS
KEYER — Uses gating and flip-flop functions to minimum spacing between dots and dashes re- TIMER FOR CODE PRACTICE— Signetics
generate dots and dashes under control of gardless ofpaddle movements. — A. D. Helfrick, NE555V timer operating on 9-V supply serves as
gated clock. SN7413 Schmitt trigger is con- A Simple 1C Keyer, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1973, p AF oscillator providing adequate volume for
nected as relaxation oscillator. Circuit provides 37-38.
classroom instruction. Output tone can be var-
ied from several hundred to several thousand
hertz. — J. Burney, Code Practice Oscillator,
QST, July 1974, p 37.
DRIVER
-O +12V
PREAMP
AF
EXCEPT AS INDICATED, DECIMAL VALUES OF

CAPACITANCE ARE IN MICROFARADS I jjF I ;
OTHERS ARE IN PICOFARADS I pF OR jjJiF);
RESISTANCES ARE IN OHMS ;
k = I 000, M= 1 000 000.
POLY - POLYSTYRENE
FL5
RC ACTIVE
750-Hz CW
FILTER
Two-part article gives all other circuits of re-

3.5 W FOR CW — Discrete devices minimize dis- ceiver covering 1.8-2 MHz. RC active bandpass ceiver. — D. DeMaw, His Eminence — the Re-
tortion and eliminate fuzziness while listening filter peaked at 800 Hz improves S/N ratio for ceiver, QST, Part 2 — July 1976, p 14-17 (Part
to low-level CW signals in communication re- weak signals. Adjust BFO of receiver to 800 Hz. 1 — June 1976, p 27-30).
144
42 V
SENSOR KEYER — Skin resistance of about 10K

creates dashes when finger touches grid pat-
tern on left side of paddle and dots when other
finger touches pattern on other side. Transis-
tors act as solid-state switches. Developed for
use with Heathkit CWkeyer HD-10. Supply is 10
V, obtained from 10-V zener connected through
appropriate dropping resistor to higher-voltage
source. Article covers construction of paddle by
etching printed-wiring board. — T. Urbizu, Try a
Sensor Keyer, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1978, p 184-
185.
Tv
CR1 RS TO RF
OUT
O+SV
4-50/Y
TO SPEAKER/
HEADPHONES
NOT CRITICAL
AF OSCILLATOR MONITORS CW— Can be

added to any transceiver not already having
built-in sidetone oscillator, to hear keying of
transmitter. RF input from transmitter is recti-
fied by CR1 to provide about 6-VDC supply. Key-
ing of carrier on and off turns NE555 AF oscil-
lator on and off correspondingly. — J. Arnold, A
CW Monitor for the Swan 270, QST, Aug. 1976,
p 44.
CQ CALL SYNTHESIZER — Uses only two Sig-

netics 8223 256-bit PROMs for storing up to
2048 bits of code information, for automatic
generation of Morse-code CQ calls, test mes-
sages, and otherfrequently used messages. Re-
peated wonts are stored in only one location
and selected as needed, to quadruple capacity
of memory. PROMs can be programmed in field
or custom-programmed by manufacturer.
Speed and timing of code characters are deter-
mined by UJT oscillator Q1, variable from about
4 to 40 Hz or 5 to 50 WPM. CR1 and CR2 are
VALUES OF CAPACITANCE ARE Archer (Radio Shack) 276-042 orequivalent. CR3
IN MICROFARADS l jiF ) ; OTHERS
ARE IN PICOFARADS (pF OR >.JiF); is 1N34A, 1N270, or equivalent germanium. 01
RESISTANCES ARE IN OHMS', is Motorola MU4891 or equivalent. Article de-
k *1000, M« I 000 000
scribes circuit operation and programming in
detail. — J. Pollock, A Digital Morse Code Syn-
SIDETONE OSC. thesizer, QST, Feb. 1976, p 37-41.
145
CODE CIRCUITS
OSCILLATOR
C2
CMOS KEYER — Draws only 0.4 mA on standby

and 2 mA with key down if supply is 10 V. Will
work properly with 4 to 15 V. Features include
self-completing dots, dashes, and spaces, along
with sidetone generator and built-in transmit-
ter keying circuit. Ratio of dashes to dots is 3:1,
and space has same duration as dot. Time base
of keyer is generated by NOR gates U2C and
U2D connected as class A MVBR. Frequency of
oscillator is inversely linear with setting of R1.
Inverter U3D buffers oscillator and squares its
output. Flip-flop U6B divides frequency by 2 and
provides clock source with perfect 50% duty
cycle. Once enabled, gates ensure completion
along with following space. Article gives power
supply circuit operating from AC line and 12-V
battery. — J. W. Pollock, COSMOS 1C Electronic
Keyer, Ham Radio, June 1974, p 6—10.
SIDETONE MONITOR— Mostek MK5086N 1C is

used with crystal in range from 2 to 3.5 MHz as
signal generator driving FET audio amplifier.
Switch SI gives choice of four AF tones, deter-
mined by dividing crystal frequency in hertz by
5120 for T1, 4672 for T2, 4234 for T3, and 3776
for T4. Can also be used as code practice set and
as audio signal generator. — J. Garrett, A Side-
tone Monitor-Oscillator-Audio Generator, QST,
June 1978, p 43.
2 5
+ 9V
ISOLATOR
REGENERATED CW — Audio oscillator whose

frequency can be varied is keyed in accordance
with incoming CW signal, to give clean locally loop serves as tunable audio filter and LED ing aid to indicate that PLL is locked on to
generated audio signal without background switch driver for activating NE555 variable-fre- incoming signal. — Regenerated CW, 73
noise and interference. NE567 phase-locked quency tone oscillator. LED serves as visual tun- Magazine, Dec. 1977, p 152-153.
15
PRODUCT DETECTOR — Designed for use in 40-

meter CW direct-conversion receiver, in which
oscillator input is from 3.5-4 MHz VFO. U1 is
RCA CA3046 transistor quad. Circuit provides
bias stabilization for constant-current transis-
tor and some amplification of AF output. T1 is
audio transformer. — A. Phares, The CA3046 1C
in a Direct-Conversion Receiver, QST, Nov.
1973, p 45.
+ 5V
TONE DECODER — Decodes audio output of am-

ateur radio receiver. Resulting audio tone burst
corresponds to CW signal being received, with
tone frequency varying with receiver tuning.
Center frequency of NE567 phase-locked loop is
adjusted with R1 . Audio is translated into digital
format of Is and Os, with tones for Os. Output
can be fed into computer for automatic trans-
lation of Morse code and printout as text. — W.
A. Hickey, The Computer Versus Hand Sent
Morse Code, BYTE, Oct. 1976, p 12-14 and 106.
OSCILLATOR BUFFERf PUSH-PUSH180 DOUBLER

-O +12V
15H <?kl] 56k rp~T^
*-
* j-AAA^-p
14-14.4 MHz
r
AAAr-
>4700_<
7
50-0HM
OUTPUT
(
r
-1—1300 ["46
+12 V
P- POLYSTYRENE
( *—
• ■PHASING
O ‘ RMS VOLTAGE

CAPACITANCE ARE □ ■ DC VOLTAGE ( jiF ) ;
IN MICROFARADS
OTHERS ARE IN PICOFARADS ( pF OR jijiF);
BOTTOM
PIN 4 RESISTANCES ARE IN OHMS J
VIEW
TO 330-OHM k*1 000, M *1 000 000.
RESISTOR
C4 — 35-pF air variable (Millen 26035 or ler 42A686CBI or equivalent). Use shield R2 — Optional circuit (see text). 10,000-ohm
Hammarlund HF-35). can (35-mm film canister or Miller S-33). linear-taper composition control.
L
C5 — 16-pF air trimmer, pc-board mount L7 — Toroidal inductor, 0.9 /LtH. Use 12 turns T1 — Trifilar-wound trans. 2 ;uH, 20 turns, j_
Johnson 187-0109-005. of No. 24 enam. wire on a T50-6 toroid twisted six turns per inch. No. 28 enam.
CR1 — Silicon high-speed switching diode, core. (See QST ads for toroid suppliers — wire on a T50-2 toroid core (see text).
1 N914 or equiv. Amidon, G. R. Whitehouse and Palomar U2 - RCA CA3045 array 1C.
L6 — Slug-tuned inductor, 3.6 to 8.5 mH (Mil- Engrs.). VR1 — Zener diode, 9.1 V, 1 W.
BFO FOR 20 METERS — Uses CA3045 transistor of push-push doubler U2C-U2D. Output of BFO ing signal, typically 700 Hz for CW reception.
array, with U2A as series-tuned Clapp oscillator is applied to product detector rather than to Article covers construction and adjustment. —
covering 7-7.2 MHz. Tuned emitter-follower mixer of receiver. Audio signal from detector is D. DeMaw, Understanding Linear ICs, QST, Feb.
U2B provides push-pull drive at 7 MHz to bases frequency difference between BFO and incom-
1977, p 19-23.
■
CODE CIRCUITS 147
RF INPUT
CODE MONITOR — Works with any transmitter,

regardless of type of keying. Use any good PNP
KEYER WITH DOT MEMORY— Features include speed of keyer. Pulse-width stability at all transistor. With NPN transistor, reverse con-
self-completing characters, exact timing of speeds is better than 5% between first and all nections to diode. Frequency of tone gets
characters, and dot memory. Timing circuit following pulses. Dot memory U2B allows key- higher as resistance of 250K pot is reduced.
uses 74121 mono MVBR U1, serving dot gen- ing of dot at any time, even if dash has not yet Monitor is turned off at minimum resistance.
erator and output stage U2A, dot memory U2B, been completed. Dot is held in memory and Enough RF to operate monitor can be obtained
and dash generator U3A-U3B. U2 and U3 are keyed out automatically after dash. Diodes are simply by connecting it to chassis of receiver or
7473 dual JK flip-flops. Length of timing pulse 1N914. — J. H. Fox, An Integrated Keyer/TR transmitter. — J. Smith, Yet Another Code Mon-
is determined by R1-C1, with R1 controlling Switch, QST, Jan. 1975, p 15-20. itor, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1971, p 58.
9
CW CALL GENERATOR — Basic CW identifier

uses two gates of 7400 to form starting flip-flop
of automatic message generator. Provides ad-
justable speed and tone, with up to 256 bits of
storage in Harris H1256 PROM. IC2 is 555 astable
MVBR providing clock signal for driving two
7493 4-bit binary counters that address PROM.
When counters reach maximum address of 255,
next clock count makes PROM restart at ad-
dress 0. Each address turns on tone oscillator
for one clock period, producing one dit. Three
addresses in row turn on tone for three clock
periods, producing one dah. Space between
dits and dahs of same letter is equal to one dit,
letter space is three dits, and word space is six
dits (2 dahs). Thus, W takes nine addresses. Ar-
ticle describes operation in detail and tells how
to modify circuit for use as RTTY message gen-
erator.— R. B. Joerger, PROM Message Gener-
ator for RTTY, 73 Magazine, March 1977, p 94-
98.
TIME CLOCK
5-50WPM
1C NO. TYPE
1.2,6 401 1 AE
3,4,5 40I3AE
4001 AE
8
7 402 3 A E
eration, as with Heathkit HW-7 transceiver. Will

operate directly from 3-15 V batteries of QRP
CMOS KEYER Features include self-complet- automatic character spacing, all achieved with transceiver, without regulation. G. Hinkle,
ing dots and dashes, dot and dash memories, low-power CMOS digital devices that are com- The QRP Accu-Keyer, 73 Magazine, Aug. 1975,
iambic operation, dot and dash insertion, and patible with low-power (QRP) transceiver op- p 58-60.
149
CODE CIRCUITS
•12 V
.01
CW FILTER — Simple single-section parallel-

tuned active filter uses negative-impedance REGENERATIVE CW FILTER— Can be added be-
converter or gyrator to replace hard-to-get in- tween product detector and volume control of
ductor ofpassive code filter. Capacitor CL is gy- SSB receiver or transceiver that does not have
rated from 0.0332 /xF to effective inductance of CW filter. Just before oscillation occurs, gain
1.87 H. Filter has 6-dB gain at resonance and es- becomes extremely high with very narrow
sentially zero output impedance. Bandpass is 85 bandpass. Regeneration and bandpass can be
Hz centered at about 865 Hz. Uses single -12 V adjusted as required. Filter typically has 40-Hz
supply. Resistors R are 7.5K, matched to about bandwidth centered on 800 Hz. — R. A. Yoe-
2%.— N. Sipkes, Build This CW Filter, 73 Mag- mans. Further Enhancing the Yaesu FTDX-560
azine, June 1977, p 55. Transceiver, CQ, July 1972, p 16-18 and 20-22.
8223 PROM U3 drive 74151 multiplexer/data se- Timed holdoff keeps identifier from being re- of circuit and gives construction and program-
lector U4 for keying NE555 audio oscillator U5 keyed within specified time period, with reiden- ming details. — W. Hosking, ID with a PROM, 73
which feeds transmitter mike input through RA. tifying at end of period. Article covers operation Magazine, Nov. 1976, p 90-92.
RECORDED-CODE KEYER — CW message re-

corded on cassette tape with keyed tone gen-
erator isplayed back for keying transmitter with
frequently repeated messages. Transmitted
signal is essentially perfect reproduction of re-
cording. Automatic transmission can be
stopped at any point by tapping hand key; this
deactivates tape recorder for manual keying of
transmitter. All transistors are 2N2222 or equiv-
alent BCY58. Use 24-V reed relays with IK coil
resistance. Pilot lamps are 24 V rated up to 3 W.
CR, is silicon diode. Whenever recorder emits
beep, positive signal appears at base of Q2, mak-
ing it conduct and activate K, whose contacts
go to key jack of transmitter. — A. Day, An Audio
Tape-Controlled CW Keyer, CQ, Nov. 1971, p
31-32.
PLL CODE REGENERATOR — Permits comforta-

ble listening to CW signals deeply embedded in
noise, hash, and interference, by detecting one
particular CW transmission and keying inde-
pendent oscillator with its signal. Consists of
signal amplifier Q1 , narrow-band PLL frequency
detector and trigger U1, PLL function generator
U2, gate Q2, and AF output amplifier U3. In ab-
sence of triggering signal, output pin 8 of U1
presents high impedance to ground. With trig-
gering frequency, output presents low imped-
O ance to ground. Oscillator U2 is gated by U1
through 02. — C. R. Lewart and R. S. Libenschek,
CW Regenerator for Interference-Free Commu-
LOAD
nications, Ham Radio, April 1974, p 54-56.
-6v. — 12v.
+ 6v.<
T T
^ Output
13
5 11
1 F Ft
MANUAL CLOCK 1
> -12v.
4 |
2 6
7 , 3 14 10 12
DATA and CONTROL switches to ground and

RECIRCULATE switch to hold, then pressing
START button (with speed control set fast) until
register is full of zeros. Release START button
and switch control to +6 V for about 10 s. Now
set CONTROL to ground and start program-
ming. To enter dah, switch manual clock
through three complete up-center/down-center
cycles, switch data line to ground, and cycle
manual clock through one cycle to insert space
into memory. To enter dit, switch manual clock
through only one up/down cycle. Continue until
entire message is entered in register, switch to
200-BIT MEMORY — Drawback of volatile code- clock pulse. Inverters L and l2 of CMOS hex in- RECIRCULATE, and push START switch. Mes-
storing memory is offset by low cost and com- verter IC3 form variable-frequency gated sage will now be sent in perfect code at any de-
parative ease of programming. 1C, is Signetics square-wave clock oscillator controlled by state sired speed. — B. P. Vandenberg, An Inexpen-
251 ID MOS dual 200-bit shift register whose of flip-flop FFZ in 74C74 CMOS dual D flip-flop. sive Memory Keyer for Contests, CQ, May 1976,
digital levels are shifted one position for each Shift register must first be cleared by setting
p 50-51.
CODE CIRCUITS 151
CMOS KEYER — Gives variable speed, auto-

matic spacing, and self-completing dots and
dashes. Gates C, B, and Aform gated MVBR. Dot
paddle initiates dot by making output of gate D
go low, while gate E goes low for dash. Char-
acter-shaping section (gates G, H, and F with JK
flip-flops FF, and FF2) takes square pulses from
pin 3 of MVBR gate B and gives perfectly spaced
dots and dashes. FF, divides clock pulses by 2,
making dot equal to one complete period of
MVBR. FF2 divides output of FF, by 2, and out-
puts of both flip-flops are logically ORed to pro-
vide dashes. K, is SPST reed relay. Supply can
be 9-V battery. — T. R. Crawford, A Low-Power
Cosmos Electronic Keyer in Two Versions, CQ,
Nov. 1975, p 17-24.
OR CIRCUIT
KEYER OSCILLATOR — Oscillator or clock starts ,NPUTSCIRCUITS

KEY FR0M
when key is closed and can be held until dot, and hold
dash, or space is completed. U1 is SN7400, and
U2 is SN74L04. Diodes at input of U2A form OR
gate that controls oscillator. These inputs can
be used to keep oscillator running for self -com-
pleting action. Time constant, set by Cl and R1,
is 4 ms which is width of clock pulse. Values for
C2, R2, and R3 give pulse repetition rate of 50 to
95 ms, corresponding to about 12 to 24 WPM.
For higher speeds, reduce values of C2 and R2.
CR1 and CR2 are signal diodes that prevent first
pulse from being different; 250-pF capacitor on
output prevents noise spikes from triggering
keyer circuits falsely. — J. T. Miller, Integrated-
Circuit Oscillator, Ham Radio, Feb. 1978, p 77.
PROD. DET. AUDIO AMP.
3.5 MHz
80-METER CW DIRECT-CONVERSION— Reso- LO

nant-dipole antenna feeds directly into bal-
anced product detector that cancels strong in-
terfering local broadcast signals but adds
products of mixing with local oscillator that
covers 3490-3660 kHz for CW work. R3 is ad-
justed only once for best performance. Only half
of GE GEL277 dual power amplifier is used, for
gain of 40 dB. Circuit values make AF amplifier
resonate at 1 kHz, with 12dB of attenuation per
octave on either side of this center frequency.
T1 should be shielded against vertical-sync
magnetic fields of TV sets up to 60 feet away.
T1 is transistor push-pull output transformer. prevent imbalance effects. Article gives con- Front End for Direct-Conversion Receivers,
Use twisted pair for connecting 1-1 and 2-2, to struction details for L1-L4. — B. Pasaric, A New QST, Oct. 1974, p 11-14.
CW FILTER — Variable-bandwidth variable-fre-

quency audio filter can be tuned to center fre-
quency anywhere in range from 300 to 3000 Hz.
Bandwidth can be as narrow as 50 Hz, which is
about 3 times theoretical minimum of 15 Hz for
50-bit words and Morse code at 25 WPM. Per-
formance can be improved over entire fre-
quency range by using 741 opamp. — R. Skelton,
Comments, Ham Radio, June 1975, p 56-57.
KEYER SPEED CONTROL — Electronic time base NE555 oscillator is 1 00 times keyer speed. Keyer
provides direct readout of keyer speed for 5 to clock is obtained by dividing oscillator speed by
40 WPM in increments of 5 WPM by noting po- 120; thus, for 24 WPM, oscillator runs at 2400
sitions ofthree speed-control switches. Vernier Hz which can be read easily on digital counter.
adjustment pot R1 can be used for continuous Time-base divider would supply 20-Hz clock fre-
speed adjustment if desired. Analog frequency quency for 24-WPM keying. — G. Jones, Cali-
meter provides alternate direct indication of brated Electronic Keyer Time Base, Ham Radio,
keyer speed on milliammeter that can be cali- Aug. 1975, p 39-41.
brated in words per minute. Frequency of
MEMORY
128-BIT CODE STORE — Draws almost no memory by placing SI in program position zero point, and unit is ready for use. If debouncer is
power, can be used on RTTY as well as CW, and and pressing start switch PB1 to dump contents not effective, move its wire from IC1-1 1 to IC4-
can be reprogrammed in less than 1 min. Built of shift register and leave only 0s. Now, set SI 10. Easier-to-get alternate values for Cl and R2
around Motorola MC14562CP 128-bit shift reg- to desired first 1 or 0, push switch PB2 once, and are 0.05 /nF and 1 megohm. — C. W. Andreasen,
ister. Combination of 1 (high level) and 0 (low repeat for rest of coded identifier. Set SI to RE- Programmable CW ID Unit, 73 Magazine, Oct.
level) bits forming identifier message is fed into CIRCULATE, push PB1 to cycle back to starting 1976, p 52-53.
153
CODE CIRCUITS
<$ — o*
10-60 WPM KEYER— Uses pA747 (pair of
/xA741Cs in 10-pin TO-5 package). R2 adjusts
relative length of first two dits to provide even
spacing. Dot-dash ratio is set by C3 and C4, with
C4 for dot and both in parallel for dash. Collector
of C4 provides for keying positive voltage (20 V
or less) to ground. Keying transistor will handle
up to 50 mA without heatsink. Characters are
self-completing. Used with low-power trans-
ceiver.— H. F. Batie, Introducing the Argomate,
Ham Radio, April 1974, p 26-33.
01-04 • 2N3T05, HEP73 6. arc

Cffl. CR2 • 5 IV/O.SW ZENER
(HEP Z02II . o'cj
M * PC BOARD CONNECTION
KEYER WITH TR CONTROL— Provides auto-

matic control of TR relay for break-in operation.
74221 TTL retriggerable mono MVBR forms
dots or dashes, with paddle selecting side of 1C
that puts out pulse. Half of A2 (74123 dual re-
triggerable mono MVBR with clear) makes
spaces between dots or dashes. Remaining half
of A2 acts with A3b and A3c as TR switch. — B.
Voight, The TTL One Shot, 73 Magazine, Feb.
1977, p 56-58.
VFO CONTROL TO ±1 Hz — Used in coherent 3500.000-kHz harmonic signal from 500- kHz fre- kHz. Same process occurs in receive offset
CW radio station to hold frequency of variable- quency standard, to produce 50-kHz signal ± chain, except that standard frequency in U3B is
frequency oscillator constant at 3550 kHz within undesired drift for mixing in U3Awith 50.000-kHz such that receiver will be 1 kHz away from de-
1 Hz so 12-WPM signal can be handled in band- signal from standard. If there is difference in fre- sired 3550.000 kHz and produce desired 1-kHz
width of only 9 Hz for greatly improved signal- quency, U3A generates control voltage propor- audio output. — A. Weiss, Coherent C.W. — the
to-noise ratio. Sample of VFO output, squared tional to amount of difference, applied to var- C.W. of the Future, CQ, June 1977, p 24-30.
by Q, and U,, goes to U2 for mixing with actortuning diode to pull VFO back to 3550.000
CODE REGENERATOR — Converts noisy CW

output of receiver into TTL Is and Os for driving
automatic Morse-code printer. Clipper U1A and
800-Hz active bandpass filter U1B feed injec-
tion-locked 800-Hz phase-shift oscillator U3
(National LM7401CN or Motorola HEP-C6052P).
U1 is LM1458N or MC1458P. U2 uses part of
LM709CN or HEP-C6103P as matched pair of 7-
V back-to-back zener diodes. Diode detector D1
has time constant of about 5 ms, which is short
enough for highest Morse-code speeds. Detec-
tor feeds LM311N or MLM311P1 voltage com-
parator U4 which can drive TTL or DTL directly.
National LM380N audio amplifier U5 allows CW
signal to drive loudspeaker directly. — H. Olson,
CW Regenerator/Processor, 73 Magazine, July
1976, p 80-82.
1-kHz TONE DECODER — Used as interface be-

+ 12 V +5V
tween amateur CW receiver and Motorola 6800
microcomputer to copy any code speed from 3
to 60 WPM while adjusting automatically to ir-
regularities ofhand-sent code. Translation pro-
gram given in article requires about 600 bytes
of memory. Algorithm can be converted to run
on almost any 8-bit microprocessor. Tone de-
coder is 567 phase-locked loop tuned to center
frequency of about 1 kHz, with bandwidth of
about 100 Hz. Circuit will switch fast enough for
most code speeds. PLL gives noise immunity.
Optimum input level is about 200 mV. Output
rests at +5 V, dropping near ground when tone
of correct frequency is detected. — R. D. Grappel 10
and J. Hemenway, Add This 6800 MORSER to
U MSG
Your Amateur Radio Station, BYTE, Oct. 1976, R8
'o°* r-h
p 30-35.
-AAA/-1
MS
ul
U1 — Quad, CMOS, two-input, NAND g

6V (CD4011AE, SCL4011AD, etc ).
U2,etc.).
U7 Quad. CMOS, two-input, NOR gate
(CD4001AE, etc.).
U3 — Dual-CMOS, J-K flip-flop (CD4027AE,
U4 etc.).
— Dual-CMOS, D flip-flop (CD4013AE, etc.).
U5 — CMOS, 12-bit binary counter (CD4040AE,
U6 IM6518CJN).
- 1024 X 1-bit CMOS RAM (Intersil
KEYER WITH MEMORY — Low-drain CMOS cir- Playback of stored message can be interrupted
cuit permits storage in RAM of message being by closing either paddle contact. 1024-bit mem-
keyed, for repeated later use by pushing button. ory will hold two runs of alphabet, two sets of lowed by 0. Free-running clock ensures that
Includes monitor, simple weight control, and numbers, and several punctuation marks. Dot spaces will be recorded. — C. B. Opal, The Micro-
both positive and negative keying outputs. is stored as 1 followed. by 0; dash is three Is fol- TO Message Keyer, QST, Feb. 1978, p 11-14.
CODE CIRCUITS 155
STOPPING PADDLE BOUNCE— Simple circuit

prevents generation of erroneous dots by pad-
dle contact bounce in keyers having dot mem-
ory. Uses 74121 mono MVBR and 7432 AND
gate. Output of 74121 stays low if paddle is not
TWO-TIMER KEYER — Characters are self-com- equivalent 400 V PIV at 1 A. Q1 and Q2 are in use or if dots or dashes are being sent. Re-
pleting and fully adjustable as to speed and 2N2222, 03 is 2N5964, and RL1 is 12-V reed lease of dash paddle makes 74121 transmit
length of character. When dot key is closed, relay. Capacitor values are in microfarads. All high-level pulse to AND gate, long enough to
NE555 timer U1 becomes astable MVBR with pots are linear. Power is not regulated. — A. block dot caused by bounce. Suitable only for
speed determined by RB and dot duration by Ring, Build the World's Simplest Keyer, 73 Mag- keyers using +5 V. — B. Locher, Keyer Modifi-
RA. Identical timer U2 provides longer character azine, May 1977, p 46-47. cation, Ham Radio, Aug. 1976, p 80.
lengths for dashes. All diodes are 1N4004 or
-VDD
KEYER WITH MEMORY— Features include dot least one year on 9-V transistor battery. Article
and dash memory, gated clock, low standby describes circuit operation in detail. U1 is 4011 U6 is 4071 quid two-input OR gate. U7 is 4001
and key-down currents, built-in sidetone oscil- quad two-input NAND gate. U2 and U4 are 4081 quad two-input NOR gate. — E. A. Li
Pfeiffer, MINI-
lator with loudspeaker, and keying circuit for quad two-input AND gates. U3 is 4013 dual D MOS — the Best Keyer Yet?, 73 Magazine, Aug.
grid-block keyed transmitter. Will operate at flip-flop. U5 is 4024 seven-stage binary counter.
1976, p 38-40 and 42-43.
156
TO 12V
AUTO SUPPLY
AUTOMATIC HI ON HORN — Pressing start but-

ton of circuit momentarily makes it send letters
HI in Morse code on automobile horn, as
friendly signal to another ham on road. Uses
NE555 timer as oscillator, acting with counter
IC2, decoder IC3, power-supply latch, and reg-
ulator. Space between four dots of H and two
dots of I is achieved by not using pin 5 of de-
coder. RY1 should pull in at 5 V and 16 mA max-
imum, while RY2 should pull in at 5 V and 80 mA
maximum and have contacts for switching 0.5-
A inductive load of horn. — J. F. Reid, Sending
HI, 73 Magazine, May 1977, p 90.
9-I2V
QUASI-BREAK-IN — Amateur station stays in transmit mode and stay there after last char- gized. Developed for use with cathode-keyed
receive mode until operator starts to send code. acter is sent, for delay of several seconds (de- transmitters.— F. E. Hinkle, Jr., KOX for CW, 73
Tapping on key makes transmitter switch into termined byR1) before transmitter is deener- Magazine, Feb. 1975, p 129-130.
CMOS KEYER — Uses two CD4001 AE quad two- of remaining gates synthesize three-input NOR justable from below 10 to over 70 WPM with
input NOR gates. Q1A-Q1B form time-base gate for dash control. Q2D controls time-base R3. — C. J. Bader, Improved CW Transceiver for
MVBR, and Q1C-Q1D form dash flip-flop. Three MVBR and provides keyer output. Speed is ad- 40 and 80, Ham Radio, July 1977, p 18-22.
'k
♦5
CODE CIRCUITS 157
16
13
‘
t
17 10
15
12
13
14 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
14 ▼END
WIRES
5115
H
G
F
E
D
V X S > V
2 V V V
> >
3
C
B
X > V v V
4 V * V X
START
POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE VOLTAGES
£
Hf-f 70
'I T~ i "^r in
/ on/
20mA
1000/* F .ImF
At 777 DISC DISC OfiF
CW IDENTIFIER — Circuit automatically gener- ment. Audio output can be fed to loudspeaker wanted on matrix. Article gives construction
ates call letters for FCC-required code identifi- as monitor or used to modulate FM repeater. and programming details. — B. Kelley, A Super
cation for FM repeaters and RTTY, when started Circuit shown is programmed for DE K4EEU by Cheapo CW IDer, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1976, p AB-
by pushbutton or by pulse from other equip- installing diodes at locations where tone is AS.
WEAK-SIGNAL DECODER— Combination of copying very weak signals in Morse code. LED speaker.— Circuits, 73 Magazine, July 1977, p
narrow-bandpass 800-Hz active filter and provides visual indication supplementing con- 35.
phase-locked loop of tone decoder permits ventional output for headphones or loud-
swi
CW STEREO FILTER — Developed to enhance current gain for driving low-impedance stereo ence of others having slightly different
ability to read CW despite heavy contest traffic headphones. CW signal at 800 Hz then appears frequencies. LI and Cl form filter for 1200-Hz
or other QRM. Two high-Q filters, one at each tocomefrom left, 1200-Hz signal from right, and channel, while L2 and C2 form 800-Hz filter for
end of AOO-Hz CW filter in receiver, create sep- in-between frequencies at various azimuth another channel. — R. L. Anderson, Stereo — a New
arate audio channels to give effect of stereo. gles. Illusion of direction makes it easier for op- Type of CW Filter, 73 Magazine, March 1976, p
A8-50.
Transistors at outputs of channels provide extra erator to concentrate on desired signal in pres-
1 :3 DOT-DASH KEYER — Gives accurate 1 :3 dot-

dash ratio at any desired keying speed, with
self-completing characters. NAND gates 1, 2,
and 3 of first FCH191 form variable-frequency
square-wave oscillator, with Cl, R1, and R2 de-
termining frequency. With values shown, fre-
quency isadjustable from about 1 50 to 1 500 Hz,
equivalent to code speed range of about 4 to 40
WPM. NAND gates 4 and 5 form mono MVBR.
Flip-flops FF1 and FF2 are SN7473 TTL JK mas-
DTL QUAD INPUT NAND GATE TTL DUAL JK MASTER SLAVE ter-slave, acting with D1, D2, and NAND gate 6
GNO 14 8
to generate dots and dashes.— H. P. Fischer.
n n n n n n n Versatile 1C Keyer, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1973, p
n Q n n n n
69-71.
U U U u u u U
I 4
vcc
Paddle
SIMPLE KEYER — Based on rapid charging of ca-

pacitors and controlled discharge through relay
coil. When C2 has discharged to relay release
voltage, relay drops out and cycle starts over
again as long as dot side of paddle is pressed.
Dashes are similarly formed by C,. R4 adjusts
speed from 10 to 40 WPM. K, is DPDT plate-cur-
rent relay having IK to 10K resistance.— J. J.
Russo, An Inexpensive Electronic Keyer, CQ,
Aug. 1971, p 58.
KEYER WITH MEMORY— Clock Z1 is NE555 for addressing static 256 x 1 bit RAM. To pro- again. To clear address counter if error is made,
timer giving keying speed range of 5 to 35 WPM . gram keyer, switch to write, hit START button, or for changing message, hit RESET switch and
Flip-flops Z2A and Z2B count clock pulses to and feed in message on keyer paddle. To send start over again.— D. W. Sewhuk, Contest Spe-
provide self-completing dits and dahs with message back, switch to read and hit START cial Keyer, 73 Magazine, Feb. 1977, p 38.
spaces. Z4 and Z5 are 4-bit binary counters used
CODE CIRCUITS 159
CODE PRACTICE — Simple AF oscillator drives PRACTICE OSCILLATOR — Simple design pro- PASSIVE CW FILTER — Uses inexpensive 88-mH
loudspeaker for producing audio tone when key vides for adjustment of both volume and toroids to give very sharp 35-Hz bandwidth at
in negative supply lead is closed. Adjust VR1 for tone. — Circuits, 73 Magazine, July 1974, p 81. 3 dB down. Filter has high insertion loss. Keyed
most pleasing tone. — Circuits, 73 Magazine, waveshape has slow rise and fall, so CW signals
July 1975, p 154. have pronounced ringing that may be objec-
tionable.— A. F. Stahler, An Experimental Com-
parison of CW Audio Filters, 73 Magazine, July
1973, p 65-70.
CW SIDETONE — Audio sidetone oscillator

serves for monitoring CW keying. Changes in
transmitter operating frequency do not affect
sidetone circuit. Hartley AF oscillator Q2 is
turned on by diode rectifier and DC amplifier Q1 .
Antenna coupling shown is adequate from 160
through 10 meters. For VHF use on 6 and 2 me-
ters, small tuned circuit and pickup antenna are
usually required to get enough RF input for
monitor. Audio pitch is adjusted by changing
value of Cl. — J. Fisk, Circuits and Techniques,
Ham Radio, June 1976, p 48-52.
INPUT CIRCUIT FOR VHF
BINAURAL SYNTHESIZER FOR CW— Provides nals at right or left. Left or low channel has low- ohm phones or loudspeakers are directly con-
two channels for feeding stereo phones or two pass active filter and right or high channel has nected to outputs. Opamps will drive 2000-ohm
loudspeakers. When interference occurs a few high-pass filter, with crossover at 750 Hz. Syn- phones with ample volume and give moderate
hundred hertz from desired frequency, receiver thesizer isdesigned for low-impedance drive, as volume levels with 8-ohm loads. — D. E. Hil-
is tuned so desired signal appears to be midway from loudspeaker output of receiver. Resistors dreth, Synthesizer for Binaural CW Reception,
between loudspeakers, leaving interfering sig- in output channels prevent oscillation when 8- Ham Radio, Nov. 1975, p 46-48.
160
NOTE CHASSIS AT +4 ZVDC
3-50 WPM KEYER— Uses NE555V U1 as switch- three octaves and easily drives 3-W 4-ohm loud- tion Q1-Q2 easily handles keying bias of -26 V
able dot generator providing accurate 1 : 1 ratio. speaker through small transistor-radio trans- at 5 mA. — H. Seeger, Micro-TO Keyer Mods,
SN7473 U2 forms variable dash circuit. NE555V former TR. NE555V U5 acts with U4 to provide Ham Radio, July 1976, p 68-69.
sidetone generator U4 has tone range of about two-tone oscillator for SSB tuning. Output sec-
CHAPTER 14
Comparator Circuits
Used to compare two values of voltage, frequency, phase, or digital inputs

and provide logic output for driving variety of control circuits and indicating
devices. See also Logic, Logic Probe, and Voltage-Level Detector chapters.
LATCH COMPARATORS FORM 3-BIT A/D CON- ing. Comparators feed Schottky TTL binary from output glitching at conversion speeds
VERTER— Seven Advanced Micro Devices encoder logic for encoding to 3-bit offset binary. under 12 ns. — S. Dendinger, Try the Sampling
AM686 comparators are arranged for direct par- Quantization process is monitored by D/A con- Comparator in Your Next A/D Interface Design,
allel conversion of rapidly changing input sig- verter. Article describes operation in detail and EDN Magazine, Sept. 20, 1976, p 91-95.
nals, without prior sample-and-hold condition- gives performance graphs which show freedom
161
PHASE COMPARATOR — High-level reference

VARIABLE WINDOW — Single comparator can down into comparison range. A, is subtractor, or carrier signal and low-level reference signal
be programmed for wide variety of applica- generating voltage Eb - Eafor use as lower limit are applied to multiplier inputs of Exar XR-S200
tions. One reference input voltage positions voltage. Lower limit is added to 2Eb at A2 to de- PLL 1C. If both inputs are same frequency, DC
center of window, and other sets width of win- rive upper limit voltage Eb + Ea. — W. G. Jung, output is proportional to phase angle between
dow. Sum or difference of reference voltages "1C Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, In- inputs. For low-level inputs, conversion gain is
must not exceed ± 10 V; if larger voltages must dianapolis, IN, 1974, p 232-233. proportional to input signal amplitude. For
be handled, add voltage divider to scale them high-level inputs (Vs above 40 mVRMS), con-
version gain is constant at about 2 V/rad. —
"Phase-Locked Loop Data Book," Exar Inte-
grated Systems. Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 9-16.
STROBED COMPARATOR — Combination of

CA3080A opamp and two CMOS transistor
SUPPRESSING OSCILLATION— Use of positive Circuit will handle triangle-wave inputs up to pairs from CA3600E array gives programmable
feedback to pin 5 of comparator gives sharp and several hundred kilohertz. — P. Lefferts, Over- micropower comparator having quiescent
clean output transitions even with slow trian- come Comparator Oscillation Through Use of power drain of about 10 /iW. When comparator
gle-wave inputs, with no possibility of compar- Careful Design, EDN Magazine, May 20, 1978, p is strobed on, opamp becomes active and circuit
ator bursting into oscillation near crossing 123-124. draws 420 (iW while responding to differential-
point. Input resistors should not be wirewound. input signal in about 8 jus. Common-mode input
range is —1 V to +10.5 V. Voltage gain of com-
parator istypically 130 dB.— "Linear Integrated
Circuits and MOS/FET's," RCA Solid State Divi-
sion, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 279.
vide +3.8 V bias for D,, clamping positive output

MICROVOLT COMPARATOR— Combination of Separation of preamp from comparator chip of comparator opamp to +5 V. D2 limits nega-
National LM121A preamp and LM111 compar- minimizes effects of temperature variations. tive output swing to -0.5 V. Open-loop circuit
ator serves for comparing DC signal levels that Circuit hysteresis is 5 // V, which under certain means that output voltage will vary in propor-
are only within microvolts of each other. With conditions can be trimmed to 1 fiM. — "Linear tion to load current. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp
bias network shown, preamp has open-loop Applications, Vol. 2," National Semiconductor, Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
temperature-stable voltage gain close to 100. Santa Clara, CA, 1976, LB-32.
1974, p 226-228.
COMPARATOR CIRCUITS
163
+ 15V
+ 15 V
INTERNALLY GATED WINDOW COMPARA-

TOR— Operation is based on fact that source
and sink currents available at pin 8 of 101
opamp are unequal, with negative-going drive
being larger. Voltage at pin 8 is low if either
comparison input (A, or A2) so dictates. Both A,
and A2 must have high outputs for pin 8 to be
high. Outputs of A, and A2 thus follow pin 8
since opamps have unity gain. D, and D2 form
STAIRCASE WINDOW COMPARATOR— Cas- age value of input. Lamp or other indicator can clamp network. Either output of A, or A2 can be
cading of 101-type window comparators for se- be added to each output line to give visual in- used. Outputs go to +5 V only when input volt-
quential operation indicates which of three win- age is in window established by upper and
dication ofvoltage range. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-
dows input voltage is in. Input voltage is applied Amp Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianap- lower voltage limits. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp
in parallel to all comparators. Output goes high olis, IN, 1974, p 233-234. Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
only for comparator whose range includes volt-
1974, p 231-232.
Dl
IN4087
SIGNAL INPUT
positive input voltage is between levels set by outside limits of window. Article gives design tem Status, EDNIEEE Magazine, June 15, 1971,
R1 and R5, relay is actuated and green indicator equations and traces operation of circuit. Num-
p 49-50.
164
OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2
FREQUENCY/PHASE UP TO 25 MHz— Universal

shift register such as 5495/7495 is connected to
compare both frequency and phase of two car-
rier signals anywhere in range from DC to 25
MHz. When f, is greater than f2, output is 1;
when f, is less than f2, output is 0. For f, = f2,
output is square wave whose duty cycle varies
linearly with phase difference between f, and f2.
Comparisons are almost instantaneous, requir-
ing at most two carrier cycles. — J. Breese, Sin-
gle 1C Compares Frequencies and Phase, EDN
Magazine, Sept. 15, 1972, p 44.
VARIABLE BIPOLAR CLAMPING— Precision

comparator provides independent regulation of
both output voltage limits without connection
to comparison inputs. A2 and A3 are comple-
mentary precision rectifiers having indepen-
dent positive and negative reference voltages,
with both rectifiers operating in closed loop
through A,. A2 senses positive peak of E„ and
maintains it equal to +Vc,amp by adjusting volt-
age applied to D,. A3 and D3 perform similar
function on negative peaks. Feedback network
around output stage of A, regulates output volt-
age independently of inputs to A,. — W. G. Jung,
"1C Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, In-
dianapolis, IN,1974, p 228-229.
LEVEL-CROSSING DISPLAY— Uses Monsanto

MV 5491 dual red/green LED, with 220 ohms in
upper lead to +5 V supply and 100 ohms in
lower +5 V lead because red and green LEDs in
parallel back-to-back have different voltage re-
quirements. Circuit requires SN75451 driver ICs
and one section of SN7404 hex inverter, with
LM311 comparator. All operate from single +5
V source. Provides indicator change from red to
green with input change of only a few milli-
volts.— K. Powell, Novel Indicator Circuit, Ham
Radio, April 1977, p 60-63.
FREQUENCY COMPARATOR— Can be used

with wide range of clock frequencies up to 5.3
MHz to provide output frequency that is equal
to absolute difference between input frequen-
cies f,and f2. Article traces operation of circuit
and gives design equations. — P. B. Morin, Fre-
quency Comparator Provides Difference Fre-
quency, EEE Magazine, April 1971, p 65-66.
h CYCLE-STORING AND SAMPLING CIRCUITS - CONSECUTIVE PULSE DETECTOR CIRCUIT -

165
COMPARATOR CIRCUITS
THUMBWHEEL
B.C.D. COUNT ©
J=c>—
A 12B 13
C D
10
15
X >Y 5
X =Y 6 COMPARATOR
X< Y 7 7485
CLOCK
9 11 14 1
A B C D
©
UP UP-DOWN
74192
COUNTER
PRESET |
Up Counts Necessary to Reach Equality

| RESET
Down Counts Necessary to Reach Equality
Equal - Go to Next Operation

INDEPENDENT SIGNALS— Single AD521 in-
strumentation amplifier compares two inde-
4-BIT BCD COMPARATOR — Provides less than, pendent signal levels from sources having no
equal to, or greater than comparison between common reference point. When one differential
setting of BCD thumbwheel switch at X and signal is applied to usual input of opamp and
BCD input digit at Y (Y is count preset into 74192 other to reference input, output is proportional
up/down counter). If equality does not exist, cir- to difference. Positive feedback provides small
cuit will count up or down until it reaches equal- amount of hysteresis, to eliminate ambiguity
ity, and thereby calculate difference between and reduce noise susceptibility. Stable thresh-
BCD values. Separate register can be used to old of about 25 mV is derived from AD580 low-
store up or down counts required to reach voltage reference circuit. Reference voltage is
equality. — R. A. Scher, Digital Comparator Is 2.5 V, but values used for Rs and RG are in ratio
Self-Adjusting, EDN Magazine, Sept. 1, 1972, p of 1 :100 so comparator output switches when
51. normal input is about ’/i<» of reference input.
Output is negative when normal input is zero,
and switches positive when input exceeds
threshold. Output swings ±12 V as inputs go
through critical ratio. R3 and D, provide in-
compatible second output. — A. P. Brokaw, You
Can Compare Two Independent Signal Levels
with Only One 1C, EDN Magazine, April 5, 1975,
p 107-108.
+ 15 V
O
VOLTAGE COMPARATOR— Motorola MC1539
opamp provides excellent temperature charac-
teristics and very high slewing rate for compar-
ator applications. Zener connected to pin 5 lim-
its positive-going waveform at output to about
2 V below zener voltage. Silicon diode con-
nected to output limits negative excursion of
output to give protection for logic circuit being
driven. Parallel RC network in output provides
impedance matching and minimizes output cur-
rent overload problems. — E. Renschler, "The
MCI 539 Operational Amplifier and Its Applica-
tions," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974, AN-439, p
18.
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED HYSTERESIS— Pre-

cise, independent control of comparator trip
point and hysteresis is achieved by switching
hysteresis control signal e„ to comparator input
with Q, and Q2 when opamp changes state. Cir-
cuit avoids hysteresis feedback error while
achieving inherent 0.01% trip-point accuracy of
comparator. Control voltage et determines first
trip point. When opamp output is negative, Q2
is held off and Q, is on for connecting nonin-
verting input to ground. Output switching oc-
curs when input signal e, drives input of invert-
ing amplifier to zero. — J. Graeme, Comparator
Has Precise, Voltage-Controlled Hysteresis,
EDN Magazine, Aug. 20, 1975, p 78 and 80.
+ 15
ZENER REFERENCE — One section of RS3900

quad opamp is connected as comparator using INDEPENDENT HYSTERESIS ADJUSTMENT—
zener D1 for reference voltage. When voltage Trip point and hysteresis of comparator opamp
applied to pin 13 by R1 exceeds breakdown volt- A, can be adjusted independently, with trip
age of zener D1, comparator amplifies differ- point being determined by setting of R, or pro-
ence voltage to produce output voltage high grammed by DC voltage applied to R2. Opamp
enough to turn on LED. Can be used for class- A2 provides polarity inversion and rectification
room demonstration of comparator action. of A, output. Hysteresis control Rs is in feedback
Zener breakdown should be under 9 V. LED can path from A2 back to A,. Amount of hysteresis
be Radio Shack 276-041.— F. M. Mims, "Semi- is determined by ratio of R to R„. With values
conductor Projects, Vol. 2," Radio Shack, Fort shown, circuit output levels are 0 and 5 V. G.
Worth, TX, 1976, p 35-42. Tobey, Comparator with Noninteracting Ad-
justments, EDNIEEE Magazine, Oct. 1, 1971 p
43.
FREQUENCY COMPARATOR— Circuit using

CA3096 transistor array plus one discrete diode
develops DC output voltage that is proportional
to difference between frequencies of input sig-
nals f,and f2. Maximum input frequency is 10
kHz. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," RCA
Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 17.
SLEW RATE — Circuit measures slew rate of

input signal with Am685 comparator in circuit
having delay-line length under 10 ns. When
slew rate exceeds predetermined limit set by R6,
comparator changes state and latches, turning
on LED. Pushing reset switch restores normal
operation. Based on comparison of input signal
with time-delayed counterpart. Derivative of
input signal, equal to its instantaneous slew
rate, is measured accurately for swings of 6 V
P-P as found in most 50-ohm video signals. Ac-
tion isfast enough to detect glitches.— R. C. Cul-
ter, Slew-Rate Limit Detector Is Simple, yet Ver-
satile, EDN Magazine, Aug. 20, 1977, p 140-141.
2.4V
COMPARATOR CIRCUITS 167
COMPARATOR DRIVES LAMP— Classroom

demonstration circuit for comparator action
uses transistor to amplify output of one section
of RS339 quad comparator, to boost output cur-
rent enough for driving 60-mA lamp. Lamp
comes on when voltage at movable arm of 500K
pot is greater than half of supply voltage. — F.
M. Mims, "Integrated Circuit Projects, Vol. 6,"
Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, p 33-41.
STROBED MICROPOWER— Uses CA3080A var-

iable opamp and CA3600E CMOS transistor
array. Quiescent power drain from ± 12 V supply
is only 10 j«W, increasing to 420 /iW when com-
parator is strobed on to make CA3080A
active.— "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," RCA
THREE-LEVEL COMPARATOR— All three sec- lower limit is exceeded, appropriate output is
types of industrial control applications. — "Cir-
tions of CA3060 three-opamp array are used activated until input signal returns to prese- cuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs, " RCA Solid State
with CA3086 transistor arrays to provide three lected intermediate limit. Suitable for many Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 17.
adjustable limits for comparator. If upper or
Vcc (+5VTYP)
MEASURING THRESHOLDS— Upper and lower

thresholds of noninverting comparator under
test (A,) are read on DVM at end of capacitor
charge and discharge cycles initiated by S, and
S2. With C, discharged, relay L, is energized.
Closing S, allows C, to charge toward Vcc-
When upper threshold is reached, relay drops
out and meter is read. Closing S2 starts dis-
charge cycle which stops at lower threshold.
Reverse relay connections when testing invert-
ing comparator. — E. S. Papanicolaou, Compar-
ator Is Part of Its Own Measuring System, EDN
Magazine, Aug. 5, 1974, p 76.
A2: VOLTAGE FOLLOWER, LM310

L,: RELAY, COUCH 2X10B460A
COMPARATOR DRIVES LED— Simple class-

room demonstrator of comparator action uses
one section of RS339 quad comparator. Refer-
ence voltage applied to positive input of com-
parator is half of supply voltage. R1 serves as
voltage divider applying variable voltage to in-
verting input. When voltage applied to pin 6 by
R1 exceeds reference voltage on pin 7, compar-
ator switches on and LED lights. R4 is chosen
for use with Radio Shack 276-041 red LED. — F.
Radio Shack, Fort Worth TX, 1977, p 33-41.
converter! to i i L-compaiiDie logic signal, volt- circuit operation in detail.— N. Pritchard, Win-
age dividers with fixed reference voltage. Re- age divider for lower limit of window detector dow Detector Uses One 1C Regulator, EDNMag-
sulting absolute error signal is amplified and is R,-R2 and for upper limit is R3-R4. Article covers azine, May 20, 1973, p 81 and 83.
169
COMPARATOR CIRCUITS
+ 15V
VOLTAGE-WINDOW COMPARATOR— Use of

DUAL LIMITS — Opamp used withoutfrequency LM111 opamps minimizes number of compo-
compensation gives positive output only when nents required to turn on green indicator lamp
input voltage exceeds 8.5 V in either polarity. when input voltage is between predetermined
Resistors in supply leads determine limit points. limits set by 2K pots. Similar circuit using 741
For inverted output, reverse inputs to opamp. opamps requires total of 31 components. Im-
Diodes are 1 N914. — K. Pickard, Dual Limit Com- proved circuit draws only 120 nA from voltage
parator Using Single Op-Amp, Wireless World, level being monitored, and operates within
Dec. 1974, p 504. 0.3% threshold level stability using single un-
regulated supply varying ±3 V from 28 V — D.
Priebe, Comparators Compared. EDNiEEB Mag-
azine, Oct. 1, 1971, p 61.
CHAPTER 15
Contact Bounce Suppression Circuits

Used to solve bounce problems of switch and relay contacts during closing or
opening.
BOUNCELESS SQUARE OUTPUT— NE555

timer eliminates need for gates to suppress con-
tact bounce. Timer can provide pulse at least 5 Vcc
ms long (much longer if desired) and can remain
on as long as trigger input (key pulse) is low
(grounded). Timer triggers on negative-going
edge of low-going pulse, such as key down to
ground. Common negative is isolated from
ground. Vcc can be 5 to 15 VDC. Timer output
can be connected directly to exciter keying
input for negative grid keying. Because of
square-wave output on make or break (100 ns
each), circuits must be added in exciter or be-
tween keying transistors to provide at least
5-ms rise and fall times for Morse or RTTY key-
ing.— B. Conklin, Improving Transmitter
Keying, Ham Radio, June 1976, p 44-47.
ARCHER 279 -059
SWITCH-CLOSURE COUNTER— National

MM5865 universal timer and counter chip is
used with 74C00 debouncer and LM555C timer
to drive digital display that counts closures of
manual switch S3. Reset transition restores dis-
play to 0000. BCD segment outputs of MM5865
feed LED 4-digit display through MM14511 in-
terface, while digit enable outputs go to display
through DM8863 driver. — "MOS/LSI Data-

CA, 1977, p 2-23-2-32.
170
CONTACT BOUNCE SUPPRESSION CIRCUITS 171
vcc
DEBOUNCER — Generates single pulse on OUTPUT A

switch closure, provided wiper of switch
bounces only between contact and an open.
Output A goes low when switch is pushed, and
at same time output B goes high. — E. E. Hriv-
nak. House Cleaning the Logical Way, 73 Mag- OUTPUT B
azine, Aug. 1974, p 85-90.
ONE PULSE PER PUSH — Circuit generates only

one rectangular pulse for each actuation of
pushbutton switch, even if contacts bounce.
TTL gates IC1 are wired as RS flip-flop (latch)
that triggers mono MVBR IC2 having fixed-du-
ration positive and negative output pulses. Out-
OUTPUTS
put drives are increased by TTL inverting buffer
gates. — H. Olson, Further Adventures of the
_n_ Bounceless Switch, 73 Magazine, Feb. 1975, p

111-114.
5V DC
CRi 470 82
1N3070 R2A R2b
POS 2
CONTACT BOUNCE
POS 3 -H h-
NAND OUT ® ■
k T (0.4 SEC) k
ONE SHOT (D ■ BOUNCELESS ISOLATOR— Integrating filter C,-
R2 eliminates effects of contact bounce that may
be superimposed on digital input signal feeding
ROTARY SWITCH DEBOUNCE— Outputs from contact for interval determined by values used optoisolator. Photodiode in optoisolator drives
mono (one-shot) provide common returns for for R7 and C,; for values shown, delay is 400 Schmitt trigger that makes output to TTL cir-
rotary switch. Multi-input NAND gate, tied to ms. — E. S. Peltzman, Circuit Eliminates Rotary- cuits change state when LED is turned on by
normally high signals from one deck of rotary Switch Bounce Problems, EDN Magazine, April input signal. — C. E. Mitchell, Optical Coupler
switch, instantly detects opening of one contact 20, 1978, p 132. and Level Shifter, EDNIEEE Magazine, Feb.1,
1972, p 55.
and triggers mono. Mono then simulates open
DEBOUNCING WITH COUNTER— Circuit uses

CMOS counter/decoder with any inexpensive
200-Hz or higher clock such as CMOS two-gate
oscillator or 555 timer. Signal to be debounced
is fed directly to reset input of counter, with no
preconditioning. When contact is made by
switch, counter unclears and starts counting
up. Each bounce of contact resets counter, so it
cycles between states 0 and 1 until contacts set-
tle. Counter then delivers clean nonoverlapping
pulses to remaining output lines, any of which
may be used as conditioned output signal.
When counter reaches state 7, it inhibits itself
> OUTPUTS
to prevent repeated pulsing of output lines.
When switch is opened, cycling action is re-
peated during bounces, with output never
going higher than state 1. After bouncing,
counter is held in clear state ready for next clos-
ing.— L. T. Hauck, Solve Contact Bounce Prob-
lems Without a One-Shot, EDN Magazine, Sept.
5, 1975, p 80 and 82.
BOUNCELESS MAKE/BREAK— Circuit elim-

inates switch bounce problems during closing
as well as opening. When switch is closed, Q
output of flip-flop goes to logic 1 for delay pe-
riod determined by RC time constant. Releasing
switch operates NAND gate, making its output
go to logic 1. This charges C through R until
reset level is reached. Flip-flop then resets,
changing Q output to logic 0. Values for R and
C are chosen according to bounce duration of
switch used. For typical 1-ASPST switch, 10,000
ohms and 0.47 /rF were used. — L. F. Walsh and
T. W. Hill, Make-and-Break Bounceless Switch-
ing, EDNIEEE Magazine, July 15, 1971, p 49.
MOMENTARY CONTACT
OPST PUSH BUTTONS
(4 Bd I
+5V 2 INPUT NAND
BOUNCE-FREE INTERLOCKING— Arrangement

provides low-cost equivalent of mechanically each actuation produces an output and resets
interlocked switch assembly, while providing all other flip-flops. If two or more buttons are
TTL compatibility and freedom from switch pushed simultaneously, all their channels will
bounce. Momentary pressing of any pushbut- go high, but only last one released will stay on. LATCHING GATES — SN74C02 quad two-input
ton restores its associated RS flip-flop to normal Any number of channels may be added. — B. NOR gate forms latching circuit in which first
and makes output of that channel high. Ar- Brandstedt, Digital Interlocking Switch Is Inex- noise pulse produced by switch latches circuit,
rangement uses cross-coupled two-input pensive to Build, EDN Magazine, Dec. 15, 1972, making it immune to contact bounce. — I. Math,
NAND gates for each flip-flop, connected so Bounceless Switch, CQ, July 1976, p 50.
p 42.
173
CONTACT BOUNCE SUPPRESSION CIRCUITS
DELAYED START— Keyed output of RTTY ter-

minal equipment or other keys and relays is de-
layed by 74123 dual mono for at least 5 ms while
contact bounce settles down. Can be used for
calculator keyboards, flip-flop testers, and other
applications in which final clean pulse length is
not highly important. — B. Conklin, Improving
Transmitter Keying, Ham Radio, June 1976, p
44-47.
KEYBOARD BOUNCE ELIMINATOR— Dual 9602

mono MVBR is used with Harris HD-0165 key-
board encoderto generate delayed strobe pulse
St', with delay set at about 1 0 ms by first mono.
Pulse width is determined by second mono and
should be set to meet system requirements.
Circuit eliminates effects of arcing or switch
bounce and provides proper encoding under
two-key rollover conditions. — "Linear & Data
Acquisition Products," Harris Semiconductor,
Melbourne, FL, Vol. 1, 1977, p 6-4.
GATES FORM SWITCH — Each time pushbutton

switch is closed momentarily, voltage on C,
makes inverter A change state, with positive
feedback from inverter B, to give alternate ON
and OFF action. R, delays charging and dis-
charging of C,, making circuit essentially im-
mune to contact bounce. Switch works equally
well with either CMOS or TTL gates. Values of
R, and C, are not critical. — T. Tyler, Inverters
Provide "ON-OFF" from Momentary Switch,
EDN Magazine, June 20, 1976, p 126.
CHAPTER 16
Converter Circuits — Analog-to-Digital

Includes circuits for converting DC, audio, and video analog inputs to linearly
related binary, BCD, or Gray-code digital outputs. Some circuits have
autoranging or some type of input compression, input multiplexing, and input
buffering.
SERIAL DATA OUTPUT — Precision Monolithics Applications include servocontrols, stress and
ICs form transceiving converter suitable for use vibration analysis, digital recording, and speech available for one full clock cycle. Other half of
in control systems incorporating 8-bit micro- synthesis. Start must be held low for one clock system is identical.— "COMDAC Companding
processors. Output conforms with Bell-System cycle to begin send or receive cycle. Conversion D/A Converter," Precision Monolithics, Santa
fi-255 logarithmic law for PCM transmission. is completed in nine clock cycles, and output is Clara, CA, 1977, DAC-76, p 12.
174
175
CONVERTER CIRCUITS — ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL
SELF-CONTROLLED AUTORANGING— DG201

quad analog switch inserts one of four atten-
uator resistors in input circuit of Siliconix LD130
or comparable A/D converter under control of
autoranging pulse output derived from con-
verter. Control logic includes 74C00 quad two-
input NAND gate with two sections connected
as flip-flop, 74C95 4-bit right-shift left-shift reg-
ister, and 74C20 dual four-input NAND gate. —
"Analog Switches and Their Applications," Sil-
iconix, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 6-28-6-29.
SOFTWARE CONTROL — Innovative software Technique can easily be expanded to 10-bit or input to DAC, using software given in article. —
for Intel 8080A microprocessor eliminates need 12-bit conversions and adapted to other micro- W. Ritmanich and W. Freeman, "Software Con-
for peripheral isolation devices when using Pre- processors. Logic of microprocessor replaces trolled Analog to Digital Conversion Using DAC-
cision Monolithics DAC-08E D/A converter and conventional successive-approximation regis- 08 and the 8080A Microprocessor," Precision
CMP-01C comparator for 8-bit A/D conversion. ter. 8 lowest-order address bits control data bit Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, AN-22, p 3.
176
10-BIT ACCURACY — Single-slope A/D converter

gives high-speed conversion of DC input volt-
age to digital data output. For 0-10 V input,
1024 pulses of 100-MHz clock appear at full scale
and 512 at half scale. When command pulse is
applied, 2N914 transistor resets 1000-pF capac-
itor (820 and 180 in parallel) to 0 V. Capacitor
begins to charge linearly on falling edge of com-
mand pulse, to 2.5 V. 10-ps ramp is applied to
AMD686 for comparison with unknown volt-
Rr
age. Output of opamp is pulse whose width is
proportional to input voltage and can therefore
be used to gate 100-MHz clock.— J. Williams,
Low-Cost, Linear A/D Conversion Uses Single-
Slope Techniques, EDN Magazine, Aug. 5, 1978,
Rj
p 101-104.
CONVERT COMMAND
(30 nSEC MIN)
Ik
17.4 k
VIDEO COMPRESSOR — Nonlinear function am-

plifier IC-2 compresses video input signals as
required to compensate for inefficient quanti-
zation where there are too many levels for small
signals and too few levels for large signals. De-
signed to feed 6-bit analog-to-digital converter,
IC-1 attenuates input -20 dB and shifts level.
Output of IC-2 is amplified by IC-3 to voltage
range comparable to that of input signal. IC-4
acts as temperature compensator and output
level shifter. R7 nulls small output offsets.— J.
B. Frost, Non-Linear Function Amplifier, EEE
Magazine, March 1971, p 78.
BIPOLAR
REFERENCE
8-BIT SUCCESSIVE APPROXIMATION— Uses

Precision Monolithics DAC-100 CCQ3 D/A con-
verter and CMP-01CJ fast precision comparator
in combination with Advanced Micro Devices
AM2502PC or equivalent successive approxi-
mation register to compare analog input with
series of trial conversions. Clamp diodes mini-
mize settling time and prevent large inputs
from damaging DAC output. Digital output is
available in serial nonretum-to-zero format at
data output DO shortly after each positive-
going clock transition. — D. Soderquist, "A Low

Cost, Easy-to-Build Successive Approximation
Analog-to-Digital Converter," Precision Mono-
lithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-11, p 3.
177
CONVERTER CIRCUITS — AN AlO G-T O-DIGIT A L
- 15 V +I5V
4-/<s CONVERSION TIME — Provides conversion

of analog input to 8-bit digital output by suc-
cessive approximation, with conversion time of
4 fis. Advanced Micro Devices AM2502 succes-
sive-approximation register contains logic for
Precision Monolithics DAC-08E and CMP-01C
comparator. — D. Soderquist and J. Schoeff,
"Low Cost, High Speed Analog-to-Digital Con-
version with the DAC-08," Precision Monolith-
ics, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, AN-16, p 3.
INTERFACE FROM A/D
AUTORANGING — Digitally controlled attenua- tects overrange and underrange information

LD110/111 or LD111/114 A/D converter. — "Ana-
tor uses DG201 quad analog switch as input lad- from A/D converter and closes appropriate at-
der attenuator switches for A/D converter. log Switches and Their Applications," Siliconix,
tenuator path. Circuit is suitable for Siliconix Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 6-28.
Switches are controlled by digital logic that de-
178
ANALOG
0—10 V ANALOG INPUT — Used to provide dig-

ital input to computer for processing and stor-
age of analog signals. Requires only three ICs in
addition to external +10 V reference and 2.25-
MHz TTL clock. Successive-approximation reg-
ister (SAR) can be Motorola MC1408 or equiv-
alent. For continuous conversions, connect pins
10 and 2 of SAR. — "Signetics Analog Data Man-
ual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 677-685.
HIGH-IMPEDANCE BUFFER— Two sections of U1

47 kf2 VCC
Motorola MC3403 quad opamp serve as voltage Q1
+ <>A
followers for differential inputs of third section /
connected as buffer for MCI 505 A/D converter.
Dual transistor Q1, connected as dual diode, Q1 A
Comparator
provides 0.6-V offset at inputs of voltage follow-
ers, to obtain temperature tracking and pre- Ramp Control
dictable performance at low bias currents of
opamp. — D. Aldridge and S. Kelley, "Input
Buffer Circuits for the MC1505 Dual Ramp A-to-
D Converter Subsystem," Motorola, Phoenix,
AZ, 1976, EB-24A. Q1B
CR 1
R1, 3 1 0 k 0. 1 %
R2, 4, 5, 20 k 0. 1 %
R7, 8
R9 10 k Pot
3.9 k
RIO, 12 1.2 k
R1 1 10 k
OA1, 2 MC1456C
CR 1 MSD6100
CR2 MSD6150
CR3, 4 1N914
Q1 MPS6415
Cl. 2
0.1
LED MLE D 630
MSB
CYCLIC CONVERTER — Unknown voltage is sulting digital output is in Gray-code form. Eight L All Others *
successively compared to reference voltage for identical circuits are operated in cascade to pro-
determining each digital bit. After determining vide 8-bit A/D converter having accuracy within Switching diode CR1 is MSD6100, and CR2 is
bit, voltage difference between unknown and 1 LSB and full-scale range of 0-8 V. Circuit re- MSD6150. Other dioodes are 1N914. — J.
reference is operated on, then sent to succes- quires only two MC1456CG opamps per stage,
Barnes, "Analog-to-Digital Cyclic Converter,"
sive stages to determine less significant bit. Re- with MPS6514 transistor as comparator. Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974, AN-557, p 7.
CONVERTER CIRCUITS— ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL 179
DIFFERENTIAL OPAMP AS BUFFER— Section of

Motorola MC3403 quad opamp, operating from
single supply, serves as low-cost unity-gain
buffer for MC1505 dual-ramp A/D converter.
Opamp is used as differential amplifier refer-
enced to MCI 505 reference voltage of 1.25 V. —
D. Aldridge and S. Kelley, "Input Buffer Circuits
for the MC1505 Dual Ramp A-to-D Converter
Subsystem," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1976, EB-
24A.
FET-INPUT BUFFER— Used ahead of Motorola

MCI 505 A/D converter to provide input imped-
ance of 10 megohms. FETsare connected as dif-
ferential amplifier having common source leads
returned to constant-current generator built
from bipolar transistor, with similar transistor
providing temperature compensation. Temper-
ature drift of amplifier is well under 1 mV from
0 to 50°C. — D. Aldridge and S. Kelley, "Input
Buffer Circuits for the MC1505 Dual Ramp A-to-
D Converter Subsystem," Motorola, Phoenix,
AZ, 1976, EB-24A.
TRACKING A/D CONVERTER— Addition of one With 8-bit converter shown, count of 11111111 goes high, so counter is free to count up only. —
gate to tracking or servo- type A/D converter, as when counting up makes carry output and load
A. Helfrick, Tracking A/D Converters Need An-
shown in dashed box, overcomes instability inputs go low, holding counter in this state so other Look, EDN Magazine, June 20, 1975, p 118
subsequent up clocks are ignored. When count and 120.
problems otherwise occurring when input volt-
ages are less than zero or greater than full scale. is all Os, borrow output goes low and clear input
DIFFERENTIAL CONVERSION— Uses high cur-

rent output capability of Precision Monolithics
DAC-08 D/A converter and high common-mode
voltage rejection of CMP-01 comparator to give
differential-input ADC without input signal con-
ditioning. Successive-approximation conver-
sion logic is obtained with REF-01 +10 V refer-
ence and 2502-type successive-approximation
register, driven by DAC and comparator. Analog
input is converted in less than 2 ps. Differential
input range is 5 V. Diodes are 1N4148— J.
Schoeff and D. Soderquist, "Differential and
Multiplying Digital to Analog Converter Appli-
cations," Precision Monolithics, Santa Clara,
CA, 1976, AN-19, p 5.
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
1N914 or 1N4148 OR AN Y SI LI CON SM A L L SIGN A L DIODE

REPETITIVE-MODE OPERATION— Quicker con-
version isobtained in Teledyne Philbrick 4109 /
or 4111 A/D converter by restarting converter

within a few microseconds after status signal,
using sure-start circuit shown. Reset pulse is
fed to converter when status signal is held at
low DC level. When status command is high,
Z-
oscillator A-B is disabled. If reset pulse is not
obeyed and status signal remains low, oscilla-
tor starts up until conversion does occur. — R.
W. Jacobs, "Repetitive Mode Operation for
Models 4109/4111 Integrating A/D Converters,"
Teledyne Philbrick, Dedham, MA, 1977, AN-28.
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
sion process is complete (comparator inputs

FOUR-QUADRANT RATIOMETRIC— Uses Pre- ventionally, and inputs VY are connected in mul- differentially nulled to less than 'k LSB), digital
cision Monolithics DAC-08 D/A converters and tiplying fashion. lnEFfor both DACs is modulated output corresponds to quotient Vx/Vv. Diodes
CMP-01 comparator to drive successive-ap- between 1 and 3 mA. Resulting output currents are 1N4148. — J. Schoeff and D. Soderquist,
proximation conversion logic using REF-01 +10 are differentially transformed into voltages by "Differential and Multiplying Digital to Analog
V reference and 2502-type successive-approxi- 5K resistors at comparator inputs and com- Converter Applications," Precision Monolithics,
mation register. Imputs Vx are connected con- pared with Vx differential input. When conver- Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-19, p 5.
CONVERTER CIRCUITS — ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL 181
BINARY OUTPUT — Converts analog signal in version time is about 26 ms. Az and A3form neg- voltage equals input voltage, comparator out-
range of 0-10 V to 8-bit binary word having all ative-going staircase generator for which startput goes positive and resets control flip-flop to
Os for 0 V and all Is for full-scale input of +9.960 conversion signal is formed by one section of
complete conversion. — W. G. Jung, "1C Timer
V. Output is 15-V CMOS-compatible but can be 556. Opamp A, compares negative output of Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
adapted for TTL compatibility. Maximum con- 7530 with input voltage Vin. When 7530 output
1977, p 226-228.
FOUR-CHANNEL INPUT MULTIPLEXING— Con- central multiplexer. System is much more eco- 100 kHz and 1 MHz. At 500 kHz, each conversion
version process is divided between central sta- nomical than having separate A/D converter at
takes about 15 ms. — S. Kelley, "Analog Data
tion and remote locations having analog sen- each sensor. Can be extended to 32 channels. Acquisition Network for Digital Processing
sors. Each station transmits two noise-immune Multiplexing is performed under control of
clock in Motorola MC14435, operating between Using the MC1405-MC14435 A/D System," Mo-
low-frequency digital signals under control of torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, EB-58.
0.01 a/F
EXTERNAL TRIGGER — Generates pulse with

100-ns minimum width in range of 125-250 Hz
for application to reset input of Teledyne Phil-
brick AID converter in applications requiring un-
attended operation with continuous conver-
sion. Adjust 100K potto give 125 Hz for 4109 or
250 Hz for 4111. Successive stages of SN7404
inverter provide required sharpening of pulse.
TO A1 is positive-starting MVBR. — R. W. Jacobs,

"Repetitive Mode Operation for Models 4109/
4111 Integrating AID Converters," Teledyne
Philbrick, Dedham, MA, 1977, AN-28.
R = 200 KS2 for 4111
= 400 KJ2 for 4109
NOTES: A1 - Philbrick 1 31 9 or equivalent 4 1 09/4 1 1 1
RESET INPUT
-Dx- = 1/6 SN7404 or equivalent
+5 V 15V
MOSFET-INPUT BUFFER— Uses Motorola
MC14007 dual complementary pair plus in-
verter, with two of MOSFETs connected as dif-
ferential amplifier for buffering opamp and third
serving as current source for differential ampli-
fier. Arrangement gives high input impedance
required in some applications of MC1505 AID
converter for which buffer was designed. 1- v
megohm pot controls gate voltage for current
source. Temperature drift is well under 2 mV ,0
over range of 0-50°C. Pin 14 of MC14007 should
be tied to +5 V.— D. Aldridge and S. Kelley,
"Input Buffer Circuits for the MC1505 Dual
Ramp A-to-D Converter Subsystem," Motorola,
Phoenix, AZ, 1976, EB-24A.
VOICE DIGITIZER — Uses 8-bit ADC capable of puter memory for later conversion back to an- + 12 V, and pin 4 is -6 V. For IC6 and IC7, pin 14
sampling AF input signal 1 00.000 times per sec- alog form for such applications as synthesis of is +5 V and pin 7 is ground. 8080 assembler pro-
ond when using 900-kHz clock. 100-kHz clock speech from phonemes and providing voice an- grams are given for input and output of mem-
gives 9000 samples per second, about minimum swers to queries. Requires about 10,000 bytes ory.— S. Ciarcia, Talk to Me! Add a Voice to Your
for human voice. Digital output is stored in com- in memory for 1 s of voice data. Pin 7 of IC4 is Computerfor $35, BYTE, June 1978, p 142-151.
0.1<iF
BCD OUTPUT — Latched non multiplexed paral- eration. Features include high linearity, noise termining digital equivalent by counting these
lel BCD outputs from Teledyne 8750 3Vdigit immunity, and 3^-digit resolution within pulses. Values shown are for full-scale voltage
CMOS analog-to-digital converter are suitable 0.025% error. Circuit is based on switching input of 1 0 V and voltage reference of -6.4 V. —
for liquid crystal and gas-discharge displays. 2- number of current pulses needed to bring ana- CMOS A-D Converter Provides BCD Output,
mA drain on ±5 V supply permits battery op- log current to zero at input of opamp, then de- Computer Design, Nov. 1977, p 156 and 158.
HIGH-SPEED SUCCESSIVE-APPROXIMA- output is used for transmission to one or more proximation A/D Conversion," Motorola, Phoe-
TION — Total conversion time for 8-bit system other locations. — T. Henry, "Successive Ap- nix, AZ, 1974, AN-716, p 5.
is about 4.5 p.s. Clock rate is up to 2 MHz. Serial
2-DIGIT BCD — Uses Motorola MC14549 succes-

sive-approximation register and MC1408L-8 D /
A converter to give full-scale value of 0.99 V in
10-mV increments. Input is buffered by opamp
A1 connected as voltage follower, with pot PI
set to give output current proportional to un-
known input voltage. This current is compared
to that required by total BCD AID converter. Pins
1-4 and 12-15 of MC14549 provide required 2-
digit parallel BCD output. Clock frequency can
bq 100 kHz. — D. Aldridge, "Successive Approx-
imation BCD A/D Converter," Motorola, Phoe-
nix, AZ, 1975, EB-51.
Conversion (J“)
8-BIT SUCCESSIVE-APPROXIMATION— Re- MC1408. If output is greater, bit is reset or

quires only four ICs. For each cycle, most sig- turned off. Process is repeated for next most overall operational figure is about 2 ps per bit
nificant bit is enabled first, with comparator giv- significant bit until all bits have been tried, com- for 8-bit system. — T. Henry, "Successive Ap-
ing output signifying that input signal is greater pleting conversion cycle. Conversion time is 18 proximation A/D Conversion," Motorola, Phoe-
or less in amplitude than output of Motorola ps, total propagation delay is about 1.5 jus, and nix, AZ, 1974, AN-716, p 4.
45V ANALOG INPUT
COMPRESSING A/D CONVERSION— Step size

GROUND
FOR increases as output changes from zero scale to
SINGLE
ENDED full scale, in contrast to conventional linear con-
INPUTS
verter inwhich step size is constant percentage
of full scale. Uses Precision Monolithics DAC-76
D/A converter in combination with CMP-01
comparator, any standard EXCLUSIVE-OR gate,
and successive-approximation register for con-
version logic. Encoding sequence begins with
sign-bit comparison and decision. Bits are con-
verted with successive-removal technique,
starting with decision at code 011 1111 and
turning off bits sequentially until all decisions
have been made. Conversion is completed in
nine clock cycles. — "COMDAC Companding
D/A Converter," Precision Monolithics, Santa
Clara, CA, 1977, DAC-76, p 12.
OPTIONAL
REFERENCE
8IP0LAR
INPUT
CMOS-COMPATIBLE SUCCESSIVE-APPROXI-
MATION— Converts analog input to 8-bit digital
output by using MC14559CMOS successive-ap-
proximation registerwith Precision Monolithics
DAC-100 D/A converter and CMP-01 compara-
tor. Conversion sequence is initiated by apply-
ing positive pulse, with width greater than one
clock cycle, to START CONVERSION input. An-
alog input is then compared successively to 'k
scale, 'It scale, and remaining binarily decreas-
ing bit weights until it has been resolved within
'k LSB. END OF CONVERSION then changes to
logic 1 and parallel answer is present in nega-
tive-true binary-coded format at register out-
puts.— D. Soderquist, "Interfacing Precision
Monolithics Digital-to-Analog Converters with
CMOS Logic," Precision Monolithics, Santa
Clara, CA, 1975, AN-14, p 4.
LOGIC OUTPUTS
-«T
+159 +159
ANALOG
INPUT
+5
02
1
I
rb POWER ANALOG
GROUND GROUND
8-BIT TRACKING — Uses Precision Monolithics near zero despite input and turn-on transients. and supply voltages. D/A converter is used in
DAC-100 CCQ3 D/A converter and CMP-01CJ Unused least significant digital inputs of 10-bit feedback configuration to obtain A/D opera-
fast precision comparator to make digital data DAC are turned off by connecting to +5 V_Lp2 as tion.— "A Low Cost, High-Performance Track-
J_02
continuously available at output while tracking shown. Simple clock circuit shown in dashed
ing A/D Converter," Precision Monolithics,
analog input. Diode clamps hold DAC output box is stable over wide range of temperatures Santa Clara, CA, 1977, AN-6, p 2.
.22 mF +V REMOTE STATION — Multiplexing of large num-

ber of analog voltages from widely separated
locations in large industrial control systems is
simplified by transmitting two noise-immune
low-frequency digital signals from each remote
to central multiplexer driving display and mi-
croprocessor. Central station using MC14435
controls direction of integration in each remote-
station MC1405 through ramp control output.
At beginning of conversion, integrator of
MC1405 integrates upward for 1000 counts of
central-station clock. Integrator then ramps
down while comparator remains high, with
clock continuing until comparator threshold is
again crossed. Counts during down ramp are
latched by counter when comparator goes low,
and circuits are reset for next conversion. Ana-
log input voltage is thus transmitted to central-
station MC14435 as two digital signals. — S. Kel-
ley, "Analog Data Acquisition Network for
Digital Processing Using the MCI 405- MCI 443 5
A/D System," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1975, EB-
58.
COMPARATOR
8-BIT DIGITAL OUTPUT — Digital output is ob-

tained in parallel format from binary-counter
output of Exar XR-2240 programmable timer/
counter. Recycle time is about 6 ms. Supply
voltage can be 4-15 V.— "Timer Data Book,"
Exar Integrated Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978,
p 11-18.
FILTERED BUFFER — Used with Motorola 60-Hz pickup. Two-pole filter is included in
MCI 505 A/D converter when making precise unity-feedback loop of buffer. Front-end scaling
measurements of slowly varying DC voltages in circuit is included with buffer. — D. Aldridge and
digital voltmeters or in feedback controls. S. Kelley, "Input Buffer Circuits for the MCI 505
Closed-loop front-end buffer provides high Dual Ramp A-to-D Converter Subsystem," Mo-
input impedance and reduces stray noise and torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1976, EB-24A.
187
CONVERTER CIRCUITS — ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL
4-BIT CLOCKLESS — Simple and low-cost ar- wave signals well up into audio range. Even easily cascaded. — B. P. Vandenberg, Tracking-
rangement ofseven CA3130 opamps gives con- with relatively slow 741 opamps. signals up to Type A/D Requires No Clock Oscillator, EDN
version times fast enough for tracking sine- 300 Hz were easily tracked. Additional bits are Magazine, Jan. 20, 1977, p 92 and 94.
CHAPTER 17
Converter Circuits — DC to DC
Use inverters typically operating from DC supplies in range of 2-15 V to
generate AC voltage at frequency typically in range of 16-25 kHz, for step-up
by voltage-doubling rectifier or transformer-rectifier combination to give
desired new positive or negative DC supply voltage that can be as high as 10
+ 12 V TO -12 V — Transformerless inverting

DC-to-DC converter has above 55% efficiency
and can withstand output shorts lasting up to
several minutes. UJT Q, and base-emitter diode
of transistor Q2 form free-running MVBR whose
25-kHz output is amplified by Q2 to drive switch-
ing-mode converter Q3-L,-D,-C2. Zener D2 regu-
lates output for variations in input voltage or
output loads up to 40 mA — G. Bank, Trans-
formerless Converter Supplies Inverted Output.
EDNIEEE Magazine, July 1, 1971, p 48.
+ 10 TO 18V DC IN
+ 12 VTO -12 V — Transforms unregulated +12 gives voltage regulation and current limiting. regulation is 0.2% for loads from 10 pA to 10
VDC to current-limited regulated -12 VDC. Circuit tolerates continuous operation under mA when load impedance is 10 ohms. — R. Dow,
Front end of 555 is connected in astable config- short-circuit conditions. With 10-V nominal out- Build a Short-Circuit-Proof +12V Inverter with
uration, with R2 selected to give about 25 kHz put, line regulation is within ±0.05% for input 178. 1C, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977, p
One 177-
at pin 3. Control of modulation input to pin 5 and output voltage ranges of 0.3 to 10 V. Load
188
CONVERTER CIRCUITS — DC TO DC 189
T,- FERROXCUBE TOROID 266 CT 125 3D3

T2- FERROXCUBE POT CORE 36 22P - A600 3B7
2 V TO 20 AND 150 V — Use of 7-turn toroidal voltages differ significantly. Blocking oscillator of horizontal drive pulse. This ensures comple-
transformer in self-excited ringing-choke block- is formed by Q,, T2, C,, R2, and base-bias net- tion of cycle within blanking interval. — N. Tka-
ing-oscillator circuit improves efficiency of con- work R6-Q2. Q4 makes possible external syn- cenko. Transformer Increases DC-DC Converter
verter circuit by providing fast switching time. chronization, permitting use in television sys- Efficiency to 80%, SDN Magazine, May 5, 1976,
Circuit is practical only when input and output tems for triggering regulator with leading edge
p 110 and 112.
REMOTE SHUTDOWN
PEAK INVER
ru
— H 30^SEC
ALL RESISTOR VALUES IN OHMS
•SHAFER MAGNETICS
COVINA. CALIF
(213) 331 3115
+6 V TO ± 1 5 V — Combination of 555 timer and erates as oscillator driving step-up transformer alog Data Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA,
two NE550A precision adjustable regulators which feeds full-wave rectifier. — "Signetics An- 1977, p 726-727.
gives 0.1% line and load regulation. Timer op-
190
12 V TO — 1 1 V WITH CMOS 1C — Bipolar inverter

and rectifier together provide -11V from 12-V
auto battery for operating high-threshold MOS
logic of portable or automotive equipment.
Diode types are not critical. Inverter draws only
about 1 mA from 12-V battery on standby and
r
supplies 2 mA from -11V terminal — B. Fette,
i Inexpensive Inverters Generate VGG for Portable
MOS Applications, EDNIEEE Magazine, Dec 15
1971, p 51.
l
2 16
low leakage inductance
BATTERY-LIFE EXTENDER — Conserves battery

life by charging capacitor from 0 V at efficiencies
over 80% and by allowing battery to be used to
lower endpoint voltage. Will generate voltages
above or below battery voltages. When used in
capacitor-discharge ignition system, power
conversion efficiency is so high that heatsink is
unnecessary and only one power transistor is
needed. Gives full output voltage even when car
battery voltage is less than half nominal value,
as during cold starting. Article describes oper-
ation of circuit in detail. Tr may require series
RC protection between collector and emitter. —
R. M. Carter, Variable Voltage-Ratio Transistor
Converter, Wireless World, Nov. 1975, p 519.
TIOI
transistors (D101 and D102) as commutating CRT filament at start-up and prevent inverter
switches for untapped feedback winding of malfunction. Article gives instructions for wind-
CRO LOW-VOLTAGE SUPPLY— Developed for power transformer. R102 then determines ing T101, along with high-voltage supply circuit
use as one of supplies for portable CRO, oper- drive, while R101 produces required unbal- and all other circuits of CRO covering DC to 10
ating from battery using sealed rechargeable anced starting bias. Thermistor R108 in series MHz. — G. E. Friton, Eyes for Your Shack, 73
cells supplying 12 V at 2-5 Ah. High-efficiency with CRT filament has cold resistance of 10 Magazine,
90-94. Nov./Dec. 1975, p 74-76, 78-88, and
inverter uses two GE D40C6 or RCA 2N5294 ohms to counteract very low cold resistance of
191
CONVERTER CIRCUITS — DC TO DC
28-V HIGH-EFFICIENCY — Uses driven-type con-

verter inwhich signal source is simple two-tran-
sistor oscillator Q1-Q2. Turn-on delay technique
eliminates overlap current otherwise flowing in
2N1016 push-pull power transistors Q5 and Q6
when one is still on in storage state while other
is driven on. Efficiency can approach 90%. 03
and Q4 prevent off transistor from conducting
until opposite device has turned off. Values for
T2, CR3, and CR4 in output circuit are chosen to
give desired DC output voltage.— R. F. Downs,
Minimize Overlap to Maximize Efficiency in Sat-
urated Push-Pull Circuits, EDNIEEE Magazine,
Feb. 1, 1972, p 48-50.
*12V
12 V TO -11 V WITH TRANSISTORS— Bipolar

inverter and rectifier together provide -11V
from 12-V auto battery for operating high-
threshold MOS logic of portable or automotive
equipment. Transistor and diode types are not
critical. Multivibrator draws only 1.2 mA from
battery on standby and supplies 12 mA from
negative output terminal.— B. Fette, Inexpen-
sive Inverters Generate VGG for Portable MOS
Applications, EDNIEEE Magazine, Dec. 15, 1971,
p 51.
CRO HIGH-VOLTAGE SUPPLY— Controlled in- voltage transformer has 22K, 5.2K, and 600-ohm 2N4302 or 2N5457. — G. E. Friton, Eyes for Your
verter operates from 12-V battery and feeds windings, all center-tapped, often marked "Lio- Shack, 73 Magazine, Nov. /Dec. 1975, p 74-76,
positive and negative triplers for producing nel" when available in surplus shops. Q201, 78-88, and 90-94.
-600 V required for portable CRO. T601 high- Q202, and Q204 are 2N697 or 2N2219. Q203 is
6 V TO ±15 V — Combination of 555 timer and

two NE550 voltage regulators provides voltage
multiplication along with regulation of indepen-
dent DC outputs. Selected oscillator frequency
of 17 kHz optimizes performance of trans-
former. Can be used to power opamps from
either TTL supplies or 6-V batteries. Line and
load regulation are 0.1 %, while power efficiency
at full load of 100 mA is better than 75%.— R.
Solomon and R. Broadway, DC-to-DC Converter
Uses 1C Timer, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1973, p
87, 89, and 91.
+ 12 VTO -8V — Developed for use with mobile

equipment when DC voltage is required with
opposite polarity to that of auto battery. U1 is
555 timer operated as free-running square-
wave oscillator. Frequency is determined by R1,
R2, and C2; with values shown, it is about 6 kHz.
Cl reduces 6-kHz signal radiated back through
input lines. For 12-V input, typical outputs are
-8.4 V at 10 mA, -7.9 V at 20 mA, and -5.7 V
at 50 mA. All diodes are 1N914, 1N4148, or
equivalent. — G. A. Graham, Low-Power DC-DC
Converter, Ham Radio, March 1975, p 54-56.
±12 V FROM +5 V — NE555 timer connected as each polarity. Circuit uses push-pull inverter mary and 350 turns No. 26 center-tapped for
20-kHz oscillator drives pair of D44H4 transis- technique to generate AC for driving trans- secondary.— S. Ciarcia, Build a 5 W DC to DC
tors through 7437 quad two-input NAND buffer former constructed by rewinding 88-mH toroid Converter, BYTE, Oct. 1978, p 22, 24, 26, 28, and
30-31.
to produce full 200 mA of regulated output for to have 40 turns No. 20 center-tapped for pri-
193
5 V TO 400 V — Astable M VBR operating at 2 1 74

kHz for values shown drives push-pull transis-
tor pair feeding primary of audio input trans-
former T,. Secondary voltage is rectified by
diode bridge to provide DC output voltage rang-
ing from 100 to 400 V depending on load resis-
tance and exact value of supply voltage Vcc.
Bridge rectifier can be replaced by 40-stage mul-
tiplier as shown in lower diagram, to give 10-
kVDC output. — A. M. Hudor, Jr., Power Con-
verter Uses Low-Cost Audio Transformer, EDN
Magazine, April 20, 1977, p 139.
• ADD ADDITIONAL STAGES AS REQUIRED

• DIODES ARE 1N649 0R EQUIVALENT
• CAPACITORS ARE CERAMIC DISC 1 kV
280 V TO 600 V — Cascode push-pull transistor

switch conversion circuit uses low-voltage tran-
sistors and provides automatic equalization of
transistor storage time. Drive-signal input to
cascode push-pull switch is symmetrical 50- kHz
15 V P-P square wave from 50-ohm source. Q1
and Q2 each see only half of DC source voltage
because Cl and C2, in series across 280-V input,
charge to 140 V each. Circuit is adaptable to
wide range of output voltages and currents be-
cause identical units can be connected in series
or parallel to obtain desired rating. — L. G.
Wright and W. E. Milberger, HV Building Block
Uses Series Transistor Switches, EDN Maga-
zine, Feb. 15, 1971, p 39-40.
-15 V FROM +15 V — First two sections, of

74C04 hex inverter form 100-kHz oscillator, with
other sections connected to provide inversion
of standard microprocessor source voltage as
required for some interfaces and some D/A con-
verters. Shunt regulator formed by D1 and Q1
maintains output voltage relatively constant.
Changing zener D1 to 13 V makes output -12
V. — S. Ciarcia, Build a 5 W DC to DC Converter,
BYTE, Oct. 1978, p 22, 24, 26, 28, and 30-31.
verter having negative output voltage. — G. A.

+5 V TO —7 V — Uses LM555 timer as variable- Graham, Low-Power DC-DC Converter, Ham
duty-cycle pulse generator controlling transis- Radio, March 1975, p 54—56.
tor switch Q, which in turn drives flyback circuit.
Regulator Q2-D3-R4-R5 varies duty cycle accord-
ing to load, and flyback circuit L-D,-C, develops
negative output voltage. When Q, is on, current
flows through L to ground. When Q, turns off,
polarity across L reverses, diode becomes for-
ward-biased, and negative voltage appears
across C, and load. When Q, turns on again,
voltage across L reverses for start of new cycle.
Circuit eliminates separate transformer supply
for negative supply of microprocessor. Effi-
ciency isabout 60%, load regulation 1.3%, and
supply rejection 30 dB. Article gives design
equations. — P. Brown, Jr., Converter Generates
Negative pP Bias Voltagefrom +5V, EDN Mag-
azine, Aug. 5, 1977, p 42, 44, and 46.
+8 V FROM +5 V — Oscillator operating at

about 16 kHz steps up 5-V supply voltage of
microprocessor to 8 V for driving special inter-
face circuits. Sections c, d, and e of 7404 hex in-
verter form buffer and driver for voltage-dou-
bling rectifier— S. Ciarcia, Build a 5 W DC to DC
Converter, BYTE, Oct. 1978, p 22, 24, 26, 28, and
30-31.
INPUT Vi
^
>27K 12V DC
*>470K
2N3904
' )1
.00062 OSCILLATOR
\
2N3904 )
\ \ FROM
+
CY r
+ OUTPUT TO
INPUT +
OSCILLATOR
JT'
7t
POLARITY REVERSER — Simple RC oscillator Vt

~
operating at about 1200 Hz can be used with supply and to ground for high operating effi- doubler uses switching transistors. All three
choice of rectifier circuits to provide negative or ciency. Two-diode voltage doubler with con- rectifier circuits provide common ground from
positive voltages equal to or higher than DC nection to 12-V supply gives positive output. supply to output. — J. M. Pike, Negative and
supply, without use of transformer. Output Other diode rectifier circuit doubles oscillator High Voltagesfrom a Positive Supply, QST, Jan.
transistors connect load alternately to positive output and gives negative supply. Negative
1974, p 23-25.
195
- 15V AT
±15 V FROM +5 V — Provides positive and neg-

ative higher voltages required by some inter- 10 m A
face devices used with microprocessors. NE555
timer is connected as 100-kHz oscillator that
switches transistor on and off, inducing current + 15V AT
in primary of T1. High-voltage spike reflected

back to collector of transistor by pulse trans-
10 mA
former is routed through D1 to filter-regulator
for providing positive output. — S. Ciarcia, Build
a 5 W DC to DC Converter, BYTE, Oct. 1978, p
22,24, 26, 28, and 30-31.
T | IS A PULSE ENGINEERING TRANSFORMER PE- 3843
vcc
2 kHr CLOCK
O O
-O -vc
Ra = IK
-vw- 100 /if 1N916
-w- TRANSFORMERLESS POSITIVE TO NEGA-

— 1(—
4 8 3 TIVE— Used to derive negative supply voltage
from positive supply voltage, while at same
time generating 2-kHz clock signal. Negative
SIGNETICS output voltage tracks DC input voltage linearly,
555 — o
but magnitude is about 3 V lower. Circuit does
B = 33K not provide regulation. — "Signetics Analog
1 5 2
ViN9i Data Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977,
0.01/iF
) 01 /i F p 729.
^TlOO/rf
198 MU
rAM-i
AA/\ — W. W\ — '\AAr- RCA
(NINE 22 MQ RESISTORS IN. SERIESI
DI20IP
BLUE RCA
AT 1 KV
-0.01 -
AT IKV
, ■ -
mF
Dl 20IP i r RCA
"
01
AT 20
^ DI IP
I KV
iO.OI
lF
aF
REGULATED HIGH-VOLTAGE SUPPLY
REGULATED +900 V FROM +6 V— CA3094 pro-
grammable opamp is connected as oscillatorfor to CA3080A variable opamp through 198-meg- is within 1% for loads of 5 to 26 jtA. DC-to-DC
driving step-up transformer that develops suit- ohm resistor of voltage divider to control pulse conversion efficiency is about 50%. — "Circuit
able high voltage for rectification in diode net- repetition rate of oscillator. Magnitude of reg- Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," RCA Solid State Di-
work. Sample of +900 V regulated output is fed ulated output is controlled by pot R. Regulation vision, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 19.
196
+ 12 V
0 TO —10 V FROM +12 V — Variable-output con-

verter using NE555 timer delivers negative out-
put voltage required by some interface devices
and D/A converters used with microproces-
sors.— S. Ciarcia, Build a 5 W DC to DC Con-
verter, BYTE , Oct. 1978, p 22, 24, 26, 28, and 30-
31.
0 TO
AT 10 m-10V
A
v+
+ 12 V TO +20 V — Developed for use with mo-

bile equipment when DC voltage higher than
that of auto battery is needed. One application
is trickle-charging 12-V nickel-cadmium batter-
ies. U1 is 555 timer operated as free-running
square-wave oscillator. Frequency is deter-
mined by R1, R2, and C2; with values shown, it
is about 6 kHz. Cl reduces 6-kHz signal radiated
back through input lines. If converter is used
with high-frequency receiver, insert 100-^H RF
chokes in power leads to suppress harmonics
15V TO -24 V — Voltage doubler is used in com- capability is about 10 mA. Output drops to of 6 kHz. For 12-V input, typical outputs are 20.4
V at 10 mA, 19.9 V at 20 mA, and 17.7 V at 50
bination with 555 astable MVBR and two peak- about -14.5 V when using supply of +10 V. —
to-peak detectors to give high negative volt- mA. All diodes are 1N914, 1N4148, or equiva-
W. G. Jung, "1C Timer Cookbook," Howard W.
ages from positive voltage source. Load current Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 197-201. lent.— G. A. Graham, Low-Power DC-DC Con-
verter, Ham Radio , March 1975, p 54-56.
>-A/\
’,RI • 2.7
• 15k
7ANY 8-12 »F
47k
2N487I \R2
ft ZE"ERA? C2
is
+ 12 V TO -12 V — High-efficiency polarity in

verter for mobile applications provides well
regulated adjustable negative output voltage
2 A from positive auto battery source. Stable
UJT oscillator Q1 drives transistor 02 to pro-
duce symmetrical square wave. Q3 buffers out-
put and furnishes driving power for inverter Q4
and output stage Q7. Q4 and Q5 together drive
Q6 into complete saturation. Q6 and Q7 form between ground and nearly battery potential is stable reference. R10 is 100 ohms for 2 A maxi-
complementary-symmetry output operating in applied to C3. Q10 and Q11 are connected as mum; increasing its value improves efficiency
saturation mode, with only one transistor diodes for clamping square wave negatively. but reduces maximum current. — J. R. Laughlin,
turned on at a time. A6 they are alternately Output voltage is regulated by transistor feed- Medium Current Polarity Inverter, Ham Radio,
switched on and off, square wave alternating back loop Q8 and Q9, with zener CR2 providing Nov. 1973, p 26-30.
197
+ 15 V TO -12 V — Simple transformerless

power converter uses 555 timer in self-triggered
mode as square-wave generator, followed by
voltage-doubling rectifier. Values shown for R
and C give frequency of about 20 kHz, which
permits good filtering with relatively small ca-
pacitors. Maximum load current is about 80
mA. — M. Strange, 1C Timer Makes Transformer-
less Power Converter, EDN Magazine, Dec. 20,
1973, p 81.
±15 V FROM 12 V — Steps up output of 12-V bat-

tery to voltages required by PLL such as NE561 .
Uses 900-Hz sine-wave oscillator and LM380N
AF amplifier to drive voice-coil side of standard
500-ohm to 3.2-ohm output transformer having
bridge rectifier across center-tapped primary.
With 10-mA loads, maximum ripple is 15 mV P-
P. With receiver quiet, 900-Hz hum is audible,
but is normally lost under background noise.
Oscillator choke (about 700 mH| is 800 turns of
No. 44 magnet wire in Ferroxcube 3C pot
core. — R. Megirian, Build a Noise-Free Power
Supply, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1977, p 208-209.
+15 V TO +27 V — Uses 555 timer in self-trig-

gered mode as square-wave generator operat-
ing at about 20 kHz, followed by voltage-dou-
bling rectifier. Provides approximate doubling
of voltage without use of transformer. Maxi-
mum load current is about 80 mA. — M. Strange,
1C Timer Makes Transformerless Power Con-
verter, EDN Magazine, Dec. 20, 1973, p 81.
CHAPTER 18
Converter Circuits — Digital-to-Analog

Includes circuits for converting variety of digital inputs to linearly related
analog output voltage or current, providing analog sum of two digital inputs,
or converting stored digital speech back to analog form.
VCC +16V TO +30V
8-BfT BINARY TO PROCESS CURRENT— Uses of 4-20 mA. Fixed current of 0.5 mA is added to load. — D. Soderquist, "3 1C 8 Bit Binary Digital
only three Precision Monolithics ICs operating DAC output current varying between 0 and 2 to Process Cu rrent Converter with 4-20 mA Out-
from —5 V and +23 V supplies to convert 8-bit mA, with resulting total current multiplied by put," Precision Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA,
binary digital input to process current in range factor of 8 to give up to 20 mA through 500-ohm 1977, AN-21.
198
CONVERTER CIRCUITS — DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG 199
DIGITAL 1.25KS1 R2 5KI!
HIGH-SPEED OUTPUT OPAMP— Precision

Monolithics OP-17F opamp optimizes DAC-08E
D/A converter for highest speed in converting
DAC output current to output voltage up to 10
V under control of digital input. Settling time is
380 ns — G. Erdi, "The OP-17. OP-16, OP-15 as
Output Amplifiers for High Speed D/A Convert-
ers," Precision Monolithics. Santa Clara, CA,
1977, AN-24, p 2.
INPUTS
FOUR-CHANNEL BCD — Uses four Precision

Monolithics DAC-20CQ 2-digit BCD D/A con-
verter, OP-11FY precision quad opamp, and
REF-01HJ +10 V voltage reference to convert 2-
digit BCD input coding to proportional analog
0 to +10 V output for each of four channels.
Same configuration will handle binary inputs,
as covered in application note. For output range
of 0 to +5 V, change voltage reference to REF-
02. — D. Soderquist, "Low Cost Four Channel
DAC Gives BCD or Binary Coding," Precision
Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, AN-26, p 3.
9-BIT USING DIGITAL SWITCHES— Combina-

tion of CD4007A multiple-switch CMOS ICs, lad-
der network of discrete metal-oxide film resis-
tors, CA3160 voltage-follower opamp, and
CA3085 voltage regulator gives digital-to-ana-
log converter that is readily interfaced with 10-
V logic levels of CMOS input. Required resistor
accuracy, ranging from ±0.1% for bit 2 to ± 1%
for bits 6-9, is achieved by using series and par-
allel combinations of 806K resistors. — "Linear
Integrated Circuits and MOS/FET's," RCA Solid
State Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 267-268.
0+5V
ra. .
DIGITAL
INPUTS
6 BITS TO ANALOG— Uses Motorola MC1723G
voltage regulator to provide reference voltage
and opamp for MC1406L 6-bit D/A converter. (MSB) A1
A4O~lC0NVE
RTER
Output current can be up to 150 mA. Full-scale
output is about 10 V, but can be boosted as high
as 32 V by increasing value of R2 and increasing ADD
ôif
A20-^ RECURRENT
+ 15 V supply proportionately to maximum of
35 V. — D. Aldridge and K. Huehne, 6-Bit D/A
A60— < MC1406L
Converter Uses Inexpensive Components, EDN
Magazine, Dec. 15, 1972, p 40-41. ASO-2J
| A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
2 4 + 8 16 32 64
LOW PASS FILTER
IOmF IOmF
8 BIT
PARALLEL
INPUT
DAC FOR SPEECH — Audio signals stored in 8- phonemes in any language or for providing
channel digital form in computer are converted voice replies to queries. Pin 7 of IC9 is +12 V,
back into analog form forfeed through low-pass and pin 4 is -12 V. — S. Ciarcia, Talk to Me! Add
filter to input of audio amplifier. Can be used for a Voice to Your Computer for $35, BYTE, June
computer-controlled synthesis of speech from
1978, p 142-151.
CONVERTER CIRCUITS-DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG 201
2-DIGIT BCD INPUT — Each Signetics 5007/5008

multiplying D/A converter serves one digit of
input voltage to give output current that is
product of digital input number and input ref-
erence current. Opamp combines currents and
converts them to analog output voltage pro-
portional todigital input value. — "Signetics An-

alog Data Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA,
1977, p 677-685.
ANALOG SUM OF DIGITAL NUMBERS— Two

Precision Monolithics DAC-100 D/A converters
and OP-01 opamp combine conversion with
adding to give high-precision DC output volt-
age. 200-ohm pots are adjusted initially to give
exactly desired output for input of all 0s. — "8
& 10 Bit Digital-to- Analog Converter," Precision
Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, DAC-100
P 5.
SIMPLE DAC — Transistors are either saturated

or cut off by outputs of clock-controlled SN7490
BCD counter. Portions of emitter voltages of the
four transistors are added in ratios 1:2:4:8 by
741 summing opamp to obtain analog output.
Article tells how two such circuits can be com-
bined for use in two-digit DVM. — D. James,
Simple Digital to Analogue Converter, Wireless
World, June 1974, p 197
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION — Use of 7407

hex buffer following SN7490 of D/A converter
permits satisfactory performance over reason-
ably wide temperature range even when driving
several TTL stages. Noninverting input of 741
opamp is connected to output of unused buffer
at logic 0. Circuit is modification of D/A con-
verter developed by D. James for use in simple
two-digit DVM. — R. J. Chance, Improved Sim-
ple D. to A. Converter, Wireless World, Dec.
1974, p 503.
2-DIGIT BCD — Output current of Precision Mon-

olithics DAC-100 D/A converter can be adjusted
to exactly desired value with 200-ohm pot for
each DAC; adjustment is made with input of all
Os. Circuit can beexpanded to 3 digits by adding
third DAC and adding 99 to current divider. —
"8 & 10 Bit Digital -to- Analog Converter," Pre-
cision Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, DAC-
100, p 5.
2^-DIGfT INPUT FOR 199 COUNT— Addition of

Vr-digit circuit to basic 2-digit BCD DAC in-
creases countfrom 99 to 199. Circuit sequences
to 99 while '/2-digit section of MC14009 hex two-
input NOR gate has low output, and goes
through steps 100 to 199 while '/2-digit output
is high. Reference voltage is 5.0 V. Calibration
procedure is given. — T. Henry, Binary D/A Con-
verters Can Provide BCD-Coded Conversion,
EDN Magazine, Aug. 5, 1973, p 70-73.
203
CONVERTER CIRCUITS — DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG
) Vcc + 16V to +30V
wv Settling
with Rl time
= 500 3=Si5 ^sec
CURRENT CONVERTER— Converts 8-bit TTL

digital inputs to process current in range of 4 to output current of 4-20 mA. To calibrate, con- Changedigital inputs to all Is (greater than +2.0
20 mA, for microprocessor control of industrial nect ammeter between output and ground, V), and adjust R2 until output current is 20
operations. Fixed 0.5-mA current is added to then apply +23 V ± 7 V and -5 V ± 1 V to con- mA. — D. Soderquist, Build Your Own 4-20 mA
DAC output current varying between 0 and 2.0 verter. Make digital inputs all 0s (less than +0.8 Digital to Analog Converter, Instruments &
mA and multiplied byfactor of 8to produce final V). Adjust Rl until output current is 4.0 mA. Control Systems, March 1977, p 57-58.
CATE
COMMAND
BUSY
OUTPUT
verter is used with logic and summer elements applications having short repeated duty cycles, sphygmomanometers. Circuit eliminates
to eliminate virtually all offset errors induced by each containing reference point. Examples in- warm-up errors.— "Pressure Transducer Hand-
time and temperature changes in process con- elude weighing scale in which transducer is load book," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
trol system fed by transducer. Best suited for cell, pressure control systems, fuel pumps, and CA, 1977, p 7-4-7-8.
1,
9 + iov
DIFFERENTIAL CURREN
DAC-08
#1 _
r K «REF
*02 FOUR-QUADRANT ALGEBRAIC— Two Preci-
DIGITAL sion Monoiithics DAC-08 D/A converters per-
'oi
\ WORD
INPUT form fast algebraic summation of two digital
input words and feed OP-02 opamp that pro-
vides direct analog output which is algebraic
5K1.!
AND "A" AND "B"
ARE POSI OR NEG
sum of words A and B in all four quadrants. — J.
REF TIVE ATI
VE eout
OFF
SET
BIN
A RY
DIGI
TAL
WOR
DS Schoeff and D. Soderquist, "Differential and
Multiplying Digital to Analog Converter Appli-
DAC-08 cations," Precision Monoiithics, Santa Clara,
#2 CA, 1976, AN-19, p 7.
iuum DIGITAL
1111 1111
1100 "A”
WORD 0000
1111
1100
WORD0000
"B"
1111 3.984mA
3.000mA
0
0.984mA
+9. 96V
+5. 04V
+0.04V
|B\ INPUT
1000 0001 1.984mA
WORD 0111 1111 2.000mA
1000 0000 1.992mA 1 ,992mA -0.04V
0111 1111 0
1.992mA 1.992mA -5.04V
0111 1111 1000 0000 0
-9.96V
0111 1110 1000 0000 1.984mA 2.000mA
0011 1111 0011 1111 0.984mA 3.000mA
0000 0000 0000 0000 0 3.984mA
CLOCK START
■5 V ANALOG INPUT
GROUND
FOR
SINGLE
ENDED
INPUTS
data, omit inverter, two 74175 chips, and half of

BELL-SYSTEM /u-255 COMPANDING LAW— lated chords, then using 4 bits to select one of 7474. Power supplies should be well by-
Precision Monoiithics DAC-86 is used in circuit sixteen linearly related steps within each chord. passed.— "COMDAC Companding D/A Con-
that provides 15-segment linear approximation Sign bit determines signal polarity, and encode/ verter," Precision Monoiithics, Santa Clara, CA,
decode select bit determines operation. Circuit 1977, DAC-86, p 6.
by using 3 bits to select one of eight binarily re-
CHAPTER 19
Converter Circuits — General

Includes V/F, V/l, V/pulse width, V/time, F/V, 7-segment/BCD, BCD/7-segment,
Gray/BCD, Gray/binary, binary/BCD, time/V, pulse height/time, l/V, and other
converter circuits for changing one parameter linearly to another. See also
other Converter chapters.
+5V
10 Hz TO 10 kHz V/F — External circuit shown for full-scale value, set VIN to 10 mV and trim with "Applications of the 9400 Voltage to Frequency
Teledyne 9400 voltage-to-frequency converter 50K offset adjust pot to get 10-Hz output, then Frequency to Voltage Converter," Teledyne
provides means for trimming zero location and set V|„ to 10.000 V and trim either R,N, VnEF, or Semiconductor, Mountain View, CA, 1978, AN-
full-scale frequency value of output. For 10-kHz CREF to obtain 10-kHz output. — M. O. Paiva,
205
10, p 3-5.
V/F CONVERTER WITH 0.05% LINEARITY— Ray-

theon RM4151 converter is used with integrator
opamp to give highly linear conversion of inputs
up to —10 VDC to proportional frequency of
square-wave output. With maximum input of
-10 V, adjust 5K full-scale trimpot for maximum
output frequency of 1 0 kHz. Set offset adjust pot
to give 10-Hz output for input of -10 mV. To
operate from single positive supply, change
opamp to RC3403A. — "Linear Integrated Circuit

Data Book," Raytheon Semiconductor Division,
Mountain View, CA, 1978, p 7-38.
0.1 Hz— 100 kHz V/F — Uses NE556 timer in dual

mode in combination with opamp and FET for
linear voltage-to-frequency conversion with
output range from 0.1 Hz to 100 kHz. Operating
frequency is 0.91/2RC where R is resistance of
FET. — K. Kraus, Linear V-F Converter, Wireless
World, May 1977, p 80.
LSB
BCD X-3 GRAY

GRAY
X3
0000 0000 0010
0110
0001 0001
0010 0111
0011 GRAY
0011 0101
0100 0010 0100
0110
0101 1100
0111
0110 0101 1101
0111 0100 1110
1111
1000 MSB
1100
1001 1101 1010
T NEU
EXCESS-THREE GRAY CODE TO BCD— Devel- TTL ICs, connected as shown. To convert regu- conversion for both types of Gray codes. — D. M .
oped for use with shaft encoder providing ex- lar Gray code to BCD, omit SN7483 4-bit adder. Risch, Two ICs Convert Excess-Three Gray Code
cess-three Gray-code output. Requires only two Tabulation shows how circuit accomplishes to BCD, EDN Magazine, Nov. 1, 1972, p 44.
207
CONVERTER C IR C U IT S — G E N E R A L
HIGH-PRECISION V/F CONVERTER— Active in-

tegrator using one section of RC3403A quad
opamp improves linearity, frequency offset, and
response time of Raytheon RM4151 converter
operating from single supply. Opamp develops
null voltage. — "Linear Integrated Circuit Data
Book," Raytheon Semiconductor Division,
Mountain View, CA, 1978, p 7-38.
DC VOLTAGE TO TIME — Opamp connected as

integrator feeds opamp comparator to produce
output pulse whose width is proportional to
magnitude of DC input voltage. Circuit shown
is for positive inputs only; for both positive and
negative inputs, article tells how to add another
comparator. Circuit can then be used to gener-
ate start and stop pulses applied to digital timer
of digital voltmeter. — G. B. Clayton, Experi-
ments with Operational Amplifiers, Wireless
World, Sept. 1973, p 447-448.
VOLTAGE-TO-FREQUENCY GO/NO-GO— Sin- exceeds predetermined limit, output to digital no-go indication. — T. H. Li, VFC Used in Isolated
gle UJT is used as V/F converter to provide com- frequency counter exceeds corresponding fre- GO/NO GO Voltage Monitor, EDN Magazine,
pletely isolated inputs and outputs for high- quency limit. Output can be fed directly into dig- July 5, 1974, p 75.
voltage go/no-go test monitor. When voltage ital frequency-limit detector that provides go/
10K
CURRENT TO VOLTAGE — Developed for use

with current-output transducers such as silicon
photocells. For widest frequency response, cir-
cuit values may need some adjusting for source
current and capacitance. C,, across feedback re-
VOLTAGE TO FREQUENCY— Input voltage linearity. Circuit is TTL-compatible. Accuracy is sistor of opamp, eliminates ringing around 500
range of 0 to —10 VDC is converted by opamp 0.2%. — "Signetics Analog Data Manual," Sig- kHz. If input coupling capacitor is added to re-
and tinier to proportional frequency with good netics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 727-729. duce DC gain, circuit can be used with inductive
source such as magnetic tape head. — R. S. Bur-
wen, Current-to-Voltage Converter for Trans-
ducer Use, EDN Magazine, Dec. 15, 1972, p 40.
0.01-10 V to 1, 10, OR 100 kHz— Simple voltage-

to-frequency converter uses Raytheon 4152 op-
erating from single 15-V supply to convert an-
alog input voltage to proportional frequency of
square-wave output. Maximum output fre-
quency depends on values used for resistors
and capacitors, as given in table. Suitable for
applications where input dynamic range is lim-
ited and does not go to zero. — "Linear Inte-
grated Circuit Data Book," Raytheon Semicon-
ductor Division, Mountain View, CA, 1978, p Range
Operating
7-45-7-46.
DC to 1 kHz 6.8 KS2 0.1 pF 100 KU 10 pF

DC to 10 kHz 6.8 KS2 0.01 fjF 100 Kn 1.0 pF
DC to 100 kHz 6.8 KU 0.001 pF 100 KS2 0.1 pF
10k 9. tk
gain than roughly offsets attenuation of Aa, with

2K pot being adjusted to provide desired ratio
20- kHz SQUARE-WAVE TO DC— Provides ac- connected as differential input voltage-follow- of DC output voltage to RMS value of input. —
curacy within 0.1% for square-wave inputs of 3 ers to provide high input impedance. A3 con- J. Renken, Differential High-Z RMS-DC Con-
to 7 VRMS in frequency range of 5 to 20 kHz verts to single-ended output as required by verter Has 0.1% Accuracy, EDN Magazine, May
when duty cycle is 50%. Opamps A, and A are Model 440 converter 1C. A, provides adjustable 5, 1977, p 114 and 116.
209
SINGLE-SLOPE V/F CONVERSION— UJT forms

reference that determines reset point of
LM301A integrator for converting analog input
voltage to proportional frequency. Output of in-
tegrator ramps negative until UJT switches and
drives output positive at high slew rate. Positive
edge of integrator output is differentiated by RC
network and level-shifted by NPN bipolar tran-
sistor to provide logic-compatible pulse. — J.
Williams, Low-Cost, Linear A/D Conversion
Uses Single-Slope Techniques, EDN Magazine,
Aug. 5, 1978, p 101-104.
GRAY TO BINARY — Converts first 4 bits of

Gray-code word to binary output. Uses two
MC7496 shift registers and logic elements to
transfer data serially from input register
through MC1812 EXCLUSIVE-OR 1C to output
register. One requirement is that strobe on pin
8 of input register must complete its function
before clock appears on pin 1 of register. When
this and other timing conditions are satisfied,
converter will work at speeds up to about 10
megabits per second. — J. Barnes, "Analog-to-

Digital Cyclic Converter," Motorola, Phoenix,
AZ, 1974, AN-557, p 9.
Binary Output
VCC
*V)N IS LIMITED TO 2
DIODE DROPS WITHIN
GROUND OR BELOW
VOLTAGE TO PULSE WIDTH— Opamp and width of output pulse with accuracy better than "Signetics Analog Data Manual/' Signetics,
timer together convert input voltage level to 1%. Output is at same frequency as input. — Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 726-727.
E,
0-10V
E2
0-10V
■ 1 — —c l — " T”1
point, circuit output is 10,000 pulses per hour,
DIVIDING ANALOG VOLTAGES— Charge-and- portional to input E„ producing negative ramp suitable for driving electromechanical counter.
dump V/F conversion technique is used to ob- at output of integrating opamp A,. When R2 Output frequency is proportional to average DC
tain quotient of two analog voltages digitally. wiper voltage exceeds E2, output of A2 goes value of E, even when input changes rapidly. —
Applications include measurement of total high, turning on Q3 and temporarily driving Q, H. L. Trietley, Voltage-to-Frequency Converter
mass flow of gas under constant pressure. With and Q2 into conduction. This process discharges Performs Division, EDN Magazine, Jan. 5, 1978,
Q, and Q2 normally off, C, charges at rate pro- C„ resetting output of A, to zero. With values
p 79-80.
r
c„
BIPOLAR OUTPUT — Low-cost voltage-to-fre- PR

quency converter 1C is here used in A/D con- DECODED r Q
DM7474
D
verter circuit that will accept bipolar inputs and POLARITY CK

generate positive-going pulses to indicate pos-
itive input voltages and negative-going pulses
OUTPUT
i
DM8853
for negative input voltages. Opamps A, and A2
PULSE §V 10k S0“pF t CODED INPUT
form negative-output absolute-value circuit Q
OUTPUT
that feeds opamp A3 and RC4151 voltage-to-fre-
CL • /ODER SECTION
quency converter, for generating 10-ps nega- (bl j. _ PULSE RECEIVER/DECODER SECTION
tive-going pulses with repetition-rate scale fac-
+SV
tor of 1 kHz/V. Full-scale input is 20 V P-P. digitally coded <j)
signals arriving from transmit- from data line. Logic 1 on complementary out-
Opamp A4 is ground-referenced voltage com- ter, for processing by data line of D flip-flop and put of flip-flop indicates that original input volt-
parator having zener clamp, providing TTL- two trigger inputs of dual-edge retriggerable age to transmitter was positive. — E. J. DeWath,
compatible logic output for indicating input mono MVBR. This generates 25-ps negative- Low-Cost A/D Converter Transmits and Re-
polarity. Pulse-receiver/decoder section takes going output pulse for each 10-/us input pulse ceives, EDN Magazine, Jan. 5, 1977, p 35.
Q 0
CONVERTER C IR C U IT S — G E N E R A L 211
POSITIVE-INPUT V/F — Input voltages from 0 to timer A2 provides functions of precision mono voltage output for 555 and 308A.— W. G. Jung,
10 V are divided by R, and R2 for application to MVBR and level sensor. Regulator A3 acts as "1C Timer Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indi-
noninverting input of current source A,. 555 gated current source and provides stabilized anapolis, IN, 1977, p 184-192.
Output 2
Output 1
(TTL Compatible)
t, — R, Ct — 50ps, Ra — 20 kn, l2 — 1 mA.

-15 V
+ R,, C,, Ra, and Rb are stable, low-TC components (see text).
scale value of 10 kHz. Internal regulation of cir- MVBR. Transistor switch Q, connects R„ to 3.15-
-10 V GIVES 10 kHz — Control voltage input in cuit makes operation essentially independent V reference voltage during t, timing period of
range of 0 to —10 V is converted linearly to fre- of ±15 V supply level. A, is opamp integrator, A3. — W. G. Jung, "1C Timer Cookbook," Howard
quency of digital output pulse train having full- A2 is comparator, and A3 is precision mono W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 184-192.
TIME TO VOLTAGE — Time period of negative

gating signal determines amplitude of linear
V/F AND F/V — Although based on Raytheon put. Design equations are given. Article also output ramp generated by integrator opamp.
4151 1C voltage-to-frequency converter, circuit covers F/V operation of same 1C for demodulat- Amplitude of ramp, proportional to input time,
is readily adapted to other modern V/F converting FSK data. — T. Cate, 1C V/F Converters Read- is observed on calibrated screen of oscillo-
ers now costing under $10 each. With values ily Handle Other Functions Such as F/V, A/D, scope.— G. B. Clayton, Experiments with Op-
shown, input of 0 to —10 VDC provides propor- EDN Magazine, Jan. 5, 1977, p 82-86. erational Amplifiers, Wireless World, Sept.
tional frequency change from 0 to 1 0 kHz at out-
1973, p 447-448.
Z3
Z6
zl' Z4
DIGIT BLNK. a b c cl e f g Z2' Z5

TYPE 4001 .
0
1
0 0
1
0 0 0 0 0 i 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 1 1 i 0 0 0 1 + 12V PIN 14
2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 TYPE 4011
3 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 GND PIN 7
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 TYPE 4002 \
5
6
0
0
0 1
1
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 + 12V PIN 16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
7 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 TYPE 4009 \• +5V PIN
GND PIN 18
8
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
BLANK 1 X X X X X X X 1 1 1 X
X = DON'T CARE SEGMENT

IDENTIFICATION
0 = Ov (SEGMENT ACTIVE)
1 = + 12V (SEGMENT OFF)
23
22
7-SEGMENT TO BCD— Uses six CMOS pack- when high, forces blank code (1110 or 1111) into 1 output is required — R. Sturla, Real-Time 7-Seg-
2 2°
ages to convert 7-segment display to corre- readout, for use in suppressing leading zeros ment to BCD Converter, EDN Magazine, June
20, 1973, p 89.
sponding four-line positive-logic BCD code for with some types of data storage. Use 4010 in
digits 0-9. Added feature is blank input which. place of 4009 for Z6 when negative-logic BCD
213
BCD
BINARY
INPUT
OUTPUT
c H
*. A1
8 >—
^DO •“
0 > LtX> '/SMC14001

Br
B3
B,
Bo
MC14519 OUTPUTS BCD OUTPUTS
B' C' D' E'
PULSE HEIGHT TO TIME — Simple opamp cir-

cuit produces time interval proportional to
height of positive input pulse. Opamp is con-
Bo " \ B ' B,
nected as integrator whose output is held at
B,®B,
B, :> B, about zero by negative feedback through D3.
Positive input pulse charges C, and C2, amplifier
output steps down, and D, is reverse-biased.
Time for output to charge back up to zero, as
4-BIT BINARY TO 5-BIT BCD — Converts binary Article gives truth tables and traces operation observed on oscilloscope, is then directly pro-
number within machine to BCD value from 0 to step by step. — J. Barnes and J. Tonn, Binary-to- portional toinput pulse height. Article gives de-
15, for driving visual displays. Requires only BCD Converter Implements Simple Algorithm, sign equations. — G. B. Clayton, Experiments
quad two-channel data selector with EXCLU- EDN Magazine, Jan. 5, 1975, p 56, 57, and 59. with Operational Amplifiers, Wireless World,
SIVE-NOR function, available in 1C packages. Sept. 1973, p 447-448.
DIGITAL TO FREQUENCY— Combination of not critical. Output frequency of each timer de- MDAC's Open Up a New World of Digital-Con-
multiplying DAC and 556 dual timer provides pends on supply voltages, capacitor values, and trol Applications, EDN Magazine, Sept. 20,
complementary output frequencies under con- setting of R,. — J. Wilson and J. Whitmore,
trol of digital input. Opamp and diode types are 1978, p 97-105.
214
VOLTAGE TO PULSE DURATION— Optical Elec-

tronics 9829 opamps are used as fast compar-
ators and 9718 FET opamp as fast integrator to
give high precision at high speed for converting
analog voltage to pulse duration for such appli-
cations as A/D conversion, delta code genera-
R
tion, motor speed3 control, and pulse-duration
modulation. Output pulse durations can be as
short as 1 /is. Conversion linearity is better than
0.1%. Minimum pulse duration is 100 ns, and
maximum dynamic range is 40 dB. Reference
voltages are determined by X input; if X is 3 V,
reference voltages differ by 6 V. Two 9829
opamps present reference voltages to two com-
parator opamps. Fifth 9829 sums comparator
outputs and gives positive output. — "Voltage
to Pulse Width Converter," Optical Electronics,
Tucson, AZ, Application Tip 10230.
VOLTAGE TO CURRENT — Circuit is capable of

supplying constant alternating current up to 1
A to variable load. Actual value of load current
is determined by input voltage, values of R,-R3,
and value of R5. Input of 250 mV gives 0.5 A
through load (RMS values) with less than 0.5%
total harmonic distortion. Applications include
control of electromagnet current. — "Audio
Flandbook," National Semiconductor, Santa
Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-21-4-28.
= ,0k R3'R6.R9.R,3 = 14.1k
io ' R 12 = 10.82k R4 R5.R8'Rh = 26.1k

SQUARE TO SINE — Transversal digital filter 16th. Simple RC filter removes remaining har- SN7495 16-bit shift register. C, and C2 are se-
suppresses harmonics present on input square monics. Input is clock whose repetition rate is lected to eliminate higher harmonics. Sine-
wave, to give pure sine wave. Resistors weight 16 times desired frequency. SN74L93 4-bit rip- wave output has harmonic distortion of less
data as it passes through 1 6-bit shift register, so ple counter divides this down to provide square than —50 dB. — L. J. Mandell, Sine-Wave Syn-
sine wave is sampled at 16 times its frequency wave of desired frequency. Square wave is sam- thesizer Has Low Harmonic Distortion, EDN
and theoretically has no harmonics below the pled 16 times per cycle and shifted down Magazine, Aug. 15, 1972, p 52.
215
SEVEN SEGMENT
INPUTS
7-SEGMENT TO BCD — Arrangement uses

SN7448 BCD to 7-segment decoder IC4 as
lookup table for inverse decoding technique.
When desired 7-segment code is applied to
input of decoder and does not match output
code from IC4, gate IC3 output is logic 1. This al-
lows pulses from clock to advance BCD counter
IC5 until its decoded state from IC4 matches that
of input code. With coincidence, output of IC3
goes low, holding proper BCD code in IC5 and
indicating by means of IC6b that BCD informa-
tion is ready. With 100-kHz clock, correct code
is available for at least 90% of digit display
time. — J. P. Cater, 7-Segment to BCD Decoder,
EDN Magazine, Feb. 20, 1973, p 92-93.
I.E , LED ON FOR DATA HIGH, OR LED HIGH FOR DATA LOW.
OPTICALLY COUPLED V/F— Input voltage range earity by RM4151 converter used in combina- LED driver. — "Linear Integrated Circuit Data
of 0—10 V is converted to proportional fre- tion with RC3403A quad opamp that provides
Book," Raytheon Semiconductor Division,
quehcy at output of optoisolator with high lin- functions of inverter, integrator, regulator, and
Mountain View, CA, 1978, p 7-40—7-41.
216
DIFFERENTIAL TO ABSOLUTE VALUE— Used in

comparing differential level to threshold level
with good common-mode rejection. Input
impedance is maintained high to avoid over-
loading differential input. Output voltage re-
mains positive when input polarity is re-
versed.— R. L. Wiker, Differential to Absolute
Value Converter, EEE Magazine, Jan. 1971, p 65.
MATCHED TO 0.025%
RMS TO DC — Single AD534 analog multiplier

and two opamps compute RMS value of input
signal as square root of sum of squares. Input
is first squared at X2 and Y„ then time-averaged
by integrator. Closing output loop back to X,
and Yj completes square-rooting function.
Crest factors up to 10 do not appreciably affect
accuracy as long as input limits of multiplier are
not exceeded. Accuracy is maintained up to 100
kHz. Article gives calibration procedure. — R.
Frantz, Analog Multipliers — New 1C Versions
Manipulate Real-World Phenomena with Ease,
EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977, p 125-129.
—J
0.2s - T f—
ANALOG TO PULSE WIDTH— Stripped-down for use in digital voltmeter. Reference current is ing diagram and design equations. — N. A.
version of dual-slope A/D converter integrates switched out of integrator when output voltage Robin, An alog-to-Pulse- Width Converter Yields
input current constantly but switches reference reaches +4.5V. With values shown, using 100 0.1% Accuracy, EDN Magazine, Nov. 1, 1970
42-43. p
current into integrator each time clock pulse kilohms for R„ maximum input current is 80 pA
occurs. Accuracy of 0.1% makes circuit suitable and full-scale voltage is 8 V. Article includes tim-
1
217
“ z
+ 15V OUTPUT
ENABLE
ACTIVE
LOW BCD OUTPUTS
10
12
i l z
Vcc C CS, CS2‘ 2.0 2 22 23'
15 13 11 9
H
14
g „
DM 76L25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
a b c d e f
7-SEGMENT INPUTS
BCD FROM 7-SEGMENT DISPLAY— Single Na-

tional DM76L25 read-only memory provides
conversion from 7-segment outputs of MOS
chip driving display to BCD inputs for data pro-
cessing. Typical power dissipation is 75 mW.
CHARGE-DISPENSING V/F CONVERSION— 0-10 kHz output with 0.01% linearity for 0-10 Access time is 70 ns when using 5-V supply.
Output state of opamp switches Ct between ref- V input. — J. Williams, Low-Cost, Linear A/D Article gives truth table for all standard and spe-
erence voltage provided by diode bridge and its Conversion Uses Single-Slope Techniques, cial characters of 7-segment display. — U. Priel,
inverting input. Network R2-C2 reinforces direc- EDN Magazine, Aug. 5, 1978, p 101-104. 7-Segment-to-BCD Converter: The Last Word?,
tion of opamp output change. Circuit can deliver EDN Magazine, Aug. 20, 1974, p 94-95.
VOLTAGE-TO-FREQUENCY USING 1C TIM- source. Circuit accepts control voltage inputs of that saturates Q,, to force reference current l2
ERS— Two 322 1C timers and single 301A 0 to -10 V, corresponding to output pulse into summing point of opamp integrator. — W.
opamp provide all functions required for stream range of 0 to 10 kHz. Article describes
G. Jung, Take a Fresh Look at New 1C Timer Ap-
charge-balancing type of voltage-to-frequency operation in detail. R4 should be 4.7 megohms. plications, EDN Magazine, March 20, 1977, p
127-135.
converter, including integrator, level sensor or Output pulses of comparator A2 trigger mono
comparator, precision mono, and gated current A3, which generates pulse having duration t.
218
+ 15V
V/F GIVES 10 to 10,000 Hz — Current propor-

tional to input voltage is balanced via periodic
charging of C, to precisely repeatable voltage by
opamp A, and FET Q,. With values shown, nom-
inal scale factor is 10 kHz/V. Input of 0 to 1 V
gives output of 10 to 10,000 Hz with better than
0,05% linearity. Article gives operating details
and design equations. — W. S. Woodward, Sim-
ple 10 kHz V/F Features Differential Inputs, EDN
Magazine, Oct. 20, 1974, p 86.
0— 10 VDCTO 0—10 kHz — Single-supply voltage-

to-frequency converter produces square-wave
output at frequency varying linearly with input
voltage. Linearity error is typically only 1%. For
values shown, response time for step change of
input from 0 to +10 Vis 135 ms. Uses Raytheon
4151 converter. Supply can be 15 V. — "Linear
Integrated Circuit Data Book," Raytheon Semi-
conductor Division, Mountain View, CA, 1978,
p 7-38. Til R0C„
0—360° to 0—180° — Used for converting angular

information in 360° wrap-around code to ± 180°
sign-plus-magnitude code. For values under
180°, converter outputs and inputs are identical.
For larger input angles, output code is comple-
ment of input plus one. Used for interfacing
shaft encoders and synchro-to-digital convert-
ers to digital display. Article gives truth table
showing which lines are high and which are low
at input and at output for angular increments of
22.5°. — J. N. Phillips, Convert Wrap-Around
Code to Sign-Plus-Magnitude, EDN Magazine,
Jan. 5, 1973, p 103.
CHAPTER 20
Converter Circuits — Radio

Various combinations of RF oscillator and mixer circuits convert wide range of
incoming long-wave and shortwave signals to correct input or intermediate
frequencies for broadcast or communication receivers not originally covering
those bands.
120-150 MHz FOR TRANSISTOR RADIO— Val-

ues shown cover bands for aircraft radio, 2-m
amateur radio band, and other services. Circuit
is regenerative converter, with incoming signal
tuned by L1-C2 and mixed in 2N2222 or equiv-
alent transistor connected as oscillator with fre-
quency controlled by L3 and C7. Difference fre-
quency isadjusted to fall in standard broadcast
band, for pickup by radio when converter is
mounted close to ferrite loop. For local stations,
antenna of converter can be 19-in length of wire.
1.2 and L4 are 100-pH chokes or about 20 in of
fine wire wound on 100K resistor. — S. Kelly,
Simple VHF Monitor, 73 Magazine, July 1976,
p 160.
5.5 MHz TO 455 kHz — Developed for use as sec- followed by triple-tuned filter feeding second of receiver. — D. M. Eisenberg, Build This All-
ond converter in all-band double-conversion mixer Q24, with Q25 as crystal oscillator. Sup- Band VHF Receiver, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1975, p
superheterodyne receiver for AM, narrow-band ply is 13.6 V regulated. Article gives all circuits 105-112.
FM, CW, and SSB operation. IF amplifier Q23 is
219
WWV CONVERTER — Designed for use with am-

ateur receiver for reception of NBS stations
WWV or WWVH on 10, 15, or 25 MHz. Receiver
is tuned to 4, 14, or 21 MHz to serve as IF am-
plifier, detector, and audio stages. Current drain
of converter is 15 mA, low enough for operation
from 9-V transistor-radio battery. Table gives
tuned-circuit values for frequency desired. Re-
striction to single frequency eliminates band-
switching. Q1 can beany common-gate JFET RF
amplifier providing 8-dB gain. Mixer is 40673
MOSFET. Oscillator transistor is not critical. Os-
cillator output serves for all three WWV fre-
quencies.— C. Watts, NBS — Ears for Your Ham-
Cl - C2 C3 LI L2-L3 L4 Band Receivers, QST, June 1976, p 25-26.
10 MHz 90 pF 22 pF 2-1/2 turns
IMo. 24 enamel Same as L5* Same as L5*
over L2.
15 MHz 43 pF 300 pF 1-1/2 turns 5.5 pH (nom.l
Miller 46A566CPC
No. 24 enamel Same as L5*
over L2-
25 MHz 22 pF 1-1/2 turns
48 pF 1 .8 pH (nom.l
No. 24 enamel Miller 46A186CPC
over L2 Same as L5*
*L5 - 2.42-2.96 pH, Miller 46A276CPC
/LONG ANT.
'23 -145'

CAPACITANCE ARE IN MICROFARADS ( jjF ) ;
OTHERS ARE IN PICOFARADS ( pF OR i»JjF);
k * I 000, M= I 000 000.
C6 — Silver mica 3900 pF, 5-percent.

C9 — Trimmer, 50 to 380 pF (Arco No. 465).
LI — Slug-tuned inductor (J. W. Miller No. 9004).
L2 — Slug-tuned inductor (J. W. Miller No. 9006).
L3, 6300).
L4 — Ferrite-antenna coil (J. W. Miller No.
L5 — 2 turns of No. 26 enam. wire on cold end of

L2.
Y1, Y2 — HC-6/U type holder. (International
Crystal Co.)
175 kHz TO 1515 OR 3515 kHz— Crystal-con- communication or broadcast receiver. Tuning length of coax — J. V. Hagan, A Crystal-Con-
trolled VLF converter covering 1750-meter band range is 160 to 190 kHz. Connect general-cov- trolled Converter and Simple Transmitter for
gives choice of two outputs, selected by S2, for erage receiver to IF output terminals with 1750-Meter Operation, QST, Jan. 1974, p 19-22.
221
CONVERTER C IR C U IT S — R A D IO
MPF-102 50pF
01
152-165 MHz TO 146.94 MHz — Permits listen-

Cl 1 - Two 1/2-inch pieces No. 18 insulated L6 — 10 turns No. 24 enam. close wound on the ing to public service band with any good 2-
hookup wire, twisted together 1/2 turn. body of a 1000-ohm 1 /2-watt resistor.
meter FM receiver or transceiver. Local oscilla-
LI, L2, L3 — 18 turns No. 28 enam. wound on L7, L8 — 5 turns No. 20 enam., formed the same
Amidon T-30-6 core. LI tapped at 6 turns and as L4. Both are tapped 2 turns from the hot tor has tuning range of 7-8 MHz and uses ger-
1 1 turns from ground end. end.
manium PNP high-frequency transistor. No RF
L4, L5 — 5 turns No. 20 enam., formed by using VI - 58.225-MHz crystal. International Crystal
threads of 1/4-20 bolt as a guide. L5 is tapped 2 third-overtone type in FM-1 (wire leads) or stage is needed for full quieting from stations
turns from the ground end. FM-2 (pins) holder.
10 miles away when using ground-plane an-
tenna. To avoid burning out converter, do not
28 MHz TO 144 MHz — Addition of small upcon- mixer, between 145.85 and 145.95 MHz, is fed transmit while converter is connected to trans-
verter to 144-MHz (2-meter) SSB transceiver to antenna terminal of receiver. — T. McMullen, ceiver. Article gives coil-winding data. — H.
permits reception of 10-meter signals from An Up Converter for Oscar Reception, QST, Schoenbach, Public Service Band Converter, 73
Oscar satellite on single transceiver. Output of March 1975, p 41-44. Magazine, Dec. 1974, p 78-79.
with receiver covering 20-meter band. Uses up- have 31 turns No. 22 enamel on T68-6 toroid and L6 26 turns No. 28 enamel. U1 is SRA-1, CM-
conversion techniques to get from 1.8 MHz of core to give 5.1 pH. L3 is 50 pH, using 66 turns 1, or ML-1 diode-quad double-balanced mixer
160-meter band to 14-MHz tunable IF of re- No. 18 enamel on T68-1 toroid. Other three coils module. — M. Arnold and D. DeMaw, Build This
ceiver. Butterworth bandpass filter at input of each use T50-6 toroid core, with L4 having 7 High-Performance Top-Band Converter, QST,
converter covers 1.8-1. 9 MHz. LI and L2 each turns No. 24 enamel, L5 11 turns No. 24 enamel. Oct. 1978, p 22-24 and 38.
2-METER FOR 10-MHz IF — Designed for ex- tuned circuits at input frequency give overall Converter uses grounded-gate FET circuit. — U.
treme linearity and selectivity while keeping bandwidth of 4 MHz, with image suppression of Rohde, High Dynamic Range Two-Meter Con-
noise figure below 5 dB. Circuit has +15 dBm 60 dB for 10-MHz IF and 80 dB for 30-MHz IF. verter, Ham Radio , July 1977, p 55-57.
intercept point and 16-dB power gain. Five
MIXER
144 MHz TO 28 MHz — Brings 2-meter band to C1-C4, incl. - 10-pF tubular ceramic trimmer (Centralab 829-10).
LI - 6 turns No. 16, 3/8-inch dia, spaced wire dia. Tap at 2-1/2 turns
input range of ordinary amateur receiver. Crys- from bypassed end, or for best noise figure.
L2 - 4-3/4 turns, like LI.
tal eliminates need for multiplier stages that
can generate spurious responses. Signal can be L3 — 4 turns No. 22, 1/4-inch dia, 5/16 inch long.
L4 - 2.7 to 4.2-,uH slug-tuned coil (Miller 4307).
injected from external source if crystal is re-
R1 - Adjust for 5 mA drain current, or lowest noise figure. Final value
moved.— Construction Hints for VHF Convert- in original unit, 220 ohms.
ers, QSTr Sept. 1975, p 32-33 and 39. Y 1 - 1 16-MHz overtone crystal (International Crystal Mfg. Co.).
223
CONVERTER C I R C UI T S - R A DIO
TUNABLE VLF — Gives tuning range of 10 kHz to

150 kHz without bandswitching, for WWV
transmissions on 20 and 60 kHz and for opera-
tion on no-license amateur band around 1750
meters. Uses inductive tuning with toroidal fer-
rite core L1-L2 that is magnetically biased by
pair of \4-inch diameter button-type permanent
magnets. Rotating one of magnets with respect
to other varies flux through toroid, changing its
permeability and inductance. Toroid uses 100
turns of stranded wire to give inductance vari-
ation from 100 /iH to 12 mH (120:1 range). Fer-
rite cores with higher permeability require
fewer turns. Converter output on 15 meters
feeds into communication receiver. Local oscil-
lator uses FT-243 7-MHz crystal in third-over-
tone mode to give 21 MHz. Antenna is directly
coupled or coupled through capacitor to im-
prove matching to long antenna. — G. Ruehr,
LlfL2 magnetically tuned inductor (see text) L5 15 turns no. 20 on W (6-mm) slug- Tuned Very Low-Frequency Converter, Ham
tuned form Radio, Nov. 1974, p 49-51.
L3 10 turns no. 20 on V»” (6-mm) slug-
tuned form, tapped 5 turns from cold L6 4 turns no. 20, center tapped, around
end cold end of L5
L4 2 turns no. 20 around cold end of L3 L7 2 turns no. 20 around cold end of ■ *
100-300 kHz POST-MIXER

LOW-PASS FILTER AMPLIFIER
L1-L3, incl. — 40 turns no. 30 enam. wire L5 — 70 turns no. 30 enam. wire wound on on an FT-50-43 core. Connect as shown
wound on a T50-3 core. a T50-2 core. in inset drawing.
L4 — 17 turns no. 28 enam. wire wound on T1 , T2 — Broadband transformer. For con- T3 — Broadband transformer. Primary, 50
a T50-2 core. ventional style winding: primary, 27 turns no. 30 enam. wire on an FT-50-72
turns no. 30 enam. wire wound over sec- core. Secondary, 7 turns no. 28 enam.
ondary turns. Secondary, 54 turns no. wire wound over primary turns.
30 enam. wire wound on an FT-50-43 Y1 — General-purpose crystal. 1700 kHz, 32-
core. For trifilar winding: three pF load capacitance.
100-200 kHz TO 1.8-2 MHz— High-perfor- individual windings of no. 30 enam. wire
mance low-frequency converter picks up exper-
imental CW, SSB, RTTY, and beacon signals in loss of 6-8 dB and will stand up against strong converter IF. Article covers construction and
160—190 kHz band for conversion to tunable IF signals without causing overloading and cross- alignment. — D. DeMaw, A High-Performance
range of modern communication receiver. Dou- modulation. Use 1N914 matched diodes. Di- Low-Frequency Converter, QST, June 1977, p
23-26.
ble-balanced diode-ring mixer has conversion plexer at mixer output is tuned to 3 times
224
PASSIVE LONGWAVE— Uses VFO of amateur-

band transmitter to supply heterodyne for
bringing in frequencies below 450-kHz broad-
cast band on amateur receiver, such as Omega
navigation station on 10.2-13.6 kHz, NAA Tele-
type on 17.8 kHz, and GBR time signals on 16
kHz. L1-C,-C2 100- kHz input wavetrap for loran
C can be omitted at far-inland locations. C2 is
two-gang broadcast variable capacitor with
both sections in parallel. Mount L2 at right angle
to L3. Converter should be well shielded. Oper-
ation involves tuning receiver to bottom of any
amateur radio band, on frequency equal to dif-
ference between VFO and that to which receiver
is tuned. If VFO is on 7 MHz and receiver is tuned
to 7.085 MHz, combination will be setfor85-kHz
station. In USA, unlicensed transmission on
160-190 kHz is permitted with 1-W input and
50-foot antenna including length of transmis-
sion line — M. Muench, Longwave Simplified,
CQ, March 1976, p 41-42.
CR7-CR10 Selected 1N270 diodes (see text)

VFO CONVERTER — Used in solid-state five-
band communication receiver. VFO input (5-5.5 CR11-CR17 1N914 or equivalent
MHz) goes directly to amplifiers Q5 and Q6 L1-L4 0.6 /!H (10 turns no. 22
when bandswitch is on 3.5 or 14 MHz. When (0.6mm) enamelled on 3/8”
VFO signal is applied to balanced mixer CR7- (9mm) diameter slug-tuned
forms. Link is 3 turns no. 22
CR10, product is at 9 MHz. Diodes should be
(0.6mm)
carefully selected for equal voltage drops ±20
mV at various current values such as 0.75, 2, 10, L5.L6 1.2 fJH . 20 turns no. 28
and 20 mA. When bandswitch is on 7, 21, or 28 (0.3mm) on 3/4” (9mm) diam-

eter slug-tuned forms
MHz, VFO signal is mixed with output of FET L7-L10
ctyst^l oscillator and filtered before being ap- 0.6 fJ.H (same as LI - L4)
plied to Q5 and Q6. FET oscillators Q1-Q4 are 10 turns no. 32 (0.2mm), trifilar
T1,T2
wound on Amidon T50-6 toroid
energized by +12 V from bandswitch, with
core
diodes CR1-CR4 selecting output. Crystals are
10 turns no. 32 (0.2mm), trifilar
parallel-resonant with 32-pF load. Y2, Y3, and
wound on Amidon T50-6 toroid
Y4 are third-overtone type. — P. Moroni, Solid- core. Collector winding has two
State Communications Receiver, Ham Radio, windings in series to give 2:1
Oct. 1975, p 32-41. ratio
225
CONVERTER CIRCUITS — RADIO
t
3 5MHz CRYSTAL
SHORT PIECE OF
COAX TO RECEIVER
TERMINALS
OOI 25—500 kHz TO 3.5—4 MHz — When receiver is
HEP 51
PNP
tuned to 3.5 MHz and converter is peaked for
loudest signal, combination is tuning 25-kHz
111- range. With receiver tuned to 4 MHz, converter
gives coverage at 500 kHz. — Circuits, 73 Mag-
azine, May 1977, p 19.
Be LOOPSTICK
I TO OUTSIDE
WIRE ANTENNA
MIXER
20 METERS TO 40 METERS— Used with 40-

meter receiver for which circuit is also given.
Converter output is in 40-meter band, for direct
feed to input of receiver. L4 is 12 turns No. 26
enamel on Amidon FT37-61 toroid, L5 is 24 turns
No. 26 enamel on Amidon T-50-6 toroid, and T3
uses Amidon T-50-6 toroid with 2 turns No. 26
enamel for primary and 21 turns for second-
ary.— D. DeMaw, The Mini-Miser's Dream Re-
ceiver, QST, Sept. 1976, p 20-23.
30K
LI 61 - 122 pH (Cambion X2060-7) L5 0.83 - 1.6 pH (Delevan 4000-10)

L2 10 - 18 mH (Cambion X2060-4) L6 28-63 pH (Cambion X2060-6), 10 turn secondary
L3 2 - 3.7 pH (Cambion X2060-1) Q1,Q2 3N140, MFE3006, HEP F2004, RCA 40673
L4 1.3 - 2.5 (iH (Delevan 4000-12) Q3 MPF102, HEP802, HEP F0015
WWV FET CONVERTER — Receives WWV on two crystals are needed because each allows to 1590 kHz. Converter uses dual-gate MOS-
2.5, 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz, using modified tran- reception of two WWV frequencies; thus, 10 FETs in RF stage Q1 and mixer 02, with JFET Q3
sistor AM broadcast receiver operating and 20 MHz are imagefrequencies when receiv- as oscillator. Antenna is short piece of wire. —
straight-through for 2.5-MHz reception and ing 5 and 15 MHz. Loopstick antenna of radio is H. Olson, Five-Frequency Receiver for WWV,
serving as IF amplifierfor converter when tuned replaced with small slug-tuned coil L6 to use Ham Radio, July 1976, p 36-38.
to higher WWV and WWVH frequencies. Only 2.5-MHz image frequency when radio is tuned
SINGLE-CRYSTAL FOR 46 TO 420 MHz — Covers

all VHF amateur bands by using mixer-gener-
ated harmonics of 66-MHz crystal oscillator fre-
quency for mixing action. IF can be tuned with
any communication receiver. Fundamental is
used directly, third harmonic of 138 MHz serves
for 2 meters, fifth of 230 MHz for 220-MHz band,
and ninth of 414 MHz for 420-MHz band. Q1-Q3
are broadband RF preamp. Y1 is plated overtone
crystal oscillating at 46 MHz in series-resonant
mode. Q5 and Q6 form differential-amplifier os-
cillator, and Q4 is mixer driver. No tuning is re-
quired in converter, but external tuning is re-
quired to prevent device from working on all
bands at once. All transistors are part of RCA
CA3049T 1C, for which pin numbers are circled.
LI is 72 inches of No. 30 enamel, doubled and
twisted 1 turn per inch and wound on 1-meg-
ohm VW resistor to form quarter-wave trans-
mission line. — S. Smith, Four-Band VHF Receiv-
ing Converter, Ham Radio, Oct. 1976, p 64-66.
105.625 MHz Q3
osc. DBLR DBLR
y,j7 MPF102 02
52.8125 MHz MPF102
MS*
52.8125 MHz 01 LI 5 MPF102

a 7 IN MICR0FARA0S (i)F) ; OTHERS
ARE IN PICOFARADS ( pF OR >ijiF);
RESISTANCES ARE IN OHMS;
k *1000. M* I 000 OOO
~{c
i L6 L8 1
MHz
28.5 MIXER |T]RFC2
V
j~
I 28
I-F4MP.
MPF102
28.5 MHz
OUT
L5
SIGNAL TROUGH 12 96 MHz tfj

BNC
L7
~~ BNC
0
if10
1
A
12 96 MHz INPUT
Cl, C2 - Nut or copper disk on end of L9 — Like L4, except adjacent to L6. Collector
adjusting
screw, with lock nut on top side of assembly
. lead of Q5 is part of this loop.
Makes variable capacitance to midpoint
of LI 0, LI 2, L14 - 1 turn No. 14, 3/8 inch (10 mm)
half-wave trough-line inner conductor. dia.
C3 - 0.5- to 5-pF glass trimmer. L1 1 — 1-1/4 turns No. 14, 3/8 inch dia.
C4, C5 — 12-pF ceramic trimmer.
LI 3 - 3 turns No. 14, 3/8 inch (10 mm) dia.
LI —2 turns insulated hookup wire around LI 5 — 5 turns No. 14, 3/8 inch (10 mm) dia.
L2.
L2,L3 - 13 turns No. 28 enam, 1/2 inch L16 — 2 turns insulated hookup wire around L17.
iron-slug form. (13 mm) 1296 MHz TO 28.5 MHz — Uses UHF transistors
LI 7 — 16 turns No. 28 enam, 1/4 inch (6 mm)
L4 - L-shaped coupling loop, 3/4 inch (19 iron-slug form. in active mixer and in final stage of injection
mm)
long. No. 18, adjacent to L5. Q5, Q6 — Uhf transistor. Use best available chain, for lower noise figure and useful conver-
L5 L6 - 1 /4-inch (6 mm) copper tubing, low-noise type for Q6.
inches (1 14 mm) long. 4-1/4 sion gain. Doubler and tripler stages are individ-
R1 , R2 — 1 0,000-ohm linear-taper control.
L7, L8 — U-shaped double coupling loop, No. 14, RFC1, RFC2 — Ferrite-bead choke. ually shielded. — L. Crutcher, An Active-Mixer
1/2 inch (1 3 mm) wide, 1 /2 inch long, centered Y1 - Third-overtone crystal, 52.8125 MHz, Converter for 1296 MHz, QST, Aug. 1974, p 11-
or to
in opening in partition P5. suit i-f range used. 14.
CONVERTER C IR C U IT S — R A D IO 227
WHIP
BELOW BROADCAST BAND— Simple solid-

state converter can be used with any good com-
munication receiver covering 3.5-4 MHz to
bring in stations from 5-550 kHz (200 meters
and up). Input coil LI is changed from 0.28 H for
5-11 kHz to 120 /tH for 250—550 kHz in eight
steps, as given in article. C2 consists of two 3-
gang variable capacitors with stators wired in
parallel, gang-tuned with dial cords. Trimmer
C7 is 1-12 pF, adjusted to give reliable starting
of FT-243 3500-kHz crystal. L2 is 80-90 îH for
80 meters, and loopstick is for broadcast
band. — K. Cornell, 200 Meters and Up Receiving
Converter for Low Frequencies, Ham Radio,
Nov. 1976, p 24-26.
28—30 MHz TO 1.65 MHz — 10-meter tuner gives

excellent image suppression with 1.65-MHz
output, for feeding into inexpensive receiver
having 1.65-MHz IF. Tuning capacitors are
ONE SECTION OF MILLER
three-gang Miller 1460-1. Article gives all coil 460-1 20 7 MAX
data along with construction details. — B. Hois-
ington. Tuneable 10 Meter Converter, 73 Mag-
azine, Jan. 1974, p 57-62.
I TURN
INJECTION TAP
EMITTER TAP
2 TURNS
432 MHz 28 MHz

INPUT OUTPUT TO
FROM
432 MHz TO 28 MHz — Contains bandpass filter, veloped for use in all-band double-conversion regulated. Article gives all circuits of receiver-
grounded-grid RF amplifier stages Q15-Q16, superheterodyne receiver for AM, narrow-band D. M. Eisenberg, Build This All-Band VHF Re-
mixer Q17, and crystal oscillator Q18-Q19. De- FM, CW, and SSB operation. Supply is 13.6 V ceiver, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1975, p 105-112.
228
8-30 MHz AMATEUR BANDS— Will convert any be almost any general-purpose high-frequency put is amplified and filtered by Q1 to produce
frequency in tuning range to IF value between transistor. Two of gates in SN7400N TTL 1C control voltage for tuning D3. Output from
3.5 and 4 MHz. Requires only three transistors serve as crystal oscillator, and other two gates mixer 03 is untuned, with RFC as drain load ele-
and one 1C. D1 and D2 can be germanium or sil- are buffers for detector diodes D1 and D2. ment. — R. Megirian, High Frequency Utility
icon, such as 1N914. D3 is rectifier diode. 02 can Diodes are modulated by VCO 02. Detector out- Converter, 73 Magazine, June 1977, p 50-53.
5645 8
kHz
600
OHkH
INPUT
UP/DOWN — Circuit shown was developed for of only 125 Hz. Texas Instruments TL442 dou- sion. Gives true single-signal reception. Article
use in 5645.8-kHz IF amplifier of Drake R-4B am- ble-balanced mixers convert IF signal to 5695- covers procedures for interfacing any crystal fil-
ateur-band receiver, to utilize high-perfor- kHz center frequency of filter and convert filter ter with any receiver IF value — H. Sartori, An
mance characteristics of Sherwood Engineer- output back to IF value. Same crystal oscillator Up/Down Filter Converter, Ham Radio, Dec.
ing CF-125/8 CW crystal filter having bandwidth serves for both upconversion and downconver-
1977, p 20-25.
229
CONVERTER C IR C U IT S — R A D IO
10-40 METERS TO 3.5-4 MHz— Five-band con-

verter is designed for use with miniaturized
communication receiver tuning from 3.5 to 4
MHz. Signals for 80-meter band are fed directly
to receiver. Two-gang tuning capacitor used to
peak converter front end is film-dielectric type
taken from transistor FM radio. — R. Megirian,
Design Ideas for Miniature Communications Re-
ceivers, Ham Radio, April 1976, p 18-25.
20 turns no. 36 (0.13mm), 20 turns no. 4.7 flH 11 MHz

2 turn link 36 (0.13mm)
12 turns nc. 28 (0.3mm), 12 turns no. 18 MHz

2.2 fdH
1.5 turn link 28 (0.3mm)
7 turns no. 28 (0.3mm), 7 turns no. 25 MHz

1 turn link 28 (0.3mm) 1.5 jLlH
4 turns no. 28 (0.3mm), 4 turns no. 1.5 /1H

1 turn link 28 (0.3mm)
455 KHz
1ST l-F
WWV ON AC/DC RADIO— When fed into IF am-
plifier ofordinary broadcast-band radio, simple
converter circuit gives choice of WWV on 10 or
15 MHz, for reception of time signals and radio
propagation reports. C2 is 1.5-10 pF; C3 and C6
are 7-60 pF; C4 is 7-100 pF (all compression
trimmers); and C5 is 1.8— 8.7 pF miniature vari-
able capacitor. — W. C. Powis, Notes on Con-
verting the AC/DC for WWV, 73 Magazine, Oct.
1974, p 116.
XI] a.
2 m TO BROADCAST BAND — Permits tuning to 9-V battery gives long life if converter is turned overtone crystal. Converter gives good recep-
2-m (146-MHz) amateur band with ordinary AM off when not in use, because drain is only 25 mA. tion of both AM and FM stations on 2 m, with
auto radio, for monitoring FM repeaters and L2 is 4 turns No. 20 on 7-mm slug-tuned form, sharpness of receiver IF tuning determining
other 2-m amateur stations. Article stresses im- with 2-turn link LI at low end and tap Vfc turns ability of radio to slope-detect FM signals. — J.
portance of shielding, compartmentalization, from low end. L3 and L4 are 3 turns No. 20 on R. Johnson, New Improved Repeater Monitor,
and RF blocking along power lead to prevent 7-mm slug-tuned form. L5 is 20 turns No. 30 on 73 Magazine, Dec. 1976, p 106-109.
bleed-through of broadcast stations. Separate 4-mm solid ferrite form. Y1 is 48.5-MHz third-
230
9-V TRANSISTOR
RADIO BATTERY
160 METERS TO 10 METERS — Simple converter

adds 160-meter band capability to older CW or
EXCEPT AS INDICATED, DECIMAL VALUES OF AM receiver. Passive mixer is adequate. High
CAPACITANCE ARE IN MICROFARADS ( _pF ) ;
output frequency eliminates IF feedthrough and
OTHERS ARE IN PICOFARADS
RESISTANCES ARE IN OHMS
( pF
,
OR »pF)\' image signals. Crystal oscillates on third over-
k = I OOO. M = I 000 000. tone and feeds directly into mixer. — A. Bloom,
A Simple 160-Meter Converter, QST, Feb. 1975,
COILS: (3/8” D slug-tuned form)
LI 1 3t No. 38 double-cotton covered '
L2 2t No. 20 enam. wire, ct (B+ end).
2t No. 18 insulated hookup wire, ct
(Gnd end).
L4 8t No. 20 enam. wire, close wound. p 46.
L5 5*/?t No. 20 enam. wire, close wound.
L6 33t No. 40 double cotton-covered \
close wound.
144 MHz TO 14 MHz— Oscillator uses 43.333-

MHz overtone-cut crystal feeding class A tripler
that injects 1 30-MHz signal into gate of MPF-1 02
mixer for combining with 144-MHz output of
IGFET RF amplifier to give 1 4 MHz for amateur-
band or general-coverage receivers. Article cov-
ers construction and alignment, including de-
tailed coil-winding data.— C. Klinert, A Two
Meter Converter, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1973, p
65-67.
MIXER OSCILLATOR
2N3600
2N S 18 OR 2N3600
1.65 MHZ TO 135 KHZ 1.785 MHZ
5600
INPUT 28 MHz
FROM OUTPUT TO
50 MHz TO 28 MHz — Contains bandpass filter, for use in all-band double-conversion superhet- Article gives all circuits of receiver.— D. M. Ei-
two grounded-grid RF amplifier stages Q1-Q2, erodyne receiver for AM, narrow-band FM, CW, senberg. Build This All-Band VHF Receiver, 73
mixer Q3, and crystal oscillator Q4. Developed and SSB operation. Supply is 13.6 V regulated. Magazine, Jan. 1975, p 105-112.
144 MHz TO 28 MHz — Contains bandpass filter, use in all-band double-conversion superhetero- ticle gives all circuits of receiver. — D. M. Eisen-
grounded -grid RF amplifier stages Q5-Q6, mixer dyne receiver for AM, narrow-band FM, CW, and berg. Build This All-Band VHF Receiver, 73 Mag-
Q7, and crystal oscillator Q8-Q9. Developed for SSB operation. Supply is 13.6 V regulated. Ar- azine, Jan. 1975, p 105-112.
220 MHz
INPUT 28 MHz
FROM OUTPUT TO
220 MHz TO 28 MHz — Contains bandpass filter, veloped for use in all-band double-conversion regulated. Article gives all circuits of receiver. —
grounded-grid RF amplifier stages Q10-Q11, superheterodyne receiver for AM, narrow-band D. M. Eisenberg, Build This All-Band VHF Re-
mixer Q12, and crystal oscillator Q13-Q14. De- FM, CW, and SSB operation. Supply is 13.6 V ceiver, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1975, p 105-112.
232
VLF CONVERTER — Uses low-pass filter Instead

of usual tuned circuit, so only associated re-
ceiver need be tuned. Measured threshold sen-
sitivity isabout 20 ^ V Transistors used in dual-
59pF
gate MOSFET mixer and FET oscillator are not
critical. Crystal can be any frequency compat-
ible with tuning range of receiver used. With
3.5-MHz crystal, 3.5 MHz on receiver dial cor-
responds to 0 kHz and 3.6 MHz to 100 kHz.— R.
N. Coan, VLF Converter, Ham Radio, July 1976,
p 69.
L2 — 6 turns No. 18 wire, 3/4 in. long, 1/4

in. diameter. Tap at 2 turns.
L4 — 3 turns No. 18 wire, 3/4 in. long, 1/4 in.
diameter. Tap at 1 turn.
L3 — 0.47-/jH rf choke (Miller).
28 MHz TO 220 MHz FOR TRANSMIT— Permits L5 — 1 turn, 1/2-in. dia, 3/4-in. leads; No.
22 insulated wire.
use of 2-meter transceiver to transmit in 220-
L6 — 1-1/2 turns, 1/2-in. dia, 1-in. leads; No.
MHz band with minimum of 6-W power output 16 wire.
for 1-W drive on 28 MHz. Local-oscillator output L7 — 1-1/2 turns, 5/8-in. dia, 3/16-in. leads;
at 192 MHz can be used for receiving converter No. 16 wire.
as well. Use 8-pF butterfly-type air variable L8 — 1/2 turn, 5/8-in. dia, 3/16-in. leads; No.
16 wire.
(Johnson 160-028-001) for C24, C26, C28, and
L10 — 1-1/2 turns, 5/8-in. dia, 1-1/4-in. leads;
C32. D1 is GE ZD8.2 8-V 1-W zener.— F. J. Merry, No. 16 wire.
A 220-MHz Transmit Converter, QST, Jan. 1978, L1 1 — 1 turn, 1/2-in. dia. 3/4-in. leads; No.
22 insulated wire.
p 16-20.
5.5 MHz
28 MHz OUTPUT TO
CHAPTER 21
Counter Circuits
Includes circuits for counting events and pulses over various ranges from 0 to
1.2 GHz singly, by 4s, or by decades, along with counting-rate meter, up/
down, multifunction, anticoincidence, PROM-controlled, free-running
classroom-demonstration, and switch-closure counters driving multiplexed or
continuous digital displays. See also Frequency Counter chapter.
P C. Board, DCE Circuits
5-DIGIT PRESET COUNTER — Basis of circuit is from 5-V supply. When used to control quantity play Is used to indicate number of boxes filled.
Motorola CMOS real-time MC14534 five-decade of items placed in carton, each item interrupts Other applications include count and display of
counter containing five ripple-type decade light beam of photoelectric system to give number of interruptions of light beam, mea-
counters whose outputs are time-multiplexed count. External trigger output is connected to surement ofconveyor speed, and measurement
by internal scanner. Time-base oscillator pro- control mechanism that advances conveyor of log lengths In sawmill. — A. Mouton, "Five
vides 10-kHz crystal reference for clocking belt when box Is full. Quantity of items desired Digit Accumulator/Elapsed Time Indicator,"
counters. Total current drain of system is 65 mA per box is dialed on thumbwheel switches. Dis- Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1975, AN-743, p 3.
234
235
COUNTER CIRCUITS
FOUR-LED BCD DISPLAY — Square-wave input

pulses are counted by 7490 1C that drives LEDs
indicating count in binary format up to 10 and
then recycling. Can be used for classroom dem-
onstrations ofcounters, flip-flop action, and bi-
nary counting. Pulses can be obtained from UJT
clock circuit operating at audio rate. — F. M.
Mims, "Computer Circuits for Experimenters,"

Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1974, p 85-93.
1.2-GHz DECADE COUNTER— Motorola

MCI 696 BCD-output counter provides direct
counting of events at up to 1.2 GHz without
prescaling. Connection shown is for AC cou-
pling of input signals. Decoupling capacitors are
used on power supplies and all unused pins.
MC1696 provides division by 10, with output
driving cascaded MC10138 biquinary counters
and associated latches connected to drive five-
decade display as covered in report. — J. Roy,
"Event Counter and Storage Latches for High-
Frequency, High-Resolution Counters," Moto-
rola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, EB-47.
SELF-STARTING COUNTER — Addition of three

logic elements eliminates need for separate
starting switch when using National MM5736
calculator chip as counter driving LED display.
When reset switch is returned to normal posi-
tion after pushing it to clear calculator, addi-
tional parts serve to generate delayed pulse
that gates digit output 2 into calculator and thus
enters a 1 . This action resets counter with single
manual operation.— M. Watts, "Calculator Chip
Makes a Counter," National Semiconductor,
Santa Clara, CA, 1974, AN-1 12, p 4.
I
BCD DOWN COUNT OUTPUT
CASCADED DOWN COUNTER— 4522 decimal
1 divide-by-N counter is used with BCD thumb-

wheel switch for each decade. Output is in BCD
CLOCK
format, going down from preset number in
RESET range of 0-99. Decoded 0 output of tens stage
JL is connected to CF or carry-forward input of
units stage. Only when both counters are in 0
state is 0 output provided. Preset number is
then reloaded into counters. — D. Lancaster,
"CMOS Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indian-
apolis, IN, 1977, p 311-312.
UNITS
TENS
THUMBWHEEL
THUMBWHEEL
SWITCH SWITCH
(BCD)
(BCD )
WEIGHTED BCD OUTPUTS

UP/DOWN COUNTER— Cascading of 4192 de-
cade up/down counters and use of two clocks 12 4 8 10 20 4 0 80 100 200 400 800
give fully synchronous system for adding or

subtracting count. Both clocks are normally
held high. Low on up clock advances count. Low
¥
on down clock subtracts 1 from count. Clocking ¥
takes place on trailing or positive edge of neg-
ative pulse. Parallel loading inputs are used to JL
preset counter to any desired number. — D. Lan-
caster, "CMOS Cookbook," Howard W. Sams,
A 1 2 4 8 10 20 40 80 100 200400 800
Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 309-310.
PARALUL LOAD INPUTS
MULTIDIGIT DEMONSTRATION COUNTER— counter for classroom demonstrations and Sci- tect against polarity reversal and reduce supply
Simple interconnection of RS7490 decade ence Fair exhibits. With two additional stages to 5 V for ICs. — F. M. Mims, "Integrated Circuit
counter, RS7447 decoder, and 7-segment digital added, display reaches 9999 before recycling. Projects, Vol. 6," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX,
display for each desired digit makes ideal Use 1N914 diode in series with battery to pro-
1977, p 53-63.
A
237
COUNTER CIRCUITS
+5V
Y
ANTICOINCIDENCE— Developed for use with
bidirectional counter circuits to avoid counting
errors when up and down pulses occur simul-
taneously. Operation is based on knowing max-
imum frequency of separate data pulses. Out-
puts 1 and 2 will be separated by at least one
clock period even if inputs D1 and D2 occur si-
multaneously. Article gives operating details. —
J. H. Burkhardt, Jr., Anti-Coincidence Circuit
Prevents Loss of Data, EDNIEEE Magazine, Jan.
1, 1972, p 73.
D 1 2 3 4 5 t 7 8 1
TPUTS
CODED OU
j-|^ DE
10-POINT STEPPER — 4017 divide-by-10 counter

routes input clock signal sequentially to each of
PROM-CONTROLLED COUNTER— Universal organized in 64 8-bit words. Pull-up resistors are ten output lines, with only selected output
counter can be set to count in any desired se- required. Article covers application details, in- going high. Internal circuit of 1C is self-clearing
quence ranging from simple binary to pseu- cluding expansion techniques PROM outputs walking ring that is glitch-free, with minimum
dorandom, using only one programmable serve as data input to register chip, and register overlap between outputs. Counters can be cas-
read-only memory chip and one 74174 edge- outputs provide PROM address inputs. — T. M. caded to provide more steps. — D. Lancaster,
triggered flip-flop register chip. Version shown Farr, Jr., Read-Only Memory Controls Universal "CMOS Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indian-
is 6-bit 64-state counter for which PROM is Counter, EDN Magazine, May 5, 1976, p 1 14. apolis, IN, 1977, p 309.
238
CALCULATOR AS COUNTER— National

MM5736 calculator chip is used with two
DM75491 segment drivers and DM75492 digit
driver for LED 6-digit display. Switches provide
manual control of counter. To reset, push S, to
clear calculator, push S2 to enter a 1, then push
S3 when new count is to be started. Current
drive to LEDs is supplied by Vcc through cur-
rent-limiting resistors, giving power saving be-
cause Vcc can be less than Vss. Will drive large
LED display — M. Watts, "Calculator Chip
Santa Clara, CA, 1974, AN-112, p 4.
MECL
Reset gate
I MM2 \ ' IVIL. IÔZZ

Reference
(CMOS Levels) *1"" Clk BCD Down
1 MHz
Reference
(MECL Levels)
DPI DP2 DP3 DP4

R
8 Stage
' Clk MC14522 CF ‘ CE MC14022
BCD Down
PE
Counter Johnson Counter
C
QO Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7
n
Supply
Voltages
V 'I' ^ \|/ \1/ ']/
QO Q1 02 Q3 Q4 Q5
CMOS +5 Vdc
MECL -5.2 Vdc
TIME BASE FOR 1.2-GHz COUNTER— Provides reference signal by 106 to give 1-Hz output. ments ranging from 1 to 9 s, using single
1-s gate, latch strobing signals, 1-kHz signal for MC14534 five-decade counter generates 1-kHz MCI 4522 BCD down counter. — I. Roy, "A Time
multiplexing displays, and digital sample rate multiplexing frequency with 20% duty cycle for Base and Control Logic Subsystem for High-Fre-
control for high-frequency high-resolution blanking. Digital sample rate control is pro- quency, High-Resolution Counters," Motorola,
counters. Timing chain divides 1-MHz external grammed on BCD thumbwheel switch in incre- Phoenix, AZ, 1975, EB-48.
COUNTER CIRCUITS 239
CALCULATOR COUNTER — Normal arithmetic

functions of National MM5736 calculator chip
are preserved while providing counting capa-
bility, through use of MOS transistors Q1-Q4.
When reset switch is pushed, pin D1 is con-
nected to pin K3 of calculator and calculator is
cleared. Cl and C2 are discharged while S, is
closed but are charged when it is released, gen-
erating negative-going delayed pulse that
causes a 1 to be entered into calculator. Delay
allows clear function to be debounced by cal-
culator chip. When S2 is in count mode, Q4 is
turned on and D6 is tied to D4, for doubling max-
imum counting rate. Input pulse will now turn
Q1 on, making calculator perform addition. Ad-
ditional pulse adds 1 to sum. When S2 is re-
turned to calculate position, keyboard logic is
returned to normal state. MM74C00 NAND
gates can be replaced with MM74C02 NOR
gates, and MOS transistors can be replaced
with MM5616 CMOS switch. — M. Watts, "Cal-
culator Chip Makes a Counter," National Semi-
conductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1974, AN-112, p 6.
+5 VOLTS
room demonstrations and Science Fair exhibits.

SELF-DRIVING COUNTER— UJT relaxation os- Counter feeds corresponding BCD outputs to 6-V battery with 1N914 diode in series can be
cillator Q1 supplies series of pulses to input pin BCD input pins of RS7447 decoder for conver-
used in place of 5-V supply. — F. M. Mims, "In-
14 of RS7490 decade counter at frequency de- sion into 7-segment decimal format for driving tegrated Circuit Projects, Vol. 2," Radio Shack,
termined bysetting of R2 and value used for Cl. Radio Shack 276-052 LED display. Ideal for class- Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed„ p 41-56.
TWO-CHIP COUNTER — Combination of Na-

tional MM5736 calculator chip and DM75492
digit driver for 6-digit LED display is suitable for
applications where typical maximum counting
rate can be about 100 Hz. Counter is reset man-
ually by closing S, to clear calculator and closing
S2 to enter a 1. Operator now controls start of
new count by pressing S3, without need for gat-
ing count input — M. Watts, "Calculator Chip
Santa Clara, CA, 1974, AN-1 12, p 2.
2-BIT BINARY— Sections of RS7473 dual flip-

flop are connected to form simple counter that
counts to three in binary with LEDs. By adding
more flip-flop stages, count can be extended to
higher values. If OFF LED represents 0 and ON
LED is 1, combinations 00, 01, 10, and 11 rep-
resent 0, 1, 2, and 3, respectively. Input is re-
stricted to low audio frequency so LED changes
can be readily observed during demonstra-
tions.—F. M. Mims, "Integrated Circuit Proj-
ects, Vol. 6," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977
p 23-32.
CALCULATOR COUNTS UP TO 300 Hz— Logic

elements used with MM5736 calculator chip
provide self-starting counting action in range
from 80 to 300 Hz. Increase in counting rate is
obtained by feeding digit output 6 back to digit
output 4, to bypass some internal logic of cal-
culator—M. Watts, "Calculator Chip Makes a
Counter," National Semiconductor, Santa
Clara, CA, 1974, AN-112, p 4.
241
COUNTER CIRCUITS
Vss Vcc
LARGE LED DISPLAY— National MM5736 cal-

culator chip is used with DM8895 segment
driver that can be mask-programmed to source
several values of current in range from 5 to 17
mA per segment of LED display, permitting use
of fairly large display. Display current comes
from Vcc supply terminal of DM8895 rather than
from calculator chip. Combination serves as 6-
decade counter driving 6-digit display. — M.
Watts, "Calculator Chip Makes a Counter," Na-
AN-112,tional
p 3.Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1974,
CLEAN RESET — Adding latch consisting of two

7400 NAND gates to reset circuit of divide-by-77
counter guarantees good reset. Reset pulse will
always be half a clock period wide. — E. E. Hriv-
nak, House Cleaning the Logical Way, 73 Mag-
azine, Aug. 1974, p 85-90.
CALCULATOR COUNTS BY 4s — Connection

shown for National MM5736 calculator chip
counts either up or down by 4s, as might be re-
quired for keeping track of inventory in bin
when parts are packaged in groups of 4. To
count by numbers other than 1 , desired number
is entered into calculator during manual start
operation. When S: is pushed, counter adds 4 to
accumulated total. When S3 is pushed, counter
subtracts 4 from accumulated total. Logic ele-
ments provide self-starting action of counter. —
M. Watts, 5.
AN-112, "Calculator Chip Makes a Counter,"
National pSemiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1974,
242
DIGITAL COUNTING DEMONSTRATOR— 555 coder that drives 7-segment digital display. R1 peat, for classroom demonstrations. — F. M.
timer serves as dock for driving RS7490 decade is adjusted to give clock frequency that makes Mims, "Integrated Circuit Projects, Vol. 6,"
counter feeding RS7447 BCD to 7-segment de- Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, p 53-63.
display cycle slowly through digits 0-9 and re-
FREQUENCY/PERIOD/EVENT/TIME — Universal oscillator, multiplex timing with interdigit and displays. Maximum supply voltage is 6 V. — Low
counter with 10-MHz maximum frequency pro- leading-zero blanking, as well as overflow in- Cost Universal Counter Performs Wide Range of
vides multiple functions with minimum number dication. Decimal position is selectable. Eight- Functions, Computer Design, Aug. 1978, p 168
of components. Range of time period measure- digit multiplexed LED display outputs of 1C can and 170.
ments is0.5 /ns to 10 s. Includes 10-MHz crystal switch up to 250 mA per digit for handling large
243
COUNTER CIRCUITS
FREE-RUNNING COUNTER DISPLAY— Atten-

tion-getting circuit simply counts at predeter-
mined rate while driving 3-digit display using 7-
segment LEDs. Circuit uses two sections of 401 1
CMOS quad NAND gate to generate pulses at
rate controlled by 100-megohm pot. Pulses trig-
ger 4026 counters connected as shown, with
outputs a-g of each going to 7-segment LED dis-
play. When all three displays reach 9, next pulse
resets all to 0 and count continues. Auxiliary cir-
cuit at upper right uses remaining sections of
4011 as flip-flop controlled by touch-plate
switches; bridging gap between center and
grounded plates with finger makes counter run.
Bridging other gap resets counter to 0 and holds
it there. If reset is not used, connect input pins
8, 9, 12, and 13 of unused gates to pin 14. — J. A.
Sandler, 9 Easy to Build Projects under $9, Mod-
ern Electronics, July 1978, p 53-56.
*6v. to +15v to Pm 14 ot 4011 return to Pin 7 of 4011
No dropping resistors needed for most .3 to .8 inch LED displays.
Pulses
Input
COUNTING-RATE METER — Uses three Optical for driving chart recorder. Values of R and C de- detector. Logamp compresses output of inte-
Electronics 9827 opamps to amplify, square up, pend on counting rate. Well-regulated power grator to eliminate need for scale changing
and integrate input pulses from event detector, supply is required because this determines am- while giving constant accuracy over wide dy-
to give integrated DC voltage that is function of plitude of squared pulses that drive integrator. namic range of counting rates. — "Logarithmic
counting rate. This voltage is compressed by Applications include counting photons of pho- Counting Rate Readout," Optical Electronics,
2538 DC logamp having 60-dB dynamic range tomultiplier or nuclear particles of solid-state Tucson, AZ, Application Tip 10106.
*
CHAPTER 22
Current Control Circuits
Includes fixed, adjustable, and voltage-controlled current sources,

bilateral
sources, current limiters, current regulators, current sink, current-c
ontrolled
oscillator, power supply monitor, and electronic fuse.
5 mA WITH VARIABLE-SLOPE START-UP—

Low-cost NSL5022 LED typically has 1.6-V drop
at 2 mA, to produce constant 0.9 V across 390-
ohm emitter resistors in circuit shown. Use of
two current sources, each feeding other's LED
reference, eliminates all voltage defects except
for small voltage-dependent changes in transis-
tor parameters. Adding 240K slope resistor can-
cels these changes, holding current constant
within 0.1% over supply voltage range of 5-20
V. Applications include use as voltage divider
with gain, Q multiplier for tuned circuits, and
bias compensation.— P. Lefferts, Variable Slope
Current Source Starts at 2.5 V, EDN Magazine,
No v. 5, 1975, p 100.
POT CONTROL — Circuit makes current through

linear pot a linear function of rotational angle of
pot. Article gives design equations. Current i,
through R, is used to charge C, which is period-
ically discharged by UJT when trigger voltage
is reached. Frequency of output sawtooth is
proportional to i, and hence to angle of rotation
of pots. To set up, adjust pots to give maximum
sawtooth frequency and adjust preset R, for re-
quired maximum frequency. Set pots to other
extreme and reset R3 for required minimum fre-
quency.—A. Armit, Linear Current/Rotation
Control, Wireless World, Dec. 1975, p 576.
244
CURRENT CONTROL CIRCUITS 245
JFET CURRENT SINK — Simple circuit effec-

tively raises load operating point of current-sen-
sitive device by shunting current through JFET
having nonlinear action. JFET type is not criti-
cal. Applications include improvement of thy-
ristor noise performance by diverting current
around load. — V. Gregory, FET Current Sinks
Raise Operating Points, EDN Magazine, Feb. 20,
1974, p 81.
PRECISION CURRENT SINK— R1 serves as cur- herently high output impedance as required for
rent-sensing resistor providing negative feed- high-accuracy current sink. — "FET Databook,"
back for opamp to enhance true current-sink National Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977,
nature of circuit. Both JFET and bipolar have in-
p 6-26-6-36.
20-mA FLOATING SOURCE — Battery-operated

circuit shown gives adequate stability for
28-VAC CURRENT LIMITER— Dual JFETs in volt- turn on further. Conversely, if Q, supplies too
strain-gage bridge. Uses four alkaline penlight
age-sharing arrangement protect output of 28- much current, Q2 drain voltage rises and tends cells to provide ±3 V for 741 opamp. E, is chosen
VAC power amplifier. Transistors should be to turn Q, off. On negative half-cycle, Q, be-
to give adequate voltage for intended load at
matched for lDss. During positive half-cycle of comes limiter and Q2 is source follower. — J. P. maximum load current. Temperature stability
input, Q2 operates as current limiter and Q, as Thompson, Current Limiter Protects Amplifier
is 0.7 /*A/°C from 0 to 50°C. — R. Tenny, Isolated
source follower. If Q, does not supply enough from Load Faults, EDN Magazine, June 5, 1978, Current Source, EDN Magazine, April 20, 1973,
current, drain voltage of Q2 drops and makes Q, p 148 and 150.
R2
p 85. 1 Ok
HIGH-COMPLIANCE CURRENT SOURCE— Non-

inverting input of LM143 high-voltage opamp
circuit offset and span to give correct end-range senses current through R4 to establish output
4-20 mA SOURCE — Digital input to multiplying currents for load. Maximum load compliance is current that is proportional to input voltage.
digital-to-analog converter determines load 25 V. Opamp types are not critical. — J. Wilson With ±38 V supply, compliance of current
current in range of 4 to 20 mA with 1 5.6- Â res- and J. Whitmore, MDAC's Open Up a New source is ±28 V. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2,"
olution. R, adjusts ratio of full-scale to zero- World of Digital-Control Applications, EDN AN-127, pSemiconductor,
National 3. Santa Clara, CA, 1976,
scale current at output 1 of MDAC, and R3 sets Magazine, Sept. 20, 1978, p 97-105.
246
Rl POSITIVE Rl
1%
0 1
POWER SUPPLY MONITOR— Rl senses output

PRECISION CURRENT SOURCE — 2N5457 JFET assure that circuit acts as current source. current of power supply. PN3684 JFET is used
and PN2222 bipolar transistor serve as isolators "FET Databook," National Semiconductor, as buffer because source and drain currents are
between output and current-sensing resistor Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36. equal, so monitor output voltage accurately re-
Rl. LM101 opamp provides high loop gain to flects current flow of power supply. — "FET Da-
CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36.
R2
1% 2 MS)
CURRENT REGULATOR — Combines zener with

opamp in bootstrap configuration. Regulated
output current l0 can be any value less than I,
but must be much greater than opamp bias cur-
rent. Current in zener is set by Rl to provide
minimum of 1 mA. Performance can be im-
proved by using Motorola MC1403 or other 2.5-
V three-terminal voltage reference in place of
zener.— W. Jung, An 1C Op Amp Update, Ham
BILATERAL CURRENT SOURCE— Output cur- ohms. Circuit is built around Precision Mono-
rent through load is constant within 2% of value
lithics OP-08 opamp. — "Precision Low Input
related to input voltage and resistor values, re- Current Op Amp," Precision Monolithics, Santa
gardless of variations in load from 10 to 2000 Clara, CA, 1978, OP-08, p 7.
♦35VDC
CURRENT SOURCE AS TRANSISTOR LOAD—

Reverse-biased germanium diode serves as
voltage-independent current source for loading
silicon transistors in linear amplifier having
voltage gain of 50 and -3 dB bandwidth of 16-
4000 Hz. In addition to low cost, circuit design
0.5 mA FOR 0—50 KILOHMS — Current source Output current is well within 1% of 0.5 mA for permits reliable operation of reliable micro-
uses Fairchild juA723 voltage regulator operat- load impedances from 0-50K. — L. Nickel, Con- power circuits over wide temperature range at
ing from ordinary unregulated supply not over stant Current Sources, 73 Magazine, March optimum current drain — M. G. Baker, Low-Cur-
40 VDC. Regulator has built-in 7.15-V reference. 1974, p 29. rent Source, Wireless World, April 1976, p 61.
CURRENT CONTROL CIRCUITS 247
3-A LIMITER — Simple current limiter protects increases to about 100 mV, Q„ and Q3 turn off, CONSTANT-CURRENT LED— National NSL4944
itself from overdissipation during shorted out- allowing load current to rise to 3-A limiting LED having built-in current control features can
put, while handling capacitor or cold-filament value. — L. G. Wright, Short-Protected Current be used in simple circuit shown to provide cur-
loads that momentarily act like shorts. R3 is ad- Limiter Ignores Inrush Currents, EEE Magazine, rent limiting and short-circuit protection for 15-
justed so starting current is high enough to Sept. 1970, p 89-90. V supply. Even with output shorted, LED draws
begin heating cold filament. As filament voltage only a little more than rated current. — "Linear
line relay gives faster action than circuit breaker relay coil to make it open. S, must be pressed
for protection against current overload. Closing again to reset relay. For adjustable dropout,
S, momentarily energizes relay, completing gate of SCR can be connected to pot placed
current path from supply to load. Overload cur- across R,. — R. Quong, Resettable Electronic
rent increases voltage drop across R, to above Fuse Consists of SCR and Relay, Electronics, CURRENT-CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR—
0.65 V, switching on SCR and thereby shorting Sept. 15, 1977, p 117. Makes use of proportional relationship be-
tween input current L and amplifier input bias
current laBC of CA3094 programmable opamp.
Linearity is within 1% over middle half of char-
'Vcc (+15V) acteristic. Circuit can be used for voltage input
if voltage is applied to pin 5 through appropriate
dropping resistor R. Output is square wave. —
"Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," RCA Solid
State Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 4.
100-mA CURRENT REGULATOR— Two-termi-

nal circuit using LM195 power transistor has
-Vcc (-15V) low temperature coefficient and operates down

VOLTAGE CONTROL — Improved voltage-con- to 3 V. 2N2222 controls voltage across current-
trolled current source uses complementary difference is fed back to input of opamp for com- sensing resistor R2 and diode D1. Voltage
transistors in opamp feedback loop. Common- parison with input voltage. Zener voltages de- across sense network is base-emitter voltage of
mode voltage at input to opamp is always near termine quiescent-current level. Frequency re- 2N2222 plus 1.2 V from LM113. R1 sets current
zero. Circuit was designed for use in integrator sponse is limited to 1 MHz by performance of through LM113 to 0.6 mA.— R. Dobkin, "Fast 1C
having ground-referenced integrating capaci- specified opamp.— P. T. Skelly, Voltage-Con- Power T ransistor with Thermal Protection," Na-
AN-110, tional
p 6. Semiconductor,
tor, to produce 1 mA/V. R3a and R3b sense current trolled Current Source, EDNIEEE Magazine, Santa Clara, CA, 1974,
through Q, and Q2, so voltage proportional to Aug. 1, 1971, p 45-46.
CHAPTER 23
Data Transmission Circuits
Includes line driver, line receiver, modem, bit-rate generator, coder-decoder,

FSK demodulator, signal conditioner, optoisolator, PDM telemetry, active
bandpass filter, and other circuits used for transmitting digital data and digital
speech over twisted-pair, coaxial, or balanced line.
1 M
ANSWER MODEM — Transmits on upper chan- modem interface to transmission network. tor, demodulator, and supervisory control func-
nel (mark 2225 Hz and space 2025 Hz) and re- Bandpass filter allows only desired receive sig- tions.— G. Nash, "Low-Speed Modem Funda-
ceives on lower channel (mark 1270 Hz and nals to be seen by limiter and demodulator. mentals," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1974, AN-731,
space 1070 Hz). Buffer and duplexer provide Motorola MC6860 modem 1C contains modula-
248
DATA TRANSMISSION CIRCUITS 249
All capacitors are in mF
BANDPASS ORIGINATE FILTER— Provides gain

of over 15 dB between 1975 and 2275 Hz, to ac-
cept 2025—2225 Hz signals of low-speed modem
system using Motorola MC6860 1C. — J. M. FAST-SETTLING COAX DRIVER— Suitable for
DeLaune, "Low-Speed Modem System Design use as radar pulse driver, video sync driver, or
Using the MC6860," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, pulse-amplitude-modulation line driver. Uses
1975, AN-747, p 13. Harris HA-2530/2535 wideband amplifier having
high slew rate. Usable bandwidth is about 100
kHz when connected for noninverting operation
as shown. Driver output is 60 mA into 60-ohm
load. 5% settling time is 60 ns. — "Linear & Data
Melbourne, FL, Vol. 1, 1977, p 7-54 (Application
Note 516).
SYNCHRONOUS SAWTOOTH FOR PDM TELE-

METRY— Circuit generates highly linear ramp
that is reset to zero by each clock pulse. When
ramp exceeds analog value of unknown input
voltage, pulse is terminated. R1, R2, and Cl
form integrating network around opamp. Vary-
ing R2 changes slope of ramp output. — J. Sprin-
ger, Build a Sawtooth Generator with Three ICs,
EDN Magazine, Nov. 15, 1970, p 49.
INTERFACES FOR 100-OHM LINE— Permits

transferring data signals from SA900/901 dis-
kette storage drive to location of MC6800 mi-
croprocessor upto maximum of 20 feet away
through 100-ohm coax. Data line drivers used
are capable of sinking 100-mA in logic true state
with maximum voltage of 0.3 V with respect to
logic ground. When line driver is in logic false
state, driver transistor is cut off and voltage at
output of driver is at least 3 V with respect to
logic ground. — "Microprocessor Applications
Manual" (Motorola Series in Solid-State Elec-
tronics), McGraw-Hill, New York, NY, 1975, p 5-
211-5-212.
Max. 20 Feet
250
OPTICALLY COUPLED DATA LINK— 322 com-

parator at transmitter end of link drives LED of
MCD 2 optoisolator which accepts TTL input.
Receiver is similar comparator having addi-
tional biasing to match photodiode output of
optoisolator. Complete system is noninverting,
with delay of about 2 jrs. Receiver can have any
supply within 4.5-40 V range of 322. Transmit-
ter should be matched to its supply voltage by
selecting R2 according to equation shown. — W.
G. Jung, "1C Timer Cookbook," Howard W.
RECEIVE FILTER — Used as prefilter having

controlled group-delay distortion, ahead of re-
ceiving modem in data transmission system.
Values shown are for 950-1400 Hz answer filter.
For 1900—2350 Hz originate filter, change critical
values to those given in parentheses. — D. Lan-
caster, "TV Typewriter Cookbook," Howard W.
• 1 *p WITH SWITCH
WITHOUT SWITCH UNITS
SCHOTTKY DIODES SCHOTTKY DIODES A B
c 30
165 90 90 - m
nsec
100
45
125
340
451
55 75
| 30
215
185 OPEN OPEN
310 70 OPEN CLOSED
45 125 125 nsec
60 45 CLOSED CLOSED
PROPAGATION TIMES SHOWN EXCLUDE

60 DRIVER AND LINE DELAYS
POLARITY-REVERSING SPLIT-PHASE DRIVE— formance. Closing only switch B enhances com- greatly improves system noise rejection in split-
Half of 9614 polarity-reversing line driver feeds mon-mode rejection but reduces propagation phase termination of line. — "Optoelectronics
pair of Hewlett-Packard HCPL-2602 optically delay slightly. Closing both switches optimizes Designer's Catalog 1977," Hewlett-Packard,
coupled line receivers through coax cable. data rate. Schottky diodes at receiver inputs im- Palo Alto, CA, 1977, p 158-159.
Cable-grounding switches A and B change per- prove data rate. NAND flip-flop at output
251
DATA TRANSMISSION CIRCUITS
CVSD ENCODER FOR SECURE RADIO— Moto-

rola MC3417 continuously variable slope delta
modulator-demodulator 1C is used as 16-kHz
simplex voice coder-decoder for systems re-
quiring digital communication of analog sig-
nals. Clock rate used depends on bandwidth re-
quired and can be 9.6 kHz or less for voice-only
systems. Analog output uses single-pole inte-
gration network formed with 0.1 juF and 10K.
Report covers circuit operation in detail for var-
ious applications. — "Continuously Variable
Slope Delta Modulator/Demodulator," Moto-
rola, Phoenix, A Z, 1978, DS 9488.
5-MHz COAX LINE DRIVER — Combination of

Harris HA-2530 wideband inverting amplifier
and HA-2630 unity-gain current amplifier pro-
vides 20-dB gain with extremely high slew rate
and full power bandwidth even under heavy
output loading conditions. — "Linear & Data Ac-
quisition Products," Harris Semiconductor,
Melbourne, FL, Vol. 1, 1977, p 2-47-2-50.
TTL -COMPATIBLE
OUTPUT
handle additional twisted-pair input. Diodes in

BALANCED-LINE TRANSMISSION— Transmits lines are required only for negative common- rent switching at high speeds. — "The Linear
data at rates up to 0.5 MHz over twisted pair to mode protection at driver outputs. System has and Interface Circuits Data Book for Design En-
Texas Instruments SN75152 dual-line receiver. high common-mode voltage capability. gineers," Texas Instruments, Dallas, TX, 1973,
Other section of receiver is identical and can SN75450 is dual peripheral driver for high-cur-
p 8-78.
252
+5V +5V COAX DRIVER AND RECEIVER— Uses two TTL

+5
gates of SN74H01 package to form either driver
or receiver for transmitting data over RG59 or
RG174 coax at rates exceeding 10 megabits per
second, with distance increasing from 400 me-
ters at 10 Mb/s to over 1000 meters at 100 kb/s
for RG59 and lesser distances for RG174. Can
also be used for twisted-pair lines but at lower
data rates. Bias gate G3 exhibits low output
impedance, for terminating channel load resis-
tor R6.— R. W. Stewart, Two TTL Gates Drive
Very Long Coax Lines, EDN Magazine, Oct. 1,
1972, p 49.
103-COMPATIBLE MODEM — Motorola 4412 1C

converts serial data, usually to and from uni-
versal asynchronous receiver-transmitter, into
tones suitable for telephone communication. In
originate mode, logic 0 is transmitted as 1070
Hz and logic 1 as 1270 Hz. In answer mode, logic
0 is transmitted as 2025 Hz and logic 1 as 2225
Hz. Modems are used in pairs, with receiver re-
sponding to tone group not being transmitted.
Speed capability is up to 300-baud data rate.
Output is 300 mVRMS into 100K load.— D. Lan-
Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 133.
MODEM — Developed as part of TV terminal for frequencies of 1270 Hz for mark and 1070 Hz for connection to telephone lines, and use of
microprocessor, to permit communication over space, with answer frequencies of 2225 Hz for modem — R. Lange, Build the $35 Modem, Kil-
telephone line with time-sharing computer sys- mark and 2025 Hz for space. AY-5-1012 UART obaud, Nov. 1977, p 94-96.
tem. Uses Motorola MC14412 modem chip for serves as parallel interface to microprocessor.
full-duplex FSK modulation having originate Article covers operation, construction, testing,
253
Voice/Non Voice aock Digital

SELECT Input Output
TELEPHONE-QUALITY CODER-DECODER—
Uses Motorola MC3418 continuously variable
slope delta modulator-demodulator 1C to give
over 50 dB of dynamic range for 1-kHz test at
1 37. 7K bit rate. At this rate, 40 voice channels can
1N914
be multiplexed on standard 1.544-megabit tele-
phone carrier facility. 1C includes active com-
panding control and double integration for im-
proved performance in encoding and decoding
digital speech. Opamp types are not critical. —
"Continuously Variable Slope Delta Modulator/
Demodulator," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1 978, DS
9488.
A 1 , A2,
MC 1 458
R2
100M
REZEROING AMPLIFIER — Used where input
signal has unknown and variable DC offset, as
in telemetry applications. Rezero command line
is enabled while ground reference signal is ap-
plied to input, making Cl charge to level pro-
portional to DC offset of system. When rezero
line is deactivated, amplifier becomes conven-
tional inverter, subtracting system offset and
giving true ground-referenced output. For 10-V
full-scale system requiring 0.1% (10-mV) accu-
racy, amplifier needs rezeroing reference every
100 ms. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 1," Na-
tional Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1973,
AN-63, p 1-12.
v
+5V
16
HEWLETT PACK ARD

5082 2835
1
£ - 1 • 3901'
-15 pF
V
i+5
<
WITHOUT
90 _ .01 *
SCHOTTKY DIODE
R = 0
WITH
R = 0
SCHOTTKY DIODE
R = 33i.' UNITS r
tPHL
1 30 90 1 30
45 90
235 30
365 nsec
m
3-,
tPLH
450 50 80 50 70 200
210
35 45 60 35 60 35 45 60 nsec PROPAGATION TIMES SHOWN EXCLUDE DRIVER AND LINE DELAYS.
POLARITY-REVERSING DRIVE— Half of 9614 cable. Data rate is improved considerably by gation delay time to high output level) are clos-
polarity-reversing line driver feeds Hewlett- using Schottky diode at input of receiver. Best
est to being equal. — "Optoelectronics De-
Packard HCPL-2602 optically coupled line re- data rates are achieved when tPHL (propagation
signer's Catalog 1977," Hewlett-Packard, Palo
ceiver through shielded, twisted-pair, or coax delay time to low output level) and tPLH (propa- Alto, CA, 1977, p 158-159.
254
+ 12V
FSK DEMODULATOR WITH CARRIER DETECT—

Exar XR-221 1 FSK demodulator operating with
PLL provides choice of outputs when carrier is
present; pin 5 goes low and pin 6 goes high
when carrier is detected. With pins 6 and 7cc con-
nected, output from these pins provides data
when FSK is applied but is low when no carrier
is present. Circuit performance is independent
of input signal strength over range of 2 mV to
3 VRMS. Center frequency is 1/C,R, Hz, with val-
ues in farads and ohms. Choose frequency to fall
midway between mark and space frequencies.
Used in transmitting digital data over telecom-
munication links. — "Phase-Locked Loop Data
Book," Exar Integrated Systems, Sunnyvale,
CA, 1978, p 57-61.
FSK DETECTOR— Exar XR-S200 PLL 1C is con-

nected as modem suitable for Bell 103 or 202
data sets operating at data transmission rates
up to 1800 bauds. Input frequency shift corre-
sponding to data bit reverses polarity of DC out-
put voltage of multiplier. DC level is changed to
binary output pulse by gain block connected as
voltage comparator— "Phase-Locked Loop
Data Book," Exar Integrated Systems, Sunny-
vale, CA, 1978, p 9-16.
POLARITY-NONREVERSING DRIVE— Hewlett- series resistor R can be added to achieve high- time to low output level) and tPLH (propagation
Packard HCPL-2602 optically coupled line re- est possible data rate. C should be as large as
delay time to high output level). — "Optoelec-
ceiver handles high data rates from shielded, possible without preventing regulator in line re- tronics Designer's Catalog 1977," Hewlett-
twisted-pair, or coax cable fed by 74S140 line ceiver from turning off during negative excur- Packard, Palo Alto, CA, 1977, p 158-159.
driver. Reflections due to active termination do sions of input signal. Highest data rates are
not affect performance. Peaking capacitor C and achieved by equalizing tPHL (propagation delay
255
DIFFERENTIAL LINE DRIVER— Uses Motorola

MC75110L line driver and MC75107L receiver
with twisted-pair transmission line having at-
tenuation of1 .6 dB per 1 00 feet at 1 0 MHz. Clock
rate is 18.5 MHz. With push-pull driver shown,
single pulse corresponds to transmission of 1
followed by series of Os; one line is then at
ground and the other at —300 mV. Arrangement
is suitable for party-line or bus applications. —
T. Hopkins, "Line Driver and Receiver Consid-
erations," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1978, AN-
708A, p 11.
+5 V +5 V +5 V
SINGLE-ENDED LINE DRIVER— Supplies 4.2-V point-to-point system. Requires only single +5 ceiver Considerations," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
input pulse to twisted-pair transmission line for 1978, AN-708A, p 14.
V supply. — T. Hopkins, "Line Driver and Re-
lOOpF
A) SYMMETRICAL CLOCK
£>
CLOCK J4 9014
DATA
EXCLUSIVE-OR GATES — Use of retriggerable puts of 9014 to generate output signal for line. trigger 9601. System remains synchronized as
mono with EXCLUSIVE-OR gates simplifies de- At receiver, clock and data stream are regener- long as pulse width of mono is between 50%
sign of both transmitter and receiver for han- ated by 9601 adjusted to 75% of data-bit time and 100% of data-bit time. — P. Alfke, Exclusive-
dling binary phase-modulated digital data over and connected in nonretriggerable mode. One OR Gates Simplify Modem Designs, EDN Mag-
single line. With 50% duty-cycle clock at trans- EXCLUSIVE-OR gate and an EXCLUSIVE-NOR azine, Sept. 15, 1972, p 43.
mitter, clock and data signals are applied to ingate connected as inverting delay element will
256
V*
3-KILOBAUD FULL-DUPLEX FSK MODEM— Val-

ues shown are for 13-kHz bandwidth, 1070 Hz
for mark and 1270 Hz for space, using Exar XR-
2206 function generator and XR-2211 FSK de-
modulator. Report gives design procedure.
Supply can be +12 V.— "Phase-Locked Loop
vale, CA, 1978, p 57-61.
12 V
DUAL-LINE RECEIVER FOR COAX— Single

Texas Instruments SN75152 1C contains two re-
ceiver sections, each taking input from separate
coax. Other receiver section (not shown) is iden-
tical and provides similar TTL output for its
coax. Driver shown has OR capability for feed-
ing single coax. Receiver has adjustable noise
immunity and continuously adjustable hyster-
esis control (not shown). — "The Linear and In-
terface Circuits Data Book for Design Engi-
8-78. neers," Texas Instruments, Dallas, TX, 1973, p
BUS TRANSCEIVER — Designed for use in bus- mon bus. One two-input NOR gate is included National Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1975,
organized data transmission systems intercon- in National DS8641 quad unified bus transceiver
nected by terminated 120-ohm lines. Up to 27 package to disable all drivers in package simul- p 3-17-3-18.
driver/receiver pairs can be connected to com-
taneously.— "Interface Integrated Circuits,"
LINE DRIVER FOR LED — Single-ended input is

converted to balanced differential drive for
100 pF
feeding 75-ohm transmission line terminated
by LED serving as input for optically coupled
line receiver. Logic 1 input is inverted to logic 0
by inverter A, turning on Q, and turning off out-
put of gate 8. At same time, output of inverter
A is logic 1, which inhibits turn-on of Q2 and
makes output of inverter D go low. Thus, logic
1 input means that current is sourced into line
and LED by Q,, then sunk by output of D. Simi-
larly, logic 0 input results in current being
sourced into line by Q2 and sunk by inverter B,
making diode D, conduct and turn off LED of OCI
receiver. — K. Erickson, Line Driver Is Compat-
ible with OCI Line Receiver, EDN Magazine, Oct.
5, 1976, p 106.
1/6-7404 1/6-7416
BIT-RATE GENERATOR — Fairchild 4702 1C syn-

thesizes frequencies most often used in serial
data communication, particularly with UARTS.
With connections shown, output is 1760 Hz
which is 16 x 110-baud rate of serial teletypes. * INTERNAL
Grounding only pin A generates 16 x 150 bauds.
Grounding only pin B gives 16 x 300 bauds,
grounding pin C gives 16 x 1200 bauds, and —=©=©=©= CONNECTION
DO NOT USE
-
grounding pin D gives 16 x 2400 bauds. Will

drive one regular TTL load at supply drain of 1
mA. — D. Lancaster, "CMOS Cookbook," How-
ard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 155.
SINGLE-SUPPLY HIGH-PRECISION PLL— Com- erating frequency range is 0.01 Hz to 100 kHz. range and low-pass filter characteristics, are
bination of Exar XR-2207 VCO and XR-2208 op- Timing resistor R0 should be in range of 5K to 45K and 0.032 /xF. — "Phase-Locked Loop Data
erational multiplier is connected for operation 100K, and R, should be greater than R0. For 10- Book," Exar Integrated Systems, Sunnyvale,
from single 12-24 V supply for data communi- kHz center frequency, C0 can be 0.01 /xF and R0 CA, 1978, p 62-64.
cation and signal conditioning applications. Op- can be 10K. R, and C,, which determine tracking
258
+ 5 V
DIFFERENTIAL LINE RECEIVER— Responds to ANALOG PLL IN FSK DEMODULATOR— Devel-

balanced-input drive signals fed to both com- oped for frequency-shift keying used in data
parator inputs of 322. Output is undisturbed transmission over wires, in which inputs vary
even with up to 1 V of common-mode noise on carrier between two preset frequencies corre-
input lines. TTL-compatible output is in phase sponding to low and high states of binary input
with positive input. Overall delay is about 1 signal. Circuit uses elaborate filter to separate
modulated signal from carrier signal passed by
fts. — W. G. Jung, "1C Timer Cookbook," How-
ard W. Sams, Indianapolis. IN, 1977, p 153-155. PLL. 565 PLL provides reference for S710 com-
parator. Article gives design equations. — E.
Murthi, Monolithic Phase-Locked Loops— Ana-
logs Do All the Work of Digitals, and Much More,
INPUT
SIGNAL
PLL FOR 0.01 Hz TO 100 kHz— Highly stable and in data transmission and signal conditioning. and low-pass filter characteristics, are 45K and
precise phase-locked loop system using Exar Supply voltage range is ±6 V to ±13 V. For 10- 0.032 pF. — "Phase-Locked Loop Data Book,"
XR-2207 VCO and XR-2208 operational multi- kHz center frequency, R0 is 10K and C0 is 0.01 Exar Integrated Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978,
plier is suitable for wide range of applications pF. R, and C1( which determine tracking range
p 62-64.
0.002 a,
LINE DRIVER AND RECEIVER

1
1/2O
S7
2 83
^
INPUTS 3
4
OUTPUT
TWISTED-PAIR TERMINATIONS— National to data signals at other end of line while provid-
DS7830 line driver applies digital data to ing immunity to noise spikes. Exact value of Cl and controls response time. — l"Interface Inte-
C *
twisted-pair transmission line in high-noise en- depends on line length. Supply voltage is 4.5 to grated Circuits," National
“■ Semiconductor,
OBE
vironment, and DS7820 line receiver responds Santa Clara, CA,STR 1975, p 8-1-8-16.
5 V for both receiver and driver. C2 is optional
4pF
BANDPASS ANSWER FILTER — Provides gain of

15 dB over bandwidth of 1020 to 1320 Hz for
low-speed modem system using Motorola
MC6860 1C. Attenuation is 35 dB at 2225 Hz, as 10-MHz COAX DRIVER— Provides high output
required for answer-only modem system. Equa- current to coaxial line over bandwidth limited
tions for values of filter components are only by single-pole response of feedback com-
given. — J. M. DeLaune, "Low-Speed Modem ponents. Response is flat with no peaking and
System Design Using the MC6860," Motorola, distortion is low. Uses Harris HA-2530/2535
Phoenix, A Z, 1975, AN-747, p 10. wideband amplifier having high slew rate. —
"Linear & Data Acquisition Products," Harris
Semiconductor, Melbourne, FL, Vol. 1, 1977, p
7-54 (Application Note 516).
100!! TWISTED PAIR LINE
MULTIPLE DRIVERS MAT BE

CONNECTED TO THE LINE
WIRED-OR TERMINALS — Arrangement per- output of receiver at right is logic 1 only if all receiver is logic 0. — D. Pippenger, Termination
mits connecting several 1C line drivers in parallel paralleled drivers are transmitting logic 1 . If any Is the Key to Wired-OR Capability, EDNIEEE
for feeding single 100-ohm twisted-pair data one or all of drivers transmit logic 0, output of Magazine, Dec. 15, 1971, p 17.
line. With wired-OR transmitting capability, TTL
PSEUDORANDOM CMOS— Uses MC14021 8- channels or stored in public files. Digital mes- through all its states within 255 clock pulses;
bit shift register in conjunction with MC14507 sage is scrambled by mixing it with output of when it reaches all-1 state, signal is fed back to
EXCLUSIVE-OR gates to generate pseudoran- code generator in EXCLUSIVE-OR gate. Func- sender for releasing FF-1 so scrambling can
dom digital code. To develop code pattern, 1st, tionally identical 255-bit random generator is commence. Article traces operation in detail. —
6th, 7th, and 8th bits are sent through EXCLU- used at receiver to unscramble data. Decoding J. Halligan, Pseudo-Random Number Generator
SIVE-OR gates and fed back to shift-register circuit must have access to sending clock and Uses CMOS Logic, EDN Magazine, Aug. 15,
input. Output can be used as random test signal means for synchronizing so as to put both reg-
or for protecting messages sent over public isters into all-1 state. Register in receiver goes 1972, p 42-43.
260
+5 V
SINGLE-SUPPLY LINE DRIVER— Motorola

MC75451P driver and external components
shown provide differential signal for twisted-
pair transmission line from single +5 V supply.
External gate provides required input phase re-
versal to gate G2 of 1C. Each output of 1C varies
between 0.5 V and 3.6 V, so net differential volt-
age driven into line is about 6 V. Only receiver
end of line is terminated in its characteristic
impedance, since arrangement is intended only
for point-to-point transmission. — T. Hopkins,
"Line Driver and Receiver Considerations," Mo-
torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1978, AN-708A, p 12.
CHAPTER 24
Digital Clock Circuits

Provide 12- or 24-hour time on LED, LCD, gas-discharge, or fluorescent digital
displays for watches and clocks. Some also have calendar display and alarm-
tone generator. Special circuits provide battery backup for AC power failure,
multiplexing of display to reduce battery drain, stopwatch, and tide clock.
Clock-pulse generators for logic and microprocessor applications are given in
Clock Signal chapter.
6-DIGIT STOPWATCH — Low-cost battery-pow- by time-sharing counters through one display- nicad batteries last 500 h per charge if displays
ered electronic stopwatch with 6-digit LED dis- driving decoder cuts battery drain because each are blanked when not being read, and about 6
play uses readily available complex-function digit is on for only one-sixth of time. Article h without blanking. — A. Mouton, Build Your
CMOS ICs to minimize component count. Time traces operation of circuit step by step. Maxi- Own Digital Stopwatch with Strobed LED Read-
range is up to 59 min and 59.99 s. Multiplexing mum error is only 0.001 s/h. Four rechargeable out, EDN Magazine, April 5, 1974, p 55—57.
261
262
5 35pF
LCD WRISTWATCH — Inverter section of Intel through 12-V zener is used to regulate and con- Separate drive flashes colon at 1-Hz rate.— M.
5801 oscillator/divider is used with 32,768-Hz trol pulse width of 1024-Hz signal. Upconverter S. Robbins, "Electronic Clocks and Watches,"
crystal to produce time base. First divider in also provides 12-15 V required by LCD and 5201 Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1975 p 128-
5801 reduces this to 1024 Hz for driving upcon- decoder/driver 1C. Output to each LCD segment 130.
verter transistor. Feedback from transistor and to common backplate is 32-Hz square wave.
iccumy IUW UUipUl miU

TIDE CLOCK — Circuit shuts off electric clock of one gate of IC7 hex inverter. When IC4 counts circuit Set tide clock at 12:00 for high tide at
any type for 5 s out of every 144 s, to give loss up to 144 s, its output goes high and resets IC6 location of use, and it will be 12:00 at high tide
of 50 min in 24 h as required for making high to low for start of 5-s low period of that counter. thereafter. Low tide will then be at 6:00 — J. F.
tides conform to clock readings. Regulated 5-V Article gives timing waveforms. Switching tran- Crowther, Time and Tide— Digitally, 73 Maga-
supply shown drives TTL 7492 frequency divider sistor is used to control relay that opens clock zine, Aug. 1978, p 156-157.
DIGITAL CLOCK CIRCUITS 263
SPRAGUE UH P -49 1
12-h WITH SECONDS — Combination of Mostek

clock 1C and Sprague high-voltage display driv-
ers, acting through 206C and 216C single in-line
resistor network, provides drive for conven-
tional seven-element gas-discharge digital
clock display showing hours, minutes, and sec-
onds. Requires -200 V supply. Display can be
Burroughs Panaplex, Cherry Plasma-Lux, or
3-5.
Beckman SP series. — "Integrated Circuits Data
Book — 1," Sprague, North Adams, MA, 1978, p
eludes outputs for displaying day of month ance drawing up to 5 A from AC line. Dual-volt- Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1975, p 103-104 and
along with time on Litronix DL707 LED read- 116-117.
age power supply provides 7 and 14 VDC. In-
ALARM FOR DIGITAL CLOCK — Uses transistor

as driver to turn on programmable unijunction
transistor (PUT) oscillator feeding 8-ohm loud-
speaker. Pitch of tone can be adjusted with 10K
pot. Input is from alarm pin of digital clock 1C
(pin 3 for Fairchild FCM7001 equivalent of Cal-
2-MHz CRYSTAL USING CMOS PAIR— One Low power drain makes circuit ideal for use in Tex CT7001). PUT is Radio Shack 276-119 or
CMOS transistor pair from CA3600E array is digital clocks and watches. — "Linear Integrated equivalent.— W. J. Prudhomme, CT7001 Clock-
connected with feedback pi network to give sta- Circuits and MOS/FET's," RCA Solid State Divi- buster, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1976, p 52-54 and
sion, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 280. 56-58.
ble oscillator performance with 2-MHz crystal.
6-DIGIT LED WITH SLEW BUTTONS— National VDC for 1C and 7 VDC for displays. Hold push- Q1 2 are Darlington-connected pairs of PNP tran-
MM5313 PMOS digital clock 1C drives display button SW1 stops count to give precise seconds sistors. Segment drivers Q13-Q19 are single
which includes four discrete LEDs mounted on setting. Slow-slew button SW2 advances time PNP transistors. — M. S. Robbins, "Electronic
readout panel to form colons between hours, at 1 min/s for precise setting, and fast-slew but- Clocks and Watches," Howard W. Sams, Indi-
minutes, and seconds. AC supply provides 14 ton SW3 advances time 1 h/s. Digit drivers Q1- anapolis, IN, 1975, p 103 and 113.
1-Hz REFERENCE — Output of 1-MHz crystal os-

cillator isstepped down to 1 Hz by CMOS de-
cade divider chain using Motorola MC14518
dual decade counters. Circuit also generates 1-
kHz multiplex rate for display used with 24-h in-
dustrial clock. Supply is +5 V. — D. Aldridge and
A. Mouton, "Industrial ClockrTimer Featuring
Back-Up Power Supply Operation," Motorola,
Phoenix, A Z, 1974, AN-718A, p 5.
1/2-MC 1401 1 1/4 MC14001
AUTO CLOCK — National MM5377 chip for au- S1 CLOSED FT DISPLAY

tomobile clock interfaces directly with 4-digit colon indication. Voltage-sensitive output erence time base. — "MOS/LSI Databook," Na-
liquid-crystal or fluorescent-tube display. 12-h drives energy-storage network serving as volt- tional Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p
1-33-1-37.
format includes leading-zero blanking and age doubler/regulator. Crystal oscillator is ref-
266
1.5-V LCD — Will operate over 1 year on single

1.5-V AAA battery with accuracy of ±1 min.
Basic timekeeping functions are provided by
Motorola MC14440 CMOS device that includes
calendar. 32.768-kHz NT-cut quartz crystal and
trimming capacitor provide reference fre-
quency. Output of 1.5-V alkaline cell is increased
to 4 V for display by voltage tripler using
MBD101 Schottky diodes — J. Roy and A. Mou-
ton, "A Cordless, CMOS, Liquid-Crystal Display
Clock," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1977, EB-56.
CIRCULAR LED ARRAY — Arrangement of 60

LEDs sequencing in outer ring to indicate sec-
onds and minutes, combined with 12 in inner
ring to indicate hours, is driven by Motorola
MC14566 CMOS industrial time-base generator.
Time reference is 16.384-kHz crystal oscillator
consisting of two NOR gates and Statek crystal.
Reference frequency is divided by 2'4 in U2 to
give 1-s pulse rate for driving accumulators
U3A-U5B. Maximum error is 1 s per month. U3
counts seconds, U4 minutes, and U5 hours.
Multiplexing is required because same set of 60
LEDs serves for minutes and seconds. Fast and
slow touch pads eliminate need for switches
when setting time. Single 12-V nicad battery
provides backup for AC line failure — A. Mou-
ton, 'The LED Circular Timepiece," Motorola,
Phoenix, AZ, 1975, EB-41.
MULTIPLEXED CLOCK DISPLAY— Multiplexed goes to 13 o'clock, and clears shift register. segment lines of LED. Leading hours digit is
display suitable for LED readouts is provided by Carry flip-flop remains set, so 1 is loaded into blanked, using RBI input on 9317. — G. Smith,
circuit using TTL counters to count 60-Hz line. hours digit to accomplish transition from Novel Clock Circuit Provides Multiplexed Dis-
When count reaches 1 0 o'clock, flip-flop M is set 12:59:59 to 1:00:00. Seven-segment decoder play, EDN Magazine, Sept. 1, 1972, p 50-51.
on every cycle. Gate G3 then detects when time driver looks at shift register output and drives
268
STANDBY SUPPLY — Phase-shift oscillator Q1 outage, oscillator is switched automatically to age, say 4 h, this 0.1-Hz error is equivalent to
operates from AC line through bridge-rectifier battery by diode network and provides reason- 0.167% error in time, so clock loses only 24 s
power supply and provides line-synchronized ably accurate signal for operating clock. Free- during outage. Cl and C2 are 200 to 300 MF. Ad-
60-Hz power to standard digital clock through running oscillator is adjusted to be slightly low, just R1 to give output just below 60 Hz on bat-
isolating emitter-follower Q2. During power such as 59.9 Hz. For reasonably long power out- tery operation. To minimize battery drain, LEDs
on digital clock are not energized during
2.097152 MHz
standby. — R. S. Isenson, Digital Clock Fall-Safe,
HOT
■Wr
73 Magazine, July 1977, p 168-169.
22M
6-25 pF 25 pF
BRIGHTNESS |7
"#rlh' MIN.
6 14|SWITCH I
0SC 1 300k > SET
10 0SC 2
Ml 0
MM5379
H10
a b c
d e
f g COLON
°
n
+ o IpF H
N 'wv-y-
0 OImF
Trjr
ImT
+
12-V WITH VSSGAS-DISCHARGE

- 180V
DISPLAY— Na-
tional MM5379 automobile clock package inter-
faces with standard 4-digit gas-discharge dis-
play. Format is 12 h with leading-zero blanking
and colon indication. 2-MHz crystal provides
time accuracy.— "MOS/LSI Databook," Na-

tional Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p
1-38-1-42.
269
DIGITAL CLOCK CIRCUITS
CAPACITOR
REQUIRED
1 T
AC/DC CLOCK— When AC power fails, MCD-2 rent sin from 200 mA on AC to 12 mA on 9-V strobe lines and remain lit when display is
optoisolator senses voltage drop and makes standby battery. Clock will runfordayson 1000- blanked, but draw only 1 mA. — S. I. Green, Dig-
Schmitt trigger force strobe input of clock chip mAh battery. Two LED pairs that form colons ital Clock Keeps Counting Even When AC Power
to ground, blanking display and reducing cur- between time digits are operated from digit Fails, EDN Magazine, Dec. 20, 1974, p 49-51.
i_r IN4I48 »'

ylOOk
1
-
r cri
1)/1
S / 1SzIs^H S4|S5| ^T-s C2 -O®
01
S Cl
min
® m IN4I — »• SPEAKER
500 uF '''
innate
11 -*• RADIO GND
* RADIO AUDIO
-40 -OHM SPEAKER

-H
A?
Te Fo
J6
timed radio turnoff after user-selected interval
SI fast set input S6 alarm off input
snooze input FPTI30 V\/ of up to 59 min. CR4 and C5 rectify alarm-tone
S2 slow set input
J7 output for amplification by Q4 to give active low
S3 seconds display input S7 alarm tone on/off
output for timed radio turn-on when coinci-
alarm display input S8
S9 alarm output on/off
S4 R41 dence is detected by alarm comparators. Q5
S3 sleep display input tone amplitude control
provides alarm-tone output at level sufficient to
drive 40-ohm loudspeaker with ample wake-up
DIGITAL ALARM — Direct drive offered by Fair- Display is Fairchild FND500 LED. Either 50- or 60- volume. If radio is used, omit loudspeaker. Ar-
child 3817 1C allows design of simple low-cost Hz input may be used. U2 is 7800-series 1C volt- ticle covers construction and adjustment. — D.
clock radio providing display drive, alarm, and age regulator rated to meet requirements
’ of R. Schmieskors, Jr., Low-Cost Digital Clock,
j,8
radio used. Q3 provides active low output for Ham Radio , Feb. 1976, p 26-30.
~leep-to-music features in 12- or 24-h formats.
270
W 20 pF
Cv = Trimmer capacitance
Cqut = integrated oscillator output capacitance
«40M
= Integrated oscillator feedback resistance
QUARTZ-MOTOR WRISTWATCH— Uses one motor at output of chip for driving conventional buffers — B. Furlow, CMOS Gates in Linear Ap-
32.768-kHz crystal at input of Motorola MTD watch hands. Chip contains three-inverter os- plications: The Results Are Surprisingly Good,
160F or 161F custom CMOS chip, with stepper cillator, 16 counting flip-flops, and motor drive EDN Magazine, March 5, 1973, p 42-48.
12-V AUTO CLOCK — National MA1003 auto- printed-circuit board to give complete digital Display has leading-zero blanking. For portable
motive/instrument clock module combines clock. Brightness control logic blanks display applications, display can be activated by closing
MM5377 MOS LSI clock with 4-digit 0.3-inch when ignition is off, reduces brightness to 33%
display switch momentarily — "MOS/LSI Data-
green vacuum fluorescent display, 2.097-MHz when parking or headlight lamps are on, and book," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
crystal, and discrete components on single follows dash-lamp dimming control setting. CA, 1977, p 13-8-13-10.
Vss-HV
MAN 1A OR
6-DIGIT DISPLAY— National DM8863 8-digit
EQUIVALENT
LED driver serves as segment driver for com-
mon-anode display of hours, minutes, and sec-
onds, replacing total of 14 resistors and 7 tran-
sistors.— C. Carinalli, "Driving 7-Segment LED
Displays with National Semiconductor Cir-
cuits," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
CA, 1974, AN-99, pi 1.
JL
R* 200. VARIABLE DEPENDING ON DESIRED DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS.
AC DIGITAL CLOCK WITH STANDBY BAT- ing of display to extend battery life. Accuracy is by fast and slow buttons, and alarm is set with
TERY— Uses MM5316 alarm-clock 1C, originally poor on batteries but batteries make resetting same buttons while depressing alarm-display
designed to drive LCD or fluorescent displays, of time and alarm easier after AC interruption. button. Transistor type is not critical. — M. F.
but modified here for LED display. Diodes and Alarm uses 555 multivibrator to produce fre- Smith, Digital
Nov. 1976, p 62.Alarm Clock, Wireless World,
batteries provide power if AC fails, with blank- quency-shift warble on output tone. Time is set
BATTERY BACKUP — During normal operation,

all power for digital clock is provided by AC
power supply. During power failure, clock con-
tinues operating from battery backup using two
DIGITAL WRISTWATCH— Single Intersil elements of display. Pressing read button once 9-V batteries in series. Battery drain is limited
ICM7200 1C drives multiplexed display giving gives hours and minutes; pressing second time by diode CR2 that blocks power flow to dis-
choice of hours and minutes, seconds, and day/ gives day and date; and pressing third time plays. Optional switch may be installed across
date. CMOS chip divides 32.768-kHz crystal out- diode to short it for momentary viewing of dis-
gives seconds.— D. Lancaster, "CMOS Cook-
put in long internal binary divider to produce book," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, play.—W. J. Prudhomme, CT7001 Clockbuster,
basic 1-s clock rate. Further division gives other 73 Magazine, Dec. 1976, p 52-54 and 56-58.
p 377-378.
4-DIGIT 0.7-INCH LED DISPLAY— National ates from either 50-Hz or 60-Hz inputs, and gives clock. Zero appearing in first digit is blanked. On
MAI 013 clock module contains MOS LSI clock either 12- or 24-h display format. Nonmulti- 12-h version, dot in upper left corner is ener-
1C, display, power supply, and associated dis- plexed LED drive eliminates RF interference.
gized to indicate PM.— "MOS/LSI Databook,"
crete components on single printed-circuit Display is flashed at 1-Hz rate after power failure National Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977,
board that is easily connected to radio. Oper- of any duration, to indicate need for resetting
p 13-23-13-28.
273
DIGITAL CLOCK CIRCUITS
4-h DIGITAL WATCH — Single Motorola MC

14521 CMOS 1C drives single-digit MAN 3 LED
display in such a way that time range of 4 h is
obtained with 1.875 min resolution. Can be built
into ok) watch case at cost under $10 for parts.
Oscillator frequency of 1.165 kHz can be
tweaked to adjust clock, or crystal oscillator can
be added for high accuracy. Analog/binary for-
mat of readout provides deciphering challenge
to user, even though article gives diagram
showing which segments of LED are lit for each
time reading. Time intervals represented by
each lit segment of display are: B = 2 h; C = 1
h; A = 30 min; F = 15 min; G = 7.5 min; E =
3.75 min; D = 1 .875 min. — R. M. Steimle, Small
CMOS Digital Watch Has Analog LED Output,
EDN Magazine, Aug. 20, 1976, p 86.
ALARM
DRIVE
DRIVE
SLEEP
12-h ALARM — General-purpose digital clock vide drive for alarm. Brightness control is op- "MOS/LSI Databook," National Semiconductor,
with alarm uses National MM5402 or MM5405 tional. Sleep output can be used to turn off radio Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 1-68-1-73.
MOS 1C to drive 3 'v-digit LED display and pro- after desired time interval of up to 59 min. —
ALARM GENERATOR — Simple 555 timer gen-

erates alarm tone driving small loudspeaker, for
use with Cal-Tex CT7001 and other similar dig-
ital clocks which do not have internal tone gen-
erator. Circuit requires +5 V, but supply can be
higher value if suitable dropping resistor is
used. — M. S. Robbins, "Electronic Clocks and
Watches," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
1975, p 91.
0—9 s DIGITAL READOUT — Can be used for

classroom demonstration of digital logic driv-
ing 7-segment LED or as attention-getting desk
display "me base Q1 feeds sequential timing
pulses to 7490 decade counter. Pulses are
counted in binary mode, and bit pattern corre-
sponding to digits 0-9 is fed to 7447 binary-to-
decimal decoder/driver connected to 7-segment
readout. Calibrate with watch or with timing
reference signals from WWV, adjusting R1 so
display advances 1 digit per second. — F. M.
Mims, "Electronic Circuitbook 5: LED Projects,"
Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis. IN, 1976, p 72-
75.
vss
SIMPLE 24-h CLOCK — Use of 60-Hz power fre- one pulse per minute and advances its internal output data to TTL level required by displays.
quency as time base simplifies design while still storage register at same rate. Output of register Power supply provides +5 V and -12 V for ICs
giving long-term accuracy comparable to that is in binary form at pins 1 , 2, 3, and 24, synchro- and 60-Hz reference for clock check. CR5 is
of crystal time base. Four-digit display uses nized with digit-enable outputs at pins 18, 19, Radio Shack 276-561, CR6 is 276-563, and CR1-
Hewlett-Packard 5082-7340 displays requiring 20, and 21. Binary data is thus applied to all four 4 are 276-1146. — K. Powell, 24-Hour Clock with
only simple four-line BCD input. National displays in parallel, with enable lines controlling Digital Readout and Line-Frequency Time Base,
MM5312N 1C divides line frequency down to data feed. SN7404N inverter converts binary Ham Radio, March 1977, p 44-48.
2-INCH LCD NUMERALS— Uses C1200 clock 1C

made by LSI Computer Systems, having time
set, logic, division for seconds, minutes, and
hours, 7-segment decoding, and display drivers
and switches. Four-digit liquid crystal display
panel (LCD) is MGC-50. SI and S2 advance min-
utes or hours on display at 2-Hz rate for setting
time. To use as elapsed-time indicator, close SI
and S2 simultaneously to generate reset pulse
that sets timing change to zero. When both
switches are released simultaneously, time
count starts from zero. — R. F. Graf and G. J.
Whalen, A Giant LCD Clock, CQ, Feb. 1978, p 18-
23 and 76.
-5
DIVIDE BY 5000 FOR CLOCK— Counter chain ■M0
uses CD4017 that divides by integer from 2 to

10, selected by connecting appropriate output
to reset. Extra gates recommended by RCA are
not needed. Used in digital clock that changes
automatically to battery operation when AC
power fails. Clock operates on either 50 or 60 -100
Hz. — S. I. Green, Digital Clock Keeps Counting

Even When AC Power Fails, EDN Magazine,
Dec. 20, 1974, p 49-51.
MC14518
CD4017 CD4017
•1X4) FOR HRS, MINS. (X6) FOR HRS, MINS, SECS
4-DIGIT GAS DISPLAY— CMOS clock 1C drives four digit-driver circuits are required, although transformer-type supply driving diode bridge;
multidigit gas-discharge display. Simple circuit only one of each is shown. Additional drivers regulation is not needed. — M. S. Robbins,
does not include alarm, flashing colon, and AM/ are needed if seconds display is desired. Re- "Electronic Clocks and Watches," Howard W.
PM features. Seven segment-driver circuits and quired supply voltages can be obtained from Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1975, p 68-71.
276
100/jF
BATTERY BACKUP — Four nickel-cadmium bat-

teries connected in series provide automatic
backup for 5-V supply of digital clock. Under
normal AC line operation, battery is continually
being recharged with half-wave rectified and IN 2070
unfiltered supply that allows internal chemical
reactions to settle between pulses of charging
energy. R1 is chosen to make average charging
current about 5% of battery rating.— D. Ald- 12- OR 24-h CLOCK — Single American Micro- changing only three connections — LSI in Con-
ridge and A. Mouton, "Industrial Clock/Timer systems AMI S1736 clock chip drives liquid- sumer Applications, Round 2: Clocks on a Chip,
Featuring Back-Up Power Supply Operation," crystal readout to give either 12-h display with EDN Magazine, May 5, 1973, p 22-23.
Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974, AN-718A, p 7. AM/PM indicator or 24-h digital display by
CALENDAR CLOCK— Uses Fairchild FCM7001 1C time and 28/30/31 calendar, along with alarm tor. RL is typically 2.7K, chosen to limit LED cur-
equivalent of Cal-Tex CT7001 clock chip (which features. Article gives construction details. rent to less than 5 mA.-W. J. Prudhomme,
is no longer available) to drive six 7-segment Each SN75491 driver chip has pins 3, 5, 10, and CT7001 Clockbuster, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1976, p
LEDs that can be switched to show 12- or 24-h 12 connected to pin 11 through 150-ohm resis- 52-54 and 56-58.
CHAPTER 25
Display Circuits
Drives and controls for LEDs used singly or in arrays, as well as liquid crystal,
gas-discharge, fluorescent, incandescent, bar-graph, and Nixie displays.
Includes controls for brightness, zero-suppression, strobing, and multiplexing.
For displays on cathode-ray screens, see Cathode-Ray chapter.
FLUORESCENT DISPLAY DRIVER— National oscillator for supplying clock signals to MOS
enable input provides ghost-free display. — "In-
DS8881 vacuum fluorescent display driver han- circuit, filament-bias zener, and 50K pulldown terface Databook," National Semiconductor,
dles 16-digit grids. Decode inputs select 1 of 16 resistors for each grid. Outputs will source up Santa Clara, CA, 1978, p 5-57-5-60.
outputs to be pulled high. Driver also contains to 7 mA. Supply is 9 V. Interdigit blanking with 277
278
voltage is gated so number of glowing seg-

BAR-GRAPH DRIVE — Use of National LM339 ments isproportional to analog input. Compar-
quad comparator minimizes number of com- ators A1 and A 2 generate gated anode signals
ponents needed to drive Burroughs 200-seg- with durations proportional to inputs. A3 com-
ment gas-discharge bar display. Every third pares ramp signal to 2-V reference and gener-
electrode of display is tied together, so only ates end-of-scan signal when ramp exceeds ref-
three lines (phase 1, 2, and 3) control all seg- erence. A4 generates clock having period of
ments. When phase lines are driven by consec- about 60 fis. — S. N. Kim, "Driving Burroughs'
utive pulses, glow of gas-discharge element is Bar Graph Display," National Semiconductor,
propagated continuously along array. Anode Santa Clara, CA, 1975, DB-4.
DISPLAY CIRCUITS 279
AUTOMATIC BRIGHTNESS CONTROL— Circuit

adjusts brightness of LED digital display by al-
tering mark-space ratio of LED supply voltage.
Ambient-light input is sensed by BC109C tran-
sistor with top taken off. Normal display current
of 20 mA is reduced to 2 mA when darkened
room makes brightness unnecessary, conserv-
ing battery life. Tr3 and Tr4 operate as Schmitt
trigger, with mark time of 1 .5 ms determined by
R2 and space time controlled by charging cur-
rent through Trs and Tr2 as affected by ambient
light on Tr,. Article gives complete circuits for
driving 11-LED array. To add brightness control
circuit, break ground connection of LED supply
transistors and insert saturated transistor Tr6. —
G. Kalanit, Analogue to Digital Meter, Wireless
World, July 1976, p 53-57.
4-DIGIT INCANDESCENT — Circuit serves for in- mA per segment when direct-driven; with mul- prevent high peak current from degrading dis-
terfacing CMOS logic to multiplexed 4-digit in- tiplexing, instantaneous power must be 9 V at play when applied continuously to 1 digit. — A.
candescent display. Scan decoder requires only 48 mA to maintain same average power per seg- Pshaenich, "Interface Considerations for Nu-
two input NAND gates since blanking is not re- ment. Display protection circuit monitors scan meric Display Systems," Motorola, Phoenix,
quired. Incandescent display requires 4.5 V at 24 oscillator and blanks display if oscillator fails, to AZ, 1975, AN-741, p 25.
♦18V
BAR-GRAPH READOUT — Transistors switch 1.0 to 10.0 V in 1-V increments. Input resistance
row of LEDs on in succession to give rising-bar of circuit is above 100,000 ohms. — F. M. Mims,
display indicating input voltage. R2 can be ad- "Electronic Circuitbook 5: LED Projects," How-
justed from minimum range of 0.1 to 0.5 V in ard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1976, p 86-88.
Vss
0.1-V increments for five LEDs to maximum of
REDUCING LED POWER DRAIN — Arrangement

of LEDs in groups of four with constant-current
1 source greatly eliminates wastage of battery
I power. Circuit shows utilization of this tech-
I nique to display 4-bit binary number from
J CMOS counter. — T. R. Owen, L.E.D. Display,
Wireless World, June 1976, p 72.
6-DIGIT DRIVE — Uses two National DM75491

four-segment drivers for multiplex-mode dis-
play of MOS calculator. Total of eight segment
drivers provides drive for each one of seven seg-
ments plus logic control for decimal point. — C.
Carinalli, "Driving 7-Segment LED Displays with
National Semiconductor Circuits," National
P 9.
CURRENT LIMIT RESISTORS

NSN 33 OR EQUIVALENT
B1 5 VOLTS
+- 10 to 20V
LED BRIGHTNESS CONTROL— Uses 10K loga-

segment decoder converts settings of four BCD cells in series, with 1N914 diode inserted in pos- rithmic pot to vary brightness simultaneously
input switches to corresponding 0-9 digit on 7- itive lead to reduce voltage to 5 V. — F. M . Mims, for all LEDs in digital display. — S. F. Bywaters
segment common-anode LED display. Display Integrated Circuit Projects, Vol. 2," Radio and J. E. West, Peak-Reading Audio Level Indi-
is Radio Shack 276-053. Battery can be four AA Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 27-40 cator, Wireless World, Aug. 1975, p 357-361.
fcQlUV T
WALL0HY-
MN1604 0R_ZL. 90V
Sc Sb S» Vj 4 70i ;
Sa Sb Sc Sd S* St Sg
Sg S» Se
MM5736 -A^V—
III /_/
/_/ III /_/
III /_/.
III /_/
O /_/
III "
D1 D2 D3 D4 05 D6
\
POWER
SWITCH
KEYBOARD
6-DIGIT LED DRIVER — National DS8877 driver

is shown in configuration for use with 6-digit Driver requires no standby power and operates tabook," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
calculator. Digit current is in range of 5-50 mA. from either 4.5 V, 6 V, or 9 V.— "Interface Da- CA, 1978, p 5-52-5-53.
O'/77b uO /_/
O o /"/
e.
g—
BINARY LINE STATES — Simple circuit using
four LEDs and one inverter (which may be a
transistor or spare gate) displays all four pos-
sible states on two binary lines. When levels of
lines X and Y are the same, A and B will be off.
Inverter then places C and D at different levels
so one LED (C or D) will be on. Reverse situation
occurs when X and Y are at different levels. — D.
CARRY/BORROW- 1 28 Straker,
Feb. 1977,Binaryp 44. State Indicator, Wireless World,
2 27
ZERO- 3 26
4 25
4-BIT 23
5
DATA BUS
6
24
7 22
COUNT INPUT- 8
19
DATA TRANSFER _ 10
9 20
(FROM PROCESSOR) 18
21 DISPLAY
12 CONTROL
11
13 16
17
14 15
CONTROL WORD READ.

(FROM PROCESSOR)
TIMER DRIVES LED DISPLAY— Intersil 7227 mi- reset, or load, then deliver counter data, feed in
croprocessor-controlled timer provides direct settable register word, or preset counter to in-
drive for LED display under supervision of mi- itial value. — B. O'Neil, 1C Timers — the "Old Re-
croprocessor. Tri-state 4-bit data bus serves to liable" 555 Has Company, EDN Magazine, Sept.
read in control word such as up/down, store. 5, 1977, p 89-93.
TO
SEGMENT
DECODERS
DIGIT SHIFTER FOR DISPLAY— Circuit takes keyboard switches to stop bouncing. BCD out- and G1D are 1000 pF, and capacitors for other
BCD output from 10-key keyboard and shifts puts from G5-G8 go directly to 7- or 10-segment gates are 240 pF. Article traces circuit opera-
each number, as entered, from right to left on decoder driver, such as SN7447 decoders driv- tion.— T. OToole, Transfer Parallel Information
display panel. Internal clock is not used. Key- ing RCA DR-2100 series low-voltage readouts. Without a Clock, EDN Magazine, Aug. 1, 1972,
board strobe is delayed 2 ms to allow time for All resistors are 220 ohms. Capacitors for G1B
p 59.
5 V
CMOS DRIVE FOR LCD — Seven-segment liquid

crystal display digit can be driven directly by
CD4054A, CD4055A, or CD4056A CMOS be-
5 -VOLT Rrn O
liquid cause these circuits contain internal level-shift-
LOGIC “Vy- CRYSTAL ing feature needed to convert 5-V input logic
SWINGS N rv CD4055A
[O— swings to 30-V peak AC signal required for driv-
ing dynamic-scattering LCD. — "COS/MOS Inte-
grated Circuits," RCA Solid State Division,
Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 629.
o— VDD
r R
MCI 4022 06 C
MC 14022
Octal
Counter/Divider
CE To
Q7
CE
V 3s Q0Q1
QO Q 1 Q6 Q7
Multiplexer
f System
( 1 /4) MCI P 16 1
401
1 2 3
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I4 5
nputs 6 7
MC3490P
Anode Drivers
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Outputs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4 kHz
Scan Oscillator
Cathode Blankin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
12 Digit Gas Discharge Display

Burroughs BR13251
Decimal Point a b c d e f g
1 3 4 5 6 7
Outputs 390 k
MC3491 330 K
5 V
Segment Drivers Current P rogramming '
Inputs
^ Decimal
— Point
Ih
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 1/2 W
Control
EN VDD a
RBI b
MC
- ' 7
1 N5267
14558
A B r
BCD d
BCD to V
SS
nputs o c Segment f
Decoder
D g
(810.05U F 200 V
12-DIGIT GAS-DISCHARGE— Display anodes pled to MC3491 segment drivers. Scan circuit is Counter output also controls system multi-
are referenced to ground and cathodes to -180 directly coupled to MC3490P anode drivers. plexer (not shown) to give synchronization of
V because number of digits in display is greater Digit scanning is derived from two cascaded
entire display system. — A. Pshaenich, "Inter-
than number of segment drivers. Positive-logic MC14022 octal counter/dividers. Required 12 se- face Considerations for Numeric Display Sys-
CMOS address circuits are powered by -10 V, quenced output pulses are achieved by reset- tems," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1975, AN-741, p
with Motorola MC14558 decoder outputs cou- ting counters with Q7 output of second counter.
23.
8-DIGIT LED DRIVE — National DM8863 8-digit

LED driver is used in conjunction with DM75491
and DM8861 drivers for driving eight common-
mode LED digits operating in multiplex mode.
Circuit also provides logic control for decimal
point. — C. Carinalli, "Driving 7-Segment LED
Displays with National Semiconductor Cir-
cuits," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
CA, 1974, AN-99, p 10.
gized, backplane and segment drive signals BCD inputs are generated from cascaded
4-DIGIT DIRECT-DRIVE LCD— Each digit of liq- have same phase and magnitude so there is no MC14518 dual BCD up counters. — A. Pshaenich,
uid crystal display has separate counter, latch, voltage across display. When segment is to be "Interface Considerations for Numeric Display
decoder, and driver. Excitation signal also feeds 741, p 5.
Systems," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-
energized, signals are 180° out of phase so
LCD backplane. When segment is to be deener- square-wave voltage is twice 1C supply value.
285
DISPLAY CIRCUITS
+ 5V
TWO-INPUT RED/GREEN LED— Uses Monsanto

MV5491 having red and green LEDs in same
housing, connected inversely in parallel so cur-
rent in one direction gives green and reverse
current gives red. Two different drivers are
used, SN75452 noninverting and SN75451 in-
verting. Each LED pair shows one color for cor-
rect polarity at its driver input and other color
for opposite polarity.— K. Powell, Novel Indi-
cator Circuit, Ham Radio, April 1977, p 60-63.
VDD
+6 V
P2
PI QO
P3 +6 V
AO
MCI 402 1 R 1
P4
8 Bit
_L_
BO P6
P5 Static
Shift
CO — Q0
(7) 100
DO
EO Register Q 1
FO P8 Q2 BCD to
C DS Q3 I 7-Segment
P/S
HO Latch/
k MCI 451 1
PI Driver R 7
p -j — wv —
LT BL LEr/
Decode
j
zr 100
A 1
MC14021
Q1 XJ
Q8
(8) MAN 4
P8 c DS QO
P/S
HI
Strobe In PI
(1/4) MC75491
R
MCI 4022
Q2 (2) MC75491
Quad MOS to
A2 Octal
BCD X LED Drivers
Counter
I nputs MCI 402 1 Divider
(1/4) MC75491
Q8
p8 c DS C CE
P/S
Q7
H 2
PI
Q3
| A3
— MCI 402 1 8-DIGIT MULTIPLEXED LED— CMOS multiplex-
ing technique uses recirculating memory. Eight
— Q8 BCD words are parallel-loaded by strobe pulse
into four MC14021 8-bit static shift registers. By
p8 C DS feeding output back to input, information is
P/S
H3
continually recirculated within each shift reg-
ister at clocked 3.5-kHz scan rate. Four serial
\ output lines are fed to MC14511 7-segment de-
coder/driver. 3.5-kHz scan oscillator also clocks
MC14022 octal counter/divider whose eight se-
f quential output pulses form digit-select control.
Common-cathode display is used. — A. Pshaen-
ich, "Interface Considerations for Numeric Dis-
AN-741,play pSystems,"15. Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975,
0.001 mF
286
ZERO SUPPRESSION— Simple CMOS circuit BCD TO 7 SEGMENT

BCD
DECODER
INPUT
using MC1401 1 quad two-input NAND gate and X * DON'T CARE
RBO FUNCTION
MC14558 1C provides zero suppression for mul- CODE PERFORMED RBI = RIPPLE
EN RBI
tiplexed displays in which scanning is left to LAMP TEST BLANKING
INPUT
right for leading-zero suppression and right to 0 0 X 0
BLANK SEGMENTS
left for trailing zeros. Article covers operation of 0 1 X 1 DISPLAY ZERO
1 1 RBO = RIPPLE
circuit. — J. J. Roy, Eliminate Excess Zeros in 0 1
BLANK SEGMENTS BLANKING
1 0 0 0 1-9 DISPLAYED
Multiplexed Displays, EON Magazine, Sept. 5, 1 X 1-9 OUTPUT
1
1975, p 77.
TIMING FOR ZERO SUPPRESSION CIRCUIT RBO
NEW BCD DATA TO 14658 INPUTS" BLANKING (EN)
RBI
A NO CAPACITOR
A 100 pF CAPACITOR
UNBLANK FF, Q
TIME WHEN
DISPLAY BLANKED
W Bd U
"FIRST AND SECOND DIGITS ARE "0" AND THIRD

IN EXAMPLE TIMING DIGIT IS NONZERO
"'XSD = MSD FOR LEADING ZERO SUPPRESSION XSD"*
XSD * LSD FOR TRAILING ZERO SUPPRESSION
* 15 V
Cl
0 1 (JF pulse obtained from two astable MVBRs. Dis-

6-DIGIT FLUORESCENT TRIODES— Uses two plished by turning on grid control transistors play digits can be packaged individually or in
sets of cascaded counters and decoders with Q1-Q3 with negative-going digit select outputs single envelope.— A. Pshaenich, "Interface Con-
series switching of positive voltage to anode of one MC14553. Timing for counters is derived siderations for Numeric Display Systems," Mo-
with MC14511 ICs. Digit scanning is accom- from MC14572 logic elements, with disable torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-741, p 9.
DISPLAY CIRCUITS
287
STROBING LED DISPLAY — Applies power in se-

quence to segments of display, so fast that eye
cannot detect flicker, to reduce drain on power
supply. Input of 1000 Hz can be taken from tim-
ing chain of circuit that is driving display. 7492
divide-by-12 counter gives scan frequency of
83.3 Hz for display. Binary output of 7492 is con-
verted to 1-in-10 output by 7441 decoder for se-
quential drive of 2N3904 PNP pass transistor
that grounds LED which is to be lighted.— W. K.
McKellips, Strobing Displays Is Cool, 73 Maga-
zine, Nov./Dec. 1975, p 49-50.
g f e d c b a TO SEGMENT LINES
MULTIPLEXING EIGHT DIGITS— Uses only one the 4 data input bits. Multiplexers and demul- ment code for driving segments of LEDs. For
7-segment driverfor eight digits of parallel BCD tiplexer are addressed by 7493 counter that is 74151 and 74155, pin 16 goes to +5 V and pin 8
data on eight-LED display that can use MAN 4 incremented at about 4 kHz by 555 oscillator. to ground. Pin 8 of 75451 goes to +5 V and pin
or DL764 7-segment LEDs. Power is supplied to IC1 1 is connected for three- to eight-line de- 4 to ground. Pin 5 of 7493 goes to +5 V and pin
only one digit at a time but is switched at high multiplexing. IC7-IC10 are peripheral interface 10 to ground. — J. Hogenson, Multiplex Your
enough rate so all digits appear to be on. Uses gates, each sinking up to 300 mA for its LED. Digital LED Displays, BYTE, March 1977, p 122-
one eight-channel 74151 multiplexer for each of 7448 decod er/driver converts BCD data to 7-seg- 126 and 128.
288
6 3 VAC
TWO MESSAGES WITH NIXIES— Circuit flashes
two messages alternately on same Burroughs
giant Nixie B7971 display. Lighted segments
needed on individual Nixies to form desired
wording are divided into three strings. Seg-
ments A are common to both sets of letters and
numbers. Segments B are those required with
A segments to form first message. Segments C
are those required with A segments to form sec-
ond message. Changeover from segments B to
C is done with switching transistors controlled
by 555 timer and 7476 or 7473 flip-flop. Decimal
or other punctuation is formed with NE2 neon
and 100K resistor wired in series between pin
13 of a Nixie and B or C. Article gives construc-
tion details. — J. Grimes, Put Your Name in
Lights, 73 Magazine, Nov. 1976, p 60-61.
5-DIGIT LED REAL TIME — Circuit provides forward current for display is about 40 mA. All
quad drivers. — A. Pshaenich, "Interface Consid-
strobing of LEDs so peak current and light out- like anode segments of common-cathode dis- erations for Numeric Display Systems," Moto-
put are greater for same average current. Peak plays are driven by emitter outputs of MC75491 rola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-741, p 13.
PWM BRIGHTNESS CONTROL— Single TTL 1C

combines functions of oscillator and modulator
to provide intensity control of solid-state dis-
play by pulse-width modulation. Fan-out of 10
is available from Q output, suitable for displays
such as Hewlett-Packard 7300 series, and
smaller fan-out is available from other Q ter-
minal.— C. Bartram, P.W.M. Oscillator to Vary
Display-Intensity, Wireless World, March 1976,
p 89.
each display digit can be varied from 10% (full through Q1, Q3, etc and turn on required 7400 Q3, etc can be ECG 123 or HEP S0002, while Q2,
on with strobing) to less than 1% (almost off). multiplex gate through Q2, Q4, etc. Outputs of Q4, etc can be any silicon PNP transistor. — B.
Circuit uses 7490 and 7442 as 1-of-10 multiplex 7447 are polarity-inverted by QA, QB, etc, which Hart, Current-Saver Counter Display, 73 Maga-
driver to strobe cathodes of display digits can be Sylvania ECG 159 rated at 200 mA. Q1, zine, June 1977, p 174-176.
- b
°l
"O B2
B3
BO
°2
°3 B4
B5
C 1 II II II II 1
*4 04 B6
B223N Bl :: BBBBB
-a XC
B7
03
SI-ABBREVIATION DISPLAY— Programmed

Signetics 8223 256-bit PROM is used as alpha-
meric display having five 7-segment digits con-
nected to form alphameric simulation of abbre-
viations for second, millisecond, microsecond,
hertz, kilohertz, and megahertz as SEC, SEC-3,
SEC-6, H2, H2 3, H2 6. Binary counter U3, 4-16
line decoder, and 5-digit parallel-connected
Hewlett-Packard display form simple multi- drives counter and sets scanning rate. Requires set it up. — J. W. Springer, Function/Units Indi-
plexer that addresses memory U4 one word at only one 5-V supply. Article gives truth table for cator Using LED Displays, Ham Radio, March
a time. External 1000-Hz square-wave oscillator memory and circuit for programmer required to 1977, p 58-63.
V? SN7413
OCTAL DISPLAY — Circuit provides display of 8- built around synchronously operated JK flip- gates and inverters. Oscillator multiplexing fre-
bitdata word in conventional octal form for con- flops provides digit and data selection. The two quency isabout 2 kHz.— R. D. Mount, Octal Dis-
venience inexperimentation with microproces- or three bits appropriate to each display are March play1977,
for Microprocessors,
p 41. Wireless World,
sors and small computers. Three-state counter steered to 7-segment decoder by wired-AND
15V
MULTIPLEXED BRIGHTNESS CONTROL— De-

veloped for use with single-chip digital clocks
in which several displays are multiplexed. Pro-
vides automatic brightness control by using
variable duty cycle and switching it on and off
in synchronism with display of time. Uses 555
timer in monostable mode, triggered by multi-
plex oscillator to determine off time of display.
When ambient light is bright, resistance of
0RP12 photocell is low and display is on most
of time. Set 470K pot to give low light output
without mistriggering under dark conditions.
Timer can also drive decimal point directly and
give matched brightness. — M. G. Martin, Au-
tomatic Display-Brightness Control, Wireless
World, April 1976, p 61.
Jj SOURCE
t; <+5v
TO ALL "0" LAMPS TO MATCH LAMPS OR LED’S
PENDULUM DISPLAY — Ten series rows of LEDs

or Christmas-tree lights mounted behind dif-
fused plastic are energized sequentially left to
right, then right to left by counter-driven drivers
to create illusion of swinging pendulum. Circuit
includes provision for pause at each change of
direction, as in actual pendulum of clock. Article =LARGE
PENDULUM
LAMPS
traces operation of circuit in detail. — E. A. Flynn,
Put a Pendulum in Your Electronic Grandfather
Clock, EDN Magazine, May 5, 1975, p 88 and 90.
292
D1 modern electronic circuits reference manual
1N914
LEDs can be Radio Shack 276-1805, and display

BCD DECODER — Drive for 7-segment common- using RS7404 hex inverter and four LEDs shows is 276-053. — F. M. Mims, "Integrated Circuit
anode digital display is provided by RS7447 BCD input in binary form for decimal digits 0-9. De- Projects, Vol. 6," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX,
to 7-segment decoder. Binary input indicator veloped for classroom demonstrations. Red
1977, p 42-52.
INPUTS u ii u o O O n
u- u. um /_/. um um /_/.
GAS DISCHARGE DISPLAY (BECKMAN SP 300 OR
SP 4001
b| H al H fl nl rtnl T
1 N41 48 1
BRIGHTNESS 820k
CONTROL
wv> — l
CATHODE 11
DRIVER 11
2!
/DI0NICS\
DISPLAY V Dl 300 /
-180V
SUPPLY
12.
l
11
•SP-400 SERIES ONLY
_1_7
MULTIPLEXING 7 DIGITS— Uses Motorola currents are maintained for gas-discharge dis-
MC3490 anode driver for active-high inputs play by Dionics D1-300 1C, to provide _18 constant
cathode driver is needed because all cathodes
(MC3494 for active-low inputs) to accept digit- brightness without using supply-voltage regu- are bused together — D. Sien, Multiplex Display
select signals from multiplex logic source and lation. For each digit added to display, equal Circuit Features Minimum Parts Count, EDN
drive display anodes directly. Constant cathode number of anode drivers is required. Only one Magazine, May 5, 1977, p 112.
NANOSECOND PULSE DETECTOR— Used to

provide visual indication of presence of a non-
repetitive digital pulse having microsecond or
nanosecond width. Bistable 1C transfers pulse
information from its data input to the Q output
on positive-going edge of clock pulse, to ener-
gize LED indicator. — P. V. Prior, Digital Pulse
Detector, Wireless World, March 1976, p 90.
IN9I4
TWO-COLOR LED — Dual LED D2 shows green
Dl
when normally off momentary switch SI is
moved to START and shows red when moved
to STOP. Latching circuit using two 7404 TTL
inverters serves as run and halt flip-flop and also
debounces switch. Momentary contact at
START toggles latch, biasing green LED. Dl
shorts R2, leaving R1 to limit forward current to
about 20 mA for green. R1 and R2 limit current
for Dl and brighter red LED to about 10 mA for
momentary contact at STOP. — E. W. Gray, LEDs
Light Up Your Logic, BYTE, Feb. 1976, p 54-57.
+ 40 V
5-DIGIT FLUORESCENT DIODES— Real-time nal scanner. Scanning rate is controlled by in- Pshaenich, "Interface Considerations for Nu-
drive for five-decade counter requires only three verters 4 and 5 of MC14572. Multiplexed BCD meric Display Systems," Motorola, Phoenix,
ICs. MC14534 contains five-decade ripple outputs go to MC14543 7-segment decoder AZ, 1975, AN-741, pi 0.
counter with output time multiplexed by inter- whose outputs drive fluorescent diodes. — A.
294
BINARY DEMO — Two sections of SN7400 quad

gate form low-frequency MVBR serving as
pulse source for SN7490 decade counter. Rate
is low enough so blinking of LED status indica-
tors in MVBR can be seen, as indication of pulse
generation. Similarly, LEDs of counter blink to
indicate counts of 8, 4, 2, and 1 from left to right,
with combinations of lights coming on to dis-
play binary values 0 to 15 before recycling. Ideal
for Science Fair exhibit.— A. MacLean. How Do
You Use ICs7, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1977, p 56-59.
2.7Vdc
PULSED LED — Circuit can generate peak cur-

rents above 1 A with pulse widths greater than
10 ms at repetition rates of 12 kHz with effi-
ciency better than 90%, for 100-mA current
drain from 2.5-V battery. Rise time of pulses is
0.2 ms. Can be used in low-light-level TV sys-
tems where high peak radiation gives better re-
solving power than constant illumination hav-
ing same average power. Also useful for LED
pilot lamps in battery-operated equipment and
as low-power strobe for studying mechanical
motions.— J. Dimitrios, Current-Pulse Genera-
tor for LED's, EDNIEEE Magazine, July 1, 1971,
p 51.
lH4i
n t \}}-
15
13 REED
MAGNETIC
(C) (B) (A)

14 SWITCHES
< <
LED WIND VANE — Ceramic magnet attached to

rotor closes magnetic reed switches positioned
at 45° intervals in circle around rotor. Eight wind U£ U
directions are represented as 0-7 in binary no-

tation, so 0 = NW, 1 = N, 2 = NE, 3 = E, 4 = SE,
5 = S, 6 = SW, and 7 = W. Since 0 requires no
switch, only seven switches are needed in roof-
top indicator and only four wires need be run to
binary decoder (wires A, B, C, and ground) driv- DIODE MATRIX -
ing LED readout in house. Transistors are
2N3641, and diodes in matrix used at vane lo-
cation are 1N914 or 1N4148 silicon.— W. L.
MacDowell, Digital Wind Direction Indicator, 73 6 6 6 -FOUR WIRE ROTOR
Magazine, Nov. 1974, p 40-42. CABLE

3VDIGIT MULTIPLEXED LCD— Uses MLC401

field-effect liquid crystal display, which is more
suitable for multiplexing than dynamic-scatter-
ing LCD. Counters, latches, multiplexer, and
scan circuits are all in MC14553 3-digit BCD
counter whose outputs feed MC14543 decoder
and driver for display. Excitation frequency of
100 Hz is derived from square-wave oscillator
G1-G2 having exactly 50% duty cycle. Scan fre-
quency is about 500 Hz, giving display refresh
rate of 170 Hz, which is well beyond detectable
flicker rate. — A. Pshaenich, "Interface Consid-
erations for Numeric Display Systems," Moto-
SWEEP
TIME
5.5-V DC
°0F
F
^4.
. R5
IC4
j
555 : iook
005
T
C2
-,5
4|TRIGGER
Q |
100- LED SOLID-STATE OSCILLOSCOPE— Flat 5. 5-V DC

S2
display of LEDs replaces cathode-ray tube of i/4 n
1 7400
oscilloscope. Suitable for classroom demon-
IC5
strations even though resolution is poor. Am- 6
plified input signal is fed to upper ends of all ten
vertical columns of LEDs. Under control of time
|14 1
base, scanner completes circuit at bottom of
each column in turn. Vertical columns are made
voltage-sensitive by resistors paralleling LEDs.
Gate circuit using section of 7400 provides trig- scanned by 7490 decade counter and 7441 de- F. M. Mims, "Electronic Circuitbook 5: LED Proj-
ON*
gering when desired. Voltage-sensitive bar- coder. Sweep rate of display is adjustable from ects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1976,
graph readouts formed by vertical columns are 1 to 20 vertical columns per second with R5. —
p 92-96.
296
+5V*
OPAMP DRIVES LED — LM301 A is used as open-
loop voltage comparator, with LED receiving
total source current of about 20 mA from
opamp. Input is TTL-compatible, with R,-R2 ref-
erence divider biasing opamp in center of TTL
output transition region. Circuit realizes full
open-loop speed of opamp since it is uncom-
pensated and its internal voltage amplifier
stages are kept out of saturation by clamping of
KO D2 and by inherent current-limiting action. Re-
sponse times for toggling LED are in microse-
cond range.— W. G. Jung, Poor Man's LED
Driver Is TTL Compatible, EDN Magazine, Feb.
15V 5, 1973, p 86.
INPUT:
IN914 T
LED ON * +5
A, to
operated
1.4 V < E^ <SV[~| reduce from
-10V < Eta < 1.4VJ L power dissipation

LED OFF
POSITIVE INPUT GIVES RED — Uses Monsanto

MV5491 dual LED having red and green light-
emitting diodes connected inversely in parallel,
so current in one direction gives green light and
reverse current gives red. Circuit uses single
SN75452 1C driver and one section of SN7404
hex inverter. High or positive input gives red in-
dication, while low input gives green. Current-
limiting resistors R1 and R2 have different val-
ues because voltage and current specifications
of parallel LEDs are different. Indicator appears
to change color as input changes. — K. Powell,
Novel Indicator Circuit, Ham Radio, April 1977,
p 60-63.
Hex Buffer/Drivers
sired character in response to pattern of Os and matrix is controlled by clock that drives binary rows of dots enabled by 1-out-of-8 decoder. —
Is on input lines A1-A6. Timing of sequential counter having row-selecting outputs A, B, and "Readout Displays/' Dialight, Brooklyn, NY,
scanning operation for seven horizontal rows of C. Outputs C1-C5 of ROM correspond to vertical 1978, Catalog SG745, p 24-26.
DISPLAY CIRCUITS
297
LED DIMMER — Intech/Function Modules A-

8402 is used in voltage-to-frequency mode to
provide controllable dimming of LED display by
varying frequency of blanking input to display
driver. Display is pulsed on and off rapidly; the
higher the duty cycle, the brighter the display.
At highest input voltage the converter is forced
out of linear region, making its mono remain on
continuously for brightest display.— P. Pinter
and D. Timm, Voltage-to-Frequency Convert-
ers— 1C Versions Perform Accurate Data Con-
version (and Much More) at Low Cost, EDN
Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977, p 153-157.
.5 A
GIANT-NIXIE SIGN — Simple power supply

drives any desired number of alphameric Nixie
characters each 2'k inches high to form illumi-
nated house numbers, "ON THE AIR" sign for to pin 13 of each Nixie, and connect to point Y tions to segments. Diode must handle AC line
amateur station, or "BAR IS CLOSED" sign for (-150 V) each segment to be lighted. Sign can voltage. — J. Grimes, Display Yourself in a Big
party room. Connect 3.3K resistorfrom +150 V be changed at any time by resoldering connec- Way, 73 Magazine, Nov./Dec. 1975, p 186-188.
6-DIGIT FOUR-FUNCTION— National MM5777 keyboard encoding and key debouncing cir- indicator. Leading and trailing zero suppression
calculator chip requires only keyboard, cuits, along with all clock and timing genera- 8-89.
is included— "MOS/LSI Databook," National
NSA1161 LED display, DS8977 digit driver, and tors. LED segments can be driven directly, with- Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 8-84-
9-V battery to provide add, subtract, multiply, out multiplexing. Seventh digit position is used
and divide functions. Calculator chip includes for negative sign of 6-digit number and as error
298
STROBING LED DISPLAY — Sequential strobing

of individual LED displays, at rate fast enough
to eliminate flicker (about 10% duty cycle), cuts
power requirements of LEDs and eliminates
ANODE
GIT need for power-wasting resistors in series with
digit segments. Circuit uses 7492 binary counter
connected to divide by 10, continuously clocked
by 1000-Hz signal from external counter time
ANODE 2
DIGIT base. Each of the 10 counter states is decoded
by 7442 decoder for use in turning on PNP
switch transistor connected in series with
anode of each 7-segment LED digit. Digits are
thus turned on for 10% of time at 100-Hz rate —
B. Hart, Current-Saver Counter Display, 73 Mag-
azine, June 1977, p 174-176.
*5V ♦sv
POSITIVE INPUT GIVES GREEN— High or posi-

tive input to circuit gives green indication in
Monsanto MV5491 dual red/green LED, and low
input gives red. Circuit uses single SN75452 1C
driver and one section of SN7404 hex
inverter. — K. Powell, Novel Indicator Circuit,
CHAPTER 26
Fiber-Optic Circuits
Includes LED modulators and photodiode or phototransistor receivers for
single- or multiple-fiber data links handling audio, data, and teleprinter
signals. Circuits are also given for infrared receivers and transmitters, high-
voltage isolator links, laser-diode modulator, Manchester-code demodulator,
and fiber light-transmission checker.
DATA COUPLER WITH ISOLATION— Length of

fiber or polystyrene rod determines amount of
voltage isolation provided between digital or
analog signal input and Fairchild FPT 100 pho-
todetector driving Optical Electronics 9720
opamp having 100-mA output for driving ca-
bles, relays, or loudspeakers. LED can be Mon-
santo MV50 handling up to 200 mA. Output of
opamp is zero for no light. Pulse-duration mod-
ulation should be used for transmission of an-
alog data. — "High Voltage Optically Isolated
Data Coupler," Optical Electronics, Tucson, AZ,
Application Tip 10266.
SW - 20 MHz
25 MHz
24-MEGABIT DATA LINK— High data-rate ca- printer. Preamp design compensates for noise shown performed acceptably with 40-foot
pability for square-wave pulses is achieved by over limited frequency range, giving uniform SI cable. — 0. E. Marvel and J. C. Freeborn, A Little
increasing complexity of receiverfeeding digital N ratio to about 20 MHz. With demonstration Hands-On Experience Illuminates Fiber-Optic
output to microprocessor from remote tele- setup, visible-spectrum LED and photodetector Links, EDN Magazine, Nov. 5, 1977, p 71-75.
299
300
?N 3906
Q2
connected as shown. For CMOS operation, re-

FIBER-OPTIC TRANSMITTER— Will handle NRZ move J1 and transfer J2 and J3 to alternate po-
data rates to 10 megabits or square waves to 5 sitions for connecting to U2. Choice of LED de-
MHz. Input is TTL- or CMOS-compatible depends on system length and desired data rate.
pending on circuit selected. Transmitter draws Power supply can be HP6218A or equivalent. DC
only 150 mA from 5-V supply for TTL or from 5- voltages shown are for TTL interface, with
15 V supply for CMOS. Choose R1 to give LED upper valuefor LED on at 50 mA and lower value
drive current for proper operation of system. for LED off. — "Basic Experimental Fiber Optic
For TTL operation, jumpers J1, J2, and J3 are Systems," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1978.
pulse width is at least 10 /xs. A2 acts as RC in-

LIGHT TRANSMISSION CHECKER— Phototran- ing condition of long fibers if light intensity of tegrator, giving voltage proportional to total
sistor and quad opamp serve as total-energy source is held constant. Will also detect light energy received. A„ provides comparison
detector of pulsed-light signals propagated changes in light intensity and changes in pulse to fixed level. — E. W. Rummel, Low-Level-Light
through fiber-optic cable of communication width. Circuit gives linear response to light lev- Detector Checks Optical Cables Fast, Electron-
system. Can be used for checking and compar- els from 100 to 10,000 ergs/cm2 if minimum ics, April 27, 1978, p 148 and 150.
FIBER-OPTIC CIRCUITS 301
FIBER-OPTIC RECEIVER— Uses MF0D100 PIN

photodiode as optical detector for handling me-
gabit data rates. Minimum photocurrent re-
quired to drive LF357 opamp U1 is 250 nA. Volt-
age comparator U2 inverts output of U1 and
provides standard TTL output. For CMOS out-
put, quad two-input NANO gate U3 is wired into
circuit, with jumper J1 connected from U3 out-
put to output terminal of receiver. Adjust R1 to
give accurate reproduction of 1-MHz square
wave with 50% duty cycle at receiver output. —
"Basic Experimental Fiber Optic Systems," Mo-
torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1978.
LASER-DIODE SOURCE— With transistor

switching circuit shown for RCA SG2007 laser
diode, pulses as short as 10 ns are possible at
repetition rates above 100 kHz. Used in optical
communication system in which fiber bundle or
single fiber is attached directly to laser pellet. —
J. T. O'Brien, Laser Diodes Provide High Power
for High-Speed Communications Systems,
Electronics, Aug. 5, 1976, p 94-96.
50-kHz FM OPTICAL RECEIVER— Designed for

pulse-rate modulation system in which trans- center frequency of 50 kHz. L14G2 GE photo of original audio. Based on circuit in "General
mitter varies pulse rate of modulated light transistor converts modulated optical light to Electric Opto-Electronics Manual." — I. Math,
beam in optical-fiber cable above and below RF signal for demodulation and reconstruction Math's Notes, CQ, July 1977, p 67-68 and 90.
1/IO/IOO-KILOBIT FIBER-OPTIC RECEIVER—

Choice of input device determines operating
speed of receiver. MC3405 contains two
opamps and two comparators, permitting use
as two-channel receiver. Table gives pin con-
nections for each channel. — "Basic Experimen-
tal Fiber Optic Systems," Motorola, Phoenix,
A Z, 1978.
50-kHz FM OPTICAL TRANSMITTER— Uses

pulse-rate modulation system with center fre-
quency of 50 kHz. Audio fed into transmitter
varies pulse rate, for driving LED coupled to op-
tical fiber. Phototransistor at other end of fiber
receives and demodulates light signal for recon-
struction ofaudio. — I. Math, Math's Notes, CQ,
July 1977, p 67-68 and 90.
+5V
BW 20 MHz 2 GHz 10 MHz
-25V
DIGITAL
INPUT
10-MEGABIT LINK — Transmitter and receiver for transmitting data at 10-megabit rate. Re- On Experience Illuminates Fiber-Optic Links,
for fiber-optic data link between teleprinter and ceiver input requires C3808 PIN photodiode.— EDN Magazine, Nov. 5, 1977, p 71-75.
microprocessor utilize wide bandwidth of cable O. E. Marvel and J. C. Freeborn, A Little Hands-
FIBER-OPTIC CIRCUITS 303
1-GHz MANCHESTER DECODER— Use of ECL

flip-flop with toggle rates above 1 GHz makes 20-KILOBIT FIBER-OPTIC RECEIVER— Photo-
decoding of bit rates approaching gigabit transistor driving three-transistor amplifier pro-
speeds feasible. Article gives step-by-step de- vides TTL output for data rates up to 20 kilo-
sign procedure for 48-Mb telemetry application bits.— "Basic Experimental Fiber Optic Sys-
using PCM over single optical-fiber cable. — B. tems," Motorola, Phoenix, A2, 1978.
R. Jarrett, Could You Design a High-Speed Man-
chester-Code Demodulator?, EDN Magazine,
Aug. 20, 1974, p 75-80.
!5 Vdc 16 Vdc
IR DETECTOR — Photodiode transforms light-

signal output of fiber-optic cable to electric sig-
nal. Spectral response of detector closely
matches that of IR-emitting diode at other end
of cable, for maximum system efficiency. Rise
and fall times of detector can be less than 35 ns
when properly biased and loaded by receiver
circuit. Developed by Augat, Inc., Attleboro,
MA, as part of fiber-optic evaluation kit for TTL
applications. — Fiber-Optic Kit Allows Engineer-
ing Evaluation of Complete Interconnection
System, Computer Design, Nov. 1977, p27 and
30.
HA-2625-5
OP AMPS NE529
COMPARATOR
(HARRIS) (SIGNETICS)
SHIFT
CLOCK
95HOO
MANCHESTER-CODE DEMODULATOR— Digi- system used over single optical-fiber channel. currence restriction. Article gives step-by-step
tal approach using ECL provides maximum Undesired transitions in input data are masked design procedure, waveforms, and excitation
speed, is self-synchronizing for alternate bit- by creating strobe. Approach recognizes dis- table. — B. R. Jarrett, Could You Design a High-
pairs, and has minimum complexity. Developed tinction between identical sequences that Speed Manchester-Code Demodulator?, EDN
for optically coupled 25-channel PCM telemetry would give some output except for time-of-oc- Magazine, Aug. 20, 1974, p 75-80.
304
1-MHz LED PULSE MODULATION— Circuit pro-

vides required low driving-point impedance for
fast tum-on of gallium arsenide phosphide LED
used as source for high-speed pulse modulation
of fiber-optic or otherlight beam. Q, supplies DC
level and modulation information to emitter-
follower output stage Q3. Output current is
sensed and limited to about 30 mA by Q2. Turn-
on time for full brightness is 12 ns. — G.
Schmidt, LED Modulator, EDNIEEE Magazine ,
June 15, 1971, p 57.
BW * 20 MHz 2.0 GHi

20 kHz
TTY LINK FOR MICROPROCESSOR— Demon-

stration circuit illustrates use of fiber-optic
cable with low-cost components for relatively
narrow-band application, to provide feed from
remote teleprinter to microprocessor. — O. E.
Marvel and J. C. Freeborn, A Little Hands-On
Experience Illuminates Fiber-Optic Links, EDN
Magazine, Nov. 5, 1977, p 71-75.
1330
CHAPTER 27
Filter Circuits — Active
Includes low-pass, high-pass, bandpass, notch, state-variable (2 to 4

functions), tracking, and equalizing filters covering from 1 Hz to limits of
audio spectrum, along with gyrator, Q multiplier and variable-Q circuits,
crossover networks for loudspeakers, and RF circuits providing frequency
emphasis.
♦ non-polarized polycarbonate
eight MOSFETs, each switched on in turn by
TRACKING LINE-FREQUENCY FILTER— Im- British 50-Hz mains frequency, circuit can read- consecutive input clock pulses. Circuit details,
provements incommutating RC network filter ily be adapted for 60-Hz rejection. Operation in- design equations, and performance graphs are
extend dynamic range without sacrificing sig- volves commutating 16 capacitors electroni- given. Three-position switch gives choice of fil-
nal bandwidth, for reducing interference at fun- cally at 16 times line frequency. Article gives ter characteristics. — K. F. Knott and L. Un-
damental ofpower-line frequency and harmon- one method of doing this, by driving two 8-way sworth. Mains Rejection Tracking Filter, Wire-
ics up to fifth. Although values in circuit are for multiplexers alternately. Each multiplexer has less World, Oct. 1974, p 375-379.
305
306
10k
10-kHz VARIABLE-Q — Second-order state-vari-

able filter having center frequency of 10 kHz
uses all four sections of OP-11FY quad opamp.
Center frequency can be tuned by varying 1.6K
feedback resistors or by changing 0.01-^F feed-
back capacitors. Value of feedback resistor for
opamp D determines Q of filter, for adjusting
circuit bandwidth or damping. For higher-fre-
quency operation, use high-speed opamps such
as OP-15 or OP-16. — D. Van Dalsen, Need an
Active Filter? Try These Design Aids, EDN Mag-
azine, Nov. 5, 1978, p 105-110.
15—3500 Hz BANDPASS — Five-pole telecom- is only 4.8 mA for ±15 V supply. — "Precision
munication filter using eight Precision Mono- Low Input Current Op Amp," Precision Mono-
iithics OP-08 opamps provides better than 30- lithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1978, OP-08, p 6.
dB attenuation in stop band. Total supply drain
FILTER C IR C U IT S — A C T I VE 307
f T ~ 20 kHz
10-20 kHz BANDPASS— Two CD4047A low-

pass filters, one connected for 10-kHz cutoff and
other for 20-kHz cutoff, drive CD4013A flip-flop.
If output of filter 2 is delayed by C, flip-flop
clocks high only when input pulse frequency
exceeds 10-kHz cutoff of filter 2. Waveforms
show performance when input signal is swept
through passband. — "CQS/MOS Integrated Cir-
cuits," RCA Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ,
1977, p 619.
fj ~'0 kH*
v, JTrLTLrLTLjmruiJ^^
01 JUUUUUUUUMT^^
-j~mnnnnj
> 0-
DELAY
I
{ nnn
1
I
nr
6 1 I
>ut I LTULIUI
1-kHz STATE-VARIABLE WITH Q OF 10— Use of

all four sections of Harris HA-4602/4605 quad
opamp gives four types of 1-kHz second-order
filtering simultaneously. Pot adjustments per-
mit matching of various RC products allowing
for noninteractive adjustment of Q and center
frequency. — "Linear & Data Acquisition Prod-
ucts," Harris Semiconductor, Melbourne, FL,
Vol. 1, 1977, p 2-84.
2 POLt FILTER
5-kHz SERIES-SWITCHED BANDPASS— N-path

filter having N of 4, Q of 500, and voltage gain
of 2 uses DG509 four-channel CMOS differential
multiplexer having necessary pairs of analog
switches and decode logic. Dual D flip-flop gen-
erates 2-bit binary sequence from 20-kHz clock
signal. Bandwidth is about 10 Hz for 3 dB down,
centered on 5 kHz. — "Analog Switches and
Their Applications," Siliconix, Santa Clara, CA,
1976, p 5-15-5-17.
v
CLOCK
v CD4IIH
N-PATH FILTER
6.8k&
700-Hz STATE-VARIABLE — Provides voltage

gain at center frequency of 100 (40 dB) and Q of
50. Used when simultaneous low-pass, high-
pass, and bandpass output responses are re-
quired. Cutoff frequency of low-pass and high-
pass responses is equal to center frequency of
bandpass response. Opamps can be 741 . Based
on use of 5% resistors. — H. M. Berlin, "Design
of Active Filters, with Experiments," Howard W.
3.3 ktt
1.5-kHz NOTCH — Unity-gain state-variable fil-

ter consists of low-pass and high-pass sections
combined with two-input summing amplifier to
give notch response for suppression of 1.5-kHz
signals. Opamps can be 741.— H. M. Berlin,
"Design of Active Filters, with Experiments,"
189.
10-kH GYRATOR — Active filter circuit uses two

sections of C A3 060 three-opamp array as gyra-
tor that makes 3-/xF capacitor function as float-
ing 10-kilohenry inductor across terminals A
and B. Q of inductor is 13. 100K pot tunes in-
ductor by changing gyration resistance. — "Lin-
ear Integrated Circuits and MOS/FET's RCA
Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ, ," 1977, p
152.
FILTER CIRCUITS-ACTIVE
.22 p.F
309
60-Hz NOTCH FILTER — Design is based on pass-

band gain of 3 and Q of 6. Resistors can be 5%.
Opamps can be 741 . Notch response is obtained
by subtracting output signal of bandpass filter
from its input signal with R6. — H. M. Berlin,
Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 155.
HP 12d8/octQV*
THREE-LOUDSPEAKER CROSSOVERS— Active sired level and gives choice of slopes in any part BCY70, BCY71, BCY72, or 2N3906. Article also
filter network spirts AF input into three fre- of frequency band. Article gives design equa- gives circuit of suitable 30-W amplifier. — D. C.
quency bands each feeding separate 30-W tions and construction details. NPN transistors Read, Active Filter Crossover Networks, Wire-
power amplifier. Design allows adjustment of can be BC107 or2N3904; PNP transistors can be less World, Dec. 1973, p 574-576.
any part of frequency characteristic to any de-
10-Hz HIGH-PASS — Equiterminated Butter-

worth high-pass ladder filter has corner fre-
quency of 10 Hz and output impedance level of
16K. Opamps are matched pair in single ML747
package. Article covers design procedure based
on use of generalized impedance converters
and gives frequency response curve. — L. T. Bur-
ton and D. T releaven. Active Filter Design Using
Generalized Impedance Converters, EDN Mag-
azine, Feb. 5, 1973, p 68-75.
MV MV
Inf 2109 2109 Inf Sweep
I nput
10-kHz VOLTAGE-TUNED— High-Q circuit
using Optical Electronics 9831 opamp has sharp
resonance, as required for analysis of spectrum
of incoming signal. Reverse-biased silicon junc-
tions serve as voltage variable capacitors for
sweeping center frequency over 3:1 range. Val-
ues shown for three resistors in twin-T network
give center frequency of 10 kHz. — "Voltage
Tuned High-Q Filter," Optical Electronics, Tuc-
son, AZ, Application Tip 10207. Ou tpu t
out o
180 Hz O 2
110 Hz O 3
ACTIVE CW FILTER — Modifications made on

MFJ Enterprises CWF-2 active audio filter per-
mit maximum flexibility. Circuit provides fixed
bandwidth of 180 or 1 10 Hz centered on 750 Hz,
or optional variable bandwidth for which center
frequency can be adjusted in range of 280 to
1590 Hz. — H. M. Berlin, Increased Flexibility for
the MFJ Enterprises CW Filters, Ham Radio ,
Dec. 1976, p 58-60.
FILTER CIRCUITS — ACTIVE
311
TWO-STAGE CW — Uses diode threshold detec- ter is sharp (16 Hz), and keyed waveform is VARIABLE Q FOR CW — Fixed-frequency active
tor between stages to prevent weak undesired good. Gain is near unity, and frequency and Q filter gives slowly rising and falling keyed wave-
signals from passing through until CW signal of are both fixed. — A. F. Stahler, An Experimental form with good slope considering narrowness
desired frequency is present, so as to provide Comparison of CW Audio Filters, 73 Magazine, of bandwidth, which is 75 Hz at 3 dB down. Ad-
quiet tuning between signals. Bandwidth of fil- July 1973, p 65-70. justing Q with IK pot changes bandwidth. — A.
F. Stahler, An Experimental Comparison of CW
Audio Filters, 73 Magazine, July 1973, p 65-70.
-20 V
NARROW BANDPASS FOR SPEECH— Simple Input is plugged into phone jack of receiver, and
audio filter provides about 20-dB gain at band- headphones are connected to output. Transis- 60-Hz ADJUSTABLE-Q NOTCH— Connection
width of 80 Hz. Bandwidth can be narrowed to tors are SK3004 or equivalent. — Circuits, 73 shown for two SN72310 voltage-follower
limits of unintelligibility by adjusting 10K pot. Magazine, Jan. 1974, p 125.
opamps provides attenuation of 60-Hz power-
line frequency. Setting of R4 determines Q of
filter. — 'The Linear and Interface Circuits Data
Book for Design Engineers," Texas Instruments,
Dallas, TX, 1973, p 4-39.
LEVEL SET
(SEE TEXT)
IIM)
no kn
POINT
ACTIVE AF FOR SSB AND CW— Uses Kinetic frequency and give choice of Q. High-imped- 100-Hz HIGH-PASS — Metallized polycarbonate
Technology FX-60 1C (culled from FS-60, FS-65, ance buffer Q1 provides nominal gain while iso- capacitors are required for good temperature
and FS-61 production by manufacturer) as 2.5- lating filter from previous receiver stages. stability in high-pass active filter using voltage-
kHz tunable detected-audio low-pass filter for Opamp U2 boosts overall gain. — M. A. Chap- follower opamp. Cutoff frequency is 100 Hz. —
SSB. Provides inexpensive hybrid active filter man, Audio Filters for Improving SSB and CW 'The Linear and Interface Circuits Data Book for
using multiloop negative feedback for low-pass Reception, Ham Radio, Nov. 1976, p 18-23. Design Engineers," Texas Instruments, Dallas,
transfer functions. External resistors tune filter
TX, 1973, p 4-39.
CONTROLLABLE 12 dB PER OCTAVE ROLL-

OFF— Frequency at which rolloff starts can be
set in range between 15 and 15,000 Hz by ex-
ternal voltage or current. If only manual control
of frequency is required, short points X and Y
and connect them to wiper of 10,000-ohm log-
arithmic potentiometer that is positioned be-
tween -12 V and ground. — T. Orr, Voltage/Cur-
rent Controlled Filter, Wireless World, Nov.
1976, p 63.
QUADRATURE OSCILLATOR — Addition of quadrature oscillator. — Y. J. Wong, Design a Oscillator, EDN Magazine, Sept. 20, 1978, p
diode limiter and positive-feedback resistor to Low Cost, Low-Distortion, Precision Sine-Wave 107-113.
UAF41 universal active filter gives precision
FILTER CIRCUITS-ACTIVE 313
10k
480-kHz LOW-PASS — Butterworth low-pass ac-

tive filter uses pair of dual opamps with external
resistors and capacitors to give corner fre-
quency of 480 kHz and output impedance level
of IK. Article presents design procedure in de-
tail and gives frequency response curve. — L. T.
Burton and D. Treleaven, Active Filter Design
Using Generalized Impedance Converters, EDN
Magazine, Feb. 5, 1973, p 68-75.
.0068 ii F
8.2 kli
300-3000 Hz WIDEBAND — Used in voice com-

munication systems where signals below 300
Hz and above 3000 Hz must be rejected . Second -
order Butterworth stopband responses are
achieved by combining low-pass and high-pass
sections of equal-component voltage-con-
trolled voltage-source filters. Overall passband
gain is 8 dB. Opamps can be 741. — H. M. Berlin,
151.
-IF
(300 Hz)
(3,000 HZ)
106k
970 pF
“VVvA—
100 pF
0.033m F 4.15nF
H( —
1.01k 34.1k 18 dB PER OCTAVE EMPHASIS— Circuit shown
-vW vW <
H(— r— 1(— is result of design procedure given in article for
active filter that provides -O frequency emphasis
at rate of 18 dB per octave between 5 and 15
0.032^ F
kHz. Emphasis does not exceed 40 dB at 20 kHz.
Design equations include parameters for
closed-loop gain of opamp. Scale factor is ap-
2.94k
23.4k plied to input and feedback networks individ-
O— WA-
ually after design, to give reasonable compo-
3>
nent values. — B. Brandstedt, Tailor the
Response of Your Active Filters, EDN Magazine,
196 March 5, 1973, p 68-72.
! 3.03nF
150-Hz HIGH-PASS — Circuit includes variable

high-frequency source supplying triangle-wave
input to filter for demonstrating high-pass ac-
tion. Iflong supply leads cause oscillation, con-
nect 0.1-/(F capacitors between ground and
supply pins 4 and 7 as shown.— F. M. Mims,
"Integrated Circuit Projects, Vol. 4," Radio
Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 87-94.
750-Hz SIXTH-ORDER BANDPASS— Provides

passband gain of 6 (15.6 dB) and Q of 8.53 by
cascading three identical second-order filter
sections. Each section uses multiple
feedback. — H. M. Berlin, "Design of Active Fil-
ters, with Experiments," Howard W. Sams. In-
dianapolis, IN, 1977, p 147-148.
FILTER
2-20 kHz SELF-TUNING BANDPASS— Center

frequency of filter is automatically adjusted to
track signal frequency, for optimum noise rejec-
tion when input frequency varies over wide
range as it does with many types of vibrating
transducers. Requires no reference frequency
and no internal oscillator or synchronizing cir-
cuits. Frequency range can be extended in de-
cade steps by capacitor switching. When filter
is not tuned to input frequency, phase shift is
not 180° and phase detector applies error signal
to gate of FET to control its drain-source resis-
tance. Phase detector A4-A5-CR2-CR3 and FET
form part of negative-feedback loop around fil-
ter, so error in phase changes resistance of FET
and thereby retunes filter. Article gives design
equations, operational details, and waveforms
at various points in circuit.— G. J. Deboo and R.
C. Hedlund, Automatically Tuned Filter Uses 1C
Operational Amplifiers, EDNIEEE Magazine,
Feb. 1, 1972, p 38-41.
3-kHz NOTCH — Uses three sections of National

LM324 quad opamp to provide fixed center fre-
quency of 3 kHz for notch. Single supply can be
5-25 V. — P. A. Lovelock, Discrete Operational
Amplifier Active Filters, Ham Radio , Feb. 1978,
p 70-73.
iok
STATE-VARIABLE DESIGN — Universal filter

network using three opamps can provide low-
pass, high-pass, or bandpass audio responsefor
CW and SSB reception. Filter uses one summing
block U1, two identical integrators, U2 and U3,
and one damping network. Cutoff frequencies
are same as center frequency for bandpass re-
sponse. Article gives design equations and
graph for choosing values to give optimum per-
formance for type of response desired. For
unity-gain second-order Butterworth filter with
low-pass or high-pass cutoff of 700 Hz, R is 6800
ohms and C is 0.033 /jlF. Q must be fixed at 0.707
and Ra must equal 1.12 x RB. Thus, if RB is 2700
ohms, Ra should be 3000.— H. M. Berlin, The
State-Variable Filter, QST, April 1978, p 14-16.
3:1 TRACKING FILTER — Connection shown for

Exar XR-215 PLL 1C tracks input signal over 3:1
frequency range centered on free-running fre-
quency of VCO. Tracking range is maximum
when pin 10 is open. R0 is typically between IK
and 4K. C, is between 30 and 300 times C0 where
timing capacitor C0 depends on center fre-
quency. System can also be operated as linear
discriminator or analog frequency meter cov-
ering same 3:1 change of input frequency. RF
can be 36K. — "Phase-Locked Loop Data Book,"
p 21-28.
COUPLING CAPACITOR
BYPASS CAPACITOR
316
20-kHz BANDPASS — Provides bandwidth of

2000 Hz and midband gain of 1 for applications
1-kHz THREE-FUNCTION — Three-function value series resistors for noninverting inputs to requiring narrow-bandwidth bandpass active
fixed-frequency active filter uses three sections limit bias current to between 10 and 100 /iA. —
filter. Design procedure is given. — "Audio
of RCA CA3401E, Motorola MC3301P, or Na- P. A. Lovelock, Discrete Operational Amplifier Handbook,” National Semiconductor, Santa
tional LM3900N quad opamp. Circuit uses high- Active Filters, Ham Radio, Feb. 1978, p 70-73. Clara, CA, 1977, p 2-52-2-53.
1-kHz MULTIPLE-FEEDBACK BANDPASS— Sin-

gle 741 or equivalent opamp is suitable for ap-
1-Hz STATE-VARIABLE FILTER — Universal filter off, replace 10-megohm resistors with 10K. — D. plications where bandwidth is less than 100%.
has simultaneous low-pass, bandpass, high- Lancaster, "CMOS Cookbook." Howard W. Gain is fixed at -2Q2, where Q is reciprocal of
pass, and notch outputs all with cutoff fre- Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 343-344. damping d and ranges from less than 1 to above
quency of 1 Hz. To scale circuit up to 1-kHz cut- 100. Q is changed by varying ratio of input and
feedback resistors while keeping their product
constant. For Q of 3, feedback resistor should be
36 times value of input resistor. — D. Lancaster,
15 "Active-Filter Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, In-
FILTER 10
12 3 dianapolis, IN, 1975, p 150-154.
IN 10k 2
o 17
10n
FREQUENCY-TRACKING BANDPASS— High-Q active filter with 5898 analog multipliers. 9813
active bandpass filter automatically tracks opamp connected as Schmitt trigger is main 50-Hz WIEN-BRIDGE NOTCH FILTER— Uses
input signal frequency over 10:1 range in pres- element of scanning circuit. Frequency range is opamp in circuit having essentially zero output
ence of noise. When signal goes outside track- 160 to 1600 Hz, and FM bandwidth of error-volt- impedance, making additional buffer amplifier
ing range, circuit sweeps between low- and unnecessary. Article gives design theory and
age output is 20 Hz. — "Frequency Tracking Ac-
high-frequency limits until suitable signal reap- tive Filter," Optical Electronics, Tucson, A2, Ap- covers many other types of notch filters.— Y.
pears. Circuit is basically voltage-controlled plication Tip 10270. Nezer, Active Notch Filters, Wireless World,
bandpass filter using Optical Electronics 3704 July 1975, p 307-311.
100k 0. 15. F
-W, a
R1
-O OUTPUT
L0 PASS
DC LEVEL SHIFTER FOR AF — Circuit using Op-
(DC) tical Electronics 9803 opamps separates AF
input signal into two outputs. Low-pass output
Cl contains DC to 10 Hz, and high-pass output has
frequency content above 10 Hz to upper fre-
quency limit approaching 10 MHz for opamp
0. 15'MF used. Dynamic output impedance of both out-
puts is less than 1 ohm. Both outputs have DC
continuity. DC output of high-pass terminal is
-O OUTPUT equal to offset voltage of integrator. DC output
HI PASS
of low-pass terminal equals DC input plus offset
voltages of both opamps. — "Automatic DC
INPUT
Level Shifter," Optical Electronics, Tucson, A Z,
>1 0k
o-
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED BANDPASS— Two

Optical Electronics 5898 four-quadrant analog
multipliers and 3704 state-variable active filter
permit use of voltage control for changing filter
characteristics remotely without having noise
pickup problems on control lines. Analog mul-
tipliers serve as variable-gain blocks that
change current levels in resistors and in effect
change resistor values. Circuit has linear rela-
tionship of frequency to control voltage, con-
stant gain and Q with frequency, and good tem-
perature stability.— "Voltage-Controlled Active
Bandpass Filter," Optical Electronics, Tucson,
A2, Application Tip 10269.
PASS/REJECT TUNABLE NOTCH— Full rotation

of ganged tuning control R4 tunes circuit from
100 Hz to 10 kHz, with position of switch SI de-
termining whether circuit passes or rejects fre-
quency to which it is tuned. Maximum selectiv-
ity, corresponding to maximum height of pass
curve or depth of reject curve and minimum
width of either curve, is obtained when R9 is set
for maximum gain in FET Q4. If R9 is advanced
far enough with switch set to pass, circuit will
oscillate and give sine-wave output attuned fre-
quency.— R. P. Turner, "FET Circuits," Howard
W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 71-
73.
318
MODERN ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS REFERENCE -o eoi
MANUAL
* 1.8k “C 0.02 p
Ik Ik >
:r ;
2 /7 3.6k 2/7 3.6k
ein O-
' C/2
e,(s)OH 0.01 pF C/2pF
0.01
10-kHz LOW-PASS SALLEN-

**fo.<J?2^ 0 01 1KEY—
kF Article gives
— If—. — u— .
design equations from which values of com-
ponents were obtained. Critical damping (Q =
R,
0.71) is provided. Frequency can be tuned over
range of two decades by changing resistor val-
ues simultaneously. Opamp can be one section
of OP-11FY. For equivalent high-pass filter,
c-- 'notch
Cl transpose positions of resistors and capacitors.
Gain is unity. — D. Van Dalsen, Need an Active
NOTCH
DEPTH
Q Filter? Try These Design Aids, EDN Magazine,
75 kfl 0.001 uF 9.8 4.22 kHz
62 dB
Nov. 5, 1978, p 105-110.
network R,C, that determ ines circuit Q. Variable
660 pF 18.4 4.22 kHz 62.7 dB
150 wi
Q feature is controlled by single passive RC net-
360 pF 62 dB
work. Center frequency of notch filter is about
220 kn 25.0 4.22 kHz
4.22 kHz. Table gives values of R, and C, for
three different values of Q. — H. T. Russell,
4.22-kHz NOTCH — Circuit consists of positive Notch Filter Has Passive Q Control, EDNIEEE
unity-gain opamp, RC twin-T network, and T Magazine, July 1, 1971, p 43 and 45.
10-Hz HIGH-PASS UNITY-GAIN— Low cutoff tive opamps can be 1556 and 8007 — W. G.
frequency is 10 Hz in active filter using opamp Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard W.
as voltage-controlled voltage source. Alterna- Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 331-333.
1 Hz WITH 0.1-Hz BANDWIDTH— Three pots

provides easy trimming to precise values de-
sired. Use R2A to trim bandwidth to exactly
0.100 Hz. Use R1A to trim gain to exactly 10.00.
Finally, trim center frequency to exactly
1 ,000Hz. Adjustments are almost perfectly non-
interacting imade
f in sequence given. — R. A.
Pease, "Band-Pass Active Filter with Easy Trim
for Center Frequency," Teledyne Philbrick, Ded-
ham, MA, 1972, Applications Bulletin 4.
100-Hz BANDPASS SALLEN-KEY— Uses one

section of OP-11FY quad opamp or equivalent
in circuit having Q of 4.7 and providing closed-
1-kHz VARIABLE-GAIN STATE-VARIABLE— opamp; for bandpass, take output from second loop gain of 200 or 46 dB. Opamp selected
Damping signal is inverted with fourth opamp opamp. Value of input resistor is 10K (10,000 should have open-loop gain of 5 to 10 times re-
to make gain and damping as well as frequency ohms) when gain K is 1.— D. Lancaster, "Active- quired gain at resonance. Adjust resistor values
independently adjustable. Damping is in range Filter Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianap- to tune center frequency. — D. Van Dalsen, Need
of 0-2, with critical value of 1 .414 giving flattest olis, IN, 1975, p 135-136. an Active Filter? Try These Design Aids, EDN
response. For high pass, take output from first Magazine, Nov. 5, 1978, p 105-110.
1-kHz STATE- VARIABLE— Low-power filter

uses three opamps to provide simultaneous
high-, low-, and bandpass outputs. Article pre-
sents complete design procedure for keeping
current drain at minimum while providing de-
sired gain-bandwidth product of 240 kHz. — L.
Schaeffer, Op-Amp Active Filters — Simple to
Design Once You Know the Game, EDN Maga-
zine, April 20, 1976, p 79-84.
1 Hz-500 kHz VOLTAGE-TUNED BANDPASS—

Coupling FET opamps with analog multiplier
gives simple two-pole bandpass filter that can
be tuned by external voltage of 0-10 VDC to
give center frequency anywhere in range from
1 Hz to 500 kHz with components shown. Article
gives design equations.— T. Cate, Voltage Tune
Your Bandpass Filters with Multipliers, EDN
Magazine, March 1, 1971, p 45-47.
adequate IF selectivity, to improve CW or SSB tive low-pass filter stages, and IN/OUT switch. age, to eliminate need for negative supply. Will
reception. Resistor values determine cutoff fre- Overall gain is unity. U1 is Fairchild pA4136, operate with supply from 6 to 36 V, drawing
quency; 700 and 900 Hz are for CW and 2500 Hz Raytheon RC4136, or equivalent quad opamp. about 7 mA. — T. Berg, Active Low-Pass Filters
for SSB. Insert filter at point having low audio Overall response is 1.5 dB down at cutoff fre- for CW or SSB, QST, Aug. 1977, p 40-41.
• 01 n F
C2
Cl
1-MHz TRACKING FILTER— Exar XR-S200 PLL 1C running frequency of VCO, it is known as track- 2-kHz LOW-PASS — Voltage-controlled voltage-
is connected to function as frequency filter ing filter. Optional wideband discriminator out- source filter uses equal-value input resistors
when phase-locked loop locks on input signal, put is also provided — "Phase-Locked Loop and equal-value capacitors, simplifying selec-
to produce filtered version of input signal fre- Data Book," Exar Integrated Systems, Sunny- tion of components. Equation for cutoff fre-
quency at VCO output. Because circuit can track vale, CA, 1978, p 9-16. quency then simplifies to f = 1/6.28RC or II
input over 3 : 1 range of frequencies around free- (6.28)(7950)(0.01)(10 6). Opamp can be 741. — H.
M. Berlin, "Design of Active Filters, with Exper-
iments," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
►
1977, p 85-86.
fQ <Hz) o.imf 0.018mF

CUT 0.18/iF
32 0.01/iF .033 fj. F
lOKft 0.0047mF
125
R1 0.047/jF
0.0022mF
-AAA/ Ik
500
0.022/iF
0.01 2/iF
64 0.001 2,uF
0.0056mF
560pF
0.0027mF 270pF
2k 1 50pF
0.001 5/jF
680pF
+ 15V 68pF
360pF 36pF
16k
-* 8k
O v0
1-kHz HIGH-PASS UNITY-GAIN— Passband

gain of 741 or equivalent opamp circuit is set by
ratio of C4 to C, rather than by resistors. Values
OCTAVE AUDIO EQUALIZER — R2 provides up and C2 at low-frequency end. Same circuit is shown give unity gain for passband above 1-Hz
to 12-dB boost or cut at center frequency deter- used for all 10 sections of equalizer, which to- cutoff. Circuit uses multiple feedback — H. M.
mined by values of Cl and C2 as given in table. gether draw only 6 mA maximum from sup- Berlin, "Design of Active Filters, with Experi-
Uses Precision Monolithics OP-08 opamp. Low ply.—"Precision Low Input Current Op Amp," ments," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
input bias current of opamp permits scaling re- Precision
OP-08, p 7.Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1978,
sistors up by factor of 10, to reduce values of Cl 1977, pi 00- 102.
6.8kI2
500-Hz LOW-PASS UNITY-GAIN— Multiple-

feedback filter using 741 or equivalent opamp
1-kHz SIXTH-ORDER HIGH-PASS— Formed by has unity gain in passband below 500-Hz cutoff.
cascading three different second-order sec- plication where such rejection justifies cost i Resistors can be 5% tolerance.— H. M. Berlin,
tions. Passband gain is 12.5 dB. Opamps can be extra filter sections. — H. M. Berlin, "Design < 'Design of Active Filters, with Experiment
741 or equivalent. Used when high rejection is Active Filters, with Experiments,” Howard V Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p s,"
99-
needed for signals just below passband, in ap- Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 122-125. 100.
FILTER CIRCOITS-ACTIVE 321
= Ri
R* R*
, R,e,c,
AF NOTCH — Notch frequency is easily tuned at

frequencies below 1 kHz with single capacitor
C, or by replacing R, and R2 with 249K pot. For
higher frequencies, use 118 opamp for A, and
5K for R3 while lowering other resistances in
proportion to R3. Indicated resistance toler-
ances are necessary for optimum notch
depth. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook,"

341.
R4
1.4-kHz TWIN-T BANDPASS— Combination of
passive twin-T bandpass filter and 741 opamp
gives simple audio filter for amplifying narrow
frequency band (about 300 Hz wide) centered
on 1 .4 kHz. Filter can be tuned to other frequen-
cies by replacing RI and R2 with 10K pots. Fre-
quency isequal to 1/6.28RC where R is value in
ohms of RI and R2 and C is capacitance in farads
of Cl and C2. R3 is half of RI. — F. M. Mims, "In-
tegrated Circuit Projects, Vol. 2," Radio Shack,
Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 71-80.
10k
600-Hz NOTCH — With values obtained from de-

sign equations and graph in article, state-vari-
able or universal filter provides Q of 100 with
four opamps. Notch filter is achieved by adding
low-pass and high-pass outputs equally, for
feed to dual-input summing amplifier. — H. M.
Berlin, The State-Variable Filter, QST, April
1978, p 14-16.
fQ = 1 kHz, B ' 1 kHz
1-kHz BANDPASS — Simple circuit using volt- 1500 Hz. — "The Linear and Interface Circuits
age-follower opamp provides bandpass of 1 kHz Data Book for Design Engineers," Texas Instru-
centered on 1 kHz, to give output range of 500- ments, Dallas, TX, 1973, p 4-39.
1 9 V
1-Hz BANDPASS — Single pot provides easy
trimming to exact center frequency desired
without change in bandwidth or gain. Q is 10.
Design equations are given. — R. A. Pease,
"Band-Pass Active Filter with Easy Trim for Cen-
ter Frequency," Teledyne Philbrick, Dedham,
MA, 1972, Applications Bulletin 4.
1-kHz BANDPASS Three-stage audio filter determines Q and bandwidth.

— Circuits, 73
uses two series resonant circuits to give very Magazine, March 1974, p 89.
narrow audio passband. Amount of feedback
60-Hz HIGH-Q NOTCH — Input network for

SN72310 voltage-follower opamp provides at-
tenuation of 60-Hz power-line frequency. Use
high-quality capacitors for maximum Q— 'The
Linear and Interface Circuits Data Book for De-
sign Engineers," Texas Instruments, Dallas, TX,
1973, p 4-39.
940 pF'
LOW-PASS WITH 10-kHz CUTOFF— Simple cir-

CLOCK FOR COMMUTATING RC FILTER— Cir- of active filter and describes operation. Clock cuit uses only one Texas Instruments SN72310
cuit synchronizes multivibrator with line fre- serves to switch 16 MOSFETs on in turn for voltage-follower opamp. For good temperature
quency to provide clock waveform required for commutating 16 capacitors electronically at 16 stability, use silvered mica capacitors. — 'The
switching capacitors electronically in n-path ac- times line frequency.— K. F. Knott and L. Un- Linear and Interface Circuits Data Book for De-
tive filter for rejecting line frequency and har- sworth. Mains Rejection Tracking Filter, Wire- sign Engineers," Texas Instruments, Dallas, TX,
monics up to fifth. Article gives complete circuit less World, Oct. 1974, p 375-379.
1973, p 4-39.
323
C2
R5
1-kHz CASCADED-OPAMP BANDPASS— Band-

r
four stages so they can be tuned to same center
width of only 71 Hz is achieved by using four frequency. Batteries are used for supply, as filter
identical three-opamp filters in series, for in- draws only 17 mA. — F. M. Griffee, RC Active Fil-
creased selectivity in communication or RTTY ters Using Op Amps, Ham Radio, Oct. 1976, p
receiver. Values for R1 and R2 are made variable 54-58.
for first filter stage, but pot is used for R3 in all
19-kHz NOTCH — Used in commercial FM trans-

mitters to eliminate 19-kHz program material
from stereo encoder. Uses Optical Electronics
9714 opamp in circuit that gives unity passband
gain below center frequency, 0.7 gain above
center frequency, and less than 0.001 gain at
notch frequency. Provides adjustments for
notch rejection level and Q. R1 is 84K, and R2 is
36K in series with 10K pot. — "Precision Notch
Filter," Optical Electronics, Tucson, AZ, Appli-
cation Tip 10255.
1-kHz THREE-FUNCTION— Uses National lated from R = 15 x 107/fc. Fourth opamp may
LM324 quad opamp, with appropriate biasing be used as output amplifier or for summing
for single supply of +5 to +25 VDC. Values of high-pass and low-pass outputs. Cl is same as
R1 and R2 establish fc at 1000 Hz, while R3 gives C2. — P. A. Lovelock, Discrete Operational Am- +15V
Q of 50. Values of R1 and R2 for other bandpass plifier Active Filters, Ham Radio, Feb. 1978, p
70-73.
center and cutoff frequencies fc can be calcu-
10k
TUNABLE NOTCH FILTER— Simple pot-tuned

active notch filter has tuning range of 200 Hz in
audio band and 3-dB rejection bandwidth of 10
TUNABLE NOTCH — Opamp circuit requires tion better than 40 dB over entire range. Circuit Hz, as required for tuning out whistle or power-
only one pot (R,) to vary notch frequency. R2 is can be voltage-tuned by replacing R, with FET line hum that is interfering with radio program.
used to set noise rejection to maximum. With operated as voltage-variable resistor. — R. J. Article gives design theory for many other types
values shown, filter tunes from 170 Hz to 3 kHz. Harris, Simple Tunable Notch Filter, Wireless of notch filters. — Y. Nezer, Active Notch Filters,
with 3-dB bandwidth of 230 Hz and notch rejec- World. May 1973, p 253. Wireless World, July 1975, p 307-311.
324
12.1k, 1%
Q MULTIPLIER — Article gives design procedure

and equations for utilizing Q multiplication to
simplify circuit for active bandpass filter. With
values shown, center frequency is 3.6 kHz and
Q of 1 0 is multiplied by gain of 6 to give effective
Q of 60.— A. B. Williams, Q-Multiplier Tech-
niques Increase Filter Selectivity, EDN Maga-
zine, Oct. 5, 1975, p 74 and 76.
.0159 fiF
1-kHz FIFTH-ORDER LOW-PASS— Uses single

first-order section and two different second-
order sections to give passband gain of 10.3 dB.
Opamps can be 741 or equivalent.— H. M. Ber-
lin, "Design of Active Filters, with Experi-
ments, Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN
1977, p 119-122.
MICROPROCESSOR
INTERFACE
SktttH INPUT STAGE
C3
470 pF I KHz HIGH PASS
FILTER
MICROPHONE
CD PARALLEL INPUT
PORT
ICI :
PIN 14: 5 V DC
PIN 7 : GND
SPEECH RECOGNITION FILTER— Voice signal

picked up by microphone is preamplified and cate use of current mirrors for noninverting in- ond and compares results with series of word
sent through 3-kHz low-pass passive filter C1- puts. Outputs are sampled about 60 times per models in memory to determine most likely
R1 to 1-kHz high-pass active filter and 1-kHz second to implement speech recognition algo- match. J. R. Boddie, Speech Recognition
for
low-pass active filter using sections of LM3900 rithm of computer, which counts number of a Personal Computer System, BYTE, July
1977,
quad opamp. Diode symbols on opamps indi- high-pass and low-pass zero crossings per sec- p 64-68 and 70-71.
320-Hz LOW-PASS — Frequency-dependent

negative-resistance circuit uses 747 dual
opamp. Signal source used as input should have
low resistance, and load should have high re-
sistance. Voltage-follower stages can be used
to isolate both input and output of filter. — R.
Melen and H. Garland, "Understanding 1C Op-
erational Amplifiers," Howard W. Sams, Indi-
anapolis, IN, 2nd Ed., 1978, p 104-105.
VOLTAGE-TUNED STATE-VARIABLE— Pro-

vides choice of high-pass, bandpass, and low-
pass outputs, each with cutoff frequency vari-
able between 1 and 6 kHz by varying control
voltage between -10 V and +15 V. Output load
resistor sets voltage gain between input and
output. Gain-control input varies gain from
maximum set by load resistor down to zero.
Input signals must be limited to 100 mV be-
cause input circuit is differential amplifier op-
erating without feedback. — D. Lancaster, "Ac-
tive-Filter Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, -10
GNDV ■- 31 kHz
Indianapolis, IN, 1975. p 203-205.
,0159/uF
1-kHz THIRD-ORDER LOW-PASS— Circuit using

741 or equivalent opamp consists of unity-gain
first-order section followed by equal-compo-
nent voltage-controlled voltage-source second-
order section. — H. M. Berlin, "Design of Active
Filters, with Experiments," Howard W. Sams,
Indianapolis. IN, 1977, p 113-114.
1-kHz BIQUAD BANDPASS— Three 741 opamps

are connected to give two integrators and in-
verter. Overall gain is -Q, determined by value
of input resistor used. Circuit is tuned by vary-
ing capacitors in steps. Absolute bandwidth re-
mains constant as frequency changes. Chief ap-
plications are in telephone systems, where
identical absolute-bandwidth channels are re-
quired.— D. Lancaster, "Active-Filter Cook-
p 159-164.
1-kHz ST ATE- VARIABLE — Circuit using three

741 opamps offers low sensitivity, voltage-con-
trolled tuning, and easy conversion to high pass
or bandpass. For high pass, take output from
first opamp. For bandpass, take output from
-O second opamp. To increase frequency, change
10K resistors to identical higher values. 10:1 re-
GA IN - +1 sistance change produces 10:1 frequency
change. Damping d is adjustable; critical value
of 1.414 gives maximum flatness of response
without overshoot. Design equations are
given. — D. Lancaster, "Active-Filter Cook-
t must return to ground via low-impedance dc path.
* optional offset compensation, may be replaced with short in noncritical circuits. p 129-135.
VARIABLE-BANDWIDTH AF— Audio filter using

1000-Hz Wien bridge provides bandwidths from
70 to 600 Hz. Transistors can be SK3004, GE-2,
or HEP-254. — Circuits, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1974,
p 124.
lOkft
1-kHz THIRD-ORDER HIGH-PASS— Passband

gain is 6 dB for Butterworth filter above 1-kHz
cutoff. Damping factor is 1.000 for both sec-
tions, each using 741 or equivalent opamp. — H.
iments," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
1977, p 115-116.
20-2000 Hz VARIABLE BANDPASS— High-Q ac- lent. Cascaded all-pass networks B and C each put of all-pass networks. R2 adjusts Q, and
tive bandpass filter can be adjusted over wide have 0 to 180° phase variation and unity gain at ganged log pots change center frequency. — J.
frequency range (100:1) while maintaining Q all frequencies. These are driven by opamp A M. Worley, Variable Band-Pass Filter, Wireless
World, April 1977, p 61.
essentially constant over 100. Two-phase out- whose feedback signal is sum of input and out-
put is available. Opamps can be 741 or equiva-
327
250-Hz THIRD-ORDER LOW-PASS— Values

shown place cutoff at 250 Hz, with 1-dB dip in 200-400 Hz PASSBAND — Design is based on
response curve. Input must be returned to use of 3.2 for value of Q, to hold passband dip
ground with low-impedance DC path. — D. Lan- at 1 dB for two-pole filter. Multiple feedback is
caster, "Active-Filter Cookbook," Howard W. used for each pole. First opamp can be 741 or
Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1975, p 146. equivalent. Center frequency is 283 Hz. — D. Lan-
caster, "Active-Filter Cookbook," Howard W.
Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1975, p 166.
1-kHz STATE-VARIABLE BANDPASS— With

three 741 opamps or equivalent, circuit gain is
Q (reciprocal of damping). Frequency is
changed by changing 10K coupling resistors be-
tween opamps while keeping their values
equal. Increasing resistors 10 times increases
frequency 10 times. High-pass output is ob-
tained from first opamp and low pass from sec-
ond opamp. — D. Lancaster, "Active-Filter Cook-
p 156-159.
-12 VO
+ 12 VO-
T
— OPINH,U1,U2,U3 PIN 6,U1,U2,U3
100 V
■ IjuF
AF NOTCH — Center frequency of notch can be such as Motorola MC1741L. U1 and U2 are in- may be connected directly across output, or
varied with single control R1; upper limit is tegrators with DC gain of about 2500, and U3 is buffer stage can be added to drive lower-imped-
about 4 kHz. Circuit Q and notch depth are con- summing device. Notch depth is at least 50 dB. ance loudspeaker or headset. Use with AGC
stant over range. R2 is adjusted initially for best Input to filter is taken from loudspeaker or head- off. — A. Taflove, An Analog-Computer-Type Ac-
notch depth. All opamps are 741 14-pin DIP, phone jack of receiver. High-impedance headset tive Filter, QST, May 1975, p 26-27.
'
■Q" 10 K
0.033 for damping factor d. Opamps can be

3-kHz STATE-VARIABLE BANDPASS— Design 741. — D. Lancaster, "Active-Filter Cookbook," VARIABLE Q AND FREQUENCY— Bandwidth
is based on value of 30 for Q, corresponding to Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1975, p 166. can be made extremely sharp (less than 9 Hz) or
very broad (greater than 300 Hz). Adjusting Q to
change bandwidth also changes gain of filter.
Center frequency of filter is independently ad-
justable.— A. F. Stahler, An Experimental Com-
parison of CW Audio Filters, 73 Magazine, July
1973, p 65-70.
100-kHz LOW-PASS UNITY-GAIN— Opamp

serves as active element in voltage-controlled
voltage-source second-order filter. Other
opamps having required high input resistance,
low input current, and high speed are 1556 and
8007. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook,"
333.
225.8-Hz REJECTION — Provides extremely supplies. Article gives equation for transfer Minimum Component Count, EDN Magazine,
sharp adjustable-depth notch with only two function.— R. Carter, Sharp Null Filter Utilizes Sept. 20, 1976, p 110.
low-gain opamps. Suitable for single-ended
1-kHz HIGH-PASS FLATTEST-RESPONSE— Val-

ues are chosen for flattest possible response
obtainable with third-order configuration of
two 741 opamps. Tripling capacitance values
cuts cutoff frequency by one-third and vice
versa. Component tolerance can be 10%. Gain
is 2. — D. Lancaster, "Active-Filter Cookbook,"
Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1975, p 186.
2.4-kHz LOW-PASS/HIGH-PASS— Three 741

opamps are connected to provide separate low-
pass and high-pass outputs simultaneously for
complex synthesis problem requiring state-var-
iable filter. Gain is 1. — D. Lancaster, "Active-Fil-
ter Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis,
IN, 1975, p 192-193.
TUNABLE FOURTH-ORDER LOW-PASS— Use

of four ganged pots permits varying cutoff fre-
quency over 10:1 range. Table gives ranges ob-
tainable with five different values for C. Opamps
can be 741 or equivalent. Tracking of 5% for
pots calls for expensive components, but ordi-
nary snap-together pots may prove satisfactory
if tuning range is restricted to 3:1 or less and
more capacitor switching is used. — D. Lancas-
ter, "Active-Filter Cookbook," Howard W.
AF LOW-PASS FOR CW — Design using 10% tol- three-transistor sections, each peaked at cutoff onance. NPN transistors are 2N3565, 2N3904, or
erance components gives sufficiently wide frequency. Q of each section is about 1.9, which similar; PNP transistors are 2N3638, 2N3906, or
bandwidth while maintaining steep skirt re- gives 6-dB bandwidth of about 200 Hz. With similar. — W. Howard, Simple Active Filters for
sponse for CW reception in direct-conversion center frequency at 540 Hz, attenuation is 75 dB Direct-Conversion Receivers, Ham Radio, April
communication receiver. Filter has five identical at 1200 Hz. Net gain of system is 28 dB at res-
1974, p 12-15.
IOk.fl lOkfl
-WV-
R
1-kHz FOURTH-ORDER HIGH-PASS— First sec- "Design of Active Filters, with Experiments,"
tion issecond-order high-pass filter having gain Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 1 16- 800-Hz BANDPASS — Active filter has 800-Hz
of 1.2 dB, and second section has gain of 7 dB. 117. center frequency for optimum CW reception.
Opamps are 741 or equivalent. — H. M. Berlin, Bandwidth is adjustable. Back-to-back diodes
provide noise-limiting capability. — U. L. Rohde,
IF Amplifier Design, Ham Radio, March 1977, p
10-21.
1 .8-1.9 MHz
1.8— 1.9 MHz BANDPASS — Butterworth band-

pass filter, suitable for use with broadband
preamp, helps reject out-of-band signals. Filter
also protects preamp from signals across re-
sponse range from broadcast band through
VHF. Cl and C2 are mica trimmers. LI and L2
have 30 turns No. 22 enamel on Amidon T68-6
toroid cores to give 5.1 /*H. — D. DeMaw, Beat
the Noise with a "Scoop Loop," QST, July 1977,
p 30-34.
«- FEEDBACK
VARIABLE-Q AF — Consists of tuned amplifier signal is fed back to twin-T network R1-R2-R3- trolled by R4 to adjust selectivity. Filtered out-
having inverse feedback, connected so band- C1-C2-C3 which has high impedance to ground put is boosted by Q4 and Q5. Article covers con-
width at -6 dB is variable from 50 to 400 Hz for except at its resonant frequency. Unattenuated struction, calibration, and operation. Q1-Q6 are
center frequency of 1 kHz. Improves selectivity signal goes through Q2 for adding to uninverted GE-20, and Q7 is GE-14 or GE-28 — C. Town-
of amateur receivers. Audio from receiver is ap- output at base of Q3. Degree of cancellation by send, A Variable Q Audio Filter, 73 Magazine,
plied to inverter Q3 through Q1 . Part of inverted two out-of-phase signals feeding Q3 is con- Feb. 1974, p 54-56.
.004 7/i F
SECOND-ORDER 1-kHz LOW-PASS— Circuit

600-Hz THIRD-ORDER LOW-PASS— Butter- using 741 opamp has equal-value series input
worth filter using 741 or equivalent opamp pro- resistors and high-pass capacitors. Cutoff fre-
vides gain of 6 dB in passband below 600-Hz cut- quency can be increased by changing 1 0K resis-
off. All components can be 5% tolerance. — H. tors to higher values while keeping their values
identical. 10:1 resistance change provides 10:1
iments," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, frequency change. Damping d is adjustable;
1977, p 114-116. critical value of 1.414 gives maximum flatness
of response without overshoot. Interchange
10K resistors and O.OI6-/1F capacitors to convert
circuit to 1-kHz high-pass filter.— D. Lancaster,
"Active-Filter Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, In-
ply value used. For center frequency of 1 kHz, R ohms. Coupling capacitors Cl can be 10 times tional Amplifiers," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1978,
is 160K, C is 0.001 /iF, and R1-R3 are 1.6 meg- value used for C. — "Quad Low Power Opera- DS 9339 R1.
AUDIO BUFFER FIITFR RFCT IfltJ

INPUT
EI2 VDC
BANDPASS FOR CW — Sophisticated audio pro- Bandwidth is about 150 Hz. Minimum relative and FS-61 production by manufacturer). — M. A.
cessing system for CW bandpass, using com- attenuation is above 20 dB. Uses three Kinetic Chapman, Audio Filters for Improving SSB and
munication receiver, has actual bandpass cen- Technology FX-60 ICs (culled from FS-60, FS-65, CW Reception, Ham Radio, Nov. 1976, p 18-23.
ter frequency between 900 and 950 Hz.
+I2V
+ 18
10-MHz TRACKING — Connection shown for

560N PLL tracking filter uses crystal to keep
free-running frequency at desired value for sig-
nals near 10 MHz. Lock range varies with input 700-2000 Hz TUNABLE BANDPASS— Uses RC
amplitude, from about 0.3 kHz for 1 mV P-P notch circuit as feedback element for active-fil-
input to about 3 kHz for 100 mV P-P. — "Signet- ter opamp. With tuning pot set for center fre-
ics Analog Data Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, quency of 1000 Hz, 3-dB bandwidth is 23 Hz and
CA, 1977, p 850-851. 10-dB bandwidth is 68 Hz. At 1000 Hz, voltage
gain is 36 dB. High-frequency rolloff is good,
being 43 dB down at 2000 Hz, so circuit converts
1000-Hz square wave into sine wave. Article
gives design equations.— C. Hall, Tunable RC
Notch Filter, Ham Radio, Sept. 1975, p 16-20.
BAUD -PASS < — Olo-pass

KX»
— wv — -O HI-PASS OOUT
OJOOI OUT
OUT
loot
-AW-
•*WV — WV-
INPUT °’\ NOTCH
lOOk Ul ^ 1’ ^ -31— —9
aAat — vw-
O
_^VVV—
lOOk U3 ^ W' —
He- io ; -AAA
loot !OOk
g —
-A/VA
loot
300-3000 Hz TUNABLE FOUR-FUNCTION— of -35 dB is 200 Hz wide at -3 dB points. Notch

Provides choice of high-pass, bandpass, low- output has unity gain with respect to input sig- 25V
pass, and tunable notch outputs. Uses National nal, but other three outputs provide gain. — P.
LM324 quad opamp. Tuning pots are ganged A. Lovelock, Discrete Operational Amplifier Ac-
500K 2-W carbon with reverse log taper. Notch tive Filters, H- "o, Feb. 1978, p 70-73.
m
■
$>
bandpass filter with Q of 1000 and voltage gain cuits, and decode logic for 8-path filter. Band- controls shunt-switched filter action.— "Analog
of about 7 uses DG508 CMOS multiplexer con- width for 3 dB down is 1 Hz centered on 1 kHz, Switches and Their Applications," Siliconix,
taining required analog switches, interface cir- with asymptotic slope of 6 dB per octave. Clock Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 5-12-5-14.
CHAPTER 28
Filter Circuits — Passive

Includes low-pass, high-pass, and bandpass AF filters for improving reception
of voice, CW, SSB, and RTTY signals, along with higher-frequency circuits for
suppressing broadcast-band interference in communication receivers and
minimizing other types of interference.
ELLIPTIC HIGH-PASS/LOW-PASS— Covers 1.45

to 32 MHz in six steps, for use at front end of
high-frequency communication receiver to sup-
press unwanted broadcast signals. Low-pass
filter section, acting with one of six following
low-pass sections, gives over 90-dB image
suppression. Special Bessel-Cauer elliptic filter
having Chebyshev response in passband pro-
vides required 50-ohm impedance matching so
filters can be cascaded. — U. L. Rohde, Optimum
Design for High-Frequency Communications
Receivers, Ham Radio, Oct. 1976, p 10-25.
333
50.5-MHz BANDPASS — Provides 60% band- essential for alignment — P. H. Sellers, 50-MHz 60-Hz TUNABLE NOTCH — Can be used to min-
width with only 4-dB insertion loss. Each coil is Bandpass
71. Filter, Ham Radio, Aug. 1976, p 70- imize hum pickup from AC line. Circuit tunes
about 2.2 /*H, and trimmer capacitors are 1 .5-7 from 40 to 120 Hz with single pot. Article gives
pF. Sweep signal generator and 5-in CRO are design equations. With unmeasured ceramic
disk capacitors and 5% resistors, notch depth
at 60 Hz was 44.5 dB. By selecting capacitors
with equal values and replacing 333K with 500K
trimpot, careful adjustment increases notch
10 depth to 57 dB.— C. Hall, Tunable RC Notch Fil-
ter, Ham Radio, Sept. 1975, p 16-20.
CW FILTER FOR INTERFERENCE— Audio band- BANDPASS FOR CW — Provides bandwidth of

like large capacitive reactance and at higher fre-
pass filter, designed for connection between quencies iresembles
t large inductive reactance, about 400 Hz (3 dB down) centered on 875 Hz,
loudspeaker jack of receiver and external loud- both causing high attenuation. Filter thus dis- for improving reception of CW signals with am-
speaker or phone, has half-power bandwidth of criminates against all except switch-selected ateur receiver. Uses three 44-mH toroids.— D. C.
about 70 Hz but rolls off gradually without caus- resonant frequency, either 760 or 1070 Hz. Rife, Low-Loss Passive Bandpass CW Filters,
ing ringing. Series LC combination, connected Choose best frequency for particular receiving QST, Sept. 1971, p 42-44.
in hot line to loudspeaker, looks like 5-ohm re- situation by trial.— F. Noble, A Passive CW Filter
sistance at resonance, cutting signal amplitude to Improve Selectivity, QST, Nov. 1977, p 34-
about in half. At lower frequencies filter looks 35.
1-15
<r
>
33 turns no. 20 enamelled on Amid'on CQ 4-section air variable, 10-160 pF per

T-106-2 toroid cores (approximately section
14/iH). Links are each 2 turns
Cy 35-pF trimmer capacitors
■m 6 turns no. 20 enamelled on Amidon
T-30-2 toroid core
160-METER BANDPASS — Four-resonator filter 60 dB shape factor is 4.78. Stopband attenua- ory, construction, and adjustment. — W. Hay-
is tunable from 1.8 to 2 MHz and has insertion tion is over 120 dB. Key to high performance is ward, Bandpass Filters for Receiver Preselec-
loss of 5 dB. 3-dB bandwidth is 30 kHz, and 6- use of high-Q toroid cores. Article covers the- tors, Warn Radio, Feb. 1975, p 18-27.
FILTER CIRCUITS — PASSIVE 335
VIA 1N458 (all) Yl A
DIODE-SWITCHED FOUR-CRYSTAL IF FILTER—

Application of 9-12 VDC to control points A or
B gives choice of two different selectivities for
IF amplifier in amateur communication receiver.
For 500-Hz bandwidth at 455 kHz, frequencies
of crystals in use should be 300 Hz apart for CW,
1.8 kHz apart for 2.7-kHz SSB bandwidth, and
1.25 kHz apart for 2.1-kHz SSB bandwidth. Ar-
ticle gives design graphs.— J. J. Schultz, Eco-
nomical Diode-Switched Crystal Filters, CQ,
July 1978, p 33-35 and 91.
>
TT?
—
»
05^F
11 2125-Hz LOW-PASS — Used with AFSK keyerto
05 fiP
convert 2125-Hz square wave to sine wave by
;/4 L 88m H
removing third and fifth harmonics. All three
71
APPROX L coils are toroids, with its two windings in series
Ri
23mH J ^ 05mF I0K
60on
NPUT 7
OR
for 88 mH and in parallel for 23 mH. — L. J. Fox,
1
. ,
OUTPUT Dodge That Hurricane!, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1978,
p 62-69.
FOUR-CRYSTAL FILTER — Uses two matched ticle gives detailed instructions for grinding 5.644416 MHz for A and A’, and 5.645627 MHz
sets of crystals, with each pair having maximum crystal to increase resonant frequency when and 5.645641 MHz for B and B'. Coil has 7 + 7
frequency difference of 25 Hz. Transistors serve necessary for matching. Use frequency counter turns No. 28 enamel bifilar wound on 10.7-MHz
as input and output isolating stages. Each for checking frequency. Values given in circuit IF transformer having 2.4-mm slug diameter. C„
matched pair, such as A-A', should be from are for 5.645-MHz crystal filter with -6 dB band- is 39 to 47 pF. — J. Perolo, Practical Considera-
same manufacturer and have same nominal pass of 1.82 kHz and insertion loss of about 5 tions in Crystal-Filter Design, Ham Radio, Nov.
parallel capacitance for circuit, same activity, dB. Crystals used are 5.644410 MHz and
1976, p 34-38.
and same resonant frequency within 25 Hz. Ar-
Y1A IN 458
C1.C6 50 pF APC or MAPC variable

C2.C3 67 pF ±5%, 7500 working volts dc
C4.C5 (Centralab type 850S ceramic capa-
citor, 6 for $1.00 from John Meshna,
P.O. setts
Box01904)62, E. Lynn, Massachu-
L1,L5 0.2 fJLH, 3 turns no. 16 or no. 14

enamelled, >/2 inch (13mm) ID, spac-
ed 1/8 inch (3mm) per turn
L2,L4 0.3 fJLH, 5 */2 turns no. 14 enam-

elled, */2 inch (13mm) ID, spaced
1/8 inch (3mm) per turn
L3 0.38 flH, 7 turns no. 14 enamelled,

>/2 inch (13mm) ID, spaced 1/8 inch
(3mm) per turn
LOW-PASS WITH 42.5-MHz CUTOFF— De-

signed for insertion in antenna coax of amateur
radio station up to 1 kW, to cure TVI problems.
Provides 60-dB attenuation on channel 2. Filter
uses m-derived terminating half-sections at
each end, with two constant-K midsections.
End sections are tuned either to channel 2 (55
DIODE-SWITCHED CRYSTALS— 1N458 diodes 455.150 kHz for Y1A and 454.850 kHz for Y1B. MHz) or channel 3 (61 MHz). Article covers con-
switch crystals in pairs to provide two different Provides adequate CW selectivity for trans- struction and tune-up.— N. Johnson, High-Fre-
degrees of selectivity for 455-kHz IF filter. For ceiver having good SSB filter.— J. J. Schultz, quency Lowpass Filter, Ham Radio, March 1975,
500-Hz bandwidth in amateur communication Economical Diode-Switched Crystal Filters, CQ,
receiver, spacing between crystal frequencies July 1978, p 33-35 and 91.
should be 300 Hz, which is obtained with p 24-27.
2.955-MHz HIGH-PASS— Used in offset fre- has sharper cutoff characteristic, for given num-
quency-measuring system for amateur-band ber of sections, than Butterworth or image pa-
signals. Nine-section Chebyshev high-pass fil- rameter designs. — J. Walker, Accurate Fre-
ter with 1-dB passband ripple attenuates un- quency Measurement of Received Signals, Ham
desired 2.045-2.245 MHz image 16 dB while se- Radio, Oct. 1973, p 38-55.
lecting desired 2.955-3.155 MHz signal. Filter
L ■) 253 turns 28 swg 35mm VINKOR LA12’1
Li- C 2 Tune to 3kHz
l_2 226 turns 28swg 35mm VINKOR i_A1 211
L2-C4 Tune to 2kHz

1-kHz FIFTH-ORDER LOW-PASS— Used with 1-
kHz signal generator to remove unwanted har-
monics, leaving pure sine wave as required for
measuring distortion in modern audio ampli-
fiers. Attenuation peaks are carefully positioned
to coincide with second and third harmonics,
put of communication receiver and 8-ohm loud- and T2 are 88-mH toroids with 100 turns No. 28 giving 65-dB attenuation of these harmonics
speaker or low-impedance phones, to suppress enamel wound over original winding of each for and at least 50-dB attenuation of higher har-
Continuous Random Unwanted Disturbances primary.— R. M. Myers, The SSB Crud-O-Ject, monics.— J. A. Hardcastle, 1 kHz Source Clean-
on voice transmissions. Passband is 355 to 2530 QST, May 1974, p 23-25 and 56. ing Filter, Wire/ess World, Oct. 1978, p 59.
FILTER CIRCUITS — PASSIVE 337
225-Hz BANDPASS RTTY — Used ahead of lim- types, well matched. Take turns off inductors as 693-2079 Hz TUNABLE NOTCH— Requires only
iter in 170-Hz-shift RTTY receiving converter. required to move passband higher if initially one tuning pot to cover entire frequency range.
Chebyshev mesh configuration with 0.1-dB rip- low in frequency. Insertion loss is 6.6 dB and 3- Developed for use in tunable narrow-band
ple uses inductor to ground for sharpening dB bandwidth is 225 Hz, which makes mark and audio amplifier. Article gives design equations.
lower skirt, with capacitive coupling for sharp- space tones only 1.5 dB down. — A. J. Klappen- Depth of notch is greater than 50 dB. Doubling
ening upper skirt, to give good symmetry for berger, A High-Performance RTTY Band-Pass capacitor values changes tuning range to 355-
response curve. Capacitors should be high-Q Filter, QST, Jan. 1978, p 33. 1028 Hz, while cutting values in half gives range
of 1340-4110 Hz — C. Hall, Tunable RC Notch
Filter, Ham Radio, Sept. 1975, p 16-20.
AM BROADCAST REJECTION — Seven-element tuned to particular broadcast station that pre-

m-derived high-pass filter provides 30-dB rejec- sents difficult interference problem. LI and L3
tion at AM broadcast-band frequencies while are 40 turns No. 30 enamel wound on T50-2 -SPEAKER OR
8 TO 600 «
passing signals in 160-meter band. Midsection powdered-iron toroid. L2 has 22 turns No. 30 on HEADPHONE
m-derived branch of circuit was eliminated to T50-2 core. — D. DeMaw, Low-Noise Receiving
simplify construction, but can be added and Antennas, QST, Dec. 1977, p 36-39.
7 3.3 5.6
SWITCHABLE AF FILTER — Provides wide range

of switch-selected capacitor values for varying
cutoff frequencies, to permit use of filter for
L 35 turns no. 22 enamelled on Amidon C 210 pF, 1% silver mica either phone or CW reception. On CW, circuit
T-68-2 toroid cores (7 /UH). Input link improves reception by eliminating higher fre-
is 4 turns, output link is 3 turns Cy 60-pF mica compression trimmers quencies that are largely interference. — J. J.
Schultz, The Quiet Maker, 73 Magazine, March
80-METER BANDPASS — Four-resonator filter MHz yielded similar results. Article covers the-
for use in 80-meter amateur band has 100-kHz 1974, p 81-84.
ory, construction, and adjustment. — W. Hay-
bandwidth, 4.4-dB insertion loss, and 6-60 dB ward, Bandpass Filters for Receiver Preselec-
'
shape factor of 5.16. Filter was designed and tors, Ham Radio, Feb. 1975, p 18-27. T
aligned at 3.75 MHz; realignment at 3.6 and 3.9
1— T— °
'
O 1 f T • nrm
,
_ Q-iyF 1 i OpF 021/F | 2.Q t,F 0.2 HF | 2.0nF 0.1 nF 1 I.OuF
1
lew SSB
ziL
500 OHMS
6 O 500 OHMS
' T/
-7
'
_ tz
O- <
LOW-PASS PI-SECTION AF— Four-pole double- yond cutoff frequency, with no loss of atten-
throw switch gives choice of 650-Hz cutoff for uation.— E. Noll, Circuits and Techniques, Ham
CW or 2000 Hz for SSB. Filter capacitors are Radio, April 1976, p 40-43.
matched. Response decreases continuously be-
.
"
~
r
CHAPTER 29
Fire Alarm Circuits

Sensors used may respond to gas, ionization, flame, or smoke associated
with fire, for triggering circuits driving variety of alarm devices.
TRIAC GAS/SMOKE DETECTOR— Conductivity

of TaguchiTGS308 gas sensor increases in pres-
ence of combustible gases, increasing load volt-
age across R1 from normal 3 VRMS to as much
as 20 V. Rise in voltage trips comparator to turn
on transistor Q1 that supplies trigger current to
2N6070A sensitive-gate triac. Resulting full-
wave drive of Delta 16003168 24-VAC horn gives
sound output of 90 dB at 10 feet. Horn stops au-
tomatically when gas clears sensor. — A
Pshaenich, "Solid State Gas/Smoke Detector
Systems,"
735, p 4. Motorola, Phoenix, A2, 1975, AN-
Ir
GAS/SMOKE SENSOR — Sensor is based on se- vironment. When gas or smoke is present, VA ing by small transients such as smoke from cig-
lective absorption of hydrocarbons by N-type quickly rises and triggers programmable UJT arette. R5 adjusts alarm threshold. Use regu-
metal-oxide surface. Heater in sensor bums off lated supply. — S. J. Bepko, Gas/Smoke
hydrocarbons when gas or smoke disappears, Detector Is Sensitive and Inexpensive, BDN
sw
bu
S,
is
res
en
an
th
to make sensor reusable. Requires initial warm- R, and C, give time delay that prevents trigger- Magazine, Sept. 20, 1973, p 83 and 85.
zz
d
it
er
er
et
e
ch
gi
eb
r.
up time of about 15 min in hydrocarbon-free en-

.
ze
y
338
FIRE ALARM CIRCUITS 339
IONIZATION ALARM USING TRANSISTORS— Q1-Q2-Q3 supplies 100-pA base current to Dar- Q9 for driving horn 0.7 s, with 50-s OFF intervals.
Use of continuous smoke alarm signal rather lington Q4 for powering horn continuously as Battery is chosen to last at least 1 year while
than beeping horn simplifies transistor circuits long as smoke content exceeds that set by furnishing standby current of about 70 /xA. — A.
needed to trigger fire alarm and low-battery threshold control R5. Low-battery circuit is Pshaenich, "Solid State Gas/Smoke Detector
alarm. When high impedance of ionization tripped at voltage range between 9.8 and 11.2 Systems,"
735, p 8. Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-
chamber is lowered by smoke or gas, amplifier V, as determined by R13, to energize MVBR Q8-
with high input impedance monitors voltage asymmetrical astable MVBR. Capacitor in tery is low, but with distinctive 1-s toot every
level at divider formed by R, and ionization MVBR charges quickly and discharges slowly, 23 s to conserve energy remaining in battery
chamber, with output of Q, going to Q2 which making alarm horn sound during discharge via and differentiate from fire warning. — A.
forms other half of differential amplifier. With inverter 3 and driver transistor Q„. Comparator Pshaenich and R. Janikowski, Gas and Smoke
smoke level of 2% or higher, Q3 is turned on and circuit Qj drives second MVBR to energize horn Detector Uses Low-Leakage MOS Transistor,
applies logic 1 to one input of NAND gate 1 in through inverter 6 and same driver Q„ when bat- Electronics, Nov. 28, 1974, p 124-125.
SCR GAS/SMOKE DETECTOR — Simple circuit

uses Taguchi TGS308 gas sensor with SCR Q1
for half-wave control of 24-VAC alarm horn.
Sensor is based on adsorptive and desorptive
reaction of gases on tin oxide semiconductor
surface encased in noble-metal heater that
serves also as electrode. Combustible gases in-
crease conductivity of sensor, thereby increas-
ing load voltage enough to trip comparator and
initiate alarm. Output voltage across R1 is nor-
mally about 3 VRMS. With gas or smoke, volt-
age can rise to 20 V. When gas or smoke has
cleared sensor, SCR turns off at first zero cross-
ing. Drawbacks are absence of time delay for
preventing false alarm when power is turned on
and reduced sound level of horn with half-wave
operation. — A. Pshaenich, "Solid State Gas/
Smoke Detector Systems," Motorola, Phoenix,
AZ, 1975, AN-735, p 3.
FLAME DETECTOR DRIVES TTL LOAD— Sensor

is silicon Darlington phototransistor Q having
peak response near infrared bands. Filter is re-
quired to reduce interference from visible light
sources. Circuit is sensitive enough to pick up
hydrogen flames that emit no visible light. Ar-
ticle describes operation of circuit and gives de-
sign equations. Output can go directly to input
port of microprocessor. — A. Ames, This Flame
Detector Interfaces Directly to a /tP. EDN Mag-
azine, Oct. 20, 1976, p 122 and 124.
CA3097 array, provide low-battery monitor and to gate of Q2 for energizing horn. Battery drain
opamp as interface for ionization chamber that horn-driver functions. When chamber detects is only 5 mA in monitoring mode. — G. J. Gran-
provides picoampere currents. With opamp in smoke, combination of RF and D1 provides suf- ieri, Bipolar-MOS and Bipolar IC's Building
pulsed mode (on for 20 ms of 20-s period), 1C ficient base current to keep Q3 and Q4 on. Blocks for Smoke-Detector Circuits, IEEE Trans-
draws only 0.6 fiA average instead of 600 #tA. Opamp is then powered continuously, and actions on Consumer Electronics, Nov. 1977, p
Other active components and zener, all on RCA steering diode Z1 supplies continuous current 522-527.
FIRE ALARM CIRCUITS 341
1N4001
GAS/SMOKE DETECTOR WITH LATCH— CMOS combustible gases. Normal voltage of 3 VRMS SI to turn off alarm after gas level drops. Op-
latching logic provides 2-min time delay to pre- across R4 increases to about 20 V in presence tional circuit shown can be used for automatic
vent false alarm when power is first applied to of fire. Half of 12.6-V center-tapped transformer reset. — A. Pshaenich, "Solid State Gas/Smoke
fire alarm using Taguchi TGS308 gas sensor secondary is used for 6-V supply and full 12.6 V Detector Systems," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z,
whose conductivity increases in presence of for DC horn supply. Latch is reset manually with 1975, AN-735, p 5.
+ 12.6 V
IONIZATION ALARM — Gates in Motorola battery. R6 is adjusted to give desired smoke MVBR. DC horn is then powered at astable rate
MC14572 CMOS 1C form two alarm oscillators, detection sensitivity. Gates 1 and 2 form MVBR of about 1 s every 23 s to give early warning of
one energized in presence of smoke at ioniza- that drives horn at astable rate of 2.5 s on and
need to change battery. — A. Pshaenich, "Solid
tion chamber and other for low battery. 0.2 s off in presence of smoke. When battery is
State Gas/Smoke Detector Systems," Moto-
Standby currents of circuits are low enough to low, comparator Q4-D2-D3 trips (about 10.5 V) rola, Phoenix, A Z, 1975, AN-735, p 7.
give at least 1 year of operation from 750-mAh and energizes inverter 4 of low-battery astable
GAS/SMOKE DETECTOR WITH BEEPING alarms, CMOS astable MVBR using gates 3 and from 24-V winding of power transformer. — A.
HORN — Taguchi TGS308 gas sensor increases 4 is energized to fire triac and drive AC horn to Pshaenich, "Solid State Gas/Smoke Detector
voltage across R3 when sensor conductivity is give distinctive repetitive sound lasting about Systems,"
increased by combustible gases. After time 2.5 s, with 0.2-s intervals between beeps. Triac
delay provided to prevent power turn-on false gate drivers operate from - 1 5 V supply derived
CHAPTER 30
Flasher Circuits
Provide fixed or variable flash rates for LEDs, incandescent

lamps, or
fluorescent lamps used as indicators, alarms, warnings, and
for such special
effects as Christmas-light shimmer. See also Game and Lamp
chapters. Control
343
VARIABLE FLASHER FOR LED — Terminal con-

nections of National LM3909 flasher 1C give
choice of three different flash rates for LED used
as indicator in battery portable equipment. Ex-
ternal resistors provide additional adjustments
of flash rate. Appropriate connections to pins 1
and 8 make flash-controlling internal resistance
3K, 6K, or 9K. Flasher operates at any supply
voltage above 2 V, with low duty cycle to give
long battery life.— P. Lefferts, Power-Miser
Flasher 1C Has Many Novel Applications, EDN
02 Of
SHIMMER FOR CHRISTMAS LIGHTS— Circuit
uses half of AC cycle to power lights conven-
tionally. On other half-cycle, C charges and
builds up voltage on gate of SCR. When firing
point is reached, SCR conducts and allows re-
mainder of this half-cycle to pass through light
string. Result is flash that gives shimmer or
strobe effect. C is 100-juF 50-V electrolytic, R1 is
2.7K, R2 is 22K, R3 is 3.3K, R4 is 100K pot, and
R5 is IK. Diodes are Motorola HEP R0053. SCR
is GE C106B1 or Motorola HEP R1221 mounted
on heatsink.— R. F. Graf and G. J. Whalen, Add
Shimmer to Your Christmas Lights, Popular
Science, Dec. 1973, p 124.
DRIVING LED ARRAY— National MM74C908/ are inverting feedback timing elements, and R4 circuit suitable for driving array of LEDs or
MM74C918 dual CMOS driver has sections con- is pulldown load for first driver. Output current lamps — "CMOS Databook," National Semi-
nected as Schmitt-trigger oscillator, with R1 drive capability is greater than 250 mA, making conductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 5-38-5-49.
and R2 used to generate hysteresis. R3 and C
345
FLASHER CIRCUITS
1-Hz LAMP BLINKER— Single CMOS flip-flop

generates approximately constant low-fre-
quency signal from variable high-frequency sig-
nal. RC network in feedback loop determines
output frequency, which is independent of rate
at which flip-flop is clocked if output frequency
is lower than clock frequency. If clock frequency
is lower, output transitions occur at half of clock
frequency. Provides two outputs, approxi-
mately equal in duty cycle but opposite in
phase. Circuit was developed to blink lamp at
1 Hz to indicate presence of active digital signal
having variable duty cycle in range of 100 to
3000 Hz. — V. L. Schuck, Generate a Constant
Frequency Cheaply, EDN Magazine, Aug. 20,
1975, p 80 and 82.
OFF
3*V STROBE — Flash rate of 1767 lamp can be

adjusted from no flashes to continuously on, in
circuit using National LM3909 flasher 1C with
external NPN power transistor rated at 1 A or
higher. Can be used as variable-rate warning
light, for advertising, or for special effects. With
lamp in large reflector in dark room, flashes sev-
eral times per second are almost fast enough to
stop motion of dancer — P. Lefferts, Power-
Miser Flasher 1C Has Many Novel Applications,
EDN Magazine, March 20, 1976, p 59-66.
Vqq 5V
OUT-OF-PHASE DOUBLE FLASHER— Sections

of National MM74C908/MM74C918 dual CMOS
driver are connected as Schmitt-trigger oscil-
lator, with LEDs at output of each section so
LEDs will flash 180° out of phase. High output
current capability makes circuit suitable for
driving two LED arrays. — "CMOS Databook,"
National Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977,
p 5-38-5-49.
CLOCK DRIVE FOR FLIP-FLOP FLASHER— 555

timer connected as astable MVBR generates se-
ries of timing pulses at rate determined by value
of capacitor and setting of 1-megohm pot. Pro-
vides automatic string of input pulses for driv-
ing flip-flop of dual flasher. Pulse output goes to
input capacitor Cl of flip-flop. — F. M. Mims, "In-
SEQUENTIAL SWITCHING OF LOADS— Ring

counter using four-layer diodes DN provides se-
quential switching of loads under control of
input pulse-train signal. Indicator lamps are
shown, but any load from 15 to 200 mA can be
switched. After power is applied, reset switch
must be pressed to establish current through L.
When switch is released, this current flows
through C2 and breaks down D2, allowing cur-
rent to flow through first lamp I,. Input pulse to
transistor Q (normally held off by current
through R, )turns Q off and removes power from
diode circuits, thus turning I, and D2 off. At end
of input pulse, Q comes on and restores power
to diode circuits, but all loads will be turned off.
Voltage on C3 now adds to 6 V normally across
D*, making D4 break down and turn on l2. Next
input pulse will break down D6 in same manner.
Output signals may be picked up as negative
pulses at A or B or by current-sensing at C if re-
quired for controlling larger loads. — I. Bliss and
D. Zinder, "4-Layer and Current-Limiter Diodes
Reduce Circuit Cost and Complexity," Moto-
1-Hz AUTO FLASHER — Lamp drawing nominal

600 mA is flashed at 1 Hz by National LM3909
flasher 1C operating from 12-V automotive bat-
tery. Use of 3300-/iF capacitor makes flasher 1C
immune to supply spikes and provides means
of limiting 1C supply voltage to about 7 V. — P.
Lefferts, Power-Miser Flasher 1C Has Many
Novel Applications, EDN Magazine, March 20,
1976, p 59-66.
OCOM
FLASHER CIRCUITS 347
DEMONSTRATION FLIP-FLOP — Two sections

of LM3900 quad opamp form bistable MVBR for
flip-flop having two stable states. When input
is grounded momentarily, output of one of
opamps swings completely on and turns other
opamp off. LED indicates which opamp is on at
any particular time. Next grounding of input re-
verses conditions. Ideal for classroom demon-
strations.— F. M. Mims, "Integrated Circuit Proj-
ects, Vol. 5," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977,
2nd Ed., p 30-37.
SCR FLASHES LED — UJT oscillator Q1 provides

timing pulses for triggering SCR driving red
Radio Shack 276-041 LED. Circuit draws only 2
mA from 9-V battery when producing 12 flashes
per second. SCR is 6-A 50-V 276-1089.— F. M.
Mims, "Semiconductor Projects, Vol. 2," Radio
Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1976, p 78-84.
NSL5057
SINGLE-FLASH LED — Mono MVBR connection

of National LM3909 1C produces 0.5-s flash with
LED each time pushbutton makes momentary
contact. —p "Linear
AN-154,tional Applications, Vol. 2," Na-
9.Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976,
ALTERNATING RED/GREEN— National LM3909

1C is connected as relaxation oscillator for flash-
ing red and green LEDs alternately. With 12-
VDC supply, repetition rate is about 2.5 Hz.
Green LED should have its anode or positive
lead toward pin 5 as shown for lower LED,
where shorter but higher-voltage pulse is avail-
able. LED types are not critical. — "Linear Appli-
Clara, CA, 1976, AN-154, p 3.
ALARM-DRIVEN FLASHER — Simple two-tran-

sistor flasher circuit for annunciator system is
activated by alarm. Operator acknowledges
alarm condition by depressing S„ which
changes lamp from flashing to steady ON con-
dition. 6-V incandescent lamp draws about 0.3
A through Q2, but IK load resistor for Q, limits
current of this transistor to about 6 mA so
smaller transistor can be used. — T. Stehney,
Flasher Design Cuts Extra Components, EDN
200♦85-
VDC
LEAVE PIN 1
7 VOLT LIMIT OPEN

the line, 1C, and LED will be less than 7 V above 1.5-V OR 3-V INDICATOR— Digi-Key LM3909N
FLASHING LED IS REMOTE MONITOR— Circuit ground, for safe remote monitoring. Use any flasher/oscillator drives LED serving as ON/OFF
uses National LM3909 flasher 1C to drive LED for LED drawing less than 150 mA. — P. Lefferts, indicator for battery-operated devices. At flash
monitoring remotely located high-voltage Power-Miser Flasher 1C Has Many Novel Appli- rate of 2 Hz, battery life almost equals shelf
power supply. When 43K dropping resistor is cations, EDN Magazine, March 20, 1976, p 59- life. — C. Shaw, ON-OFF Indicator for Battery
located at power supply, all other voltages on Device, QST, March 1978, p 41-42.
66.
LED BLINKER — Two sections of SN7400 quad

gate form MVBR operating at low enough fre-
quency so LED status indicators come on and
off slowly for visual observation of MVBR. LEDs
FLIP-FLOP DRIVES SCR — UJT relaxation oscil- flashing lamp load. Load and SCR supply volt- are optional and do not affect operation of
lator Q1 serves as clock for driving section of age depend on application but must be within MVBR. Capacitors must be same value. Ideal for
7473 dual flip-flop. One output of flip-flop SCR rating. — F. M. Mims, "Semiconductor Proj- student demonstration in classroom or as Sci-
flashes Radio Shack 276-041 red LED to indicate ects, Vol. 2," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1976, ence Fair exhibit. — A. MacLean, How Do You
operating status. Other output alternately trig- Use ICs7, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1977, p 56-59.
gers SCR which can be 6-A 50-V 276-1089, for p 62-70.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RED/GREEN LED FLASHER — One section of

LM324 quad opamp is connected as square-
wave generator giving about 1 flash per second
for each LED. Series resistors for LEDs have dif-
ferent values because they have different for-
ward voltage requirements. If LED 2 glows be-
tween flashes, increase value of R6 slightly. Too
large a value for R6 reduces flash brilliance of
LED 2. Supply can be 5 or 6 V. — F. M. Mims,
"Semiconductor Projects, Vol. 1," Radio Shack,
Fort Worth, TX, 1975, p 69-74.
12-V FLUORESCENT — Relay acts as mechanical

DC1AC converter operating off 12-V car battery.
COMPARATOR LED FLASHER— One section of LED turns on and off rapidly. Connecting R2 to Each time relay opens, inductive kick in relay
LM339 quad comparator drives two RS2016 pin 6 makes LED turn on rapidly and turn off coil is stepped up by output transformer to high
NPN transistors having LED load, to give simple very slowly. Cl controls flash interval; typical enough voltage for ionizing 24-inch fluorescent
flasher for classroom demonstrations. Circuit tube, giving flash that can serve as emergency
value is 0.01 gf. — F. M. Mims, "Integrated Cir-
can be duplicated with other three sections to flasher when car breaks down. — Circuits, 73
cuit Projects, Vol. 5," Radio Shack, Fort Worth,
give four flashers. Connecting R2 to pin 1 of 1C TX, 1977, 2nd Ed , p 45-51. Magazine, June 1975, p 175.
1.5-V LED FLASHER— National LM3909 1C op- sets flash rate at about 1 Hz. — "Linear Appli-
erating from 1.5-V battery drives NSL5027 LED cations, Vol. 2," National Semiconductor, Santa LED FLASHER — Requires only LM3909 1C and
in such a way that current is drawn by LED only Clara, CA, 1976, AN-154, p 2. external capacitor operating from 1.25-V nicad
about 1% of time. External 300-jiF capacitor or other penlight cell. Circuit can be duplicated
for as many additional flashing LEDs as are de-
sired for display. Optional charging circuit uses
silicon solar cells and diode for daytime charg-
ing of battery automatically. — J. A. Sandler, 1 1
Projects under $11, Modern Electronics, June
1978, p 54-58.
2-kHz FLASHER FOR LED— Single 1.5-V cell pro- ing external resistors until average energy
vides power for National LM3909 flasher 1C that reaching LED provides sufficient light for appli-
operates at high enough frequency to appear on cation. At 2 kHz, no flicker is noticeable. — P. Lef- 6-V OR 15-V INDICATOR— Uses Digi-Key
continuously, for use as indicator in battery ferts, Power-Miser Flasher 1C Has Many Novel LM3909N flasher/oscillator to drive LED at 2 Hz
portable equipment. Duty cycle and frequency Applications, EDN Magazine, March 20, 1976, p as ON/OFF indicator for battery-operated de-
59-66. vices. For 6-V battery, CT is 400 /iF, Rs is 1000
of current pulses to LED are increased by chang-
ohms, and RFB is 1500 ohms. For 15 V, corre-
sponding values are 180, 3900, and 1000. Bat-
tery life is essentially same as shelf life. — C.
Shaw, ON-OFF Indicator for Battery Device,
QST, March 1978, p 41-42.
FAST 1.5-V BLINKER — Addition of IK resistor

between pins 4 and 8 of National LM3909 1C in-
creases flash rate to about 3 times that obtain-
able when 300 pF is connected between pins 1
and 2. Modification of external connections
gives choice of 3K, 6K, or 9K for internal RC re-
sistors.— "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," National
p2.
1-A LAMP FLASHER — National LM195 power AUTO-BREAKDOWN FLASHER— Two-transis-

transistor is turned on and off once per second tor amplifer with regenerative feedback sends
for flashing 12 -V lamp. Current limiting in BLOWN-FUSE BLINKER— Neon .lamp NE-2 60-ms pulses of currents up to several amperes
LM195 prevents high peak currents during turn- glows steadily when fuse is good and flashes through low-voltage lamp to give high-bril-
on even though cold lamp can draw 8 times nor- when fuse opens. Flash rate, determined by R1 liance flashes without destroying lamp. LI can
mal operating current. Current-limiting feature and Cl , is about 10 flashes per second for values be PR-2 lamp (Radio Shack 272-1120).— F. M.
prolongs lamp life in flashing applications. — R. shown. — T. Lincoln, A "Smart" Blown-Fuse In- Mims, "Transistor Projects, Vol. 1," Radio
Dobkin, "Fast 1C Power T ransistor with Thermal dicator, QST, March 1977, p 48. Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 27-32.
Protection," National Semiconductor, Santa
Clara, CA, 1974, AN-110, p 5.
CHAPTER 31
Frequency Counter Circuits

Used to indicate frequency value directly on digital display by counting
number of cycles in period of exactly 1 second. Included are preamps, time
bases, and prescalers for extending counting range to as high as 500 MHz.
4-MHz COUNTER — Portable frequency counter to minimize battery drain. One multiplexed out- repeater tones, signal-generator frequencies for
using RCA CMOS logic draws only 300 mW (12 put is for three least significant figures and TV alignment, tuning musical instruments, and
V at 25 mA) yet operates to well above 4 MHz. other for four most significant figures. Article serving as tachometer or speedometer in car. —
Supply voltage can be between 4 and 15 V, describes operation in detail. Applications in- R. M. Mendelson, Milliwatt Portable Counter,
loosely regulated, without affecting accuracy. clude setting RTTY mark and space tones, FM Ham Radio, Feb. 1977, p 22-25.
Display uses multiplexing with 10% duty cycle
352
FREQUENCY COUNTER CIRCUITS 353
FKO- 503 COMMON CATHODE DISPLAYS 1.2 MS!
0-3 MHz PREAMP — Provides wide frequency

response required for amplifying 100 mV P-P
input signals to 5-V level for driving CMOS logic
of frequency counter. — R. Tenny, Counter Pre-
Amp Matches CMOS Logic Capability, EDN
Magazine, Sept. 20, 1976, p 114 and 116.
50 MHz WITH 1-Hz RESOLUTION— Combina-

tion of CMOS and TTL devices reduces chip
count for digital frequency counter that pro-
vides 1-Hz resolution from below 20 Hz to above
50 MHz. Use of 10:1 prescaler, also given in ar-
ticle, extends range to above 300 MHz with 10-
Hz resolution. Uses Intersil 7208 CMOS seven-
decade counter that includes multiplexer,
decoder, drivers, and other controls for Fairchild
FND-503 8-digit display. High-stability 5.24288-
MHz crystal oscillator and frequency divider
provide 1-s gate required for counting, outputs
for synchronizing multiplexer, and short pulses
for latching and resetting counters. Resolution
can be decreased by factor of 10 by connecting
pin 1 1 of 7207A to Vcc, which is regulated 5 V. —
H. E. Harris, Simplifying the Digital Frequency
Counter, Ham Radio, Feb. 1978, p 22-25.
grounded. When all switch outputs are

PRESET-FREQUENCY ALARM— When selected play in counter. Four connections are made to grounded, all transistors are turned on and SCR
frequency occurs in Nixie-driving counter, each counter stage to get BCD inputs A, B, C, fires to actuate alarm relay. If latching is unde-
alarm circuit triggers and locks until reset man- and D for 7441. Connections can be made to
sirable, use medium-power NPN transistor in
ually. Requires one SN7441 Nixie decoder/ 7475 quad latch in typical counter. Circuits are place of SCR. — W. L. MacDowell, Frequency De-
driver, one decimal-type thumbwheel switch, for 8-digit display. When display reaches digit tectorforYourCounter, 73 Magazine, Oct. 1976
and one 2N3905 transistor for each digit of dis- to which switch is set, switch output is
p 50-51.
• IS .01 s
PND-S03 COMMON CATHOOP DISPLAYS
TIME BASE — Intersil 7207 1C generates clock

and housekeeping pulses required for fre-
quency counter. With pin 11 grounded, gate
output is high for 0.1 s and low for 0.1 s. With
pin 11 high, gate is high 0.01 s and low 0.01 s.
1.6-kHz square wave at pin 12 is useful for mul-
tiplexing displays. Update output is narrow
negative-going pulse coincident with rising
edge of gate output, for use in transferring
count to display latches. Reset output is used to
reset counter.— D. Lancaster, "CMOS Cook-
book," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis. IN, 1977,
p 161.
30 MHz WITH 10- Hz RESOLUTION— Simplified

counter design using low chip count provides
multiplexing of seven digits in Fairchild display,
for applications where 1-Hz resolution is not
needed. 7207 oscillator/timer gives counting in-
terval of 0.1 s, for updating display 5 times per
second. Article also gives circuit of 10:1 pre-
scaler that increases frequency limit to 300
MHz, though with 100-Hz resolution. Total
counter current drain is 300 mA from regulated
5-V supply. — H. E. Harris, Simplifying the Digital
Frequency
22-25. Counter, Ham Radio, Feb. 1978, p
13 ~7 CONTROL
REGENERATION
60-kHz WWVB PREAMP — Installed in loop an- plies regulated 10 VDC for preamp. Article in-
tenna to boost strength of 60-kHz standard-fre- Although construction details apply to double- cludes techniques for minimizing interference
quency broadcasts from NBS station at Boul- from nearby TV receivers. — H. Isenring, WWVB
copper shielded 54-inch-diameter circular loop,
der, Colorado, enough to drive digital frequency preamp can also be used with simple un- Signal Processor, Ham Radio, March 1976 p28-
counter for which circuit is also given in article. shielded wood-frame loop. Output coax sup-
34.
5-MHz FRONT END — Used ahead of 5-MHz fre-

quency counter to make input signal swing
from logic 0 of 0 V to logic 1 of about 10 V as
required for accurate counting of frequency for
input signal having any input waveform shape
and level. Input of front end has high impedance
to minimize effect on input waveform. FET tran-
sistor Q1 and bipolar buffer Q2 drive Schmitt
trigger using half of Motorola MC75108 dual line
receiver. — D. Aldridge, "Battery-Powered 5-

MHz Frequency Counter," Motorola, Phoenix,
AZ, 1974, AN-717, p 5.
COUNTER LATCHES, DECODERS, DISPLAYS

line transfers count into memory of MC14511
12-V 5-MHz COUNTER— Portable counter is desired enable time, up to 10 s, using 3%MC14518 latch decoder, and control line resets MC14518
signed with low-power logic to minimize bat- dual decade counters connected in ripple- decade counters for next count cycle. Displays
tery drain, yet provides good performance. through mode. Actual counting of input signal are Monsanto MAN-4 LEDs. Article traces circuit
Since most of milliwatt power drain is taken by codes is also done with MC14518 counters. operation in detail and gives timing diagram. —
digital readout, circuit blanks out LED display Latches and BCD to 7-segment decoders use D. Aldridge, CMOS Counter Circuitry Slashes
when there is no input signal. Time base divides MC14511S. Enable line turns first counter on Battery Power Requirements, EDN Magazine,
1-MHz crystal oscillator frequency down to de- and off for precise enable time period. Strobe Oct. 20, 1974, p 65-71.
Ra
300-MHz PRESCALER— Uses Fairchild 95H90 1C

to divide input signal frequency by factor of 10
up to 320 MHz. Full-wave diode limiter at input
prevents damage to 1C. RA is chosen to bias 1C
at point of maximum sensitivity; typical value
is 680 ohms. Transistor amplifier provides 2-3
V P-P output. Bias resistor Re is set to make col-
lector-base voltage 3 V; typical value is 620
ohms. Wind one lead of 4.7-/rH choke around
nail 4 times, then remove nail and slip ferrite
bead over end of wire before connecting it to
pin 1. Keep all leads as short as possible. Article
covers construction and alignment in detail. —
I. Math, Math's Notes, CQ, May 1975, p 42-44
and 64.
F HD -SOS COHUOH CAT HOOF DISPLAYS
DIRECT-COUPLED PREAMP — Provides fre-

quency response from 0 to 1 MHz at very low
power levels, as required for driving CMOS logic
of frequency counter. Diodes protect input from
overload. Output impedance of frequency
source should be kept below 50K to minimize
noise pickup.— R. Tenny, Counter Pre-Amp

Matches CMOS Logic Capability, EDN Maga-
zine, Sept. 20, 1976, p 114 and 116.
-7VDC
1.5-GHz PRESCALER — Motorola MC1697 1C

provides division by 4 to extend operating
range of 400-MHz counter above 1.5 GHz. Cir-
cuit will operate on input signals as low as 1
6 MHz WITH 10-Hz RESOLUTION— Intersil 7208 stage. — H. E. Harris, Simplifying the Digital Fre- mW. Requires 60-mA power supply at -7 V.
CMOS counter provides multiplexing of six dig- quency Counter, Ham Radio, Feb. 1978, p 22- Article gives construction and test details. — J.
its in Fairchild display operating from 5-V reg- 25. Hinshaw, 1.5 GHz Divide-by-Four Prescaler,
ulated supply. Uses MOSFET 4673 input Ham Radio , Dec. 1978, p 84-86.
FREQUENCY COUNTER CIRCUITS
357
B+ "MO option output + 100 output B+
TWO-DECADE SCALER — Solid-state frequency

scaler extends range of older frequency
counters by factors of 10 and 100, or up to 10
MHz for 100-kHz counter. Emitter-follower Q,
provides matching from high input impedance
to low impedance for driving sensitive clipper
Q2 that operates class B and presents 4 V P-P
square wave to decade counter. Input accepts
1 to 14 V P-P. — D. Peck, A Solid State Scaler for
Frequency Counters, CQ, April 1974, p 24-27.
MBD502
200-MHz BUFFER — Developed for use ahead of

prescaler in 200-MHz autoranging frequency
counter. Provides high input impedance to
count-sensing device. Circuit includes Schmitt
trigger action. Sensitivity is about 50 mV P-P. —
T. Balph, "A 200 MHz Autoranging MECL —
McMOS Frequency Counter," Motorola, Phoe-
nix, AZ, 1975, AN-742, p 10.
IMPROVED PREAMP — Replaces inefficient FET source-follower having extremely high

using two sections of 74H00 high-speed quad
input circuit of inexpensive frequency counter, input impedance. Back-to-back diodes provide NAND gate. Circuit requires dual-polarity sup-
to ensure accurate counting from DC to over 60 overload protection. Input stage drives 733 dif- ply delivering at least 63 mA; regulation is op-
MHz. Circuit brings input signal waveform to ferential video amplifier having 100-MHz band- tional.— G. Beltrami, High-Impedance Preamp
TTL level of 3.5 V P-P while providing required width and gain of 400. 2N709 switching transis- and Pulse Shaper for Frequency Counters, Ham
perfect square waves down to lowest-fre- tor squares preamp signal for TTL translator
Radio, Feb. 1978, p 47-49.
quency input signal. Input circuit is balanced
25—250 MHz PRESCALER — Based on use of

Fairchild 95H90 decade counter, with preamp
Q1 and associated components selected for 25-
250 MHz range. 1N914N diodes prevent over-
loading of input. Voltage regulator is LM340T-5.
LI is 8 turns No. 28 wound on body of 1 000-ohm
or larger resistor, with ends soldered to re-
sistor leads. Quarter-wave whip antenna at
input will pick up adequate signal from 1-W 146-
MHz transceiver hand-held 6-10 feet away.
Counter provides division by 10. — R. D. Shriner,
Prescaler Updates the DVM/Frequency Counter,
QST, Sept. 1978, p 22-24 and 37.
secondary is 20 pH. Article also gives circuit of

COUNTER DRIVE FOR WWVB— Uses LM311 as S2 to serve as gate for frequency counter. T1 is preamp that can be built into 60-kHz loop an-
true zero-crossing detector for 60-kHz carrier of 24-V 500-mA power transformer, and T2 is 40- tenna to build up signal strength to 0.4 V as re-
NBS standard-frequency station at Boulder, kHz cup-core slug-tuned RF transformer as used quired for input to processor. — H. Isenring,
Colorado. Resulting square wave is fed to chain in many TV remote controls. Primary induc- WWVB Signal Processor, Ham Radio, March
of 7490 dividers whose outputs are selected by tance (7.5-46 mH) of T2 is tapped at 0.5 mH; 1976, p 28-34.
10:1 PRESCALER FOR 500 MHz— Uses Fairchild

11C06 D flip-flop and Fairchild 95H91 divide-by-
5 counter. Input sensitivity is less than 100 mV
from 10 to 500 MHz. Back-to-back diodes pro-
tect 11C06 input from overloads. Output is fed
to 50-MHz frequency counter. Use regulated
supply — W. C. Ryder, 500-MHz Decade Pre-
scaler, Ham Radio, June 1975, p 32-33.
UPDATE TO 100 MHz — Simple counter stage

can be added to input of existing frequency
counter to extend direct counting range to 100
MHz, preparing it for use with 1-GHz prescaler.
Use 74S196 presettable decade counter and
74S00 NAND-gate 1C. If existing counter has
positive reset pulse, connect C to CC and D to
DD; if reset pulse is negative, connect C to D. If
count enable pulse is negative, connect A to AA
and B to BB; if positive, connect A to B. Power
supply bypass capacitor should be shunted by
47-/nF 10-V tantalum or electrolytic. Article cov-
ers modifications required in some counter
input stages. — I. MacFarlane, How to Modify
Your Frequency Counter for Direct Counting to
100 MHz, Ham Radio, Feb. 1978, p 26-29.
count from MC14518 counter chain. Article de-

MULTIPLEXED DISPLAY — Used with battery- display appear continuous. Display operates at scribes operation in detail and gives circuit of
operated frequency counter to reduce battery peak of 20 mA but duty cycle is only 12.5%. companion front end and 5-MHz counter. — D.
drain by multiplexing single decoder driver be- Counter is operated from 6-V supply. Four Aldridge, CMOS Counter Circuitry Slashes Bat-
tween all of MAN-4 displays. Readout is inte- MC14021 8-bit shift registers implement multi- tery Power Requirements, EDN Magazine, Oct.
grated by eye over total time period, making plexing and provide latches needed to store 20, 1974, p 65-71.
500 MHz WITH 100-Hz RESOLUTION— Circuit

provides separate 0-50 MHz preamp Q1-Q7 and
50-500 MHz prescaler for Intersil ICM7207A 7-
digit CMOS frequency counter. 500-MHz pre-
scaler uses Fairchild 11C90 that drives TTL di-
rectly, with 2N5179 transistor as preamp. LI
and output capacitance of 2N5179 form low-Q
resonant circuit. U3 is 50-MHz prescaler for both
preamps. Crystal frequency is 5.242880 MHz. 5-
V regulators are MC7805, and 12-V regulator is
MC7812. Article covers construction and ad-
justment.— J. H. Bordelon, Simple Front-Ends
for a 500-MHz Frequency Counter, Ham Radio,
Feb. 1978, p 30-33.
RAMP GENERATOR/COMPARATOR— Devel-

oped for frequency counter using standard ECL
components. One input to comparator is from
integrator stage, and other is from ramp gen-
erator driven by reset signal from UJT oscilla-
tor.— W. R. Blood, Jr., "Measure Frequency and
Propagation Delay with High Speed MECL Cir-
cuits," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1972, AN-586,
P 3.
1/4
INPUT BUFFER FOR 100-MHz COUNTER— Can

be used with 500-ohm probe for wide range of
high-frequency input signal levels and wave-
forms, as part of frequency counter using stan-
dard emitter-coupled logic. Opamps used have
50-ohm input impedance. 450-ohm resistor in
series with coax gives 10:1 attenuation factor
(80 mV at amplifier input when measuring 800-
mV ECL swing).— W. R. Blood, Jr„ "Measure
Frequency and Propagation Delay with High
Speed MECL Circuits," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
1972, AN-586, p 3.
40:1 SCALER FOR 1200 MHz — Uses Fairchild

11C05 divide-by-4 counter and 95H90 decade
divider. Unused CP input is tied to ground. Tran-
sistor translates ECL level to TTL for driving one
unit load. Operates from single regulated power
supply. Input may be AC or DC coupled so either
input amplifier or simple bias network (also
given in article) may be used. 10K resistor from
pin 4 to ground eliminates noise triggering in
middle frequency ranges.— D. Schmieskors,
1200-MHz Frequency Scalers, Ham Radio, Feb.
1975, p 38-40.
SCALER FOR CB — Low-cost prescaler for low-

range frequency counter permits accurate mon-
itoring of 450-MHz CB transceiver. Fairchild
11C90 decade counter gives division by 10 for
counters covering up to 45 MHz. For lower-
range counter, add 74196 TTL decade counter
as shown to give total division by 100 for con-
version to 4.5-MHz output. D1 and D2 should be
fast-switching diodes such as 1N914 or 1N4148.
Keep input signal under 1 V to avoid damaging
11C90. Will operate from 5-V supply or four D
cells — P. A. Stark, 500 MHz Scaler, 73 Maga-
zine, Oct. 1976, p 62-63.
10:1 SCALER — Used to increase range of fre-

quency counter. Sensitivity is 20 mV at 175
MHz, 40 mV at 220 MHz, and 90 mV at 250 MHz.
Fairchild 1C is used. Simple L-section filter at
output rolls off frequencies above 30 MHz, al-
lowing scaler to be used up to 250 MHz without
erroneous counting of second or third harmon-
ics of square-wave output of scaler if counter in
use will respond to 60 MHz or more.— E. Guerri,
Frequency Pre-Scaler, Ham Radio, Feb. 1973, p
57.
COMMON -CATHODE LED DISPLAY
l'U‘U LJ U U I
1'U‘UI II II If
6. 5536 -MHz
CRYSTAL
counter and display. Square wave is further di-

vided to produce 0.1-sand 0.01-s counting gates
along with reset and update commands. RCA
INPUT CONDITIONING
3130 opamp is used for conditioning of input
10 Hz TO 2 MHz — Seven-decade Intersil 7208 ing waveform from 7207 1C which divides signal.— D. Lancaster, "CMOS Cookbook,”
latched and multiplexed frequency counter Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 380-
6.5536-MHz crystal oscillator output by 2 ‘ to
with direct digit and display drive obtains tim- produce 1600-Hz square wave for multiplexing 382.
363
FREQUENCY COUNTER CIRCUITS
100 MHz
100-MHz CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR— Developed

for frequency counter that uses standard ECL
components. Crystal can be changed to 10 MHz
when measuring TTL performance. — W. R.
PREAMP FOR CMOS LOGIC — Combination of Blood, Jr., "Measure Frequency and Propaga-
CA3130 and CD4010 ICs provides broad fre-
tion Delay with High Speed MECL Circuits,"
quency response at very low power levels, as Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1972, AN-586, p 3.
required for driving frequency counter. Diodes
protect input from overvoltage. Amplifier offset
control pot is used as trigger level control. Input
sensitivity of amplifier/trigger combination is 50
mV P-P from 1 Hz to 1 MHz. — R. T enny. Counter
Pre-Amp Matches CMOS Logic Capability, EDN
Magazine, Sept. 20, 1976, p 114 and 116.
counter up to prescaler limit of 300 MHz. Read- also gives circuits of high-resolution counters fying the Digital Frequency Counter, Ham
ing of counter must be multiplied by 10. Article using CMOS TTL devices. — H. E. Harris, Simpli- Radio, Feb. 1978, p 22-25.
THREE TIME-BASE WINDOWS— Intersil 7207A

crystal-controlled timer generates precision
gate windows of 10 ms, 100 ms, and 1 sfor use
as time bases, calibration markers, or gate tim-
ers for frequency counters such as 7208. — B.
O'Neil, 1C Timers — the "Old Reliable" 555 Has
Company, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977, p 89-
93.
Vo„,
LOW-DRAIN 2-MHz FRONT END— Simple

CMOS linear front end for 5-MHz battery-oper-
ated counter reduces power drain and makes it
proportional to Input frequency. With no input,
TO CMOS drain is only a few microamperes. Half of
MC14583 CMOS Schmitt trigger forms front
COUNTER
end operating from single 6-V battery used in
counter. Upper frequency limit is about 3 MHz,
and input sensitivity is 400 mV. — D. Aldridge,
CMOS Counter Circuitry Slashes Battery Power
Requirements,
65-71. EDN Magazine, Oct. 20, 1974, p
CHAPTER 32
Frequency Divider Circuits

Provide division ratios in range from 2 to 29 for clock-signal generators,
receivers, transmitters, and event counters. See also Clock Signal, Digital
Clock, Frequency Multiplier, Frequency Synthesizer, and Logic chapters.
DIVIDE BY 7 — Requires only two different types

of chips. Input clock is alternately inverted and
noninverted by gates operating in conjunction
with 3 bits of storage using 852, to give square-
wave output at one-seventh of clock fre-
quency.— C. W. Hardy, Reader Responds to Odd
Modulo Divider in July 1st EDN, EDN Magazine,
Oct. 1, 1972, p 50.
-1/2N
DIVIDE BY 9 WITH SHIFT REGISTER— Uses 7496

as 5-bit shift register, 7486 as EXCLUSIVE-OR
gate, and 7404 as inverter to give division of
square-wave input frequency by 9 while main-
taining 50% duty cycle at output. Article covers
connection changes needed for other division
INPUT
FREQUENCY ratios. With 8-bit shift register, circuit will divide
by as much as 15. Addition of 7486 EXCLUSIVE-
CLOCK OR gate across any outputs, as shown by
INPUT
dashed lines, makes effective output half that
S-REG
of basic TTL circuit. — J. N. Hobbs, Jr., Divide-by-
A
L
N Uses Shift Register, EDN Magazine, Oct. 5,
I I
_r
1976, p 108.
r
365
A B
DIVIDING 40-60 MHz BY 2. 3, OR 4— Division

ratio is controlled externally by making control
terminals A and B high (1) or low (0), as given
in table. Developed for use in receiver requiring
local oscillator covering 10 to 30 MHz. Counter
simplifies tunerdesign. — C. Attenborough, Fast
Modulo-3 Counter, Wireless World, Aug. 1976,
p 52.
division
A B ratl°
1 1 4
0 1 3
Gi“G4 each J4 74 SOON
0 0 2 Cl
FF, & FFj each V2 74S112N c2
Q2
<< R4 8 V
IN 4001
AF DIVISION BY 2 TO 11— Ratio of C2 to Cl de-
S 5.1 k I
termines division ratio, as given in table. When — w—
ir~ -U-
C2 charges to peak point firing voltage of Q2, it
fires and discharges C2, so Cl charges to line
voltage. Q2 then turns off. Next cycle begins
with another positive pulse on base of Q1, dis-
1N4001 C2;
charging Cl. Division range can be changed by D 1
.100 S 5.1 k
utilizing programmable aspect of PUT Q2 and
changing ratio of resistances. — R. J. Haver and TT Division
B. C. Shiner, "Theory, Characteristics and Ap- 0 01 /jF
0.01 /jF
plications of the Programmable Unijunction 0.02 /jF
0.01 IlF
Transistor," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974, AN- 0.01 /JF 0.03 IlF
2
527, p 9. 0.01 /JF 3
0.04 /JF
0.05 fdF
0 01 /JF 4
5
0 01 /JF 0.06 /JF 6
0 08 /JF 7
0.01 /JF
0.01 /J F 0.07 /JF 8
0.09 /JF
0.01
0.01 /JF
Id F 9
10
0 1 /JF
11
DIVIDER FOR 7 MHz— Used after 7-MHz VFO of

40-meter transmitter, to provide 3.5 MHz as re-
quired for operation in 80-meter band. Half of
7474 TTL D flip-flop U1 is connected in divide-
by-2 configuration. U2 provides required well-
regulated 5-V source. Q1 clips negative-going
portion of 7-MHz sine wave to prevent damage
to 7474. Square-wave 3.5-MHz output from U1
is applied to source-follower Q2 which drives
class A amplifier output stage Q3. RFC1 and
RFC2 are 10 pH. Cl is 6.8-pF 10-V tantalum. C2
is 100-pF mica. LI is 41 turns No. 26 enamel
spaced to fill entire T-80-2 core, to give 10 pH.—
S. Creason, A VFO Frequency Divider, QST,
Nov. 1976, p 23-24.
FREQUENCY DIVIDER CIRCUITS 367
DIVIDER WITH PULSE SHAPER— Half of Exar

XR-2556 dual timer divides input pulse fre-
quency by 2 or 3, and other half shapes output
pulse by controlling duty cycle over range that
can be adjusted from 1%to 99% with R2. Supply
voltage can be 4.5-16 V.— "Timer Data Book,"

p 23-30.
DUAL-TIMER TONE STEPPER— One section of

RS556 dual timer is connected as free-running
astable MVBR for supplying pulses to trigger
input of other section connected as mono
MVBR driving loudspeaker. When both MVBRs
are adjusted so one trigger pulse initiates each
timing period and no trigger pulses occur dur-
ing timing periods, output tone has frequency
of free-running MVBR. With two trigger pulses
per timing cycle, every other trigger pulse is ig-
nored and tone is at half frequency. With three
trigger pulses per cycle, output is one-third of
frequency. Can be used for classroom demon-
stration ofelectronic music; settings of R1 and
R3 can be adjusted to give tones resembling vi-
olin, bagpipes, or almost any other instru-
ment.— F. M. Mims, "Integrated Circuit Proj-
p 70-78.
v+ ( + 10Vto+15V)
PLL DIVIDER — Simple phase-locked loop is suit-

able for generating integral submultiples M of
input frequency. Values shown give M of 2.
Square-wave input reference is limited in am-
plitude to supply voltage by first CMOS inverter
A3A. RC network R9-C2 integrates output to give
2 V P-P triangle across C2 for sampling by sam-
ple-and-hold switch sections S, and S2 of 4016
CMOS analog switch. Sampled error voltage of
loop, stored on CH2, is read out by FET amplifier
A2. Amplified error voltage is applied to A,
through R5 to induce changes in center fre-
quency of A, as required to maintain locked con-
dition.— W. G. Jung, "1C Timer Cookbook,"
224.
UHF PRESCALER— Uses Fairchild 11C06 700-

MHz D flip-flop as divide-by-20 UHF prescaler
with toggle rates in excess of 550 MHz from 0
to 75°C. Amplifier may be used in place of input
bias network shown. Developed for use with
95H90 decade divider. Unused CP and D inputs
are tied to ground. — D. Schmieskors, 1200-MHz
Frequency Scalers. Ham Radio, Feb. 1975, p 38-
40.
+5V +5V +5V +5V
DIVIDE BY 15 — Input clock is alternately in-

verted and noninverted by gates operating in
conjunction with 4 bits of storage using 852 JK
flip-flops, to give square-wave output at 1/15 of
clock frequency.— C. W. Hardy, Reader Re-
sponds to Odd Modulo Divider in July 1st EDN,
EDN Magazine, Oct. 1, 1972, p 50.
DIVIDER DATA
RATIO INPUTS
N D C B A
3 0 0 Q Q
5 0 0 1 Q
7 0 Q Q Q
9 0 1 0 Q
13 0 1 Q Q
11
15 0 1 1 Q
17 Q Q Q Q
1 0 0 Q
<o
19
1 0 Q Q
23 1 0 1 Q
21 1 Q Q Q
25 1 1 0 Q
1 1 Q Q
29
27 1 1 1 Q
BORROW
(2)
Y
FF, -0 @
FF,- 0 f~\ -3.5- -3.5 -

(f - N) ©
3 TO 29 ODD-MODULO — Basic divider using connections as shown in table, all with sym- ternately byM and M + 1. Connection shown is
74193 4-bit up/down counter and single 7474 metrical output waveforms. Based on writing for divide-by-7. — V. R. Godbole, Simplify De-
dual D flip-flop provides any odd number of di- any odd number N as N = M + (M + 1), where sign of Fixed Odd-Modulo Dividers, EDN Mag-
vider ratios from 3 to 29 by changing feedback M is integer. Circuit forces counter to divide al- azine, June 5, 1975, p 77-78.
FREQUENCY DIVIDER CIRCUITS 369
DIVIDE BY 5 — Requires only two digital chip

types. Input clock is alternately inverted and
noninverted for clocking divide-by-3 counter, to
give effect of dividing by 2'k which toggles A3 to
give symmetrical divide-by-5 output with 50%
duty cycle for pulses. Article gives timing dia-
gram and traces operation of circuit. — C. W.
Hardy, Reader Responds to Odd Modulo Divider
in July 1st EDN, EDN Magazine, Oct. 1, 1972, p
50.
+ 5V
SQUARE-WAVE DIVIDER — Divides input

square wave by 1, 2, 5, or 10 depending on
which switch is open. Signal at OUT-1 is in-
verted with respect to input, and OUT-2 is non-
inverted.— Circuits, 73 Magazine, June 1977, p
49.
MM74C74 MM74C74
PROGRAMMABLE COUNTER — Input frequency

can be divided by any number between 1 and
16 by pressing appropriate key on keyboard
connected to National MM74C922 16-key en-
coder. Output frequency is symmetrical for odd
and even divisors. Can be used for simple fre-
quency synthesis or as keyboard-controlled
CRO trigger. Operates over standard CMOS
supply range of 3-15V. Typical upper frequency
limit is 1 MHz with 10-V supply. Circuit uses two
MM74C74 dual D flip-flops and MM74C86 EX-
CLUSIVE-OR package. — "CMOS Databook,"
p 5-50-5-51.
1 0-MHz FRONT END — Front-end design for bat- logic 1 (about 10 V), for which suitable counter
tery-operated 5-MHz counter consists of FET circuit is given in article. Accepts any input
and bipolar buffer followed by Schmitt trigger waveform shape and level. — D. Aldridge, CMOS
made from MC75108 dual line receiver. Circuit Counter Circuitry Slashes Battery Power Re-
operates linearly up to 10 MHz with 25-mV input quirements, EDN Magazine, Oct. 20, 1974, p 65-
signal. Requires swings from logic 0 (0 V) to 71.
SYMMETRICAL DIVIDE-BY-5 CLOCK— Uses clocked at midbit time. Both phases are recom-
74163 counter to generate two phases of 1-MHz bined ingate G, to give 2-MHz clock that toggles
clock pulse with 50% duty cycle from 5-MHz FF2 to generate desired 1-MHz output. — L. A.
system reference. One phase is decode of binary Mann, Divider Circuit Maintains Pulse Symme-
4 from counter, while other is decode of 1 try, EDN Magazine, July 1, 1972, p 54-55.
ci°ck s~ u- L_ri— n_r

control
SWITCHED DIVIDER FOR BINARY COUNTER—

Simple circuit provides method of switching
division by two into or out of stream of clock
pulses. Output is in phase with input and free
of spikes. Switching requires only one D-type
flip-flop and one inverter. When control is high,
logic action gives normal connection for divi-
DIVIDE BY 5 WITH TWO GATES AND 3 BITS — square-wave output pulses having 50% duty sion by two, using D-type flip-flop; inverter then
Arrangement shown for dividing clock input cycle — C. L. Maginniss, Another Reader Re- restores phase.— J. M. Firth, Control of a Binary
Counter for Division by One or Two, Wireless
frequency by5 requires only two gates from 846 spondsto Odd Modulo Divider, EDN Magazine, World, Jan. 1975, p 12.
1C and 3 bits of 852 JK flip-flop storage to give Oct. 15, 1972, p 57.
CHAPTER 33
Frequency Measuring Circuits

Includes direct-reading heterodyne frequency meters, synchroscopes, dip
meters, tuning indicators, frequency-to-voltage converters, tachometers, and
monitors showing when input frequency or pulse rate is above or below
reference, for variety of frequencies in range from 1 Hz through power-line
and audio values to 150 MHz. See also Frequency Counter and Frequency
Multiplier chapters.
_n tl
PRF MONITOR — Upper channel latches when

pulse repetition frequency of train of pulses is
higher than specified limits, turning on above-
limit LED driven by JK flip-flop FF, . Lower chan-
nel latches and turns on its LED when PRF is
below second specified limit. Upper channel
also detects single noise pulse, while lower
channel detects single missing pulse. After off-
limit indication, circuit must be reset. — L. Birk-
wood and D. Porat, PRF Monitor with Adjusta-
bleEnd Limits, EDNIEEE Magazine, Feb. 1, 1972,
p 57-58.
INPUT
FREQUENCIES
GATES 7486
BEAT-FREQUENCY DISPLAY — Apparent rota- of beat frequency between two tone oscillators. terclockwise. When FI equals F2, dot does not
tion of dot on four-LED display gives indication When FI is greater than F2, dot rotates clock- move. — Circuits, 73 Magazine, July 1977, p 35.
371
55 pF
GRID-DIP METER — Uses ordinary No. 48 or 49

pilot lamp as resonance indicator. Will oscillate
at frequencies up to 12 MHz. Wind LI to cover
desired frequency ranges — Circuits, 73 Maga-
zine, April 1973, p 133.
LED SYNCHROSCOPE — Circuit uses four LEDs

to indicate direction of phase error as correct 150 2N3702
setting is approached when tuning oscillator to

standard frequency. Lamps form display that
rotates once per cycle at reference frequency,
with brightness of each lamp being modulated
at frequency of oscillator being adjusted. Dis-
play thus appears to have frequency equal to
difference between two signal frequencies, ro-
tating in direction indicative of sense of fre-
quency difference. Mount lamps on smallest
possible circle. Diode and LED types are not crit-
ical.— R. H. Pearson, An L.E.D. Synchroscope,
Wireless World, Sept. 1974, p 321.
PI J1 i
® 0 AUDIBLE DIPPER — Designed for use by blind

radio amateurs, but tone indication has advan-
tage of permitting anyone to concentrate on
equipment while checking antenna, tracking
parasitics, or neutralizing amplifier with dip
meter. Plug-in coils L1-L6 are Heathkit parts 40-
1689 through 40-1695. Q1, 02, and Q4 are Radio
Shack RS-201 1 or equivalent, and Q3 is RS-2021
or equivalent. Pitch of tone heard from loud-
speaker drops sharply when tuned circuit of dip-
per becomes loaded by external source. — W. E.
Quay, An Auditory Dip Oscillator, QST, Sept.
1978, p 25-27.
-X- SHELL OF J2
INSULATED
FROM CASE.
IN MICROFARADS ( jiF ) ; OTHERS
ARE IN PICOFARADS ( pF OR jjJjF);
LSI
RESISTANCES ARE IN OHMS',
8 OHMS
k *1000, M=1 000 000
FREQUENCY MEASURING CIRCUITS 373
FREQUENCY-TO-VOLTAGE CONVERTER— Na-

tional LM122 timer is used as tachometer by
averaging output pulses with simple filter.
Pulse width is adjusted with R2to provide initial
calibration at 10 kHz. Linearity is about 0.2% for -r
output range of 0—1 V. Analog meter can be dri-
ven directly by connecting it in series with R5.
Supply can range from 4.5 to 40 V. — C. Nelson,
"Versatile Timer Operates from Microseconds
to Hours," National Semiconductor, Santa
Clara, CA, 1973, AN-97, p 10.
16 9-
g;
INPUT
3 100
Ljoj (ci
PULL-UP — 470pF
.O.OInf
RATE DETECTOR — Only three ICs are used to GNDO—

G,
sense pulse rate of input signal with high ac- O— ff^ca 5
curacy. For monitoring frequency, two such cir- 12
cuits can be used, with one set to upper fre-
quency limit and other to lower limit. Output is CP
high when input pulse rate is above set point Q
and low for frequencies below set point. Fre- ff2 CLR (B)
quency of set point is reciprocal of monostable
ff3
delay time (f„ = 1/0.32R2C2). — J. W. Poore, Three
IC's Accurately Sense Pulse Rate, EDN Maga- +5V CP
zine, Aug. 15, 1972, p 53.
l
nr C
REF TYPE PULL-UP
SN7400N 14
SN54121N 14 5
SN7474N 14
2, 4, 10, 13
STANDBY-GENERATOR FREQUENCY ME-

TER— Developed for use with 10-60 VAC gen-
erator driven by lawn mower engine, as guide
for adjusting speed manually to give correct
power-line frequency. Output of alternator,
connected to A and B, is converted to regulated
10 VDC by R„ D,, D:, and C2. Same input voltage
is squared by Tr, and fed to Tr2 through differ-
entiating circuit. Current pulses developed in
collector circuit of Tr2 have constant width and
varying repetition rate depending on input fre-
quency. Inertia of meter movement provides in-
tegration required to give steady reading that
changes only with input frequency. Meter scale
is calibrated from 0 to 100 Hz, with RE adjusted
to give correct reading when 10-60 VAC line
voltage Is applied to input. Power transformer
must be used to boost output of alternator to
correct AC line voltage. — J. M. Caunter, Low-
Cost Emergency Power Generator, Wireless
World, Feb. 1975, p 75-77.
CONNECTIONS TO
FET VIEWED
FROM INSIDE OF
OCTAL PLUG
TRANSISTORS FOR BC-221— Old BC-221 fre-
quency meter can be modernized by replacing
its three now-scarce tubes with four2N3819 N-
channel JFETs and changing supply to single 9-
V battery. VT167 (6K8) mixer-oscillator is re-
placed by two JFETs with R2, R3, and Cl
mounted inside octal plug. Resistance values
may need some adjustment. Cut and insulate 750p
original leads to pins 2, 4, and 7, and connect

top-cap clip of mixer tube to pin 4. VT116-B
(6SJ7-Y) tube used for VFO is replaced by single CONNECTIONS VIEWED FROM INSIDE OF OCTAL PLUG
2N3819 connected as for Q1. Add R1 in parallel
with plate load resistor; value depends on par- METHOD OF MOUNTING THE FET, 01 AND 02
ticular FET used, and can range from 1 to 6800
ohms (1500 is typical). VT116 (6SJ7) beat-fre- (B)
quency amplifier is replaced by 2N3819
mounted same as for Q1. Place 4K across 15K
load resistor of VT116-B and replace 300-ohm
cathode resistor with one giving 1-mA source
current (typically IK to 3.3K). Total current drain
is about 3 mA, Try 3-10 pF capacitor between
gate and drain of Q3 if circuit does not oscil-
late.—R. S. N. Rau, Solid-State BC-221 Fre-
quency Meter, QST, Feb. 1977, p 35-36.
(C)
PARALLELING THE ANODE LOAD RESISTOR (19) BY R1
1-1/4
1-3/8
Frequency 1-H2
range Coil diameter and turns Wire size and
32
(MHz) 38 coil const.
1 (inches)
35 25 (mm)
1000
.08 - 0.2 700 750 800 No. 30 enam., 5 pies.
40
220 240 No. 30 enam., 5 pies.
0.205 - 0.6 100 256
110
49 310
140
45
0.5 - 1.4 90 22 No. 30 enam., close wound.
0.95 - 3 18 No. 22 enam., close wound.
2.6 - 6 20 29
12
64 No. 22 S. C. enam., 1-3/4"
long (44 mm)
5.5 — 15 7 8 9 2-1/2
No. 22(38S.mm)
long C. enam., 1-1/2"
14 - 35 GATE DIPPER — Used to determine resonant
2 2 2 No. 22 S. C. enam., length
indicated at bottom of frequency of tuned circuit, provide signal for re-
((11/16")
1 7 mm) (19 mm) (25 mm) column. ceiver alignment, and make antenna measure-
(25 mm)
(3/4") (1") ments. Table gives winding data for plug-in
(1”) coils LI. Parts values are not critical. T2 is tran-
sistor interstage audio transformer with 10,000-
ohm primary and 2,000-ohm secondary in meter
circuit. JFET Q1 is used in common-drain circuit
followed by PNP bipolar transistor, with gate
junction of JFET acting as rectifier. Dip meter
Ml measures gate current. When tuned circuit
of dipper is loaded by coupling it to external cir-
cuit, power is absorbed and meter reads dip oc-
curring when L1-C1 is tuned to resonance with
external circuit. R1 is regeneration control.
Audio amplifer Q3-Q4 using 2N4125 or HEP52,
optional, helps in listening to signals picked up
by tuned circuit or enhances display on CRO.
Can be used as field-strength meter if antenna
is plugged into J1 .— B. Clark, A Hybrid Gate-Dip
Oscillator, QST, June 1974, p 33-37.
375
FREQUENCY MEASURING CIRCUITS
FREQUENCY INDICATOR — Circuit furnishes

green indication at resonance and red for either
side of resonance. Uses Monsanto MV5491 dual
red/green LED, with 220 ohms in upper lead to
+5 V supply and 100 ohms in lower +5 V lead
because red and green LEDs in parallel back-to-
back have different voltage requirements. Use- FREQUENCY-DOUBLING TACHOMETER— Con-
ful for SSTV, RTTY, or subaudio-tone indication nection shown for National LM2907 1C provides
for control purposes on FM. Circuit requires two output pulse each time sine-wave input from
driver ICs and one section of hex inverter 1C, magnetic pickup crosses zero, for use in digital
with any suitable active filter used to form level control system. Width of each pulse is deter-
detector for signals at desired frequency.— K. mined by size of Cl and supply voltage used.
Powell, Novel Indicator Circuit, Ham Radio, Circuit serves for doubling frequency presented
April 1977, p 60-63. to microprocessor control system.— "Linear
Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-162, p 12-13.
DIPPER— Circuit of Heath HD-1250 solid-state

dip meter covers 1.6-250 MHz range with six
plug-in coils — The Heath HD-1250 Dip Meter,
QST, Jan. 1976, p 38-39.
BICYCLE SPEED ALARM — Useful for long-dis-

tance bicycling, to indicate when rider drops
below predetermined minimum speed. Speed
sensor is reed switch attached to frame and
tripped once per revolution by permanent mag-
net mounted on wheel. Rate at which switch
closes determines level of DC voltage produced
by circuit. When voltage drops below preset
level determined by lOOKpot, output transistor
comes on and energizes relay controlling bicy-
cle horn or other signaling device. Supply can
by 9-V transistor battery. Transistor reading
should be high enough to handle relay used. —
J. Sandler, 9 Projects under $9, Modem Elec-
tronics, Sept. 1978, p 35-39.
+ V to pin 14, return to pin 7
Voltage output
Oto lOv.
GATE DIPPER — Solid-state version of vacuum-

tube grid-dip meter gives dip from 50 to about
20 p A on most bands in range of 1.8 to 150 MHz
when dipper is held 1 inch away from resonant
circuit under test. Uses Siliconix 2N5398 UHF
JFET, but MPF107 (2N5486) can also be used.
Coil tap position is more critical at higher fre- 0-10 kHz TO 0-10 VDC— Raytheon 4151VFC
quencies; adjust tap for most pronounced dip. voltage-to-frequency converter is used in re-
Article gives coil data for five frequency verse as linear frequency-to-voltage converter.
ranges. — C. G. Miller, Gate-Dip Meter, Ham Applications include use in pairs as complete
Radio, June 1977, p 42-43. data transmission system, for remote monitor-
ing of DC voltage such as output of SWR bridge
located at junction of antenna with transmis-
sion line. DC voltage is changed into audio volt-
age at remote location, sent over lines, then
changed back to DC at readout location. Line
characteristics do not affect frequency of audio
signal. — J. J. Schultz, A Voltage-to-Frequency
Converter 1C with Amateur Applications, CQ,
Jan. 1977, p 39-41 and 75.
SPARK-COIL TACHOMETER— Input to National

LM2917 tachometer 1C is taken from spark-coil
distributor terminal of gasoline engine. Fre-
quency of input signal is converted to voltage
for driving meter. Circuit is set up for number of
cylinders on engine by adding link for appropri-
ate timing resistor. Zener protects 1C from tran-
sients found in auto battery circuit. — "Linear
HETERODYNE FREQUENCY METER— Circuit

consists of 1-2 MHz oscillator Q1, untuned
mixer XI, and AF beat-note amplifier Q2. C4 is
calibrated to read directly in frequency from 1
to 2 MHz, using accurate unmodulated RF signal
generator. After calibration, unknown RF signal
input frequency is fed into meter for zero-beat-
ing with harmonics of calibrated oscillator.
Magnetic headphones plugged into J1 make
beat note audible. On second harmonic, dial of
C4 covers 2-4 MHz; on twentieth harmonic,
coverage is 20-40 MHz. LI is 65 turns No. 28
enamel on 1-inch form, tapped 20 turns from
ground. L2 is 10 turns No. 28 enamel close-
wound around center of LI. — R. P. Turner, "FET
Circuits," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
1977, 2nd Ed., p 144-146.
R0 6.8k;;
HIGH-PRECISION FA/ — Use of integrator

opamp with frequency-to-voltage connection
of RM4151 converter gives increased accuracy
and linearity for converting square-wave inputs
of 0—10 kHz to proportional output voltage in
range of -10 V to 0 V. — "Linear Integrated Cir-
cuit Data Book," Raytheon Semiconductor Di-
vision, Mountain View, CA, 1978, p 7-39.
+ 15V
FA/ WITH 4151 — Uses Raytheon 4151 as fre-

quency-to-voltage converter for generating cur-
rent pulses having precise amplitude and width.
Average value of output pulse train is directly
proportional to input frequency. Article gives
design equations. Response time can be im-
proved and ripple reduced by using second-
order (double-pole) low-pass filter as shown in
diagram (b). Ripple is less than 0.1 V P-P over
range of 1 0 to 1 0,000 Hz when R, and R2 are 1 00K
CALIBRATION:
and C, and C2 are 0.1 /xF. — T. Cate, 1C V/F Con-
1.SET f)N TO 10 Hz. ADJUST OFFSET FOR -lOmVOUTPUT. verters Readily Handle Other Functions Such as
2. SET f,N TO 10 kHz. ADJUST OFFSET FOR -10V OUTPUT. FA/, A/D, EDN Magazine, Jan. 5, 1977, p 82-86.
R2 R1
10k 10k
TACHOMETER USING MAGNETIC PICKUP— mines accuracy of unit over temperature range.
Signal frequency proportional to shaft speed Use equivalent zener-regulated LM2917 1C if
being measured is fed into National LM2907 1C output voltage must be independent of varia-
for conversion to output voltage that is propor- tions in supply voltage. — "Linear Applications,
tional to Input frequency. Output is zero at zero Vol. 2," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
frequency. Quality of timing capacitor Cl deter- CA, 1976, AN-162, p 3-4.
SPEED SWITCH — National LM2907 tachometer

1C is used as switch to energize load when input
frequency exceeds value corresponding to pre-
determined speed limit. Automotive applica-
tions include use as overspeed warning that ac-
tivates audible and/or visual indicator when
auto speed exceeds legal limit or other desired
value. Another application is increasing inten-
sity of auto or taxi horn above predetermined
speed such as 45 mph. Input is variable-reluc-
tance magnetic pickup positioned against teeth
of gear wheel; in typical setup, pickup output is
16.6 Hz at 60 mph. Values shown for compara-
tor-controlling components R1 and Cl (below
1C) give switching operation at about 16.6 Hz at
input. Report gives design procedure for other
FET DIP OSCILLATOR — High input impedance spaced to 1 inch for 20-45 MHz, and 4.5 turns frequencies.
AN-162,tional — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," Na-
p 8. Semiconductor,
of FET makes performance comparable to that No. 22 spaced to 1 inch for 40-95 MHz. Adjust Santa Clara, CA, 1976,
of tube-type grid-dip oscillator. Six plug-in coils R1 to set meter pointer to desired portion of
are wound on Millen 45004 1-inch 4-pin forms scale before tuning for dip. R1 provides some
or equivalent. Use 150 turns No. 32 enamel for control of volume when using headphones. — R.
1. 1-2.5 MHz, 77 turns No. 28 for 2.5-5 MHz, 35 P. Turner, "FET Circuits," Howard W. Sams, In-
turns No. 22 for 5-11 MHz, 17 turns No. 22 dianapolis, IN, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 134-136.
spaced to 1 inch for 10-25 MHz, 8.5 turns No. 22
CURSOR .
POSITION
MARKER
ALARM FOR SPECTRUM ANALYZER— Circuit

drives audible alarm when frequency of Interest
appears in spectrum range. Display cursor can
be preset to Initiate narrow search band in
which fx is expected to appear. 100- jus pulse rep-
resenting cursor position in display sweep trig-
gers mono 1C, so its output becomes window
whose time-out is equivalent to band in which
f x is center. Comparator A, supplies high output
when fx appears. Simultaneous arrival of this
signal and timer window at gate A sets output
LINEAR (qL
of left flip-flop high. At end of window period,
SPECTRUM ^
SIGNAL +5V
right flip-flop also goes high and initiates alarm
via Q,. Loss of fx stops alarm. — R. L. Messick,
Alarm Simplifies Spectrum-Analyzer Measure-
ments, EDN Magazine, June 5, 1978, p 152.
v+
SPEED ALARM — Frequency detector using two
1C timers provides alarm output when input fre-
quency isgreater than reference frequency, cor-
responding to overspeed. Calibrated mono
MVBR A, produces fixed-width positive pulse
across R2, with average voltage of pulse varying
linearly with input pulse train frequency. Com-
parator A2changes states when integrated out-
put of R3-C, on pin 5 goes above or below 2-V
voltage threshold of A2. With values shown, de-
sired frequency is 1 kHz and circuit detects fre-
quency variation of less than 1%. If low-fre-
quency alarm is desired, connect logic input pin
2 of A2 to reference voltage (pin 4) instead of to
ground. — W. G. Jung, "1C Timer Cookbook,"
230.
CR,
GRID-DIP OSCILLATOR— Millen 90652 solid- with seven plug-in coils. Oscillator also func- load protection for MOSFET. Meter is sup-
state grid-dip oscillator uses MOSFET operating tions as Q multiplier that increases sensitivity. pressed-zero type, with readings only for upper
in split-Colpitts circuit with resonating tank RF voltage across tuned circuit is indicated by portion of current range. J3 is provided for use
connected between drain and gate. Circuit is meter whose reading dips for resonance with with low-frequency coils. — W. M. Scherer, CQ
tuned by split-stator variable capacitor with coupled test circuit. Full-wave rectifier CR,-CR2 Reviews: The Millen Model 90652 Solid-State
rotor grounded, chosen to cover 1.7 to 300 MHz provides DC voltage for meter and some over- Dipper, CQ, Sept. 1971, p 63-64, 66, and 96.
HI-LO LED FREQUENCY DISPLAY— Apparent outputs are square waves with mark-space ra- and reference frequencies. Correct positioning
rotation of flashing LEDs around square indi- tios at half original frequency. Square waves are of LEDs in square is shown on small diagram.
cates whether input frequency is above or gated together to produce rectangular pulse Reference frequency input should be via
below reference frequency. Input and reference train having mark-space ratio that depends on BC108B (not shown), same as for input fre-
waveforms may have any shape, because phase difference between the two square quency.— C. Clapp, Beat-Frequency Indicator,
Wireless World, Nov. 1976, p 63.
Schmitt triggers reshape both to give rectan- waves. Logic is arranged to drive LEDs at rota-
gular pulses which flip-flops divide by two so tion rate of half the difference between input
vcc
TACHOMETER WITH SQUARE-WAVE OUT-

PUT— National LM2907 tachometer 1C provides
square-wave output at same frequency as sine
wave generated by magnetic pickup, for use as
line driver in automatic control system. — "Lin- ■O
ear Applications, Vol. 2," National Semiconduc-

tor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-162, p 12-13.
v+
A,V(+9
r V to +15 V)
Full-Scale
I
R,
C, Calibrate
I
0.1 MF
XL v+
J“1
Trigger R,
L
TR — /Wl —
DC Output
322 C
560 left R/C lOMn Full Scale = 5 V
GND 1 500 pF
T
C ,* __
3.9 kn
I
R*
‘
1 500 pF
FREQUENCY METER — High-precision fre- full-scale voltage value of +5 V. Two-pole filter

quency-to-voltage converter can be used as fre- removes ripple from positive output pulses
quency meter in laboratory. Input frequency across R1 before signal is fed to 3130 opamp that Jung, "1C Timer Cookbook," Howard W. Sams,
range up to 1 kHz is converted to corresponding provides gain and zero adjustments. — W. G. Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 192-196.
FREQUENCY RANGE (Hz)
UNKNOWN
FREQUENCY
INPUT
I VRMS
AF METER — Timer IC1 forms basis for linear fre- gered by unknown input frequency. Article cov- pin 2. — G. Hinkle, 1C Audio Frequency Meter, 73
quency meter covering audio spectrum. Mono ers operation and calibration. Errata: pin 4 of Magazine, Holiday issue 1976, p 61.
MVBR puts out fixed-width pulse when trig- 555 should be connected to pin 8 instead of to
to 2 MHz, providing one logic level when input

iNyi4 rate crosses set point and opposite logic level
when input rate falls below set point. Set-point
-• — /vv — » rate is reciprocal of MVBR time, or 1/R,C,. Two
-wv^~
1 5M
periods of input signal are sufficient for re-
sponse to rate change. Value of C2 is R,C,/1.5
x 106. — J. M. Toth, Versatile Circuit Forms Ac:
■i(MC1401 1 ) I G, curate Pulse-Rate Detector, EDN Magazine ,
Aug. 20, 1977, p 142-143.
RATE LOW OUTPUT D C

Q
’41 MCI 401 3)
RATE HIGH OUTPUT D FLIP FLOP
Q R
S
1
0-
F/V WITH OUTPUT FILTER— Two-pole low-pass

active filter improves dynamic range and re-
sponse time of Raytheon 4152 frequency-to-
voltage converter. Ripple in output is less than
0.02VP-P above 100Hz. Requires ±15 Vsupply.
Maximum input frequency is 10 kHz when CIN is
0.002 /*F, R0 is 6.8K, and C0 is 0.01 /ltF. — "Linear
Integrated Circuit Data Book," Raytheon Semi-
conductor Division, Mountain View, CA, 1978
p 7-48.
LI
Rf R2 R3 SI 15 15
FREQ. RANGE 10
Cl
33 C2
10 71-1 /2
MHz TURNS
10
33 39-1/2
3. 4-5.1 6-1/2
25-1/2
14-1/2
10 4-1/2
2.3-4 10 33
4.8-8 10 2-1/2
7.9-13
12.8-21.2
10 33
33
Not 33
21-34
34-60 33
60-110 Not *
90-200 * *
used
used PF
’denotes a 1-1/2-turn coil of pF No. 18 enam.

wire wound on a 1 /2-inch form spaced 1 18
inch between turns. It should be placed so
that the coil is near the top of the coil form,
••denotes a hairpin loop made from flashing
copper, 3/8-inch wide X 1-7 /8-inch total
length.
All other coils are wound with No. 24
enam. wire.
MOSFET DIP METER — Output of grounded- reaches 250 MHz when LI is reduced to hairpin. shown if drain resistor R„ is shorted. Battery
drain Colpitts oscillator using RCA N-channel Table gives values of plug-in assembly L1-C1-C2 drain is about 20 mA. All coils are wound on
dual-gate MOSFET Q1 is detected by CR1 and for nine frequency ranges. Circuit was designed Millen 45004 forms. — F. Bruin, A Dual-Gate
amplified by Q2 for driving meter. Frequency of for 12-V supply but works well with 9-V battery MOSFET Dip Meter, QST, Jan. 1977, p 16-17.
oscillation depends on Cl, C2, C3, and LI, and
+ 15V VOLTAGE
OUTPUT
GATE-DIP FET OSCILLATOR — Meter indicates

gate current, which drops whenever resonant
load is placed on tank circuit of oscillator by
bringing plug-in input coil near frequency
source being checked. By opening switch to
power supply, circuit can be used as absorption
wavemeter; when signal at resonant frequency
of dip-meter tank circuit is picked up, gate-
source circuit of FET operates as diode detector
DESIGN EQUATIONS
for producing increase in meter reading. Values
1 R C -til of plug-in coil and tuning capacitor depend on
VQ f| K 1 Where K 0 486 *
rbroco v
frequency range of interest. — E. M. Noll, "FET
Principles, Experiments, and Projects," Floward
F/V CONVERTER — Single-supply circuit uses 214.
wave input varies between 0 and 10 kHz. — "Lin-
frequency-to-voltage connection of RM4151 ear Integrated Circuit Data Book," Raytheon
converter to make output voltage vary between Semiconductor Division, Mountain View, CA,
0 and +10 V as frequency of 5 V P-P square- 1978, p 7-39.
+ 15 V
HIGH-PRECISION F/V— Components of V/F con- MVBR A2 either directly if pulsed or indirectly scaling amplifier and filter. — W. G. Jung, "1C
verter are reconnected to provide F/V function, after conditioning. For low-frequency or slowly Timer Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianap-
Input frequency up to 10 kHz is fed to 322 mono changing waveforms, zero-crossing detector is olis, IN, 1977, p 192-196.
CHAPTER 34
Frequency Modulation Circuits

Covers FM circuits used in broadcast receivers and transmitters for
monophonic or stereo transmissions, along with FM radio communication
circuits and power-line FM carrier systems. Includes tuning indicators, stereo
decoders, SCA demodulator, and FM deviation meter.
TUNER USES 1C — Availability of Signetics front end permits switched or continuous tun- FM-4 or Toko CFS) before being fed back
NE563 1C having about 180 transistors greatly ing with 100K Helipot or with switched preset through C5 to 1C for mixing with crystal-con-
simplifies construction of high-quality FM 100K pots connected between +12 V and trolled 9.8-MHz local oscillator. Article covers
tuner. 1C includes circuits for converting IF out- ground. Tuning controls can be remotely lo- construction and operation of tuner in detail. —
put signal to lower frequency for driving phase- cated. After 60 dB of amplification in NE563 1C, J. B. Dance, High-Quality F.M. Tuner, Wireless
locked loop of demodulator. Use of varicap signal passes through ceramicfilter F (Vernitron World, March 1975, p 111-113.
383
384
144- MHz FM TRANSMITTER — Low-power cir-

cuit was developed for use with double-conver-
sion continuous- tuning FM receiver suitable for
either fixed or mobile communication on 2-
meter amateur band. Q4-Q6 are part of RCA
CA3018 1C. Power output with 12-V supply is
about 1.5 W. Two crystals are selected by slide
switch; tuning can be compromised to use crys-
tals whose 2-meter outputs are 1 MHz apart.
Article also gives all circuits for receiver. — J. H.
Ellison, Compact Package for Two-Meter FM,
Ham Radio, Jan. 1974, p 36-44.
RFC6
3 turns no. 16 tinned bus wire, RFC9 4 Amidon ferrite beads on V2”
length of no. 24 wire
1/4 M ID. 3/8" long, tapped l/z turn
from C13 end
RFC7
L3 3 Amidon ferrite beads on 1/2"
4 turns no. 22 enamelled wire, RFC8 length of no. 24 wire
closewound, V*" 1 D
25 turns no. 28, closewound on 18-MHz crystal ground for 20-pF
L4
body of 100k, 1-watt resistor load capacitance
GROUND
FM MODULATOR — Developed to permit FM op- Audio from modulator drives variable-capaci- crease deviation to about 8.5 kHz. To reduce
eration on AM transceiver. Consists of micro- tance diode D1 (which can be silicon switching deviation for narrow-band FM, adjust 500K pot
phone preamplifier, driver amplifier, and 8-MHz diode) in oscillator circuit. Adapter feeds AM in preamp.— R. Orozco, Jr., Put That AM Rig on
crystal oscillator providing 24-MHz output. transmitter in which frequency multipliers in- FM, 73 Magazine, April 1976, p 34-35.
FREQUENCY MODULATION CIRCUITS 385
SINGLE-LED TUNING INDICATOR— Circuit

shown, when driven by IF output of FM tuner,
permits tuning for maximum brightness of sin-
gle LED such as 5082-4403. Article gives choice
of two tuning indicator circuit arrangements
that can be used with the SBA750 limiting IF
amplifier and detector 1C. Recommended ver-
sion of tuning indicator uses Plessey SL3046
five-transistor array with discrete resistors and
capacitor to drive LED. Arrangement gives very
i.t. clear, sensitive indication of correct tuning
input point to within a few millivolts. — J. A. Skingley,
Sensitive F.M. Tuning Indicator, Wire/ess
World June 1974, p 173-174.
2-W 2-METER PHASE-LOCKED FM TRANSMIT-

TER— Operating frequency of 144-148 MHz is
generated directly, without using frequency-
multiplier stages. Oscillator stability is achieved
by phase-locking oscillator to crystal. Tuning
range of 143-149 MHz corresponds to varactor
control voltage of 1-4 V, which maintains
proper loop gain across entire band. ECL decade
divider U2 is Plessey SP647 driving Schottky-
clamped divider U3B to give overall division of
50. Phase detector and loop amplifier functions
are in U4. Pierce crystal oscillator Q3 feeds
buffer Q4 interface with TTL levels. Microphone
preamp U5 is slightly overdriven so speech
waveform is clipped or limited. With phase-
locked circuit, frequency stability is as good as
that of crystal used in reference oscillator. Di-
vide desired operating frequency by 25 to get
crystal frequency. — A. D. Helfrick, A Phase-
Locked 2-Meter FM Transmitter, QST, March
1977, p 37-39. Cl -C6, incl. — 1 ,000-pF ceramic feedthrough Q1 - RCA 2N3866 or Motorola HEP S3008
capacitors. transistor.
Cl, C8 — 14- to 150-pF ceramic trimmer Q2 — C3-12, manufactured by Communica-
(Arco 424). tions Transistor Corp., a division of Varian.
CR2, CR3 — BB105 or Motorola MV839 Var- An RCA 2N5913 may be substituted.
icap diode, 82 pF nominal capacitance, Q3, Q4 — RCA transistor.
73.8- to 90.2-pF total range. U1 — 5-volt, 1 -ampere fixed positive regulator.
LI, L3, L7 — 33-mH molded inductor (Miller An LM309K may be substituted.
9230-56). U2 — Plessey Semiconductors integrated cir-
L2 — 1 -1 /2 turns no. 20 enameled wire, 1 74- cuit.
inch diameter, 1 /2-inch long. U3 — Signetics 82S90 or National
L4 — 3 turns no. 28 enameled wire through DM73LS196 integrated circuit.
ferrite bead. U4 — Motorola MC4044 integrated circuit.
L5 — 2.2-mH molded inductor (Miller 9230- U5 — RCA CA3130 integrated circuit.
28). Y1 — Overtone Crystal, 5.76-5.92 MHz, Inter-
L6 — 1-1/2 turns no. 20 enameled wire, 3/8- national Crystal Mfg. Co. Type GP. Crystal
inch diameter, 1-inch long. frequency is discussed in the text.
L8 — 100-juH molded inductor (Miller 9230-
68).
386
-5000 TUNING
left-zero NULL INDICATOR — Uses standard
meter as tuning indicator connected in
basic opamp AC voltmeter configuration using
1C,, with reference buffered by opamp IC2. DC
output voltage of tuner is compared with non-
zero reference voltage; as these voltages ap-
proach each other during tuning, meter pointer
moves toward zero, and abruptly reverses di-
rection as tuning null point is passed. Diode D,
protects meter from overload. Use any low-
leakage diodes for bridge.— A. S. Holden, Sen-
sitive Null Indicator, Wireless World, Oct. 1974
p 381.
(Miller 44000 Note:

Final I.F. C, C2 Cj R, L, Serlw or 1C i can be
Signetics N5111A or
455 kHz 680 pF 3 pF Similar) Motorola MC1357P
.005 22K 135-240 /iHy r
2 Mhz 300 pF 3 pF .005 22K 16-30 /tHy =
4.5 Mhz 120 pF 3 pF .003 22K 7-14 /iHy
ADD-ON FM DETECTOR — Suitable for any com- 5.5 Mhz lOOpF 3 pF .003 22K 5-8 /tHy
munication receiver. Other IF values can be han- 10.7 Mhz 1 00 pF 4.7 pF .01 3.9K 1,5-3 /tHy
dled by changing values of L and C. Connecting
C2 to pin 10 instead of pin 9 may improve per-
in
Last IF
transformer FM 120
formance. Circuit is easy to construct and align;
adjust slug-tuned coil for maximum recovered
audio when receiving FM signal.— I. Math,
Math's Notes, CQ, April 1975, p 37-38 and 62.
.15= .1
ToA.M. To
circuitry detector detector volume
ToAVC ToA.M. ~
control
FM DEMODULATOR — Uses Signetics NE564

PLL having postdetection processor, operatin
g
from 5-V supply. Conversion gain is low so fre-
quency deviation in input signal should be at
least 1%.— "Signetics Analog Data Manual,"
Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 828-830.
FREQUENCY MODULATION CIRCUITS
387
2-METER 1C RF AMPLIFIER— High-gain double

compound amplifier using RCA CA3102E has
low noise, excellent stability, and only two
tuned circuits. Ideal for 2-meter FM RF stage,
but can be used from DC up to 500 MHz by
changing tuned circuits. Article covers con-

struction, with emphasis on proper shielding. —
B. Hoisington, Two High Gain RF Stages in One
1C for Two Meter FM, 73 Magazine, May 1974,
p 47-50 and 52.
FM DEMODULATOR— Uses RCA CA3046

1C IF amplifier connected as highly linear volt-
age-controlled oscillator, in phase-locked loop
configuration capable of handling 10.7-MHz am-
plitude-limited FM input as FM demodulator.
Output AF signal is about 20 mV for 75-kHz de-
viation. FET serves as synchronous-chopper
type of phase-sensitive detector. — J. L. Linsley
Hood, Linear Voltage Controlled Oscillator,
Wireless World, Nov. 1973, p 567-569.
LINEAR FM DEMODULATOR— Exar XR-2212

precision PLL 1C provides linear demodulation
for both narrow-band and wideband FM sig-
nals. Article gives circuit design procedure.
With +12 V supply voltage and 67-kHz carrier
frequency having ±5 kHz frequency deviation,
R„ is 18K fixed resistor in series with 5K pot. C0
(between pins 13 and 14) is 746 pF, R, is 89. 3K,
C, is 186 pF, Rf is 100K, and Rc is 80. 6K. These
values give ±4 V P output swing. All values ex-
cept R0 can be rounded off to nearest standard
value. — "Phase-Locked Loop Data Book," Exar
Integrated Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 35-
40.
388
modern electronic circuits reference manual
0 1 *iF
DEMODULATOR WITH CARRIER DETECT—

Exar XR-567 PLL system is used with XR-21 5 FM
demodulator to detect presence of carrier signal
in narrow-band FM demodulation applications
where bandwidth is less than 10% of carrierfre-
quency. Output of XR-567 is used to turn off FM
demodulator when no carrier is present, giving
squelch action. Circuit will detect presence of
carrier up to 500 kHz.— "Phase-Locked Loop
vale, CA, 1978, p 41-48.
Cl - 8.2 pF Ceramic disc capacitor ni - juu Kiionm,

1/4 W carbon resistor
C2 - 43 pF Dipped, silvered mica capacitor R2 — 27 kilohm, 1/4 W carbon resistor
C3 - 0.2 pF Ceramic tubular capacitor R3 — 62 kilohm, 1/4 W carbon resistor
C4 - 12 pF Ceramic disc capacitor R4 - 56 kilohm, 1/4 W carbon resistor
C5 - 15 pF Dipped, silvered mica capacitor R5 — 220 ohm, 1/4 W carbon resistor
C6, C7, C8, C9, CIO R6 — 910 ohm, 1/4 W carbon resistor
C16 — 220 pF Ceramic disc capacitor LI - 2-1/2 turns no. 20 enameled wire on 9/32"
plastic form with brass slug (70 nH)
C11 - 10 pF Dipped, silvered mica capacitor L2, L4 - 2-1/6 turns no 20 enameled wire on
9/32" plastic form with brass slug (60 nH)
C12 - 0.47 pF Ceramic tubular capacitor
L3 - 1-5/6 turns no. 20 enameled w,re on 9/32"
C13 - 3.6 pF Ceramic tubular capacitor plastic form with brass slug, tapped 1/2 turn
from ground (55 nH)
C14 - 8-60 pF Mica compression trimmer, Arco 404
Cl 5, C19
Q1 -2N
Q2
0.01 /iF Ceramic disc capacitor - 3N 5486 JFET
20 VmOSF ET enameled Wlre °n 9/32" plas,ic ,orm wi,h brass slu9. laPPed 2/3 turn from ground (70 nH)
Cl 7, C18
3 pF Dipped, silvered mica capacitor T1 “ Primary = ’8 turns no. 24 enameled wire on T44 6 Micrometals toroid core
C20 - 24 pF Dipped, silvered mica capacitor Secondary = 4 turns no. 24 enameled wire twisted around last 4 turns of ground end of primary
225-MHz FRONT END — RF stage, mixer, and voltage is 12.5 V. Spurious-response rejection "Economical 225 MHz Receiver Front End
Em
tuned circuits are designed for use in FM com- is 100 dB, image rejection is 97 dB, and noise 22.
ploys FETs," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1978 EB-
munication receiver having local oscillator figure is 12 dB.— J. Hatchett and B. Morgan,
input of 246.4 MHz, for IF of 21.4 MHz. Supply
+v
RELAY OUTPUT
IK
CARRIER-OPERATED RELAY— Relay is ener-

gized when carrier is present in FM receiver, to
activate transmitter for repeater applications or
turn on tape recorders, alarms, or other devices.
Will work with either solid-state or tube-type
receivers. Inverting (minus) input of opamp is
connected directly to collector of audio preamp
transistor or any other point having voltage
change between signal and no signal. If voltage
change is in wrong direction, reverse leads to
opamp input. Use IK pot to set reference volt-
put is boosted by 531 opamp to give deviations age so relay trips reliably on incoming signal.
0.5 MHz WITH 100% DEVIATION — Carrier fre- up to ±100% of carrier frequency. Capacitors C1 Relay can be reed-type drawing less than 75
quency under 0.5 MHz is generated by 566 func- control frequency range of each function gen- mA. — S. Uhrig, The 5 Minute COR, 73 Maga-
tion generator at right, for modulation by other zine, Dec. 1976, p 152-153.
erator.— "Signetics Analog Data Manual," Sig-
566 connected as triangle generator whose out- netics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 852-854.
VARICAP TUNER — Uses silicon variable-capac- stable noise-free regulated power supply that Resistors R can be any value between 100K and
itance diodes to provide voltage tuning over FM also provides required DC tuning voltage of 2 to 1 megohm. — L. Nelson-Jones, F.M. Tuner De-
band of 87.5 to 108 MHz. Article covers con- 30 V. All six varicap diodes are Siemens BB103 sign— Two Years Later, Wireless World, June
struction and adjustment and gives circuit of of same color selection (all green or all blue).
1973, p 271-275.
390
modern electronic circuits reference manual
0 1 mF
tinn „# PM " aemoau,a- erat'°" be'ow 5 MHz, Rx can be opened; above

“f M S,gnals' Value of C° depends on car- 5 MHz, use about 750 ohms.-"Phase-Locked
lOMH^rTn"
0 MHz, range offdrterTnnrnSeleCtiVitV;f0r1-
C, is 10-30 times C„. For op- L°°P °ata B°°k" Exar '"‘grated Systems,
Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 21-28.
STEREO DECODER — Improved circuit for FM can produce audible signals from adjacent for entire FM tuner. All transistors are BC109 or
tuner uses active filters to eliminate subcarrie channels at 100 and 200 kHz away from wanted
r equivalent. LED is 5082-4403. Tr, has roll-off re-
harmonics as well as birdlike interference station. Resulting interference, centered on sponse at 18 dB per octave above 53 kHz, while
14
sounds (birdies) experienced under certain con- kHz and 10 kHz, sounds like high-pitched twit- active filters Tr2 and Tr3 remove harmonics of 38
ditions. Stereo reception normally involves de- tering sounds of birds. Tr, serves as active filter kHz from outputs.— J. A. Skingley and N. C.
modulation of stereo channel at 38 kHz by for suppressing these sounds. This is followed Thompson, Novel Stereo F.M. Tuner, Wireless
square-wave switching, a process that also de- by phase-locked loop type of 1C decoder, oper- World, Part 2— May 1974, p 124-129 (Part 1—
modulates signals around odd harmonics of 38 ation of which is described in article that also April 1974, p 58-62).
kHz. The first two of these, at 1 14 and 190 gives complete circuit and construction details
kHz,
MOSFET RF STAGE — Changing 6AK5 tube to

3N204 dual-gate MOSFET improves sensitivity
and lowers noise in older VHF FM communica-
tion receiver using tubes. Break off center
grounding pin of tube socket and cut wires sol-
dered to pin, then connect transistor circuit to
tube socket as shown. Replace original resistor
going to pin 6 with 120K and run 37K resistor
from pin 6 to ground. Move antenna input lead
to top of RF input coil, and remove 6-V filament
wiring from socket. If tube filaments were in se-
ries, replace 6AK5 filament with 36-ohm 2-W re-
sistor. Conversion increases sensitivity to 0.3
/xV for 20-dB quieting. — H. Meyer, How to Im-
prove Receiver Performance of Vacuum-Tube
VHF-FM Equipment, Ham Radio, Oct. 1976, p
52-53.
TWIN-LED TUNING INDICATOR— Provides

maximum sensitivity at correct tuning point
and indicates direction of mistuning. Both
lamps are in feedback loop of one opamp, con-
nected to serve as highly sensitive null detector.
When set is tuned correctly, output of this
opamp is at midpoint of supply voltage and nei-
ther LED is lit. Circuit is used with RCA CA3089
IF chip in which AFC output is a current. Capac-
itor across first 741 opamp removes modulation
components from this input. — M. G. Smart,
F.M. Tuning Indicators, Wireless World, Dec.
1974, p 497.
+10 VOLTS
SCA DEMODULATOR— VCO of NE565 PLL is set

at 67 kHz and is locked in by incoming 67-kHz
subsidiary-carrier component used for trans-
mitting uninterrupted commercial background
music by FM broadcast stations. Circuit demo-
dulates FM sidebands and applies them to
audio input of commercial sound system
through suitable filter. 5K pot is used to lock
VCO exactly on frequency. Frequency response
extends up to 7000 Hz.— E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C
W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 212-213.
Mull
d2
STEREO DECODER — Single Sprague ULN-

2122A 1C is driven by composite signal derived
at output of standard FM detector, to give orig-
inal left- and right-channel audio signals for
driving audio amplifiers of FM stereo receiver. —
E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C Principles, Experiments,
and Projects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis,
IN, 1974, p 263-266.
T2 1N4002
CAPACITOR VALUES IN PF Q1A-Q1E = LM3046

RESISTOR VALUES IN il
•SELECT FOR CARRIER FREQ.
W to remote loudspeaker. Can be plugged into tector which operates as narrow-band tracking
»o C2 Ci 3
any AC outlet on same side of distribution transfilter for input signal and provides low-distor-
200 kHz 1000 300
former. Carrier signal is taken from line by tuned tion demodulated audio output. Mute circuit
100 kHz 3900 620
transformer T,. Output of two-stage limiter am- quiets receiver in absence of carrier. — J. Sher-
CARRIER-SYSTEM RECEIVER— Used to detect, plifier Q1 A-Q1 D is applied directly to mute peak win, N. Sevastopoulos, and T. Regan, "FM Re-
amplify, limit, and demodulate FM carrier mod- detector D1-Q2-C7. Limiter output is reduced to mote Speaker System," National Semiconduc-
ulated with audio program, for feeding up to 2.5 1 V P-P for driving National LM565CN PLL de- tor, Santa Clara, CA, 1975, AN-146.
SINGLE-TUNED DETECTOR— RCA CA3089E 1C

serves as communication receiver subsystem
providing three-stage FM IF amplifier/limiter
channel, with signal-level detectors for each
stage, and quadrature detector that can be used
with single-tuned detector coil. Detector also
supplies drive to AFC amplifier whose output
can be used to hold local oscillator on correct
frequency. Level-detector stages supply signal
for tuning meter. Values shown are for 10.7-
MHz IF. — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C Principles, Ex-
periments, and Projects," Howard W. Sams, In-
dianapolis, IN, 1974, 347-349.
QUADRATURE DEMODULATOR — Quadrature

coil associated with balanced-mixer demodu-
lation system is connected to pin 6 of National fm i f
LM373 1C, and output signal is taken from pin 7.
Good output is obtained with only ±5 kHz de-
viation at either 455 kHz or 10.7 MHz. Can be
operated as wideband or narrow-band circuit
by choosing appropriate interstage and output
LC and RC components. — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C
BANDPASS
FILTER
PLL IF AND DEMODULATOR— Signetics 10.7 MHz to 900 kHz, where phase detector op- resonator, LC network, crystal, or capacitor. —
NE563B 1C (in dashed lines) serves as complete erates. Ceramic bandpass filter provides IF se- H. Olson, FM Detectors, Ham Radio, June 1976,
IF amplifier and demodulator for FM broadcast lectivity at 10.7 MHz. XI can be 9.8-MHz ceramic
receiver. Circuit uses downconversion from
p 22-29.
c,
0.5 MHz WITH 20% DEVIATION— One 566 func-
tion generator serves for generating relatively
low-frequency carrier (center frequency less
than 0.5 MHz), and other 566 serves as modu-
lator producing triangle output with frequency
determined by Cv Combination is suitable for
deviations up to ±20% of carrier frequency. —
Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 852-853.
LOW-PASS FILTER OR
SINE CONVERTER MAY
BE INSERTED HERE
IF SINUSOIDAL MODULATION
IS REQUIRED
FM DETECTOR — Single 1C can be added to any

receiver not having FM detector. Moving C2
from pin 9 to pin 10 gives higher audio output.
Receivers having less than 5 kHz IF bandwidth
can be broadened by stagger-tuning IF strip
slightly to improve audio clarity. Adjust tuned
circuit of detector for maximum recovered
7-14
4.7
audio.— I. Math, Math's Notes, CQ, June 1972, I.F. Ci (pf)
p 49-51 and 80. 4.5mHz

10. 7 mHz
C 2 (pf)
LiUH)
120
120 3.0
455kHz 300
2 mHz 3.0 16-30
135-240
650
3.0
1.5-3
D3 T2
1N4002 •10VCT
CARRIER-SYSTEM TRANSMITTER— Used to Input permits combining stereo signals for receiver on either side of line. Transmitter input
convert audio program material into FM format mono transmission to single remote loud- can be taken from monitor or tape output jack
for coupling to standard power lines. Modu- speaker. Uses National LM566CN VCO. Fre- of audio system. — J. Sherwin, N. Sevastopou-
lated FM signal can be detected at any other quency response is 20-20.000 Hz, and total har- los, and T. Regan, "FM Remote Speaker Sys-
outlet on same side of distribution transformer, monic distortion is under 0.5% With 120/240 V tem," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
for demodulation and drive of loudspeaker. power lines, system operates equally well with CA, 1975, AN-146.
CRYSTAL DISCRIMINATOR— Inexpensive

third-overtone CB crystal used at 9-MHz fun-
damental serves as high-performance discrim-
inator for VHF FM receiver. Adjust C3 for zero
TRANSISTOR-PUMP DISCRIMINATOR — Used placed between last IF stage and stereo de- voltage with unmodulated carrier at or near
with 10.7-MHz IF strip of high-quality FM tuner coder.— W. Anderson, F. M. Discriminator, center frequency. Adjust Cl and C2 with AF sine
built from discrete components. Circuit is Wireless World, April 1976, p 63. wave applied to FM signal generator, using CRO
to check distortion of recovered sine wave. With
1 V P-P IF signal at 9 MHz and 5-kHz deviation,
recovered audio will be about 1 V P-P at lower
audio frequencies. Good limiter is required
ahead of discriminator for AM rejection. — G. K.
Shubert, Crystal Discriminator for VHF FM,
Ham Radio, Oct. 1975, p 67-69.
LED TUNING INDICATOR— One LED is mounted even very slight mistuning by having one light 21-75 MHz DIODE RECEIVER— Covers 6-meter
at each end of tuning scale. Tuning pointer is come on even slightly. Adjust VR, to give wide band and most 2-meter FM receiver oscillators
moved away from whichever LED is on, to dead enough dead spot so LEDs do not flicker on loud near 45 MHz. Circuit is essentially that of crystal
spot at which both are off, to obtain correct tun- speech or music. — H. Hodgson, Simpler F.M. detector. Jack J3 gives AF output, and J2 gives
ing point. Advantages of lights-off tuning in- Tuning Indicator, Wireless World, Sept. 1975, p DC output for meter. — B. Hoisington, Tuned
clude minimum current drain and indication of 413. Diode VHF Receivers, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1974,
p 81-84.
DEVIATION METER — Uses simple crystal oscil- CRO should be direct-coupled. To calibrate, tion oscillator is sufficient since transmitter
lator combined with fixed or tunable FM retune oscillator either 10 or 15 kHz above or usually deviates equally well both ways. — V.
ceiver and CRO to show carrier shift on either below second oscillator of receiver, and cali- Epp, FM Deviation Meters, 73 Magazine, March
side of center frequency. Vertical amplifier of brate screen of CRO accordingly. One calibra- 1973, p 81-83.
ANALOG PLL AS FM DEMODULATOR— Upper

frequency limit of about 50 MHz for NE562 and
other monolithic analog phase-locked loops
complicates construction of FM telemetry re-
ceivers that directly demodulate standard 88-
108 MHz FM broadcast signals. Circuit shown
solves problem, with only small amount of sig-
nal preconditioning, by first converting RF car-
rier to 10.7 MHz with conventional superhetero-
dyne front end, then applying signal to phase
detector of PLL with VCO set to run free at 10.7
MHz. Input sensitivity is less than 30 pV, and
audio output is greater than 100 mV.— E. Mur-
thi. Monolithic Phase-Locked Loops — Analogs
Do All the Work of Digitals, and Much More,
OPAMP DRIVE FOR LED TUNING LAMPS—

Opamp with 100K feedback resistor gives gain
of 10 as optimum compromise for driving two
LED tuning indicators in FM receiver. — R. D.
Post, F.M. Tuning Indicator, Wireless World,
May 1975, p 220.
(5 6 V > 7 mV/kHjl
to pin 5. Demodulator 1C includes automatic
IF AND STEREO DEMODULATOR— National inates all but one IF alignment step. AFC output stereo/monaural switching and 100-mA stereo
LM3089 1C and LM1310 PLL FM stereo demod- from pin 7 of IF strip drives center-tune meter. indicator lamp driver. Optional 300-pF capacitor
ulator provide all circuits required between FM Wide bandwidth of detector and audio stage in on pin 6 of LM3089 can be used to limit band-
tuner and inputs to power amplifiers of stereo IF strip is more than adequate for stereo receiv- width.— "Audio Handbook," National Semi-
receiver. Use of 10.7-MHz ceramic filters elim- ers. Audio stage can be muted by input voltage conductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 3-18-3-23.
R2
FREQUENCY MODULATION °CIRCUITS

— Of 397
ir
1M
Cz
1N4003 Spotlight
A vac.
3.3K
117
i 6 vd c.
5600 mf
200mf
10 v
1N4003 2N3053
-j4> 50ft
25 v. - > T154-CC
Tube 39 K
Switch RCA
2N3646 SK3024
Squelch
or RCA t ? control
cathode
SK3019
Transceiver
p.t.t.
ground
X^/ or R
CALL ALERT — Developed to trigger relay when
signal arrives at squelch tube in GE Progress
Line 2-meter FM receiver. Relay is held ener-
AFC AMPLIFIER — Simple DC amplifier can be gized about 2 s, determined by C,-R„ then de-
added to AFC circuit of FM tuner to eliminate energized for at least 25 s. Used for flashing red
tuning errors over entire lock-in range. — J. S. spotlight in room that is too noisy for hearing
Wilson, Improved A.F.C. for F.M. Tuners, Wire- bell or buzzer. Circuit is easily adapted for any
less World, July 1974, p 239. other FM receiver having squelch stage. Control
circuit responds to small change in voltage at
cathode of squelch tube. With no carrier pres-
ent, tube conducts and places positive voltage
at face of Q„ making it conduct and turn off Qz.
When carrier arrives, Q, restores bias to Q2,
turning on relay. Connection to push-to-talk
switch keeps lamp from flashing during trans-
0 1 pF
mission.— L. Waggoner, The WAOQPM "Call
Alert," CQ, May 1971, p 48-49.
CRYSTAL FM DETECTOR— Exar XR-215 PLL 1C

is operated as crystal-controlled phase-locked
loop by using crystal in place of conventional
timing capacitor. Crystal should be operated in
fundamental mode. Typical pull-in range is ±1
kHz at 10 MHz. — "Phase-Locked Loop Data
CA, 1978, p 21-28.
25 WAT",
VHF POWER AMPLIFIER— Three-stage 25-W input signal, output is 25 W. Four capacitive di- plifier can withstand output mismatches as
225-MHz power amplifier module for FM appli- viders serve for input, output, and interstage high as 50:1 without damage. — E. Noll, VHF/
cations uses three Amperex power transistors. matching. Collectors are shunt-fed. Three de- UHF Single-Frequency Conversion, Ham Radio,
Input and output are 50 ohms. With 100-mW coupling networks prevent self -oscillation. Am- April 1975, p 62-67.
398
nH)
Cl - 10 pF
L3 - 2 T NO. 20 AWG Wire, Wound on R3 (35
C2, C3 — 15 pF
C5 - 68 pF
Dipped Silvered L4, 5 - 2(44T nH)
NO. 18 AWG Wire, 0.25-In. I.D.
C6 - 18 pF
Mica, El-Menco
C7, C9 — 12 pF Case DM10 L6 nH) T NO.
- 3.5 18 AWG Wire, 0.25-In. I.D. (90
C8, CIO 20 pF
C17 - 82 pF R 1 — 100 Ohm, 1/4 W, ±10% Carbon Resistor
R2 — 820 Ohm, 1/2 W, ±10% Carbon Resistor
C11, 14 — .01 juF Ceramic Disc R3 - 330 Ohm, 1 W, ±10% Carbon Resistor
C12, 15 — 220 pF Ceramic Disc R4 22 Ohm, 1/4 W, ±10% Carbon Resistor
C13, 16 — 5/iF, 25 V, Aluminum RFC1, 2 Ferroxcube VK200 19/4B Choke
Electrolytic
C4 nH)
3-35 pF Trimmer, ARCO NO. 403 Z 1 Microstrip Line, 2200 X 62 Mils
LI — 5 T NO. 20 AWG Wire, Wound on R2 (50 Z2 Microstrip Line, 1200 X 62 Mils
Z3 Microstrip Line, 1000 X 62 Mils
L2 - 1.5 T NO. 20 AWG Wire, 0.25 In. I.D. (30 Z4 Microstrip Line, 1600 X 62 Mils
nH) with Ferroxcube 5659065/3B Ferrite Board - G10
Bead 1 oz. Epoxy-Glass,
Copper er = 5, t = 62 Mils
225-MHz 13-W AMPLIFIER— Suitable for use in uation of second harmonic. Microstrip match- "13-Watt Microstrip Amplifier for 220-225 MHz
FM transmitters for 220-225 MHz amateur ing network simplifies construction. Supply Operation,"
radio band. Bandwidth is about 10 MHz for ±0.5 voltage is 12.5 V — J. Hatchett and T. Sallet,
dB. Low-pass filter provides about 60-dB atten-
CHAPTER 35
Frequency Multiplier Circuits

Emphasis is on frequency doublers, but includes circuits providing multiplying
factors up to 10 for sine, square, and other waveforms in audio range and in
RF systems extending well above 400 MHz.
SIMPLE DOUBLER — Performance is good up to

about 10 kHz. R2 is adjusted to set FET just at
cutoff under no-signal conditions, to give op-
eration in square-law region. With R, correctly
adjusted, using scope or third harmonic distor-
tion monitor to obtain minimal distortion, har-
monic content of output can be made to ap-
proach that of sine-wave input. Article gives
design equations — R. Williams and J. Dunne,
Frequency Doubler, Wireless World, Dec. 1975,
p 575.
+ 12DC
LOW-FREQUENCY DOUBLER— Signetics bal-

anced modulator-demodulator transistor array
is connected much like phase detector circuit.
Output contains sum component which is twice
frequency of input signal because same input
signal frequency goes to both sections of bal-
anced modulator. — Signetics Analog Data
Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 758.
-8
6
VDC
399
12
10
TYPICAL USABLE
M
16 74154 OUTPUTS
7490
COUNTER
7492
7493 V 3, 5. 7.9
SQUARER — Simple tunnel-diode circuit dou- 1. 3. 5. 9. 11. 13
bles frequency efficiently without use of tuned 1. 3. 5. 7. 9. 11. 13. 16
circuits. Fundamental and other harmonics of
input are at least 30 dB below level of frequency- MULTIPLES OF 2.5 MHz — Three TTL circuits
doubled output. Circuit operates from DC to provide integral frequency-multiplication ratios
upper frequency limit of opamp used. Adjust R2 between 1 and 8. BCD outputs of counter having
so diode current is at peak of its bias current, to modulus M are fed to inputs of 74154 4-line to
eliminate offset at amplifier output. — R. Kin- 16-line decoder. As outputs of counter change,
caid, Squaring Circuit Makes Efficient Fre- at rate equal to input frequency divided by
quency Doubler, EDNIEEE Magazine, Aug. 15, counter modulus M, each goes low at same
1971, p 45. rate. Output of NAND gate thus goes high once
for each input to gate from decoder. If 7490 de-
cade counter is used and input is 1 MHz, BCD
outputs of 7490 limit usable outputs of 74154 to
lines 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9. Since inputs to 74154
changeat 100-kHz rate, output from gatewill be
n x 100 kHz. With input of 25 MHz, output is
integral multiple of 2.5 MHz. — R. S. Stein, Three
TTL IC's Provide Frequency Multiplication, EDN
Magazine, April 5, 1975, p 117 and 119.
DOUBLING 200 MHz — Recommended for use

lo-ismw with VHF/UHF converters having inputs of 180
to 220 MHz, with 5-10 mW output. Diode in se-
ries with power supply prevents damage if po-
larity is reversed. — J. Reisert, VHF/UHF Tech-
niques, Ham Radio, March 1976, p 44-48.
L3.L4 2 turns no. 22 (0.6mm), air core, 1/8' (3mm) diam-

eter, 1/4" (6.5mm) tong
Q1.Q2 Fairchild 2N5179 recommended but 2N2857, 2N918,
FMT2060 or equivalent may be substituted
DOUBLING 150 MHz— Motorola MC1596G bal- spurious outputs are at least 20 dB below de- tional transistor doubler. — R. Hejhall, "MCI 596
anced modulator is connected for doubling at sired 300-MHz output. Suppression of spurious Balanced Modulator," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
RF and UHF. With output filtering shown, all outputs is poorer for higher input frequencies, 1975, AN-531, p 10.
FREQUENCY MULTIPLIER CIRCUITS 401
24.5 MHz TO 147 MHz — Uses Q1 as tripler to

73.5 MHz for frequency-modulated input of 24.5
MHz, and Q2 as doubler whose output tank is
tuned to 147 MHz by C6 and L3. Output is about
200 mW of RF. LI is 20 turns No. 26 with center
tap, on 0.5-cm form. L2 is 8 turns No. 22 on 0.8-
cm form. RFC is 25 turns on 0.5-cm form. Article
covers troubles likely to be encountered — B.
Hoisington, Frequency Multiplication the Easy
Way, 73 Magazine, Oct. 1973, p 69-71.
BROADBAND LOW-FREQUENCY DOUBLER—

Motorola MC1596G balanced modulator func-
tions as frequency doubler when same signal is
injected into both input ports (pins 1 and 8).
Doubling occurs in audio range and up to about
1 MHz. — R. Hejhall, "MC1596 Balanced Modu-
lator," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-531, p
10.
V+
? (+ 10V to +15 V)
Rt~C,
Frequency
Multiplier
Programming
(As shown, n = 4.)

1
(As shown, fo = 50 Hz with
fr — 60 Hz, n = 4, and M = 6.)
*4016 CMOS switch sections.
^ CMOS inverters.
is locked through common frequency submul-

PROGRAMMABLE PLL SYNTHESIZER/MULTI- Phase-locked output frequency is not direct tiple of 10 Hz, to give sampling rate of 10 Hz for
PLIER — Uses programmable timer/counter A, multiple of reference frequency. 2240 can lock
reference input. — W. G. Jung, "1C Timer Cook-
as VCO for generating frequencies both above on programmable multiple or on subharmonic book," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977,
and below that of square-wave reference. reference. For values shown, phase-locked loop
p 220-224.
500-5000 Hz SQUARE-WAVE DOUBLER— Cir-

cuit shows virtually no deviation from 50% duty
cycle over entire frequency range. Four NOR
gates in CD4001AE 1C form edge detector that
presents negative pulse to 555 1C timer on both
rising and falling edges of input square wave, to
achieve frequency doubling. High-gain 741
opamp amplifies any difference between DC
level at timer output and reference equal to half
of supply voltage, to send correction voltage to
pin 5 of timer for forcing output to 50% duty
cycle. — L. P. Kahhan, Frequency Doubler Out-
puts Square Wave with 50% Duty Cycle, EDN
o Magazine, June 5, 1977, p 211-212.
©I I I I I
PUSH-PUSH DOUBLER— Useful in VFO output

circuits where oscillator operates at half output
frequency of doubler. Circuit helps reduce os-
cillator instability during load changes while
having about same efficiency as straight ampli-
fier. Uses two sections of RCA CA3028A differ-
ential amplifier as doubler (U1C Is not used).
Values of tuned circuit depend on frequency,
which can be up to 120 MHz.— D. DeMaw, Un-
derstanding Linear ICs, QST, Feb. 1977, p 19-23.
-15V +15V
WIDEBAND DOUBLER — AC-coupled multiplier

block is connected in squaring mode to provide
second harmonic of input frequency with no
tuned circuits. Circuit operates over wide band-
widths without adjustment. Output is low-dis-
tortion sine wave; total harmonic distortion is
typically 1%. Output can be taken from pin 2 or
14, depending on phase desired. Circuit will
work with R, grounded, but offset adjustment
can be used to minimize distortion. Maximum
operating frequency is several megahertz. — W.
G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard W.
.i
403
FREQUENCY MULTIPLIER CIRCUITS
MULTIPLIER/DIVIDER — Choice of values for R

and C determines multiplication or division fac-
tor acting on square-wave input frequency. Out-
put of 4013 flip-flop sets gates of 4011 to steer
input clock pulse of RCA CD4047AE mono
MVBR to proper inputs. When rising edge of
PLL MULTIPLIES BY 10 — Used with frequency cation by 100. Requires +5 V and +12 V sup- input triggers mono, Q output of mono goes
counter to measure very low frequencies. Two plies.— H. S. Laidman, Upgrading Inexpensive high and switches flip-flop, preparing mono to
such circuits can be cascaded to give multipli- Counters. CQ, Aug. 1975, p 16-22. accept falling-edge trigger. Since 4047 locks out
inputs until it times out, mono triggers only on
first falling edge occurring after its output goes
low. Mono pulse length is about 2.5RC. With 60-
Hz input clock, mono pulse length less than 8.33
ms allows triggering on every transition, to give
120-Hz output. — P. A. Lawless, One-Shot Forms
Frequency Multiplier, EDN Magazine, Aug. 5,
1978, p 72.
_TL uir
SQUARE-WAVE DOUBLER — Circuit locks onto

both rise and fall of input square wave, to give T>~
quency. For high input frequencies, use smaller
capacitance values. — Circuits, 73 Magazine ,
identical square-wave output at doubled fre- April 1977, p 164.
E300
Li
R3. Rj
- 220KS2, ’AW 7.5K
Cl . C5, C6 - 1500 pF
C2.C3 - 1000 pF - 4T #18 AWG. 5/16 DX 5/16 LG
C4 - 8 35 pF TAPPED 3/4T FROM COLD END
C7 — 30 pF L2 - 2T #16 AWG 5/16 DX 3/16 LG
- 1.2 pHy Vj - Ejimcjjt
Cs - 2.3-20 pF RFC
- RELCOM BT 9 vo ■ Eo,,nJ“i'
Ri - 1KH ti
R? - 10KS2
50ft IN 400CT 400ft OUT SINE-WAVE DOUBLER — Frequency of sinusoi-
dal input signal Vs is doubled to give sine-wave
FET DOUBLER — Siliconix E300 matched FETs dB. Positive bias of 0.5 V is applied to FET gates output with total harmonic distortion less than
are connected as common-gate amplifiers in to permit inclusion of balance control R2. Gain 0.6%. With input of 4 V P-P at 10 kHz, output is
balanced push-push circuit giving up to 100% of doubler is about 1 dB. — "Analog Switches 1 V P-P at 20 kHz. X and Y offset adjustments
efficiency as frequency multiplier in UHF range. and Their Applications," Siliconix, Santa Clara, are nulled to minimize harmonic content of out-
Series-tuned output trap L2C8 increases rejec- CA, 1976, p 7-52. put.— "Phase-Locked Loop Data Book," Exar In-
tion of third-order harmonics to greater than 70 tegrated Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 9-16.
73.333 MHz ON THIRD OVERTONE— Simple

DOUBLER FOR TACHOMETER — Frequency of large load currents and provides DC level shift crystal oscillator circuit requires only one tripler
input from tachometer is doubled by charging required for bringing output voltage to zero for multiplying to 220-MHz amateur band.
and discharging of C, to reduce ripple in DC out- when input frequency is zero. — T. Frederiksen, Mode suppression is provided by 10-/xH coil
put voltage of tachometer circuit. Opamp 2 pro- Frequency-Doubling Tach Operates from a Sin- which, with 4.5-pF capacitance of crystal holder,
vides bias current for opamp 1, while Q, drives gle Supply, EDN Magazine, June 5, 1977, p 208. is series resonant at 24 MHz. — H. Olson, Fre-
quency Synthesizer for 220 MHz, Ham Radio,
Dec. 1974, p 8-14.
AF MULTIPLIER — Multiplies 1-100 Hz input sig-

nal by 100 to permit measuring frequency with
ordinary counter. Half of 4046 PLL is connected
as 100—10,000 Hz VCO whose output is divided
by 100 in 4518 dual divide-by-10 counter for
comparison with input signal in other half of
PLL connected as wideband phase detector.
Output of detector goes to loop filter and to
VCO for locking VCO at 100 times input fre-
quency.—D. Lancaster, "CMOS Cookbook,"

366.
1 1
INPUT 1
„j n
OUTPUT 1
0J i-t— n
!! n.
EXCLUSIVE-OR gate combines both pulses at

output. Values shown for R and C will double
PULSE DOUBLER — Generates pulses at twice monostable which runs for time TB. If TA equals frequency of 800-/is-wide input pulses having
pulse input frequency. Input pulse at first mono- half of input period and TB equals width of input repetition rate of about 130 per second. — K. R.
stable of 74123N makes it run for time T„. Neg- pulse, desired result is achieved wherein addi- Brooks, Pulse Rate Doubler, Wireless World,
April 1976, p 63.
ative edge, terminating T#, triggers second tional pulse is generated between input pulses.
405
FREQUENCY MULTIPLIER CIRCUITS
C3- series resonant at approximately 5/7(110

L3 MHz), 1 flH and 0.6-10 pF
Ll 12 turns C4- series resonant at approximately 3/7(110
no. 28 (0.3mm) on Amidon T25-12 toroid
core L4 MHz), 2.2 (UH and 0.6-10 pF
1-2 7 turns no. 24 (0.5mm), air core, closewound on 0.1” L2 0.5 /!H (parallel resonant at 110 MHz
(2.5mm) diameter with 4.5-pF holder capacitance)
DOUBLING 100 MHz — Recommended for use vents damage if the polarity is reversed. — J. 110 MHz ON SEVENTH OVERTONE— Requires
with VHF/UHF converters having inputs of 90 to Reisert, VHF/UHF Techniques, Ham Radio, only one doubler for use in 220-MHz amateur
120 MHz. Diode in series with power supply pre- March 1976, p 44-48. band. Series-resonant traps are at frequencies
of undesired lower modes. — H. Olson, Fre-
quency Synthesizer for 220 MHz, Ham Radio,
Dec. 1974, p 8-14.
PARTS
POINT A
1 - SN54L04
1 - SN5486
POINT C . __n_n_n_n 1 - SN54121

*RT - 2k to 30 k
‘CT - 10 pF to 10*iF
DOUBLER FOR 1 Hz TO 12 MHz — Simple ar- quency doubling in digital systems, along with delay. — V. Rende, Frequency Doubler Operates
rangement of EXCLUSIVE-OR, mono, and hex waveform symmetry. Article gives design equa- from 1 Hz to 12 MHz, EDN Magazine, Aug. 20,
1976, p 85.
inverter ICs provides extremely accurate fre- tion. Series inverters create about 120 ns of
CHAPTER 36
Frequency Synthesizer Circuits

Covers methods of generating up to 2500 different discrete frequencies in
audio and RF spectrums, generally by setting thumbwheel switches or by
keyboard control, for use in test equipment, receivers, and transceivers.
406
407
FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER CIRCUITS
1 1-16 MHz IN 10-Hz STEPS— Data input re-

quirement iparallel
s BCD with 10-V CMOS lev-
els and five digits. Reference input is 1-MHz sine
or square with at least 1 V P-P. VCO covers 1 1D-
160 MHz in 1-kHz steps, operating in loop hav-
ing 1-kHz reference. VCO signal is divided by
100 to give final output in 10-Hz steps. LI is 6
turns No. 22 on 3-mm form, tapped at 2 turns.
RFC is 6 turns No. 28 on F754-1-06 ferrite bead.
T1 is Mini-Circuits Lab T16-1 broadband RF
transformer.— R. C. Petit, Frequency Synthe-
sized Local-Oscillator System for the High-Fre-
quency Amateur Bands, Ham Radio, Oct. 1978,
p 60-65.
+5
408
SQUARE WAVE
INPUT FROM VCO + 5V +I2V
“ 15 pF 7 v 15 pF
v A
CRYSTAL >
8 192MHz 1 KHz
III
* III 11 ,, OUTPUT (
— Wv —
IOK
INTERSl L
7038
I Ql = GENERAL PURPOSE
NPN TRANSISTOR
5K
SQUARE WAVE OUTPUT

TO PIN I OF MC4044
REFERENCE OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY/PHASE LOW VOLTAGE CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR

8,192,000Hz DIVIDED BY DETECTOR PASS
8'92 = 1,000Hz FILTER
THIS INTEGRATED CIRCUIT HAS AN
INTERNAL DIVIDE BY 8192 COUNTER
1-9 kHz PLL— Simple experimental phase- audio range, for easy monitoring with head- setup procedure — G. R. Allen, Synthesize Your-
locked loop circuit synthesizes frequencies in phones. Article gives theory of operation and self!, 73 Magazine, Oct. 1977, p 182-188.
+ 5V
(BIAS ADJUSTMENT)
10K
tion is achieved with Signetics NE564 PLL by in- input frequency determined by counter; with square-wave output. — "Signetics Analog Data
serting counter in loop between VCO and phase connections and values shown, multiplication Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p
comparator. VCO is then running at multiple of factor for 60-Hz input signal is 100, giving 6-kHz 830-831.
FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER CIRCUITS 409
ONES THOUSANDS
7.000—7.999 MHz PLL — Provides output in 1- low-pass filter at output of VCO to eliminate all are set to give desired division ratio. Article
kHz steps under digital programming, except frequencies above 7.999 MHz, or use different gives theory of PLL synthesizers. — G. R. Allen,
that first digit is hard-wired to 7 and does not VCO. 74123 mono lengthens reset pulse gen- Synthesize Yourself!, 73 Magazine, Oct. 1977,
change. VCO is Motorola MC4024, which generated by divide-by-N circuit. Terminals A, B, C,
erates square-wave output. For sine output, use and D of 74192s go to grounding switches that
p 182-188.
CARRY
FROM
OUT IN
TO NEXT CARRY
HIGHER
DECADE NEXT
LOWER
DECADE
SWITCH-CONTROLLED ADDER— Direct BCD fou r D flip-flops whose outputs are fed back and be doubled and output of accumulator used to
input from thumbwheel switch and use of stan- added to switch states. Frequency range de- clock flip-flop. — D. W. Coulbourn, Set Fre-
dard crystal frequencies are primary advan- pends on number of decades used. Output quency Synthesizer with Thumbwheel
tages of accumulator stage of synthesizer, one pulse may be used directly for synchronization. Switches, EDN Magazine, April 5, 1975, p 115
decade of which is shown. BCD adder drives If square wave is needed, clock frequency can and 117.
+ISV
220- MHz PHASE-LOCKED— Fairchild 95H90 di-

vide-by-10 counter U3 is used to divide 221.86-
MHz VCO output frequency by 10. Resulting 22-
MHz output of U3 is compared in phase with
output of 22-MHz crystal-controlled oscillator
by phase comparator U1, which is standard
double-balanced mixer. Output of phase detec-
tor is passed through active low-pass filter for
control of VCO. Article gives filter and VCO cir-
cuits. U2 is 5-V voltage regulator for 95H90. — H.
Olson, Frequency Synthesizer for 220 MHz,
Ham Radio, Dec. 1974, p 8-14.
REMOVE Cl 9. ADD JUMPER
600-kHz OFFSET — Developed for use with

GLB400B frequency synthesizer which uses
programmable divider and has outputs availa-
ble from each flip-flop. Requires only two ICs,
shown below horizontal dashed line. Select
higher frequency of repeater pair on frequency-
set switches. For operation at 146-147 MHz, se-
lect offset Tx to transmit on repeater input. For
147-148 MHz, select offset Rx to receive on re-
peater output. To operate in reverse, flip switch
to other position. At center-off position, both
transmit and receive are on selected frequency,
with offset function disabled. LED lights only for
offset. — D. Sargent, 600 kHz Offset for Fre-
quency Synthesizers, Ham Radio , July 1978, p
98.
-if ' I0K

♦CI4
•'IOmF
I
9 102222 MHz
R9
5-25pF
RI2
REF.,0SC|_
T T
cio
C 12 2.2K V0ImF I00K

lOpF '"p 33 lOOpF
-il- 17 1 CI5
_ CI6
:R7
114-
p- *—
rk
l,,F
MF
pl
/■
1N5530, D2 is 1N5144, and other diodes can be

1 N914 or equivalent. Unmarked bipolar transis-
146.000-147.995 kHz SYNTHESIZER— De- for transmit and receive frequencies. Only two tors are fast-switching silicon types; NPNs can
signed for use with Drake TR-33C transceiver. crystals are required. Desired frequency can be be 2N2222, and PNPs can be 2N4403 — J. Moell,
Circuit has built-in offset providing choice of entered with BCD thumbwheel switches. Tune- Super Deluxing the TR-33, 73 Magazine, April
any 5-kHz-spaced channel in frequency range up and testing procedures are given. D1 is
1978, p 72-74.
A B C D PRELOADS
#IOk NOMINAL
DATA (PRESET) INPUT THROUGH
LOWER RESISTANCE
GIVES MORE HYSTERESIS COMPLEMENT- OF -NINES -COMPLEMENT SWITCH
(SP7
55-MHz PRESETTABLE COUNTER— High-speed
four-decade counter with preload switches
gives positive output pulse 30 ns long at 55 MHz
to ensure that all counters are preset to right
digit and transients have died out at end of
count. If counters are preset to 5555, input fre-
quency iscounted until count gets to 9997. Next
clock pulse triggers auxiliary flip-flop to initiate
load pulse (2 cycles long) and get back to zero.
Total count is 10,000 minus 5555, or 4445 (10-
kHz output for 44.5-MHz input). Article covers
construction and testing. Counter draws less
than 300 mA at 5 V. Developed for use in 2-
meter frequency synthesizer. — H. Cross, High- SN74SI 12 OR SII3
Speed Divide-by-N Counters, Ham Radio,
March 1976, p 36-38.
I20K
-r-Or
MPS 33 9 3
Y 390K
COUNTER
KBD DETAIL
frequency. When key is depressed, mono (one- play decoder/driver. LED display may be used in
shot) fires, causing CD4022 counter to incre- place of LCD display if current drain is not im-
KEYBOARD ENTRY WITH 4^-DIGIT DISPLAY— ment. At same time, keyswitch places appro- portant. Keyboard lockout switch prevents ac-
Developed to give keyboard entry of desired fre- priate BCD data on input lines of 74C192 cidental change of frequency. — M. I. Cohen, A
quency for 2-meter frequency synthesizer, as presettable decade counters. Output from Practical 2m Synthesizer, 73 Magazine , Sept.
alternative to thumbwheel-switch setting of counters goes to synthesizer input and to dis-
1977, p 146-151.
413
FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER CIRCUITS

♦ VCC
XR2240 SYNTHESIZER— Circuit uses XR2240

programmable timer/counter for simultaneous
multiplication of input frequency FR by factor of
M and division of input frequency by factor of
N + 1, where M and N are integers selected by
appropriate connections of binary pins 1-8 to
common output bus. Output frequency is then
FR(M)/(1 + N) where M is between 1 and 10 in-
clusive and N is between 1 and 255 inclusive.
OUTPUT
VCC is 4—15 V. — H. M. Berlin, 1C Timer Review,
73 Magazine, Jan. 1978, p 40-45.
SINGLE-CONVERSION SYNTHESIZER— Used transmit and 455 kHz below channel frequency grammable divider. — L. Sample, A Linear CB
in single-conversion CB transceiver in which during receive. 5.120 MHz is quintupled to Synthesizer, IEEE Transactions on Consumer
VCO operates at channel frequency during 25.600 MHz to mix and provide input to pro- Electronics, Aug. 1977, p 200-206.
DUAL-CONVERSION SYNTHESIZER— Single-

crystal transceiver system uses 10.240-MHz ref-
erence frequency which is added to VCO fre-
quency to produce transmit frequency. Same
10.240-MHz reference frequency is mixed with
first IF signal to generate 455-kHz second IF sig-
nal. Dividing reference by 2 provides 5.120-MHz
signal that is lightly coupled to multiply-by-3
buffer whose output is tuned to third harmonic
(15.360 MHz). This is mixed with VCO frequency
to provide input signal for programmable di-
vider. When VCO is operating as first mixer and
local oscillator on CB channel 1 (16.270 MHz),
difference frequency is 910 kHz. Programmable
divider divides by 182 to give necessary 5-kHz
input to phase detector. If VCO moves off fre-
quency, divided input to phase detector moves
away from 5 kHz and action of loop pulls VCO
back on frequency. — L. Sample, A Linear CB
Synthesizer, IEEE Transactions on Consumer
Electronics, Aug. 1977, p 200-206.
255-FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER— Circuit as

shown for programmable counter section of
Exar XR-2240 programmable timer/counter pro-
vides square-wave outputs at 255 discrete fre-
quencies from given internal time-base setting.
Output is positive pulse train with pulse width
T determined by values of R and C. Period is
equal to (N + 1 )T where N is programmed count
in counter of 1C. Counter output connections to
-«-j T output bus determine value of N; if pins 1,3, and
4 are connected to bus, N is 1 + 4 + 8 or 13 and
period is 14T. Supply voltage range is 4-15 V.
OUTPUT If counter cannot be triggered when using sup-
_TL_n
ply above 7 V and less than 0.1 /uFforC, connect
300 pF from pin 14 to ground. — "Timer Data

T IN*1! CA, 1978, p 11-18.
0 1 pF
IK R 1
) REFERENCE INPUT
n n
o
0 rji fji Q rij
I
TB
| !
CN
(N
F F
BINARY
_n_r^ r COUNTER
l
Fo(>— H<h
OUTPUT
TJ □ u u u u u g-.#i
r
TOOOpF 300 pF 500 pF^ f
2500 FREQUENCIES WITH SYNCHRONIZA- equal to input frequency FB multiplied by M/(1 with pulse duration ranging from 30% to 80%
TION— EXAR XR-2240 programmable timer/ + N). M and N can be externally adjusted over of time-base period T. R, determines value of M.
counter containing 8-bit programmable binary broad range, with M between 1 and 10 and N C is in range of 0.005 to 0.1 /xF, and R is between
counter and stable time-base oscillator can gen- between 1 and 255. Multiplication factor M is IK and 1 megohm for maximum output fre-
erate over 2500 discrete frequencies from single obtained by locking on harmonics of reference. quency of about 200 kHz. With M = 5 and N =
input reference frequency. Circuit simultane- Division factor N is determined by prepro- 2, 100-Hz clock synchronized to 60-Hz line fre-
ously multiplies input frequency by factor M grammed count in binary counter section, es-
quency is obtained. — "Timer Data Book," Exar
and divides by N + 1, where M and N are ad- tablished bywiring appropriate pins 1-8 to out- Integrated Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p SI-
justable integer values. Output frequency F0 is put bus. Input reference is 3 V P-P pulse train 32.
CHAPTER 37
Function Generator Circuits
Used for generating various combinations of sine, square, and triangle

waveforms, usually with manual or external variations of frequency in AF or
RF ranges by DC control voltage. Also includes circuits for generating cubic,
quadratic, hyperbolic, trigonometric, ramp, and other mathematical
waveforms, as well as circuits for converting one of these waveforms to one
or more others. See also Multivibrator, Oscillator, Pulse Generator, Signal
Generator, and Sweep chapters.
FSK SINE-SQUARE-TRIANGLfc GENERATOR—

Exar XR-2206 modulator-demodulator
(modem) is connected as function generator
providing high-purity sinusoidal output along
with triangle and square outputs, for FSK ap-
plications. Circuit has excellent frequency sta-
bility along with TTL and CMOS compatibility.
Total harmonic distortion in 3 V P-P sine output
is about 2.5% untrimmed, but can be trimmed
to 0.5%. High-level data input signal selects fre-
quency of 1/R6C3 Hz, while low-level input se-
lects I/R7C3 Hz. For optimum stability, R6 and R7
should be in range of 1 0K to 100K. Adjust R„ and
R, for minimum distortion. — "Phase-Locked
Loop Data Book," Exar Integrated Systems,
"X" DIVISOR
DIGITAL INPUTS
/ \
HYPERBOLIC A/X FUNCTION— Uses Precision

Monolithics DAC-20EX D/A converter with OP-
17G opamp to generate extended-range hyper-
bolic functions of the type A/X, where A is an-
alog constant and X represents decimally
expressed digital divisor. R5 provides
simultaneous adjustment of scale factor and
output amplifier offset voltage. Same circuit
serves for —A/X function if DAC reference am-
plifier and output opamp terminals are re-
versed.— W. Ritmanich, B. Blair, and B.
Debowey, "Digital-to-Analog Converter
Generates Hyperbolic Functions," Precision
Monolithics. Santa Clara, CA, 1977, AN-23, p 2.
416
FUNCTION GENERATOR CIRCUITS
417
BASIC SQUARE-TRIANGLE— Requires only two

sections of LM324 quad differential-input
opamp to provide choice of triangle or square-
wave outputs at frequency determined by val-
ues of components. Supply voltage range is 3-
32 V. — "Quad Low Power Operational Ampli-
fiers," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1978, DS 9339 R1 .
R 1 + Rr R2 R1
if R3 =
4 CRf R1 R2 * R1
WAVEFORM GENERATOR— Two Optical Elec-

tronics 9008 integrators and 9813 comparator
together generate choice of sine, square, and
triangle waveforms suitable for system testing
and display generation. Square wave is typi-
cally ± 13.5 V with 20-/ns transition time. Trian-
gle wave is ±10 V with better than 0.1% triangle
linearity. Comparator senses zero crossings of
sine-wave output to produce square waves,
thus completing feedback loop. Integrators are
commanded at pin 8 for zero output, so triangle
and sine outputs can be made to start from
zero. — "Waveform Generator," Optical Elec-
tronics, Tucson, AZ, Application Tip 10257.
0.01 Hz TO 100 kHz — Variable DC offset permits

adjustment of average value of sine, square, or
triangle waveform to any arbitrary plus or
minus value within voltage swing capability of
opamp U3. Buffer stage U2 is inside feedback
loop. Simple emitter-follower differentiator
provides positive-going 1-V 0.5-jxs output at
sink terminal. Square-wave output is buffered
by emitter-follower Q2. — H. Olson, The Function
Generator, CQ, July 1975, p 26-28 and 71-72.
15. 15u
TWO-PHASE VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED— Pro-

duces fixed-amplitude sawtooth outputs that
can be shaped to give sine waves, with outputs
of the two identical channels differing by a spec-
ified phase such as 90°. Each output is inte-

grated to give rising or falling ramp that con-
trols switching FET of opposite channel. With
oscillation established, one integrator output
goes toward zero and the other a way from zero,
with same or opposite polarity. When first out-
put crosses zero, discriminator switches FET in
input amplifier of other channel, with action
being self-perpetuating to give desired saw-
tooth outputs. Dashed-line gating at outputs of
discriminators can be used to boost slope of one
sawtooth in one quadrant. — F. B. Jones, Volt-
age-Controlled Two-Phase Sawtooth Oscilla-
tor, Wireless World, June 1973, p 285.
output 2
n wavef
at X
or
10 Hz TO 2 MHz — Triangle wave is generated by give low-distortionoutput from triangle input. forms are symmetrical up to 1 MHz, and output
switching current-source transistors to charge Square-wave output is obtained at emitter of is usable to about 2 MHz.— R. C. Dobkin, "Wide
and discharge timing capacitor. Precision dual Q5, for driving current switches Q1-Q4 and Range Function Generator," National Semicon-
comparator sets peak-to-peak amplitude. Sine LM318 output amplifier. Scaling permits ad- ductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1974, AN-115.
converter requires close amplitude control to justing all three waveforms to ±10 V. Wave-
FUNCTION GENERATOR CIRCUITS 419
SINE-WAVE SHAPER— Uses CA3140 opamp as

voltage follower, acting with diodes from
CA3019 array to convert triangle output of func-
tion generator or other source to sine wave hav-
ing total harmonic distortion typically less than
2%. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," RCA
+ 10V
VOLTAGE-TUNED WITH 10:1 FREQUENCY

RANGE — Exar XR-S200 PLL 1C is connected to
generate basic periodic square or sawtooth
waveform. Multiplier section, used as linear dif-
ferential amplifier, converts differential saw-
tooth input waveform to triangle wave. 5K pot
connected between pins 8 and 9 rounds peaks
of triangle to give low-distortion sine wave with
less than 2% total harmonic distortion. Output
frequency can be swept or frequency-modu-
lated by applying proper analog control input.
For linear frequency modulation with less than
10% deviation, modulation is applied between
pins 23 and 24. For larger deviations, negative-
going sweep voltage Vs is applied to pin 18 as
shown. Digital control input pips 15 and 16 can
be used for FSK applications; if this is not de-
sired, pins are disabled by connecting to ground
through current-limiting resistor. — "Phase-

Locked Loop Data Book," Exar Integrated Sys-
tems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 9-16.
)0V
- 12V
SINE/COSINE— Uses National SK0003 sine/co-

sine look-up table kit consisting of four MOS
ROMs and three output adders. Combination
implements equation sin 0 = sin M cos L + cos
M sin L. Worst-case error is 1 5/8 bits in least
significant bit. Cosine is approximated with loss
in resolution of ’A bit in 11-bit input or 'It bit in
10-bit input. — "Memory Databook," National
Semiconductor,
6-99. Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-98-
420
AAAA
SQUARE-TRIANGLE AF — Two sections of
LM3900 quad opamp are connected to generate
dual-polarity triangle- and square-wave AF out-
puts while operating from single supply, by
using current mirror circuit at noninverting
ci* JUUL- input. Value used for Cl determines frequency
and pulse width; frequency ranges from 0.5 Hz
with 1 fxf to 3800 Hz with 0.0001 pF and 21 kHz
with Cl omitted. Pulse-width range is 35 ps
without Cl to 1.6 s with 1 pF. — F. M. Mims, "In-

p0WER
AF SINE-SQUARE-TRIANGLE— Can be tuned wave. IC3 acts as integrator converting square- ple inverting amplifier for output.— R. Melen
over entire audio spectrum in four ranges for wave output of IC1 to triangle wave. IC4-IC6 and H. Garland, "Understanding 1C Operational
generation of low-distortion waves for labora- form state-variable filter for removing sine- Amplifiers," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
tory use. IC1 converts sine wave to square wave componentf rom triangle wave. IC2 is sim- 2nd Ed., 1978, p 130-134.
0.5—25 kHz TRIANGLE — Diode bridge and FET

form constant-current source charging C,, to
make voltage across C, change at linear rate as
required for triangle output across C,. Fre-
quency can be adjusted from 500 Hz to above
20 kHz with constant output amplitude, by
means of R,. Short-term stability is better than
1 part in 10,000. Since the same R and C are used
2 - C| N Rs Ri
20-20,000 Hz SINE-SQUARE — Opamp is used to generate both sections of the waveform, pos-
as tuned circuit driven by square wave from itive and negative slopes are identical. Diodes
voltage comparator. Frequency is controlled by R6 and C5 provide DC negative feedback around are HP 5082-2810. — G. R. Begault, Op Amp
R1-R3, Cl, and C2, with R3 providing tuning. comparator to ensure starting. Values of Cl and Makes Variable-Frequency Triangular Wave
Comparator is fed with resulting sine wave to C2 are equal, and range from 0.4 pF for 18-80 Generator, EDN Magazine, Sept. 15, 1972, p 42-
obtain square wave for feedback to input of 43.
Hz to 0.002 pF for 4.4-20 kHz — "Easily Tuned
tuned circuit, to cause oscillation. Zener stabi- Sine Wave Oscillators," National Semiconduc-
lizes amplitude of square wave that is fed back. tor, Santa Clara, CA, 1971, LB-16.
RESOLVER — Circuit accepts DC input voltages systems to convert rectangular to polar coor- is obtained by shifting first output 90° in phase.
R and X and generates two DC output voltages dinates. Sine wave is generated by chopping Circuit also generates proper sampling pulses
R sin X and R cos X. Can be used in guidance input signal R and filtering resulting square and contains two sample-and-hold circuits on
computers to solve coordinate conversion wave. Sine wave is then sampled at time con- outputs. — W. H. Licata, Solid-State Resolver,
problems (polar to rectangular) and in feedback trolled by X to generate R sin X. Cosine output EDN Magazine, July 20, 1973, p 82-83.
100-Hz SQUARE-TRIANGLE — Two-opamp os-

cillator delivers ±13 V square waves and ±10 V
triangle waves simultaneously at 100 Hz for val-
ues shown. By scaling R„ R2, and C, wide range
of frequencies can be covered down to 0.1 Hz
(increase R2 to 10 megohms for frequencies near
lower limit). Square-wave rise time is about 1 .5
ps and fall time 0.5 /is Opamp At operates as
integrator and A2 as Schmitt trigger.— R. S. Bur-
wen, Triangular and Square Wave Generator
Has Wide Range, EDN Magazine, Dec. 1, 1972,
C0R1
p 59.
Logic Level Active Timing Resistor Output Frequency
Pin 8 Pin 9
Pin 6
-o MiW\
«njui FSK
c0r3
OUTI Pins 6 and 7

C0R] C0R2
Pm 5 c0r3 c0r4
ENABLE/DISABLE OR
CHANNEL SELECT
H H
Pins 4 and 5 1 + 1
gle-supply operation, to produce triangle or is in farads, and frequency is in hertz. For opti-
square FSK outputs for either single-channel or mum stability, R, and R3 should be in range of
two-channel multiplex operation. Used in trans- 10K to 100K. For two-channel multiplex, make
mitting digital data over telecommunication connections shown by dotted lines. — "Phase-
FSK SQUARE-TRIANGLE GENERATOR— Uses links. Table gives equations for selecting timing Locked Loop Data Book," Exar Integrated Sys-
Exar XR-2207 FSK modulator connected for sin- resistors R,-R4; resistor values are in ohms, C0 tems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 57-61.
423
2N3638
1000:1 FREQUENCY SWEEP— Permits varying
output frequency of function generator over
wide frequency range by using potto vary con-
trol voltage Vc. Network consisting of two tran-
sistors and two diodes replaces usual charging
resistor of Miller integrator in function genera-
tor, and has output current varying exponen-
tially with input voltage. Electronic switch
using pair of transistors is controlled by Schmitt
trigger of function generator, which connects
+VC and — Vc alternately to charging circuit. If
frequency pot is mechanically connected to
strip-chart recorder. Bode plots of audio equip-
ment can be made over entire audio range. — P.
D. Hiscocks, Function Generator Mod. for Wide
Sweep Range, Wireless World, Aug. 1973, p
374.
CURRENT-CONTROLLED SQUARE-TRIANGLE
GENERATOR — CA3080 opamp is connected as
current-controlled integrator of both polarities
for use in current-controlled triangle oscillator.
Frequency depends on values of C and opamp
bias current and can be anywhere in audio
range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz. Square-wave output
is obtained by using LM301 A opamp as Schmitt
trigger. — S. Franco, Current-Controlled Trian-
gular/Square-Wave Generator, EDN Magazine,
Sept. 5, 1973, p 91.
_n_
tegrating capacitor Cl in feedback loop of in-
angle outputs that can be swept over range of tegrator IC2. R2 adjusts symmetry of triangle
0.1 Hz to 100 kHz with single 100K pot R1. Al- output. IC3 is used as controlled switch to set
SINGLE CONTROL FOR 1,000,000:1 FRE- ternate voltage-control input is available for re- excursion limits of triangle output when square
QUENCY RANGE — Uses two RCA CA3130 mote adjustment of sweep frequency. IC1 is op- wave is desired. — "Linear Integrated Circuits
opamps and CA3080A operational transcon- erated as voltage-controlled current source and MOS/FET's," RCA Solid State Division, So-
ductance amplifier to generate square and tri- whose output current is applied directly to in- merville, NJ, 1977, p 236-244.
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED NONLINEAR— Circuit

produces function E0 = XT'2, where X is input
voltage in range of +10 mV to +10 V and Y is
analog programming voltage in range of -0.4
V to -10 V. Uses Optical Electronics 2534 tem-
perature-compensated logfeedback elements.
+5 V reference, two high-frequency opamps,
and one low-frequency opamp. 2534 produces
log conversion of input signal. 5898 multiplier
serves to vary scale factor of log signal. With
offsets used as shown, +10 V input will always
produce +10 V output regardless of Y input. To
set up, adjust R4 until output does not change
with Y for +10 V input, then adjust R7 for +10
V output with +10 V input.— "Voltage-Con-
trolled Non-Linear Function Generator," Optical
Electronics, Tucson, AZ, Application Tip 10263.
R9 33k
+V -V +v
0.5 Hz TO 1 MHz SINE-SQUARE-TRIANGLE—

Uses ExarXR-2206ICfunction generator in sim-
ple circuit that operates from dual supply rang-
ing from ±6 V to ±12 V. Withl-pF capacitor for
C, 2-megohm frequency control covers range of
0.5-1000 Hz. Range is 5-10,000 Hz with 0.1 gF,
50 Hz to 100 kHz with 0.01 gF, and 500 Hz to 1
MHz with 0.001 gF. Designed for experiments
with active filters. — H. M. Berlin, "Design of Ac-
tive Filters, with Experiments," Howard W.
SQUARE TO SINE WITH PLL— 8038 waveform frequency is 0.15/R9C3. R,„ should be at least 10 plifies and offsets phase-difference signal. Sine
generator simultaneously generates synthe- times smaller than R9. If center frequency is 400 output has less than 1% distortion, DC com-
sized sine wave and square wave. Square-wave Hz, capture range is half that or ±100 Hz. When ponent of 0.5 Vcc, and minimum amplitude of
output closes phase-locked loop through 741 input is applied, phase comparator generates 0.2 Vcc P-P. — L. S. Kasevich, PLL Converts
opamp IC2 and dual flip-flop 1C,, while sine-wave voltage related to frequency and phase differ- Square Wave into Sine Wave, EDN Magazine ,
June 20, 1978, p 128.
output functions as converted output. Center ence of input and free-running signals. IC2 am-
425
ci
VARIABLE SQUARE-TRIANGLE— Dual pot R1-

R3 varies frequency over range of 15-500 Hz
when Cl is in circuit and 150-4800 Hz when C2
is in circuit. Each output has amplitude control.
Opamps are Motorola MC3401P or National
LM3900, and transistors are 2N2924 or equiva-
lent NPN. Supply can be 12 VDC. — C. D. Rakes,
"Integrated Circuit Projects," Howard W. Sams,
INPUT AT 16 TIMES PHASE REVERSING

OUTPUT FREQUENCY CONTROL INPUT
DIGITAL FOURIER — Sine-wave generator pro- converter consisting of digital expander that ming junction. Signs and magnitudes are under
duces Walsh-function approximation of sine expands input square wave into variety of dig- microprocessor control. Net output is stairstep
function. Frequency of sine wave is set by ital waveforms and analog combiner that adds approximation to desired output, which can be
square-wave input to pin 14 of 7493. Filter com- these waveforms to produce periodic analog smoothed by low-pass filter. — B. F. Jacoby,
ponents of opamp help smooth staircase wave- output. Negative signs of Walsh harmonics are Walsh Functions: A Digital Fourier Series,
form generated by summing Walsh-function handled with digital inverter, and magnitudes BYTE, Sept. 1977, p 190-198.
components as weighted by resistors. Circuit is are handled by choice of resistor value in sum-
+ 12V
TRIANGLE-TO-SINE CONVERTER— Nonlinear

emitter-base junction characteristic of 51 IB
transistor array is used for shaping triangle out-
put of 566 function generator to give sine out-
put having less than 2% distortion. Amplitude
of triangle is critical and must be carefully ad-
justed for minimum distortion of sine wave by
varying values of R,, R2, and input level pot
while monitoring output with Hewlett-Packard
333A distortion analyzer. — "Signetics Analog
p 851-853.
PULSE/SAWTOOTH GENERATOR— Pulse out-

put is obtained from Exar XR-2006C function-
generator 1C when pin 9 is shorted to square-
wave output at pin 11. Pulse duty cycle, along
with rise and fall times of ramp from pin 2, is
determined by values of R1 and R2. Both can be
adjusted from 1 to 99% by proper selection of
resistor values as given in formulas alongside
diagram. — E. Noll, VHF/UHF Single-Frequency
Conversion, Ham Radio, April 1975, p 62-67.
20 pF
SINGLE FREQUENCY CONTROL— Adjustment lower, and CA3080 variable opamp as high- with C5 maintain constant amplitude within
range of over 1,000,000 to 1 for frequency is speed capacitor. Variable capacitors C1-C3 10% up to 1 MHz. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear
achieved by using CA3080A as programmable shape triangle waveform between 500 kHz and 1977, RCA
ICs," p 6. Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ,
current source, CA3160 opamp as voltage fol- 1 MHz. C4 and C5 with 50K trimmer in series
REDUCING DISTORTION— Use of UAF41 uni-

versal active filter at output of function gener-
ator reduces distortion of sine-wave output by
eliminating some of harmonics. In typical ap-
plication, two-pole active filter reduces 1% dis-
tortion down to 0.1%, using low-pass configu-
ration. Article gives design equations. For 1-kHz
cutoff, R, should be 159.2K. — Y. J. Wong, De-
sign a Low Cost, Low-Distortion, Precision Sine-
Wave Oscillator, EDN Magazine, Sept. 20, 1978,
• 1 1 OlSIQ
(NOliH
p 107-113.
+v
%l)
1 MHz — Simple sinusoidal generator using Exar

XR-2206C 1C provides sine, triangle, or square
outputs. For sine output, SI is closed and RA and
RB are adjusted for minimum distortion. Exact
output frequency f is 1/RC where R is about 2
megohms from pin 7 to ground and C is con-
nected between pins 5 and 6. FM output is ob-
tained when modulating input is applied to
either pin 7 or 8. For AM output, modulation is
applied to pin 1— E. Noll, VHF/UHF Single-Fre-
quency Conversion, Ham Radio, April 1975, p
62-67.
racy over input amplitude range of several linearization of transducer characteristics, and procedure. — H. McPherson, Non-Linear Func-
decades. Applications include analog com- teaching theory of quadratic equations. Article tion Generator, Wireless World, Oct. 1972, p
putations for radar and ballistic problems, gives design equations and complete design 485-487.
NEGATIVE RAMP — Connection shown for 566

function generator gives negative output ramp
having period equal to 1/2f where f is normal
free-running frequency of 566 as determined by
supply voltage and RC values used. Ramp has
very fast reset because PNP transistor charges
timing capacitor C, rapidly at end of discharge
nrrr
nNNN'
period. Short output pulse is available at pin
3. — "Signetics Analog Data Manual," Signetics,
(WAVEFORM R5 >
GENERATOR)
Rl 10 K
— 1
► <
R2 20 K
RS
(EQUALIZER ATTEN ) (BUFFER AMPLIFIER)
500
10 K>
THREE-WAVEFORM — Gives simultaneous
sine, square, and triangle outputs with low dis-
c
tortion (1%), high linearity (0.1%), 0.05 Hz to 1 4l 51 6 9 —
MHz frequency range, and duty cycle of 2% to

98%. Intersil 8038 waveform generator feeds
buffer amplifier using 2N3709 transistor,
switched to desired output waveform. Timing
capacitors C1-C8, determining frequency de- O SIGNAL OUT
cades of signal generator, start with 500 /aF for
0.05 Hz to 0.5 Hz and decrease in submultiples
of 10 to 500 pF for 50 kHz to 500 kHz. C8 is 250
pF for final range of 100 kHz to 1 MHz.— H. P.
Fisher, Precision Waveform Generator, 73 Mag-
azine, Dec. 1973, p 41-43.
Cl — C8 (SEE TEXT)
+ 12 V
ru
WAVE
SINE
OUTPUT
FET TRIANGLE TO SINE CONVERTER— Use of function generator gives sine wave having less minimum distortion of sine output. — "Signet-
nonlinear transfer characteristic of P-channel than 2% distortion. Amplitude of triangle wave ics Analog Data Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale,
junction FET to shape triangle output of 566 is critical and must be carefully adjusted for
CA, 1977, p 851-852.
' ADD DIODE

ANY SMALL
' SIGNAL
GERMANIUM
DIODE CANCELS SUPPLY CHANGES— Adding

any small-signal germanium diode to Intersil
8038 sine-square-triangle function generator as
SQUARE WAVE
shown will compensate for changes in supply
voltage. When using diode, change from 10 to
TRIANGLE WAVE
15 V produces only 5-Hz change in output over
OUT frequency range of 100-10,000 Hz. Technique
can be applied to other 1C function generators,
such as Signetics 565, as well as to 555 timers. —
R. Liebman, Single Diode Compensates 1C Os-
cillator, EDN Magazine, April 20, 1974, p 87.
“LTLT
i_n_r
20-20,000 Hz SQUARE-TRIANGLE— R, and C, kHz if component values are suitably changed. 50 ms at frequency range covered. — W. G. Jung,
are chosen for upper frequency limit of 20 kHz, A:: should be offset-nulled by adjusting for best "1C Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, In-
and oscillator is adjustable down to lower limit symmetry at lowest frequency. Total width of dianapolis, IN,1974, p 381-383.
of 20 Hz with R5. Circuit will operate up to 100 T of output waveform varies between 50 /xs and
DRIVEN CONSTANT-AMPLITUDE SAW- ing sawtooth waveform is amplified by opamp level by A3 and D, to meet input voltage require-
TOOTH— Gives constant-amplitude output A, of MC3401P four-opamp package and fed to ments of Tr2. Desired sawtooth output appears
over input frequency range of 2-100 kHz. Input A2 which acts as comparator for amplitude-sen- at source of Tr3. — J. N. Paine, Constant Ampli-
signal from SN74121 1C is 300-ns pulse that sing. 25K threshold-setting pot is adjusted for tude Sawtooth Generator, Wireless World, Oct.
drives basic sawtooth generator Tr,-Tr2. Result- maximum linearity of amplitude versus fre- 1975, p 473.
D1 02
TRIANGLE-WAVE CLIPPER — T riangle-wave

generator using 566 function generator is con-
nected to RS741C opamp for clipping positive
and negative peaks of triangle waves. Output as
seen on CRO is modified square wave with slop-
ing side. Clipping level depends on voltage rat-
ings of zeners used. Supply voltages can range
from 1 .5 to 9 V each. Can be used for classroom
demonstrations. — F. M. Mims, "Integrated Cir-

TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 37-44.
TRIANGLE TO SINE — Expression approximat-

ing sine function from 0 to 90° is generated by
function fitting and duplicated by using AD534L
analog multiplier and appropriate close-toler-
ance (0.1%) resistors. Accuracy of sine wave is
within ±0.5% at all points. Linearly increasing
voltage of triangle develops rising sinusoidal
output. Conversely, linearly decreasing input
generates mirror of rising sinusoids. Increasing
triangle waveform, then bringing it back to zero
again, completes full cycle of sine-wave out-
put.— R. Frantz, Analog Multipliers — New 1C
Versions Manipulate Real-World Phenomena
with Ease, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977, p 125-
129.
WAVE
INPUT
.Q TRIANGULAR
O LEVEL
HIGH
SQUARE
4 , OUTPUT
WAVE
0.1 *iF
TTL
WAVE
SQUARE
30-20,000 Hz SQUARE-TRIANGLE— Uses 555 A, charges Ct between +5 and +10 V threshold 5-V TTL output at pin 7 for additional square-
timer as bilevel threshold detector, together points of 555 to give linear triangle output for wave output and for controlling state of A,. —
with A1 as bidirectional constant-current source buffering by A2. Simultaneously, toggling of 555 W. G. Jung, Build a Function Generator with a
and A2 as buffer amplifier. If buffered triangle between its high and low output generates 555 Timer, EDN Magazine, Oct. 5, 1976, p 110.
output is not needed, opamp A2 can be omitted. square wave of about 13 V at pin 3, along with
HYPERBOLIC SINE — Burr-Brown 4302 multi-

function converter and opamp generate hyper-
1 kHz SQUARE-TRIANGLE— National LM386 bolic sine transfer function with response
opamp operating from 9-V supply generates 1- 90-900 Hz SINE-SQUARE-TRIANGLE— Ganged matching ideal curve within 0.7%. Technique
kHz square wave at 0.5 W for driving 8-ohm 10K dual pot covers range when C is 0.25 gF for permits setting powers and roots at fractional
loudspeaker or other load. Exact frequency is 8038CC waveform generator. Other values of C as well as integer values. Converter shown is
determined by values used for R, and C,. Tri- (from 0.005 fiF to 2.2 jiF) give different fre- set for exponent of 3.2. Choice of amplifier gain
angle output can be taken from pin 2. Pins 1 and quency ranges between 10 Hz and 50 kHz. Lin- and reference voltage scales response for given
8 can be shorted because DC offset voltages are earity of waveforms depends on tracking pre- input and output signal levels. Article gives de-
unimportant. — "Audio Handbook," National cision of dual pot.— C. D. Rakes, "Integrated sign equations. — J. Graeme, Sinh Generator
Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-30- Circuit Projects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapo- Boasts 0.7% Error, END Magazine, Aug. 5, 1978,
4-33.
lis, IN, 1975, p 116-120.
p 70 and 72.
m
ui 1-kHz SINE-SQUARE — 555 timer starts as
astable MVBR but then acts with A2 to form
multiple-feedback bandpass filter that removes
harmonics from square wave to give sine-wave
output with distortion less than 2%. Sine out-
put is fed back to timer through C, which now
operates as Schmitt trigger, shaping sine wave
to give output square wave. Frequency is de-
termined primarily by filter components C,, C2,
R,, and R2. Output is about 9 V P-P. — W. G. Jung,
"1C Timer Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indi-
anapolis, IN, 1977, p 203-204.
SQUARE-TRIANGLE VCO— With DC control

voltage of 5 mV to 5 V, circuit controls fre-
quency of both square and triangle outputs
with good linearity. Peak value of triangle out-
put isprecisely set at 2.44 V and 0 V by reference
voltages at noninverting inputs of comparators.
Comparator A2 drives load for low outputs,
while comparator A1 drives load when output
is high. Article tells how circuit works. — R. C.
Dobkin, Comparators Can Do More Than Just
Compare, EDN Magazine, Nov. 1, 1972, p 34-37.
R2
18—20,000 Hz SINE-SQUARE — Circuit uses two

opamps to obtain necessary positive feedback
for sustaining oscillation. RC network of first
stage acts as tuned circuit, permitting operation
only at frequency determined by values of R and
C. Pot R3 provides tuning over significant fre-
quency range. Pot R8 controls amplitude of sine
output. Zener XI stabilizes amplitude of square
output. Sine signal is applied to LM111 acting
as limiter to provide desired square wave. Table
gives values of Cl and C2 for five different fre-
quency ranges — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C Princi-

ples, Experiments, and Projects," Howard W.
MIN
FREQ
FREQ MAX
C1.C2
0.47 nF 18 Hz
0.1 pF 80 Hz
380 Hz
80 Hz
.022 mF v +
380 Hz 1.7 kHz
.0047 nF 1.7 kHz
-002 nF 8 kHz
4.4 kHz 20 kHz
POSITIVE RAMP — NPN transistor across timing

capacitor C, of 566 function generator gives fast
charging of capacitor at end of discharge period,
for positive ramp having very fast reset. Period
of ramp is equal to 1/2f where f is normal free-
running frequency of 566 as determined by sup-
ply voltage and RC values used. — "Signetics
Analog Data Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale,
CA, 1977, p 851.
TTYT '°9
\Z\NY hn
SINE-SQUARE-TRIANGLE WITH LIN/LOG voltage reaches about one-third Vcc plus 0.9 V. variable. Point A has short positive pulse that
SWEEP — Four-transistor circuit provides In logarithmic mode, positive feedback pro- can be used to reset capacitor C of 1C, and to
choice of linear or logarithmic sweeps for Inter- vides exponential charging of C,. Voltage at B sync an oscilloscope — S. Villone, Linear/Loga-
sil 8038 1C function generator. In linear mode, must be set experimentally because it depends rithmic Sweep Generator, Wireless World, Dec.
1976, p 42.
constant-current generator Tra charges C, al- on Voc. For overall frequency control, make R,
most lineariy, with Tr,-Tr2 resetting C, when its
TRIANGULAR WAVE I
|SQU ARE WAVE
•GENERATOR
GENERATOR 1
2.5 Hz TO 250 kHz SQUARE-TRIANGLE— Five

switched frequency ranges each give continu-
ous variation of frequency over one decade and
adjustment of output amplitude from 0.2 to 20
V P-P. Slope of triangle is highly linear, and rise
time of square wave is less than 1 00 ns. Square-
wave generator is simple hysteresis circuit trig-
gered by triangle generator. Output voltage is
clamped to desired level by diodes connected
to bandwidth control point. Output opamp is
selected for high slew rate. S3 gives choice of 1
or 10 for gain. Maximum output current should
be limited to 20 mA. — "Linear & Data Acquisi-
tion Products," Harris Semiconductor, Mel-
bourne, FL, Vol. 1, 1977, p 7-25 (Application
Note 510).
1 Hz TO 100 kHz SQUARE-TRIANGLE— Wide-

range function generator built around LM111
comparator provides two different output
waveforms whose frequency can be varied over
five decades by R„ from 1 Hz to 100 kHz. Two
transistor pairs are used to vary charging cur-
rent of timing capacitor exponentially. Output
current from transistor pairs is controlled by lin-
ear pot, so rotation of pot is proportional to log
of output frequency. Sensistor R2 provides tem-
perature compensation for transistor pairs. — R.
C. Dobkin, Comparators Can Do More Than Just
-15V
TRIANGLE T
WAVE SQUARE WAVE

+ 5-6V AAAVpp OUTPUT OUTPUT
22Ck
SYMMETRY
O sinewave 5V
O triangular wave 3V
SINE-SQUARE-TRIANGLE AT 3-5 V— Uses to sine-wave converter. Sine-wave approxima- sawtooth and pulse waveforms at desired fre-
CD401 1 1C operating from 1 5-V AC line as at left. tion, depending on transfer function of G* is cal- quency determined by setting of R5. — J. W.
NAND gates of 1C are connected as at right, with ibrated by R3 and R„. Values of R, and R2 may be Richter, Single I.C. Function Generator, Wire-
varied between 0.01 and 10 megohms and C less World, Nov. 1976, p 61.
G, serving as integrator with variable delay
time, Gz-G] as Schmitt trigger, and G„ as triangle between 100 pF and 2.2 fj. F to obtain desired
HIGH-PRECISION TRIANGLE— Opamp circuit

provides easily controlled peak-to-peak ampli-
tude of triangle wave suitable for use in sweep
circuits and test equipment. Positive and neg-
ative peak amplitudes are controllable to accu-
racy of about ±0.01 V by DC input. Output fre-
quency islikewise easily adjusted over range of
two decades. Circuit consists of integrator and
two comparators. One comparator sets positive
peak, and other sets negative peak. Operating
frequency depends on R1, Cl, and reference
voltages. Maximum difference in reference volt-
ages is5 V. Frequency limit is about 200 kHz. —
R. C. Dobkin, "Precise Tri-Wave Generation,"
LB-23.
REMOTE FREQUENCY CONTROL— Frequency serves as noninverting readout amplifier for tri- diodes, to give desired square-wave output. —
of square and triangle outputs can be adjusted angle wave developed across integrating ca- "Linear Integrated Circuits and MOS/FET's,”
over range of 1,000,000:1 with 10K pot or by pacitor network at output of CA3080A current RCA Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977,
varying DC voltage applied to pin 5 of CA3080A source. Second CA3080 acts as high-hysteresis
over wire line from remote location. CA3140 switch having trip level established by four p 248-254.
CHAPTER 38
Game Circuits
Included are chip connections, VHF modulators, score generators, and sound
effects for variety of TV games, along with electronic dice, roulette wheel,
coin tosser, robot toy, model railroad switch, six-note chimes, and attention-
getting LED displays.
+ 6 2 V
RIFLE — Developed for use with General Instru-

ments AY-3-8500-1 TV game chip to simulate
target practice with rifle. Player aims at bright
target spot moving randomly across TV screen.
If gun is on target when trigger is pulled, pho-
totransistor inbarrel picks up light from target
and generates pulse for producing sound effect
of hit and incrementing player's score. PT-1 can
be TIL64 or equivalent phototransistor. 4098 is
dual mono, and 4011 is quad two-input NAND
gate. Pulse outputs go to pins of game chip.
Article gives all circuits but covers construction
only in general terms. — S. Ciarcia, Hey, Look
What My Daddy Built!, 73 Magazine, Oct. 1976,
p 104-108.
SIX-TONE CHIME — Separate AF oscillators, can be mounted so each tone comes from dif- tery, with CMOS logic drawing very little
gated on by six-stage time-delay circuit, gen- ferent location in house. When doorbell button standby current. — J. Sandler, 9 Projects under
erate six different chime tones. Loudspeakers is pushed, each tone generator is turned on in $9, Modern Electronics, Sept. 1978, p 35-39.
435
436
♦6 2 V
DIGITAL NOISEMAKER — Simple sound-effect Q1f needed with low-impedance voice coil, is
generator for video games, electronic cash reg- not critical as to type. For smaller acoustic out-
isters, and electronic toys uses one-fourth of put, Qt can be replaced by 100-ohm resistor if
LM3900 quad opamp chip as 2-kHz signal gen- 100-ohm voice coil is used, to avoid overloading
erator that can be turned on or off by input con- 1C. — T. Frederiksen, Build a Transformerless
trol voltage. Suitable for applications that do Tone Annunciator, EDN Magazine, April 5, 1977,
not require pure sine wave. Output transistor 2-MHz MASTER CLOCK — Developed for use
p 141-142. with General Instruments AY-3-8500-1 TV game
chip, which contains dividers that deliver re-
quired 60-Hz vertical and 15.75-kHz horizontal
sync signals for video signal going to TV set.
Coil is Miller 9055 miniature slug-tuned. Article
gives other circuits for game. — S. Ciarcia, Hey,
BLACK
Look What My Daddy Built!, 73 Magazine, Oct.
1976, p 104-108.
WHO'S FIRST? — One of LEDs comes on to in-

dicate which of two people pushes button first
after event such as stopping of music. Circuit
requires two 7400 quad gates. — Circuits, 73
Magazine, Nov. 1974, p 142.
0,0,® ground
0 TO SWITCH COIL-MAIN T SEPARATE + 12V SUPPLY 1
, > AMP, (UNREGULATED)
0 TO SWITCH COIL-SIDING J USED FOR SWITCHES 01
0 CONTROL-SHORT TO GROUND TO THROW SWITCH TO

MAIN LINE
0 CONTROL-SHORT TO GROUND TO THROW SWITCH TO

SIDING
SMALL MAGNET GLUED TO REED H
0 LED TO +5 TO INDICATE
LOW) SWITCH IN MAIN (THIS POINT SWITCH MAKES IT NORMALLY CLOSED
HOWLING BOX — Tone oscillator driving loud-

0 LED TO +5 TO INDICATE SWITCH IN SIDING
speaker issealed into wood or plastic box, with
reed switch mounted on one face of box and
0 +5 VOLTS IN FOR ICs
pushbutton of other switch projecting out
POINTS 4 AND 5 CAN BE PARALLEL TO MANUAL
MOMENTARY SWITCHES AND LOGIC SWITCHES-ANY through hole in box. Place "DO NOT TOUCH"
label on button. When button is pushed despite
PULSE (LOW) WILL WORK, HOLDING POWER ON ABOUT /, warning, SCR latches and applies power to AF
SECOND, 74121 WITH RESISTOR AND CAP CONTROL
TIME. oscillator. Only way to turn off howling is to
hold large permanent magnet against location
MODEL RAILROAD SWITCHING— Control cir- switch is energized in given direction. Output of reed switch, to oppose field of magnet glued
cuit is used to drive solenoid-operated track transistors are rated at 20 W, enough for driving on switch and make reed contacts open. If mer-
switches of typical HO train layout. Input can be solenoids taking 1 A at 12 V. Use protective cury switch is used in box in place of pushbut-
pair of complementary TTL signals from 8008 or diodes across coils of solenoids. — H. De Mon- ton, alarm goes off when box is picked up. — P.
other computer or can be from manual switch stoy. Model Railroad Switch Control Circuit, Walton, Now What Have I Done?, 73 Magazine,
SI. 74121 mono MVBR controls time that BYTE, Oct. 1975, p 87. May 1975, p 81.
GAME CIRCUITS 437
£01?160-MHz
TV GAME CONTROLLER— Single General In-

struments 8500 1C contains most of electronics
needed for pong, hockey, squash, or practice
games using screen of TV set. Desired game is
selected by grounding one of pins 20-23. Con-
nect ball, player, and score outputs to four-input
OR circuit to generate composite video for com-
bining with sync output. Final output can be fed
directly to video amplifier of TV set or fed to
suitable RF modulator. Sound output is fed to
loudspeaker through transistor audio amplifier.
No connection on pin 5 gives two rebound an-
gles, while grounding gives four rebound an-
gles. Open pin 7 gives fast speed, and ground-
ing gives slow speed. Open pin 13 gives small
bats, and grounding gives large bats. — D. Lan-
IC2
kkkkkkkkkk
kkkkkkkkkk
4017
kxkkkkkkkk
'kkkkkkkkk
4069
01-D6
kk x k k kk k k LED 1 - LED 60
fb 1N914
IC4
I lighted in sequence as IC1 and IC2 carry out

counting function. IC3 is square-wave oscillator
IC2 every tenth count. At end of 60 counts, both
ICs reset to zero for new sequence. Inherent cur-
60-LED HYPNOTIC SPIRAL— LEDs are mounted with frequency determined by Cl and setting of rent limiting of ICs makes dropping resistors
on display board in spiral arrangement and R2. Output pulses are used to clock IC1 to ad- unnecessary for LEDs. — F. Blechman, Digi-
wired in matrix connected to ICs so each LED is vance count, with carry output of IC1 clocking trance. Modern Electronics, Dec. 1978, p 29-31.
RF OUTPUT
VHF MODULATOR — Developed as interface be-
► TO ANTENNA
TERMINALS
tween General Instruments AY-3-8500-1 TV
game chip and antenna terminal of TV set. Ad-
just Cl to frequency of unused channel to which
receiver is set for playing games. Article gives
all circuits but covers construction only in gen-
eral terms. — S. Ciarcia, Hey, Look What My
Daddy Built!, 73 Magazine, Oct. 1976, p 104-
108.
OSCILLATOR FOR CHANNELS 2-6— Transmit-

ter serving as interface between video game
and TV set can be tuned with L, to vacant chan-
nel in low TV band. Regular antenna should be
disconnected when output of oscillator is fed to
TV set via twin-line, to avoid broadcasting
game signals. L, is4turnsNo. 18 spaced 3/8 inch 300! I TWIN
on Vinch slug-tuned form. — B. Matteson, LEAD TO TV
ANTENNA
"King Pong" Game Offers Hockey and Tennis
Alternatives to TV Re-Runs, EDN Magazine,
Aug. 5, 1975, p 47-55.
Jsion Rl2
R 9
I3*|
330 ft
5ion TO MODULATOR
OR VIDEO TERMINAL
< 220ft
l Rll
SIX-GAME VIDEO — General Instruments AY-3- screen. Can be used with standard TV receiver on field. Article covers operation in detail and
8500-1 MOS chip gives choice of hockey, (using RF modulator circuit) or with video mon- gives suitable rifle circuit. Supply is +6 V. 2-MHz
squash, tennis, two types of rifle shoot, and itor. S4 grounds base of Q1 when in manual- clock is at upper right.— A. Dorman, Six Games
practice games, all with sound effects and au- serve mode, to eliminate steady boing when on a Chip, Kilobaud, Jan. 1977, p 130, 132, 134,
^ RIO
ball leaves playing field. R5-R8 position players
tomatic scoring on 0-15 display at top of TV 136, and 138.
439
GAME CIRCUITS
MICRO COMPUTER OUTPUT PORT
PLOP FOR GAMES— Section 1 of 7406 TTL hex

inverter can be attached to output port and dri-
ven by program loop, to provide sound effects
for computer games. When output port goes to
logic 1 (greater than +2 V), action of inverter is
such that paralleled inverters 3 and 4 go to 0 and
draw current through primary of T1, making
loudspeaker produce single plopping sound.
When output port goes to 0, another plop is pro-
duced. Ifoutput port is switched between 0 and
1 fast enough, loudspeaker output will be tone
at switching frequency. — D. Parks, Adding
"Plop" to Your System, Kilobaud, May 1977, p
98.
HEADS/TAILS FLIPPER — Uses only half of 7400

quad NAND gate as gated clock driving half of
7473 JK flip-flop. With power switch closed,
LEDs representing heads and tails flash on and
off at clock frequency. Closing FLIP switch stops
clock randomly, leaving one LED on to give
equivalent of tossing coin for heads/tails call. —
G. Young, JK Flip-Flops and Clocked Logic, Kilo-
baud, July 1977, p 66-70 and 72-73.
U.UI
DPDT SLIDE
SWITCH
LONG THROW '
HOCKEYfTENNIS/HANDBALL — Uses National have sound. Circuit generates all necessary tim- interface directly to antenna terminals of set. —
MM57100 TV game chip to provide logic for ing (sync, blanking, and burst) to interface with "MOS/LSI Databook," National Semiconductor,
generating backgrounds, paddles, ball, and dig- circuit of standard TV receiver. With addition of Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-37-4-47.
ital scoring. All three games are in color and chroma, audio, and RF modulator, circuit will
DICE OR ROULETTE RUNDOWN— 4046 PLL

connected as VCO is set at twice desired max-
imum rate for dice or roulette-wheel counters.
Pressing spin button momentarily to start ac-
tion charges 1-/uF capacitor to supply voltage
and jumps VCO to highest frequency. Output
frequency then decreases rapidly as capacitor
is discharged by 10-megohm resistor. Output is
stopped by using retriggerable mono to drive
other half of 4013 dual D flip-flop. When fre-
quency drops below value at which mono times
out, mono resets flip-flop and holds it to stop
VCO OUTPUT
display — D. Lancaster, "CMOS Cookbook,"
Howard W. Sams, Indianpolis, IN, 1977, p 252-
MONO STABLE
254.
JLTLn I— L
FINAL OUTPUT
3.57955 MHz 9-35 pF
S2
SPST
COIN FLIPPER — One of LEDs comes on when SI

is pressed, to simulate tossing of coin. LEDs can
be labeled HEADS and TAILS if desired. Transis-
receiver. Circuit allows video information from ulators, and RF oscillators and modulators for tor types are not critical. For true random re-
video games, test equipment, videotape re- two low VHF channels. — "MOS/LSI Databook," sults, voltage between collectors of transistors
corders, and similar sources to be displayed on National Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, should be 0 V with S2 closed and SI open. —
black-and-white or color TV receivers. LM1889N Circuits, 73 Magazine, June 1975, p 161.
p 4-48-4-49.
GAME CIRCUITS
441
*12 *12
SCORE DISPLAY — National 5841 1C is used for

display of video game scores on TV receiver, as
well as for time and channel number displays.
Properly conditioned H and V pulses must be
applied to pins 18 and 19to interface TV. Output
video on pin 15 must be buffered and summed
into existing video inside TV set. Display posi-
tion is controlled by H and V pots. Horizontal
display size depends on clock frequency.
Grounding M input gives only channel number.
Positive voltage at M gives both channel and
time. Grounding D input provides 5-slot time
display, while positive D input gives 8-slot time
display. Channel inputs are applied continu-
ously in negative-logic form, with time inputs
multiplexed externally. — D. Lancaster, "CMOS
Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
1977, p 158.
MODEL-TRAIN SWITCHING— Individual SCRs

are triggered by logic-level signals indepen-
dently to initiate discharge of large capacitor Cl
through solenoid of model railroad track
switch. — D. W. Zimmerli, Two Hobbies: Model
Railroading and Computing, Kilobaud, Aug.
1978, p 62-68.
DUAL-MOTOR ROBOT — Battery-operated toy machine. With head-on collision, both contacts until probes at opposite end from bumper enter
car roams around room, reversing whenever it of bumper close to reverse both motors so ma- jacks. Circuit permits search mode for recharg-
hits wall or obstacle, and returns automatically chine backs away, turns, and proceeds in new ing only when relay D senses low battery volt-
to home base when batteries are in need of age and energizes lamps that illuminate white
direction. With glancing collision, motor on op-
charge. Small geared motor, such as Meccano posite sideis reversed so machine sheers away. tape. Article gives operation and construction
No. 11057 or 4.5-V Taplin, is used for each rear White tape on floor, leading to charger having details. — M. F. Huber, Free Roving Machine,
wheel so reversal of one motor provides steer- female jacks, is sensed by two phototransistors Wireless World, Dec. 1972, p 593-594.
ing. Single free-swiveling caster is at front of used to control motors so machine follows tape
DICE SIMULATOR — Two 4018B synchronous

counters are connected in modulo-6 walking-
ring sequences for driving LEDs to produce fa-
miliar die patterns. Pressing roll button starts
gated astable that cycles first die hundreds of
times and second die dozens of times, for ran-
domizing ofresult. When roll button is released,
final state of each die is held. — D. Lancaster,
apolis, IN, 1977, p 324-325.
RANDOM-FLASHING NEONS— Neon glow

lamps such as Radio Shack 272-1101 flash in R • 1-10 MEGOHM
unpredictable sequences at various rates that C ■ .01-1 (if, 200 VOLTS
are determined by values of R and C used for
each lamp, to give attention-getting display for
classrooms and Science Fairs. Value of R1 can
be as low as 2200 ohms for higher repetition
rates, but battery drain increases. When circuit
is energized, each neon receives full voltage and
fires. Lamp capacitor begins charging, decreas-
ing voltage across lamp until lamp goes out and
cycle starts over. Use of different capacitor val-
ues makes lamps recycle at different rates. T1
is 6.3-VAC filament transformer used to step up
oscillator voltage. — F. M. Mims, "Transistor
1974, p 43-52.
DICE — Simple low-cost arrangement of three SN7490N TTL decade counter with SN7405 hex suggests variations for Arabic and binary dis-
ICs operating from 5-V battery (four nickel-cad- inverter to drive Minitron 301 5F seven-segment plays.— G. J. Naaijer, Electronic Dice, Wireless
mium or alkaline cells) provides bar display cor- display. Article describes operation in detail and World, Aug. 1973, p 401-403.
responding to spots on six sides of die. Uses
GAME CIRCUITS 443
8500-1 TV game chip and associated circuits chip to get vertical and horizontal sync frequen- general terms. — S. Ciarcia, Hey, Look What My
give choice of six different games. Article gives cies, VHF modulator used between game and Daddy Built!, 73 Magazine, Oct. 1976, p 104-
additional circuits required, VO
including
D that for 2- antenna terminal of TV set, and rifle target prac- 108. 13
'C,
n n
NO
PIN IC,
lc.
'C3 GND 3 12 4
'C. 14 7
4 R
14
16 7
CLK
16 8
PE 1C U/D
8
2
CO Cl
O D„ PD O
2 14 11 6
BL
6 2 1 7
3 , P
4
LE f g
LT P
a b c d e 1
-N.C. -N.C.
-N.C.
13
,C2B-
u
8
9
'V D Sj Q,
11 U2 ^2 12
CD4011 OR MC14011 (QUAD 2- INPUT NAND) c’ r2Q>

IC,= CD4013 OR MC14013 (DUAL "D” FLIP FLOP)
CD4510 OR MC14510
IC,- CD4511 OR MC14511 (LATCH/DECODER/DRIVER)
HP5082 7740 (SEVEN SEGMENT INDICATOR) COMMON CATHODE
>c4-=
LED,
LED DIE — When positive bias on input of IC1D number displayed. Number can be between 1 blanked until plate is touched. Standby current
NAND gate is pulled to ground by skin resis- and 9, between 1 and 6 for die, or between 1 and drain of 10 jiA on three AA alkaline cells is so
tance of finger, D flip-flop IC2A connected as 2 to represent heads or tails. Change BCD value low that ON/OFF switch is unnecessary. — C.
mono is triggered. Pin 1 goes high for about 2 of jam inputs of IC3 to highest random number Cullings, Electronic Die Uses Touchplate and 7-
s, making IC4 latch outputs of counter IC3 and desired. Values shown are for 4.5-V supply and Segment LED Display, EDN Magazine, May 20,
unblank LED display. Random time that finger display current of 10 mA per segment. LED is
1975, p 70 and 72.
is on touch plate determines randomness of
CHAPTER 39
IF Amplifier Circuits
Gives circuits for most common IF values used in single-conversion and
double-conversion superheterodyne receivers, including noise blanker, CW
filter, Q multiplier, and T attenuator variations. See also Frequency
Modulation, Receiver, Single-Sideband, Television, and Transceiver chapters.
I-F AMr
rnuu, i
TO AGC AMP
1500 h
-J-A/W^-O
“1
POLYSTYRENE
180
POLY
1
1 near-taper
composition control (panel mount).
/ 1
RFC11 — 2.5-mH miniature choke (J. W
-J Miller 70F253A1).
1 RFC12 — 10-mH miniature choke (J. W
J
Miller 70F102A1).
CR6-CR9, incl. — High-speed silicon,

1 N91 4A or equiv.
CR10 — Motorola MV-104 Varicap
tuning diode.
LI 6 — Nominal 640-mH slug-tuned
gain to +9 V for maximum gain, is applied to inductor (J. W. Miller 9057).
455-kHz WITH PRODUCT DETECTOR AND pins 7 of both IF opamps. Product detector uses LI 7 — Nominal 60-/uH slug-tuned
inductor (J. W. Miller 9054).
BFO — Used in 1.8-2 MHz communication re- quad 1N914A diodes. Varicap CR10 and R1 vary
T2, T3 — 455-kHz i-f transformer. See
ceiver having wide dynamic range. Input comes BFO output from 453 to 457 kHz. Two-part ar- text. (J. W. Miller 2067).
from diode-switched bandpass filter giving ticle gives all other circuits of receiver. — D. T4 — Trifilar broadband transformer. 15
trifilar turns of No. 26 enam. wire on
choice of 400-Hz or 2.1-kHz bandwidths. Output DeMaw, His Eminence — the Receiver, QSTr
Amidon T-50-61 toroid core.
for AGC amplifier is taken from primary of T3. Part 2— July 1976, p 14-17 (Part 1— June 1976,
U2, U3 - RCA 1C.
AGC voltage, ranging from +2 V for minimum VR1 — 9.1 -V, 1 -W Zener diode.
p 27-30).
444
IF AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 445
AGC A GC
BOTTOM
3.5-4 MHz TUNABLE IF WITH NOISE BLANK- noise spikes for blanker consisting of 1N60 dual-gate MOSFET, transformer-coupled to ce-
ING— MC1550G is followed by Silicon General diode gate and 40673 pulse amplifier. Blanker is ramic filter FL2 at IF output. Article gives con-
SG3402T mixer that provides good conversion fed from envelope detector that controls gate struction details. — R. Megirian, The Minicom
gain with very light oscillator loading. Mixer feeding FL1 dual ceramic filter providing IF se- Receiver, 73 Magazine, April 1977, p 136—149.
output is fed to 40673 amplifier that builds up lectivity. IFstage following blanker uses SD304
455-kHz SECOND IF— Used in all-band double- gain amplifier using three MPS 2926 transistors wide-range AGC circuit. Supply is 13.6 V regu-
conversion superheterodyne receiver for AM, all having automatic gain control and master
lated. Article gives all circuits of receiver. — D.
narrow-band FM, CW, and SSB operation. Input gain control. Use of silicon rectifiers in inter- M. Eisenberg, Build This All-Band VHF Receiver,
is fed through 455-kHz ceramic filter to high- stage networks of IF amplifier gives economical 7 3 Magazine, Jan. 1975, p 105-112.
446
COUPLING TO HIGH-IMPEDANCE DETECTOR—

Final IF stage of receiver uses piezoelectric over-
tone resonator connected backwards for cou-
pling to high-impedance detector. Arrange-

ment provides useful voltage step-up as well,
about 2.5 times. Resonator can be Brush Clevite
Transfilter. — G. W. Short, Reversed Operation
of 'Transfilter,' Wireless World, Aug. 1971,
386. p
60 MHz WITH 80-dB POWER GAIN— Two-stage network. Overall bandwidth is 1.5 MHz. Resis- “A High Gain Integrated Circuit RF-IF Amplifier
tuned IF amplifier achieves maximum gain and tors in series with AGC pins 2 of opamp stages with Wide Range AGC," Motorola. Phoenix, A Z
1975, AN-513, p 8.
output signal swing capability by using differ- provide more efficient AGC action.— B. Trout,
ential-mode coupling for interstage and output
■
1
^ GAIN 67 dB
|
E|N = RMS \
eOUT = DETECTED RF/
2
r 1 8
n rCT
if
DETECTED
IF INPUT ^ _
OUTPUT
j
Z|N 30 K 1 -
1 1 1
MILLER 2061
, L
1
1 1
INPUT
6J
1
O GAIN CONTROL VOLTAGE
(GROUND FOR MAXIMUM GAIN)
: oi F
-O GAIN CONTROL VOLTAGE
455-kHz CASCODE IF — Sections of Signetics

-O DETECTED OUTPUT NE510A transistor array serve as active ele-
ments for IF strip using standard transformers.
Voltage gain is 66 dB when gain-control input
is grounded. Alternate detector connection for
-O TO NE 510 PIN 5
including AGC is shown below. — "Signetics
CA, 1977, p 746-747.
447
IF AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS
COMPRESSOR
455-kHz IF WITH AF COMPRESSOR— Combi-

nation of IF amplifier, audio compressor, tuna-
ble audio filter, and audio output system oper-
ates from single supply. Compressor and filter
each use N5558V dual opamps or equivalent
units. T uning range of filter is about 500 to 2000
Hz. IF input goes directly to pin 2 of LM373H.
Use coupling capacitor to prevent shorting pin
2 to ground and damaging 1C. — R. Megirian,
Design Ideas for Miniature Communications Re-
120-144 MHz — General-purpose amplifier can and up to 144 MHz for RF. Transistor type is not azine, Peterborough NH 03458, July 1974, p 55-
be used around 120 MHz as microwave IF strip critical. — B. Hoisington, DC Isolation, 73 Mag- 62.
453-KHz FILTER I-F AMR

T!
PROD. DET.
455 kHz WITH PRODUCT DETECTOR— Bipolar detector produces output in audio range when 455-kHz IF transformer, and T3 is miniature
transistor Q6 provides about 20-dB gain at 455 its inputs are 455-kHz IF signal and BFO signal audio transformer with 10K primary and 2K cen-
kHz, which is adequate for handling wide range near 455 kHz. T ransistors can be 2N222, 2N3641, ter-tap secondary (CT not used). — D. DeMaw
of signal amplitudes without changing audio 2N4123, or equivalent. T1 is J. W. Miller 8814 and L. McCoy, Learning to Work with Semicon-
gain setting in receiver without AGC. Product 455-kHz IF transformer/filter, T2 is miniature ductors, QST, Aug. 1974, p 26-30.
ceiver. Used to isolate weak CW signals despite

noise and interference, as required in low-
power amateur work. FET input is directly cou-
pled to collector of HEP55 serving as Q-multi-
plier regenerative amplifier. Transformer L1-L3
provides feedback. Filter is connected in series
with input end of IF strip, following 1 .2-kHz me-
chanical filter. When two CW signals are re-
ceived, one can be eliminated by adjusting CA
to recenter passband of filter. Current drain of
6 mA can be supplied by two 6-V batteries. For
455-kHz IF, C is 470 pF, CA is 7-45 pF, and L1-
L2-L3 are 12-115-24 turns No. 32 enamel on
Amidon T44-15 core. — S. M. Olberg, Vari-Q Fil-
ter, Ham Radio, Sept. 1973, p 62-65.
-M5V
l-r AMPLIFIER
28-MHz LOW-NOISE — Developed for use with

2304-MHz balanced mixer. Provides required
match between 50-ohm mixer output and input
of 28-MHz IF amplifier in UHF receiver. Input and
output connections are made with short
lengths of RG-58/U coax. Noise figure is less
than 1.5 dB. — L. May and B. Lowe, A Simple and
Efficient Mixer for 2304 MHz, QST, April 1974,
p 15-19 and 31.
AM/FM WITH AGC — Operates from single +15 the other for AM component. External transis- furnished by diode detector. — "Integrated Cir-
V supply. Standard 455-kHz IF is used for AM to tor is needed because MC1350 requires up to 0.2 cuit IF Amplifiers for AM/FM and FM Radios,"
feed 1N34A diode detector. One output of mA of AGC drive and this is more than can be Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1975, AN-543A, p 10.
MC1350 is used for FM signal component and
449
IF AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS
-N°!SE l-F AMPLIFIER AUDIO

BLANKER
OS to tiF
IF WITH NOISE BLANKER — Addition of BFO and

noise blanker to 455-kHz IF amplifier gives setup
for testing new tuners and front ends. Two
methods of coupling into amplifier are shown.
LM373H 1C with two Murata SFD-455D ceramic
filters fulfills requirements for IF amplifier, de-
tector, and AGC functions. — R. Megirian, De-
sign Ideas for Miniature Communications Re-
ceivers, Ham Radio , April 1976, p 18-25.
♦12 V
T ATTENUATOR — When inserted between

stages of IF amplifier, circuit acts as three-sec-
tion attenuator with dynamic range greater
than 60 dB. Can be controlled by positive volt-
age from AVC system of receiver or manually
with 100K pot. Use PIN diodes. — Super Circuits,
73 Magazine, Aug. 1975, p 140.
+ 15 V
10.7-MHz IF for FM — Motorola dual MC1355 amplifier for FM receiver. MPS-H04 discrete impedances are 235 ohms. — "Integrated Circuit
limiting gain blocks are used with two TRW five- transistor is used after first filter block to reduce
IF Amplifiers for AM/FM and FM Radios," Mo-
pole linear phase filters and external ratio de- noise figure for overall system. Input and output torola, Phoenix, A Z, 1975, AN-543A, p 4.
tector to give complete high-performance IF
Q MULTIPLIER — Transistorized Q multiplier can

be connected to plate of mixer in receiver hav-
ing IF in range of 1400-1500 kHz. Iron-core coil
should have high Q. Setting of pot depends on
transistor used, which could also be HE-3 or
2N1742. — Q& A, 73 Magazine, April 1977, p 165.
NOTE - ENCIRCLED LETTERS DESIGNATE TEST POINTS

and construction. — B. Hoisington, Building a
135-kHz STRIP — Developed for use in all-band supply, connected to positive terminal of C11 135 kHz l-F Strip, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1975, p
127-130 and 132.
VHF/UHF/S-band receiver. Operates from 12-V through 100-ohm resistor. Article covers design
+ 12 V
FM AUTO RADIO IF — Uses MC1357 quadrature Sensitivity is 18 gM for 3% total harmonic dis- AM/FM and FM Radios," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z,
detector after ceramic filter to give IF band- tortion. — "Integrated Circuit IF Amplifiers for 1975, AN-543A, p 6.
width required for good stereo reproduction.
IF AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 451
-10 dB
DIODE-SWITCHED IF FILTER— Used In 1.8-2 width) or F455FD-25 FL4 (2.5-kHz bandwidth). main IF strip of receiver. Two-part article gives
MHz communication receiver having wide dy- Reverse bias is applied to nonconducting all other circuits of receiver. — D. DeMaw, His
namic range. 1N914 diodes select Collins me- diodes to lesson leakage through switching Eminence — the Receiver, QST, Part 1 — June
chanical filter F455FD-04 FL3 (400-Hz band- diodes. Filter is located between IF preamp and 1976, p 27-30 (Part 2— July 1976, p 14-17).
V* = U V
Ip * 20 TURNS #36
LS « 20 TURNS5 TURNS
TAPPED #36
FROM OUTER EDGE
10.7-MHz LIMITING AMPLIFIER— Uses Signet- 300 kHz, achieved by adjusting transformers for pling. Full limiting is provided by circuit with
ics NE510 transistor arrays in common-collector 600-kHz bandwidth and using dual cup-core input voltage of 70 /aVRMS. — "Signetics Ana-
common-base configuration as IF strip for com- transformers originally designed for tubes.
log Data Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA,
mercial FM broadcast receiver. Bandwidth is Windings were changed to give critical cou-
1977, p 747-748.
CHAPTER 40
Instrumentation Circuits
Includes DC, AF, and wideband RF amplifiers with such special features as
automatic nulling and automatic calibration, for use with resistance-bridge,
photocell, strain-gage, and other input transducers. Applications include
measurement of ionization, radiation, small currents, liquid flow and level,
light level, pH, power, torque, weight, and wind velocity. Metal detectors and
proximity detectors are also covered. See also chapters covering
measurement of Capacitance, Frequency, Resistance, and Temperature.
RANGE
^ SELECT
-O +1 5V
n n ?
20k 20k -15
10 11 6
2
4 MC1495L
9
3 8 12
14
p-vw^-,
'cwâ-4x1°
nn n
\ / 200k
20k
O-VVV^+XI
V OFF-
1SET
o+15rV*' 2
4 MC 1495L
14
9
3 8 12
IN4152
(4)
ential current-to-voltage converter to obtain VS5

WIND SPEED Developed to give magnitude of voltages from strain-gage sensors are con- as sum-of-squares of V, and Vv. Range covered
wind velocity over wide range of values when verted to normalized values Vx and VY which are is 1-100 mph. Article covers operation of circuit
its two measured vectors are expressed as volt- squared by MC1495L four-quadrant transcon- in detail. — J. A. Connelly and M. B. Lundberg,
ages. Output is in logarithmic form for easy ad- ductance multipliers. Output currents are then Analog Multipliers Determine True Wind Speed,
aptation to data processors. N-Sand E-W vector summed, and HA2705 opamp is used as differ- EDN Magazine, April 20, 1974, p 69-72.
452
453
INSTRUMENTATION CIRCUITS
PROXIMITY DETECTOR — Output changes from

high (9 V) to low (0 V) when conducting object
moves within 1 cm from open end of 150-turn
coil L (No. 34 enamel) mounted in half of Fer-
roxcube 1811-PL00-3B7 core set. Can be used as
contactless limit switch or tachometer pickup.
Qt-Qj are CMOS MOSFETs in CD4007A package.
Q, and pickup coil form 100-kHz oscillator.
Diodes develop DC voltage proportional to
peak-to-peak value of oscillator signal, for ap-
plication to Schmitt trigger Q2-Q4. Conductive
object near coil absorbs energy from magnetic
field, lowering oscillator amplitude and turning
Schmitt trigger off. 10K pot adjusts sensitivity.
Circuit drives CMOS logic directly. For TTL
drive, use buffer. — M. L. Fichtenbaum, Induc-
tive Proximity Detector Uses Little Power, Elec-
tronics, Jan. 22, 1976, p 112.
0-15 MHz WITH 100-dB CMR— Differential in-

puts are applied to Optical Electronics 9715
opamp through 9714 voltage followers. Current
booster using 9810 opamp raises load current
to ±100 mA. Complete amplifier has very high
differential and common-mode input imped-
ance. Common-mode rejection can be trimmed
to greater than 100 dB at 1 kHz for unity gain.
Gain is determined by value of resistor RG con-
nected between points A and B and is equal to
(2R2/R1)(1 + 2R2/RG). Settling time is 500 ns.
Accuracy is maintained from -55°C to +85°C. —
"Instrumentation Amplifier," Optical Electron-
ics, Tucson, AZ, Application Tip 10240.
+9V
MOSFET DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER— Devel-

oped to monitor chemical process of titration,
by recording probe output voltages between
100 and 400 mV when internal impedance of
probe is in gigohm range. Either 40673 or 3N187
dual-gate MOSFETs connected as differential
amplifier are suitable for meeting high input re-
sistance requirement. Transistor level drifts be-
cause of temperature are in opposition and tend
to cancel each other. Overall power gain of am-
plifier isabout 70 dB. Circuit is suitable for other
To
electrometer applications as well. — D. R. Bow-
probe
man, Automatic Titration Potentiometer, Wire-
less World, Aug. 1971, p 400-401.
— 9V
R, R.
HIGH GAIN WITH WIDE BANDWIDTH— High

CMRR is achieved by using Q, and Q2 as emitter-
coupled pair biased by constant-current
sources Q3 and Q„. Differential signals applied
to Q and Q2 appear across 100K resistor R„ for
amplification by factor inversely proportional to
R,. R. is used to null opamp A, when no input
is present. Bandwidth, determined by A,, is
about 2 MHz. Gain is flat at about 40 dB over
temperature range of -55°C to +125°C. Circuit

will handle common-mode inputs up to ±10
V. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook," How-
ard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 243-245.
*Rg varied to adjust input sensitivity and gain; can be

greater than 200 kit if attenuation desired.
TORQUE WRENCH— Micro Networks MN2200

instrumentation amplifier is used with strain
gage to create digital-readout torque wrench.
Strain gages having nominal impedance of 120
ohms are bonded to torque-sensing member at
45° to longitudinal axis, so gages in opposite
bridge arms are under simultaneous tension or
compression for given direction of torque.
Bridge power is taken from 5-V digital panel
meter supply. Instrumentation amplifier will
work with any voltage from ±5 to ±15 V. Vari-
able gain-adjust resistor G (10-turn 50K pot) is
set so DPM reads 200 ft-lb of torque at full scale
in increments of 0.1 ft-lb. — R. Duris, Instrumen-
tation Amplifiers — They're Great Problem Solv-
ers When Correctly Applied, EDN Magazine,
Sept. 5, 1977, p 133-135.
0-35 MHz WITH GAIN OF 10— Wideband am- sors. High-frequency gain is provided by 40673 back path establish amplifier gain. R„ sets op-
plifier handles inputs up to 100 mV P-P and dual-gate MOSFET. Low-frequency gain with erating point of N, for 10-mA drain current. Base
drives 1-kilohm load, to meet requirements of DC stabilization is provided by CA3130 CMOS resistor of Q3 is 1 kilohm. — H. A. Wittlinger,
oscilloscope preamps, instrumentation and opamp. Transistors Q,-Qs are part of CA3086 CMOS Op Amp, MOSFET Implement Wideband
pulse signal amplifiers, and video signal proces- transistor-array 1C. Values of R, and R„ in feed- Amplifier, EDN Magazine, June 20, 1977, p 114.
INSTRUMENTATION CIRCUITS 455
3-18 V
161 kHz
VOLUME
0.1 pF
36 pF
GAIN-FILTER
METER AMPLIFIER — Junction FET in simple DC
cTb—
CRYSTAL i amplifier circuit converts 0-1 mA DC milliam-
HEADSET
meter to 0-100 /xA DC microammeter. Adjust
zero-set control for zero meter current with no
input, then apply input signal and adjust gain to
desired value. — N. J. Foot, Electronic Meter
Amplifier, Ham Radio, Dec. 1976, p 38-39.
A, - A4 : ’/«4030
TWIN-OSCILLATOR METAL DETECTOR— Metal

object near search coil changes frequency of
oscillator A, which is initially tuned to 160 kHz,
thereby changing frequency of 1-kHz output de-
rived by mixing with 161-kHz output of A . Sen-
sitivity, determined largely by dimensions of
search coil, is sufficient to detect coins about 1
SEARCH COIL foot away. — M. E. Anglin, C-MOS Twin Oscil-
lator Forms Micropower Metal Detector, Elec-
(AWG 18, 140 TURNS, 6 IN. DIAMETERI tronics, Dec. 22, 1977, p 78.
STRAIN-GAGE AMPLIFIER — Optimum perfor- output stage. Bypass capacitors suppress un- VDC for system while giving excellent power
mance is achieved in fully portable system by desirable high-frequency signals. Stevens-Ar- isolation. — D. Sheehan, Strain-Gauge Trans-
utilizing combination of 747 opamps for A, and nold DC/DC converter operating from 12-V stor- ducer System Uses Off-the-Shelf Components,
A2 with National LH002CH opamp for B,-B3 and age battery provides required regulated ±15 EDN Magazine, Nov. 5, 1977, p 79-81.
special AD521K instrumentation amplifier for
±34 V COMMON-MODE RANGE — Interconnec-

tions shown for three LM143 high-voltage
opamps give equivalent of single differential-
■O Vn input opamp having wide common-mode
range, high input impedance, and gain of 1000.
Adjust R2 to trim gain. Adjust R7 for best com-
mon-mode rejection. With 10K load, frequency
response is down 3 dB at 8.9 kHz. — "Linear Ap-
plications, Vol. 2," National Semiconductor,
VS = -38V
IplfiCS
REMOTE
SENSING
DIFFERENTIAL-INPUT AMPLIFIER— Provides
gain up to 1000, depending on value of Rg, for
video signals in radar, medical ultrasound, laser - i NPUT
communication, and laser rangefinder applica-
tions. Uses three Optical Electronics 9906 wide-
band opamps and 9910 current booster for
cable drive. Bandwidth is above 10 MHz for OUTPUT
gains of 0.1 to 100, decreasing to 5 MHz at gain REFERENCE
of 1000. Miller compensation of input amplifiers
minimizes noise level and gives input imped-
ance of 5 megohms and 5 pF. — "Wide Band In-
strumentation Amplifier," Optical Electronics, + input R6=300
Tucson, AZ, Application Tip 10276. GA I N=1+2k/Rg
Ck= . 033uF
C3=0.3-2pF
METAL DETECTOR — Will detect small coin up difference between search oscillator and refer- 10 pF variable. C2 is used for coarse tuning, and
to about 5 inches underground and larger metal ence oscillator Tr„-Tr5 to opamp and Tr6 for driv- C3 for fine adjustment to get beat note. Diodes
objects at much greater depths. Frequency of ing phones or loudspeaker. Article gives con- are 1N4148. Tr3 is BC308, BCY72, or equivalent,
search oscillator Tr,-Tr2 depends on values used struction and adjustment details, including and other transistors are BF238, BC108, or
for three paralleled capacitors, search coil, and dimensions for search coil. Reference oscillator equivalent. — D. E. Waddington, Metal Detector,
metal objects in vicinity of coil. Mixer Tr3 feeds is set to 625 kHz. C, is 560 pF, C2 150 pF, and C3 Wireless World, April 1977, p 45-48.
+ 15 V
50-OHM LINE DRIVER— CA3100 bipolar MOS

opamp operates as high-slew-rate wideband
amplifier that provides 18 V P-P into open circuit
or 9 V P-P into 50-ohm transmission line. Slew
rate is 28 V/jus. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear
ICs," RCA Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ,
1977, p 13.
*15V
ADJUSTABLE-GAIN WIDEBAND AMPLIFIER—

Single resistor R8 adjusts gain from less than 1
to over 1000, with gain value equal to 200,000
divided by value in ohms used for R8. Common-
mode rejection ratio is about 100 dB, indepen-
dent of gain. Q1-Q2 are operated open-loop as
floating differential input stage. Current
sources Q3 and Q4 set operating current of
input transistors. — "Linear Applications, Vol.
2," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA
1976, LB-21.
PI COA MMETER CIRCUIT

10 KMI1
OPAMP PICOAMMETER — Current-to-voltage guarded mode to reduce leakage current.

handled with single 10,000-megohm resistor in
converter connection for CA3160 and CA3140 CA3140 provides gain of 100 for driving zero-
overall feedback path. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA
bipolar MOS opamps provides full-scale meter center microammeter. With suitable switching,
Linear ICs," RCA Solid State Division. Somer-
deflection for ±3 pA. CA3160 is operated in full-scale current ranges of 3 pA to 1 nA can be ville, NJ, 1977, p 14.
+ 15V
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATOR — Automatic scaling

circuit permits frequent and fast recalibration
for precision optical measurements, to compen-
sate for variations in light intensity due to ther-
mal cycling of lamp filament, dirty optics, and
gain variations between photodetectors and
between amplifiers. With reset pulse at point B,
comparator A2 compares output of multiplier to
preset reference voltage on R,. If A2 input volt-
age isgreater than reference applied to pin 3 by
R2, output switches to zero and remains there
until C has discharged enough to lower output
of A, and output of multiplier below reference
on pin 3. If input at pin 2 of A2 is less than ref-
erence on pin 3, A2 will switch to 15 V and out-
put of multiplier will be adjusted upward until
voltage on pin 2 of A2 again exceeds that on pin
3. Output of A2 is thus continually switching be-
tween 15 V and 0 V during reset or scaling. After
reset pulse is removed, scale factor K is main-
tained constant by multiplier during measur-
ing.— R. E. Keil, Automatic Scaling Circuit for
Optical Measurements, R6
EDNEEE Magazine,
Nov. 15, 1971, p 49-50.
1%
3M
HIGH GAIN FOR WEAK SIGNALS— National

LM121 differential amplifier is operated open-
loop as input stage for input signals up to ± 10
mV. Input voltage is converted to differential
output current for driving opamp acting as cur-
rent-to-voltage converter with single-ended
output. R4 is adjusted to set gain at 1000. Null
pot R3 serves for offset adjustment. — "Linear
97.6k
5V
0-20 Hz DATA DEMODULATOR— Used for buffered by opamp A, for branching to sum-
measuring and monitoring suppressed-carrier ming junction of A3. Article describes operation
signal modulation from aircraft control sys- than 0.1%. In-phase reference voltage applied of circuit. — J. A. Tabb and M. L. Roginsky, In-
tems. Provides data frequency response within to comparator IC5 controls gating of CD4016 strumentation Signal Demodulator Uses Low-
0.1 dB from DC to 20 Hz, with linearity better MOS switch S,. Suppressed-carrier signal is Power IC's, EDN Magazine, Jan. 20, 1976, p 80.
+/ sv
OPTIONAL BYPASS NETWORK
(SEE
i *
8 7 6 5 PIN CHAPTER
4 PIN 7 1)
•Cl Innnn
(TOP) 'n-nW .1. , .1. , IM >33*
12 3 4
t±t‘
HIGH INPUT Z — Suitable for use as active probe

for CRO, as electrometer, and for instrumenta-
tion applications. Combination of unipolar and
bipolar transistors gives desirable amplifying
PHOTOCELL BRIDGE— Radio Shack 276-116 R5 is at maximum resistance, adjust R5 until features of each solid-state device. — 1. M. Got-
cadmium sulfide photocell is connected in needle moves away from zero, rezero with R3, tlieb, A New Look at Solid-State Amplifiers,
Wheatstone bridge circuit. When bridge is bal- and repeat procedure until meter can no longer Ham Radio, Feb. 1976, p 16-19.
anced, RS741C opamp connected to opposite be brought to zero. Sensitivity is now maxi-
comers of bridge receives no voltage and meter mum, and uncovered photocell will detect
reads zero. Light on photocell unbalances flame from candle at 20 feet. — F. M. Mims, "In-
bridge and gives meter deflection. Can be used
as high-sensitivity light meter. Adjust R3 until Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 29-35.
meter reads zero with photocell covered while
SIX-RANGE LIGHT METER — Switching of feed-

back resistors for opamp driven by Radio Shack
276-1 15 selenium solar cell gives multirange lin-
ear light meter. With 1000-megohm resistor for
highest sensitivity, star Sirius will produce pho-
tocurrent of about 25 pA when solar cell is
shielded from ambient light with length of card-
board tubing. Supplies are 9 V, and meter is 0-
1 mA. — F. M. Mims, "Integrated Circuit Proj-
2nd Ed , p 45-53.
LIGHT METER WITH LED READOUT— Light on

LED 5 phototransistor Q1 (Radio Shack 276-130) pro-
duces voltage change across R2 for amplifica-
tion by opamp whose output drives array of five
LED4
LEDs forming bar graph voltage indicator. Ad-
just R3 initially for highest sensitivity by turning
off room lights and rotating until LED 1 just
LE03 stops glowing. Now, as light is gradually in-
creased on sensor, LEDs come on one by one in
upward sequence and stay on until all five are
LED* lit. Solar cells or selenium cells can be used in
place of phototransistor. — F. M. Mims, "Opto-

electronic Projects, Vol. 1," Radio Shack, Fort
Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed„ p 85-93.
LED 1
460 MODERN ELECTRONIC CIRCUITSR, (n)REFERENCE MANUAL
(Voltage+ Input)
o- V (Full Scale) Ml!)
1.5 M
10 mV 100k 1.5 M
1.0 M 1.5M 1.5 M
100 mV
(Current Input) 1.5 M
1.0V 1.5 M
10V 10 M 0
100V 10 M
300 k
30 k R, 00
0
M’)
1 (Full Scale) R (!■>)
(Common)
100 nA 1.5 M 1.5 M
1.0 Â
500
5.0 nA 300 k
10 Â 300 k
300 k 0
0
50 mA 60 k 0
100 mA 30 k 0
6.0 k
0
NANOAMMETER — Programmable amplifier 3.0 k FET-BIPOLAR DARLINGTON— Can be used as

operating from +1.5 V supply such as D cells is in tables. Adjust R, to calibrate meter, and ad- meter interface amplifier, impedance trans-
used as current-to-voltage converter. Offset just R2 to null input offset voltage on lowest former, coax driver, or relay actuator. Combi-
null of A, is used to minimize input offset volt- range. Not suitable for higher current ranges nation of unipolar and bipolar transistors gives
age error. If programmed for low bias current, because power drain is excessive above 100 desirable amplifying features of each solid-state
amplifier can convert currents as small as 100 device. — I. M. Gottlieb, A New Look at Solid-
pA. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook,"
nA with less than 1% error. Resistor values for Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 414- State Amplifiers, Ham Radio, Feb. 1976, p IB-
variety of current and voltage ranges are given 417. 19.
DIGITAL pH METER — 3130 CMOS opamp gives

required high input impedance for pH probe at
low cost. Output of probe, ranging from posi-
tive generated DC voltage for low pH to 0 V for
pH 7 and negative voltages for high pH values,
is amplified in circuit that provides gain adjust-
ment to correct for temperature of solution
being measured. For analog reading, output of
opamp can be fed directly to center-scale mil-
liammeter through 100K calibrating pot. For
digital display giving reading of 7.00 for 0-V out-
put, pH output is converted to calibrated cur-
rent for summing with stable offset current *
equal to 700 counts. This is fed to current-to-fre-
quency converter driving suitable digital dis-
play. Standard pH buffer solutions are used for
calibration. — D. Lancaster, "CMOS Cookbook,"
349.
DIFFERENTIAL-INPUT VARIABLE-GAIN— Gain

of A3 is varied by modifying feedback returned
to R„. A, serves as active attenuator in feedback
path, presenting constant zero-impedance
source to R4 as required for maintaining good
balance and high CMRR. With values shown,
gain can be varied from unity to 300. — W. G.
C,
Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard W.
Sams, Indianapolis. IN, 1974, p 238-239.
Matching of resistor pairs R2 - R3 and R4 - R5

determines CMRR.
150 pF
— It—
461
SENSOR-BRIDGE AMPLIFIER— RCA CA3094

combination power switch and amplifier can be
used with variety of transducer bridges for in-
strumentation and other applications. Circuit
delivers output of 1 V full-scale for driving
meter. Pot R serves as centering or reference
control. Can be used as thermometer if one leg
of bridge is thermistor and meter scale is cali-
brated in degrees. — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C Prin-
ciples, Experiments, and Projects," Howard W.
HIGH CMRR — Use of two Precision Monolithics

OP-05 opamps feeding OP-01 opamp gives
input impedance of about 100 gigohms and
high common-mode rejection for instrumenta-
tion applications. — "Instrumentation Opera-
tional Amplifier," Precision Monolithics, Santa
Clara, CA, 1977, OP-05, p 7.
v+
= (E.
R, = R.
R, = R5
R, = R ,
106
= ■
DIFFERENTIAL PREAMP— Opamps A, and A2
form cross-coupled preamp with differential
input and differential output, driving instru-
mentation opamp A3 to provide overall gain of
106. Common-mode input range is ±10 V, and
full-scale differential input is ±100 mV. For
higher input impedance, 108 opamps can be
used in preamp. For higher speed, all three
opamps can be 118. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp

1974, p 241-243.
Matching of resistor pairs R2 - Rs and R6 - RT determines

CMRR. All gain resistors (R, - R,) should be metal-film or
wire wound types for best stability.
R1
LINEAR LIGHT METER — Uses Radio Shack 276-

115 selenium solar cell or equivalent photocell
with high-gain RS741C opamp to drive meter.
Sensitivity is sufficient to detect individual stars
at night without magnifying lens if photocell is
shielded from ambient light with length of card-
board tubing. Increasing value of R1 increases
gain and sensitivity of circuit. R2 sets meter
needle to zero when sensor is dark. — F. M.
Mims, "Integrated Circuit Projects, Vol. 4,"
Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p
45-53.
lOpf
HODOSCOPE AMPLIFIER— Charge amplifier

using Teledyne Philbrick 102601 opamp was de-
veloped for use with each Geiger counter of 132-
counter array for ionization hodoscope used in
tracing paths of cosmic rays. Charge-sensitive
stage A, converts input charge pulse to voltage
pulse significantly larger than noise of second
stage. With 616-pF load capacitor, output is 12
V for input of 10 mV. Cost of charge amplifier is
about $50. — H. C. Carpenter, Low Cost Charge
Amplifier, EDN Magazine, May 20, 1973, p 83 ALL RESISTORS 1/4 W
and 85.
C, 3k V SPRAGUE CERAMIC 30GA D47
C2 100V MICA D 15 IE 100FC
C3 35 V SPRAGUE CS 13BF 105K
A, 102601 TELEOYNE PHILIBRICK
A2 1026 TELEDYNE PHILBRICK
CL DETECTOR LOAD CAPACITANCE
463
THREE-STAGE OPAMP — Responds to differ-

ence between two applied signals. Differential
output voltage of LM102 pair is applied to bal-
anced differential input of LM107 opamp. Out-
put can be metered or used in any other desired
manner. Voltage gain is equal to ratio R4/R2 and
is 100 for values shown. — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C
W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 126.
FEEDBACK OPAMP FOR BRIDGE— Uses

CA3094 programmable opamp to convert dif-
ferential input signal from resistor bridge to sin-
gle-ended 1-V output signal. Circuit provides
feedback for opamp. RC network between ter-
minals 1 and 4 of opamp provides compensa-
tion to improve stability. — "Circuit Ideas for
RCA Linear ICs," RCA Solid State Division, So-
merville, NJ, 1977, p 13.
provide choice of 10.4 or 101 gain and choice of tation applications. Highest gain is obtained and Their Applications," Siliconix, Santa Clara,
two differential input channels for instrumen- when control logic is high. — "Analog Switches CA, 1976, p 7-91.
FLOW METER — Simple opamp circuit with one is fed back to power transistor in correct phase
transistor gives reliable hot-wire anemometer for maintaining constant-temperature condi-
for measuring flow of gases or liquids. R2 is tion in which R2 is approximately equal to R,. NONLATCHING RELAY — When liquid rises
heated above ambient temperature in Wheat- Article covers construction of hot-wire probe above level determined by positions of probes,
stone bridge including overheat resistor R, made from Wollaston wire. — W. Bank, Build circuit is triggered and relay, buzzer, or other
which is calibrated to be 30% larger than cold Your Own Constant-Temperature Hot-Wire indicator is energized. Alarm stops when liquid
resistance of R2. Bridge is fed from power tran- Anemometer, EDN Magazine, Aug. 1, 1972, p drops below preset level again. Use any oper-
sistor which is within feedback loop of opamp 43. ating voltage from 3 to 12 V that will actuate
that senses bridge unbalance. Output of bridge load employed.— J. A. Sandler, 9 Easy to Build
Projects under $9, Modern Electronics, July
1978, p 53-56.
Rl
Rr
LARGE-SIGNAL BUFFER — Unity-gain connec-

tion of Precision Monolithics OP-07A opamp
provides high accuracy (0.005% worst case)
over temperature range of -55°C to +125°C for
SMALL-CURRENT AMPLIFIER— CA3140 bipolar show method of decoupling circuit from effects buffer applications for ±10 V signals.— D. Sod-
MOS opamp serves as high-gain current ampli- of high output-lead capacitance. — "Circuit erquist and G. Erdi, "The OP-07 Ultra-Low Off-
fier. Input current through load is increased by Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," RCA Solid State Di- set Voltage Op Amp— a Bipolar Op Amp That
ratio of R2 to Rl, which is 1000 for values vision, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 13.
Challenges Choppers, Eliminates Nulling," Pre-
shown, for reading by meter M. Dashed lines cision Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1975, AN-
13, p 8.
I 1
PICOAMMETER — Highly stable circuit uses

Valvo CSA70 chopper-stabilized opamp. Re-
'Selected 5pF to lOOpF
quired high feedback resistance is provided by
400-Hz AMPLIFIER WITH 95-dB CMRR— Preci- as viewed on CRO while feeding ±10 V signal R,-R2 in feedback loop. Article gives design
sion Monolithics OP-10 dual opamp driving OP- at 400 Hz to common connection of inputs. — equations. R, and R2 are 1 megohm, R, is 10
02 opamp gives high common-mode rejection "Linear & Conversion I.C. Products," Precision ohms, and all capacitors are 0.1 pF. — K. Kraus,
ratio. CMRR is optimized by selecting Cl and C2 Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1977-1978, p High-Speed Picoammeter, Wireless World, May
15-2. 1976, p 78.
in range of 5 to 100 pF for minimum output e0
465
GEIGER COUNTER — Output signal of Victoreen

1B85 G-M tube biased at 900 VDC is propor-
tional to beta-gamma particle count. Signal is
amplified by high-gain AF amplifier Q1-Q2 for
driving AC meter circuit. Closed-circuit jack is
provided for alternate use of headphones.
Count-rate range of instrument is determined
by exposing G-M tube to different calibrated ra-
dioactive samples and marking meter scale for
each. Bias for counter can be obtained from
three 300-V photoflash batteries in series or
equivalent supply capable of providing up to 10
mA. — R. P. Turner, "FET Circuits," Howard W.
Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 152-
153.
DIFFERENTIAL TO SINGLE-ENDED— Conver-

sion from differential input signal of thermo-
couple to single-ended output signal is
achieved without feedback by using CA3094A
programmable opamp. Output is ±4.7 V at 8.35
mA. Preamp gain is 180. For linear operation,
differential input must be equal to or less than
±26 mV. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs,"
; l0
p 13.
ZERO & OFFSET
VOLTAGE REFERENCE
STRAIN GUAGES"
FROM COMPUTER
(TARE WEIGHT)
TARE WEIGHT
LOGIC COMMAND
FROM COMPUTER
(EXTERNAL OFFSET
ELECTROMAGNETIC
& ELECTROSTATIC SHIELDS,
PLUS STYROFOAM ENCLOSURE
FOR THERMAL SHIELD
NOTES:
- ULTRONIXTYPE 105A WIREWOUND
■ FLOATED GROUND
■ INSTRUMENT (EDISON) GROUND
■ 100k, 0.005%. TYPE R 44, lb, for monitoring changes in body weight dur- puter. Proper grounding is critical; all ground
rft ■ JULIE RESEARCH LABS
ing clinical study. Bonded strain gages distrib- returns should go to single point at each power-
■ 600, 0.1%. R 44. JULIE RESEARCH LABS
all op amps and power supplies -analog devices uted symmetrically on platform of scale form supply common line. Article covers circuit op-
■ SCHEMATIC FOR STRAIN GUAGES IS SIMPLIFIED
bridge network R^R^f-R^Rs serving as input for eration in detail. — J. Williams, This 30-PPM
0.02% WEIGHING ACCURACY— Analog instru- circuit that displays weight on digital panel Scale Proves That Analog Designs Aren't Dead
ment covers up to 300 lb with resolution of 0.01 meter and provides digital outputs to com- Yet, EDN Magazine, Oct. 5, 1976, p 61-64.
5pF
HIGH-IMPEDANCE DIFFERENTIAL-INPUT—
Two Harris HA-2900 chopper-stabilized opamps
feed HA-2700 high-performance opamp for in-
strumentation applications. Circuit provides ex-
cellent rejection of ±10 V common-mode input
signals. Protection diodes prevent voltages at
input terminals from exceeding either power
supply. Supply can be ±15 V.— "Linear & Data

Melbourne, FL, Vol. 1, 1977, p 7-70 (Application
Note 518).
FERRfTE-BEAD CURRENT TRANSFORMER— INGULATING SLEEVE

No. 27 ferrite bead (Ferronics 11-122-B) wound
with 25 turns No. 30 enameled wire and
shunted by 50-ohm 'A-W resistor, gives low-cost
transformer that can be used in range of 3 kHz
to 30 MHz. Current-conversion ratio is 1 VIA into
50-ohm coaxial-cable termination, with excel-
lent linearity from milliamperes up into am-
peres. Wire carrying current to be measured is
passed once through core, to serve as single-
turn primary of transformer. — M. Salvati, Fer- CEMENT OR RIGID
rite Bead Makes Cheap Current Transformer, POTTING COMPOUND
EDN Magazine, March 20, 1974, p 85.
AUTOMATIC NULLING — Simple offset zeroing mentation opamp A, to reference ground. Arti- input circuit using strain gages is shown at left
loop reduces effective input offset of instru- cle describes operation in detail. Input signal of dashed line. — M. Cerat, Zeroing Loop Re-
mentation amplifier to less than a microvolt by source drives logic input, for nulling up to 4 V duces Instrumentation Amplifier Offsets, EDN
using zero-and-hold that nulls output of instru- without using external nulling pot. Typical Magazine, March 20, 1976, p 100 and 102.
+6V
-29
TRANSFORMER DATA
150T
T2
PRIMARY
120T 300T
1650T
SECONDARY 300T
SECONDARY TAP AT -
LAMINATIONS
CAPACITANCE:
T1
EE-28
(PRIMARY to SECONDARY)
8 pF 8 pF
• ■ SYSTEM
GROUND
Q1.2, 4. 6, 7, 8 2N4221
Q3. 5 GENERAL PURPOSE NPN
CR1 , 2, 3, 4 GENERAL PURPOSE
ANALOG PREAMP— Combination of 5-kHz FET- hundreds of volts of common-mode DC. Signal followers Q3-Q4-Q5 is sent through T1 to syn-
chopper amplifier Q1-Q2 with transformer iso- accuracy is 0.1% for inputs between 50 and 500 chronous FET demodulator Q6-Q7. R7 adjusts
lation of signal and system grounds gives low- mV. Input impedance is 4 megohms, drift is only system scaling. — C. A. Walton, High-CMR, Low-
cost analog instrumentation amplifier that will 0.2 /+V/C, and DC common-mode rejection rate Cost DC Instrumentation Preamp, EDN Maga-
process millivolt DC signals while rejecting is better than 120 dB. Low-impedance output of zine, Jan. 15, 1971, p 47-48.
+32 Vdc + 15 V
Maximum load power for linearity is 2 kVA, with

maximums of 400 V and 5 A for load voltage and
-15 V current. Output voltage can vary from -10 V to
+10 V depending on instantaneous polarities
and magnitudes of load voltage and current. R,
OP AMPS: 741
determines current range, and R2 determines
*R5: 12 kS2(5%) FIXED, 5 INVARIABLE
voltage range. — D. DeKold, Integrated Multi-
plier Simplifies Wattmeter Design, Electronics,
POWER-TO-VOLTAGE TRANSDUCER— Two
Sept. 27, 1973, p 106-107; reprinted in "Circuits
opamps and inexpensive 1C multiplier provide taneous power through load. Frequency re- for Electronics Engineers," Electronics, 1977, p
sponse extends from DC to several kilohertz. 175-176.
output voltage directly proportional to instan-
CHAPTER 41
Integrator Circuits
Provide output that is integral of input with respect to time. Special
features
include logic-reset, analog start/stop, fast dump, and fast recovery.
INTEGRATE AND DUMP — Transistor is used as

BUFFER
switch, without power supply. Simple RC inte-
grator will dump (discharge C) completely in
about 1 gs when dump input is logic 1 (+5 V).
Values of R and C determine time constant of
integrator. Without power supply, circuit can
only drive high-impedance load; for low-imped-
ance load, add FET-input opamp such as Analog
Devices 40J as buffer.— R. Riordan, Integrate
and Dump Circuit Uses No Power Supply. EDN
Magazine, Feb. 20, 1973, p 93.
FAST DUMP SWITCH — Requires only 350 ns to

only -25 g\i. Opamp is Analog Devices 120 or
dump 6-V output to level of 3 mV. Transistors Transistor operating in forward mode deter- equivalent having unity-gain bandwidth above
are connected so one of them is biased in for- mines initial discharge rate until it saturates, 100 MHz and slew rate above 200 Mlgs. — F. Tar-
ward mode independently of output polarity. after which inverted-mode transistor continues ico. Fast Bipolar Dump Switch Has Low Offset,
Both transistors turn on during dump interval. to discharge capacitor. Offset voltage error is EDN Magazine, Nov. 5, 1974, p 66.
468
INTEGRATOR CIRCUITS 469
HIGH INPUT IMPEDANCE— Two-opamp con- Ri

nection shown gives input resistance of 200
megohms and drift time of 90 min for 0 to 10
V. — N. G. Boreham, Op-Amp D2 Integrator, Wire-
less World, DMarch
, 1977, p 42.
IN9I4
IN9I4
33k
FAST RECOVERY — Two diodes and two zeners

clamp output of integrator below saturation
level of opamp, making recovery time approxi-
mately equal to slew rate. With values shown,
integration time constant R3C, is 35.6 ms and
output is clamped at +23 V. Output linearity is
±1%, and threshold range of circuit is -3 V to
-10 V. — K. S. Wong, Fast-Recovery Integrator
with Adjustable Threshold, EEE Magazine, Aug.
1970, p 77.
15V
ELIMINATING RINGING— High-Q bandpass in-

tegrator reduces ringing significantly by ampli-
fying AC input signal in two broadband differ-
ential amplifier stages. A, and A2, before
differentiation and selection by D, and D2. Input
gate pulse P, and differentiated pulses drive
AND logic that generates output pulse Ps coin-
cident with zero crossings of AC input. Leading
edge of Ps will always occur at first zero cross-
ing after P, initiates gating action. If output
drives balanced diode bridge, gating pedestal
and AC signal transient are eliminated; high-Q
bandpass integrator then has fast settling time,
permitting faster repetition rates. — R. J. Turner,
Reduce Integrator Transients with Synchro-
nized Gate Signals, EDNIEEE Magazine, Jan. 1 5,
1972, p 46-47.
+ 15V
STORING INTEGRATOR OUTPUT— Modified

sample-and-hold circuit with capacitive feed-
back combines integrate, sample, and hold
functions, for use in temporarily storing output
of integrator, integrating amplifier is 741
opamp; for critical applications, FET opamp is
preferable. — E. Crovella, Circuit Combines In-
tegrate, Sample and Hold Functions, EDN Mag-
azine, Oct. 20, 1974, p 90.
TIME OF OPERATION OF
RESET PUSH BUTTON SWITCH
/— L
10V PEAK
OUTPUT
OV
JFET WITH AC COUPLING — Connection shown

gives very high voltage gain. Use of Cl as Miller
integrator or capacitance multiplier allows sim-
ple circuit to handle very long time constant. —
'EET Databook," National Semiconductor,
Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36.
PRECISION INTEGRATOR — Low input bias cur- transient but can be omitted for low-speed ap- AC-COUPLED JFET — Use of Cl as Miller inte-
rent of National LH0052 opamp makes it suita- plications. R3, used to balance resistance in in- grator or capacitance multiplier allows simple
circuit to handle very long time constant while
ble for applications requiring long time con- puts, should be equal to sum of R2 and 100-ohm
stants. R1 is selected so total leakage current at providing high voltage gain. Circuit also offers
resistance of reset switch. — "Linear Applica-
low distortion with low noise and high dynamic
summing mode is sufficiently smaller than sig- tions, Vol. 1," National Semiconductor, Santa
nal current to ensure required accuracy. R2 is Clara, CA, 1973, AN-63, p 1-12. range — "FET Databook," National Semicon-
included to protect input circuit during reset ductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-26
471
+ 15V
INTEGRATOR CIRCUITS
RMS CONVERTER — Converts analog voltage to

RMS equivalent by squaring operation followed
by integration and square-rooting. Bipolar input
signal is first converted into linear absolute
value with Optical Electronics 9004 absolute-
value module, as required for processing by
5904 unipolar devices. Pots are used to estab-
lish 10-V full-scale level. RjC, is integration time
constant. — "Simple RMS Converter," Optical
ANALOG START/STOP AND RESET— One sec-

tion of DG300 dual analog switch serves for dis-
charging integrator capacitor C through RL
when resetting integrator, with start/stop
switch section being held open by control logic.
When both switches are open, output of inte-
grator is held. — "Analog Switches and Their
Applications," Siliconix, Santa Clara, CA, 1976,
p 7-81.
LOGIC-RESETTABLE INTEGRATOR— DG200

CMOS analog switch serves for discharging in-
>1
tegrator capacitor C rapidly for high logic input
pulse. Other section of switch disconnects in-
tegrator from analog input when logic goes
high. When logic input is returned to low, inte-
grator is triggered. Diodes prevent capacitor
from charging to over 15 V. — "Analog Switches
and Their Applications," Siliconix, Santa Clara,
CA, 1976, p 7-68.
NOTE: PIN CONNECTIONS SHOWN ARE FOR METAL CAN PACKAGE.
Vo-fl V,Nd' (CinuFI

472
BIPOLAR INPUT FOR V/F CONVERTER— Abso-

lute-value integrator circuit gives effect of gen-
erating negative frequencies when input signal
is negative by making counter count up for pos-
itive voltage and count down for negative volt-
age. Diode types are not critical. — M. O. Paiva,
Applications of the 9400 Voltage to Frequency
Frequency to Voltage Converter," Teledyne

Semiconductor, Mountain View, CA, 1978, AN-
10, p 3.
ABSOLUTE VALUE CIRCUIT

CHAPTER 42
Intercom Circuits
Covers one-way and two-way basic intercom circuits, four-station two-way

system, induction receiver for paging, and private telephone system. Audio
amplifier circuits suitable for intercoms are also given.
R?
AUDIO INDUCTION RECEIVER— Used to pick

up audio signal being fed to low-impedance sin-
gle-wire loop encircling room or other area to
be covered. Pickup loop LI is 100-500 turns
wound around plastic case of receiver. Opamp
sections are from Motorola MC3401P or Na-
tional LM3900 quad opamp. Supply can be 9—1 5
V. Requires no FCC license. Can be used as pri-
vate paging system if audio amplifier of trans-
mitter has microphone input. — C. D. Rakes, "In-
tegrated Circuit Projects," Howard W. Sams,
MICROPOWER ONE-WAY INTERCOM— Na-

tional LM3909 1C operating from single 1.5-V
cell serves as low-power one-way intercom
suitable for listening-in on child's room and
meeting other room-to-room communication
needs. Battery drain is only about 15 mA. Per-
son speaking directly into 3.2-ohm loudspeaker
used as microphone delivers full 1. 4 VP-P signal
to 40-ohm loudspeaker at listening location. —
"Linear Applications, Vol. 2," National Semi-
473
474 REFERENCE MANUAL
MODERN ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS
CASCADED 741 OPAMPS — Two opamps in se-

ries provide 80 dB of audio gain with bandwidth
of about 300 to 6000 Hz. Gain of each opamp is
set at 1 00. With three stages, bandwidth would
be 5100 Hz. Output will drive loudspeaker at
comfortable room level, if fed through 1 -pF non-
polarized capacitor to output transformer hav-
ing 500-ohm primary and 8-ohm secondary.— C.
Hall, Circuit Design with the 741 Op Amp, Ham
Radio, April 1976, p 26-29.
+8 to 18 v.
2 W WITH 1C — Inexpensive audio amplifier

using 14-pin DIP provides adequate power for
small audio projects and audio troubleshooting.
Pins 3, 4, 5, 10, 11, and 12 are soldered directly
to foil side of printed-wiring board used for con-
struction, togive effect of heatsink.— J. Schultz,
An Audio Circuit Breadboarder's Delight, CQ,
Jan. 1978, p 42 and 75.
BEEPER— Private two-station telephone sys-

tem for home requires only two wires between
ordinary telephone sets, with 1.5-V battery in
series with one line, but this voltage is not
enough to actuate ringers in sets. Beeper in par-
allel with each set, with polarity as shown,
serves same purpose as ringer. 555 timer IC1
turns on IC2 about once every 3 s, and IC2 then
generates 1 000-Hz beep for about 1 s as ringing
signal. No switches are required, because tele-
phone handsets provide automatic switching.
When both telephones are hung up, 1.5-V bat-
tery splits equally between beepers and result-
ing 0.75 V is not enough to turn on Q1 in either
set. When one telephone is picked up, beeper at
other telephone receives close to 1.5 V and Q1
J turns on IC1 to initiate beeping call. When other

telephone is picked up, beeping automatically
stops because 1.5 V is again divided between
sets— P. Stark, Private Telephone: Simple
Two-Station Intercom, Modern Electronics,
July 1978, p 32-34.
INTERCOM CIRCUITS 475
V, = 8V
1 W AT 6 V — Battery-operated power amplifier

using National LM390 1C provides ample power
for loudspeaker despite operation from 6-V
4-41.
portable
tionalbattery. — "Audio
Semiconductor, Handbook,"
Santa Clara, CA, 1977,Na-p
+ I5V
BIDIRECTIONAL INTERCOM— Uses 759 power switch across microphone eliminates audio
opamps to provide 0.5 W for 16-ohm loudspeak- feedback while listening. Article tells how to
ers. Crystal microphones feed NPN transistors calculate heatsink requirements. — R. J. Apfel,
that provide both in-phase and 180° out-of- Power Op Amps — Their Innovative Circuits and m
phase signals. Balance-adjusting circuits of am- Packaging Provide Designers with More Op-
plifier cancel out the two signals, so only out-of- tions, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977, p 141-144. DIRECT-COUPLED AF — Combination of unipo-
phase signal goes to receiving unit. Privacy lar and bipolar transistors gives desirable am-
plifying features of each solid-state device. Can
be used as speech amplifier and for other low-
level audio applications. — I. M. Gottlieb, A New
Look at Solid-State Amplifiers, Ham Radio, Feb.
1976, p 16-19.
+ 125V
AF OUTPUT — Operates directly from 125-V rec-

tified AC line voltage. Combination of unipolar
SINGLE 1C WITH TRANSFORMERS— CA3020 former T2 similarly matches 1C to loudspeakers and bipolar transistors gives desirable ampli-
differential amplifier uses AF input transformer
operating conventionally. — E. M. Noll, "Linear fying features of each solid-state device. — I. M.
T1 to match loudspeakers (used as microphone) Gottlieb, A New Look at Solid-State Amplifiers,
1C Principles, Experiments, and Projects," How-
to higher input resistance of 1C. AF output trans- ard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 100-101. Ham Radio, Feb. 1976, p 16-19.
476
0.25-W AMPLIFIER — Single Radio Shack RS386

1C powered by 6—9 V from battery provides gain
of about 200 with sufficient power to drive 8-
ohm loudspeaker when speaking closely into
small dynamic microphone of type used with
portable tape recorders— F. M. Mims, "Inte-

grated Circuit Projects, Vol. 2," Radio Shack,
1C, A,ICy IQ
1C,
CD4025
1C, CD4081
CD4075 LM380
CD4028 741 FOUR-STATION TWO-WAY — Each station can free status as indicated by LEDs 1 and 4 being
A
1C 5 6 , CD4016 communicate privately with any one of others. on. LEDs flash for system-busy status. When
All four stations have identical inputs as at code is selected, enable inputs of nonselected
Station upper left, with fourth station having master stations go low to prevent generation of further
links Code circuit. Each two-station combination is as- codes. System can be expanded to six stations
1 to 2
1 to 3 signed 3-brt code as given in table, for selection by using 4-bit code and CD4514 decoder with
010
001
1 to 4 by switches Sw,-Sw„. All station codes are larger matrix of analog switches.— B. Voyno-
2 to 3 01 1 ORed and decoded by 1C, to drive matrix of an- vich. Multiple Station Two-Way Intercom, Wire-
100
2 to 4 less World, March 1978, p 59.
101 alog switches for coupling appropriate audio in-
110
3 to 4 puts and outputs. Code 000 is used for system-
INTERCOM CIRCUITS 477
SINGLE OPAMP — When switch SI is in talk po-

sition as shown, loudspeaker of master station
acts as microphone, driving opamp through
step-up transformer T1, Switch at remote sta-
tion must then bein listen position. Supplyvolt-
age range is 8-20 V. — "Audio Handbook," Na-

4-21-4-28.
•FOR STABILITY WITH

HIGH CURRENT LOADS
Vs ( t 12 V)
2-W LM380 POWER AMPLIFIER— Complete

basic circuit for most audio or communication
purposes uses minimum of external parts. C3,
used to limit high frequencies, can be in range
of 0.005 to 0.05 /a F. — A. MacLean, How Do You
Use ICs?, 73 Magazine, June 1977, p 184-187.
0.5-W AF 1C — Simple audio power stage drives

8-ohm loudspeaker for producing greater vol-
ume with pocket radio or for intercom applica-
tions. Supply range is 4-12 V. For long life, 6-V
lantern batteries are recommended. Trans-
former is Radio Shack 273-1380. — F. M. Mims,
HIGH-GAIN INTERCOM — Internal bootstrap-

ping in National LM388 audio power amplifier
1C gives output power levels above 1 W at sup-
ply voltages in range of 6-12 V, with minimum
parts count. AC gain is set at about 300 V/V,
eliminating need for step-up transformer nor-
mally used in intercoms. Optional RC network
suppresses spurious oscillations. — "Audio
Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-37-4-41.
LOW-Z INPUT — Can be used with low-imped-

ance source, such as 4- to 16-ohm loudspeaker
or telephone earphone used as mike. If loud-
speaker isput out in yard, sensitivity is suffi-
cient to pick up sounds made by prowlers. Can
be fed into input of any high-fidelity amplifier. —
E. Dusina, Build a General Purpose Preamp, 73
Magazine, Nov. 1977, p 98.
CHAPTER 43
Keyboard Circuits
Includes interface circuits required for converting keyboard operation to
ASCII, BCD, hexadecimal, teleprinter, Baudot, Morse code, and other formats
serving as inputs for microprocessors, PROMs, CW transmitters, hard-copy
printers, TV typewriters, and other code-driven applications. See also
Microprocessor and Telephone chapters.
ELECTRONIC TELETYPE KEYBOARD— Uses Teletype. Developed to permit communication be used at 60 WPM, adjust R1 so 555 oscillates
eight 7474 shift register sections in combination by handicapped people. Simplified keyboard at 45 Hz. Toroids are Indiana General CF-102
with pulse generator that is discharged through has one set of alphabetic characters and five having 10-turn primaries. — L. A. Stapp, Elec-
appropriate toroid core to create correct mark- numerics for BCD input. Outputs of shift regis- tronic Teleprinter Keyboard, Ham Radio, Aug.
space coding for energizing magnet drivers of ters drive 7430 NAND gate U2. If keyboard is to
1978, p 56-57.
479
480
CL
SCANNING ASCII ENCODER— Converts key ac-

R
tion into composite parallel ASCII code. Circuit
4 8
EN includes debouncing and two-key rollover. Two
1
4001 quad two-input NOR gate sections form
1 'NC 50-kHz clock that is gated. When clock is al-
lowed to run, two cascaded 4520 binary
counters are driven for continuous cycling
through all their counts. Slower counter pro-
duces 1-of-8 decoded output for 4051 1-of-8
switch. Faster counter drives second switch
17 that monitors sequential rows of characters.
When key is pressed, output from +5 V through
both selectors stops gated oscillator and holds
count. Resulting ASCII output is then routed to
external output logic for control and shift op-
erations. When key is released, scanning re-
! ] 1 ! sumes and continues until new key is pressed.
@ H
p X ; SP lie
If second key is pressed before first is released,
A i Q 1 Y I ! 1 1 ! 1
nothing happens until first key is released.
B
Scanning then resumes and stops at second key
C K R !Z j" . I2 location, to give two-key rollover permitting
Lii !
D E *! i M * ij faster typing with minimum error. — D. Lancas-
f M u Lli 1 $ ' 1 ■ 1 a r= ter, "CMOS Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, In-
1 / ’ 7
T F
'
N
0
V
w
t & ' .
j 1
6
-
>
5
?
i 1
KEY MATRIX - - EACH KEY SHORTS WIRES UNDER IT

KEYBOARD CIRCUITS 481
ASCII TO HEX CONVERTER— Simple two-chip

HEX
circuit takes ASCII data from keyboard and con-
verts characters 0-9 and A-F to 4-bit hexadeci-
ASC II
DATA mal machine-language format, as required for
FROM OUT loading operating system initially into 1802-
based microprocessor system. Once loaded,
further code conversion can be achieved with
software. — E. Copes, One Keyboard: Hex and
ASCII, Kilobaud, June 1978, p 57.
UI-7486 QUAD EXCLUSIVE-OR GATE

U2-7400 QUAD NAND GATE
HEX KEYBOARD — Circuit provides correct hex-

adecimal output for each key depressed, along
with enable level that indicates when key has
been pressed, and three switches for providing
eight separate codes serving for program con-
trol. When no key is pressed, voltage at point A
(lower left) and any horizontal keyboard row is
0 V and voltage on any vertical keyboard col-
umn is 5 V. When key is pressed, voltage at A
becomes 1 V and voltage at selected row and
column becomes 3 V. Comparator outputs for strobed onto data lines with open-collector board Provides Program Control, EDN Maga-
Ui and U2 are decoded with NOR gates and NAND gates — J. F. Czebiniak, Simple Hex Key- zine, Jan. 5, 1978, p 27-28.
SCANNING KEYBOARD ENCODER— Uses RCA

CA3600 1C for sampling 90 keys and providing
parallel ASCII output with parity. Network on
pins 1-3 sets clock at 50 kHz. Capacitor on pin
31 sets debounce time at about 8 ms. Uppercase
only or both uppercase and lowercase can be
selected by switching between pins 7 and 9.
Provides two-key rollover; N-key rollover can
be obtained by adding diodes to keys. Each out-
put will drive one TTL load. — D. Lancaster, "TV
Typewriter dianapolis,
Cookbook,"IN, 1976, p 38.Howard W. Sams, In-
♦ 5 V
POWER LEADS
CALCULATOR-KEYBOARD INPUT— Uses diode Circuit eliminates need for entering programs with first 2 bytes, then enters loop that loads
matrix that encodes 16 hexadecimal input keys with front-panel switches, by using keyboard to memory byte by byte in ascending address se-
as 4-bit code for microprocessor. Register holds enter data in octal or hexadecimal form. Choice quence. RGS-008A interface logic is used to con-
conversion results. Multiplexer gives switch-se- of form is achieved with 74157 multiplexers trol interface for RGS-008A computer.— J. Hoe-
lected 3-digit octal or 2-digit hexadecimal inter- IC11 and IC12, set by SI. Article covers circuit gerl. Calculator Keyboard Input for the
pretation to inputs. Control logic serves for key- operation in detail and gives 8008 full keyboard Microcomputer, BYTE, Feb. 1977, p 104-107.
board debouncing, clearing, and entering data. input program that defines memory address
483
KEYBOARD CIRCUITS
PARALLEL TO SERIAL CONVERSION— Can be

used as interface between parallel outputs of
keyboard and serial input port of microproces-
sor. Keyboard output data is fed to 74165 shift
register, with eighth input tied low. 7403 gates
are connected as mono MVBR for converting
keyboard strobe to narrow pulse for loading
shift register. Fourth gate in package serves as
output buffer. 555 timer forms clock adjustable
from 150 to 1400 Hz, to allow operational stan-
KEYBOARD dard baud rates of 150, 300, 600, or 1200. — F. J.
DATA
OUTPUTS
Greeb, Who Needs a UART?, Kilobaud, Aug.
1978, p 108.
'■ I7~t. j'" ^ X — < -12V
X
-<GND
-C-v
KBM 0E VLl
KEY
CODE
OUTPUTS
MM5740AAC
OR
MMS740AAD
► DATA STROBE
-O-
CLK RPT SHIFT CONTROL
♦5v — y
LOCK
SHIFT
P_P-
r XaX
cr 0-4-
I
4012V
mA
CM2 7371
EN2222
Note 1 N key rollover -MM5740AAC
U
2 key rollover - MM5740AAD
Note 2: Clock frequency ; 100 kH*
Note 3 Scan cycle - 900m
Note 4 Repeat rate = 10 characters per second
KEYBOARD FOR PROM— National MM5740 en- Note 5: Key bounce mask time = 4 ms.
Note 6 Data strobe = 10m pulse
coder serves as interface between keyboard
and MM5204 4K PROM capable of handling 90
four-mode keys. Encoder includes all logic fined by user. Bit-paired coding system of en- sense line of encoder. Combination gives total
needed for key validation, two-key or N-key roll- coder has five common bits (B1-B4 and B9) and of 360 9-1bit codes. — "Memory Applications
over, bounce masking, mode selection, and National Semiconductor, Santa
four variable bits IB5-B8) for each key. Each key- Handbook
strobe generation. Key code outputs can be de- switch is defined by one X drive line and one Y Clara, CA
1978, p 5-5— 5-8.
R6
LED DISPLAY FOR ASCII CODE— Shows code

for any ASCII keyboard character as aid in de-
bugging keyboard matrix wiring. Requires only
two 7400 quad NAND gates, eight resistors, and
eight LEDs. High input to gate forces output
low, grounding LED and lighting it. On standby
with positive logic, all LEDs are lit; with nega-
tive logic, all are dark on standby. Arrange LEDs
on keyboard so rightmost represents least sig-
nificant bit (DO) and leftmost LED represents
parity bit. Using positive logic, ASCII code for
any depressed key will show as lit LED for 1 and
dark LED for 0. Pin 14 of 7400 is +5 V, and pin
7 is ground. — B. Brehm, Using a Keyboard ROM,
BYTE, May 1977, p 76-82.
ASCII TO BAUDOT CONVERTER— Converts of computer or microprocessor storage, making punctuation. — J. A. Lehman and R. Graham,
parallel ASCII output of keyboard to serial Bau- this memory space availablefor other purposes. ASCII to Baudot ... er ... Murray (the Hard
dot format for driving Baudot teleprinters. Con- Article gives conversion table for all capital and Way), Kilobaud, June 1978, p 80-83.
version circuit can save several hundred bytes lowercase alphabetic characters, numerics, and
485
KEYBOARD CIRCUITS
TYPEWRITER KEYS CW TRANSMITTER— Al- is SPST switch, and each cross at intersection
lows operator to send perfect Morse code sim- is silicon switching diode such as 1N914. Out-
ply by typing messages on alphameric key- puts of keyboard switches are converted into
board. Accuracy is determined only by typing 1 5-bit code for feeding into 64-character first-in
skill of operator. One RC oscillator controls first-out memory using four MP3812B ICs for
mark-space ratio of Morse characters and du- storage and for generating corresponding
ration of character and word spaces, while clock Morse characters. Article gives construction
oscillator is divided down and switched to give and adjustment details. — C. I. B. Trusson,
sending-speed choices of 6, 12, 24, and 48 words Morse Keyboard and Memory, Wireless World,
per minute. Each square on keyboard diagram Jan. 1977, p 55-59.
fimnnnTTTT
UNIVERSAL KEYBOARD ENCODER— Harris

HD-0165 keyboard encoders are combined with
three read-only memories wired in parallel to
generate universal code that can be translated
to desired output code by using suitable electric
programming of ROMs. Key-to-encoder wiring
is arbitrary as long as each key operation pro-
duces unique 6-bit output code from encoders.
One ROM is programmed to contain all 64 out-
put words for unshifted mode, second for
shifted mode, and third ROM contains all words
for control mode. — "Linear 8 1 Data Acquisition
Products," Harris Semiconductor, Melbourne,
204).
FL, Vol. 1, 1977, p 7-2-7-8 (Application Note
ENCODED
OUTPUT
BINARY-
DATA-ENTRY KEYPAD ENCODER— Designed priate channel is driven low. When counter ad- it remains until another key is depressed. Clock
for use in point-of-sale and other data-entry ap- dresses low input of multiplexer, common should be above 200 Hz.— M. E. Keppel, Multi-
plications requiring bounceless binary encoder. output goes low for one clock cycle. Differen- plexer Scans Keyboard for Reliable Binary En-
Keypad is scanned by CD4067 16-channel ana- tiating network changes this to negative spike coding, Electronics, March 17, 1977, p 99.
log multiplexer. When key is depressed, appro- for strobing counter data into quad latch where
KEYBOARD CIRCUITS 487
HEX ENCODER FOR KEYBOARD— Standard 16-

button keyboard is used with CMOS packages
to provide hex output bits. Pressing one button
increases voltage on its horizontal line from 0
to 2.2 V. If button is in other than first row, OR
gate U3 or U4 is activated and either bit 2 or 3
changes from LOW to HIGH. Simultaneously,
voltage of vertical column of button decreases
from 5 V to 2.2 V. If button is in other than first
column, NAND gate U, or U3 is activated and
either bit 0 or 1 changes from LOW to HIGH. OR
gates U5 and U6 provide button-pressed signal
by changing bit 7 from LOW to HIGH upon ac-
tivation of any button. — W. H. Hailey, CMOS
Logic Implements Keyboard Encoder, EDN
Magazine, Aug. 5, 1978, p 54 and 56.
SCANNING KEYBOARD WITH MEMORY—

Standard keyboard is updated to 53 keys as re-
quired for character feed in microprocessor-
based TV typewriter system. Features include
two-key rollover, along with choices of letter
case, strobe polarity, clear key, and repeat key.
Space output is produced automatically during
clear. — D. Lancaster, "TV Typewriter Cook-
p 150-151.
488
BCD
BCD
OUTPUT
spacing on 2 meters) each time + key is pressed. 74S188 (8223) PROM, using simplified code con- cle gives construction details. — B. McNair and
Seven-segment signal normally used for calcu- version table given in article. 74175 ICs provide G. Williman, Digital Keyboard Entry System,
lator display is decoded by programming required demultiplexing of segment data. Arti- Ham Radio, Sept. 1978, p 92-97.
CHAPTER 44
Lamp Control Circuits
Covers methods of triggering triacs and silicon controlled rectifiers for turning
on, dimming, and otherwise regulating lamp loads in response to
photoelectric, acoustic, logic, or manual control at input. Starting circuits for
fluorescent lamps are also given.
AC CONTROL WITH TRIAC — Decoder outputs 7476
of microprocessor feed 7476 JK flip-flop that

(JK FF)
DECODER
drives optocoupler which triggers triac for ON/
OFF control of lamp or other AC load. LED and
OUT
cadmium sulfide photocell are mounted in light
shield. When light from LED is on photocell, cell
resistance drops and allows control voltage of
DECODER
correct direction and amplitude to trigger gate
of triac, turning it on. When light disappears, OUT
triac remains on until voltage falls near zero in

AC cycle. — R. Wright, Utilize ASCII Control DECODER
OU T
Codes!, Kilobaud , Oct. 1977, p 80-83.
A ◄-
B ◄-
supplies base drive for transistors and filament

40-W RAPID-START BALLAST— AC line voltage oscillator that develops 600 V P sine wave power for lamps. Article gives transformer and
is rectified by diode bridge and filtered by C6-L1A. across T1A. When fluorescent lamps ionize, cur- choke winding data. — R. J. Haver, The Verdict
Transistors Q,-Q2 with center-tapped tank coil rent to each is limited to about 0.4 A. Lamps Is In: Solid-State Fluorescent Ballasts Are Here,
T1A and CrC3 make up power stage of 20-kHz operate independently, so one stays on when EDN Magazine, Nov. 5, 1976, p 65-69.
489
5VO
8 7 it 6 5
DUAL LAMP DRIVER— National DS75451 dual
>-<
peripheral AND driver using positive logic pro-
vides up to 300 mA per section for driving in-
INPUT A O—
candescent lamps. Optional keep-alive resistors
R maintain OFF-state lamp current at about
STROBE O DS75451 10% of rated value to reduce surge current.
— - V*
Lamp voltage depends on lamps used. Relays
INPUT B O shown, with diodes across solenoids, can be
used in place of lamps if desired. — "Interface

Databook," National Semiconductor, Santa
1 2 3 4 Clara, CA, 1978, p 3-20-3-30.
COMPLEMENTARY FADER— Control unit for

stage lighting fades out one lamp while simul-
taneously increasing light output of another
with accurate tracking. Gate of silicon con-
trolled rectifier SCR, is driven by standard ex-
ternal phase control circuit. Interlock network
connected to output of SCR, provides comple-
mentary signal for trigger of SCR2. If lamps
larger than 150 W are required, use larger value
for C,. — M. E. Anglin, Complementary Lighting
Control Uses Few Parts, Electronics, Dec. 12,
1974, pill; reprinted in "Circuits for Electron-
ics Engineers," Electronics, 1977, p 78.
75-W INSTANT-START BALLAST— DC voltage voltage required by 96-inch instant-start lamps. stays on when other is removed. — R. J. Haver,
for 20-kHz two-transistor oscillator is obtained Article gives transformer and choke winding The Verdict Is In: Solid-State Fluorescent Bal-
from AC line. Secondary is added to center- data along with circuit details and performance lasts Are Here, EDN Magazine, Nov. 5, 1976, p
65-69.
tapped tank coil of T, B to provide 1 kV P starting data. Lamps operate independently, so one
LAMP CONTROL CIRCUITS 491
♦ 15 V
ACTIVE LOAD — National NSL4944 constant-

current LED serves as current source for collec-
tor resistor of Schmitt trigger to provide up to
12-V output at 40 mA for lamp load. When lamp
and Q2 are off, most of LED current flows
through 100-ohm resistor to determine circuit
trip point of 2 V. When control signal saturates
Q,, Q2 provides about 1 V for lamp to give some
preheating and reduce starting current surge.
When control is above trip point, Q2 turns on
and energizes lamp. — "Linear Applications,
Vol. 2," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
CA, 1976, AN-153, p 3.
800-W TRIAC DIMMER — Simple circuit uses

Sprague
Motorola MBS-4991 silicon bilateral switch to
LI -150 Watt Projection Lamp With
Built-In Reflector Mirror provide phase control of triac. 1-megohm pot
1 1Z12
varies conduction angle of triac from 0° to about
PROJECTION-LAMP VOLTAGE REGULATOR— duction angle of triac Q3. Light pipe, painted
170°, to give better than 97% of full power to
Circuit will regulate RMS output voltage across black, is used to pick up red glow from back of load at maximum setting. Conduction angle is
lamp to 100 V ± 2% for input voltages between reflector inside lamp, which has relatively large the same for both half-cycles at any given set-
105 and 250 VAC. Light output of 150-W projec- mass and hence has relatively no 60-Hz modu-
ting of pot. — "Circuit Applications for the
tion lamp is sensed indirectly for use as feed- lation.— "Circuit Applications for the Triac," Triac," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1971, AN-466,
back to firing circuit Q1-Q2 that controls con- Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1971, AN-466, p 12.
P 5.
5 Vac INTERFACE FOR AC LOAD CONTROL— Stan-

dard 7400 series gates provide input to Moto-
Resistive
Load) rola MOC3011 optoisolators for control of triac
handling resistive or inductive AC load. Gates
are driven by MC6800-type peripheral interface
adapters. If second input of two-input gate is
/ 2N6071B Load]Vac
Load)uctivc
tied to simple transistor timing circuit as
shown, triac is energized only at zero crossings
VnS, of AC line voltage. This extends life of incan-
descent lamps, reduces surge-current effect on
triac, and reduces EMI generated by load
switching. — P. O'Neil, "Applications of the
MOC3011 Triac Driver," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
1978, AN-780, p 6.
IN9M
HELMET-LAMP DIMMER— Provides lossless

variation in brightness of incandescent lamp by
using duty-cycle modulation. All three sections
of 4025 triple three-input NOR gate turn lamp
on and off rapidly at rate determined by setting
of brightness control pot in astable MVBR cir-
cuit. Output transistor rating must be sufficient
to handle lamp current. — D. Lancaster, "CMOS
1977, p 231.
SOUND-CONTROLLED LAMP— Zero-voltage 1C, 4 is fed by DAC 1C, which produces stepped passes 10-mV level. Lamp automatically turns
switching achieves interference-free propor- ramp waveform from outputs of 7490 counter on when music stops. All ICs are 741 or equiv-
tional control of lamp intensity by sound 1C,. Counter is connected to count to 5 before alent except as marked. Unmarked diodes are
source. Both inputs to AND gate IC,5 must be resetting internally, giving five possible bright- 1N4148, C, and C2 are 100-nF polyester electro-
high for triac to turn on. One input is from zero- ness levels for lamp. Opamps IC5 and IC6 detect lytics, and all transistors are general-purpose
crossing detector 1C,, Tr,, and IC2, which pro- when audio input falls below about 10 mV and types. Resistor values in table are for three-
duces 100-Hz series of positive-going pulses. then release IC7-IC9 from reset stage so the two channel system, but more channels can be used
Other input is provided by filter/rectifier/com- 4-bit counters start counting 100-Hz waveform. if desired. — A. R. Ward, Sound-to Light Unit,
Wireless World, July 1978, p 75.
parator circuit. Inverting input of comparator Resetting occurs again when audio input next
493
LAMP CONTROL CIRCUITS
LANTERN-BATTERY EXTENDER— Life of lan-

tern battery can be tripled without reducing
light by chopping current while doubling volt-
age at 50% duty factor. 6-V lamp is connected
across chopped 12-V supply built around 4011
CMOS quad NAND gate. First two gates form
chopping oscillator, while third serves as inter-
face to any NPN high-gain power transistor. If
lamp draws more than 1 A, add fourth gate as
shown in dashed lines. If gate is not used, tie its
input leads to pin 14 of 1C. Duty cycle is varied
with 1-megohm pot; set at midrange before ap-
plying power, then adjust for normal lamp bril-
liance.— J. A. Sandler, 9 Easy to Build Projects
under $9, Modern Electronics, July 1978, p 53-
+ 5V
56.
FULL-WAVE CONTROL — Monsanto MCS6200

dual SCR optocoupler provides direct full-wave
control of 15-W lamp or other AC device when
driven by output logic voltages of microproces-
sor. LEDs are connected in series and photo-
I20VAC
SCRs in reverse parallel to create equivalent of
triac.— H. Olson, Controlling the Real World,
BYTE, March 1978, p 174-177.
+ 15 V
CMOS LOGIC CONTROL OF 300-W LAMP—
Storage capacitor C2 in interface transistor cir-
cuit for typical CMOS gate charges to full +15
V supply voltage in time determined by R3 and
C2, after which Q1 is fired by positive-going dif-
ferentiated pulse derived from input square
wave. C2then dumps its charge through R4and
Q1, to fire triac 02 and energize AC load. For
maximum load power, triac should be fired
early in conduction angle. With 1-kHz input
square wave, output power is over 98% of max-
imum possible. — A. Pshaenich, "Interface Tech-
niques Between Industrial Logic and Power De-
vices," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-712A,
p 13.
PHASE-CONTROLLED DIMMER— Mullard point of coincidence, trigger pulse is produced pulse. — "TCA280A Trigger 1C for Thyristors and
TCA280A trigger module is connected to com- in output amplifier for triggering triac that con- Triacs," Mullard, London, 1975, Technical Note
pare amplitude of ramp waveform with controls lamp load. Choice of triac depends on load. 19, TP1490, p 12.
trollable DC voltage in difference amplifier. At Values shown for C4 and R9 give 100-/xs
LOGIC CONTROLS 25-W LAMP— Ordinary 1-A source in optoisolator). — D. D. Mickle, Practical LAMP SURGE SUPPRESSOR— Circuit limits
bridge is used with H74C1 optoisolator to pass Computer Projects, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1978, p turn-on current through cold filament, which is
92-93. major cause of lamp failure but provides normal
full current to 25-W lamp when logic input goes
low (to ground, so full 5 V is applied to light current when filament reaches operating tem-
perature. Developed primarily for use with
lamps in locations where replacement is ex-
tremely difficult. Values shown are primarily for
low-voltage pilot lamps such as No. 44 and No.
47 but can be applied to any lamp within voltage
and current ratings of transistors used. — J. A.
Sandler, 11 Projects under $11, Modern Elec-
tronics, June 1978, p 54-58.
CHAPTER 45
Limiter Circuits
Covers clamps, clippers, and limiters used to keep signal peaks below
predetermined limits for positive swings or for both positive and negative
swings. See also Audio Control and Automatic Gain Control chapters.
AUDIO CLIPPER/FILTER — Improves selectivity

of communication receiver and prevents un-
comfortably loud volume in 500-ohm head-
phones. 88-mH toroid and 0.47-/rF capacitor
form series resonant circuit at about 750 Hz
with 6-dB bandwidth of 75 Hz. R2 and diodes
form audio clipper whose level is determined by
forward conduction voltage of diodes. With ger-
manium diodes for CR1-CR4 and silicon for CR5-
CR6, each successive switch position boosts
volume 6 dB. For low-impedance headphones,
omit T1 and use 8 ohms for R2. — A. R. Bloom,
An Audio Clipper/Filter, QST, Aug. 1977, p 48.
crease average level of human voice and cor- mitter properly. Overall amount of amplitude Gain of opamp is determined by CR1-CR2,
responding SSB transmitter output signal. limiting isdetermined by setting of preampgain which give logarithmic response to audio input
Preamp U1 increases audio input level to over- control R4. High-pass filter eliminates 60-Hz amplitude. Adjust R2, R17, and R19 for mini-
come loss of following high-pass filter. Low- hum developed in audio system or in accessory mum distortion while applying 1-kHz sine wave
pass filter after logamp U2 eliminates all energy equipment and reduces harmonic distortion to input. — R. Myers, A Quasi-Logarithmic Ana-
above about 2950 Hz. Last opamp U3 sets out- generated by deeply pitched voice or by hum log Amplitude Limiter with Frequency-Domain
put level of processor for driving station trans- picked up from tape recorder or phone patch. Processing, QST, Aug. 1974, p 22-25 and 40.
495
INPUT >
FAST CLAMP — Smaller capacitance of temper-

ature-compensated reference diodes allows
clamping of faster pulses than is possible with
ordinary zeners. Diagram shows positive 6.4-V
diode clamp at ground potential. For smaller
zener voltages, connect diode to more negative
potential. Device limits only positive peaks; for
negative peaks, reverse connections to
1N4570A. To clamp both polarities, use two
units in parallel, oppositely connected. — W.
CLIPPER/STROBE — Combination strobe and Walloch, Clamp Fast Pulses with One Compo-
nent, EDN Magazine, April 5, 1974, p 76.
clipper built around 741C opamp provides two
basic functions. First, strobe input of 5 V can re-
duce gain of amplifier to nearly zero by shorting
output to input. Second, clipping function holds
all outputs below predetermined level. When
used in integrator, circuit provides constant
rate of discharge for integrating capacitor. Clip-
ping is done by four-diode bridge having three differential output. All transistors are 2N2219,
extra diodes acting as zener. Strobe function is and all diodes are 1N914. — L. Strahan, Op Amp
provided by four-diode bridge alone, with strob- Control Without Relays, EDNIEEE Magazine,
ing input circuit having single-ended input and Aug. 15, 1971, p 41-42.
^7
E„ o VW SHUNT
(high Z) CLIPPER — When input voltage is above
reference voltage, D, is reverse-biased and
input voltage passes through R, to output.
When negative peak of Ein exceeds Vrel, opamp
A, turns D, on to absorb input current from R,,
thereby clamping output at level of Vref If low
output impedance is required, use 110 high-
* Optional — use only with type 101 op amp. speed voltage follower as buffer a mplifier. — W.
* * To change dipping polarity, reverse D, (and D,, it used), G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard W.
-t5V
t Best general-purpose type; higher speed available with
8007, 1556 — or use 531, 2620 compensated lor unity gain.
o-
VOLTAGE LIMITER WITH BUFFER— CA3080 op- type of limiter to maintain loop gain and ensure CERAMIC-FILTER DRIVE — National LM3011
erational transconductance amplifier is used in constant limiting level for varying loads. Limiter gain block provides three differential stages and
combination with D and D2 that are normally action is absolute, in that there can be no further current-source output suitable for driving 300-
reverse-biased at low levels, to provide abrupt output voltage change when current limit is ohm ceramic filter in IF amplifier of FM receiver.
or hard limiting. When output peaks from A, reached. Limiter can handle input/output levels Circuit provides 60 dB of power gain to matched
exceed voltage limits set by R„ and R7, diodes of ± 10 V or more when using ± 15 V supply. — load. — "Audio Handbook," National Semicon-
conduct and absorb A, output current, to limit W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard ductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 3-11-3-12.
its voltage swing. Buffer A2 is required with this W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 466-467.
LIMITER CIRCUITS 497
HARD-LIMITING OPAMP — Based on limited between limit points is within about 100 mV at INVERTER/LIMITER — Developed for direct-con-
output swing of opamp. Single pot adjusts both output level of 2 V P-P. Opamps specified are version receivers that lack AGC, to provide lim-
positive and negative limit points. First opamp adequate for 3-kHz bandwidth. — E. E. Barnes, iting for CW reception. Below adjustable limit-
produces limiting. Second opamp serves as Ease Hard-Limiter Design with Op Amps, EDN ing threshold, amplifier is linear with voltage
voltage follower for isolating attenuator and re- Magazine, Aug. 5, 1975, p 76. gain of 10. When output is high enough for sil-
ducing output impedance. Matching of output icon diodes to conduct, gain drops below unity.
Amplifier should be preceded by several sec-
tions of filtering and followed by single-section
D1 D2 low-pass filter to eliminate harmonic distor-
tions generated in limiting process. — W. Hay-
ward, Simple Active Filters for Direct-Conver-
sion Receivers, Ham Radio, April 1974, p 12-15.
D, D,
OPAMP AS CLIPPER — Two zeners are used to ♦ ♦

PIN 4 PIN 7
BIPOLAR ZENER — Circuit limits opamp output
clip both sides of AC signal. Clipping level is de- swing in either direction to sum of zener- and
termined byrating of zeners used, which can be capacitors between ground and supply pins 4 forward-breakdown voltages of D, and D:. With
6, 9, 12, or 15 V depending on application. Ratio and 7 as shown. — F. M. Mims, "Integrated Cir- matched zeners, positive and negative limiting
of R2 to R1 determines amplification. If long cuit Projects, Vol. 4," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, levels are symmetrical. With 10-V zeners, lim-
supply leads cause oscillation, connect 0.1-/uF TX, 1977, 2nd Ed , p 37-44. iting occurs at 10.6 V (10.0 -I- 0.6 V) to allow lin-
ear ±10 V swing without saturating A,. R2 is se-
Vcc" 9 Vdc sponse of 6 dB per octave between 300 and 3000 passive filter following limiter to give low-pass
LIMITING PREAMP FOR FM — All four sections Hz, with 6-dB per octave rolloff beyond. In- filter having attenuation of at least 12 dB per
of Motorola MC3401 quad amplifier are used as cludes amplitude limiter to prevent peak devia-
octave above 3 kHz. — D. Aldridge, "An Econom-
interface between high-impedance microphone tion of transmitter from exceeding allowed ical FM T ransmitter Voice Processor from a Sin-
and FM modulator to provide preemphasis re- maximum. U1D forms active filter acting with
gle 1C," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1975, EB-57.
■H5V
SELF-BUFFERED SERIES CLIPPER— Provides

negative clipping of sine-wave input, using 2620
opamps with diodes as linear OR gate. When
SYMMETRICAL BIPOLAR — Circuit uses transis- symmetrical limiting. Transistors and opamps input voltage is greater than reference voltage,
tor feedback, with current returned to opamp shown are selected for high-speed operation. A,-D, turns on and input voltage appears at out-
summing point through emitter-followers Q For single-polarity limiting, insert large resis- put. When Ein falls below Vref, A2-D2 provide Vre,
and Q2. When output E0 rises to positive voltage tance Rb in base lead of remaining transistor to as output signal. With 2620, circuit gives good
high enough so tap on R4 makes Q, turn on, out- prevent it from conducting heavily on output performance to above 10 kHz. For positive clip-
put of A, is limited to value corresponding to voltage swings. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp ping, reverse diode connections and return R,
setting of R4. C) performs similar limiting func- Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, to +15 V. Circuit provides low output imped-
tion for negative swings of input signal. R4 sets ance.— W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook,"
1974, p 203-204.
limiting level for both polarities, for variable Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 187-
189.
CLIPPING OPAMP — Simple circuit limits excur-

sion of DC input voltage to level precisely equal
iiov
to DC reference input voltage. When reference
is 0 V, circuit can be used as half-wave rectifier
up to 100 kHz. Feedback overcomes breakover
characteristics of D2, to provide sharp clipping
at levels from millivolts to volts. At 10 kHz, with
D, omitted, range of levels is 70 mVRMS to 7
VRMS. With D„ circuit is useful at levels down
to 0.3 VRMS at 100 kHz. — R. S. Burwen, Preci-
sion Clipper Operates from Millivolts to Volts,
EDN Magazine, Dec. 1, 1972, p 57 and 59.
CHAPTER 46
Logarithmic Circuits
Combinations of logamps and opamps provide squaring, cubing, log, and

antilog functions for analog signals, along with logarithm of ratio of two input
values. Also includes logamp test circuit.
80-dBV INPUT RANGE — Logamp using Texas

Instruments SN56502 or SN76502 in combina-
tion with three SN52741 opamps can handle
input voltage range greater than 80 dB with re-
spect to 1 V P-P. Inputs are limited by reducing
supply voltages of input amplifiers to ±4 V.
Gains of input amplifiers are adjusted to achieve
smooth transitions. — "The Linear and Interface
Circuits Data Book for Design Engineers," Texas
Instruments, Dallas, TX, 1973, p 7-45.
Tr i fr2
7C1 2N3707 2N3707 J(
CUBE GENERATOR — Combination of temper-

ature-compensated opamp log converter and
antilog converter generates output signal e0
proportional to cube of input signal ej. Article
gives design equations. — G. B. Clayton, Exper-
iments with Operational Amplifiers, Wireless
World, Feb. 1973, p 91-93.
499
+ 15V replace with 1 Mfl resistor
BASIC LOG CONVERTER — Suitable for positive

input voltages. Negative feedback is applied to
opamp through diode- connected transistor,
with additional diode D protecting transistor
from excessive inverse voltage caused by
wrong input polarity. For negative inputs, re-
verse transistor and diode connections. Article
gives design equations and application proce-
dures.— G. B. Clayton, Experiments with Oper-
ational Amplifiers, Wireless World, Jan. 1973, p
33-35.
LOGAMP TESTER — Circuit sweeps logamp

under test (LAUT) over its dynamic range while
automatically canceling offset voltage at input,
with output serving as indication of this offset
voltage. Exponential decay voltage generated
is accurate from 10 V to 100 fi\l. At time zero,
pulse T2 is applied to Optical Electronics 9729
opamp connected as exponential generator,
charging NPO feedback capacitor to 10 V. At
end of pulse, opamp output voltage decays ex-
ponentially. Input pulse also generates ±10 V
precision reference ramp in pair of 9813
opamps. Output of LAUT is compared with ref-
erence ramp; any difference is proportional to
nonlinearity of logamp. — 'Testing Logarithmic
Amplifiers," Optical Electronics, Tucson, AZ,
Tech Tip 10268.
ANALOG DIVIDER — Optical Electronics 2457

logarithmic module containing two pair of bi-
polar log elements and three opamps drives sin-
gle 395 opamp to provide analog division func-
tion with high accuracy and wide dynamic
range. Input resistors set full-scale input volt-
age. R3 determines AC accuracy. Connect in-
puts together for drive with signal varying be-
tween 100 mV and 10 V (1% to 100% of full
scale), and adjust R3 for straight-line output at
1 V. For negative inputs, reverse diode connec-
tions and make reference voltage negative. —
"Accurate Logarithmic Analog Divider," Optical
LOGARITHMIC CIRCUITS
2N3707
TEMPERATURE-COMPENSATED ANTILOG
CONVERTER — Circuit provides antilog conver-
sion with high degree of temperature compen-
sation. Article gives design equations and ap-
plication instructions. Circuit is for positive
inputs; for negative inputs, use PNP transistors
such as 2N4058 in place of those shown. Adjust
value of R< to make output of opamp A, exactly
10 times input voltage 6i when input is - 1 V. —
G. B. Clayton, Experiments with Operational
Amplifiers, Wireless World, Jan. 1973, p 33-35.
Icy
T 2X3707
Tr' 2X3707
^2 Ic2
T
TEMPERATURE-COMPENSATED LOG CON-

VERTER— Two opamps and two logging tran-
sistors give output proportional to logarithm of
input with high degree of temperature compen-
sation. Article gives design equations and ap-
plication instructions. Circuit is for positive in-
puts; for negative inputs, use PNP transistors
such as 2N4058 in place of those shown. — G. B.
Clayton, Experiments with Operational Ampli-
fiers, Wireless World, Jan. 1973, p 33-35.
for temperature
compensation of E0
+ 15V
VARIABLE-TRANSCONDUCTANCE DIVIDER—
Practical analog divider follows ideal division
equation over typical 20:1 range of reference
current and operates in two quadrants. Circuit
is analyzed in terms of logarithmic behavior of
its elements. Bandwidths up to 5 MHz can be
achieved. Article gives design equations. — L.
Counts and D. Sheingold, Analog Dividers:
What Choice Do You Have?, EDN Magazine,
May5, 1974, p 55-61.
LOGAMP — Based on fact that back-to-back 60-dB range. Transistors are 2N2924, SK3019,
diodes driven by current generator give output GE-10, or HEP-54, and diodes are 1N914. — Cir- ANTILOG CONVERTER — Basic opamp circuit
that varies logarithmically with input signal. cuits, 73 Magazine, April 1974, p 34. with diode-connected transistor as logging ele-
With values shown, relation is logarithmic over ment performs antilog conversion for positive
input signals. For negative inputs, reverse tran-
sistor connections.— G. B. Clayton, Experi-
ments with Operational Amplifiers, Wireless
World, Jan. 1973, p 33-35.
40-dB LOGAMP — Uses Optical Electronics 2457

logarithmic module containing two pairs of bi-
polar log elements and three opamps. Connec-
tion shown produces pure log10 function on pos-
itive inputs. Zero point is set by R2 or by
reference e. Reference must be positive for pos-
itive logs and negative for negative logs. Trim
11 OK resistors for exactly 10-V output. — "Two-
Decade Precision Logarithmic Amplifier," Opti-
cal Electronics, Tucson, AZ, Application Tip
10212.
LOW-COST USING OPAMP— Motorola

MC1539G opamp is connected with PNP tran-
sistor as logarithmic element. Circuit requires
external compensation, has about 200-nA bias
current, and accommodates wide range of input
voltages when appropriate networks are used
to compensate for errors. To adjust bias current
initially, replace transistor with 500K resistor
and adjust 5K pot for gain of 5 over input signal
range. — K. Huehne, "Transistor Logarithmic
Conversion Using an Integrated Operational
261 A, p 4. Motorola,
Amplifier," Phoenix, AZ, 1971, AN-
LOGARITHMIC CIRCUITS 503
100-dB DYNAMIC RANGE — Circuit generates

log ratio of currents lc, and lcz with accuracy
within 3% from 10 nA to 1 mA (100-dB range)
when lc2 is fixed at 10-/iA reference value. Ac-
curacy increases to 1% for current inputs be-
tween 40 nA and 400 /i A (80 dB). A2 supplies
constant reference current to Q2. Q, is operated
as transdiode with Q2 providing temperature
compensation of offset voltage. — W. G. Jung,
v,„
(+15 V)
ANTILOG GENERATOR — Basic log generator

circuit is rearranged to perform inverse opera-
tion of antilog (exponential) generation. Expo-
nential current generated by Q2 is summed at
current-to-voltage converter A2. Q, voltage
drive to Q2 is such that collector current of Q2 is
exponentially related to voltage at base of Q,.
Temperature-compensating divider scales
input sensitivity to 1 V per decade. Feed-for-
ward connections at A, and A2 optimize circuit
for speed. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cook-
p 214-216.
V,.,
(+15 V)
FAST LOG GENERATOR — Circuit is designed

for settling time of only 10 /is. Voltage-follower
opamp A, buffers base current of Q, and input
current to A„ allowing Q, to operate as diode
while demanding minimum input current to A3.
Scale factor Is 1 V per decade. Zero-crossover
point of output swing is controlled by R3. Ac-
curacy is 1% for logging range of 100 nA to 1
mA. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook,"
215.
504
MULTIPLIER/DIVIDER — Upper half of circuit is converter is added to that of upper circuit, pro- reference voltage; R„ will then establish refer-
log converter in which output at A, is logarith- ducing log (E,E3/E2) at emitter of Q<. Q„ and A, ence current.— W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cook-
mic ratio of E, and E2. A3 and Q3 form second log take antilog to give final output equal to E,E J book," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974,
converter for E3 input. Log output of second 10E2. If only multiplication is desired, E2 can be
p 216-217.
LOW _ -0+1 5V
LEVEL J-
vo=5l°9,o<Vv2>
R3 r
ADJ.
0< V,, v2 < 10
10k Ri
HIGH
LEVEL
ADJ. 50k
R2
10
_L R4
10
HIGH
LEVEL
ADJ.
LOGARITHMIC RATIO — Output is proportional

50k- to logarithm of ratio of input voltages V, and V2
for voltages between 0 and 10 V. Each input
goes to modified logamp circuit using Analog
Devices 180K. Outputs are combined by differ-
ential opamp (Analog Devices 184L), with Fair-
child fi A726 temperature-regulated dual tran-
sistor serving asfeedback element. Article gives
-O +15V design equations and analyzes possible error
sources — D. R. Morgan, Get the Most Out of
Log Amplifiers by Understanding the Error
Sources, EDN Magazine, Jan. 20, 1973, p 52-55.
LOGARITHMIC CIRCUITS 505
±15 VDC POWER
0.1 mF
RECORDING PHOTOMULTIPLIER OUTPUT— ers calibration procedure for obtaining overall

Wide range of output data from photomultiplier accuracy of ±2 dB. — "How to Specify Parame-
is fed through Teledyne Philbrick 4351 logarith- ters of Nonlinear Circuits," Teledyne Philbrick,
mic amplifier for compression of data to range Dedham, MA, 1974, AN-15, p 4.
of ± 5 VDC for feed to tape recorder. Report cov-
LOGAMP WITH OFFSET ADJUSTMENT— Mo-

torola MC1556G opamp provides accurate op-
eration down to millivolt input levels without
bias current compensation. Input offset is ad-
justed with 10K pot. 0.1-pF capacitor is required
across feedback transistor to reduce AC gain.
Diode protects transistor from polarity reversal
of input voltage. Power supplies should be by-
passed as close as possible to amplifier socket.
NOTE: TO OBTAIN NEGATIVE OUTPUT VOLTAGE USE TWO 4351 S AND THE -15 V SUPPLY.
Positive input voltage gives negative output
voltage. 1C includes output short-circuit protec-
TWO-QUADRANT SQUARING— Teledyne Phil- tion.— K. Huehne, "Transistor Logarithmic Con-
shown provides positive output voltage. — "Ap-
brick log modules are used in simple two-quad- plications for Models 4350/4351 & 4362/4363 version Using an Integrated Operational Ampli-
rant squarer in which input is offset because fier," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1971, AN-261A,
Logarithmic Amplifiers," Teledyne Philbrick,
modules accept only one polarity. Circuit Dedham, MA, 1974, AN-14.
P 3-
10-MHz DUAL-CHANNEL LOGAMP— Circuit compression, analog computation, radar and in each channel. Coordinate origin is adjusted
using Texas Instruments SN56502 or SN76502 infrared detection systems, and weapons sys-
with offset pots of output buffers. — "The Linear
in combination with four SN52741 opamps will tems. Differential output voltage levels are gen- and Interface Circuits Data Book for Design En-
handle 50-dB input range per channel at all fre- erally less than 0.6 V. Output swing and slope gineers," Texas Instruments, Dallas, TX, 1973,
quencies up to 10 MHz. Suitable for data of output response are adjusted by varying gain
p 7-46.
506
DIFFERENTIAL LOGARITHM — Optical Electron-

ics 9818 opamp and 2245C logamp together
give logarithm of differential input voltage or
current. Combined transfer function is E0 = K
log (R^/RJfe^ — e,). R, can be zero for differential

input current circuit. For unity-gain preamp, R,
and R2 should be 10K. For 1 -V full-scale input,
use 10K for R, and 100K for R2. For 100-mV full-
scale input, use 10K for R, and 1 megohm for
R?- — "How to Obtain a Differential Logarithm,"
Optical Electronics, Tucson, A2, Application Tip
10126.
LOG-ANTILOG DIVIDER — Can be used in appli- are proportional to logarithms of input varia- racy. Overall nonlinearity can be as low as
cations where both numerator and denomina- bles. R4 in feedback circuit of A4 converts collec- 0.05%. Article gives design equations. — L.
tor are restricted to single polarity (to one quad- tor current of Q1B to output voltage proportional Counts and D. Sheingold, Analog Dividers:
rant). Input variables X, Y, and Z are applied to What Choice Do You Have?, EDN Magazine,
to V2VY/VX. Circuit performs multiplication and
three independent transdiode log amplifiers division simultaneously and with equal accu- May 5, 1974, p 55-61.
(A,-Q,a, A2-Q24, and A3-Q2B). Outputs of logamps
CHAPTER 47
Logic Circuits
Includes interfaces for different types of logic, along with gates, Schmitt
triggers, and other types of logic circuits that are responsive to sudden or
gradual changes in input logic levels. Also covered are pulse sequence, pulse
coincidence, and pulse-width detectors, along with pulse memories. See also
Logic Probe, Memory, Microprocessor, and Operational Amplifier chapters.
♦ 10 v
INPUT AO COS/MOS SUPPLY
INPUT BO
INPUTS
A B
H H GREEN
L L RED
L H OFF
H L OFF
COINCIDENCE DETECTOR— If inputs A and B upper lead to +5 V supply and 100 ohms in
are both high, indication will be green. If A and lower +5 V lead because red and green LEDs in INTERFACE FOR INDUSTRIAL CONTROL— Sim-
B are both low, indication will be red. If inputs parallel back-to-back have different voltage re- ple resistive divider circuit provides interface
are out of phase, so one is high and the other quirements. Drivers are SN75451 and between 24-V logic swing of industrial control
low, indicator will be off. Suitable for monitor- SN75454. — K. Powell, Novel Indicator Circuit, system and CMOS logic operating from 10-V
ing complex logic circuits. Uses Monsanto Ham Radio , April 1977, p 60-63. supply. Filter capacitor enhances excellent
MV5491 dual red/green LED, with 220 ohms in noise immunity of CMOS logic. Clamp diodes
ensure that input signal voltage is between VDd
and Vss. — "COS/MOS Integrated Circuits," RCA

ON U 3 \/0L IS too n 628.

OFF 2 9 VOLTS
AND LOGIC FOR MUTING— Connection shown

for National LM389 combination of three tran-
sistors with opamp gives standard AND circuit
for controlling muting transistor in audio sys-
tem. Shorting pin 12 of opamp to ground gives
LATCH — National LM3909 1C operating from 3- that level. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," Na- 4-37.
NAND logic. — "Audio Handbook," National
V battery requires only momentary contact by tional Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-33-
AN-154, p 9.
switch to change logic level of output and hold
507
508
+ 5V
PHASE-SENSITIVE DETECTOR— Uses quadru- square waves. This output is applied to low-
ple two-input NAND-gate 1C with minimum of pass filter R2-C, having values chosen OV to suit
external components. DC output level is abso- operating frequency and required output resis-
lutely linear with phase difference at inputs, tance. R, is chosen to give required output
making circuit suitable for phase-locked loops swing up to maximum of 15 V — R. A. Harrold,
and phase-shift keyed demodulation. Output is Inexpensive P.S.D., Wireless World, Jan. 1973,
rectangular wave whose mark-space ratio is
proportional to phase difference between input
p 32.
CMOS INTERFACE FOR OPAMP— Clamp diodes CMOS input voltage does not go outside per-
and single resistor provide interface between missible range.— "COS/MOS Integrated Cir-
CMOS circuit and opamp operating between cuits," RCA Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ,
normal ±15 V supply rails. Diodes ensure that 1977, p 629.
SEQUENCE DETECTOR— Generates output

pulse if, and only if, sequence of input pulses is
in prescribed order. Any other sequence inhibits
output pulse and clears circuit at instant of first
out-of-order pulse. Circuit also clears itself at
end of correct sequence, by generating se-
quence-OK pulse. Developed for use in control
systems, electronic combination locks, and any
other applications requiring sequence of pulses.
To detect more than 4 bits in sequence, NAND
gates and flip-flops can be added. If TTL input
pulses occur in correct T,-T2-T,-T, order, 1 state
at U,D, will propagate down chain of D flip-flops
until U2Qj output is reached. Simultaneously, 0
BALANCED LINE DRIVER— National DS75450 through half of line impedance. Output current is propagated in similar manner to hold clear
dual peripheral driver serves as interface be- bus at 1. Article traces circuit operation in de-
is 300 mA. — "Interface Databook," National
tween TTL and twisted-pair line. Output line 1 3-30.
Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1978, p 3-20- tail.— M. J. Gallagher, Self-Clearing Digital Se-
is terminated to ground through half of line quence Detector, EDN Magazine, April 5, 1973,
impedance, and line 2 is terminated to +5 V
p 88-89.
LOGIC CIRCUITS 509
VARIABLE-HYSTERESIS SCHMITT— Uses stan-

dard 555 timer with only five additional com-
ponents to give fully TTUDTL-compatible
Schmitt trigger that responds to slow input «2
ramps as well as straight DC levels. When input
is 0. output goes high and turns on Q,. When
input increases to 5.8 V, output goes low and Q,
turns off. Decreasing output to 4.7 V (lower
threshold point) makes output high again. For
values shown, hysteresis is thus 1.1 V. Thresh-
old points and hysteresis value can be adjusted
as required by changing zeners used. — M. K.
Lalitha and P. R. Chetty, Variable-Threshold
Schmitt Trigger Uses 555 Timer, EDN Maga-
zine, Sept. 20, 1976, p 112 and 114.
200K 12
POLARITY REVERSER — Logic input controls

operation of DG303 low-power analog switch
providing polarity reversal for output of opamp.
Low input logic gives noninverting operation
because input signal then goes to pin 12 of
opamp. — "Analog Switches and Their Applica-
tions," Siliconix, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 7-91.
+ 5Vd,
°2
Q
D,
1N914B 2N2222
POWER-UP/POWER-DOWN RESET— Output of

circuit goes high at end of time interval RTUCTu
required for charging of CTU by applied 5-VDC
1N914B
input signal. When 5-V power fails, Q drives Q2
and Q3 off, making output low for time interval
determined by RT0CTD. When CTD is discharged,
' 0 2 *jF output goes high again. Interruption of power
1M thus produces negative-going pulse having var-
4 ¥
iable width determined by values chosen for re-
sistors and capacitors. — S. Rummel, Reset Cir-
, CTU
cuit Detects Power Drop-Out, EDN Magazine,
May 20, 1976, p 94.
RESET (LOW)
Rru ::
jQl -vw- 2N2222

2N2907 Ik
47 mF
CURRENT-MODE SCHMITT TRIGGER— Moto-

rola MMT3960 transistor array is connected as
differential amplifier with feedback to produce
Schmitt trigger having input hysteresis of 500
mV. Small rise and fall times make circuit suit-
able for driving flip-flop over wide range of fre-
quencies.— B. Broeker, "Micro-T Packaged
Transistors for High Speed Logic Systems,"
Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974, AN-536, p 6.
TWO-GATE SCHMITT — TTL inverter gates are ohm resistor at output terminal. With values
connected in series, with small feedback resis- shown, positive-going threshold is 2.4 V and
tor in common ground lead, so gates are always negative-going threshold is 2 V.— C. J. Ulrick,
in opposing logic states. Resulting constant Schmitt Trigger Uses Two Logic Gates, EEE
voltage drop across 22-ohm resistor produces Magazine, Dec. 1970, p 54.
constant offset voltage that is corrected by 220-
PULSE-COMPLETING SCHMITT— Half of 7413

dual four-input NAND Schmitt trigger forms RS
bistable which ensures that cycle is completed
after switch is opened. Low-impedance expo-
nential sawtooth output is produced at point C.
TTL-TO-MOS DRIVER— Uses National DS75450 ferent logic types. Operates from single 5-V Point A is high when oscillator is running and
dual peripheral driver having 300-mA output can be used as control signal — T. P. Hopkins,
supply.— "Interface Databook," National Semi-
current capability to provide high-speed switch- conductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1978, p 3-20-3-30. Improved Schmitt Trigger Oscillator, Wireless
World, Jan. 1978, p 58.
ing while providing compatibility between dif-
LOGIC CIRCUITS +5.0V
511
LOGIC PROTECTOR — Simple bidirectional triac adjustment of R 2. — D. L. Sporre, Bidirectional TTL-TO-CMOS TRANSLATOR — Two sections of
crowbar can be set so positive voltages above Crowbar Protects Logic, EDN Magazine , Dec. Harris HA-4900/4905 precision quad comparator
6 V and negative voltages greater than 1.5 V 15, 1970, p 37. provide interface between TTL drive and CMOS
cannot reach digital logic. Article covers initial
output circuits. Supply is ±15 V. — "Linear &
Data Acquisition Products," Harris Semicon-
ductor, Melbourne, FL, Vol. 1, 1977, p 2-95.
+ 15 V
HIGH-LEVEL ACTIVATION BY CMOS— High

SCHMITT FROM 555 TIMER— Only three addi- drives output low. Conversely, input can de- output of typical CMOS gate drives comple-
tional parts need be added to standard 555 crease to about 0.7 V before output goes high mentary MPS-A13 Darlington transistor having
timer to give fully TTL/DTL-compatible Schmitt again. — M. K. Lalitha and P. R. Chetty, Variable- 80-mA lamp load. — A. Pshaenich, "Interface
trigger that responds to slow input ramps as Threshold Schmitt Trigger Uses 555 Timer, EDN Techniques Between Industrial Logic and
well as straight DC levels. With output initially Magazine, Sept. 20, 1976, p 112 and 114. AN-712A, p 11.
Power Devices," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975,
high, increasing input from 0 to about 1.35 V
OR LOGIC FOR MUTING — Connection shown

for National LM389 combination of three tran-
sistors with opamp gives standard OR circuit for
MOS-TO-TTL DRIVER — National DS75450 dual tion. Requires only single 5-V supply. — "Inter- controlling muting transistor in audio system.
peripheral driver serves as interface between face Databook," National Semiconductor, Shorting pin 12 of opamp to ground gives NOR
different logic types while providing high-speed Santa Clara, CA, 1978, p 3-20-3-30. logic. — "Audio Handbook," National Semicon-
switching and 300-mA output current per sec- ductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-33-4-37.
+5
SCHMITT USING 7400 GATES— Uses two sec- protection of input circuit. Used as interface be- LOW-LEVEL ACTIVATION BY CMOS— Typical
tions of 7400 quad NAND gate. Will accept input tween 60-Hz line and frequency divider having CMOS gate interfaces directly with small-signal
voltages of 10-50 V P-P with values shown, but TTL logic, when 1-s time base is required for Darlington transistor driving 80-mA lamp
can use line voltage directly if input resistor is timing applications. — W. A. Palm, Connect a load. — A. Pshaenich, "Interface Techniques Be-
22K and feedback resistor is 220K. Diode in DC 7400 Gate as a Schmitt Trigger, EDN Magazine,
tween Industrial Logic and Power Devices,"
supply limits positive-going input to 5.7 V for Aug. 20, 1976, p 84. Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-712A, p 11.
TTL
LOGIC
LEVEL
PULSE
INPUT
PULSE-WIDTH DETECTOR— Logic terminal of

National LM122 timer is driven simultaneously
with trigger input to give high-accuracy pulse-
width detector. Output changes state only
when trigger input stays high for longer than
time period set by R, and Ct; resulting output
pulse width is then equal to input trigger width
minus RtCt. CL filters out narrow spikes that
would occur at output due to interval delays
during switching. Supply can range from 4.5 to
40 V. — C. Nelson, "Versatile Timer Operates
from Microseconds to Hours," National Semi-
'Vout = 0 F0R w R« C,
PULSE OUT = W - R, C, FOR W R, C,
TTL INTERFACE — Motorola MPQ 6001 quad edge of gate drive pulse until bridge gate opens time measurement.— R. W. Hilsher, Universal
complementary-pair transistor 1C serves as in- is 30 ns, with negligible delay between comple- Interface: TTL to Diode Array, EDN Magazine ,
terface between TTL gate and diode bridge used mentary outputs. Used in providing low-level March 5, 1975, p 74 and 76.
as signal gate. Propagation delay from leading burst of input signal when making response
513
LOGIC CIRCUITS
5V
POWER-ON RESET — One Schmitt trigger and

three discrete components ensure correct initial
state of logic circuits when power is applied.
During charge time of Cl, output of gate G1 is
high. When Cl reaches 1.5 V, gate output goes
LEVEL AND POLARITY SHIFTER— Simple FET supply and ground. Transistor has fast switch low and terminates power-on reset. — R. C. Sny-
circuit provides for level shifting from MOS
ing time. — "FET Databook," National Semicon- der, Single-Voltage Circuit Generates "Power-
logic element having negative supply to TTL or ductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36. On"
1972, Reset
p 72. Pulse, EDNIEEE Magazine, Jan. 1,
other bipolar logic level operating from positive
10 V vcc (75 VI
Off
,-TL ECL INTERFACE FOR VMOS— S55V12 VMOS

(identical to S55V01 except for higher break-
down/saturation voltage) is used to buffer ECL-
compatible SN75441 peripheral driver. Combi-
CMOS INTERFACE USING OPTOISOLATOR— lamp. With values shown, 10 mA at optoisolator nation is capable of handling up to 90 V at 2 A.
Provides logic control of 350-mA lamp. High input controls completely isolated 350-mA SN75441 has open-collector output, so inter-
level on input of typical CMOS inverter ener- load. — A. Pshaenich, "Interface Techniques Be- face with VMOS requires only pull-up resistor
gizes 4N25 optoisolator, to clamp Q1 off. This tween Industrial Logic and Power Devices," R,. — L. Shaeffer, VMOS Peripheral Drivers
removes drive from Q2, deenergizing load. Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-712A, p 16. Solve High Power Load Interface Problems,
Logic 0 at input reverses conditions, turning on Computer Design, Dec. 1977, p 90, 94, and 96-
98.
LOW-POWER SCHMITT— Uses two NAND

gates from SN74L00 NAND package and one
V2 O ' NOR gate (used as inverter) from CD4001AE
CMOS package to make low-power Schmitt
trigger. NAND gates are connected to form RS
flip-flop. Q goes high when input voltage is
greater than 2.1 V, and other output does not
go low until input voltage is less than 1.2 V.
EXCLUSIVE-OR LOGIC FOR MUTING— Connec- transistor in audio system. Shorting pin 12 of Both polarities of output signal are available. —
tion shown for National LM389 combination of
opamp to ground gives EXCLUSIVE-NOR R. Cox, CMOS and LPTTL Gates Make Low-
three transistors with opamp gives standard logic. — "Audio Handbook," National Semicon- Power Schmitt Trigger, EDN Magazine, Oct. 1,
1972, p 48.
EXCLUSIVE-OR circuit for controlling muting ductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-33-4-37.
^
10k
j
k
10
514
SELECT I STATUS
TERMINAL
= SELECT (LED OR AUDIO ALARM)
2N1415 ZERO O-
IINDICATOR
LATCHING ALARM — Single-channel monitor

using half of CD4013AE flip-flop detects out-of-
tolerance condition or alarm state represented
by logic 1 on clock input. Flip-flop then changes
to alarm state that turns on transistor for en-
ergizing alarm device, and holds alarm condi-
tion until operator reacts by applying voltage to
ECL INTERFACE FOR LED — PNP germanium SET input. Logic 0 on D terminal activates flip-
flop when monitoring is desired.— J. C. Nichols,
-5 2 VDC transistor serves as interface for driving LED
from emitter-coupled logic. Same interface can CMOS "D" Flop Makes Latching "AND" Gate,
be used to drive 7-segment or other arrays that EDN Magazine, April 20, 1974, p 89 and 91.
have common-cathode configuration, such as
Fairchild FND10 or Monsanto MAN3. Optoiso-
lator can be used in place of LED. — G. A. Alte-
mose. One Transistor Provides ECL to LED In-
terface, EDN Magazine, Oct. 15, 1972, p 54.
-O E
■ -V LCU
120
A B A B A B A B
74SOO "READY"
0 0 11 2 2 3 3
a<b a>b A < B A > B A <B A > B A < B A>B

9324 AAAA BBBB AAAA BBBB
AAAA BBBB 9324 AAAA BBBB
E 0 1 2 3 0 12 3 E 0 1 2 9324
3 0 12 3 E 0 1 29324
3 0 12 3
E 0 1 2 3 0 12 3
FF A
74S112
C A Q
EN 0 1 2 3 EN 0 1 2 3 EN 0 1 2 3
o X EN 0 1 2 3
9314
SSSSD D D D SSSSD D D D SSSSD DDD SSSSD D D D
0 12 3 9314
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 9314
0 1 2 3
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 9314
STORING SINGLE PULSE — Designed to take counters are initially cleared. Input pulse of in- IC1 is enabled and oscillator is gated on again to
single-event positive-going TTL pulse, occur- terest gates delay-line oscillator (lower left) on reset 9316s and toggle FF-C. Square-wave out-
ring only once when series of logic conditions for duration of pulse width. During this time, put of FF-C then represents original pulse width
is met, and recreating pulse accurately on CRO binary representation of pulse width is accu- within 35 ns (one clock).— N. L. White, Don't
as square wave in which half of cycle represents mulated in 9316 counters, then stored in 9314 Miss That Single Event Pulse— Store It, EDN
original pulse width. FF-A and 9316 binary D-latches. At same time, final 9324 comparator Magazine, Sept. 20, 1975, p 70 and 72.
LOGIC CIRCUITS 515
TONE DETECTOR — Output goes low only when

input tone has been continuous at desired fre-
quency for interval exceeding duration of pulse
from 555 timer. Circuit can be used to reset an
alarm system or to detect TTL level that exceeds
predetermined time duration. — Circuits, 73
Magazine, April 1977, p 164.
10 v
(7,5 V)
AMPLIFIED TTL INTERFACE FOR VMOS— Bi-

polar voltage amplifier Q, translates TTL output
swing of 0.4 to 2.4 V from 7400 interface to 15-
CMOS INTERFACE FOR VMOS— Simple 4011 V drive signal for S55V01 VMOS peripheral
TOTEM-POLE ECL INTERFACE FOR VMOS— CMOS gate connection provides required logic driver. Circuit can be driven by any low-level sig-
Transistor and diode in totem-pole configura- interface for S55V01 VMOS that is capable of nal, including ECL, if comparator such as AM686
tion improve performance of SN75441 ECL- handling up to 1 A. Switching time is about 25 is used in place of SN7400 quad NAND gate.
compatible peripheral driver for S55V12 ns but can be doubled by connecting four CMOS Switching times of circuit are less than 40 ns in
VMOS. — L. Shaeffer, VMOS Peripheral Drivers gates in parallel. Vcc can be either 10 or 15 V — both directions. — L. Shaeffer, VMOS Peripheral
Solve High Power Load Interface Problems, L. Shaeffer, VMOS Peripheral Drivers Solve Drivers Solve High Power Load Interface Prob-
Computer Design, Dec. 1977, p 90, 94, and 96- High Power Load Interface Problems, Computer lems, Computer Design, Dec. 1977, p 90, 94, and
98. Design, Dec. 1977, p 90, 94, and 96-98. 96-98.
CHAPTER 48
Logic Probe Circuits

Provide LED and/or audible indication of logic-level status at terminal on
which test probe is held for troubleshooting or other purposes. One circuit
shows status at eight separate terminals on CRO display.
-O +5V
Tr2
36 ^ red S 36
0 5W< >0-5W
2N2222A
O— AA/V-
2N2222A
R2
IN914
Tr
+ IN914
Oov
TTL-STATE PROBE — Uses voltage drop of LED cuts off Tr, and turns on green LED. For high FET LOGIC PROBE — Field -effect transistor with
in Schmitt trigger to indicate high, low, open- impedance at input, both LEDs are off. Rectan- very high input resistance makes LED glow
circuit, and pulse-train conditions at probe gular waves up to about 1 MHz turn on both when logic 1 is present at input, without loading
input. Indicator is Monsanto MV5491 dual red- LEDs, with relative brightness giving rough in- circuit being monitored. — F. M. Mims, "Com-
green LED package. High input saturates Tr„ dication of mark-space ratio. — J. C. Flower, puter Circuits for Experimenters," Radio Shack,
cuts off Tr2, and turns on red LED. Low input Logic Probe, Wireless World, Sept. 1976, p 72. Fort Worth, TX, 1974, p 35-43.
LOGIC PROBE — Provides almost as much infor-

mation, when working with TTL or DTL digital
circuits, as costly CRO or logic analyzer. Can be
built into length of plastic tubing, with probe tip
projecting at one end and two supply leads
coming from other end. One LED flashes for
high to low transition, and other for low to high
transition. Flash is visible even with very nar-
row pulses, because probe circuit stretches
pulse width. With SI open (memory mode),
pulse LED at right stays on until reset by oper-
ator, for capturing any stray pulse. If probe tip
is held on open circuit or on chain of floating in-
puts, no LED will light. — C. W. Andreasen, Su-
perprobe, 73 Magazine, Holiday issue 1976, p
92-93.
516
LOGIC PROBE CIRCUITS 517
RTL/TTL PROBE — Static LED indicates logic

MV-SO level at probe tip. Dynamic LED indicates pres-
ence of high or 1 pulse at probe tip even though
LOGIC-STATE PROBE — Useful for low-repeti- steady state is high, CR2 will light when switch momentary, because circuit stretches pulse to
tion-rate applications having single narrow is high. Other two lamps indicate presence of about 50 p.s for easy visibility. Pulse stretcher
pulses, as in computer interfaces and logic con- pulse superimposed on steady-state signal. If requires at least 100-ns 4-V pulse. 1N4001 diode
trol systems. Pulses as narrow as 50 ns are repetition frequency of pulse is high, pulse light protects against reversed power leads. Probe
stretched by mono so they provide clear LED in- appears on continuously. — J. W. Hamill, Low- requires +5 V from circuit under test. LEDs and
dication. Ifsteady state of circuit under test is Speed Logic Probe, EDNIEEE Magazine, Nov. 1, transistor are not critical. — Circuits, 73 Maga-
low, CR, will light when S, is in low position. If 1971, p 51. zine, April 1974, p 31.
LOGIC PROBE — Pocket-size battery-powered

probe using two inexpensive CMOS ICs has
such low standby current drain that ON/OFF
switch is unnecessary. Drain is appreciable only
when LEDs are on during use. Mallory TR-133
4.2-V mercury battery gives 2-V threshold for
TTL compatibility. LEDs come on to indicate
logic 1. Pulse-stretching circuit ensures detect-
ing positive or negative pulses as short as 250
ns. — J. Edrington, Battery-Powered Logic
Probe Needs No ON/OFF Switch, EDN Maga-
zine, May 20, 1975, p 72 and 74.
*5V
BUILT-IN LOGIC PROBE — Permanently wired desired. ICs la and 1b form noninverting driver DARLINGTON LOGIC PROBE — Two-transistor
LEDs indicate TTL levels and changes in levels. for 9602 mono which is triggered on both pos- Darlington connection provides very high input
LEVEL LED-1 comes on for TTL 1 input and goes itive-going and negative-going edges by Cl and impedance that does not load logic circuit being
out for TTL 0 input. EDGE LED-2 comes on mo- D1. Pulse train input having period less than monitored, while driving LED that glows when
mentarily for input changes. Will detect levels, width of flash pulse will keep EDGE indicator
logic 1 is present at input. — F. M. Mims, "Com-
steps, single pulses, and pulse trains. Only half on. — K. W. Christner, The Built-In Logic Tester, puter Circuits for Experimenters," Radio Shack,
of each 1C is used, so dual tester can be made if BYTE, Jan. 1977, p 82-83. Fort Worth, TX, 1974, p 35-43.
518
+ 12 AUDIBLE LOGIC INDICATOR— Audio oscillator

Q1-Q2-Q3 is isolated from TTL by opamp U1
wired as Schmitt trigger. Opamp acts as high-
input-impedance inverter. Reference level is set
at +1.6 V by R8-R9 for TTL-compatible logic
(about midway between high and low logic lev-
els). When probe input is below +1.6 V, opamp
output of about 10.5 V saturates Q1 and disa-
bles Q2-Q3 to cut off tone. When probe voltage
is above +1.6 V, U1 output is about 2 V which
cuts off Q1 and allows Q2-Q3 to generate tone
indicating high logic.— H. F. Batie, Versatile
Audio Oscillator, Ham Radio, Jan. 1976, p 72-
74.
RED/GREEN LEVEL DISPLAY — Level detector

can be used with TTL, DTL, and RTL, as probe
for troubleshooting, indicator is Monsanto
MV5491 dual red/green LED, with 220 ohms in TTL SIGNAL O
upper lead to +5 V supply and 100 ohms in
quirements. Will furnish green indication on
high or plus signal and red indication on low or
false signal. Supply voltage of +5 V can be taken
from equipment under test. Circuit requires
SN75451 driver ICs and two sections of SN7404
hex inverter. — K. Powell, Novel Indicator Cir-
cuit, Ham Radio, April 1977, p 60-63.
1/4 7400
PROBE — Red LED comes on to indicate that test

point is at high logic level, while green LED sig-
nifies low level. Circuit uses one 7400 quad dual-
input NAND gate. — S. Uhrig, Check Logic with
This Simple Probe, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1974, p
76.
m FLASHES ONCE
VZ/
/27X THEN GOES OFF
ON INITIALLY
BLINKS ON D3
S OFF
LED DISPLAY FOR TTL — Useful for observing
TTL levels when CRO is not available. A1 and A2
are 74123 dual retriggerable mono MVBRs with WAVEFORM
Dl D2
clear, used to turn on LEDs when input transi-
tions are detected. Even very short pulses are
5V
oo o
made visible because mono stretches pulse
length. Table shows how LED indications are 5 V |
O0oFF • o
e• o
OV
interpreted.— B. Voight, The TTL One Shot, 73
o© %
Magazine, Feb. 1977, p 56-58. V
50V
5V
©© © ON
6 o
0
5V^
ov 5S II
\*
5ov
V n 1
ovJ 1 5S P
'
OV
8312 /9312 ♦ 5V 6 8pF 8-50pF
8-TRACE LOGIC DISPLAY— Adapter for stan-

dard oscilloscope shows time relationship be-
tween pulses at eight different locations in dig-
ital circuit, for troubleshooting and isolation of
glitches. Almost any general-purpose CRO can
be used, but triggered sweep improves useful-
ness. Multiplexer feeds each input in turn to Y
input of CRO, under control of counter. Article
covers operation and use of adapter. — R. A.
Johnson, Eight Trace Scope Adapter, 73 Mag-
azine, Sept. 1976, p 108-110.
CMOS LOGIC PROBE — Designed for wiring into

microprocessor to show status of an important
terminal, as troubleshooting aid. LEVEL LED is
onforTTL input of 1 and off for input of 0. EDGE
LED lights momentarily when input changes
from 1 to 0 or 0 to 1. Use of CMOS inverting
buffer 3a at input prevents probe from affecting
microprocessor. — F. A. Weissig, A CMOS Logic POWER + 5V
CONNECTIONS
Probe, BYTE, Oct. 1977, p 11. 1C 1 GND

7405
14 7
IC2 9602 16 8
1C 3 CD4049 1 8
LISTEN TO LOGIC — Gives audio indication of Logic 0 at probe input gives lower frequency. either mono from firing two consecutive
TTL states when probe is held on 1C pin. Input Logic pulse transitions trigger 2602 dual monos times. — I. Simon, Audio Output Eases Logic
level above 2 V makes 2N4803 UJT oscillate at for 1 s, modulating tones at about 1-s rate. Level Checking, EON Magazine, June 20, 1975,
about 400 Hz and give tone from loudspeaker. Monos also drive two-gate latch that prevents
p 116 and 118.
520
VISUAL-AUDIBLE PROBE — Indication of static

state of terminal in digital logic is made audible
for blind experimenter by using NE556 timer IC3
as oscillator controlled by IC1 (SN74132N) and
IC2 (SN7486N). Any logic transition from 1 to 0 provided by LED that comes on when input is
or 0 to 1, lasting at least 50 ns, is detected and logic 1. — T. Lincoln, A Logic Probe You Can
indicated by audio beep. Visual indication is Hear, 73 Magazine, Aug. 1976, p 106.
OUTPUT STATUS DISPLAY — Monitors state of

single bit and shows H or L on 7-segment dis-
play depending on status of data input. Uses
two 7437 inverters and one DL-704 common-
cathode display. Diode symbols represent seg-
ments of display (segment A is not needed for
H or L). Power connections to 7437 inverter are
+5 V to pin 14 and ground to pin 7. — G. Toma-
lesky. Bit Status Display. BYTE, Dec. 1977, p
197.
TTL PROBE — LED comes on, and stays on until comes on for high-level or +5 V pulse.— R. B.
circuit is reset, if input probe receives low-level Shreve, Troubleshooting Logic Circuits, Ham
(negative-going) pulse when polarity switch is Radio, Feb. 1977, p 56-59.
set as shown. For other position of switch, LED
LOW LEVEL DETECT
AUDIBLE CMOS PROBE — Eliminates need for ing troubleshooting. Produces high tone for describes circuit operation in detail. — C. W. An-
watching meter white applying probe tip in turn logic high, low tone for logic low, and no sound dreasen. The Best Probe Yet?, 73 Magazine,
to large number of closely spaced terminals dur- for open or floating string. Supply is 12 V. Article April 1978, p 134-135.
FAST TTL PROBE — RS flip-flop wired from

NAND gate detects pulses as short as combined
gate delays of NAND sections forming flip-flop
(about 30 ns). Circuit changes state at start of
pulse, with LED monitoring flip-flop output.
After pulse has been detected, circuit must be
reset with S2. Will work with either positive-or
negative-going pulse, as selected by SI .— W. A.
Walde, Build a TTL Pulse Catcher, BYTE, Feb.
1976, p 58 and 60.
AUDIBLE PROBE — Speeds troubleshooting by

eliminating need to look at meter, and prevents
possible damage to logic under test by mini-
mizing possibility of shorts occurring if probe
slips when looking at meter. Components used
with A-8402 1C give 1-kHz output for 6-V input.
Binary counter divides this signal to give output
in low audio range and converts to square wave
more suitable for driving loudspeaker. Probe
can also serve as input for digital voltmeter.
When probing TTL circuits, probe gives low fre-
quency for 0 state, high frequency for 1, and
middle frequency for open circuit. Output tran-
sistor type is not critical. — G. E. Row, Audible
Logic Probe Doubles as DVM Input Section,
TEST PROBE — Checks binary levels and pulse need for pushing button continuously. At AUX 1N914. Probe drain is about 160 mA; changing
coincidence. Indicator lamp, driven by switch- position of main switch, two inputs are needed to LED would cut drain to 60 mA. — R. H. Fran-
ing transistor Q3, is bright enough to be seen in at same time. To check for coincidence, connect sen. Improved Logic Test Probe, Ham Radio,
sunlight. Close OFF-MEM switch when using patch core! from AUX jack to second point being Dec. 1973, p 53-55.
probe as binary level indicator, to eliminate checked in logic circuit. All signal diodes are
LATCHING PROBE — TTL pulse catcher can be

used as logic probe forICtroubleshooting. Uses
Monsanto MV5491 dual red/green LED, with 220
ohms in upper lead to +5 V supply and 100
ohms in lower +5 V lead because red and green
LEDs in parallel back-to-back have different
voltage requirements. SN75454 driver circuit is
cross-coupled to form latch or memory ele-
ment. Positive-going pulse sets latch and
makes LED change color to indicate arrival of
pulse. Latch must be reset manually with
+ 5V
RESET switch. Also useful for locating intermit-
tents such as glitches; probe can be left con-
nected to circuit under test, to see if latch has
been set by unwanted signal. — K. Powell, Novel
Indicator Circuit, Ham Radio, April 1977, p 60-
63.
f— ►
PARTS
IC1 — SN7406- HEX INVERTER

1C -SN5400-QUAD NAND
POINT (T
)
INPUT
LOGICAL HIGH
LOGICAL LOW
0V ■■ ■
LOGICAL LOW
gate. Will respond to square-wave pulses with

PULSE FREQUENCY DETECTOR— Can be used 50% duty cycles up to 3 MHz. When pulse ap- B will be complementary and E will go low, re-
H
as digital-logic probe or as frequency detector pears at Input, points A and B detect logic high setting latch and turning off LED. — V. Rende,
for test equipment. Requires only two ICs, level and make point E go high so latch sets and Digital Frequency Detector Uses Only Two IC's,
SN7406 hex inverter and SN5400 quad NAND turns on LED. Without an input frequency, A and EDN Magazine, April 20, 1976, p 114.
ence of positive- and negative-going pulses. if pulse is positive-going, while LED2 and LED3
LOGIC PROBE — Designed to indicate logic Input of logic 0 lights LED1 and LED3, with LEDs stay on if pulse is negative-going. — H. M. Berlin,
states in TTL and CMOS circuits. Will substitute staying on only 200 ms. With logic 1, only.LED2 A TTL and CMOS Logic Probe, Ham Radio,
March 1978, p 114.
for high-speed triggered CRO in indicating pres- lights. With SI closed, LED1 and LED3 stay on
CHAPTER 49
Medical Circuits
Includes circuits for telemetering and processing of heart, brain, muscle, and
other bioelectric potentials, recording data from joggers, monitoring
therapeutic radiation, synthesizing speech, and providing audible indications
for blind persons of light level, voltage, logic status, bridge null, and other
measurable parameters.
IMPLANT AMPLIFIER — Designed for use in im-

planted transmitters monitoring brain and
RADIATION MONITOR— 1N3191 commercial amplifies detector current to usable level for heart potentials. Requires only 4 /iA at 1.35 V.
diode serves as sensor in high-accuracy dosage- 3292 chopper-stabilized opamp that provides Voltage gain is 2000, and equivalent input noise
rate meter for gamma rays and high-energy X- additional gain while minimizing temperature
only 10 fiV P-P with 10-megohm source imped-
rays used in radiotherapy. Diode is small errors. — P. Prazak and W. B. Scott, Radiation ance. Tr, is current-starved, but resulting lim-
enough for accurate mapping of radiation field. Monitor Has Linear Output, Electronics, March ited bandwidth of about 5 kHz is acceptable for
Output voltage varies linearly from 0.1 V to 10
20, 1975, p 117; reprinted in "Circuits for Elec- biological applications. — C. Horwitz, Micro-
V as dose rate increases from 10 to 1000 rads
tronics Engineers," Electronics, 1977, p 106. power Low-Noise Amplifier, Wireless World,
Dec. 1974, p 504.
per minute. Low-drift FET-input 3521 L opamp
when measured voltage exceeds reference volt- nected as free-running MVBR that generates AF or OA200. R7 can alternatively be wirewound
age as set by decade switches of R7. Blind per- signal for earpiece. Use germanium transistors pot. — R. S. Maddever, Meter for Blind Students,
son can then read Braille markings at switch such as OC45 or OC71. Opamps are Motorola Wireless World, Jan. 1973, p 36-37.
523
524
+5V +15V
SENSING MUSCLE TENSION— Capacitive

transducer of type used for measuring displace-
• 100kn ment and pressure is used to modulate 555
MVBR. Frequency is detected in NE560B PLL
6
14
that produces DC output voltage. CF sets band-
width of demodulated information. Zero-posi-
5 kn tion frequency of transducer is measured at pin
O.lpF
15 _UcF
0.0 5m F
HH
-l 12 of PLL, and VCO frequency of PLL is mea-
C!t sured from pin 5 through 2N3393 emitter-fol-
5608 6 lower stage — R. M. Wise, Capacitive Trans-
TRANSDUCER ducer Senses Tension in Muscle Fibers,
2 Electronics, June 26, 1975, p 97; reprinted in
VCO
c
5-20pF 13 "Circuits for Electronics Engineers," Electron-
3 4.7 kSJ OUTPUT ics, 1977, p 349.
0.003/iF 5
7‘ 10
9 1
lokn 1 2
OUTPUT
)
d 15kn
0.1//F 0.01/jF
BINARY TONE GENERATOR FOR BLIND— Recognition of binary digits in tone form can be bridge connected to input terminals; S, is used
When low/high input is voltage in binary form, learned by blind person much as learning of to increase sensitivity of 741 opamp as null is
as obtained from converter circuit (also given in Morse code. Uses LM566 1C as tone-generating approached. Article covers operation of circuits
article) fed by digital voltmeter, circuit produces VCO that feeds loudspeaker through LM380 1C in detail. — R. A. Hoare, An Audible Voltmeter
low pitch for binary 0 and high pitch for binary amplifier and 5K volume control. With S2 at po- and Bridge-Indicator, Wireless World, Sept.
1 when S2 is set at D for digital voltmeter mode. sition L,circuit serves as audio null detector for
1976, p 87-89.
MEDICAL CIRCUITS 525
ELECTROMYOGRAM AMPLIFIER— Used to am-

plify voltages in range of several microvolts to
several millivolts in frequency spectrum of 20 to
5000 Hz, as picked up with 13-mm thin silver
disks placed on skin over muscle being studied.
Article also covers electrocardiographic appli-
cations involving source impedances as high as
50 kilohms (as with one electrode on each
wrist). Maximum output capability is 9 V P-P.
Voltage gain is 1000. RF is 800K pot, adjusted to
give 12 dB per octave dropoff above turnover
frequency. — R. E. George, Simple Amplifier for
Muscle Voltages, Wireless World, Oct. 1972, p
495-496.
Rl R2 R3 R« compare
AUDIBLE VOLTMETER— Voltage-controlled

audio oscillator produces 400-Hz tone for 0 V,
with frequency of tone increasing with voltage
over two-octave range to 1600 Hz for maximum
or full-scale voltage. Ten-resistor voltage di-
vider produces calibrated reference tones cor-
responding to main 0-10 divisions of meter
scale for aural comparison. Simple square-wave
audio oscillator Q,-Q2 is voltage-controlled by
Q3, which in turn is driven by opamp whose gain
is set by R5. Article covers adjustment of sensi-
tivity pot R5 and frequency pots R2,-Rri so VCO
tracks voltage being measured and tones coin-
cide at MONITOR and COMPARE positions of S,
for each meter division. — H. F. Batie, An Audible
Meter for the Blind Amateur, CQ, Dec. 1973, p
26-31.
s
/7h Chassi
PHASE LOCKED LOOP - DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER ■ ACTIVE LOW PASS FILTER

LEVEL SHIFT ^
EKG FM DEMODULATOR— Developed as part receiving location is fed to input of 565 phase- components and determines bandwidth of de-
of system using satellite for relaying electrocar- locked loop. Error voltage of loop, at pin 7, con- modulator. Cutoff frequency is 1 00 Hz. Final 741
diograms and other medical data having band- tains data being sought as well as undesirable opamp scales and shifts output to reasonable
width of 0.5 to 50 Hz. Audio signal serving as DC and AC components. DC component of error value. Recorded output could not be distin-
source of FM is applied to voltage-controlled 1- signal is removed by 741 differential amplifier guished from original EKG by doctors. — D. Nel-
kHz oscillator having ±40% deviation for full- following PLL. Following four-pole active RC son, Medical Data Relay via Oscar Satellite,
scale input. Corresponding audio signal at low-pass filter eliminates high-frequency AC Ham Radio, April 1977, p 67-73.
AUDIO EMG MONITOR — Used to measure very

small voltages that appear on surface of skin
over body muscle. Instead of recording voltage
V+ in form of electromyogram (EMG), opamp
drives transistor circuit to produce audible note
that varies in pitch as EMG signal varies in am-
plitude. Applications include use by stroke pa-
tient as aid to learning reuse of muscle group
affected by stroke. Q1 rectifies and averages
amplified EMG signal. Q2 controls charging cur-
rent of C5 for varying frequency of UJT oscilla-
tor Q3. — R. Melen and H. Garland, "Under-
standing 1C Operational Amplifiers," Howard
127.
10-Hz LOW-PASS — Filter design for biomedical

experiment has 10-Hz cutoff, tolerable transient
and overshoot response, and at least 30-dB re-
jection of all frequencies above 15 Hz. All com-
ponents should have 2% tolerance.— D. Lancas-
ter, "Active-Filter Cookbook," Howard W.
TRANSMITTER
A/D
CONVERSION
COMPLETE
A/D
START
CONVERSION
UART FOR EKG RELAY — After electrocardio- transmitter of satellite relay system, with start, cies to give signal required for transmission
gram is converted to digital form by commercial stop, and parity bits added to data under control through satellite. Article covers operation of
A/D converter, circuit shown takes 8-bit word of 19.2-kHz external clock. This serial output is UART in detail. — D. Nelson, Medical Data Relay
output of converter for processing by universal then used to control FSK oscillator that via Oscar Satellite, Ham Radio, April 1 977 p 67-
asynchronous receiver-transmitter (UART) to switches between two discrete audio frequen- 73.
give required serial asynchronous code for
MEDICAL CIRCUITS
* cc O 527
LIGHT-SENSITIVE OSCILLATOR— Uses 555

timer connected so frequency increases directly
3 with intensity of light. Free-running frequency
PHOTO 6 „ 555 and duty cycle of timer operating in astable
TIMER mode are controlled by two resistors and one
Iad-
CELL
7 8 capacitor. R3 sets upper frequency limit at about
2 ”
D(i 6.5 kHz, and dark resistance of photocell R2 sets
10k lower limit at about 1 Hz. Loudspeaker provides
%W
audio output, while LED flashes for visual indi-
"75
cation when frequency goes below about 12 Hz.
®
Applications include detection of lightning
flashes, use as optical radar for blind, and use
FREQUENCY
as sunrise alarm. — C. R. Graf, Build a Light Sen-
SCENE LIGHT INTENSITY
sitive Audio Oscillator, EDN Magazine, Aug. 5,
1976, p 83.
R2 VALUE
BRIGHT SUN 104CANDELA/m2 100S2 6500 Hz
DUSK 10k 3000 Hz
STARLIGHT 10M 2 4 Hz
10-4
HEART-RATE MONITOR — Measures instanta- portable operation. Fast response time gives caused by changing blood pressure. Accuracy
neous frequency of such slow signals as heart reading of heartbeat rate on digital display in is near 1%. — G. Timmermann, Heartbeat-Rate
beats (1 Hz) or 33-rpm motors (0.5 Hz) by mea- two or three pulses. Optoisolator serving as Monitor Captures VLF Signals, EDN Magazine,
suring period T and inverting that quantity to sensor can be taped to almost any part of body Oct. 20, 1977, p 79-80.
obtain f. Operates from single 5-V supply for because it responds to reflectivity changes
2.2k
FSK OSCILLATOR FOR EKG RELAY— Used in

satellite system for relaying electrocardiograms
in digital form. Input consists of 8-bit words ob-
tained in serial form from universal asynchro-
nous receiver-transmitter. Uses 8038 function
generator that is switched between two ad-
justable trimmer resistors giving independently
adjustable discrete audio frequencies for mark
and space. Output is phase-coherent even
though switching does not necessarily take
place at zero-crossing points of sine wave. Op-
eration ismuch like that of FSK RTTY. — D. Nel-
son, Medical Data Relay via Oscar Satellite,
0 METER
AUDIBLE METER READER — Analog meter ter-

minals are connected to input of DC amplifier
Q1 for feeding audio oscillator Q2 and output
amplifier Q3. Frequency of oscillator is directly
proportional to reading of meter. At calibrate
position of S2, DC amplifier is fed by voltage
divider R1-R2 and R2 is adjusted until tones
heard are identical for both positions of S2. De-
veloped for use by blind person. Knob of R2
sweeps over large scale having markings in
Braille for reading of setting at which tones
match. Alternatively, R2 can be preset to de-
sired reading and equipment under test ad-
justed to give tone match. Article covers con- quency. C2, if required, is in same range. T1 is (500 to 3.2 ohms). — N. Rosenberg, Tune-Up
struction and calibration. Cl is chosen in range transistor driver transformer (10,000 to 2000 Aids for the Blind, 73 Magazine, Feb. 1978, p 64-
of 0.002 to 0.1 /iF to give desired minimum fre- ohms), and T2 is transistor output transformer
67.
JOGGER DATA COLLECTION— Portable data ac- be set between 20 and 1 00 Hz, with 2 min of con- suring desired physiological phenomena during
quisition system using microcomputer to drive tinuous data being stored at fast rate. Recorded jogging, walking, or running. — P. G. Schreier,
digital cassette tape transport operates from data is played into PDP-11 minicomputer later Physiological Data Acquisition Presents Un-
12-V rechargeable battery and fits in backpack for analysis. Motion sensor shown can be re- usual Problems, Solutions, EDN Magazine,
having total weight of only 8 lb. Sample rate can placed by other types of transducers for mea- June 20, 1978, p 25-26, 28, and 30.
SPEECH SYNTHESIZER — Based on analog sim-

ulation ofvocal tract. Rush of air through vocal
passages is simulated by white-noise genera-
tor, while action of larynx is simulated in lower
branch of circuit. Article covers problems in-
volved in achieving transitions from phoneme
to phoneme, along with automatic emphasis of
leading or terminating consonants and intona-
tion of rhythm associated with importance or
placement of word in speech. ASCII symbols are
given for 33 phonemes generated in Ai Cyber-
netic Systems model 1000 speech synthesizer,
which uses circuit shown in combination with
10 active filters composed of 15 opamps, vocal
excitation circuits, ASCII character decoders,
and phoneme memories. — W. Atmar, The Time
Has Come to Talk, Byte, Aug. 1976, p 26-30 and
32-33.
EKG TELEMETER — Developed for experimen-

tation or educational demonstrations in which
audience listens to electrocardiograph signal
voltage as fed through LM4250 opamp for mod-
ulating NE566 connected as VCO driving small
loudspeaker. Acoustic output can be picked up
by microphone for telemetry purposes if de-
sired. Connection to patient can be made with
standard adhesive monitoring electrodes or
with small metal disks held on wrists with rub-
ber bands. Tone shifts frequency with each
pulse beat. — M. I. Leavey, Inexpensive EKG En-
coder, 73 Magazine, Feb. 1978, p 20-23.
TTL LEVEL
ACTIVE LOW PASS FILTER LEVEL
- PHASE LOCKED LOOP - ■ DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER -
U FT
SHIF
FSK DEMODULATOR FOR EKG RELAY— Used error signal through differential amplifier to verted into TTL-compatible level. Recorded out-
at receiving end of satellite system for relaying five-pole Butterworth low-pass filter having put could not be distinguished from original
EKGs, to convert received audio FSK signal to 1500-Hz cutoff. DC offset is removed by capac- EKG by doctors. — D. Nelson, Medical Data
TTL level-shifting output from which original itor coupling, for use in zero-crossing detector Relay via Oscar Satellite, Ham Radio, April 1977,
EKG can be obtained. Phase-locked loop tracks or Schmitt-trigger detector. Signal is next con-
input signal frequency and feeds appropriate
p 67-73.
ISOLATED PREAMP — Optoisolator in electro-

cardiograph preamp circuit prevents circulating
ground currents from shocking patients under
test. Can be used with practically all other types
of AC line-operated equipment in medical en-
vironments.—R. R. Ady, Let's Take an Illumi-
nating Look at Latest Developments in LED's,
EDN Magazine, Aug. 5, 1975, p 30-35.
AURAL SWR INDICATOR — Permits blind ama-

teur radio operator to check standing waves on
transmission line and adjust for best possible
impedance match between source and load.
Darkened areas are foil strips 6 x 70 mm, 1.5
mm apart, forming inductive trough that trans-
fers RF energy from transmission line to simple
aural monitor. Rectified RF energy changes bias
on base of Q1, which makes tone increase in
pitch with increasing voltage. Idling tone is
about 500 Hz for values shown. Operates from
three penlight batteries. Transmitter is peaked
for maximum output on rising pitch, and match-
box antenna tuner is adjusted for minimum
SWR on descending pitch. To lower audio tone,
increase size of 82K resistor. — C. G. Bird, Aural
SWR Indicator for the Visually Handicapped,
Ham Radio, May 1976, p 53-53.
MULTIMETER FOR BLIND — Uses small electric in sound, then reads Braille dots for that setting Other diodes are small-signal silicon, such as
horn to produce sound when DC voltage being to get value of voltage being measured. Use BA100 or 1N914A. — G. P. Roberts, Multimeters
measured is different from reference voltage PNP silicon transistors, such as BC177 or BC187. for Blind Students, Wireless World, April 1974,
value determined by setting of linear wire- Ds is 4.3-V 400-mW zener, such as BZX79/C4V3.
wound pot R7. Blind person adjusts R7 for null
p 73-74.
BIOELECTRIC VOLTMETER— Used to measure

bioelectric phenomena involving both DC and
waveform characteristics with amplitudes of
about 10 mV. Since electrodes have impedance
of 20,000 to 100,000 ohms, guard terminal must
be used to drive input shield. Bias-current re-
turn comes from ground plate on skin. Fixed
gain of 1000 gives absolute measure of input-
voltage magnitude. — R. Duris, Instrumentation
Amplifiers — They're Great Problem Solvers
When Correctly Applied, EDN Magazine, Sept.
5, 1977, p 133-135.
TONE OUTPUT FOR DIGITAL DISPLAY— Con- of tone sequence equals number of digits dis- kilohms from 6.8K to 470K), determining fre-
verts BCD input from digital test gear to se- played, plus sign indicator or half-digit if de- quencies ofgenerated tones, are switched into
quence of 10 different tones representing 0 to sired. Circuit shown is for 3'k digits. Article de- VCO IC10 by IC9. — D. R. Pacholok, Digital to
9, for recognition of reading on digital display scribes operation of circuit and gives Audio Decoder, 73 Magazine, Oct. 1977, p 178-
by blind radio operator or experimenter. Length construction details. Resistors R0-R9 (values in ISO.
TRANSMITTER
OUTPUT
AUDIBLE TUNING FOR BLIND— Transmitter or
exciter output is sampled at coax line and high-
resistance voltage divider. Rectified voltage of
divider, which varies during transmitter tuning,
is fed to relaxation oscillator whose output var-
ies in pitch with voltage; low voltage gives
high-pitched tone, and high voltage gives low-
pitched tone. Input divider draws about 1 W
from 100-W transmitter; for higher power, such
as 1 kW, change lOKto about 100K. Diode feeds
about 2 V to emitter of transistor. Any audio-
type PNP transistor can be used. For NPN de-
vice, reverse diode connections. Transformer is
from 5-W transistor amplifier, with 22-ohm
high-impedance winding. Other two windings,
in series aiding, are 4 ohms each. — D. H. Atkins,
Tuning Aid for the Sightless, Ham Radio, Sept.
1976, p 83.
15 V
COMMON
TO
MONITOR
HEART MONITOR — Electrocardiograph ampli- tient is being monitored. Heart pulses are ac- types. — B. Olschewski, Unique Transformer De-
fier uses Burr-Brown BB3656 isolation amplifier curately amplified over frequency range of DC sign Shrinks Hybrid Isolation Amplifier's Size
to protect electrocardiograph from inadvertent to 3 kHz. Resistors must be carbon-composition and Cost, Electronics, July 20, 1978, p 105-112.
applications of defibrillation pulses while pa-
CHAPTER 50
Memory Circuits
Includes circuits for read, write, refresh, one-time programming, and

interfacing various types of microprocessor memories, LED display showing
PROM status, wave synthesizer, punched-card converter, and addition of
memory capacity to calculators. See also Microprocessor chapter.
LEVEL SHIFT WITH 1C— Level shifter for dy-

namic MOS random-access memory uses
SN7406 1C with two-transistor booster to con-
vert TTL levels to MOS levels. Booster can be
omitted for data input lines because they drive
such low capacitive loads in typical arrays. — M.
E. Hoff, Designing an LSI Memory System That
Outperforms Cores — Economically, Computer
Hardware (section of EDN Magazine), Jan. 15,
1971, p 6-15 (p 000110-001111).
ADDRESS
PROM WITH LED DISPLAY — Developed for use during execution of a program. Monitor 7408 gates are used to boost high-level output.
in debugging small microprocessor systems. switches can be used for data display when pro- Article gives instructions for use of display. — K.
Uses LEDs in place of diodes as OR gates of 8 gram is inserted. System was built to debug In- S. Hojberg, Light-Emitting Memory Aids pP De-
x 12-bit diode matrix memory which displays tersil IM6100 gP. Since voltage output of diode bugging, EDN Magazine, May 5, 1977, p 107.
memory-cell content when word is addressed array is too small for direct input to MOS circuit.
533
534
— )T,|—Tj— j
PROM POWER-DOWN — Conserves power in

applications when data is required from PROM
for only small percentage of system cycle. Cir-
I PROGRAM
|SEQUENCE
I
I
cuit turns PROM off automatically when not
needed, with access time increased only by 80-
ns delay of power-down circuit. PNP switch can
PROGRAMMER FOR SIGNETICS 8223— digits in circuit serving as function/units indi- be PN4313 or2N3467 pass transistor. With two
Bounceless switch U1 triggers mono MVBR U2, cator for interval timer/counter, where it forms 74S04 sections in series at input, active low se-
both operating at 7 V above ground. When Q1 simulation of abbreviations for time and fre- lection isobtained. 74S00 at input gives active
is saturated by pulse from U2, it applies 250-ms quency units. Article gives step-by-step instruc- high selection. When logic input to R2 goes low,
12.5-V programming pulse to Vcc terminal (pin tions for mistake-free operation of program- PNP switch is turned on and +5 V is applied to
16) of memory chip and opens fuse at previously mer.— J. W. Springer, Function/Units Indicator National DM74S287 256 x 4 PROM — "Memory
addressed bit to make it logic 1. Separate reg- Using LED Displays, Ham Radio, March 1977, p
58-63. Applications Handbook," National Semicon-
ulators are required for 7 V and 12.5 V. Used ductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1978, p 5-9-5-12.
with alphameric display having five 7-segment
+5 V
Q OUTPUT
MAGNETICS INC. TYPE 80505 - % DMA

CORE WITH Np = Ns = 80 TURNS OF
NO. 34 AWG INSULATED WIRE
ALL RESISTORS ± 5%, ’/. W
Q OUTPUT
SET
INPUT % 7 433
is initially stored in circuit, set or reset pulse

must have minimum width of 35 /us and mini-
LATCH MEMORY — Use of saturable trans- stay magnetically biased without voltage sup- mum separation of 65 /us.— G. E. Bloom, Sat-
formers makes memory nonvolatile and im- ply to provide reference state to which memory urable Core Transformers Harden Latch Mem-
mune to false command signals. Transformers latch returns when power is reapplied. When bit ories, Electronics, March 31, 1977, p 104-105.
MEMORY CIRCUITS 535
PROGRAM
RS BENCH
♦ 1812V
SUPPLY
READ PROGRAM 1/2 SEC.
I
MOMENTARY
PUSH BUTTON
s 68011
PROGRAMMING OF PROM— Simple circuit is

& effective for 82S23, DM8577, and 74188 PROMs.
With DM8577, circuit changes logic Is to Os.
m
With 82S23, Os are changed to Is. Set address
switches for word to be programmed, set SI to
47fl
IOW
program position, set S3 to bit to be pro-
grammed, and push S2 momentarily (less than
0.5 s). To verify that bit has been programmed,
return SI to read position and observe LED.
Supply can be three 6-V lantern batteries in se-
ries.— Ham Help, 73 Magazine, April 1977, p42.
D
REA
3,
A5
M
6 BIT D/A[PR
CONVERTER
OGRA Mo
O OUTPUT
MCI 406 L
10 OR EQUIV.
1
11 9 8 7 6 5
B„
20 18
22 21 19 17
6
7 PROGRAMMABLE ROM
MCM5003AL
a OR EQUIV
24
MC74193
OR EQUIV.
UP/DOWN COUNTER
G MC7400
A2,A3
A, MC1458CP
MC4024
WAVE SYNTHESIZER— Virtually any symmet- form, divide first 90° into 64 points, calculate gives better resolution than is possible with
rical waveform can be generated by using only sine or other function for each, multiply each MC1406L 6-bit D/A converter because 8-bit
1C counters, a read-only memory, and a mono- result by 63 to normalize, round off, convert words give 256 discrete output levels instead of
lithic D/A converter. Only first 90° of waveform each to 6-b'rt binary equivalent, take comple- 64. — K. Huehne, Programmable ROMs Offer a
need be digitized; this information can be ma- ments, and use results for programming ROM. Digital Approach to Waveform Synthesis, EDN
nipulated togenerate other 270° and repeated Article describes operation of circuit in detail. Magazine, Aug. 1, 1972. p 38-41.
as often as necessary. To digitize desired wave- Use of MC1480 8-bit monolithic D/A converter
536 MODERN ♦12
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS REFERENCE MANUAL
ADAPTIVE REFRESH — Circuit monitors system

utilization of National MM2464 64-kilobit
charge-coupled device (CCD). Refresh time and
maximum page times are determined by two
counters that obtain clock signals from temper-
ature-controlled oscillator. — "Memory Appli-
cations Handbook," National Semiconductor,
Santa Clara, CA, 1978, p 7-1-7-10.
2 OM74LS160
S4 is pushed momentarily to burn out pro- across 19-V zener for current calibration. For mA when S7 is closed. — W. J. Hosking, Finally!
grammed bit, and S5 verifies programming. S6 82S23, adjust power supplies to 10 and 21 V and A Simple PROM Burner!, 73 Magazine , Dec.
is set to PROM type, and S7 puts 12-V zener adjust 25-ohm pot to give meter reading of 65
1977, p 186-187.
MEMORY CIRCUITS
537
+ 15 TO +25V UNREGULATED
MEMORY-PROTECTING REGULATOR— Devel-

oped for MOS RAM in which accidental removal
of -5 V bias supply would allow buildup of cur-
rents flowing between +12 V and ground to
value sufficient to open up metal paths and de-
stroy memory. Protection is achieved by feed-
ing unregulated negative voltage to on-card
local regulator using LM320MP-5 to provide -5
V regulated bias for all memory chips. LM317K
is used as +12 V regulator for delivering up to
1.5 A. If -12 V gradually drops out of regulation,
Q, turns on and pulls LM317K adjust pin to
ground so output of this regulator drops to + 1 .3
V and logic circuits are undamaged. If -12 V
shorts to ground, capacitors on -5 V line hold
up for several hundred microseconds so Q, has
time to turn off +12 V regulator. Use heatsinks
for regulators. — R. Pease, Safe Supply Manages
MOS Memories, EDN Magazine, Oct. 20, 1978,
p 82 and 84.
HOLLERITH TO ASCII
CARD CONVERTER— National MM530B ROM output state because it is not recognizable shown, before being presented into common 8-
forms basis for conversion of 12-line Hollerith product term. First 7 Hollerith lines, which are
input ROM. — "Memory Databook,” National
punched-card code to 8-line ASCII. All 12 inputs ordinary decimally coded lines, are encoded to Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 11-49-
11-56.
from cards are presented to programmable 3 binary lines with additional logic elements
logic array (PLA). Invalid input produces all-high
^B
B
538
LEVEL SHIFTER FOR RAM — Uses predriver with

three transistors, followed by two-transistor
booster, to convert TTL levels to those required
by dynamic MOS random-access memory.
Booster can be omitted for data input lines be-
cause they drive such low capacitive loads in
typical arrays— M. E. Hoff, Designing an LSI
Memory System That Outperforms Cores —
Economically, Computer Hardware (section of
EDN Magazine), Jan. 15, 1971, p 6-15 (p
000110-001111).
18
ADDING FOUR FUNCTIONS— Capability of 8- - (N.C.)

digit four-function Novus 850 calculator made
23
22MM5738 DISPLAY RESET
by National Semiconductor (also marketed as —
<
Montgomery Ward P50) can be doubled by add-
ing four SPST switches and connecting as
shown. These provide additional functions of
MS TO
memory store, memory recall, percent, and con- %
stant. Switches can be put on front panel above
24
display, at corners of battery. Cutler Hammer
DM 8864
SA1BV20 SPST switches with SW53AA1 caps MR
can be squeezed in. — D. Arnett, Add Memory,
Constant and % to a 4-Function Calculator, EDN
4 ■
512-BIT PROM PROGRAMMER— Simple man- receivers show contents of output bits by driv- switch must simultaneously be set along with
ual programmer requires minimum equipment ing 5-V 20-mA lamps. Address word number is proper output switch for each used bit. — J. E.
for fusing memory links of Motorola MCM5003 selected with two BCD thumbwheel switches. Prioste, "Programming the MCM5003/5004 Pro-
or MCM5004 programmable read-only memory. Three MC4001 ROMs convert BCD code to that grammable Read Only Memory," Motorola,
One link is fused at a time. MC1489 quad line required at address inputs. Program/verify Phoenix, AZ, 1974. AN-550, p 4.
MEMORY CIRCUITS 539
♦ 12 5 V D C
PROM PROGRAMMER — Can be used to blow

links one by one, as required, on 8223 pro-
grammable read-only memory and on 82S23
Schottky version. Article covers construction,
pretesting, and operation. — R. M. Stevenson,
An 82S23 PROM Programmer!, 73 Magazine,
June 1977, p 82-83.
♦17V
CLOCK DRIVER — Circuit uses National

DS0026CN monolithic clock driver as direct-
TO ADDRESS
coupled driver for address or precharge lines on
LINES ON
MM1 103 RAM at frequencies above 1 MHz. Can MEMORY
be driven by standard TTL gates and flip- SYSTEM
flops. — "Memory Databook," National Semi-
conductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 11-27-11-
36.
To prevent loss of memory data when RAM is mounted directly on memory board. Data-pro- livan, On-Board Backup Supply Protects Vola-
removed from microprocessor control system tection circuit senses loss of 5.7-V main supply tile RAM Data, EDN Magazine, April 5, 1978, p
during system design or maintenance, three and disables STR, CE, and WE lines of RAM to 120 and 122.
+ 16 V
CONNECT DIODES
IN SERIES TO
LOW-CAPACITANCE DRIVER FOR RAM— Suit-

MEMORY SAVER — Standby battery takes over they are switched on by removal of bias. Cur- able for data input lines of memory system op-
automatically during power failure to prevent rent is then supplied by battery. Output should erating from 16-V supply with memory input
memory loss. Use any rechargeable battery that be loaded with resistor drawing about half of logic swing of 16 V. Used with Motorola 1103
can handle load. Connect one LM340-5 regula- trickle-charge current, so battery has small con- dynamic RAM for which transition times of data
tor in circuit for each 1 .2 A of load current drawn tinuous current flow and stays charged. — C. R. input signals should be 20 ns to give maximum
by circuits to be protected. In normal operation, Carpenter, Protect Your Memory Against Power memory speed. Suitable for maximum capaci-
output diodes are biased off by slightly higher Failure, Kilobaud, March 1978, p 73. tances per line as high as 20 pF. — D. Brunner,
voltage from computer. During power failure. "A MECL 10,000 Main Frame Memory System
Employing Dynamic MOS RAMs," Motorola,

Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-583, p 13.
Memory Storage
1
HIGH-SPEED FIFO — Design is based on Moto- taneous read and write. Reset is applied initially ister outputs are read sequentially in same
rola MC10143 register file, with each 1C holding to drive both address counters to empty state. order that data was entered (first-in first-out). —
8 words by 2 bits. Circuit includes write and read To enter data, write clock input is enabled with B. Blood, "A High Speed FIFO Memory Using
enable inputs for cascading two register file negative-going pulse. Write addressing is con- the MECL MCI 0143 Register File," Motorola,
packages to memory depth of 16 words. Full trolled by MC10178 binary counter. Used for Phoenix, AZ, 1974, AN-730, p 5.
master-slave flip-flop operation allows simul- stack registers of computing systems when reg-
MEMORY CIRCUITS 541
390H PROGRAM
PUSH TO
PROGRAM
mss
.r*
12 5VDC
i 5 V
LM
IN
@ 300mA 309K
" lO/i F
1
12-V PROGRAMMER FOR PROM— Circuit in-

cludes regulator for operation from 12-V auto
storage battery. Developed to use 8223 32-word
by 8-bit memory as CW identifier. All outputs of
memory are initially at logic 0, so only logic Is
need to be programmed. After programming a
1, LED comes on to confirm it when S7 is
switched to VERIFY. Do not hold S8 down
longer than 1 s. — G. W. Kufchak, The PROM
Zapper, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1976, p 112.
BATTERY BACKUP — Delivers 2.3 V to micropro-

cessor memory automatically in event of supply
failure, to prevent loss of data. On standby, bat-
teries receive charge of about 20 mA through R3
and Q,. When power supply fails, Q, isolates it
from load and Qz conducts to provide change-
over to battery power. Standby switch (op-
tional) permits defeating battery backup. — R.
N. Bennett, 2.4-V Battery Backup Protects Mi-
croprocessor Memory, Electronics, Feb. 3,
1977, p 109; reprinted in "Circuits for Electron-

ics Engineers," Electronics, 1977, p 304.
INITIALIZING CMOS STORAGE— Simple RC cir- ply line is directly connected, C should be 1000
cuit initializes all storage elements (flip-flops, to 1500 pF. Article also shows how to get set or
registers, and counters) of CMOS system to all reset function after initialization by using pair
1 s (switch at left) or all 0s (switch at right) when of CD4016A or CD4066A transmission gates. —
power supply is turned on. For most CMOS stor- O. Bismarck, A Simple Method for Initializing
age elements, 30 pF for C ensures setting or re- CMOS Storage Elements, EDN Magazine, Feb.
setting when power is applied by closing 20, 1974, p 83.
switch. If power supply is turned on while sup-
X 1 00 AC LINEAR PHASE DIFFERENTIATOR

PREAMPLIFIER LOW PASS F ILTER
DISK-FILE DECODER — Provides precondition- ter and second 592 serving as low-noise differ- phase-encoded data. — "Signetics Analog Data
ing of readback data from disk or drum files by entiator/amplifier. Mono provides required out- Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p
using NE592 video amplifier coupled to 8T20 put pulses at zero-crossing points of 708-710.
bidirectional mono MVBR through low-pass fil- differentiator. Designed for reading 5-MHz
542
PROGRAMMER FOR SCIENTIFIC CALCULA-

TOR— National MM5766 dynamic key sequence
programmer can be added to MM5758 scientific
calculator chip to provide learn-mode pro-
grammability. Circuit memorizes any combi-
nation of key entries up to 102 characters while
in load mode, then automatically plays back
programmed sequence as often as desired in
run mode. Halt key programs variable data
entry points at which control is temporarily re-
turned to operator in run mode. — "MOS/LSI Da-
CA, 1977, p 8-76-8-79.
ON OFF
SWITCH
543
MEMORY CIRCUITS
-< 15
-< 22
— < 1^
-<13
-< 16
-< 18
-<'3
-< '9
~< 2°
position requiring logic 0 by process equivalent ming procedure in detail. Software for gener-
PROM PROGRAMMER— Developed specifically to blowing fusible link on PROM chip. Process ating critical timing and control signals with
for programming Harris 7641-5 and 7681-5 is not reversible, so one erTor ruins PROM. Cir- microprocessor is also given. — T. Hayek, Sim-
PROMs, which come with logic 1 in all bit po- cuit uses two regulator ICs (IC3 and IC4) and two pie and Low-Cost PROM Programmer, Kilo-
sitions. Programmer is used to burn bit at each TTL gates (IC1 and IC2). Article gives program- baud, July 1978, p 94-96 and 98-99.
CHAPTER 51
Microprocessor Circuits
Includes handshaking, time-logging, power-failure alarm, motor control, light
pen, interface, and troubleshooting circuits for microcomputers,
minicomputers, and computers as well as for microprocessors. See also Clock
Signal, Game, Keyboard, and Programmable chapters.
PROGRAMMED BIT RATES— Choice of 37 dif- terface adapter (PIA) and two asynchronous ample of initialization program. — G. Nash, Mi-
ferent bit rates inrangefrom75to1 800 b/s, each communication interface adapters (ACIA) by croprocessor Software Programs Bit-Rate Gen-
multiplied by 1, 8, 16, or 64, can be obtained appropriate programming of Motorola MC6800 erator, EDN Magazine, Aug. 20, 1977, p 134, 136,
and 137.
from Motorola MC1441 bit-rate generator, two microprocessor used in data communication
8-channel data selectors, half of peripheral in- system. Article gives operating details and ex-
544
545
MICROPROCESSOR CIRCUITS
COMPUTER
DATA BUS
TO OTHER
OUTPUT LATCHES
MOVING-LIGHT DISPLAY— Computer-con- is addressed for output. Decoded WRITE signal LEDs. Software is written to turn on LEDs in de-
trolled blinking of LEDs arranged in circle or latches data presented at bus receivers. Inter- sired sequence and provide desired variable de-
other pattern gives illusion of motion. One sec- face can be extended to many registers in
lays between blinks. — C. Helmers, There's More
tion of quad 7475 latch is assigned to each of groups of eight, limited only by input/output to Blinking Lights than Meets the Eye, BYTE,
several output ports of microprocessor. Decod- addressing capability and power available for Jan. 1976, p 52-54.
ing logic of output port determines when latch
realistic lunar lander simulation display. Throt- drive voltage required by DC motor for motion output then becomes 12 V, and portion of this
tle signal and altitude signal serve as inputs to to occur. Output of difference amplifier IC1 goes (about 2 V) drives motor into operating range.
microprocessor. Feedback position-measuring to summing amplifier IC4 as one component of IC5 is high-power opamp delivering 1 A at 12
pot is geared to 12-VDC motor so full travel of final motor voltage. Comparators IC2 and IC3 V. — L. Sweer, T. Dwyer, and M. Critchfield, Con-
pot shaft occurs while lunar module traverses sense when difference voltage is larger than trolling Small DC Motors with Analog Signals,
full altitude range. Circuit provides minimum small positive voltage set by R13 or smaller than BYTE, Aug. 1977, p 18-20, 22, and 24.
K ALARM SUPPLY
30V MAX
FAIL-SAFE ALARM — Circuit monitors status of

microprocessor system and energizes lamp or
other alarm indicator to indicate when CPU
halts or power is lost. Input is TTL-compatible,
and output can drive loads up to 130 mA at 30
V. — J. Elias, Alarm Driver Is Fail-Safe, EDN Mag-
azine, May 20, 1975, p 76.
UPPERCASE/LOWERCASE DRIVE FOR TV-

Standard Microsystems CG5004 alphameric
data-to-video converter provides both upper-
case and lowercase characters and all numerals
in serial video form for display as 7 x 9 character
matrix on TV screen under microprocessor con-
trol. 1C requires only single +5 V supply. Wink-
ing underline cursor is produced automatically
by cursor oscillator. Internal shift register is part
of 1C. Raw video requires predistorting for clar-
k-H
tA\ - NORMALIZED DIGITAL INPUT
OSCILLATOR CONTROL — Digital inputs from mable current source that alternately charges supply voltage. Design equations are given. —
microprocessor to Precision Monolithics DAC- and discharges capacitor between precisely
D. Soderquist, "Exponential Digitally Con-
76CX 8-bit companding D/A converter provide controlled upper and lower limits. Since both
trolled Oscillator Using DAC-76," Precision
8159:1 frequency range for AF oscillator, from limits are derived by dividing power supply volt- Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, AN-20, p 1.
2.5 to 20,000 Hz. DAC functions as program- ages, frequency is independent of changes in
547
HIGH
ORDER
ADDRESS
LINES
ADDRESS STATE ANALYZER— Dynamic fluc-

tuations of 16-bit memory address bus are dis-
played on CRO for troubleshooting. Two
MC1408 8-bit DACs drive inputs of CRO with
analog equivalents of eight high-order and
eight low-order address lines. Display serves as
visual picture of computer in action, in which
accessing of unexpected memory locations is
instantly visible. Incoming address lines can be
connected to MC1408S in any order. Article cov-
ers evaluation of scope patterns. — S. Ciarcia, A
Penny Pinching Address State Analyzer, BYTE,
LOW
Feb. 1978, p 6, 8, 10, and 12.
ORDE R
ADDRESS
LINES
7404 S
J4
PIN 9 _2 13.
PIN 6
PAGE I
J 10 PAGE
PIN l 2
CURSOR CONTROL — Full software cursor con-
trol permits writing anywhere on screen with- J 10 PIN 2
out restrictive top-to-bottom/left-to-right for- Three 7445 BCD-to-decimal decoders operate in eight outputs will go low. — R. Wright, Utilize
mat. System uses 18 of possible 32 ASCII 3-line-to-8-line mode wherein pin 12 becomes ASCII Control Codes!, Kilobaud, Oct. 1977, p
control codes in TV II system having 8K BASIC. chip enable. When pin 12 goes low, one of the 80-83.
548
PICTURE-DRAWING LIGHT PEN— Circuit im-

proves ability to draw pictures on display
screen with light pen by using short data lock-
out period to avoid smearing. Value of R1 de-
pends on light pen; use 1 megohm for Texas In-
struments H-35. One-shot No. 1 produces
constant-amplitude 200-ns pulse for storing 1 or
0 bit in 2102 memory of CRO graphics interface.
One-shot No. 2 delays generation of another
write command 0.25 s, giving operator time to
withdraw or move pen before double dot is
formed. R4 and Cl control length of writepulse,
while R5 and C2 control wait time. — S. S.
Loomis, Let There Be Light Pens, BYTE, Jan.
1976, p 26-30.
OUTPUT
/DATA
T STARTPUT OUT-
RECEIVER AND ■
RESET
HANDSHAKING — Circuit sets up operating con- any 8-bit computer. IC4 is standard UART such gives typical software routines for parallel I/O
nection between computer and UART (univer- as Signetics 2536, General Instruments AY 5 handshaking. Technique permits running UART
sal asynchronous receiver-transmitter). Eighth 1012, Texas Instruments TMS 6011, or Ameri- at any desired clock speed, as long as all clocks
bits of I/O ports indicate when data has been can Microsystems S1883. Receiver of UART has in system are matched. — T. McGahee, Save
successfully transmitted and system is ready to seven data lines connected to input port. Article Software: Use a UART for Serial 10, BYTE, Dec.
transmit more information. Can be adapted to covers handshaking operation in detail and
1977, p 164-166.
549
C 2 pF
47
R3
FROM MICROPROCESSOR OUTPUT LATCH
R4
1K
»— w\ —
2K -15
-15 V
TO MICROPROCESSOR
NPUT PORT
LM30IA LM 311
-I5V
CURRENT TO VOLTAGE ANALOG COMPARATOR
CONVERSION
digital word, applying it to DAC, and comparing should now be near 0 V. Apply all Is to DAC and
MCI408L-8
DIGITAL TO ANALOG analog output of DAC to analog input to be con- adjust output of LM301 A to 5.00 V with R4. Con-
CONVERTER verted. Results of comparison determine next version routines implementing these functions
digital word to be generated for DAC by micro- are given for Motorola MC6800 and Intel 8008
ANALOG/DIGITAL CONVERSION— Circuit can processor. LM301A changes 0-2 mA output of microprocessors. — R. Frank, Microprocessor
be used for either ramp or successive-approxi- DAC into 0-5 V for LM311 comparator. To cali- Based Analog/Digital Conversion, BYTE, May
mation method of converting analog input to brate, apply all Os to DAC; pin 6 of LM301A
1976, p 70-73.
AUTORANGING FOR DATA ACQUISITION— differential multiplexers for 16 channels and in- random events. With known input signal levels,
Circuit accepts up to 16 channels of analog instrumentation opamp. MN2020 programmable- required gain information can be stored in mi-
formation and provides full-scale input ranges gain amplifier provides choice of eight gains croprocessor memory for use in place of auto-
from ±78 mV to ±10 V when used with 6800
ranging from 1 to 128 in binary progression. Au- ranging.— R. Duris and J. Munn, PGA's Give
CPU. Resolution is 0.01%. MN7130 multiplexed toranging operation of data acquisition system Your DAS Designs Autoranging, Wide Dynamic
sample-and-hold amplifier includes eight full- allows channel-sampling plans that depend on Range, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1978,p 137-141.
I 0 MHi
CLOCK
ASCII
CHARACTERS
{VIDEO DATA)
FROM DISPLAY
MEMORY
TAP
UPSTREAM
FROM
ROW COMMANDS
INSTRUCTION
DECODER
UART INTERFACE— Uses TMS-6011 UART to UPPERCASE DRIVE FOR TV GRAPHICS— Alpha-
convert parallel data into serial data and back meric data-to-video converter using 2513 char-
again for Altair 8800 microprocessor. UART acter generator accepts ASCII words from mi-
mates directly to computer bus, because all out- croprocessor memory and three line commands
puts from UART are three-state buffers with from instruction decoder. Five dots are output-
separate enable lines provided for status bits ted simultaneously, corresponding to one row
and 8 bits of parallel output. Pin 22 is high when on 5 x 7 dot-matrix character. 7416S eight-input
UART can accept another character for conver- one-output shift register converts dots into se-
sion. Pin 18 must be pulsed low to reset pin 19 rial output video. Input repeats to generate all
so it can signal receipt of another character. seven dot rows in row of characters. Shift reg-
Connections to pins 35-39 depend on I/O de- ister is driven by high-frequency timing circuit
vices used, as covered in article. — W. T. Walters, that delivers LOAD pulse once each micro-
Build a Universal I/O Board, Kilobaud, Oct. 1977, second along with CLOCK output running con-
tinuously at desired dot rate. Optional cursor
p 102-108.
uses 4584 5-Hz oscillator for cursor winking
rate. If ASCII input bit 8 is high, cursor input
goes high and output is white line on leads 01
through 05. Right diode mades this line blink,
while left diode allows winking cursors only
during valid character times.— D. Lancaster.
TVT Hardware Design. Kilobaud, Jan. 1978, p
64-68.
0>B7 DATA READY
* MYLAR OR
POLYCARBONATE
RECEIVER FOR REMOTE TERMINAL— National
DM8820 receiver at computer location is con-
20
nected by twisted-pair line to remote terminal.
DM8820 RECEIVER (SND5I82)
NE555 oscillator is set at 1760 Hz within 1% 6
with aid of frequency counter, to match corre- OUTPUT FROM
STROBE
sponding clock in remote terminal. Serial bits +
5 RESPONSE
JT
-
coming over line are converted to parallel bits SITE
>C<XXX>COC;.' REMOTE
for computer by AY-5-1013 UART. Article gives IC2 rt
circuit for remote terminal and covers operation DM8820 J£
t
OI^F
in detail. — S. Ciarcia, Come Upstairs and Be Re-
spectable, BYTE, May 1977, p 50-54. ^lOOpF
MICROPROCESSOR CIRCUITS 551
5 W
EIA SERIAL
DATA OUT
TTL SERIAL
DATA OUT MALFUNCTION ALARM— Motorola MOC3011

16 optoisolator serves as interface between CMOS
4A iy
3A 4A
logic of microprocessor and 5-W 1 1 5-VAC lamp.
IB
IA 15
Input logic is connected to energize infrared
IC2
21CA 3 LED of optoisolator by providing up to 50 mA.
2 A 3A
S 74 1 3Y 74157
4B
S
Once triggered, indicator lamp remains on until
IB 57 current drops below holding value of about 100
2B 3B 4 B2Y
4Y 3B
4 Y
fiA. — P. O'Neil, "Applications of the MOC3011
2Y 2B Triac
780, pDriver,"
2. Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1978, AN-
3Y
IY IA
SERIAL ASCII GENERATOR — Provides choice of

two different words in standard serial ASCII
asynchronous data format for troubleshooting
and testing code converters and other com-
puter peripherals. S19 gives choice of four data
output patterns. R gives logic high for all 8 bits.
A gives pattern determined by settings of SI-
S8. B gives pattern determined by settings of
S9-S1 6. A/B alternates words A and B. S20 gives
choice of three different output modes. Mode B
generates words 1 bit at a time. Mode W pro-
duces single word at rate of 110 bauds. ModeC
produces continuous output of selected word
pattern, for testing teleprinters and other out-
put devices. Article covers construction and op-
eration of circuit. 1C power (-1-5 V) and ground
pins are: 74150—24 and 12; 74157, 74161, and
74265—16 and 8; 555—8 and 1; 7474 and
7400 — 14 and 7. — R. J. Finger, Build a Serial
ASCII Word Generator, BYTE, May 1976, p 50-
53.
+ 5V
Consists of AY-5-1013 UART attached to key- to computer system because terminal has own rate. IC6 is 5-V National DM8830 differential line
board, with twisted-pair cable running to re- power supply. Transmission is in one direction driver or equivalent. Pin 14 of IC6 goes to +5 V
ceiver unit at computer location. Coaxial exten- only. NE555 oscillator is set at 1760 Hz ± 1% and pin 7 to ground. — S. Ciarcia, Come Upstairs
sion cable for monitor is only other connection with aid of frequency counter, for 1 1 0-b/s serial and Be Respectable, BYTE, May 1977, p 50-54.
1k£2
47pF
4-MHz NAND-GATE OSCILLATOR SYNCHRO-
NIZES TWO MPUs — Low-cost NAND-gate sec-
tions A and B form low-cost oscillator for driv-
ing two Motorola MC6802 microprocessors.
47pF NAND gates C and D function as phase-locked
loop, with D ensuring that phases of enable out-
puts are 180° apart. Small drifts in oscillator fre-
quency do not affect synchronization. Circuit
allows each MPU to operate during half-cycle
that other MPU has disabled, to provide addi-
tional computing power of two microproces-
sors while maintaining system costs of one data
bus. — J. Farrell, "Synchronizing Two Motorola
MC6802s on One Bus," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
1978, AN-783.
♦ 5V
— — I mS
APPROX
LIGHT PEN WITH INTERFACE— Any high-qual-
V
GND
ity photodiode mounted in discarded housing
of marking pen serves as pickup for holding
against screen of video display. If diode is
mounted in plastic lens, flatten end of lens with PHOTO SHIELDED
AND
monF J CABLE
' PLUG/JACK +5V(FROM VDM-|)
emery cloth to give narrower angle of accep-
tance. Developed for use with VDM-1 display
TO SINGLE BIT
terminal. Use CRO to monitor output as pen is
COMPUTER INPUT
moved across screen. Dark area on screen gives
5-VDC level, and white area gives dips. Article
covers use in program design, editing memory
dumps, and arranging complex displays. — J.
Webster and J. Young, Add a $3 Light Pen to
Your Video Display, BYTE, Feb. 1978, p 52, 54,
56, and 58.
POT INTERFACE — Circuit converts resistance of

pot setting to frequency with NE555 timer IC1.
Frequency is measured under direct control of
microprocessor program, using 8-bit counter
with CPU clock as time base. Processor is pro-
grammed to clear counter, turn on counter, wait
2 ms, turn off counter, and read count. Result is
number of cycles in 2-ms period, ranging from
1 to about 240. Relationship of frequency to con-
trol position is accurate enough for game con-
trol. R1 , R2, R3, and Cl are chosen so frequency
varies from about 0.75 to 122 kHz as R1 is varied
from 100K to 0. Use audio-taper pot to improve
conversion linearity. Article gives subroutines
for Motorola 6800 and Intel 8080 microproces-
sors.— C. Helmers, Getting Inputs from Joy-
sticks and Slide Pots, BYTE, Feb. 1976, p 86-88.
WRITE CLOCK
FROM SYSTEM TO SYSTEM
FROM SYSTEM
BUS INTERFACE BUS INTERFACE
OUTPUT LOGIC
OUTPUT SIDE INPUT SIDE
"POT IN" OUTPUT "POT IN ' INPUT
SINGLE
SWITCH
STEP
R I
270K
RUN
SLOW STEPPER — Addition of slow-stepping

TERMINAL INTERFACE — Developed for use be- switch position to single-step circuit of micro-
tween computer terminal and microprocessor processor eliminates need for pushing single-
development board. Provides interface be- step switch repeatedly while executing endless
tween teleprinter terminal using EIA RS-232C loop program and watching address and data
standard and input of microcomputer (upper lights to see where program or hardware fails
diagram) and interface between computer and during debugging run. Circuit uses 74123 mono
teleprinter using 20-mA current-loop standard MVBR to give 1.5-ms pulses on single step and
for actuating printout. Logic 1 is -3 to -9 V or 1 50-ms on slow step. — H. R. Bendrot, The Slow-
less, and logic 0 is +3 to +9 V or more. — P. Sni- Stepping Debugger, Kilobaud, April 1977, p 60.
gier. Constructing a Low-Cost Terminal Inter-
face, EDN Magazine, June 5, 1977, p 205-206.
LIGHT PEN — Photocell in tip of light pen senses

when dot is written on screen at its location by
becoming conductive and biasing Q1 so it feeds
short pulse through Cl to base of 02. If pulse is
greater than 0.6 V, Q2 is driven into saturation
and output of pen drops to 0.3 V. Output line
goes to pin 5 of digital display unit (DDU), which
writes 1 or 0 (dot or no dot) on screen at instant
that electron beam of CRT terminal reaches po-
-12
sition ofpen. Sensitivity control can be adjusted
so illuminated dot just ahead of pen can be used
to create new dot in adjacent dark space. If
screen is dark all around pen, footswitch-con-
trolled auxiliary circuit can be used to override
FROM DDU CARO
Z-axis control and flood screen with light mo-
mentarily by feeding logic 1 to Z input. This Z OUTPUT
mode can be used for creating or correcting V
graphics. — S. S. Loomis, Let There Be Light

Pens, BYTE, Jan. 1976, p 26-30.
+ 5V
DIGITIZING POT POSITION— Converts position

of pot arm into digital value, using NE555 timer
and several bytes of program in 8008 or 8080
microprocessor having 23- gs clock. NE555 is
triggered at pin 2 by OUT TRIGGER instruction.
Program monitors output at pin 3 in loop that
increments B register. When NE555 times out,
B,0 program exits from subroutine and B register
POTPOS: contains digital representation of pot
MVI
OUT TRIGGER position. — J. M. Schulein, Pot Position Digitiz-
INR B ing Idea, BYTE, March 1976, p 79.
CONT:
IN STATUS
ANA A
JM
CONT
RET
SOFTWARE MONITOR — Detects large percent-

age of random faults, such as overflow condi-
tions. Based on fact that part of program passes
TO
through reentry on predictable repeat basis. For
each reentry, pulse is fed from CPU to input of
♦5
74LS123 retriggerable mono MVBR. On each
CPU RESET
LOGIC pass through program, programmer sets and
then resets MVBR. Period of mono is made
longer than longest normal time between pro-
grammed pulse outputs, to prevent false
alarms. Any system fault that makes program
TO FAULT
INDICATOR
repeat instructions endlessly or lose control will
(HI = FAULT)
give false indication.— D. Brickner, Get a Watch-
dog to Monitor Those Real-Time Operations,
Kilobaud, April 1978, p 118-119.
H SYNC
V SYNC
FROM
INSTRUCTION (DEN)
FROM
DECODER INSTRUCTION
DECODER
>RI
POSITION CONTROL FOR GRAPHICS— Six induced by microprocessor through alphameric decoder of microprocessor. — D. Lancaster, TVT
verters serve for moving entire character dis- data-to-video converter. Circuit requires contin- Hardware Design, Kilobaud, Jan. 1978, p 64-68.
play to any position on TV screen. Display is pro- uous feed of H and V signals from instruction
15
12 > 1500
IC2 10 R3
19
LSB ICI 1 MC 1408
74100 19 1
74100
TO SCOPE
102
518 1 2 ID2 IQ2 5 A5
IDI 101 IDI 101 A8 10
ID2 103 4 1 103 ID3 4 II HOR INPUT
18 A7
_22_ ID3 1 22
15
16 IC3 REF
.DO 103 17 A6
A2
OUTPUT ID4 104 20 1 20 9 A3 -V REF
17 ID4 104
PORT 201
202 e in 2DI 8 8 A4
9 1 9 7
2D2
2DI 2D2 202
2D3
2D4 204
C2
203 1 21 2Q4
2QI 6 3300
2D3 2Q3
1 a A I
i 2D4
1 Cl C2 00
68
I
12 COMP APPROX
V OUT -V
Cl
0 T0-4V
A8
74100
IC4 19 MC 1408
A7
5 A6 TO SCOPE
IDI
ID2 101
IQ2
4 11 12 A5 10 VERT INPUT
ID3 103 10 R7
•1 98
ID4 104 1C 5 ■ +VR EF
18
20 C2
17
8 A2 +5 V
201 A4
A3 -V F' 16 pF
9 l 7
22D2
DI 202 1 6 16
2D3 203 3300 (-7.1)
2Q4 1 5 AI tR6 Power
R4 2D4 Ground
C2 74100
COMP Type
470 IC6 12
nR2
74100 13
7404 Cl > 6800 IC2
ICI 7 _
i_r rh
C6 IC3 24 7 _
MC1408L7
7404 2 3
74100or 24
— 1 MC1408L8 13
IC4
o- IC6
>470 IC5 24 7
7404 MC1408L7
T_T
5 IC6 2 3
MC1408L8
X"
£R5 7404
14 7
D—
GRAPHICS INTERFACE — Used between com- outputting two binary words to pair of DACs often than other points. Article gives listing for
or
puter and ordinary CRO to create images with giving voltages proportional to numerical val- Intel 8080 graphics drive program. Program pro-
array of 512 x 512 dots stored in computer ues of words. Dot pattern is repeated many vides for interrupts once per scan to give key-
memory. Location of each dot is specified by times per second to give steady nonflickering board-controlled drawing mode. — P. Nelson,
two voltages, for application to V and H inputs image. Dot brightness can be increased by stor- Build the Beer Budget Graphics Interface, BYTE,
of CRO. Computer provides voltage values by ing in several locations so it is refreshed more Nov. 1976, p 26-29.
-
D>
555
+ 5V
VR I
POWER TRANSISTOR
(OR POWER DARLING-

TON) IN MEAT SINK
DC CONTROL BY TTL I/O — Output of micropro-

cessor drives LED of photocoupler through one
TV AS DISPLAY TERMINAL — Simple switch in- section of 7414 hex Schmitt-trigger-input in-
serted inordinary TV receiver serves for feeding verter. Phototransistor switches power transis-
video output of microprocessor directly into tor or power Darlington on and off for control
video amplifier of set, to give low-cost display of direct current through load. With transistor
terminal. TV must have transformer-type having current gain of 30 and 20-mA control cur-
power supply. Excellent set for monitor use is rent, load current can be 500 mA. With power
12-inch Hitachi model P-04, having Hitachi SX Darlington having higher current gain,
chassis. This set has very wide bandwidth, giv- load can be several amperes. Since power de-
ing sharp display with line widths up to 80 char- vice is either off or saturated, heatsink can be
acters.— G. Runyan, The Great TV to CRT Mon- small. — M. Boyd, Interfacing Tips, Kilobaud,
itor Conversion, Kilobaud, July 1977, p 30-31. Feb. 1978, p 72-74.
LOGGING EXACT TIME — Used in microcom- rupt request every 16.67 ms. Requires use of program. Article diagrams software routine re-
puter applications requiring recording of exact software routine that acknowledges interrupt, quired.— Real-Time Software Keeps Program
time of each event by data-logging printer. Uses increments counter in known location to serve Segments on Schedule, EDN Magazine, Nov.
555 timer and 7474 D flip-flop to produce inter- as time-of-day clock, and resumes interrupted 20, 1976, p 277-283.
system that requires human intervention under Negative-going pulse on pin 2 triggers mono D1 and D2 for trigger input of IC2. Different
certain conditions, to alert operator who may on. If microprocessor circuit creates pulse tones are achieved by using IC1A to change
be watching machinery rather than display. rather than level change, input should go to pin input voltage to pin 5 of tone generator IC3. Op-
When input line goes high, device emits 1-s 2. Tone frequency is set by C5, R13, and R14 of tional electrolytic capacitor across R24 will in-
beep that means stop. When input goes low, IC3. Trigger uses IC1A as inverting opamp and crease volume. — C. F. Douds, Audible Inter-
1-s lower-frequency boop sounds to indicate IC1B as noninverting opamp. Trigger outputs rupts for Humans, BYTE, Feb. 1977, p 54 and 58.
1 kfi
47pF
47pF
8 BITS CONTROL 128 BITS — Combination of

74154 demultiplexer and 16 NE591 latches per-
SYNCHRONIZING TWO MICROPROCES- puting power of two MPUs with system cost of mits control of 128 single-bit outputs with stan-
SORS— 4-MHz oscillator using 74LS00 quad one data bus. No time is sacrificed since half- dard 8-bit parallel output of microprocessor.
two-input NAND gates serves in place of crystal cycle used would normally be dead time on Latches are driven from three low-order bits of
source of individual MC6802 microprocessors bus. — J. Farrell, "Synchronizing Two Motorola microprocessor. Next four higher bits drive
to ensure synchronizing so one microprocessor MC6802s on One Bus," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 74154 which in turn drives chip-enable inputs of
operates during half-cycle when other micro- 1978, AN-783. NE591s. Eighth bit of microprocessor drives
processor isdisabled. Arrangement gives com- data inputs of all latches and sets addressed bits
appropriately.— R. D. Grappel, Control 128 Bits
with an 8-Bit /< C Port, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5,
1978, p 70 and 72.
ASCII DATA FROM

MICROPROCESSOR
07 06 D5 D4 D3 02 Dl DO
PARALLEL-TO-SERIAL CONVERTER— Multi- output of multiplexer. 1 10-Hz clock gives trans- without using universal asynchronous receiver-
plexer IC2 selects formatting and data bits ac- fer rate of 10 characters per second. Provides transmitter.— G. C. Jewell, How to Drive a
cording to state of IC1. IC3 is output latch. standard asynchronous format of 1 start bit, 8 Teletype Without a UART, BYTE, Jan, 1977, p
Teletypewriter current loop is driven by Q1 from data bits, and 2 stop bits for teletypewriter 32.
CALIBRATING MARK/SPACE VCO— Simple

buffer/counter provides accurate calibration of
FSK circuit used in cassette interface of 8080
microprocessor to generate mark and space fre-
quencies. Audio FSK waveform is squared and
divided down in 7493 4-bit counter. Resulting
pulses are fed to input port of microprocessor
for software pulse counting. Software sets VCO
frequency, waits until pulse starts, counts each
pulse occurrence, and displays resultant count.
Each 7493 count is 29 Hz or 14.5 gs, so 371
counts correspond to 2975 Hz for space. Mark
frequency of 2125 Hz gives pulses separated by
519 counts. — D. R. Bourdeau, Cassette Interface
First Aid, Kilobaud, July 1977, p 49.
AC CONTROL BY TTL I/O — Output of micropro-

cessor drives LED of photocoupler through one
section of 7414 hex Schmitt-trigger-input in-
NOTE: UNUSED INPUTS OF 74C107
MUST BE TIED TO Vcc OR GND verter. Output of phototransistor controls SCR
connected across full-wave diode bridge. Cur-
12 BITS ON 8-BIT BUS — Arrangement shown rent flow through bridgeand SCR turns on triac,
speeds reading of 12 bits of data onto 8-bit mi- allowing alternating current to flow through
croprocessor bus by simplifying checking pro- load. Choose triac rated for handling required
cedure. Output of 74C107 flip-flop becomes load current. — M. Boyd, Interfacing Tips, Kilo-
DATA INVALID bit and is placed on bus during baud, Feb. 1978, p 72-74.
second read cycle. Simultaneously, circuit pulls
3 remaining bits (D„-D6) low through use of
spare 8T97 gates. Article gives simplified 8080
subroutine required. — D W. Taylor, Speed-
Read 12 Bits onto an 8-Bit Bus, EDN Magazine,
Sept. 5, 1978, p 70.
AC/DC CONTROL WITH SCR— Decoder output

of microprocessor feeds 555 timer driving LED
that is mounted in light shield with cadmium
sulfide photocell. Combination serves as opto-
coupler for triggering gate of SCR to energize
load for short time interval determined by value
of resistor and capacitor used. Serves to control
small DC motor such as is used to raise or lower
transmitter power in small increments. — R.
Wright, Utilize ASCII Control Codes!, Kilobaud,
Oct. 1977, p 80-83.
CHAPTER 52
Modulator Circuits
Covers circuits that vary amplitude or some other characteristic of carrier
signal or pulse train in accordance with information contained in modulating
signal. Includes PCM, PDM, PPM, duty-cycle, and other types of pulse
modulators, light-beam modulators, delta modulators, and various types of
AM, SSB, and suppressed-carrier modulators. See also Frequency Modulation,
Transceiver, and Transmitter chapters.
PULSE-RATIO MODULATOR— LM1 11 compar-

ator serves with single transistor to provide
pulse-train output whose average value is pro-
portional to input voltage. Frequency of output
is relatively constant but pulse width varies.
Pulse-ratio accuracy is 0.1%. Circuit can be used
to drive power stage of high-efficiency switch-
ing amplifier, or as pulse-width/pulse-height
multiplier. Article tells how circuit works. — R.
C. Dobkin, Comparators Can Do More than Just
DOUBLE-SIDEBAND AM — Connection shown

for multiplier section of Exar XR-S200 PLL 1C
gives double-sideband AM output. X-offset ad-
justment for modulation input sets carrier out-
put level, and Y-offset adjustment of carrier
input controls symmetry of output waveform.
SINGLE-SUPPLY AM— Motorola MCI 545 gated nals must be AC coupled to prevent application Modulation input can also be used as linear au-
video amplifier is connected as amplitude mod- of excessive common-mode voltage to 1C. — tomatic gain control (AGC) for controlling am-
ulator operating from single supply. Artificial "Gated Video Amplifier Applications — the plification with respect to carrier input
ground is established for 1C at half of supply MC1545," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1976, AN-491, signals. — "Phase-Locked Loop Data Book,"
voltage by 5K resistors R1, which should draw Exar Integrated Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978,
much more than bias current of 15 gA. All sig-
558 P 15.
p 9—16.
MODULATOR CIRCUITS 559
LIGHT-BEAM MODULATOR — Intensity of light nals are mixed by summing amplifier IC2 which PULSE-DURATION MODULATOR USES
beam is modulated by rotating Polaroid vane drives noninverting power amplifier consisting TIMER — Half of Exar XR-2556 dual timer is con-
driven by small motor. Since amplitude is not of 741 opamp driving two OC28 power transis- nected to operate in monostable mode, for trig-
constant with change in frequency between 10 tors connected in closed feedback loop having gering with continuous pulse train. Output
and 100 Hz, compensation is provided by sam- gain of 5. Power amplifier drives pen motor of pulses are generated at same rate as input, with
pling modulated beam with silicon photodiode modulator. — R. F. Cartwright, Constant Ampli- pulse duration determined by R, and C,. Supply
that is linearized by 1C,. Input and feedback sig- tude Light Modulator, Wireless World, Sept. voltage is 4.5-16 V. — "Timer Data Book," Exar
1976, p 73.
Integrated Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 23-
30.
VOLTAGE TO PULSE WIDTH— Constant-cur-

rent source Q2 produces linear timing ramp
across C, in circuit of 322 1C timer A„ for com-
parison internally with 0-3.15 V applied to pin
7. Pulse is thus linearly variable function of con-
trol voltage Vc over dynamic range of more than
100:1. Circuit is highly flexible, permitting use
of many other operational modes as covered in
article. When AC waveform is applied to V,,,
circuit operates as linear pulse-width modula-
tor.— W. G. Jung, Take a Fresh Look at New 1C
Timer Applications, EDN Magazine, March 20,
1977, p 127-135.
560
PULSE HEIGHT MODULATOR— Used ahead of

FET gate to reduce spike feedthrough. Voltage
swing on FET gate is limited to difference be-
tween V| and pinchoff voltage of FET. Zener D2
is matched to measured pinchoff voltage of FET
in use. — M. D. Dabbs, Pulse Height Modulator,
Wireless World, April 1975, p 176.
SUPPRESSED-CARRIER MODULATOR— Mul-

lard TCA240 dual balanced modulator-demod-
ulator provides suppression of carrier frequency
at output, as required for SSB or DSB operation
of transmitter. Bias resistor R7 is adjusted for
minimum carrier output to correct imbalance.
Can be used as conventional AM modulator if
biasing of circuit sections is deliberately unbal-
anced.— "Applications of the TCA240," Mul-
lard, London, 1975, Technical Note 18, TP1489.
-W\r
+ 12 Vdc
1 k
1 k
j— VSAr ±0.1 mf
60 mV (rms)
O AM Signal
Carrier Output
Input
Modulating
Signal
Input
300 m V(rms) AMPLITUDE MODULATOR — Motorola type

Max MC1596G balanced modulator functions as am-
plitude modulator when carrier null is unbal-
anced enough to insert proper amount of carrier
6.8 k into output signal. Provides excellent modula-
-8 Vdc tion from 0% to well over 100%. — R. Hejhall,
Modulation
"MCI 596 Balanced Modulator," Motorola,
Adjust
Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-531, p 7.
MODULATOR CIRCUITS
561
SINGLE-IC AM — Adjustable carrier offset is

added to carrier differential pairs to provide car-
rier-frequency output that varies in amplitude
with strength of modulation signal. — "Signet-
ics Analog Data Manual/' Signetics, Sunnyvale,
CA, 1977, p 757.
DSB BALANCED MODULATOR— Provides ex-

cellent gain and carrier suppression by operat-
ing upper (carrier) differential amplifiers of Mo-
torola MC1596G balanced modulator at
saturated level and lower differential amplifier
in linear mode. Recommended input levels are
60 mVRMS for carrier and 300 mVRMS maxi-
mum for modulating signal.— R. Hejhall,
"MCI 596 Balanced Modulator," Motorola,
Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-531, p 3.
+12 V DC
DOUBLE-SIDEBAND SUPPRESSED-CARRIER—
Motorola MC1596G double-balanced modula-
tor has carrier input between pins 8 and 7 and
modulation between pins 1 and 4. Balancing
carrier-null circuit, also connected between pins
1 and 4, contributes to excellent carrier rejection
at output. For unbalanced output, ground one
of push-pull output terminals. Requires two
supplies. — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C Principles, Ex-
DELTA MODULATOR— Uses LM111 compara-

tor in basic pulse-ratio modulator circuit, with
output pulse width and transition time fixed by
external clock signal applied to gate of JFET
switch Q2. Average value of output is always
proportional to input voltage. — R. C. Dobkin,
Comparators Can Do More than Just Compare,
EDN Magazine, Nov. 1, 1972, p 34-37.
SUPPRESSED-CARRIER AM — Double-balanced
-ooutout modulator using Signetics 511 transistor array
gives output consisting of sum and difference

-o-esv frequencies of carrier and modulation inputs
along with related harmonics. Circuit is self-bal-
ancing, eliminating need for pots. Output in-
cludes small amounts of carrier and modulating
signal. Capacitor between emitters of Q3 and
Q6 is selected to have low reactance at lowest
modulating frequency. — "Signetics Analog

p 750-751.
+ I2VDC
BALANCED MODULATOR — High-performance

balanced modulator for 80-meter SSB trans-
ceiver uses Motorola MC1496 1C. Adjust 50K pot
for maximum carrier suppression of double-
sideband output. — D. Hembling, Solid-State 80-
Meter SSB Transceiver, Ham Radio, March
1973, p 6-17.
CARRIER NULL
563
MODULATOR CIRCUITS
DUTY-CYCLE MODULATOR— Uses half of

LM339N or LM3302N quad comparator. With no
modulation signal, output is symmetrical
square wave generated by one of comparators.
Constant-amplitude triangle wave is generated
at inverting input of second comparator, and is
relatively independent of supply voltage and
frequency changes. Modulating signal varies
switching points to produce duty-cycle modu-
lated wave for such applications as class D am-
plification for servo and audio systems. — H. F.
Stearns, Voltage Comparator Makes a Duty-
Cycle Modulator, EDN Magazine, June 5, 1975,
p 76-77.
FET BALANCED MODULATOR FOR SSB — AF

modulating signal is applied to gates of
matched FETs in push-pull through T1 having
accurately center-tapped secondary, and RF
carrier is applied to sources in parallel through
C3. Carrier is canceled in output circuit, leaving
two sidebands. R3 is adjusted to correct for un-
balance in circuit components. — R. P. Turner,
"FET Circuits," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis,
IN, 1977,2nd Ed , p 90-91.
100% MODULATION OF DIGITAL SIGNALS—

Developed to produce positive-going half-sine
envelope modulated 100% by digital RF signal.
Modulator uses loop gain of opamp to reduce
diode drops very nearly to ideal zero level. D2
prevents opamp output terminal from swinging
more negative than diode drop of 0.3 V, which
is not apparent at output. RF input amplitude
must be sufficient to provide 100% modulation;
this can be achieved by providing about 20%
overdrive to give safety factor. Use hot-carrier
diodes such as HP-2800 series. — D. L. Quick, Im-
prove Amplitude Modulation of Fast Digital Sig-
nals, EDN Magazine, Sept. 20, 1975, p 68 and 70.
D, , D2 5082 2800
IK IK
DOUBLE-SIDEBAND SUPPRESSED-CARRIER—
Signetics MC1496 balanced modulator-demod-
ulator transistor array provides carrier suppres-
sion while passing sum and difference frequen-
cies. Gain is set by value used for emitter
degeneration resistor connected between pins
2 and 3. Output filtering is used to remove un-
wanted harmonics. — "Signetics Analog Data
Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p
756-757.
564 MODERN
*vcc ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS REFERENCE MANUAL
SUPPRESSED-CARRIER AM— Multiplier sec-

tion of Exar XR-S200 PLL 1C is connected to gen-
erate suppressed-carrier AM signal having
about 60-dB carrier suppression at 500 kHz and
MODULATION 40 dB at 10 MHz. Inputs are interchangeable.
INPUT
XR S200 15K offset adjustment pots optimize carrier
MULTIPLIER suppression. Supply voltage range is ±3 to ±30
SECTION V. — "Phase-Locked Loop Data Book," Exar In-
tegrated Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 9-1 6.
100 mW — Can be used to collector-modulate

transmitters up to about 200 mW or base-mod-
ulate somewhat larger power amplifiers. Trans-
former coupling minimizes number of compo-
nents needed. — Circuits, 73 Magazine, Jan.
1974, p 177.
01,02.03 2NI09, 2N2613, 2N2953, SK3004

TI 25K 1200 OHMS
T2 20 K 2K OHMS CT
T3 5K CT 200 OHMS CT
PCM FOR MICROWAVE TRANSMITTER— Mod- quencies up to 5 kHz. When 10-kHz sampling generatorto —5 V. At same time, binary counter
ern pulse-code modulator can be used for ex- spike (derived from external 1 ,28-MHz oscillator U9 is stopped by reset flip-flop U15A, and binary
perimentation above lowest legal frequency of by frequency divider UlOand mono U11) arrives equivalent of sample appears at pins 3, 4, 5, 6,
2.3 GHz, such as for satellite and moonbounce at pin 13 of transmission gate U1, AF voltage of 9, 11, and 12 of U9. Remainder of circuit con-
communication. Single voice channel is en- pin 1 appears at pin 2. 470-pF capacitor charges verts bits to serial form for transmission. Article
coded by using CMOS technology having low to this voltage and holds charge until next sam- explains circuit operation in detail and gives
power consumption, good noise immunity, and ple. This voltage is compared by U2 to linear corresponding decoder circuit for receiver. — V.
moderate cost. Audio is sampled 10,000 times ramp started by Q1 at sampling instant. When Biancomano, A Prototype Pulse-Code Modula-
per second for conversion to 7-pulse code plus ramp voltage exceeds sampled voltage, U2 trig- tion System, QST, Jan. 1977, p 24-29.
synchronizing bit, for 123 levels of encoding fre- gers, setting flip-flop U3 and resetting ramp
MODULATOR CIRCUITS 565
CARRIER
FREQUENCY
AMPLITUDE MODULATOR— Uses controlled

variation of amplifier bias current lABC in
CA3080A variable opamp to obtain effective
gain control of signal. Variations in amplitude
of modulating voltage VM change bias current
through Rm to give amplitude modulation of
carrier. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," RCA
MODULATING
FREQUENCY
MOSFET BALANCED MODULATOR— Balanced

carrier is fed to G2 gates and balanced audio to
G1 gates. Both carrier and audio are canceled in
output, leaving desired double-sideband sig-
nal.— E. M. Noll, "FET Principles, Experiments,
and Projects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis,
IN, 2nd Ed., 1975, p 195. i 100 UF
50mW @ 30V CARRIER FREQ.

SPEED- 2psec EITHER INPUT
USE BUFFERED LOW CAPACITANCE PROBE
ALL RESISTORS 5“
SQUARE-WAVE MODULATOR— Analog mod- tom of amplified carrier wave. Following pulse up circuit operation. Provides modulation range
ulation input goes through buffer Qt-R, to am- amplifier converts TTL signal to square wave. of 0-98%. — E. Burwen, Low-Power Square-
plifier Q2-R2-R3. Outputs of Q2 are buffered by Two opposed emitter-followers and D5 form Wave Modulator Is TTL Compatible, EDN Mag-
separate emitter-followers Q3 and Q4 and fed to buffer that can either source or sink current azine, Nov. 20, 1973, p 91 and 93.
clipping diodes D2 and D3 acting on top and bot- from load. Other three diodes are used to speed
PDM WITH CLOCK — First section of Exar XR-

2556 dual timer operates as pulse-duration
modulator and second section as clock gener-
ator, eliminating need for external clock. Supply
voltage is 4.5-16 V. Values of R and C determine
frequency and pulse duration of output. —
"Timer Data Book," Exar Integrated Systems,
20K
FOUR-QUADRANT MULTIPLIER— Provides am-

plitude modulation for applications where low
power consumption is more important than ac-
curacy. Uses CA3080A variable opamp in com-
bination with transistors of CA3018A array and
2N4037 amplifier for bias current of opamp. Ac-
curacy is within 7% full scale. — "Circuit Ideas
for RCA Linear ICs," RCA Solid State Division,
CHAPTER 53
Motor Control Circuits
Speed control circuits for various types and sizes of AC and DC motors,
including three-phase motors. Some use tachometer feedback to maintain
desired constant speed. Includes stepper motor drives, phase sequence
detector, braking control, facsimile phase control, and revolution-counting
control. Many respond to logic inputs. See also Antenna, Lamp Control,
Power Control, Servo, and Temperature Control chapters.
12 V
SWITCHING-MODE CONTROLLER— Developed

for driving 0.01-hp motor M at variable speeds
with minimum battery drain. Circuit uses pulses
with low duty cycle to set up continuous current
in motor approximating almost 200 mA when
average battery drain is 100 mAfor output volt-
age of 3.5 V. Voltage comparator A, serves as
oscillator and as duty-cycle element of control-
ler. C, and R, provide positive feedback giving
oscillation at about 20 kHz, with duty-cycle
range of 10% to 70% controlled by feedback
loop Q,-RrC3-R3. D is used in place of costly
large capacitor for filtering. — J. C. Sinnett,
Switching-Mode Controller Boosts DC Motor
Efficiency, Electronics, May 25, 1978, p 132.
PWM SPEED CONTROL — Power stage using

Motorola 4N26 optoisolators and push-pull
transistors drives fractional -horsepower single-
phase AC motor over speed range of 5% to
100% of base speed. Input drives are provided
by pulse-width modulation inverter using
stored program in ROM to generate sine-
weighted pulse trains to provide variable-fre-
quency drive. — T. Mazur, "A ROM-Digital Ap-
proach to PWM-Type Speed Control of AC
Motors," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1974, AN-733,
P 12.
567
568
40 W 24-OV lamp
2-hp THYRISTOR CONTROL— Provides smooth

variation in speed of shunt-wound DC motor
from standstill to 90% of rated speed. Use thy-
ristor rated 30 A at 600 V. Outer diodes of bridge
are 35-A 600-PIV silicon power diodes, as also
is thyristor diode, and inner diodes are 5-A 600-
V silicon power diodes. Article gives complete
circuit of trigger pulse generator used to control
speed by varying duty cycle of thyristor. Larger
motors can be controlled similarly by uprating
thyristor and diodes. Controller will also handle
other types of loads, including lamps and heat-
ers.— F. Butler, Thyristor Control of Shunt-
Wound D.C. Motors, Wireless World, Sept.
1974, p 325-328.
TAPE-LOOP SPEED CONTROL — Shunt rectifier-

capacitor circuit was developed for speed con-
trol of permanent split-capacitor fractional-
horsepower induction motor used in some
motion-picture projectors. Light-dependent
resistor LDR makes Q2 conduct when light from
lamp is not blocked by tape loop. Split capacitor
C, for motor provides both run and speed-con-
trol functions without switching. Values are: C2
0.01 fiF; D 1N4004; Q1 2N4987; Q2 C106B; R,
330K; R2 100; R3 10. — T. A. Gross, Control the
Speed of Small Induction Motors, EDN Maga-
zine, Aug. 20, 1977, p 141-142.
TIME
E IN °~
-15 V
0.033 mF
el
phase comparator by error detector. Circuit ac-
tion serves to maintain constant motor speed
DC MOTOR SPEED CONTROLLER— Tachome- ceiving reference voltage from another at value determined by position of pot R. Input
ter driven by motor produces output voltage CA3094A connected as ramp generator. Output to ramp generator is pulsating DC voltage used
proportional to speed for application to of phase comparator triggers SCR in motor cir- to control rapid charging of Cl and slower dis-
CA3080A voltage comparator after rectification cuit. Amount of motor current is set by time du-
charging to form ramp.— E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C
and filtering. Output of CA3080A is applied to ration ofpositive signal at pin 6, which in turn
upper CA3094A phase comparator that is re- is determined by DC voltage applied to pin 3 of W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 321-323.
MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUITS 569
T
SERIES-MOTOR SPEED CONTROL— Adjusta-
<330 ble-speed solid-state motor drive replaces gov-
ernor in Kleinschmidt RTTY page printer, to give
'j
0 knob-controlled speed range of 60 to 100 WPM.
Notched (33-slot) sheet-aluminum disk serving
-
© as pulse wheel is mounted on motor shaft and
01
H13AI
J2N34I4
rotates in gap between LED and phototransis-
tor of GE H13A1 optical coupler to form motor-
speed sensor or tachometer. Pulses from tach-
ometer, squared by Q1, trigger mono MVBR
2.7k
02-03 which converts signal to constant-am-
plitude constant-width pulses having repetition
rate proportional to motor speed. Opamp U1
forms three-pole Butterworth active filter that
develops required average DC voltage from
pulse train. Output current of U1 is compared to
reference current derived from speed control
circuit, for switching U2 sharply on and off as
speed varies above and below desired value. U2
in turn switches motor on and off through
H15A1 optical coupler and Q4 in gate circuit of
triac. Second coupler isolates control circuit
from AC line. — K. H. Sueker, Electronic Speed
Control for RTTY Machines, Ham Radio, Aug.
1974, p 50-54.
SERIES MOTOR
+ 5V
SPEED CONTROL FOR 3-V MOTOR— Designed

for use with hobby or toy motors running at
about 10,000 rpm and powered by 3-V to 6-V
batteries. Uses 4011 CMOS NAND gate with
diodes and power transistor to provide variable
liver selected number of pulses to stepper the desired count as set up by switches. Article duty cycle, so adjustment of 1-megohm speed
motor when start button is pushed, in micro- gives flowcharts and software routines for mi- control varies average voltage applied to motor
processor application where number of steps is croprocessor tobe used for controlling stepper without affecting peak voltage. Motor battery
more important than precise speed. Thumb- motor. — R. E. Bober, Taking the First Step, is connected between + terminal and ground of
wheel switch inputs can be I/O port lines of mi- BYTE, Feb. 1978, p 35-36, 38, 102, 104, 106, and circuit. — J. A. Sandler, 11 Projects under $11,
croprocessor. LOAD line transfers into counter 108-112. Modern Electronics, June 1978, p 54-58.
570
MODERN ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS+I2V REFERENCE MANUAL
FOUR-PHASE STEPPER DRIVE— EXCLUSIVE-

OR gates of 7486 provide steering, while 7476
flip-flops provide memory for generating drive
patterns of bidirectional logic stepper motor
that is controlled by microprocessor. Output
transistors, diodes, and resistors are chosen to
R,
meet power requirements for each phase of
motor. Speed is controlled by frequency of clock
input. Use 555 for coarse control or crystal os-
cillator for accurate control. SI, which can bean
I/O line of microprocessor, controls direction of
rotation.
ss, Frequency can be obtained from digi-
tally controlled oscillator whose setting is de-
termined byDAC. — R. E. Bober, Taking the First
Step, BYTE, Feb. 1978, p 35-36, 38, 102, 104,
-0
106, and 108-112.
FF2
ss2
+5VO-
-WVS—
— \
0.VF X
-OREADY
L >r\ -OREADY
I I
UNDER/OVERSPEED LOGIC — Provides signal
(READY output high) only when tachometer
pulses from motor are within specific upper and
lower limits. Also provides overspeed output ' SPEED
TACH.O-
signal when upper limit has been exceeded. Sin-
gle-action triggering eliminates instability at
decision point. Article covers circuit operation
in detail and gives timing diagram. — W. Bleher,
+5VO
D
Circuit Indicates Logic "Ready," EDN Magazine,
March 5, 1974, p 72 and 74.
X>
SS,,SS,“V4MULTIVIBRATOR
74123 MONOSTABLE
FF,.FF2=y1NEGATIVE-EDGE
74m°3 OR EQUIVALENT
TRIGGERED T
0- 1 F
FLIP FLOP
C,. C2=SELECTED FOR DESIRED TIMING RANGE

3—
R, “SELECTED FOR UNDER/NOMINAL SPEED HYSTERESIS
R2 “SELECTED FOR NOMINAL/OVER SPEED HYSTERESIS
O-
CASSETTE DRIVE CONTROLLER— Used in ergizing solenoid. When motor stops, pulse- of Tr4, reducing its forward bias and reducing
high-quality stereo cassette deck operating generating switch also stops and Tr, stops con- current in the base of Trs so as to stabilize
from AC line or battery. Combines current ducting. After 3-s delay determined by C2 and motor. Article gives all other circuits of cassette
source for cassette-retaining solenoid with R5, Tr2 conducts and solenoid is deenergized, deck and describes operation in detail. — J. L.
speed control for drive motor. As motor turns, releasing cassette. In speed control circuit, Tr5 Linsley Hood, Low-Noise. Low-Cost Cassette
associated motor-driven pulse-generating acts as constant-current source for motor, using Deck, Wireless World, Part 3— Aug. 1976, p 55-
switch keeps Tr, conducting; this cuts off Tr2 feedback from its collector to base of Tr„. Back 56 (Part 1— May 1976, p 36-40; Part 2— June
and allows current to flow through Tr3 for en- EMF developed by motor is applied to emitter 1976, p 62-66).
SHUNT-WOUND MOTOR— Switch provides di-

rection control and R1 controls speed of frac-
tional-horsepower shunt-wound DC motor.
Field is placed across rectified supply, and ar-
mature windings are in four-SCR bridge circuit.
Switch determines which diagonal pair of SCRs
is turned on, to control direction of rotation.
Triggering circuit consisting of Q5, D5, and Cl
is controlled by R1, for changing conduction
angle of triggered SCR path. — "Direction and

Speed Control for Series, Universal and Shunt
Motors," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1976, AN-443.
Load
900-W FULL-WAVE TRIGGER— Uses UJT for

phase control of triac. Suitable for control of
shaded-pole motors driving loads having low
starting torque, such as fans and blowers. — D.
LOW-LEVEL CMOS CONTROL— Low-level out- A. Pshaenich, "Interface Techniques Between A. Zinder, "Electronic Speed Control for Appli-
put of CMOS buffer turns on DC motor through Industrial Logic and Power Devices," Motorola, 482, pance
4. Motors," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-
Q1 and 20-A Darlington power transistor Q2. — Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-712A, p 18.
load
PLL MULTIPLIER SHIFT REGISTER
FACSIMILE PHASE CONTROL— Circuit provides required drive motor frequency. This gives
each clockwise switch step gives 360/16 or 22.5°
accurate phasing of 51-pole-pair phonic/syn- pulse train with 1:15 mark-space ratio and rep- phase advance. Article describes circuit opera-
chronous motor in facsimile transmitter, and etition rate equal to drive frequency. Multi- tion in detail. — P. E. Baylis and R. J. Brush, Syn-
can readily be adapted for similar applications. plexer used as single-pole 16-way switch can chronous-Motor Phase Control, Wireless
A 16-stage shift register loaded with 1 bit and select output for any stage of shift register; World, April 1976, p 62.
connected as ring counter is clocked at 16 times
572
SHUNT-MODE SPEED CONTROL— AC tachom-

eter on shaft of DC motor serves as input for
National LM2917N-8 1C acting as shunt-mode
regulator with LED indicator. Output of Darling-
ton power transistor provides analog drive to
motor. As motor speed approaches reference
level set by values chosen for R1, Cl, and C2,
current to motor is proportionately reduced so
motor comes gradually up to speed and is main-
tained there without operating in switching
mode. Advantage of this arrangement is ab-
sence of electric noise normally generated dur-
ing switching-mode operation. — "Linear Appli-

Clara, CA, 1976, AN-162, p 10-11.
SOLENOID
PAPER-TAPE FEED — High or 1 bit at output port
of microprocessor turns on LED of optocoupler
to energize solenoid of pinch-roller drive for
paper tape of tape reader. Circuit will control
reader from computer keyboard. Optoisolator MANUAL
TAPE
is essential to keep grounds separate, since me-
chanical devices are electrically noisy and can FEED
generate garbage in computer. Article gives
software for tape input routine on 8008 micro-
processor.— D. Hogg, The Paper Taper Caper,
Kilobaud, March 1977, p 34-40.
REVOLUTION-COUNTING CONTROL— When Voltage developed across 5-ohm resistor Rs in through signal-squaring inverters. Counter out-
desired number of revolutions is reached by DC series with motor contains frequency compo- puts are decoded by gate 1. Motor slowdown
motor, as determined by preset counter, Tr, is nent related to speed of rotation and number of by heavy loads does not affect accuracy of revo-
turned off to interrupt path to 5-V motor supply, armature coils. This signal is amplified by lution-counting.—R.McGillivray, Motor Revo-
while TR2 is turned on to brake motor rapidly. CD4007 CMOS inverter for feeding to counters lutions Control, Wireless World, Jan. 1977, p 76.
Starting Winding
TRIAC STARTING SWITCH FOR Vhp MOTOR—

Triac replaces centrifugal switch normally used
to control current through starting winding of
single-phase induction motor. Value of R1 is
chosen so triac turns on only when starting cur-
Used with thyristor speed control for 2-hp or equivalent, and any small-signal silicon rent exceeds 12 A. When motor approaches nor-
shunt-wound DC motor. Circuit provides train diode. Output pulses are suitable for triggering mal speed, running current drops to 8 A and
of pulses with variable delay with respect to all types of thyristors up to largest. Article also triac blocks current through starting winding. —
zero-crossing instants of AC supply, for feeding gives motor control circuit. — F. Butler, Thyris- "Circuit Applications for the Triac," Motorola,
to cathode and gate of thyristor to vary duty tor Control of Shunt-Wound D.C. Motors, Wire- Phoenix, A2, 1971, AN-466, p 8.
cycle. Use Mullard BFX29 silicon PNP transistor less World, Sept. 1974, p 325-328.
INDUCTION-MOTOR SPEED— Uses variable- phase A and phase B. Outputs of RS flip-flops sistors having complementary NPN/PNP pairs.
frequency UJT oscillator at upper left to toggle are differentiated and positive-going transi- Circuit will provide speed range of 300 to 1700
MC664 RS flip-flop which in turn clocks MC663 tions amplified by pair of 2N3904 transistors, rpm for permanent-split capacitor motor. — T.
JK flip-flops. Quadrature-phased JK outputs are with pulse width of about 500 ps. NAND-gate Mazur, "Variable Speed Control System for In-
combined with fixed-width pulses in MC672 to outputs are then translated by small-signal am- AN-575A, duction
p 6.Motors," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1974,
provide zero-voltage steps of drive signals for plifiers to levels suitable for driving final tran-
574
WATER-LEVEL CONTROL — Two thermistors

operating in self-heating mode are mounted on
sides of water tank. Thermistors change resis-
tance when water level rises so liquid rather
than air conducts heat away. Threshold adjust-
ment pots are set so RCA
CA3098 programma-
'To hh ble Schmitt

water level tr'99er turns onthermistor
rises above pump motor when
mounted
near upper edge of tank, to remove water from
tank and prevent overflow. Motor stays on to
pump water out of tank until water level drops
below location of lower thermistor inside
tank.— "Linear Integrated Circuit and MOS/
FET's," RCA Solid State Division, Somerville,
NJ, 1977, p 218-221.
OPAMP SPEED CONTROL — Provides fine speed

control of DC motor by using 0.25-W 6-V motor
as tachogenerator giving about 4 V at 13,000
rpm. Opamp (RCA 3047A or equivalent) pro-
vides switching action for transistor in series
with controlled motor, up to within a few volts
of supply voltage. Choose transistor to meet
motor current requirement. — N. G. Boreham,
D.C. Motor Controller, Wire/ess World, Aug.
1971, p 386.
TO STEPPER
MOTOR CIRCUIT
IN BOWMAR
PRINTER
STEPPER MOTOR DRIVE— Two CMOS pack- Bowmar Model TP 3100 thermal printer. Out- commanded. — R. Bober, Stepper Drive Circuit
ages provide the four feed signals required for puts of flip-flops are above 10 V, enough to drive Simplifies Printer Control, EDN Magazine, April
controlling forward/reverse drive of stepper stepper motor directly. Each clock pulse to JK 5, 1976, p 114.
motor for carriage drive and paper advance of flip-flop advances carriage one step in direction
575
MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUITS
UP-TO-SPEED LOGIC — Simple speed-sensing

circuit fed by tachometer pulses makes READY
output high when rotating device reaches de-
sired minimum or threshold speed. Single-ac-
tion triggering eliminates instability at decision
point. Circuit also provides hysteresis, for sep-
arating pull-in and drop-out points any desired
amount as determined by ratio of R, to R2 in tim-
ing network. Article covers circuit operation
SS= MONOSTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR (SINGLE SHOT) 74122 OR 9601
OR V, 74123 OR 9602 and gives timing diagram. — W. Bleher, Circuit
FF=NEGATIVE EDGE-TRIGGERED FLIP FLOP. 74H103 OR EQUIVALENT
Indicates Logic "Ready," EDN Magazine, March
R,=0 TO 20% OF Rj, SELECTED FOR REQUIREO HYSTERESIS 5, 1974, p 72 and 74.
C,=SELECTED FOR REQUIRED TIMING RANGE.
TO SOLENOID
CONTINUOUS-DUTY BRAKE— High or 1 bit at
output port of microprocessor energizes brake
solenoid of paper-tape reader through optocou-
pler and amplifier. When tape is to be stopped,
brake solenoid is energized and tape is
squeezed between top of solenoid and flat iron
brake shoe that is attracted by solenoid. — D.
R°99. The Paper Taper Caper, Kilobaud, March LOW - BRAKE ON
1977, p 34-40.
SPEED CONTROL FOR INDUCTION MOTOR— essentially constant torque. Speed varies line- drive signals from unipolar control signals. Each
Uses UJT oscillator Q, to generate frequency in arly with frequency. Circuit uses pair of flip- output drive circuit is normally off and is turned
range from 40 to 1200 Hz for feeding to divide- flops (MC673) operated in time-quadrature to on only when its LED is on. If logic power fails,
by-4 configuration that gives motor source fre- perform same function as phase-shifting capac- drives are disabled and motor is turned off as
quency range of 10 to 300 Hz. With induction itor so motor receives two drive signals 90° fail-safe feature. — T. Mazur, Unique Semicon-
motor having two pairs of poles, this gives the- apart. Article covers operation of circuit in de- ductor Mix Controls Induction Motor Speed,
oretical speed range of 300 to 9000 rpm with tail. Optoisolators are used to provide bipolar EDN Magazine, Nov. 1, 1972, p 28-31.
TRIAC SPEED CONTROL WITH FEEDBACK—

Feedback is derived from load current, elimi-
nating need for separate connections to motor
field and armature windings. When triac con-
ducts, normal line voltage less drop across triac
and R5 is applied to motor. If firing of triac is
delayed in each half of AC cycle, RMS voltage of
motor is reduced and speed is correspondingly
reduced. Feedback maintains torque at reduced
speeds. Value of R5 in ohms is equal to 2 divided
by rated RMS motor current in amperes and is
0.32 ohm for 6.5-A induction motor. Suitable for
use with electric drills, where good torque is
obtained down to about one-third of maximum
speed. — "Circuit Applications for the Triac,"

+ 24 V
CLAMPED DARLINGTON CONTROL— Circuit

uses MJE205 5-A transistor in Darlington con-
figuration driving 2N5301 30-A transistor for
passing 18 A to DC motor under logic control.
CMOS gate connections are shown for energiz-
ing motor when logic is low and when logic is
high. — A. Pshaenich, "Interface Techniques Be-
tween Industrial Logic and Power Devices,"
Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-712A, p 19.
between control and drive sections. Article tells

FREQUENCY CONTROLS SPEED— Circuit gen- and 9000 rpm without affecting maximum how circuit works and gives similar circuit using
erates variable frequency between 10 and 300 torque. Direct coupling between control and optical coupling. — T. Mazur, Unique Semicon-
Hz at constant voltage for changing speed of in- drive circuits is used; if motor noise affects conductor Mix Controls Induction Motor Speed,
duction motor between theoretical limits of 300 trol logic circuits, optoisolators should be used EDN Magazine, Nov. 1, 1972, p 28-31.
577
2-hp THREE-PHASE INDUCTION— Speed is con-

trolled by applying continuously variable DC
voltage to VCO of control circuit for 750-VDC 7-
A bridge inverter driving three sets of six Delco
DTS-709 duolithic Darlingtons. Bridge inverter
circuit for other two phases is identical to that
shown for phase AA\ VCO output is converted
to three-phase frequency varying from 5 Hz at
50 VDC to 60 Hz at 600 VDC for driving output
Darlingtons. Optoisolators are used for base
drive of three switching elements connected to
high-voltage side of inverter. — "A 7A, 750 VDC
Inverter for a 2 hp, 3 Phase, 480 VAC Induction
Motor," Delco, Kokomo, IN, 1977, Application
Note 60.
PULSED BRAKE — Transition from high (1) to

low (0) at control port of microprocessor ener-
gizes brake solenoid of paper-tape reader in
pulses lasting several microseconds, with time
determined by size of capacitor used. Energiz-
ing of solenoid squeezes tape between top of
solenoid and flat iron brake shoe that is at-
TO SOLENOID
POWER SUPPLY tracted by solenoid. Unmarked resistor is IK. —
COMMON D. Hogg, The Paper Taper Caper, Kilobaud,
March 1977, p 34-40.
SERIES-WOUND MOTOR— Provides both direc-

tion and speed control for fractional-horse-
power series-wound or universal DC motors as
long as motor current requirements are within
SCR ratings. Q1-Q4, connected in bridge, are
triggered in diagonal pairs. SI determines
which pair is turned on, to provide direction
control. Pulse circuit is used to drive SCRs
through T1 or T2. When Cl charges to break-
down voltage of zener D5, zener passes current
to gate of SCR Q5 and turns it on. This dis-
charges Cl through T1 or T2 to create desired
triggering pulse. Q5 stays on for duration of
half -cycle. R1 controls motor speed by changing
time required to charge Cl, thereby changing
conduction angle of Q1-Q4 or Q2-Q3. — "Direc-

tion and Speed Control for Series, Universal and
Shunt Motors," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1976,
AN-443.
ANGLE (000.0 -360.0 DEGREES)
MONOSTABLE MULTIVIBRATORS
MOTOR STEP-ANGLE DISPLAY— Digital dis- generator that produces high-current square- ments of incremental plotters, precision film
play circuit tracks stepper-motor shaft move- wave pulses under control of clock used for dis- camera drives, numerical control machines, and
ments. Up/down decade counters read out four play, which can be external square-wave gen- precision start-stop motions of fuel control rods
BCD digits as travel angle (000.0 to 360.0) in de- erator or clock output of microprocessor such in nuclear reactor. — H. Lo, Digital Display of
grees and number of completed revolutions (0 as KIM-1 . Power source for digital display is 5 V Stepper Motor Rotation, Computer Design,
to 9). Stepper under study is driven by state at 1 .2 A. Applications include monitoring move- April 1978, p 147-148 and 150-151.
579
+ 15 V + 24 V + 24 v
HIGH-LEVEL CMOS CONTROL— When output

of CMOS buffer goes high, Q1 turns on and sinks
150-mA base current of power Darlington Q2, to
activate motor load. Used in logic-controlled in-
dustrial applications. — A. Pshaenich, "Interface
Techniques Between Industrial Logic and
Power Devices,"
AN-712A, p 18. Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975,
N4001
TELEFAX PHASING — Simple coincidence cir-

cuit provides reliable synchronization of Telefax
machine in which 2500-Hz signal is generated
by photoelectric scanning of paper placed on
revolving drum. Circuit uses 7402 quad two-
input NOR gate. If alternate connection en-
closed in dashed line is not used, connect pin 8
to ground at pin 7. Q1 is S0014 silicon or equiv-
alent. Ifrelay contacts will handle motor voltage
and current, they can be connected directly
across points of test switch on machine, with
switch left open for phasing circuit to work. —
W. C. Smith, A Logic Circuit for Phasing the
Telefax, QST, Nov. 1978, p 33-34.
CONNECTION
(SEE TEXT)
phase applications in which direction of rota- and shaped by 1N4001 diodeand MPS5172 tran- five device for removing air conditioner or other
tion of phases is critical, as in three-phase mo- sistor, with additional shaping by MCI 4572 in- equipment from line before it is damaged. — T.
tors where reversal of two phases can provide verter. Shaped outputs of all three phases are
Malarkey, "A Simple Line Phase-Reversal De-
disastrous reversal of motor. Line voltages are combined in AND gates G1-G3 to give pulse out- tection Circuit," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975,
stepped down and isolated by control-type puts sequentially. D flip-flops are connected to EB-54.
PHASE A
PHASE SEQUENCE DETECTOR— Circuit de- phase loss or incorrect sequence, output goes pulse coincides with positive zero crossing of
tects incorrect phase sequence of motor driving low and LED is dark. Diodes and zeners change phase B, output pulses can be used to trigger
pump, compressor, conveyor, or other equip- sine waves for all phases to rectangular logic- SCR connected across phase B and driving
ment that can be damaged by reverse rotation. level pulses that feed gates. When phases are relay-coil load. SCR then energizes relay only
Circuit also protects motor from phase loss that correct, output of G4 is train of rectangular when sequence is correct. — H. Normet, Detec-
could cause rapid temperature rise and heat pulses about 2.5 ns wide. Output is zero for in- tor Protects 3-Phase-Powered Equipment, EDN
damage. LED is on when phasing is correct. For correct sequences. Since leading edge of output Magazine, Aug. 5, 1978, p 78 and 80.
ates high-current square-wave pulses and pro- A2

0
vides correct switching sequence for exciting
stepper motor when digital display is required 1 1 i 1
5 V 0 ! 0 0
1 11 ! 11i 0 i 1 1i 1 1
to show instantaneous step angle and total rev- 1 1
1 1
1 i
olutions traveled by shaft of stepper motor. If 0 1 1
microprocessor is used, speed and direction of 1 ' o! Li
0 0 1 0 l 1 1 1
CW2 i
motor rotation can be controlled by program- 5 V 1 I i
ming period and level of output pulses. Clock 1 i 1 i
0
signals trigger SN7473N JK flip-flop that 61
changes ON/OFF states of four outputs as 62 CW4 1
shown in table. Clock signal is obtained from
CW1 TIME (t) -
external square-wave generator or from micro- ital display circuit driven by same clock — H. Lo, !!
Computer Design, !'
!!April ; p 147-148
1978, and
processor such as KIM-1. Article also gives dig- Digital Display of Stepper Motor Rotation, 150-151.
12
VOLTS LIMIT
MOTOR TRANSISTOR Q EMITTER
VOLTAGE 0.42
VOLTAGE CURRENT
11.5
0 0 10A
6 6 0.20 16A
0.5
24-VDC PROPORTIONAL SPEED CONTROL— Rj-Pi-Pj- Pi mechanically coupled to motor 21 .4 A
National LM378 amplifier 1C is basis for low-cost shaft as continuously variable feedback sensor. STALLED-MOTOR PROTECTION— Modification
proportional speed controller capable of fur- As motor turns, P, tracks movement and error of basic speed control circuit for small DC per-
nishing 700 mA continuously for such applica- signal becomes smaller and smaller; system manent-magnet motors provides maximum
tions as antenna rotors and motor-controlled current limit under normal conditions and re-
stops when error voltage reaches 0 V. — "Audio
valves. Proportional control results from error Handbook," National Semiconductor, Santa duced current limit under stall conditions, to
signal developed across Wheatstone bridge R,- Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-8-4-20. limit dissipation of series transistor Q4 to safe
value. When motor stalls, motor voltage falls,
reducing voltage and motor current required to
turn on Q3 and thereby limiting stalled-motor
current. — D. Zinder, Current Limit and Foldback
for Small Motor Control, EDN Magazine, May 5,
1974, p 77 and 79.
SPLIT-PHASE CONTROL WITH BRAKING— Use shaft-position encoders, circuit generates feed- brake duration is controlled by 1-megohm re-
of CMOS logic to gate direction-controlling back information. Overshoot and other stability sistor at input of U2C. With values shown, brake
triacs and turn on SCR for braking provides low- problems are easily controlled by strong brak- is applied for about 1 s. Circuit works reliably on
cost switchless control of split-phase motor ing function. CMOS logic provides complete supply voltages of 5 to 15 V.— V. C. Gregory,
used in place of brush-type DC motor. Applica- noise immunity. Oscillator pulse width is ad- Split-Phase Motor Control Accomplished with
tions include control of ball valves and other justed with IK resistor in series with 1N914, and CMOS, EDN Magazine, Oct. 5, 1974, p 65-67.
throttling functions in process control. With
CHAPTER 54
Multiplexer Circuits
Includes circuits for multiplexing of data or communication channels, analog
switches, filters, displays, and sensor channels under control of logic signals.
See also Cathode-Ray, Data Transmission, Display, Instrumentation, and Logic
chapters.
EIGHT-CHANNEL SEQUENTIAL— Eight differ- words for furtner processing. Maximum

mV in 1 /is after hold command. — "FET Data-
ent analog inputs are sampled by National throughput rate of system is 2800 samples per book," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
LF13508 multiplexer and converted into digital second per channel. Output will settle to ±0.05
CA, 1977, p 5-77-5-78.
582
583
MULTIPLEXER CIRCUITS
Binary
7490
counters
Input
I I
I I
itrtrri
I I
I I
til
Enablen - I I 7401
open collector
and gates
-^VAAv—
4k7 <►
■AMH I -O +5V
4k7
-A/W-O
■AAA/ —
“0Vo
7400 rtrtrtrt To display "enables"
as inverter
To segments
via resistors
MULTIPLEXING OF DISPLAYS— Three or more cathode displays, segment and display enable
displays can be multiplexed simply by gating signals must be inverted. With individual dis-
7490 counter output via 7401, then using OR play units, segments must be paralleled. — G. A.
connection for outputs. 7401s are switched on Bobker, Simplified Multiplexing, Wireless
World, Feb. 1978, p 59.
in rotation by positive enable signal which also
LOGIC SIGNALS CONTROL TDM— Use of switches displays on in turn. If using common-
pA776 opamps eliminates need for FET
switches in time-division multiplexing and sig-
nal conditioning. Multiplex inputs S,-S2-S3 can
be driven directly by TTL or DTL devices. Each
amplifier is controlled by either supplying or
denying its 70-pA master-bias input, thus turn-
ing it on or off. All stages have identical com-
ponent values. — M. K. Vander Kooi, Multiplex-
ing Without FETs, EDNEEE Magazine, Aug. 1,
1971, p 47.
EIGHT-CHANNEL TELEMETER— Multiplex location to perform timing and synchronizing monitoring is desired at more than one loca-
transmission system permits monitoring eight functions for outputs of MM74C42 BCD-to-dec- 7-72. tion.— "Analog Switches and Their Applica-
different inputs at remote location. 5-V pulse imal decoder. 15-V reset pulse is superimposed tions," Siliconix, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 7-71—
train is sent down separate channel to receiving on 5-V clock. Other receivers can be added if
TWO-INPUT FSK MULTIPLEXER— Uses Signet-

ics NE571 or NE570 analog compandors. Gain
of each channel is unity, as determined by RGA,N
value for channel. When complementary con-
trol signals are provided, FSK generator
switches between the two signal inputs. Out-
puts, when on, are summed by opamp in 1C.
Each channel is gated off by low control logic
input. For FSK or alternate-channel use, CON-
TROL A and CONTROL B signals should be com-
plementary. Control signal suppression is opti-
mized with chopper null pot. Suppression is
better than 60 dB after trimming. Circuit can
also be used as summing switch, with both sig-
nals on at any given instant. — W. G. Jung, Gain
Radio, July 1977, p 47-53.
-5 V
-15 V
+5 V + 15 V
Type GND
Number
16.
1 to 8 CA3130 7 4
16
109 CD4051 8 7
13
CD4051 8 7
13 2
MCI408L-8
12
11 LM311 1 4 8
LM318
4 8
pin with 0.01 /uFto suppress stray spikes caused
by power surges. Use of LM318 opamp mini-
MULTIPLEXED A/D-D/A CONVERTER INTER- computer system. Useful in interactive games, mizes response time of MC1408L-8 DAC. — D. R.
FACE— Time-multiplexed interface minimizes equipment testing, and electronic music. Opti- Kraul, Designing Multichannel Analog Inter-
hardware required for applications of personal mized for 0.1-100 Hz signals. Bypass each power faces, BYTE, June 1977, p 18-23.
_
c, 585
ANALOG SUMMING — ON/OFF programming of

A776 opamps allows any or all inputs to be on
at given time. Switched outputs are combined
in summing inverter A„. Voltage followers A,-A3
are programmed from on to off by Q,-Q3 and As-
A7. Noise gain of stage A, is minimized when
input channel is switched off. If sign inversion
by A„ is undesirable, add inverter stage follow-
ing A„. Any number of additional channels can
be added. Programming pulses are applied to
inputs of A5, A6, and A7.— W. G. Jung, "1C Op-

Amp Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianap-
olis, IN, 1974, p 419-421.
DATA MULTIPLEXER/DECODER— CD4013A number of input channels can be added by ex- being sampled by sample-and-hold decoder.
flip-flop switches channel opamps alternately tending circuit. At receiving end, one CA3080A Either output of flip-flop can be used to trigger
to transmission line under control of -5 V clock variable opamp is used as mono MVBR to pro- MVBR. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," RCA
pulses for multiplexing of inputs to line. Any vide 10-jts delay for Input signal to settle before Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 15.
586
8kHz , -15V
7493 9 + 15V
CLOCK 1-kFlz COMB FILTER — DG508 eight-channel
n GND
CMOS multiplexer is used in comb filter having
fundamental frequency of 1 kHz. Sampling ac-
N'8 D A0A,A2 En Vj V2 tion provides response at each harmonic mul-
o.1-imfJ_J__LJ._LJ_J.J_
1,1 ITTTTTT
tiple except at 8 and 16 kHz (no response at Nf0
-XTjSj DG508 S,
T or 2Nf0). Used in selective filtering of periodic
signals from background of nonperiodic noise
+ VDO
interference. 7493 TTL binary counter provides

r^L Vout
necessary 3-bit binary count sequence from 8-
kHz clock. Q is 50. — "Analog Switches and Their
INPUT BUFFER
OUTPUT BUFFER Applications," Siliconix, Santa Clara, CA, 1976,
AMPLIFIER (OPTIONAL)
AMPLIFIER
p 5-17-5-18.
COMMUTATING BANDPASS FILTER— CD4051 quency. Can be tuned by varying commutating

analog multiplexer serves for commutation and frequency.— J. Tracy, CMOS Offers New Ap-
switching of eight low-pass filter sections. Mul- proach to Commutating Filters, EDN Magazine,
tiplexer isdriven by CD4024 binary counter that Feb. 5, 1974, p 94-95.
is clocked at 8 times desired 1 00-kHz center fre-
+ 12 V
BFO MULTIPLEXER — Signal 455-kHz multi-

mode detection system using RCA CD4001AE
quad NOR gate functions as upper-sideband or
lower-sideband crystal oscillator, tunable BFO
6
12 V for CW, or limiter of IF signal for FM or synchro-
2, analog input 2 goes to output. Eight-channel nous AM reception. Desired oscillator or limiter
ANALOG SWITCH — Circuit using Signetics 511 analog multiplex switch can be formed by com- is gated on by grounding its digital control line
transistor array provides digital selection of bining four 511 analog switches with Signetics with SI A. Multimode reception occurs when
either of two analog signals. When logic input 8250 binary-to-octal decoder. Analog signals up multiplexed output of oscillators and limiter is
at left is zero, signal at analog input 1 goes to to 200 kHz are switched without amplitude deg- applied to product detector. — J. Regula, BFO
output and other analog input signal is rejected. radation.— "Signetics Analog Data Manual," Multiplexer for a Multimode Detector, Ham
Similarly, when logic 0 is applied to logic input Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 753-754. Radio, Oct. 1975, p 52-55.
MULTIPLEXER CIRCUITS 587
64-CHANNEL TWO-LEVEL — Two-level multi- high state, DG181 analog switch fed by it turns
plexing system increases effective switching off and corresponding DM7493 4-bit binary
speeds when transmitting 64 analog signals on counter is triggered to next address state for
single transmission line. Four clock phases are sampling of that input channel at output. Reset
generated with DM7473 2-bit counter that tog- is used to set system for starting on first chan-
gles on high-to-low clock edge. DM7400 NAND nel when power is applied. — "Analog Switches
gates decodeflip-fl op outputs into required four and Their Applications," Siliconix, Santa Clara,
clock phases. As clock phase goes from low to
CA, 1976, p 7-11-7-13.
S61
19 V, GND VREF V2
,°
|
VCC siO— -
Bin
02
r02
'01
Ap At a2 a3 en
INVERTERS: I17 11 6 15 114 11 8
A
DM7404
B
DM7493
i Vee
D
ol|
^20-—
Gnd
V, gndvrefv2
i l
iJ
S6 0p^
5V '
14 MUX2
j 0 DG506
Vj DM7473
1
CLOCK
IN
Aq At A2 A3 EN
—
3 K 0 12 15 14 18
11
CLEAR Gnd R... VCC „ 9 +5 V
8 m"7 ’
,20^
NC
15 V
r01 r02 Gnd
’
l
i. 6<f
■o
|
01 |ON |
1 1o*l bin
1
°2
ON
[orj
“
1
J
ON 1
I
1 1 A
_ VCC
DM7493 B
ON
r01 r02 D
’1 I3 .
Gnd
_L
*
588
R5
WIDEBAND DIFFERENTIAL-INPUT— Circuit de-

sign using PN4392 FET switches driven by
2N5457 general-purpose FETs allows handling
of high-frequency signals at toggle rates up to
1 MHz for multiplexing to any desired number
of channels. — "FET Databook," National Semi-
15V -15V
FOUR-CHANNEL DIFFERENTIAL— Low-speed cuit. Timing is provided by MM5863 12-bit A/D clock frequency depends on required accuracy
high-accuracy data acquisition unit acquires an- converter and lower MM74C74 flip-flop. Upper and minimum zeroing time of instrumentation
alog input signal differentially with LF13509 1C two flip-flops form 2-bit up counter for channel amplifier. — "MOS/LSI Databook," National
and preconditions it through LF352 instrumen- select. Instrumentation amplifier is zeroed at Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 5-2-5-
tation amplifier having automatic zeroing cir- power-up and after each conversion. Maximum 22.
MULTIPLEXER CIRCUITS S89
64-CHANNEL TWO-LEVEL HIGH-SPEED— Four switched to next address line; this shortens
DG506 16-channel multiplexers serve for first overall system transition time from 1.5 /jis to
multiplexer level, and two DG304 high-speed 0.25 /l>s. Two-level system also lowers output
dual analog switches serve in second level for node capacitance and output leakage. CMOS
switching DG506 outputs to single output of
digital logic controls entire system. — "Analog
multiplexer. As one multiplexer is being sam- Switches and Their Applications," Siliconix,
pled at output, other multiplexers are being Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 7-82-7-84.
+ 15 V NC -15 V
590
8-CHANNEL CRO MULTIPLEXER— Simple

adapter converts any single-trace oscilloscope
into professional 8-channel model by multiplex-
ing eight input signals into one output for ver-
tical amplifier. Discrete voltages are picked off
resistor divider chain sequentially and added to
digital input signal so trace is shifted fast
enough to produce eight individual traces. Ad-
dressing for 74151 digital multiplexer requires
3 bits of binary code to address all eight chan-
nels in sampling sequence. As each channel is
sampled, its logic level (1 or 0) appears at pin 5
of 74151 for feed to vertical input of CRO. De-
veloped fortroubleshooting in digital circuits. —
W. J. Prudhomme, Build an Eight Channel Mul-
tiplexer for Your Scope, Kilobaud, April 1977, p
29-32.
quentially into 8-bit successive-approximation MHz,throughputrateis31,250samplespersec-

switch provides second-level multiplexing by A/D converter. Technique makes throughput ond per channel. — "FET Databook," National
accepting outputs of each LF13508 eight-chan- rate of system independent of analog switch Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 5- 79-
nel multiplexer and feeding these outputs se- speed. With maximum clock frequency of 4.5 5-80.
591
15V 15V
16-CHANNEL SIMPLIFIED SEQUENTIAL MUL-

TIPLEXING— Two National LF13508 eight-chan-
nel multiplexers are connected so enable pins
are used to disconnect one multiplexer while
the other is sampling. Any number of eight-
channel multiplexers can be connected in
this way if speed is not prime system require-
ment.— "FET Databook,'' National Semicon-
EIGHT-CHANNEL MUX/DEMUX— Provides for opamp for driving readout. Similar DG508 at chronization. 15-V reset pulse superimposed
monitoring of all eight channels continuously at transmitter feeds inputs over single-wire line on 5-V clock pulses keeps channels
remote location instead of scanning channels at under control of MM74C90 presettable decade synchronized. — "Analog Switches and Their
receiver. Each output of DG508 eight-channel counter which also feeds pulse train over sep- Applications," Siliconix, Santa Clara, CA, 1976,
analog multiplexer in receiver feeds its own arate channel to receiver for timing and syn-
p 7-71-7-74.
+ 15 V
TWO-CHANNEL LOGIC-CONTROLLED— Two

CA3080A operational transconductance ampli-
fiers are programmed on and off alternately by
control logic, for multiplexing two inputs each
up to ±5 V into single output. When control line
Ec is high or 1, input 1 appears at output; for
logic 0, input 2 appears at output. Both channels
operate at unity gain. Control logic is TTL-com-
patible. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook,"
462.
FOUR-CHANNEL ANALOG MULTIPLEXER—

Buffered input and output provide very high
input impedance and low output impedance for
analog signal selection or time-division multi-
plexing with Harris HA-2400/HA-2405 1C that
combines functions of analog switch and high-
performance opamp. Bandwidth is about 8
MHz. Signal is fed back from output to digitally
selected input channel to place that channel in
voltage-follower configuration with noninvert-
ing unity gain. — "Linear 8< Data Acquisition
Products," Harris Semiconductor. Melbourne,
FL, Vol. 1, 1977, p 7-36-7-38 (Application Note
514).
WATER-LEAK ISOLATOR — Master indicator gate is water sensor, second is inverter, and last and C is in farads. CP value in farads should be
monitors large number of two-electrode water- two form astable MVBR. When sensing elec- 1/1000 of lowest frequency used by detectors.
leak detectors simultaneously, with each detec- trodes are dry, resistance between them is L in henrys is about 1/600 of lowest frequency. —
tor indicating presence of water by producing above 500K and MVBR is disabled. When water F. E. Hinkle, Multiplexed Detectors Isolate
unique tone signal. Only two wires are needed drops resistance below 100K, MVBR oscillates Water Leaks, Electronics, Dec. 11, 1975, p lie-
117.
between detectors and master indicator unit. at audio frequency determined by its RC time
Each detector location has quad NOR gate. First constant, equal to 1/1.4RC where R is in ohms
MULTIPLEXER CIRCUITS 593
TIME-MULTIPLEXING TWO FM CHANNELS—

Digital programming capability of Exar XR-215
PLL 1C makes possible time-multiplexing de-
modulator between two FM channels, at 1.0
and 1.1 MHz. Channel-select logic signal is ap-
plied to pin 10, and both input channels are ap-
plied simultaneously to PLL input pin 4. —
"Phase-Locked Loop Data Book," Exar Inte-
grated Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 21-28.
THREE-CHANNEL FOR DATA— Each input

channel uses CA3060 variable opamp as high-
impedance voltage follower driving output
MOSFET serving as buffer and power amplifier.
Cascade arrangement of opamps with MOSFET
provides open-loop voltage gain in excess of
100 dB. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs,"
p 16.
STROBE 'ON'. 1 -H5V

STROBE OFF' —I L_|5V
N-PATH FILTER
1-kHz N-PATH NOTCH FILTER— Combination of width of 0.75 Hz at 1 kHz. Low-pass filter intro- nents in original signal to produce desired notch
DG508 eight-channel CMOS multiplexer with duces 180° phase shift at 1 kHz. Amplifier sums characteristic. — "Analog Switches and Their
low-pass and bandpass active filters provides 1- original signal in phase-shifted bandpass out- Applications," Siliconix, Santa Clara, CA, 1976,
kHz notch filter having Q of 1 330 and 3-dB band- put from N-path filter, canceling 1-kHz compo-
p 5-18-5-20.
ALL PULLUP
RESISTORS 1.2k
MULTIPLEXING BCD SWITCHES— Multiplexing outputs of low-cost single-pole decade input address determines which decade switch
technique reduces number of interconnections switches are paralleled, with wiper arm con- is addressed, and switch position then deter-
between thumbwheel switches and counters, nections being brought out separately. Parallel mines which encoder NAND gates are acti-
displays, or industrial control equipment being outputs are fed into simple encoder using four vated.— E. Breeze, Putting the "Thumb" on
programmed remotely. Ten decades of BCD NAND gates to generate 4-bit BCD output code. Thumbwheel Switch Multiplexing, EDN Maga-
zine, Aug. 1, 1972, p 56.
switches require only 10 interconnections, as Wiper of each switch is addressed from active
compared to 50 without multiplexing. All 10 low open -co Ilector decoder. In operation, 3-bit
CHAPTER 55
Multiplier Circuits
Opamps and analog-multiplier ICs are used separately or together to provide

a variety of operations involving multiplication, including analog product,
square, square root, root-sum-square, difference of squares, trigonometric
approximations, and vector sum. See also Frequency Divider, Frequency
Multiplier, and Logarithmic chapters.
A2 - B2 — Transfer function Vour = (A2 - B2)/10

is easily generated by AD534 analog multiplier.
Differential inputs on Z terminals permit addi-
tion of feedback attenuator to decrease scale
factor (or increase signal gain) from 40 to nom-
inal value of 10. Feedback attenuation increases
output offset proportionally; to make offset ad-
justment, connect 4.7-megohm resistor be-
tween Z, and wiper of 50K pot connected across
power supplies. — R. Frantz, Analog Mul-
tipliers— New 1C Versions Manipulate Real-
World Phenomena with Ease, EDN Magazine,
Sept. 5, 1977, p 125-129.
X Y + Z CIRCUIT — Developed for controlling am-

plitude of video signal from photodiode t "•
over 2 to 1 range. Circuit provides 3-dB band-
width of 3 MHz, using CA3046 transistor array
combined with LM318 opamp connected as an-
alog divider, with half of 747 opamp serving as
current source. Article covers initial adjust-
ments of circuit. Basic circuit may be used as full
XYtZ multiply/divide element with differential
bipolar signals on one numerator input. — A. R.
Kopp, An Analog Multiplier/Divider Circuit, EDN
Magazine, May 5, 1 973, p 74-75.
595
596
vcc+ - s v
PRECISION SQUARER — Circuit using differen-

tial comparator 1C accepts input from TTL and
delivers square of input signal voltage to out-
put. Adjust 30K pot to set clamp level.— "The

1973, p 6-16.
LINEARIZING X INPUT — Adding resistors as

shown to 1C transconductance multiplier gives
major improvement in X-input linearization. Ar-
ticle gives adjustment procedure. SMILE and
FROWN terminal notes refer to X feedthrough
pattern observed on CRO during setup, telling
which position requires addition of RSEL resis-
t°r. — L. Counts, Reduce Multiplier Errors by up
to an Order of Magnitude, EDN Magazine,
March 20, 1974, p 65-68.
Tr i Tr2
2N3707 2N3707
MULTIPLIER/DIVIDER — Combination opamp-

transistor circuit may be used for either multi-
plication or division. All signals must be of same
polarity (positive). For multiplication, use in-
puts e, and e3. For division, use e, and e2, with
e3 being adjusted to give desired scaling factor.
Log output at base of Tr2 is connected directly
to antilog circuit at base of Tr3. Article gives de-
sign equations. Circuit shown was developed to
measure current gain of PNP transistor over
range of operating currents. — G. B. Clayton, Ex-
periments with Operational Amplifiers, Wire-
less World, Feb. 1973, p 91-93.
MULTIPLIER CIRCUITS
597
DIVIDER/SQUARE-ROOTER— Modification of
multiplier circuit gives divider in which negative
output voltage is equal to 10 times ratio Ex/Ey.
E0=V/MOEtl
(Divider) To use as square-rooter for Ex, connect pins 4
and 9 together and omit R1 and R2 at Ey input.
(Square Rooter) Circuit uses multiplier block driving 741 current-

to-voltage converter. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp
1974, p 257-258.
Rt R2
APPROXIMATING SINES— Analog Devices 433

multiplier/divider 1C approximates sine of angle
to less than 0.25% in just two terms (one quad-
rant). Arrangement requires only single opamp.
Article gives analysis of theoretical errors and
shows error curve. — D. H. Sheingold, Approxi-
mate Analog Functions with a Low-Cost Multi-
plier/Divider, EDN Magazine, Feb. 5, 1973, p 50-
52.
SEL- SEL+ ANALOG DEVICES

r\ kj 426 OR 428
TYPICAL RANGE OF RA+R„ 25kS2TO 200kS2, 1%, METAL FILM RESISTOR
LINEARIZING MODULAR MULTIPLIER — Add- rough, decreases average nonlinearity, and cuts rors by up to an Order of Magnitude, EDN Mag-
ing three external resistors to conventional overall error in half. Article gives adjustment azine, March 20, 1974, p 65-68.
transconductance multiplier reduces feedth- procedure. — L. Counts, Reduce Multiplier Er-
-15V +15V
ROOT-SUM-SQUARED — Vector summation

circuit uses AD531 variable-gain analog multi-
plier. Starting with trimpots centered and input
VB grounded, apply specified DC voltages to
input VA and adjust trimpots for output speci-
fied in table. — R. Frantz, Analog Multipliers —
New 1C Versions Manipulate Real-World Phe-
nomena with F.ase, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5,
1977, p 125-129.
VA
V2— V V=V2 + V2 — V V
a ’out v b a vb voutvb
IV
'out 2|1 = v2
VA + v2
VB VOUT
IVoutI= V VA2 + VBZ = ROOT SUM SQUARED (RSSI
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
ADJUST
STEP
SYMMETRY,
1 +10.0V, -10.0V +EQUAL
1.0V OUTPUTS FOR ± IN
symmetry2
2 + 1.0V, -1.0V EQUAL OUTPUTS FOR ±IN
3 + 1.0V OFFSET
+ 10.0V + 10.0V
4
GAIN
+ 15 V
-iovsv,stiov
-10 VSVy S+10 V
FOUR-QUADRANT WITH OPAMP LEVEL duced by 10:1 attenuation networks, and dif- -10 V and +10 V. Frequency limit of circuit is
SHIFT — Connections shown for Motorola ferential output voltage is fed to opamp having about 50 kHz for signal swings approaching ±10
MC1595L linear four-quadrant multiplier are closed-loop gain of 10. Resulting output is still V. — E. Renschler, "Analysis and Basic Opera-
used in applications requiring level shift to V„Vy/10, which appears single-ended above tion of the MCI 595," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z,
1975, AN-489, p 9.
ground reference. Common-mode voltage is re- ground reference. Each input can be between
MULTIPLIER CIRCUITS 599
12k
APPROXIMATING COSINES— Analog Devices term of cosine f> plus a linear term and a con-
433 multiplier/divider 1C approximates cosine of stant term, as described in article. — D. H. Shein- PHASE-SENSITIVE DETECTOR— Circuit using
angle to better than 1%, by computing nonin- gold. Approximate Analog Functions with a single opamp produces DC output proportional
tegral exponents. Only one opamp is needed. Low-Cost Multiplier/Divider, EDN Magazine, to both amplitude of AC input signal and cosine
Approximation uses arbitrary exponent as one Feb. 5, 1973, p 50-52. of its phase angle relative to reference signal.
Can be used as synchronous rectifier in chop-
per-type DC amplifier or for accurate measure-
ment of small AC signals obscured by noise.
Article gives design equations. — G. B. Clayton,
Experiments with Operational Amplifiers, Wire-
less World, July 1973, p 355-356.
MSB LSB 5.0KS1
TWO-QUADRANT — Bipolar digital multiplier and D. Soderquist, "Differential and Multiplying

has output polarity controlled by offset-binary- Digital to Analog Converter Applications," Pre-
coded digital input word. Precision Monolithics cision Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-
DAC-08 D/A converter drives OP-02 opamp. Out- 19, p 2.
put is symmetrical about ground. — J. Schoeff
H5 00V
FOUR-QUADRANT MULTIPLYING DAC— Com-

bination oftwo Precision Monolithics DAC-08 Dl
A converters accepts differential input voltage
and produces differential current output. Out-

put opamp is not normally required. Output an-
alog polarity is controlled by analog input ref-
erence or by offset-binary digital input word.
Common-mode current present at output must
be accommodated by balanced load. Differen-
tial input range is 10 V. — J. Schoeff and D. Sod-
erquist, "Differential and Multiplying Digital to
Analog Converter Applications," Precision
600
FOUR-QUADRANT WITHOUT LEVEL SHIFT—

CA3060 three-opamp array provides four-quad-
rant multiplication without level shift between
input and output. Circuit includes adjustments
associated with differential input and adjust-
ment for equalizing gains of amplifiers 1 and 2.
Amplifier 3 is connected as unity-gain
inverter. — "Linear Integrated Circuits and MOS/
NJ, 1977, p 153.
+ 32 V
APPROXIMATING VECTOR SUMS— Combina- computing square root of sum of squares. — D.

tion of two opamps and Analog Devices 433 H. Sheingold, Approximate Analog Functions
multiplier/divider 1C provides output voltage with a Low-Cost Multiplier/Divider, EDN Mag-
equal to vector sum of two input voltages, by azine, Feb. 5, 1973, p 50-52.
100K 10K
-15 V vx — Offset Adjust
FOUR-QUADRANT— Motorola MC1595L linear

four-quadrant multiplier takes two different
input voltages, each between - lOVand +10 V,
and gives output equal to one-tenth of their
product. Circuit can be operated in either AC or
ANALOG MULTIPLIER — Multiplier and ampli- output. Single-ended output is at ground DC mode. Design and setup procedures are
fier sections of Exar XR-S200 PLL 1C are com- level. — "Phase-Locked Loop Data Book," Exar given. — E. Renschler, "Analysis and Basic Op-
bined to perform analog multiplication without Integrated Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 9- eration of the MC1595," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
16. 1975, AN-489, p 8.
need for DC level shifting between input and
OUTPUT LEVEL SHIFTER — Transistors con-

nected to Motorola MC1595L linear four-quad-
rant multiplier perform level shifting for appli-
cations requiring output having ground
reference. Temperature sensitivity of circuit is
minimized by using complementary transistors
in same package, such as MD6100, in place of
upper two transistors. If high output impedance
and low current drive are drawbacks, opamp
can be connected as source-follower output
stage. — E. Renschler, "Analysis and Basic Op-
eration ofthe MC1595," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
1975, AN-489, p 10.
+ 15V
AC-COUPLED MULTIPLICATION— Combina-

tion of Precision Monolithics REF-02 voltage
reference and DAC-08 D/A converter uses com-
pensation capacitor terminal Cc as input. With
full-scale input code, output V0 is flat to above
200 kHz and 3 dB down at 1 MHz, for multiplying
applications far beyond audio range. Circuit has
high input impedance, as often required to
avoid loading high source impedance. Dynamic
range is greater than 40 dB. — J. Schoeff and D.
Soderquist, "Differential and Multiplying Digi-
tal to Analog Converter Applications," Precision
+ 10.00V
BIPOLAR ANALOG TWO-QUADRANT— Bipolar

reference voltage for upper Precision Monolith-
ics DAC-08 D/A converter modulates reference
current by ± 1 .0 mA around quiescent current of
1.1 mA. Lower DAC-08 has same 1.1-mA refer-
ence current and effectively subtracts out quies-
cent 1.1 mA of upper reference current at all
input codes since voltage across R3 varies be-
tween -10 V and 0 V. Output voltage E0 is thus
product of digital input word and bipolar analog
reference voltage. — J. Schoeff and D. Soder-
quist, "Differential and Multiplying Digital to
Analog Converter Applications," Precision
V,
N
30k 62k
— n/W —
11
12 7 8
10
- 10 pF MCI 594
MCI 494
510
15
6 5 14
1 6k * +15V -15V
SQUARING CKT.
ADJUSTMENTS
R, - INPUT OFFSET
R2 - OUTPUT OFFSET
R3 - GAIN
R4 - GAIN
R5 - INPUT OFFSET AVERAGING CKT
Rc - OUTPUT OFFSET
SQUARING FOR RMS — Combination of two opamp for conversion to voltage and for aver- P-P; for other ranges, input scaling can be used.
MCI 594 multipliers and two opamps gives RMS aging by means of capacitor in feedback path. Since direct coupling is used, output voltage in-
detector for squaring instantaneous input val- Second opamp is used with second multiplier cludes DC components of input. Maximum
ues, averaging over time interval, then taking as feedback element for taking square root. input frequency is about 600 kHz, and accuracy
square root to give RMS value of input wave- Technique eliminates thermal response time is about 1%. — K. Huehne and D. Aldridge, True
form. First multiplier, used to square input drawback of most other RMS measuring cir- RMS Measurements Using 1C Multipliers, EDN
waveform, delivers output current to first cuits. Input voltage range for circuit is 2 to 10 V Magazine, March 20, 1973, p 85-86.
APPROXIMATING ARC TANGENTS— Analog

Devices 433 multiplier/divider 1C approximates
arc tangent to 0.75%. Article presents mathe-
matical basis for approximation used. — D. H.
Sheingold, Approximate Analog Functions with
a Low-Cost Multiplier/Divider, EDN Magazine,
Feb. 5, 1973, p 50-52.
-15V +15 V
FOUR-QUADRANT MULTIPLIER/SQUARER—
Basic 1595 multiplier block and 741 current-to-
voltage converter convert input voltages Ex and
E, to output equal to one-tenth of their product
when connected as shown for multiplier use. To
operate as squarer of E„, connect pins 4 and 9
together and omit Rs and R6 at Ey input. Output
is then one-tenth of square of E„. — W. G. Jung,
5% 5%
LEVEL SHIFTER WITH HIGH CURRENT DRIVE— plier, to improve current drive capabilities. Out- from each side of paralleled pots. — E. Ren-
Motorola MC1539 opamp is used as source-fol- put voltage is in range of ±10 V. Input offset schler, "Analysis and Basic Operation of the
lower output stage for three-transistor level adjusting circuits are lOKpots in series with 10K MCI 595," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1975, AN-489,
shifter of MC1595L linear four-quadrant multi- resistors between ±15 V, with IK to ground
604
BROADBAND MIXER — Uses Tektronix M084 150 MHz. Current-gain ceil in multiplier takes local oscillator signal. — M. Jaffe, Build a Low-
multiplier as broadband mixer having linear advantage of logarithmic relationship between Cost Wideband Mixer with a Monolithic Multi-
output within -3 dB limit from 2 MHz to above current and voltage in a semiconductor. Output plier, EDN Magazine, May 20, 1975, p 63-64.
CHAPTER 56
Multivibrator Circuits
Includes circuits in which one section is cut off when the other conducts. In an
astable or free-running MVBR, frequency of spontaneous transition is
determined by time and/or external control voltage. In a monostable MVBR,
external trigger signal forces circuit into unstable state, with circuit constants
determining time for return to stable state. In a bistable MVBR or flip-flop,
external trigger is required for each transition. Use chiefly for generating
square-wave pulses and signals.
1-/xs PULSE — Monostable MVBR converts neg-

ative-going event signal into pulses having
standardized width of about 1 fj.s, inverted by
Q3 for use as input to counter. — T. E. Hutchin- IT
son, Inexpensive Decimal Counting Unit, 73
Magazine, Jan. 1974, p 47-51.
“L_
MONOSTABLE MULTIVIBRATOR
v+
r
*t, = R,, Ct Timing Diagram

)
U2 = R,'2 C,*2
3 .3
13 — - R . C,
t3
Output 1 ~ | i r
T = t, + t: + tj
CHAINED (=: 322

ASTABLES — Cross-connected sum of three individual periods, after which give values of R and Cfortiming periods ranging
mono MVBRs, operating as astables. are inter- cycle repeats itself. Chain may be extended fur- from 10 fjkS to several minutes. — W. G. Jung,
connected so individual timing periods are gen- ther if desired. Useful when prescribed se- "1C Timer Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indi-
erated in sequence as shown. Total period T is quence of timing events is required. Equations anapolis, IN, 1977, p 125-128.
605
606
-)h
O.l^F
OUTPUT
-)h-
0 imf
1 °-
be in range of-3t^
to 15 V. Serves as compact low-
CRYSTAL MONO USING IMVERTERS— Uses all power portable RF oscillator having low battery
three sections of CD4049 triple inverter, with drain. — W. J. Prudhomme, CMOS Oscillators,
series-resonant crystal connection. Supply can 73 Magazine , July 1977, p 60-63.
20-kHz ASTABLE — Single-capacitor circuit is re-

liable over wide range of temperatures, volt-
ages, and transistor gains. Frequency varies
only by 0.05% for supply voltage changes be-
tween 6 and 12 V. Timing can be changed with
1k R,, R2, and C. Duty cycle depends on ratio of R3
to R4, and is 50% for values shown . — C. Horwitz,
Tolerant Astable Circuits, Wireless World, Feb.
1975, p 93.
♦vcc
FOUR-GATE MONO — NAND-gate mono using T is 350 C. Input pulse widths over 30 ns can
Texas Instruments SN7400 package provides initiate output. C can be 100 pF to 100 j*F. — J.
cleaner, more stable output. Feedback resistor E. McAlister, Single NAND Package Improves
eliminates tendency to oscillate. Output pulse One-Shot, EEE Magazine, Aug. 1970, p 78.
width T is equal to 1.3 RC; when R is 270 ohms.
554 MONO — Uses one section of 554 quad

monostable timer, connected to give output
pulse for negative-going trigger pulse. Width of
output pulse in seconds is equal to RC. Trigger
must be narrower than output pulse. VCC is
4.5-16 V at 3-10 mA.-H. M. Berlin, 1C Timer
Review, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1978, p 40-45.
+ 15V
PINS 1 AND 16 ARE GND

PIN 8 IS -5.2Vdc
BYPASS PIN 8 TO GND WITH 0.1 /jF
. "I-! i i i— i r
. I I I I 1_
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED MONO— Timing pe-

riod of opamp operating as monostable multi-
vibrator iscontrolled by magnitude of DC ref-
erence voltage. With square-wave input shown,
BIDIRECTIONAL MONO — Requires only one 1C, resistor to threshold, then the other. Output differentiating action by C,-R, gives positive
three resistors, and one capacitor. Will trigger gates are tied together to form common output. pulses that cause mono to make transitions.
on both positive- and negative-going transi- Width of pulse is defined by values of compo- Article gives design equation and typical wave-
tions, as required in critical timing applications nents.— W. A. Palm, Bidirectional ECL One-Shot forms.— G. B. Clayton, Experiments with Op-
involving pulses narrower than 50 ns. Capacitor Uses a Single 1C, EDN Magazine, Jan. 5, 1977, erational Amplifiers, Wireless World, May 1973,
alternately discharges through one pulldown
p 41-42. p 241-242.
607
MULTIVIBRATOR CIRCUITS
+ 15V
TRIGGERED BISTABLE — Positive feedback ap-

plied to opamp through R2 and R, causes am-
plifier output to remain at either its positive or
negative saturation limit. Triggering pulses for
changing state of output may be applied to
either input terminal, through C, or C2; pulse
polarity required to produce transition depends
on state of circuit, which should be verified ex-
perimental y.— G. B. Clayton, Experiments with
Operational Amplifiers, Wireless World, May
1973, p 241-242.
wA723
15-s ASTABLE — Precision opamp/diode clamp A2 provides oscillator with reference voltage V3
circuit simulating zener reduces cost of astable halfway between V, and V2. R2 allows frequency
multivibrator having long time constant and of oscillator to be adjusted about ±6%. Article
good temperature stability. Circuit operates gives design equations. — L. Drake, Long Time-
from single-ended supply, with /tA723 provid- Constant Oscillator Uses Precision Clamps,
ing 7-V reference for clamp amplifiers A3 and A4. EDN Magazine, Dec. 20, 1974, p 51-52.
VERSATILE MONO — Uses standard digital 1C

voltage levels as inputs, and can be enabled or
inhibited at any time without causing output
pulse. Input gate Q3-Q4 is enabled with logic 1
at point A and inhibited with logic 0. Logic 1 at
B starts timing cycle. Q, is 2N3819 JFET, and all
other transistors are 2N3704. — R. Tenny, Ver-
satile One-Shot, EEE Magazine, Sept. 1970, p
89.
♦ vcc
0.01 Hz to 7 MHz — Generates square waves the required period and add bistable SN7474 POSITIVE-OUTPUT MONO — Timer is triggered
suitable for clock signals in sequential digital divider as shown by dashed line. — P. J. Best, by negative-going pulse to give positive output
circuits, with values of RC pairs determining pe- Monostable Ring Oscillator, Wireless World, pulse whose width t in seconds is 1.1RC. VCC
riod in range from about 150 ns to 120 s. To ob- March 1976, p 89.
is 4.5-16 V at 3-10 mA.-H. M. Berlin, 1C Timer
tain equal mark-space ratio, set oscillator to half Review, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1978, p 40-45.
PWM MONO — Circuit provides pulse-width

modulation with high duty cycles and comple-
mentary output. Strobe input to gate G, drives
output of gate to binary 0, turning Q, off and let-
ting voltage across C, build up until U JT Q, fires,
discharging C,. Output of UJT drives output of
G2 to binary 0. Article gives timing diagrams. —
G. Lewis, Simple One Shot Has Complementary
Outputs, EEE Magazine, Oct. 1970, p 78-79.
VARIABLE PULSE WIDTH— R, and C2 together

provide wide range of pulse widths from Mo-
torola MC851P mono. Rise and fall times of
complementary output pulses are better than
100 /us. With only four switched capacitors in
combination with R, , pulse widths can be varied
between maximum of 4.5 ms and minimum
well under 4.5 /us. — C. W. Stoops, Wide-Range
Vcc
Variable Pulse-Width Monostable, EEE Maga-
zine, Dec. 1970, p 56.
LOW-POWER TTL MONO — Simple monostable

circuit using DM74L03 draws only 800-/uA
standby current yet delivers pulses up to 1 s
wide. Uses RC time control and regenerative
feedback, with values of C2 and C3 determining
frequency. Pulse width increases from 0.1 s to
0.55 s as C2 and C3 are increased from 10 gf to
60 fiF. — C. Gilbert and C. Davis, LPTTL One-Shot
Yields Wide, Clean Pulses, EDN IEEE Magazine,
May 15, 1971, p 47-48.
(for very long pulses)
LOW OUTPUT FOR POWER-ON— Logic signal

controls both turn-on and turnoff of 555 timer
used as oscillator. When input signal at cathode
of CR2 goes low, oscillator remains off and out-
put at pin 3 is low. When input goes high, os-
cillator starts with its first state low so there are
no initial pulse errors. — K. D. Dighe, Rearranged
Components Cut 555's Initial-Pulse Errors, EDN
Magazine, Jan. 5, 1978, p 82 and 84.
MULTIVIBRATOR CIRCUITS
609
DUAL-EDGE TRIGGERING— Although 9602

multivibrator 1C can be triggered normally
either on leading or falling edge of square wave,
but not on both, addition of two resistors and
one capacitor provides double-edge triggering.
When input goes low, negative-going pulse
through C, triggers 9602 and makes it deliver
one output pulse. When input goes high again,
high-going pulse is delivered directly to pin 12
of 9602, triggering it again so it produces an-
other pulse. — J. P. Yang, Circuit Triggers One-
Shot on Both Edges of Square Wave, EDN Mag-
azine, Nov. 15, 1972, p 49.
PULSE-WIDTH DETECTOR— Connections as

shown for 555 timer give output only if trigger
pulse width is greater than time constant (t2 =
1.1R,Ct) of mono MVBR circuit. Q, is normally
off. Pin 2 of 555 is then high. At start of trigger
pulse, output at point C is low. Positive trigger
drives Q, on for time determined by R,C,, feed-
ing negative-going pulse to trigger pin 2. Timer
then acts as normal mono, driving Q2 on fortime
t2. If input pulse is still high at end of t2, it ap-
pears at output D since Q2 is now off. Output
pulse width is thus equal to input trigger width
less 1.1R,Ct. For greater accuracy, insert delay
between point A and R4 equal to inherent pro
pagation delay of timer. — S. Sarpangal, Build a
Pulse-Width Detector with a 555 Timer, EDN
Magazine, Oct. 5, 1977, p 93 and 96.
2-Hz ASTABLE PULSER— Single-capacitor cir-

cuit operates at very low duty cycles, in range
4 - 4 OpF
OOOI^F
of 10% to 1%. Battery drain is low because off
-tf-
current is about 1 /xA for 50-mA on current. R2
— )( ►OUTPUT
and C determine on time, while R, and C set off
!80pF
time. Circuit pulses about twice per second,
-)l-
I. which is suitable for animal temperature and
rt
heart-rate studies. Can be used with implanted
CRYSTAL WITH NOR GATES— Uses two sec- with exact frequency depending on values used transmitters operating from single mercury
tions of CD4001 quad NOR gate to give mono for R and C. — W. J. Prudhomme, CMOS Oscil- button cell for more than one year with suitable
multivibrator operating in frequency range lators, 73 Magazine, July 1977, p 60-63. resistor values. — C. Horwitz, Tolerant Astable
from 10 kHz up to top limit of about 10 MHz, Circuits, Wireless World, Feb. 1975, p 93.
610
NEGATIVE-OUTPUT MONO— Timer is wired to pin is momentarily grounded, output returns to MICROPOWER MONO— Uses Exar XR-L555
give negative output pulse
for positive-going stable state. VCC is 4.5-16 V at 3-10 mA.-H. having typical power dissipation of only 900 pW
input trigger pulse. Width of output pulse in sec- M. Berlin, 1C Timer Review, 73 Magazine , Jan. at 5 V, serving as direct replacement for 555
onds is 1.1RC. Input pulse
must be narrower 1978, p 40-45. timer in micropower circuits. Time delay is con-
than desired output pulse width. When reset trolled by one external resistor and one capac-
itor (R„ and C) which determine output pulse
duration. Can be triggered or reset on falling
waveform. Output will drive TTL circuits or
source up to 50 mA.— "Timer Data Book," Exar

Integrated Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978 p 7-
Vcc(+ 5 TO + 15V)
♦VCC
8.
555 ASTABLE — Produces repetitive rectangular

output at frequency equal to 1.443/(R, + 2R2)C
hertz. Duty cycle is determined by values of R,
ASTABLE OSCILLATOR — Circuit for astable op- RcC3. Free-running period is sum of these time and R2; R2 must be much larger than R, to obtain
eration of 555 timer provides completely inde- constants. — J. P. Carter, Astable Operation of nearly a 50% duty cycle. Normal range for duty
pendent ON and OFF times. Time constant for 1C Timers Can Be Improved, EDN Magazine, cycle is 51 to 99%. VCC is 4.5-16 V at 3-10
one mode is 1.1 RcC2 and for other mode is 1.1 June 20, 1973, p 83. mA.— H. M. Berlin, 1C Timer Review, 73 Maga-
zine, Jan. 1978, p 40-45.
LOW-POWER MONO — 555 timer provides low-

drain monostable operation suitable for inter-
facing with CMOS 401 1 B NAND gates. Standby
drain is less than 50 /xA. When mono is on, cur-
rent drawn is 4.5 mA for pulse duration of T =
1.1RC.— "Signetics Analog Data Manual," Sig-

netics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 733.
MULTIVIBRATOR CIRCUITS 611
1 Hz TO 1 MHz — Opamp-based astable MVBR

generates square waves over extremely wide
range, with suitable changes in circuit values.
RCA 3130 opamp has CMOS output stage for
driving either 5-V TTL or 10-15 V CMOS logic
stages directly. Values are for 100 Hz. Rt and Ct
can be readily scaled for different ranges. To
control symmetry, replace R, with two resistors
in series with reverse-connected diodes as at
lower right. — W. Jung, An 1C Op Amp Update,
Ham Radio, March 1978, p 62-69.
+ 15 V
PROGRAMMABLE ASTABLE— 4016 CMOS an-

alog switch selects 1.5-megohm timing resistor
Rt1 when control input line is high, to give neg-
ative-going 100-Hz output pulses. When input
is low, CMOS switch S2 is on, selecting 1 .2-meg-
ohm timing resistor R^ to give 120-Hz output. —
W. G. Jung, "IC Timer Cookbook," Howard W.
VARIABLE DUTY CYCLE— First section of Exar

XR-2556 dual timer operates as astable MVBR
whose frequency is equal to 1.44/(RA + 2RB)C1f
with output used to trigger timer 2 connected
in monostable mode. Time delay T2 of timer 2
is made less than period of timer 1 waveform,
so both timers have same frequency. Duty cycle
is determined by timing cycle of timer 2, ad-
justable from 1% to 99% with R2. Supply volt-
age is 4.5-16 V. — "Timer Data Book," Exar In-
tegrated Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 23-
30.
V+
INVERTED MONO — Connection shown for 555

timer accepts positive trigger pulses and deliv-
ers negative output pulses. Duty cycles above
99% are possible without jitter. Heavy loads can
be driven from pin 7 without loss of accuracy,
but excessive loading of pin 3 can affect timing
accuracy. Width of output pulse is 1 ms for val-
ues of Rt and Ct shown. Trigger must be held
below two-thirds of supply voltage for standby
and raised above two-thirds of supply momen-
tarily (not longer than pulse width) for trigger-
ing.— W. G. Jung, "IC Timer Cookbook," How-
ard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 89.
612
DIVIDING FOR SYMMETRY— 4013 dual D flip- quency half that of MVBR. — D. Lancaster,
flop is used as binary divider at output of astable "CMOS Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indian-
MVBR to give 50/50 symmetry for output fre- apolis, IN, 1977, p 232-234.
C2
MICROPOWER CLOCK — Free-running fre-

quency and duty cycle are controlled by RA, RB,
and C in astable MVBR connection of Exar XR-
L555 micropower equivalent of 555 timer. With
5-V supply, power dissipation is only 900 pW. —
"Timer Data Book," Exar Integrated Systems,
AC-COUPLED FLIP-FLOP — When leading edge vents trailing edge of first pulse from driving
of 2-V positive trigger pulse is applied to nega- opamp back into positive saturation. Value
tive input of 741 or equivalent opamp, this input shown for C2 should be increased if pulses are
becomes more positive than positive input and r2 :
longer than 50 ms — R. Melen and H. Garland,
opamp swings into negative saturation. This
"Understanding 1C Operational Amplifiers,"
condition is held by positive feedback until trail- Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 2nd Ed.,
ing edge of next trigger pulse makes opamp
1978, p 118-119.
swing back into positive saturation. C2 pre-
D,
4.7k <
(+5 to +15V)
► 4.7k
ENABLE O-
F
OF
1N914
;; < 1M
► Ri
TRIGGER V+
Q
< R«
JON
¥<>
FOR R,« Rf (OPEN COLLECTOR)
T = 1.1 R,Ct
(AS SHOWN, T= 1.1 SEC)
enable \.V-I
(OPTIONAL! U |
input— I ij
— w — u —
OUTPUT
BASIC 555 MONO — Circuit variation shown for describes operation in detail and points out pos-
original 1C timer prototype has same timing sible drawbacks, including possibility of timing TIMING-PULSE GENERATOR— Astable MVBR
equation and input trigger requirements for error for high duty cycle operation because C, uses CA3078 micropower opamp to develop
standard connection but provides two outputs takes longer to discharge than in conventional timing pulses for driving other low-power cir-
rather than one. This is achieved by using pin 7 monostable MVBR. — W. G. Jung, Take a Fresh cuits. Current drain is only about 2/aA from 1.5-
of 1C as an open-collector output that can be re- Look at New 1C Timer Applications, ED N Mag- VDC supply. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear
ferred to any supply voltage between 0 and + 1 5 azine, March 20, 1977, p 127-135. ICs,"
1977, RCA
p 4. Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ,
V regardless of voltage used for timer. Article
IOmF
RETRIGGERABLE MONO — Circuit provides

pulse widths up to 60 s, has short reset time,
and can be retriggered during timing cycle.
Pulse width is determined by C2, R3, R5, and R6.
If trigger pulse arrives while output of A, is high,
C2 discharges to its original triggered state for
initiating completely new timing cycle. — D.
Pantic, Retriggerable Monostable, EDNIEEE
Magazine, May 15, 1971, p 50.
TRIGGERED MVBR — Each trigger input pro-

duces fixed number of pulses, between 2 and 30
depending on setting of 1-megohm frequency
control. Monostable feeds gated astabie, both
realized with single CD4001 1C. Use dashed cir-
cuit with pushbutton for manual operation in
place of trigger pulse. — K. Padmanabhan, N-
Stable Multivibrator, Wireless World, April
1977, p 61.
MONOSTABLE GATE ASTABLE
01
1N914
MONO WITH NORMALLY ON LED— Connection

shown for three gates of 7400 quad NAND gate
inverts operating mode, so LED is normally on.
1C FLIP-FLOP DEMONSTRATOR— Demonstra- and off. Circuit is designed for Radio Shack 276- T rigger pulse at input extinguishes LED for time
tion circuit using RS7473 dual flip-flop incor- 041 or equivalent red LEDs. If clock is omitted, determined by R1 and Cl while making gates
porates 555 clock circuit providing sequential state of flip-flop is changed by grounding clock change states. Gates revert to original states
train of input pulses at AF rate to JK master- input pin 1 momentarily. — F. M. Mims, "Inte- after delay also determined by values of R1 and
slave flip-flop section for toggling LED loads of grated Circuit Projects, Vol. 6," Radio Shack, Cl. — F. M. Mims, "Integrated Circuit Projects,
flip-flop back and forth between ON and OFF Fort Worth, TX, 1977, p 23-32. Vol. 2," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd
states. R1 controls rate at which LEDs flash on
Ed., p 19-26.
614
BASIC MONO — Opamp is normally in positive

saturation because of negative voltage pro-
vided by voltage divider R2-R3. When 2-V pos-
itive trigger pulse is applied to input, output of
opamp swings into negative saturation but au-
■o Output time interval returns

tomatically to positive
determined by values used forafter
saturation C2
and R4. With R4 set at maximum resistance, this
time is about 1 s. Increase size of C2 for longer
time periods. Opamp can be 741 or
equivalent. — R. Melen and H. Garland, "Under-
standing 1C Operational Amplifiers," Howard
121.
ASTABLE USING CMOS TRANSISTOR PAIR—

One transistor pair from CA3600E array is used
with CA3080 operational transconductance am-
plifier to give precise timing and threshold for
square waves. Quiescent power consumption
is typically 6 mW with values shown. — "Linear
Integrated Circuits and MOS/FET's," RCA Solid
State Division. Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 279.
PERFECT SQUARE WAVES FOR LAB— Two sec-

tions of 4049 hex inverting buffer are connected
as 10:1 variable-frequency astable MVBR to
feed chain of four divide-by-10 counters using
4518 dual counters. Frequency division pro-
vides perfect symmetry for square-wave out-
put.— D. Lancaster, "CMOS Cookbook," How-
ard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 232-234.
2M2
17-Hz SQUARE WAVES — Uses three compara-

tors from MC3302P 1C to generate three sym-
metrical square waves 120° apart. Inverting out-
puts of comparators gives waves 60° apart.
Operating voltage can be anywhere from 4 to
12 V. — L. J. Bell, Three Coupled Astables, Wire-
clock _njnjnj~LrL_n_
B _
INPUT PULSE | 1
A
OUTPUT PULSE
CLOCK-SYNCHRONIZED — Circuit generates goes to 1 and sets it. B follows state of A with
pulse that is two clo.K pulses wide, in synchron- delay of one clock pulse. Output pulse can occur
ism with clock, from random input pulse whose only once during a particular input strobe. — F. DIRECT-COUPLED ASTABLE— Collectors and
width is more than 5 times that of clock pulse. E. Nesbitt. Synchronized One Shot, EDNIEEE bases of both emitter-biased transistors are di-
Flip-flops A and B are connected as shift regis- Magazine, May 15, 1971, p 50. rectly coupled to each other. Switching action
ter. When clock pulse falls, input of flip-flop A takes place by means of capacitor in each emit-
ter circuit. Triangle waves are generated at
emitters. Neither transistor can remain perma-
nently cut off. Instead, circuit has two quasi-
states, with switching action achieved by
charging and discharging capacitor between
these states. Single 0.1-^xF capacitor can be
used between emitters in place of C, and C2. —
S. Chang, Two New Direct-Coupled Astable
Multivibrators, Proceedings of the IEEE, March
1973, p 390-391.
NEGATIVE-GOING DUAL-OUTPUT 555— Cir- goes low, C, discharges to ground through R,.
cuit triggers on positive-going pulses and deliv- Timing accuracy is good, and duty cycles above
ers negative-going output timing pulses. C, 99% are possible without jitter. — W. G. Jung,
charges when JFET switch Q, is held on by high Take a Fresh Look at New 1C Timer Applications,
output state of timer. When output of timer EDN Magazine, March 20, 1977, p 127-135.
DUTY-CYCLE CONTROL— Feedback loop

through two transistors automatically adjusts
timing of MVBR to hold duty cycle constant
over wide range of triggering rates. 2N3904 acts
as integrator with time constant much longer
than pulsing period. If duty cycle increases or
decreases, current into integrator becomes pos-
itive or negative and DC voltage at its collector
slowly decreases or increases. This collector
voltage drives 2N3906 operating as current gen-
erator for adjusting automatically to give cho-
sen duty cycle as selected by IK pot. Range is
17% to above 50%. — J. L. Engle, Regulate Duty
Cycle Automatically, EDN Magazine, Nov. 5,
1978, p 122.
LOW BATTERY DRAIN — Combination of asta-

ble and bistable MVBRs, connected so diago-
nally opposite transistors switch on and off
together, minimizes current drain in battery-
powered signal generator. Period of square
wave is approximately equal to 1.4CR, and peak
load current can be up to 70 mA with 24-V bat-
tery supply. Circuit will tolerate wide range of
values for CR. — J. C. Hopkins, Efficient Square-
Wave Oscillator, Wireless World, June 1977, p
58.
fo
PRECISION MONO — Negative-going pulse trig-

gers mono, making output go LOW for duration
of eight clock pulses at frequency determined
by values of R and Cin 4011 clock generator 1C,.
R is greater than 2RT, and clock frequency is 1/
13 8RtC. Width of output pulse depends on
number of stages in shift register IC2 and clock
frequency. — B. Bong, Two CMOS IC's Yield Pre-
cision One-Shot, EDN Magazine, Aug. 5, 1978,
p 82. TRIGGER
A
OUTPUT
LOW STANDBY POWER— Basic 555 timer cir-

cuit is combined with control logic to keep drain
from 12-V supply down to 1 g, A during standby.
Drain increases to 6 mA when input signal
makes output pulse go high. Circuit can be in-
terfaced with CMOS logic. Negative-going
input pulse triggers SR flip-flop, which in turn
saturates Q, and applies power to 555. Simul-
taneously, C2feeds trigger to trigger input pin
2 of 555, to make output pulse go high. At end
of time delay determined by values of R and C,
timer output goes low and transition resets flip-
flop for standby operation. — K. J. Imhof, 555
One-Shot Circuit Features Low-Power Standby
Mode, EDN Magazine, April 20, 1978, p 134.
TRUTH TABLE
UJT MONO — UJT Q2 is normally on, with its

TRIGGER RESET emitter saturation current supplied by transis-
(PIN 2) (PIN 4 )
OUT tor Q, which is also on. Application of positive
trigger pulse to base of Q, turns both off to start
1 HIGH
t timing cycle. CE starts charging each time from
HIGH HIGH
t saturation voltage of UJT. When capacitor volt-
age becomes high enough to fire UJT, Q, turns
HIGH
\ l
LOW on and supplies emitter current required to
HIGH
t keep UJT on. OutputtransistorQ3 delivers pulse
having duration related to value used for CE. —
555 TIMER AS FLIP-FLOP — Eliminating RC tim- stays low until reset goes high and trigger goes "Unijunction Transistor Timers and Oscilla-
ing network of 555 timer and tying threshold low; this bistable action prevents contact tors," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974, AN-294, p 5.
low makes output states depend on trigger and bounce from switching output erroneously. Cir-
reset inputs. These are pulled high through R, cuit will source or sink 200 mA. — R. L. Gephart,
and R2, then pulled low either with switch or Mini-DIP Bistable Flip-Flop Sinks or Sources 200
TTL level of 0 on reset input pin 4. Output then mA, EDN Magazine, Oct. 5, 1974, p 76 and 78.
MOSFET ASTABLE— RCA 40841 dual-gate N-

channel depletion-type MOSFETs alternate be-
tween high and low conduction states in be-
tween dormant periods when C, is charging or
discharging through R,. Circuit switches state
when voltage level at gate of Q, makes gain
high enough for regeneration to occur. D, re-
duces voltage across R2 to give TTL drive ca-
pability.— D. R. Armstrong, Wide-Frequency
Astable Multivibrator Uses One R-C Network,
EDN Magazine, Aug. 5, 1977, p 54.
+5 TO +15V
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED MONO— Circuit gives

choice of linear sawtooth and constant pulse-
width outputs over frequency range from DC to
50 kHz. Output frequency and pulse repetition
rate vary linearly with control current. Applica-
tions include audio synthesizers, variable time
bases, and current-to-frequency converters. —
S. Wetenkamp, Minor Changes Turn VCO into
Voltage-Controlled One-Shot, EDN Magazine,
March 5, 1978, p 67-69.
618
455-Hz ASTABLE — Frequency of square-wave

output depends on values used for external ca-
pacitor and resistors. Very low frequencies can
be obtained by using large values for both.
High-frequency performance is limited by slew
rate of opamp. — R. Melen and H. Garland, "Un-
derstanding 1C Operational Amplifiers," How-
ard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 2nd Ed., 1978, p
119-120.
V+
GATED ASTABLE — With values shown, circuit

produces positive output pulses at about 1 kHz
when gated on by positive pulse at pin 4. Supply
voltage for 555 timer can be 15 V. — W. G. Jung,
"1C Timer Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indi-
anapolis, IN, 1977, p 135-136.
100k
PULSE-WIDTH CONTROL— DC input voltage

controls width of rectangular output pulse of
opamp operating as free-running multivibrator,
by injecting additional current into phase-in-
verting input of opamp. This current serves to
increase one timing period and decrease the
other. Circuit also provides similarly controlla-
ble sawtooth output (at pin 2). Output circuit
uses diode bridge and zener for symmetrically
clamping output voltage limits of amplifier
when this feature is required. — G. B. Clayton,
Experiments with Operational Amplifiers, Wire-
less World, May 1973, p 241-242.
SEQUENTIAL TIMING GIVES DELAYED MONO

MVBR — Output of first timer section of Exar XR-
2556 dual timer is capacitively coupled to trig-
ger pin of secondtimer section. When input trig-
ger is applied, output 1 goes high for duration
T, = 1.1R,C,, then goes low and triggers timer
2 through Cc. Output at pin 13 then goes high
for duration T2 = 1 1R2C2 to give performance of
delayed mono MVBR. Supply voltage is 4.5—16
V. Choose Rl to keep timer output below 200
mA for supply voltage used. — "Timer Data
CA, 1978, p 23-30.
ASTABLE SQUARE-WAVE— CA3080 variable

opamp drives one inverter/amplifier section of
CA3600E inverter array. Quiescent power drain
is typically 6 mW. Supply voltage range is ±3 to
±15 V. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," RCA
10k
R
FREE-RUNNING — Positive feedback is applied

to noninverting input terminal of opamp
through voltage divider R,-R2/ to make amplifier
switch regeneratively and repetitively between
saturated states. Charging time of C controls
duration of each state, to give desired free-run-
ning multivibrator providing rectangular (pin 6),
trapezoidal (pin 3), and sawtooth (pin 2) sym-
metrical waveforms. Article gives design equa-
tions and waveforms. For nonsymmetrical
waveforms, use alternative circuit in place of R;
here, diodes switch two different timing resis-
tors into circuit alternately. — G. B. Clayton, Ex-
periments with Operational Amplifiers, Wire- in place of R
less World, May 1973, p 241-242.
R?
VW
10kQ
ASYMMETRICAL SQUARE WAVES— Addition
of D1 and R4 to astable MVBR connection of 741
Asymmetric or equivalent opamp results in two different

charging rates for Cl, depending on whether
Output
opamp is in positive or negative saturation. Pos-
itive and negative peaks of output pulse then
> 10kO
have different widths. — R. Melen and H. Gar-
R3 land, "Understanding 1C Operational Ampli-

1MQ
fiers," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 2nd
R4 ^
1( X)'kQ Ed., 1978, p 122-123.
1N914
:o. imf
ci:
VCc ;5 15 V
SQUARE-WAVE BURSTS— When pushbutton

switch is closed, 555 timer generates square-
wave tone bursts for duration depending on
how long voltage on pin 4 exceeds threshold
value. R1f R2, and C, control astable action of
timer. — "Signetics Analog Data Manual," Sig-
-(V+-V‘)+ V+- Vn
T= RCln
BASIC MONO DRIVES LED — Two sections of
7400 quad NAND gate are connected as mono-

stable MVBR having one stable state and one
unstable state. Incoming pulse at pin 13
changes state of gate IC1. Since output of this
gate goes to input of other gate, that also
MONO SQUARE-WAVE — Stable characteristics amplifier section of CA3600E inverter array, changes state. After interval determined by val-
ues of Cl and R1, gates automatically return to
of differential amplifier in CA3080 variable Supply voltage range is ±3 to ± 15 V. — "Circuit
opamp assure precise timing and threshold for Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," RCA Solid State Di- original states. LED flashes when input pulse is
output waveform. Opamp drives one inverter/ vision, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 5. applied, for duration also determined by R1 or
Cl . If Cl is increased to 470 pF, LED will stay on
for over 1 s before fading out gradually as ca-
pacitor discharges. — F. M. Mims, "Integrated
Circuit Projects, Vol. 2," Radio Shack, Fort
Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 19-26.
1Hz TO 10 MHz — Simple circuit operating from of C, to C2, duty cycle can be made as low as
single 5-V supply provides TTL output levels 20%. — D. B. Arnett, One-Chip TTL Oscillator Re-
with reliable starting over wide frequency quires One 5V Supply, EDN Magazine, Jan. 5,
range. When capacitors are equal, period of os- 1978, p 96.
cil ation isequal to 5 x 103C s. By changing ratio
LOGIC CONTROL — External circuit modifica-

tion shown for 555 timer makes initial pulse
more nearly equal to subsequent pulses and
makes circuit deliver low output when power is
applied. Optional diode ensures 50% duty
cycle. — K. D. Dighe, Rearranged Components
Cut 555's Initial-Pulse Errors, EDN Magazine,
Jan. 5, 1978, p 82 and 84.
PULSE-TRIGGERED MONO — Combination of

two ICs generates pulse having width precisely
determined by external clock frequency and
countdown factor N of 74C193 binary counter;
time t in seconds is equal to N divided by fre-
quency in hertz. With 74C193, 11 values of N are
possible (1-6, 8-10, 12, and 16). With CD4013
14-stage counter, values of N can range from 1
to 24,576. Input pulse must be shorter than out-
put pulse. Value of N depends on which two
counter outputs are connected to two-input
NAND gate. — R. L. Anderson, Digital One-Shot
Produces Long, Accurate Pulses, EDN Maga-
zine, March 5, 1978, p 127.
c> D,
LM3900 AS MONO — R4 holds output high nor-
mally, so C, is charged almost to V+ level
through Dv Negative input trigger forces output
of current-differencing amplifier low, and C, dis-
nr
charges through R,. When decreasing current
R,= . R4<R2
through R2 approaches current in R3 (when volt-
3
Pulse Width = t = 1.1 R, C, age across C, is about one-third of V+), output
switches to high and returns circuit to standby
ir
As shown, t = 2 ms
state. Pulse width, equal to 1.1R,C1f can be pro-
grammed easily by using pot or some form of
manual or electronic switching for R,. — W. G.
EDGE-TRIGGERED MONO — Output pulse

width is precisely determined by external clock
frequency and countdown factor N of 74C193
binary counter (t = N/f). Pulse is generated on
rising edge of input, with output remaining high
until count N is reached by binary counter.
Counter resets and output returns instantly to
zero if input pulse goes to zero before count of
N. Value of N depends on which two counter
outputs are connected to two-input NAND gate.
With 74C193, 11 values of N between 1 and 16
are possible; with CD4013, values of N can
range from 1 to 24,576. — R. L. Anderson, Digital
One-Shot Produces Long, Accurate Pulses, EDN
Magazine, March 5, 1978, p 127.
KEYED FREE-RUNNING MVBR— One section of

Exar XR-2556 dual timer is operated in free-run-
ning mode, with other section used to provide
ON/OFF keying. Frequency of oscillator is set by
Ra, Rb, and C2. Timer 1 operates as mono MVBR
with output connected to reset pin 8 of timer 2.
Trigger drives pin 1 of timer 1 high, keying timer
2 on and producing tone-burst output for du-
ration set by R, and C,. Supply voltage is 4.5-16
V. — 'Timer Data Book," Exar Integrated Sys-
VvV
20K ' (RA*2HBlC2
CHAPTER 57
Music Circuits
Includes organ, piano, trombone, bell, theremin, bird-call, and other sound
and music synthesizer circuits, along with circuits giving warble, fuzz, three-
part harmony, reverberation, tremolo, attack, decay, rhythm, and other
musical effects. Joystick control for music, active filters, contact-pickup
preamp, metronomes, and tuning aids are also given.
INPUT BUFFER OUTPUT SUMMER
SIMULATION OF FLANGING — Sound-effect cir- or of Doppler characteristic. Uses two LM348 adjusted from 5 V to 8 V either manually with
cuit sometimes called phase shifter simulates quad opamps, two AM9709CN quad JFET de- foot-operated rheostat or automatically by
playing of two tape recorders having same ma- vices, and one LM741 opamp. Phase-shift LM741 triangle-wave generator whose rate is
terial while varying speed of one by pressing on stages are spaced one octave apart from 160 to adjustable from 0.05 Hz to 5 Hz — "Audio Hand-
flange of tape reel. Resulting time delay causes 3200 Hz in center of audio spectrum, with each book," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
some signals to be summed out of phase and stage providing 90° shift at its frequency. JFETs CA, 1977, p 5-10-5-11.
canceled. Effect is that of rotating loudspeaker control phase shifters. Gate voltage of JFETs is
622
623
MUSIC CIRCUITS
TUNING FOR EQUAL TEMPERAMENT— Instru-

ment described enables anyone to tune such in-
struments as organ, piano, and harpsichord in
equal temperament with accuracy approaching
that of professional tuner. Only requirement is
ability to hear beats between two tones
sounded together. Master oscillator circuit
shown generates 250.830 kHz for feeding to first
of five ICs connected as programmable divider
that provides 12 notes of an octave as 12 equal
semitones differing from each other by factor of
1 .0594. Article gives suitable power amplifier to
fit along with divider connections and detailed
instructions for construction, calibration, and
use. — W. S. Pike, Digital Tuning Aid, Wireless
World, July 1974, p 224-227.
TREMOLO CONTROL — National LM324 opamp

connected as phase-shift oscillator operates at
variable rate between 5 and 10 Hz set by speed
pot. Portion of oscillator output is taken from
depth pot and used to modulate ON resistance
of two 1 N914 diodes operating as voltage-con-
trolled attenuators. Input should be kept below
0.6 V P-P to avoid undesirable clipping. Used for
producing special musical effects. — "Audio
Clara, CA, 1977, p 5-11-5-12.
♦ 12V
AUDIO FOR COMPUTER MUSIC— Wideband

low-power audio amplifier was developed for
use with DAC and low-pass active filter to cre-
ate music with microprocessor. — H. Chamber-
lin, A Sampling of Techniques for Computer Per-
formance of Music, BYTE, Sept. 1977, p 62-66,
68-70, 72, 74, 76-80, and 82-83.
/77
NO
PUSH BUTTON
n
TROMBONE CIRCUIT — Unique arrangement
for driving 25-ohm loudspeaker with National
LM3909 1C operating from 1.5-V cell permits
generation of slide tones resembling those of
trombone. Operation is based on use of voltage
generated by resonant motion of loudspeaker
voice coil as major positive feedback for 1C.
Loudspeaker is mounted in roughly cubical box
having volume of about 64 in3, with one end of
box arranged to slide in and out like piston. Po-
sitioning ofpiston and operation of pushbutton
permit playing reasonable semblance of simple
tune. 1C, loudspeaker, and battery are mounted
on piston, with 21/2-in length of 5/ie-in tubing pro-
vided to bleed air in and out as piston is moved,
without affecting resonant frequency. Fre-
quency of oscillator becomes equal to resonant
frequency of enclosure. — "Linear Applications,
CA, 1976, AN-154, p 6.
VCO SOUND SYNTHESIZER— Developed for tail. Heart of oscillator is triangle and square- pulse, and ramp waveforms. — T. Orr and D. W.
use in instrument capable of duplicating variety wave generator built around 1C Schmitt trigger. Thomas, Electronic Sound Synthesizer, Wire-
of sounds ranging from bird distress calls and Ramp rate and operating frequency are varied less World ' Part 1— Aug. 1973, p 366-372 (Part
engine noises to spoken words and wide variety by changing drive voltage or gain of integrator. 2— Sept. 1973, p 429-434; Part 3— Oct. 1973, p
485-490).
of musical instruments. Three-part article gives Similar VCO in synthesizer also produces sine.
625
MUSIC CIRCUITS
+ VCC +15V
ANALOG MEMORY — Used in synthesizer for

generating wide variety of musical and other
sounds, to provide constant control signal for
sounds requiring long fadeout. Positive input
pulse initiates sampling of analog signal for pre-
set time, with signal being held for unspecified
period. Input voltage range is from about -0.5
V to +6.5 V, being deliberately limited by D,.
Three-part article describes operation in detail
and gives all other circuits used in
synthesizer.— T. Orr and D. W. Thomas, Elec-
tronic Sound Synthesizer, Wireless World, Part
3— Oct. 1973, p 485-490 (Part 1— Aug. 1973, p
366-372; Part 2— Sept. 1973, p 429-434).
♦ i zv
TREMOLO AMPLIFIER — Provides amplitude

modulation at subaudio rate (usually between
5 and 15 Hz) of audio-frequency input signal.
Uses National LM389 array having three tran-
sistors along with power amplifier. Transistors
form differential pair having active current-
source tail to give output proportional to prod-
uct of two input signals. Gain control pot is ad-
justed for desired tremolo depth. Interstage RC
network forms 1 60- Hz high-pass filter, requiring
that tremolo frequency be less than 160 Hz. —
"Audio Handbook,” National Semiconductor,
Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-33-4-37.
from pedal, to initiate start of rhythm accompani-

to drawbar
ment. High-impedance input connection rent passes through toTr5and triggers bistable
busbar" through 100K is made to toneshaper output, that pulls in relay. S2 and S3 are used for manual
AUTOMATIC REMOTE RHYTHM CONTROL— and transformer connection is used with elec- start and stop of rhythm.— K. B. Sorensen,
When added to electronic organ, circuit is acti- tromechanical Hammond organ. Transistor and Touch Start of Automatic Rhythm Device, Wire-
vated by audio signal from lower manual or diode types are not critical. If S, is closed, cur- less World, Oct. 1974, p 381.
MUSICAL BELLS — Opamp connected as active

filter simulates attack followed by gradual
decay as produced when bell or tuning fork is
struck. Filter portion of circuit uses twin-T net-
work adjusted so active filter breaks into oscil-
lation when slight external disturbance is intro-
duced by closing SI momentarily. Circuit feeds
external audio amplifier and loudspeaker for
converting ringing frequency into audible
sound. Set R3 just below oscillation point. R1
and R2 can be adjusted to give sounds of other
musical instruments, such as drums, bamboo,
and triangles. — F. M. Mims, “Electronic Music
1977,2nd Ed., p 71-80.
VCiO
vc2 o
50(1 /25 V
IC5
SN7404N
U
oTI
nu pulse output
PULSE AND SEQUENCE OUTPUTS— Voltage-

controlled oscillator produces sequence of cillator, with exponential frequency-voltage re- from bird distress calls and engine noises to
steps, with amplitude of each step individually lationship extending in one range from sub- spoken words and wide variety of musical in-
controllable up to maximum of six steps. Circuit sonic frequencies to over 20 kHz. Used in sound struments.— T. Orr and D. W. Thomas, Elec-
also generates series of pulses having 1 : 1 mark- synthesizer described in three-part article that tronic Sound Synthesizer, Wireless World, Part
space ratio, each coincident with leading edge gives all circuits and operating details. Appli- 2— Sept. 1973, p 429-434 (Part 1— Aug. 1973, p
of a step. Pair of summing inputs controls os- cations include synthesizing sounds ranging 366-372; Part 3— Oct. 1973, p 485-490).
MUSIC CIRCUITS 627
327-Hz HIGH-PASS — Developed to make third

harmonic of 130.81 Hz (C3 note) minimum of 30
dB stronger than fundamental, to give saw-
10-kHz LOW-PASS FILTER— Suitable for use at waveform and suppressing background noise tooth output for use in electronic music system.
both input and output of A/D-D/A converter in on output when small signals are being pro- Design uses third-order filter with 3-dB dips in
digital audio system for synthesizing speech or cessed with 8-bit linear encoding. — T. Scott, response. Opamp can be 741. — D. Lancaster,
music. Serves for smoothing steps of output Digital Audio, Kilobaud, May 1977, p 82-86. "Active-Filter Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, In-
dianapolis, IN, 1975, p 192.
PIANO MUSIC FROM ORGAN— Simple add-on

circuit for electronic organ attenuates output of
oscillator exponentially to zero In manner suit-
able for mimicking waveform of piano. Circuit
is self-triggering, so exponential decay starts
only when output of multivibrator is applied;
this eliminates need for extra contacts on key-
board. With no input, Tr, is on and point A is at
supply voltage. Input signal turns Tr, off, dis-
charging C3through R3 and R5. Voltage across
C3 controls gate of FET, with R5 being adjusted
so FET just switches off when C3 is fully dis-
charged. Tr, then conducts and C3 charges rap-
idly, to permitfast piano playing. — C. J. Outlaw,
Electronic Organ to Piano, Wireless World, Feb.
1975, p 94.
RANDOM MUSIC — Uses Johnson counter as playing one of eight musical notes (C, D, E, F, G, left Input of stereo amplifier, while outputs 16F
special shift register producing almost random A, B, or C), depending on state of seven note- and 4F are similarly paired for right channel.
bit patterns of 18 to 3255 12-bit words under selector lines coming from selector switches. Article covers construction, tune-up, and crea-
control of clock operating in range of about 1- Oscillator is divided down in frequency by tion ofpleasing musical sequences. — D. A. Wal-
10 Hz. Oscillator (upper right) uses NE555 as three-stage ripple counter to provide four oc- lace, The Sound of Random Numbers, 73 Mag-
voltage-controlled square-wave generator taves of range. R1 -R8 serve fortuning each note azine, Feb. 1976, p 60-64.
628
mastertone generator replaces 12 conventional simple portable touch-sensitive electronic FUZZ CIRCUIT — Two diodes in feedback path of
RC oscillators otherwise required in electronic piano. — G. Cowie, Electronic Piano Design, LM324 opamp create musical-instrument effect
piano. Frequencies generated are within 0.1% Wireless World, Part 3, May 1974, p 143-145. known as fuzz by limiting output voltage swing
of equal-temperament scale, so piano will work to ±0.7 V. Resultant square wave contains
chiefly odd harmonics, resembling sounds of
clarinet. Fuzz depth pot controls level at which
clipping begins, and fuzz intensity pot controls
output level. — "Audio Handbook," National
Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 5-11.
NOISE SOURCE — Used in synthesizer for gen-

erating wide variety of musical and other
sounds, to provide any combination of white,
filtered, and VLF noise to be used directly as
audio signal or as control signal. Source for
white noise is Tr,, which is a germanium tran-
sistor selected for high leakage or heated
enough to make it leaky, so as to produce an
average noise level of about 40 mV P-P. Filtered
(colored) noise is produced by driving spec-
trum-shaping network (Baxandall tone control)
with white noise. Preset control R„ is adjusted
so output shows no clipping when both red and
blue tone controls are at maximum. VLF noise
is extracted from white noise by either of two
low-pass filters selected by S,. Three-part arti-
cle describes operation in detail and gives all
other circuits used in synthesizer. — T. Orr and
D. W. Thomas, Electronic Sound Synthesizer.
Wireless World, Part 3— Oct. 1973, p 485-490
(Part 1— Aug. 1973, p 366-372; Part 2— Sept.
1973, p 429-434).
MUSIC CIRCUITS 629
+9 VOLTS
CLICKING METRONOME — Basic lamp-flashing

circuit is used to produce sharp click in loud-
speaker each time Q2 is turned on by RC oscil-
lator Q1. R2 adjusts repetition rate over range
of 20-280 beats per minute. Changing value of
Cl varies tone of clicks. — F. M. Mims, "Transis-
tor Projects, Vol. 1," Radio Shack, Fort Worth,
TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 33-39.
ages and a bias voltage, to provide amplitude gives all other circuits of synthesizer, along with
modulation as required for synthesizer used to procedure for aligning preset controls R8, R,4>
generate wide variety of sounds. Heart of circuit R20, and R21. — T. Orr and D. W. Thomas, Elec-
is linear four-quadrant multiplier 1C. Output is tronic Sound Synthesizer, Wireless World, Part
taken between two load resistors, with differ- 2— Sept. 1973, p 429-434 (Parti— Aug. 1973, p
ential amplifier IC2 removing common-mode 366-372; Part 3— Oct. 1973, p 485-490).
LIGHT-SENSITIVE THEREMIN— Tone of loud-

speaker increases and decreases in frequency
as flashlight is moved in vicinity of photocell in
darkened room. Use Radio Shack 276-1 16 cad-
mium sulfide photocell. Cell resistance de-
creases with light, increasing frequency of
audio oscillator. Continuously changing fre-
quency resembles that produced by hand-con-
trolled theremin. — F. M. Mims, “Electronic
Music Projects, Vol. 1,” 'Radio Shack, Fort
Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 91-95.
REVERBERATION — Used in sound synthesizer beration only or reverberation combined with cle gives all circuits and describes operation in
developed for generating wide variety of mus- input signal at VA. Amount of reverberation can detail. — T. Orr and D. W. Thomas, Electronic
ical and other sounds. Four-transistor driver be controlled manually with R3 or automatically Sound Synthesizer, Wireless World, Part 2 —
feeds spring-type reverberation unit at up to with voltage-controlled amplifier or voltage- Sept. 1973, p 429-434 (Part 1— Aug. 1973, p
about 4 kHz, with switch giving choice of rever- controlled filter of synthesizer. Three-part arti- 366-372; Part 3— Oct. 1973, p 485-490).
630
RAMP FUNCTION — Circuit combines triangle

and square-wave inputs from VCO in differen-
tial amplifier having switched gain, to generate
ramp function for use with variety of other
waveforms in sound synthesizer designed for
duplicating wide variety of sounds. Three-part
article gives all circuits and operating details. —
T. Orr and D. W. Thomas, Electronic Sound Syn-
thesizer, Wireless World, Part 1— Aug. 1973, p
366-372 (Part 2— Sept. 1973, p 429-434; Part
3— Oct. 1973, p 485-490).
7404
o + 5V
TOP 7404 O + 5V O
-a [middle bottom
hr— <h
— -t>°-
4 MHz 7404 vs
1k
b 5V 100k +5V f 5V y 5V
:22mF
NRST
VGG XI
X2
NRST VGG XI
7^
NRST
?
VGG XI
FLAG 0
NRST 1
VGG XI
FLAG 0 FLAG 0
FLAG 1 10
FLAG 1 FLAG 2 FLAG 1
FLAG 2 FLAG 2
AD00 - AD09 AD00 - AD09 AD00 - AD0q
L-'00 - 'AL-'09
ADnfl - AD,
NHOLD
CONT DBn — DBt DB0 - DB; DB0 - DB7 •+/

Vss NWDS NBREQ
NWDS SC/MP, NWDS vss NWDS
NRDS
SC/MPo
NRDS NRDS SC/MP. NBREQ SC/MP,
v
NRDS Tii
NENIN NENOUT NBREQ v«NENOUT
NENIN NENIN NENOUT NENIN
NBRQ
10
* 10
+ 5 V<
ADf
18| 16R/W
7404
Aq 8
—Â iI/O,
10
- l/04
OD
1
)+5V RAM
- 12V
rci CE2
2111
\5.1k
THREE-PART HARMONY— Four SC/MP micro- 4 bits of data bus. Each microprocessor is sup- list. If it is, next note is played by other proces-
processors, one serving as conductor and three plied with list of notes by note number and note sors until signaled by conductor via memory.
as instrumentalists, generate multiple parts for lengths as part of software. At end of each basic Article gives software listing. — T. Doone, Quar-
harmony feeding common loudspeaker system. note length, SC/MP, checks each other proces- tet of SC/MP's Plays Music for Trios, EDN Mag-
Microprocessors have paralleled address and sor to see if it is time to proceed to next note in azine, Sept. 20, 1978, p 57-58 and 60.
data buses, with 4K RAM connecting to lowest
MUSIC CIRCUITS 631
*9 VOLTS
WIDE-RANGE UJT ORGAN — Combination of

five individual resistor switches and three-ca-
pacitor range switch gives 15 different audio
frequencies for demonstration electronic organ
oscillator feeding power amplifier and loud-
speaker. R1 is adjusted for best combination of
sounds. Any number of capacitors can be
added. Battery drain is about 35 mA during op-
eration. Pleasing tone sequence is obtained
with resistor values of 6.8K, 8.2K, 10K, 12K, and
15K when range switch is set to 0.1 fiF. — F. M.
Mims, "Electronic Music Projects, Vol. 1," Radio
Vr
voltage
control
input c2
.
vaO — i
Rie|/
Ik
Cl Du
Dio
150n 3n3
4V5
4V5
W- II M —
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED FILTER— Used in voltages and a bias voltage. Can also be used as D. W. Thomas, Electronic Sound Synthesizer,
elaborate sound synthesizer developed for gen- notch filter or as spectrum analyzer. Three-part Wireless World, Part 2 — Sept. 1973, p 429-434
erating wide variety of sounds. Serves as band- article describes operation in detail and gives all (Part 1— Aug. 1973, p 366-372; Part 3— Oct.
pass filter for which resonant frequency is lin- other circuits of synthesizer. Supply voltages
1973, p 485-490).
early proportional to sum of input control are 15 V, with polarity as indicated. — T. Orr and
CCD DELAY FOR SPECIAL EFFECTS— Basic ment, chorus, and vibrato generation. Other ap- wave. Article describes operation of evaluation
bucket-brigade device incorporated in Reticon plications include speech compression and circuit in detail and presents variety of practical
Corp. SAD-1024 charge-coupled-device delay voice scrambling. Evaluation circuit shown was applications.— R. R. Buss, CCD's Improve Audio
line can synthesize such interesting audio-sys- developed by manufacturer. Input clock fre- System Performance and Generate Effects,
tem delay effects as reverberation enhance- quency is200 kHz, and signal input is 5-kHz sine EDN Magazine, Jan. 5, 1977, p 55-61.
2 00024 MHz
85 OUTPUT FREQUENCIES TO
KEYSWITCHING CIRCUITRY
ORGAN TONE GENERATOR— National fully spanning equal-tempered octave. Can also as 7 kHz for other applications. — "MOS/LSI Da-
MM5832 and MM5833 chromatic frequency be used as celeste or chorus tone generator and tabook," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
generators are used with 12 MM5824 frequency as electronic music synthesizer. Square-wave
CA, 1977, p 3-1 1-3-13.
dividers to generate 85 musical frequencies input for organ is 2.00024 MHz but can be as low
633
MUSIC CIRCUITS
Re R7
PIANO-TUNING AMPLIFIER— Used with bat-

tery-powered digital tuning aid that provides 12
equal semitones of octave, between 261.6625
and 493.8833 Hz, for equal-temperament tuning
of such keyboard instruments as organ, piano,
and harpsichord. 1C used is part of RCA amplifier
kit KC-4003 which includes T, and other discrete
components. Article gives circuits for oscillator
and programmable divider, along with instruc-
tions for construction, calibration, and use. — W.
S. Pike, Digital Tuning Aid, Wireless World, July
1974, p 224-227.
WARBLER — One 555 timer is connected as low-

frequency square-wave generator that modu-
lates second timer producing higher-frequency
tone, to give warbling tone that can be varied
with R1 and R4 to simulate siren or songs of cer-
tain birds. Will operate over supply range of 4.5-
18 V. Use 8-ohm miniature loudspeaker, with
optional volume control R7 in series. — F. M.
Mims, “Electronic Music Projects, Vol. 1 ,” Radio
1. INCREASE Cl TO INCREASE SWITCHING RATE (TEMPO.

2. INCREASE C2 TO INCREASE ALL TONE FREQUENCIES.
3. R3 -R12 ARE TONE RESISTORS. (SEE TEXT TOR VALUES.I
MUSIC SYNTHESIZER— 555 timer is used as Each of ten outputs feeds through tone-con- are generated in sequence repeatedly. R3-R12
clock to set beat, adjustable with R1. Beat trolling resistor to modulation input terminal of can be 1000-ohm pots, so ten-note tune being
pulses drive flip-flop chain in 7490, which pro- another 555 used as voltage-controlled AF os- played can be easily changed. — F. M. Mims,
vides running total in binary format to 7441 1- cillatorfeeding loudspeaker. Values used for re- "Electronic Music Projects, Vol. 1," Radio
of-10 decoder for conversion to decimal output. sistors determine frequencies of ten notes that Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 61-70.
634
BASIC UJT ORGAN — Switches give choice of

five audio frequencies for simple transistor os-
cillator driving loudspeaker. Adjust R1 for best
combination of sounds. Capacitor values can be
changed to give other frequencies. Ideal for +VCC
classroom demonstrations. — F. M. Mims,
"Electronic Music Projects, Vol. 1," Radio
ATTACK/DECAY — Waveform generator pro- tronic signal derived from other circuits of and D. W. Thomas, Electronic Sound Synthe-
duces approximate rectangular waveform hav- sound synthesizer. All characteristics of wave- sizer, Wireless World, Part 3— Oct. 1973, p 485-
ing exponential rise (attack) and exponential form are arbitrarily variable. Three-part article 490 (Part 1— Aug. 1973, p 366-372; Part 2—
decay, initiated either by manual trigger or elec- describes circuit operation and gives all other Sept. 1973, p 429-434).
INPUT
51 K
0 TO +5V
5K SOURCE
IMPEDANCE 56K
VW
+ 3.5 TO
OUTPUT
+ 8.5 V.
rh
FILTERED
+ 5 V OUT
NOTES. ALL RESISTORS 1/4 WATT 5%

IOO/i. F ALL CAPACITORS EXCEPT 100/iF
6V
PLASTIC FILM OR NPO CERAMIC
rh PREFERABLY 5%
LOW-PASS WITH 3-kHz CUTOFF— Used in com- gives frequency table, program for generating event. — H. Chamberlin, A Sampling of Tech-
puter music system to suppress high-fidelity four simultaneous musical voices, and song niques for Computer Performance of Music,
distortion resulting from steps in sine-wave table for encoding "The Star Spangled Banner" BYTE, Sept. 1977, p 62-66, 68-70, 72, 74, 76-80,
output of DAC. Article covers complete com- in four-part harmony, using 5 bytes per musical and 82-83.
puter synthesis of music by microprocessor and
MUSIC CIRCUITS 635
ATTACK-DECAY GENERATOR— Designed for 400Hz

polytonic electronic music system handling
more than one note at a time. Each note to be
controlled is sent through voltage-controlled
amplifier (VCA) whose gain is set by charge on
capacitor. Attack is changed by varying charg-
ing rate. Discharge rate sets decay of individual
note. To avoid having separate adjustment pot
for each VCA, duty-cycle modulation is used to
change charging current through resistors. At-
tack pulses are generated by upper three in-
verters forming variable-symmetry astable
MVBR. Decay pulses are generated by lower
three inverters connected as half-mono MVBR.
for percussion, snubbing, and other two-step book," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977,
Additional half-monos can be added as needed
decay effects — D. Lancaster, "CMOS Cook- p 231-232.
FOUR-OCTAVE ORGAN— Two 7473 dual flip- ceeding switch gives tones precisely one octave tors to give desired variety of notes. — F. M.
flops provide four frequency dividers for 555 lower. Four organ applications, pushbutton
Mims, "Electronic Music Projects, Vol. 1 ," Radio
timer connected as master tone generator. SI switches are added to timer circuit for switch- Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 45-53.
gives fundamental frequency, and each suc- ing frequency-controlling capacitors or resis-
O*'0dB
INPUT FROM IBANEZ

BUG PIEZO CERAMIC
CONTACT PICKUP
- available fiom Eiger Co ,

P0 Box 469. Cornwells Hts . PA 19020
violin, and dulcimer. Half of 1C is used as con-
trollable gain stage, and other half is used as
PREAMP FOR ACOUSTIC PICKUP— National control and volume control. Used with flat-reactive two-band tone-control block. — "Audio
LM387 dual opamp provides switchable gain sponse piezoceramic contact pickup for acous- Handbook," National Semiconductor, Santa
choice of 2:10 dB along with bass/treble tone tic stringed musical instruments such as guitar. Clara, CA, 1977, p 5-12.
636
AUDIBLE/VISIBLE METRONOME— Produces

uniformly spaced beats in synchronism with
flashes of LED, at rate that can be adjusted with
R1 from one beat every few seconds to ten or
more beats per second. Use red Radio Shack
276-041 or similar LED. Add switch in series
with battery to avoid disturbing setting of R1.
R3 serves as volume control. Add 5-10 yxF ca-
pacitor across loudspeaker to mellow beat
sound if desired. — F. M. Mims, "Electronic
Music Projects. Vol. 1," Radio Shack, Fort ,V
Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 55-59.
HAND-WAVING THEREMIN — Single-transistor

RF oscillator is tuned to generate frequency
about 455 kHz above oscillator frequency of
transistor radio. With aluminum-foil antenna
away from nearby objects and radio tuned be-
tween stations, R1 is adjusted until high-
pitched tone is heard from radio. Now, as hand
is brought toward and away from foil antenna, THEREMIN— Two transistor oscillator stages L2 about one-third out of its winding. Tune
wailing sounds are produced. With practice, generate separate low-power RF signal in radio until either oscillator signal is heard. Sig-
musician can produce recognizable melodies by broadcast band, for pickup by AM broadcast re- nal can be identified by whistle if on top of
vibrating hand. Primary controls of frequency ceiver. Movement of hand to ward or a way from broadcast station or by quieting of background
are Cl (10-365 pF broadcast radio tuning ca- metal pitch plate varies frequency of Q1, mak- noise if between stations. Adjust slugs so whis-
pacitor) and adjustable antenna coil LI (Radio ing audio output of receiver vary correspond- tle is heard at desired location of quieting sig-
Shack 270-1430). Radio can be up to 15 feet ingly as beat frequency changes. Both circuits nal. Pitch of whistle should change now as hand
away from theremin. Rotate radio for maximum are Hartley oscillators, using Miller 9012 or is brought near pitch plate. — I. P. Shields,
pickup from LI. — F. M. Mims, "Electronic Music equivalent slug-tuned coils. To adjust initially, “How to Build Proximity Detectors & Metal Lo-
Projects, Vol. 1," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, place next to radio and set tuning slug of LI cators,” Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 2nd
1977, 2nd Ed , p 81-89. about two-thirds out of its winding. Set slug of
Ed., 1972, p 154-156.
JOYSTICK CONTROL — Mechanically controlled synthesizer used for generating wide variety of Thomas, Electronic Sound Synthesizer, Wire-
voltage source generates two independent con- musical and other sounds. Three-part article de- less World, Part 3— Oct. 1973, p 485-490 (Part
trol voltages, proportional to stick position, to scribes circuit operation and gives all other cir- 1— Aug. 1973, p 366-372; Part 2— Sept. 1973, p
429-434).
serve as one of controls for elaborate sound cuits used in synthesizer. — T. Orr and D. W.
CHAPTER 58
Noise Circuits
Includes many types of noise limiters, blankers, and filters for audio, IF, RF,
and digital applications, along with suppression of noise from arcing contacts
and motors. Circuits for white-noise and pink-noise test-signal generators
also given. are
AF-POWERED CLIPPER — Designed for use just

ahead of 8-ohm loudspeaker in receiver cover-
ing lower amateur phone bands (75 and 40 me-
ters). Reduces hissing noise caused by short-
wave diathermy, electric motors, and
fluorescent lighting, as well as impulse noise
generated by auto ignition system or atmo-
spheric interference. T, and T2 are transistor
radio output transformers with 500:4 or 600:8
ohm impedance. Q, is 2N2222 NPN transistor.
Q2 is 2N2907 PNP transistor. D, and D2 are
1N270. — C. Laster, An Audio Powered Noise
Clipper, CQ, May 1976, p 26-27.
-15V
PINK-NOISE GENERATOR— Uses MM5837

broadband white-noise generator with -3 dB
per octave filter from 10 Hz to 40 kHz to give
pink-noise output having flat spectral distribu-
tion over entire audio band from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
Output is about 1 V P-P of pink noise riding on
AM NOISE SILENCER — Circuit samples mixer accommodating wide range of input levels. Ar- 8.5-VDC level. Used as controlled source of
output (IF input) of AM receiver and, when noise ticle describes operation of circuit in detail. For noise for adjusting octave equalizer to optimum
pulse is detected, interrupts IF input signal for frequencies above 2 MHz, use LM373 in place of
settings for specific listening area. — "Audio
duration of noise pulse. Uses National LM372 1C LM372. — T. A. Tong, Noise Silencer for A.M. Re- Handbook," National Semiconductor, Santa
having AGC loop with range of about 69 dB, for ceivers, Wireless World, Oct. 1972, p 483-484. Clara, CA, 1977, p 2-53-2-59.
637
IF NOISE BLANKER— Used ahead of 455-kHz IF

strip of communication receiver to provide
about 40-dB attenuation of ignition and other
noise pulses that can interfere with reception in
2- and 6-meter amateur bands. Two paths for
noise pulses, one AC and the other DC, must be
balanced for good operation. Resistor and ca-
pacitor values in noise rectifier are chosen to
select sharp noise pulses in preference to sig-
nals. DC noise pulses are amplified by pulse am-
plifier and converted to AC noise pulses. Set-
tings of pots are optimized for best noise
blanking. Circuit requires 12-V supply, which
can be obtained from receiver with appropriate
dropping resistors and zener as shown for + 1 05
V, or from separate source. — F. C. Jones, Ex-
perimental I.F. Noise Blankers, CO, March 1971,
p 81-83.
EXCESS-NOISE SOURCE — Develops about 18

dB of excess noise in region of 50-300 MHz for
optimizing converter or receiver for best noise
figure. Can also be used for noise optimizing of
TV receivers and for peaking UHF TV front ends.
Q1 and Q2 form cross-coupled 700-MHz MVBR.
Cl is greater than C2 to favor conduction of Q2.
When 02 is on, Q3 turns on and makes current
flowthrough broadband noisediodeCRI. Diode
is forward-biased because available gating volt-
age does not generate enough noise in reverse-
bias mode. If noise output is too great, insert
2000-ohm attenuator as shown. — T. E. Hartson,
A Gated Noise Source, 0 ST, Jan. 1977, p 22-23.
50-5000 Hz WHITE NOISE— Both signal and covery of low-level 500-Hz signal from noise. quire ±15 V supply, which can be simple volt-
noise levels are continuously and indepen- Circuit gives maximum noise output into 1500- age doubler without regulation.— J. E. Morris,
dently variable from zero to maximum in simple ohm load; for lower load impedances, reduce Simple Noise Generator, Wireless World, April
1977, p 62.
noise generator developed to demonstrate re- noise level to prevent oscillation. Opamps re-
639
NOISE CIRCUITS
1 M-5
THYRISTOR SPARK QUENCHER— Suppresses

arcing at contacts when switching large induc-
tive loads. Use SCR capable of operating at well
over twice supply voltage and passing full load
current during switch-off. SCR shown will han-
dle up to 500 V at up to 80 A provided current
pulses are under 8 ms. — E. Potter, Switch Spark
Quench for Inductive Loads, Wireless World,
Dec. 1973, p 605.
out disconnecting circuit. Noise diode gives ment and More, Ham Radio, Jan. 1977, p 49-51.
PINK-NOISE FILTER — Used in acoustics for

measuring transducer characteristics, absorp-
INPUT tion-reflection and transmission coefficients of
materials, and room parameters such as rever-
200K OUTPUT beration time. Offsets falloff of detected noise
signal at low frequencies by using filter shown
to convert random-noise source from constant
energy per hertz (white-noise frequency spec-
trum) to constant energy per octave (pink-noise
005mF response). Filter covers audio range from 10 Hz
to 20 kHz, providing -20 dB per decade trans-
mission characteristics with three 741 opamp
stages. Frequency characteristic is independent
of source and load impedances. Supply volt-
ages can be from ±6 to ±18 V. — R. Mauro, Sim-
ple Pink Noise Filter, Audio, March 1977, p 36
and 38.
WRAPPED AROUND
CURE FOR NOISY CONTROL— Connecting 5K

resistor between grid of first AF stage and
ground as shown substantially reduces noise
generated by worn volume-control pot in older
tube-type communication receiver. Modifica-
INPUT NOISE TEST CIRCUIT— Used for mea- series with 50-ohm input of CRO to isolate tion can be made from top of chassis by wrap-
suring noise immunity of emitter-coupled logic input; this gives 10:1 amplitude attenuation ping piece of wire around grid pin of audio tube,
to transient signal on input line. Supply volt- while still providing accurate picture of input bringing wire up alongside tube and out
ages used permit terminating logic outputs to noise. — B. Blood, "AC Noise Immunity of MECL through top of shield, then soldering 5K resistor
ground through 50-ohm CRO probe. Accurate 10,000 Integrated Circuits," Motorola, Phoenix, between wire and chassis. — J. Schroeder, Tem-
bias provided by power supply is used to set AZ, 1972, AN-592. porary Fix for Noisy Volume Controls, Ham
input logic levels. 450-ohm resistor is used in Radio, Aug. 1974, p 62.
*-3
L4
L,
field
foot 0'5mH
Vs
5pH
AF NOISE LIMITER — Trough limiter eliminates

5jiH background noise that is normally passed by
SEWING-MACHINE SUPPRESSION— Circuit is McLachlan, J. H. Ainley, and R. J. Harry, Radio conventional limiters, to permit use of higher
used to suppress clicks from speed control as Interference — a Review, Wire/ess World, June volume level without annoying static when
well as interference produced by motor itself in 1974, p 191-195. monitoring single radio channel continu-
sound and television broadcast bands. — A. S. ously.— Circuits, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1973, pi 20.
12V
ZENER GENERATOR — Uses National LM389

array having three transistors along with
opamp. Application of reverse voltage to emit-
ter of one grounded-base transistor breaks it
down in avalanche mode to give action of zener
diode. Reverse voltage characteristic, typically
7.1 V, is used as noise source for amplification
by second transistor and power opamp. Third
transistor (not shown) can be used to gate noise
generator if desired. — "Audio Handbook," Na-
4-33-4-37.
tenuator. In other channel, noise amplifier U2

NOISE BLANKER — Minimizes effects of short- tuned drain circuit form low-gain bandpass am- drives pulse detector Q3 and AGC detector CR1.
duration high-amplitude low-repetition-rate plifier that removes remaining local oscillator Opamp U1 amplifies AGC and controls gain of
noise such as auto ignition noise, power-line signal and sets bandwidth at about 50 kHz. Sig- U2. R4 is threshold adjustment. Gates U3B and
arcing, and make-or-break switching. Devel- nal is then split into two channels. Q2 in main U3C form mono used with gates of U3 to de-
oped for use in Collins ARR-41 receiver, where channel drives 50-ohm low-pass delay network velop proper phase and current amplitude for
it is inserted between plate of second mixer and with 700-kHz cutoff, feeding double-balanced operating blanking gate.— W. Stewart, Noise
500-kHz first IF amplifier. Q1 and its double- mixer DBM operated as current-controlled at- Blanker Design, Ham Radio, Nov. 1977, p 26-29.
641
NOISE CIRCUITS
LOW-PASS DIGITAL FILTER— Used to retrieve

pulse train data from noisy signal line. Filtering
is achieved with SN7400 quad two-input NAND
gate, SN7413 dual four-input Schmitt trigger,
two diodes, and two capacitors. One gate of
SN7400 is used as inverter driving pulse delay
operating on negative-going transition of input
signal. Other Schmitt trigger, diode, and capac-
itor provide delay on positive-going transition.
Any additional pulses occurring during delay-
circuit time-out resets delay time without af-
fecting output. — T. H. Haydon, Low-Pass Digital
Filter, EDN Magazine, Nov. 20, 1973, p 85.
: C, =
480 ^ 10-®
F + 200
UNUSED
F = CUTOFF FREQUENCY
NOISE CONTROL — Circuit is plugged into head-

phone jack of amateur receiver. Four-position
rotary switch selects desired combination of
noise-limiting diodesfor handling progressively
more severe noise pulses. Adjustable AF T-
notch filter limits passband over sufficient
range for both phone and CW. Inductor is com-
mon 88-mH toroid. Audio peaker circuit over-
comes insertion losses of filters. — S. T. Rap-
pold. Noise Rejector, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1977,
p 116.
COMPARATOR
(NON-INVERTING)
NOISE GATE FOR AF PREAMP— Used in high- cuit controls muting reed relay serving both LED is TIL209 or equivalent. Article covers cir-
performance phono preamplifier to mute out- stereo channels of preamp. Delay switch-on cuit operation in detail and gives all other cir-
put when there is no signal at phono input. using 555 1C overrides noise-gate opamps. Un- cuits of preamp. — D. Self, Advanced Preampli-
Opamps each provide gains of about 100. Cir- marked diodes are 1 N914 or equivalent, and red fier Design, Wireless World, Nov. 1976, p 41-46.
+ 5Vdc
.001
RESET
NOISE-RESISTANT LATCH — False triggering of

latch gates by noise spikes is prevented by gen-
erating pulse T whose width is equal to mini-
LOW-LEVEL RF SOURCE— Used to measure mum width of desired input pulse. Values used
noise floor of receiver under test. RF source is is comparable to commercial signal generator, for RC combination set T. If R is chosen as 10
simple, well-shielded crystal-controlled oscilla- as leakage is quite low. Output is -112 dBm at kilohms, C should be T/3.424, where C is in pi-
tor that is decoupled from battery supply. After 14 MHz. LI has 24 turns enamel on Amidon T50- cofarads and T is in nanoseconds. — S. R. Martin,
attenuator resistors are adjusted to provide 6 toroid, with 1 turn for output link. — W. Hay- Latching Circuit Provides Noise Immunity, EDNI
about S7 signal in receiver, oscillator housing is EEE Magazine, Feb. 1, 1972, p 56.
ward, Defining and Measuring Receiver Dy-
sealed with solder. Once calibrated, RF source namic Range, QST, July 1975, p 15-21 and 43.
AF NOISE LIMITER — Operation is similar to that

of delay line. Voltage developed across voltage
divider at output of 1N34 germanium diode is
instantaneous, while DC voltage at output of
circuit is delayed. If no pulses are present and
0.1-pF capacitor is not at ground, 1N914 silicon
diode will have floating voltage. High positive
pulses charge capacitor, and silicon diode
shorts audio voltage. Negative pulses disable
germanium diode directly. Circuit thus acts as
noise blanker in both directions. Used in Euro-
pean communication receivers. Transistor type
is not critical. — U. L. Rohde, IF Amplifier Design,
Ham Radio, March 1977, p 10-21.
SPIKE REJECTION — Used to eliminate noise signal level will be sampled. If transition was and describes operation in detail. — A. S. Bo-
that may be present on signal line. Based on caused by desired legitimate signal, sampled zorth. Pulse Verification Yields Good Noise Im-
sampling input line at fixed time after each de- waveform represents true signal delayed by munity, EDN Magazine, Nov. 5, 1973, p 75 and
tected transition. If transition was due to noise pulse width of mono MVBR. Mono pulse width 77.
spike, spike will no longer be present and true is about 12 /ns. Article gives circuit waveforms
NOISE CIRCUITS 643
'
AF LINE FROM PRODUCTR DETECTOR
*— AF LEAD
- ! RL ,
i 1 50K:r
AF GAIN
2 1 CONTROL
.1. (IN RX)
OK - C3 i
Cl 1
005
05 05
C2 -
RL R1 C2.C3
10K .022 .22 .005
.005
Cl .05
50 K CF
.001
50 K 270 K
1 5 .001 50 pF
.01
EMERGENCY NOISE GENERATOR— Simple cir-
AF NOISE LIMITER — Audio signals rectified by common load resistors. Diodes are fast-switch- cuit generates noise in audio range at wideband
diodes develop bias across R1 and Cl such that ing silicon such as 1N916. To minimize residual level adjustable with IK pot from 0 to over 1 V.
diodes are back-biased. Diodes thus conduct clipping distortion, use value for CF that gives If 680-pF capacitor is omitted, noise output goes
and clip only when noise signal peaks exceed 3-dB rolloff at about 2.5 kHz. — P. Lovelock, The up to 30 MHz with wideband level more than 5
bias level. Component values depend on imped- Audio Bishop, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1974, p 75- V. — D. Di Mario, Simple Noise Generator, Wire-
ance of audio circuit; tablegives values forthree 76. less World, May 1978, p 70.
SSB CW NOISE LIMITER — Simple limiter is easy

to install in receiver having good product de-
tector. Inplace of dual-diode tube, semiconduc-
tor diodes having high front-to-back ratio may
be used. — Novice Q & A ,73 Magazine, Holiday
issue 1976, p 20.
CHAPTER 59
Operational Amplifier Circuits
Versatility of modern opamps is illustrated by variety of amplification, control,

signal processing, and other general-purpose functions involving frequencies
ranging from DC to many megahertz. More specific applications will be found
in practically all other chapters.
+15 V
VARIABLE DEAD-BAND RESPONSE— Diode

bridge in feedback loop of opamp provides con-
trolled amount of dead-band response. As value
of R2 is increased from 0 ohms, voltage devel-
oped across R2 serves to raise dead-band level
at which bridge opens and circuit amplifies with
normal gain of R3/Rn. Below dead-band level,
bridge is blocked and circuit gain is equal to par-
allel combination of R2 and R3 divided by R Use
matched diodes such as CA3019 for peaks
below ±7 V; for higher peaks, use 1N914s. — W.
G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard W.
TWO-STAGE POSTAMPLIFIER— Connections

shown for CA3600E CMOS transistor-pair array
give total open-loop gain of about 160 dB for
system. Open-loop slew rate is about 65 V/j+s. —
"Linear Integrated Circuits and MOS/FET's,"
p 278-279.
644
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 645
V+ = +38V
ci
130 V P-P DRIVE — Two LM143 high-voltage

opamps operating from 38-V supply can pro-
vide up to 138 V P-P undipped into 10K floating
load when connected as shown to give nonin-
verting voltage amplifier followed by unity-gain
inverter. Power supplies should be bypassed to
ground with 0.1-/*F capacitors. — "Linear Appli-

Clara, CA, 1976, AN-127, p 1-3.
BUFFERED OPAMP— NPD8301 dual FET is ideal

low-offset low-drift buffer for LM101A opamp.
Matched sections of FET track well over entire
bias range, for improved common-mode rejec-
tion.— “FET Databook.” National Semiconduc-
tor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36.
+ 15V
LOW-COST FET-INPUT — Uses two 2N3819

FETs as differential source-follower operated at
constant source current of 200 Â provided by
Tr, and Tr2. Input performance is comparable to
that of more expensive commercial units.
Match FETs to reduce thermal drift. Trim input
offset voltage to zero by adding resistor in ap-
LM301A propriate FET source. Input impedance of circuit
output
is greater than 10'3 ohms. — J. Setton, F.E.T.-
Input Operational
Nov. 1976, p 61. Amplifier, Wireless World,
-15V
OPTIMIZING CMR — Article covers procedures

for optimizing common-mode rejection when
opamp is used to drive digital voltmeter. Value
12-ftH GYRATOR — Two RCA opamps in gyrator 1 at 10 Hz to maximum of 500 at 10 kHz. Article of Rv is determined by using resistance box con-
loaded with 10-pF capacitor give effective 12- nected between negative supply and pin 1 or 5
gives design equations.— A. C. Caggiano, Sim-
pH inductorthat remains constant in value over while other pin is shorted to negative supply,
pie Gyrator for L from C, EEE Magazine, Aug.
range from 10 Hz to almost 1 MHz. Ovaries from 1970, p 78. choosing pin which gives voltage swing in right
direction on meter, then adjusting resistance
box for zero output. Resistance box is similarly
used at dRs and dR, locations. — R. J. Isaacs, Op-
timizing Op-Amps, Wireless World, April 1973,
p 185-186.
TRACKING QUAD GAIN CONTROL— Basic cir-

cuit for each channel uses section of National
LM324 quad opamp with section of AH5009
quad FET in feedback path. Each channel is AC
coupled and has 40-dB range (gain range of 1 to
100). Bandwidth is minimum of 10 kHz, and S/N
ratio is better than 70 dB with 4.3-VRMS maxi-
mum output. — J. Sherwin, "A Linear Multiple
Gain-Controlled Amplifier," National Semicon-
ductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1975, AN-129, p 6.
POSTAMPLIFIER FOR OPAMP— High input

impedance of National MM74C04 inverter
makes it ideal for isolating load from output of
LM4250 micropower opamp operating from sin-
*20V gle dry pcell.

AN-88, 2. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," Na-
+ 3 to -M5V
NEGATIVE R — Negative-resistance connection

of 741 opamp is suitable for both AC and DC ap-
plications. Requires floating power supply be-
CMOS DRIVER FOR OPAMP — CMOS inverter alleling two other sections of CMOS. — B. Fur- cause 0-V terminal floats with respect to both
pair (one-third of CD4007A) is used in closed- output terminals. For DC use, adjust 10K pot to
low, CMOS Gates in Linear Applications: The
loop mode as unity-gain voltage follower for cancel offset voltage of amplifier. Value of neg-
Results Are Surprisingly Good, EDN Magazine,
CA3080 opamp. Slew rate is 1 V/ps. Output cur- ative resistance is varied with RN or by adjusting
March 5, 1973, p 42-48.
rent capability of 6 mA can be increased by par- ratio of RF to RA. Can be used to make LC circuits
operate at subaudio frequencies. — D. A. Miller,
Negative Resistor, Wireless World, June 1974,
p 197.
UNITY-GAIN AF CURRENT AMPLIFIER— Exter- frequency, to well above 10 at 340 kHz for values
nal components are used with National LM377/ shown — D. Bohn, AC Unity-Gain Power Buffers
378/379 family of opamps to provide stability at Amplify Current, EDN Magazine, May 5, 1977,
unity gain. Article gives design equations. At
frequencies above audio band, gain rises with p 113-114.
+ 15V
741 OPAMP — Power supply and null pot con-

nections for TO-5 metal-can package and 8-lead
DIP package are shown. Maximum rated power
supply voltages are ±18 V, but lower voltages
may be used. 9-V transistor battery is often
used for each supply, but higher voltages will
permit larger output signal swing. Pin 3 is in-
verting input, and pin 4 is noninverting input.
With values shown, both input terminals see
about same resistance, and output offset can be
nulled to zero. Gain of circuit is about 100. — C.
Hall, Circuit Design with the 741 Op Amp, Ham
Radio, April 1 976, p 26-29.
R4 lOKfi
FASTER 741 — Feed-forward techniques extend

dynamic response of differential opamp to give AC-coupled feed-forward amplifier. Perfor-
unity-gain bandwidth of 18 MHz, slew rate over mance depends on use of nonstandard pin con- SUMMING AMPLIFIER — Provides output equal
200 V/ps, and DC gain above 10' V/V, while pre- nections for 741, as shown. Developed for to sum of all input voltages, with high precision.
serving latchup-free operation and wide input processing fast analog data in frequency do- Use of Precision Monolithics OP-07A opamp
voltage range. Composite amplifier uses fast main.— J. Dostal, 741 + Feedforward = Fast- makes circuit adjustment-free.— "Ultra-Low
symmetrical four-transistor output stage that is Differential Op Amp, EDN Magazine, Aug. 20, Offset Voltage Op Amp," Precision Monolithics,
symmetrically driven by DC-coupled 741 and by 1974, p 90. Santa Clara, CA, 1977, OP-07, p 7.
10K 10K
amplifier to produce absolute-value circuit for HALF-WAVE RECTIFIER — Provides accurate

SIGNAL SEPARATOR — Circuit shown for Harris multiplying or averaging functions. For band- half-wave rectification of incoming signal. Gain
HA-2530 opamp separates input voltage into its width of 1 MHz, dynamic range is 100 mV to 10 is 0 for positive signals and -1 for negative sig-
positive and negative components. Diodes V peak. — "Linear & Data Acquisition Products," nals. Diodetypes are not critical. Polarity can be
steer components to separate outputs. Appli- Harris Semiconductor, Melbourne, FL, Vol. 1, inverted by reversing both diodes. With opamp
cations include feeding outputs into differential 1977, p 7-54-7-55 (Application Note 516). shown, circuit will function up to 10 kHz with
less than 5% distortion. — "Signetics Analog
1 0K
p 641-643.
ABSOLUTE-VALUE AMPLIFIER— Generates than 1 V. Opamp is noninverting on positive sig- TEMPERATURE-COMPENSATED OFFSET CON-
positive output voltage for either polarity of DC TROL— Drift effects of offset adjustment are re-
nals and inverting on negative signals. — "Sig-
input. Opamp and diode types are nor critical. netics Analog Data Manual," Signetics, Sunny- moved by deriving correction current from
Accuracy is highest for input voltages greater vale, CA, 1977, p 641-643. emitter-base voltage of PNP signal transistor to
develop appropriate temperature compensa-
+7.5V tion. Correction current is divided with conven-
tional control pot used for adjusting offset volt-
age. Article gives design equations. — J.
Graeme, Offset Null Techniques Increase Op
Amp Drift, EDN Magazine, April 1, 1971, p 47-
48.
•MATCHED TO 1% FASTER SLEWING — Single transistor stage at

output of opamp increases slewing rate by fac-
tor equal to gain of transistor stage. Choose R,
RECTIFIER WITHOUT DC OFFSET— Avoids tantalu ms. D, and D2 should be matched for for- to meet output impedance requirements and
drawback of large nonlinearity at low signal lev- ward voltage at peak load current. Use Hewlett- current rating of supply. R2 is then made equal
els, by isolating AC of opamp from DC output. Packard 5082-281 0 hot-carrier diodes instead to to R, divided by desired gain of transistor stage.
Circuit has wide bandwidth, as required for rec- improve operation at millivolt signal levels or at Collector of Tr, should be at 0 V when output of
tifying 20-kHz input signal with high precision. higher frequencies. — D. Belanger, Single Op opamp is 0 V, assuming feedback loop is not
Output coupling capacitor C3 is low-leakage Amp Full- Wave Rectifier Has No DC Offset, EDN closed by R,. Article gives design equations. — L.
Mylar; for low-frequency operation, it can be Magazine, April 5, 1977, p 144 and 146. Short, Faster Slewing Rate with 741 Op-Amp,
Wireless World, Jan. 1973, p 31.
replaced with two back-to-back low-leakage
SIGNAL CONDITIONER — FET-buffered opamp

circuit will operate from source impedances up
to 100 megohms while providing voltage gain
of 5. Offset adjustment is provided for initial cal-
ibration of circuit. Developed for use with high-
impedance sensors such as pH electrodes. —
"Industrial Control Engineering Bulletin," Mo-
torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1973, EB-4.
C,
HIGH-SPEED HALF-WAVE RECTIFIER— Pro-

duces inverted half-wave replica of input signal
with low error at frequencies up to 100 kHz. C,
provides feed-forward compensation. For neg-
ative-going output, reverse connections to
diodes. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook,"
Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 191 —
192.
UNITY-GAIN FEED-FORWARD— Provides 10 V quency circuit takes over completely when

P-P output signal at 2 MHz when gain of feed- input frequency is too high for input stage to
forward amplifier is increased to give closed- respond. — E. Renschler, “The MC1539 Opera-
loop gain of 10. Provides fast response to step- tional Amplifier and Its Applications,” Moto-
function input, with slow settling. High-fre- rola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974, AN-439, p 20.
RF
FAST SLEWING AND LOW IMPEDANCE— With

values shown, Tr, increases slewing rate of
ments and high speed is preserved. — D. Sod- opamp by factor of 5, and Tr. connected as emit-
SUMMING AMPLIFIER — Combination of Preci- ter-follower reduces output impedance to meet
erquist and G. Erdi, 'The OP-07 Ultra-Low
sion Monolithics OP-07C and OP-01C opamps Offset Voltage Op Amp — a Bipolar Op Amp requirements of following circuit. Feedback is
gives 18 V//rs slew rate. Can be used as current- taken from emitter of Tr, to noninverting input
That Challenges Choppers, Eliminates Nulling,"
output summing amplifierfor D/A converter be- Precision Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1975, of opamp. — L. Short, Faster Slewing Rate with
AN-13, p 9.
cause it requires no zero scale offset adjust- 741 Op-Amp, Wireless World, Jan. 1973, p 31.
R,
100-kHz FULL-WAVE RECTIFIER— Feed-for- for measurement and analysis. — W. G. Jung,

ward connection of opamps gives high-speed "1C Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, In-
full-wave rectification of signals up to 100 kHz dianapolis, IN, 1974, p 193-194.
’ 38V
BOOSTING VOLTAGE RATING — Bootstrapping

technique permits operation of low-voltage
unity-gain opamp from high-voltage DC supply
for handling large input signal voltage swings,
while retaining gain and voltage stability of
opamp. Allowable input-voltage range depends
entirely on transistor rating. With 1000-V tran-
sistors, circuit can handle input signals of ±475
V. Input capability for values shown is ±100 V
P-P for DC to 10 kHz. Output capability is 5 mA
P at ±100 V. Input impedance is lOteraohms. —
S. A. Jensen, High-Voltage Source Follower,
EDNIEEE Magazine, Feb. 1, 1972, p 58.
100-mA CURRENT BOOSTER— Provides short- heatsinks with transistors. Output is ±33 V P-P
circuit protection along with current boosting into 400-ohm load. — "Linear Applications, Vol.
for LM143 high-voltage opamp. Diodes are 2," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA,
1N914. Use Thermalloy 2230-5 or equivalent 1976, AN-127, p 4.
DIFFERENTIAL I/O — Arrangement shown for

three 741 opamps gives amplifier having differ-
ential output as well as differential input. Circuit
is designed primarily to drive meter with signal
of either polarity when center-tap power supply
is not available. Article covers operation and
adjustment of circuit. — A. D. Monstall, Differ-
ential Input and Output with Op-Amps, Wire-
less World, Jan. 1973, p 31.
POWER OPAMP — Transistor Q1 and power

transistor 1C Q2 form equivalent of power PNP
transistor for use with NPN LM195 power tran-
sistor 1C serving as output stage for opamp. Cir-
cuit is stable for almost any load. Bandwidth
can be increased to 150 kHz with full output re-
-15V
sponse by decreasing Cl to 15 pF if there is no
capacitive load to cause oscillation. — "Linear
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS +38V
651
O0PERATE
TEST 20k
POWER BOOSTER — Simple two-transistor

power stage increases power output of LM143
high-voltage opamp. Intended for loads less
than 2K. Drawbacks are noticeable crossover
distortion and lack of short-circuit protection.
Transistors should be used with Thermalloy
2230-5 or equivalent heatsinks. — "Linear Appli-
Article gives operating instructions based on cations, Vol. 2," National Semiconductor, Santa
PHASE-ERROR TESTER — Circuit reveals signif- observation of null with XY CRO connected to Clara, CA, 1976, AN-127, p 3.
icant phase errors at relatively low frequencies, phase-error test output. — R. A. Pease, Tech-
even for high-speed opamps. Technique applies nique Trims Op-Amp Amplifiers for Low Phase
to most opamps and almost any signal gain. Shift, EDN Magazine, Aug. 20, 1977, p 138.
100-kHz BUFFERED RECTIFIER— High-speed off and feedback loop of A2 is closed through D2
110 voltage follower is used within feedback so output terminal is maintained at low imped-
loop of A, to maintain low output impedance for ance. For opposite output polarity, reverse
precision half-wave rectifier. When input signal diode connections. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp
is positive, D, and R4 rectify signal and A2 fol- Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, POSTAMPLIFIER — CMOS transistor pair from
lows this signal. On opposite alternations, D, is 1974, p 192. CA3600E transistor array provides additional
30-dB gain above 100-dB gain of CA3080 opamp
15V
to give total of 130 dB. Current output is about
10 mA. Remaining transistor pairs of array can
be paralleled pair shown to give greater out-
put.—"Linear Integrated Circuits and MOS /
NJ, 1977, p 278-279.
LOW TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT— Use of

) OUT National 2N3954 dual FET as input device for
opamp gives fast response to thermal tran-
sients, making it possible to adjust R3 and R4
so temperature coefficient is less than 5 /uV/°C
from — 25°C to +85°C. Common-mode rejection
INPUTS ratio is typically greater than 100 dB for input
voltage swings of 5 V. Drain current level is set
by Q2 which is 2N5457 FET.— "FET Databook,"

p 6-4— 6-7.
-15V
+ 15V
1-1000 GAIN RANGE — Control voltage of 0 to

-9 V changes gain of amplifier over complete
range while providing maximum output level of
8.5 VRMS and bandwidth of over 20 kHz at max-
imum gain. If gain range of 100 is sufficient, am-
plifier can be changed to LM301A; 20K resistor
is then changed to 2K. — "Linear Applications,
CA, 1976, AN-129, p 5.
+ 15V
JFET INPUT — U401 dual JFET acting as preamp

for standard bipolar opamp uses CR033 N-chan-
nel JFET as 330- fj. A current source. R4 is used to
null initial offset. R3 is adjusted for minimum
drift. — "Analog Switches and Their Applica-
tions," Siliconix, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 7-51.
POWER BOOSTER — Opamp power booster is

used after conventional opamp when greater
power-handling capability is required. 741
opamp circuit shown will drive moderate loads.
Other opamps may be substituted in power
stage if value of R1 is appropriately changed. —
Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 640-642.
•■375
653
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS
^2 10h rectified output
tion with LF356 opamp shown gives gain of

DIFFERENTIAL JFET INPUT — Differential con- about 500. Noise is somewhat higher than with
nection of National NPD5565 dual JFET is used single-ended JFET — "FET Databook," National
when balanced inputs and low distortion are Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-17-
main requirements for AC amplifier. Combina- 6-19.
PRECISE RECTIFICATION — Use of opamp in
combination with silicon diode overcomes non-
linearity of diode at forward voltages under
about 0.5 V. Offset-voltage pot is adjusted for
symmetrical output waveform for small input
voltages. D, is connected in opamp feedback
path so initial forward voltage drop required to
make diode conduct is supplied by amplifier
output. Second feedback path through D; pre-
vents output saturation on input half-cycles for
which D, is reverse-biased. — G. B. Clayton, Ex-
less World, June 1973, p 275-276.
3-W PULSE AMPLIFIER— Motorola MC1554 should not be exceeded during peak of output
power amplifier provides voltage gain of 18 for pulse. — "The MC1554 One-Watt Monolithic In-
peak pulse power output up to 3 W. Maximum tegrated Circuit Power Amplifier," Motorola,
peak output current rating of 500 mA for 1C Phoenix, AZ, 1972, AN-401, p 3.
+15V
R4 lOKn
SUMMING WITHOUT ADJUSTMENTS— Sin-

gle-stage opamp for analog computation pro-
vides high-precision output that is function of
*0r other op amp compensated for unity gain. multiple input variables. Circuit drift is less than
* *D, - D, are matched monolithic diodes, such as the CA3019.
For peak voltage higher than +7V, use 1N914s.
2 /tV per month, eliminating need for periodic
calibration while ensuring long-term accuracy.
DEAD-BAND RESPONSE — With bridge in feed- jumps to new level determined by R2. Input is Opamp is Precision Monolithics OP-07A. — D.
back loop of opamp, low-level input signals give then amplified by ratio of R2/R, in normal linear Soderquist and G. Erdi, "The OP-07 Ultra-Low
essentially 100% feedback around A, so there manner. Circuit thus has dead-band property Offset Voltage Op Amp— a Bipolar Op Amp
is very little output voltage. When input current for low levels. Value of R, sets threshold level.—
That Challenges Choppers, Eliminates Nulling,"
through R, rises above allowable current limit Precisionp 11.
AN-13, Monolithics. Santa Clara, CA, 1975,
W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard
of circuit, bridge opens and output voltage W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 206-207.
E0 = E„ with S, at A,
SIGN CHANGER — When switch S, grounds pin

3 of opamp, circuit becomes inverter providing
180° phase shift. When S, is at position A, input
voltage acts on both inputs of A, and no current
flows through R, and R2; output voltage is then
equal to input voltage. Switch permits remote
programming of phase reversal. For higher
5Kn _ R2_ input impedance, 1556 opamp can be used. —
W. G. Jung, “1C Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard
10 Kft" Rl
ABSOLUTE-VALUE RECTIFIER— Use of CA3140 Bandwidth for -3 dB is 290 kHz, and average DC
bipolar MOS opamp in inverting gain configu- output is 3.2 V for 20 V P-P input.— "Circuit
ration gives symmetrical full-wave output Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," RCA Solid State Di-
when equality of design equations is satisfied. vision, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 18.
* 1 5V
SINGLE-ENDED JFET — Basic JFET amplifier is

virtually free from popcorn noise problems of
bipolar transistors and bipolar-input opamps.
Combining JFET transconductance amplifier
with current-to-voltage opamp adds high volt-
age gain and simplifies circuit applications.
Gain-limiting 7.5K FET drain resistor is by-
passed and removed from gain equation. Pa- R,
rameter variation problems are minimized by
biasing FET source through 15.1K resistance to
negative supply. Gain variations are minimized
by leaving 100 ohms of this resistance unby-
passed.— J. Maxwell, FET Amplifiers — Take An-
other Look at These Devices, EDN Magazine,
Sept. 5, 1977, p 161-163.
TEST 18k 2k, PHASE ADJUST

qOPERATE
ceff
Rs = * R3
R5 ' C1
CAPACITANCE MULTIPLIER— Resistance ratio

TEST OUTPUT determines factor by which value of C, is mul-
tiplied when used in simple opamp circuit
shown. With values shown, ratio is 1000 and 10-
MINIMIZING PHASE ERROR — Phase compen- unnecessary. Step response has about 30% ov- g F capacitor provides effective capacitance of
sation circuit trimmed by R2 keeps phase error ershoot, and sine response has about +1 dB of 10,000 gf. Q of circuit is limited by effective se-
of LM118 opamp well below 1° from DC to 200 peaking before going 3 dB down at about 2 ries resistance, so R, should be as large as prac-
kHz. In-phase error due to gain peaking is also MHz. — R. A. Pease, Technique Trims Op-Amp
tical. Opamp type is not critical. — "Signetics
low. Feed-forward network connected to pin 8 Amplifiers for Low Phase Shift, EDN Magazine, Analog Data Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale,
improves stability, making feedback capacitor Aug. 20, 1977, pi 38.
CA, 1977, p 640-641.
Rl R2 *t!v
Rf
FEED-FORWARD OPAMP — DC input character- to give desired bandwidth. Composite rolloff of SINGLE-SUPPLY POSTAMPLIFIER— Use of two
istics are determined by A„ which is bypassed 6 dB per octave is then obtained by narrow- sections of MM74C04 as postamplifier for
at high frequencies, while AC-coupled A2 deter- banding A, with R„ and C2, so gain-bandwidth LM324 single-supply amplifier gives open-loop
mines dynamic performance. Resulting com- product is equal to ratio between unity-gain gain of about 160 dB. Additional CMOS inverter
posite amplifier combines such desired prop- crossover frequency of A2 and open-loop sections can be paralleled for increased power
erties as low input current and drift, large gain. — Fairchild Linear 1C Contest Winners, EEE to drive higher current loads; each MM74C04
bandwidth and slew rate, and fast settling time. Magazine, Jan. 1971, p 48-49. section is rated for 5-mA load. — "Linear Appli-
Compensation network C3-C„-C5 is chosen first cation, Vol. 2," National Semiconductor, Santa
Clara, CA, 1976, AN-88, p 2.
200k
power stage for LM143 high-voltage opamp pot R11 and on output voltage. Limit ranges common Thermalloy 6006B or equivalent heat-
provides very high peak drive currents along from 14 A when R11 is 0 down to about 4 A for
sink.— "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," National
with output voltage swings to within 4 V of ± 38 5K. Maximum power output is 144 WRMS, for Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-127,
V supply under full load. Maximum output cur- which frequency response is 3 dB down at 10
p 5—6.
♦15V
GAIN-CONTROLLED AMPLIFIER— Control volt-

age in range of 0 to -9 V provides gain range of
1 to 1000 for National LM318 opamp using FET
in feedback path. Bandwidth is better than 20
kHz at maximum gain. Applications include re-
mote or multichannel gain control, volume ex-
pansion, and volume compression/limiting. — J.
Sherwin, "A Linear Multiple Gain-Controlled
Amplifier," National Semiconductor, Santa
30 K
Clara, CA, 1975, AN-129, p 5.
60- kHz PRECISION RECTIFIER— Usable full- loop of opamp. Added stage is driven from
power response of typical opamp is boosted to power-supply current drains of opamp. Article
60 kHz while giving 300-kHz small-signal band- traces operation of circuit in detail. — J. Graeme,
width. Circuit uses transistors to provide speed- Boost Precision Rectifier BW above That of Op
boosting gain during transition from one pre- Amp Used, EDN Magazine, July 5, 1974, p 67-
cision rectifier diode to the other in feedback 69.
V + = >38V
R11
100k
eration of Motorola MC1539G opamp in closed-

loop mode with noninverting gain of 100 and
source impedance of about 300 ohms. Circuit
bandwidth is about 5 kHz. — E. Renschler, "The
MCI 539 Operational Amplifier and Its Applica-
tions," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974, AN-439, p
19.
15V
CERAMI
C X
0 I^F
FET DRIVE — National PF5102 JFET is combined
V~ 38 V with LF356 opamp to give low noise and high
C4
gain, for use as wide-bandwidth AC amplifier.
1-A CURRENT BOOSTER— Used with LM143 four transistors should be on Thermalloy 6006B Typical gain for combination shown is about
high-voltage opamp to increase output current or equivalent common heatsink. All diodes are 1000. Any other opamp can be used as long as
while providing short-circuit protection and low 1N3193. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," Na- it meets slew rate and bandwidth require-
crossover distortion. With 40-ohm load, output tional Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, ments.— "FET Databook," National Semicon-
voltage can swing to + 29.6 V and -28 V. All AN-127, p 4-5. ductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-17-6-19.
657
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS
C lOn
R2 2 k eo
Hh
R +15v
VOLTAGE/FREQUENCY CONVERTER— Uses

opamp A, as integrator and A2 as regenerative
comparator with hysteresis, to generate se-
quence ofpulses with repetition frequency pro-
portional to DC input voltage. Article gives de-
PRECISION RECTIFIER WITH GAIN— Gain is se- stage. Following transition, one of diodes con- sign equations and typical waveforms. Input
lectively added during open-loop switching ducts heavily, shunting high output impedance voltage range is 10 mV to 20 V for linear oper-
transition of precision rectifier diodes D, and D2 of stage and dropping its gain below unity. Ar- ation.— G. B. Clayton, Experiments with Oper-
in feedback loop of opamp, to boost speed ticle covers circuit operation in detail. — J. ational Amplifiers, Wireless World, Dec. 1973,
while maintaining feedback stability following Graeme, Boost Precision Rectifier BW above
switching. Q, and Q2 add gain of about 250 up That of Op Amp Used, EDN Magazine, July 5,
to 30 kHz during switching, because D, and D2
1974, p 67-69.
are then off and do not shunt output of added
p 582.
C4
wv
+ 15 V 9 Rf
SUMMING OPAMP— Motorola MC1539 serves

as closed-loop summing amplifier having very
small loop-gain error because of high open-loop
gain. Rs should equal parallel combination of RA,
300-Hz VOLTAGE FOLLOWER— Simple LM195 opamp. — R. Dobkin, "Fast 1C Power Transistor Rb, Rc, and RF. — E. Renschler, "The MC1539 Op-
power output stage provides 1-A output for with Thermal Protection,” National Semicon- erational Amplifier and Its Applications," Mo-
voltage-follower connection of LM108 ductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1974, AN-110, p 6. torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974, AN-439, p 18.
R3 R4 R5
f # .
lOKfi
PRECISION ABSOLUTE VALUE— Circuit using plifier stages. Negative input turns D1 off and
two Precision Monolithics OP-07 opamps pro- D2 on, changing resistor currents precisely
vides precise full-wave rectification by inverting enough to give overall circuit gain of - 1 . Design
negative-polarity input voltages and operating equations are given. — D. Soderquist and G. 1000 GAIN AT 2 kHz— Uses Harris HA-2900
as unity-gain buffer for positive-polarity inputs. Erdi, "The OP-07 Ultra-Low Offset Voltage Op chopper-stabilized opamp. Either input termi-
Applications include positive-peak detectors, Amp — a Bipolar Op Amp That Challenges Chop- nal may be grounded, giving choice of inverting
single-quadrant multipliers, and magnitude- or noninverting operation, or inputs may be dri-
pers, Eliminates Nulling," Precision Monolith-
only measuring systems. For positive inputs, ics, Santa Clara, CA, 1975, AN-13, p 10. ven differentially. Symmetrical input networks
circuit simply operates as two unity-gain am- eliminate chopper noise, limiting total input
noise to about 30 /uVRMS when C is 0. Noise can
be further reduced, at expense of bandwidth, by
adding optional capacitors C as shown. Without
these capacitors, bandwidth is 2 kHz. — "Linear

& Data Acquisition Products," Harris Semicon-
ductor, Melbourne, FL, Vol. 1, 1977, p 7-69 (Ap-
plication Note 518).
+ 13 V
50 U
100 mW
AT 10 % THD
NOTE
TRANSISTORS pi , p2 , p3 AND nl , n2, n3 ARE
PARALLEL - CONNECTED WITH Q8 AND QI2 ,
RESPECTIVELY, OF THE CA3I60
POWER BOOSTER— CA3600E CMOS transistor loop gain of 20 dB. Typical large-signal band-
array provides parallel-connected transistors width (—3 dB) is 190 kHz. — "Linear Integrated
for power-boosting capability with CA3160 Circuits and MOS/FET's," RCA Solid State Divi-
opamp. Feedback is used to establish closed- sion, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 271-273.
-GUV
30 pF
o
60 V
Vv\
10 K
COMPLEMENTARY POSTAMPLIFIER— Paral- FULL-WAVE RECTIFIER— Circuit provides ac-

leled NAND gates provide buffering for LM308 supply while MM74C02 gates supply same curate full-wave rectification of input signal,
opamp while increasing current drive to about with distortion below 5% up to 10 kHz. Reversal
amount from negative supply. — "Linear Appli-
50 mA for 6 V P-P output. MM74C00 NAND cations, Vol. 2," National Semiconductor, Santa of all diode polarities reverses polarity of out-
gates supply about 10 mA each from positive Clara, CA, 1976, AN-88, p 2-3. put. Output impedance is low for both input po-
larities, and errors are small at all signal
levels. — "Signetics Analog Data Manual,” Sig-
netics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 641-643.
R2
100M
GUARDED FULL-DIFFERENTIAL— Extremely

high input impedance is achieved by intercept-
ing leakage currents with guard conductor
placed in leakage path and operated at same
voltage as inputs. A2 serves as guard drive am-
plifier, with R5 and R6 developing proper volt-
age for guard at their junction. R7 balances
detector R5 plus R6 without degrading closed-
loop common-mode rejection. — “Linear Appli-
cations, Vol. 1 ,” National Semiconductor, Santa
Clara, CA, 1973, AN-63, p 1-12.
CHAPTER 60
Optoelectronic Circuits
Basic voltage-isolating applications for optoisolators. Includes bar-code reader
circuits. Other chapters may include optoisolators in circuits having specific
applications.
PEN MOTION
BAR CODE
PATTERN
collector of Q2 is further amplified by IC2 and

BAR-CODE READER — Edge-sensitive circuit is held constant by DC servo action despite fed to dual threshold comparator. Output of
outputs short pulses at each black-to-white or changes in temperature, ambient light, or back- comparator is short pulse for each transition,
white-to-black transition. Timing diagram ground of pattern. Alternate sensor uses pho- suitable for feed to microprocessor. — F. L. Mer-
shows outputs corresponding to bar-code pat- todiode and 2N2222 transistor for increased kowitz. Signal Processing for Optical Bar Code
tern indicated. Direct-current level at base of Q1 bandwidth. Amplified differentiated signal from Scanning, BYTE, Dec. 1976, p 77-78 and 80-84.
660
OPTOELECTRONIC CIRCUITS 661
FAST OPTICALLY ISOLATED SWITCH— Uses

almost any standard optoisolator. Less than 20
p A is needed from photodiode D2 to turn LM195
power transistor fully on. Returning cathode of
D2 to separate positive supply rather than to
collector of Q1 eliminates collector-base capac-
itance of diode and increases switching speed
to 500 ns for 40-V 1-A load. — R. Dobkin, "Fast

1C Power Transistor with Thermal Protection,"
AN-110,
National pSemiconductor,
5. Santa Clara, CA, 1974,
DC/DC OPTOISOLATOR — Designed to provide diode turn-on voltage insignificant. — R. J.

input isolation for thyristor converters. Linear- Haney, Linear D.C./D.C. Opto Isolator, Wireless
ity is within 2%. Loop gain of opamp makes World, June 1976, p 72.
PULSE AMPLIFIER — Motorola MOCIOOO opto-

isolator permits coupling digital logic to system
having different supply voltages or unequal
grounds while providing essentially complete
isolation. Circuit provides transfer characteris-
tics needed in instrumentation applications and
has sufficient drive for handling low input
impedances. — "Industrial Control Engineering
Bulletin," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1973, EB-4.
+ 5Vdc
OPTICAL DRIVE FOR SWITCHING TRANSIS- can use small 60-Hz transformers with bridge ing as required for driving transistors Q, and
TOR— Base driver circuit for TRW SVT6062 rectifiers and light filtering. Control isolation is Q2. — D. Roark, "Base Drive Considerations in
power Darlington switching transistor uses provided by high-speed optical coupler that can High Power Switching Transistors," TRW
separate isolated bias supplies for each transis- be controlled directly from logic. DH0034 1C am- Power Semiconductors, Lawndale, CA, 1975,
tor to provide performance characteristics of plifies coupler output and provides level shift- Application Note No. 120, p 8.
driver transformer at lower cost. Bias supplies
OPTO ISOLATOR INPUT PROTECTION— Com-

bination ofdiodeand transistor limits input cur-
rent to LED of Motorola MOC3011 optoisolator
to safe maximum of less than 15 mA for input
voltage range of 3-30 VDC. Circuit also protects
LED from accidental reversal of polarity. — P.
O'Neil, "Applications of the MOC3011 Triac
+E
Driver," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1978, AN-780,
DC ISOLATOR WITH HARMONIC SUPPRES- 2 MHz for signals below 2 V P-P. Input signals
SION— Two isolators operating like push-pull of either polarity may be applied at either in-
amplifier minimize harmonic generation. When verting or noninverting input. — H. Sorensen,
input signal is applied, upward change of incre- Opto-lsolator Developments Are Making Your
mental gain in one isolator is balanced by down- Design Chores Simpler, EDN Magazine, Dec. 20,
ward change in other to give harmonic cancel-
1973, p 36-44. P 4.
lation. Circuit gain is about unity. Bandwidth is
SET-RESET LATCH — Provides almost complete

Isolation between each input and the output, as
well as between Inputs. Applying 2-V pulse at
14 mA momentarily to SET terminals allows up
to 150 mA to flow between output terminals.
This current flows until about 2 V at 15 mA is
applied to RESET terminals or until load voltage
is reduced enough to drop load current below
1 mA. — R. N. Dotson, Set-Reset Latch Uses Op-
tical Couplers, EDN Magazine, Jan. 5, 1973, p
107.
+V +V
ANALOG ISOLATOR — Circuit is basically FM rate proportional to input voltage. Phototran- transmitter. Supply can be ±6 V to ±12 V. —
transmission system in which light is used as sistor drives amplifier having sufficient gain to "Signetics Analog Data Manual," Signetics,
transmission medium. Transmitter uses 565 apply 200 mV P-P signal to input of receiving 565 Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 846-847.
PLL as VCO for flashing LED of optoisolator at acting as FM detector for re-creating input to
OPTOISOLATOR DRIVES 1-A POWER TRANSIS-

TOR 1C— Practically any standard optoisolator
provides sufficient output to meet input current
requirement of power transistor 1C capable of
handling 1 A. With no drive, R1 absorbs base
current of Q1, holding it off. When power is ap-
plied to LED D1, less than 20 /rA from photo-
diode D2 is sufficient to turn LM195 fully on.
Supply can be up to 42 V. — "Linear Applica-

tions, Vol. 2," National Semiconductor, Santa
Clara, CA, 1976, AN-110, p 5.
isolator. Output signal is sampled and fed back

ISOLATION WITH GAIN COMPENSATION — to FET to maintain constant AC gain. Design
Provides total harmonic distortion under 1% equations are given. — A. Billings, Optocoupler
while automatically adjusting for temperature- Provides Analog Isolation, EDN Magazine, Nov.
produced or other DC gain variations in opto- 5, 1978, p 121-122.
Clip on Photo-cell
| Spec.
Assembly Port No. 4
Unknown
I
I Wand Lamp: 5 V @ 750 mA
I
.. j
47/it .
6 V
-12
6 V
;47/if
’/j-MCI 747 L
n
6.8 k 6.8 k Orange
T
-Wv — C1747L
1
>1.1 k >10 k 15 *-M
k
-|_
x
0-5V
'/i-MC1 747 L
0
Va - M C 1 7 4 7 L — WW+ 13
.01 -N— °
9 + 12
10 M -W~
12 82 k
— VW-
£ 500 k < 1.1 k
100 k -^wv-
3900
-A/W —
K—
processing is done by microprocessor such as
UPC WAND-SIGNAL CONDITIONER— Used in opamps are used to amplify and condition pho- MC6800. — "Microprocessor Applications Man-
recovering analog output signal of photocell as- tocell output so conditioned output of circuit 5-17. ual" (Motorola Series in Solid-State Electron-
sembly for reading bars of universal product provides TTL level 1 while wand is scanning ics), McGraw-Hill, New York, NY, 1975, p 5-16-
code. All four sections of two MC1747 dual black and 0 while scanning white. Additional
664
CR, R2 DIGITAL ISOLATION — Optical coupling pro-

1N3070 560 + 5V vides complete electrical isolation between two
digital circuits. Input signal as low as +4 V can
make output change state, yet circuit safely
handles input peaks up to +100 V without
breakdown. Q, and Q2 form current regulator
that limits loop current through input of opto-
isolator to 7 mA. Zener CR2 provides reference
voltage that defines current through R2. Schmitt
trigger ST, in output eliminates oscillations that
could otherwise occur when slow-rise-time sig-
nal is applied to fast TTL circuits. Output
changes state when input signal lights LED in
optoisolator. — C. E. Mitchell, Optical Coupler
and Level Shifter, EDNIEEE Magazine, Feb. 1,
1972, p 55.
ANALOG ISOLATOR— Uses Mullard CNY44 op-

toisolator to transmit analog signals between
units of equipment having unequal ground po-
tentials. Circuit has 3-dB rolloff point at 6 Hz and
80 kHz. Total harmonic distortion at 8 V P-P out-
put is less than 1.5% between 100 Hz and 20
kHz. Output transistor TR2 is not critical. —
"Photocouplers" Mullard, London, 1974, Tech-
nical Information 4, TP1477, p 12.
MODULATED OPTOISOLATOR— Circuit pro- compromising performance. R, and C, set VCO useful with visible light systems. — R. Oliver, Im-
vides modulation of Fairchild FPA 103 optoiso- of NE567 phase-locked loop 1C at about 1400 Hz, prove Photo Sensors with a Phase-Locked Loop
lator at about 1400 Hz and demodulation of sig- and 741 opamp converts triangle wave at pin 6 1C, EDN Magazine, April 5, 1976, p 112.
nal from detector, to make optoisolator of PLL to square wave with 50% duty cycle for
insensitive to strong fluorescent light without driving LED of optoisolator through Q,. Also
+5 V
GROUND ISOLATION — Optoisolator such as

HP4320 provides ground isolation up to 200 V
between systems used in spacecraft. Arrange-
ment is effective over bandwidth of DC to 1 MHz
for both DTL- and TTL-driven circuits. — W. C.
Milo, Simple Scheme Isolates System Grounds
Optically, EDN Magazine, Sept. 15, 1970, p 64.
400-VDC SWITCH — Optically isolated photo-

SCR serves for switching high-voltage DC. T urn-
off of SCR occurs when Q3 in MCA2 photo-Dar-
lington shunts load current through gate,
bypassing gate-cathode junction within SCR.
Circuit can be operated by pulsing appropriate
LEDs to turn SCR on or off. Without input signal,
inverter maintains current through LED of
MCA2 to keep SCR clamped off. — G. C. Riddle,
Opto-lsolators Switch High-Voltage DC Cur-
rent, EDN Magazine, Feb. 5, 1975, p 54.
10 TO 30 pF
BAR-CODE SIGNAL CONDITIONER— Processes outputs 0 or 1 based on reference level estab- input. If signal level is greater than reference
low-level signal from photodiode of bar-code lished. Peak values of white level and black level level, comparator output is 0. If signal level is
scanner by converting its current outputto volt- are held long enough to read through coded bar less than reference level (black bar), output is
age in IC1 for further amplification in IC2. Am- pattern. Difference between peak values is di- 1. — F. L. Merkowitz, Signal Processing for Op-
plified signal is routed to peak holding circuits vided by 2 and fed to one input of comparator, tical Bar Code Scanning, BYTE, Dec. 1976, p 77-
that set reference level and to comparator that while amplified signal level goes to inverting 78 and 80-84.
OPTOISOLATOR AS SCANNER— Consists es-

sentially of Texas Instruments TIL 139 source/
sensor assembly and common 75140 line re-
ceiver. Applications include response to re-
flected or interrupted light. With 5-V supply,
ISOLATED THRESHOLD SWITCH— Standard value extends from 60 mA for 10 ohms at R, to output is at standard TTL levels. To make sen-
photocoupler programmed with 150-ohm resis- 3 mA for 400 ohms. Use of 2.7-megohm resistor sitivity adjustable, insert 500-ohm pot between
tor R, provides threshold switching function for R2 across base-emitter terminals of coupler re- R, and R2. To invert output polarity, connect pin
separating high-level noise from switching-sig- duces low-current gain of phototransistor. 7 of 75140 to pin 3 and take output from pin 1. —
nal pulses as short as 10 g s. Current-transfer Noise currents up to 5 mA on sensing line are W. Grenlund. Low-Cost Photo Scanner Yields
ratio of phototransistor coupler is made prac- rejected while operating currents as low as 10 High Performance, EDN Magazine, Nov. 20,
tically zero at some arbitrary input current, and mA are accepted. — J. Cook, Photocoupler 1976, p 320.
changed rapidly back to 10% or more at slightly Makes an Isolated Threshold Switch, EDN Mag-
higher level. Programming range for threshold azine, Oct. 5, 1974, p 72, 74, and 76.
screen
1. 5-5.7 MHz OPTICALLY ISOLATED VFO— Iso- quency. Oscillator is emitter-coupled Colpitts using ICs in place of transistors. Designed for
lation gives long-term frequency stability de- using low-noise 2N3707 transistor. Article also use in amateur radio equipment. — A. K. Lang-
spite changes in ambient temperature, and gives circuit for output amplifier and automatic ford, Optically Coupled V.F.O., Wireless World,
eliminates effect of fluctuating load on fre- limiting control, along with alternative versions Nov. 1974, p 455-457.
Rll +5v
LIGHT-WAND AMPLIFIER — Signal processor is currents and independent of absolute photo- LM324 quad opamp. All diodes are 1N4148 sili-
independent of most variables involved in read- current. White-level output of amplifier ICIa is con or equivalent. Q2 is MPS6513 or equivalent,
ing printed bar data. Amplifier uses exponential clamped at fixed level by comparator ICIb and and Q3 is MPS651 7 or equivalent. Output is TTL-
forward conduction properties of silicon diode peak detector D2-C1. Amplified and clamped compatible. — R. C. Moseley, A Low Cost Light
D1 to transform output of wand to logarithmi- signal is converted to binary digital output re- Wand Amplifier, BYTE, May 1978, p 92 and 94-
cally varying voltage having peak-to-peak value quired by microprocessor. Article traces oper- 95.
proportional to ratio of white and black photo- ation of circuit step by step. IC1 is National
+5 +5
1500-V ISOLATION FOR DAC— Motorola 4N27

optoisolator provides required isolation be-
tween DAC of programmable power supply and
remotely located CMOS MC14010 noninverting
buffer. — D. Aldridge and N. Wellenstein, "De-
signing Digitally-Controlled Power Supplies,"
+ 20 — 24V
35V pre-amp
tant.
2^2 a f to
light-sensitive Darlington pair in conjunction

circulation of ground currents at line frequency, with infrared-emitting diode. Diode current is
for protection of low-level signal runsfrom hum adjusted with 50K variable resistor to give best
interference. Used in tuner providing quality compromise between noise and distortion. — D.
HUM-BLOCKING OPTOISOLATOR— Optoelec- sound and video outputs, circuits for which are C. Read, Television Tuner Design, Wireless
tronic isolator for audio feed in TV set prevents given in four-part article. Optoisolator uses World, Jan. 1976, p 51-57.
TO
DIGITAL
LOGIC
BUILT-IN HYSTERESIS— Will operate at all Q, increases, Q2 and Q3 begin turning on; rising With this hysteresis action, there is no constant
speeds in range from 20 kHz down to zero while collector of Q3 adds more current through R2 to light level at which circuit will oscillate. — D. C.
still having suitable rise times for driving digital LED, giving Q, more light and driving Q3 into Hoffman, Optical Sensor Has Built-In Hyster-
logic. When optical path is blocked, all three saturation. When light dims, Q, begins to turn esis, EDN Magazine, June 5, 1973, p 91.
transistors are off and output is low. As light on off and extra current is cut off, driving Q3 off.
8k
: 200 pF
30-kHz BANDWIDTH — Isolation amplifer circuit of optoisolator. Similar 1C converts output of to-Frequency Converters — 1C Versions Perform
uses Intech/Function Modules A-8402 voltage- optoisolator back to proportional DC voltage. Accurate Data Conversion (and Much More) at
to-frequency converter having linearity of Supply for converters is nominally 12 V, but can Low Cost, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977, p 153-
±0.05% to convert input voltage to propor- be 5 to 18 V. — P. Pinter and D. Timm, Voltage-
157.
CHAPTER 61
Oscillator Circuits — AF
Includes variety of Wien-bridge, phase-shift, voltage-controlled, and
multivibrator types of oscillators producing output at audio and ultrasonic
frequencies. Other audio oscillators can be found in Code, Frequency
Synthesizer, Function Generator, Pulse Generator, Signal Generator, Staircase
Generator, Sweep, and Test chapters.
2-kHz TWO-PHASE — Dual opamp circuit uses

two-pole Butterworth bandpass filter followed
by phase-shifting single-pole stage that is fed COSINE
OUTPUT
back through zener voltage limiter. Circuit pro-
vides simultaneous sine and cosine outputs.
Distortion is about 1.5% for sine output and
about 3% for cosine. Component values shown
are for 741 opamp. For higher frequencies, use
531 opamps to reduce distortion due to slew
limiting. — "Signetics Analog Data Manual,"

Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 642-644.
output
BASIC MOS OSCILLATOR— Output is 50 Hz

when R, and R2 are 3.3 megohms, increasing to
30 kHz as resistor values are reduced to 5100
ohms. Circuit has no inherent lower frequency
limit; with 22-megohm resistors and 1-pF ca-
pacitors for C, and C2, sine-wave output is 0.007
Hz. Article gives basic equations for circuit. Fea-
tures include high input impedance, fast slew
rate, and high output voltage capability. Com-
bination of bridge rectifier with monolithic
zener diodes in regulating system provides
practically zero temperature coefficient. — M.
Bailey, Op-Amp Wien Bridge Oscillator, Wire-
less World, Jan. 1977, p 77.
668
-M5V
OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS — AF 669
GATE
1000 Hz WITH ONE CHIP— Quad NAND gate Hz for driving other TTL circuits. — Circuits, 73
gives sawtooth output waveform at 800 to 1000 Magazine, June 1977, p 49.
1-50 kHz SINE-WAVE — Uses unijunction tran-

sistor as negative resistance in simple RLC cir-
cuit. Maximum output with good waveform is
about 200 mV. Exact frequency depends on val-
ues used for L and C. — R. P. Hart, Simple Sine-
Wave Oscillator, Wireless World, July 1976, p
Rb
34.
Ro
Frequency (c.ps) C
400
0.016 mf
10 K
1000 10 K
6400 mmf 10 K
2125 10 K
3000 mmf 1 2 K va r.
10K
2975 2200 mmf 12 K var.
10 K
TEST TONES — Provides preset frequencies of load for oscillator and stable 600-ohm output
400, 1000, 2125, and 2975 Hz. Circuit consists of impedance. — S. Kelly, A Simple Audio Test Os-
RC phase-shift oscillator driving Darlington cillator, CQ, Oct. 1970, p 50 and 90.
emitter-follower that provides high-impedance
r-VW — i
T LEVEL
1 OUTPUT
| 5000
FREQ.
P0S.
SWITCH 1
1 15-150 Hz
2
150 -1500Hz
3
4 15 -150k
1500Hz Hz
-15kHz
15 Hz TO 150 kHz IN FOUR RANGES— Switch

2.34-kHz SINE-WAVE— Uses low-cost by altering single component, R3, or by inserting gives choice of ranges, with R2 and R3 varying
LM3900N quad differential amplifier 1C in low- between points B and C an RC network and pot frequency in each. Circuit draws only 4 mA from
distortion oscillator for which third harmonic connected as shown in inset. Article gives de- two 9-V batteries and provides moderate out-
distortion is typically 0.5%. Peak-to-peak am- sign equations for frequency and Q. — T. J. Ros- put at 4-5 V. Connections shown are for TO-5
plitude of sine-wave output is typically 25% of siter. Sine Oscillator Uses C.D.A., Wireless case of 741 . — T. Schultz, Audio Oscillator, QST,
Nov. 1974, p 43.
source voltage Vcc. Frequency can be changed World, April 1975, p 176.
670
STABILIZED SINE-WAVE — Peak detector is

used with FET operated in voltage variable-re-
sistance mode, in combination with standard
double-integration circuit having regenerative
feedback, to give 1.46-kHz sine-wave output
into 500-ohm load at 10 V P-P. Will operate at
power supply voltages of 8 to 18 V without ap-
preciable variation in output amplitude or fre-
quency. Output varies less than 1.5% in fre-
quency and 6% in amplitude over temperature
range of 10 to 65°C. Circuit can be modified for
other frequencies. — F. Macli, FET Stabilizes
Sine-Wave Oscillator, EDN Magazine, June 5,
1973, p 87.
1-kHz LOW-DISTORTION — Total harmonic dis-

tortion isonly 0.01% in amplitude-stabilized os-
cillator delivering 7 VRMS. Opamp A, has
closed-loop gain of 3. Regenerative feedback
through bandpass filter C,-C2-R,-R5 determines
frequency of oscillation. Output is stabilized by
multiplier whose control voltage is derived
from integrator Az. — R. Burwen, Ultra Low Dis-
tortion Oscillator, EDNIEEE Magazine, June 1,
1971, p 45.
+VCC (5 TO 15V)
4 x 1N4148 1M 2
CURRENT-CONTROLLED WIEN — Small varia- being proportional to control current. Value of

tions in input voltage to National LM3900 cur- C is 700 pF. Ratio of R2 to sum of R, and R2 shou Id
rent-mode amplifier change frequency of four- begreaterthan 3 to give voltage gain needed. —
diode current-controlled Wien bridge over K. Kraus, Oscillator with Current-Controlled 3.8 kHz — Simple opamp circuit provides con-
range from 10 to 50,000 Hz, with frequency Frequency, Wireless World, Aug. 1974, p 272. venient sine-wave AF signal. — J. S. Lucas, Un-
usual Sinewave Generator, Wireless World,
2.2 mF May 1977, p 81.
800-Hz SINGLE-TRANSISTOR— Ladder net-

work determines frequency. For higher frequen-
cies, decrease values of capacitors in network
Circuit also works with OC-2, SK-3004, and
AT30H transistors. — Circuits, 73 Magazine,
May 1977, p 31.
10-Hz WIEN-BRIDGE — JFET serves as voltage- wave; this voltage is rectified and fed to gate of
variable resistor in feedback loop of opamp, as JFET to vary its channel resistance and loop
required for producing low-distortion constant- gain of opamp — "FET Databook," National
amplitude sine wave. LM103 zener provides 6-36.
Semiconduc tor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-26-
voltage reference for peak amplitude of sine

IN MICROFARADS (jjF) ; OTHERS
ARE IN PICOFARADS I pF OR
jjjiF);
resistances are in ohms;
k >1000, M.1 000 000
DOT GENERATOR — Can be used by amateur rate of 12 per second. Frequency of free-running electrolytics. Q1-Q4 are 2N2222 or equivalent
radio operator to "talk" himself onto frequency MVBR Q1-Q2 is determined by values of Cl, C2,
NPN general-purpose transistors. — M. Righini
while listening on downlink passband of Oscar R1, and R2. Emitter-follower Q3 drives 1500-Hz and G. Emiliani, Audio Dot Generator Eases
satellite, without causing interference to other audio oscillator Q4. Cl and C2 are l-^F 16-V OSCAR SSB Spotting, QST, Nov. 1977, p 45.
stations using satellite. Generates audio dots at
25-Hz SINE-WAVE — Output voltage is 8 V P-P

at about 25 Hz for values shown, with total har-
monic distortion less than 0.5%. Circuit will op-
erate from 15 Hz to 100 kHz by using other val-
ues. Set regeneration control R, at minimum
value needed to sustain oscillation. — J. C. Free-
born, Simple Sinewave Oscillator, EDNIEEE
Wien-bridge circuit drives Texas Instruments AF or RF oscillator depending on values used for
linear opamp serving as output stage. Feedback R and C. — E. M. Noll, "FET Principles, Experi-
path from output of 1C to base of JFET stabilizes
ments, and Projects," Howard W. Sams, Indi-
output and provides temperature compensa- anapolis, IN, 2nd Ed., 1975, p 213-214.
OUTPUT
50-30,000 Hz WIEN-BRIDGE— Wide-range

audio oscillator utilizes high input impedance,
high slew rate, and high voltage characteristics
of CA3140 opamp in combination with CA3019
by passive filter and active filter using /uA709, chel and A. Paterson, Amplitude-Stabilized diode array. R1 and R2 are same value, chosen
produces amplitude-stabilized sine wave at 350 Audio Oscillator, EEE Magazine, April 1971, p
for frequency desired as given in table. — "Cir-
Hz, for which third harmonic is 39 dB down and cuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," RCA Solid State
65. Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 4.
50 k
1-kHz WIEN-BRIDGE — Simple circuit uses only

one section of LM324 quad opamp having true
1-kHz FAST-START GATED — Circuit is conven- same time, edge of input pulse is applied to differential inputs. Supply voltage range is 3-32
tional phase-shift oscillator in which frequency transistor base to kick off oscillator on its first V. Reference voltage is half of supply voltage.
is determined by C2, C3, C„, Rs, R3, and input half-cycle, which is always in phase with falling Values of R and C determine frequency accord-
impedance of transistor. When input is +5 V, edge of input signal.— G. F. Butcher, Gated Os- ing to equation f = 1/6.28RC. For 16K and 0.01
almost 100% negative feedback blocks oscilla- cillator with Rapid Start, Wireless World, Aug. //F, frequency is 1 kHz. Diode types are not crit-
tor. When input drops to 0 V, D, is reverse- 1974, p 272. ical.— "Quad Low Power Operational Ampli-
biased and negative feedback is removed. At fiers," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1978, DS 9339 R1.
(+)
100- Hz WIEN-BRIDGE— Simple RC-tuned oscil- quencies, change value of R in ohms and C in
lator uses only two resistors (R1 and R2) and farads in equation f = 1/6.28RC where frequency
two capacitors (Cl and C2) to set frequency. is in hertz, R = R1 = R2, and C = Cl = C2. — R.
Feedback path covers both FET stages. Set R6 P. Turner, "FET Circuits," Howard W. Sams, In-
for best sine-wave output. For other audio fre- dianapolis, IN, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 48-50.
20-20,000 Hz — Wide-range audio oscillator

covers AF spectrum in three switch-selected
ranges, with harmonic distortion as low as
0.15%, for quick checks of audio equipment.
Drain is only 6 mA from two 9-V batteries. Cir-
cuit is Wien-bridge oscillator using 741 opamp.
Article covers construction and calibration, in-
cluding optional connection for operation from
single 9-V battery with AF output reduced to 2
V. — J. J. Schultz, Wide Range 1C Audio Oscilla-
tor, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1974, p 25-28.
400-Hz LED-OPAMP SINE-WAVE— Uses LEDs

as nonlinear-resistance diodes in Wien-bridge
configuration with opamp operating from 15-V
supply. Circuit will operate over wide range of
other frequencies if values of R and C are
changed. R5 adjusts output amplitude from 10
to 20 V P-P. Total harmonic distortion is 1%. —
W. G. Jung, LED's Do Dual Duty in Sine-Wave

Oscillator, EDN Magazine, Aug. 20, 1976, p 84-
85.
is varied between 175 and 3500 Hz by circuit 1% over frequency range. Buffer opamp A5 pro- quency Oscillator Features Low Distortion, EDN
components forming capacitor simulator. Ad- vides high load impedance to 1C, and low source Magazine, Aug. 5, 1974, p 76 and 78.
* IK
674
MODERN ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS REFERENCE MANUAL 9-V DC
< R1
? 10K
?.L. f
r : R3
5 Q2
: r2
OPTO ISOLATOR*/^
2 16
4
) 25 K
*SEE TEXT
i
PARTS LIST
LED
ICl
DvD2,D3,D4 JAN 1N4153 NEGATIVE-RESISTANCE LED OSCILLATOR—

CR2 2200
14.3k pfd
D5 JAN 1N754A Covers frequency range of about 3.2-8 kHz with
Op. Amp. /jA709
R, R, 6.81k values shown. Will drive loudspeaker inserted
ZENER CONTROLS BRIDGE— Amplitude of 2Ri, so output begins decreasing sinusoidally. at point X. For lower frequency (range of 120-
10.5-kHz Wien-bridge oscillator output is main- As swing decreases, gain increases until e0 1800 Hz) and louder sound, change Cl to 1 /xF.
tained symmetrical above ground by using sin- reaches negative threshold. Signal then re- Negative-resistance portion of circuit includes
gle zener with diode bridge. As output e0 ap- verses and again starts going positive.— W. B. Q1, Q2, LED, R2, and R3. Optoisolator can be
proaches soft knee threshold of conduction for Crittenden and E. J. Owings, Jr., Zener-Diode MCT-2 or equivalent.— F. M. Mims, "Electronic
zener, its impedance decreases and shunts R2. Controls Wien-Bridge Oscillator, EDN Maga- Circuitbook 5: LED Projects," Howard W. Sams,
This violates oscillator requirement that R2 = zine, Aug. 1, 1972, p 57-58. Indianapolis, IN, 1976, p 26-29. NC
*
AWs^ 0.5-s TONE BURSTS — Simple 566 function gen-

erator circuit supplies audio tone for 0.5 s after
power is applied, for use as communication-
>1 rui^ network alert signal. SCR is gated on when C2

charges up to its gate voltage, which takes 0.5
s, to shunt timing capacitor between pin 7 and
ground and thereby stop tone. If SCR is replaced
by NPN transistor, tone can be switched on and
off manually at transistor base terminal. — "Sig-

j netics Analog Data Manual," Signetics, Sunny-
3 R,C,0 5 SEC TONE vale, CA, 1977, p 852-853.
BURST FOLLOWING
APPLICATION OF POWER
20-20,000 Hz LOW-DISTORTION— Opamp at

right is driven by square-wave output of com-
parator at left, with feedback between opamps
providing oscillation. Frequency range covered
by tuning control R3 is determined by equal-
value capacitors Cl and C2, which range from
0.4 #iF for 18-80 Hz to 0.002 fiF for 4.4-20 kHz.
Distortion ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% when 20%
clipping of sine wave is provided by zeners.
Both positive and negative supplies should be
bypassed with 0.1-/xF disk ceramic
-• OUT
capacitors. — "Easily Tuned Sine Wave Oscilla-
tors," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
CA, 1971, LB-16.
675
20p
OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS — AF
log compandor as phase-shift oscillator, with cillator, with frequency being varied by chang-
internal inverting amplifier serving to sustain ing values of Cl, C2, and C3. Total harmonic dis-
oscillation. Cl, C2, and C3 are timing capacitors, tortion is only 0.01% at 3-V output. — W.G
while R1 and R2 serve for phase-shift network. Jung, Gain Control 1C for Audio Signal Process-
Suitable for use only as spot-frequency AF os- ing, Ham Radio, July 1977, p 47-53.
SINGLE-POT WIEN — Can be tuned from 340 to

3400 Hz with single 150K logarithmic pot. Out-
put is constant over tuning range. Opamp can
also be 741 . Components in the two arms of the
Wien bridge have large ratio to each other, so
attenuation of network is only slightly affected
by change in one of resistors. — P. C. Healy, Wien
Oscillator with Single Component Frequency
Control, Wireless World, Aug. 1974, p 272.
20 Hz TO 200 kHz — Variable-frequency RC- ibrated against standard audio frequency with
tuned oscillator uses FETs with Wien-bridge fre- CRO set up for Lissajous figures, or calibrated
quency-determining network. Identical resis- with high-precision AF meter connected to AF
tors accurate to at least 1% are switched in pairs output terminals. — R. P. Turner, "FET Circuits,"
to change range. Dual 365-pF variable capacitor Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, 2nd
C2 is used fortuning in each range. Can be cal-
Ed., p 132-134.
200—65,000 Hz WIEN — Adding single opamp to

Wien-bridge oscillator gives wide-range oscil-
latorhaving single-control tuning. R„, D,, and D2
together stabilize output amplitude by provid-
ing controlled nonlinearity that reduces gain at
high signal levels. AD528 opamp A, is FET-input
complement to AD518 A, and has bandwidth
required for wide output frequency range. RP
sweeps output from 200 Hz to 65 kHz. Since os-
cillation frequency is inversely proportional to
square root of RP, frequency changes rapidly
near low-resistance end of pot. Use of pot with
audio or log taper makes tuning more linear. —
P. Brokaw, FET Op Amp Adds New Twist to an
Old Circuit, EDN Magazine, June 5, 1974, p 75—
77.
1-kHz WIEN-BRIDGE — Closed-loop gain of 10,

fixed by ratio of R, to R2, is sufficient to avoid
spurious oscillations. Frequency is easily
changed by using different values for capacitors
Cv R3 and lamp L, provide amplitude-stabilizing
negative feedback. Supply can be 9 V. — "Audio
Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-30-4-33.
WIEN SINE-WAVE — Uses NE571 analog com-

pandor in oscillator circuit based on Wien net-
work formed by R1-CI and R2-C2, placed around
output amplifier of section A to make it band-
pass amplifier. Section B serves as inverting
amplifier with nominal gain of 2. Total harmonic
distortion is below 0.1%. Operating frequency
is about 1.6 kHz for values shown, but can be
varied from 10 Hz to 10 kHz. Frequency is
1/27rRCfor R = R1 = R2 and C = Cl = C2. R should
be kept between 10K and 1 megohm and C be-
tween 1000 pF and 1 fxF. Useful as fixed-fre-
quency oscillator but can be tuned if matched
dual pot is used for R1-R2.— W. G. Jung, Gain
Radio, July 1977, p 47-53.
+ 20V
WIEN-BRIDGE 2-W— Uses half of LM377 1C con-

nected as oscillator, with FET amplitude stabi-
lization in negative feedback path. Total har-
monic distortion is under 1% up to 10 kHz. With
values shown, maximum output is 5.3 VRMS at
60 Hz. R12 and CIO are added if necessary to
prevent high-frequency instability.— "Audio

Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-8-4-20.
677
OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS — AF
1-2 kHz TONE GENERATOR — Simple feedback

circuit converts HEP 580 1C to emitter-coupled
MVBR producing reasonably sinusoidal output
somewhere between 1 and 2 kHz. Supply is 9-V
battery. — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C Principles, Ex-

OUTPUT
1N4001
136.5-Hz TONE — Uses 2.235-MHz crystal with

counter chip to produce 136.5-Hz subaudible
tone for amateur transmitter. Low-frequency
square-wave output of 1C is put through multi-
stage low-pass filter to develop sine wave. Tone
should be introduced into transmitter just after
audio processing (after deviation control). Al-
ternate filter is also shown; use whichever gives
best performance. For other tone frequency,
use crystal that is 16,384 times frequency de-
sired.— E. Gellender and M. Marcel, P/L Tone
Generator, QST, Aug. 1976, p 43.
R3
220 ft
1850-Hz DIGITAL 1C — Two sections of RS7404

hex inverter are connected as astable MVBR op-
erating at frequency determined by values used
for Cl and C2. Output drives loudspeaker as
shown to produce audible tones or can be con-
nected to flash LEDs. D1 reduces battery volt-
age to 5 V required by 1C. Developed for class-
room demonstrations. Circuit produces nearly
square waves with amplitude of about 3 V and
pulse width of about 100 fis if used as square-
wave generator.— F. M. Mims, "Integrated Cir-
TX, 1977, p 64-69.
SINE COSINE
OUTPUT OUTPUT
10-kHz SINE-COSINE — Combination of

SN72310 voltage-follower opamp and SN
72301A high-performance opamp gives two
outputs differing in phase by 90°. Supply is ± 18
V. — 'The Linear and Interface Circuits Data
Dallas, TX, 1973, p 4-40.
220 kil 2 kSi
1%
1 kHz/V FOR VCO — Voltage-controlled oscilla-

tor uses CA3130 opamp as MVBR and CA3160
opamp as comparator. Tracking error is about
0.02%, and temperature coefficient is 0.01% per
degree C. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs,"
P 4.
SINE-WAVE WIEN — Uses CA3140 opamp and

diode array to generate low-distortion sine
waves. Table gives values recommended for R
and C to obtain frequencies from 50 Hz to 30
kHz. Use of zener diode clamp for amplitude
control gives fast AGC. — W. Jung, An 1C Op
Amp Update, Ham Radio, March 1978, p 62-69.
CHAPTER 62
Oscillator Circuits — RF
Includes fixed and tunable Clapp, Colpitts, crystal, LC, RC, Pierce, relaxation,
and wobbulator oscillators having sine or square outputs in range from AF
spectrum to 200 MHz. Some can be changed in frequency by digital control or
diode switching of crystals.
100 kHz OUTPUT 10 kHz OUTPUT
SECONDARY STANDARD FOR 100 AND 10

kHz — Combination of 100-kHz crystal oscillator
and 10-kHz MVBR provides 100-kHz harmonics
far up into high-frequency spectrum, with each
100-kHz interval subdivided by harmonics of
MVBR using two FETs. Oscillator is tuned to
crystal frequency with Miller 42AZ23CBI or
equivalent slug-tuned coil LI. Cl adjusts crystal
frequency over narrow range for standardizing
against WWV transmissions. Synchronizing
100-kHz voltage is injected into MVBR through
R5. — R. P. Turner, "FET Circuits," Howard W.
Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 127-
129.
450-500 kHz WOBBULATOR— Center fre-

quency of sweep is adjusted with C, and C2.
With appropriate coil, operation can be ex-
tended up to 10.7 MHz. Transistors can be
BC107, BF115, BF194, or other equivalent.
Choose value of R, to give best waveform with
transistor types used. Feedback for VCO is
taken via Tr3 without phase change. If control
voltage for base of T r3 is derived from ramp out-
put of oscilloscope time base, wobbulator out-
put will follow variations in sweep voltage of
time base. — E. C. Lay, Wobbulator, Wireless
World, May 1975, p 226.
timebase
679
3.3
RC CONTROL — Chief advantage is absence of

5-MHz LOW-NOISE CRYSTAL— Extremely low- be used. — U. L. Rohde, Effects of Noise in Re- attenuation at zero phase shift in passive RC
noise series-mode crystal oscillator is designed ceiving Systems, Ham Radio, Nov. 1977, p 34- network used to define frequency of oscillation.
for use in high-quality communication receiv- 41. Output is 20 V P-P. Pilot lamp stabilizes loop
gain to unity, eliminating need for thermistor.—
W. R. Jackson, Oscillator Uses Passive Voltage-
Gain Network, Wire/ess World, April 1975, p
175.
670 pF
100-kHz SINE — Tunnel-diode sine-wave oscil-

alent of 4007, supply can be 2.5 to 5 V. Stability lator uses single GE 2J-69. Frequency is stable
279.61 1-kHz CRYSTAL — DT-cut quartz crystal is 4.3 PPM, not including temperature varia- provided there are no drastic temperature
operating in CMOS inverter pair circuit serves tions.— B. Furlow, CMOS Gates in Linear Appli- changes, but for long-term accuracy and stabil-
as efficient timing circuit. Supply voltage can be cations: The Results Are Surprisingly Good, ity a crystal oscillator is recommended. — Cir-
from 5 to 15 V. With TA5987 low-voltage equiv- EDN Magazine, March 5, 1973, p 42-48. cuits, 73 Magazine, May 1977, p 31.
♦ 12V
LI- 25 TURNS 28 AWG TAPPED 4 TURNS FROM

COLD END, WOUND ON 1/8 in DIAMETER
FORM, APPROXIMATELY 1/2 in LG.
50-MHz CRYSTAL — Uses microtransistor as os-

cillator handling 100-mW input power and giv-
UP TO 100 kHz WITH 322 TIMER— Efficient LC shown. Sine-wave output of oscillator may also ing 40-50% efficiency. Article covers construc-
oscillator uses 1C timer as inverting comparator, be used externally by adding single-supply tion with microcomponents and gives other
with pi-network LC tank as resonant circuit. opamp as buffer. Values shown give 10 kHz, but microtransistor circuits for low-power amateur
Output square wave is regulated to 3 V in am- upper limit is 100 kHz. — W. G. Jung, Take a radio use and possible bugging applications. —
plitude, independently of supply voltage; upper Fresh Look at New 1C Timer Applications, EDN
B. Hoisington, Introduction to "Microtransis-
supply limit should be 40 V instead of value Magazine, March 20, 1977, p 127-135. tors/' 73 Magazine, Oct. 1974, p 24-30.
OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS — RF 681
FREQUENCY RANGE: 1 .0 MHz to 20 MHz
-O OUT
O °UT
GATED 5-MHz RELAXATION — Output always

starts in same phase with respect to gating sig-
nal. Frequency-selective network RtR2-C pro-
vides positive feedback around MC 1545G gate-
controlled wideband amplifier. — F. Macli, 1C Op
Amp Makes Gated Oscillator, EDN Magazine ,
Sept. 1,1972, p 52.
1-20 MHz FUNDAMENTAL CRYSTAL— Oscilla- ond section is connected as Schmitt trigger to
tor requires no resonant tank circuit for fre- improve signal waveform. Third section is
quencies below 20 MHz. Use of noninverting buffer providing complementary outputs. — B.
output makes oscillator section of Motorola
Blood, "1C Crystal Controlled Oscillators," Mo-
MC10116 1C function simply as amplifier. Sec- torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1977, AN-417B, p 4.
GENERAL-PURPOSE UP TO 10 MHz— Variation

10-20 MHz CRYSTAL — Modification of basic crystal activity without changing phase angle of of Colpitts oscillator uses negative feedback at
Colpitts crystal oscillator has excellent load ca- signal. Output buffer Q3 prevents loading of os- all frequencies at which LC network does not
pacitance correlation and temperature stability. cillator. Q1 is low-cost Motorola JFET, but prac- provide phase inversion and voltage step-up.
Crystal will oscillate very close to its series res- tically any other JFET will work. CR1 is 1N914 Choose values for coil and capacitors to give fre-
onant point. Component values are optimized or 1N4148. — D. L. Stoner, High-Stability Crystal quency desired. R3 serves as regeneration con-
for 10-20 MHz. Emitter-follower Q2 provides Oscillator, Ham Radio, Oct. 1974, p 36-39. trol and for changing waveform of output. — G.
power gain for feedback energy and gives high W. Short, Good-Tempered LC Oscillator, Wire-
U 3955 TO 4455 kHz —
OSCILLATOR EMITTER FOLLOWER
I0-I0<WF
o* n a Q3, Q4 = 2N4124
. . npn silicon
lyj = dc voltage
© = RMS voltage
3.955-4.455 MHz VFO — Basic Colpitts LC oscil- is Miller 4503 1.7-2. 7 îH variable inductor. L2
lator designed for 80-meter receiver with 455- is 48 turns No. 30 enamel closewound on ’A-inch
kHz IF uses zener in supply line to minimize wood dowel or polystyrene rod. Main tuning UP TO 30 MHz — Simple single-transistor RF os-
frequency drift. Emitter-follower buffer contrib- capacitor CIO can be 365-pF unit with six of rear cillator is easily assembled from noncritical
utes to stability by isolating oscillator from rotor plates removed. — D. DeMaw and L. parts. Tuning capacitor and coil determine fre-
mixer. Low-pass filter C13-L2-C14 attenuates McCoy, Learning to Work with Semiconduc- quency.— Circuits, 73 Magazine, July 1977, p
harmonic currents developed in Q3 and Q4. LI tors, QST, June 1974, p 18-22 and 72. 35.
4700 12k 1000
42 667-MHz MOSFET — Unusual crystal-con- damental ofcrystal is desired, increase RFC1 to

trolled oscillator, similar to modified Pierce os- 100 pH or replace it with IK resistor. Stability
cillator that uses crystal between grids 1 and 2 is excellent. Circuit works well with supply as
of tetrode tube, can be used as local oscillator low as 4 V. — G. Tomassetti, Dual-Gate MOSFET JFET PIERCE CRYSTAL — Basic JFET oscillator
in VHF and UHF converters. No trimming or tun- Offers an Unusual Crystal-Controlled Oscillator circuit permits use of wide frequency range of
ing is required to get overtone frequency. If fun- Concept, QST, June 1976, p 39. crystals. High Q is maintained because JFET
gate does not load crystal, thereby ensuring
good frequency stability. — "FET Databook,"

p 6-26-6-36.
SWITCHED CRYSTALS — High stability is com- BC108, or similar NPN RF type. Diodes are
bined with multichannel selection by diode switching types such as BAY67. — U. Rohde,
switching of crystals in range of 2-20 MHz, used Stable Crystal Oscillators, Ham Radio, June
in series-resonant mode. LI is about 30 pH at 2 1975, p 34-37.
MHz and 1 pH at 20 MHz. Q1 is 2N708, HEP50,
DIGITAL CONTROL TO 100 kHz— Schmitt trig-

ger function of CD4093B 1C gives oscillator op-
eration over four decades of frequency without
changing C. Basic frequency value is equal to k/
RC, with k equal to 1.3 up to about 5 kHz and
decreasing gradually to 1.0 at 100 kHz. Use of
CD401 6 quad transmission gate permits remote
switching in of additional resistors to provide
direct digital control of frequency. Arrangement
shown gives choice of five unrelated frequen-
800-kHz OSCILLATOR— National LM3909 1C op- demonstrating versatility of this low-voltage cies, but binary selection of binary-weighted re-
erating from single 1.5-V cell is used with stan- 1C. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," National sistors will give choice of 16 unrelated frequen-
dard AM radio ferrite antenna coil having tap Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-154, cies.— R. Tenny, CMOS Oscillator Features
40% of turns from one end, with standard 365- Digital Frequency Control, EDN Magazine, June
pF tuning capacitor across coil. Developed for 5, 1976, p 114 and 116.
P 8.
+ 1 50Vdc
INCREASING CRYSTAL FREQUENCY— Adding 100-kHz CRYSTAL-DIODE RELAXATION— Crys- VARIABLE CRYSTAL — Maximum frequency
parallel resonant circuit across crystal, tuned tal-controlled relaxation oscillator uses 1N3304 shift is almost 10 kHz at 5 MHz. Use crystal
slightly above crystal frequency, makes oscil- four-layer diode as active element. R, adjusts RC made especially for variable operation. Fre-
lator frequency increase. Some plated crystals time constant so oscillator locks at fundamental quency stability is good even at extremes of
will work better than others in this circuit; third- frequency of crystal or at half this frequency. — shift. Use 5-20 /xH for LI with crystals from 6-
overtone types operating on their fundamental R. D. Clement and R. L. Starliper, Crystal-Con- 15 MHz, and 20-50 jxH for 3-6 MHz. Q1 is
generally give best results. Article covers theory trolled Relaxation Oscillator, EDNIEEE Maga- 2N3563, 2N3564, 2N5770, BC107, BC547, BF1 15,
of operation. — L. Lisle, The Tunable Crystal Os- zine, Oct. 15, 1971, p 62 and 64. BF180, SE1010, or equivalent. — R. Harrison,
cillator, QST, Oct. 1973, p 30-32. Survey of Crystal Oscillators, Ham Radio, March
1976, p 10-22.
220 5 MHz ± 250 kHz — Simple and stable circuit

using PNP transistors has tuning range of about
250 kHz in any segment of 5-9 MHz range, de-
pending on how oscillator coil is set. Wind coil
on ceramic form or use air-wound coil. Capaci-
tors marked M should be mica for stability. Tun-
ing capacitor is 365 pF, from AM radio. 400/N750
temperature-compensating capacitor can be re-
placed by 400-pF mica unless VFO is used in
mobile application. — An Accessory VFO — the
Easy Way, 73 Magazine, Aug. 1975, p 103 and
106-108.
C2 — Double-bearing variable capacitor, 50 Miller S-74 shield can).

LI 9 — 10- to 18.7-mH slug-tuned pc-board
C3 — Miniature 30-pF air variable. inductor (J. W. Miller 23A155RPC).
CR1 — High-speed switching diode, silicon RFC13, RFC14 — Miniature 1-mH rf choke
type 1 N914A. (J. W. Miller 70F103AI).
LI 8PF.
— 17- to 41 -n\-\ slug-tuned inductor, VR2 - 8.6-V, 1-W Zener diode.
Qu of 175 (J. W. Miller 43A335CBI in
OSCILLATOR AMPLIFIER
2.255-2.455 kHz LOCAL OSCILLATOR— Used in 2255-2455 kHz
1.8-2 MHz communication receiver having

wide dynamic range. Oscillator has good sta-
bility, with circuit noise at least 90 dB belowfun-
damental output. Amplifier Q14 provides re-
quired +7 dBm for injection into balanced mixer
of receiver. Two-part article gives all other cir-
cuits of receiver.— D. DeMaw, His Eminence—
the Receiver, QST, Part 1— June 1976, p 27-30
(Part 2— July 1976, p 14-17).
28V
+ 12 V
8 MHz ± 5 kHz — Tuning two-gang 365-pF vari- CRYSTAL COLPITTS — Circuit is ideal for low-
able capacitor through its range provides fre- and L2 is 40 turns No. 36 tapped at 13 turns, on frequency crystal oscillators because JFET cir-
quency change up to 5 kHz in output of 8-MHz Vinch slug-tuned form. — Circuits, 73 Maga- cuit loading does not vary with temperature.
crystal oscillator. LI is 16-24 fxH Miller 4507, zine, Jan. 1974, p 128. Output frequency is determined by threshold
used. — "FET Databook," National Semiconduc-
+ 15V
+20Vdc
330k
50-kHz MEACHAM BRIDGE — Crystal oscillator

using Meacham bridge requires no trans- 200-kHz crystals. By adding single-transistor
formers for producing low-distortion sine-wave stage, oscillator can be used as clock generator
output. Quartz crystal should be cut for opera- for TTL circuits.— K. J. Peter, Stable Low-Dis- 100-kHz CRYSTAL-FET RELAXATION— Adding
tion in series-resonant mode. With minor mod- tortion Bridge Oscillator, EDNIEEE Magazine, crystal in frequency-determining circuit im-
ifications, same circuit can be used for 100- and Nov. 15, 1971, p 50-51. proves frequency stability of UJT relaxation os-
cillator. With charging capacitor replaced by
100-kHz quartz crystal, measured output fre-
quency was 99.925 kHz — R. D. Clement and R.
L. Starliper, Crystal-Controlled Relaxation Os-
cillator, EDNIEEE Magazine, Oct. 15, 1971, p 62
and 64.
22MEG
1
^*3-22 ^20pF I50K
I PF I r\5.,
CRYSTAL WITH CMOS INVERTER— Simple
mono multivibrator circuit using MC14007 or
CD4007 operates in frequency range from 10
kHz up to top limit of about 10 MHz, with exact
frequency depending on values used for R and
LOW-NOISE 5-MHz — Very low-noise high-Q LC class A and the other operating as limiter that C. Pin 7 of 1C is VSS and pin 14 is VDD. Pins 5
oscillator operating at 5 MHz is designed for use also serves as feedback path. — U. L. Rohde, Ef- and 1 must be connected together for proper
in high-performance communication receivers. fects of Noise in Receiving Systems, Ham operation. — W. IIJ. I Prudhomme, CMOS Oscilla-
/
Oscillator uses two stages, one operating in Radio, Nov. 1977, p 34-41. tors, 73 Magazine, July 1977, p 60-63.
+ 5
and symmetrical square-wave output. Diodes

1 MHz WITH ONE GATE — Crystal oscillator uses are 1N34A or 1N914. Gimmick is 1 or 2 turns of MODULATED CRYSTAL— CA3000 differential
only one section of SN7408 TTL quad AND gate insulated wire wrapped around output lead. — amplifier is operated as efficient crystal-con-
Use series-resonant crystal having 30-pF series Clyde E. Wade, Jr., An Even Simpler Clock Os- trolled oscillator. Output frequency depends on
capacitance. Adjust IK pot for reliable start-up cillator, 73 Magazine, Nov./Dec. 1975, p 164. crystal. If desired, RF output can be modulated
with low-frequency tone applied between pin
2 and ground. — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C Principles,

50—500 kHz CRYSTAL — Parallel-mode low-fre- specified load capacitance of 30 or 50 pF, re-
quency oscillator makes excellent BFO for 455 move 100-pF capacitor Cl in series with crystal.
kHz. If oscillator will not start, reduce value of Q1 is 2N2920, 2N2979, 2N3565, 2N3646, 2N5770,
feedback resistor RF. Increasing RF reduces har- BC107, or BC547. — R. Harrison, Survey of Crys-
monic output, but oscillator may then take up tal Oscillators, Ham Radio, March 1976, p ID-
to 20 s to reach full output. For crystals with 22.
7 MHz— Uses single Siliconix 2N2608 FET. Keep

leads short. Coil can be air-wound or permea-
bility-tuned. Ituning
f capacitor
+ 5 is variable, coil
value can be fixed. RF output level depends on
circuit voltages and on activity of crystal
used.— Q & A, 73 Magazine, April 1977, p 165.
for 20-150 kHz for 150-500 kHz

crystals crystals
Q1,Q2, Q3 Q1,Q2, Q3
2N3565 BC 107, BC547
2N2920 2N3565
2N2979 2N5770
2N2222
20—500 kHz CRYSTAL — Series-mode oscillator 4.8 MHz — Uses all four sections of 7400 quad
requires no tuned circuit, gives choice of sine or lytic. Omit Cl for sine-wave operation; har- dual-input NAND gate to give 4.8 MHz output
square output, and has good frequency and monic output is then quite low, with second at pin 8, as harmonic-rich square wave. Can
mode stability. Works nicely with troublesome harmonic typically -30 dB. Output is about 1.5- cause severe television interference during test-
FT241 crystals. If any crystal fails to start relia- VRMS sine wave or 4-V square wave. — R. Har- ing. Article gives five other crystal oscillator cir-
bly, increase R1 to 270 ohms and R2 to 3.3K. For rison, Survey of Crystal Oscillators, Ham Radio, cuits using same 1C.— A. MacLean, How Do You
square-wave operation, Cl is 1- “F nonelectro- March 1976, p 10-22. Use ICs7, 73 Magazine, Oct. 1976, p 38-41.
VFO
MPF102
PRECISION VFO — Permeability-tuned oscilla-

tor provides stability and linearity at low cost
for receivers with 160-meter tunable IF stages.
LI has 28 turns No. 36 enamel closewound on
J. W. Miller form 64A022-2. Article covers con-
struction oftuning dial, incuding contouring of
LI core to give good dial linearity. Frequency
coverage is 2.255—2.505 MHz. Direct-reading
dial is accurate within 1.5 kHz over entire 250-
kHz tuning range. — W. A. Gregoire, Jr., A
Permeability-Tuned Variable-Frequency Oscil-
lator, QST, March 1978, p 26-28.
7 MHz ± 50 kHz — Requires no tuning capaci-

tors. Collector-to-base junctions of two 2N3053
transistors perform function of varactor diodes
to provide tuning over range of about 50 kHz
centered on 7 MHz. Capacitors marked M
should be mica. — An Accessory VFO — the Easy
Way, 73 Magazine, Aug. 1975, p 103 and 106-
108.
TIMER AS OSCILLATOR — Output of National

LM122 timer is fed back to trigger input through
capacitor to give self-starting oscillator. Fre-
quency is 1/RtCt. Output is narrow negative
pulse having duration of about 2R2Cf. Conser-
vative value for Ct for optimum frequency sta-
bility can be chosen from graph based on size
of timing capacitor C,. — C. Nelson, "Versatile
Timer Operates from Microseconds to Hours,"
Nationalp Semiconductor,
AN-97, 10. Santa Clara, CA, 1973,
C, 0;F)
OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS-RF 687
1-MHz FET PIERCE — Field-effect transistor

serves in place of vacuum triode in Pierce oscil-
lator. Circuit values are for 1 MHz, but tuned cir-
cuit can be adjusted to other desired frequency.
STABLE CRYSTAL— Stability is good enough tals from 1.6 to 160 MHz, with coils and capac- Q1 can be2N4360 orTIM12. — Circuits, 73 Mag-
azine, March 1974, p 89.
for microwave transmitter frequency control. itors being chosen for frequency in use.— Cir-
Will operate with fundamental or overtone crys- cuits, 73 Magazine, May 1973, p 105.
100 MHz
200 MHz WITH OSCILLATOR/DOUBLER— One having two MC10101 gates as phase shifters
AS REQUIRED
section of Motorola MC10101 is connected as and two MC1662 NOR gates. Outputs of
TO COMPENSATE
TOTAL = 32 pF
100-MHz crystal oscillator having crystal in se- MC1662s are wired-OR connected to give 200-
ries with feedback loop. LC tank circuit tunes MHz signal. One of remaining MC1662 gates is 4-MHz CRYSTAL — High-stability crystal oscil-
100-MHz harmonic of crystal and can be used to used as bias generator for oscillator. — B. Blood, lator uses two 1500-pF capacitors to swamp out
adjust circuit to exact frequency. Second sec- "1C Crystal Controlled Oscillators," Motorola, internal impedance changes that might cause
tion of 1C serves as buffer and gives comple- Phoenix, AZ, 1977, AN-417B, p 5. frequency drift. For best stability when used as
mentary 100-MHz signals for frequency doubler frequency standard, choose high-accuracy 4-
MHz crystal. — B. Kelley, Universal Frequency
9-35 pF
Standard, Ham Radio, Feb. 1974, p 40-47.
TTL 4.59-MHz CRYSTAL— Uses FT243 crystal

Rp = 510 n to VEE or 50 fi to Vjj
hand-ground to 4.5895 MHz, with 50-pF series
20-100 MHz OVERTONE CRYSTAL — Adjusta- capacitor allowing frequency to be trimmed to
Motorola 10116 1C and is nominally -1.3 V. B.
ble tank circuit C,L, ensures operation at de- Blood, "1C Crystal Controlled Oscillators," Mo- exactly 4.59 MHz for use in AFSK generator. —
sired crystal overtone. Reference voltage for dif- torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1977, AN-417B, p 3. J. Nugues, AFSK Generator, Ham Radio, July
1976, p 69.
ferential amplifier is supplied internally by
1500
+ 12V
SK D26GH TUNE PAD PflD
+ I2V
51-55 MHz — Tunable local oscillator is padded

to tune over range required for use with 1.65-
MHz IF in 6-meter receiver, using Johnson type
U 14-plate tuning capacitor. Can also serve as
sets band center. LI is 34 turns No. 24 on Ami- test transmitter putting out up to 20 mW. LI is
5-5.5 MHz VFO — Used in solid-state five-band don T50-6 toroid core. — P. Moroni, Solid-State 9 turns No. 26 tapped 1 turn from low end, and
communication receiver. Temperature com- Communications Receiver, Ham Radio, Oct. 12 is 1 or 2 turns. Article covers construction in
pensation isprovided by 20-pF trimmer that 1'A x Vk x 'k inch box. — B. Hoisington, A Real
1975, p 32-41.
Hot Front End for Six, 73 Magazine, Nov. 1974,
p 88-90 and 92-94.
RFC 3
465-kHz FOR IF TUNE-UP— Simple crystal os-

cillator using National LM3909N is adjusted to
exactly desired frequency with capacitor in se-
ries with pin 8. Drain from AA cell is less than
0.5 mA at 1.2 V. Use 465-kHz crystal and couple
oscillator to receiver input with 100-pF capaci-
10-MHz VFO — Values shown for high-stability tor. With 100-kHz crystal, circuit will generate
maximum stability. — E. M. Noll, "FET Princi-
variable-frequency oscillator give operation in ples, Experiments, and Projects," Howard W. strong harmonics beyond 30 MHz; to zero-beat
10-MHz range. Stable supply voltage is essen- Sams, Indianapolis, IN , 2nd Ed., 1975, p 193- with WWV, use about 10 pF in series with crys-
tial. Use silver mica capacitors in gate circuit for 194. tal.— I. Queen, Simple Crystal Oscillator, Ham
Radio, Nov. 1977, p 98.
-O OUTPUT
APPROX. 0.5V RMS
I
(Ik LOAD MIN.)
freq rh rh
crystal m
C2 C3 C4 LI
Cl
(MHz) l/4M (6.5mm) diam form
(pF) (pF) 3/16” (5mm) diam form
100 100 (pF) (pF)
33 12 turns no. 30 15 turns no. 28
15-25
68 33 (0.25mm) closewound 9.5-MHz TUNABLE CRYSTAL— Clapp oscillator
(0.3mm) closewound
25-55 100 8 turns no. 30 10 turns no. 28 with inductance in series with crystal can be
68 47 22 tuned with C2 as much as 100 kHz below rated
(0.25mm) closewound (0.3mm) closewound
33 6 turns no. 22 (0.6mm) 7 turns no. 28 (0.3mm) frequency of crystal. Based on making crystal
50-65
68 15 closewound act as capacitive reactance below its series-res-
space to V*" (6.5mm) long
onant frequency. Circuit can be adapted to
15-65 MHz IMPEDANCE-INVERTING— Uses and stability is good. Q1 is 2N3563, 2N3564, other amateur bands by keeping reactances of
third -overtone crystals. LI trims crystal fre- 2N5770, BF180, BF200, or SE1010. — R. Harrison, various components approximately the
quency. Resistor across crystal prevents oscil- Survey of Crystal Oscillators, Ham Radio , March same. — L. Lisle, The Tunable Crystal Oscillator,
lation at undesired modes. Starting is reliable QST, Oct. 1973, p 30-32.
1976, pi 0-22.
689
OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS — RF
desirably at twice fundamental frequency. LI is

150—500 kHz CRYSTAL — Circuit is series-mode 800-2000 gH for 150-300 kHz, and 360-1000
if Cl is 0.01 g. F. Parallel-mode crystals can be jaH for 300-500 kHz. Adjusting slug in LI pulls
used if Cl is equal to specified load capacitance crystal frequency. Q1 is 2N3563, 2N3564,
(30, 50, or 100 pF) for crystal. Harmonic output 2N3693, BC107, BC547, or SE1010. — R. Harri-
is usually better than -30 dB. Circuit is partic- son, Survey of Crystal Oscillators, Ham Radio ,
ularly good for crystals prone to oscillate un- March 1976, p 10-22.
OSCILLATOR-DOUBLER — Overtone crystal os-

cillator circuit that frequency-doubles in tran-
sistor can be frequency-modulated or used as
stable voltage-controlled crystal oscillator. Tun-
ing range with 70-MHz third-overtone crystal is
typically 30 kHz at crystal frequency or 60 kHz
at output. LI is resonant with Cl at desired out-
put frequency. Tap for varactor CR1 (Motorola
BB105B or BB142) is at one-fourth total number
of turns. Q1 is 2N918, BF115, HEP709, or equiv-
alent.— U. Rohde, Stable Crystal Oscillators,
2-22 MHz FUNDAMENTAL-MODE— Interna- tone crystal, output is at fundamental of crystal

tional Crystal OF-1 oscillator for fundamental- or about 9.43 MHz.— C. Hall, Overtone Crystal
mode crystal has no LC tuned circuits and re- Oscillators Without Inductors, Ham Radio, April
quires no inductors. With 28.3-MHz third-over- 1978, p 50-51.
+ 20 V
20 to 60 pF mica. Use as high value as possible (until

circuit just oscillates reliably when C3 is tuned
through resonance)
C3 20 pF piston or miniature trimmer
LI 8 turns no. 24 (0.5mm) on Amidon T37-12 toroid

core, tapped 3 turns from cold end
Fairchild 2N5179 recommended but 2N2857,
Q1
2N3563, 2N918 or equivalent may be substituted
RFC
0.39 mH. Resonates with crystal holder capacitance (4 910 pf
FREQUENCY Cl C2 pf
50 kHz
80 kHz 1500 L
to 6 pF typical) for parallel resonance at crystal fre- 3500
1800 pf
2200 pf
quency 100 kHz 750
180 pf
pf 4.7 mH
6 102 mH
mH
910 pf 390 pf
90 to 125 MHz, 5th or 7th overtone, series-resonant, 200
455 kHz
kHz 180
390 pf
pf 2.2 mH
75 pf
HC-18/U crystal. Cut leads as short as possible (V4” or IOOO kHz
1 mH
6mm maximum) 0.47 mH
90-125 MHz CRYSTAL — Recmmended for VHF / allow crystal to operate at its natural series-res- 50-1000 kHz — Simple single-transistor circuit
UHF converters. Output is 5 to 15 mW. Crystal onant frequency and use regulated power sup- provides extremely stable beat-frequency oscil-
should be high-quality fifth- or seventh-over- ply-— J- Reisert, VHF/UHF Techniques, Ham lator for which frequency can be changed by
tone type. Ferrite bead FB prevents undesired Radio, March 1976, p 44-48. using tank-circuit components listed in table. —
oscillation above 500 MHz. For best stability. Circuits, 73 Magazine, Feb. 1974, p 101.
+ 5V
NAND-GATE TTL CRYSTAL — Overcomes prob-

lems of poor starting performance and has
upper frequency limit of 20 MHz. Suitable for
applications requiring high-output aperiodic os-
cillator. Excellent as frequency marker. — R. Har-
rison, Survey of Crystal Oscillators, Ham Radio,
March 1976, p 10-22.
2-20 MHz VXO — Variable-frequency crystal os-

cillator plus buffer, using Signetics N7404A hex
inverter or equivalent, covers 2-20 MHz. Only
three inverters are used, two forming oscillator
and one as output buffer. VCc is +5 V. Crystals
can operate at fundamental, third, or fifth over-
tone. Frequency-limiting capacitor CP can be 15
pF. Only higher-frequency crystals can be
moved useful amounts without creating insta-
bility problems. Article gives design equations
and tables showing frequencies obtained with
various crystals for various values of frequency
controls Cv (0-100 pF) and Lv (0-17 pH). — B.
King, Hex Inverter VXO Circuit, Ham Radio,
April 1975, p 50-55.
CAPACITIVELY TUNED WIEN— Output of am-

plifier isconnected to apex of Wien bridge. Pos-
itive feedback is taken from junction of C1A and
C,B for noninverting input of first opamp, while
negative feedback is taken from other junction
of bridge for inverting input. Oscillation is sus-
tained when R2 = 2r. Nonlinearity of lamp r pro-
vides stabilization of oscillator. Frequency de-
pends on values used for bridge components. —
H. D. Olson, Wien-Bridge Oscillator Is Capaci-
tively Tuned, EDN Magazine, Aug. 5, 1975, p 74.
65-110 MHz OVERTONE— Uses fifth- or sev-

enth-overtone crystals. RF choke formed by L2
is wound on low-value resistor to suppress
lower-frequency resonances of crystal. Buffer is
recommended. Circuit is slightly frequency-sen-
sitive to supply voltage variations, so use well-
regulated supply. Q1 is 2N3563, 2N3564,
LI 65-85 MHz: 7 turns no. 22 (0.6mm) or no. 24 (0.5mm)
2N5770, BF180, BF200, or SE1010. — R. Harrison, enamelled, closewound on 3/16" (5mm)
Survey of Crystal Oscillators, Ham Radio, March diameter form
1976, p 10-22. 85-1 10 MHZ: 4 turns no. 22 (0.6mm) or no. 24 (0.5mm)

L2
enamelled, on 3/16” (5mm) diameter form,
turns spaced one wire diameter
10 turns no. low-value ‘/4-watt
Cl 34 (0.2mm) closewound on
resistor
65-85 MHZ: 85-110 MHZ:

15 pF 10 pF
150 pF
C2 65-85 MHZ: 85-110 MHz: 100 pF
C3 65-85 MHZ: 100 pF 85-110 MHZ:
68 pF
OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS — RF
+6 V
691
1MHz SERIES-MODE CRYSTAL— Motorola

MC1553 video amplifier provides wide band-
width and output swing capability needed for
high-frequency master clock or local oscillator
in many system designs. Positive feedback is
injected through crystal to input pin 1. Output
is taken from pin 7 which is buffered internally
from oscillator by gain and emitter-follower
stages. Brute-force pi filter at output extracts
desired fundamental frequency. — "A Wide
Band Monolithic Video Amplifier," Motorola,
Phoenix, AZ, 1973, AN-404, p 9.
CONTROL o-
VOLTAGE
i1 1(
— O OUTPUT
9-MHz LINEAR VCO — U1 A and U1C of RCA
CA3046 transistor array form emitter-coupled
oscillator. Portion of U1A current is diverted
through U1B and LI, producing magnetic flux
that reduces effective inductance of resonating
coil L2. Output frequency is varied in direct pro-
portion to voltage applied at A. LI is 23 turns on
3A-inch Teflon form 2 inches long, with 4 turns
wound between windings for L2. VR 1 is 1 N3828
6.2-V zener. Circuit must be well grounded and
shielded to avoid hum pickup by input, which
could modulate output. — D. G. Stephenson, A
Second Look at Linear Tuning, QST, March
1977, p 40-41.
O-
L1 Delevan H2500-44 R 1, R3, R5, R 7 , R9 = 82 k 52 R 1 8 — R21 = 10 k52

Nytronics »Wee 2200 Cl - CIO = 0.1 n F
R 2, R4, R 6, R8, RIO - 4.3 k 52
Miller «6302 R12 — R16 = 1 k 5 2 D 1 D10 = 1/2 MSD7000
(2.5 mH nominal inductance) R 17 - 5.1 kU XI - X5 = 0.1 MHz -2.0 MHz
CRYSTAL-SWITCHING DIODES— Circuit for and reverse bias to diodes for other four crys- tronic scanning. Requires only single 5-V sup-
Motorola MC12060 crystal oscillator uses tals. Diode switching eliminates need to run ply. Frequency pulling is minimized. — J.
diodes as RF switches giving choice of five dif- high-frequency signals through mechanical Hatchett and R. Janikowski, "Crystal Switching
ferent crystal frequencies. Forward bias is ap- switch, permits control of switching from re- Methods for MC12060/MC12061 Oscillators,"
plied to diode associated with desired crystal mote location, and is readily adapted to elec- Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-756.
±io v
freq
01- 2N384, 2N525, SK3004, Tl XM03
01.D2- GENERAL PURPOSE SILICON DIODES
DUAL-FREQUENCY CRYSTAL— Uses two dif-

1C CRYSTAL — Uses LM375 1C with crystals from crystal ferent crystals, with frequency being changed
C2/C3 C4
3 to 20 MHz in parallel mode. Will oscillate with by reversing supply voltage. Transistor then in-
(MHz)
only 4-V supply, but output voltage increases 3-10 (pF) verts itself and gain reduces to about 2, which
22 180
(pF)
with supply voltage. L1-C1 is resonant at crystal is adequate for oscillator operation. Provides
10 82
frequency. Adjust LI only for maximum output, 10-20 two frequencies from single stage with mini-
not for trimming frequency. If C3 is 3-30 pF, it Harrison, Survey of Crystal Oscillators, Ham mum of switching. — Circuits, 73 Magazine,
Feb. 1974, p 101.
can be used to adjust frequency of crystal. — R. Radio, March 1976, p 10-22.
+ I5V SIKO
100-kHz WIEN-BRIDGE— CA3160 opamp in

bridge circuit operates from single 15-V supply.
Parallel-connected diodes form gain-setting
network that stabilizes output voltage at about
1.1 V. 500-ohm pot is adjusted so oscillator al-
ways starts and oscillation is maintained. —
p 271-272.
BUFFER
alent)
C1.C2.C4,
polystyrene capacitor (Mallory type SX or equiv-
7.0-707 3
MHz XC1 C5, C6,
1
XC1 75 pF miniature air variable, double-bearing type
2 C7, C8
(one section of a Miller 2109 suitable)
C9.C10 dipped silver-mica capacitor
XL CR1 highspeed silicon switching diode (1N914A or

1 equivalent)
XL XRFC
2 1
XRFC variable inductor, 6 mH nominal (Miller
XC 2
1 42A686CBI)
XC
2
L2 variable inductor, 3.2 mH nominal (Miller
265 ohms 2275 ohms 4.5 ohms
23A47RPC)
23 ohms Z1
LI
140 ohms X„C4, 33 ohms RFC1.RFC2
RFC3 100 /iH miniature rf choke (Millen J301 type)
4400 ohms
690 ohms X^7 690 ohms 500 mH miniature rf chokp (Millen J301 type)
X „„ 303 ohms (minimum) 4400 ohms
690 ohms ohms
Lb X^g 227 9.1-volt, 1-watt zener diode
s
X^g 48 ohm
X^g 152 ohms
LOW-DRIFT 7-MHz VFO — Low-drift solid-state tuned ohm
Xdo^S
Colpitts
s oscillator is followed by two tor pulling from load changes. Article stresses
design for 40-meter band has maximu m change buffer stages, with second providing enough importance of choosing and using components
of only 25 Hz from cold start to full warm-up at amplification for practical amateur work while that minimize drift. — D. DeMaw, VFO Design
25°C. After stabilization, maximum hunting is 5 further improving isolation of oscillator. Low- Techniques for Improved Stability, Ham Radio ,
Hz. Drift is minimized by paralleling two or more impedance output network minimizes oscilla- June 1976, p 10-17.
capacitors in critical parts of circuit. Series-
693
OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS-RF
freq
C2
crystal
(MHz) Cl
3-10
10-20 (pF)
47 390
(pF)
220
3-20 MHz CRYSTAL — Circuit is series-mode os-

cillator, but parallel-mode crystals can be used
if trimmer in series with crystal is replaced 22 by
SURE-STARTING short-circuit. Adjust feedback by varying ratio
loop oscillator design ensures reliable starting or 54S00 for 6-20 MHz. Temperature stability is of Cl to C2. Use grid-dip oscillator to resonate
without use of critical components. Frequency adequate for crystal clocks and other digital- LI with Cl when crystal is shorted; then remove
depends on crystal, which can be anywhere in system applications.— J. E. Buchanan, Crystal- short and tune slug of LI to pull crystal exactly
range from 1 to 20 MHz. 1C can be 54L00 for 1- Oscillator Design Eliminates Start-Up Prob- to frequency. R1 should be between 100 and
2 MHz, standard 5400 for 2-6 MHz, and 54H00 lems, EDN Magazine, Feb. 20, 1978, p 110. 1000 ohms. The lower its value, the lower the
crystal power dissipation and the better is sta-
bility. Q1 is 2N918, 2N3564, 2N5770, BF200,
SE1001, or equivalent.— R. Harrison. Survey of
Crystal Oscillators, Ham Radio, March 1976, p
10-22.
160-METER VFO — Standard Colpitts oscillator

Q, with emitter-follower Q2 gives dependability
and adequate isolation from later stages. Zener
regulation provides stability even with weak
battery. Output is about 0.7 VRMS. Low-level
parasitic oscillation may occur about 150 kHz
below operating frequency but is suppressed by
tuned stages following VFO. L, is 52 turns No.
28 enamel on Amidon T-50-2 toroid. RFC, is 850
pH. — A. Weiss, Design Notes on a Moderate
Power Solid State Transmitter for 1.8 MHz, CQ,
Nov. 1972, p 18-22, 24, 98, 100, and 102.
STABLE 3.5— 3.8 MHz VFO — Oscillator Q1-Q2, less than 10 Hz from turn-on, and less than 330 1N34 diodes and 3.3-V zener. LI is 25 turns No.
emitter-follower output Q3, and buffer Q4 pro- Hz as supply voltage varies between 15 and 30 18 closewound on 1.5-in form. — J. Fisk, Circuits
vide 5 V P-P into 200-ohm load, with good iso- V. Amplitude stability is within 1 dB over tuning and Techniques, Ham Radio, June 1976, p 48-
lation between oscillator and load. Total drift is range. Oscillator amplitude is stabilized by two
52.
15-65 MHz THIRD-OVERTONE— Crystal start-

ing is reliable, and power dissipation of crystal
is well below allowable maximum. Q1 is 2N918,
2N3564, 2N5770, BF180, or BF200. LI resonates
at crystal frequency with 22 pF (1 pH for 15-30
MHz or 0.5 pH for 30-65 MHz). Stability is as
good as that of fundamental-frequency oscilla-
tor. Set LI roughly to frequency with no supply
voltage by shorting crystal and dipping LI with
grid-dip oscillator. Now apply power and tune
LI close to marked crystal frequency while
monitoring output frequency. Remove short
and trim to frequency with 3-30 pF trimmer. —
R. Harrison, Survey of Crystal Oscillators, Ham
18-60 MHz THIRD-OVERTONE— International

Crystal OF-1 oscillator for third-overtone crys-
tals requires no inductors. Crystal operates near
series resonance, making capacitor unneces-
sary in series with crystal. With 28.3-MHz third-
overtone crystal, circuit delivers 28.3 MHz when
Cl is 100 pF and C2 is 18 pF. Using larger values
given in table produces oscillation at funda-
mental of 9.43 MHz. — C. Hall, Overtone Crystal
Oscillators Without Inductors, Ham Radio, April
1978, p 50-51.
SWITCHED OVERTONE CRYSTALS— Uses

third-overtone crystals between 20 and 80 MHz,
with diode switching and with frequency dou-
bling in transistors. Ll-Ln are series resonant
with 10 pF at each crystal frequency. L4 is res-
onant with 10 pF at desired output frequency.
L3 and L5 have one-third as many turns as L4.
Q1 is 2N918, BF115, HEP709, or equivalent.
Diodes are switching types such as BAY67. — U.
Rohde, Stable Crystal Oscillators, Ham Radio,
June 1975, p 34-37.
4 70
— wv—
AA/V
74S00
28.3-MHz THIRD-OVERTONE TTL— Third-over- swing is from about 0.4 to 3.5 V P-P, as required
tone crystal oscillator uses 74S00 Schottky TTL for TTL. No inductors are required. — C. Hall,
quad NAND gates acting as oscillator and out- Overtone Crystal Oscillators Without Inductors,
put buffer to increase output amplitude. Output Ham Radio, April 1978, p 50-51.
OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS— RF 695
at least twice coil diameter. — An Accessory

4-4.6 MHz TUNABLE— Emitter-follower buffer ing harmonic output and giving better sine- VFO— the Easy Way, 73 Magazine, Aug. 1975,
stage for isolation has low-pass filterfor reduc- wave output. Oscillator coil should be in shield p 103 and 106-108.
CHAPTER 63
Phase Control Circuits
Includes circuits for measuring, shifting, comparing, and digitally controlling

phase of signal. Many use phase-locked loops. See also Lamp Control, Motor
Control, Power Control, and Temperature Control chapters.
TO
lOOhHl
FOLLOWING
7490‘S
PHASE-LOCKED 100-kHz REFERENCE— Uses 4- 7490 ICs divide 4-MHz signal by 4 and then by Transistor types are not critical. Gates U2B and
MHz crystal in oscillator, with voltage-variable 10 to give 100 kHz. Main output can be further U2C with Q3 form lock indicator circuit that
capacitor VVC in parallel with fixed and variable divided with additional 7490s, down to 60 Hz for turns on LED when 4-MHz oscillator is phase-
capacitors for setting frequency precisely. Var- driving electric clock if desired. Adjust C3 and locked to output of external high-stability 100-
icap or silicon diode can also be used for VVC. R1 for symmetrical square wave at pin 1 of kHz frequency standard. U1 and U2 are
Control voltage for WC is developed by Moto- MC4044P, with clean leading and trailing edges. SN7400. — C. A. Harvey, How to Improve the
rola MC4044P phase-frequency detector and as- Typical values are 68 pF for C3 and 300K for R1, Accuracy of Your Frequency Counter, Ham
sociated MPSA20 amplifier and filter. 7473 and but values will depend on transistors used. Radio, Oct. 1977, p 26-28.
696
PHASE CONTROL CIRCUITS 697
Calibrator
0-90° SHIFTER — Used in automatic plotter for

measuring capacitance-voltage characteristics
of Schottky barrier solar cells. Diode under test
is connected as shown in block diagram. Phase
of square-wave output from IC2 can be shifted
continuously from 0 to 90° by adjusting R3. Ar-
ticle gives ramp circuit and design equations. —
J. T. Lue, An Automatic C-V Plotter and Junc-
tion Parameter Measurements of MIS Schottky
Barrier Diodes, IEEE Journal of Solid-State Cir-
cuits, Aug. 1978, p 510-514.
band phase-locked loop uses one Am686 latch- ator combined with low-pass filter R,-R2-C2form locking ranges are both equal at ±60% for 5-
ing comparator as voltage-controlled oscillator, PLL. When locking fails, UJT causes V0(jt to MHz input. — M. C. Hahn, PLL's Capture Range
while other is coupled with TTL latch to produce scan, repetitively sweeping all frequencies in Equals Its Locking Range, EDN Magazine, Sept.
edge-triggered comparator. VCO and compar- VCO range until lock is restored. Capture and
20, 1977, p 117 and 119-120.
PHASE DETECTOR VOLTAGE CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR
AF PLL — Addition of components to conven- ative when waveforms are in phase, and most
tional two-transistor MVBR gives simple phase- positive when they are out of phase. Once
locked loop. Tr, and diode form logic gate that phase lock has been established, it is main-
conducts during alternate half-cycles of input tained by VCO over range of 100 to 3000 Hz. —
and VCO waveforms respectively. Output of J. B. Cole, Simple Phase-Locked Loop, Wireless
this phase detector, when filtered, is most neg- World, June 1977, p 56.
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED PHASE SHIFTER—

Circuit shifts carrier 180° by sensing polarity of
modulating voltage. Operating range is 5 kHz to
10 MHz. Circuit can also be used to convert un-
ipolar pulses to alternate bipolar pulses or vice
versa when synchronized square wave is sup-
plied to control input. With 0 V at base of Q2, Q3
will amplify RF voltage applied to input, without
phase shift. To actuate switch and provide 180°
phase shift, positive voltage is applied to base
of Q2 so it saturates and cuts off, allowing Q1
to conduct. Output then appears across load
with phase reversed. — A. H. Hargrove, Simple
Circuits Control Phase-Shift, EDN Magazine,
Jan. 1, 1971, p 39.
FULL-WAVE FEEDBACK — Used when average quires use of pulse transformer T. — D. A. Zinder.
load voltage is desired feedback variable for full- "Unijunction Trigger Circuits for Gated Thyris-
wave phase control of load power. Circuit re- tors," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974, AN-413, p 4.
CHANNEL 1
1 INPUT
CHANNEL 2
INPUT
1 00 Hz TO 1 MHz PHASE METER— Provides bet- wave. This gives directly the amount of phase ference on voltmeter. Article gives performance
ter than 2% accuracy over most of frequency difference between input wave trains, up to specifications and describes circuit operation in
range, as required for making Bode plots. Based 180°. Instead of measuring periods, overlap is detail. — D. Kesner, 1C Phase Meter Beats High
on squaring two sine waves and comparing integrated over total period to give average of Costs, EDN EEE Magazine, Oct. 15, 1971, p 49-
amount of overlap to total period of an input ON to OFF times that can be read as phase dif- 52.
PHASE CONTROL CIRCUITS 699
+ 12 VDC
PHASE COMPARATOR — Signetics balanced

modulator-demodulator transistor array is con-
nected as phase detector in which output con-
tains term related to cosine of phase angle.
Equal-frequency input signals are multiplied to-
gether by 1C to produce sum and difference fre-
quencies. Difference component becomes DC,
while undesired sum component is filtered out.
DC component is related to phase angle, with
cosine becoming 0 at 90° and having maximum
positive or negative value at 0° and 180° respec-
tively. Balanced modulator provides excellent
conversion linearity along with conversion
gain. — "Signetics Analog Data Manual," Sig-

netics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 757-758.
pro up to 180 pha shi und con of

vid ° se ft er tro
es l
con JF spe
are ide f c be-
tro ET
s cif al or ircui
l. c d n l ied p ne t
ause
they o ot oad hase- tw
or
FET Databook," National shi
ftSemiconduk ctor,
s.
Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36. —
^5
—
- ®
—
<’ Q
7
+5V
Rio q Rn
6.8k Y 6.8k
— sAAA ■# — vW —
CLOCK OUTPUT
.,0.02
FT SYNC INPUT >-•■

ER
—E
ach
J20
2
JFE
m T
sta
d ge
pot
s g
ive
ful
l r
ange
of
©
CLOCK >
LOSS-OF-LOCK MONITOR— Modified digital

phase-locked loop includes second phase de- tivibrator VCO, operating at 4 times desired scribes operation of circuit and gives timing dia-
tector that provides alarm signal when loop clock frequency, drives two-stage switch-tailed grams.— C. A. Herbst, Digital Phase-Locked
gets out of lock. Output may also be used to ring counter that provides two-phase internal Loop with Loss-of-Lock Monitor, EDNIEEE Mag-
disable other circuits. Voltage-controlled mul- clock signals A and B for detectors. Article de- azine, Oct. 15, 1971, p 64-65.
PLL LOST-LOCK INDICATOR— Developed for

use with phase-locked loop to indicate both ac-
quisition and loss of lock. Based on concept that
lock exists as long as static-phase error is less
than 90°. Uses quad opamp package such as
RC4136, with A4 feeding retriggerable one-shot;
output of one-shot is low when lock exists.
When lock is lost, output of one-shot immedi-
ately goes high and remains high until lock is
reacquired plus time duration of one-shot. De-
veloped for use in systems where certain pro-
cesses must be interrupted immediately upon
loss of lock. — J. C. Hanisko, PLL Lock Indicator
Uses a Single 1C, EDN Magazine , Oct. 5, 1976,
p 104.
LOCK DETECTION CIRCUIT
SIGNAL
POWER
(5INPUT
MHz) DIVIDER
R 90° PHASE DETECTOR +15V

DEMODULATED
DATA OUTPUT
0‘ PHASE DETECTOR
QUAD HYBRID +
10k
</Wv
10k
47k
LOOP FILTER
LIMITER
1200- Hz LOW PASS FILTER
frequency and phase. This is followed by low- hybrid is Merrimac Research QHT-2, 0° and 90°
DPSK ON DSBSC — Differential phase-shift pass filtering. Demodulation at output is by fre- phase detectors are Relcom M6A, and multiplier
keyed double-sideband suppressed-carrier sig- quency/phase controlled loop that automati- is Analog Devices 4281. Article covers theory
nal is demodulated by reinsertion of missing cally locks local oscillator in frequency and and operation of circuit in detail. — R. Hennick,
carrier, using synchronous or coherent detec- phase to received vestige of carrier. This ex- Demodulate DPSK Signals Coherently Using a
tion. Receiver input signal is multiplexed by lo- tracts phase information from modulated sig- Costas Phase-Lock Loop, EDN Magazine, July
cally generated carrier, accurately controlled in nal. Power divider is RF Associates H22, quad
1, 1972, p 44-47.
701
PHASE CONTROL CIRCUITS
SHIFTING AND SQUARING— Circuit uses two

opamps to derive phase-shifted reference
square wave and DC output signal of phase-sen-
sitive detector from same sine-wave signal
source. Article gives theory of operation and
waveforms for various operating conditions. —
G. B. Clayton, Experiments with Operational
Amplifiers, Wireless World, July 1973, p 355-
356.
6.8 k
VOLTAGE FEEDBACK — Used when quantity to
be sensed is isolated varying DC voltage es such
as output of tachometer. Operating point is de-
termined by setting of Rc. Output of voltage
feedback circuit goes to thyristor in series with
load. — D. A. Zinder, "Unijunction Trigger Cir-
cuits for Gated Thyristors," Motorola, Phoenix,
AZ, 1974, AN-413, p 4.
FASTER PHASE LOCK — Circuit was developed lockup time less than 10 cycles of input when correction on C,, controlled by values of R2 and
to reduce the normally long acquisition time of using idling frequency of 12 kHz for VCO. Input R3, is proportional to width of error pulses. Ar-
phase-locked loops when measuring frequency signals are compared to those of VCO at EX- ticle covers circuit operation in detail. — R.
of short signal bursts. Synchronization of VCO CLUSIVE-OR gate A. Gating of error pulses by Bohlken, A Synchronized Phase Locked Loop,
to input phase allows correction pulses to be gate F and flip-flop G-H allows I or J to drive cur- EDN Magazine, March 20, 1973, p 84-85.
developed in correct polarity only, to give rent pulses of correct polarity into C,. Voltage
+ 16V 78
L12
DATA WORD
PE 2° 2'
> 2* 23
PE
-Oq
k -
CE
CO U
CLK CLK
LI
CE
Z,= CD4093B
Z,, Z = F4516
DIGITAL CONTROL OF PHASE ANGLE— Circuit that is periodically synchronized with zero signal for generating triac drive is produced by
transforms 5-bit digital control word into phase crossings of AC line; R, and C set clock fre- D,-D„ and Q, . — R. T enny. Circuit Provides Digital
angle overfull range. Resolution is proportional quency, which for 5-bit control word must be 64 Phase Control of AC Loads, EDN Magazine, Oct.
to length of control word. Developed for stage times line frequency or 3.84 kHz. Load require-
ments determine choice of triac for Q„. Required 5, 1977, p 99-101.
lighting control. Z1C serves as clock oscillator
PLL WITH 1C TIMER — Uses 2240 programmable waveform by R9-C2. Triangle is sampled by S, frequencies need not have direct harmonic re-
timer/counter as combination voltage-con- and S2 which with C., and CH2 form cascaded lationship; with circuit values shown, output is
trolled oscillator and frequency divider, with sample-and-hold network that holds only last 50 Hz for reference input of 60 Hz. Output fre-
CMOS analog switches serving as sample-and- instantaneous voltage on C„, as error voltage. quency can go as high as 100 kHz by using pro-
hold phase detectors. Incoming reference fre- This error is amplified by FET-input 3140 opamp grammability of divider chain. — W. G. Jung,
quency is amplified and limited by CMOS in- A: for driving pin 12 of 2240 timer as correction Take a Fresh Look at New 1C Timer Applications,
verter, then integrated into reference triangle voltage, to establish lock. Reference and output EDN Magazine, March 20, 1977, p 127-135.
CHAPTER 64
Phonograph Circuits
Includes RIAA-equalized preamps for all types of mono and stereo phono
pickups, along with power amplifiers, tone controls, rumble and scratch
filters, and test circuits. See also Audio Amplifier and Audio Control chapters.
3312 3300 £2
MAGNETIC-CARTRIDGE PREAMP— Uses Sig-

netics PA239 dual low-noise amplifier designed OUTPUT I.
specifically for low-level low-noise applications.
Stereo channel separation at 1 kHz is typically
90 dB, and total harmonic distortion without
feedback is 0.5%. Circuit matches amplifier re-
sponse with RIAA recording characteristic. Sup-
ply voltage can be between 9 and 1 5 V at 22 m A.
Article gives design equations. — A. G. Ogilvie, OUTPUT 2.
Construct a Magnetic-Cartridge Preamp, Audio,
June 1974, p 40 and 42.
VfH IIMF
220 pf 820 pf
C4
C3
NEW RIAA NETWORK— Values of R7 and C2

have been changed as shown in standard net-
work for phonograph playback equalization.
Tantalum electrolytic rated at least 20 V is rec-
ommended for C2. Network can also be used as
inverse RIAA equalizer for testing preamps,
with signal applied to terminal 2 and output to
preamp taken from terminal 1. New standard
extends playback equalization to 20,000 Hz and
specifies that equalization be 3 dB down from
previous standard at 20 Hz, with rolloff at 6 dB
per octave below 20 Hz. — W. M. Leach, New
RIAA Feedback Network, Audio, March 1978, p
trol and all tone controls along with ganged vol- ects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974,
ume control. Values shown give proper equali- p 237 and 242. 103.
703
704
MODERN electronic circuits reference manual
RUMBLE/SCRATCH FILTER— Used after pre-

amp in high-quality audio system to improve
reproduction of phonograph records. Two-pole
Butterworth design has switchable breakpoints
providing any desired degree of filtering. —
"Signetics
R2
Analog Data Manual," Signetics,
Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 638-639.
SCRATCH FILTER — Provides passband gain of

1 and corner frequency of 10 kHz for rolling off
excess high-frequency noise appearing as hiss,
ticks, and pops from worn records. Design pro-
cedure isgiven. — "Audio Handbook," National
Semiconductor,
2-52. Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 2-49-
150k +20 -24 V
RIAA PREAMP — Low-noise circuit (below -70

dB referred to 5-mV input from pickup) has high
overload capability and low distortion (below
0.05% intermodulation at 2 VRMS output). Ar-
rangement of first stage gives improved tran-
sient reponse over usual feedback pair. Second
stage provides gain of 10. — S. F. Bywaters,
RIAA-Equalized Pre-Amplifier, Wireless World,
Dec. 1974, p 503.
705
PHONOGRAPH CIRCUITS
INPUT BUFFER FOR PREAMP— Used between preamps for which input impedance is un- MAGNETIC-CARTRIDGE PREAMP— Uses dual
cartridge and preamp of each stereo channel to known. Article tells how to determine correct
opamp for stereo, other half of which is con-
make comparison testing of phonograph value of Cl for cartridge used and covers nected exactly the same but with connections
preamps more nearly independent of cartridge preamp test procedures in detail. — T. Holman, to pin numbers changed to those in parenthe-
and cable capacitances. Buffer terminates car- New Tests for Preamplifiers, Audio, Feb. 1977, ses: 6 (5), 5 (8), 3 (11), 4 (10), and 1 (13).— Cir-
tridge in47K in parallel with Cl. Buffer can then cuits, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1973, p 143.
p 58, 60, 62, and 64.
20-Hz HIGH-PASS RUMBLE FILTER— Second-

order rumble filter for phonograph amplifier has
EQUALIZED PREAMP — Low-frequency boost is Input resistor is selected to provide specified 1-dB peak and 20-Hz cutoff frequency. Design
provided by inductance of magnetic cartridge, loading for cartridge. Output noise is about 0.8 uses large resistance values to permit use of
acting with RC network to approximate theo- mVRMS with input shorted. — "Signetics Ana- smaller and lower-cost capacitors. — D. Lancas-
retical RIAA or NAB compensation as deter- log Data Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, ter, "Active-Filter Cookbook," Howard W.
mined by position of compensation switch. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1975, p 191-192.
1977, p 638-639.
12V
CERAMIC-CARTRIDGE SYSTEM— Circuit using transistor is wired as high-impedance emitter- distortion Baxandall tone-control circuit. —
National LM389 opamp having three transistors follower. Remaining transistors form high-gain "Audio Handbook," National Semiconductor,
on same chip provides required high input Darlington pair used as active element in low- Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-33-4-37.
impedance for ceramic cartridge because input
Vcc
SPLIT-SUPPLY PHONO PREAMP— Low-noise

circuit using LM1303 provides RIAA response
and operates over supply voltage range of ±4.5
to ±15 V. 0-dB reference gain (1 kHz) is about
34 dB. Input is from magnetic cartridge. —
Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 2-25-2-31.
SCRATCH/RUMBLE FILTER — Single active filter

provides two widely differing turnover frequen-
cies, as required in audio amplifier used with
phonograph. For values shown, insertion loss
of filter is -6 dB at 37 Hz and at 23 kHz. Com-
ponents may be switched to provide different
turnover frequencies, but complete removal of
filter requires considerably more complicated
switching. — P. I. Day, Combined Rumble and
Scratch Filter, Wireless World, Dec. 1973, p 606.
to level
NO-COMPROMISE PHONO PREAMP— Distor- circuit is based on Baxandall system but has output, level detection, noise gate, and power
tion figure is below 0.002 percent, overload bass control turnover frequency which de- supply. Transistors Tr,-Tr6 and Tr13-Tr15 are
margin is about 47 dB, and S/N ratio is 71 dB for creases as control approaches flat position. This BCY71; Tr7-Tr9 and Tr,6-TrI8 are MPS A06; Tr,0-
phono amplifier. This feeds normalization am- allows small amount of boost at low end of Tr,2 and Tr,9-Tr2, are MPS A56; Tr9 is BFX85 or
plifier whose output is set at 0 dBm by setting audio spectrum to correct for transducer short- equivalent. Circuit is duplicated for other stereo
input gain control. Feedback components R2, R3, comings. Article describes circuit operation in channel. — D. Self, Advanced Preamplifier De-
and C2 provide RIAA bass boost. Tone-control detail and gives additional circuits used for tape sign, Wireless World, Nov. 1976, p 41-46.
+ 12V
PHONOGRAPH CIRCUITS 707
12-V PHONO PREAMP — Low-noise circuit has

midband 0-dB reference gain of 46 dB. Designed
for RIAA response. Internal resistor matrix of 1C
minimizes parts count. Input is from magnetic
cartridge. — "Audio Handbook," National Semi-

RUMBLE FILTER — Used when rumble from without losing stereo separation. Emitter-fol-
cheaper turntable or record extends above 100 lowers feed high-pass filters having 200-Hz
Hz, causing disconcerting out-of-phase loud- breakpoint frequencies and Butterworth char-
speaker signals. Circuit is based on fact that acteristics. Attenuation of filter is 12 dB at 100
human ear is not sensitive to directional infor- Hz. Filter circuit can be disabled by placing
mation below about 400 Hz, making it permis- switch between points P and Q. — M. L. Oldfield,
sible to remove stereo (L - R) signal at low fre- Stereo Rumble Filter, Wireless World, Oct.
quencies and thus remove stereo rumble 1975, p 474.
+ 18V
COMMON-MODE VOLUME AND TONE CON-

TROL— Eliminates attenuation of signal by con-
ventional voltage-divider type of volume con-
trol and gives maximum input impedance. Used
with transducers having high source imped-
ance, but will also serve with low-impedance
transducers.
4-28. — "Audio Handbook," National
HIGH CURRENT LOADS

"AUDIO TAPE POTENTIOMETER
(10% OF Rt AT 50% ROTATION!
TO INVERSE
RIAA GENERATOR
AS SHOWN
INVERSE RIAA RESPONSE GENERATOR— output of National LM387, used as flat-response square-wave generator, which can be built with
Used in design, construction, and testing of adjustable-gain block. Gain range is 24 to 60 dB, other half of LM387 connected as also shown. —
phonograph preamp. Provides opposite of play- set in accordance with 0-dB reference gain (1 D. Bohn, Inverse RIAA/Square Wave Generator,
back characteristic. Passive filter is added to kHz) of preamp under test. Input is from 1-kHz Audio, Feb. 1977, p 65-66.
708
20 to 24V
MAGNETIC-PICKUP PREAMP— Circuit uses

type 747 dual opamp, but individual 741
opamps may be used instead. Input signal is
first amplified fiat, after which equalization acts
on both signal and noise to give improved S/N
ratio. Adjust first opamp for gain of 13. Series
feedback is used to minimize noise since imped-
ance of magnetic pickup is low compared to
opamp input impedance. Second opamp has
frequency-dependent series feedback for RIAA
compensation. Gain here is unity at 1 kHz. Out-
put is about 70 mV for modern pickup having
output of about 5 mV.— B. S. Wolfenden, Mag-
netic Pick-Up Preamplifier, Wireless World,
Sept. 1976, p 81-82.
RUMBLE FILTER — Used to roll off low-fre-

quency noise associated with worn turntable
and tape transport mechanisms. Gain is 1. De-
sign procedure is given. For values shown, cor-
ner frequency is 50 Hz and slope is -12 dB per
octave. — "Audio Handbook," National Semi-
v 7/ output
, ^ 'Recording
To second
channel
output
*1
M izing circuit. Equalization for magnetic pickups
and other types of inputs is automatically se-
lected by three-deck input selector switch. To
*120k
^ II avoid overloading input stage, adjust set level
* I.OOOp 3,000p
control to give comfortable listening level for
P
II 1 II given input when main volume control is at
about half its maximum rotation. Article also
^j.OOOp
gives lower-cost version for ceramic-pickup
[afc
equalization and changes required in this for
operation from negative supply. — B J. Bur-
PREAMP WITH EQUALIZATION— Based on with improved filter and tone control circuits rows, Ceramic Pickup Equalization, Wireless
1966 high-performance Bailey preamp and additional complete ceramic-pickup equal- World, Aug. 1971, p 379-382.
design
PHONOGRAPH CIRCUITS 709
9V 9V
LOW-NOISE PREAMP— Provides dynamic

range of about 80 dB for phonograph playback
system, even when using highest-quality car-

tridge having low output. Source voltage is re-
duced to 18 V for National LM381A, which still
provides ample signal for 2-V high-level input of
stereo channel. Cross-channel isolation is bet-
ter than 60 dB from 20 to 20,000 Hz. — J. P. Holm,
A Quiet Phonograph Preamplifier, Audio, Oct.
1972, p 34-35.
Vs = 1«V
CERAMIC-CARTRIDGE AMPLIFIER— Single Na-
tional LM380 forms simple amplifier with tone
and volume controls for driving 8-ohm loud-
speaker at outputs above 3 W. Supply voltage
range is 12-22 V, with higher voltage giving
higher power. Tone control changes high-fre-
quency rolloff. — "Audio Handbook," National
4-28.
Ik
INPUT
30V
lOpF
-K-
25k
5-W POWER OPAMP — Low-cost phono ampli-

fier using only single 591 power opamp pro-
vides 5 W into 8-ohm load with only 0.2% total
harmonic distortion. With crystal cartridge, cir-
ity. Will drive power amplifier having 5 VRMS cuit has fixed gain of 50.— R. J. Apfel, Power Op
RIAA PHONO PREAMP — Design procedure is Amps — Their Innovative Circuits and Packaging
input overload limit.— "Audio Handbook," Na-
given for operation from 30-V supply, using tional Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p Provide Designers with More Options, EDN
2-25-2-31.
magnetic cartridge having 0.5 mV/cm/s sensitiv- Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977, p 141-144.
CHAPTER 65
Photoelectric Circuits
Covers circuits involving change in light on photocell or other light-sensitive

device, including punched-tape reader, transmission of voice or data signals
on light beam, and solar-power oscillator. See also Burglar Alarm, Fiber-Optic,
Instrumentation, Lamp Control, and Optoelectronic chapters.
R2
■VvV-
LIGHT-BEAM VOICE TRANSMITTER— Opamp
100K
and transistor together provide amplitude mod-
ulation of LED in accordance with amplitude
variations of microphone output signal. Re-
quires only single 9-V supply. Other three sec-
tions of opamp are not used. Designed for dy-
namic microphone. Q1 is 2N2222 (Radio Shack + . 9V
276-2009). — F. M. Mims, "Optoelectronic Proj- input

ects, Vol. 1," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, _ o_ B1
2nd Ed., p 34-43.
RATIO OF TWO UNKNOWNS— Developed for sampled through S2 and stored on C2 for com-
corresponding to time T2, is multiplied by'same
use when two signals are time-shared on same parison with reference voltage. Result is applied gain so numerator output is proportional to de-
input line, such as exists when two LEDs alter- through switchable amplifier network AFB to sired ratio BfA of unknowns. Article describes
nately illuminate single photocell. Measures gain control element which is LED-photoresis-
circuit operation in detail. — R. E. Bober, Here's
ratio of amplitudes of unknowns with accuracy tor coupled pair (CLM 6000). This closed loop a Low-Cost Way to Measure Ratios. EDN Mag-
better than 1%. During time period T,. input is adjusts signal gain to make denominator of azine, March 5, 1976, p 108, 1 10, and 1 12.
711
712
5-kHz PHOTOCELL OSCILLATOR— Provides 5-V nal. Applications include fail-safe interruption
pulses at about 5 kHz only if photocell is illu- monitor and illumination transducer. Oscilla-
minated by its companion LED. Repetition rate tion stops if beam is completely interrupted or PUNCHED-TAPE READER — Connection of 555
varies with illumination, so interruption or at- if strong ambient light falls on photocell.— H. L. timer as Schmitt trigger produces output pulses
tenuation of light produces easily detected fre- Hardy, FM Pulsed Photocell Is Foolproof, EDN with sharp rise and fall times that are indepen-
quency change that can be used as control sig- Magazine, March 5, 1975, p 72. dent of tape speed. Output is compatible with
TTL or CMOS circuits. When scanning light
8
beam hits hole in punched card or tape, resis-
tance of light-sensitive resistor drops sharply
and voltage at pins 2 and 6 rises above 0.67 Vcc-
Voltage at output pin 3 then drops sharply from
Vcc to 0 V. When PC, goes dark, circuit switches
rapidly back to original state. Reverse PC, and
R,-R2 for positive edge-triggered logic. — S. Sar-
pangal, 555 Timer Implements Tape Reader,
EDN Magazine, Jan. 5, 1978, p 86 and 90.
AUDIBLE LIGHT SENSOR — 741 opamp is con- crease in illumination serves to increase fre- 9 VOLTS
B1
nected as audio oscillator with Radio Shack 276- quency. Choose R4 to reduce volume to desired
677 photocells in feedback circuits. When light level. R3 is balancing control for photocells. — F.
strikes PCI, its resistance decreases and fre-
quency of audio tone in headphone decreases Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p
correspondingly. When light strikes PC2, which 81-86.
is connected to noninverting input of 741, in-
PHOTOTRANSISTOR RELAY— With phototran-

sistor Q1 dark, R1 biases Q2 into conduction and
miniature SPDT relay (Radio Shack 275-004) is
energized. When light falls on Q1, Q2 is turned
off and relay drops out. Battery drain is about
5 mA in darkness, dropping almost to 0 mA with
light. — F. M. Mims, 'Transistor Projects, Vol.
3," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1975, p 69-74.
PARTS LIST
Cl — O.lmfd capacitor R5 — 560,000-ohm, V2 w resis- (Motorola HEP S3022)
C2 — lOmfd @150V capacitor LSCR— Light-op. SCR, 200V
R1 — 1-meg. carb. potentiom- R6 tor
— 22,000-ohm, V£w resistor (Radio Shack 276-1081)
eter D1.D2
HEP — 156)
Diode (Motorola Triac — Mot. HEP R1725
R2 — 82,000-ohm, V£w resistor CPL — Light coupler Sigma
R3 — 390-ohm, lw resistor D3 — Zener diode, 6.2V (Mo- 301T1-120A1 (SW Tech. ON/OFF CONTROL — RCA CA3062 combination
R4 — 2.2-megohm, V2 w resis- torola HEP 103 or equiv.) Prod., 219 W. Rhapsody,
San Antonio, Tex.) photodetector and power amplifier provides
tor Q — High-voltage transistor
ON/OFF output in response to light signal. Out-
GARAGE-LIGHT CONTROL — When mounted comes on when headlights strike light-operated put transistors in 1C should be either saturated
on far wall in garage, controller picks up head- SCR. Controller must be kept out of direct sun- or blocked to avoid heat rise in silicon chip.
light beams as car is driven in at night and turns light. For manual control, connect pushbutton Complementary outputs give choice of load
on one or more garage lights long enough (3 switch between points A and B. To increase normally on or normally off when light from in-
min) for driver to get out of car and reach exit. time delay, increase value of C2. With 20 pF, frared emitter falls on photo input of 1C. Inter-
Controller then flickers lights as warning and time will be doubled.— C. R. Lewart, Automatic ruption of light path then produces opposite
begins dimming them out. With parts specified, Garage Light Control, Popular Science, July load condition — "Linear Integrated Circuits
will handle up to 800 W of lamps. Adjust sen- 1973, p 110. and MOS/FET's," RCA Solid State Division, So-
merville, NJ, 1977, p 156.
sitivity control R1 so light in optocoupler CPL
PHOTOELECTRIC CIRCUITS 713
LIGHT-CHANGE DETECTOR— Combination am-

plifier and detector using 3140 opamp responds
only to sudden changes in light on photocell LIGHT-CHANGE SENSOR DRIVES RELAY— Ca- AUDIBLE LIGHT METER— Low light on cad-
while ignoring slow changes in ambient light. pacitive coupling between phototransistor and mium sulfide photocell (Radio Shack 276-116)
When beam is suddenly broken, opamp output bipolar transistor makes circuit respond only to produces series of clicks in miniature 8-ohm
swings positive and stays positive for delay interruptions or rapid changes in light while ig- loudspeaker. As light increases, clicks merge
time set by recharging of 0.05-/*F capacitor on noring normal gradual changes in ambient light into audio tone that increases in frequency as
positive input. Delay locks out spurious signals as caused by clouds or at sunrise. Relay pulls in light intensity increases. Can be used for class-
until photocell resets itself to normal illumina- when flash of light occurs and drops out when room demonstrations or as sunrise alarm clock.
tion. Values shown give time-out delay of about light is removed. Use Radio Shack 275-004 min- Circuit is quiet in total darkness. — F. M. Mims,
1 s, with clean conditioned rectangular output iature relay. — F. M. Mims, "Transistor Projects, "Optoelectronic Projects, Vol. 1," Radio Shack,
pulse. — D. Lancaster, "CMOS Cookbook," Vol. 3," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1975, p Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 61-66.
Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 346- 69-74.
347.
MODULATED-LIGHT RECEIVER— Two FET

stages amplify chopped or smoothly modulated
output signal of silicon solar cell. With 1000-Hz
modulation of 5-lm/ft2 light beam, circuit will
produce 1 VRMS at output when R4 is set for
maximum gain. Can be used for light-beam
communication and for alarm systems. — R. P.
Turner, "FET Circuits," Howard W. Sams, Indi-
anapolis, IN, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 113-114.
R3
LIGHT-BEAM RECEIVER— Converts amplitude-
modulated light beam back to audio signal for
driving transistor radio earphone having resis-
tance of 500-1000 ohms. Miniature 8-ohm loud-
speaker can be used by adding output trans-
former such as Radio Shack 273-1380. Gain of
opamp is controlled by R3, which can be trim-
mer resistor or pot. Designed for use with trans-
mitter providing amplitude modulation of LED,
for short-range voice communication. — F. M.
Mims, "Optoelectronic Projects, Vol. 1," Radio
END-OF-TAPE DETECTOR— Self-compensating

sensor automatically compares short-term light
REFLECTING
variations produced by beginning and end
markers on digital magnetic recording tape
against long-term variations of ambient light, to
improve reliability of sensing marker when
there are reflections from blank tape. Low-pass
filter R3-C,, having time constant about 5 times
expected 10-ms incoming pulse width, stores
long-term light level without reacting to short
signal pulse. Low-pass filter R„-C2, having 1/20
time constant of incoming pulse width, reduces
spurious noise without deteriorating incoming
pulses. — C. A. Herbst, Optical Tape-Marker De-
tector, EEE Magazine, March 1971, p 79.
PRIMARY ;
: GREEN
; SECONDARY
&
RED «
SOLAR
CELL
2N1304 C
01
CRYS1AL
EARPHONE
(OR)
MAGNETIC
EARPHONE LASCR-CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR— UJT re-
( BOTTOM I
laxation oscillator having loudspeaker load pro-
L-0:“ duces single click each time flash of light falls
on light-activated SCR. Setting of R1 deter-
SOLAR-POWER
r A1
OSCILLATOR — Supply /voltage
51 & .5
mines whether circuit produces series of pulses
or tone burst during time light is on. Oscillator
for single-transistor audio oscillator is gener-
ated by Radio Shack 276-1 15 selenium solar cell frequency increases with light intensity. — F. M.
that produces about 0.35 V in bright sunlight. Mims, "Semiconductor Projects, Vol. 2," Radio
With cell 3 feet away from 75-W incandescent Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1976, p 71-77.
lamp, oscillator frequency is about 2400 Hz. Fre-
quency drops as light increases. Transformer is
273-1378. — F. M. Mims, "Transistor Projects,
Vol. 2," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1974, p
53-58.
MISSING-PULSE ALARM — Developed for sens-

ing missing light pulses or detecting absence of
object on moving conveyor belt. CA3062 com-
bination light sensor and amplifier detects light
pulses synchronized to 60-Hz line. With SW1 at
A, each pulse resets 20-ms timing network of
2N2646 UJT at 16.7-ms intervals, preventing
UJT from firing. If light beam is interrupted by
object, UJT is allowed to fire and trigger 2N3529
SCR that turns on alarm. With SW1 at B, circuit
detects interruptions in steady light beam and
sounds alarm only when interruption does not
occur. — J. F. Kingsbury, Double Duty Photo
Alarm, EDNIEEE Magazine, May 15, 1971, p 51.
CHAPTER 66
Photography Circuits
Includes adjustable or programmable timers for enlargers and printers,
photoflash, slave flash, strobe, and controlled-sequence flash circuits,
exposure meters, and gray-scale control for CRT. See also Instrumentation,
Lamp Control, and Timer chapters.
SLAVE FLASH — Remote flashtube having no

connection with camera is fired by light-acti-
vated SCR (LASCR) when triggered by main
flash of camera. Used to provide illumination at
greater depth than main flash range, to soften
sharp shadows, and to provide backlighting for
flash photographs. LED is indicator showing
that circuit has been triggered, reminding pho-
tographer that new flash lamp should be in-
serted.— F. M. Mims, "Transistor Projects, Vol.
4 m 1," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed.,
MODE L 29
SIMPSON
METER M-l
p 79-85.
50
MICROAMP
+ 19-3V 2N3704 1Sto21-3mA
SW2-E
THREE-RANGE LIGHT METER— Uses probe low, full-scale adjustment cannot be made. Re- 19.5 V FROM 27-V BATTERY— Used to provide
containing Clairex 905HN light-dependent resistors having values specified in article are con- precise voltage levels required by portable trig-
sistance element, connected to DC differential nected in turn to terminals of photocell jack PI ger unit designed to fire up to five different flash
amplifier driving meter having specially cali- for calibration that gives linear scale reading. — units at equal intervals that may range from 11
brated scale. Article gives calibration proce- J. L. Mills, Jr., Light Right? — Do-It-Yourself ms to 11 s. Article gives all circuits. — R. Lewis,
dure. Switching circuit provides constant check Photo Exposure Meter, 73 Magazine, Sept. Multi-Flash Trigger Unit, Wireless World, Nov.
on voltage of 22.5-V battery. If 4.5-V battery is 1978, p 204-206 and 208-211. 1973, p 529-532.
715
716
unregulated input
9V or greater
TIMER SWITCH-OFF FOR ENLARGER— Circuit

shows power supply designed to operate digi-
tal exposure timer using TTL. Since timer logic
is needed only when enlarger lamp is on, power
supply circuit will be turned off automatically
when timer goes low and turns off enlarger
lamp at end of exposure. Switch S is closed
when timer cycleis activated, setting timer out-
put at 5 V and turning on lamp. Transistor and
diode types are not critical. Since D2 is con-
nected to logic point of timer, power supply re-
mains on when S is released, until completion
of timer cycle. — E. R. Rumbo, Automatic
Switch-Off Power Supply, Wireless World, Feb.
1976, p 77.
generates pulses at about 500 Hz for step-up by

300-mA filament transformer T1 (Radio Shack
273-1384) to charge storage capacitors C2 and
C3, which are 250-V electrolytics. Simultane-
ously, C4 is charged through R2. After allowing
sufficient time for capacitors to charge, SI is
pressed to discharge C4 through 272-1 146 flash-
tube trigger transformer T2, which steps up
voltage pulse to about 4000 V for ionizing gas
in 272-1145 xenon flashtube FT1 . C2 and C3 now
discharge through ionized gas to produce bril-
liant flash of white light lasting only a few mi-
croseconds, as required for photography of ob-
S2 jects moving at high speed. Circuit may require
two cells in series for reliable operation. — F. M.
Mims, 'Transistor Projects, Vol. 3," Radio
2-min RAMP — Used in multiple timer for devel-

opment ofphotographic paper, in which six in-
LOW-LEVEL EXPOSURE METER— Uses Sie- sure, SI and S2 open to give amplification of dependent timers are started in sequence as
mens BPX 63 photodiode having sensitivity of over 3000. Integrating capacitor Cl is then
each sheet of exposed paper is placed in devel-
10 nA per lux in circuit which ensures that ap- charged by photocurrent, making output volt- oper. C, is 1 /J.F and R, is 1 1 megohms for 2-min
erture setting is affected only by useful light and age vary linearly with time. Base-emitter junc- timer having accuracy within 5 s. Article gives
not by noise signals. When used at low light lev- tion of T3 begins to conduct at output voltage all other circuits required and suggests modifi-
els, circuit recovers quickly from temporary of 1 V. Exposure is completed when Cl provides cations to meet other needs. Output B drives
light bursts. Switches SI and S2 are closed feedback via T3 so no current flows through meter and trigger circuit for audible alarm.
when camera shutter is not open; opamp out- load resistor RL. Supply is ±3 V. — "Photodiode Timer is started by input switch connected to
put is then connected to its inverting input BPX 63
elin, NJ.— All ft Needs Is Starlight," Siemens, Is- A. — R. G. Wicker, Photographic Development
through FET T1. At commencement of expo- Timer, Wireless World, April 1974, p 87-90.
PHOTOGRAPHY CIRCUITS 717
BCD THUMBWHEEL-SET 99-min TIMER— Pro-

vides timing in seconds to 99 s, and timing in
minutes to 99 min, with 2-digit LED indicator
showing elapsed time. Desired interval is set
with BCD thumbwheel switches. LED readout
counts up to preset time, then resets automat-
ically to zero. Switch giving choice of seconds
or minutes has center-off position that stops
count temporarily for burning in portion of neg-
ative. Article gives construction details. — M. I.
Leavey, Build a Unique Timer, 73 Magazine,
Aug. 1977, p 66-71.
type power supply because circuit operates gates. Triac is triggered with 100-j/s 60-mA ger lamp used. — M. J. Mayo, Transformerless
from 1 mA taken from AC line through 10K re- pulses at zero-crossing point. Logarithmic time- Enlarger Timer, Wireless World, May 1 978, p 68.
718
99-s PROGRAMMABLE — Line-frequency-based

precision interval timer was developed for use
with repeaters or photographic enlargers. Cir-
cuit is accurate to within 1/60 s. Two 10-position
switches are set to desired interval. Connection
to AC line gives 4-V square wave for 60-Hz clock
input. T ransistor type used as relay driver is not
critical. — G. R. Allen, Dependable Timer, 73
Magazine , July 1976, p 84-87.
image on screen of cathode-ray tube, as re- only by TTL drive circuits. Four bits of digital complete video inversion for negative
quired for different imaging requirements or data stored in 9311 memory are used for se- images. — K. R. Peterman, Fast CRT Intensity
different photographic films. DMOS FETs pro- lecting desired scale. Output of circuit is used to Selector Adjusts the Gray Scale, EDN Maga-
vide fast switching times so data rate is limited control beam intensity. Circuit also permits zine, March 20, 1976, p 98 and 100.
719
PHOTOGRAPHY CIRCUITS
9 vaTS BASIC 555 TIMER — Closing switch SI momen-

B1 tarily applies activating signal to trigger input
pin 2 of timer, to start charging of Cl. When Cl
charges to two-thirds of supply voltage, timer
discharges it to complete timing cycle. Duration
of charging interval can be varied from several
microseconds to over 5 min by changing values
of R1 and Cl. With IK for R1, capacitor values
of 0.01 to 100 fiF give time range of 10 /xsto 100
ms. With 1 00 megohms and 1 /xF, time increases
to 10 s. Once timer starts, closing SI again has
no effect. Timing cycle can be interrupted only
by applying reset pulse to pin 4 or opening
power supply. Circuit will drive LED directly or
can be used with miniature relay (Radio Shack
275-004) to control larger loads. Can be used as
darkroom timer if LED is kept several feet away
from photographic paper. Diode is 1N914. — F.
Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed„ p
57-65.
2 85 to 2-15mA
MULTIFLASH SWITCH — When ramp output of

flash trigger circuit (given in article) is applied
to input at A, flash at output of switch circuit is
tripped when ramp voltage reaches level deter-
mined by setting of R,2. Similar voltage-oper-
ated switches are required for other flashes.
Used for taking sequence photographs such as
springboard diver in flight. Settings of R,2 for di-
ferent switches are chosen for equal times be-
tween flashes, with intervals from 11 ms to 11
s. Article gives all circuits and setup procedure.
Regulated 19.5-V supply is required — R. Lewis,
Multi-Flash Trigger Unit, Wireless World, Nov.
1973, p 529-532.
f-NUMBER FLASHMETER — Used to measure from f/2 to f/64, while film speed selector covers gives values for 18 resistors (one for each film
light produced at subject position by electronic films from ASA 12 to 650. Texas Instruments speed) selected by S5. Examples are 20K for ASA
flashlamps prior to actual taking of picture. TIL77 photodiode is used as sensing element in 64 and 51K for ASA 25. — R. Lewis, Photographic
Meter is calibrated to read correct f-number set- probe. Article covers construction, operation, Flashmeter, Wireless World, Aug. 1974, p 273-
and calibration of meter in detail. Table in article 278.
ting of lens aperture. Three ranges are provided,
720
AUDIBLE ALARM FOR TIMER— Used with 2-

min timer for developing photographic paper,
to produce short warning bleep indicating end
of developing time. Input D is taken from output
of Schmitt trigger that changes state when 2-
min ramp generator times out. Tr9 and C, to-
gether lengthen short reset pulse so MVBR Tr10-
Tr„ oscillates long enough for signal to be
heard. — R. G. Wicker, Photographic Develop-
ment Timer, Wireless World, April 1974, p 87-
90.
2 to 9 mA
FLASH TRIGGER — Used in instrument de- monostable MVBR that is switched to unstable waveform as required for triggering flashes in
signed to trigger up to five individual flash units state by negative pulse applied to base of Tr2 by sequence. Article gives all circuits and setup
at equal increments of time that can range from SCR, when camera shutter contacts FL, are procedure. Regulated 19.5-V supply is re-
1 1 ms to 1 1 s, as required for such assignments closed. Timing circuit Tr4-Tr5-Tr6 provides ramp quired.— R. Lewis, Multi-Flash Trigger Unit,
as taking sequence photographs of springboard output at A for feeding voltage-operated Wireless World, Nov. 1973, p 529-532.
diver in flight. Transistors Tr1# Tr2, and Tr3form switches set to trip at different points of ramp
1 Vi SN7473N
2 Vi SN7400N
MULTIPLE TIMER FOR PRINTS— Six indepen- reset pulses. Similartwo-input NAND gates are
3 Vi SN7404N
dent 2-min timers, each using half of SN7473N used to form fully compatible input pulses from
1C, are set in sequence by unique input switch min time for first sheet inserted. Audible bleep input switch control, each having correct level,
as sheets of exposed paper are inserted in de- is repeated as each subsequent sheet reaches rise time, and fall time, without contact bounce
veloper at about 20-s intervals. When capacity its 2-min development time. Article gives all cir- that might cause spurious starting of several
of six prints is reached, Tr12 turns on light to tell cuits and explains operation in detail. Two- timers simultaneously. — R. G. Wicker, Photo-
operator that no more prints should be inserted input NAND gates (each ’A of SN7400N) and in- graphic Development Timer, Wireless World,
until control logic activates alarm signifying 2- verters (each '/s of SN7404N) are used to steer April 1974, p 87-90.
PHOTOGRAPHY CIRCUITS 721
DENSITY AND EXPOSURE— Circuit converts

transmission parameter of spectrophotometer
to more useful density parameter, which in turn
can be converted to exposure parameter. Opti-
cal Electronics 2357 opamps at input provide 90-
dB dynamic rangefor DC to 1 kHz or 40-dB range
for DC to 100 kHz, operating basically as current
amplifiers. 9827 is used as wideband opamp in
unity-gain subtracter configuration. Additional
376 opamps are used only for converting to ex-
posure parameter. Use 1000 ohms for R1 with
10-V full-scale inputs. — "Conversion of Trans-
mission to Density and Density to Exposure,"
Optical Electronics, Tucson, AZ, Application Tip
10133.
TRIGGER
TRANSFORMER
100-Ws PHOTOFLASH — Uses AC supply and

large storage capacitors to give intense flash
lasting only about 250 ms, as required for stop-
motion photography of fast-moving objects
such as bullets. For battery-powered operation,
T1 can be replaced by solid-state chopper cir-
cuit. Contacts can be in camera or in external
control device. — W. E. Hood, Lightning in a Bot-
tle, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1974, p 109-112.
CHAPTER 67
Power Control Circuits
Included are general-purpose circuits capable of handling many types of

resistive or inductive loads, as contrasted to specialized circuits given in Lamp
Control, Motor Control, Servo, and Temperature Control chapters. Although
most circuits are solid-state relays, conventional relay controls are also
shown. Inputs can respond to logic levels, pulses, or sensing transducers.
Output devices are chiefly SCRs or triacs. Many circuits have zero-crossing
action for suppressing RFI, as well as optoisolators at input or output.
DRIVING 240-VAC TRIAC— Two Motorola

MOC3011 optoisolators are used in series as in-
terface between logic and triac controlling 240-
VAC load. 1-megohm resistors across optoiso-
lators equalize voltage drops across them.
Choice of triac depends on load to be handled. —
P. O'Neil, "Applications of the MOC3011 Triac
Driver," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1978, AN-780,
P 5.
*5 VDC
TRIAC TRIGGER— National LM3909 1C is con-

nected as pulse-transformer driver operating
from standard 5-V logic supply. 1C is biased off
when logic input is high. With low logic input,
1C provides 10-/ts pulses for transformer at
about 7 kHz. Trigger is not synchronized to zero
crossings but will trigger within 8 V of zero for
resistive load and 115-VAC line. Triggering oc-
curs at about 1 V, but trigger level can be
changed by using other input resistors or bias
dividers. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," Na-
AN-154,tional
p 7. Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976,
722
POWER CONTROL CIRCUITS 723
2k
HALF-WAVE CONTROL— Simple AC relay op-

erates during positive alternations of AC
source, with optoisolator providing complete
isolation between control circuit and SCR han-
dling inductive load. When input LED is ener-
gized by control pulse, photo-SCR of optoiso-
lator conducts and provides gate current for
SUMP-PUMP CONTROL — Impurities in water mined lower level. Diodes are 1N4001 or equiv- turning on power SCR. 1N4005 diode protects
provide conductivity for completing circuit of alent, rated 1 A. Fuse should be chosen to pass SCR from back EMF transients of inductive
transistor when water reaches level of sensing normal motor current. Use 12-V double-pole load. — T. Mazur, Solid-State Relays Offer New
electrode, energizing relay that starts pump relay. T1 is 300-mA filament transformer. — J. H. Solutions to Many Old Problems, EDN Maga-
motor. Extra set of contacts on relay keeps Gilder, Automatic Turn-On, Modern Electron- zine, Nov. 20, 1973, p 26-32.
motor running until water drops to predeter- ics, Dec. 1978, p 78.
LOGIC-TRIGGERED TRIAC— Pulsed output to logic 1. Output remains high until another
LOGIC DRIVE FOR INDUCTIVE LOAD— When
from microprocessor controls gate drive of triac pulse from CRU returns it to zero, thus giving
through SN7475 clock and transistor. Pulse latching action. High output turns on transistor output of NAND gate goes high and furnishes
10 mA to LED of Motorola MOC3011 optically
from one output port of microprocessor is ap- and supplies about 100-mA gate drive to TIC263
plied to D input of clock simultaneously with coupled triac driver, output of optoisolator pro-
25-A triac. — "Thyristor Gating for /jlP Applica-
pulse from communications register unit (CRU) vides necessary trigger for triac controlling in-
tions," Texas Instruments, Dallas, TX, 1977, CA-
going to clock input, to raise Q output of clock 191, p 4. ductive load. Cl is 0.22 /jl F for load power factor
of 0.75 and 0.33 gE for 0.5 power factor. Omit Cl
115V ac for resistive load. R1, R2, and Cl serve as snub-
ber that limits rate of rise in voltage applied to
triac. — P. O'Neil, "Applications of the MOC301 1
Triac
780, pDriver,"
2. Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1978, AN-
VOLTAGE-SENSITIVE SWITCH— RCA 40527

triac is triggered by small neon. After break-
down occurs bidirectionally at 88 V, triac takes
over as short-circuit. D, can beany other voltage
PERFECT AC SWITCH — Developed for use in in relay K, to follow up SSR, with hard contacts. breakdown device, such as diac or zener, and
computerized equipment to prevent generation When S, is later opened, K, drops out immedi- thyristor can be used in place of triac to give
of severe noise spikes if contact closure can ately but C, discharges through gate of SSR, to unilateral switching. Applications include use
occur at any point in AC cycle. Closing S, gates hold it on for about T = 6R,C,. Load is then as power crowbar, with breakdown level set by
solid-state relay SSR,, which noiselessly switched off at next zero crossing after this artificial resistance-controlled zener. — L. A. Ro-
switches load at next zero crossing. During this delay. — E. Woodward, This Circuit Switches AC senthal, Breakdown and Power Devices Form
time, C2 charges through R2. After time T = Loads the Clean Way, EDN Magazine, Nov. 20, Unusual Power Switch, EDN Magazine, July 5,
3R2C2, MJE800 Darlington is turned on, pulling 1975, p 160 and 162.
1974, p 74-75.
724
GE TRIAC
SC41D
TRIAC FOR INDUCTIVE LOADS— Simple triac

gating circuit applies AC power to inductive
400-Hz TRIGGER FOR SCR— Simple UJT oscil- with design equations.— W. Dull, A. Kusko, and load when low-power switch SI is closed. R1
lator combined with pulsetransformer provides T. Knutrud, Pulse and Trigger Transformers — and Cl provide dv/dt suppression. — C. A. Farel
pulses required for firing 2N1764 SCR. Article Performance Dictates Their Specs, EDN Maga- and D. M. Fickle, Triac Gating Circuit, EDNIEEE
gives design data for pulse transformer, along zine, Aug. 20, 1976, p 57-62. Magazine, Jan. 1, 1972, p 72-73.
5 V
Q
100
1 50
A/W -AW-
MOC301 1
MOC301 1
THYRISTOR SWITCH — When circuit of conven-

tional P-gate thyristor is grounded by switch,
negative-going pulse is applied to thyristor
cathode, which reverse-biases the diode. When
OPTOISOLATOR DRIVE FOR 240-VAC LOAD— thyristor conducts, diode is forward-biased and
Two Motorola MOC3011 optically coupled triac megohm resistors equalize voltage drops has only about 0.7-V drop. Use low-voltage
drivers are used in series to overcome voltage diode, rated for full load current. Opening of
across couplers. — P. O'Neil, "Applications of
limitation of single coupler when triggering the MOC3011 Triac Driver," Motorola, Phoenix, relay contacts makes circuit switch off. — R. V.
triac connected to control 240-VAC load. Two 1- AZ, 1978, AN-780, p 5. Hartopp, Grounded Gate Thyristor, Wireless
World, Feb. 1977, p 45.
T.l.
TRIAC DRIVE — Motorola MOC3011 optoisola-

tor serves as interface between 10-mA input cir-
cuit and gate of triac controlling AC load. Choice
of triac depends on load being handled. Opto-
isolator detector chip responds to infrared LED;
TRIAC CONTROL WITH OPTOISOLATOR— 5 W, can be switched directly in either random once triggered on, optoisolator stays on until
Dionics Dl 425 switchable bridge circuit controls or zero-crossing mode. — High-Voltage Mono- input current drops below holding value of
120-VAC line in optically isolated zero-crossing lithic Technology Produces 200V AC Switching about 100 /uA. — P. O'Neil, "Applications of the
solid-state relay that can be used as trigger for Circuit, EDN Magazine, April 5, 1975, p 121. MOC3011 Triac Driver," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
1978, AN-780, p 2.
power triac. Small AC devices, drawing under
725
POWER CONTROL CIRCUITS
ACTIVE-HIGH TRIAC INTERFACE— Typical

CMOS logic gate operating from negative sup-
ply triggers triac on negative gate current of 8
mA for control of 25-W AC load. High supply
lines for both logic gate and interface transistor
are grounded. — A. Pshaenich, "Interface Tech-
niques Between Industrial Logic and Power De-
put of CMOS logic gate to 10 mA required for ply. For 15 V, use MC14049B buffer and 910 vices," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-712A,
LED at input of Motorola MOC3011 optically ohms for R. — P. O'Neil, "Applications of the
coupled triac driver. When MOS input goes MOC3011 Triac Driver," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
high, optoisolator provides output voltage for 1978, AN-780, p 4.
HIGH P 12.
LOAD
600-W HALF-WAVE — UJT serves as trigger for

thyristor in circuit that provides power control
for load only on positive half-cycles. Thyristor
acts also as rectifier, providing variable power
BRIDGE-TRIGGERED TRIAC — Developed for tion is maintained on next negative half-cycle determined by setting of RT during positive half-
use with AC sensor in one leg of bridge. CA3094 by energy stored in 100-/iF capacitor. Bridge cycle and no power to load during negative half-
is shut down on negative half-cycles of line. unbalance in opposite direction does not trigger cycle.— D. A. Zinder, "Unijunction Trigger Cir-
When bridge is unbalanced so as to make pin 2 triac. — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C Principles, Experi- cuits for Gated Thyristors," Motorola, Phoenix,
more positive than pin 3, 1C is off at instant that AZ, 1974, AN-413, p 3.
AC line swings positive; pin 8 then goes high anapolis, IN, 1974, p 313-314.
and drives triac into conduction. Triac conduc-
O o
FULL-WAVE POWER CONTROL— Bidirectional

three-layer trigger for triac allows triggering on
LINE-POWERED SWITCH— When AC line triggering until 0.013 ms (less than one-third both half-cycles at point determined by setting
Switch is closed, power is not applied to load electrical degree) after next zero-crossing of 1-megohm pot. Triac rating determines size
until after line voltage next goes through zero. point. — A. S. Roberts and O. W. Craig, Efficient of load that can be handled. — "SCR Power Con-
Identical circuits control each half of AC cycle. and Simple Zero-Crossing Switch. EDNIEEE trol Fundamentals," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
1971, AN-240, p 6.
Transistor turn-on at 1.4 V prevents SCR from Magazine, Aug. 15, 1971, p 46-47.
- Load Vcc (75 V)

non-inductive
loon
FAST-SWITCHING TTL INTERFACE FOR
1 VMOS — Totem-pole TTL interface drive for

S55V01 VMOS gives appreciably faster switch-
— H h~ i
^ lOOus
ing times (less than 30 ns). To achieve fast turn-
on time without unduly small pull-up resistor,
SWITCHING 4500 W AT UP TO 10 kHz— Darling- are 2N6100. Diodes are 1N4001. Cl is 4 pF at 15 which dissipates considerable power when
ton connection of Delco DTS-709 transistors V. R1 is 510 ohms, R2 is 100, R3 is 12, R4 is 10, switch is in OFF state, emitter-follower Q,
will switch 7 A at 700 V with 1-/ns switching R5 is IK, R6 is 47, and R7 is 100. — "Low Cost drives high peak currents into capacitive VMOS
time. Suitable for motor speed control, switch- 'Duolithic Darlington' Switches 4500 Watts at input. — L. Shaeffer, VMOS Peripheral Drivers
ing regulator, and inverter applications. Can be Solve High Power Load Interface Problems,
up to 10 kHz," Delco, Kokomo, IN, 1973, Appli-
cation Note 54, p 2.
operated directly from 440-VAC line. Q1 and Q2 Computer Design, Dec. 1977, p 90, 94, and 96-
98.
LINE-VOLTAGE COMPENSATION— Can be

used with either half-wave or full-wave phase
MDA920-1 bridge rectifier provides full-wave mines size of load. Drawback of circuit is gen- control circuit to make load voltage indepen-
rectification of AC line voltage for 2N5064 SCR eration of EMI if logic signal occurs at other than dent of changes in AC line voltage. PI is ad-
placed across DC output of bridge. When posi- zero crossings of AC line. — A. Pshaenich, "In- justed to provide reasonably constant output
tive logic pulse from CMOS circuit energizes terface Techniques Between Industrial Logic over desired range of line voltage. As line volt-
optoisolator, SCR conducts and completes path and Power Devices," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, age increases, PI wiper voltage increases. This
fortriac gate trigger current through bridge and 1975, AN-712A, p 17. has effect of charging CT to higher voltage so
more time is taken to trigger UJT. Additional
delay reduces thyristor conduction angle and
thereby maintains desired average voltage. — D.
A. Zinder, "Unijunction Trigger Circuits for
AN-413, p 4.
Gated Thyristors," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974,
600-W TRIGGERED SCR— 2N4154 SCR is oper-

ated from DC output of bridge rectifier and trig-
125-ns POWER SWITCH — Developed for repet- techniques. Load power up to 10 A is typically gered by MPT32 at setting determined by po-
itive pulse applications in which rise, fall, and applied within 125 ns. Applications include sition of 300K pot. Circuit provides full-wave DC
storage times of pulse must be kept at absolute drive for laser diode and for radar circuits. — control of lamp and other loads up to 600 W,
minimum. Circuit provides very high gain of "Designer's Guide to Power Darlingtons as using relaxation oscillator operating from DC
Unitrode U2T601 Darlington and switching Switching Devices," Unitrode, Watertown, MA, source. — "SCR Power Control Fundamentals,"
speeds up to 5 times greater than conventional 1975, U-70, p 19. Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1971, AN-240, p 6.
727
LOAD 2N4442
HALF-WAVE FEEDBACK — Provides phase con-

trol of power to resistive load in applications
900-W FULL-WAVE — Combination of bridge where average load voltage is desired feedback
rectifier, pulse transformer, and triac allows variable. RC network R^Rs-Ci averages load
100K pot Rt to control power to resistive load voltage so it can be compared with set point on
on both positive and negative half-cycles. Triac Rc by Q,. — D. A. Zinder, “Unijunction Trigger
is triggered through transformer by 2N4870 Circuits for Gated Thyristors," Motorola, Phoe-
UJT. — D. A. Zinder, “Unijunction Trigger Cir- nix, AZ, 1974, AN-413, p 4.
cuits for Gated Thyristors," Motorola, Phoenix,
AZ, 1974, AN-413, p 3.
V+ (24 V)
TTL INTERFACE FOR VMOS — By using open-

collector 7416 TTL interface with its output
pulled up to 15 V, S55V01 VMOS will switch up
POWER OPAMP FOR CONTROL— Precision 714 transmission lines. Article tells how to calculate to 2 A easily. Inductive load such as relay re-
opamp drives 759 power opamp to give ultra- heatsink requirements for opamp. — R. J. Apfel, quires diode across relay coil. — L. Shaeffer,
precision power amplifier system. High current Power Op Amps — Their Innovative Circuits and VMOS Peripheral Drivers Solve High Power
capability (up to 500-mA peak output current) Packaging Provide Designers with More Op- Load Interface Problems, Computer Design,
makes circuit suitable for such control applications, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977, p 141-144. Dec. 1977, p 90, 94, and 96-98.
tions as driving motors, relays, solenoids, or
switch uses pulsed gate drive. Switch supplies netic interference generated during turn-on of firing time of triac. — "Thyristor Gating for p?
phase-locked driving pulses during zero-volt- triac Works well with resistive loads, but in- Applications," Texas Instruments, Dallas, TX,
1977, CA-191, p 6.
age crossover period, to minimize electromag- ductive loads can create phase shift that affects
ZERO-POINT SWITCH — Used to control resis-

tive loads. With SI open, triac Q2 is turned on
very close to zero on initial part of positive half-
cycle because of large current flow into C2.
Once Q2 is on, C3 charges through D5. When
line voltage goes through zero and starts neg-
ative, C3 is still discharging into gate of Q2 to
turn it on near zero of negative half-cycle. Load
current thus flows for most of both half-cycles.
When SI is closed, Q1 is turned on and shunts
gate current away from 02 during positive half-
cycles. Q2 cannot turn on during negative half-
cycle because C3 cannot charge, which makes
load current zero. — "Circuit Applications for the
Triac," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1971, AN-466, p
12.
OUTPUT CONTROL FOR CLOCK COMPARA-

TOR— Circuit triggers 1 0-A triac when Q output
of comparator-driven flip-flop is logic 1. LED in
optoisolator is then energized, activating pho-
totransistor pair for driving gate circuit of triac
through diode bridge. T rigger voltage of triac is
positive for first quadrant and negative for third
quadrant, to give maximum sensitivity of triac
control. — D. Aldridge and A. Mouton, "Indus-
trial Clock/Timer Featuring Back-Up Power Sup-
ply Operation," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974,
AN-718A, p 7.
PROTECTION AGAINST SIMULTANEOUS OP-

ERATION OF TRIACS — Optoisolators provide
cross-connection between solid-state triac
relay circuits to eliminate possibility that two or
more triacs come on at same time due to circuit
malfunction or componentfailure. Circuit shuts
system down when this occurs. — "Thyristor

Gating for nP Applications," Texas Instru-
ments, Dallas, TX, 1977, CA-191, p 5-9.
729
HALF-WAVE AC CONTROL— Motorola 4N26

optoisolator serves as interface for static series
switch in gate circuit of 2N5064 SCR. When logic
input goes high, optoisolator is energized and
first SCR is triggered on. Resulting current turns
on power SCR for passing load current on that
positive half-cycle of AC line voltage. When
logic goes low, load current stops at next zero
crossing of AC source. 5 mA of isolated DC con-
trol current thus controls up to 16 A for half-
wave load. — A. Pshaenich, "Interface Tech-
niques Between Industrial Logic and Power
Devices," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-
712A, p 16.
LOGIC CONTROLS 15-A LOAD— Load is ener-

19 AMP (SUCH AS
gized when logic input drops to 0. Can be used SOLENOID)
to drive solenoid or electromagnet from 48-VDC

supply, for stopping paper tape in high-speed
5V
tape reader. If relay is to be activated by high or LOGIC
1 level, add inverter at input as shown. — D. D. 470ft INVERTED

Mickle, Practical Computer Projects, 73 Maga-
OUTPUT
zine, Jan. 1978, p 92-93. LOGIC
I/O PORT
FROM o
SIMILAR
2N3904 OR
FULL-WAVE CONTROL — Uses triac to provide

current for inductive load during both positive
2k and negative alternations of AC source, with
optoisolator providing complete isolation for
logic control circuit. MDA920-4 diode bridge
provides pulsating DC voltage for photo-SCR of
optoisolator so gate current is supplied to triac
for both halves of AC cycle. — T. Mazur, Solid-
State Relays Offer New Solutions to Many Old
Problems, EDN Magazine, Nov. 20, 1973, p 26-
32.
5 V
control logic and gate drive for triac at low cost, lays. Transistor provides direct current drive for cations," Texas Instruments, Dallas, TX, 1977,
with faster switching than is possible with re- gate of triac. — "Thyristor Gating for g.P Appli- CA-191, p 4-5.
730
FEEDBACK CONTROL — Replacement of man-

6.8 k ual phase control pot with sensor and transistor
provides automatic control of load power in re-
sponse to stimuli such as heat, light, pressure,
or magnetic fields. Output of feedback control
circuit goes to thyristor in series with load. Rc
establishes desired operating point for sensing
resistor Rs. As Rs increases in resistance, more
current flows into CT and makes 2N4870 UJT
trigger at smaller phase angle so more power
is applied to load. For opposite effect, inter-
*RS SHOULD BE SELECTED TO BE ABOUT 3k TO 5k change Rs and Rc. — D. A. Zinder, "Unijunction
OHMS AT THE DESIRED OUTPUT LEVEL
Trigger Circuits for Gated Thyristors," Moto-
LIQUID-NITROGEN LEVEL CONTROL— 1N4005 TO PUMP

CIRCUIT
diode serves as sensor. Junction voltage of trols solenoid valve through solid-state relay. eliminate frequency recycling. LED indicates
diode increases from 0.7 V at room temperature IK pot R adjusts circuit sensitivity; this can be valve status — V. J. H. Chiu, Diode Sensor and
to 1.05 V when in liquid nitrogen. Voltage set so pump starts refilling of container when Norton Amp Control Liquid-Nitrogen Level,
change is used to activate amplifier that con- liquid is as much as 2 inches below diode, to Electronics, Feb. 2, 1978, p 117.
731
MAC6-4
K° k i MPT 32
0.033 /iF LOAD
. 068 mF
ACTIVE-LOW TRIAC INTERFACE— With con- Pshaenich, "Interface Techniques Between In-
nection shown for interface transistor Q1, typ- dustrial Logic and Power Devices," Motorola,
ical CMOS gate triggers triac when gate output Phoenix, A Z, 1975, AN-712A, p 12.
O O
FULL-RANGE CONTROL — Triggered triac is

used with double phase-shift network to obtain
reliable triggering at conduction angles as low
as 5°, as required for control of incandescent
lamps and some motors. Triac rating deter-
mines size of load. — "SCR Power Control Fun-
240, p 6. damentals," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1971, AN-
Bridge MDA990 3
PUT CONTROLS SCR — Programmable unijunc-

tion transistor 02 provides phase control for
both halves of AC line voltage by triggering SCR
connected across bridge. Relaxation oscillator
formed by Q2 varies conduction interval of Q1
from 1 to 7.8 ms or from 21 .6° to 1 68.5°, to give
control over 97% of power available to load. —
H(-
R. J. Haver and B. C. Shiner, "Theory, Charac-
teristics and Applications of the Programmable
Unijunction T ransistor," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
1974, AN-527, p 10.
GROU ND-REFERENCED RAMP-AND-PEDES- opamp 1 discharges timing capacitor at zero selected by high-end trimming pot. Output is
TAL CONTROL — Need for transformer is elimi- line voltage and synchronizes circuit with line sufficient for optoisolators and logic triacs. — J.
nated by applying alternate half-cycles to in- frequency. Buffer opamp 2 scales input and pro- C. Johnson, Ramp-And-Pedestal Phase Control
verting and noninverting inputs of section 3 of vides linear pedestal for capacitor. Opamp 4 is Uses Quad Op Amp, EDN Magazine, June 5,
LM3900 quad opamp, so full-wave-rectified comparator serving as output driver whose out- 1977, p 208 and 211.
waveform is referenced to ground. Comparator put is high when capacitor is charged to level
732
LOGIC DRIVES SCR — Uses light-activated SCR

in H74C1 optoisolator to trigger larger SCR for
controlling loads up to 3000 W through bridge
diodes. When logic input goes low (to ground),
LOGIC
INPUT load is energized. Limit for inductive loads is 8
+5
A or about 1000 W if using 25-A SCR. — D. D.
Mickle, Practical Computer Projects, 73 Maga-
zine, Jan. 1978, p 92-93.
LOGIC DRIVES TRIAC — H74C1 optoisolator

combined with saturation characteristic of or-
dinary filament transformer serves to trigger
full-wave triac on or off under control of logic
input, for energizing AC loads up to rating of
triac. Logic 0 (ground level) turns load on, and
logic 1 turns it off.— D. D. Mickle, Practical Com-
puter Projects, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1978, p 92-93.
PHOTON FLUX
nominal 8-V breakover voltage of unilateral
ZERO-CROSSING CONTROL— When control 1-V conduction voltage of MUS4988, triacs will switch S,. S2 performs similar function on neg-
signal calls for power, optoisolator energizes not be turned on. Circuit thus provides relay-en- ative voltage alternations. Load-controlling
circuit that provides load turn-on at zero-volt- abling voltage window, lower limit of which is triac is rated 40 A.— T. Mazur, Solid-State Re-
age time of AC waveform. If phototransistor Q3 point at which all components involved in turn- lays Offer New Solutions to Many Old Prob-
of optoisolator is illuminated after S, drops to ing on triacs are forward-biased. Upper limit is lems, EDN Magazine, Nov. 20, 1973, p 26-32.
MDA920 1
J 1 L°ad I
1BS4992
. y 55£2M6°71a
115 V
0.22 mF
Mn / qi 60 Hz
Cl
o„_n!'
small enough to fire triac early in its conduction
4-A FULL-WAVE CONTROL— When logic input voltage across Cl reaches triggering voltage of angle (near zero crossing), to maximize load
to CMOS buffer goes high, load is off. Low input SI (about 8 V), MBS4992 silicon bidirectional power while minimizing EMI. — A. Pshaenich,
logic deenergizes optoisolator; clamp formed switch fires, allowing Cl to dump charge into "Interface Techniques Between Industrial Logic
by bridge rectifier and SCR is then removed gate of triac. Triac and load are then turned on. and Power Devices," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
from Cl, allowing it to charge through R1 . When R1 and Cl are chosen to give time constant 1975, AN-712A, p 17.
POWER CONTROL CIRCUITS 733
+700 Vdc
SWITCHING 4500 W BELOW 5 kHz— Simple

Darlington connection of Delco DTS-709 tran-
sistors serves for switching of up to 700 V at 7
A for low-speed motor control, regulator, and
inverter applications. — "Low Cost 'Duolithic
Darlington' Switches 4500 Watts at up to 10
kHz," Delco,
Note 54, p 3. Kokomo, IN, 1973, Application
RELAY DRIVE — Logic input of 0 turns first tran-

sistor off, allowing base of next transistor to go
high so it turns on and energizes relay for
achieving desired control function. — D. D. Mic- TO FURNACE
THERMOSTAT.
HAM RIG,
MODEL TRAINS,
kle, Practical Computer Projects, 73 Magazine,
Jan. 1978, p 92-93. LASER UNIT. OR
WHATEVER
ential input voltages derived from output of input, gate current pulses are generated at zero- switch. T riac can be selected to handle resistive
4N28 optoisolator. When LED is off, voltage at voltage excursions of AC power source. Tran- loads from 4 to 40 A. — T. Mazur, Solid-State
pins 1 and 2 of switch is positive with respect sistor ensures adequate gate drive at low Relays Offer New Solutions to Many Old Prob-
to pin 3, inhibiting switch so no current pulses temperatures. For normally-on configuration. lems, EDN Magazine, Nov. 20, 1973, p 26-32.
180 33 k
OPTOISOLATOR AS SOLID-STATE RELAY — Cir- snubber network for handling inductive AC O'Neil, "Applications of the MOC3011 Triac
cuit provides input protection of LED from loads. Triac should be chosen to handle load. Driver," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1978, AN-780,
overvoltage and reverse polarity, along with Safe input voltage range is 3-30 VDC. — P. p 6.
734
FOR 120- V OPERATION, FOR 240- V OPERATION,

TRIAC = T2300B TRIAC * T2300D
RS s 6 8k, 2 W RS = 12 k, 4 W
ALARM CONTROL — Any input suitable for driv- and Q5 of CA3096 array serve as comparator.
velop DC supply voltages from AC line. — "Cir-
ing LED of optoisolator triggers triac for ener- Diode-connected transistor Q3, zener-con- cuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," RCA Solid State
gizing load such as alarm gong. Transistors Q4 nected transistor Q1, and 100-/xF capacitor de- Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 9.
CHAPTER 68
Power Supply Circuits

Includes unregulated circuits for changing AC input voltage to variety of DC
voltages ranging from 1.5 V to 3 kV. Also includes inverter circuits containing
oscillator operating from DC supply and providing AC voltage at 60 Hz or 400
Hz, along with RMS AC regulator. See also Converter — DC to DC, Regulated
Power Supply, Regulator, and Switching Regulator chapters.
12-V TRANSFORMERLESS PREREGULATOR—

AC line voltage is converted to regulated 12
VDC by varying firing angle of 10-A SCR. Circuit
provides reliable operation for AC line voltages
between 50 and 140 V. Key element in trigger-
ing of SCR is programmable unijunction tran-
sistor that provides variable and accurate con-
trol of firing time. Developed for use in power
supply that uses digital techniques of sample-
and-hold switching to achieve high degree of
isolation between power line and load without
using transformer. — J. A. Dickerson, Trans-
formerless Power Supply Achieves Line-to-
Load Isolation, EDN Magazine, May 5, 1976, p
92-96.
110/120 VAC ± 2.5 V AT 600 W— Simple open- oven heaters, projection lights, and certain R2. As input voltage Increases, required trigger
loop voltage compensator for small conduction types of AC motors. Full-wave bridge D1-D4 and voltage also Increases, retarding firing point of
angles operates from 200-260 VAC input and SCR Q2 provide full-wave control, with UJT Q1 SCR to compensate for change in input. — D.
provides true RMS output voltage for sensitive serving as trigger. Triggering frequency is de- Perkins, 'True RMS Voltage Regulators," Mo-
equipment such as photographic enlargers. termined bycharge and discharge of C3 through torola, Phoenix, A Z, 1975, AN-509, p 3.
735
736
1.5 V FOR VTVM — Simple rectifier circuit re-

places battery in vacuum-tube voltmeter. Pro-
vides good regulation and eliminates need for
frequent battery replacement. Remove battery
before using supply. AC source can be 6.3-V sec-
ondary of filament transformer or terminals of
6.3-V pilot lamp in any AC equipment. — P. Alex-
ander, Battery Replacement Circuit for VTVM,
TRANSFORMERLESS ±12 V AT 15 mA— Devel- formance requirements. For values shown, rip- QST, Jan. 1976, p 42-43.
oped to provide bias voltage for six 741 opamps. ple is 1.1 V. Diode types are not critical. — C.
Circuit connects directly across 120-V 60-Hz AC Venditti, Build this Transformerless Low-Volt-
line. Article gives design procedure to meet per- age Supply, EDN Magazine, Feb. 5, 1977, p 102.
1000 V FOR CRT — Unique connection of two TV

booster transformers having 125-V secondaries
gives high-voltage supply for small monitor
scope. T1 is connected conventionally, with its
7.5-kV REGULATED SUPPLY — Power trans- TV monitor. Diodes are 1 kV, such as 1N4007. 6.3-V winding going to heater of CRT. 6.3-V
former is special design, but commercial unit Article gives circuit of complete monitor, in- winding of T2, also connected to CRT, serves as
delivering 5 to 10 kV can be used. Inverter circuit cluding low-voltage supply.— L. Pryor, Home- primary for second transformer. Remaining
uses MJE105 transistor driving primaries of brew This SSTV Monitor, 73 Magazine, June windings of T2 and high-voltage secondary of
transformer. 741 opamp and transistor provide 1975, p 22-24, 26-28, and 30. T1 are connected in series aiding to give about
regulation for 7.5-kV output used in slow-scan 367 VAC for doubling by D1-D2 and C1-C2. Since
CRT drain is low, filter charges to very nearly
peak voltage of 1027 VDC.— W. P. Turner, Cheap
Power Supply for a CRT, 73 Magazine, March
1974, p 53.
AMPI IFIERS POWER

OSCILLATOR BUFFER
100-W SINE AT 60 Hz — Consists essentially of

60-Hz sine-wave oscillator with 10K frequency-
control pot, two buffer stages, and push-pull
power amplifier. Circuit eliminates noise prob-
lems of square-wave inverters when operating
115-V radio receiver or cassette player in car. —
G. C. Ford, Power Inverter with Sine Wave Out-
put, 73 Magazine, May 1973, p 29-32.
IZ VOLT
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
737
HEP
12 V TO 6 V — Permits operation of older 6-V

VHF FM mobile equipment from 12-V storage
battery. With transistor mounted on suitable
heatsink, maximum output is 15 A. If positive
and negative lines are isolated from chassis,
converter may be used with either negative or
positive ground. — E. Noll, Circuits and Tech-
niques, Ham Radio, April 1976, p 40-43.
PARALLEL INVERTER DRIVE— Uses Mullard itor discharge circuit, and bistable MVBR for
modules for converting DC power to AC at high parallel inverter system. RSA61 and TT61 are
power levels for such applications as driving in- trigger modules, with RSA61 also providing
duction motors at higher speeds than are ob-
power supplies for other modules. — "Universal
tainable with line frequency. DC control voltage Circuit Modules for Thyristor Trigger Systems
of 0-10 V varies output frequency up to 400 Hz. (61 Series)," Mullard, London, 1978, Technical
UPA61 modules provide functions of level de- Information 66, TP1660, p 19.
tector, pulse generator, ramp generator, capac-
12 VDC TO 1 15 VAC AT 400 Hz— Provides three- oscillator. Emitter-follower amplifier driving
saturated switching mode. — R. J. Haver, "The
phase output at 20 W by using RC coupling to push-pull power output transistors is shown ABC's of DC to AC Inverters," Motorola, Phoe-
oscillator in such a way that 120° phase differ- only for phase 1 ; other two phases use similar nix, AZ, 1976, AN-222, p 15.
ence exists at collectors of 2N651 transistors of amplifiers. Power transistors are operated in
738
12-V EMERGENCY POWER— Trickle-charge cir-

cuit and 12-V motorcycle battery provide relia-
ble emergency power for battery-operated
weather radio, portable AM/FM receiver, or
hand-held transceiver for many hours. 100K
pots drop voltage to 9 V for each receiver. Lamp
can be auto dome light. GE-63 pilot lamp in
charging circuit acts as current limiter and
charge indicator. — J. Rice, Simple Emergency
Power, QST, March 1978, p 42.
ISOLATION
TRANSFORMER
TRIAD N-68X
130 AND 270 V FOR CRT — High-voltage power

supply provides 270 V required for deflection
plates of 2AP1-A CRT used as RTTY tuning in-
dicator, as well as 130 V for high-voltage am-
plifier. Large capacitor keeps ripple voltage
low. — R. R. Parry, RTTY CRT Tuning Indicator,
73 Magazine, Sept. 1977, p 118-120.
12 VDC TO 115 VAC AT 100 W-566 function

generator provides triangle output at 60 Hz with
frequency stability better than ±0.02%/°C. 540
power driver feeds six-transistor power output
stage. Transformer load attenuates third har-
monic, giving output very close to pure 60-Hz
sine wave. 566 also provides square-wave out-
put for other purposes.— "Signetics Analog
Data Manual." Signetics. Sunnyvale, CA, 1977,
p 853-854.
739
230 VAC FROM 115 VAC— Connect 6.3-V fila-

ment transformers back-to-back as shown to
get 230 V when step-up transformer is not avail-
HALF-WAVE SYNCHRONOUS RECTIFIER— flows through load RL. On negative alternations, able. 115-V windings must be phased properly
T ransistor Q1 is synchronously biased on by AC Q1 is reverse-biased and transistor is blocked. — in series; if wrong, output voltage will be zero.
input voltage to give efficient low-voltage reg- B. C. Shiner, "Improving the Efficiency of Low Output power rating at 230 V is somewhat less
ulation. When points A and C are positive with Voltage, High-Current Rectification," Motorola. than twice the power (E x I) rating of smallest
respect to points B and D, base-emitter junction Phoenix, AZ, 1973, AN-517, p 3. filament transformer. If 6.3-V 10-A transformers
of Q1 is forward-biased and collector current are used, power rating would be about 100 W
(less than 2 x 6.3 x 10). — A. E. McGee, Jr.,
Cheap and Easy 230 Volt AC Power Supply, 73
Magazine, Aug. 1974, p 64.
270 G6005
WITH HEATSINK
HEP
02
TRANSIENT ELIMINATOR— Used between DC

power supply and load to eliminate supply tran-
±6 V AND ±15 V — Suitable for use when fre- in CMOS 1C function generator. — R. Megirian, sients that might damage semiconductor de-
quency or some other critical parameter of load Ingegrated-Circuit Function Generator, Ham vices. Zener rating should be about 10% higher
is not dependent on voltage. Developed for use Radio, June 1974, p 22-29. than supply voltage so Q1 is normally turned
off. Q2 is normally conducting. When voltage
spike is present on input line, zener conducts
and turns Q1 on. Q1 then places positive bias on
10K pot to turn off Q2 and protect load during
500 W AT 20 kHz — Uses four Delco DTS-712 put of 40-kHz primary oscillator drives JK flip- error signal is fed to NAND gates to give regu-
transistors in push-pull Darlington configura- flop that generates complementary square lation better than 0.1% for load range of 200-
tion, with pulse-width modulation on push-pull waves and divides frequency by 2 with neces- 500 W or line range of 300—400 V. — "A 20 kHz,
inverter providing regulation. Can be operated sary symmetry. NAND gates establish primary 500 W Regulating Converter Using DTS-712
from 220-VAC three-phase full-wave rectified ON/OFF periods of power stage. Portion of out- Transistors," Delco, Kokomo, IN, 1974, Appli-
line. Efficiency is up to 80%. Square-wave output signal is compared to reference voltage, and cation Note 55.
740
SHUTDOWN PROTECTION— Used with digital

logic to prevent generation of false logic signals
when power supply is turned on or turned off.
FETs sense +15 V and —15 V supplies and
conduct when either supply drops below pinch-
off voltage, activating shutdown output. With
values shown, shutdown output is disabled
when supplies exceed about 4 V, to provide nor-
mal operation. — E. Burwen, Power-Supply
Monitor Suppresses False Output Signals, EDN
Magazine, Nov. 5, 1977, p 110 and 112.
117 VAC FROM 24-60 VDC— Will operate from

either 24- or 32-V storage battery or from 60-
VDC source. Circuit shown is set up for 60-V op-
eration. For 24/32 V, remove FI and F4 and insert
F2 and F3, then switch S3 to 32 V. T1 is 117-V
20-A Variac with bifilar primary winding added;
use 38 bifilar turns of No. 8 for 24 V and 48 turns
for 32 V. Commutating capacitor Cl consists of
ten 1 20-/j F 400-VDC oil-filled capacitors (do not
use electrolytics). SCRs Q1 and Q2, rated 100 A
at 800 PIV (Poly Paks 92CU1167), are switched
by Cornell-Dubilier 98600 60-Hz 12-V vibrator.
VR1, which limits voltage across vibrator coil,
consists of two 6.8-V 10-W zeners. With 60-V
operation, use 1-ohm 200-W resistor in series
with inverter while starting, but short it out
while inverter is running. Inverter output volt-
age varies from 150 VAC no-load to 110 VAC
with 1650-W resistive load. CR1 is 400-PIV 200-
A silicon. CR2 and CR3 are 800-PIV 250-A sili-
con.— R. Dunaja, A High-Power SCR Inverter,
r I T\
QST, June 1974, p 36-37.
CR5-CR8
o=a>
234AC 10 A* VALUES OF CAPACITANCE ARE

IN MICROFARADS ( jjF ) ; OTHERS
ARE IN PICOFARADS ( pF OR jjjjF ) ;
kRESISTANCES
-1000, M- 1 000ARE000IN OHMS',
117V
AC
ALTERNATE
CONNECTIONS
FOR J1
* - CHANGE TO 20 AMPS FOR HTVAC
**-10 1-MEG. 1-WATT RESISTORS IN SERIES
only after turning off power and allowing time

2500 V AT 500 mA — Meets power requirements Diodes are 1000 PIV at 2.5 A, such as Motorola for capacitors to discharge; output voltages are
for2-kW linear amplifier using pair of 8873 con- HEP170. T2 is Stancor P-8190 rated 6.3 V at 1.2 dangerous. — R. M. Myers and G. Wilson, 8873s
duction-cooled triodes for SSB transmitter ser- A. DS1 is 117-V neon pilot lamp. Set tap on R1 in a Two-Kilowatt Amplifier, QST, Oct. 1973, p
14-19.
vice. Power transformer is Hammond 101165. 5000 ohms from B— lead. Make adjustments
741
LOW STANDBY DRAIN— Positive 12-V pulse at

input A triggers SCS Qt and turns on transistor
switch Q3. Positive pulse at input B gates SCS
T2
Q2 on and turns off Q3. Current drain is essen-
tially zero (typically 3 /nA). Circuit was designed
to supply up to 7 mA of switched current from
12-VDC supply. — D. B. Heckman, Bistable
Switch with Zero Standby Drain, EDNiEEE Mag-
azine, Oct. 1, 1971, p 42.
T1 Pri: 36 t#30 AWG

24 t#25 AWG
200 W AT 25 kHz— Two Delco DTS-403 high- Sec: Fcrroxcube
voltage silicon transistors are connected as Core: 266 T 1 25-3F2A
push-pull oscillator operating on 150-VDC bias. Ferrite toroid
Efficiency is 78% at full load. Diodes serve al-
ternately as steering and clamp diodes. — "25
♦Sec-
kHz High Efficiency 200 Watt Inverter," Delco,
1 26 t tapped#38(o> 63t,
40
Kokomo, IN, 1971, Application Note 47. 2.38strands
V/t AWG litz
5t rr 25 AWG
Feedback:
T2 Core:
Pri:
Ferroxcube (ferrite toroid)
528T500-3C5
★ Adjust value of resistor for maximum * To be determined by individual

efficiency at full load. requirements.
3 kV FOR CRO — Circuit also provides 1-kV neg- inverter operating at about 20 kHz to simplify Treo and Tr81 for 709 1C opamp.— C. M. Little, A
ative supply at 2 mA, as required for cathode- filtering. Tr82 and Tr83 form current-switched 50 MHz Oscilloscope, Wireless World, July
ray tube of oscilloscope. Positive supply fur- class D oscillator producing sine waves at high
1975, p 318-322.
nishes 50 fx A at 3 kV. Design uses transistor efficiency. Current multiplication is provided by
742
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION FOR 400-V SUP-

PLY— R, and Q, form current detector for bias
supply. At normal current levels, voltage drop
is very small and Q2 is reverse-biased. When cur-
rent reaches 400 ftA, voltage drop across R,
forces gate of Q, to near pinchoff. Combined
voltage drop across R, and Q, then becomes
large so Q2 is forced almost to full conduction.
Q3 and Q.. then turn on Q , to provide overcur-
rent-alarm signal for activating logic circuit that
shuts off power supply. — J. P. Thompson,
Overcurrent Alarm Protects HV Supply, EDN
Magazine, Nov. 20, 1978, p 321-322.
FULL-WAVE SYNCHRONOUS RECTIFIER—

Transistors are biased on alternately by AC
input voltage, to supply load current on alter-
nate half-cycles. Silicon diodes D1 and D2 pro-
tect transistors from charging current of capa-
citive load when circuit is turned on. Capacitor
discharge problems are minimized by use of
diodes 03 and D4 in base circuits of transis-
tors.— B. C. Shiner, "Improving the Efficiency of

Low Voltage, High-Current Rectification," Mo-
torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1973, AN-517, p 4.
90 VRMS AT 500 W — Open-loop RMS voltage serves to increase firing point of PUT Q3. This
J. Haver and B. C. Shiner, "Theory, Character-
regulator acts with full-wave bridge to provide delays firing of SCR Q5 to hold output voltage istics and Applications of the Programmable
good AC voltage regulation for AC load over line fairly constant as input voltage increases. Delay Unijunction T ransistor," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
voltage range of 110-130 VAC. As input voltage network of Q1 prevents circuit from latching up 1974, AN-527, p 11.
increases, voltage across R10 increases and at beginning of each charging cycle for Cl. — R.
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS 743
SI T I
3-kV SUPPLY — Circuit uses full-wave bridge are 500 g.F at 450 VDC. Capacitor combination 6R520SP4B4. T1 has 2200-V secondary rated
rectifier D2-D5, with each diode stack con- thus gives equivalent of 50 /jlF for filter, rated 500 mA. K1 is 24-V relay. Article covers con-
structed from two 1 000-PI V 2.5-A diodes in se- 4500 V. When using 500-/xA movement for out- struction and stresses safety precautions. — E.
ries. Each diode pair is shunted by 470K 1-W re- put voltmeter, R5 should be ten 1-megohm re- H. Hartz, 3000 VDC Supply, 73 Magazine, July
sistor and 0.01-îF 1000-V disk capacitor. C2-C1 1 sistors in series. Thyrector TY1 is GE
1974, p 69-72.
CHAPTER 69
Programmable Circuits
Circuits having 1 to 11 digital control inputs provide switch, logic, or
computer-programmed choice of values for variables such as attenuation,
division ratio, filter center frequency, math function, pulse width, or output
frequency. See also Microprocessor chapter.
♦ vcc
TIMER/COUNTER — Basic circuit using XR2240

programmable timer/counter acts as pro-
grammable mono when SI is closed, with out-
put pulse width being a multiple in binary of RC
seconds. With 8-bit binary counter, time delays
range from 1 RC to 255 RC seconds. As an ex-
ample, ifonly pin 6 (dividing input frequency by
32) is connected to common output bus, dura-
tion of output pulse will be 32 RC seconds. Sim-
ilarly, with pins 1, 2, 5, and 7 connected to bus,
delay is 83 RC seconds. With SI open for astable
operation, output frequency is 1/t hertz where
t is multiple of RC from 1 to 255. VCC is 4-15
V. — H. M. Berlin, 1C Timer Review, 73 Magazine,
Jan. 1978, p 40-45.
FROM FLOATING OR ISOLATED POWER BCD ATTENUATION FACTOR SELECTION

SOURCE (10V)
16
10
16
82pF=^ +5V
r
3 V
+5
8[ 3| 10
i
!>
BCD CONTROL OF GAIN — Provides optically counter output compatible with requirements
coupled input and BCD-selected attenuation of second converter connected to give output
factor, for combination with fixed-gain DC am- voltage that is scaled reproduction of input volt-
plifier to give programmable gain capability. age. Circuit performance is comparable to that
Output of A-8402 V/F converter feeds proof high-cost instrumentation amplifier — K. W.
grammable modulo-n decade counter chain Kissinger, Low-Cost Isolation Amp Provides
through optoisolator, to give frequency division BCD-Selectable Gain, EDN Magazine, Oct. 20,
by BCD factor applied to selector inputs. 74122 1977, p 82-83.
retriggerable mono MVBR makes duty cycle of
744
745
PROGRAMMABLE CIRCUITS
20K U
DIGITALLY SELECTABLE GAIN— TTL controls

operation of DG301 low-power analog switch at
CONTROL INPUTS output of inverting opamp. Low logic gives gain
of 1, and high logic gives gain of 10. — "Analog

PROGRAMMING INPUT Switches and Their Applications," Siliconix,
Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 7-90.
0 0 0 0 X + Y
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 X Y
0 0 1 1 X Y
0 1 0 0 X Y
X Y
0 1 0 1 Y
0 1 1 0 X
0 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 XX ++ yY 16 FUNCTIONS OF X AND Y— With only three
1 0 1 0 x + y 1C chips, circuit provides choice of any one of 16
1 0 1 1 x y rF2 possible functions of two Boolean variables,
1 1 0 0 x y Table shows output states for all programming
1 1 0 1 y combinations of control inputs P. — S. Muruge-
1 1 1 0 x san. Programmable Logic Circuit Has Versatile
1 1 1 1 0 Outputs, EDN Magazine , Feb. 5, 1975, p 57.
20K li
OUTPUT DG307 = 120 /jW

L 1 44 =18 mW
PROGRAMMABLE-FREQUENCY STATE-VARI- center frequency of 700 or 7000 Hz. Logic input resistors R, and R2. — "Analog Switches and
ABLE— Provides choice of low-pass, high-pass, controls DG307 low-power dual analog switch Their Applications," Siliconix, Santa Clara, CA,
and bandpass outputs with logic-selectable for changing values of frequency-determining
1976, p 7-86.
746
CURRENT
ANALOG-
SWITCH
V]
GAIN-PROGRAMMABLE AMPLIFIER— National
Vin — — wv—
AH 5010 4-bit current-mode analog switch for
TTL input is used with general-purpose opamp
such as LM1 18 to give multiplying D/A converter
2R at low cost. For CMOS control logic, use
'►WVNr AM97C10 switch. Use of 10K for gain-program-
ming resistor R gives compromise between
switch resistance and switch leakage. Use 0.2%
tolerance resistors for R and 2R, 0.5% for 4R,
and 5% for highest resistance, with 0.1% tol-
DIGITAL
4R INPUTS eranceforfeedback resistor R, which is also 10K,
' 1— WV-
to give overall accuracy within 0.2%.— J. Max-
well, Analog Current Switch Makes Gain-Pro-
grammable Amplifier. Electronics, Feb. 17,
1977, p 99 and 101.
— VvV
8R
R = 10 kn
(SEE TEXTI
' R
= -v, L
fir A (2°) + B (2-') + C (2-2) + D (2-3)
FOUR-STATE ATTENUATOR— HA-2400 four-

channel programmable amplfiier is used as non-
inverting four-state attenuator controlled by
logic inputs 0 and 1 to D0 and D,. Output voltage
for each logic combination is given in truth
table. Values shown provide gains of 1, % 'It,
and 'k. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook,"
431.
+15 V
DIGITAL
INPUT
CONTROLLING REGULATOR OUTPUT— Digital ponents or equipment. Analog Devices MDA- output for varying output of 723 regulator over
control of D/A converter determines output 10Z-110 converter generates 0-2 mA range of 7-37 V at 150 mA maximum. — C. Vis-
output
voltage of regulator, with FET serving as volt- with resolution determined by 10-bit digital wanath, D-A Converter Controls Programmable
input. 741 opamp transforms current to 0-6 V Power Source, Electronics, July 21, 1977, p 125.
age-variable resistor. Applications include gen-
eration ofsequence of voltages for testing com-
747
0—12 V PROGRAMMABLE — Combination of

Motorola MC1408 DAC and MC1723 regulator
gives digitally programmable voltages in 0.1-V
increments at currents in excess of 100 mA. Can
be used as programmable lab power supply,
computer-controlled supply for automatic test
equipment, or in industrial control systems. Re-
quires ±5 V and ±15 V supplies. Voltage range
can be increased to 25.5 V if positive supply is
increased to 28.5 V or higher. — D. Aldridge and
N. Wellenstein, "Designing Digitally-Controlled
AN-703, p 3.
Power Supplies," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975,
A,
f.
■ io kn v+
16
1 Mn
14
10
PROGRAMMABLE ASTABLE — Square-wave 15
16 8T 2240
output frequency of Exar XR-2240 programma- n 12 TBO
Input
ble timer/counter is made digitally program- Lines 2 IT V+ REG
2T
mable by use of 4051 CMOS multiplexer having 9 3
•Truth Table 45 MOD
three-line channel-select control ABC. Lines se- 1
4051
C O <
lect one of eight possible switching paths by Input Output Inputs
4 , R/C
5 6 4T
1/2 R, C,
binary combination. When all three inputs are C B A n Output 2 7
1/4 R,C, 64T
16T
128T _ TR
zero, highest of eight basic output frequencies 0 0 0
1 4 8
1/8 R,C, 32T R
of 2240 is obtained, as shown in truth table. Cir- 0 0 1 2 GND C.Ô.SmF
16 1/16 R,C,
cuit will yield outputs with periods of 1, 2, 4, 8, 0 1 0 4
1/32 R,C,
0 1 1
ns
8
16, 32, 64, and 128 s. — W. G. Jung, "1C Timer 1 0 0 1/64 R,C,
Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1 0 1 1/128 R,C, 'CMOS Inverters,

1977, p 123-125. 1 1 0 1/256 R, C,
128
64
Output.
1 1 1
32
m
I ”°
erters.
{t>oJ-tr>o o
Ei D
0 10 D11
? 9
0 O O
PROGRAMMABLE-GAIN OPAMP — Cascading unit steps. Article gives truth table showing clude digital AGC and digital control of servo-
two HA-2400 digitally programmed amplifiers, total gain obtained for 1 6 combinations of 0 and systems and level detectors. — J. A. Connelly, N.
each combining functions of analog switches 1 on control lines D10, D,,, D!0, and Dz,. Enable C. Currie, and D. S. Bonnet, Op Amp Has 1 6-Step
and high-performance opamps on single 1C lines are normally at 1, and E, is made 0 only Digital Gain Control, EDN Magazine, May 5,
chip, gives 16 different programmable gains in when total gain must be zero. Applications in-
1974, p 75 and 77.
R* R3* R,* R*
FOUR-STATE AMPLIFIER— HA-2400 four-chan-

nel programmable amplifier is used with tapped
voltage divider in feedback loop to give gains of
1, 2, 4, and 8 controlled by logic inputs to D0 and
D, as shown in truth table. Amplifier is nonin-
verting.— W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook,"
432.
PROGRAMMED 0—25.5 V — Uses D/A converter

and 2.5-V zener to form digitally programmed
voltage reference. Binary-coded TTL informa-
tion selects voltage ranges of 0-2.55 V or 0-25.5
V. Can be used as lab source having 10 mV per
step in low range and 100 mV per step in high
range. Output is adjusted with 8-bit input con-
trol. R3 determines basic voltage range, being
set at 1280 ohms for low range and 12.8K for
high range. Although 741 or other general-pur-
pose opamp is adequate for low range, higher-
voltage single-supply opamp such as 759 is bet-
ter for high range and for both ranges, because
it gives higher output current on low range. —
W. Jung, An 1C Op Amp Update, Ham Radio,
March 1978, p 62-69.
r pP,
'll
,
20 pF >
2 14 13
'
)\
0 TO +63 V AT 1 A — High-voltage digitally con-

trolled power supply uses Motorola MC1406L 6-
bit DAC and MC1466L floating voltage regulator
II 1 to deliver up to 1 A of load current over output
I I voltage that can be incremented in 63 steps of
! I \j \ 1 V each. Digital word that controls voltage is
1^ 1 1 1 iUi
I I r-w— , 1 I 1-W-1 r^j~i p
I I [—►(-, I I coupled into DAC with 4N28 optoisolators. Cur-
rent-amplifier output stage using Darlington
connection of transistors is designed to operate
<y 270|
V MSB from +70 V supply. — D. Aldridge and N. Wel-
lenstein, "Designing Digitally-Controlled Power
703, p 6.
Supplies," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-
749
r AM97C10 *1
(8k BCD)
GAIN-PROGRAMMED AMPLIFIER— 8-bit multi-

plying D/A converter using cascaded 4-bit sec-
tions provides logic-controlled gain for signal
preconditioning, level control, and dynamic
range expansion. Logic 0 turns JFET switch on,
and logic 1 turns switch off. Series FET in feed-
back path of opamp compensates for ON resis-
tance of JFET switch. Circuit has gain of 0.9996
(binary) with 5K feedback resistor and gain of
0.99 (BDC) with 8K feedback resistor. — "FET

Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-47-6-49.
VIN O— •— VW
IN
CYCLE)
(50/50
N
DUTY
PROGRAMMED DIVIDE-BY-1 79— Produces = 89 is programmed into divider and odd/even FF„ can be eliminated. Article tells how to pro-
symmetrical output waveforms even if divider control of logic is a 0. Control logic can be sim- gram for any other value of N. — V. R. Godbole.
ratios are large, variable, and even or odd. Cir- plified, depending on particular requirements; Programmable Divider Maintains Output Sym-
cuit is set up for output of N = 179, for which M thus, if perfect symmetry is not essential, G4 and metry, EDN Magazine, July 5, 1974, p 72-74.
Vi
VREF
▼ 10 v mu
fC4
C4 - 150 pF
-oH*-
SELECT O-
C3 * 1,500 pF
*_
fpi fC2
SELECT O-
TTL C2 = 0.015/.F
DIGITALLY CONTROLLED VARIABLE LOW-
CONTROL fC1 <A a- PASS — DG201 CMOS analog switch with TTL
control permits setting of break frequency at 1,
SELECT O- 10, 100, or 1000 Hz. Voltage gain below break
Ct = 0.15mF frequency, determined by ratio of R3to R„ is 100
H *-
(40 dB). Highest break frequency (1000 Hz) is
SELECT O- HI obtained when C„ is switched in. — "Analog
Switches and Their Applications," Siliconix,
Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 7-66-7-67.
v2 GND
T 3T
> — 1
o
Wr
-O v0UT
vW
6
2
7
8 Va7476 15
9
10 3 14
11
12
-VW1
1.0k Ov5
5V
C begins charging again. Second half of 7476

8-BIT PROGRAMMABLE INPUT— Serves as dig- ative direction. When capacitor voltage exceeds serves as divider. To cover above frequency
itally programmable frequency source covering lower negative threshold voltage at pin 3 of range, values should be: R 3.9K; R, 27K; R2 10K;
10 to 2550 Hz for systems under microprocessor LM311 high-impedance comparator A,, com- R3 2.2K; C 0.1 /if Circuit gives 8-bit accuracy.
control. Frequency change is essentially instan- parator changes state and sets 7476 flip-flop. Design equations are presented in article. — A.
taneous, assuring immediately valid data. Uses This turns on Q, through level-shifter Q2, dis- Helfrick, Eight-Bit Frequency Source Suited for
MC1408L8 8-bit monolithic D/A converter to charging C until it exceeds higher threshold ftP Control, EDN Magazine, Sept. 20, 1976, p 116
and 118.
supply constant current for charging C in neg- voltage at pin 2 of A2. Flip-flop then resets and
751
<15V 15V
PROGRAMMABLE GAIN — Combination of two

Signetics 5007/5008 multiplying D/A converters
and NE535 opamp gives digital control of atten-
uation and gain in audio system. AC input con-
trols polarity of output, giving output of ±10 V
for inputs from DC to 10 kHz and ±5 V if re-
sponse goes up to 20 kHz.— "Signetics Analog

p 677-685.
GAIN-PROGRAMMABLE — Gain of noninverting

opamp can be programmed with standard dig-
ital logic levels. With input at 0 V, Q, is turned
on but is held out of saturation by Schottky
diode D2. Resulting opamp gain is (R, + R2)/R2.
If R2 is 1.13 kilohms and R, 10 kilohms, gain is
10. When input is 5 V, Q, is off and gate of Q2 is
driven to -15 V. Gain now becomes (R, +
R2
+ R3)/(R2 + R3). If R3 is 8.87 kilohms, gain is 2. —
K. Karash, Gain-Programmable Amplifier, EEE
Magazine, Sept. 1970, p 89.
MULTISTAGE PROGRAMMABLE AMPLIFIER— ent values of gain, ranging from 0 to 45 dB, by shown.— W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook,"
Cascading of two HA-2400 four-channel pro- applying logic pulses to control inputs for pins Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 433-
grammable amplifiers gives choice of 16 differ- 15 and 16 in accordance with truth table 435.
752
♦ 15V NC
DIGITALLY PROGRAMMED INPUTS AND DG201 switch gives choice of four different gain
for unity-gain position of switch. — "Analog
GAINS — DG200 CMOS analog switch gives pro- values (1, 10, 100, or 1000) for opamp. Full Switches and Their Applications,” Siliconix,
grammable choice of two inputs to opamp, and opamp output range of ±12 V is provided even Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 7-67.
753
+ 15 V
BINARY CONTROL OF GAIN— Gain of amplifier

increases by decades from 1 to 1000 as binary
input to A, and A0 of DG304 low-power analog
switch decreases from 1,1 to 0,0. Power dissi-
pation of switch is less than 0.1 mW.— "Analog

njinr OUTPUT
T =0.693 R_C
r _ 1 1 44
—
OUT T IR. + 2R.IC
HI O' TTL
■0 47(;F LO J, LEVELS
Hz
RES.
Ra values
BIT WT.
BIT
. 103
413
1 14.8k
7.21k
2 29.8k 207
} 59.8k 13
4 120k 52
5 240 k 6.5
26
6 3.2
481k
7 1.6
10 962k
8 1.9M
9
3.9M
11 7.7M
PROGRAMMABLE 0-825 Hz PULSES— Inex- 0.8
pensive pulse generator is programmable in switching transistors. Inputs and outputs are charging is through parallel combination of re-
0.4-Hz steps from 0 to 825 Hz, and can be mod- TTL-compatible. When bit input is high (0), its sistors. Width of output pulse T, is constant
ified to extend range to 200 kHz. Circuit uses 555 associated transistor is turned off. When bit over frequency range.— E. G. Laughlin, Inexpen-
connected in astable mode, with timing resistor input is low (1), transistor is on, allowing
0.4 C, to sive Pulse Generator Is Logic Programmable,
Ra replaced by 11 sets of timing resistors and charge. When more than one input is low. EDN Magazine, Aug. 20, 1974, p 92.
CHAPTER 70
Protection Circuits
Provide protection of equipment and components from overvoltage or

overcurrent conditions, ground fault, loose ground, contact arcing, and
inductive transients. Also included are digital-coded or tone-coded controls
for doors, auto ignition switches, and equipment ON/OFF switches, along
with fail-safe interlocks and power-outage indicators. See also Burglar Alarm,
Fire Alarm, Power Control, Power Supply, Regulated Power Supply,
Regulator, and Siren chapters.
CROWBAR — When output of regulator for mi-

croprocessor power supply exceeds maximum
safe voltage as determined by zener Q1 , SCR 02
is triggered on and conducts heavily, blowing
fuse rapidly to protect equipment. Fuse rating
is 125% of nominal load. Choose SCR to meet UNREGULATED
REGULATED AND
voltage and current requirements. Choose DC FROM
PROTECTED Vcc
POWER SUPPLY
zener for desired trip voltage. Each germanium
diode in series with Q1 will add 0.3 V to trip volt-
age, and silicon diodes add 0.6 V. To calibrate,
place IK resistor temporarily in series with Q2
and measure drop across it to see if SCR fires
and produces surge on meter at desired Vcc. —
J. Starr, Want to Buy a Little Insurance?, Kilo-
frorr capacitor
(quick blow )
BLOWN-FUSE INDICATOR— Used with quick-

blow fuses in high-power audio amplifier using
split power supply. When fuse blows, transistor
shunting it is turned on and passes current to
R, draws current from C, through D,, in oppo- Diodes D5 and D6 are not critical, and simply pre- corresponding indicator lamp. Maximum cur-
sition to Rs. This gives drops of about 0.12 V vent current flow from base to collector of tran- rent in blown-fuse condition is less than 1
across C, and C2, allowing full drive. With short- sistors.— M. G. Hall, Amplifier Output Protec- mA. — I. Flindell, Amplifier Blown-Fuse Indica-
circuited load, however, capacitor drops in- tion, Wireless World, Jan. 1977, p 78. tor, Wireless World, Sept. 1976, p 73.
754
755
PROTECTION CIRCUITS
‘5
Small hand-carried unit
.01/if
° If—
1N4148
1M12
1N4148 1 1 10/if
Unlocking device
L31
3-kHz TONE LOCK — Electric door lock opens
only when signal voltage of about 3 kHz is ap-
plied to two exposed terminals by holding com-
pact single-IC AF oscillator against terminals.
Will not respond to DC or 60-Hz AC. Pocket os-
cillator operates from 9-V transistor radio bat-
tery, with current drawn only when output
prongs are held against lock terminals. SCR can
be any type capable of handling current drawn
by electric lock. — J. A. Sandler, 11 Projects
under $11, Modern Electronics, June 1978, p
54-58. 10-DIGIT CODED SWITCH — Uses seven Texas but provides much greater protection unless in-
Instruments positive-logic chips. NAND gates 1- truder knows that 10 digits are required. Article
4 and 5-8 are from two SN7400N packages. Two describes operation of circuit. One requirement
SN7404N packages each providesix of inverting of the 2N7496N shift registers is that informa-
opamps shown. Desired code is set up as com- tion be present at serial input before clocking
bination of Os and Is by presetting ten 2-posi- pulse occurs. — K. E. Potter, Ten-Digit Code-Op-
tion switches. To open lock, switches at input erated Switch or Combination Lock, Wireless
for 0 and 1 must be pushed in sequence of code. World, May 1974, p 123.
Arrangement gives 1024 possible combinations
RELAYS: =IMPULSE LATCHING

7012 COILS TYPE,
,Ss
SWITCH z SET RESET
S3
S4 0 1
Ss 1 0
0 1 RELAY,
1 0 IN SERIES
1 0 WITH IGNITION
SWITCH
ELECTRONIC LOCK — Correct combination of (contact opened) by pressing S6. With connec- used again. Switches can be connected for any
switches S,-S5 must be actuated to energize tions shown, switches S2, S„, and S5 must be other desired combinations. — L. F. Caso, Elec-
relay in series with ignition switch of auto or depressed simultaneously to open (set) lock. If tronic Combination Lock Offers Double Protec-
any other type of electric lock. If wrong combi- error is made, output of fault gate goes to logic tion, Electronics, June 27, 1974, p 110; re-
nation is used, lock cannot be opened until re- 1 and contacts of relay 2 will open. After error,
printed in "Circuits for Electronics Engineers,"
S, and S3 must be depressed simultaneously to Electronics, 1977, p 346.
setting combination is entered. When car igni-
tion is turned off, ignition relay should be reset reset lock before opening combination can be
756
600-Hz CLAMP — Polar clamp was developed to

provide overvoltage input protection for ±6
VDC teleprinter signals at 10 mA. Circuit will
withstand input transients up to 120 VDC at 20
mA. When input exceeds emitter-base break-
down voltage of Q1r Q2 becomes forward-biased
for clamping of input. With excessive negative
input, Q, is forward-biased and emitter-base
path in Q2 completes clamping action. — R. R.
Breazzano, A Polar Clamp, EDNIEEE Magazine,
June 15, 1971, p 59.
FOLDBACK CURRENT LIMITER— Provides current through Q, drops correspondingly.

overload and short-circuit protection for load When load is shorted, Q2 goes off and short-cir-
while isolating malfunctioning circuit from cuit current folds back to safe lower value.
other loads on common supply bus. In normal Choose value of unmarked resistor to ensure
operation, Q, is saturated. When load attempts saturation of Q, at load current.— S. T. Venka-
to draw more than this saturation value, base taramanan. Simple Circuit Isolates Defective
current of Qt cannot maintain saturation so Loads, EDN Magazine, Jan. 20, 1978, p 114.
voltage across unmarked resistor drops and
AC LINE MONITOR — Detects AC line failures of

any duration and turns off neon lamp PL1 to in-
dicate that clocks require resetting. Circuit is
plugged into AC outlet, and SI is pushed to trig-
ger SCR on and send current through lamp. — J.
R. Nelson, Some Ideas for Monitoring A.C.
Power Lines, CQ, July 1973, p 56.
AUDIBLE LINE MONITOR — Audio oscillator resetting. Q2 is any PNP audio power transistor,
coupled to simple relay circuit gives alerting K1 is 115-V SPDT relay, and PL1 is neon lamp. —
tone when power fails even momentarily. C2 J. R. Nelson, Some Ideas for Monitoring A.C.
determines duration of tone. With 2900 /*F, tone Power Lines, CQ, July 1973, p 56.
lasts about 1 s, as warning that clocks will need
AC GENERATOR CUTOUT — Disconnects equip- Normally closed contacts of K1 open, removing

ment from gas-engine generator when AC out- power from 11 5- VAC relay K2. 1N523 zener re-
put exceeds 125-VAC limit determined by set- duces output of U3 enough so Q1 can be turned
ting of R2. Normal 1 1 7-VAC output of generator off. R1 prevents relays from chattering when AC
is applied to 12.6-V filament transformer T1. U1 line voltage is close to threshold. To adjust,
and U2 rectify and regulate one input to com- apply 125 VAC between A and B, and set R2 so
parator U3. CR1 and Cl form peak line-voltage K2 drops out. — P. Hansen, Overvoltage Cutout
monitor. When pin 3 of U3 exceeds 5 V of pin 2, for Field Day Generators, QST, March 1977, p
output of U3 goes positive and turns on Q1, 49.
which applies power to small 12- VDC relay K1.
757
PROTECTION CIRCUITS
TRIAC SUPPRESSES RELAY ARCING— Circuit

prevents arcing at contacts of relay for loads up
to 50 A, by turning on as soon as it is fired by
REGULATOR OVERLOAD — When output is short is removed, circuit recovers automati- gate current; this occurs after SI is closed but
shorted, germanium diode D, turns on and cally.— D. E. Waddington, Germanium Diodefor before relay contacts close. Once contacts are
draws current through R„ removing reference Regulator Protection, Wireless World, March closed, load current passes through them rather
voltage across zener. Tr, is then held off and 1977, p 42.
than through triac. When SI is opened, triac lim-
turns Tr3 and Tr4 off to block load current. When its maximum voltage across relay contacts to
about 1 V. Circuit permits use of smaller relay
02 since it does not have to interrupt full load cur-
rent.— "Circuit Applications for the Triac," Mo-
torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1971, AN-466, p 8.
12.6V
.UNREGULATED
REGULATED
2N4167
(use heat sink}
TRANSCEIVER-SAVER — Simple circuit has no

effect on normal operation of CB transceiver or
other solid-state equipment in auto but pro-
5-V CROWBAR — Simple overvoltage protec- then supplies gate current to SCR Q2, which vides overvoltage protection if voltage regula-
tion circuit for 5-V 1-A logic supply can be ad- fires and continues conducting until power sup- tor in auto fails. Use heatsink with transistor if
justed to trigger at 10% overvoltage or 5.5 V. ply is disconnected. Power supply must include transmit current is above 2 A. Choose resistance
Tunnel diode CR3 senses level. At 5.5 V, diode current-limiting circuit and fuse. R3 adjusts trip value to give output of 12.6 V during normal
switches slightly past its valley point, and volt- point. — L. Strahan, Logic-Supply Crowbar, operation. — Circuits, 73 Magazine, March 1977,
age across diode biases Q, into saturation. Q, EDNIEEE Magazine, Nov. 15, 1971, p 51.
p 152.
by disconnecting supply when it exceeds preset Tr, on to provide fast switching action. Output World, March 1977, p 42.
758
EQUIPMENT INTERFACE PROTECTION— When

circuit shown is used to transfer signal from one
piece of equipment to another, desired signal
passes with very little degradation. Component
values can be chosen to make thyristor SCR,
latch at any desired voltage between A and B
that is greater than 0 V, blowing fuse F, and giv-
ing desired protective isolation. On other side
GROUND-FAULT INTERRUPTER— Compares break circuit. Toroid uses Amidon T-184-41 of circuit, SCR2 will latch and blow F2 when volt-
current in ungrounded side of power line with core, with 600 turns No. 30 for secondary, and age exceeds limiting value set by diode D2 and
current in neutral conductor. If currents are not 12 turns No. 16 solid twisted-pair for primary. zener D„. Zeners are 10-V CV7144, diodes are
equal, ground fault exists because portion of Circuit operates on fault current of 4 mA, well CV9637 small-signal silicon, resistors are 10K,
line current is taking an unintended return path below danger limit for children. — W. J. Pru- capacitors are 0.047 // F, and thyristors are
through leaky electric appliance or human dhomme. The Unzapper, 73 Magazine, Nov./ 2N4147. — S. G. Pinto and A. P. Bell, Thyristor
body. Voltage induced in toroid by unbalanced Dec. 1975, p 151-156. Protection Circuit, Wireless World, Oct. 1975, p
current is amplified for energizing relay K1 to 473.
D,
V IN
<12V
o 12-V OVERVOLTAGE LIMITER— Single LM111
comparator is basis for simple overvoltage pro-
tection of circuits drawing less than 50 mA.
Fraction of input supply is compared to 1.2-V
reference. When input exceeds reference level,
power is removed from output. — R. C. Dobkin,
LM113 Comparators Can Do More than Just Compare,
CODED LOCK — Five-digit combination lock state of each. Five of bistables serve for com- numbers of combination. Final correct number
uses five low-cost ICs operating from 5-V supply bination, and sixth prevents operation by num- sets B5 and turns on Tr,, to operate relay that
that can be derived from 12-V auto battery as ber in incorrect sequence. After S, is set to one can be used to open door. — S. Lamb, Simple
shown in inset. Six set/reset bistable circuits are number of code, S2 is pushed to enter that num- Code-Operated Switch or Combination Lock,
formed by cross-coupling pairs of dual-input ber, with process being repeated for other four
NAND gates, so 0-V input is needed to change
759
PROTECTION CIRCUITS
LOOSE-GROUND FLASHER— Uses ordinary

neon lamp in series with silicon diode, with
FAIL-SAFE INTERLOCK — Developed for pro- to provide complete interlock chain. Failure of lamp normally dark. Gives warning by flashing
tecting people and equipment at 40-kW RF ac- any component, including power supply, if ground wire is accidentally or purposely dis-
celerator station. All interlock switches (air breaks chain and places system in safe mode. — connected from chassis of oscilloscope or other
flow, water flow, water pressure, temperature, T. W. Hardek, Interlock Protection Circuit Is Sim- test instrument. — R. H. Troughton, Earth Warn-
etc) are normally closed, grounding one side of ple and Fail-Safe, EDN Magazine, May 20, 1975, ing Indicator, Wireless World, April 1977, p 62.
each relay coil. All relays are normally pulled in.
p 74. Load
CURRENT SENSOR — Load current is sensed

across base-emitter junction of output transis-
tor. Rt controls OFF time and R2 controls ON
time. Capacitor should be electrolytic rated
above 16 V. — M. Faulkner, Two Terminal Circuit
Breaker, Wireless World, March 1977, p 41.
BYPASSING SOLENOID TRANSIENTS— Feed-

back from collector to base of power transistor
through Cl and R2 protects device from de-
structive transients generated when inductive
load such as solenoid is turned off. Alternative
use of diode CR2 or CR1-R1 across coil would
limit voltage transient but would increase so-
lenoid release time. — D. Thomas, Feedback Pro-
tects High-Speed Solenoid Driver, EDN Maga-
zine, Jan. 1, 1971, p 40.
CHAPTER 71
Pulse Generator Circuits

Generate square waves with fixed or variable width and duty cycle, at audio
and radio frequencies up to 100 MHz. Includes tone-burst generators, strobe,Vcc
pulse delay, PCM decoder, and single-pulse generators. See also Frequency
Divider, Frequency Multiplier, Frequency Synthesizer, Function Generator,
Multivibrator, Oscillator, and Signal Generator chapters.
PULSE-STRETCHING MONO— Section of

CMOS MM74C04 inverter accepts positive input
pulse by going low and discharging C. Capacitor
is rapidly discharged, driving input of MM74C14
Schmitt trigger low. Output of Schmitt then
goes positive for interval T0 which is equal to
input pulse duration plus interval T that de-
pends on values used for R, C, and supply volt-
age.— "CMOS Databook," National Semicon-
“Lru“L_rLn_r
SoC- l l l 111 11 1i111 11 11 i
iiii i i
CLOCK-
NRZL _n_ri
PCM DECODER — Three CMOS ICs provide de-
coding of Manchester (split-phase) PCM signals
®- by generating missing mark which should occur
at each change of level data to recover original
clock frequency. Retriggerable mono MVBR
times out at slightly longer than half of original
clock frequency. Signal levels are TTL-compat-
ible. Values of C and R depend on system fre-
quency. Other resistors are 15K, and other ca-
pacitors are 470 pF.— M. A. Lear, M. L. Roginsky,
and J. A. Tabb, PCM Signal Processor Draws
Little Power, EDN Magazine, April 20, 1975, p
70.
780
761
PULSE GENERATOR CIRCUITS
♦VCC
554 ASTABLE — Two sections of 554 quad mon- square wave is obtained. VCC is 4.5-16 V at 3-
ostable timer are used. Output frequency is 1/ 10 mA. — H. M. Berlin, ICTimer Review, 73 Mag-
(R, + R2)C hertz, and output duty cycle is 100R2/ azine, Jan. 1978, p 40-45. QUADRATURE OUTPUTS— Exar XR-567 tone
{Ri + R2). When R, is equal to R2( symmetrical decoder is connected as precision oscillator pro-
viding separate square-wave outputs that are
very nearly in quadrature phase. Typical phase
shift between outputs is 80°. Supply voltage
range is 5-9 V. — "Phase-Locked Loop Data
5V
CA, 1978, p 41-48.
tion delay time of 7404 inverter establishes out-

100 MHz — Developed for measuring impulse re- put pulse width.— R. J. Lang, W. A. Porter, and
sponse of surface acoustic wave devices, for B. Smilowitz, Simple Circuit Generates Nano-
which pulse width had to be under 10 ns for fre- second Pulses, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1975, p
77-78.
quency spectrum of about 100 MHz. Propaga-
LM322 ASTABLE — National LM322 timer gen-

erates narrow negative pulse whose width is
approximately 2RC seconds. VCC is 4.5-20 V.
Will drive loads up to 5 mA. — H. M. Berlin, 1C
Timer Review, 7 3 Magazine, Jan. 1978, p 40-45.
BIPOLAR PULSE TRAINS — Output of Signetics parator 1 is off, forcing R, high). Comparator 2 400 Hz — One section of Signetics NE558 quad
555 timer F, consisting of unipolar waveform goes off when timer P goes low, and action of timer is used as nonprecision audio oscillator
varying from ground to +5 V, is converted to comparator 1 is turned on and off by timer F to providing square-wave output of about 400 Hz
bipolar pulse train having duration equal to that produce bipolar pulse train at E0. — G. L. Assard, with values and supply voltage shown. Output
of output pulse from lower 555 timer. While P Derive Bipolar Pulses from a Unipolar Source, frequency is affected by changes in supply volt-
is high, comparator 2 is on, forcing R2 to ground EDN Magazine, April 5, 1977, p 144.
age.— "Signetics Analog Data Manual." Signet-
and placing base of Q, at 2.5 V (because com- ics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 738.
762
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY UP TO 0.5 MHz— Fre-

(AS SHOWN, f0 - 1 kHz)
quency isdetermined by choice of values for C
50% DUTY CYCLE WITH 555— Provides pure resistor R, is required to switch Q, fully on when and frequency-control potentiometer R,.
square-wave output without sacrificing allow- it is driven by output of timer. — W. G. Jung, Square-wave output has almost equal mark-
able range of timing resistance. Q, replaces con- Take a Fresh Look at New 1C Timer Applications, space ratio over wide frequency range. Regen-
ventional timing resistor going to V+. Pull-up EDN Magazine, March 20, 1977, p 127-135. erative action is rapid, reducing transition
times. When circuit is switched on, C is un-
charged and Tr2 is on. C charges until Tr, begins
to conduct, cutting off Tr2 and discharging C
through R4 until Tr. cuts off and cycle repeats. —
J. L. Linsley Hood, Square-Wave Generator with
Single Frequency-Adjustment Resistor, Wire-
less World, July 1976, p 36.
30—4000 Hz WITH OPAMP — Frequency is deter- ground; R1 must be properly adjusted to give
mined by pot R1 in feedback path. Square-wave output of about 220 Hz.— F. M. Mims, "Inte-
output pulse amplitude is about 5 V. Circuit will grated Circuit Projects, Vol. 6," Radio Shack,
generate almost perfect sine waves if 0.1-juF ca- Fort Worth, TX, 1977, p 89-95.
+VCc
pacitor is connected between pin 12 and
(5 -15 V)
relay
J
With positive-going input pulses, output will be
CONTROLLED-DURATION PULSES— Economi- delayed until trailing edge occurs. Diode is re- SEQUENCE GENERATOR— Uses gated shift
cal Signetics 1C provides output pulse currents quired across output relay coil to suppress tran- register assembled from 7475 D-type latch,
up to 200 mA at duration ranging from micro- sients that might damage 1C and cause auto- along with four EXCLUSIVE-OR gates. Clock
seconds to many minutes depending on values matic retriggering.— J. B. Dance, Simple Pulse pulse should be narrow to avoid race-around
used for R3 and C2. Input pulses may have du- Shaper or Relay Driver, Wireless World, Dec. effects. — P. D. Maddison, Sequence Generator,
ration under a microsecond, negative-going. 1973, p 605-606.
763
_n_n_
3o
JlfUlP'o
V*
OUTPUT
input
FREQUENCY-DOUBLED OUTPUT— Current-
J _
W6 controlled oscillator section of Exar XR-567 tone
decoder is connected to double frequency of
square-wave output by feeding portion of out-
put at pin 5 back to input at pin 3 through resis-
tor. Quadrature detector of 1C then functions as
~i L frequency doubler to give twice output

quency at pin 8. Supply voltage range is 5-9
V. — "Phase-Locked Loop Data Book," Exar In-
fre-
tegrated Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 41-

48.
~ir
THREE-PHASE PULSE GENERATOR— Requires signal having frequency 6 times that of desired
only CMOS 4-bit shift register and two CMOS output frequency. — C. Rutschow, Simple
inverters. Register is connected to operate as CMOS Circuit Generates 3-Phase Signals, EDN
divide-by-6 Johnson counter giving glitch-free Magazine, June 20, 1976, p 128.
outputs. Circuit is driven by square-wave clock
clock jmnjuuimjiRjiminjiRr
Qa i— njHjnjnjnjnj- ltl
Q. -I i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1
_i L
i i— i L
~u~ IT
U
~\r~ u
LT
~ir~ u U
u U If
UNAMBIGUOUS STROBING — Combination of
74155 two-line to four-line decoder/demulti-
plexer with any conventional 4-bit binary
counter provides family of strobe pulses stag-
gered in such a way that pulse-edge ambiguity
is impossible. Clock pulses at input serve to
strobe 74155 as well as drive counter. Qa of cou-
ter acts as data input, while Q„ and Qc act as
PULSE STRETCHER — Circuit also serves as an- pulse. Optical Electronics 9053 comparator au- select lines. Action is such that edges of various
alog one-shot memory and as peak sense-and- tomatically resets circuit after timing interval 2Y pulses do not coincide with each other, with
hold with automatic reset. Digital output is unless reset is performed manually. Analog out- edges of 1Y pulses, or with edges of QB, Qc, or
logic 0 until CT and RT have decayed by onetime put can be used as pulse stretcher with known Q0 pulses. Result is hazard-free strobing. — D.
constant, when it goes to logic 1. Pulse duration McLaughlin and C. Fanstini, End Edge Ambi-
and controllable pulse duration. — "Analog
is RCTC. Analog output amplitude is equal to 'One-Shot' — Pulse Stretcher," Optical Electron- guities with Two ICs, EDN Magazine, April 5,
input amplitude, and duration is same as digital 1973, p 88.
ics, Tucson, AZ, Application Tip 10292.
764
+VCC (5 TO 15 V)
MISSING-PULSE DETECTOR— Timing cycle of

555 AS TONE GENERATOR — Connection of 555 555 timer is continuously reset by input pulse
timer as astable MVBR starts next timing cycle loudspeaker. R1 controls frequency of tone. — F. train. Change in input frequency or missing
automatically, generating sequential square- M. Mims, "Integrated Circuit Projects, Vol. 2," pulse allows completion of timing cycle, pro-
wave output pulses in audio-frequency range Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p ducing change in output level. Component val-
with sufficient power to drive miniature 8-ohm 66-70. ues should be chosen so time delay is slightly
longer than normal time between pulses. —
WAVEFORM-EDGE PULSER — Circuit generates

square-wave output pulse for each edge of
square-wave input. EXCLUSIVE-OR gate is used
as programmable inverter that returns point C
to quiescent low state following each transfer
of data through 5474 1C. When used for fre-
quency-doubling, input waveform should be
symmetrical because output is proportional to
propagation delay of flip-flop plus delay of 5486
EXCLUSIVE-OR gate. — D. Giboney, Double-
Edge Pulser Uses Few Parts, EDN Magazine,
Dec. 15, 1972, p 41.
vcc vcc vcc
SUBAUDIO TO 20 MHz — Square-wave signal with switchabie decade dividers for range se- TONE-BURST GENERATOR — One section of
source covers widefrequency range in fully tun- lection and switchabie binary dividers for band 556 dual timer is connected as mono MVBR and
able decade steps, as TTL signal source for ex- selection. Article covers construction and cali- other section as oscillator. Pulse established by
perimentation with counters, microprocessors, bration.— A. G. Evans, Digital Signal Source, 73 mono turns on oscillator, allowing generation
and other logic circuits. Uses tunable 2N2222 Magazine, Dec. 1977, p 150-151. of AFtone burst. — "Signetics Analog Data Man-
transistor oscillator operating at 10-20 MHz, ual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 723-724.
765
+5
AF/RF SQUARE-WAVE — Use of feedback resis-

tor between input and output of each gate pro-
duces oscillation in each Schmitt-trigger oscil-
lator, one operating at audio frequencies and
one operating at radio frequencies. Both AF and
RF can befed into NAND gate to give modulated
RF, or outputs can be used separately as clocks
for microprocessor.— B. Grater and G. Young,
Build a Pulse Generator, Kilobaud ' June 1977,
p 49.
AF SQUARE WAVES — With value shown for Cl,

frequency of output square wave is 530 Hz. For 12
5300 Hz, use 0.001 *iF; for 53 Hz, use 0.1 /nF. Cir-
cuit will drive ordinary crystal earphone or crys- o 14
tal microphone used as earphone. — F. M. Mims,
LM339 13
Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 52-56. IC1
(TOP) 11
10
V+
9-V DC
UJT/LED PULSER — Rise time of output pulse is

about 200 ns and width is about 25 ns when
using 1 /iF for Cl. Reducing value of Cl reduces
(As shown, T s 100 s.)
pulse width. Cl charges through R1 until volt-
EXTENDED-RANGE ASTABLE — Square- wave of A2b stage, equal to R3/R2. Output frequency age across Cl is high enough to bias UJT into
output is extended in frequency by combining thus corresponds to that of 4.7-/uF capacitor. conduction. Cl then discharges through UJT
buffer A 2A with opamp A2B functioning as capac- Negative supply should be equal and opposite and LED and cycle repeats. LED can be any com-
itance multiplier for 555 timer connected as mon type. — F. M. Mims, "Electronic Circuitbook
to positive supply — W. G. Jung, "1C Timer
astable MVBR. Value of 1-/*F timing capacitor Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 5: LED Projects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapo-
Ct is increased in effective value by ratio of gain 1977, pi 18-121. lis, IN, 1976, p 30-32.
0, R„
ASYMMETRICAL PULSE GENERATOR—
Charge and discharge paths of timing capacitor
C, in LM3900 1C connected as astable oscillator
s;=,,'R>=R-
Positive Period = t ,, Negative Period = I,.
t,= 0.7R,. C, are individually controlled by D, and D2. Value
of R,a controls charge rate of C, and period t„
t,S0.7R,sC,
while R10 controls discharge rate and period t2.
Resistors can be pots for providing variable
pulse width and repetition rate. For constant
frequency with variable duty cycle, R, can be
single pot with ends going to D, and D2 and tap
going to output. For values shown, t, is 1 ms
and t2 is 4 ms. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cook-
p 505.
1-MHz SQUARE-WAVE FOR TDR— Fast-rise- VI
time 1-MHz pulse generator serves with wide-

band CRO and T connector for time-domain re-
flectometry (TDR) setup used to pinpoint exact
location of fault in transmission line. Will also
locate multiple faults along line, measure SWR,
and measure characteristic impedance of cable.
With 1-MHz square-wave source having 500-ns
duration for positive portions of wave, cables
up to 150 feet long can be tested. R1 should
equal characteristic impedance of line being
tested. U1 is Signetics N7400A or equivalent
quad NAND/NOR gate. Article gives instruc-
tions for use. — W. Jochem, An Inexpensive
Time-Domain Reflectometer, QST, March 1973,
p 19-21.
PULSE WIDTH ADJ
FREQUENCE
SELECT
,002pF
r? O
.02,, F
.2„F
2.0pF
20,, F
et*s
1 Hz TO 1 MHz ADJUSTABLE-WIDTH— Fre-

quency and pulse width are selected indepen-
dently in decade steps with rotary switches.
Vernier controls provide fine tuning and allow
up to 20% overlap of ranges. Rise and fall times
are 100 ns or better. Both positive and negative
outputs are provided, each adjustable from 0 to
10 V. S, gives choice of continuous or single-
pulse operation, and pushbutton S4 provides
single-pulse outputs. ,tA710 comparator con- for DM8850 retriggerable mono. Article gives gado. Versatile Inexpensive Pulse Generator,
nected as astable MVBR provides trigger inputs circuit details and design equations. — C. Bro- EDNIEEE Magazine, Oct. 1, 1971, p 37-38.
767
*18v .5V
900 kHz TO 10 MHz — Pulse width is variable

from about 50 ns to over 500 ms by adjusting
only two components. Uses VCO portion of Sig-
netics NE562 as pulse generator and 74121
mono MVBR to adjust pulse width. Variable ca-
pacitors C3 and C6 are broadcast-band type.
VCO will operate to 30 MHz, limiting factor
being stray capacitance and minimum of tuning
capacitor. Low-frequency limit of VCO is about
1 Hz, obtained when C3 is 300 //F. — A. Plavcan,
Pulses Galore!, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1978, p 194-
195.
HIGH-SPEED PULSES — TTL circuit provides

dual-polarity microsecond pulses. Pulse ampli-
tude is adjusted by changing zeners D„ D2, or
R3. Design overcomes slew-rate problems as-
sociated with most opamps.— L. Johnson,
Dual-Polarity Pulses from TTL Logic, EDN Mag-
azine, April 20, 1974, p 91. -y d,+ d2 d2
R. > "A
+y D, - D? D,
>
R2
OUTPUT
TO BUFFER
i—o
stable multivibrator. Duration of output pulse

ply. Low duty cycle of clock pulses ensures pos-
T is about 1.4R1C1. Output pulse occurs each itive full-load starting of supply. — J. L. Bohan,
MONO PULSE-SHRINKER — Duty cycle of clock time input clock goes from high to low. Used Clocking Scheme Improves Power Supply
pulse is shortened by two CMOS inverters used with foldback current limiting for short-circuit Short-Circuit Protection, EDN Magazine, March
to form negative-transition triggered mono- protection in clock-driven regulated power sup-
5, 1974, p 49-52.
768
INDEPENDENT ON AND OFF PERIODS— High

input resistance of CA3130 opamp permits use
of high RC ratios in timing circuits, to give pulse
period range of 4 fjts to 1 s with switch-selected
capacitors. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs,"
P 5.
0 I ^.F 0 4 ms TO 100 ms
I /i F 4 ms TO Is
ADJUSTABLE SQUARE WAVES — Q, and Q2

form flip-flop, with UJT Q3 connected as time
delay. When power is applied, one flip-flop tran-
sistor conducts and C1 charges through one pot
and diode. When reaches firing voltage of
UJT, it conducts and resulting output pulse trig-
gers flip-flop. Sequence of events now repeats,
with C, charging through other diode. By proper
selection of C1 and pot values, circuit becomes
square-wave generator with each pot control-
ling duration of one half-cycle. With one pot re-
placed by fixed resistor, circuit becomes pulse
generator with other pot controlling pulse-rep-
etition rate. If equal-value fixed resistors replace
pots and R, is changed to pot, circuit becomes
symmetrical square-wave generator with pot
controlling frequency — I. Math, Math's Notes,
CQ, April 1974, p 64-65 and 91-92.
> OUTPUT
HYSTERESIS-AND-DELAY OSCILLATOR— Sep- with relatively simple pulse-generating circuits. is switched from positive to negative voltage
arate noninteracting frequency and duty-factor Synchronization cannot be lost. Average value symmetrically also. Article covers circuit oper-
controls permit construction of simple teleme- of threshold voltage is maintained constant. ation in detail. — W. H. Swain, True Digital Syn-
try oscillators having inherently linear transfer Adjustment of hysteresis gap width moves chronizer Employs Hysteresis-and-Delay Ele-
function. Absolute synchronization of indepen- threshold voltage limits symmetrically about ment, EDN Magazine, Jan. 1, 1971, p 33-35.
dent and dependent variables is obtainable average value. Resistance portion of RC delay
769
♦vcc
IT SEQUENTIAL PULSES— Any number of sec-

tions of 554 quad monostable timer can be cas-
caded as shown to give sequential series of out-
put pulses of widths determined by values of R
T
and C. No coupling capacitors are required be-
cause timer is edge-triggered. Negative reset
IT pulse simultaneously resets all sections. Vary-

ing control voltage (in range of 4.5-16 V) affects
period of all timer sections simultaneously. — H.
M. Berlin, 1C Timer Review, 73 Magazine, Jan.
1978, p 40-45.
J L
RCA CD2302E/846
AF RECTANGULAR-WAVE — Frequency can be

adjusted over wide AF range, with ON and OFF
times of rectangular output signal indepen-
dently varied between 35 and 60% on by choice
of values for C, (0.05 to 40 /iF), R2 (IK.or 2K), and
R3 (7.3K to 27K). Minimum value of R3 is 6K. — D.
E. Manners, Adjustable Rectangular- Wave Os-
cillator Interfaces with 1C Logic, EDNIEEE Mag-
azine, Sept. 15, 1971, p 46.
PULSE WIDENER — Peak detection diodes CR, is unity. Article describes timing and control cir- monostable used as delay-pulse and dump-
and CR, in feedback loop of unity-gain CA3006 cuits required in conjunction with peak holder pulsetiming generators, and discrete transistor
differential opamp form peak holder that main- to achieve predictable termination times for stage serving as dump-pulse output stage. — B.
tains amplitude of narrow video pulses while stretched pulses. These external circuits include Pearl, Peak Holder Stretches Narrow Video
stretching output pulses as much as 6000 times juA710 used as threshold limiter, 9602 dual Pulses, EDN Magazine, Feb. 5, 1973, p 46-47.
(from 50 ns to as much as 300 g.s). Gain of circuit
11X PULSE STRETCHER — Provides negative

output pulse width equal to positive input pulse
multiplied by 1 + R4IR3, which is 11 for values
shown. Output pulses are TTL- or DTL-compat-
ible. Minimum output pulse width is 70 ns, and
maximum is ’/ii of pulse repetition rate. Circuit
consists of switched current source, switched
current sink, integrating capacitor, and com-
parator. Q1 and Q2 act as switches for current
sources 03 and Q4, while Cl and C2 reduce turn-
on and turnoff times of switches. CR1 and CR2
provide temperature compensation for Q3 and
Q4. AND gate compensates for propagation
delay in NOR gate, to ensure that current sink
is switched on by trailing edge of input pulse.
Add Inverter if output must be same polarity as
input.— F. Tarico, Linear Circuit Multiplies Pulse
Width, EDNiEEE Magazine, Dec. 1, 1971, p 45-
46.
-H
COMPLETING LAST CYCLE— Developed for ap-

plications requiring that gated oscillator must
always complete its timing cycle. Circuit uses
only two NAND gates and two diodes, none of
which are critical as to type. With no input at A,
oscillator output B is low. When A is driven high,
D goes low initially and drives output B high. If
JTJTJTTL
input at A is removed, regenerative feedback is t,» t,* - RC tn 0.5= — (1 06 x 10_6x In 0.5) = 6.93 nsec
applied from B through diode D2 to C until nor-
mal timing cycle is finished. Then, with B low,
urn
D becomes high and keeps output B low. — L. P.
Kahhan, Gated Oscillator Completes Last Cycle,
EDN Magazine, Jan. 5, 1977, p 43.
ages form simple circuit that generates output plies pulses coinciding with both leading and quad two-input EXCLUSIVE-OR gate, and IC2 is
pulse at C as function of either leading or trailing trailing edges of input, independently of logic quad two-input NAND gate — C. F. Reeves, A
edge of input pulse at A, depending on logic level at D. Maximum input frequency is 10 MHz, Programmable Pulse-Edge Selector, EDN Mag-
level at terminal D. Additional output at E sup- and edge pulses are about 35 ns wide. 1C, is azine, April 20, 1973, p 85 and 87.
771
PULSE-WIDTH MONITOR— Circuit turns on

upper pilot lamp when pulse width is less than
predetermined minimum value, because upper
7473 JK flip-flop is clocked when pulse falls to
ground before 74121 mono recovers, triggering
upper SCR on. Similarly, 8601 mono is set to
coincide with specified maximum pulse width;
if pulse falls to ground after this mono recovers,
its JK flip-flop is clocked and lower (greater
than) lamp is turned on. Fault indication is held
until reset button is pushed. — J. Kish, Jr., Three
ICs Monitor Pulse Width, EDN Magazine, March
20, 1973, p 86.
60 Hz WITH 50% DUTY CYCLE— Adding single

resistor R2 to standard oscillator connection of
555 timer permits operation with 50% duty
cycle independently of frequency as determined
by value of C,. For 60-Hz output, Vcc is 10 V, C,
is 1 gf. R, is 10K, and R2 is 75K. — R. Hofheimer,
One Extra Resistor Gives 555 Timer 50% Duty
Cycle, EDN Magazine, March 5, 1974, p 74-75.
GATED PULSE TRAIN — When control is logic 0, gate signal falls. When control is logic 1, circuit input NAND and 9046 quad two-input NAND;
circuit transmits train of complete clock pulses transmits one complete clock pulse after logic other compatible DTL or TTL NAND gates can
to output, beginning with first clock pulse that 1 gate signal rises. To send another single pulse, also be used. — J. V. Sastry, Gated Clock Gen-
starts to rise after application of gate signal and gate signal must be removed and reapplied. erates Pulse Train or Single Pulse, EDNIEEE
ending with last clock pulse that starts before Gates are Fairchild LPDT^L9047 triple three- Magazine, July 1, 1971, p 50.
772
SQUARE-WAVE GENERATOR— Uses two

74122 retriggerable mono MVBRs with clear.
Two single pots may be used in place of dual
25K pot if up and downtimes of output must be
independently adjustable.— B. Voight, The TTL
One Shot, 73 Magazine, Feb. 1977, p 56-58.
120 kHz TO 4 MHz — Square-wave output of

about 3.5 V can be obtained with SN7400 quad
NAND gate, quartz crystal of desired frequency,
and single resistor. One of unused gates may be
used to gate generator output. Insertion of crys-
tal in socket shocks crystal into oscillation at its
resonant frequency, for generating square-
wave output over most of frequency range.
Waveform approaches clipped sine wave near
4 MHz. Output is suitable for triggering SN7490
decade counters reliably, with normal fan-
out.— E. G. Olson, 2 Gates Make Quartz Oscil-
lator, EDN Magazine, May 5, 1973, p 74.
IN-LINE
KILOVOLT PULSES — Simple circuit generates size, and weight. During half of AC cycle, C, formed by D2, D3, ft2, Q-, and L clamps voltage
1.5-kV pulses at fixed rate equal to line fre- charges. During other half, C, discharges across C, at 130 V to ensure constant amplitude
quency. Used to drive small piezoelectric trans- through Q2 into primaries T,, T2, and T3 to proof output pulses. — S. Anderson, Portable Gen-
ducers for sound velocity measurements. Ab- vide output pulse. R3, C2, Ds, D4, and T4 provide erator Produces Kilovolt Pulses, EDN Magazine,
Oct. 20, 1977, p 102.
sence of power transformer minimizes cost. trigger pulse for turning on Q2. Shunt regulator
PULSE GENERATOR CIRCUITS 773
SINGLE-PULSE SELECTOR — Circuit is used to

select any desired single pulse from wavetrain
continuously applied to input terminal. When
enable pulse (not exceeding width of input
pulse) is applied, flip-flop FF, clocks on leading
edge of next input pulse and FF2 clocks on trail-
ing edge. Output pulse thus has same width as
pulses in input wavetrain. Edge-triggering char-
acteristics of D flip-flops prevent operation if
they are enabled during input pulse; in this
case, next input pulse is delivered as output. —
S. J. Cormack, Pulse Catcher Uses Two ICs, EDN
PULSE STRETCHER WITH ISOLATION— Moto-

rola MOCIOOO optoisolator provides safe inter-
facing with digital logic while stretching input
pulse. Circuit uses phototransistor of optoiso-
lator as one of transistors in mono MVBR. With
input pulse width of 3 /<s, output pulse width is
about 1.2 ms. — "Industrial Control Engineering
Bulletin," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1973, EB-4.
SYNCHRONIZATION TO 10 MHz — Free-running

pulse generator circuit uses diode to inhibit op-
eration until sync signal is applied. Circuit then
pu Ises until sync signal returns to original state.
Complementary outputs having pulse widths of
100 ns swing essentially from ground to power
supply voltage that can be anywhere in range
from 0.65 V to 15 V. Values used for R and C de-
termine frequency. For oscillation, R must be in
range of 1 kilohm to 1 megohm. For 5-V supply,
frequency is 1.2/RC. — B. Shaw, Oscillator Pro-
vides Fast, Low Duty-Cycle Pulses, EDN Maga-
zine, March 20, 1975, p 73.
VARIABLE-WIDTH TO 12.85 MHz— Single 1C cir-

cuit uses two monostables to form pulse gen-
erator that covers over eight decades (0.054 Hz
to 12.85 MHz) with only eight capacitors. Simi-
larly, only eight capacitors cover pulse width
range of over eight decades (60 ns to 18 s). Volt-
age control of frequency and pulse width can be
obtained by connecting R2 and R4 to individual
1 .5-4.5 V control voltage lines instead of to Vcc-
Frequency will then vary almost linearly with
control voltage, while pulse width will vary al-
most inversely with control voltage. Capacitor
values range from 1 pF to over 100 /iF. — M. J.
Shah, Wide-Range Pulse Generator Uses Single
1C, EDN Magazine, Jan. 5, 1973, p 107 and 109.
774
MEMORY REFRESHER — Delivers high-energy

pulses in extremely low duty-cycle mode. De-
veloped to provide memory-refresh pulses for
MOS memory system from standby battery.
Circuit is basically programmable UJT oscillator
with divider R2-R3 setting threshold or trigger
level. To complete one cycle and start next, UJT
is turned off by zener. Current through L, drops,
and resulting negative transient at base of Dar-
lington cuts it off. This generates high-power
pulse with very sharp rise and fall times. Charg-
ing sequence then starts again to give sustained
oscillation. Article gives design equations. — J.
P. Stein, PUT Delivers Ultra-Low-Power, High-
Energy Pulses, EDN Magazine, Sept. 1, 1972, p
51-52.
DELAYED PULSE — Both time and duration of

output pulse are programmable by selection of
RC networks. Original and delayed clock pulses
can both be used in gating circuits. With values
shown, output pulse is 1 ms wide and is delayed
15 ix s from trailing edge of clock pulse.— D. T.
Anderson, Operational Amplifier Makes a Sim-
ple Delayed Pulse Generator, EDN Magazine,
July 1, 1972, p 55.
775
0
.
1
—
9 provi preci duty- contr of pulse
9 des se cycle ol
train over wide dynam range by choice of val-
. ic
9 ues for R, and R2. Opamp forms gain eleme of
% nt
astabl MVBR, with pulse and space time inter-
e
vals de by feedb eleme Value
DUte ack nts. s
Trm
Y ined
shown give dutCyY-CcLE — ratio of 0.001 and period
ycle Singl
of 1 s. — J. Graem Pulse Geneeropam Offers Wide
e, ator p ci
Range of Duty Cycles EDNIE M rcui, tS
ept.
, EE agazine
1, 1971, p 42-43.
Ik
0.05jj F
. R,
I 5.6k 180 jjSEC
SHORTENING DUTY CYCLE— Clock-pulse dif-

ferentiator/buffer shortens duty cycle of 500-Hz Saturation of transistors provides some short-circuit protection. — J. L. Bohan, Clocking
clock signal having positive period of 1000 stretching of output and gives output pulse Scheme Improves Power Supply Short-Circuit
Open-collector 7405 inverter acts as buffer. C, width of about 180 ;is. Developed for driving Protection, EDN Magazine, March 5, 1974, p 49-
and R, are primary differentiating components. regulated power supply having clock-controlled 52.
VARIABLE WIDTH AND DELAY— Produces var- shown, output pulse range is 8 to 12 jus, and Blanking-Pulse Generator, EDNIEEE Magazine,
Dec. 1, 1971, p 49.
iable-width blanking pulse at selectable delay delay range is independently adjustable from 26
time after triggering by input pulse. With values to 36 jus with R5. — D. E. Norris, Variable Delay
CHAPTER 72
Receiver Circuits
Individual stages and complete circuits for entertainment, amateur radio,

commercial communication, and other types of AM and FM receivers,
including ultrasonic, radiotelescope, and satellite communication receivers.
See also Amplifier, Antenna, Audio Amplifier, Code, Frequency Modulation, IF
Amplifier, Single-Sideband, Squelch, Television, and Transceiver chapters.
T2
St I 25 REPRESENTS A DUMMY "WINOSHIELD'- TYPE ANTENNA
Coupling
T3 Inductance Total Turns To
Frequency Capacitance Q
Transformer
Symbol
Tap Turns Ratio
130 none
First IF:
Primary 262 kHz 2840 60
130 30:1 critical
Secondary -0 01 7 ^ 1/Q
2840 60
T1
Second 1F 130
2840
Primary 262 kHz 60 31:1 _
130 8.5:1 critical
Uh
2840
Secondary Li 60 8.5:1 ^0.01 7 — 1 /Q
pF
Antenna: l2 195
1 MHz
Primary l3 65
Or
(0,1-130
Adjusted to an impedance resonant 40
Secondary of 75 12 with primary at 1 MHz. Coupling should be as tight as practical
Wire should be wound around end of coil away from tuning core.
7.9 MHz 6 50
Coils 1 MHz 55 50
1.262 MHz 41
AM SUPERHET SUBSYSTEM— RCA CA3123E 12-V supply, making subsystem particularly used only for initial tuning.— "Linear Integrated
provides all active elements needed up to audio suitable for auto radios. IF value is 262 kHz. 1- Circuits and MOS/FET's," RCA Solid State Divi-
volume control. Table gives values of compo- MHz signal generator shown in input circuit is sion, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 361-362.
nents for tuned circuits. Operates from single
776
RECEIVER CIRCUITS 777
MRS 6512 OR
2N502
ATTENUATOR OUT
6-METER PREAMP — Simple transistor circuit

47-, 100-, 100-, and 47-ohm resistors, with 1- requires no tuning, draws less than 50 mW from
RECEIVER-CHECKING VFO— Simple variable- ohm resistors going from each of the three junc- 9-V supply, and increases sensitivity of low-
frequency oscillator is combined with attenua- tions to ground. LC combinations are chosen for priced receiver without complicated impedance
tor network to generate signal of about 1/tV for amateur band desired. Circuit will work down matching. — E. R. Davisson, Simple Six Pre-
checking performance of amateur radio receiver to at least 2 meters. — Is It the Band or My Re- Amp, 73 Magazine, Oct. 1974, p 111-112.
quickly. Attenuator is series arrangement of ceiver?, 73 Magazine, Oct. 1976, p 132-133.
—o
foot antenna wire, circuit gives sufficient vol- ing carrier. When used for CW reception, circuit
ume for driving headphones connected to sec- is left in oscillation and audible difference fre-
ondary of Lafayette AR-104 or equivalent audio quency isproduced in output corresponding to
driver transformer 12, for reception of broad- marks and spaces. T1 is Miller 2004 or equiva-
cast stations when tuned over AM broadcast
lent antenna transformer. — E. M. Noll, "FET
band with C2. Feedback control R2 is backed off
slightly from point of oscillation, for maximum W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 2nd Ed., 1975, p 235-
sensitivity in removing modulation from incom- 237. ceramic
C2 1000 pF miniature ceramic disc CR1
CR1 hot-carrier diode

5082-2810) (Hewlett-Packard
CR2 6.2 volt zener diode (1N4735)

CR3 silicon diode (1N914)
FT 3
FT1- feedthrough capacitors, 470-1000 pF
J1.J2 SMA-type coaxial connectors (see text)
LI 4 turns no. 24 on 0.1” (2.5mm) diam-

eter, spaced wire diameter (approxi-
mately 30 nH)
Q1 Fairchild FMT 4575 low-noise tran-

sistor (see text)
R2 100 ohms, watt (see text)

RFC1 0.47 fJLH miniature rf choke (Nytronics
SWD=0.47)
RFC2 0.2-0.47 /iH miniature rf choke or Ohm-

ite Z-460 (value not critical)
432-MHz LOW-NOISE PREAMP— Uses Fairchild

FMT4575 transistor having 1 ,25-dB noise figure,
equaling performance of best paramps at 432
MHz. Input matching circuit is low-loss low-Q
L matching section L1-CR1. Value of blocking
capacitor Cl is not critical, but should be low-
loss high-Q type. Hot-carrier diode CR1 in
matching section adds about 0.75 pF to circuit,
and serves also as low-loss limiter that protects
from local station if used with efficient 6-inch transistor from excessive RF. Zene, -diode bias-
SINGLE-IC RADIO— National LM3909 JC is con- 40-ohm loudspeaker. Coil is standard AM radio ing permits direct grounding of emitter, is in-
nected as detector-amplifier driving loud- ferrite loopstick having tap 40% of turns from sensitive to transistor current gain, provides
speaker, with extremely low power gain giving one end. Short antenna can be 10-20 feet, and some DC protection to transistor, and requires
continuous operation for 1 month from D cell. no adjustments. — J. H. Reisert, Jr., Ultra Low-
long antenna can be 30-100 feet.— "Linear Ap-
Tuning capability is comparable to that of sim- plications, Vol. 2," National Semiconductor, Noise UHF Preamplifier, Ham Radio, March
ple crystal set. Provides acceptable volume Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-154, p 8-9.
1975, p 8-19.
50-dB ATTENUATION CONTROL— Low-cost

FET in pi network serves as resistive attenuator
providing up to 50-dB attenuation of 30-MHz
level-controlled signal source by varying DC
control voltage over range of 0 to 4 V. Tank cir-
SINGLE-BALANCED MIXER— Uses RCA on frequency used. Unmarked resistors are on cuit across source-drain leads of FET keeps
CA3028A differential amplifier U1 to provide 1C. — D. DeMaw, Understanding Linear ICs, phase shift under 2° over entire attenuation
conversion gain of about 30 dB for signal Inputs QST, Feb. 1977, p 19-23. range. FET type is not critical. — E. E. Baldwin,
up to 1 20 MHz. Values of tuned circuits depend Voltage-Controlled Attenuator Has Minimum
Phase Shift, EDNIEEE Magazine, Nov. 15, 1971,
40823
p 40.
DUAL-GATE MOSFET MIXER— RF and oscilla- circuit and by tuned circuits of IF amplifier. — E.
tor signals are applied to gates G1 and G2 for M. Noll, "FET Principles, Experiments, and Proj-
mixing in MOSFET. Choice of sum or difference ects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 2nd
frequency is determined by values used in tank Ed., 1975, p 141-142. 10-METER PREAMP — Simple preamp can also
be used on 2 meters with appropriate change of
AUDIO FILTER
coils. Needs no neutralization. Developed for
use with receiver capable of receiving satellite
transmissions on 29.45 to 29.55 MHz. Transis-
tors can be MPF 102, MPF 106, or 2N4416. All
coils are 1 .2 pH having 7 turns No. 26 enamel on
3/16-inch slug-tuned form. LI and L3 have tap at
3 turns. — G. L. Tater, CQ OSCAR 7, 73 Maga-
zine, Feb. 1975, p 54-56 and 58-60.
VFO WITH DIRECT-CONVERSION DETECTOR— supply to terminal 4. Load on low-level output

Used in demodulating SSB and CW signals. In- of oscillator has negligible effect on frequency.
coming signal is heterodyned with VFO output Load on high output may change frequency, but SUPERREGENERATIVE — Simple single-tran-
to give direct conversion to audio. Audio filter this can be corrected by retuning oscillator if sistor superregenerative receiver is adequate
R4-C7-C8 allows only AF components to be load Is constant. Values shown are for 80-meter for copying many local signals in 2-meter ama-
transferred to audio amplifier 02. Oscillator can teur band. With components shown, tuning
band. — E. M. Noll, "FET Principles, Experi-
be operated alone for other purposes by remov- ments, and Projects," Howard W. Sams, Indi- range is about 90 to 150 MHz. Transistor can be
ing jumper between output terminals 2 and 3, anapolis, IN, 2nd Ed., 1975, p 165-173. GE-9 or HEP-2. — Circuits, 73 Magazine, Feb.
then applying +24 V to terminal 3 and negative 1974, p 100.
779
RECEIVER CIRCUITS
1 00-200 MHz DIODE RECEIVER— Hybrid tuned-

diode version of basic crystal detector uses line
cavity cut from sheet copper and soldered into
box to give high Q up to 200 MHz. Useful for
checking local oscillators around 135 MHz and
versus noise figure. Two 500-pF feedthrough up. — C. Sondgeroth, Really Soup Up Your 2m transmitters around 147 MHz, along with 2-
capacitors (FT) serve as convenient terminals Receiver, 73 Magazine, Feb. 1976, p 40-42. meter transmitters and transceivers. L2 is 4
turns air-wound '4 inch diameter and '4 inch
long, with LI as 1 turn adjustable around it. C2
is 1 x 2 inch brass plate with 0.005-inch teflon
sheet with nylon bolts. — B. Hoisington, Tuned
Diode VHF Receivers, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1974,
p 81-84.
1-F OUT TO
J3
AMPLIFIER L S
2-12 MHz DIODE RECEIVER — Basic crystal de-

tector circuit can be tuned over 4-MHz range
and can also serve as AM detector for 1 0.7-MHz
IF strip. L2 is 64 turns on '4-inch diameter air-
wound, center-tapped, with 2 turns around it
product demodulator that overcomes intersta- code mode, with permeability tuning of input for LI. Cl is about 365 pF. Unmarked C can be
tion tuning whistles or heterodynes by deriving and RF choke and input of MC1330P together 0.01 gF. — B. Hoisington, Tuned Diode VHF Re-
local oscillator source from incoming signal car- forming output load. Article covers circuit op- ceivers, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1974, p 81-84.
rier. This AM carrier is amplified before modu- eration in detail and gives alignment proce-
lation isstripped off, and used in homodyne sys- dures. Although developed for broadcast band,
tem in which converter output (IF signal) is the basic circuit can be adapted for communication
same as audio signal. Motorola MC1330P 1C, and FM receivers as well. — J. W. Herbert, A
originally developed as color TV video detector, Homodyne Receiver, Wireless World, Sept.
is here connected as synchronous demodulator. 1973, p 416-419.
CX
TWO-TRANSISTOR RECEIVER— Suitable for re-

ception of local AM broadcast stations. LI is
standard ferrite-rod antenna or suitable wind-
40-275 MHz BROADBAND VMOS— Response munication applications. Uses Siliconix VMP-4 ing on 5/16-inch ferrite rod Vk inches long, for
is flat within 1 dB over entire frequency range vertical MOS power transistor. — E. Oxner, Will use with broadcast-band tuning capacitor.
for 12-dB output. Circuit requires no initial ad- VMOS Power T ransistors Replace Bipolars in HF Choose value of CX that gives maximum sen-
justments and cannot be damaged by mis- Systems?, EDN Magazine, June 20, 1977, p 71- sitivity.—Circuits, 73 Magazine, July 1975, p
matched loads. Designed primarily for com- 75. 170.
J.W. MILLER 8902 -B
text)
ceiver suitable for monitoring WWV and other Miller IF module. L is 26 turns No. 26 on ’/«-inch part of JFD LC374 tank circuit
station transmissions or for checking specific form, tapped at 13 turns. Y1 is 9.545 MHz for 10- 10-pF silver-mica with 3N159,
3N159,
8-pF
mica with 3N200
frequencies in HF bands. Receiver is single-con- MHz WWV, and Y2 is 14.545 MHz for 15-MHz Cl silver
version superheterodyne with FET front end, WWV. — Build a Useful HF Receiver, 73 Maga- 15-pF silver-mica with
C2 ver mica with 3N200
crystal-controlled. No bandswitching is re- zine, Dec. 1977, p 216-217. 12-pF sil-
235-pF mica button (see
C3
500-pF mica button
5-mm
LI
C4 JFD LC374 tank circuit (contains Cl)
L2
C5 6 turns no. 22 enamelled on a
(0.2") diameter slug-tuned form, tap at 1

turn
144-MHz PREAMP — High-performance circuit

for 2-meter receiver provides 15-dB gain and
low noise figure. Low-loss low-noise input cir-
cuit uses tapped-capacitor coupling. LI and Cl
are JFD LC374 tank circuit with Cl serving
mainly to support LI and one transistor lead. Cl
also serves for adjusting resonant frequency at
input. Dual-gate MOSFET requires no neutrali-
zation. Power is fed into preamp through RF
PREAMP COVERS 1-50 MHz— Can be used to 20 insulated wire. Transformer is made by wind- output connector. Power feed arrangement
improve performance of old communication re- ing about 10 bifilar turns of about No. 20 wire shown at right can be located inside unit with
ceivers as well as modern equipment. LI is sev- on 0.5-inch toroid core. — E. Pacyna, Wideband which preamp is used. — R. E. Guentzler, A Good
eral ferrite beads over short loop of about No. Preamp, Ham Radio, Oct. 1976, p 60-61. Two-Meter Preamplifier, Ham Radio, June
1974, p 36-38.
Tg IF TOKO RZC IAS42SA
AM MIXER/IF 1C — Single National LM1820 chip dyne AM broadcast radio. Omission of RF stage out can minimize stability problems. Total gain
provides all active stages for oscillator, mixer, reduces cost at some sacrifice in sensitivity and is 88 dB. — "Audio Handbook," National Semi-
IF amplifier, and AGC detector of superhetero- stability, along with more noise, but careful lay- conductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 3-4-3-8.
781
RECEIVER CIRCUITS
+ 9V
CRI CR2 CR3
455-kHz BFO — Simple basic oscillator produces

signal that can be mixed with signals in all-band
radio to give beat frequency for CW or SSB re-
ception. By itself, circuit can be used as low-
power (QRP) phone or CW transmitter or as sig-
nal source for other purposes. — R. L. Price, 990
1C BFO, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1976, p 201.
NOTE- SOURCE <S> IS TIED TO CASE.

43K IIOK DO NOT GROUND THE CASE.
INPUT ATTENUATOR — Low-distortion auto- distortion products of attenuator are about 85

matic input attenuator for modern communi dB down for two 1-V signals. — U. L. Rohde, Op-
cation receiver is activated at input signal levels timum Design for High-Frequency Communi-
above 100 /xV. For range of 1-30 MHz, use PIN cations Receivers, Ham Radio, Oct. 1976, p IQ-
diodes such as HP5082-3081. Intermodulation 25. 29.45-MHz PREAMP — Reduces noise figure of
average communication receiver 2.5 dB and
adds up to 20 dB of gain, as required for recep-
tion of 29.45-MHz satellite beacon signals. Q1 is
RCA 40673 or almost any other dual-gate MOS-
FET, with shield partition across the device. L2
is 10 turns No. 24E spaced on ’A-inch slug-tuned
core, with 2 turns over cold end for LI. L3 is 10
turns No. 24Eclosewound on 'A-inch slug-tuned
core, with 2 turns over cold end for L4. — J. D.
Colson, An Oscar Preamp That Works Wonders,
73 Magazine, July 1975, p 31-32.
C 3
3 pE
160-500 MHz DIODE RECEIVER— Cavity ver-

sion of basic crystal detector was developed for
use chiefly in 220-MHz and 450-MHz amateur
bands. Cl is 25-pF tuning capacitor, and C2 is 1
opamp A1 with signal of local oscillator A3 to can be wide-range audio amplifier capable of x 2 inch brass plate insulated from sheet-cop-
produce AF signal for further amplification by handling 38-42 kHz, driving similar ultrasonic per cavity by 0.005-inch Teflon sheet or mica. LI
A2 which drives headphones. Opamp sections transducer. — C. D. Rakes, "Integrated Circuit is 3-inch length of 1 -inch copper strap. — B. Hois-
are from Motorola MC3401P quad opamp. Projects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, ington. Tuned Diode VHF Receivers, 73 Maga-
Diodes are 1 N914 or equivalent. LI is Miller 6315 zine, Dec. 1974, p 81-84.
1975, p 26-29.
782
<k R7
U Preset (see text)
% frequency
SIMPLE PLL DEMODULATOR— Requires only
single 1C to provide synchronous detection. Per-
formance issatisfactory for most requirements
of most amateur radio experimenters. Gates A,
output
B, and C in 1C form relaxation-type VCO whose
output frequency is determined by C and pos-
itive current sources supplying pins 10 and 13
of 1C. When pin 6 is high, gate D is biased by R2
and R3 to operate as linear amplifier for input
signal. In operation, pin 6 is made alternately
high and low by oscillator output, so D acts as
amplifying phase detector. Output goes
through low-pass filter R„-C2 to VCO, complet-
ing phase-locked loop. Separate filter Rs-C3 pro-
vides AF output. When C, is 22 pF, circuit op-
erates at about 10 MHz. With 270 ohms for R6,
lock is maintained over range of 2 MHz; with 10
kilohms, locking range is 300 kHz. R, is optional,
for fine adjustment of frequency. — R. King,
Phase-Locked Loop Demodulator, Wireless
World, July 1973, p 337.
d.c. control signal r.f. input

>200mV
783
RECEIVER CIRCUITS
SENS
6K
RF METER — Simple square-law detector can tion, and U2 serves as low-impedance reference
detect and measure signals as low as -26 dBm, for 10-mA meter. Diodes can be hot-carrier SYNCHRONOUS AM DETECTOR— Input signal
at microwatt levels. CR1 is biased with about 20 types or 1N914s. — W. Hayward, Defining and is applied to multiplier section of Exar XR-S200
ix A by opamp U1 serving as low-impedance DC Measuring Receiver Dynamic Range, QST, July PLLIC with pins 5 and 7 grounded. Detector gain
source. CR2 provides temperature compensa- 1975, p 15-21 and 43. and demodulated output linearity are then de-
termined by resistor connected between pins
10 and 11, in range of IK to 10K for carrier am-
plitudes of 100 mV P-P or greater. Multiplier out-
put can be low-pass filtered to obtain de-
modulated output. For typical 30% modulated
input with 10-MHz carrier and 1-kHz modula-
tion, output is clean 1-kHz sine wave. — "Phase-
Locked Loop Data Book," Exar Integrated Sys-
oscillator at
twice
carrier frequency
BALANCED MIXER — Uses CA3080 1C transcon- unity mark-space ratio. Divided carrier is used
ductance amplifier as precise low-frequency to switch amplifier on as unity-gain voltage fol-
single balanced mixer with inherent carrier bal- lower. Conversion loss is 4 dB. — R. J. Harris,
ance and accurately defined conversion gain. Single Balanced Mixer, Wireless World, May
Binary divider 1C halves oscillator frequency, 1976, p 79.
giving carrier waveform having highly accurate
COIL TABLE
TURNS WIRE SIZE (AWG)
CD LENGTH
4
OVER L2 PLL AM — Phase-locked loop of Signetics
L5
LB 22, INSULATED
3/16 m. 1-3/8 in.
L2 19 20, BARE, TINNED NE561B is locked to AM signal carrier fre-
L4 19 3/16 in 1-3/8 in.
20, BARE, TINNED
OVER L4 quency, and output of VCO in 1C is used as local
LI 3 22, INSULATED
7 3/16 in. 1/2 in. oscillator signal for product detector. Tuned RF
20, BARE, TINNED
2 22, INSULATED OVER L6 stage will generally be required, along with
L8 29 30, S.C.C., IN MILLER CUP CORE
FROM “IOC" TRANSFORMER good antenna and ground. Simple one-transisr
L9 4 32 D.C.C , OVER LS, IN CUP CORE tor audio amplifier will suffice for driving loud-
L7
speaker. Circuit can be adapted for other fre-
6-METER FRONT END — Developed for use as mits miniaturization.— B. Hoisington, A Real quencies outside of broadcast band, from 1 Hz
converter with any communication receiver Hot Front End for Six, 73 Magazine, Nov. 1974, to 15 MHz, by changing values of CY and C,. — E.
having 1.65-MHz IF. Article covers construction p 88-90 and 92-94. Kanter, PLL 1C Applications for Hams, 73 Mag-
and tune-up. Use of GE microtransistors per- azine, Sept. 1 973, p 47-49.
784
VCO
OUT
PLL DETECTOR — Developed for use with BFO

multiplexer in 455-kHz multimode detection
200-MHz NEUTRALIZED— Provides 18.2-dB *or- — E- Oxner, Will VMOS Power Transistors system using NE561 phase-locked loop 1C. Cir-
gain and —50 dB reverse isolation for commu- Replace Bipolars in HF Systems?, EDN Maga- cuit provides required 90“ phase-shift network
nication applications. Noise figure is low. Uses zine, June 20, 1977, p 71-75. in series with output of BFO multiplexer, to
Siliconix VMP-4 vertical MOS power transis- compensate for lockup of NE561 in quadrature
INPUT LINK IS !/A THE

with signal at input of phase detector during
AM reception. IF input level to NE561 should be
below about 100 mVRMS for minimum distor-
tion. Audio output level will then be at least half
that for narrow-band FM, about same for SSB
and CW, and about double for AM if both side-
bands are passed by IF filters. FM audio output
level is proportional to percent deviation and
cannot be increased by increasing signal level.
Two 0.004-/iF capacitors limit audio bandwidth
to about 4 kHz. VCO output of NE561 is 0.6 V P-
~ g. UWUIWV VUIIIICb' tween 1 and 2 dB, with gain of about 15 dB. Cir- P square wave at AM carrier or BFO fre-
tions uses bridge arrangement for neutralizing cuit is unconditionally stable, and combines op- quency.— J. Regula, BFO Multiplexer for a Mul-
feedback capacitance between timum matching for best noise, lowest input timode Detector, Ham Radio, Oct. 1975, p 52-
gate and drain.
Input impedance is transformed in parallel be- SWR, and high power gain. — U. Rohde, High 55.
tween gate and ground to provide necessary Dynamic Range Two-Meter Converter, Ham
wideband characteristic. Noise figure is be- Radio, July 1977, p 55-57.
18 V
50pt
* 5 - 6 V. lOv.
2200 tl
nected as 20-kHz MVBR provide switching ac-
- *j« 100 pF tion at same rate for RF oscillations generated
C3 ZiZ 100 pF
in crystal feedback path. Received AM signal in-
4- 100 pF duced in tank circuit of C, will modulate exact
carrier. 1C is tuned over broadcast band by
PLL AS AM DEMODULATOR— Single phase- changing frequency of internal VCO with exter- switching point of circuit at rate directly pro-
locked loop 1C provides audio output signal nal variable capacitor C4. By changing capacitor portional to modulation component of received
when connected to suitable antenna for broad- limits, circuit can be used to cover long-wave signal. Choose L,, C,, and crystal for frequency
cast band. Demodulation is achieved without desired. If at 10 MHz, standard WWV time
and shortwave bands.— E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C
use of input tuned circuits because control os- Principles, Experiments, and Projects," Howard broadcasts can be picked up.— I. Math, Math's
cillator ofPLL is locked to frequency of incoming W. Sams, Indianapolis. IN, 1974, p 303-305. Notes, CQ, Sept. 1972, p 36-37.
PREAMP BOOSTS GAIN 20 dB— Two RCA MOS-

INPUT
TUNED
001 FETs in cascode provide extra 20 dB of gain
CIRCUIT
when used ahead of older Radio Shack AX-190
shortwave receiver. Input and output tuned cir-
cuits, gang-tuned, are part of receiver preselec-
tor. Article covers construction and tune-up. —
P. J. Dujmich, Improve the AX-190 Receiver, 73
Magazine, Jan. 1978, p 106-107.
1. 8-2.0 MHz FL1 -5dB

50
C1B "sro:
-12dB
-6dB
ATTENUATORS
.8-2.0 MHz FL2 -5dB j-j-ft)

S.M. -SILVER MICA
6
to roo-kHz
CALIBRATOR
IN MICROFARADS (jiF) ; OTHERS
ARE IN PICOFARADS ( pF OR jijiF)
RESISTANCES ARE IN OHMS',

k -1000, M= I 000 000
Cl — Three-section variable, 100 pF pei L7, Miller

L9 — 9052).
13-pH slug-tuned inductor (J. W. (J. W. Miller 9056).
section. Model used here obtained as
surplus. LI 5 — 1.3- to 3.0-mH, slug-tuned inductor
L8 — 380-pH slug-tuned inductor (J. W (J. W. Miller 9059).
Miller 9057).
J1 - S 0-239.
J2 — Phono jack. L10 — 16 turns No. 30 enam. wire over L11 Q1 , Q2,— Q3
RFC1 - Motorola
2.7-mH miniatureJFET.
choke (J. W.
winding. Miller 70F273AI).
LI, L4 - 38 to 68 pH, Qu of 175 at 1.8
MHz, slug-tuned (J. W. Miller 43A685CBI L1 1 — 45 turns No. 30 enam. wire on RFC2 — 10-mH miniature choke (J. W.
in Miller S-74 shield can). Amidon T-50-2 toroid, 8.5 pH. Miller 70F102AI).
L2, L3 - 95 to 187 pH, Qu of 175 at 1 .8 LI 2 — 42-pH slug-tuned inductor, Qu of 50 SI — Three-pole, two-position phenolic
MHz, slug tuned (J. W. Miller 43A154CBI at 1 .8 MHz. (J. W. Miller 9054). wafer switch.
in S-74 shield can). L13 — 8.7-pH toroidal inductor. 12 turns S2, S3 — Two-pole, double-throw miniature
L5, L6 — 1 45-pH toroid inductor, Qu of No. 26 enam. wire on Amidon FT-37-61
ferrite core.
250 at 1 .8 MHz. U1 toggle.
— Mini-Circuits Labs. SRA-1-1 doubly
15 turns No. 26 enam. wire on Amidon L14 — 120- to 280-pH, slug-tuned inductor balanced diode mixer (2913 Quentin Rd.,
T-50-2 toroid. Brooklyn, NY 11229).
1.8-2 MHz FRONT END — Includes enough ating three-pole tracking filter FL1 when tuning in 1C mixer U1 improves noise performance with-
tenuation for comfortable listening even when band. RF amplifier Q1 compensates for filter out degrading 455-kHz IF. Output goes to IF fil-
nearby high-power amateur station comes on loss by giving maximum of 6-dB gain. Double- ters. Two-part article gives all other circuits of
air. Used with downconverter to cover 80 me- balanced diode-ring mixer U1 handles high sig- receiver. — D. DeMaw, His Eminence — the Re-
ters through 10 meters. Fixed-tuned 1.8-2 MHz nal levels and has good port-to-port signal iso- ceiver, QS7, Part 1 — June 1976, p 27-30 (Part
bandpass filter FL2 eliminates need for repeak- lation. High-pass diplexer network at output of 2— July 1976, p 14-17).
786
RF
GAIN
80-METER TUNER — RF stage uses dual-gate N-

channel enhancement-mode Signetics SD304
operating with positive bias. With 0-6 V applied
to gate 2, AGC range is about 40 dB, but circuit
shown uses manual RF gain control. Extra stage
of IF overcomes insertion loss of 3-kFlz ceramic
ladder filter. SG3402T 1C is used in mixer; re-
move pin 6. Transformers T1, T2, and T3 are
wound on standard %-in IF forms — R. Megirian.
Design Ideasfor Miniature Communications Re-
RF AMPLIFIER
20-dB PREAMP FOR 160 METERS— Provides
HEP-FOCM5
MPF102 OR
badly needed extra gain when using Beverage antenna Q1
or other inefficient low-noise receiving anten-
nas. Gate of common-source JFET is tapped AMr TO
15 < 8-2.0MHz
down on tuned circuit by capacitive divider C3-
C4 to prevent self-oscillation. Mica compression RCVR
trimmer Cl provides match to antenna. LI and J2
L2 are J. W. Miller 43-series slug-tuned coils; LI
has tuning range of 36-57 pH, and L2 has 24- S.M.- SILVER MICA
40 pH range. For 160-meter band, LI and L2 can
be peaked at 1827 kHz to provide maximum
CAPACITANCE ARE IN MICROFARADS ( jjF ) ; v 0
gain in 1825-1830 kHz DX window— D. OTHERS ARE IN PICOFARADS ( pF OR jjjjF ); + 12V
DeMaw, Build This "Quickie" Preamp, QST,
April 1977, p 43-44. 000, M*1 OOO 000.
J2
NOTE:
To 817 speaker
IC1A, B and C are sections of CD4007A 1C.
ALL-CMOS RECEIVER— Uses CD4007A 1C, hav- loudspeaker. Selectivity is provided by single at low end of band.— C. Green, Easy-to-Build
ing complementary pair of opamps and in- tuned circuit and can be improved by optimiz- CMOS Radio Receiver, Modern Electronics,
verter, to provide all circuits for AM broadcast ing value of Cl to adjust antenna loading. Tune Sept. 1978, p 40-41, 46, and 59.
radio capable of driving headphones or 8-ohm with C3, adjusting LI if necessary to get stations
9-MHz CRYSTAL WITH MULTIPLIER— Uses two

sections of RCA CA3028A differential amplifier
as Colpitts oscillator U1C feeding U1B which
can be either amplifier or multiplier depending
on values used for output tuned circuit. U1A is
not used. Unmarked resistors are on 1C. — D.
DeMaw, Understanding Linear ICs, QST, Feb.
1977, p 19-23.
CRYSTAL
OSCILLATOR
TTL DIGITAL MIXER— Uses two of 7400 TTL

gates as crystal oscillator and other two gates
as input buffers to 7474 D flip-flop serving as
mixer. RF input signal must be lower than crys-
tal frequency, and IF signal must be less than
half crystal frequency. With 8-MHz crystal and
6.75-MHz RF signal, IF is 1.25 MHz. Common TTL
7474 can be used up to 25 MHz, 74H74 to 43
MHz, and 74S74 Schottky version to 100 MHz;
Motorola MC12000 is good to 250 MHz. — G. H.
Schrick, Introduction to the Digital Mixer, Ham
Radio, Dec. 1973, p 42-43.
RC ACTIVE FILTER
(700 Hz)
audio amplifier for communication receiver. audio filter should attenuate all frequencies not ohms. Can also be used as test bench audio am-
Two taps for regulated supply provide regu- in 700-Hz passband of filter. Gain is adjustable plifier, intercom, or with code-practice oscilla-
lated 8.5 V at 250 mA for other circuits. With fil- over wide range. Output will drive small loud- tor.— J. Rusgrove, A General-Purpose Audio
ter out, changing input frequency from 300 to speaker of4-1 6 ohms or headphones of 4-2000 Amplifier, QST, Nov. 1976, p 32-34.
788
TWO-IC AM RADIO— National LM1820 1C serves

for RF, oscillator, mixer, and IF stages of AM
superheterodyne radio while LM386 1C is audio
amplifier driving loudspeaker. Double-tuned
circuit at output of mixer provides selectivity.
Total gain from base of input stage to diode de-
tector is 95 dB. CA is 140 pF, CB is 60 pF, L, has
110 and 5 turns for broadcast band, L2 has 98
and 12 turns for oscillator. T, has 140 turns cen-
ter tap and 2 turns, T2 has 142 turns and 7 turns,
, and T3 has 142 turns center tap and 71 turns. IF
3 ” too* value is 455 kHz. L3 has 3 turns on ferrite bead. —
Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 3-4-3-8.
2-METER SINGLE-VMOS — Provides 5-W PEP

output at 146 MHz, with noise figure of only 2.35
dB. Developed for amateur radio applications.
Uses Siliconix VN65AJ transistor. — E. Oxner,
Will VMOS Power Transistors Replace Bipolars
in HF Systems?, EDN Magazine, June 20, 1977,
p 71-75.
nr. 50 onus
DOUBLE-BALANCED MIXER — Uses grounded- SRA3H double-balanced mixer. Third-order in- shown in parentheses are for 0 dBm (224 mV)
gate CP643 preamp having high dynamic range, tercept point is +30 dBm. Oscillator require- at input and zero AGC voltage.— U. L. Rohde.
2N5109 oscillator injection amplifier, and 3N200 ment is -1 to +2 dBm (200 to 280 mV across 50 High Dynamic Range Receiver Input Stages,
IF amplifier in combination with Minilabs ohms). AGC range is greater than 50 dB. Levels Ham Radio, Oct. 1975, p 26-31.
RECEIVER CIRCUITS
789
450-MHz PREAMP — Provides up to 10-dB extra

gain for older tube-type 450-MHz receivers.
Gives significant improvement in receiver sen-
sitivity and quieting. Use of trough-line induc-
rca tors simplifies construction. 1N914 diodes in
PLUG parallel at input jack protect transistor from
burnout by nearby transmitter. LI and L2 are
made from ’A-inch diameter copper tubing, 8.6
cm long. Article covers construction and oper-
ation.— C. Klinert, Easy Preamp for 450 MHz, 73
Magazine, May 1973, p 33 and 36—38.
9-MHz TUNED OUTPUT— Motorola MC1596G

balanced modulator connected as double-bal-
anced mixer has 3-dB bandwidth of 450 kHz at
output. Local oscillator signal LO is injected at
upper input port and modulated signal of about
15 VRMS maximum at lower Input port. Con-
version gain is 13 dB for 30-MHz input and 39-
MHz LO — R. Hejhall, "MC1596 Balanced Mod-
ulator," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-531,
P 7.
DETECTOR LCWPASS FILTER
PRECISION FULL-WAVE DIODE DETECTOR—

Uses opamp to reduce input voltage at which
transfer curve of diode detector becomes non-
linear by factor equal to open-loop gain of
opamp. Chief drawback is that delay for positive
input signals, which are inverted and amplified
2 times, is twice that for composite signals. Be-
cause of delay difference, signals do not sub-
tract inphase and high-frequency performance
suffers. Values shown are for test purposes,
with low-pass active filter having 2-kHz
cutoff. — H. Olson, Diode Detectors, Ham Radio,
Jan. 1976, p 28-34.
I
WWV REGENERATIVE— Tunes from 4.7 to 1 5.5 1.5V
MHz, covering three WWV frequencies, 20- and

40-meter amateur bands, and several foreign
broadcast bands. Draws only 1.5 m A from sin-
gle D cell when using headphones with 2000-
ohm or higher impedance. Performs well with
AM, CW, or SSB. When oscillating, detector pro-
vides own BFO signal. LI is 3.8 /iH, with emitter
tap 1 turn from ground. Use clip for adjusting
antenna tap. Tuning requires two hands. — C.
Hall, Simple Regenerative WWV Receiver, Ham
Radio, April 1 973, p 42-45.
2»F
790 REFERENCE
modern electronic circuits MANUAL
LOW-NOISE RF INPUT — Low-noise version of

transistorized push-pull RF stage uses emitter
feedback through transformer to give ex-
tremely high input and output impedances.
Noise figure is below 2 dB. Developed for use in
high-quality communication receiver. — U. L.
Rohde, Optimum Design for High-Frequency
Communications Receivers, Ham Radio, Oct.
1976, p 10-25.
Note 1 R1 sets the voltage at pins 1 , 2,

3 and 4 to approx 3V
Note 2 Compensation R7C13 not required with speaker impedances 40 ohms or higher
Cl 2 section gang capacitoi, oscillator sectio Note 3 R8 sets the gain, A v, of the power
amplifier
60 pF. antenna section = 130 pF max
T1 Transistof antenna fod
T2: Oscillator coil (ted) Av (V/V)
168 100
T3 455 kHz IF transformer (yellow)
T4 455 kHz IF transformer (white) 0 200
T5: 455 kHz IF transformer (black) Note 4 All resistor values in ohms and all capacitor values in pf unless otherwise
indicated
AM RADIO— National LM1820N 1C provides all is 'It W into 8-ohm loudspeaker when operating AM-Radio System Using LM1820 and LM386,"
sections of superheterodyne broadcast-band from 6-V supply. Total current drain is about 10 National Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA 1975
LB-29.
radio up to second detector, with diode and mA, making battery operation feasible.— E. S.
power opamp forming rest of receiver. Output Papanicolaou and H. H. Mortensen, "Low-Cost
RECEIVER CIRCUITS
791
ALL-BAND PREAMP WITH WHIP— Combination
of two-stage preamp and 47-inch telescoping
antenna gives overall gain of over 30 dB from
160 to 10 meters, for use with communication
and SWL receivers when frequent travel pre-
cludes erection of fixed antennas. Use type F,
BNC, or SO-239 antenna connector. Tuning coil
has 20 taps on 150 turns of No. 28 enamel wire
wound on H-inch dowel, with taps at 3, 7, 12,
18, and 25 turns and then about every 10 or 11
turns. Keep leads of Q1 shorted during handling
and soldering, to avoid damage by static
charges. — K. T. Thurber, Jr„ Build A Vacation
Special, 73 Magazine, Aug. 1977, p 62-63.
14-30 MHz PRESELECTOR— Simple self-pow-

ered preselector using FET improves overall
noise figure of shortwave receiver along with
sensitivity in 14-30 MHz portion of HF band.
Also helps reduce cross-modulation from
strong out-of-band shortwave broadcast sta-
tions. Cl and C2 are 50-500 pF Miller 160B. LI
is 10 turns No. 22 on T50-10 Micrometals core
with 1-turn link. L2 is 10 turns No. 22 with center
tap and 2-turn link on T50-10 core. Q1 is
MPF102, HEP-802, or HEP-F0015. D1 and D2 are
1N4002 or HEP-R0051. — H. Olson, The S38 Is
Not Dead!, 73 Magazine, Nov. 1976, p 88-89.
RF AMPLIFIER DETECTOR TUNED AF

AMPLIFIER
Cl , C2 — 8- to 60-pF mica or ceramic trimmer Whitehouse and Palomar Eng.) Mount LI / turns No. 28 enam. wire on bobbin. Core
(Arco 404 or JFD DV1 1PS60Q suitable). L2 on opposite side of pc board from L3/
kit is Amidon PC-2213-77.
C3 — 0.47-pF Mylar capacitor. L4. L2 = 2.5 pH. R1 — 1000-ohm linear-taper composition
LI — Two-turn link of No. 24 enam. wire L3 — 25 turns No. 24 enam. wire on T50-6
over L2. control, panel-mounted.
toroid core. Tap 10 turns from C2 end. U1 — RCA CA3127E npn transistor-array 1C.
L2 — 25 turns No. 24 enam. wire on T50-6 L3 = 2.5 pH.
powdered-iron toroid core. Tap 4 turns L4 — 6 turns No. 24 enam. wire, center tapped.
up from low-Zend. (See QST ads for Wind over L3.
toroid suppliers, Amidon, G. R. L5 — Pot-core inductor, 1 10 mH. Wind 1 72
20-METER DIRECT-CONVERSION CW/SSB— drain makes receiver ideal for battery operation, energy at 14-14.4 MHz for product detector at
Simple direct-conversion or synchrodyne re- but circuit has no AGC. AF output will drive 1.5-2 VRMS must be furnished by external
ceiver uses RCA CA3127E five-transistor array. headphones adequately for strong 20-meter BFO. — D. DeMaw, Understanding Linear ICs,
Product detector follows 14-MHz RF stage. Low signals, but not loudspeaker. Local-oscillator QST, Jan. 1977, p 11-15.
792
2-METER VMOS ADDITIVE MIXER— Single-

ended circuit for amateur band can deliver 0.5
W of power to IF amplifier while providing con-
version gain of 18 dB and compression level of
10 dBm. Noise figure is 5.2 dB. Traps in both sig-
nal and noise feeds to Siliconix VMP-4 power
transistor prevent radiation of unwanted sig-
nals.— E. Oxner, Will VMOS Power Transistors
Replace Bipolars in HF Systems?, EDN Maga-
zine, June 20, 1977, p 71-75.
40823
PRODUCT DETECTOR — Excellent isolation is

provided by dual-gate MOSFET. Used for de-
modulating SSB or CW signals. Input resonant
circuit is tuned to IF value. High-frequency com-
ponents of signal are filtered out by drain out-
put circuit. RC low-pass filter passes voice fre-
quencies to succeeding audio amplifier. — E.
Noll, MOSFET Circuits, Ham Radio, Feb. 1975,
p 50-57.
793
RECEIVER CIRCUITS
28-30 MHz SATELLITE PREAMP— Low-noise

design provides up to 25-dB gain and typical
noise figure of 1 dB, using dual-gate MOSFET in
cascode circuit. Adjust Cl and C2 for maximum
output. Developed for use at input of commu-
nication receiver. Drain from 12-V power supply
should be 3 to 7 mA; if too low or too high, ad-
just value of R1. — J. Reisert, Jr., Low Noise Fig-
ure 28-30 MHz Preamplifier for Satellite Recep-
Cl LI 25 turns no. 24 (0.5mm) on Amidon tion, Ham Radio, Oct. 1975, p 48-51.
20 pF trimmer (JFD DVJ300 or equiv-
alent ceramic trimmer) T50-10 toroid core
22 turns no. 24 (0.5mm) on
C2 Amidon
50 pF trimmer (JFD DVJ305 or equiv- T50-10 toroid core, tapped 7 turns
alent ceramic trimmer) L2 from cold end
FB R1 150 ohms typical (see text)

Ferrite bead (56-590/65/3B or equiv-
alent) R2 2000 ohms typical (see text)
VHF REGENERATIVE — Covers 2-meter amateur

band, 152-174 MHz public-service channels in-
cluding 162.5-MHz weather service, and num-
ber of other services. Performance is good
enough for use as emergency communication
receiver. Supply should be six D cells in series;
cheaper 9-V transistor radio batteries may have
too much impedance and cause motorboat-
ing.— S. Kelly, A Solid State V.H.F. Regenerative L3 — 1 4t #24e., wound on a 1 meg 1
Ci — 20 mmf split stator tuning capacitor.
Receiver, CQ, March 1970, p 63-64. watt resistor.
C2— 9-35 mmf ceramic trimmer capacitor.
Li —end
It of
#10e., l/4"'diam. coupled to the cold T] — 2K to 10K. Olson T-230 or equiv.
L2.
T2— 250 ohms center tapped to 8 ohms.
L2 — 6t # 1 0e., 1/4" diam. tapped at 3/4 turns.
SIX-TRANSISTOR AM — Typical older Magna- is loopstick antenna. Article tells how to add quency receiver. — H. Olson, Five-Frequency Re-
vox radio uses PNP germanium transistors. L7 FET converter to radio for use as standard-fre- ceiverfor WWV, Ham Radio, July 1976, p 36-38.
794
BALANCED PRODUCT DETECTOR— Uses RCA

CA3028A differential amplifier U1 to provide
conversion gain of about 18 dB for commonly
used IF values. Values of tuned circuits depend
on frequency used. Unmarked resistors are on
1C. — D. DeMaw, Understanding Linear ICs,
QST, Feb. 1977, p 19-23.
9-1 1 m A
144-MHz PREAMP — Low-noise 2-meter preamp

has 18-dB gain and typical noise figure of 1.7 dB.
LI and L2 are each 3'/i turns No. 18 wound 'h in
long on %-in form and tapped 1 turn from cold
end. MOSFET Q1 is MEM554C, 3N159, 3N140, or
3N141. Avoid static charges until MOSFET is
connected. Developed for use with tube-type 2-
meter converter. — E. Noll, Circuits and Tech-
niques, Ham Radio, April 1976, p 40-43.
05
customary three-gang tuning capacitor. Two transformers were stripped and used for coil
3.5-4 MHz WITH TUNING DIODES— Miniatur- Murata SFD-455D ceramic filters provide IF se- forms. T3 is 455-kHz IF with secondary changed
ized communication receiver was developed for lectivity. MFC6030 voltage regulator provides to 1 turn. Remove pins 4, 6, and 8 from Silicon
use as tunable IF fed by external converter for around 7 VDC with regulation required for diode General SG3402T mixer. — R. Megirian, Design
all-band coverage up to 30 MHz. Motorola tuning. Regulator also supplies VFO and BFO. Ideas for Miniature Communications Receivers,
MVAM-1 triple tuning diode serves in place of Standard 3/8-in diameter 455-kHz transistor IF Ham Radio, April 1976, p 18-25.
3 N200
FET MIXER — Double-balanced mixer developed

for use In high-quality high-fidelity communi-
cation receiver has high input impedance
(about 1000 ohms). Two-tone 176-mV signal
produces third-order intermodulation distor-
tion 68 dB down. — U. L. Rohde, Optimum De-
sign for High-Frequency Communications Re-
ceivers, Ham Radio, Oct. 1976, p 10-25.
C6
freq
freq
crystal Cl C2 C3,C4 C5 L1&L2 L3
values turns cores
value value value value AWG (mm) AWG (mm) coil
station (MHz) (MHz)
40
WWV WWVH 2.50 2.955 (pF) 820 220
(pF) 30
(pF) 150
(pF) 66 32 32
(pF) (0.2) (0.2)
WWV WWVH 5.00 5.455 300
120 100 30 150 49
WWV WWVH 10.00 56 680
330 47 30 150 32 (0.2) 32 (0.2)
10.455 (0.2) T37-2
26
WWV WWVH 15.00 15.455 33 330 30 30 30 (0.2)
32 (0.25) T37-2
WWV WWVH 20.00 20.455 30 330 27 10
150 29 32 (0.25) 32
32 T25-2
short (0.2) (0.2)
WWV WWVH 25.00 25.455 24 22 10 32 32
short 37 (0.2) T25-6
820
300 56 (0.2) T25-6
30 T 25-6
CHU 3.33 300 220 30 50 30
3.785 (0.25)
CHU 7.34 7.795 30 150 44 32 (0.25) 32
350 (0.2) (0.2)
CHU 14.67 15.125 33 330 30 30 36 32 32
68 (0.2) T37-2
150 30 T25-6
T37-2
(0.2)
10-MHz FIXED FOR WWV— Fixed-frequency re- cies and tuned-circuit values for all nine fre- 1383; use only T1 (gray core) and T2 (white
ceiver has high sensitivity, portability, low quencies on which frequency calibration data, core). Specify load capacitance as 32 pF when
power consumption, and low cost. Number of propagation forecasts, geophysical alerts, time ordering crystals. Use overtone crystals for 20
parts is minimized by using RCA CA3088 1C for signals, and storm warnings are broadcast by and 25 MHz with C5 replaced by short and C6
converter, IF, detector, audio preamp, AGC, and American and Canadian governments. Core reduced to 10 pF. — A. M. Hudor, Jr., Fixed-Fre-
tuning-meter output, along with RCA CA3020 type numbers are for Amidon Associates cores. quency Receiver for WWV, Ham Radio, Feb.
as audio amplifier. Table gives crystal frequen- IF transformers come as Radio Shack set 273-
1977, p 28-33.
796
DIRECT-CONVERSION PRODUCT DETECTOR—

Antenna is matched to high-impedance gate
input of JFET with resonant input transformer.
Demodulating carrier is applied to same gate.
RC filter and audio transformer in output circuit
of JFET recover demodulating audio while fil-
tering out RF signals and undesired mixing
components.— E. M. Noll, "FET Principles, Ex-
dianapolis, IN, 2nd Ed., 1975, p 155.
PLL IN AM RECEIVER — Phase-locked loops pro- between input and VCO signals. After filtering overall receiver gain is achieved mainly in audio
vide required stability for synchronous detec- and amplifying, this voltage is used to control amplifier. Article traces development and op-
tion to improve reception quality of commercial frequency of VCO to make it synchronize with eration of receiver in detail.— T. Molllnga. Solve
double-sideband AM transmissions. Signal incoming signal. Features include absence of Phase Stability Problem in AM Receivers with
input and output of VCO are multiplied in image responses since IF is 0 Hz, almost com- PLL Techniques, EDN Magazine, Feb. 20, 1975,
phase-sensitive detector or multiplier that pro- plete Immunity to selective fading, and conver-
duces voltage proportional to phase difference sion of RF to audio at very low signal levels so
p 51-56.
BALANCED FOUR-FET MIXER— Uses two dB. Developed for use in high-quality commu- sign for High-Frequency Communications Re-
matched FET pairs to bring third-order inter- nication receiver. — U. L. Rohde, Optimum De- ceivers. Ham Radio, Oct. 1976, p 10-25.
modulation distortion suppression down to 71
output is main audio source, feeding preamp LM380N-8 AF power amplifier is rated at 600- tion. Article gives construction details of com-
using half of dual opamp whose output goes to m W output. Audio from pin 8 of detector is am- plete receiver. — R. Megirian, The Minicom
AF gain control except when CW filter is in use. plified about 30 times in second half of dual Receiver, 73 Magazine, April 1977, p 136-149.
798
RF PREAMP — Boosts sensitivity of older tube-

type communication receiver when added
ahead of first RF tube. Has low noise figure. Val-
ues of Ct, C2, and C3 are varied to suit receiver
being used. Using 0.01 /uF for these gives 20-dB
gain from 0.5 to 30 MHz; if this overloads re-
ceiver on lower frequency ranges, try smaller
values. — I. Math, Math's Notes, CQ, April 1975,
p 37-38 and 62.
L DEPENDS ON
OPERATION FREQUENCY
IZLT TER->r
ouble-balanced U257„r
circurt having 50-ohm FET in ’' L. Rohde. Optimum Design for High-Frequency
input ce.ver. Gives excellent third-order intermodu- Communications Receivers, Ham Radio Oct
impedance, for high-quality communication relation distortion
suppression (68 dB down).— U. 1976, p 10-25.
C3
ICi
13
2 14 1211
3 4
LM1820N
1 10 5 8 9 SPK
iowfX
10 pF
NOTES:
x
2-SECTION GANG 1. R, SETS THE VOLTAGE AT PINS 1. 2, 3 & 4 TO APPROX. 3V
CAPACITOR. OSCILLATOR |
2. COMPENSATION R8C13 NOT REQ'D WITH SPEAKER IMPEDANCES
SECTION
TRANSISTOR= 60 ANTENNA
PF , ANTENNA
ROD SECTION = 130 PF MAX JMATCHED 4 0 OHMS OR HIGHER.
OSCILLATOR COIL (RED) 3. R?SETS THE GAIN, Av, OF THE POWER AMPLIFIER.
455 KHz IF TRANSFORMER (YELLOW)! ARCHER * 168 Av (V/V)
455 KHz IF TRANSFORMER (WHITE) / (RADIO SHACK) 100
455 KHz IF TRANSFORMER (BLACK) 1273 1318 20
R7(Si)
0 200
TWO-CHIP AM RADIO — Current drain of only 10 mixer, two IF stages, and AGC, and LM386N AF Papanicolaou and H. H. Mortensen, Low Cost
mA makes operation from 6-V battery feasible. chip provides power output of 0.25 W into 8- AM Radio Uses Only Two IC's, EDN Magazine,
National LM1820N 1C serves for oscillator/ ohm loudspeaker. D, is diode detector. — E. S. Jan. 20, 1976, p 82 and 84.
799
RECEIVER CIRCUITS
INPUT OUPTUT
2-METER DU AL-VMOS— Provides 10-W PEP

output at 146 MHz for amateur applications.
Noise figure is only 2.35 dB, and two-tone IMD
is —30 dBC. — E. Oxner, Will VMOS Power Tran-
sistors Replace Bipolars in HF Systems?, EDN
Magazine, June 20, 1977, p 71-75.
AUDIO BOOST — LM380 power amplifier oper-

ating on 12 V is well suited for communication
J2
SPEAKER
receiver having only limited audio gain. Circuit 8 OHMS
provides excellent headphone volume and
enough loudspeaker output for small room. If
PHONES
signal at full secondary winding of product de- ji
tector AF coupling transformer in receiver 2000 OHMS
overloads U1, take signal from center tap of
transformer winding that feeds volume control
in amplifier —H. L. Ley, Jr., More Audio for QST
Course Receiver, QST, Oct. 1977, p 45.
LUG UNDER
use in dual-conversion amateur receiver. De- artificial ground for U1 and U2. Low-pass rolloff tween pins 2 and 7 of U2 establishes output gain
tected audio is passed through active low-pass starts at 2500 Hz, with about 20-dB attenuation for U1 and U2 together at about 0.8. — M. A.
filter-opamp arrangement U1-U2 and further of higher audio frequencies. IF heterodyne hiss Chapman, High-Performance 20-Meter Receiver
amplified by 2-W audio amplifier U3. Simple is greatly attenuated and overall S/N ratio of re- with Digital Frequency Readout, Ham Radio,
voltage-divider circuit on pin 3 of U2 establishes ceiver enhanced. Level-set 1-megohm pot be- Oct. 1977, p 48-61.
(1-30) pF
Input from ÂGC~6.0 V |F
Local Oscillator (1 10) pF
(70 MHz)
100
Output
(110) pF (30 MHz)
100-MHz MIXER — With local oscillator fre-
Signal Input
quency of 70 MHz, opamp provides difference
frequency of 30 MHz at high conversion gain.
(100 MHz)
(1-30) pF Isolation between oscillator and signal source
is excellent.— B. Trout, "A High Gain Integrated
0.002 10 nH Circuit RF-IF Amplifier with Wide Range AGC,"
Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1975, AN-513, p 9.
LI = 5 Turns, #16 AWG, 1/4” ID,

5/8” Long
L2 = 16 Turns, #20 AWG Wire on a Toroid

Core, (T44-6 Micro Metal or Equiv)
DOUBLE-BALANCED MIXER— Uses Watkins- U310, CP643, or CP651 can be used in place of ues are in microhenrys. — A. J. Burwasser, Re-
Johnson M6 low-level hot-carrier-diode double- U320 high-transconductance JFET. Pi-network ducing Intermodulation Distortion in High-Fre-
balanced mixer as replacement for FET second output circuit couples 2000-ohm output of JFET quency Receivers, Ham Radio, March 1977, p
mixer in amateur-band dual-conversion re- 26-30.
stage to 2000-ohm IF filter. All inductance val-
LIMITER-DETECTOR — Used in all-band double- put of Q29 is coupled to detector by T3. Al- is then energized and connected to T3. Output
conversion superheterodyne receiver for AM, though detector is actually phase discriminator, of diode detector feeds squelch and audio
narrow-band FM, CW, and SSB operation. Q29 mode switch connects circuit as half-wave rec- stages. Supply is 13.6 V regulated. Article gives
acts as limiter on FM but on AM is 455-kHz am- tifier for AM and CW/SSB. On CW/SSB (SI on 1 ), all circuits of receiver. — D. M. Eisenberg, Build
plifier whose RF output is coupled to 1 N60 AGC AGC rectifier is disconnected and AGC diodes This All-Band VHF Receiver, 73 Magazine, Jan.
rectifier pair connected as voltage doubler that receive bias from manual gain-control pot. BFO
1975, p 105-112.
provides bias for AGC amplifier Q33-Q34. Out-
+ 12 V
AM DEMODULATOR— Signetics ULN2209 1C

provides 55-dB gain for input signal and sym-
metrical limiting above 400 fi\/. Limited carrier
is then applied to MC1496K balanced modula-
tor-demodulator transistor array for demodu-
lation. Output filtering is required to remove
high-frequency sum components of carrierfrom
audio signal. Output amplitude is maximum
when phase difference between signal and car-
rier inputs is 0°. — “Signetics Analog Data Man-
+ 9V
432-MHz PREAMP — Developed as part of 400-

MHz radiotelescope, for low-noise operation.
Gain is 12 dB, and noise figure is below 2 dB.
Circuit is basic common-emitter amplifier with
tuned input and output. Neither neutralization
nor shielding are needed. Supply can be 9-V
transistor radio battery. Current drain is 3 mA.
LI and L2 are each 1 turn No. 16 wire % inch in input
diameter, with L2 center-tapped. — S. A. Maas, L-2
An Inexpensive Low Noise Preamplifier for 432 t
MHz, QST, Jan. 1975, p 21-22. r
2N5I09 7:1
RF INPUT STAGE — Push-pull transistorized RF

stage for communication receiver uses voltage
and current feedback to minimize intermodu-
lation distortion. Transformers serve to stabi-
lize impedance. Circuit is basically constant-cur-
rent device. Second-order intermodulation
distortion products are suppressed almost 40
dB more than with single-transistor stage. To
apply AGC, replace the two 270-ohm resistors
with single PIN-diode shunt regulator. — U. L.
Rohde, Optimum Design for High-Frequency
Communications Receivers, Ham Radio, Oct.
1976, p 10-25.
PUSH-PULL RF — Uses VHF power transistors to

obtain wide dynamic range. Transformers are
trifilar wound on Indiana General F625-9-TC9
toroid cores. Circuit has extremely low VSWR
at both input and output, along with low noise
figure. Second-orderintermodulation products
can be suppressed nearly 40 dB over single
stage. Either RCA 2N5109 or Amperex BFR95
transistors can be used. Gain is about 11 dB.
Current feedback is used through unbypassed
6.8-ohm emitter resistor, voltage feedback
through unbypassed 330-ohm base-to-collector
resistor, and transformer feedback through
third winding on wideband transformer to sta-
bilize input and output impedances. — U. L.
Rohde, High Dynamic Range Receiver Input
Stages, Ham Radio, Oct. 1975, p 26-31.
DIRECT CONVERSION — Simple direct-conver- sired pitch. Not suitable for AM or FM reception. circuit for VFO and buffer amplifier. Separate
sion amateur receiver uses VFO and mixer to Separate input tuned circuits are used for 15- VFO is used for each band (160, 80, 40, 20, and
produce AF signal directly, with no IF amplifier 40 meters and for 80-160 meters. Use ferrite or 15 meters). Construction details are given,
or second detector. For SSB reception, VFO is powdered iron toroid cores for coils, with turns along with advantages and drawbacks of direct
tuned to frequency of suppressed carrier. For determined experimentally. L7 and L8 are 88- conversion. — D. Rollema, Direct-Conversion
CW, VFO is detuned enough to give note of de- mH toroids with series-connected windings. R1 Receiver, Ham Radio, Nov. 1977, p 44-55.
CHAPTER 73
Regulated Power Supply Circuits

Various combinations of line-powered rectifiers and voltage regulators
provide highly regulated fixed and variable positive and negative outputs
ranging from 0 to ±35 V at maximum currents from 24 mA to 24 A. Dual-
output supplies may have tracking. See also Power Supply, Regulator, and
Switching Regulator chapters.
SET CURRENT LIMIT

0-27
120
SET CURRENT LIMIT
0 to ±35 V — Twin stabilized DC supply uses also provide ±12 V lines for 741 opamps. Load of load. — J. L. Linsley Hood, Twin Voltage Sta-
ganged pots R1 and R1a to set both positive and regulation is within 2 mV from no load to full 2- bilized Power Supply, Wire/ess World, Jan.
negative regulated outputs at any desired value A maximum output. Output hum, noise, and rip-
up to 35 V. Input supplies from bridge rectifiers ple are together only 150 /jl\J and independent 1975, p 43-45.
803
500 H- +12 to 16 V
±9 V— Developed for use with demodulator of I. Schwartz. An RTTY Primer, CQ, Feb. 1978, p
teleprinter. Regulation is provided by zeners. — 31-36. 12-16 V FROM 6.3 VAC — Designed for use with
transistor or 1C amplifier being fed by tube-type
-°;r
preamp having 6.3-V power transformer wind-
ing for filament supply.— K. D. James, Balanced
576.
Output Amplifier, Wireless World, Dec. 1975, p
IN4002
1.50
low
..22MF
'50V
100/iF
15 V AT 1 A — Developed for operating CROfrom

ADJUSTABLE SWITCHED REGULATOR— Cir- adjusts amount of added voltage. Divider R,-R2 AC line. Can also be used for recharging batter-
cuit shows method of using LM109, 7805, or provides positive feedback into pedestal circuit ies of portable CRO if pot is set to correct charg-
other 1C voltage regulator to provide output of regulator, to allow switching of 1C and tran- ing voltage for cells being used. Use good heat-
voltage that is higher than rated output of 1C. sistor.— V. R. Krause, Adjustable Voltage- sink with 7812 regulator.— G. E. Friton, Eyes for
Voltage pedestal is developed across R2 and R3 Switching Regulator, Wireless World, May Your Shack, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1976, p 66-69.
for adding to normal regulated output of 1C. R„ 1976, p 80.
X-
14 V AT 250 mA FOR CASSETTE DECK— Used filter capacitors through 20-ohm 10-W resistor, all other circuits of cassette deck and describes
in high-quality stereo cassette deck operating with negative return line connecting directly to operation in detail.— J. L. Linsley Hood, Low-
from AC line or battery. For U.S. applications, filter capacitors instead of chassis, to eliminate Noise, Low-Cost Cassette Deck, Wireless
use 120-V power transformer. Power for cas- noise originating from pulsating current of cas- World, Part 2— June 1976, p 62-66 (Part 1— May
sette motor is taken directly from power-supply sette-drive motor-control circuit. Article gives 1976, p 36-40; Part 3— Aug. 1976, p 55-56).
REGULATED POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS 805
II7VAC
±15 V — Provides positive and negative supply overloads.— I. Math, Math's Notes, CQ, Jan
voltages required by some opamps. Supply is 1974, p 68-69.
short-circuit-proof and protects itself against
lOOOpF
Dl
±6 AND ±15 V — Developed for use with func-

tion generator. Mount regulators on heatsinks
insulated from chassis by mica wafers. Article
covers construction and adjustment to give ex-
actly desired outputs.— H. Olson, Build This
Amazing Function Generator, 73 Magazine,
Aug. 1975, p 121-124.
sistorized regulator provides good voltage reg- power supply and neon fault indicator will come
ulation with low ripple. Second ground prong on. At currents up to 55 mA, -6 V output had
is connected through fuse to grounded center 0.1-V ripple and +15 V output had 0.05-V rip-
conductor of AC line to guard against faulty AC ple.— D. Kochen, Transformerless Power Sup-
wiring. If wiring is reversed, fuse will disable plies, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1971, p 14-17.
TRIAD
F91 X
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
+5 V AT 200 mA OR 7-20 V AT 100 mA— Uses drive common terminal of National LM340-05 heatsink. BR1 is Adva bridge. — H. Olson, Sec-
National LM741 opamp as noninverting fol- three-terminal voltage regulator. Heatsink tab ond-Generation 1C Voltage Regulators, Ham
lower to sample output of voltage divider and of regulator U1 must be connected to floating Radio, March 1977, p 31-37.
12-V LOW-RIPPLE — Three-transistor feedback

circuit gives low-cost voltage stabilizer in which
ripple is low and regulated output is very little
less than unstabilized input voltage. — R. H.
Pearson, Novel 5-Watt Class A Amplifier Uses
Three-Transistor Feedback Circuit, Wireless
World, March 1974, p 18.
1 1 7 VAC IN i2 VAC OUT © 250mA OR GREATER
+5 V WITH UNREGULATED +15 V— Developed

for use with audio decoder that converts BCD
output of digital display to audio tones that can
be recognized by blind radio operator or exper-
imenter.— D. R. Pacholok, Digital to Audio De-
coder, 73 Magazine, Oct. 1977, p 178-180.
POPULAR-VOLTAGES SUPPLY— Provides

most common fixed voltages required for tran-
sistor and 1C projects. Eliminates cost and nui-
sance of replacing batteries. Provides ±15 V at
100 mA, +5 V at 1 A, and choice of +6.0, +8.2,
and + 1 2.0 V at 1 A. Separate grounds (not chas-
sis grounds) permit connecting supplies in se-
ries to get combination voltages. Rectifier
diodes are 100 PIV at 1 A. Use meter and shunt
to give full scale at 1 A; for 150-mA meter, use
0.08 ohm for R1 (six 0.5-ohm resistors in paral-
lel). U1 is LM340K-12, U2 is LM340K-8, U3 is
LM340K-6, U4 is LM340K-5, and U5 is 4195 — C.
J. Appel. A Combination Fixed-Voltage Supply,
QST, Nov. 1977, p 36-37.
807
REGULATED POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
Triad F 90X
2 A OPTIONAL
5 V AT 1 A — Can handle over 30 TTL ICs in fre-

erator for testing SSB equipment. BR, is Moto- Generator, CQ, April 1974, p 48-49. quency counter if LM309K regulator is mounted
directly on aluminum heatsink. Case of regula-
tor is grounded, so mica insulation is not
needed. Provides excellent regulation with
practically no output ripple and is short-circuit-
proof. Circuit also shuts itself off if temperature
gets too high. — P. A. Stark, A Simple 5 V Power
Supply for Digital Experiments, 73 Magazine,
Oct. 1974, p 43-44.
ries resistor across current-limiting resistors R3 voltage but should not exceed 20-V rating. Ad- A. T3 has 117-V primary and 6.3-V secondary at
and RIO, which also serve as meter shunts. DC just R5 and R1 2 as required to get correct output 1 A. — R. Silberstein, An Experimental Fre-
input voltage at terminal 3 of MC1460R regula- voltages. Diodes are 200 PIV at 0.5 A. T1 and T2 quency Standard Using ICs, QST, Sept. 1974, p
14-21 and 167.
tor should be at least 3 V greater than output have 1 17-V primary and 25.2-V secondary at 0.3
12 V FOR TRANSCEIVER — Permits operation of

144-MHz transceiver from AC line at base sta-
tion. If18-V transformer at 3 A is not available,
use 12-V3-A unit and add 26 turns No. 20 teflon-
coated wire to secondary in proper phase.
Choose transformer having enough room for
12 AND 5 V — Used with multiple photographic and audible alarm circuits. — R. G. Wicker, Pho- these extra turns. — W. W. Pinner, Midland 2
development timer to provide 12 V at about 5 tographic Development Timer, Wireless World, Meter Base or Portable, 73 Magazine, Aug.
mA and 5 V at about 300 mA for logic, control. April 1974, p 87-90.
1974, p 61-63.
5/10/15/20 V SWITCH — Reference voltage se-

lected by switch is applied to noninverting input
of opamp having voltage gain of 2, to provide
both positive and negative regulated voltages
at desired value. Any standard opamp, such as
ft A709 or pA741, can be used in place of Na-
tional LM101. — T. D. Towers, Elements of Lin-
ear Microcircuits, Wireless World, July 1971, p
342-346.
TRIAD F40X
±4 V TO ±25 V — Arrangement permits varying

both positive and negative regulated output
voltages simultaneously with single control,
with maximum load current of 400 mA for both
regulators. Positive supply controls negative
slave regulator to provide tracking within 0.05
V at full output. Developed for use in lab to ob-
serve effect of varying supply voltages on cir-
cuits under development.— J. A. Agnew, Dual
Power Supply Delivers Tracking Voltages, EDN
Magazine, Oct. 15, 1970, p 51.
* HEAT SINK
MOUNTED
DUAL 5-V — Provides two 5-V regulated sup- VDC auto battery. Splitting of supply divides pling between sections of load.— J. Pollock, Six
plies for frequency counter, operating either current demand so regulators operate well Digit 50-MHz Frequency Counter, Ham Radio,
from 9-VDC outputs of AC supply or from 12- below maximum ratings and provide decou- Jan. 1976, p 18-22.
Tl 12 6 V \I\NNN RIPPLE 2N490I

12.6 V AT 3 A — Article gives step-by-step pro-
12 6V REG
OUTPUT
cedure for designing simplest possible regu-
01
lated supply to meet specific requirements in
general service. Power transformer rated 12.6
V at 3 A delivers about 18 V P to bridge rectifier
rated 50 V at 5 A. Value of Cl is chosen to keep
voltage to regulator above 15-V limit at which
circuit would drop out of regulation. — C. W. An-
dreasen. Practical P. S. Design, 73 Magazine,
June 1977, p 84-85.
+5 V AND ±6 OR ±12 V — Three power supplies

for experimental use are achieved with only one
transformer. LM309K regulates 5-V supply.
Other two supplies are regulated by 6.2-V ze-
ners in conventional regulator; shorting out one
zener in each with gang switch reduces output
to 6 V. — Design a Circuit Designer!, 73 Maga-
zine, Oct. 1977, p 152-153.
cuit has additional 5-V output. Tr6 requires heat-

sink dissipating 0.6 W, while heatsinks for Tr5
and Tr7 must each dissipate 14 W. Bridge recti-
fier is rated 100 V inverse peak at 2 A. Three-part
article gives all circuits used in synthesizer. — T.
Orr and D. W. Thomas, Electronic Sound Syn-
thesizer, Wireless World, Part 3 — Oct. 1973, p
±15 V FOR SOUND SYNTHESIZER— Provides sound synthesizer developed for generating 485-490 (Part 1— Aug. 1973, p 366-372; Part
highly stabilized voltages required by elaborate wide variety of musical and other sounds. Cir- 2— Sept. 1973, p 429-434).
810
CR2
Dl
m
OUTPUT
I
ADJUST
VOLTAGE
R2
5k
1 .25 TO 37 V AT 1 .5 A — Adjustable positive volt-
age regulator used with simple bridge rectifier overload protection. Load regulation is about
and capacitor-input filter delivers wide range of 0.3%. — H. Berlin, A Simple Adjustable 1C Power
regulated voltages, all with current and thermal Supply, Ham Radio, Jan. 1978, p 95.
rent regulated supply requires no power trans-

former. Output current can be increased by
using better filtering. Second ground prong
is
connected through fuse to grounded center
conductor of AC line to guard against faulty AC
wiring. If wiring is reversed, fuse will disable
power supply and neon fault indicator will come
on. — D. Kochen, Transformerless Power Sup-
plies, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1971, p 14-17.
13.7 V AT 5 A— Output is constant within 0.7 V insulated from heatsink. C2 is essential to pre-
for AC line range of 98 to 128 VAC, and regula- vent oscillation under certain conditions. Use
tion is within tenths of a volt from 0 to 5 A. De- gallium arsenide phosphide LED. Article tells
sign includes short-circuit, overcurrent, and how to determine exact trip point of SCR crow-
overvoltage protection. Uses series-pass bar.—B. Meyer, Low-Cost All-Mode-Protected
transistor to increase current-carrying capabil- Power Supply, Ham Radio, Oct. 1977, p 74-77.
ity of regulator. Transistors are mounted on but
K4) AI4P
IN4007(G.E.)
hEP-ROOS6 CR2
200-volt
to , 50-watt
chassis) zener diode (heatsink
Motorola HEP244 or MJE340 (heatsink

to chassis)
Motorola HEP707 or MJ413 (heatsink

to chassis)
10B)
0-132 volt, 2.25 A (0.3 VA) variable

auto-transformer (Superior Electric
550 volts center-tapped,

110 mA (Triad
not used) or
R112A R12A, filament windings
F90X)
20 volts center-tapped, 100 mA (Triad
<820* x 500* 10 pF
450V
i| OUTPUT
MALLORY VOLTAGE
UF55L ADJ. ✓77
KGAWG TO VARIABLE
/ TRANSFORMER Tl)
50-300 V VARIABLE AT 100 mA— Solid-state ganged to DC voltage-control pot connected to MC1566L floating regulator powered by 25-V
version of regulated high-voltage supply for pin 8 of U1 to keep input-to-output voltage dif- supply having no common connection to
tube circuit has adjustable current-limiting, in- ference nearly constant. Differential voltage ground. Use 600-V rating for 0.33 gf from T3 to
stant turn-on, and long component life. Small across Q1 never exceeds 100 V so power dissi- ground. — H. Olson, Regulated, Variable Solid-
variable autotransformer in primary circuit of pation of Q1 is only 5 W maximum. Regulator State High-Voltage Power Supply, Ham Radio,
high-voltage transformer circuit is designed around Motorola MC1466L or Jan. 1975, p 40-44.
is mechanically
TRIAD
F 94X
-20 V FOR VARACTORS — Precision low-ripple

bias supply for varactor tuning applications can
provide up to 20-mA output current. — M. A.
Chapman, Multiple Band Master Frequency Os-
cillator, Ham Radio, Nov. 1975, p 50-55.
±15 V AT 10 A — Uses two Motorola positive

voltage regulators, each having separate 18-24
VRMS secondary winding on power trans-
former T,. Current-limiting resistor Rsc is in
range of 0.66 to 0.066 ohm. Use copper wire
about 50% longer than calculated length and
shorten step by step until required pass current
is obtained; thus, start with 25 ft of No. 16, 15
ft of No. 18, 10 ft of No. 20, or 6 ft of No. 22 — G.
L. Tater, The MPC1000 — Super Regulator, Ham
Radio, Sept. 1976, p 52-54.
28 V AT 10 A — Developed for 60-W UHF linear

amplifier. Cl and C4 are computer-grade elec-
trolytics. CR1-CR4 are Motorola 1N3209 100-PIV
10-A silicon diodes. U1 is Motorola MPC100 or
equivalent voltage regulator mounted on heat-
sink. T1 is Stancor P-8619 or equivalent 24-V 8-
A transformer. — J. Buscemi, A 60-Watt Solid-
State UHF Linear Amplifier, QST, July 1977, p
42-45.
12 V AT 10 A FOR HOUSE— Power supply is

more than adequate for handling 12-V FM trans-
ceiver and even small amplifier. Series combi-
nation of three 6.3-V 10-A filament transformers
drives 12-A 50-PIV bridge rectifier supplying 18
VDC to National LM305 regulator and pass tran-
sistors. Output voltage is at least 4 V less. Cir-
cuit provides foldback-current limiting for pro-
tection against load shorts. 500-ohm pot varies
output from 11.2 to 14.1 V. Q1 is 2N2905, Q2 is
2N3445, and Q3 is 2N3772. T1-T3 are 6.3 V at 10
A (Essex Stancor P-6464 or equivalent). — C. Car-
roll, That's a Big 12 Volts, QST, Aug. 1976, p 26-
27.
±15 V TRACKING — Uses Motorola dual-polar-

ity regulator to provide balanced positive and
negative voltages, with series-pass transistor
handling major part of output current. Devel-
oped for use with audio signal generator. — H.
Olson, Integrated-Circuit Audio Oscillator, Ham
Radio , Feb. 1973, p 50-54.
±6 V AND ±15 V — Developed for use with

wide-range function generator requiring these
voltages for transistors and ICs. Voltage-setting
15K and 37. 5K resistors are adjusted to give de-
sired output voltages.— H. Olson, The Function
Generator, CQ, July 1975, p 26-28 and 71-72.
TO FILTERS t
- TO LM309K
REGULATOR
- NEGATIVE
TO FILTERS a
REGULATOR
+5, -7, AND -10 V — Developed to meet power RAM requiring negative voltages. Diagram mentarily.— B. Kelley, Random Access Memory
requirements of RTTY message generator hav- shows how to add 12-V storage batteries to pre- RTTY Message Generator, Ham Radio, Jan.
ing TTL and Numitrons requiring +5 V and MOS vent loss of programming if AC power fails mo-
1975, p 8-15.
12 V AT 5 A— Uses National LM340K-12

mounted on external heatsink, with series-pass
transistor 02 boosting current rating to 5 A. Pro-
vides complete protection from load shorts;
output drops suddenly to nearly zero when cur-
rent exceeds 5 A. R2 is several feet of No. 22 en-
amel wound on phenolic form to make 0.3-ohm
60-W resistor. CR1 and CR2 are HEP R0103 or
equivalent. Transformer is rated 18 V at 8 A.—
C. R. Watts, A Crowbar-Proof 12-V Power Sup-
ply, QST, Aug. 1977, p 36-37.
BRIDGE
RECTIFIER
TOGGLE
SPST
si 50 PIV
SWITCH
2 A
J*
ALL CAPACITORS =
ELECTROLYTIC
R I 3 330 .TL ft 3.3 K _TL
RESISTORS PARALLEL
CONNECTED
309 K
BOTTOM VIEW
5 AND 14 V AT 1 A — Regulated dual-voltage TTL, CMOS, and linear 1C projects. Higher-volt- sink.— A. Lorona, Dual Voltage Power Supply,
power supply serves for experimenting with age regulator must be insulated from heat- 73 Magazine, Holiday issue 1976, p 146-147.
60 VAC CT
±5, ±15, AND +30 V — Provides all voltages increments. Highest positive voltage of +30 V stein, "Designing Digitally-Controlled Power
needed for digitally controlled power supply is well above maximum output voltage that can Supplies," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-
703, p 4.
that has voltage range from 0 to 25.5 V in 0.1-V be programmed.— D. Aldridge and N. Wellen-
814
±11.5 V — Developed for experimentation with

1C audio amplifiers, delivering up to 5 W, where
good regulation is required to prevent oscilla-
tion caused by feedback through power supply
to input stage. Q1 and Q2 are inexpensive sili-
con transistors, serving also as low-cost fuses
because they burn out first when power supply
is overloaded. Use heatsinks with silicone
grease for output transistors.— D. J. Kenney, In-
tegrated Circuit Audio Amplifiers, 73 Magazine,
Feb. 1974, p 25-30.
| 800 -L 600
500 /liH I| 100 V T' JT

100 vT
SCR Bridge Rectify i Lj_ 1 >
*T1 = 1 • 1 pulse transformer

Resistors - in ohms, 1/2 W, unless specified
Capacitors — in jiF , 400 V, unless specified.
80 V AT 1.5 A FOR COLOR TV— Holds output SCRs that control amount of output voltage by gate voltage, which in turn determines output
voltage across RL within 2% over line-voltage using variable duty cycle. Regulator uses Regulator
voltage across RL. — R.— J. Valentine, "A Low-
range of 105 to 140 V. Designed for use in 19- MPU131 programmable UJT, which also serves Cost 80 V— 1.5 A Color TV Power Supply," Mo-
inch color TV receiver having 700-V flyback hor- for gating SCRs. IK pot provides control of PUT torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974, AN-725, p 2.
izontal system. Bridge rectifier has two 2N4442
+ 1 3 V AT 1 A — Regulated output voltage can be

varied upward about 0.6 V per diode by placing
silicon diodes between pin 3 and ground. Two
diodes boost output of regulator from 11.9 V to
about 13 V. Insulate regulator from heatsink
with mica washers. CR, and CR2 are 50-PIV 3-A
diodes. Motorola equivalent of regulator is
MC7812. — A. M. Clarke, Simple, Superregu-
lated, 12 Volt Supply, CQ, April 1974, p 61-62.
12 V AT 1 A — Simple supply furnishes up to 1

A with excellent regulation. Bottom of chassis
can be used for heatsink. Connect additional
0.1-fiF capacitor between pin 1 of VR, and
ground. T, is Radio Shack 273-1505 with 12.6-V
CT 1.2-A secondary, and F, is 0.5-A fuse. — A.
Pike, Radio Shack Power Supply, CQ, Sept.
1977, p 66.
TO
SWITCHED
±12 V — Simple circuit provides power required
SIDE OF for two 741 opamps used in CRT tuning indi-
120 VAC
cator circuit for RTTY receiver. — R. R. Parry,
RTTY CRT Tuning Indicator, 7 3 Magazine, Sept.
1977, p 118-120.
12 V AT 10 A — Permits AC operation of 12-V FM

transceiver. Article tells how to rewind 12-V TV
power transformer rated above 120 W with No.
12 enamel to get required 18-V secondary. If
original winding has 2 turns per volt, new sec-
ondary will need 36 turns. Q1 is HEP233,
HEP237, or similar transistor rated 10 A or
higher, with heatsink. U1 is25-A 100-PIV bridge
rectifier, and U2 is National LM340K-12 regula-
tor. CR1 can be any rectifier rated at least 3 A at
35 V. — L. McCoy, The Ugly Duckling, QST, Nov.
1976, p 29-31.
5 V AT 1 A — Simple lab supply provides voltage

required for digital ICs. Rectifier is 6-A 50-PIV
bridge. Power transformer has 12.6-V second-
ary rated 1 A, such as filament transformer. — G.
McClellan, Give That Professional Look to Your
Home Brew Equipment, 73 Magazine, Feb.
1977, p 28-31.
12 V FOR TRANSCEIVER — Output voltage var-

ies only 0.2 V between transmit and receive.
Transistor can be mounted directly on side of
metal minibox for heatsinking. Transformer
secondary is 24 V at 5 A — Circuits, 73 Maga-
zine, March 1977, p 152.
+ 12 V AT 50 mA — Provides 0.1% regulation as rent reaches about 200 mA, Q1 turns on and
required for PLL RTTY tuning unit and other crit- limits regulator output. U1 can be Motorola rence, Precision Voltage Supply for Phase-
ical applications. Rsc and Q1 provide short-cir- MC1469G or HEP C6049G, and Q1 is any gen- Locked Terminal Unit, Ham Radio, July 1974, p
60-61.
cuit protection for regulator. When output cur- eral-purpose NPN silicon transistor. — E. Law-
1/2 A FUSE (OPTIONAL)
15 V AT 600 mA — Developed for 2-meter FM

transceiver used as repeater. Output voltage is
well filtered. Regulator allows voltage to drop
only 0.1 V when repeater goes from standby to
transmit. Use heatsink on 2N3055 series-regu-
lator transistor. — H. Cone, The Minirepeater, 73
Magazine, June 1975, p 55-57, 60-62, and 64-
65.
IN472I . IN4999 ETC
12.6 V AT 3 A — Will handle typical 15-W 2-m

transceiver. Short-circuit protection is provided
by 82-ohm resistor. Adjust value of resistor
marked 2.4K to give desired output voltage.
Transformer secondary is nominally 35 V cen-
ter-tapped at 1.5 A. Output capacitor can be tan-
talum-slug electrolytic with any value above 10
ftp- — H. H. Cross, The Chintzy 12, 7 3 Magazine,
Feb. 1977, p 40-41.
12 V AT 150 mA— Designed for use with audio regulation, and good temperature stability are regulated input can be up to 36 V. — M. L. Old-
preamps, FM tuners, and stereo decoders for important. Uses 5.6-V reference zener that is fed field. Regulated Power Supplies, Wireless
which minimum ripple, minimum noise, good from output but is inside feedback loop. Un- World, Nov. 1972, p 520-521.
5 V AT 2 A — Developed as supply for receiver

frequency counter having LED display. FET hav-
ing Idss of about 7.5 mA serves in place of 1200-
ohm resistor as current regulator. Power trans-
former isTriad F-26X with secondary rated 12.6
V center-tapped at 2.5 A.— H. H. Cross, The
Chintzy 12, 73 Magazine, Feb. 1977, p 40-41.
0-15 V BENCH SUPPLY— Provides up to 175 by 5.6-ohm (5R6) resistor and D,; when resistor duced.— J. A. Roberts, Bench Power Supply,
Wireless World, May 1973, p 253.
mA with ripple less than 1 mV. Choose Tr2 to drop exceeds about 1.2 V, current source Tr,
handle load current. Current limiting is provided produces less current and output voltage is re-
UNREG
,+ 18 V
5 V AND ±12 V — Also provides 18 V unregu-

lated for use with code regenerator driving au-
tomatic Morse-code printer. BR1 is Motorola
MDA920-3 or HEP-R0802 bridge. LED is HP5082-
4882 or HEP-P2000. U6 is LM341-5, MC7805, or
HEP-C6110P. U7 is LM326H with T05 finned
clip-on heatsink. — H. Olson, CW Regenerator/
Processor, 73 Magazine, July 1976, p 80-82.
13 V AT 2 A WITH NPN TRANSISTORS— Q1 is

reference voltage source and Q2 is series-pass
regulator for basic supply suitable for running
mobile FM transceiver or other 12-V portable
equipment in home. Transformer secondary is
16-19 V, or can be 6-V and 12-V filament trans-
formers in series. R1 protects rectifier diodes
from surge current generated when supply is
turned on. Article tells how to adapt circuit for
other output voltages. — R. B. Joerger, Power
Supply, 73 Magazine, Holiday issue 1976, p 40-
41.
12-15 V AT 500 W — Developed to permit op- begins dropping as load exceeds 35 A. When above 16 V, turning on SCR2 and activating
eration of high-power mobile solid-state ama- voltage drops below 8 V, Q1 turns off and SCR1 relay K1 to cut off main DC supply. Article gives
teur transmitter in home. Current sensing is turns on, cutting output power. Power supply construction details. T1 has 22-V secondary. —
done with 15-milliohm resistor R16. Short-cir- must be turned off to unlatch SCR1. For over- C. C. Lo, 500-Watt Regulated Power Supply,
cuit cutoff is provided by regulator along with voltage shutdown, CR2 starts conducting Ham Radio, Dec. 1977, p 30-32.
current limiting through R16. Output voltage
5 V AT 3 A — National LM5000 voltage regulator

having built-in overload protection is basis of
small bench supply for TTL work. Filament
transformer rated 12.6 V at 3 A feeds full-wave
bridge rectifier rated 200 PIV at 6 A, such as
Radio Shack 276-1172. U1 requires heatsink in-
sulated from chassis. Output filter C3 should be
mounted directly on regulator terminals to min-
imize circuit oscillation. Output should read
within 100 mV of 5 V. Radio Shack 276-047 LED
serves as output indicator. Use 0.22-/nF bypass
between pins 2 and 3 of U1. — K. Powell, The 5
x 3 Power Supply, QST, May 1977, p 25-26.
13 V AT 2 A WITH PNP TRANSISTORS— Refer-

ence voltage source Q1 is 2N301, while series-
pass regulator Q2 is 2N1 523. D5 is 1 N5245 1 5-V
zener. Secondary of T1 is 16-19 V, or can be 6-
V and 12-V filament transformers in series. Ar-
ticle tells how to adapt circuit for other output
voltages. — R. B. Joerger, Power Supply, 73
Magazine, Holiday issue 1976, p 40-41.
MAIN
POWER
II5VAC SWITCH
T I STANCOR P-8617
2 SECONDARIES, 24 VAC @ IA
WIRED IN PHASE
T2 3
IN4002
H4 X,52
34V
f° I«7K
SECONDARY
IN 4002
— W—
— 14- 19V SECONDARY

_I_2I000?| 2K IN
50 PIV ,
T2 STANCOR PCA-4
34 VAC, CENTER
I0A /TJ
TAPPED ©
_£^v
.35A 300
19 VAC, CENTER TAPPED © 2.5A k(5.6V):
-
<330X1 1
J
-n4734
8V
ADJ.
m
,01
► 820X1 ,100X1
+5 V AT 4 A, -12 V AT 0.25 A, AND +24 V AT CURRENT
2 A — Provides regulated voltages needed for

LIMITER /T7
Sykes 7158 floppy disk and its interface con- justable current limiting and overvoltage pro- P. Hughes, Interfacing the Sykes OEM Floppy
troller, used in Southwest Technical Products tection on 5-V supply. Output voltage adjust- Disk Kit to a Personal Computer, BYTE, March
MP-68 computer system. Circuit provides ad- ments are provided for 5-V and 24-V supplies. —
1978, p 178-185.
FOR I2VDC OPERATION BREAK
13.6 V AT 1 A — Used in all-band double-conver-

sion superheterodyne receiver for AM, narrow-
band FM, CW, and SSB operation. Simple trans-
former-rectifier-filter circuit is followed by
zener-referenced Darlington pair. When trans-
mitter of amateur station is on air, muting is
accomplished by grounding base of Q44
through 2.7K resistor, which turns off Q45 and
kills A + to audio amplifier. — D. M. Eisenberg,
Build This All-Band VHF Receiver, 73 Magazine,
Jan. 1975, p 105-112.
BL/WH GREEN +f
X
CR1
500^ F
25V
x '3
12V
LM340K
— 4.7mF
X
C7
FULL WAVE
C9
X
BRIDGE
VARO
1 VE27
X
-20V
CR3
r N
4.7mF
CIO
BL/RED RED
-5V
L l
X
-12V
C8 I
500m F
, CR4
LM320K
X
4.7mF
C11
±5 V AND ±12 V — Four different National volt- 3
X
age regulators provide voltages required for LM320H
-► -5V
wide-range function generator. Power trans- 4.7mF
C12
T
former is Triad F90X. — R. C. Dobkin, "Wide
Range Function Generator," National Semicon-
ductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1974, AN-115.
|GN
D
GN
|
jGt.
0-20 V AT 1 A — Variable-output regulated sup- ulator as pass element, LM101A opamp as error continuous operation. — C. T. Nelson, Power
ply for lab use maintains output voltage within amplifier, and LM1 13 zener as reference. Circuit Distribution and Regulation Can Be Simple,
2 mV of desired value for outputs up to 1 A. Ar- provides complete protection against load Cheap and Rugged, EDN Magazine , Feb. 20,
rangement uses National LM120 negative reg- shorts. LM120 requires adequate heatsink for
1973, p 52-58.
s,
6-30 V AT 500 mA — Zener used for CR, should

be rated 1 V less than desired minimum voltage,
at 300 mW. R, improves regulation at low cur-
rent levels. Current-limiting value is about 1 A.
Diodes are 50-PIV 1-A silicon. I, is 117-V neon
lamp. Q, is any 15-W NPN power transistor. Q2
is 2N697 or equivalent. T, is power transformer
with 24-V secondary at 0.5 A. — J. Huffman, The
Li'l Zapper — a Versatile Low Voltage Supply,
CQ, Nov. 1977, p 44.
UNIVERSAL SUPPLY — Provides three different

fixed voltages and two variable, each regulated
and each current-limited at 1.5 A for use on ex-
perimenter's bench. Use heatsinks for fixed
voltage regulators and for output transistors. —
N. Calvin, Universal Power Supply, 73 Maga-
zine, Aug. 1974, p 65-66.
100-mA TRACKING — Circuit uses +15 V from transistor. Arrangement requires only one cen- tifier section.— H. Olson, Simple ±15V Regu-
A7815 positive fixed-output regulator as exter-tapped transformer winding yet gives re- March lated
20,Supply Provides
1973, p 87. Tracking, EDN Magazine,
ternal reference for LM304 negative regulator quired tracking of voltages. Output can be
operating with outboard current-carrying PNP boosted to 200 mA by using larger bridge rec-
Ul
12 V AT 2.8 A — Simple supply was developed

for use with 2-meter FM transceiver when op-
erating in home. Power transistors are Radio
Shack 276-592 rated 40 W. T1 is 12.6 V at 3 A,
and Ul is 276-1171 rated 100 V at 6 A. Article
covers construction.— M. L. Lovell, 12 Inexpen-
sive Volts for Your Base Station, 73 Magazine,
Sept. 1976, p 60-62.
TO
TO
+25V SUPPLY
+39V SUPPLY
”.1
0-20 V CURRENT-LIMITING— Novel full-wave Initially, R2 is adjusted for minimum output volt- cuit current. Raw DC supply provides separate
voltage doubler formed by diode bridge and C,- age when R1 is maximum counterclockwise, to 25 V for pass transistors. — L. Drake, Variable
C2-C3 provides 39 V required by /uA723 regulator balance bridge RtR2-R3-R4 when output voltage Voltage Power Supply Uses Minimum Compo-
whose output is continuously variable with R,. is zero. Value used for Rsc determines short-cir- nents, EDN Magazine, Aug. 5, 1974, p 80 and 82.
- C2
TFJ rr REGULATED
6 VOLTAGE
OUTPUT
"
f.
if
,
CAPACITANCE ARE IN MICROFARADS ( jjF ) ;
OTHERS ARE IN PICOFARADS I pF OR jijiF);
* * • BE SURE SECONDARY k* I 000, M * 1 000 000.
WINDINGS ARE PROPERLY
PHASED
tifier. Ripple voltage on output is less than 30

12 V AT 2 A— Will operate 10-W 220-MHz port- age is adjustable from 9 to 13 V. DC voltage at mV P-P. — E. Kalin, A No-Junkbox Regulated
able FM transceiver from AC line. Output volt- point A is about 30 V. U 1 is 50-V 1 0-A bridge rec- Power Supply, QST, Jan. 1975, p 30-33.
12 V AT 5 A — Uses MJ3000 Darlington power

device as pass element providing gain of 1000
at 5 A. Output is set to current-limit at 6.5 A.
Fuse at X is desirable. Values: R1 is 1.8K; R2 is
2.5K trimpot; R3 is 2.7K; R4 is 1.5K; R5 is 0.1
ohm at 5 W; C1-C5 are 4000 *<F each at 20 V; C6
is 250 g F at 25 V; C7-C8 are 1.2 gf at 35 V; C9
is 220 pF; D1-D2 are MR1 120 or equivalent rated
6 A; D3-D4 are 1N4607 or equivalent; D5 is
1N4002 or equivalent; andTI is 24-28 VCT sec-
ondary at 4 A. Article gives design procedure for
increasing regulated output to as much as 100
A. — C. Anderton, A Hefty 12 Volt Supply, 73
Magazine, May 1975, p 85-87.
5 V FROM AC OR DC — Developed for use with

secondary frequency standard to permit check-
ing frequency of amateur radio transmitter at
station or in field. Any battery capable of deliv-
ering 250 mA at 9-15 V is suitable. — T. Shank-
land, Build a Super Standard, 73 Magazine, Oct.
1976, p 66-69.
+ 13.8 VDC AT 18 A — Developed for use with supply and protect transceiver. Parts values with 100 PIV at 18 A, D5-D6 1N4607 or equiva-
amateur radio transceiver. Transformer second- are: R5 1.8K, R6 2.5K, R7 2.7K, R8 1.5K, R9 IK, lent, and D7 1N4002 or equivalent. — T. Law-
ary is rated 25 VAC at 12 A. When output voltage C4 250 gf, C5-C6 1.2 gF, C7 220 pF, C8 100 gF, rence, Build a Brute Power Supply, 73 Maga-
exceeds 15 VDC, zener D8 (1N965A or equiva- C9-C11 0.01 gF, D1-D4 1N3492 or equivalent zine, Aug. 1977, p 78-79.
lent) conducts and fires 2N4441 SCR to crowbar
REGULATED POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
825
±5 AND ±12 V FOR COMPUTER— Provides all windings giving required voltage and current. should be mounted on large heatsink at rear of
voltages required for 8080-4BD microcomputer Crowbar circuit using 2N688 SCR protects ICs computer housing in open air. — L. I. Hutton, A
system marketed by The Digital Group (Denver, in memory and CPU. Use of at least 50,000 /*F Ham's Computer, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1976, p 78-
CO). Transformer for positive supplies is 6.3-V in filter of 5-V supply prevents noise problems 79 and 82-83.
20-A unit with secondary replaced by two new in computer. MPC-1000 5-V 10-A regulator
R2 R3
8 5K I8K
5 V AT 20 A AND 0-25 V AT 0-24 A— Developed providing output proportional to parameters ticle gives construction details. — J. W. Craw-
as lab supply for experimenting with high-cur- called for by front-panel controls of supply. D2 ford, The Smart Power Supply, 73 Magazine,
rent TTL circuits. Motorola MC1466 monitors and D8 are 50-PIV 20-A diodes, and all other
March 1976, p 96-98 and 100-101.
voltage and current requirements continuously. diodes except D3 are 1N4002 or equivalent. Ar-
FILAMENT XFORMER
5 V WITH DOUBLER — Doubling permits use of

inexpensive 6.3-V filament transformer without
risking loss of regulation when line voltage
drops below about 105 V. With values shown,
output varied only 6 mV for line voltage range
of 95 to 135 V. Doubler circuit consists of C2, C3/
Di, D3, D5, and D6. — A. Paterson, Voltage Doub-

ler Prevents Supply from Losing Regulation,
EDN Magazine, Nov. 1, 1972, p 46.
COMPONENT VALUES
1N4001
D1 THRU D4
1N914
8000ai F, 15V
50p F, 25 V
250*t F, 25V
100*/F, 10V
MJE 521 (HEATSINK)
2N3392
CONSTANT CURRENT DIODE, (e.g. 2N5033, 2-3 mA)

REF. DIODE, 4.3 V @ 2-3 mA (e.g. LVA43A)
12-14 V AT 3 A — Basic circuit for operating mo-

bile equipment off AC line uses 1C voltage reg-
ulator in conjunction with series-pass transis-
tor.— Circuits, 73 Magazine, Holiday issue 1976,
p 170.
CHAPTER 74
Regulator Circuits
Used at outputs of unregulated power supplies to provide highly regulated
fixed and variable positive and negative output voltages ranging from 0 to
±65 V for solid-state applications and up to 1000 V at 100 W for other
purposes. Maximum current ratings range from 5 mA to 20 A. Some
regulators have overvoltage crowbar or foldback current limiting. Dual-output
regulators may have tracking. Current regulators are included. See also
Regulated Power Supply and Switching Regulator chapters.
+
-30 V TO -7 V — Circuit uses Signetics
îA79M05 adjustable voltage regulator in com- cuit protection. Input voltage should be at least
bination with 741 opamp to give wide negative 3 V more negative than maximum output volt-
output voltage range. Regulator includes ther- age desired. — "Signetics Analog Data Manual," Input
mal overload protection and internal short-cir- Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 670.
0.
Vour +5V ^ Vqut
5-V FET REGULATOR — Output voltage changes

less than 0.1 V for load current change from 0
to 60 mA. Output voltage changes caused by
change in load resistance affect gate-source
voltage of FET Tr, via R, and R2, causing com-
pensating change in drain current. Additional
5 AND 15 V SINGLE CONTROL— Single poten- gives design equation and covers other possible transistors serve to reduce output resistance
tiometer serves for adjusting two regulators si- sources of error. — R. C. Dobkin, One Adjust- and increase output current without affecting
multaneously. Accuracy depends on output ment Controls Many Regulators, EDN Maga- stabilization ratio of about 1000. — C. R. Masson,
voltage differences of regulators; error de- zine, Nov. 1, 1970, p 33-35. F.E.T. Voltage Regulator, Wireless World, Aug.
creases when output voltages are closer. Article 1971, p 386.
827
-MOV +5V
+ 1 5 V WITH DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER— Series zener provides coarse regulated voltage to dif-
regulator uses differential amplifier as control ferential pair. — H. Olson, Power-Supply Servic-
circuit in which one side is referenced to zener ing, Ham Radio, Nov. 1976, p 44-50.
and other to fraction of output voltage. Second REGULATED DIVIDER FOR ±5 V— Used at out-
put of adjustable regulated power supply pro-
viding up to 15 V, to give lower positive and
negative voltages that remain steady despite
changes in load current. To get +5 V and -5 V
from +10 V, set R, at midposition and adjust R2
for 20 mA through output transistors. Uses 741
opamp. — C. H. Banthorpe, Voltage Divider,
DUAL -5.2 V AND +15 V — Output voltages are mA. D and D3 protect against polarity reversal
equal to preset values of regulator ICs in basic of output during overloads. — C. T. Nelson,
arrangement shown. R, and D, ensure startup Power Distribution and Regulation Can Be Sim-
of LM109 when common load exists across sup- ple, Cheap and Rugged, EDN Magazine, Feb. 20,
plies. D, should be germanium or Schottky hav- 1973, p 52-58.
ing forward voltage drop of 0.4 V or less at 50
+50 V FLOATING — RCA CA723 regulator oper-

ating from 85-V supply delivers 50 V with line
regulation of 1 5 mV for 20-V supply change and
load regulation of 20 mV for 50-mA load current
change. — "Linear Integrated Circuits and MOSZ
NJ, 1977, p 61.
2N6I24
Ql
5-30 V AT 1.5 A — External series-pass transis-

tor boosts 500-mA rated output of 78MG or
79MG regulator to 1.5 A for use as adjustable
5 V AT 5 A WITH 1C SWITCHER— Uses Silicon ence, oscillator, comparator, error amplifier, power supply in lab. Circuit has no short-circuit
General SG1524 1C as pulse-width-modulated current limiter, pulse-steering flip-flop, and au- protection for safe-area limiting for external
regulator for which operating frequency re- tomatic shutdown for overload. — P. Franson, pass transistor, but article shows how to add
mains constant, with ON time of each pulse ad- Today's Monolithic Switching Circuits Greatly protective transistor for this purpose. — J. Tru-
justed to maintain desired output voltage. Op- Simplify Power-Supply Designs, EDN Maga- love, A New Breed of Voltage Regulators, 73
erating range extends above 1 00 kHz but device zine, March 20, 1977, p 47-48, 51, and 53. Magazine, March 1977, p 62-64.
829
REGULATOR CIRCUITS
LM 109 -VW+
5 V FROM 48 V — Combination of zener and re- optional capacitor, circuit noise is only 700 /iV
sistor R gives equivalent of power zener as so- P-P. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," National
lution to regulator protection problem when Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-103,
input voltage is much higher than rated maxi-
mum of regulator. Maximum load is 1 A. With
p 10.
+y,„ (+2o v)
PARALLELING REGULATORS— Current-shar-

ing problem is overcome without sacrificing rip-
ple rejection or load regulation, by using bot-
tom regulator as control device that supplies
most of load current until current through this
regulator reaches about 1.3 A. At this point Q,
turns on and raises output voltage of other reg-
ulators to supply additional load current de-
mands. Circuit shown will supply up to 6 A for
minimum input voltage of 8 V. For optimum
regulation, minimum load current should be 1
12-V SHUNT AT 5 mA — Low-power shunt reg- Output impedance is 0.01 ohm at 100 Hz, giving A. — C. T. Nelson, Power Distribution and Reg-
ulator uses opamp to absorb excess load cur- 120-Hz ripple-frequency filtering comparable to ulation Can Be Simple, Cheap and Rugged, EDN
rent. Value of R, is chosen to step up reference that of 100,000-/aF capacitor. — W. G. Jung, "1C Magazine, Feb. 20, 1973, p 52-58.
voltage of 5.6-V zener to +12 V at 5 mA. Design Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indi-
procedure for other output voltages is given. anapolis, IN, 1974, p 166-168.
12 V AT 20 A — Regulator conducts and regu-

lates until current demand is such that IR drop
across Rs is sufficient to overcome base-emitter
junction potential of switch transistor Qs, which
is two 2N174 germanium transistors in parallel.
Use 2 ohms for Rs. Qs is then turned on, with
current/voltage regulation to its base controlled
by regulator. Input voltage of 7812 regulator
should be 2 V more than desired output voltage.
Article gives three different rectifier circuits
suitable for use with regulator. — A. M. Clarke,
Regulated 200 Watt-12 Volt D.C. Power Supply,
CQ, Oct. 1975, p 28-30 and 78-79.
0-25 V WITH FOLDBACK CURRENT LIMITING—

When D2201 diode senses load current of 1 A at
maximum regulated output of 25 V, 2N2102 cur-
rent-sensing transistor provides foldback of
output current to 40 mA. Arrangement permits
use of 2N5294 transistor as series-pass element,
using only small heatsink. High-impedance ref-
erence-voltage divider across 30-V supply
serves CA3140 connected as noninverting
power opamp. — "Linear Integrated Circuits and
LINE REGULATION MOS/FET's," RCA Solid State Division, Somer-
0 1%/VOLT ville, NJ, 1977, p 248-257.
830
+ 15 V
5-20 V ZENER-STABILIZED— Use of dual linear 100-mA CURRENT REGULATOR— 741 opamp is
■l
J. Baughan, Variable Power Supply with Zener
pot simplifies problem of feeding reference Stabilization, Wireless World, Nov. 1975, p 520. connected as noninverting voltage-controlled
zener diode from variable-voltage supply. — L. current source feeding transistors that boost
output and provide bidirectional current capa-
-H bility in load RL. If single-polarity current flow is
sufficient, omit opposite-polarity transistor. —
W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 173.
01
2N3055
V,n = 48V O-
1N5359
X
24 V
•Heat sink Q1 and LM340.
+ 15 V FROM HIGH INPUT VOLTAGE— Zener is mV for 1 -V change in input voltage for no load.
used in series with resistor R to level-shift input With optional output capacitor, circuit noise is
voltage higher than rated maximum of LM340K-
only 700 /*V P-P. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2,"
15 regulator. Typical load regulation is 40 mV National Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976,
for 0—1 A pulsed load, and line regulation is 2 AN-103, p 9-10.
HUM-FREE CASSETTE RECORDER SUPPLY—

Designed for tape recorder feeding into AF am-
plifier, to permit operation of recorder from
power supply of amplifier without having hum
due to positive feedback through shared
ground connection. Circuit provides up to 150
mA at 7.5 V from supply ranging from 12 to 24
V. Transistors are connected as constant-cur-
rent source in series with constant-voltage sink.
Use three 39-ohm resistors in parallel as 13-ohm
resistor. — G. Hibbert, Avoiding Power Supply
Hum, Wireless World, Oct. 1973, p 515.
+ 15 V WITH FEEDBACK — Fraction of output

malloy 6006B or equivalent heatsink. Devel- voltage is fed back to base of 2N3641 regulator
7.1— 65 V AT 0—1 A — Provides continuously var- oped for use with pulsed loads. For input volt- transistor. Difference between this voltage and
iable output voltage and adjustable output cur- age range of 46-76 V, regulation is within 286 zener diode voltage is amplified to control base
rent range. Q1 is connected as zener to give mV for 500-mA DC output. — "Linear Applica- of 2N5191 series transistor. — H. Olson, Power-
6.5-V reference voltage. Darlington current tions, Vol. 2," National Semiconductor, Santa Supply Servicing, Ham Radio, Nov. 1976, p 44-
boosters Q4-Q7 should be on common Ther- Clara, CA, 1976, AN-127, p 8-10. 50.
REGULATOR CIRCUITS 831
+ 15 V WITH //A723 — Series power transistor pair of all types of regulators. — H. Olson,
and Fairchild 1C voltage regulator provide up to Power-Supply Servicing, Ham Radio, Nov.
100 mA. Article covers troubleshooting and re- 1976, p 44-50. OVERLOAD PROTECTION — When critical cur-
rent is exceeded, SCR, conducts and reduces
base-ground voltage of Q,, cutting it off. Load
current then drops to very low value, and Q, is
protected. Operation is restored by turning off
current supply to power transformer after clear-
ing short-circuit condition. — R. Phelps, Jr., Pro-
tective Circuits for Transistor Power Supplies,
CQ, March 1973, p 44-48 and 92.
CONVERTING TO DUAL SUPPLY— With equal

values for R2 and Ra, input of 30 V is converted
to ±15 V at output. If desired, R2 and R3 can be
Q,
scaled for unequal voltage drops. Circuit uses
540 power 1C having 1 00-mA rating for each out-
put, for handling load imbalances up to 100
25 V AT 10 A FOR LAB — Circuit uses no large sharing, since 300 W will be dissipated under mA. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook,"
output capacitors yet has good response as worst-case conditions. Only two control Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 170-
constant-voltage or constant-current source. opamps are needed, onefor voltage control and 171.
LM395 units (7 in parallel) act as current-limited one for current control. — R. C. Dobkin, General-
thermally limited high-gain power transistor. Purpose Power Supply Furnishes 10A and 25V,
Mount all on same heatsink for good current EDN Magazine, March 5, 1975, p 70.
5A OUTPUT CURRENT
1(V F
tantalum)
VOUT
(solid
2N3055
(WITH VALUES SHOWN, 0.1
VQ= 20V @ 50 mA)

5 A AT -5 TO —15 V — Use of 2N3055 pass tran-
sistor boosts current output of LM120 regulator
1C. Minimum differential between input and
output voltages is typically 2.5 V, so supply volt-
10 PPM/CC — Connections shown convert desired performance over temperature range age must be 2.5 V higher than preset output
LM723CH regulator into precision power refer- from +15 to +65°C. — B. Welling, High-Stability voltage of regulator chosen from National
ence having excellent long-term stability and Power Supply Uses 723 Regulator, EDN Maga- LM120 series. — C. T. Nelson, Power Distribu-
temperature stability. LM399H replaces internal zine, Jan. 20, 1978, p 114 and 116. tion and Regulation Can Be Simple, Cheap and
reference of LM723 with low-noise 6.9 V to give Rugged, EDN Magazine, Feb. 20, 1973, p 52-58.
2N5I94
+5 V WITH MC1460G — Series power transistor MC1469. Equivalents made by other manufac-
and Motorola 1C voltage regulator provide up to turers can also be used. — H. Olson, Power-Sup-
100 mA. 1C shown has been replaced by ply Servicing, Ham Radio, Nov. 1976, p 44-50.
-3 V — Circuit using three sections of Motorola
MC7404 operates from +5 V supply and gen-
erates -3 V at up to 100 /xA, as one of supply
voltages required by Motorola MCM6570 8192-
bit character generator using 7x9 matrix. — "A
CRT Display System Using NMOS Memories,"
Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1975, AN-706A, p 5.
anced to within millivolts of each other or can can be used to provide required unregulated 36
be offset as required. Negative voltage is regu- VDC for inputs. — C. Brogado, 1C Op Amps Sim-
lated, and positive output tracks negative. Ar- plify Regulator Design, EDNIEEE Magazine, Jan.
ticle gives step-by-step design procedure based 15, 1972, p 30-34.
40V, 1 A
UNREGULATED
INPUT
1 A WITH 0.005% VOLTAGE ACCURACY— Use

of National LM120 negative regulator with
LM108A low-drift opamp and 1N829 precision
reference diode gives extremely tight regula-
tion, very low temperature drift, and full over-
load protection. Bridge arrangement sets out-
put voltage and holds reference diode current
OUTPUT constant. FET is required because 4-mA maxi-

2_ 37V REGULATED mum ground current of regulator exceeds out-
put current rating of opamp. R, and R2 should
track to 1 PPM or less. R3 is chosen to set ref-
erence current at 7.5 mA. For output of 8 to 14
V, use LM120-5.0; for 15-17 V, use LM120-12.—
2-37 V — Simple circuit gives fine linear control ence down to 2 V. — G. Dressel, Regulator Cir- C. T. Nelson, Power Distribution and Regulation
with 10-turn pot over wide voltage range by cuit Provides Linear 2-37 V Adjustment Range, Can Be Simple, Cheap and Rugged, EDN Mag-
first using 10K trimmer pot to divide 7-V refer- EDN Magazine, March 5, 1978, p 122. azine, Feb. 20, 1973, p 52-58.
2N3035
+12 V AT 2 A — Developed for unregulated 12-

VDC supplies used by some amateurs with
low-power VHF FM equipment, where no-load
voltage may be 18 V or more. During transmit,
voltage drops to about 12 V, but on receive may
exceed voltage ratings of small-signal transis-
tors in transceiver. Use heatsink with transistor,
and use 2-A fuse to protect transistor from
shorted load. — J. Fisk, Circuits and Techniques,
POSITIVE SHUNT REGULATION— Connection

shown for LM137 negative series regulator pro- raw DC supply. Output is 5.65 V. — P. Lefferts,
vides high-reliability positive shunt regulation Series Regulators Provide Shunt Regulation,
for applications having high-voltage spike on EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1978, p 158 and 160.
CURRENT
LIMIT
±15 V WITH TRACKING— In arrangement

shown for National regulator ICs, positive out-
put voltage tracks negative voltage to better
than 1%. Ripple rejection is 80 dB for both out-
puts. Load regulation is 30 mV at 1 A for nega-
tive output and less than 10 mV for positive out-
put. Circuit works well for output in range of
±6 to ±15 V. C, provides stability. — C. T. Nel-
son, Power Distribution and Regulation Can Be
Simple, Cheap and Rugged, EDN Magazine,
Feb. 20, 1973, p 52-58.
+ 12 V SERIES EMITTER-FOLLOWER— Base-

emitter voltage is more or less constant without
use of feedback because base is held at constant
voltage by zener diode. Ripple at base is re-
provides better than 0.01% regulation from no MOS/FET's," RCA Solid State Division, Somer- duced by RC filter. — H. Olson, Power-Supply
load to full load and input regulation of 0.02%/ ville, NJ, 1977, p 236-243. Servicing, Ham Radio, Nov. 1976, p 44-50.
+24V-35V
'Germanium signal diode

about 2 mV P-P. Load regulation is 60 mV for
48 V FROM 80 V — Level-shifting transistor- pulsed load change from 5 mA to 1 A. Line reg-
zener combination R1-D2 is used with zener D1 ulation is 0.01 %/V of input voltage change for
to keep voltage across LM340-24 regulator 500-mA load. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2,"
below maximum rated value. Addition of zeners National Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976,
has drawback of increasing output noise to AN-103, p 10-11.
HUM-FREE TUNER SUPPLY — Permits opera-
tion of high-quality FM tuner from amplifier
supply without having hum due to positive
feedback through shared ground connection.
Circuit provides up to 90 mA at 12 V from any
supply ranging from 24 to 34 V. Low output
impedance eliminates all likely sources of feed-
back and suppresses ripple. Circuit requires
careful initial adjustment to limit current sunk
by 741C opamp to less than 15 mA; coarse ad-
justment ismade by varying number of 47-ohm
resistors in parallel serving as BD136 emitter re-
sistor, and fine adjustment by changing R2. — G.
Hibbert, Avoiding Power Supply Hum, Wireless
World, Oct. 1973, p 515.
TRI TR2 TR 3
9 V FROM 12 V— Developed for economical op- battery of car.— Circuits, 73 Magazine, March
eration of 9-V portable radio from 12-V storage 1975, p 136.
DRIFT
"VOUT 'lVBE
— (2 * R, R_) ♦ ;'BV£B (1 + R R l
->T -IT ’ * JIT ’ 1
QUIESCENT CURRENT ' 4pA
JFET SERIES-PASS — Use of JFET as series-pass

element for LM3046 voltage regulator 1C mini-
mizes battery drain in microprocessor system
^Solid tantalum. applications. Pass element needs no preregu-

lation because drive comes from regulated out-
put. Gate source is isolated from line by drain
— 10 V AT 1 A — Combination of LM195 power tion. Input voltage must be only 2 V greater than and thus provides excellent line regulation. — J.
transistor 1C and standard LM104 regulator output voltage.— "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," Maxwell, Voltage Regulator Bridges Gap Be-
gives negative output voltage with full overload National Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, tween IC's and Zeners, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5,
protection and better than 2-mV load regula- AN-110, p 4-5.
1977, p 178-179.
2N5I94
+5 V WITH LM300H — Series power transistor LM305H, may be substituted. — H. Olson,

and National 1C voltage regulator provide up to Power-Supply Servicing, Ham Radio, Nov.
100 mA. Improved version of regulator. 1976, p 44-50.
-15 V TRACKING +5 V— LM104 negative reg-

ulator isused with inverting gain to give nega-
iL tive output voltage that is greater than positive
reference voltage. Noninverting input is tied to
divider R5-R6 between negative output and
**
Q, ground. Positive reference determines line reg-
ulation and temperature drift, with negative
•Use 741 lor lL > 10 /+»; lor lu < 10 yi», use output tracking. — R. C. Dobkin, One Adjust-
low-inpul-current type such as 8007. 108, or 1556.
ment Controls Many Regulators, EDN Maga-
IProledion against input polarity reversal.
zine, Nov. 1, 1970, p 33-35.
2N3904
1.0 /xA - 1.0 mA
2N2219 1.0 mA • 100 mA
2N6057 100 mA - 10 A
+ 5.0
NEGATIVE-INPUT CURRENT REGULATOR— ier current than feedback current, as required

V +5.0 V +5 0 V
Opamp is used as inverter starting current- for high load current. Current gain depends on
boosting transistor to provide positive supply ratio of R2 to R3.— W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp
voltage. Load current range depends on tran- Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
sistor used. R3 forces Q, to conduct much heav- 1974, p 176-177.
+5 AND +12 V AT 6 mA — Circuit using four sec-

tions of Motorola MC7406 provides +12 V sup-
ply required by MCM6570 8192-bit character
generator using 7x9 matrix, along with con-
ventional +5 V. — "A CRT Display System Using
NMOS Memories," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
1975, AN-706A, p 5.
0.1-35 V AT 1 A — CA3160 serves as error am-

plifier in continuously adjustable regulator that
functions down to vicinity of 0 V. RC network
between base of 2N21 02 output drive transistor
and input source prevents turn-on overshoot.
Input regulation is better than 0.01 %/V, and reg-
ulation from no load to full load is better than
0.005%. Hum and noise output is less than 250
juVRMS. — "Linear Integrated Circuits and MOS /
NJ, 1977, p 267-269.
f R4RS
|
100
PARAMETER VALUES FOR BEST RESULTS
2V< V_ < TV 5W
[fiA+ffS j
. RE (7- V0)
rO*< P: t R2 OOOk
R5<V0-7)
l0k<RS<100k
+2 TO +35 V AT 10 A — Provides fixed output

voltage at value determined by choice of resis-
tance values, computed as given in table. Heat-
sink should have very low thermal resistance. modified V|N
slightly as set forth in article. — H.
For similar range of negative voltages. Motorola Olson, Second-Generation 1C Voltage Regula-
MPC900 regulator can be used, with circuit tors, Ham Radio, March 1977, p 31-37.
36V
+0.5 TO 1 V BIAS— Motorola MC1723G regu-

lator, 2N5991 current-boost transistor, and
base-emitter junction of 2N5190 transistor CR1
serve as adjustable bias voltage source for 300-
W solid-state power amplifier. R3 sets current
limiting at about 0.65 A. Measured output-volt-
age variations are about ±6 mV for load
changes of 0 to 600 mA. — H. O. Granberg, One
KW— Solid-State Style, QST, April 1976, p 11-
14.
4.5—34 V AT 1 A — Combination of LM195 power and output voltages is only 2 V. — "Linear Ap-
transistor 1C and standard LM105 regulator plications, Vol. 2," National Semiconductor,
gives better than 2-mV load regulation with Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-1 10, p 4.
overload protection. Differential between input
±10 V TRACKING— Fairchild 78MG and 79MG

positive and negative voltage- regulator ICs pro-
vide up to 500-mA output, with protection
against short-circuits and thermal overloads. —
D. Schmieskors, Adjustable Voltage-Regulator
ICs, Ham Radio, Aug. 1975, p 36-38.
±5 TO ±18 V WITH TRACKING— Ground pin of

LM340K-15 positive regulator is lifted by
LM1558 inverter, while ground pin of negative
LM320K-15 is lifted by LM1558 voltage follower.
Positive regulator is made to track negative reg-
ulator within about 50 mV over entire output
range. At ±15 V, typical load regulation is be-
tween 40 and 80 mV for 0-1 A pulsed load. —
"Linear
8-9. Applications, Vol. 2," National Semi-
conductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-103, p
'Solid tantalum.
2N6305
POWER DARLINGTON
0.1-24 V AT 1 A — High-impedance reference-

voltage divider across 30-V supply serves
CA3140 connected as noninverting power
opamp with gain of 3.2. 8-V reference input
gives maximum output voltage of about 25 V.
D2201 high-speed diode serves as current sen-
sor for 2N2102 current-limit sensing amplifier.
Current-limiting point can be adjusted over
range of 10 mA to 1 A with single IK pot. Power
Darlington serves as series-pass element. —
p 248-256.
< 200 uV RMS (NO LOAD TO FULL LOAD)

(MEASUREMENT BANDWIDTH - 10 MHz) < 002%
LINE REGULATION
01%/ VOLT
* A, and A2 pin connections shown are for 1558 dual

op amp. If operation down to zero output is desired, use
two 741s and operate A2 V- at -3.0 V minimum.
UNREGULATED
INPUT FAIRCHILD
**Change listed components to meet

required output current as follows:
100 mA 2.0 A
Q,
2N3766
2N6057t
R7
4.7 it 0.25 it
c, + 10 TO +25 V AT 100 mA — Series regulator
100 mF 1000 mF
uses opamp as differential amplifier and extra
transistor Q2 as current limiter. When 100 mA
fHeat sink required.
is drawn, 0.6 V is developed across R2 to make
0-15 V AT 2 A — Basic zener-opamp regulator through R7. Large output capacitor C^ maintains Q2 conduct, pulling Q1 base in negative direc-
output of 6.6 V is scaled up to maximum of 15 low output impedance at high frequencies tion. This action prevents excessive current
V, adjusted with R4, by adding buffer opamp A2 where gain of A2 falls off.— W. G. Jung, "1C Op- from being passed by Q1. — H. Olson, Power-
and current-boosting transistors. Q2 provides Amp Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianap- Supply Servicing, Ham Radio , Nov. 1976, p 44-
short-circuit protection by sensing load current olis, IN, 1974, p 158-159. 50.
838
RIPPLE-PREAMP SUPPLY — Shunt regulator re-

moves virtually all AC line ripple without using
large capacitor, making it ideal for audio appli-
cations where freedom from ripple is more im-
portant than precise supply voltage level. Cir-
cuit cannot be damaged by short-circuits. Tr3
may be power transistor or Darlington. — P. S.
Bright, Ripple Eliminator. Wireless World, April
1977, p 62.
-0 5V
22K
LOW COST WITH DISCRETE ELEMENTS— Per-

formance is comparable to that of combined
discrete and monolithic circuits, with load reg-
ulation of0.01%, line regulation of 0.05%, ripple
rejection of 0.1%, and output ripple and noise
of 1 mV. Output is 1 A at 5 V. Foldback short-
circuit protection is provided by Tr<, with max-
imum current determined by value of R. C2,
(tantalum) which can be 100 g F, gives extra ripple rejection
by introducing more AC feedback into loop.
TIP32A is plastic series transistor, and is not crit-
ical; many other types will work equally well. —
K. W. Mitchell, High Performance Voltage Reg-
ulator, Wireless World, May 1976, p 83-84.
-O0V
TRIMMED DUAL SUPPLY
DUAL OUTPUTS WITH TRIMMING— Trimming

pots connected across outputs provide positive
or negative currents for producing small trim-
ming voltages across 33-ohm ground-leg resis-
tors of National regulators. Same components
can be used for higher output voltages, but re-
sistance values of pots should be increased if
power dissipation becomes problem. — C. T.
Nelson, Power Distribution and Regulation Can
Be Simple, Cheap and Rugged, EDN Magazine,
Feb. 20, 1973, p 52-58.
5 V AT 10 A WITH CURRENT LIMITING— Com-

bination of three transistors and SN52105 or
SN72305 regulator provides foldback current
limiting for overload protection. Input voltage
can be up to 40 V greater than 5-V output. Load
regulation is about 0.1%, and input regulation
is 0.1 %/V. Regulators are interchangeable with
LM105 and LM305 respectively. — "The Linear

and Interface Circuits Data Book for Design En-
gineers," Texas Instruments, Dallas, TX, 1973,
p 5-9.
0 TO ±6.6 V TRACKING AT 5 mA — Master-slave

regulator combination is used to make second
regulator provide mirror image of first while
output of first is varied over full range from 0 to
zener limit with R„. Accuracy of tracking de-
pends on match between Rs and R6, which
should be 1% film or wirewound. — W. G. Jung,
ELECTRONIC SHUTDOWN— Both sections of

National LM125dual tracking regulatorareshut
down by TTL-compatible control signal VT
which shorts internal reference voltage of reg-
ulatorto ground. Q3 acts only as current sink. —
T. Smathers and N. Sevastopoulos, "LM125/
LM126/LM127 Precision Dual Tracking Regula-
tors," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
CA, 1974, AN-82, pi 5.
■I*
28 V AT 1 A— Circuit uses SN52105 or SN72305

regulator with three protective diodes. Feed-
back diode at top protects against shorted input
and inductive loads on unregulated supply.
-V0 * 28 V
Input diode protects against input voltage re-
versal. Output diode protects against output
voltage reversal. Maximum input voltage is 50
V. — "The Linear and Interface Circuits Data
47
35 V -
Dallas, TX, 1973, p 5-9.
mF '
R1
15 V AT 5 A WITH PROTECTION— External

boost transistor is used with National LM340T-
15 regulator to boost output current capability
to 5 A without affecting such features as short-
circuit current limiting and thermal shutdown.
Short-circuit current is held to 5.5 A. Heatsink
for Q1 should have at least 4 times capacity of
heatsink for 1C. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2,"
AN-103, p 3-4.
+ VIN
± 15 V AT 10 A WITH FOLDBACK CURRENT LIM-

ITING— Combination of Darlington pass tran-
sistors and current limiting is used with Na-
tional LM125 dual tracking regulator to give
high output currents with protection from
short-circuits. — T. Smathers and N. Sevasto-
poulos, "LM125/LM126/LM127 Precision Dual
Tracking Regulators," National Semiconductor,
2-35 V VARIABLE — Wide voltage range is

achieved by using p A723 regulator 1C in simple
feedback arrangement requiring only single pot
to vary output voltage continuously and linearly
from 2 to 35 V. Resistors R3 and R„ divide output
voltage by 5, so inverting input of regulator sees
one-fifth of output voltage. R, is connected be-
tween-V
7 reference of 1C and ground to present
any intermediate voltage to noninverting input.
1C acts to keep these two voltages equal. Max-
imum input voltage limit is 40 V; if possibility
of higher voltages exists in lab applications,
protect 1C with 40-V zener across it. — ). Gangi,
Continuously Variable Voltage Regulator, EDN
Magazine, Feb. 20, 1973, p 91.
0 TO ±15 V INDEPENDENTLY VARIABLE—

Common zener reference serves for both regu-
lators. Buffer A3 uses negative reference voltage
developed from 6.6-V positive voltage across D,
by inverter A,. Both regulators provide 100 mA
or 2 A depending on transistors used.— W.
Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard
•‘Change listed components to meet

required output current as follows:
Qi 100 mA 2.0 A
q2 2N3766
2N60571
2N3740
2NG050 1
4.7 !!
R7, Rio
0 25 it
1000 pF
c,. c2 100 mF
tHeat sink required.

1.2-37 V AT 1.5 A — Uses National LM317 ad-

justable three-terminal positive voltage regu-
lator. Output voltage is determined by ratio of
V OUT, REGULATED R1 and R2. Output can be adjusted from 37 V
down to 1.2 V with R2. If DC input is 40 V, reg-
120 -J_ C3
ulation isabout 0.1% at all settings when going
'T'
— *— C2icvf
from no load to full load. Regulator includes
TO - 3
CASE
overload and thermal protection. If current limit
LM3I7K
is exceeded, regulator shuts down. C2 and C3
ft T 'mF
are optional; C2 improves ripple rejection, and
C3 prevents instability when load capacitance
is between 500 and 5000 pF. — Adjustable Bench
Supply, 7 3 Magazine, Dec. 1977, p 192-193.
+5 V AT 3 A — Uses Motorola MPC1000 positive

voltage regulator to provide high current re-
quired for large TTL project. Current-limiting re-
sistor Rsc is in range of 0.66 to 0.066 ohm. Use
copper wire about 50% longer than calculated
length and shorten step by step until required
pass current is obtained; thus, start with 25 ft
of No. 16, 15 ft of No. 18, 10 ft of No. 20, or 6 ft
of No. 22 — G. L. Tater, The MPC1000— Super
Regulator, Ham Radio, Sept. 1976, p 52-54.
+vIN
SIMULTANEOUS CURRENT LIMITING— Limit-

ing action of circuit depends on output current
of positive regulator but acts simultaneously on
both positive and negative outputs of National
LM125 dual tracking regulator. Positive output
current produces voltage drop across R1 that
makes Q1 conduct. When increase in current
makes voltage drop across R2 equal negative
current limit sense voltage, negative regulator
will current-limit. Positive regulator closely fol-
lows negative output down to level of about 700
m V. Q2 turns off negative pass transistor during
simultaneous current limiting. Output voltages
are ±15 V. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," Na-

AN-82, p 12-13.
15 V AT 200 mA — Linear regulator using Texas

Instruments SN52105, SN72305, or SN72376 is
connected for foldback current limiting. Regu-
lators are interchangeable with LM105, LM305,
and LM376 respectively. Load regulation is
0.1%, and input regulation is 0.1%/V. — 'The

1973, p 5-9.
5 V AT 1 A — Use of Darlington at output boosts

power rating of standard opamp voltage regu-
lator circuit. Article gives step-by-step design
procedure. With fiA741 opamp, circuit gives
good regulation along with short-circuit protec-
tion. AC ripple is less than 2 mV P-P. Required
input of 30 V is obtained from conventional full-
wave bridge rectifier with capacitor-input fil-
ter.— C. Brogado, 1C Op Amps Simplify Regu-
lator Design, EDNIEEE Magazine, Jan. 15, 1972,
p 30-34.
0-20 V AT 2 A — R3 provides control of output

voltage for regulator built around LM3900 quad
Norton opamp. Output is well regulated against
both line and load variations and is free of rip-
ple. Opamp sections A3 and A„ provide overcur-
rent sensing and shutdown functions; after out-
put fault is cleared, S2 is closed momentarily to
restore output power. Article describes circuit
operation and initial setup in detail. — I. C. Han-
isko and W. Wiseman, Variable Supply Built
Around Quad Amp Outputs 2A, EDN Magazine,
June 20, 1976, p 128 and 130.
OOlpF
VARIABLE DUAL-POLARITY— External resistor

R„ determines values of positive and negative
regulated output voltages provided by Silicon
General SG3501 dual regulator. — H. Olson, Sec-
ond-Generation 1C Voltage Regulators, Warn
5 V AT 200 mA — Article gives step-by-step de-

sign procedure for developing special opamp
regulator when commercial unit meeting de-
sired specifications is not available. Opamp is
|uA741. Circuit gives good regulation along with
short-circuit protection, with less than 2 mV P-
P AC ripple. Required input of 20 V is obtained
from conventional full-wave bridge rectifier
with capacitor-input filter. — C. Brogado, 1C Op
Amps Simplify Regulator Design, EDNIEEE
Magazine, Jan. 15, 1972, p 30-34.
0 TO ±15 V TRACKING AT 100 mA OR 2 A—

Basic tracking regulator is combined with tran-
sistors to extend output to voltages higher than
zener reference and provide higher output cur-
rents. Choice of transistors for Q, and Q2 deter-
“Change listed components to meet
required output current as follows: mines maximum load current. — W. G. Jung, "1C
Q, 2.0 A Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indi-
100 mA
anapolis, IN, 1974, p 161-163.
Qt 2N3766
2N60571
2N3740
2N6050+
R7, Rio 4.7 !! 0.25 !!
100 1000 mf
Ci, C2
•Heat sink required.
-v,„* OV to -15 V @
100 mA or 2 . 0 A
±V,n are equal and opposite unregulated inputs (tracks +E„)
01
5 V AT 5 A FOR TTL — Typical load regulation is

1.8% from no load to full load. Q1 and Q2 serve
in place of single higher-cost power PNP boost
transistor. Dotted lines show how to add over-
load indicator using National NSL5027 LED and
R2 as overload sensor. When load current ex-
ceeds 5 A, Q3 turns on and D3 lights. Circuit in-
cludes thermal shutdown and short-circuit
protection. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2,"
AN-103,
NEGATIVE SHUNT REGULATION— Connection

shown for LM117 positive series regulator pro-
vides spike-suppressing negative shunt regu-
lation of -5 V output. With capacitor shown,
regulator will withstand 75-V spikes on raw DC
supply. For larger spikes, increase capacitor
value. — P. Lefferts, Series Regulators Provide
Shunt Regulation, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1978,
p 158 and 160.
*Ai and A; pin connections shown are tor 1558

dual op amp. It operation down to zero output is
desired, use two 741s and operate A2 V- at
-3.0 1/ minimum.
0-6.6 V AT 2 A — High-power circuit is suitable

for low-voltage logic devices that require high
current at supply voltages between 3 and 6 V.
Maximum output of 2 A is obtained with
2N6057 Darlington pair for Q,. Single 2N3766
can be used if load is only 100 mA. Q2 provides
short-circuit protection for Q,. Since supply
does not have to be adjusted down to 0 V, neg-
ative supply for A2 can go to common negative
of circuit. Optional connection to -3 V is used
only when voltage range must go down to 0
'Change listed components to meet
required output current as lollows: V. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook," How-
2.0 A ard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 157-158.
Q, 100 mA
2N3766
2N6057 1
Rs
4.7 il 0.25 n -3 0 V (minimum)*
C, 100 Mf 1000 mf
’Heat sink required

±15 V AT 7 A — External Darlington stages

boost output currents of LM125 dual tracking
regulator and Increase minimum input/output
voltage differential to 4.5 V. Maximum output
cunent is limited by power dissipation of
2N3772. Typical load regulation is 40 mV from
no load to full load. — T. Smathers and N. Se-
vastopoulos, "LM125/LM126/LM127 Precision
Dual Tracking Regulators," National Semicon-
0— 25 V AT 0—10 A — Lab-type constant-voltage/ of seven LM395 power transistors serving as

constant-current power supply using standard pass element. Current limiting is provided on "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," National Sem
ICs achieves high current output by paralleling LM395 chip for complete overload protection. — conductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, LB-28.
-10 V AT 2 A — Negative-voltage regulator

using SN52104 or SN72304 accepts input volt-
age of -12 V to -40 V and uses only single ex-
ternal resistor to provide regulated output of
-10 V with typical load regulation of 1 mV and
input regulation of 0.06%. ICs are interchange-
able with LM104 and LM304 respectively. —
"The Linear and Interface Circuits Data Book for
Design Engineers," Texas Instruments, Dallas,
TX, 1973, p 5-5.
2N4906
±15 V TRACKING— Single NE/SE5554 dual

tracking regulator is used with pass transistors
to give higher output current than 200-mA limit
for each section of regulator, with close-toler-
ance tracking. — "Signetics Analog Data Man-
-20 VOLTS
FOLDBACK CURRENT LIMITING— Reduces

short-circuit output current of National LM125
dual tracking regulator sections to fraction of
full-load output current, avoiding need for
larger heatsink. Programmable current source
is used to give constant voltage drop across R5
for negative regulator. Simple resistor divider
serves same purpose for positive regulator. De-
sign examples are given. — T. Smathers and N.
Sevastopoulos, "LM125/LM126ILM127 Preci-
sion Dual Tracking Regulators," National Semi-
Q2 - 03 2N2640
-10 V AT 1 A — National LM195 power transis-

tor, used with LM105 regulator, provides full
overload protection. Load regulation is better
than 2 mV. Circuit requires only 2-V differential
between input and output voltages. — R. Dob-
kin, "Fast 1C Power Transistor with Thermal
Protection," National Semiconductor, Santa
Clara, CA, 1974, AN-110, p 5.
15 V AT 1 A WITH LOGIC SHUTDOWN— Ar-

rangement shown provides practical method of
shutting down LM340T-15 or similar regulator
under control of TTL or DTL gate. Pass transistor
Q1 operates as saturated transistor when logic
input is high (2.4 V minimum for TTL) and Q2 is
turned on. When logic input is low (below 0.4 V
for TTL), Q2 and Q1 are off and regulator is in
effect shut down. — "Linear Applications, Vol.
1976, AN-103, pi 1.
46—60 V FROM 62 V — Variable-output high- ulator has been shut down by shorted load,
again and start regulator. — "Linear Applica-
voltage regulator includes short-circuit and LM31 1 must be activated by applying 4-V strobe tions, Vol. 2," National Semiconductor, Santa
overvoltage protection. When LM340K-24 reg- pulse to 2N2222 transistor to make Q1 close Clara, CA, 1976, AN-103, p 11-12.
R3 V0ut R4 Vqut
+ 15, +5,AND -15 V — Single potentiometer R5

serves for adjusting all three regulated output
voltages simultaneously. Accuracy of adjust-
ment is within 2%. — R. C. Dobkin, One Adjust-
ment Controls Many Regulators, EON Maga-
zine, Nov. 1, 1970, p 33-35.
0-15 V — Addition of 307 or 301A opamp and

three inexpensive components to standard
three-terminal voltage regulator provides pro-
gramming capability from maximum terminal
voltage down to zero. With adequate heatsink,
output current can be up to 1 A. Opamp A2 pro-
vides floating reference voltage to normally
grounded common terminal of A,, with pot al-
lowing ground to be positioned anywhere
along voltage drop of 15 V across pot. Unregu-
lated negative supply is not critical, and drain is
10 mA. — W. G. Jung, Three Components Pro-
gram Regulator from Maximum to Zero, EDN
Magazine, May 20, 1977, p 126 and 128.
±15 V TRACKING AT 100 mA— Provides line

and load regulation of 0.075% by using
CA3094A programmable opamp and CA3085A
series voltage regulator. V+ input range is 19 to
30 V for 15-V output, while V- input range is
-16 to -30 V for -15 V output. — "Circuit Ideas
for RCA Linear ICs," RCA Solid State Division,
w * V ~ INPUT RANGE = — 16 T0-30 V

FOR -15 V OUTPUT
R4 Vout.+15V
±15 V TRACKING — Arrangement uses LM104

negative regulator to track positive regulator,
with both regulators adjusted simultaneously
by changing R1. Inverting opamp can be added
to provide negative output voltage while using
positive voltage as reference. — R. C. Dobkin,
One Adjustment Controls Many Regulators,
EDN Magazine, Nov. 1, 1970, p 33-35.*v,B
BOOSTING OUTPUT CURRENT— External NPN

pass transistor is added to each section of
LM125 precision dual tracking regulator to in-
crease maximum output current by factor equal
to beta of transistor. To prevent overheating
and destruction of pass transistors and result-
ant damage to regulator, series resistor RCL is
used to sense load current. When voltage drop
across Rc, equals current-limit sense voltage in
range of about 0.3 to 0.8 V (related to junction
temperature), regulator will current-limit. Max-
imum load current is about 1 A for 25°C junction
and 0.6 ohm for RCL. LM125 provides ±15 V,
LM126 provides ±12 V, and LM127 provides
+5 V and -12 V. — T. Smathers and N. Sevas-
topoulos, 'LM 1 25 LM 1 26 LM 127 Precision Dual
Tracking Regulators," National Semiconductor,
LM108A opamp that is buffered by LM195K 5V
0-20 V HIGH-PRECISION— National LM199 power transistor 1C which provides full overload AN-161, p 6.
temperature-stabilized 6.95-V reference feeds protection. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," Na-
7-23 V AT 1.2-2 A — Ground terminal of

LM340T-05 regulator Is raised by amount equal
to voltage applied to noninverting (+) input of
opamp, to give output voltage set by R2 in re-
sistive divider. Short-circuit protection and
thermal shutdown are provided overfull output
range. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," National
p 6—7.
0 TO -6.6 V AT 5 mA — Voltage follower A, buff-

ers output that can be adjusted over full range
from 0 V to zener limit with R4. Positive supply
of A2 must go to voltage slightly more positive
than +3 V common if linear output operatfon is
required over full range. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-
olis, IN, 1974, p 159-160.
Cl
10uF
50 V
REGULATED
65V
OUTPUT
±65 V TRACKING AT 1 A — Circuit uses two times for application through RIO to Darlington- voltage. Q2-Q5 should be on common Ther-
LM143 high-voltage opamps in combination connected transistors Q2 and Q3. Feedback re- malloy 6006B or equivalent heatsink. Supply in-
with zener reference and discrete power-transistor R5 is made variable so positive output cludes short-circuit protection. Maximum
sistor pass elements. Q1 is transistor used as voltage can be varied from 6.5 V to about 65 V.
shorted load current is about 1.25 A. — "Linear
stable 6.5-V zener voltage reference. Opamp A1 This output is applied to unity-gain inverting Applications, Vol. 2," National Semiconductor,
amplifies reference voltage from 1 to about 10 power opamp A2 to generate negative output Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-127, p 8-9.
2H4396
5-24 V — Choice of regulator in 7800 series de-
01 termines value of output voltage that is main-
tained within 0.05% of its actual value. Choose
regulator for voltage desired. Unregulated
input V;„ must be at least 2 V higher than reg-
ulator rating. Transient suppression capacitor
CT is typically 10 to 50 ju F. Output current is
increased above 1C rating by using PNP series-
pass transistor Q1 which has maximum collec-
tor current of 30 A. Protection circuit Q2 pre-
vents burnout of power transistor. Choose Rsc
for limiting current value to desired value. — J.
E. Trulove, Three-Terminal Voltage-Regulator
ICs, Ham Radio, Dec. 1973, p 26-30.
OVr
-10 V TO -0.5 V — Regulator in /iA7900 series

is used with 741 opamp to provide adjustable
output voltage. Differential between input and
output is 2 V. — "Signetics Analog Data Man-

ual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 670.
•FOR HIGHER VALUES OF Cl INCREASE R6 TO LIMIT THE PEAK

CURRENT THROUGH Q5 TO A SAFE VALUE.
CURRENT BOOSTING WITH ELECTRONIC any desired level by adjusting values of R8 and starts current sources Q1 and Q2. Currents l„ i2,
SHUTDOWN — Circuit provides complete shut- R9. Control signal is used to short internal ref- and l3 are then equal so both sides of regulator
down for both sections of National LM125 dual erence voltage of regulator to ground, thereby are shut down simultaneously. — T. Smathers
tracking regulator without affecting unregu- forcing positive and negative outputs to about and N. Sevastopoulos, "LM125/LM126/LM127
lated inputs that may be powering additional +700 mV and +300 mV respectively. When Precision Dual Tracking Regulators," National
equipment. Shutdown control signal is TTL- shutdown signal is applied, Q4 draws current Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1974, AN-82,
compatible, but regulator may be shut down at through R3 and D2, establishing voltage VR that
853
REGULATOR CIRCUITS
• isu
±15 V TRACKING AT 1 A — Positive regulator

tracks negative. If Q1 and 02 are perfectly
matched, tracking action is unchanged overfull
operating temperature range, with tracking
better than 1 00 mV. Regulation from no load to
full load is 10 mV for positive side and 45 mV for
-isv negative side. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2,"

National Semiconductor, Santa Clara. CA, 1976,
AN-103, p 8-9.
'Germanium diode.
"Solid tantalum.
DUAL TRACKING — Uses one 759 power opamp

for positive output, connected to track with
79MG negative voltage regulator having ad-
justable output. Common-mode range of 79MG
includes ground, permitting operation from sin-
gle supply. Circuit can also be built with two
power opamps, one inverting and the other
noninverting. — R. J. Apfel, Power Op Amps —
Their Innovative Circuits and Packaging Provide
Designers with More Options, EDN Magazine,
Sept. 5, 1977, p 141-144.
CURRENT-FOLDBACK PROTECTION— current is controlled by diode drop across R, and gives lower short-circuit current, improves ef-
MPC1000 hybrid regulator provides regulated foldback current by drop across R2. Article gives ficiency, and reduces heat generation. Foldback
output of 5 V at 5 A from 14-V input. Values of design equations and procedure for obtaining protection is not suitable for variable-output
components are based on foldback current of 6 other output voltages. Circuit also serves to supplies because foldback current is propor-
A and short-circuit current of 2 A; this ensures limit starting surges into capacitive load, and tional to output voltage. — R. L. Haver, Use Cur-
that dissipation of regulator on short-circuit is reduces heatsink size and transistor ratings. Re- rent Foldback to Protect Your Voltage Regula-
less than dissipation at rated load. Short-circuit turning R3to pin 2 of MPC1000 instead of pin 3 tor, EDN Magazine, Aug. 20, 1974, p 69-72.
28 V AT 7 A — Uses Motorola MPC1000 positive

voltage regulator to provide regulated voltage V,N
for aircraft radio equipment being used at
ground station. Current-limiting resistor Rsc is
in range of 0.66 to 0.066 ohm. Use copper wire
about 50% longer than calculated length and
shorten step by step until required pass current
is obtained; thus, start with 25 ft of No. 16, 15 voltage is obtained from 30-V transformer and Super Regulator, Ham Radio, Sept. 1976, p 52-
ft of No. 18, 10 ft of No. 20, or 6 ft of No. 22. Input bridge rectifier. — G. L. Tater, The MPC1000 — 54.
36V
4.5-34 V VARIABLE AT 1 A— National LM195

power transistor is used with LM105 regulator
to give fully adjustable range of output voltages
with overload protection and only 2-V input-to-
output voltage differential. Load regulation is
better than 2 mV.— R. Dobkin, "Fast 1C Power
Transistor with Thermal Protection," National
P 4.
5 V AT 5 A — Current-sharing design provides

short-circuit protection, safe-operating-area
protection, and thermal shutdown. Typical load
regulation is 1.4%.— W. R. Calbo, A High-Cur-
rent, Low-Voltage Regulator for TTL Circuits,
QST, Sept. 1975, p 44.
TIL209 or equivalent. — D. Self, Advanced

±24 V REGULATED AND ±35 V UNREGU- mance stereo preamp. Each 1C regulator re- Preamplifier Design, Wireless World, Nov. 1976,
LATED— Developed for use with high-perfor- quires about 7 cm2 of heatsink area. Red LED is
p 41-46.
REGULATOR CIRCUITS
855
SLAVED DUAL TRACKING REGULATOR— Uses

Fairchild pA78MG adjustable four-terminal reg-
ulator with opamp and power transistor for de-
livering output currents up to 0.5 A per side,
with output voltages adjustable from ±5 V to
±20 V for component values shown. Positive
side functions independently of negative side,
but negative output is slave of positive output.
To slave positive side, use /xA79MG and2N6121
NPN transistor as at (b). Opamp functions as in-
verting amplifier driving power transistor serv-
ing as series-pass element for opposite side of
regulator, with R, adjusting both output volt-
ages simultaneously. — A. Adamian, Dual Ad-
justable Tracking Regulator Delivers 0.5A/Side,
EDN Magazine, Jan. 5, 1977, p 42.
+ V|N
TRACKED CURRENT LIMITING— Simultaneous

limiting scheme for both sections of National
dual tracking regulator depends on output cur-
rent of positive regulator. Voltage drop pro-
duced across R1 by positive regulator brings Q1
into conduction, with positive load current I, in-
creasing until voltage drop across R2 equals
negative current-limit sense voltage. Negative
regulator will then current-limit, and positive
side will closely follow negative output down to
level of about 700 mV. — T. Smathers and N. Se-
vastopoulos, "LM125/LM126/LM127 Precision
Dual Tracking Regulators," National Semicon-
856
±15 V SYMMETRICAL AT 1 A — Connection

shown gives same line and load regulation char-
acteristics as for individual regulators. D1 en-
sures start-up of LM340K-15 under worst-case
conditions of common load and 1-A load current
over full temperature range.— "Linear Applica-
tions, Vol. 2," National Semiconductor, Santa
Clara, CA, 1976, AN-103, p 8.
••Germanium diode (using a PNP germanium transistor with the collector shorted
to the emitter).
Note: Cl and C2 required if regulators are located far from power

supply filter.
1000 V AT 100 W — Two Delco DTS-723 transis- nal is amplified by Q3-Q4 for feed to Q5. 12-V which fires SCR. When overload is removed, cir-
tors in series function as pass element of regu- regulated supply is referenced to high side of cuit returns to normal operation. Input voltage
lator in which differential amplifier Q1-Q2 output voltage through R2. R1 is chosen so reg- range of 1200-1500 V gives 0.1% regulation at
senses output voltage and compares it with ulator shuts down when load current reaches full load — "1000-Volt Linear DC Regulator,"
reference voltage at base of Q2. Difference sig- 120 mA and triggers Schmitt trigger Q8-Q9 Delco, Kokomo, IN, 1974, Application Note 45.
— 5V @ 1 A MAX,
2mV P-P RIPPLE (MAX).
through Q, increases; at predetermined limit,

5 V WITH PROTECTION — Switching-type Q6 conducts and cuts off Q7, breaking ground goes off and Q7 turns on to begin another ON/
short-circuit protection network uses R7 con- connection of R7 and thus cutting off Q3. Power OFF cycle, with switching process continuing
nected to Schmitt trigger Q6-Q7. Ground is pro- transistor Q, is also cut off, and output current until short-circuit is removed.— H. S. Raina and
vided by Q, which is normally conducting. If out- begins to decrease. When load current drops R. K. Misra, Novel Circuit Provides Short Circuit
put of regulator is short-circuited, current below another predetermined level, Q6 again Protection, EDN Magazine, June 5, 1974, p 84.
REGULATOR CIRCUITS
857
VOLTAGE ADAPTER — Bench power supply

provides ±12 V and +5 V from single regulated
24-V source, for use with many ICs. Both 12-V
supplies can be adjusted in same direction by
varying 24-V source or in opposite directions by
adjusting IK pot. R1 is used to decrease power
dissipated in LM309K voltage regulator and is
normally 2.2 ohms. — J. A. Piat, Voltage Adapter
for MSI/LSI Circuits, Ham Radio, March 1978, p
115.
OVERVOLTAGE CROWBAR— Components Regulated output is 5 V with 1C shown. Article Pirkle, Circuit Protects Power Supply Regulator
within dashed lines protect regulator 1C from gives operating details of circuit and equation from Overcurrent, EDN Magazine, Feb. 5, 1973,
overcurrent condition frequently encountered for shutdown time, which is about 1 s. — S. J.
when zener-SCR crowbar is used across output.
p 89.
CHAPTER 75
Remote Control Circuits
Wired, wireless, light-beam, and other techniques are given for controlling
transmitters, transceivers, receivers, motors, and other switched devices from
a distance, including use of tone coders and decoders. See also Data
Transmission, Instrumentation, Optoelectronic, and Repeater chapters.
♦ten turn pot
The computer ground is designated by /fj
The transmitter section ground is designated by
^ ■ These two grounds are isolated by opto-
isolator IC4 and are not to be connected to-
gether. Also, when this unit is attached to the
AC line, care should be taken in handling the
circuit board, since sections of it will be at AC
CARRIER-CURRENT TRANSMITTER— Modu- proportional to voltage. With values shown, former. IC5 is 2 to 2.5 V reference chip such as
lates existing house wiring with high-frequency range is about 30 to 110 kHz, with 256 discrete MC1403U. System uses one frequency to turn
signals that can be detected by special receivers increments of frequency. Thus, input code receiver on and frequency 4 kHz above or below
plugged into any AC outlet, for control of appli- 00000000 gives 30 kHz, 00000001 gives 30.3 kHz, in 8-kHz band to turn it off, for maximum of ten
ances by home computer. Applications include and 01000000 (decimal 64) gives 49.2 kHz. Sig- control channels in system. Article covers cali-
turning house lights on and off during owner's nal is applied to house wiring by 0.5-W power bration of transmitter.— S. Ciarcia, Tune in and
absence on elaborate time schedule pro- amplifier Q1-Q3, using optical coupling through Turn on. Part 1: A Computerized Wireless AC
grammed into computer. IC1 converts 8-bit data IC4 to prevent computer circuit from interacting Control System, BYTE, April 1978, p 114-116,
word from computer to proportional analog with house wiring. Supply voltage ±V is 11 to 118, 120, and 122-125 (Part 2— May 1978, p 97-
100 and 102).
output current. This is converted to voltage by 13 V. T1 is 12.6-VAC 300-mA filament trans-
IC2 for control of VCO IC3 that gives frequency
858
REMOTE CONTROL CIRCUITS
859
pulse width commands to servo amplifiers
NINE-CHANNEL DECODER— Circuit accepts se-

rial information arriving over data link as series
of nine varying-width pulses followed by fixed-
width sync pulse, and after detection passes the
nine individual commands to their respective
servoamplifiers. Use of TTL ICs gives low com-
ponent count for remote control system. Detec-
tion of sync pulse is done by comparing length
of inverted input pulses with output of 0.6-ms
monostable reference. All command pulses ex-
ceed 0.6 ms, so only 0.5-ms sync pulse clears
counter to prepare for next channel-1 command
pulse. Article gives operating details of system
and circuits for coder and servoamplifier. — M.
F. Bessant, Multi-Channel Proportional Remote
Control, Wireless World, Oct. 1973, p 479-482.
LIGHT BEAM FOR CONTROL OF MOVING

TOY — Battery-powered CMOS logic is
switched on and off by aiming flashlight beam
at photocell, for turning small motors of model
train or other powered toy on and off. Transis-
tors can be 2N2222A for most small motors, but
larger motors will require power transistors.
Use high-intensity flashlight, with shield over
8 CHOICES WITH 3 WIRES— Provides remotely lens to restrict beam width, so only one of five
wires going to three-relay arrangement for de-
selected choice of eight functions, such as chan- coding back to 8-position format. Relays are photocells is illuminated at a time. LED shows
nels in mobile FM station, with only three wires two-pole and four-pole double-throw 12-V ON/OFF status of circuit. Values of R1-R4 are
running from control head to controlled equip- units. — G. D. Rose, Independent 8-Channel Fre- chosen so each gate flips logic state only when
ment that can be in front of car. System involves quency Selection with Only Three Wires, QST, associated photocell is illuminated. — J. San-
converting 8-position switch selection in con- Aug. 1974, p 36-40. dler, 9 Projects under $9, Modern Electronics,
trol head to 3-bit binary form for three control Sept. 1978, p 35-39.
c
DUAL TIME-CONSTANT TONE DECODER—

Exar XR-567 PLL system is connected as de-
coder having narrow bandwidth and fast re-
sponse time. Circuit has two low-pass loop filter
capacitors, C2 and C'2. With no input, pin 8 is
high, Q, is off, and C'2 is out of circuit. Filter then
has only C2, which is kept small for minimum
response time. When in-band input tone signal
DUAL TONE DECODER — Used in communica- values of each PLL decoder selected to provide is detected, pin 8 goes low, Q, turns on, and C 2
tion systems where control or other informa- desired center frequencies and bandwidth re- is in parallel with C2 to give narrow bandwidth.
tion is transmitted as two simultaneous but
quirements. Supply voltage is 5-9 V. — "Phase- Supply voltage can be 5-9 V. — "Phase-Locked
separate tones. Circuit uses two Exar XR-567 Locked Loop Data Book," Exar Integrated Sys- Loop Data Book," Exar Integrated Systems,
PLL units in parallel, with resistor and capacitor tems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 41-48. Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 41-48.
INPUT FILTER TONE DETECTION OUTPUT LATCH
VAC
POLARIZED
(GROUNDED)
WALL PLUG
(3-WiRE)
AC GROUND
1 1 5 VAC // 6 3 VAC
300mA
CARRIER-CURRENT RECEIVER— When it is

plugged into AC line, receiver responds to pair Input filter provides attenuation of 60-Hz line
of control frequencies 4 kHz apart in range of 30 frequency and all other frequencies except 8-
to 110 kHz, placed on house wiring by com- kHz band of specific channel. LC bandpass cir-
puter-controlled transmitter. Receiver turns cuit, set for center of desired passband, acts as 5 VAC
600 WATTS
controlled device on or off through solid-state passive filter. L is low-Q slug-tuned 1-10 mH
relay for which article gives suitable circuit. coil, set at 2 mH when C is made 0.01 piF for cen- O |L0AD|
Tuned bandpass filter amplifies only that pair of ter frequency of 35 kHz. Article covers operation ‘POLYSTYRE NE OR
frequencies assigned to its receiver, attenuat- in detail and gives procedure for determining POLYCARBONATE
ing all other frequency pairs used in system. values of R1, Cl , and C2 for each detector. Solid- 2: An AC Wireless Remote Control System,
Amplified signal is sent to tone decoders IC1 state output relay can be Sigma 226 RE1-5A1, BYTE , May 1978, p 97-100 and 102 (Part 1 —
and IC2, one responding to each frequency. rated 6 A. — S. Ciarcia, Tune in and Turn on. Part April 1978, p 114-116, 118, 120, and 122-125).
REMOTE CONTROL CIRCUITS
861
TIMED-TONE DECODER— Uses NE567 PLL and

555 timer to activate muted monitoring receiver
until alerting audio tone of correct frequency
and duration is received. Can be applied to al-
most any receiver for weather emergency alert
warnings, paging calls, and similar services
without having to listen continously to other
traffic on channel. If received tone is within
bandwidth of tone decoder, output of U1 goes
nearly to zero and C5 starts to discharge
through R4. When voltage at pins 2 and 6 of U2
reaches one-third of supply voltage, output of
U2 goes high and triggers SCR Q1, energizing
12-V relay K1. Values shown for C4 and C5 give
1-s delay, which means triggering tone must be
on at least 1 s. Once SCR is triggered, it holds
relay on even after tone ceases. Pushbutton
switch shorts SCR and releases relay when
reset is desired. Zener provides regulated 6.2 V
required for decoder. Values shown for R1, R2,
and C2 give response to 450-Hz tone. Avoid use
of Touch-Tone frequency, to prevent accidental
triggering by those using Touch-Tone

system. — J. S. Paquette, A Time-Delayed Tone
Decoder, QST, Feb. 1977, p 16-17.
CONTROL HEAD TRUNK MOUNTEO RIG
*. OPTIONAL
TEST SWITCHES
1 6 CHOICES WITH 3 WIRES— Developed for use

with mobile transceiver mounted in trunk of
car, to give full independent selection of eight
transmit and eight receive frequencies with
only three wires running to control head on
dash. System involves converting 8-position
switch selection in control head to 3-bit binary
form for control wires, then decoding with re-
lays. Miniature SPST relay in control head is op-
erated by normal push-to-talk circuit to change
channel selector switch when transmitting. —
G. D. Rose, Independent 8-Channel Frequency
Selection with Only Three Wires, QST, Aug.
1974, p 36-40.
REMOTE SWITCHING — Uses four flip-flops,

each having one 4-input and one 2-input CMOS
NAND gate. Momentarily grounding any input
drives corresponding output high and all other
outputs low. Unless power is interrupted, ad-
ditional pulses on same input have no effect;
circuit remains stable until some other input is
momentarily grounded. Outputs can be used to
drive other logic devices directly or through
buffer if current required exceeds 10 mA. Can be
used for remote frequency control of VHF trans-
ceiver and for other applications requiring re-
mote selection of mutually exclusive func-
tions.— P. Shreve, Remote-Switching Circuit,
Ham Radio, March 1978, p 1 14.
RADIO CONTROL FOR MOTOR— Proportional

control system produces control pulses every
20 ms, with length of each adjustable between
1 and 2 ms. Circuit removes first 1 ms of pulse
and expands remainder to produce 0-20 ms
pulses for driving motor. Pulsing of motor gives
smoother control than resistors, particularly at
very low speeds. Transistor types are not criti-

cal. Tr5 can be OC28. Optional dashed connec-
tion of 8.2K resistor provides foldback current/
voltage protection. — M. Weston, Variable-
Speed Radio Control Motor, Wireless World,
Feb. 1978, p 59.
RECEIVER
Cl — 0.0025 mfd disc
C2 — 20 mfd @ 16V
capacitor
electrolytic cap.
TRANSMITTER Cx — See text
Cl. C2 — 0.02 mfd disc capacitor R1 — 560-ohm, '/2w
C3 — 0.05 mfd disc capacitor
C4 — 20 mfd @ 150V electrolytic resistor
R2 — 1800-ohm, 2w
capacitor
R1 — 12.000-ohm, '/2w resistor
resistor
R3 — Photoresistor
R2 — 8,200-ohm, */2w resistor
R3 — 750-ohm, 5w resistor (Clairex CL604L)
R4 — 400-ohm, 5w resistor L — 508-816uh choke
LI — 750uh choke Dl, D2 — 1N457 or eq.
L2 — 420uh choke K — 2N3439
Q 12VDC latching
or eq.
L3 — 200uh choke
D — Diode 1N547 or eq. 662-12)(Cornl. Dublr.
relay
Q — Motorola HEP S3020 or eq.
S1-S3 — SPDT large pushbutton NE — Neon NE-2
(N.C. not used)
trolled device. Relay is released by sending

WIRELESS CONTROL — Choice of three lamps tones (depending on button pushed) into house same tone again. Values of CX can be 0.005,
or appliances anywhere in house and garage, or wiring. Receivers at locations of controlled de- 0.01, and 0.02 p.F. Adjust slug of L 2 for each re-
even in neighboring home if on the same power vices are each tuned to one of carrier tones. Cor- ceiver so neon comes on when assigned tone
transformer, can be turned on or off individually rect tone for receiver energizes neon lamp, and for that receiver arrives. — W. J. Hawkins, Three-
with three-channel transmitter that plugs into resulting light is picked up by photoresistor that Channel Wireless Switch — Use It Anywhere,
any wall outlet. Transmitter injects one of three energizes latching relay K for turning on con- Popular Science, Sept. 1973, p 98-99 and 121.
REMOTE CONTROL CIRCUITS 863
NINE-CHANNEL CODER— Use of TTL ICs gives

low component count for remote control sys-
tem having nine fully proportional channels.
Input channels can be potentiometers for fully
proportional information and switched resis-
tors for go/no-go or multistep information.
Coder scans the nine parallel inputs sequen-
tially and presents them to single-line data link
as series of nine varying-width pulses followed
by fixed-width sync pulse. Article describes
coder operation in detail and gives circuits for
corresponding decoder and servoamplifier at
receiving end of data link.— M. F. Bessant,
Multi-Channel Proportional Remote Control,
Wireless World, Oct. 1973, p 479-482.
GND +5
decoding two Touch-Tone digits to give oper- responding to any two keys in given row or col- relay. Similarly, pushing of # key generates 941
ation or release of relay by remote control over umn on Touch-Tone keyboard. As example, * and 1477 Hz that can be used for deenergizing
wire line. Three 567 tone decoders and 7402 key generates 941 and 1209 Hz, and circuit can relay. — W. J. Hosking, Simple New TT Decoder,
quad gate are adjusted to recognize tones cor- be adjusted so these two frequencies energize 73 Magazine, April 1976, p 52-53.
LAMP CONTROL WITHOUT CONDUIT— Moto-

rola MOC3011 optoisolator permits control of
large lamp, motor, pool pump, and other AC
loads from remote location with low-voltage
signal wiring while meeting building codes.
Choice of triac depends on load being han-
dled.— P. O'Neil, "Applications of the MOC301 1
780,
Triac p Driver,"
5. Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1978, AN-
-WW
V.F.O. enclosure
V.F.O.
d.c. output maximum O-IOv.
— VvV
100K
14K Imf :
WIRELESS REMOTE TUNING— Frequency-to- Varactor
NC
voltage converter for transceiver responds to
AF output of control receiver and feeds corre-
sponding DC voltage to varactor tuning diode
in VFO of transceiver, for remote wireless tun-
Raytheon
4151
ing. In most cases only a few volts of DC varia-
> 10K
tion across varactor are sufficient, so variable -ÂAr
audio oscillator at remote-control location need
have range of only a few kilohertz. — J. Schultz, — W\r
H.F. Operating — Remote Control Style, CQ, 6.8K

March 1978, p 22-23 and 90.
5K
Nk
JT
10K
A.F. input
+9-15v.
maximum 0 lOKHz
n/
BC109
BLIP-AND-HOLD RADIO CONTROL— Coder When switch A is closed, 7490 is clocked by neg- ferent blip-and-hold combinations can be ob-
uses two ICs to generate sequence of pulses ative edge of oscillator waveform and Tr, be- tained by suitable arrangement of switches and
suitable for actuators of radio control system. comes forward-biased. Output of NAND gate 2 gates. — G. D. Southern, Sequence Generator
During standby, oscillator formed by NAND then drops to zero, stopping oscillator and hold- for Radio Control, Wireless World, Jan. 1976, p
gate 1 operates at 0.5 Hz as determined by C, ing outputs of 7490. When switch A is opened, 60.
and R, and all four outputs of 7490 1C are zero. outputs of 7490 again drop to zero. Many dif-
REMOTE CONTROL CIRCUITS 865
500CT
500-Hz CONTROL TONE — Developed for use as

wireless FM remote control for keying trans-
mitter at another location by sending keyed
audio tone over radio link, acoustic link fed by
loudspeaker, or audio line. Frequency is about
PLL TONE DECODER — Used in simple wireless 500 Hz. — J. Schultz, H.F. Operating — Remote
FM remote control set up for keying transmit- Control Style, CQ, March 1978, p 22-23 and 90.
ter. Keyed 500-Hz tone output of FM receiver at
transmitter site acts through 567 PLL to operate
6-V relay whose contacts are in keying circuit of
transmitter — J. Schultz, H.F. Operating— Re-
mote Control Style, CQ, March 1978, p 22-23
and 90.
TWO-TONE CONTROL — Used to perform sim-

ple ON/OFF auxiliary function via repeater input.
Two 567 decoders energize relay for input tone
of 1800 Hz, with latching, and release it for 1950
Hz. Diodes are 1 N4001 . Relay can be 12 or 24 V.
Q1 is 2N3905, 2N3906, MPS6521, or 2N2222 —
W. Hosking, A Single Tone Can Do It, 73 Mag-
azine, Nov. 1977, p 184-185.
+ 5V
(nom.)
TONE DECODER — Replaces resonant reeds ital high-pass characteristic that is passed ponents to left of dashed line may be common
commonly used in multichannel radio-con- through inverter to give digital low-pass char- to all these elements. Article covers multichan-
trolled models to detect modulation frequency acteristic. Values of Rx and Cx determine critical nel systems in detail, along with use of time-
being transmitted. Use of 1C logic has advan- frequency; for 900 Hz, use 150,000 ohms and division multiplexing. — C. Attenborough, Radio
tage that range of audio frequencies can exceed 0.015 /liF. To obtain n nonoverlapping bandpass Control Tone Decoder, Wireless World, Dec.
an octave, whereas reeds cannot because they characteristics, n - 1 basic elements with dif-
1973, p 593-594.
respond to second harmonic. Decoder has dig- ferent critical frequencies are required; com-
CHAPTER 76
Repeater Circuits
Audible and subaudible tone generators and decoders provide access to
desired FM repeater and give autopatch for telephone connections. Also
included are time-out timers, phone-ring-counting control, microprocessor
control, carrier-operated control, VOX, and lightning detector for remote site.
TIME-OUT WARNING
+12V TO 13.8V DC
O
TIME-OUT WARNING — Provides either visual

or audible warning after preset interval up to 3
min, when pin 1 of first NE555 is grounded by
push-to-talk switch on microphone of mobile
transmitter. When preset limit is reached, pin 3
provides ground for second NE555 that makes
it pulse at 2-Hz rate to warn that time limit for
use of repeater is being approached. — F. Sharp,
IOOajF
Time-Out Warning, QST, Oct. 1976, p 67. PTT
ON SWITCH
MIC O/
16V V ,
(§)■ DELAY TO 3 MINUTES
(D * 2 Hz APPROX. FLASH RATE
TO PTT
12 V KEY UP,
GROUND
KEY DOWN ,
O— VW
470 TIMER IS AUTOPATCH KEYER— Simple keyer
oscillator using NE555 timer was designed for
autopatch in repeater having decoder bandpass
SIX ACCESS TONES — Provides 0.4-s bursts at tinuously, connect frequency counter to junc- from 2980 to 3080 Hz. Adjust R2 to 3042 Hz. Out-
choice of six audio frequencies, for access to up tion of 0.05-/*F capacitor and 1-megohm resis- put options for loudspeaker and microphone
to six different repeaters. Value of Cl in transistor, set all pots at minimum, adjust R1 for 2500 are shown. Adjust R3 for required input/output
tor circuit determines duration of burst. AF os- Hz, set selector switch to position 1, and adjust level; use variable resistor if desired. Normally
cillator uses Signetics NE566V phase-locked corresponding control for desired frequency. closed keyer contacts can also be connected
loop, with tone frequencies determined by Cl Repeat for other pots. — G. M. Dickson, A Tone- between pin 7 and ground. Supply can be 9-V
and R1 plus R2 through R7. To adjust initially, Burst Generator for Repeater Access, QST, April transistor radio battery. — E. Noll, Circuits and
remove Q1 from circuit so oscillator runs con- Techniques, Ham Radio, April 1976, p 40-43.
1974, p 30-31.
866
REPEATER CIRCUITS
+ I2V
867
LIGHTNING DETECTOR— Uses 20-foot wire

strung around repeater house to pick up pulses
induced by lightning. Keep wire well away from
antenna and transmitter. Pulse at SCR gate
turns it on and energizes relay that activates
signaling device at desired location. Circuit au-
tomatically resets itself after capacitor dis-
charges through 10K resistor— P. A. Stark, Sim-
ple Lightning Detector, 73 Magazine, April 1973,
p 85.
repeater when signal arrives at receiver; pro- are small-signal silicon diodes such as 1N914.
vides 3-min timer, CW ID timer, and tail or delay U1 and U2 are 7404 TTL hex inverters. — C. M.
at end of transmission; and generates Morse Robbins, The Microprocessor and Repeater
code CW ID. Article gives flow charts and pro- Control, QST, Jan. 1977, p 30-34.
30 if
SUBAUDIO TONES — Six-channel subaudible

encoder uses twin-T oscillator covering 93 to
170 Hz. Tones are adjustable with 20-turn 10K
trimpots. Used with 2-meter amateur transmit-
TIME-OUT WARNING — Transceiver-actuated ters to access and maintain signal through re-
circuit inhibits FM repeater timer override. Uses peater having subaudible tone decoder. When
556 dual timer and two 555 timers. Triggers on transmitted signal opens up receiver of re-
positive step-input voltage from transceiver peater, subaudible tone on incoming audio
when PTT switch is pushed. If negative trigger- peater. At end of 10 s, red LED goes out and closes relay and permits transmitter to key up
ing is preferred, omit U1A. Values of R1 and Cl cycle is completed. If transmission time is less and repeat signal. Choice of tones permits use
provide delay that is 10 s less than repeater than that of repeater timer, indicator is recycled of different repeaters in given area. For 93-107
timer. With 60-s repeater, delay should be 50 s. when PTT switch is pressed again. R1-C1 deter- Hz, use 12K for Rx; for 98-116 Hz, use 8.2K; and
Flip-flop U2 flashes green LED 80 times per min- mine green flash time, and R2-C2 determine red for 114-170 Hz, use jumper. Article gives con-
ute during this delay. After 50 s, U2 is disabled flash time. — H. M. Berlin, Time-Out Warning In- struction details. — W. G. Moneysmith, Subau-
and U3 flashes red LED for 10 sas indication that dicator for FM Repeater Users, Ham Radio, June dible Tone Encoder, 73 Magazine, Oct. 1977, p
transmission must stop to avoid timing out re- 52-53.
1976, p 62-63.
AUDIO OUT
TO MIKE
Caller then hangs up, waits 20 s, redials number 1800-Hz TONE BURST — Developed to provide
and lets it ring three times again, then hangs up. access to repeater requiring accurate tone fre-
Circuit then performs desired control function. quency. Half of 556 dual timer serves as mono
Any combination of rings can be used as long MVBR having ON time of about 400 ms. Other
as total is less than nine. Decoder U2 is pro- half is free-running oscillator that is disabled
grammed by moving two jumper wires to var- when mono goes low. Transistor starts tone
ious outputs of U2. Relay K2 is chosen to give burst when push-to-talk switch is closed. For
desired momentary, latching, or stepping func- frequency stability, resistors with asterisk
tion. Relay K1 is used for validating phone line. should be cermet or wirewound. R1 is 15- or 20-
If remote station keying voltage is taken turn trimmer pot having low temperature coef-
through contacts of K1, interruption of phone ficient and giving about 30 Hz change per
line prevents activation of transmitter. Cl turn. — L. Meyer, One 1C Tone Burster, 73 Mag-
stores voltage during brief interruptions such as azine, April 1976, p 55.
when phone is ringing. Article gives detailed

explanation of ring-counting circuit. LEDs 11-14
indicate status of control sequence and aid in
troubleshooting. K1 and K2 are sensitive DPDT
PHONE-RING REMOTE CONTROL— Repeater or relays with 8000-ohm coils. R11 is selected for
other unattended equipment can be turned on desired time setting. — R. C. Heptig, Automatic
or off with ordinary telephone. Phone at remote Telephone Controller for Your Repeater, Ham
station is called and allowed to ring three times. Radio, Nov. 1974, p 44-48.
FUNCTION DECODER — Simple controller for high when digit is decoded. Four 1N914 diodes all logic except for output stage. Regulated VCC
single repeater uses 3-digit control code (523) form OR gate that triggers U3A to create clock of 5 V is obtained from 7805 regulator con-
to turn repeater on and 524 to turn it off. Digits pulse with each digit received. Other output of nected to 12 V. — W. J. Hosking, Simple Se-
must be in correct sequence. Digit decoder (not U3A triggers 555 timer U5, set for delay of about quential Decoder, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1978, p
shown) uses TTL-compatible inputs which go 8 s. At end of delay, timer triggers U3B to reset 166-167.
869
REPEATER CIRCUITS
100 Hz — Simple and stable subaudible tone

generator serves for access to FM repeaters.
Frequency is adjusted to that of repeater with
20K pot. Will operate from car battery. — Cir-
cuits, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1973, p 143.
itive ON/OFF action. Time-out is controlled by

setting of R8 and value of C3. To monitor re-
TO CATHODE
peater or simplex channel for call without lis-
OF CHAN A
OSCILLATOR tening to other conversations, set timer for
about 5 s. When call comes in, first few words
will be at normal volume so call can be identi-
TO CATHODE
fied. At time-out, volume will drop to low level.
OF CHAN B
OSCILLATOR
If call is for you, disable COR for normal listen-
ing. Search-lock uses single SN7400, with gates
G1 and G2 connected as oscillator and gates G3
and G4 as dual D flip-flop. Q3 acts as lock to stop
oscillator. With no input carrier, Q3 is off and
NOTE GATES 1 THROUGH 4
CONTAINED IN US (SN7400I oscillator makes Q4 and Q5 switch between
channels A and B alternately. If signal arrives on
COR FOR LINKING — Carrier-operated relay will two channels, for linking two repeaters or using one channel, oscillator stops on it and relay
operate repeater, serve as guard receiver for re- two-channel drive receiver. Q1 and Q2 are con- closes, bringing repeater transmitter on. — R. C.
peater input channels, and provide loudspeaker nected as Darlington amplifier for negative- Heptig and R. D. Shriner, Carrier-Operated Relay
muting when no station is being received. Sim- going control signals, as found in vacuum-tube for Repeater Linking, Ham Radio, July 1976, p
57-59.
ple search-lock feature following CR4 controls receivers. Dual Schmitt trigger U1 provides pos-
146-MHz RECEIVER PREAMP— Uses 146-MHz front-end overload problems from strong adja- Input and output for filter should be exactly 50
bandpass crystal filter to suppress front-end in- cent-channel amateur signals. Filter response is ohms. — J. M. Hood, Monolithic Crystal Filter
termodulation-distortion products (IMD) in VHF down 40 dB at ±38 kHz and down over 50 dB Application in Amateur VHF Repeaters, QST,
repeater circuits while providing gain of 6-8 dB beyond 60 kHz from filter center frequency. Fil- July 1975, p 27-29 and 48.
to overcome filter insertion loss. Also helps ter used is Piezo Technology TM-4133VBP.
J k !A
+ 9-12 V
♦- 12
12 VV
REPEATER
5A
n r'lSV CIRCUITRY
_FAST BLO
CROWBAR — Developed to protect portable re- that can reach repeater. Diode prevents damage
peaters from reverse or excessive voltage when by incorrect polarity. Use fast-blowing fuse. —
operating on emergency power supply. Zener Circuits, 73 Magazine, April 1977, p 164.
voltage rating determines maximum voltage
TONE BURST FOR MIKE— Uses NE566 PLL func-

tion generator to provide tone entry into 2-
meter repeaters. Output is fed into volume con-
trol of any AM transistor radio, and loudspeaker
is held in front of transceiver microphone when
tone is desired. — F. J. Derfler, An Acoustically
Coupled Digital Keyed Squeaker for Tone Burst
Entry, 73 Magazine, Aug. 1973, p 27-30.
detector through 10-/xF electrolytic. Series re-

sistance inpath through 35-/*F electrolytic con-
trols its charge-up time and thus controls delay
of relay pickup. Adjust 100K pot to give desired
rh turn-on delay in range from fraction of second
to about 4 s. Resistance divider shown provides
DELAYED VOX — Minimizes unintentional trig- erated relay until 20-s lapse in transmission relay dropout delay of about 20 s, which pre-
gering of repeater by using timer requiring 3 s occurs. System then requires another 3-s carrier vents VOX circuit from dropping out repeater
of continuous carrier and audio on input re- to restore normal operation. Q1 is common- during lapses in speech. — J. Everhart, A De-
ceiver of repeater to turn on transmitter. Re- emitter amplifier with gain adjusted by 500K layed VOX for Repeaters, 73 Magazine, April
peater isthen controlled by its own carrier-op- pot. Audio peaks from Q1 feed full-wave diode
1974, p 17 and 19-20.
repeater mode from carrier to tone-access, and

CONTROL-FUNCTION DECODER— Circuit de- device. Circuit uses two dual mono MVBRs. switching to remote receiver. Q1-Q6 can be al-
tects predetermined 3-digit sequence of Touch- Output of U1A goes to reset terminal of U1B. most any NPN silicon transistors, such as
Tone signals and sets flip-flop to provide re- Output of U1B goes to reset terminals of monos 2N3904. U3 can be MC14001 or CD4001. Num-
quired output for activating desired function. U2A and U2B. Mono outputs drive RS flip-flop bers in boxes and parentheses refer to edge
Another 3-digit sequence, differing in only third to provide output required for desired control connector pins. — T. E. Doyle, Control Function
digit, resets flip-flop for turning off controlled fu nction, such as control of autopath, switching Decoder, Ham Radio, March 1977, p 66-67.
*12
REPEATER CIRCUITS 871
^~P call
SUBAUDIBLE TONE ENCODER— Simple crys-

tal-controlled oscillator drives CD4020 CMOS
divider to give output frequency below normal
voice range, for providing tone access to re-
peater. With 1.120-MHz crystal and division
CONTROL-TONE GENERATOR— Uses NE566V call tones. Output level of PLL is adjusted so ratio of 8192, output is 136.7 Hz. Output circuit
PLL as tone generator, directly connected to tone is same amplitude as voice. — K. Wyatt, Pri- is RC filter that converts square wave to trian-
microphone input of transmitter for activating vate Call System for VHF FM, Ham Radio, Sept. gle, with pot setting level. Article tells how to
loudspeaker in receiver being called. Operation choose crystals for other output frequencies
1977, p 62-64.
is similar to that of paging units using selective and division ratios. — C. Haines, Jr., Go Tone for
Ten, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1976, p 22-23.
1800-Hz COMMAND OSCILLATOR— Connects

across microphone leads of FM transceiver, to
produce control (command) tone for entry to
repeater or for other purposes. Switch may be
placed in supply lead if desired. Q1 can be2N404
or one of transistors in 2N1303, 2N2904,
2N3638, 2N6516, or 2N6533 series. Q2 can be
2N1308, 2N2712, 2N3565, 2N3569, 2N6513, or
equivalent. CTmM is 0.0062 pF.— Circuits, 73
Magazine, April 1973, p 132.
System prevents fringe-area station from block-

ACCESS CONTROL FOR OPEN REPEATER— guard control switch off latches output of U5D ing repeater access for local users. When re-
Permits repeater to run open, for user access high, letting repeater run open.) When control ceiver squelch is operated 3 times in succession
without access tone, when there is no outside switch is on, repeater can be accessed only by by signal not having one of access tones, input
interference on input frequency. Carrier-oper- use of guarded input applied to Q1, such as is automatically guarded for 15 min by timer U3-
ated relay (COR) pulse is shaped by 7400 gates 2000-Hz tone burst, 1336-Hz Touch-Tone signal, U4 unless accepted access tone arrives. — R. B.
U5A and U5B, for keying transmitter through or 110.9-Hz private line. Repeater then remains Shreve, Troubleshooting Logic Circuits, Ham
U5C as long as output of U5D is high. (Turning open for 5 s after duration of each transmission. Radio, Feb. 1977, p 56-59.
+ I2V
ACCESS-TONE GENERATOR— Produces audio

burst for 0.5 s at frequency determined by R1
and Cl, for use with FM transceiver as subau-
PTT dible tone generator to access repeaters. Pro-
LINE +J2V vides buffered outputs of square waves as well
as triangle waves. Uses NE566 function gener-
ator as voltage-controlled oscillator having ex-
OV
cellent stability and linearity. R1 should be be-
tween 2K and 20K. SCR should be type that
triggers at 70 g A. — E. Kanter, PLL 1C Applica-
ACCESS TONE-BURST— Generates 1-s tone by R2C2 time constant, triggered by push-to- tions for Hams, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1973, p 47-
burst at specified audio frequency such as 1800 talk switch (PTT). Large capacitor C3 powers 49.
Hz each time transmitter is energized, to pro- MVBR during burst, with capacitor normally
vide access to a desired repeater. Uses CMOS charged to 12 V through PTT circuit during re-
CD4001AE quad NOR gate, which is small ceive. Supply voltage is taken through PTT relay
enough so entire circuit can be fitted in micro- in transmitter. — G. Hinkle, Tone-Burst Genera-
phone housing. Gates are connected as astable tor for Repeater Accessing, Ham Radio, Sept.
MVBR, with ON time of tone burst determined
1977, p 68-69.
- 12 V + 12 V
TIME-OUT TIMER — Prevents unnecessary re-

peater timeouts by generating warning tone in
loudspeaker of mobile transceiver when trans-
mitter ison too long. Normal push-to-talk line
is broken and connected to points A and D.
Pushing talk button starts timer. Time in sec-
onds is 1.1 R3C3, with R3 in megohms and C3
in microfarads. Thus, 1 megohm and 27 gF give
30 s, while 2 megohms and 81 gF give 180 s. —
J. A. Kvochick, Keeping the Wind Down, 73
65-240 Hz — Output of 65-240 kHz crystal os-

cillator isdivided by 1000 in three SN7490s to
give 65-240 Hz tone required for access to am-
ateur FM repeater. Choose crystal to give ex-
actly desired frequency. Q1 and Q2 are
MPS 6513, and Q3 is 2N1613. Supply can be 9 to
15 VDC from transceiver or from 9-V battery. —
P. H. Wiese, Rock Solid Subaudible Tone Gen-
erator, 73 Magazine, April 1974, p 79-81.
CHAPTER 77
Resistance Measuring Circuits

Includes ohmmeter circuits of various types for measuring resistances from
under 0.001 ohm to 500 megohms, along with continuity checkers providing
audible or LED indications, potentiometer tester, RLC bridges, and AC
ohmmeter for nonpolarized measurements. See also Instrumentation and
Test chapters.
AUDIBLE OHMMETER — Circuit is built around

555 timer. Resistance detection range is from 0
ohms to about 10 megohms. At high end of
range, output is series of clicks from loud-
speaker, and at low end is high-pitched tone.
Intermediate resistance values produce differ-
ent tones. Current through unknown resistance
is only a few microamperes, so semiconductor
junctions can be checked without damage. R2
sets frequency for 0 ohms. Can also be used as
code practice oscillator if Rx terminals are
shorted and ground lead of pin 1 is keyed. — J.
Schultz, An Ohmmeter Potpourri, CQ, June
1978, p 32-33.
500-MEGOHM LINEAR-SCALE OHMMETER— difference between outputs of A, and A2, as dard Rc.— E. H. Armanino, Extending the Range
Resistance multiplier using 741 opamp reduces guide for minimizing difference during mea- of the Linear-Scale Ohmmeter, Electronics,
current drain when measuring low resistance surement. Rssets meter for full-scale deflection Dec. 22, 1977, p 93-94.
values (below 10 ohms). LEDs indicate voltage when measuring resistor value equal to stan-
873
330
1/4 W
TRANSISTOR
BATTERY
BRIDGE FOR 0.1—5 OHMS — Set meter reading nient scale marking by adjusting R2. Calibration
to zero with multiturn pot R1 when test leads curve is then made for meter scale by using
are shorted. Simple one-point calibration is other normal resistances. — J. Schultz, An
made by using known low resistance for about Ohmmeter Potpourri, CQ, June 1978, p 32-33.
midrange value and setting meter to conve-
MOISTURE TESTER — Simple probe tells when

plants need watering. Amount of moisture and
minerals in soil together determine current
available for LED. Almost full brilliance indicates
adequate moisture, and no illumination means
plant needs water badly. Probe can be No. 14
wire filed to point and centered with epoxy in
3/is-inch copper tubing, or simply two stiff probe
wires about 1 inch apart. — W. L. MacDowell,
AUDIBLE OHMMETER — Volume and/or pitch of tapped windings, connected as shown to give The VioletTester, 73 Magazine, May 1975, p 52-
one-transistor audio oscillator varies with resis- three-winding transformer. Operates from two
tance across test terminals, to give audible in- 1.5-V cells in series. Will respond to resistance
dication of continuity and relative resistance values from short to about 100K. Volume in- 53.
without looking at meter. Can also be used as creases and pitch rises as resistance is in-
transistor and diode tester, signal injector, code creased. For very low resistance, tone resem-
practice oscillator, and CW monitor. Oscillator bles croaking of frog. — Build the El Sapo Tester,
uses transistor-type transformer having center- 73 Magazine, Dec. 1977, p 184-185.
SENSE ELECTRODES
470k
ALL CAPACITORS I ,,F

Q. & Q = 2N2484
WATER-SEEPAGE ALARM — National LM3909 (Qa and Qb) become astable MVBR operating at can be two strips of stainless steel on insulators
flasher 1C operating from 1.5-V cell provides rate that starts at 1 Hz and increases with leak-
or zigzag path in copper of printed-wiring
safe water-seepage alarm for potentially damp age between electrodes. Pulse waveform ap- board. Place damp finger across gap to test
floors because there is no connection to power plied to pin 8 of 1C varies timing current of alarm. — P. Lefferts, Power-Miser Flasher 1C Has
line. When sensing electrodes pass about 0.25 flasher, resulting in distinctively modulated Many Novel Applications, EDN Magazine,
/*A through moisture, pair of 2N2484 transistors tone output for loudspeaker of alarm. Sensors March 20, 1976, p 59-66.
RESISTANCE MEASURING CIRCUITS 875
LINEAR-SCALE OHMMETER— Unknown resis-

tance value is arithmetic product of standard
resistor value and current reading in milliam-
peres. With IK standard resistor, deflections
from 0 to 1 A correspond to resistance readings
from 0 to IK. Requires no calibration and no
zero adjustment. Can be made multirange by
switching in different standard resistors. — J.
Schultz, An Ohmmeter Potpourri, CQ, June
1978, p 32-33.
THREE-RANGE MILLIOHMMETER— Solid-state

design measures resistance values accurately
down to less than 0.001 ohm. Full-scale values
for ranges are 10, 1, and 0.1 ohms. — Circuits, 73
Magazine, July 1974, p 80.
=J1>H0.05
t (N34 1M I 1 R1
-wv-mM —
1M DC 02
P4 <-^WV-»-
BT 1 — Battery, 9-volt rectangular.

D1 — Zener diode, 6.2-V.
J1-J4, incl. — Standard tip jacks.
Ml — Panel meter, 0-50 nA dc; Radio Shack
22-051 or equiv.
P1-P3, incl. — Standard tip plugs.
P4 — Standard test probe. Mount 1-megohm,
1/4-watt resistor inside probe tip.
P5, P6 — Standard test probe.
51 —Q2 Spst
Q1, — Motorola
toggle. MPF102; do not substitute.
52 — 2-pole, 3-position rotary.
P6<- 53 — 2-pole, 5-position rotary.
against peg at high end of scale. When ohmme-

ter leads are shorted, zero pot is adjusted so
FET VOM — Use two FETs in balanced circuit. bridge. Resistance measurements use linear meter reads 0 ohms. Article covers construction
Meter reads zero when circuit is balanced with ohms-readout system, with single meter scale and calibration. — J. Rusgrove, An FET Volt-
R11. Values being measured produce imbalance Ohmmeter with Linear Ohms Readout, QST,
serving for all resistance and voltage measure-
linearly proportional to output voltage of ments. In ohms position, meter will rest gently March 1978, p 16-18.
L R 10
ImHI0.1 (ohms) (ohms!
1.0 0.01
(mF) 100
0.01 10
100
0.01 - 10.
1.0 10 0.1 10
1.0
10. 100 0.1
0.1 100
0.1 - 100. 10
100.
1000 1000
0.1 10 -
1.0 -- 1000 100 1.0 100
1.0 - 1000 1.0 10
1000
100 -
10. -
100. 10 -
RLC BRIDGE — Maxwell bridge uses only one re- and Rb can be calibrated initially over their var- 10. - as astable oscillator running at about 1000 Hz
active element for measuring resistance, induc- iable ranges by using standard resistors. Mea- 100
with values
10 - shown for R and C, drawing 6.5 mA
tance, and capacitance. Wagner ground bal- surements are not affected by frequency of driv- from 9-V 1battery.
- Article covers construction
ances stray internal capacitances to ground to ing source. Circuit is set up as shown for and calibration and gives balance equations for
obtain perfect null. Measurement ranges are measuring inductance. If standard inductance all measurements.— J. H. Ellison, Universal L, C,
1 -
shown in table. Over fixed range, RA can be cal- is used in place of Lx, unknown capacitor at CB R Bridge, Ham Radio, April 1976, p 54-55.
ibrated to read inductance values directly. RA can be measured. Signetics NE555 is connected
1 -
LOW-VOLTAGE OHMMETER— Combines sta-

ble constant-current source U1-CR1-RV with DC
amplifier U2 having gain of 10 to keep applied
voltage down to 0.1 V. Output is linearly pro-
portional to unknown resistance. Resistances
well below 1 ohm can be measured accurately.
U2 scales 0-100 mV unknown voltage to 0-1 V
at output, so IK resistor under test can be read
as 1.000K on DVM scale. U2 should be offset-
nulled to eliminate zero error, for best low-scale
accuracy, by shorting input and adjusting R4 for
0.000 V out of U2. Full-scale calibration involves
trimming individual range values of Rv for cor-
rect output, while using reference value for R*.
Fuse and clamp diodes protect range resistors,
and R5 protects opamp. — W. Jung, An 1C Op
Amp Update, Ham Radio, March 1978, p 62-69.
OC, "1
OC,
QVC
-ÊTE^-
OC. OC,
oo
—c
NE— 555 OC,

6 3
timer controls output at frequency determined other half. Output current is independent of fre-
AC OHMMETER — Optoisolator circuit operat- by R,, R2, and CT. R, is made very much less than quency and duty cycle up to 150 Hz. With Mon-
ing from single battery develops alternating R2 but should not be below about 1 K. Frequency santo MCT-2 optoisolators, R3 and R„ are 330
current for measuring resistance of soils and value is 1 .44/(R, + 2R2)CT. Output switching ma- ohms and R5-R8 are each 22K. — D. J. Beckwitt,
construction materials without errors due to trix is controlled by timer so OC, and OC4 are on AC Ohmmeter Provides Novel Use for Opto-lso-
polarization and earth-current effects. 555 1C lators, EDN Magazine, July 5, 1974, p 70.
for one half-cycle and OC2 and OC3 are on for
CONTINUITY CHECKER— National LM3909 1C

operating from 1.5-V cell provides enough
audio power to drive loudspeaker when probes
are shorted by resistance up to about 100 ohms.
By probing two points in rapid succession,
small differences in resistance can be detected
by noticeable differences in tone; this feature is
useful for identifying windings of trans-
formers.— "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," Na-
AN-154, p 4-5.
Sla
R feed back
R INPUT
Rshunt Roffset Rfeedb>
Scale
1v.
100v.
1M
10M 0
lOv. Open 10M 0 300K
10M 1.5M 1.5M

30K
100mv 1.5M
Open
10a.
lOmv Open 100K 1.5M
Open 1.5M
1.5M
.03
Open 30K 0 30K
la. .03 0 300K
.3 0 300K
lOOma .3.0
3K
30K 0
lOma 30 K
Ima 3K 0
100/ja 300K
0 0
300 K
0 0 6K
LINEAR-OHMS MULTIMETER— Full-scale value timeter functions. For dual multimeter, dupli- 50/ia
10/ja 0
0
for each of five resistance ranges is determined cate circuit for other section to permit Open
Open 0 0
by values used for R1-R5. Table gives values of measuring input and output signals simulta-
Open 0 0 3K
30K
resistors connected to each layer of three-gang neously.— J. Sandler, ME's New Twin Elec- 5yua
500na 0
12-position selector switch to obtain five volt- tronic Multimeter, Modern Electronics, Oct. Open 60KK
300
lOOna Open 0 1.5M 1.5M
age ranges and 12 current ranges for other mul- 1978, p 58-61. 300K
300K
Open
Open
.3
DOWN TO 0.05 OHM — Switch S3 gives choice

of three ranges in linear ohmmeter circuit de-
veloped for measuring very small values of re-
sistance. Values of R4, R5. and R6 require ad-
justment during initial calibration. — Circuits, 73
Magazine, June 1975, p 161.
SI(AKB>,S2<AXB)- 2 POLE PUSH-

BUTTON. NORMALLY OPEN
S3a
LINEAR-SCALE OHMMETER— Provides accu-

rate measurements of resistance in four ranges,
with linear scale at high end of each. — Circuits,
73 Magazine, Feb. 1977, p 27.
CIRCUIT TRACER — Continuity tester delivers

continuous audio tone when its test terminals
are connected by resistance less than about 1
ohm. Circuit under test does not receive more
than 3 V or 300 mA, depending on resistance
between terminals. Tester ticks softly when
switched on but is open-circuited, as reminder
that battery drain is then about 0.8 mA. Tester
uses sections of Motorola low-power MC3302P
quad comparator as measurement comparator,
600-Hz tone oscillator, AF amplifier, and ticker.
Pins 3 and 12 of 1C are used in power supply. —
R. C. Marshall, Continuity Bleeper for Circuit
Tracing, Ham Radio, July 1977, p 67-69.
ECONOMY TICKER
NO-CALIBRATION OHMMETER— When un-

known resistor Rx is connected, milliammeter
reading is Rx/Rc where Rc is value of known stan-
dard resistor used. Rx is then equal to meter
reading in milliamperes multiplied by value of
Rcin ohms. Full-scale deflection is thus obtained
on 1-mA meter when Rx is 100K. Other ranges
can be obtained by changing value of Rc, using
range switch if desired. Meter has automatic
zeroing because V„ rises to exactly 3 V when
measuring leads are shorted and no current
flows through meter. — V. Ramprakash, Direct-
Reading Ohmmeter Needs No Calibration, Elec-
tronics, Nov. 11, 1976, p 115-116.
Power input
3 pin
U-ground
plug
POT TESTER — Developed for testing noisy 10K

wirewound linear pots used in control of the-
atrical lighting system. Circuit detects any mo-
mentary open and drives LED to produce visible
flash lasting about 0.1 s. Circuit operates from
-10 V provided by bridge and AC transformer.
Left half of IC1 acts as comparator whose out-
put stays low as long as input is above thresh-
old voltage. When pot passes open point, pin 5
goes high and charges C3, making right half of
R2 IC1 turn on LED. — C. J. Shakespeare, Test Your
Pot, Modem Electronics, Oct. 1978, p 38-39.
-lOv. (nominal)
ioo kn
quad opamp measures relative change in con- electrolysis effect. Wien-bridge oscillator hav- giving output voltage equal to absolute value of
centration of salt solution by monitoring its ing R4C, and R2R , as arms of bridge generates 1- input voltage. — M. Ahmon, One-Chip Conduc-
conductance. Use of alternating current kHz signal for driving amplifier A2 through so- tivity Meter Monitors Salt Concentration, Elec-
through solution eliminates errors caused by lution. P, controls oscillator amplitude, and P; ironies. Sept. 15, 1978, p 132-133.
INDICATORS
CABLE TESTER — Five Signetics NE555V timers mains balanced as long as clock pulses at op- end of line turns on red LED to indicate that line
check all lines of four-conductor cable for opens posite ends of line are identical. Clock pulse at is shorted. With good cable line, neither LED is
and for short-circuit conditions. Differential timer end of one line turns on green LED to in- on. — "Signetics Analog Data Manual," Signet-
transistor pair at one end of each cable line re- dicate open in line. Clock pulse only at transistor ics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 730.
CHAPTER 78
Sampling Circuits
Methods of sampling and holding analog signals, including digital selection of

sampling level and long-term storage of signals in digital form as substitute
for storage CRO.
TWO SLEW RATES — Cost of sample-and-hold

circuits is reduced by using high slew rate only
during sample period. Programmable piA776
opamp permits switching from high rate re-
quiring 50-nA input bias current to holding am-
plifier mode requiring only 750-pA input bias
current. Output level is held constant within 1%
for about 2 s, making circuit ideal for digital
readouts. — M. K. Vander Kooi, Low Cost Sam-
ple-and-Hold Circuit, EDNIEEE Magazine, Nov.
1, 1971, p 46.
+7 5
operational transconductance amplifier feeds Input voltage is sampled for duration of strobe sion, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 165-170.
881
TRACK AND HOLD — When track input control

is 0.8 V or less, gate in SN75180 holds 2N4391
transistor source-drain path closed so input sig-
nal goes to output unchanged. When control
voltage is increased to 2 V, gate opens path
through transistor, so signal voltage stored at
that instant in 0.1-pF capacitor is held at output.
Track time is greater than 500 ns for 1-V input,
giving hold time over 6 s. Circuit uses two
SN72310 wideband voltage-follower op-
amps. — "The Linear and Interface Circuits Data
Dallas, TX, 1973, p 4-41.
256 8-BIT SAMPLE/STORE— Low-cost substi- A/D converter whose digital output is fed into counter. At 250 kHz, shift register stores input
tute for storage oscilloscope can be used to shift register holding 256 8-bit words. Separate signal for 1 ms. Article gives details of circuit
study analog variables in speech synthesis, clock for shift register is continuously adjusta- operation. — K. P. Roby, Transient Signal Ana-
transient signal analysis, and destructive test- ble from about 250 kHz down to about 4 s per lyzer Has MultipleUses, EDN Magazine, Oct. 20,
ing of components. Circuit is basically a tracking cycle, with output going to 12-stage ripple 1974, p 46—48.
SAMPLING CIRCUITS 883
ANALOG INPUT
Rr
NONINVERTING SAMPLE AND HOLD— out of C„ while SW2 provides fast resetting of
Matched pair of FETs gives high input resis- capacitor voltage to zero. Similar FET pair and
tance for analog input signal greater than 10,z opamp provide output voltage proportional to
ohms, while output resistance of FET pair is sampled value. — "Analog Switches and Their
under 12K. Opamp A, acts as buffer and allows Applications," Siliconix, Santa Clara, CA, 1976,
C, to charge rapidly. Use of DG181 analog
switches limits leakage current flowing into or p 4-7— 4-8.
DIGITAL SAMPLE AND HOLD— When strobe

input is applied, RC low-pass network between
reset and trigger inputs of Exar XR-2240 pro-
grammable timer/counter resets and then trig-
gers timer, sets output of bistable latch to high
state, and activates counter. Circuit generates
staircase voltage at opamp output. When stair-
case level reaches that of analog input to be
sampled, comparator changes state, activates
bistable latch, and stops count. Opamp output
voltage level then corresponds to sampled an-
alog input. Sample is held until next strobe sig-
nal. Minimum recycle time is about 6 ms. Sup-
ply voltage can be 4-1 5 V. — "Timer Data Book,"

p 11-18.
ANALOG SAMPLE-AND-HOLD— Uses AM685

time (determined by pulse input) is negative, in-
comparator for continuous sampling of analog tegrator voltage ramps to more positive value.
voltage at summing node formed by R, and R2. Circuit soon reaches equilibrium, at which out-
Complementary logic outputs of comparator
put voltage is equal to —10 times value of sam-
drive differential indicator formed by AM1 12 pled waveform. Article gives performance
opamp. When error voltage at summing node
waveforms for sampling video pulses. — S. Den-
is positive, comparator latches in high state and dinger, High-Speed Analog Sampler Uses Only
causes output opamp to integrate toward more Two IC's, EDN Magazine, May 20, 1977, p 128
negative voltage. When error voltage at latch and 130.
NEUTRALIZATION OVER ±7.5 V RANGE—

Switching transients are attenuated in sample-
and-hold circuit using DG181 FET analog switch
by adding neutralization derived from comple-
mentary signal coupled through upper switch
of DG181. Charge transferred from second
switch is then opposed to that from main chan-
nel. Circuit is controlled by input logic signal.
With compensation, change in transferred
charge is less than 5 picocoulombs for input sig-
nal range from -7.5 V to +7.5 V. — "Analog
R)
loon
NONINVERTING SAMPLE AND HOLD— DG181

JFET analog switch provides best combination
of settling speed and inherent charge transfer
accuracy for 2N5545 FET-input opamp for high-
speed sample-and-hold applications. — "Analog
LOW = SAMPLE
HIGH = HOLD
TIMED SLOPE-SAMPLING — Circuit measures

rate of signal change for slowly varying signals
(changing less than 1 V/min) by using sample-
and-hold circuit to store instantaneous sample.
After compatible time interval, sample is com-
pared with new input current value; difference
is then the desired slope. One limitation is that
offset errors added to stored signal near zero
voltage can cause large errors in the derivative.
Circuit is highly sensitive to noise spikes during
sampling. — R. E. Bober, This Derivative Circuit
Handles Slowly Varying Signals, EDN Maga-
zine, Jan. 20, 1976, p 82.
256-LEVEL HOLD — Uses digital approximation

to hold sampled analog voltage for long pe-
riods. Cascaded SN7493 ICs form 8-bit binary
counter providing 256 discrete voltage levels
from opamp A2, while input voltage provides
varying reference to opamp A, serving as com-
parator. Apply 0 at reset input to clear counter
for period determined by monostable 1C.
Counter now feeds staircase waveform to A,
through A2 until staircase reaches Vin, when
counter goes high and disables counter clock.
Count is then held and sampled voltage appears
at output. — N. Macdonald, Digital Sample and
Hold, Wireless World, May 1976, p 78.
SAMPLING CIRCUITS 885
TRACK-AND-HOLD UP TO 4 kHz— Developed

fortracking ±10 V AF input signal when control
input is +5 V. When control drops to 0 V, series
FET Q3 opens and input voltage at that time is
stored on C, for transfer to output through high-
impedance opamp A2. — R. S. Burwen, Track-
and-Hold Amplifier, EDNIEEE Magazine, Sept.
1, 1971, p 43.
M HOLD
30 kft
SAMPLE AND HOLD— CA3140 bipolar MOS

opamp serves as readout amplifier for storage
capacitor Cl which is charged by CA3080A var-
iable opamp serving as input buffer and low-
feedthrough transmission switch. CA3140 also
provides offset nulling. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA
Linear ICs," RCA Solid State Division, Somer-
ville, NJ, 1977, p 17.
-f 15 V
15-V SINGLE-SUPPLY— CA3160 opamp pro- current source for CA3140 output integrator 100K pot.— "Linear Integrated Circuits and
vides high input impedance and input voltage and storage capacitor. Pulse droop during hold MOS/FET's," RCA Solid State Division, Somer-
range of 0-10 V. CA3080A functions as strobed interval can be reduced to zero by adjusting ville, NJ, 1977, p 271-272.
FET-OPAMP SAMPLE AND HOLD— Meter indi-

cates output signal when input is present and
stores input in Cl when sample switch is open.
-T
Opamp is connected as unity-gain voltage fol-
lower. Charge on Cl will be drained within a few
minutes by opamp shown. Charge can be held
longer by changing to FET-input opamp or by
opening both battery circuits with alternative
DPDT switch SW2. Developed for classroom
demonstrations.— F. M. Mims, "Integrated Cir-

TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 61-69.
LOW-DRIFT SAMPLE AND HOLD— JFETs pro-

vide complete buffering to sample-and-hold ca-
pacitor Cl. During sample, Q1 is turned on to
provide charging path. During hold, Q1 and Q2
are turned off so discharge paths through tran-
sistors for Cl are each less than 100 pA. 02 also
serves as bufferfor opamp so feedback and out-
put current are supplied only from opamp
source. — "FET Databook," National Semicon-
^Polycarbonate dielectric capacitor

*15
FAST SAMPLE-AND-HOLD — Strobe pulse de-

veloped from logic input of 53 1 opamp IC2 turns
on JFET Q, to complete feedback loop to 1C,, Q,,
and Q2. C, charges to voltage equal to that of
input signal plus gate-to-source offset voltage
of Q2. At end of strobe time, feedback loop is
broken and C, holds voltage until time of next
strobe pulse. Decay in output voltage between
samplings is 1 mV/s.— "Signetics Analog Data
Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p
643-644.
SAMPLING CIRCUITS
887
JFET SAMPLE AND HOLD — Logic voltage is ap-

plied simultaneously to sample-and-hold
JFETs. By matching input impedance and feed-
back resistance and capacitance, errors due to
ON resistance of JFETs are minimized. — "FET
Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36.
FEEDBACK REDUCES DRIFT— FET Q2 serves as

buffer for hold capacitor C,, minimizing droop
error. Switching transistor Q, is placed in feed-
back loop. A, serves as input signal buffer and
as driver for Q, and Ct. When sample line is
raised to -HIS V by control pulse, D, is reverse-
biased and Q, is turned on. C, now charges until
output terminal reaches equilibrium with input
(so A, is tracking input). When sample pulse
goes low, feedback loop of A, is opened; output
of A, stays at voltage last sampled since C, re-
tains its charge and Q2 buffers this voltage while
presenting it to output. Optional voltage fol-
lower can be used if more output current is
needed to feed low-impedance load. — W. G.
Sample/Hold
Control Pulse
SAMPLE/HOLD DISCRIMINATOR— Uses CMOS

ICs and CMOS switches to minimize RF noise.
Input from 10-kHz reference divider triggers
CD4009 gate, and combination of diode and RC
circuit produces sawtooth waveform having
fast charge and slow discharge. Since input sig-
nal pulse may be too narrow, it is widened to 2
fj.s by two-gate mono MVBR for controlling first
CD4016 switch. Signal passed from first switch
through 8007 opamp to second CD4016 switch
is delayed by input of second switch to suppress
unwanted spikes, so clean signal is fed through
second 8007 opamp to T-notch filter having 10-
kHz reference frequency for one leg and 20 kHz drives VCO of frequency synthesizer through Rohde, Modern Design of Frequency Synthesiz-
for other leg. Notch depth can be 60 dB. Filter BCY59 emitter-follower transistor. — U. L. ers, Ham Radio , July 1976, p 10-23.
DERIVATIVE SLOPE-SAMPLING— Analog de-

"2
rivative circuit forces voltage across C, to follow
slowly changing input signal. Current required
to keep capacitor voltage equal to signal volt-
age is proportional to rate of change of signal
voltage. RCA 3033 FET-input opamp will work
equally as well as Teledyne Philbrick 1421
shown. Careful selection of values for Rjr and C,
will set rate limit that will reject spikes. — R. E.
Bober, This Derivative Circuit Handles Slowly
Varying Signals, EDN Magazine, Jan. 20, 1976,
p 82.
INVERTING SAMPLE AND HOLD— Total offset

error can be adjusted to much less than 1 mV in
2N5545 FET-input opamp by using compensa-
tion circuit R3-C2-C3 with DG181 JFET analog
switch. Switch operation occurs consistently at
constant voltage, reducing aperture time jitter.
Designed for high-speed sample-and-hold re-
quirements.— "Analog Switches and Their Ap-
7-59. plications," Siliconix, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p
LOW = SAMPLE
HIGH = HOLD
*15 V mc
GLITCH CANCELLATION — Fourth section of voltage range of -10 V to +10 V. Acquisition ture time is typically 1 /ts. — "Analog Switches
DG201 quad CMOS analog switch provides can- time is 25 /xs for opamp shown but can be im- and Their Applications," Siliconix, Santa Clara,
cellation ofcoupled charges (glitches), to keep proved by using faster-slewing opamp. Aper- CA, 1976, p 7-68.
sample-and-hold offset below 5 mV over analog
SAMPLING CIRCUITS
889
SAMPLE AND HOLD WITH OFFSET ADJUST-

MENT— Use of 2N4393 JFET at input of opamp
gives simple high-performance circuit having
low leakage. Offset is easily adjusted with IK
pot. — "FET Databook," National Semiconduc-
SAMPLE
— -i r— 15V SAMPLE
LJ 15V HOLD
CHAPTER 79
Servo Circuits
Includes logic-controlled preamps and power amplifiers for driving two-phase,

stepper, and other types of 60-Hz and 400-Hz servomotors in either direction
for correct time at correct speed for bringing servo shaft exactly to desired
new position. See also Motor Control chapter.
TACHOMETERLESS SERVO — Developed to scanning-microscope eyepiece used for mea- and noninverting operation each time scanning
provide speed control for motor enclosed in suring CRT line width. Buffer A, feeds X input of direction changes, to keep feedback negative. —
such a way that tachometer cannot be used for XY plotter through opamp A2, and also feeds H. F. Stearns, Differentiator and Position Pot
feedback. Position pot R, and differentiator B differentiator B and limit-detector voltage com- Sub for Tachometer, EDN Magazine, Aug. 5,
substitute for tachometer in controlling rate of parator Ct-Cj. S switches A3 between inverting 1977, p 50-52.
890
SERVO CIRCUITS 891
R 1
27 k
DUAL-OPAMP PREAMP— First section of Mo-

torola MC1437 dual opamp is connected as op-
erational differentiator driving direct-coupled
noninverting opamp. Single-ended output is
converted to push-pull by following phase-split-
ting amplifier for driving power amplifier of 115-
V 60-Hz servomotor. — A. Pshaenich, "Servo
Motor Drive Amplifiers," Motorola, Phoenix,
AZ, 1972, AN-590.
A\/ i - 0 dB A\/2 = 40 dB ^V3 = 0 dB
SERVO DRIVE — Combination of Fairchild

ft A795 multiplier and /(A 741 opamp generates
AC error signal for driving two-phase servo-
motor. Phase-shifted signal from R,-C, is ap-
plied to input pin 4 of multiplier, DC signal input
is applied to pin 9, and servo position signal
goes to pin 12. Multiplier takes difference be-
tween signals on 9 and 12, multiplies this by sig-
nal on pin 4, and feeds resulting sine wave from
pin 14 to opamp for amplification and transfer
to servo driver. When servomotor action makes
voltages on 9 and 12 equal, system is nulled. —
Fairchild Linear 1C Contest Winners, EEE Mag-
azine, Jan. 1971, p 48-49.
motor supply (+ 5V max)
DARLINGTON PHASE SHIFTER— Basic 90°

push-pull RC phase shifter using discrete tran-
sistors is connected as phase-splitting ampli-
TTL SERVO CONTROL — Used in nine-channel pulse controls both direction and duration of fier. Used at output of follow-up pot in servoam-
remote control system having nine identical motor rotation. Article describes operation in plifier driving 115-V 60-Hz servomotor. Supply
servos fed by decoder at receiving end of data detail and gives associated coder and decoder is 28 V. Motorola MPSA13 Darlington 1C can be
link. Variable-width pulse command from de- circuits. — M. F. Bessant, Multi-Channel Propor- used if 39K resistor is omitted. — A. Pshaenich,
coder isfed into TTL 1C pulse-width comparator tional Remote Control, Wireless World, Oct.
"Servo Motor Drive Amplifiers," Motorola,
that feeds bridge-type motor drive. Command 1973, p 479-482. Phoenix, AZ, 1972, AN-590.
OP INTEG PRE AMP PHASE-SPLITTING

OPERATIONAL-INTEGRATOR PHASE SHIFT-
AV1 = 0 dB AV2 = 40 dB
ER— Motorola MPSA13 Darlington 1C provides
PHASE-SPLITTING PREAMP— Uses Motorola power amplifier of 115-V
A\/3 = 0 60-Hz
dB servomotor. 90° phase shift required in servoamplifier for
MPSA13 operational integrator to provide 90° Voltage gain is about 40 dB.— A. Pshaenich, 115-V 60-Hz servomotor. Two cascaded 2N3904
phase shift for MC1709 inverting opamp, with "Servo Motor Drive Amplifiers," Motorola, discrete Darlingtons can be used in place of
single-ended output complemented by phase- Phoenix, A2, 1972, AN-590. 1C. — A. Pshaenich, "Servo Motor Drive Ampli-
splitting amplifier to provide push-pull drive for fiers," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1972, AN-590.
100K
20 W AT 60 Hz — Adding high-current comple- Bringing opamp feedback resistor to actual out-

mentary transistors to opamp gives servoam- put point makes nonlinearities and crossover
plifier with 115-V output. Opamp drives low point between transistors insignificant by plac-
impedance of 10-V filament transformer con- ing them in feedback loop. — I. Math, Math's
nected in reverse to boost output to 115 V for Notes, CQ, Jan. 1978, p 53-54 and 70.
driving servo. Use heatsink for transistors.
REFERENCE
O PHASE n
R
TO
MO
FROM
PUSH-PULL ,
PREAMP
NOTES: Q1.Q2
MJE1 102 or
MJ 1001
O
O SERV
PARALLEL-OPAMP PREAMP— Provides differ-
MOTOR
MFG WATTS R7, R8 ential output required for driving power ampli-
WESTON SIZE p|N/</> fier of 115-V 60-Hz servomotor. One opamp sec-
18
11 M A2 6.8 ft 1/2W
tion is connected inverting and the other
11 4
U 21 1663 noninverting to give required complementary
DAYSTROM
U 207263 10 3.3 ft 1W
outputs. Voltage gain is 40 dB, operating from
28-V PUSH-PULL POWER AMPLIFIER— Power single 20-V zener-regulated supply. High DC
Darlingtons are used in common-emitter con- sinks. Suitable for driving size 11 servo at 4 W feedback gives excellent DC stability. Band-
figuration togive high current gain for driving and size 18 at 10 W if emitter resistors R7 and
width is about 6 kHz. Input is driven by 90°
control phase of 60-Hz servo while providing R8 are changed as in table. — A. Pshaenich, phase shifter. — A. Pshaenich, "Servo Motor
high input impedance for preamp. No trans- "Servo Motor Drive Amplifiers," Motorola, AN-590.
Drive Amplifiers," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1972,
formers are required. Darlingtons require heat- Phoenix, AZ, 1972, AN-590.
SERVO CIRCUITS 893
5k 50k
12-VDC DRIVE — Circuit uses 791 power opamp

in inverting configuration with gain of 10 for
driving size 8 12-VDC servomotor in either di-
rection. Article tells how to calculate heatsink
.< i requirements for opamp. — R. J. Apfel, Power
Op Amps — Their Innovative Circuits and Pack-
aging Provide Designers with More Options,
560 n
i w
DIFFERENTIAL INPUT AND OUTPUT— Pream-

plifier for servosystem uses 90° operational in-
tegrator to drive MC1420 opamp having differ-
ential input and differential output connected in
inverting configuration. With values shown,
voltage gain is about 38 dB. Bandwidth is about
4 kHz, giving stability when using 510-pF com-
pensating capacitors. Zener provides 12 V re-
quired for opamp operation from single sup-
ply.— A. Pshaenich, "Servo Motor Drive
Amplifiers," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1972, AN-
590.
UP/DOWN RAMP CONTROL— Siliconix other than 0 V and energizes optoisolator A3 for off. A, now initiates down-ramp waveform to
DG387CJ solid-state relay A„ provides switch- switching A;. Resulting positive-going ramp decelerate system to stop. For ramp rate of 20
ing from up ramp to down ramp for decelerating from As moves system load toward desired po- Vis, C can be 0.33 /zF and R3 1.8 megohms. — R.
servo when it zeroes in on correct new position. sition, making feedback voltage of servo reduce E. Kelly, Up-Down Ramp Quickens Servo Sys-
Slopes are determined by settings of R and R2. control-input voltage. When this drops to tem Response, Electronics, July 20, 1978, p 121
Arrangement ensures optimum servo system within 0.7 V of ground. A, goes low and A3 turns and 123.
response at low cost. A, detects that input is
+ 28 V
STEP-SERVO CONTROL — Variable UJT oscilla-

tor generates train of pulses under control of
digital input logic levels, at 1000 pulses per sec-
ond for logic 1 or 4400 pulses per second for
logic 0, with smooth transitions between rates
when logic changes, for driving stepping ser-
vomotor. Q, and Q2 are constant-current
sources. JFET Q3 acts as voltage-controlled var-
iable resistor in parallel with R,„, controlling
pulse rate of UJT oscillator Q_. — C. R. Forbes,
Step-Servo Motor Slew Generator, EEE Maga-
zine, Oct. 1970, p 76-77.
TWO-PHASE SERVO DRIVE — Both sections of

National LM377 power amplifier are connected
to provide up to 3 W per phase for driving small
60-Hz two-phase servomotor. Power is suffi-
cient for phonograph turntable drive. Lamp is
used in simple amplitude stabilization loop.
Motor windings are 8 ohms, tuned to 60 Hz with
shunt capacitors. — "Audio Handbook," Na-
4-8-4-20.
(Q3 = MJ3585)
(Q5 = 2N3585)
LINE-OPERATED AMPLIFIER— Push-pull RC power transformer or operate directly from line ages can be tolerated. Suitable power supply
phase shifter, single-ended preamp, and push- with diode rectifiers. Power output is enough to
circuits are given. — A. Pshaenich, "Servo Motor
pull class B power amplifier all obtain supply drive size 18 servomotor at 10 W. Larger ser- AN-590.
Drive Amplifiers," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1972,
voltages from AC supply that can either use vomotors can be used if reduced supply volt-
895
SERVO CIRCUITS
INPUT i-l 5 V
1 50mV
510K5 Feedback pot should turn 1/3 of
V
its
OOmV range over full scale (prox) .
270K <
« 200mV XY RECORDER SERVO — Optical Electronics

1 60K > 9712 FET opamp drives 10-V 0.2-A servomotor
4
i 500m V HH 1 used for positioning pen of XY recorder. Circuit
provides coarse and fine attenuation of input
51 K > 1 Onf
1. 'V l/l 3 signal along with position-control pot. FET
,
27k £ 9712 input of opamp allows use of 1-megohm input
T attenuator. Response time is limited only by
that of servomotor and mechanical portion of
1*
system. Requires highly stable regulated power
i6k; supply. — "The 9712 as a Servo Motor Ampli-
fier," Optical Electronics, Tucson, AZ, Applica-
tion Tip 10206.
5. ik I
,5V
10V
2. 7K ;
, 20 V
i.6k-
IK
} ■O +30V
6-15V
V
50
^
OPAMP DRIVES POWER DARLINGTONS— Dif-

ferential outputs for Darlingtons are obtained
by using power supply pins of 741 opamp. Tr,
and Tr2 can be any general-purpose transistors,
and individual transistors can replace Darling-
ton pairs. If circuit is used in servo system, add
components shown in broken lines for zeroing
of output offset. With values shown, 30 W can
be delivered into 8 ohms from DC to 100 kHz at
gain of 10 with less than 0.2% distortion. — K.
Griffiths, Novel Power Amplifier, Wireless
World, Dec. 1974, p 504.
O-30V
V O — )|—
5k
44-VAC DRIVE — Uses two 791 power opamps,

each rated for 10-W continuous dissipation, in
AC bridge. Upper 791 has inverting gain of 10.
Lower 791 inverts its output so 44 V P-P signal
is applied across two-phase AC servomotor. —
R. J. Apfel, Power Op Amps — Their Innovative
Circuits and Packaging Provide Designers with
More Options, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1 977, p
141-144.
VCC
TO PIN 6
POSITION SET OF 543
555 timer determines position of 11.5-ohm ser- netics Analog Data Manual," Signetics, Sunny-
vomotor by feeding appropriate square-wave vale, CA, 1977, p 727-728. To conthol surface
mA
400-Hz AMPLIFIER — Developed to increase out- Includes overload protection. Delivers 95 VRMS mA when load exceeds 300 mA. — F. H. Catter-
put power of digital-to-synchro converter sys- at 400 Hz continuously into 500-ohm load. molen and J. A. Pieterse, Digital/Synchro Am-
tems while providing stable and accurate out- Power bandwidth is about 20 kHz. Foldback cur- plifier Features Overload Protection, EDN Mag-
put and overall gain even with reactive loads. rent limiting drops short-circuit current to 200 azine, Nov. 5, 1977, p 107-108.
CHAPTER 80
Signal Generator Circuits

Includes fixed-frequency and tunable sine-wave and square-wave oscillator
circuits operating in various portions of spectrum from 1 Hz to 1296 MHz, all
of which can be accurately calibrated. Used in adjusting, testing, and
troubleshooting tuned circuits. Includes band-edge marker generators and FM
signal generators. See also Frequency Synthesizer, Function Generator,
Staircase Generator, and Sweep chapters.
OPTIONAL
130 mHi
0-100
LOWPASS MHi
L3 LA L5 L6
-'T's 39 y-j-s56 /Ts 51 ^T~x56 ✓'■p. 3
rb rb rb rb rb OUT
_l
L3-L6 A TURNS NO 18 1 1 mm)

ON
CORE 3/16" (3 mm) DIAM
TRACKING GENERATOR — Used with spectrum

analyzer to generate CW signal corresponding
to frequency to which analyzer is tuned, for
evaluation of filter response. Q1 and Q2 provide
gain and isolation between 200-MHz oscillator,
Q3 and first IF amplifier of analyzer. R1 provides
fine tuning. MX1 mixes 200-MHz output with
signal from 200-300 MHz first local oscillator to
provide 100-kHz to 100-MHz tracking signal.
Optional 130-MHz low-pass filter attenuates
400-500 MHz component generated by mixer
in tracking generator. — W. Ryder, Spectrum
Analyzer Tracking Generator, Ham Radio, April
1978, p 30-32.
897

25-kHz CALIBRATOR — Addition of one 7473

dual JK flip-flop 1C to circuit of Radio Shack 28-
140 100-kHz calibrator kit provides conversion
to 25 kHz for checking frequency settings of am-
ateur receivers. Amplitude of output is 5 V P-P
square wave with rich harmonic content. Orig-
inally designed for use with HW-8 Heathkit am-
ateur receiver. Output of calibrator is coupled to
receive side of antenna relay through 10-pF ca-
pacitor. Article covers initial calibration. — D.
Karpiej, A 25-kHz Calibrator for the HW-8, QST,
Oct. 1978, p 20-21.
UNIVERSAL TEST OSCILLATOR— Crystal is in

feedback path of Pierce oscillator, between
base and collector of Q1, with 2.5-mH RF choke
455-kHz FOR IF ALIGNMENT — Simple crystal- former from AM transistor radio, used to tune in place of tuned collector circuit. Oscillator
controlled signal generator serves for aligning drain circuit and obtain low output impedance. works from 400 kHz to 20 MHz, depending on
IF strips. Amplitude modulator uses Colpitts 1- Current drain is about 7 mA with 12-V supply crystal. Designed for fundamental crystals;
kHz oscillator circuit, with surplus 88-mH toroid and 5 mA with 9-V battery.— C. Hall, 455-kHz third overtone types will oscillate but at fun-
in tank circuit; tie two adjacent leads together l-F Alignment Signal Generator, Ham Radio, damental. Value of Cl is for 1 MHz and higher;
to provide center tap. T1 is 455-kHz IF trans- Feb. 1974, p 50-52. increase to 330 pF for lower frequencies. An-
tenna can be 20-inch wire; increasing length in-
creases signal radiation. Can be used as signal
source for receiver alignment (with either ra-
diated or probe-coupled signal), as marker gen-
erator, or in combination with station receiver
as code-practice oscillator. — D. DeMaw, Build
a UTO-1, QST, Oct. 1977, p 19-21.
LAB GENERATOR/CALIBRATOR— Portable de-

sign operating from single flashlight D cell uses
National LM3909 flasher 1C to produce clean rec-
tangular wave that can be adjusted to exactly
1 V. Pulse width is 1.5 ms and OFF interval be-
tween pulses is 5.5 ms. Useful for calibrating
oscilloscopes and adjusting their probes. Article
describes operation of circuit in detail. Current
drain is low enough to give 500 h of operation. —
P. Lefferts, Power-Miser Flasher 1C Has Many
Novel Applications, EDN Magazine, March 20,
1976, p 59-66.
899
SIGNAL GENERATOR CIRCUITS
01
2N2222
BAND-EDGE MARKER — Series-tuned Colpitts
crystal oscillator feeding 10-inch insulated-wire
antenna provides sufficient signal radiation for
pickup by nearby communication receiver.
Used to provide band-edge marker for calibrat-
ing receiver tuning dial so receiver meets FCC
rules for checking transmitter frequency when
using VFO rather than crystal control for Novice
transmitter in amateur bands. Crystal can be
either for 40- or 80-meter band. Although band-
edge frequency is convenient for warning when
transmitter is going off frequency, calibration
can be done with any frequency in or near band
of interest. C5 is 0.25 g. F. — K. Negoro, A Band-
Edge Marker Generator, QST, April 1973, p 16-
17.
SINE/COSINE OSCILLATOR— Two oscillators in

cascade with positive feedback generate two
sine waves in quadrature (differing in phase by
90°). Limiting network D,-D2-R5 is used around
A2 to prevent oscillator from stabilizing at sat-
uration limit of A2. R5 is used to set output at any
level above zener limits of D,-D2. Frequency is
1 kHz for values shown. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-
olis, IN, 1974, p 371-372.
WAVEFORM SYNTHESIZER— Values of tiplexers through all states at 16 times funda- sine wave, weighting resistors range from
weighting resistors connected to inputs of mul- mental frequency of desired waveform. Active about 15Kto 425K. — J. R. Tracy, CMOS Circuits
tiplexer chips determine waveform of analog filter using 741 opamp removes components of Generate Arbitrary Periodic Waveforms, EDN
output. CD4024 binary counter sequences mul- sampling frequency. For near-approximation to Magazine , Aug. 20, 1973, p 86-87.
8-50
30-kHz MARKERS FOR 2-METER FM— Crystal is

placed in loop of standard TTL MVBR. Circuit is
modified so 32-pF parallel-mode unit will work
into effective load of 32 pF. Series 220-pF ca-
pacitor raises crystal frequency enough to per-
mit accurate frequency adjustment by trimmer.
Oscillator output is fed to two decade dividers;
output of second decade IC3 is 30-kHz square
wave with 20% duty factor, coinciding with
standard 2-meter FM channels. Regulated sup-
ply is 5 VDC at 110 mA. — G. E. Zook, Channel
Marker Generator, CQ, April 1972, p 41-42.
FREQUENCY STANDARD — Uses high-perfor-

mance TTL ICs operating from regulated 5-V
supply furnishing 260 mA, connected to point
X. Provides choice of 18 precision frequencies
if all ICs are used, or 8 marker frequencies if only
upper three ICs are used. Adjustable level con-
trol permits matching output of frequency cal-
ibrator to incoming signals such as from WWV,
or turning full on for strong, clear markers.
HEP71 5 oscillator transistor is coupled to TTL by
-ADD THESE SECTIONS FOR COUNTER TIME BASE- HEP50 transistor. 7493 binary dividers U1 and
u€ [„ U5 divide by factors of 2, with 7490 decade di-
I U7 ON
viders making up remainder of logic. Reset pins
749
4i
2 and 3 control operation of logic, either with SI
H (-
| 749 ON | or with progressively shorted contacts of rotary
switch S2. Crystal should be ordered for
LRT3>~FF°>nrl
0.0005% tolerance, F-700 or SP7-P holder, 32-pF
load, and 4 MHz at room temperature. — B. Kel-
CENTRALAB ley, Universal Frequency Standard, Ham Radio,
PA 300
INDEX
Feb. 1974, p 40-47.
1 It
5 8
ooooooooo tt
TTL OUTPUT
I .
nun
CALIBRATOR OUTPUT
(SO- 239 JACK)
0
SIGNAL GENERATOR CIRCUITS 901
1 00-kHz CRYSTAL — Drives JK or RS flip-flops to

provide markers at 10-kHz or 20-kHz intervals
for calibrating transmitter, receiver, or trans-
ceiver. D, and D2, used to stabilize output, can
be eliminated if desired; R5 and R6 are then
grounded directly. Transistor and diode types
are not critical. — G. F. Moynahan, An Improved
Crystal Calibrator Using Solid-State Tech-
niques, CQ, May 1972, p 18 and 20.
CD
THERMISTOR
VECO 3SCI
15 Hz TO 40 kHz IN FOUR RANGES— Tunable

wide-range Wien-bridge audio oscillator is
switched to cover 15-200 Hz, 150-2000 Hz, 1.5-
20 kHz, and 3-40 kHz. U1 is high-input-imped-
ance opamp in bridge circuit using thermistor
as nonlinear feedback element. Cl is adjustable
in series branch of bridge to compensate for ca-
pacitance (about 1 0 pF) of ungrounded common
terminal of dual tuning capacitor. Use -15 V
dual regulated supply.— H. Olson, Integrated-
Circuit Audio Oscillator, Ham Radio, Feb. 1973,
p 50-54.
Cl 4.5 - 25 pF trimmer capacitor U 1 Fairchild fJ A740C, Signetics
C2 Dual 518-pF tuning capacitor (Jack- NE536T, National NH0042C or In-

tersill ICL8007C
son Brothers 5084/2/518HO)
U2 Motorola MC1438R or MC1538R
+ 18
+ 18
PRECISION 4.5-MHz FM FOR TV IF— Translation kHz, using 4.400-MHz crystal to control refer- Hz. — "Signetics Analog Data Manual," Signet
loop made from Signetics 561N and 562N PLLs ence frequency. Modulation frequency is 400 ics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 843-845.
produces 4.5-MHz signal with deviation of ±25
SIX-RANGE RF — Covers from 100 kHz to about

75 MHz in six bands, for checking low-frequency
IF circuits on up to VHF circuits (using harmon-
ics up to 220 MHz). Omission of frequency read-
out dial scale simplifies design without affect-
ing usefulness for troubleshooting. FETs can be
HEP-802 or MPF102, and output transistor is
2N3866 or 2N706. First FET is Hartley oscillator
lightly coupled through 5-pF capacitor to FET
source-follower isolation stage. Last stage
boosts signal level up to about 1 V on most
bands. Tuning capacitor is broadcast-band type
having 300-pF AM section and 25-pF FM section.
Set of six coils can be purchased as Conar CO-
69 through CO-74 from National Radio Institute
or can be wound as suggested in article to give
high-end band limits of 0.57, 1.4, 4.5, 17, 39, and
75-80 MHz. For portable use, 12-V battery pack
or 9-V transistor radio battery can be used to
give constant 9-V supply. — Brew Up a Signal
Generator, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1978, p 50-52.
30 Hz TO 100 kHz — Wien-bridge sine-wave os-

cillator using two RCA CA3140 opamps covers
frequency range with less than 0.5% total har-
monic distortion. Adjust lOKpotfor best output
waveform. Maximum output into 600-ohm load
is about 1 VRMS. Opamps are direct replace-
ments for 741 but have higher input impedance
and better slew rate. — C. Hall, New Op Amp
Challenges the 741, Ham Radio, Jan. 1978, p76-
78.
OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY DIVIDER
60 kHz 300kHz
^ 6
| f.
> TQ .I O
^
30 KHz2 14 <680 OUTPUT
T<

IN MICROFARADS ( jiF ) ; OTHERS
ARE IN PICOFARADS ( pF OR jjjiF);
RESISTANCES ARE IN OHMS,
k "1000. M> I 000 000
1 2 3 A 5 6 7
2-METER RECEIVER CALIBRATOR— Checks PIV at 500 mA, such as HEP156. DS2 is 117-V
both frequency and sensitivity of amateur FM levels are so low that only simple 100-ohm at- neon. T2 is 12 V at 0.3 A — H. Lukoff, A 2-Meter
receiver. Starts with 3-MHz crystal and provides tenuator isneeded. Article covers construction Frequency and Sensitivity Calibrator, OST, Feb.
markers every 30 kHz or every 300 kHz. Energy and calibration. CR9-CR12 are silicon rated 200
1976, p 34-36.
903
ALIGNMENT OSCILLATOR— With 500-kHz crys-

tal, output can be used as 5-kHz markers in
sweep alignment procedure. If SN7490P decade
dividers are omitted and 455-kHz crystal is cho-
sen, TTL circuit can be used to supply low IF
value used by some receivers. Circuit will oscil-
late up to several megahertz — J. Carr, VHF FM
Receiver Alignment Techniques, Ham Radio,
Aug. 1975, p 14-22.
FM SIGNAL GENERATOR OR WOBBULATOR—

With sine-wave input, RCA CA3046 transistor
array connected as VCO can be used as low-
distortion FM signal generator. With sawtooth
input, same arrangement serves as wobbulator.
Increasing size of timing capacitor reduces op-
erating frequency, permitting use down to
audio frequencies as voltage-controlled oscil-
lator in electronic organ. — J. L. Linsley Hood,
Linear Voltage Controlled Oscillator, Wireless
World, Nov. 1973, p 567-569.
LINK
Cl , C2 - Glass piston trimmer or other high-Q inch diameter slug-tuned form. Tapi RFC1-RFC3, incl. - 2-1/2 turns no. 28 enam.
variable. turn from cold end. wire on ferrite bead with 950 permeability
CR1 — 1 IM914 silicon high-speed switching L2 - 4 turns no. 18 copper wire, 1/4-inch (Amidon miniature beads suitable).
diode. Y1 — Third-overtone crystal, 48 MHz.
ID by 7/16-inch long, center tapped.
LI — 12 turns no. 28 enam. wire on 1/4- L3, L4 — See Fig.
1296 MHz — Can be used as signal source for re- clipperfeed 1 44 MHz to 1N91 4 diode which mul- link below RFC3 is removed for measuring
ceiver adjustment and antenna testing, or as tiplies frequency by 9. Half-wavelength stripline diode current.— A 1296-MHz Signal Source,
minibeacon on 1296 MHz. 48-MHz oscillator and QST, March 1977, p 26.
tank L3-C2 rejects other harmonics. Shorting
MODULATED
AM, FM, AND SWEEP — Oscillator and multi-

plier sections of Exar XR-S200 PLL 1C are con-
nected as general-purpose voltage-tuned AM/
FM radio-frequency signal generator. Can also
serve as high-stability carrier or reference gen-
erator if crystal at desired frequency is con-
nected between pins 19 and 20 as shown. Mul-
tiplier section introduces amplitude modulation
on carrier signal generated by VCO. Balanced
multiplier allows suppressed-carrier or double-
sideband modulation. Typical carrier suppres-
sion is above 40 dB for frequencies up to 10
MHz. With timing capacitor used in place of
AM
MODUl crystal, oscillator section can provide highly lin-
INPUT ear FM or frequency sweep. Digital control ter-
minals of oscillator can be used for frequency-
shift keying. — "Phase-Locked Loop Data
CA, 1978, p 9-16.
•NOT FOR CRYSTAL-CONTROLLED OPERATION
1-kHz SQUARE WAVE — Useful for signal-trac-

ing from audio frequencies to several mega-
hertz because 1000-Hz square-wave output of
555 timer is rich in harmonics. Use 5-V supply.
Developed for checking audio, IF, and RF stages
of amateur receiver operating on 160- to 40-m
bands. — J. J. Carr, How to Become a Trouble-
shooting Wizard, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1976, p
■OOUT
138-143.
+ 5V
365 pF
I kHz
OUTPUT
600 kHz TO 12 MHz — Uses Motorola MC4024P
or HEP3805P dual voltage-controlled MVBR or pacitor providing tuning over 20:1 range from Output voltage is well over 1 V P-P. T1 is 88-mH
VCO. One half is used to produce rectangular RF 600 kHz to 1 2 MHz. Use large dial for calibration. toroid with 30 turns No. 26 enamel wound over
output and other half to generate rectangular 1- Half of MC3029P line-driver NAND gate follows it as secondary. Use regulated supply. — H.
kHz modulation frequency. RF output frequency each of MVBRs in MC4024P to provide isolation Olson, Wide Range RF Signal Generator, Ham
is proportional to 1/C, with 365-pF variable ca- and to drive 50-ohm lines with either output. Radio , Dec. 1973, p 18-21.
TTL CRYSTAL CALIBRATOR — Easily assembled

from low-cost TTL digital ICs, for use as trou-
bleshooting signal generator. Almost any fre-
quency can be obtained by correct choice of os-
cillator crystal and/or division ratio. If zeroed
against frequency standard such as WWV, cir-
cuit gives accurate frequency check. — J. J. Carr,
How to Become a Troubleshooting Wizard, 73
Magazine, Jan. 1976, p 138-143.
cut crystal in NOR-gate oscillator U1A and di- U5 used to reset selected divide-by-5 logic. Out- battery to 2.8 mA but allow sufficient switching
vider chain U2-U6 to provide calibration mark- put of 100 kHz is divided by 5 and then by 2 to speed and harmonic energy for good response
ers at 200, 100, 50, 25, 10, and 5 kHz. U2A-U3B give symmetrical 10-kHz output for division by throughout HF bands— F. M. Griffee, Fre-
are wired as D flip-flops for dividing by 2. U4 is 2 to provide 5 kHz. CMOS CD4000-series logic quency-Marker Standard Using CMOS Logic,
divide-by-N counter, with latch arrangement of elements reduce power consumption from 9-V Ham Radio, Aug. 1977, p 44-45.
2N544
01
100-kHz CALIBRATOR — Simple crystal-con-

trolled single-transistor oscillator can be used
to calibrate amateur radio transceiver. Output
should be connected to antenna input side of
receiver, not to antenna terminal normally
used. — Novice Q& A, 73 Magazine, March 1977,
p 187.
28MHz
RECEIVER CHECKER— Single-transistor 28-

MHz crystal oscillator and carefully designed
attenuator network serve to generate signal of
about 1 /xV for checking performance of ama-
teur radio receiver. Can be used on any band
down to 6 meters by appropriate choice of crys-
<9 IK
tal and LC circuit components. Coil is CTC LS5
—
form having 15 turns No. 22 enamel and 2-turn Mil
link. — Is It the Band or My Receiver?, 73 Mag-
azine, Oct. 1976, p 132-133.
TANT
0.47
REG
O O +5V REG
6-36 MHz HARMONIC GENERATOR— Phase- phase comparison, and phase-frequency output When opamp is capturing VCO, meter needle
locked loop is used with short-duration pulses is fed to opamp U5 that locks VCO more tightly will flop from side to side but will return to
from 1-MHz crystal reference oscillator to pro- to reference-oscillator output by increasing its midscale after lock is achieved. Article covers
duce highly accurate harmonics. SN74S00N control of varactor. VCO frequency will then be construction, tuning, and operation. — K. W.
Schottky U2 changes reference waveform to harmonic of reference oscillator. Meter used to Robbins and J. R. True, Crystal-Controlled Har-
harmonic-rich 100-ns pulses for feed to 1N914 monitor control voltage to varactor can have monic Generator, Ham Radio, Nov. 1977, p 66-
phase-detector diodes CR1 and CR2. Buffer U3 full-scale value of 100 /xA to 1 mA, with its mul- 69.
delivers output of 2N5140 VCO to diodes for tiplier resistor adjusted to read 5 V at midscale.
16
14 6
4 70
15 10 8
CD 4015
-3h-
416
9
22 M 7 -4 46 48 tIO -16
42
— W v
5 4 3 10 13 12 -14
II
CMOS MARKER — Crystal-controlled marker
412 2
-2 generator uses any crystal from 100 kHz to 4
-14
CRYSTAL MHz. Requires only one CD4009 hex inverter
— Ill— 16
PP, and two CD4015 shift registers. Switches give
choice of even-number division ratios up to 256.
Used for locating band edges or subbands and
for calibrating receivers. Transistor AM beeper
15 10
14 6 8
12 is simple clamp that gates RF on or off, to facil-
CD 4015
itate location of marker in crowded bands. — K.
9 412
W. Robbins, All Band Frequency Marker, 73
-6 t8 -10 Magazine , June 1975, p 88-90.
4
7
5 3 10 13 II 2
4 4
O +12V
5-MHz STANDARD — Guriot-Clapp crystal oscil- EXCEPT AS INDICATED, DECIMAL VALUES OF

lator using broadband high-gain opamp U1 can CAPACITANCE ARE IN MICROFARADS ( jjF ) ;
be tuned by conventional variable capacitor C5 OTHERS ARE IN PICOFARADS ( pF OR ppF)\'
or alternatively by Motorola MV1650 varactor h* I 000. M* I 000 000.
CR1. Buffer Q1 minimizes effect of loading on
frequency. — R. Silberstein, An Experimental
Frequency Standard Using ICs, QST, Sept. 1974,
p 14-21 and 167.
HEP55
03
50 MHz WITH ATTENUATOR — Positioning of down to zero as generator is moved away from crystal oscillator, AF oscillator, and simple class
miniaturized signal generator in 41/* x 2'k x 24 receiver pickup plate. Slide can be calibrated for A modulator. — B. Hoisington, Low-Cost Infinite
inch waveguide provides stable variable- measuring sensitivity of 6-meter receiver in Attenuator for Amateur Use, 73 Magazine,
strength signal that can be dropped gradually tenths of a microvolt. Circuit consists of 50-MHz
Sept. 1974, p 107-108.
908
PULSED MARKER — Crystal calibrator circuit

provides pulsed output for easy spotting, elim-
inating need for turning marker on and off re-
peatedly to identify it in crowded band. With
values shown, switching rate is about 2 Hz.
When marker is found, placing SI in CW posi-
tion keeps it on for zero-beating calibrator out-
put more accurately. Reducing value of Cl in-
creases switching speed of U3, thus increasing
pulse rate. LED indicates either pulsed or CW
output. ICs are conventional types used in crys-
tal calibrators. — R. G. Brunner, Crystal Calibra-
tor Has Pulsed Output, QST, Nov. 1977, p 45.
1800 220
•
t
II 14 5
5 II 14
1114
,-TH — t 1
n
l
r-E~
n
CAP
EXT. ^
stages. Extra SN7490 divider can be switched in feeding to divider chain. External capacitor for
FREQ CONTROL
at various points along string to add divide-by- fourth stage tunes square-wave generator from
UNIVERSAL SIGNAL GENERATOR— Collection 5 and divide-by-2 functions. LED in 1-MHz crys- several hertz to several megahertz. Optional
of 1C oscillators and dividers generates square tal stage indicates that circuit is oscillating. Sec- fifth stage is VCO for entire HF range up to 25
waves from HF down to subaudible AF, along ond stage can be used with any external crystal MHz. — J. Schultz, Updated Universal Fre-
with markers up into VHF. Selectable oscillator up into low VHF range. Third stage accepts and quency Generator, 73 Magazine, Nov. 1976, p
section feeds fixed string of four divide-by-10 conditions external sine or square input for 50-52.
NETWORK TESTER — Sweep generator pro-

duces time-varying constant-amplitude fre-
quency signal for network under test, with out-
put of network converted to logarithmic DC
voltage for display of amplitude or gain on dec-
ibel scale of CRO or recorder. Sawtooth voltage
for sweep, generated by first Optical Electronics
3329 1C, drives another 3329 that converts saw-
tooth into logarithmic signal for log-frequency
output. Detector uses 9004 absolute-value
module as linear detector, with 2357 logamp
converting output to decibel scale. Resulting
display is Bode plot of frequency response. —
"A Simple Sweep Generator," Optical Electron-
ics, Tucson, A2, Application Tip 10201.
1-MHz CRYSTAL CALIBRATOR— Battery-pow-

ered crystal oscillator for checking frequency
calibration of communication receiver uses TTL.
Regulator is in TO-5 can, which is 100-mA ver-
sion of LM309. — J. J. Carr, Resurrecting the Old
War Horse: New Hope for the Old Receiver,
Ham Radio, Dec. 1976, p 52-55.
AF/RF FROM 1 MHz — String of SN7490 decade is oscillating. When using external sine-wave ceiver calibration up into VHF range or as signal
counters divides output of 1-MHz crystal oscil- source, input is squared by SN74121 MVBR for generator for precise AF or RF square-wave sig-
lator by 10 or 2 to give choice of six fixed fre- driving frequency divider chain. Circuit is easily nal at desired frequencies. — J. J. Schultz, Poor
quencies between 1000 Hz and 100 kHz along modified to give other divider ratios. Applica- Man's Universal Frequency Generator, 73 Mag-
with undivided 1 MHz. One gate of SN7400 crys- tions include use as marker generator for re- azine, July 1974, p 33 and 35-36.
tal oscillator drives LED to indicate that crystal
SECONDARY STANDARD — Provides switch-

selected square-wave outputs of 100, 20, 10, 5,
and 1 kHz, calibrated with receiver tuned to
WWV frequency. 100-kHz clock signal is gener-
ated by crystal oscillator 1C,. Half of IC2 is buffer
between oscillator and first decade counter IC3,
used to generate 10- and 20-kHz outputs. Sec-
ond decade counter 1C* gives 1 and 5 kHz. — E.
R. Spadoni, A Versatile Secondary Frequency
Standard, CQ, Sept. 1975, p 31-32.
n
Output
1 Hz TO 1 MHz — Low-cost secondary frequency Short-term accuracy is about 1 part in 10s. Unit covers construction and operation in detail, and
standard generates marker signals of 1000, 500, is easily aligned to WWV with shortwave re- gives circuit for suitable regulated power sup-
100, 50, 25, 10, 5, and 1 kHz and 100, 10, and 1 ceiver. Frequency-burst mode turns output on ply having standby battery. — T. Shankland.
Hz, with harmonic markers usable well beyond and off 1 0 times per second, for identification of Build a Super Standard, 73 Magazine, Oct. 1976,
30 MHz. Two TTL output levels are available as markers in crowded band of receiver. Article
clocks or signal injectors for checking TTL.
p 66-69.
911
1-10 MHz CRYSTAL — Stable crystal test oscil-

lator takes any crystal in frequency range with
no tuning adjustments. Uses single Motorola
MC799P 1C in circuit that provides 32-pF crystal
loading. Trimmer may be used to adjust crystal
for exact frequency if desired. Circuit is not crit-
ical. Bias pot compensates for battery voltage
changes. Output attenuator uses standard re-
sistor values to provide up to 126 dB of output
signal control. Meter serves as battery tester
and gives instant indication of crystal activity
when circuit is used for testing crystals. — A. A.
Kelley, Crystal Test Oscillator and Signal Gen-
erator, Ham Radio, March 1973, p 46-47.
+ 9V
2-MHz STANDARD WITH DIVIDERS— Can be

used for calibration of frequency meters, fre-
quency counters, and amateur receivers. Two
crystal oscillators (2 MHz and 100 kHz) feed two
7490 decade counters through isolation ampli-
fier. Arrangement gives frequency division by 2,
4, 10, 20, and 100 for each oscillator, with all fre-
quencies rich in harmonics and usable through
144 MHz. Counter reset gates at pins 2, 3, 6, and
7 and ground at pin 10 must be connected to
common terminal for all modes of operation.
Supply should not exceed 5.5 V. — J. M. Janicke,
A Wide-Range Crystal-Controlled Frequency
r/ Standard, QST, July 1976, p 27-28.
RIO
9100 VAR
RI3—
— vv\
'■ x mi
VW=
I00K IK
MULT — VA
S3 “FT5 —
' i
1
C8
V IMEG
(Lis) OUTPUT
«
/
Cl C3 C5 C6 C2 C9 CIO Hz
I _
N
FREQ VALUE,
/ I Jl
CI8_C4
C !5 _ / CI9_ C2 POS
0_
a2_ CI4 _ CI6_ CI7_ S2 CAPACITOR
C7 1 1 5 + .1
C_I3 .15 ♦ .15
2 2
' i 3
12
4
CI-CI2 =
C2-CI3*
0.2/'
4 6
5 8 C 4 * 05 * .068+.0068
C3-CI4- .15
6
II 18
10
05+ .01
7 C 5 * C 16= .0 5
12
8 14 C6
C7* = CC 18
17*=
.033 + . 01
9 16
C8* C 19* .033+0047
10 C9* C20* .033
20 0I5 + .0I5
- CI0-C2I*
Cll -■ C22* -
1-20 Hz SINE — Designed to complement usual cades. Circuit uses 741 opamp in Wien-bridge
lab sine-wave generator that goes down to only oscillator having four-element RC network in ticle gives construction details. Offset adjust-
20 Hz, by providing discrete switch-selected positive feedback path of amplifier (R6 in par- ment R2 may need touching up as batteries run
output frequencies of 1 Hz and 2-20 Hz in 2-Hz allel with capacitor selected by S2A, and R7 in down. — D. Hileman and L. Hileman, V-V-V LF
steps. Output attenuator uses pot and switch to series with capacitor of S2B), so oscillation oc- Generator, 73 Magazine, Holiday issue 1976, p
set output at any value within range of five de- 97-99.
curs at frequency where phase shift occurs. Ar-
.1
56K 56 K
455-kHz FREQUENCY-MODULATED— Can be control R1, output level control R2, and carrier Hz sine wave of several hundred millivolts.
used to align IF amplifier and quadrature detec- frequency control R3. Adjust 500-ohm pot be- Transformer in power supply can be two sepa-
tor of FM receivers. Unit is stable and provides tween pins 4 and 5 of 8038 for clean sine-wave rate 12.6-V units with primaries in parallel and
ample deviation for amateur receivers. Uses output on CRO. Adjust R3 to give 455 kHz as secondaries in series. — J. C. Chapel, Build This
8038 function generator and 741 opamp con- measured by meter or frequency counter. To FM Signal Generator, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1978,
nected as audio oscillator to provide about check audio oscillator, connect AC voltmeter or
1000-Hz modulating voltage. Includes deviation CRO across R1, which should have clean 1000-
p 154-155.
9 MHz
OSCILLATOR
T 3
HF/VHF MARKERS— Provides markers needed puts are 1 MHz, 100 kHz, and 10 kHz. When LED WWV. All 7476 TTL dual JK flip-flops are con-
for most amateur radio bands, including 30 and is off, outputs are 3 MHz, 300 kHz, and 30 kHz. nected to divide by 3. — F. E. Hinkle, Inexpensive
300 kHz for VHF FM operation and 10 and 100 Uses 7404 TTL hex inverter as crystal oscillator, HF-VHF Frequency Standard, 73 Magazine,
kHz for 2-m FM operation. When LED is on, out- with 2-8 pF trimmer for zeroing crystal with April 1976, p 62-63.
CHAPTER 81
Single-Sideband Circuits
Includes audio clippers, shapers, and other circuits for improving speech
readability, along with product detectors, sideband selectors, double-
balanced mixers, direct-conversion receivers, and SSB test equipment.
PRODUCT DETECTOR — Developed for use in

SSB receiver having 9-MHz IF amplifier. Values
in parentheses are *or receiver having 455-kHz
IF amplifier. Diode types are not critical. — Cir-
cuits, 73 Magazine, May 1973, p 105.
approximation of average current in voice-mod- supply and converts it into signal that can be opamp. R6 allows small adjustments of opamp
ulated SSB signal. Circuit also gives peak cur- run through shaping network to get averages gain, which is normally set at 100. — R. Sans,
rent reading, with peaks measured and held for and peaks. D,-D7 are 1N3064 or equivalent. D, Make Your Meter Readings Count, CQ, Dec.
short time. Opamp isolates current from plate and D2 eliminate spikes that might damage
1972, p 28-29. 913
+ 9
914
♦ 9 - 12V
VDC
SPEECH PROCESSOR — Preamplification com-

bined with clipping or compression gives higher
average level and increased intelligibility of SSB
communication. Degree of compression is con-
trolled with 100K pot that adjusts input. Output
of transistor feeds passive diode compressor.
Amount of compression will vary with diode
type, and experimentation is suggested. Article
covers construction and adjustment of
circuit. — B. Barrington, Simple Audio Preamp,
73 Magazine, Feb. 1974, p 69-70.
SSB MONITOR — Requires two connections to detector that gives audio signal for monitoring
SSB transmitter, at output of carrier oscillator directly with headphones or for feeding AF am-
and at output of sideband filter. FET isolation plifier driving loudspeaker.— Clean Up Your
stagesfor each connection feed 2N4124 ♦9Vproduct Act, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1978, p 136-137.
SIDEBAND MIXER — Used as transmitting

mixer in SSB transceiver made by Sideband As-
sociates for radiomarine communication in 2-
23 MHz range. Low-frequency sideband signal
and high-frequency oscillator signal are mixed
to produce higher sum frequency at output.
Double-tuned resonant circuit provides ade-
quate output bandwidth and excellent skirt re-
OFF-AIR MONITOR — Single-frequency modu- sired band. LC circuit should be resonated to jection of undesired frequency components. —
lation monitor for SSB transmitter combines band being used. Oscillator signal is spotted E. Noll, MOSFET Circuits, Ham Radio, Feb. 1975,
crystal oscillator with product detector, for with transceiver in receive mode, after which
checking audio at one point within band. If tun- transceiver can be monitored during transmis-
ing and loading of SSB transmitter are same sions.— Clean Up Your Act, 73 Magazine, Jan. p 50-57.
over rest of band, audio quality also remains 1978, p 136-137.
constant. Usefundamental-mode crystalfor de-
*■9 -I2V
•'"r" 0
06
5
560m
1 0015
€n
Hb AUDIO OUT
IN34A' S 008 TO TX
OR
IN270'S
JL 20K^
m rh
SOFT CLIPPER — Used after audio compressor lowed by low-noise FET voltage amplifier hav- kHz. — J. J. Schultz, Adding dBs to the Audio
to improve effective signal strength of SSB ing broadband flat frequency response. Output Compressor, 73 Magazine, May 1974, p 21-23
and 25.
transmitter. Soft clipping is achieved by driving filter sharply attenuates signals above about 3
diode pair through resistance. Clipper is fol-
915
S IN G L E - S ID E B A N D CIRCUITS
INPUT (50 OHMS)
PREAMP WITH CLIPPING — Increases speech in-

telligibility, particularly with SSB amateur sta-
tions. Q1 and Q2 are HEP-54. Diodes are 1N456
or HEP-158. — Circuits, 73 Magazine, Feb. 1974,
p 100.
3-30 MHz QUADRATURE PHASE SHIFT— Wide- of Indiana General F684-1 balun core. Twist to-
band passive AF phase-shift network makes di- gether three 7-inch lengths of No. 26 enamel
rect-conversion SSB generation possible. and wind 3 turns through the two holes. Con-
Bridge networks each provide 45° phase shift, nect two wires in series for 200-ohm windings.
to give differential phase shift of 90° over entire Article gives data for winding all other coils. —
frequency range with maximum phase error of R. Harrison, A Review of SSB Phasing Tech-
about 1°. Overall loss of network is about 6 dB. niques, Ham Radio, Jan. 1978, p 52-62.
T1, T2, and T3 are wound on Neosid 1050-1-F14
560
PRECOMPRESSION SHAPER— Improves effec-

tive signal strength of SSB transmitter by shap-
ing AF frequency response ahead of audio com-
pressor. Low-noise FET preamp providing initial
gain for high-impedance microphone is fol-
lowed by low- and high-rolloff circuit giving 15-
dB boost or rolloff to frequencies centered at
about 1 kHz. — J. J. Schultz, Adding dBs to the
Audio Compressor, 73 Magazine, May 1974, p
21-23 and 25.
660 AND 1000 Hz FOR SSB TESTING— Produces

two audio frequencies with all harmonics and
crossproducts down 40 dB or more, as required
for accurate testing of amateur SSB equipment.
Two sections of Raytheon 4136D quad opamp
serve as Wien-bridge audio oscillators, one at
1000 Hz and one at 660 Hz. Silicon signal diodes
in each bridge act as nonlinear stabilization ele-
ments. Third section of opamp adds sine waves,
and fourth section is simple inverter with gain
of 1 for push-pull or balanced output. With all
four pots at midvalue, adjust R, for 12 V P-P at
TP, and adjust R2 for 12 V P-P at TP2. Open X2
and adjust R3 to give 12 V P-P from either output
terminal to ground, then close X2 and repeat for
X, and R4. Output should now be 660 and 1000
Hz added linearly as required, with no cross-
products. Use regulated ±15 V supply. — H.
Olson, A One-Chip, Two Tone Generator, CQ,
April 1974, p 48-49.
v
L i
CRYSTAL BFO — Bipolar crystal oscillator is cou- kHz for lower sideband operation or 453.75 kHz
pled to FET source-follower by miniature 455- for upper sideband in SSB transceiver. — W. J.
kHz IF transformer T2. RF output is adjusted Weiser, Integrated Circuit SSB Transceiver for PT.T>—
Si -ANY S. DIODES
1C -BURR BROWN 1506,

with R7A so BFO injection voltage can be set for 80 Meters, Ham Radio, April 1976, p 48-52. FAIRCHILD 709 or »quiv.
01- ANY Si NPN TRANSISTOR
TO FIRST
AUDIO
AMPL
SPIKE CLIPPER — Improves efficiency of low-
power SSB amateur transmitter by removing
from voice waveform the spikes that cause
overmodulation or give low average modula-
tion level. When used as in-line microphone am-
plifier, circuit gives up to 20-dB equivalent gain
at receiving location.— H. E. Weber, Increase
Your SSB Efficiency, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1973, p
71.
SSB DETECTOR — Can be switched in and out of regular detector stage. Requires stable BFO. —
most tube-type AM receivers for use in place of Novice Q & A, 73 Magazine, March 1977, p 187.
CARRIER OSCILLATOR— Two MOSFETs serve

with diode switching arrangement for selecting
either upper or lower sideband. Circuit between
gates couples oscillator to isolating output
117V stage. Upper/lower sideband switch applies +9
AC
V to anode of switching diode that closes feed-
0^0^-
back circuit for crystal to be activated. Output
TWO-TONE BURSTS — Uses 709 or 741 opamps filament transformer. Tone frequency of each can be used as injection voltage in demodula-
to generate 1850-Hz and 855-Hz tones simulta- opamp is determined by symmetrical twin-T tion of incoming signal by product detector of
neously, pulsed at 60-Hz line rate for duty cycle network. R1 sets level of 1850-Hz tone, and R3 transceiver or as basic carrier applied to bal-
slightly below 50%. Used to measure linearity controls 855-Hz tone. R2 mixes and balances anced modulator for transmitting mode. Used
of high-frequency amplifiers in low-power tones. Diodes are 50-PIV 500-mA silicon. — B. in SSB transceiver made by Sideband Associ-
stages of SSB transmitter. Each opamp is pow- Buus, A Technique for Burst Two-Tone Testing ates for radiomarine communication in 2-23
ered by half-wave rectified AC, with opposite of Linear Amplifiers, QST, Aug. 1971, p 17-21. MHz range. — E. Noll, MOSFET Circuits, Ham
voltage polarities provided by 12.6-V CT 50-mA Radio, Feb. 1975, p 50-57.
S IN G L E - S ID E B A N D CIRCUITS 917
INPUT (50 OHMS)
90° PHASE SHIFT WITH BRIDGES— Wideband

passive AF phase-shift network makes direct-
conversion SSB generation possible. Devel-
oped for use with circularly polarized antenna
system. Bridge networks each provide 45°

phase shift between 1 and 15 MHz, to give dif-
ferential phase shift of 90° over that frequency
range with phase error less than 1°. Amplitude
difference between outputs is less than 0.5 dB
over range. T1, T2, and T3 are wound on Neosid
1050-1-F14 of Indiana General F684-1 balun
core. Twist together three 7-inch lengths of No.
26 enamel and wind 3 turns through the two
holes. Connect two wires in series for windings
going to bridges. Article gives data for winding
all other coils. — R. Harrison, A Review of SSB
Phasing Techniques, Ham Radio, Jan. 1978, p
52-62.
SSB/CW DEMODULATOR— LM373 communi-

cation 1C uses balanced mixer as product detec-
tor, with reinserted carrier reapplied to pin 6. 1F
CW or SSB output is taken from pin 7. If desired,
RF gain control can be inserted in AGC feedback
path. — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C Principles, Experi-

anapolis, IN, 1974, p 350-351.
49.85 Hz 597 Hz 4853 Hz
WIDEBAND ACTIVE PHASE SHIFTER— Active to 10 kHz. Each stage is adjusted with 4.7K trim- ply. Overall gain of entire circuit is unity. — R.
audio phase-shift network uses two LM324 Harrison, A Review of SSB Phasing Techniques,
pot to give 90° phase shift at frequency shown
quad opamps to provide equal-amplitude out- on diagram. Align with audio oscillator and CRO Ham Radio, Jan. 1978, p 52-62.
puts differing in phase by 90° ± 2° from 100 Hz or phase meter. Operates from single 5-V sup-
MOSFET PRODUCT DETECTOR— SSB IF signal

is applied to one gate of MOSFET and demo-
dulating carrier to other gate. Linear demodu-
lation is obtained without distortion compo-
nents. RC filter connected into drain circuit
removes IF and carrier components, leaving de-
modulated audio as output. — E. M. Noll, "FET
W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 2nd Ed., 1975, p 154.
■< + l2VDC
AUDIO OUTPUT
14.0-14 350 MHz
selector, selectivity is obtained only through

shaping of audio channel. Bandwidth is more
appropriate for CW if C7 is increased to 0.02 or
0.047 /xF. T1 is 10K to 2K CT Stancor TAPC-35.
L2 is 40 turns No. 30 enamel on T-37-6 core, with
depth of sound, with SSB signals seeming to 2 turns No. 28 on it for LI and 4 turns for L3. L5
stand out against nearly noiseless background. is 16 turns No. 28 on FT-37-63 core, with center
Covers entire 20-meter band. Use of balanced- tap, with 4 turns No. 28 on it for L4. L6 is 19 turns
product detector improves stability to reject No. 28 on T-37-6 core, tapped 7 turns above
strong broadcast-band AM signals. BFO energy ground. — J. Rusgrove, A 20-Meter High-Perfor-
20-METER DIRECT-CONVERSION— Well-de- from Q4 is injected through center tap of broad- mance Direct-Conversion Receiver, QST, April
signed circuit provides pleasing polarity and band toroidal transformer L4-L5. Except for pre-
1978, p 11-13.
0 05
0005
CIO
33. LEVEL
OUTPUT |CW
~| RI3 '-T-x
LOGARITHMIC LIMITER— Speech processor

with logarithmic limiting makes noticeable im-
provement in speech readability of SSB trans-
mitter. Adjustable-gain preamp U1 sets input
level for soft limiting amplifier U2 in which non-
linear resistance characteristics of CR1 and CR2
supply increasingly heavier negative feedback
as U2 output amplitude increases, thus provid-
ing logarithmic response. Low-pass active filter
using U3 attenuates any frequencies above 2.8
kHz that may be generated in clipping pro-
cess.— F. C. Getz, Audio-Frequency Speech Pro-
cessor, Ham Radio, Aug. 1977, p 48-51.
S IN G L E - S ID E B A N D CIRCUITS 919
SIDEBAND SELECTOR— MOSFET circuit uses

diode switching of crystals in carrier oscillator
to select either upper or lower sideband. Sec-
ond transistor serves as common-source isolat-
ing amplifier for driving modulator. Switch ap-
plies +9 V to anode of diode that closes
feedback circuit for crystal to be activated. De-
veloped for use in SSB transceiver; if operating
in 9-MHz range, crystals can be 8.9985 MHz and
9.0015 MHz. — E. M. Noll, "FET Principles, Ex-
dianapolis, IN, 2nd Ed., 1975, p 191-192.
580 connected as two-stage audio amplifier Q4 for straight-through amplification when "Linear 1C Principles, Experiments, and Proj-
feeding double-balanced modulator IC1 double-sideband output is desired. For 9-MHz ects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974,
through transformer T1. Double-sideband sig- single-sideband operation, sideband filter is p 353-356.
920
TWO-TONE TESTER — Twin-T transistor oscil-

lators generate two distinct sine-wave AF sig-
nals for use in adjusting SSB transmitters. Q1
is fixed at about 1000 Hz, and Q2 is adjustable
between 1000 and 1300 Hz, giving frequency
difference of 0—300 Hz for use with scopes hav-
ing 60-Hz horizontal sweep rate that permits
display of one to five cycles of RF envelope pat-
tern. Switches permit use of either oscillator
separately. — F. Brown, The Two-Tone Tester,
QST, Nov. 1978, p 22-24.
UNTUNED DOUBLE-BALANCED MIXER—

Wideband mixer for high-frequency SSB cir-
cuits operates from single 12-V supply. Gain is
controlled by R9 and increases as value of R9 is
decreased. Output at pins 13 and 14 is product
of local oscillator and signal input frequencies
and contains desired IF value for receiver. Os-
cillator signal level should be kept below 20 mV
to avoid undesired harmonics produced by
limiting. Circuit uses Mullard TCA240 dual
balanced modulator-demodulator. — "Applica-
tions of the TCA240," Mullard, London, 1975,
Technical Note 18, TP1489.
+ 12 Vdc
SINGLE-SUPPLY PRODUCT DETECTOR— Mo- spectrum and easily filtered out. Circuit performance from very low frequencies up to 100
torola MC1596G balanced modulator requires forms well with carrier input levels of 100-500 MHz — R. Hejhall, "MC1596 Balanced Modula-
no carrier null adjustment because all frequen- mVRMS. Provides good product detector per- tor," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-531, p 7.
cies except desired demodulated audio are in RF
SINGLE-SIDEBAND CIRCUITS 921
1 0-MHz PRODUCT DETECTOR— IF signal of SSB

receiver is mixed with signal from beat-fre-
quency oscillator in Mullard TCA240 dual bal-
anced modulator-demodulator to give desired
audio output signal. Simple low-pass filter R12-
C9-C10 removes unwanted output signal. —
"Applications of the TCA240," Mullard, London,
1975, Technical Note 18, TP1489.
+i? v
PHASING-TYPE SSB GENERATOR— Modulat- termine which sideband will appear at output ulator, leaving only desired sideband. Resonant
ing wave is first applied to input audio phase of modulator. Carrier is generated by FET crys- output transformer provides low-impedance
shifter for generating audio components that tal oscillator for application through RF phase- feed to succeeding linear amplifier. Designed
are equal in magnitude but differ 90° in phase. shift network to pins 1 and 13 of modulator. for 160-meter band. — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C Prin-
After amplification in CA3018, these audio com- Both carrier and modulating frequencies are
ponents are applied to CA3050 double-balanced suppressed in balanced output circuit of mod- Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 356-357.
modulator. SPST and SPDT switch settings de-
CHAPTER 82
Siren Circuits
Includes variety of circuits for simulating sounds of police and other

emergency sirens. Battery-operated versions can be used in toys or as part of
burglar or fire alarm system. Some have adjustments for frequency,
whooping rate, and duration of rising and falling tones.
10-W AUTO ALARM SIREN — Generates force
field of high-intensity sound inside car, painful SWITCHED + 1 2 V FROM
ALARM SYSTEM
enough to discourage thief from entering car
after tripping alarm switch by opening door.
Circuit produces square-wave output that
sweeps up and down in frequency. Modulation
is provided by triangle waveform generated by
R1, D1, and Cl. If sweep-frequency siren is pro-
hibited, remove Cl to produce legal two-tone
sound. Use efficient horn loudspeaker capable
of handling up to 10 W. D2 is silicon rectifier
rated 1 A at 50 PIV. Other diodes are general-
purpose silicon. — A. T. Roderick III, New Protec-
tion for Your Car, 73 Magazine, March 1978, p
76-77.
P | Relay circuit on NOTE:
LOW-NOTE SIREN — Produces up/down bloop-

ing sounds characteristic of European police
cars and now being used on some US emer-
gency vehicles. Can be connected to burglar or
theft alarm system for protection purposes, or
used as portable sound box operated by mo-
mentary pushbutton switch. Includes volume
control and tone control that varies both pitch
and rate. — D. Heiserman, Whizbox, Modern
Electronics, June 1978, p 67.
922
923
SIREN CIRCUITS
SIREN — Creates sounds resembling those of

police-car siren in which air is forced through
slots in motor-driven disk. LI is half of audio
transformer, using winding having 10K center
tap. — Circuits, 73 Magazine, April 1977, p 164.
FIRE SIREN USES FLASHER — Low-drain circuit

operating from 1 ,5-V cell uses National LM3909
flasher 1C to simulate fire-alarm siren. Pressing
button produces rapidly rising wail, with tone
coasting down in frequency after button is re-
leased. Sound from loudspeaker resembles that
of motor-driven siren. Volume is adequate for
child's pedal car. — P. Lefferts, Power-Miser
FIRE SIREN — Pressing button produces rapidly

rising wail, and releasing button gives slower
lowering of frequency resembling sounds of
typical siren on fire engine. Circuit uses National
LM3909 1C operating from 1.5-V cell for driving
25-ohm loudspeaker. 1-pF capacitor and 200-
ohm resistor determine width of loudspeaker
pulse, while 2.7K resistor and 500-/iF capacitor
determine repetition rate of pulses. — "Linear
POLICE SIREN — Circuit used in Dietz siren-light

police-car system gives distinctive tones. Posi-
tion 1 of S, produces slow continuous rise and
fall. Position 3 produces fast rising and falling
tone. Position 2 rises slowly to full pitch when
point 1 is grounded, then decays at same rate
when point 1 is ungrounded. Position 3 gives
most noticeable tone for break-in alarm on car.
Terminal 1 goes to normally open door, hood,
and other switches that complete circuit to
ground when opened by intruder. Audio tran-
sistors and diode are general replacement
types — J. W. Crawford, The Ultimate Auto
Alarm-Model II, CQ, Aug. 1971, p 54-57 and 96.
Kl
250k 1N914
VARIABLE FREQUENCY AND RATE— Uses Na-

tional LM380 opamp as astable oscillator with
frequency determined by R2 and C2. Base of Q,
is driven by output of LM3900 opamp connected
as second astable oscillator, to turn output of
LM380on and off at rate fixed byR, and C,. Tran-
sistor type is not critical. Circuit is ideal for ex-
perimenters—"Audio Handbook," National
4-28.
WHOOPER — Two National LM3909 ICs and sin-

gle transistor generate rapidly modulated tone
resembling that used on some police cars, am-
bulances, and airport emergency vehicles. Rap-
idly rising and falling modulating voltage is
generated by 1C having 400-/xF capacitor. Diode-
connected transistor forces this 1C ramp gen-
erator to have longer ON periods than OFF pe-
riods, raising average tone of tone generator
and making modulations seem more even. —
"Linear Applications, Vol. 2," National Semi-
RAMP GENERATOR
SIREN CIRCUITS 925
VARIABLE TONE USING VCO— Tone generator

uses UJT and opamp in voltage-controlled os-
cillator Frequency of audio output is deter-
mined by setting of R3. For two-tone siren ef-
fects, optional switches and resistors can be
used. To speed up siren effect, use smallervalue
for Cl. — F. M. Mims, "Integrated Circuit Proj-
2nd Ed., p 61-69.
'OPTIONAL COMPONENTS
FOR SIREN EFFECT
8 2K
LOUD BIKE SIREN — Uses 5558 dual opamp and

four general-purpose NPN transistors to gen-
erate triangle wave that can be distorted by 10K
symmetry control to give either fast or slow rise
for sawtooth applied as base bias to astable
MVBR Q1-Q2. Drain is reasonably low with 9-V
radio battery. Repetition rate can be varied from
long wail to rapid warble, and volume changed
from soft to annoying. Article gives construc-
tion details, and recommends use of removable
mounting on bike to avoid theft. — R. Megirian,
Simple Electronic Siren, 73 Magazine, Oct.
1977, p 176-177.
MV POLICE-ALERTING ALARM— Combination of

CA3130 bipolar MOS opamp, CA3094 pro-
/vn
grammable opamp, and CA3082 transistor
array develops large signal swings with various
waveforms required for driving loudspeakers to
produce attention-getting siren and other
sounds. CA3094 is connected as VCO for gen-
erating tones that are combined with output of
FAST
MED CA3130 astable MVBR to develop required sig-
nal swings. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs,"
+ 9 VOLTS
ADJUSTABLE SIREN — Tone is made adjustable

by using multiposition switch to change capac-
itors in oscillator circuit. Speed (rate of change
in frequency) of siren is adjusted with R3. 4700-
ohm resistor in series with R3 keeps siren op-
erational when R3 is rotated to minimum-resis-
tance position. Siren is operated by pressing
switch to produce rising wail, then releasing
switch until wail drops down to cutoff. — F. M.
Mims, "Transistor Projects, Vol. 1," Radio
SPEAKER
POLICE SIREN USES FLASHER— Low-drain cir-

cuit operating from 1.5-V cell uses National
LM3909 flasher ICs to simulate "whooper"
sounds of electronic sirens used on some city
police cars and ambulances. Two flashers are
required for generating required rapidly rising
and falling modulating voltage. Transistor is
connected as diode to force ramp generator of
1C to have longer ON periods than OFF periods,
raising average tone and making modulation
seem more even. — P. Lefferts, Power-Miser
A A'
PORTABLE TOY SIREN — Can be assembled in form AF MVBR that produces actual siren sound eration before siren is shut off. When carried by
small box as toy for small child. If mercury with frequency varied by triangle waveform on child, siren is jostled enough so it keeps recy-
switch is used for SI, siren comes on automat- Cl MVBR Q5-Q6 is mono that conducts for pre- cling.— J. H. Everhart, Super Siren, 73 Maga-
ically when box is picked up. MVBR Q1-Q2 con- set time period when SI is closed, for applying zine, Feb. 1978, p 96-97.
trols rate at which siren wails, while Q3 and Q4 power to siren. Values shown give 12 s of op-
SIREN CIRCUITS 927
MANUALLY CONTROLLED SIREN— When

switch is pressed, output tone of loudspeaker
builds from low to high frequency. Releasing
switch brings high frequency slowly back to low
point and then cutoff. Siren sounds can be var-
ied manually by pushing and releasing switch
at different points in cycle. C2 controls pitch,
and R3 determines speed at which pitch
changes. — F. M. Mims, "Transistor Projects,
Vol. 1," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd
Ed., p 58-63.
ON RATE Vs
SIREN WITH MUTING — National LM389 array

having three transistors and power opamp on
same chip uses opamp as square-wave oscilla-
tor whose frequency is adjusted with R2B. One
transistor is used in muting circuit to gate
power amplifier on and off, while other two
transistors form cross-coupled MVBR that con-
trols rate of square-wave oscillator. — "Audio
Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-33-4-37.
vCc = 10V
10-V SIREN CHIP — One section of National

MM74C908/MM74C918 dual CMOS driver is
used as audio VCO and other section as voltage
ramp generator that varies frequency of VCO.
Combination gives siren effect at low cost, with
output current up to 250 mA for driving loud-
speaker.— "CMOS Databook," National Semi-
CHAPTER 83
Squelch Circuits
Used to suppress background noise in transmitters and receivers during
intervals between sentences and words, when tuning between stations or
when carrier is absent. Also included are decoder circuits that unblock
squelch of amateur receiver only when special tone is transmitted by desired
station.
AF SQUELCH AMPLIFIER— Holds audio channel

of receiver silent until receiver input signal
reaches predetermined amplitude. DC control
voltage can be derived from IF amplifier by rec-
tification or from second detector of receiver.
FET is biased to cutoff by DC gate voltage ap-
plied to threshold terminals. DC control voltage
bucks this bias and activates amplifier when-
ever it exceeds predetermined threshold in
range of 0-6 V. If receiver gives opposite polar-
ity for DC voltages, use P-channel FET such as
2N2608, reverse C2, and change R4 and R5 as
required. — R. P. Turner, "FET Circuits," Howard
W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 73-
74.
TO + i5 VOLTS
CARRIER-OPERATED SWITCH— Turns on trans- received signal disappears; for longer delay, use lent, capable of handling 25 V at 1 A. — H. Cone,
mitter of 2-meter FM transceiver (used as re- larger electrolytic on collector of Q1. Q1-Q4 can The Minirepeater, 73 Magazine, June 1975, p
peater) when squelch of receiver is broken by be 2N3904, 2N3565, 2N2222, or other good NPN 55-57, 60-62, and 64-65.
signal. Transmitter remains on about 1 s after switching transistor. Q5 is 2N3054 or equiva-
928
929
SQUELCH CIRCUITS
♦ 12V
AUDIO SQUELCH— Used to suppress back-

ground noise during intervals between sen-
tences and words when operating amateur
EXPERIMENT
VALUES
WITH
FOR BEST
radio station on VOX and using compressor.
TIME
SQUELCH RELEASE Circuit attenuates audio path below preset
input level determined by setting of R3. — Cir-

cuits, 73 Magazine, May 1977, p 19.
DIGITAL CTCSS OSCILLATOR— Uses two gates

of CMOS quad NAND gate as 3.2-kHz oscillator,
one gate as buffer, and one as amplifier serving
in active bandpass filter. Requires only one pre-
cision capacitor, and uses ordinary carbon re-
sistors in frequency-determining network. C,
must be polystyrene, polycarbonate. Teflon, or
silver mica. IC2 divides oscillator frequency by
binary multiple. Output is fed back to gate of 1C,
for converting square wave into sine wave by
filtering out high-frequency harmonics. Pro-
vides continuous-tone-coded subaudible
squelch (CTCSS) for amateur repeater system
to protect input from interference on commonly
shared channels. Voltage regulator can be re-
placed by zener. Use base-collector junction of
2N3638 or equivalent transistor as varactor in
parallel with transmitter crystal of true FM
transmitter, to modulate output frequency of
crystal oscillator for CTCSS encoding. — D. Dau-
ben, Miniature Solid State Tone Encoders to
Replace Reeds, CQ, Dec. 1975, p 42-45 and 76.
3-W CLASS AB — Used in all-band double-con- only noise is present, first audio transistor Q36 Article gives all circuits of receiver. — D. M. Ei-
version superheterodyne receiver for AM, nar- is biased out of conduction by squelch and senberg. Build This All-Band VHF Receiver, 73
row-band FM, CW, and SSB operation. When mutes loudspeaker. Supply is 13.6 V regulated. Magazine, Jan. 1975, p 105-112.
CI.C2.C3.C4.C6 AND C7- ELECTROLYTIC , 16V WKG
AF SQUELCH — Simple audio squelch circuit

suppresses all input signals below preset
threshold. — Circuits, 73 Magazine, Holiday
issue 1976, p 170.
10/1W
SILENT COR — Solid-state carrier-operated

relay uses Q1 to sense DC level change from re-
ceiver squelch and forward-bias 02, thus latch-
ing Q3 on. Q4 and Q5 prevent Cl from accu-
mulating a charge. Q6 is then disabled as long
as there is an incoming signal. Q2 feeds termi-
nals 1 and 3 for switching transmitter on and
starting timer that shuts off transmitter after 3
min of use. Q6 is timer that holds transmitter on
for short time after incoming carrier has
dropped out (carrier tail). R2 adjusts tail length,
usually 1-2 s. — D. L. Moon, Solid-State Re-
peater Control, QST, Oct. 1974, p 19-21.
RESET / OFF ■
'CUl- NE567V
U2 - NE566V
2C
3C • bj
Ja
3?
TOP VIEW
TO □ 6
RECEIVER
SPEAKER
OUTPUT b5
7 15
6 1
R2 le.2*
GROUND +
+
R3 | 5k
FREQ. 4 7
C3
ADJ __
C2
0 1
> 1
CONTROL-TONE DECODER — Permits monitor- drops from 4 V to near 0 V, turning off Q1 and
ing local VHF FM repeater for calls from friends transmitter, set at correct frequency for con- turning on 02. Q2 closes relay K1, to connect
without having to listen to chatter of others or necting loudspeaker so desired call can be loudspeaker, and holds it on until RESET switch
to repeater noise. Operation is similar to that of heard. Red LED comes on pF to confirm that loud- is operated. 02 is Radio Shack 276-1059 or other
Motorola paging units in which special tone is speaker isconnected.
pF Audio from receiver loud- small SCR. CR1 is 1N4735, and CR2 is red LED —
transmitted to disable squelch of receiver being speaker is fed into pin 3 of NE567V PLL Ul. K. Wyatt, Private Call System for VHF FM, Ham
called. Each friend has tone encoder for his When correct tone frequency is received, pin 8 Radio, Sept. 1977, p 62-64.
SQUELCH CIRCUITS 931
R7
ONE-TUBE SQUELCH — Designed for insertion

between second detector and AF volume con-
trol in tube-type AM receiver having AVC and
FROM well-filtered DC supply, to suppress noise when
DETECTOR there is no input signal, such as when tuning
between stations. — Circuits, 73 Magazine, May
1977, p 31.
'
|
PC BOARD
VDC
SQUELCH ADAPTER — Designed for use with

any solid-state receiver having discrete transis-
tor audio stages. Uses RCA CA3018 1C contain-
ing four NPN transistors, connected here to give
noise amplifier that drives DC bias control stage
acting on switching transistor for AF stages of
receiver (one transistor in 1C is unused). De-
signed for circuits having positive supply-volt-
age ground; for negative-ground circuits, re-
verse polarity of C6 and connect C4 to negative
ground. R1 should be about 5 times resistance
of volume control in receiver. B + 1 should not
exceed +12 VDC and can be as low as 6 V. B+2
is 3.5 V. Squelch is used chiefly when monitor-
ing police bands on radio. — P. A. Lovelock, The
Postage Stamp Squelcher, 73 Magazine, May
1975, p 103-105.
L J
SQUELCH — Simple system with sharply de- (below) connects FM detector output to 500K nal noise output voltage from FM detector
fined threshold can be added to any FM re- squelch sensitivity control, for amplification by should be at least 0.75 VAC. Circuit eliminates
ceiver. Circuit includes conventional 1C audio Q1 and rectification. Q2 is turned off at thresh- no-signal noise while allowing weakest desired
amplifier. Audio is taken from FM detector out- old level determined by sensitivity control. Q2 signals to pass. — R. C. Harris, Versatile Squelch-
put by shielded audio line and filtered by U2 to then begins logic toggling action through U1. Audio Amplifier for FM Receivers, Ham Radio,
drive loudspeaker. Similar arrangement Low on pin 8 of U1 clamps off portion of U2, Sept. 1974, p 68-69.
100-Hz CTCSS OSCILLATOR— Stable Wien-

bridge oscillator provides continuous-tone-
coded subaudible squelch (CTCSS) for amateur
FM repeater system to protect input from inter-
ference on commonly shared channels and add
security to input frequency. Tone can be heard
in background but does not become irritating.
Use film resistors for R, and R2. C , and C2 should
be polystyrene, polycarbonate. Teflon, or silver
mica. Select R5 to give 8-10 V P-P sine wave
when operating from 12-V supply. R, and R2
may be varied slightly to adjust frequency. — D.
Dauben, Miniature Solid State Tone Encoders
to Replace Reeds, CQ, Dec. 1975, p 42-45 and
76.
NOISE SUPPRESSOR — Eliminates repeater

squelch tails from receiver having its own
squelch, while allowing normal communica-
tions to pass through. Circuit goes between re-
INPUT ceiver squelch gate and point at which squelch
acts on audio amplifier, to provide about 3-s
delay before turning amplifier on. If received
signal disappears before end of delay, radio re-
mains silent and circuit resets itself. If received
signal lasts longer than 3 s, as when repeater is
interrogated, receiver operation is normal. De-
signed for receivers using low voltage level to
squelch audio amplifier. NE555timer is wired as
mono MVBR that is triggered through inverter
Q1 each time receiver squelch is tripped, pro-
vided SCR is off. SCR type is not critical. Input
is taken from squelch gate in receiver. — R. K.
Morrow, Jr., Repeater Kerchunk Eliminator for
Mobile Rigs, Ham Radio , Oct. 1977, p 70-71.
OUTPUT X
NOISE
NOISE AMPLIFIER GATE AUDIO AMPLIFIER
/OOk 3300 pF
DETECTOR
AUDIO INPUT
SQUELCH — Simple circuit using LM380 audio voice during no-signal conditions. CR1 and CR2
amplifier 1C gives excellent performance. First rectify noise. Second transistor conducts and but small value of Cl makes circuit less suscep-
transistor amplifies random noise which is clamps U1 off when there is no signal. Increas- tible to heavy noise peaks. — R. Harris, Another
greater in frequency than normal spectrum of ing value of Cl increases gain of noise amplifier. Squelch Circuit, Ham Radio , Oct. 1976, p 78.
CHAPTER 84
Staircase Generator Circuits
Generate output voltage that increases or decreases in number of equal or

unequal steps in range from 7 to 256 steps. Applications include curve tracers
for semiconductor devices, video testers, production of gray scale for satellite
weather pictures, and feed for one axis of XY recorder or storage CRO.
4 7 OOp F
StX-STEP COMPOSITE VIDEO — Circuit accepts changes wide horizontal blanking pulse to cor- TV sets and VTR decks. — M. J. Salvati, VFO
negatively referenced output signals of TV sync rect width for triggering oscillator 1C. National Adds Versatility to TV Sync Generator, EDN
generator and delivers 1 V P-P six-step compos- LH002C current driver provides low-impedance Magazine, May 20, 1974, p 70 and 72.
ite video signal to 75-ohm load. 74121 mono drive capability for video signal. Used in testing
933
5 I KQ IN9I4
STEPS FOR CURVE TRACER — Square waves waveform. Flip-flops count down MVBR output. terminal of device under test (DUT). Use 2N3904
with 1-V amplitude and Veo-s period, 2 V at 1/3o-s, Complementary-amplifier stage Q10-Q11 for Q10, Q12, Q1 5, and Q16. Use 2N3906 for Q1 1,
and 4 V at 11-15 s are generated by L914 drives phase splitter Q12. Output of phase split- Q13, and Q14. — R. P. Ulrich, A Semiconductor
MVBR and /jl L923 flip-flops U2-U4, for combin- ter goes through SI to appropriate current Curve Tracer for the Amateur, QST, Aug. 1971,
ing in simple ladder network to give staircase source, Q13-Q14 or Q15-Q16, for supplying base
p 24-28.
STAIRCASE GENERATOR CIRCUITS 935
pictures. Input 1 is 2400-Hz square wave ob-

tained from separate reference oscillator. Input
2 is 2400-Hz sine wave having 1 V P-P maximum
voltage. U9 is 4-bit binary counter having spe-
cial reset provided by U10A and U10B at count
12 to give desired 12 states. Outputs of U9 are
used to adjust gain of U16A in 12 steps. Article
describes operation in detail and gives circuits
for reference oscillator and power supply. — R.
Cawthon, Toward a More Perfect Weather Pic-
ture, 73 Magazine, April 1978, p 116-118.
Ci + 15V
4—400 Hz BIPOLAR — Single 2240 serves as

time-base generator with Rt determining fre-
quency in range of 4-400 Hz. Digital output is
converted to analog form by 7530 10-bit CMOS
multiplying D/A converter. Reference voltage
can be varied up to ±10 V to give variable-am-
plitude bipolar staircase output in same ampli-
tude range, with 255 staircase steps corre-
sponding to 8-bit count of 2240. Opamp A3
serves as current-to-voltage converter for
changing ± 1 mA output current of 7530 to ± 10
V swing for staircase. — W. G. Jung, "1C Timer
1977, p 224-226.
counter drives Harris HI-1080 D/A converter pro- counter represents 8-bit digital equivalent of adjusting IK reference pot. Accuracy is main-
ducing staircase voltage ramp. When converter analog input. Data output from latch is comple- tained within '/i LSB at clock rates up to 330
output voltage equals analog input voltage as ment of digital value. Input range is 0-10 V. kHz. — "Linear 8t Data Acquisition Products,"
determined by HA-2602 comparator, compara- Other input ranges, positive or negative, are ob- Harris Semiconductor, Melbourne, FL, Vol. 1,
tor changes state. At that instant, state of tained by changing opamp gain or polarity or by 1977, p 7-33-7-35 (Application Note 512).
STAIRCASE GENERATOR CIRCUITS 937
SEVEN STEPS — Circuit shown generates seven

identical steps before waveform is repeated.
Number of steps can be increased by cascading
two or more SN74164 shift registers, or reduced
by taking clear pulse from earlier Q output of
register. — P. Cochrane, Simple Staircase Gen-
erator, Wireless World, April 1976, p 63
NEGATIVE TRIGGERING — Standard transistor

pump circuit is driven by differentiating and
squaring circuit designed so each staircase
block is triggered by negative edge rather than
by pulse. Circuit was developed for FET curve
tracer, and can be used in other applications
where only resetting edge of normal sawtooth
is available as trigger. R28 changes number of
steps produced before staircase is reset. Tr6 is
Texas Instruments 43, 1C opamp is SN72741P,
transistors are BC182L or equivalent, and
diodes are 1S44. — L. G. Cuthbert, An F.E.T.
Curve T racer. Wireless World, April 1974, p 101-
103.
'<T;
NO OF STEPS
NOTE ALL GROUNDS MUST BE ISOLATED

FROM CHASSIS AND COLLECTOR
SWEEP GROUNDS
Ul 7400
U2.U3
U4 74 427473
U5 MCI460L
U6 MCI74IPI
step
step
voltage
current
50 MA R
10
100 ma 5 mV 1
10 mV R2/9
500 mA j®2-1 2 R2
IjoJ wc
50 mV
R2/19
100 mV
51 m
m A
A 20 R2/99
gain
500 mV 100
10 m A
1000 mV 200 R2/199
oo
STEP GENERATOR — Base-step generator pro- MC1406L 6-bit D/A converter U5. Ul (7400), U2, 26.4-V secondary of transformer. Table gives
duces series of voltage or current steps syn- and U3 (both 7473) form synchronous divide- values for R3 through R8 as ratio of R2 for var-
chronized with beginning of each collector volt- by-8 counter whose outputs are applied to A1- ious gains and steps. Thus, for 500-mV steps
age sweep, for application to base or gate of A3 inputs of U5. U6 (MCI 741 PI) and Q2 form (gain of 100), R7 is about 101 ohms. Accuracy
three-terminal semiconductor device while current amplifier. Q1 is general-purpose NPN depends on values of R2-R9 used. Never apply
sweep voltage is applied to collector of curve transistor having DC current gain of about 30. voltage steps to base of bipolar transistor. — H.
tracer that displays current-voltage character- Point A goes to output of full-wave rectifier Wurzburg, Integrated Circuit Base-Step Gener-
istics on CRO. Circuit is built around Motorola using two 50-PIV 1-A diodes connected across ator, Ham Radio, July 1976, p 44-46.
SQUARE TO STEP — Simple staircase generator

circuit converts square wave into staircase volt-
age output. Each step approximates level of
input pulse. First pulse charges 02 to amplitude
of input pulse. After pulse, voltage across 02
acts through Q1 to charge Cl to same voltage.
Next pulse adds to voltage across C2, doubling
its charge. Each subsequent pulse steps up
height of staircase until it reaches level of sup-
ply voltage. — J. Fisk, Circuits and Techniques,
Vcc Ham Radio, June 1976, p 48-52.
STEP-FUNCTION GENERATOR— Successively mV depending on setting of range switch and can be 1.45-V mercury cell. Resistor values
lower resistances at decoder outputs create Rs. Spacing between steps ranges from 1 .6 s to shown for Ra provide fixed 10% increments in
stairstep function for testing various types of 6 min, so total time for complete 10-step stair- stairstep. — M. M. Lacefield, Simple Step-Func-
instruments. Steps are equally spaced and of case is 16 s to 60 min depending on setting of tion Generator Aids in Testing Instruments,
equal height, covering range of 5-12 or 50-120 2.5-megohm timer pot. Reference voltage V0 Electronics, Dec. 26, 1974, p 103 and 105.
>15V
PULSE TRAINS FORM STAIRCASE— Circuit ac- staircase generator that produces analog out- reaches almost 8.7 V, to prevent data from
cepts pulse trains from pulse-generating posi- put proportional to number of input pulses. being lost if opamp saturates before data run is
tion transducer and produces staircase wave- Mono switches on Q3 for constant time duration completed. — R. G. Warsinski, Staircase Gener-
form as analog input for horizontal axis of XY with every pulse, to ensure that C5 gets same ator Uses Current-Regulating Diode, EDNIEEE
recorder or storage scope. Current-regulating amount of charge regardless of pulse rate. Relay Magazine, Aug. 1, 1971, p46.
diode serves as constant-current source for resets integrator to zero when output voltage
939
STAIRCASE GENERATOR CIRCUITS
256 NEGATIVE STEPS — Interconnection of Exar

XR-2240 programmable timer/counter with 741
opamp and precision resistor ladderforms stair-
case generator. Reset pulse drives output low.
When trigger is applied, output goes high and
circuit generates negative-going staircase hav-
ing 256 equal steps. Duration of each step is
equal to time-base period as determined by val-
ues used for R and C. Staircase is stopped by
applying disable signal (less than 1.4 V) to pin
14 through steering diode. Supply voltage
range is 4-15 V. If counter cannot be triggered
when using supply above 7 V and less than 0.1
M F for C, connect 300 pF from pin 14 to
ground. — "Timer Data Book," Exar Integrated
Q,
Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 11-18.
SYNCHED OSCILLATOR 430 pf
• R.
150 pf Qi
2N4860
1/ 2N2907 4.7k
q t C. 4r1500 pf J OUTPUT
H BLANKING
GRAYSCALE TEST GENERATOR— Synchro-

nized LC oscillator drives staircase generator, gates of SN5400, biased at their linear range by spaced pulses. Article covers theory and gives
both of which are reset by horizontal-blanking negative feedback resistors R, and R,. Oscillator design equations. — E. E. Morris, Simple Stair-
input signal. Developed fortesting video equip- always starts in same condition. Circuit gener- Step Generator Uses 1 1C and 3 Transistors,
ment. Synchronized oscillator uses two TTL ates staircase by integrating train of equally EDN Magazine, Oct. 1, 1972, p 48-49.
CHAPTER 85
Stereo Circuits
Includes amplifier and signal-processing circuits developed specifically for

stereo FM, tape recorder, and phonograph systems. Many can be used singly
in monophonic systems. Includes circuits for FM noise suppression,
reverberation, rear-channel ambience, and loudspeaker phasing.
ACTIVE TONE CONTROLS— Provides ±20 dB

gain with 3-dB comers at 30 and 10,000 Hz. Use
of LM349 quad opamp means only one 1C is
needed for both stereo channels. Buffer at input
gives high input impedance (100K) for source.
Total harmonic distortion is typically 0.05%
across audio band. Input-to-output gain is at
least 5. — "Audio Handbook," National Semi-
FM NOISE SUPPRESSOR — Circuit acts as noise

limiter to help produce pseudostereo sound
having reduced noise, to offset noise signal
heard during weak passages during stereo re-
ception of FM stations. FET short-circuits both
audio channels when audio signal strength
drops sufficiently to make noise objectionable.
If this voltage is insufficient to drive FET, am-
plifier or transformer must be used. — J. W.
Richter, Stereo Dynamic Noise Limiter, Wire-
less World, Oct. 1975, p 474.
includes, volume balance and tone controls)
940
STEREO CIRCUITS 941
300k
REAR-CHANNEL AMBIENCE— Can be added to

existing left front and right front loudspeakers
of stereo system to extract difference signal for
combining with some direct signal (R or L) to
add fullness for concert-hall realism during re-
production ofrecorded music. Very little power
is required for pair of rear loudspeakers, and this
can be furnished by National LM377/LM378
dual-amplifier 1C operating from about 24-V
supply. — "Audio Handbook," National Semi-
Vs = 33V
ULTRALOW-NOISE PREAMP — Complete pre-

amp has inputs for magnetic-cartridge pickup,
tuner, and tape, along with ganged volume con-
trol and ganged selector switch for both chan-
nels. Tone controls are easily added. RIAA fre-
quency response is within ±0.6 dB of standard
values. 0-dB reference gain at 1 kHz is 41.6 dB,
producing 1. 5- VRMS output from 12.5-mVRMS
input. Signal-to-noise ratio is better than -85
dB referenced to 10-mV input level. — "Audio
Clara, CA, 1977, p 2-25-2-31.
STEREO FM DEMODULATOR — Single National

LM1800 1C converts composite AF input signal
to left and right signals for audio power ampli-
fiers. LED with series resistor can be used in
place of 100-mA lamp. — "Audio Handbook,"

p 3-23-3-27.
TOP VIEW
♦ VCC (>4 VOLTS )
53-dB PREAMP— RCA CA3052 quad AC ampli-

fier serves for both channels of complete stereo
preamp. Circuit is duplicated for other channel.
Total harmonic distortion at 1-kHz reference
and 1-V output is less than 0.3%. Gain at 1 kHz
is 47 dB, with 11.5-dB boost at 100 Hz and 10
kHz. Cut at 100 Hz is 10 dB and at 10 kHz is 9 dB.
Operates from single-ended supply. Inputs can
be from tape recorders and magnetic-cartridge
phonographs. — "Linear Integrated Circuits and
MOS/FET's," RCA Solid State Division, Somer-
ville, NJ, 1977, p 327-330.
30 V
PREAMP WITH TONE CONTROLS— Use of while eliminating need for transistor to offset Use log pots for tone controls. Other stereo
LM381A selected low-noise preamp with pas- signal loss in passive controls. Circuit provides channel is identical. Controls are ganged. —
sive bass and treble tone controls as phono or 20-dB boost and cut at 50 Hz and 10 kHz relative "Audio Handbook," National Semiconductor,
tape preamp gives superior noise performance to midband gain. Design equations are given. Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 2-40-2-49.
943
STEREO CIRCUITS
oupli -\ji -gr right channel Ci
SUM AND DIFFERENCE — Simple circuit using

two BC109 or equivalent transistors is effective
for summing and differencing two signals, as
required in stereo and quadraphonic sound ap-
plications. For resistor values shown, upper
output is - 1 2 (A + B) and lower output is
-'i(A - B). Will handle input signals up to 1.4
V. Bottom of 68K resistor should go to
ACTIVE MIDRANGE TONE CONTROL— Addi- mined by C4 and C5 and is 1 kHz for values ground. — B. J. Shelley, Active Sum and Differ-
tion of midrange tone control to active bass and shown. C5 should have 5 times value of C4. — ence Circuit, Wireless World, July 1974, p 239.
treble control gives greater control flexibility. "Audio Handbook," National Semiconductor,
Center frequency of midrange control is deter- Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 2-40-2-49.
STEREO REVERBERATION— Uses National ing, and floor of listening environment. Ampli- delayed signal with original in inverting sum-
LM377 dual power amplifier as driver for fier has frequency response of 100-5000 Hz, ming configuration. Output is about half of orig-
springs acting as mechanical delay lines. Used with rolloff below 100 Hz to suppress booming. inal signal added to all of delayed signal. —
to enhance performance of stereo music system Recovery amplifier uses LM387 low-noise dual "Audio Handbook," National Semiconductor,
by adding artificial reverberation to simulate re- preamp, and another LM387 provides mixing of Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 5-7-5-10.
flection and re-reflection of sound off walls, ceil-
TOOK
BALANCE AND LOUDNESS CONTROL— Pro-

vides bass boost at low listening levels to com-
pensate for nonlinearity of human hearing sys-
tem. Balance control permits equalizing volume
from left and right loudspeakers at particular lis-
tening location. — "Signetics Analog Data Man-
ual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 640.
LEFT IN
-K-
0 01
RIGHT IN
REVERBERATION ENHANCEMENT— Can be National LM387 low-noise dual units. Outputs

used to synthesize stereo effect from monaural are inverted scaled sums of original and delayed gether and outputs become input minus delay
source or can be added to existing stereo sys- signals; left output is left signal minus delay,
and input
tionalplus delay. — Santa
Semiconductor, "Audio Clara,
Handbook,"
CA, 1977,Na-p
tem. Requires only one spring assembly, which while right output is right signal plus delay. 5-7-5-10.
can be Accutronics 4BB2C1A. All opamps are With mono source, both inputs are tied to-
STEREO CIRCUITS 945
24 V
ACTIVE TONE CONTROLS USING FEEDBACK—

Variation of Baxandall negative-feedback tone
control circuit reduces number of capacitors re-
quired. Developed for stereo systems. R< and R5
provide negative input bias for opamp, while C„
prevents DC voltages from being fed back to
tone control circuit. For other supply voltages,
R4 is only resistor changed; design procedure is
12V
V'
FM DEMODULATOR— National LM1800 PLL 1C

accepts composite IF output and converts it to
separate audio signals for left and right chan-
nels. C8 has effect of shunting phase jitter to
minimize channel separation problems. If free-
running frequency of VCO is set at precisely 19
kHz with R5, separation remains constant over
wide range of composite input levels, signal fre-
quencies, temperature changes, and drift in
component values. — "Linear Applications, Vol.
1976, AN-81, p 7-8.
FREQ* 1 17 Hz
PIN I IDENTIFIER
LOUDSPEAKER PHASING — Used to determine

correct phasing of loudspeakers, microphones,
amplifiers, and audio lines in complex stereo
systems. Transmitter input feeds sawtooth
waveform into stereo input jack of one channel,
and receiver unit having microphone input and
zero-center meter output is held in front of each
loudspeaker in turn for same channel. Compo-
nents are correctly phased when meter deflects
in same direction for all loudspeakers. Proce-
dure is then repeated for other channel. Saw-
tooth waveform is generated by Analog Devices
AD537JD voltage-to-frequency converter. Mi-
crophone can be that used with portable cas-
sette recorder. 741 opamp ICq with gain of 200
feeds dual peak detector D1-D2. Filtered DC sig-
nals are detected ramp and detected spike, with
spike overriding ramp. Resulting DC level is am-
plified by 741 opamp having gain of 10, for driv-
ing meter. Microphones to be phased are
plugged into J1 and connections noted for giv-
ing correct meter deflection. J2 is used for phas-
ing amplifiers, lines, and other audio compo-
nents. Article covers calibration and use. — C.
Kitchin, Build an Audio Phase Detector, Audio,
Jan. 1978, p 54 and 56-57.
PLL DECODER — Motorola MCI 310 phase-

locked loop stereo decoder requires only one
adjustment, by 5K pot R5. With pin 2 open, ad-
just R5 until reading of 19.00 kHz is obtained
with frequency counter at pin 10. Alternatively,
tune to stereo broadcast and adjust R5 to center
of lock-in range of stereo pilot lamp. Circuit
v,gives 40-dB separation and about 0.3% total
harmonic distortion. — B. Korth, Phase-Locked
Loop Stereo Decoder Is Aligned Easily, EDN
PLL STEREO FM DEMODULATOR— National

Cf
LM1800 1C uses phase-locked loop techniques
to regenerate 38-kHz subcarrier. Automatic
stereo/monaural switching is included. Supply
voltage range is 10-18 V. — "LM1800 Phase
Locked Loop FM Stereo Demodulator," Na-
tional Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1974.
(IDENTICAL TO CHI) 46 dB = 500 Q

40 dB = IK
34 dB = 2K
LOW-COST STEREO PHONOGRAPH— Uses sin- other channel, but balance control shown
28 dB = 4K
gle Sprague ULN-2277 1C containing two audio cartridge. Connections are identical for other serves both channels. — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C
amplifiers each capable of driving loudspeaker channel. Power output per channel is 2 W. Tone
directly, for input from high-impedance stereo and volume controls are ganged with those for W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 237-239.
STEREO CIRCUITS 947
HEADPHONE AMPLIFIER — Designed to drive

medium- to high-impedance headphones. Add
matching transformers having 1000-ohm pri-
maries if using low-impedance headphones.
Dual 1-megohm pot controls gain in stereo
channels over range of 1 to 100. Use 9-15 V
well-filtered supply rated at least 20 mA. Use
Motorola MC3401P or National LM3900 quad
opamp and 2N2924 or equivalent NPN transis-
tors.— C. D. Rakes, "Integrated Circuit Proj-
ects,” Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1975,
p 21-24.
FM HISS LIMITER — Uses low-pass filter to re-

move noise sometimes heard with weak pas-
sages during stereo reception of FM stations.
FET driven by output of amplifier or tuner is
used to switch low-pass filter into operation
rather than switching over to mono. Based on
fact that the hiss is an antiphase effect that can
be removed with little detriment to overall sig-
nal.— G. Hibbert, Stereo Noise Limiter Improve-
ment, Wireless World, March 1976, p 62.
TO COMPANION CHANNEL
FOR STEREO CIRCUIT
harmonic distortion level is less than 0.05% and output at maximum level. Identical preamp is CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36.
100k
NONINVERTING POWER AMPLIFIER— Single

National LM377/LM378 provides gain of 50 and
3 W per channel for driving loudspeakers. Sup-
ply is 24 V. High input impedance permits use
of high-impedance tone and volume controls.
Heatsink is required. — "Audio Handbook," Na-
tional Semiconductor,
4-8-4-20. Rf
Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p
INVERTING POWER AMPLIFIER— Single Na-

tional LM377 1C provides 2 W per channel with
18-V supply for driving loudspeakers when fed
by stereo demodulator of FM receiver. Similar
LM378 chip gives 3 W per channel with 24-V
supply, and LM379 gives 4 W per channel with
28-V supply. Gain is 50 for all. Heatsink is re-
quired.— "Audio Handbook," National Semi-
LM379S p>>
CHAPTER 86
Sweep Circuits
Includes circuits for generating linear, nonlinear, logarithmic, exponential,
negative-starting, variable start/stop, bidirectional, and other types of ramps
or sweeps at frequencies ranging from 0.2 Hz to 10.7 MHz for CRO and other
applications. See also Cathode-Ray and Signal Generator chapters.
CAPACITANCE FREQUENCY RANGE

Cl 0.4 juF
C2 0.2 mF 0.5 - 1 kHz
15-RANGE SWEEP — Serves for adjusting tuned at higher frequency ranges. HEP S9001 pro- 1 - 2 kHz
circuits, aligning IF strips, and checking filter grammable UJT generates sweep signal. C3 0.1 /uF 2 - 4 kHz
4-8 kHz
characteristics. Uses Motorola MC4024 1C con- C4 .05 juF
Switch gives choice of 100 Hz or 1 kHz sweep. C5 .025 nF 8-16 kHz
taining two separate voltage-controlled MVBRs Buffer and 741 opamp then give exponential C6 .0125 nF
16 - 32 kHz
with output buffer for each. Frequency of oscil- sweep from about -1 to +1 V after DC level is Cl .0062 mF
C8 .0033 juF 32 - 64 kHz
lation isdetermined primarily by single switch- set to 0 by 25K pot, for horizontal input of CRO. 64 - 130 kHz
C9 .00125 mF
selected external capacitor that gives choice of Sweep signal is also fed to MVBRs through con- CIO 620 pF 0.15 - 0.3 MHz
Cl 1 300 pF 0.3 - 0.6 MHz
15 frequency ranges, with frequency within trols giving independent width and center fre- 0.6 - 1.2 MHz
each range varied by applying DC control volt- quency adjustments. Diodes are 1-A 50-PIV sil- Cl 2 150 pF
Cl 3 75 pF 1.2 - 2.4 MHz
age to one pin of 1C. For 3.5-5 V of control volt- icon. T1 is 6.3 V at 1 A — W. C. Smith, An C14 33 pF 2.4 - 5 MHz
age, linearity is good. Output waveform is 4 V Cl 5 15 pF 5-10 MHz
Inexpensive Sweep-Frequency Generator, QST,
10 - 20 MHz
P-P at lower frequencies, becoming triangular Oct. 1976, p 17-19.
949
BIDIRECTIONAL RAMP — Originally used to vary

reference voltage for DC servomotor to control
acceleration and deceleration. R2 and C, deter-
mine ramp rate, while R, controls ramp ampli-
tude. With values shown, output takes 1 s to
ramp from 0 to 10 V. — Ebb R. W. Currell, Linear Bi-
directional Ramp Generator, EDNIEEE Maga-
zine, Nov. 1, 1971, p 50-51.
LINEAR RAMP — Free-running ramp generator

has excellent linearity and repetition rate inde-
pendent of supply voltage. C2 is charged at con-
stant current through Q, and is discharged by
Q2. R2 provides sync pulse during retrace. Rep- fbe
etition rate of ramp is controlled by R3, from
about 100 to 4000 Hz. Output voltage is 10 V
P-P, and sync pulse amplitude is 5 V P-P. — I. J.
Nagle, Voltage Independent Ramp Generator,
CQ, Sept. 1972, p 61 and 98.
750
+ 12 TO +100V
4 . 1 N5290
- - CR1
M4L3054
wCR2
C
0.047 F
SIMPLEST SWEEP GENERATOR— Requires

only constant-current generator CR1, Schottky
diode CR2, and capacitor. Provides excellent lin-
earity (0.07%) and stability over wide range of
SWEEPING RAMP — Uses three CA3140 bipolar erates rates and slopes as well as sawtooth, tri- supply voltages and temperatures. Sweep rates
MOS opamps. One serves as integrator, an- as high as 100 kHz can be obtained by changing
angle, and logarithmic sweeps. — "Circuit Ideas
other as hysteresis switch determining start for RCA Linear ICs,” RCA Solid State Division, value of C. Article gives design equations. — D.
and stop of sweep, and third as logarithmic Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 7. R. Morgan, Sweep Generator Boasts Only Three
shaping network for log function. Circuit gen- Parts, EDN Magazine, Sept. 15, 1970, p 57.
SWEEP CIRCUITS
951
LOGIC-CONTROLLED RAMP RATE— Bidirec-

tional linear ramp generator uses FET switch to
slow ramp. With FET off, fast ramp has duration
of 100 ms. With FET on, slow ramp is 1 s. — R.
W. Currell, Linear Bidirectional Ramp Genera-
tor, EDNIEEE Magazine, Nov. 1, 1971, p 50-51.
+ 15V
0.2-20,000 Hz VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED
RAMP — With values shown, frequency of ramp
can be varied over range of about 20 kHz by
changing DC input voltage. Lowest frequency
is set by R,. Adjust R2 to make average output
0 V, and set desired output level with R3. Uses
555 1C timer as astable MVBR, with charge cur-
rent being supplied by transistor. Voltage/fre-
quency relationship is logarithmic, making os-
cillator suitable for use in sound synthesizers. —
J. L. Brice, Voltage-Controlled Ramp Generator,
+15V 10k
ADJUSTABLE NONLINEAR RAMP— Circuit proportional to voltage difference between ±15 V Circuit uses DC coupling, avoiding need for
vides predistortion of sweep with concavity or supply and base voltage of Q,. Ramp output is large coupling capacitors. With 0.22 #rF for C,
convexity as required to compensate for nonlin- linear when wiper of curvature pot is set to min- period is 6 ms. — H. Olson, Ramp Generator Has
earity ofcircuit being driven. Q, operates as con- imum position (ground). Period of ramp is same Adjustable Nonlinearity, EDN Magazine, May
stant-current source that provides current pro- as that of trigger impulses that gate SCR on. 20, 1973, p 85 and 87.
30-Hz SAWTOOTH — Uses neons as relaxation

oscillator for producing sawtooth wave re-
quired for monitor scope of SSB transmitter.
Rate at which Cl charges depends on its value
FAST-FLYBACK 2-V SAWTOOTH— Simple biased BC107B, capacitor is quickly discharged and those of R2 and R3. When Cl charges to
modern time-base circuit using transistors can until voltage drops about 2 V and transistor as- breakdown voltage of neon string, around 70 V
be added to old oscilloscopes that have only a sumes its high-resistance state again for start per tube, neons fire and Cl discharges through
them. Cl then starts charging again, to give
synchronized free-running sweep. Size of CT de- of next sweep. — K. Padmanabhan, Timebase
termines sweep rate. When timing capacitor CT Circuit, Wireless World, June 1974, p 196. sawtooth output. Voltage source should be
charges to breakdown voltage of reverse- qbout 500 VDC, and R1 at least 500K. For greater
sweep width, increase number of neons in se-
ries.— D. Schmarder, A Simple Sweep Genera-
tor for Monitor Scopes, 73 Magazine, Feb. 1974,
10 Hz-100 kHz RAMP — Uses Miller integrator

p 32. at selected rate by 1C comparator in
switched
feedback loop. Ramp circuit was developed to
drive FETs serving as voltage-dependent resis-
tances in Wien-bridge oscillator of AF sweep
generator. Article gives all circuits and con-
struction details. Sweep linearity is better than
15% for all four ranges, covering 10 Hz to 100
kHz. For greatest accuracy, use 40-s sweep
time; 4-s sweep is for long-persistence CRT, and
0.1-s sweep can be used only on upper three
ranges. — F. H. Trist, Audio Sweep Generator,
Wireless World, July 1971, p 335-338.
provides independent controls over amplitude used for inversion and level-shifting of comple- ramp time from 50 ms to 2 s. — L. J. Retallack,
and frequency, as required for amplitude-mod- mentary ramp, so both ramps are available from Complementary Ramp Generator with Indepen-
ulating auditory signals to either ear for creat- very low impedance sources. Article describes dent Amplitude/Slope Control, Wireless World,
Feb. 1975, p 94.
ing impression of left to right scan. High output circuit operation in detail. For values shown,
953
SWEEP CIRCUITS
,5V Center
,l|.7nf
Frequency
, +15V 10k
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED RAMP— Current

source Q1 and Cl together set duration time of
ramp. As positive DC voltage at gate of MPU131
is increased, peak point firing voltage of PUT is
changed and duration time is increased. With
0.01 /jlF, control voltage change from 5 V to 20
V increases duration time linearly from 2 ms to
7.2 ms. — R. J. Haver and B. C. Shiner, 'Theory,
Characteristics and Applications of the Pro-
grammable Unijunction Transistor," Motorola,
LIN/LOG SWEEP — Sweep rate and center fre- Phoenix, A Z, 1974, AN-527, p 8.
quency are adjustable in versatile sweep gen- timing resistors to 10K. Second 3329 delivers
erator providing sweep-frequency output and frequency-varying sine wave to 9110B buffer.
both linear and logarithmic voltages represent- 10K pot determines center frequency. Stable
ing output frequency. Optical Electronics 3329 log f output is obtained with 2457 log module.
voltage-to-frequency transducer generates Frequency and sweep rates can be range-
sweep voltage at frequency determined by ex- switched from DC to 100 kHz by changing tim-
ternal resistors, capacitor, and input voltage ing capacitor. — "Improved Sweep Generator,"
from 10K pot. Sweep waveform is triangular; Optical Electronics, Tucson, A Z, Application Tip
for sawtooth waveform, change one of 100K 10209.
DIGITAL RAMP — Digital-to-analog technique reset pulse to counters. Use of stable but vari- frequency increased. If response of 741 opamp
using single CD4024A CMOS shift register elim- able supply for 1C permits adjustment of ramp is not adequate for very steep ramps, use
inates temperature and linearity problems nor- output amplitude. Ramp itself consists of large opamp having higher slew rate. — K. Bower,
mally encountered when using RC circuit to number of small steps; if these steps are too CMOS Linear-Ramp Generator Has Amplitude
drive VCO of digital ramp. Ramp is generated large, second CD4024A can be added and clock Control, EDN Magazine, June 20, 1973, p 87.
from 50-kHz clock and stopped by applying
+15V
EXPONENTIAL RAMP — Used in curve tracer in

which ramp does not need to be linear. Input
UJT Tr, is Texas Instruments 43 or equivalent,
ICs are SN72558P dual opamp or individual
SN72741P opamps, and diodes are 1S44 or
equivalent. Article gives other circuits and cali-
bration procedure.— L. G. Cuthbert, An F.E.T.
Curve Tracer, Wireless World, April 1974, p 101—
103.
SET CENTER t
10.7-MHz SWEEP GENERATOR— Can be used

with CRO for studying response of IF amplifier
or filter. Greater dynamic range is obtained by
using with spectrum analyzer. — Circuits, 73
Magazine, Holiday issue 1976, p 170.
+15V +15V
UPPER
VARIABLE START/STOP — Ramp generator can
be operated either in full ramp mode, with out- T (0 SET
10V)
put sweeping from 0 to +10 V, or partial ramp
mode in which output sweeps between adjust-
able starting point and adjustable stopping
point. R5 selects time period in both modes. C2 and R5 give 100-s charge time, but changing point in ramp cycle. — D. Dantuono, Ramp Gen-
Ramp is reset automatically when output R5 to 1 megohm increases charge period to 7 erator Features Variable Start/Stop Points, EDN
reaches preset voltage limit. Values shown for min. S3 stops ramp and resets circuit at any Magazine, April 20, 1978, p 130 and 132.
955
SWEEP CIRCUITS
SQUARE WAVE
DIGITAL RAMP— RCA CD4004T 1C, internally

connected as ripple counter, provides flip-flop
outputs corresponding to number of binary bits
loaded into single input 1. Frequency range of
counter is DC to 2.5 MHz, making it ideal for low-
frequency operation. With R-2R ladder con-
nected to flip-flop outputs, input square wave
gives digitally stepped ramp at ladder output,
with ramp frequency equal to Vias of input fre-
quency.— W. E. Peterson, Digital Ramp Gener-
ator, EEE Magazine, Jan. 1971, p 64-65.
RAMP FROM -10 V — Based on use of integrat-

ing opamp to generate triangle wave from
square wave. Circuit goes one step further by
converting triangle to ramp function having
predetermined negative starting level of -10 V.
When square-wave input signal changes in po-
larity from positive to negative, output of circuit
begins to go positive as ramp function and C4
charges with output voltage. When input
changes from negative to positive and output
begins to go negative, Q, conducts and drives
noninverting input of opamp negative. Since
square-wave input is positive at this time,
opamp output is forced to go negative at its
slew rate. Output then remains negative until
square-wave input switches in negative direc-
tion for repeating cycle. — L. Wing, Op Amp and
One Transistor Produce Ramp Function, EDN
Magazine, Nov. 15, 1972, p 49.
ULTRALINEAR SWEEP — Designed to generate

horizontal and vertical sweep signals for mili-
tary radar system. Linearity was so good that
deviations could not be measured. With Ein pos-
itive as shown, circuit gives negative-going
sweep. Reverse input polarity to get positive-
going sweep. Circuit is immune to short-cir-
cuits.— R. C. Scheerer, Designing Linear Sweep
Generators, EDIIIEEE Magazine, July 1, 1971, p
39-42.
CHAPTER 87
Switching Circuits
Includes circuits using switching opamps, switching transistors, analog-

switch ICs, and other devices under control of logic or other input signals to
provide solid-state SPST, SPDT, or DPDT switching functions for RF and AF
signals.
FAST ON AND OFF — Driver Q, is low-power de- ing known and repeatable switching times. Cur-
vice with fast switching time, while power tran- rent reaches maximum in about 50 ns. — C. Ven-
sistor Q2 handles power dissipation and am- ditti. Fast Power Switch Self-Corrects for
peres of current being switched. Used in TTL Degradation, EON Magazine, Jan. 20, 1975, p
circuits requiring fast solid-state switches hav- 59-60.
TRANSFORMER DRIVE FOR SWITCHING TRAN-

SISTOR— Transformer provides isolated base
drive for high-speed high-power TRW SVT6062
power Darlington Q2. When 12-V secondary
switches positive, C, charges rapidly, after
which base drive current is maintained at level
determined by base-emitter voltage of Q2 and
value of R,. During turnoff, transformer second-
ary goes to zero due to shorting of transformer
primary by Q3 and Q4. Base of Q, is then forward-
biased by capacitor and turned on, discharging
C, through base-emitter path of Q2. — D. Roark,
"Base Drive Considerations in High Power
Switching Transistors," TRW Power Semicon-
No. 120, pductors,
6. Lawndale, CA, 1975, Application Note
DIFFERENTIAL ANALOG SWITCH— NPD5566

dual JFETs provide high accuracy for differential
multiplexer because JFET sections track at bet-
ter than ±1% over wide temperature range.
Close tracking reduces errors due to common-
mode signals. Values of resistors depend on ap-
plication and on type of opamp used. — "FET
Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36.
956
SWITCHING CIRCUITS 957
ANALOG WITH HIGH TOGGLE RATE— Simple

commutator circuit provides low-impedance
gate drive to PN4091 FET analog switch for both
ON and OFF drive conditions. For high-fre-
quency signal handling, circuit also approaches
ideal gate drive conditions by providing low AC
impedance for OFF drive and high AC imped-
6-36. ance for ON drive. — "FET Databook," National
DPDT FET — With ON resistance of several ohms

and OFF resistance of thousands of megohms,
drain-source channel of field-effect transistor
makes ideal low-frequency switch. Transistor
capacitances are detrimental to high-frequency
signal isolation and limit response times. —
"Low Frequency Applications of Field-Effect
Transistors," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1976, AN-
51 1A,p 5.
2N4091 JFETS
FOUR-CHANNEL COMMUTATOR— 2N4091

JFETs give ON resistance of less than 30 ohms
for each channel along with low OFF current
leakage. DS7800 voltage translators provide
gate drives of lOVto -20 V for JFETs while giv-
ing DTL/TTL compatibility. — "FET Databook,"
p 6-26-6-36.
i i
i i
VIDEO SWITCH— 2N4391 FETs provide ON re-

sistance of only 30 ohms and OFF impedance
less than 0.2 pF, to give performance compa-
rable to that of ideal high-frequency switch. At-
tenuation igreater
s than 80 dB at 100 MHz. In-
sertion loss is about 6 dB. — "FET Databook,"
p 6-26-6-36.
FERRITE-CORE SWITCHING — Darlington tran-

sistor driven by low-power current stage serves
for saturating groups of ferrite cores in phased,
arrays for radar systems or in read/write core
switching for memory systems. Circuit provides
fast rise and fall times. — "Designer's Guide to
Power Darlingtons as Switching Devices," Uhi-
trode, Watertown, MA, 1975, U-70, p 4.
+V (5 or 15 V| +15 NC
LATCHING
Si SPDT — DG200 CMOS analog switch
is driven through pair of NAND gates connected
for logic inputs. With inputs normally low, both
s2
switches are held in predetermined states.
When either input receives high command
pulse, switches assume states given in truth
table. Both switches are off when both inputs
are held high; after release of high commands,
last input to go low determines states of
TRUTH TABLE switches. — "Analog Switches and Their Appli-

cations," Siliconix, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 7-
69.
STATE OF SWITCHES
COMMAND
AFTER COMMAND
A2 A1 same
same
0 0 (normal)
0 1
OFF
1 0 ON
ON
1 1 OFF
INDETERMINATE
959
SWITCHING CIRCUITS
A 6k8
10k 20k
FET ANALOG SWITCH— Simple level-shifting 0, both transistors are off and driver output is
driver provides analog switching. Input of logic at +15 V. Diode is now reverse-biased, turning
1 makes emitter and collector current flow in FET on to provide desired switching action be-
input PNP transistor, for shifting from logic to tween outputs 1 and 2. — J. Cohen, Solid-State
-15 V. This current makes NPN transistor turn Signal Switching: It's Getting Better All the
on so its collector is -15 V, diode is forward- Time, EDN Magazine, Nov. 15, 1972, p 22-28.
biased, and FET gate is about -14.3 V. At logic
SWITCHING OPAMP — Circuit provides change-

over function when only single pair of contacts
is available. With switch open, input A goes to
output. With switch closed, input B goes to out-
put and signal of input A is inverted by opamp
so as to cancel direct signal A. Gain is unity for
both output signals. Switch can be replaced by
FET as in lower diagram; here, capacitor pre-
vents FET from cutting off during positive half-
cycle above about 100 Hz. In multichangeover
applications, opamp could be section of pro-
grammable opamp. — M. J. Sells, Electronic
Changeover Switching, Wireless World, Dec.
1974, p 503.
ANALOG SWITCH PROTECTION— Current-lim- fore determined by experimentation. Tech-

iting resistors are used in series with sections nique is suitable for applications in which
of DG300 dual analog switch to limit contact DG300 serves for charging and discharging ca-
currents to 30 mA continuous or 100 mA pulsed pacitor.— "Analog Switches and Their Applica-
for less than 1 ms. Values of limiting resistors tions," Siliconix, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 7-81.
depend on supply voltage used and are there-
DIAMOND-BRIDGE ANALOG SWITCH— Analog lemetry encoder. Symmetrical drive circuits Typical rise time is 1.5 ns and fall time is 2 ns for
signals up to 3 V P-P are switched in less than turn four-transistor diamond bridge on and off 1-VDC analog input. — W. A. Vincent, Diamond
3 ns to meet requirements of multiplexer and at 20-MHz clock frequency. Transient-coupled Bridge Improves Analog Switching, EDN Mag-
sample-and-hold portions of 100 Mb/s PCM te- pullback transistors Q5 and Q9 speed turnoff. azine, Feb. 15, 1971, p 41-42.
960
AC SPDT — Complementary NPN and PNP tran-

sistors provide single-pole double-throw
switching action for AC signals, as required in
some digital-to-analog converter applications.
Circuit switches between ground and signals of
up to ±5 V. Output transistor pair will toggle
with unipolar drive. — J. Cohen, Solid-State Sig-
nal Switching: It's Getting Better All the Time,
♦15 V 50K12
SWITCHING SINGLE-SUPPLY OPAMPS—

DG301 low-power analog switch serves as in-
terface between TTL control input and DC-cou-
pled opamp pair. Logic level determines which
opamp is connected to single output. — "Analog
Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 7-88-7-89.
DTL
S±t>->
I
TTL I
INPUT I
CONTROL I
£pO-t>
I
DS7800
VOLTAGE
TRANSLATOR
LOGIC-CONTROLLED ANALOG SWITCH— LM102 opamp serves as voltage buffer. DS7800 TTL levels.— "FET Databook," National Semi-
2N4860 JFETs were chosen for low leakage and IC provides switch drive under control of DTL or conductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 6-26-6-36.
SWITCHING CIRCUITS 961
NONVOLATILE LATCH — Design shown for

latch gives immunity to interfering noise pulses
on command line and prevents loss of essential
data bit during unexpected power-line interrup-
tion. Subminiature saturable transformers in
positive feedback paths between two gates of
latch prevent instantaneous change of state.
Transformers remain magnetically biased in
positive or negative saturation even without
circuit power, to provide pretransient-state ref-
erence to which latch must return when power
is reapplied. — G. E. Bloom, Add Nonvolatility to
Your Next Latch Design, EDN Magazine, Jan. 5,
1978, p 80 and 82.
10V
CAPACITOR-COUPLED DRIVE FOR SWITCHING

TRANSISTOR — TRW SVT6062 power Darling-
ton switching transistor is used in grounded-
emitter connection in which negative bias re-
quired for turnoff is created by charging C,
during ON interval. Zener limits charge on C,
and provides path for base drive current to Dar-
lington. Diodes give faster response to input
signal by preventing Q3 from saturating.
Grounding base of Q makes Darlington con-
duct, whereas high input level to Q, initiates
turnoff. Circuit will operate at pulse widths
down to 5 /ns. — D. Roark, "Base Drive Consid-
erations inHigh Power Switching Transistors,"
TRW Power Semiconductors, Lawndale, CA,
1975, Application Note No. 120, p 7.
+5 V
SYNCHRONIZED SWITCHING— Transients oc- on of one switch in DG181 JFET analog switch and Their Applications," Siliconix, Santa Clara,
curring during switching between two amplifier with turnoff of other switch. Switching action CA, 1976, p 7-61.
channels are attenuated by synchronizing turn- is controlled by logic input. — "Analog Switches
NEGATIVE SPDT — Developed for driving R/2R

ladder network in D/A converters. Signal input
or reference voltage range is 0 to -12 V. With
logic 0, R, forward-biases Q2 and Q3; Q2 then
switches output to ground, and Q3 clamps base
of Q, to ground to keep it off. With logic 1, D,
and D2 conduct and make Q, switch on. — J.
Cohen, Solid-State Signal Switching: It's Get-
ting Better All the Time, EDN Magazine, Nov.
15, 1972, p 22-28.
FET DPDT — Uses FETs as switching elements

for transferring VFO and carrier oscillator sig-
nals between first and second mixers of SSB
transceiver. Transmitter key line is at +13 V on
receive and 0 V on transmit, and "T" line has
opposite voltages. On receive, Q304 and are
pinched off by about +10 V, while QK and Q306
are conducting with only about +0.7 V on their
gates. VFO signal then flows to first mixer and
carrier oscillator to second mixer. On transmit,
conditions are opposite.— J. Schultz, CQ Re-
views: The Atlas 210 and 215 SSB Transceivers,
CQ, May 1975, p 22-27 and 65.
mixer input
DUAL-FUNCTION SWITCH — Pressing switch runs as long as switch is held down, for pro-
for less than 3 s produces single output pulse ducing repetitive stepping motion. Applications step or automatically through desired number
about 5 gs wide. When switch is pressed longer include positioning of test probes on single of steps. — J. McDowell, Single Switch Controls
than 3 s, single pulse is generated as before, and semiconductor chip or on wafer of several Two Functions, EDN Magazine, April 5, 1974, p
scan oscillator is turned on 3 s later. Oscillator hundred chips, or indexing device either step by 78 and 80.
963
SWITCHING CIRCUITS
T, = MICROTRAN MT 11
80-VRMS ANALOG SWITCH— Developed for cuit parameters. For AC signal inputs between input channel; input signal is then amplified by
switching high-level analog signals with speed, ±10 V, -12 VDC on gate of FET blocks input A, and fed to unity-gain power opamp A2. — D.
accuracy, and reliability, for such applications channel and R2 grounds inverting input of J. Musto, Analog Switch and 1C Amp Controls
as digital-to-synchro converters. Feedback net- opamp A, to prevent noise pickup and minimize 80V RMS, EDN Magazine, Feb. 20, 1973, p 91-
work stabilizes output against changes in cir- voltage offset. Grounding gate of FET turns on
92.
CHAPTER 88
Switching Regulator Circuits

Covers regulators in which DC input voltage is converted to pulse-width-
modulated frequency in range of 9-100 kHz, with duty cycle or frequency
being varied automatically to maintain essentially constant output voltage at
desired value. Circuit may use discrete components or switching-regulator 1C.
R 1<
-O V0
jTrn.
V
i
'in O- 1 mH
-Kh
2N3789
1N5816
D2
5—24 V SWITCHING — Choice of regulator in
Q1 /uA7800 series determines fixed output voltage.
►4 7 Devices are available for rated outputs of 5, 6,
470 > 8, 12, 15, 18, and 24 V, positive or negative, with
>R3
output current ratings of 100 mA, 500 mA, or 1
A. If input voltage is greater than maximum
pApA78XX
78MXX
input rating of regulator used, add voltage-
dropping zener D1 to bring voltage between
10 pF
Cl R2 . 0C333 pF pins 1 and 3 down to acceptable level. — "Sig-
i
C2
500 uF netics Analog Data Manual," Signetics, Sunny-
vale, CA, 1977, p 668.
01 * 0 5
—5 V SWITCHING AT 10 A — Uses Unitrode

PIC635 hybrid power switch with LM304 regu-
lator for switching speeds up to 100 kHz with
input voltage range of 20-40 V. Q1 provides cur-
rent-limiting action. — "Switching Regulator
Design Guide," Unitrode, Watertown, MA,
1974, U-68A, p 9.
964
965
SWITCHING REGULATOR CIRCUITS
5 V AT 1 A — National LM122 timer is connected

as switching regulator by using internal refer-
ence and comparator to drive switching tran-
sistor Q1. Minimum input voltage is 5.5 V. Line
and load regulation are less than 0.5%, and out-
put ripple at switching frequency is only 30 mV.
5-V FIXED OFF-TIME SWITCHING— Uses LM305 +5 V ± 1%. Switching speed is nominally 50 Output voltage can be adjusted between 1 V
regulator and Unitrode hybrid power switch in kHz but can go up to 100 kHz. Article covers the- and 30 V by using appropriate values for R2-
PIC600 series. Operates in fixed OFF-time mode. ory of operation in detail. — L. Dixon and R. R5. — C. Nelson, "Versatile Timer Operates from
Output ripple of 100 mV P-P is independent of Patel, Designers' Guide to: Switching Regula- Microseconds to Hours," National Semiconduc-
input voltage range of 20 to 40 V for output of tors, EDN Magazine, Oct. 20, 1974, p 53-59. tor, Santa Clara, CA, 1973, AN-97, p 9.
switching regulator is varied by modulating ON quency, using pulse-duration-modulation con- Regulators — They Fit Today's Power-Supply
time while maintaining constant switching fre- trol circuit. — J. Spencer, Monolithic Switching Needs, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977, pi 17-121.
- 10 V SWITCHING — Uses LM304 regulator and

Unitrode hybrid power switch in PIC600 series
to provide output of 10 A. R, and R2 determine
reference voltage. Current limiting is achieved
by reducing reference voltage to ground instead
of turning off base drive to power output
switch. Article covers operating theory. — L.
Dixon and R. Patel, Designers' Guide to: Switch-
ing Regulators, EDN Magazine, Oct. 20, 1974, p
53-59.
STEPPING 5 V UP TO 15 V— Fairchild Â78S40

switching regulator transforms 5 V to 15 V at
efficiency of 80% for 150-mA load. Average
input current is only 550 mA. Article gives de-
sign equations. — R. J. Apfel and D. B. Jones,
Universal Switching Regulator Diversifies
Power Subsystem Applications, Computer De-
sign, March 1978, p 103-112.
1 bridge rectifier of 15-W filament transformer sistor. When logic is low, MPS-U95 Darlington
3-A collector current (other half of power stage T3 provide ±6 V for logic circuits that provide holds inverter transistor off. — R. J. Haver,
is identical). Bridge rectifier and capacitive filter pulse-width modulation for inverter. When "Switched Mode Power Supplies — Highlight-
connected directly to AC line form 150-VDC sup- logic signal is high, MPS-U51 saturates and sup- ing a 5-V, 40-A Inverter Design," Motorola,
ply for inverter operating at 20 kHz. Regulators plies 1 A to base of 2N6544 inverter power tran- Phoenix, A Z, 1977, AN-737A, p 10.
SWITCHING REGULATOR CIRCUITS 967
VARIABLE SWITCHING FREQUENCY— TL497

switching regulator operates at maximum fre-
quency under maximum load conditions. For
smaller loads, duty cycle is varied automatically
by maintaining fixed ON time and varying
switching frequency. Circuit optimizes effi-
ciency at about 75% by reducing switching
losses as load decreases. — J. Spencer, Mono-
lithic Switching Regulators — They Fit Today's
Power-Supply Needs, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5,
1977, p 117-121.
-5 V FLYBACK SWITCHING — Uses Unitrode

PIC625 regulator operating at 25 kHz and TL497
control circuit operating in current-limiting
mode to give line and load regulation of 0.2%
for input voltage of 12 V ±25%. Efficiency is
75%. Short-circuit current is automatically lim-
ited to 3 A. — "Flyback and Boost Switching
Regulator Design Guide," Unitrode, Water-
town, MA, 1978, U-76, p 5.
CONTROL FOR SWITCHING REGULATOR— signal, to produce variable-duty-cycle output push-pull drive for power switch of regulator,
Uses all four sections of Motorola MC3302 quad pulse for power switch of switching regulator. and point B goes to current-sensing resistor in
comparator. First section is connected as 20- Sections 3 and 4 initiate current-limiting action; output circuit of regulator. Point y goes to 10-V
kHz oscillator that supplies sawtooth output section 3 senses overcurrent and triggers sec- supply. — R. J. Haver, "A New Approach to
sweeping between voltage limits set by 100K tion 4 connected as mono MVBR. Limiting oc- Switching Regulators," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z,
positive feedback resistor and 15-V supply. Sec- curs at about 4 A. When load short is removed, 1975, AN-719, p 7.
tion 2 compares sawtooth output to feedback regulator resets automatically. Point A goes to
-5 V AT 3 A SWITCHING— Negative-voltage
regulator using SN52104 or SN72304 accepts
input voltage range of -8.5 V to -40 V and pro-
vides regulated output of -5 V with typical load
regulation of 1 mV and input regulation of
0.06%. ICs are interchangeable with LM104 and
LM304 respectively. LI is 60 turns No. 20 on Ar-
HIGH-VOLTAGE POSITIVE SWITCHING— Uses lates output of LM305 from switch. — L. Dixon nold Engineering A930157-2 molybdenum per-
1 8-V zener in series with 3.9K resistor to provide and R. Patel, Designers' Guide to: Switching malloy core or equivalent. — "The Linear and In-
power for LM305 1C regulator. Q2 provides base Regulators, EDN Magazine, Oct. 20, 1974, p 53- terface Circuits Data Book for Design
drive for PIC626 hybrid power switch and iso- 59. Engineers," Texas Instruments, Dallas, TX,
1973, p 5-5.
REDUCING 24 V TO 5 V— Uses Fairchild

/xA78S40 switching regulator having variety of
internal functions that can provide differing
voltage step-up, step-down, and inverter
modes by appropriately connecting external
components. Connections shown provide step-
down from 24 V to 5 V at 500 mA with 83% ef-
ficiency. Applications include running TTL from
24-V battery. Output ripple is less than 25 V.
Article gives design equations. — R. J. Apfel and
D. B. Jones, Universal Switching Regulator Di-
versifies Power Subsystem Applications, Com-
puter Design, March 1978, p 103-112.
Line Reg. (4 V < V||g < 6 V) = .3% Overall Efficiency = 66%

Load Reg. (P0UT < 3 W) = .2% 20-kHz Ripple = .IVp p
5 V TO 200 V WITH SWITCHING REGULATOR— using Motorola MC3380 astable MVBR as con- kHz. — H. Wurzburg, "Control Your Switching
Converts standard logic supply voltage to high trol element in switching regulator. Will drive Regulator with the MC3380 Astable Multivibra-
voltage required by gas-discharge displays. up to 15 digits. Operating frequency is about 20 tor," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1975, EB-52.
+ 10 V SWITCHING — Positive switching regu-

lator circuit uses /xA732 with Unitrode PIC625
hybrid power switch and single transistor, op-
erating in fixed OFF-time mode. Article covers
regulator theory of operation in detail. — L.
Dixon and R. Patel, Designers' Guide to: Switch-
ing Regulators, EDN Magazine, Oct. 20, 1974, p
53-59.
BATTERY REGULATOR— Uses LM376N posi-

tive voltage regulator in switching mode to
compensate for voltage changes of battery sup-
ply during discharge cycle, without adjusting
series rheostat. Load regulation is 0.3% for un-
regulated input of 9 to 30 V, with R1 and R2 set-
ting output voltage anywhere between 5 and 27
V. Maximum output current is 25 mA. Switch-
ing frequency of regulator is 33 kHz. — E. R. Hna-
tek and L. Goldstein, Switching Regulator De-
signed for Portable Eqiupment, EDN IEEE
Magazine, Sept. 15, 1971, p 39-41.
pulse-duration-modulated switching regulator tor applies voltage alternately to opposite ends Spencer, Monolithic Switching Regulators —
gives output flexibility, allowing for multiple of transformer primary, making transformer They Fit Today's Power-Supply Needs, EDN
outputs and wide range of output voltages. perform as if it had AC input. TIP101A rectifier Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977, p 117-121.
5-V SWITCHING — Fixed OFF-time mode of op-

eration isused in switching regulator design to
provide 5-V output that is constant within 100
mV P-P for input range of 20-40 V, for loads
ranging from 10 A maximum to 2 A minimum.
Switching frequency can be in range of 1-50
kHz. Operation above 20 kHz eliminates possi-
bility of audio noise but with some drop in ef-
ficiency. Values shown are for 50 kHz. Article
gives design equations and design pro-
cedure.— L. Dixon and R. Patel, Designers'
Guide to: Switching Regulators, Part 2, EDN
Magazine, Nov. 5, 1974, p 37-40.
—
Ci, Cj, C5, C„ — 1 .0„F, Polycarb

Rs, R 13, Ro— 11.2K, V2W
Cl, C(— 1 00MF, 50V R,— 15K, VzW
C,— 1000^F, 50V R„— 20o, 10W
C7 — 0.0082/,F R,i — 0.075O, 6 watts
C,— 390pF R„— 1.5K, 1W
R,<— 3300, V2W
0.00
150-W SWITCH-MODE— Unregulated DC volt- Q4 and Qs provide 20-kHz clock pulse, above au-
1N3
R,s, R„— 680n, V4W

—2^
L,, l_3— lOîhy, 10 amps age is applied to power Darlington Q, serving as dible range. Overcurrent protection of transis-
89
R„— 22K, 1/2 W

F0
L2— 180/nhy R,t — 4.7K, V4W

switch that chops voltage so rectangular wave- tors isprovided by R„, SCR, and Q3. Adjust R,,
Q] — D45E2 {General Electric) — R,s — 120K, ’/2W so SCR turns on and shuts down circuit when
R„— IK, V2W
form is applied to RLC output filter. Average
Qj, Qs — D33D25
Qi — D29E25 R11 — 100O, V2W
voltage to filter depends on duty cycle of current through R,, reaches 8 A. Circuit must be
Q4 — 2N6027 Ri,— 18K, V2W switch. 555 timer operates in mono MVBR reset manually after overload. Q, and R,„ load
Qt — D32S4
R,<— IK, 1W Pot. mode as pulse generator and pulse-duration circuit to prevent oscillation at low output volt-
Q, — D40K2 — Use Thermalloy R,5 3900, V2W
6063B heatsink
modulator. R24 applies varying voltage to pin 5 age and light load. — R. J. Walker, A 150 Watt
SCR-1 — C103B
Ri, Rj, R<, Rs— 1.2K, %W Z,— 1 N5233B to modulate pulse duration linearly with re- Switch-Mode Regulator, CQ, March 1977, p AO-
Ri, Rr— 110n, V4W Z,— 1 N5226B spect to applied voltage. Actions of Q,, Q2, and 43 and 74-75.
Rt— 4.7K, V4W IC-1 — 555 Timer Q6 maintain constant 3.6 V at arm of control pot.
>15
5-kW SWITCHING— Six Delco DTS-709 transis-

tors are connected in progressive Darlington
configuration to provide stable and efficient
switching at high voltages. Can be operated
from 480-V three-phase full-wave rectified line
to minimize filter cost. Control circuit uses one
LM3900 1C operating from isolated 15-V supply,
along with 5-kHz triangle oscillator and error
sensor feeding into comparator. In power stage,
one DTS-709 drives two DTS-709s which drive
three DTS-709s. Efficiency is better than 90% for
all loads above 500 W. — "Economical 5 kW
Switching Regulator Using DTS-709 Transis-
tors," Delco, Kokomo, IN, 1974, Application
Note 56.
VOUT
VOUT
15 V
12 V
lOUT
100 mA
+ 12 V AND +15 V FROM 4-24 V— Connections Efficiency is about 50% for input extremes of 4 and D. B. Jones, Universal Switching Regulator
shown for Fairchild p, A78S40 switching regu- and 24 V, increasing to maximum of 75% for Diversifies Power Subsystem Applications,
lator give universal regulator providing either other input voltages. Output ripple is essen- Computer Design, March 1978, p 103-112.
step-up or step-down, for loads up to 100 mA. tially eliminated at 12-V output. — R. J. Apfel
HIGH-VOLTAGE NEGATIVE-SWITCHING— De-

signed for operation from supply voltages
above maximum of -40 V for LM304 regulator.
Output is -5 V at up to 10 A. 02 provides volt-
age isolation between regulator and Unitrode
PIC636 hybrid power switch. R9 limits current
through zener under steady-state and start-up
conditions. — "Switching Regulator Design
Guide,"
68A, p 9. Unitrode, Watertown, MA, 1974, U-
6 V FOR CALCULATOR — Can be mounted in

housing of calculator or small transistor radio,
for operation from AC line. D, and D2 produce 15
VDC across filter capacitor C2 as supply for in-
verter Tr, operating at 13 kHz. Transformer is
wound with No. 37 wire on small core such as
Phillips P14/8 337 pot core. Primary windings
are brfilar. Use grounded shield to reduce ra-
diated switching noise. — M. Faulkner, Minia-
ture Switch Mode Power Supply, Wireless
World, Oct. 1977, p 65.
EO-
10-V SWITCHING AT 100 mA— Use of 555 timer Circuit includes current foldback. With 15-V Timer in Your Next Switching Regulator Design,
as pulse-width-modulated regulator gives line input, output is 10 V — P. R. K. Chetty, Put a 555 EDN Magazine, Jan. 5, 1976, p 72.
regulation of 0.5% and load regulation of 1%.
+12 V AND +15 V FROM 5 V— Uses Fairchild

pA78S40 switching regulator having variety of
components. External NPN transistor Q3
boosts step-up regulator, and NPN transistor
Q4 increases series-pass regulator output well
above 1 A. Total of 1.5 A is available from two
outputs. Transistor and diode types are not crit-
ical. Efficiency is 80% for 15-V output and 64%
for 12-V output. — R. J. Apfel and D. B. Jones,
Universal Switching Regulator Diversifies
Power Subsystem Applications, Computer De-
sign, March 1978, p 103-112.
3.3-kW SWITCHING— Delco DTS-518 and DTS-

519 power transistors in high-efficiency stacked
supply are operated at 25-kHz switching rate to
provide 330 VDC at 10 A. Control circuit oper-
ates at primary 50-kHz pulse frequency, with
negative-going pulses having 2-p.s duration.
Flip-flop converts this to 25-kHz complemen-
tary square-wave signal driving Darlington
DTS-2000s. T ransf ormer cores are Magnetics EE
No. 42510 each having 15-turn primary and 5-
turn secondary for driving DTS-518s. Error am-
plifier compares portion of total output voltage
to zener reference for control of DTS-519 power
transistor switching at 25 kHz. Efficiency is 95%
at full load. — "3.3kW High Efficiency Switch
Mode Regulator," Delco, Kokomo, IN, 1977, Ap-
plication Note 59.
4.5-30 V SWITCHING AT 6 A— LM105 positive

regulator serves as amplifier-reference for
LM195 power transistor 1C in switching regu-
lator. Duty cycle of switching action adjusts au-
tomatical y togive constant output. 02 consists
of four LM195s in parallel since each is rated at
only about 2 A. R8 serves as output voltage con-
trol.— "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," National
P 4.
T Solid tantalum.
TRANSFORMING +12 V TO -15 V— External voltage more negative than substrate, which is D. B. Jones, Universal Switching Regulator Di-
PNP transistor 03 and catch diode D2 (types not grounded. Efficiency is 84% with 200-mA load. versifies Power Subsystem Applications, Com-
critical) are used with Fairchild /*A78S40 Output voltage ripple is 50 mV but can be re- puter Design, March 1978, p 103-112.
switching regulator so no pin of 1C substrate has duced by increasing value of C0. — R. J. Apfel and
975
HIGH-VOLTAGE NEGATIVE SWITCHING— Uses

zener to reduce supply voltage to acceptable
level for LM304 1C regulator. Base drive and volt-
age isolation are provided by Q2, R10, and R„ for
PIC636 hybrid power switch. Circuit operates in
fixed OFF-time mode. — L. Dixon and R. Patel,
Designers' Guide to: Switching Regulators,
EDN Magazine, Oct. 20, 1974, p 53-59.
-12 V
VOUT
lOUT
300 mA
—12 V AT 300 mA FROM —48 V — Uses Fairchild

/iA78S40 switching regulator having variety of
components. Efficiency is 86%, and output rip-
ple is 300 mV. Extra opamp on chip is used to
derive required referen ce voltage of -2.6 V from
internal 1.3-V reference. — R. J. Apfel and D. B.
Jones, Universal Switching Regulator Diversi-
fies Power Subsystem Applications, Computer
Design, March 1978, p 103-112.
POWER SWITCH FOR SWITCHING REGULA- provided at 3 A and 20 kHz, with artificial neg- by forcing 1C to logic low. Used in 24-V 3-A
TOR— Circuit operating from 12-V step-down ative bias supply created from single positive switching-mode power supply operating from
transformer includes push-pull driver providing supply to improve fall time. Current limiting is AC line. — R. J. Haver, "A New Approach to
interface between logic drive signal and 2N6306 added to base current to limit overdrive and re- Switching Regulators," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
duce storage time. Power switch is turned off 1975, AN-719, p 5.
high-voltage power transistor. Switching is
+5 V TO -15 V — Use of switching regulator for by C, and R5 and duty cycle by divider R3-R„. kHz, duty cycle is 20% for -15 V output, and
voltage conversion permits generation of Extra loop function performed by Q, and zener maximum load current is 200 mA. Design equa-
higher output voltage along with polarity re- operating in conjunction with resistor network tions are given. — H. Mortensen, 1C Comparator
versal. LM311 operates as free-running MVBR modifies oscillator duty cycle until desired out- Converts +5 to —15V DC, EDN Magazine, Dec.
with low duty cycle. Frequency is determined put level is obtained. Nominal frequency is 6 20, 1973, p 78-79.
15 V FROM 7.5—30 V — Switching regulator op- three transistors. Voltage across L, reverses, desired level, when IC2 switches to its low out-
eration is independent of input voltage level. and current flows into C, through D, and D2. put state and holds 1C, low until output drops
When power is applied, Q, conducts and turns When this current as sensed by R2 falls below back below preset level to complete one cycle
on Q2 and Q3. When linear rising current of Q, lower threshold, 1C, switches back to its high of oscillation. — A. Delagrange, Voltage Regu-
exceeds upper threshold as sensed by R,, 1C, output state. This oscillating action continues lator Can Have Same Input and Output Level,
switches to low output state and turns off all until output voltage as sensed by IC2 rises above EDN Magazine, Aug. 5, 1973, p 87 and 89.
+24 V FROM +12 V AT 2 A — Combination of

PIC635 boost switching regulator and TL497
control circuit accepts DC input voltage and pro-
vides regulated output voltage that must be
greater than input voltage. When transistor
switch is turned on, input voltage is applied
across L. When transistor is turned off, energy
stored in L is transferred through diode to load
where it adds to energy transferred directly
from input to output during diode conduction
time. Output voltage is regulated by controlling
duty cycle. — "Flyback and Boost Switching
Regulator Design Guide," Unitrode, Water-
town, MA, 1978, U-76, p 9.
±15 V TRACKING— Dual-tracking connection for +15 V and 85% for -15 V, both at 100 mA. fies Power Subsystem Applications, Computer
for Fairchild /iA78S40 switching regulator op- Output ripple is 30 mV.— R. J. Apfel and D. B. Design, March 1978, p 103-112.
erates from single 20-V input. Efficiency is 75% Jones, Universal Switching Regulator Diversi-
V|N
5-V SWITCHING — Darlington pair Q,-Q2 serves

as switch for regulator using Signetics 550 as
threshold detector. Design equations are given.
Exact frequency of self-oscillating switching
regulator depends primarily on parasitic com-
ponents. Iffrequency is important, as in appli-
cations requiring EMI suppression, regulator
may be locked to external square-wave drive
signal fed to reference terminal. — "Signetics
CA, 1977, p 661-662.
on Ferroxcube. 42/29-377 A400
)0 mA)
p0ut i = 4 waits POUT 2 = 600 mW Load Regulatii
tv0 = 5 V 15%) (VQ = 12 V ±10%) (0 < I L sS . pOUT 1 = 0.6%
5 V Ripple Component 50 mV ÔUT 3 ~ 3 mW
(120 Hz + 20 kHz)
(Vq = 3 V ±10%)
MULTIPLE-OUTPUT SWITCHING REGULA- astable MVBR serves as control element. Feed-
power circuit. — H. Wurzburg, "Control Your
TOR— Additional outputs are obtained from back is achieved by amplifying output error Switching Regulator with the MC3380 Astable
switching regulator by adding secondary wind- with opamp A1 and applying this voltage to pin Multivibrator," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975,
ings to power transformer. Motorola MC3380 6. Report covers design of transformer and EB-52.
+5 V SWITCHING AT 10 A— Unitrode PIC625

hybrid power switch provides switching action
for LM305 regulator at switching speeds up to
100 kHz for input voltage range of 20-40 V. Cir-
cuit operates in fixed OFF-time mode that
makes output ripple independent of input volt-
age. Q1 provides current-limiting action. —
"Switching Regulator Design Guide," Unitrode,
Watertown, MA, 1974, U-68A, p 7.
24-V 3-A SWITCHING-MODE — Circuit operates Logic drive uses push-pull transistors to switch 3 A for input range of 100 to 140 VAC. — R. J.
at 20 kHz from AC line with 70% efficiency. Con- 2N6306 power transistor at 20-kHz rate. Load Haver, "A New Approach to Switching Regula-
trol portion uses quad comparator and optoiso- regulation is 0.8% over output range of 1.5 to 3 tors," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-719, p
lator and provides short-circuit protection. A with 120-VAC input. Line regulation is 3% at 11.
250 V AT 3 A — Single high-voltage silicon

power transistor Q1 serves as series element in
switching regulator, with regulation obtained
by pulse-width modulation. Delco DTS-431 pro-
vides output of 250 V for maximum input of 325
V; other Delco transistors in same series give
different combinations of output voltage and
current in range of 300-750 W maximum output
power. Efficiency is 92% at full load. Differential
amplifier Q2-Q3 senses output voltage of reg-
ulator and feeds Schmitt trigger Q4-Q5 tor turn-
ing series transistor Q1 on and off. Resulting
square wave of voltage is smoothed by LC filter
between Q1 and load. — "Pulse Width Modu-
lated Switching Regulator," Delco, Kokomo, IN,
1972, Application Note 39, p 3.
-5 V SWITCHING— Unitrode U2T201 Darling-

ton serves as switching element for LM304
step-down switching regulator operating from
input of -25 V. Operating frequency can be
about 25 kHz. Darlington will handle peak cur-
rents up to 10 A. — "Designer's Guide to Power
Darlingtons as Switching Devices," Unitrode,
Watertown, MA, 1975, U-70, p 10.
28 V AT 100 W — Circuit using Delco DTS-1020

Darlington silicon power transistor operates
over input range of 22-28 V. Switching rate is
9 kHz. Efficiency is about 85% at full load. Out-
put voltage is sensed to control pulse width of
mono MVBR which is triggered at 9 kHz by os-
cil ator.— "28 Volt Darlington Switching Regu-
Note 49,lator," p 4.Delco, Kokomo, IN, 1971, Application
981
SYMMETRY CORRECTION — Low-cost external

correction circuit for MC3420 switching-mode
regulator ensures balanced operation of power
transformer in push-pull inverter configuration.
Circuit senses voltage impressed on primary of
T1 through sensing secondary S2, for integra-
tion by opamp A1 so voltage on C represents
volt-second product applied to T1. During con-
duction period of Q1, voltage on C ramps up to
some positive value and output of A2 is low.
Conduction period for output 2 then begins, Q2
turns on, and C ramps down to 0 V. A2 output
then goes high, inhibiting output 2 and 02.
Times for C2 to charge and discharge are equal
so conduction periods are equal. — H. Wurz-
burg, "A Symmetry Correcting Circuit for Use
with
EB-66.the MC3420," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1977,
+ 275 Vdc NOM
T4 - PRI 75t *25 LI — 70t of 5 Pcs.

T1_ - PRI 50t tap @ 25t *22 AWG
*16 in PARALLEL
SEC: 62t tap@ 31 1 *25 AWG. ALL SEC'S: 12t *25
CORE FERROXCUBE INC. CORE MAGNETICS INC. CORE ARNOLD ENG.
MOLY PERMALLOY
846T250-3E2A
50076-1 D
A 109 156-2
T2, T3- pri 1 50t *29 T5 - PRI 77t *16
SEC 1 50t *29 SEC: 18t of 6 Pcs
CORE ARNOLD ENG *16 m PARALLEL
4T551 5-S500 CORE USE 2 Pcs

FERROXCUBE
1 44T500-365
50 V AT 1 kW — Switching regulator operating nected inparalleled pairs in each leg of bridge controlling direct current through windings of
at 10 kHz uses pulse-width modulation to give circuit. Clamp diodes in each bridge leg prevent magnetic amplifier. — "One Kilowatt Regulated
87% efficiency at full load. Input voltage is 275 reverse conduction through collector-base Power Converter with the 2N5157 Silicon
VDC. Inverter output drives combination of diodes of transistors. Regulator consists of dif- Power Transistor," Delco, Kokomo, IN, 1972,
eight Delco 2N5157 power transistors con- ferential amplifier and two-stage DC amplifier Application Note 44, p 3.
HIGH-VOLTAGE POSITIVE-SWITCHING— De-

signed for operation from supply voltages
above 40-V maximum rating of LM305 regula-
tor. Output is +5 V at up to 10 A. Circuit uses
fraction of input voltage as determined by R9
and zener, with Q2 providing voltage isolation
between regulator and Unitrode PIC626 hybrid
power switch.— "Switching Regulator Design
Guide,"
68A, p 9. Unitrode, Watertown, MA, 1974, U-
24 V AT 3 A FOR CATV — Switching regulator source. Control circuit consists of dual opamp sistor isoperated between saturation and OFF
design meets requirements for cable television and linear 1C timer used to vary ON time of state at above 18 kHz, with ON time varied
systems where small size, low weight, and high 2N6546 power transistor. At start-up, 04 is sat- while OFF time is fixed, to maintain constant
efficiency are prime considerations. Circuit op- urated and full input voltage is applied to pri- output voltage as sensed by A1. — I. Nappe and
erates above 18 kHz either from 40-60 V 60-Hz mary of power transformer T1. Current then N. Wellenstein, "An 80-Watt Switching Regu-
square-wave source (CATV power line from fer- ramps up linearly until Q4 is switched off by
latorfor CATV and Industrial Applications," Mo-
roresonant transformer) or from DC standby opamps A1 and A2 and timer A3. Power tran- torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-752, p 5.
CHAPTER 89
Tape Recorder Circuits

Includes interface circuits for recording and playback of instrumentation and
microprocessor data signals, Morse code, and RTTY signals on inexpensive
cassette deck, along with NAB-equalized preamps, erase/bias oscillator, AVC,
dynamic range expansion, and VOX circuits for all types of mono and stereo
tape recorders. Interface for keying CW transmitter with taped message is
also given.
DIGITAL RECORDING WITH CASSETTES— Cir- passed through record head to saturate tape, timer is used as combination level detector and
cuit shows modifications required for standard with polarity depending on direction of current. flip-flop to recover serial data. — R. W. Burhans,
cassette recorder to bring read level up to about During read cycle, voltage is induced in head A Simpler Digital Cassette Tape Interface,
1 V. Recorder works well over range of 100 to winding only when transition between oppo- BYTE, Oct. 1978, p 142-143.
1200 b/s. During write process, direct current is sitely polarized zones moves past head. 555 983
ERASE/BIAS OSCILLATOR — Used in high-qual-

ity stereo cassette deck operating from AC line
or battery. Provides up to 33 VRMS at 50-kHz
erase frequency, as required for completely
erasing existing recording on tape when record-
ing over it. Supply voltage should be in range of
12-14 V. Article gives all other circuits of cas-
sette deck and describes operation in detail. —
+ 12
J. L. Linsley Hood, Low-Noise, Low-Cost Cas-
sette Deck, Wireless World, Part 1 — May 1976,
p 36-40 (Part 2— June 1976, p 62-66; Part 3—
Aug. 1976, p 55-56).
CASSETTE PREAMP — Provides gain of 81 dB

and 0.22 mVRMS for 10K load. Gain drops to
about 78 dB and output is 0.1 mVRMS for 600-
ohm load. Gain values are for 100 Hz, with gain
dropping above and below this value. — "Sig-
netics Analog Data Manual," Signetics, Sunny-
vale, CA, 1977, p 782.
FULL WAVE DETECTORS
R 42
A
TO TTL
CASSETTE INTERFACE — With quality recorder READ OFFSET ADJUST
INPUT PORT
and tapes, interface operates reliably at 1100

50 K
bauds, for loading 24K microprocessor system and feed their outputs to summing junction at quencies to sum voltage of 0 V at midfrequency
in 246 s. Cassette output is amplified and pin 5 of three-pole active low-pass filter IC37. of 2550 Hz. Output opamp IC38 delivers correct
clipped by limiting amplifier IC34. Bandpass fil- 2975-Hz tones are rectified to positive voltage TTL level for reading by single-bit input port. —
ters followed by full-wave detectors respond to and 2125-Hz tones to negative voltage, with R. Suding, Why Wait? Build a Fast Cassette In-
2125-Hz mark and 2975-Hz space frequencies amplitudes varying from maximum at exact fre- terface, BYTE, July 1976, p 46-53.
TAPE RECORDER CIRCUITS 985
CASSETTE FILE UPDATE — Interface circuit con-

trols two tape decks for updating mailing lists
or other sequential files stored on magnetic
tape in audio cassettes. Two cassette tape re-
corders are required, one for input (reading
files) and one for output (writing files). Micro-
processor tape input and output circuits are
connected to appropriate tape unit as shown.
Only one cassette operates at any given time.
Optocouplers prevent polarity or voltage prob-
lems between tape motor and microprocessor.
Tape functions are under software control. Soft-
ware delay of about 1 s allows tape motor to
come up to speed before recording starts. Rec-
ords are in numerical or other logical sequence,
so updating requires only one pass. On update,
old cassette file is read into microprocessor for
deletion, change, or addition of data, and cor-
rected data is written on new cassette. Article
covers use for maintaining Christmas card and
other mailing lists, payroll records sequenced
by Social Security number, and other sequential
lists. — W. D. Smith, Fundamentals of Sequen-
tial File Processing, BYTE, Oct. 1977, p 1 14-1 16,
118, 120, 122, 124, and 126-127.
1/4-MC3021
I C7.8.9.1 0 = 1/2 MC7473
signal is 10 mV. Phase encoding is used with

1600 flux reversals per inch. Circuit design pro-
cedure isgiven. Two Motorola MC1458 gain
stages feed head output to passive differentia-
tors C2-R7 and C3-R11 to generate zero cross-
ing. Corner frequency for each differentiator is
86 kHz. IC3 and IC4 process negative-going
R19 » 2.2 k
peaks, while IC5 and IC6 process positive-going
peaks. Outputs of IC4 and IC6 drive T flip-flops
serving as data inputs to IC7 and IC iO. — "The
Recovery of Recorded Digital Information in
CASSETTE DATA READOUT — Uses separate positive and negative peaks, for reading data Drum, Disk and Tape Systems," Motorola,
circuits having threshold provisions for both stored on cassette tape at 15 in/s. Head output Phoenix, A Z, 1974, AN-711, p 9.
+12- 15V 24 V
NAB PLAYBACK PREAMP — Provides standard

NAB equalization for tape player requiring 0.5
VRMS from head having sensitivity of 800 pV
at 1 kHz, with operating speed of 3% in/s. Design
procedure is given. Voltage gain at 1 kHz is 56
dB. — "Audio Handbook," National Semicon-
HEADPHONE AMPLIFIER — Used in high-quality cassette deck and describes operation in detail.
stereo cassette deck operating from AC line or Input to volume control is taken from output of
battery. Provides gain of 5 in class A, for use opamp in replay amplifier, nominally about +5
with low-sensitivity headphones or low-imped- V. — J. L. Linsley Hood, Low-Noise, Low-Cost
ance headphones down to 100 ohms. Replay Cassette Deck, Wireless World, Part 2 — June
amplifier output alone is adequate for head- 1976, p 62-66 (Part 1— May 1976, p 36-40; Part
phones having 2000-ohm load impedance or 3— Aug. 1976, p 55-56).
+ 5V
CASSETTE INTERFACE — Used between re-

corder and computer for loading data stored in
tape cassette. Single divider network R1-R2
drives both opamp inputs and provides stabi-
lized sensitivity. R3 isolates inputs. — B. E.
Rehm, The TDL System Monitor Board, BYTE,
April 1978, p 10, 12-14, and 16.
IC 2
»9V IC 3
SsJ7
AUDIO . M 3
INPUT
IK JPF 3 9K
2 \.6
47K
I00K
OUTPUT
♦9V
L I0K : ik
N 10V
♦ 1 00/i F
“ lOO/i F I0K
t. ;
T7 \7
put of cassette player and audio input of tape four cycles of 1200 Hz represents digital 0. Ad-
COPYING CASSETTE PROGRAMS— Controller recorder. Opamp IC1 with gain of 100 overloads ditional opamps act as four-pole Butterworth
serves for making duplicate copies of micropro- so output is constant-amplitude square wave filter rejecting signals above 3000 Hz. 10K pot is
cessor programs recorded on magnetic tape, for regardless of input level from tape being copied. adjusted so output level matches requirements
insurance against accidental damage to master If program uses audio tones for digital data, of recorder. — P. A. Stark, Copying Computer
cassette during use. Used between audio out- eight cycles of 2400 Hz represents digital 1 and Cassettes, Kilobaud, Aug. 1978, p 94-96.
24V
CW AND RTTY ON CASSETTES— Circuit pro- 2N3906 which gates 2N2646 sawtooth oscilla-
vides conditioning of routine CW calls or RTTY tor operating at about 5 kHz when using 0.005-
test messages, as required for recording on end- /t F gate capacitor; for lower frequency, increase
less-loop cassette. Keyed signal is filtered to re- capacitor to 0.01 /iF. — Cassette-Aided CW and FAST TURN-ON PLAYBACK PREAMP— Turn-on
move contact bounce, then used to turn on RTTY, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1977, p 122-123. for gain and supply voltage is only 0.1 s, as com-
pared to 5 s normally required in preamp pro-
viding NAB tape playback response. — "Audio
Clara, CA, 1977, p 2-31-2-37.
+ 9V
CASSETTE PLAYBACK OF CW AND RTTY—

Playback-signal conditioning circuit is used be-
tween tape recorder and transmitter when rou-
tine CW calls or RTTY test messages are re-
corded on endless-ioop cassette recorder.
Recorded tone is rectified by 1N4148 and ap-
plied to RC timing circuit. Decay voltage devel-
oped across network when tone is removed
turns on 2N3904 and 2N3906 stages. Output of
2N3906 drives reed relay in transmitter keying
circuit. If resistor is used in place of relay, drop
across it during key-down period can be used to
drive electronic keyer. — Cassette-Aided CW
and RTTY, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1977, p 122-123.
stereo cassette deck operating from AC line or sistor specified). Motorola 1C in second stage, Hood, Low-Noise, Low-Cost Cassette Deck,
battery. Amplifier design is optimized for mini- similar to 741 but having 8-pin metal-can en- Wireless World, Part 1 — May 1976, p 36-40
mum noise voltage by using PNP silicon input capsulation, provides equalization required for (Part 2— June 1976, p 62-66; Part 3— Aug. 1976,
transistor operated with lowest possible collec- replay. Output of amplifier is about 0.4 VRMS.
p 55-56).
R5 2N5400
KEYING FROM TAPE — Simple envelope detec-

tor and wave-shaping circuit uses quad NAND
gate for instant replay of recorded CW trans-
missions through transmitter. Diodes can be
1N270 or any other small-signal switching or
general-purpose types. R3, C2, and CR3 provide
envelope detection of amplified and clipped
audio input from tape recorder. — A. H. Kilpa-
trick, Keying a Transmitter with a Tape Re-
corder, QST, Jan. 1974, p45.
8.2V II.OV
DIGITAL CASSETTE HEAD DRIVE— Provides

saturation recording as required for digital data.
Back-to-back zeners provide bipolar limiting at
± 10 V. TTL-level inputs are applied to write data
input, inverted by 7404, and fed to inverting
input of opamp. Noninverting opamp input is
referenced to +1.4 V so output will switch po-
larities when TTL level of input changes. — I.
Rampil and J. Breimeir, The Digital Cassette
Subsystem: Digital Recording Background and
Head Interface Electronics, BYTE, Feb. 1977, p
24-31.
RECORDING AMPLIFIER — Used in high-quality have to be changed for other heads. C,e (3.9 nF) con diode. Article gives all other circuits of cas-
stereo cassette deck operating from AC line or is switched in to change from basic 70-ps re- sette deck and describes operation in detail. —
battery. Uses active RC circuit R16-R,7-C12-C,3- cording characteristic to 120 fis. C17 and RZ7 pro- J. L. Linsley Hood, Low-Noise, Low-Cost Cas-
R19-VR2-C15 to provide required high-frequency vide new cassette-standard bass preemphasis sette Deck, Wireless World, Part 1 — May 1976,
recording characteristic for use with Garrard at 3,180 ns. Recording level is chosen as 0 VU p 36-40 (Part 2— June 1976, p 62-66; Part 3—
CT4 recording head; component values may at 660 Hz. Output feeds VU meter through sili- Aug. 1976, p 55-56).
PLAYBACK PREAMP — Circuit is optimized for

RECORDING AMPLIFIER— Designed for use for slope of 6 dB per octave between 4 kHz and automotive use at supply of 10-15 V. Wideband
with microphone having 10-mV peak output 16 kHz to compensate for falling frequency re- 0-dB reference gain is 46 dB. NAB equalization
and recording head requiring 30-/iA AC drive sponse of recording head starting at 4 kHz. — is included. Tape speeds can be Vk or 3aA in/s. —
current. Output swing is 6 VRMS. High-fre- "Audio Handbook," National Semiconductor, "Audio Handbook," National Semiconductor,
quency cutoff is 16 kHz, with circuit designed Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 2-31-2-37. Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 2-31-2-37.
+ 9 tol5V
MICROPHONE PREAMP — Used in high-quality

stereo cassette deck operating from AC line or
battery. Provides three preset gain positions
(10, 33, and 100) to meet amplification require-
ments of practically all types of microphones
used with tape recorders. Recording input of
cassette deck provides only enough gain for re-
cording from audio amplifier or radio tuner de-
livering 50-100 mV at fairly low impedance,
hence is not suitable for microphone input. Ar-
ticle gives all other circuits of cassette deck and
describes operation in detail. — J. L. Linsley
Hood, Low-Noise, Low-Cost Cassette Deck,
Wireless World, Part 2 — June 1976, p 62-66
(Part 1— May 1976, p 36-40; Part 3— Aug. 1976,
p 55-56).
present in receiver, and turns off recorder when erating at 6 V obtained from 12-V receiver sup- on when recorder is on. Q1 is NPN power tran-
signal goes off. Applications include monitoring ply by series regulator Q1 and zener D1. Con- sistor, while Q2 and Q3 are small-signal NPN
local FM repeater for daily usage to obtain call nection to mute or squelch circuit of receiver is transistors. — F. Johnson, Automatic Taping
signs of users, or unattended recording of mes- shown for set having CA3089E in IF tail end. Dar- Unit, 73 Magazine, May 1977, p 98-99.
PLAYBACK OF PULSE TRAINS— Teledyne Phil-

brick 4702 frequency-to-voltage converter cir-
cuit provides ripple filter required for converting
recorded square waves in frequency range of
0.5 to 5 kHz to desired analog output in range
of 2 to 8 VDC. Report covers problems of re-
cording and playing back pulse trains. — "V-F's,

F-V's, and Audio Tape Recorders," Teledyne
Philbrick, Dedham, MA, 1974, AN-11.
STEREO TAPE PLAYBACK — Single Sprague

ULN-2126A 1C provides preamplification for two
channels along with 2-W output power for driv-
ing stereo power amplifier. Values shown give
equalization required for tape playback. Single
ganged tone control serves for both treble and
bass adjustment. — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C Prin-
Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 237 and 243.
01 i
TO TAPE RECORDER
MICROPHONE INPUT vcc K I
C.
FROM
RECEIVER
AUDIO OUTPUT R9 (NO)
O
O
7
C
14 (pin numbers are > Rio0! f 1

P2
5K
TO TAPE RECORDER
"REMOTE" JACK
(SEE TEXT)
UNATTENDED RECORDER— Uses 567 tone de- on RS-267-2016 transistor and pulls in relay to ducing required control frequency. Article gives
coder in circuit designed to respond to 1-kHz turn on tape recorder for recording about 30-s construction and adjustment details. — R. Perl-
tone, to turn on recorder for taking message message. Relay then drops out. Use well-regu- man, The F.M. "Auto-Start," 73 Magazine, April
when receiver of amateur station is unattended. lated 5-V supply. All transmitters using this ser-
R6, C5, and 741 opamp U2 form timer that turns 1974, p 21 and 23-24.
vice must have 1-kHz audio encoders for pro-
R,
TO
10k R2
5% CONDITIONAL
JUMP INPUT
C, OF PROCESSOR
TAPE OUTPUT
0.05 n F
5%
10k % DM 74 74
’/iLM339
GND
and shows waveforms of pulses at five points
INTERFACE FOR AUDIO CASSETTES— Permits which provides self-clocking and is indepen- in circuit. Parity bits provide error correction
use of ordinary home cassette recorder to pro- dent of tape speed variation. Effective I/O rate and detection, using Hamming code. — S. Kim,
vide high-speed loading of assembler and is about 500 b/s or 5 times that of low-speed An Inexpensive Audio Cassette Recorder Inter-
source program into microprocessor. Data is re- paper-tape punch or reader. Article covers 83-86.face for /IP's, EDN Magazine, March 5, 1976, p
corded by using variation of phase encoding. phase-encoding procedure, gives flowchart,
-C26
CIS
‘ 680pF 220pF
■ C23
• 680pF
IC6 R30
1C 1 2
MCI303 MCI303
\ R43
PEAK - FLUX TRANSITION
'gain -MV-
33K
DETECTOR
R48
IOOK “lEiy —
J 33K
lOOpF
R 15
C24
FLUX TRANSITION
4H
J2-05 4 70K
|C R32
— Wv —
IOK
| TRANSPORT
I HEAD '* 20
^SR5
| J2-03 O-,
lR6 / ADJUSTWV
j -THRESHOLD
] ^THRESHOLD
DETECTED
£470K /
L\ / 3 kIC5
is eliminated by detecting peak of analog read

signal, then combining result with threshold in-
DIGITAL CASSETTE READ AMPLIFIER— Signal threshold detectors IC4 and IC5, which give formation inpeak detector. Circuit is used in
from magnetic head of digital tape cassette is logic-level output. When input signal is below Phi-Deck cassette system made by Economy
amplified by two-stage MCI 303 amplifier pro- preset reference level, output of positive thresh- Company, Oklahoma City. — I. Rampil and J.
viding analog output of about 4 V P-P to /llA741 old detector is low; above reference, output is Breimeir, The Digital Cassette Subsystem: Dig-
opamp IC10 of LM31 1 peak detector IC1 1. Signal high. Negative threshold detector operates sim- ital Recording Background and Head Interface
also goes to LM311 positive and negative ilarly for negative pulses. Time jitter in outputs Electronics, BYTE, Feb. 1977, p 24-31.
FOUR-SPEED PLAYBACK PREAMP— Provides

0-dB reference gain of 34 dB. Supply can be ±4.5
to ±15 V. Values shown are for NAB equaliza-
tion and lôrSîn/sjforyând 15 in/e, change
values as indicated. Design equations are
300-BAUD BIT BOFFER TRANSMITTER— Per- waves at 1200 Hz for space or digital 0, for feed
mits recording of serial data on ordinary low- to input of cassette recorder. Circuit eliminates
cost cassette tape recorders for bulk storage of errors commonly encountered when attempt-
data to be used later in microprocessor. Re- ing to record square waves on tape with low-
quires 19,200-Hz reference input to terminal XC cost recorder. — D. Lancaster, "TV Typewriter
from external clock. Feedback from sine-wave Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
synthesizer IC1 to divide-by-4 counter IC2 au- 1976, p 167-171.
tomatically synchronizes system so sine waves
automatically switch just before zero crossing
TO / FROM
each time serial data changes from 1 to 0 or back LANCASTER SPEED INDEPENDENT I- RECEIVE DATA FROM INTERFACE
again. Output consists of 16 half sine waves at CASSETTE INTERFACE 2 - RECEIVE CLOCK FROM INTERFACE
2400 Hz for mark or digital 1 and 8 half sine 3- TRANSM IT CLOCK TO INTERFACE
PERIPHERAL
SIDE
CPU
SIDE T
1C I R RLYI
MC6850 7407 OPEN AN
S
COLLECTOR M
DRIVER
CTS IT NON-INVERTING IT I2VDC
DA . NO RELAY
VSS TA 1200ft 10m A
TO RADIO SHACK 275-003
DCD1T RXDATA
I
N
DO RXCLK T
E
R
F
A TO TAPESETTE REMOTE
CAS-
TV<CLK C
E CONTROL
DO
IT RTS
Dl
D3
DATA TX DAT A
Dl
BUS D4
D3D 2— IT IRQ
D5 JLCSO
P2 -9-
D6
D4 — 1TCS2
RS
D5 — -10- LR4
Vi D.
JLCSI
D6 —
E VDD
R/W
D7
107 —
ADDRESS
R/W- t_I_ 100
42 —
AND
2 I 74121
a
CONTROL IC6
BUS AO —
AI3-
IRO - 5 sec DELAY
2 7400^±— ^ 5|~t400^>^
3
fas STD, 3
IC3 JCLRO
C >39K
555
-H- TRANSMIT CLOCK C 3
-pr-10
50MF
1C 4
7473 16 * F 4800Hz
n:: FOR 300 BAUD |3
9K
n
-ADJUST R|
FOR 9600Hz ONESHOT
2700pF
74121
Ua — jQ.
m 2 5 sec DELAY
CASSETTE INTERFACE WITH ACIA— Permits transfers in ACIA are made over single 8-bit bi- quency. IC7 gives delay so reading starts 2.5 s
use of audio pickup for mass storage in Moto- directional bus. Request-to-send line (RTS) con- before first data byte. Article covers circuit op-
rola 6800 microcomputer system. Uses Moto- trols tape recorder motor. When RTS is set high, eration in detail and gives operating subrou-
rola MC6850 asynchronous communication in- input to IC8 is high and relay coil is not ener- tines.— J. Hemenway, The Compleat Tape Cas-
terface adapter (ACIA), which is specialized gized. IC6 gives 5-s delay following motor turn- sette Interface, BYTE, March 1976, p 10-16.
version of UART. All control, status, and data on so long leader will be recorded at mark fre-
Vs = *33 V
ULTRALOW-NOISE PLAYBACK PREAMP— Pro-

vides optimum noise performance at popular
tape speeds of Vh and 33k in/s. Reference gain
for 0 dB is 41 dB, giving output level of 200 mV
from head output of 1 mV at 1 kHz. Single-
ended biasing and use of metal-film resistors
2-37.
reduce noise. — "Audio Handbook," National
300-BAUD BIT BOFFER RECEIVER— Used with three-fourths of way through low-frequency
ordinary cassette recorder to convert half sine (1200 Hz) half-cycle. Point E then has stream of
waves of recorded serial data to corresponding eight pulses for 0 and no pulses for 1. Final flip-
digital Is and Os. Output of recorder passes flop provides recovery of data as Is and Os.
through filter and limiter IC6 to give square Leading edge of waveform at D is shorten ed and
wave at point C whose zero crossings corre- combined with clock pulses to provide compos-
spond to recorded sine wave. Leading and trail- ite UART clock output. Boffer system eliminates
ing edges of square wave are converted to nar- errors commonly encountered when attempt-
row positive pulses by EXCLUSIVE-OR gate IC4 ing to record square waves on tape with low-
to give stream of pulses at D, one for each zero cost recorder. — D. Lancaster, "TV Typewriter
crossing. Transistor circuit forms retriggerable Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
mono that is adjusted so point E goes positive
1976, p 167-171.
0 OOlvF
CASSETTE RECORD/PLAYBACK — National complete recording and playback of cassette control when recording. Diode is also on chip. —
LM389 power amplifier chip includes three NPN tapes. Two of internal transistors act as signal "Audio Handbook," National Semiconductor,
transistors, to provide all circuits needed for amplifierswhilethirdisusedforautomaticlevel Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-33-4-37.
AUTOMATIC RANGE EXPANSION— Instrumen- lect corresponding inverse gain for unfolding lected so direction of enEC is reversed. If e,N is
tation tape recorder technique folds recorded recorded signal. Level of input signal e,N, in greater than V2, both comparators are high and
signal over and reuses same VCO range three range of 0-10 V, is sensed by comparators section 4 is selected for gain of +1/3, so eBEC
times, at three different gains, for increasing whose preset thresholds are determined by again reverses to cross VCO range for third
dynamic recording range to over 10,000. Two pots V, and V2. If input is less than V,, both com- time. Outputs of comparators are summed to
comparators select one of three amplifier gains parator outputs are low and section 1 of HA2405 form three-level signal for recording on control
according to level of input signal and record se- four-channel opamp is selected for recording at track. — J. R. White, Comparator Technique Ex-
lected gain on separate control track. During 10 times input. If input is greater than V, and pands Tape Recorder's Range, EDN Magazine,
playback, control track signal eC0N is used to se- less than V2, section 2 having gain of -2 is se- April 5, 1975, p 111, 113, and 115.
12-V PLAYBACK PREAMP — Provides standard

NAB equalization. Gain is decreased gradually
from 60 dB at 20 Hz to 32 dB at 20 kHz in accor-
dance with NAB playback curve. Playback head
is represented by 3.3K resistor. — "Audio Hand-

CA, 1977, p 2-31-2-37.
-5V
square-wave output is taken care of automati-

FSK GENERATOR FOR CASSETTE DATA— Uses cally by high-frequency rolloff characteristic of
two 565 PLL ICs, locked to 800-Hz system clock tape recorder. Incoming data determines which
but oscillating at 6.4 kHz and 4.8 kHz, to provide oscillator feeds its signal to recorder. — "Sig-
FSK signals for recording digital data on ordi- netics Analog Data Manual," Signetics, Sunny-
nary cassette tape. Harmonic suppression of vale, CA, 1977, p 859-860.
R4 RIO R1 5
Cl, 4, 8, 10, 12 — 50mfd electrolytic capacitor

C2 — 2.2mfd electrolytic capacitor
C3, 7, 11 — O.lmfd ceramic capacitor
C5 — 220mfd electrolytic capacitor
C6, 9 — lOOmfd electrolytic capacitor
R1 — 120,000-ohm, '/«w resistor
R2 — 56,000-ohm, Viw resistor
R3, 9, 13 — 10,000-ohm, Viw resistor
R4, 10, 14 — 1000-ohm, Viw resistor
R6, 11 — 1 megohm, Viw resistor
R8, 12 — 2700-ohm, Viw resistor
R15 — 56-ohm, Viw resistor
R16 — 50,000-ohm, miniature potentiometer
R22, 23 — 560,000-ohm, Viw resistor
Dl, 2, 3, 4— diodes 1N266 or equiv.
I1-—Q6NPN transistor Motorola HEP 50

2, 3— P-channel FET 2N3820
4, 5, 7— N-channel FET Motorola HEP 801
8 — PNP transistor Motorola HEP 52
9 — NPN transistor Motorola HEP 53
— outpu
273-1 transformer 1K-200K Radio Shack
t 376
K — miniature relay Radio Shack 275-004
AVC AND VOX — Voice-operated ON/OFF turning on recorder. Circuit provides about 2-s spite movements of loudspeaker toward or
switch uses microphone to sense normal back- delay after subject stops talking, before releas- away from microphone. — G. Beard, Automatic
ground sound. Anything above background ing relay. Automatic volume control circuit Volume and VOX for Your Tape Recorder, Pop-
threshold preset by R16 energizes relay K for keeps recorded signal essentially constant de- ular Science, Oct. 1973, p 134 and 136.
12V INPUT FROM RECORDER

EARPHONE JACK
NAB TAPE PREAMP — One section of Signetics

NE542 dual noise amplifier is used to provide
100-mV output level at 1 kHz following NAB
equalization curve for tape speed of 7'n in/s. —
Sunnyvale, CA, 1977* p 780.
+5V
CASSETTE DATA PLAYBACK— Converts low-
level digital signals from cassette recorder into
CMOS-compatible 5-V square waves. Both in-
puts of 3130 opamp are biased to -1-2 V for use
as open-loop comparator. RC input filter mini-
mizes hum and bias interference. — D. Lancas-
ter, "CMOS Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, In-
dianapolis, IN, 1977, p 345.
FSK DETECTOR FOR CASSETTE-RECORDED

DATA — Connection shown for 565 PLL provides
data output of 1 for 6.4 kHz and 0 for 4.8 kHz
from ordinary cassette tape recorder having fre-
quency response to 7 kHz. Report gives circuit
of suitable recorder using return-to-zero FSK.
System also requires 800-Hz clock generator for
synchronizing to data. Up to seven Os can occur
in succession without making clock go out of
sync. Odd parity is used. — "Signetics Analog
p 857-859.
NE565 phase-locked loop serves for both mod-

ulation and demodulation. Frequency response
of 0-800 Hz is suitable for recording VLF phe-
nomena at tape speed of 9.1 cm/s (3.5 in/s). Car-
rier frequency is in midband, at 3 kHz. Article
covers circuit operation in detail and gives de-
sign equations. — B. D. Jordan. Simple F.M.
FM FOR INSTRUMENTATION— Frequency and opamp converts ordinary low-cost tape re- Modulator/Demodulator for a Magnetic Tape
modulator-demodulator circuit using single 1C corder into instrumentation recorder. Signetics Recorder, Wireless World, March 1974, p 29-30.
CHAPTER 90
Telephone Circuits
Includes coders and decoders for standard Touch-Tone pairs of frequencies
and for single-tone remote ON/OFF control, along with repeater autopatch
circuits, Touch-Tone to dial converter, phone-call counter, ring detector, ring
simulator, and busy-signal generator. See also Repeater chapter.
lOmeg
DIAL-TONE GENERATOR — Simultaneous pairs

of Touch-Tone frequencies used by telephone
company are generated by adjustment-free cir-
cuit using Motorola Touch-Tone dialer with ex- SPECIAL
TOUCH TONE
KEYPAD
ternal 1-MHz crystal. Internal circuits of 1C select
proper division rates and convert outputs to
synthesized sine waves of correct frequencies. PRESSING KEY
SHORTS ONE ROW
Grounding one of row inputs by pressing key LINE AND ONE
gives lower-frequency tone, while grounding COLUMN LINE TO
COMMON
one of column inputs gives higher-frequency ICHROMERICS ER 216231
tone. Special Touch-Tone keyboard provides
this grounding action automatically when sin-
gle key is pressed. — D. Lancaster, "CMOS Cook-
p 239-240. 1N4001
R2
r3
Tl
C2
Co Rm rL
R1
Ri
rm
Zl
750kS2 27 V ZENER
TYPICAL VALUES 2k£2
1fiF/200V 200012/812 TRANSFORMER Z2
330pF
18kS2 812 SPEAKER d5.d6 1 50k£2
dj d4 300kS2
IN 4004 47jjF/25V
200k£ 2 12V ZENER 1N4742
3.3k£2 IN914
SP
BELL SIMULATOR— Uses AMI S2561 CMOS 1C necessary, network inside dashed lines can be 640 Hz. Power output to 8-ohm loudspeaker is
to simulate effects of telephone bell by produc- omitted and pins EN and Dl connected directly at least 50 mW, fed through 200:8 ohm trans-
ing tone signal that shifts between two prede- to VDD, which is typically 10 V. Power is derived former.— 'Tone Ringer," American Microsys-
termined frequencies at about 16 Hz. In appli- from telephone lines by diode-bridge supply. tems, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, S2561, p 7.
cations where dial pulse rejection is not Values shown give tone frequencies of 512 and
997
I MHZ +I2V _
-O
TRANSMIT N , RECEIVE
680 \\ V
© © © o
CONTROL.
© © ©
© © © 470
© © ©
TOUCH-TONE ENCODER— Crystal-controlled
encoder using 14410 tone encoder operates
from 12-V supply to provide good frequency
stability along with correct balance between
A
r*h
high and low tones. 50K level adjustment pot
can be screwdriver type. — G. A. Wilson, The COMMON O H
Micoder: Some Improvements, Ham Radio,

Nov. 1978, p 42-43.
1C PIN ARRANGEMENT
STABLE ENCODER — All tones are frequency-

synthesized and held within tolerance of 0.2%
by using Motorola MC14410P CMOS tone-en-
coder chip which is digital synthesizer requiring
only 1-MHz reference crystal and nine other ex-
ternal parts. Circuit is redesign of Heath Mi-
coder for triggering autopatch of repeater dur-
ing mobile operation. Operates from 9-V
battery. Audio output matches input for low-
impedance microphone. For higher output, in-
crease R3 and R4. — G. K. Fallenbeck, Mycoder,
QST, April 1978, p 27-29.
KEY PULSER — American Microsystems S2560A Dialing rate can be varied by changing dial rate digit is entered. Arrangement permits entering
CMOS 1C pulser converts pushbutton inputs to oscillator frequency. 1C includes 20-digit mem- digits much faster than output rate. Last num-
series of pulses suitable for telephone dialing, ory that makes last dialed number available for ber is redialed by going off hook and pressing
as replacement for mechanical telephone dial. redialing until new number is entered. Entered # key. — "Key Pulser," American Microsystems,
Circuit shows typical connection to dial tele- digits are stored sequentially in internal mem- Santa Clara, CA, 1977, S2560A/S2560B, p 8.
phone set using 500-type encapsulated circuit. ory, with dial pulsing starting as soon as first
+5V TELEPHONE CIRCUITS 999
TO PLL SINGLE-TONE DECODER— Can be used for

Touch-Tone decoding as well as for telephone-
PATCH
line and wireless control applications using sin-
gle audio frequency. Operating center fre-
quency depends on R1 and Cl. R1 should be
AUTO- between 2K and 20K. Cl in microfarads is
computed from f = 1/R1C1, where R is in meg-
ohms and f is in hertz. C2 is low-pass filter in
range of 1-22 /uF; the larger its value, the nar-
rower its bandwidth. C3 is not critical and can
be about twice C2.— C. D. Rakes, "Integrated
Circuit Projects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapo-
lis, IN, 1975, p 68-73.
TOLL-CALL KILLER — Prevents unauthorized di- Circuit requires only three 567 tone decoders,
rect long-distance dialing through repeater au- 7402 quad gate, and either transistor or relay for
topatch from areas where "1" must be dialed controlling autopatch. Article covers installa-
ahead of desired out-of-town phone number. tion and operation. — W. J. Hosking, Long Dis-
Based on simultaneous detection of 350-Hz tance Call Eliminator, 73 Magazine, April 1976,
component of dial tone and 1209- and 697-Hz
tones assigned to "1" in Touch-Tone system. p 44-45.
tone telephone. Diodes D1-D4 are added to grammable dividers to give eight standard
DUAL-TONE SIGNALING — American Microsys- telephone set to ensure that polarity of direct audio frequencies with high accuracy for com-
tems S2559 digital tone generator
si 1C at upper voltage across device is unchanged even if con- bining inpairs as required for dual-tone signal-
right interfaces directly with encapsulated 500- nections tophone terminals are reversed. Gen- ing.— "Digital Tone Generator," American Mi-
type telephone set to give pushbutton dual- erator 1C requires external crystal feeding pro- crosystems, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, S2559, p 1 1.
SINGLE-TONE DECODER — Used at receiving

end of leased telephone line in which single
tone frequency serves for alarm and other pur-
poses. A1 is 741 opamp connected as inverting
amplifier, with R1 and R3 chosen to match input
impedance and R2 chosen to give gain required
for available input signal level. For 10K input
impedance, R1 and R3 are 10K and R2 in kilohms
is 10 times required gain (500K for gain of 50).
Actual tone decoding is performed by A2, which
is also 741; here C3, C4, R8, and R9 are fre-
quency-determining components and R6 is gain
control. R4 is chosen to give desired bandwidth;
use 470K for 5-10%, 1 megohm for 3-5%, and
2.2 megohms for 1-3%. R8 is same as R2, and
R9 equals R3. Diodes are 1N914. — C. D. Rakes,
"Integrated Circuit Projects," Howard W. Sams,
OFF
PHONE-CALL COUNTER — Circuit actuates so-

lenoid that depresses R/S counting key of SR-56
calculator for each interrogation event consist-
ing of sequence of pulse bursts each corre-
sponding to ring of phone. Bursts are separated
by 4-s pauses, so circuit includes time delay that
prevents actuation of solenoid until line has re-
mained quiescent for more than 5 s after burst.
Article includes program that is inserted in cal-
culator to total number of times R/S key is de-
pressed. Applications include counting number
of telephone calls received while away. — M.
Bram, Hardware + Program Makes SR-56 Event
Counter, EDN Magazine, Aug. 5, 1978, p 84 and
86.
TOUCH-TONE ENCODER— Uses 555 timers to low-group oscillator reads 941 Hz at pin 3 of U1 Automatic push-to-talk control uses U4 con-
generate Touch-Tone frequencies in pairs using when * key is pressed. Frequencies of 852, 770, nected as 1-s mono MVBR driving relay K1. — H.
two of seven possible frequencies, under con- and 697 Hz will then be correct within 2% when M. Berlin, Homebrew Touch-Tone Encoder,
trol of standard 12-button pad. Adjust R10 so 7, 4, and 1 are pressed, if 1% resistors are used Ham Radio, Aug. 1977, p 41-43.
TELEPHONE CIRCUITS 1001
KEYBOARD
SWITCH DETAIL ENCODER
TOUCH-TONE DRIVE FOR LOUDSPEAKER— En-

coder is held in front of microphone to access
and use autopatch of repeater. Acoustic cou-
pling eliminates need for opening new trans-
ceiver to make wire connections, which would
void guarantee. Uses Motorola MC14410P 1C
with KB1 keyboard (Polypaks 92CU3149). Q1
and 02 are 2N3643 or equivalent. Y1 is 1.000
MHz crystal (Mariann Labs ML18P or Sherold
Crystal HC-6) . T ransistors Q1 and Q2 boost out-
put enough to drive 8-ohm loudspeaker. Total
current drain is 35 mA idling and 100 mA with
full drive. — C. Gorski, A Low-Cost Touch-Tone
Encoder, QST, Oct. 1976, p 36-37.
AUTOPATCH RELEASE — Control circuit auto-

matically releases telephone autopatch at re-
ceiver when called party hangs up, by generat-
ing disconnect signal for patch control logic.
Action is based on reversal of polarity of phone
line when called party answers, and return of
polarity to preanswered condition when called
party hangs up. Article describes circuit opera-
tion and use. — T. R. Yocom, Automatic Auto-
patch Release, 73 Magazine, April 1977, p 52.
TOUCH-TONE BAND-REJECT FILTER— Cas- as aid to decoding for repeater control func- ing resistorvalues and adjusting toroids so each
caded notch filters with active limiter at output tions. All coils are 88-mH toroid. RA is between stage rejects different tone in its band. — B.
provide 20-dB attenuation of either low (697- 5600 and 22,000 ohms, and RB is 1000 to 3000 Bretz, Multi-Function FM Repeater Decoder,
941 Hz) or high (1209-1633 Hz) groups of tones. ohms. Article gives tuning procedure for select- Ham Radio, Jan. 1973, p 24-32.
♦ 12
BUSY-SIGNAL GENERATOR— Conventional

Bell System busy signal is provided by turning
twin-T oscillator at left on and off with low-fre-
quency asymmetrical square wave generated
by transistor pair at right. Q1 acts as switch for
turning oscillator on and off. Developed for use
at repeater in home when autopatch connects
to family telephone, to inhibit use of autopatch
by mobile station when phone is in use. Article
also covers connections to phone line and to re-
peater.— T. Yocom, An Autopatch Busy Signal,
73 Magazine, Holiday issue 1976, p 148 and 150.
PUSHBUTTON-TO-DIAL CONVERTER— Combi- for dialing number on conventional dial-tele- dialed. Check local telephone company regula-
nation of Motorola MC14419 keypad-to-binary phone system. Eleventh SPDT button is used for tions before making connections to telephone
converter and MC14408 BCD-to-dial telephone redial feature; if line called is busy, one press of lines. — I. Math, A Push-Button to Dial Tele-
pulse converter is used with 10-switch push- redial button dials number over again. Number phone Converter, CQ, Sept. 1 976, p 36-37.
button array to provide correct chain of pulses is stored for repeated use until new number is
1003
TELEPHONE CIRCUITS
TOUCH-TONE ENCODER— Consists of SME

Touch-Tone generator and keyboard made by
Data Signal (Albany, GA) mounted on any small
transistor radio. Only audio section is used,
with output tones from loudspeaker being fed
acoustically to microphone of FM amateur sta-
tion. Article gives construction details. — D. In-
gram, The Shirt Pocket Touch-Tone, 73 Maga-
zine, Nov. 1976, p 58-59.
45-kHz LOW-PASS STATE-VARIABLE FILTER—

Used in precision telephone-network active
equalizer. Damping value is 0.082, which re-
qu ires 1 % components. For high pass, take out-
put from first opamp; for bandpass, take output
from second opamp. — D. Lancaster, "Active-Fil-
ter Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis,
IN, 1975, p 147.
R22
IOOK
-L C22
a — rr^
TOUCH-TONE DECODER — Uses seven National of gate gotohighorl state for driving NPN tran- of ordinary calculator used as digital display.
LM567 phase-locked loop decoders (U1-U7) sistor that can turn on LED labeled with corre- Article tells how to adjust 10K pot for each 567
having high noise rejection, immunity to false sponding Touch-Tone number. Alternatively, for detection of desired frequency. — W. Mac-
signals, and stable center frequency. Each 567 gate outputs can drive 12 relays, with relay con- Dowell, Touch-Tone Decoder, 73 Magazine,
activates proper gate of SN7402, making output tacts going to LEDs and/or to keyboard switches June 1976, p 26-27.
PLL TOUCH-TONE DECODER— Seven 567 PLLs

sense presence of selected tones from common
100-200 VRMS input line, while 8885 NOR
gates perform necessary decoding logic to gen-
erate decimal outputs. Circuit takes advantage
of good frequency selectivity provided by lock-
and-capture ranges of PLLs, as required for dis-
criminating against many tones. — E. Murthi,
Monolithic Phase-Locked Loops — Analogs Do
All the Work of Digitals, and Much More, EDN
Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977, p 59-64.
TONE ENCODER— Motorola MC14410 CMOS 1C as Chromerics ER-21623 or ER-21611. Q1-Q2 in detail and gives tone-encoder frequency
is basis of accurate low-power Touch-Tone en- form tone-amplifier/emitter-follower line driver. table. — J. DeLaune, Digital Touch-Tone En-
coder system providing full 2-of-8 encoding U2 is push-to-talk mono 1-s timer. Supply can coder for VHF FM, Ham Radio, April 1975, p 28-
be any voltage from 5 to 12 V if zener is used to SI.
from basic 1-MHz crystal oscillator. Can be used
with 2-of-7 or 2-of-8 keypad switch matrix such supply 5 V to ICs. Article covers circuit operation
1005
TELEPHONE CIRCUITS
SINGLE-TONE SIGNALING — Wien-bridge oscil-

lator using 741 opamp drives 2N2924 or equiv-
alent NPN transistor to generate stable audio
tone for signaling over telephone lines. Tuning
capacitor (C2 and C3 are equal) and resistor (R2
and R3 are equal) values range from 0.1 fiF and
15.9K for 100 Hz to 0.005 /*F and 6.3K for 5000
Hz. For other frequencies, use f = 0.159/R2C2.
With 12-V supply, tone output is about 7 V P-P.
Select R7 to match impedance of driven cir-
cuit.— C. D. Rakes, "Integrated Circuit Proj-
p 55-60.
ALL KEYS ACTUATE
MOBILE AUTOPATCH — Circuit operates push-

to-talk of mobile station automatically when
any button on Touch-Tone pad is pushed for
dialing telephone number after making auto-
patch, eliminating need for engaging micro-
phone before dialing. Circuit remains active for
about 2 s after Touch-Tone button is released. —
Circuits, 73 Magazine, May 1977, p 19.
keyboard together form inexpensive Touch- vide dual tones only. Pin 10 provides output input of transmitter. Choice of 1C depends on
Tone generator producing tones within 0.75% when keyboard entry has been made, for keying type of keyboard used.— T. Ahrens, Integrated-
of required values. Uses 3.579545-MHz TV push-to-talk (PTT). Loudspeaker can be elimi- Circuit Tone Generator, Ham Radio, Feb. 1977,
color-burst crystal. Pin 15 is grounded to pro- nated ifoutput is fed directly into microphone
TWO-TONE ENCODER — 741 opamps and 2000-Hz tone, use 0.01 juF for Cl and C2 and use and C = Cl = C2. Frequencies can be chosen for
2N2924 transistors are connected as single- 8K for R3 and R4. Formula for frequency of each
Touch-Tone signaling. — C. D. Rakes, "Inte-
tone encoders producing different audio fre- encoder is f = 0.159/RC where f is in hertz, R in grated Circuit Projects," Howard W. Sams, In-
quencies, with outputs connected together. For megohms, and C in microfarads; R = R3 = R4 dianapolis, IN,1975, p 95-97.
for automatic dialer using BCD thumbwheel added. To make telephone call from car through ephone numbers. — W. J. Hosking, Drive More
switch to choose telephone number desired. repeater, select number desired, push access Safely with a Mobile Dialer, 73 Magazine, Feb.
Numbers are stored in 256-bit PROM by con- button and, when dial tone is heard, push start
1977, p 102-104.
TELEPHONE CIRCUITS 1007
TOUCH-TONE DIALER— Single Motorola 4410

chip requires only two external components
and 2-of-8 keyboard to generate twosine waves
simultaneously for Touch-Tone dialing and tel-
ephone modem communication. Each key on
keyboard grounds one of C inputs and one of R
inputs. As example, when 6 key is pressed, R2
and C3 are grounded to give 770-Hz sine wave
on pin 2 and 1477-Hz sine wave on pin 15. De-
signed for driving IK load. Output voltage is
about 600 mV P-P for low output and 800 mV P-
P for high output. — D. Lancaster, "CMOS Cook-
p 132.
RING DETECTOR — Optoisolator using neon

lamp and light-dependent resistor serves as in-
terface between telephone line and line-oper-
ated remote bell. Neon fires reliably from nom-
inal 100-VAC ring signal, while capacitor C ,
provides isolation required to prevent latch-up
by sustaining voltages within range of phone-
line quiet battery. If optional protective varistor
RiC1 is added, rating of capacitor can be reduced
to 400 V. Triac Q, in series with primary of line
transformer provides synchronization to 20-Hz
ringing frequency of phone system. — W. D.
Kraengel, Jr., Ring Detector Optically Interfaces
Phone, EDN Magazine, Aug. 5, 1978, p 80 and
82.
TOUCH-TONE PAD f
>4© 6 © -O
- © © ©'-©'
>~© © ®; -
(*) ® SINGLE-IC TOUCH-TONE ENCODER— Uses
ME8900 tone generator made by Microsystems
* ♦ International, Ottawa, Canada, to generate
n -0^0 pairs of audio frequencies for telephone signal-

ing. Standard Touch-Tone pad provides column
and row switch closures for pins 4, 5, 6, and 8
OUTPUT
I 16
10 VmF
going to low-frequency parallel-T oscillators of
1C and for pins 9, 10, 11, and 12 of high-fre-
1 mF 16 V
quency oscillator.— C. D. Rakes, "Integrated Cir-
9-V DC cuit Projects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis,
680 IN, 1975, p 100-101.
1/2 WQ
TOP VIEW
o J
ME8900 SWITCH THAT CLOSES EACH TIME A
PUSH - BUTTON SWITCH IS PRESSED
ON TOUCH -TONE PAD
CHAPTER 91
Teleprinter Circuits
Includes tone generators and demodulators for FSK and AFSK used in wire
and video Teletype systems having 170-Hz, 850-Hz, or other frequency shifts,
as well as "QUICK BROWN FOX" and other test-character generators, RAM
storage for up to 128 RTTY characters, autostart control, RTTY active filters
and motor control, microprocessor and UART interfaces, and clock-signal
generator for variety of keying speeds.
RTTY SPEED CONVERTER— Digital speed con- FIFO storage chip, TR1602A universal asynchro- for transmitting, derived by dividing down from
verter for amateur RTTY permits transmitting nous receiver-transmitter, and six Fairchild same 1-MHz clock. Input and output are TTL-
either above or below input speed from key- 9316 programmable dividers. Values shown compatible. — A. Sperduti, The 60 WPM Conver-
board or tape. Uses FR1502E 40-character 9-bit give choice of 60 or 100 WPM for receiving and sion, 73 Magazine, April 1977, p 158-159.
1008
1009
TELEPRINTER CIRCUITS
+ 5V 56V
SAFE SWITCHING OF SOLENOIDS— Optoiso- RC filter across Darlington pair speeds release
lator provides protective interface between time of print magnets.— T. C. McDermott,
teleprinter and 8080A or other microprocessor Switching Inductive Loads with Solid-State De-
when switching inductive loads of teleprinter. vices, Ham Radio, June 1978, p 99-100. FSK GENERATOR — Simple frequency-shift
keyer uses Exar XR-2206C 1C. Keying input is
applied to pin 9. Mark frequency fl is 1/R1C and
space frequency f2 is 1/R2C, with C connected
between pins 5 and 6. — E. Noll, VHF/UHF Sin-
gle-Frequency Conversion, Ham Radio, April
1975, p 62-67.
t -O 117 V AC
TO TELEPRINTER
MOTOR
SCR CONTROLS RTTY MOTOR— Single SCR modulator. Pickup time is 1 s and dropout time
can replace several transistor or tube stages in is 3 s, determined by values of R1 and Cl and by
RTTY, VOX, COR, and other relay control cir- SCR. Circuit keys only on 2125-Hz mark tone.
cuits. Threshold triggering effect of SCR means Diodes are 50-PIV silicon. Rd is appropriate
triggering is automatically suppressed on low- dropping resistor for relay, if needed. — D. Wee-
level noise and similar interference. Used in den, SCR Relay Control for RTTY, VOX, and
RTTY autostart and motor delay sections of de- COR, QST, July 1976, p 42.
constant-speed amateur radioteletype trans-

missions despite erratic keyboarding speeds.
Uses NE555 timer chip as free-running MVBR
whose speed can be varied by R1 down to about
1 character every 15 s or up to full machine
speed. Can be used with any automatic send-
receive machine. Keep enough slack in punched
paper tape to permit backspacing and correct-
ing errors before they are sent. With 5-V supply
shown, 6-V SPST DC relay can be used. — B. Gul-
ledge,
Oct. 1976,Mechanical
p 74. RTTY Buffer, 73 Magazine,
FSK DEMODULATOR— Exar XR-210 FSK mod-

ulator-demodulatorconnected
is as PLL system
by providing AC coupling between VCO output
pin 15 and pin 6. When input frequency is
shifted, corresponding to data bit, polarity of DC
voltage across phase detector output pins 2 and
3 is reversed. Voltage comparator and logic
300 Baud driver sections convert this DC level shift to bi-
nary pulse. C, serves as PLL filter. C2 and C3 are
Low Band: fj = 1070 Hz Ro = 5.1 KS1, Co = 0.22pF postdetection filters. Timing capacitor Co and
f2= 1270 Hz Ci = C2 = 0.047 pF, C3 = 0.033 pF
fine-tune adjustment are used to set VCO mid-
High Band: fj = 2025 Hz R() = 8.2 Kll, C0 = 0. 1 pF way between mark and space frequencies of
f2 = 2225 Hz Ci = C2 = C3 = 0.033 pF input signal. Table gives typical values for 300-
1200 Baud R0= 2K«, C0 = 0.14 pF baud (103-type) and 1200-baud (202-type)
fl = 1200 Hz Ci = 0.033 pF, C3 = 0.02 pF modem applications. Supply can be 5-26 V. —
f2 = 2200 Hz C2 = 0.01 pF "Phase-Locked Loop Data Book," Exar Inte-
grated Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 17-20.
AFSK SHIFTS UP TO 20 kHz — Wide-range gen-

erator can be tuned from 50 Hz to 20 kHz, for
shifting between two frequencies as much as 20
kHz apart. U1 is 555 timer connected as astable
MVBR. When Q3 is biased off, charge/discharge
currents for Cl flow chiefly through R1 and R2
to determine lower frequency of oscillation.
When Q3 is on, R2 is effectively shorted and fre-
quency is increased. Q1 acts as buffer and in-
verter so higher voltage at input gives higher
tone. Keying occurs when input voltage ex-
ceeds 1V with 5-V supply. If 10K supply resistor
for Q1 is reduced to 1000 ohms, keying voltage
increases to 3V. — T. M. Whittaker, Wide-Range
AFSK Generator, QST, May 1977, p 48.
TTY RESETS CPU — Circuit uses break key on

TTY as reset button for microprocessor. Retrig-
gerable mono 1C, monitors data input line from
TTY, which goes low for spacing condition. Dur-
ing normal data input, constant spacing pulses
in data retrigger mono, keeping IC2 reset. When
break key is depressed, input data goes to
steady space and IC1 times out. IC2 then trans-
fers high on its data input to its output to pro-
duce reset signal for CPU. Values of R2 and C,
give 150-ms period for mono, suitable for baud
rates of 110 and higher. — C. Sondgeroth, Reset
Your CPU from Your TTY's Break Key, EDN
Magazine, May 5, 1978, p 39.
SERIAL INPUT DATA

(SPACE LOW)
To teleprinter
DEMODULATOR FOR 170-Hz SHIFT — Converts pulses required for driving selector magnets of dard 88-mH toroids as indicated. — I. Schwartz,
RTTY audio tones of 2125 and 2295 Hz to DC teleprinter. Coupling links are added to stan- An RTTY Primer, CQ, Feb. 1978, p 31-36.
TELEPRINTER CIRCUITS 1011
*12V 0 033*jF 0.047„F
PLL FSK DEMODULATOR— Signetics NE560N

phase-locked loop is used as receiving con-
verter for demodulating carrier shifted between
two preset frequencies, one corresponding to
0 and other to 1 of binary data signal. PLL pro-
vides shifting DC voltage to initiate 1 or 0 (mark
or space) code elements. Circuit locks on and
tracks output frequency of receiver. Input at pin
12 should be from 30 mV to 2 V P-P square or
sine wave. Output of about 60 mVDC at pin 9 is
amplified, conditioned, and fed to pA710 com-
parator to provide proper output voltages for
interfacing with printer. — "Signetics Analog
p 844-845.
FSK DECODER — Simple circuit for Signetics

NE565 PLL locks to input frequency and tracks
it between two values used, to produce corre-
sponding DC shift at output. Values shown are
for 1070-Hz and 1270-Hz FSK signals. Three-
stage RC ladder filter removes sum frequency
component. Band edge of filter is chosen to be
about halfway between maximum keying rate
(150 Hz) and twice input frequency (about 2200
Hz). Output is made logic-compatible by con-
necting voltage comparator to pin 6. — "Signet-
ics Analog Data Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale,
CA, 1977, p 845.
SOO K
— v^v—
V
STAGE A STAGE B STAGE C
BANDPASS FOR 170-Hz RTTY SHIFT— Three- bandpass of about 260 Hz to allow reception of and alignment procedures. Use two 10K resis-
stage active Butterworth bandpass input filter some of audio sidebands produced by keying tors between V and ground to get V/2 for bias
is used in radioteletype demodulator to sepa- and allow for small drift. Five pots serve for when operating from single supply. — P. A.
rate RTTY tones from each other and from trimming center frequency of each stage and Q Stark, Design an Active RTTY Filter, 73 Maga-
noise. Filter is centered on 2200 Hz, and has of end stages. Article gives step-by-step design zine, Sept. 1977, p 38-43.
FSK GENERATOR — Digital programming capa-

bility of Exar XR-215 PLL 1C is used to provide
shifting of VCO frequency between mark and
space frequencies by applying logic pulse to pin
10. Circuit gives 2.5 V P-P output at pin 15 and
10 V P-P output at pin 8. Each output is sym-
metrical square wave with second harmonic
content less than 0.3%. — "Phase-Locked Loop
Data Book,” Exar Integrated Systems, Sunny-
vale, CA, 1978, p 21-28.
AUDIO PROCESSOR FOR RTTY RECEIVER—

Audio tones of 2125 and 2975 Hz, as received
and detected by FM receiver, are limited and fed
to two active bandpass filters, each set to one
of tone frequencies. Outputs are amplitude-de-
tected and compared, to give output of 1 for
2125 Hz and output of 0 for 2975 Hz. Output is
suitable for UART providing serial-to-parallel
conversion. — D. Lancaster, "TV Typewriter
1976, p 174-175.
POWER
SWITCH
RTTY FROM SATELLITE — Developed for receiv- of 1 kHz. Audio is converted to varying DC volt- used as comparator, for feeding to two-stage
ing RTTY transmitted from satellite as space- age by envelope detector and amplified by 741 driver and high-voltage loop keying circuit
only keying. Receiver can be operated in CW or opamp that drives additional filter having high- conventional design. — K. O. Learner and W.
narrow-filter mode, to increase signal-to-noise level output for space and low-level output for Kotras, Oscar RTTY Converter, 73 Magazine,
ratio. Any receiver having CW filter with 400-Hz mark. Slow rise and fall times of varying voltage
July 1975, p 53-54.
bandwidth can be used. Tune for audio output are converted to ON/OFF keying signals by 741
1013
UART INTERFACE — Permits use of universal

asynchronous receiver-transmitter with model
33 Teletype so keyboard can send and printer
can receive at same time. Transmitter interface
provides 20-mA current for mark or 1 and open + 5V
circuit for space or 0. Receiver senses closed +5 V
contact for mark or 1 and open contact for space
or 0. Extra inverters are added to make codes
correspond so 1 from UART is read as 1 by
Teletype. Designed for 110-baud rate.— D. Lan-
caster, "TV Typewriter Cookbook," Howard W.
DATA TO
TTY FROM
UART
TO RTTY KEYBOARD CIRCUIT

OR TO PIN 5 ON ID BOARD
(TAKE LOW FOR SPACE)
AFSK KEYER — Developed for use with 49-MHz 7400 quad NAND-gate crystal oscillator, which tiplexer feeds divide-by-1000 chain feeding
FM transmitter to rebroadcast hurricane bulle- works with almost any HC-6/U crystal. Fre- 2125-Hz square wave to buffer transistor. Arti-
tins and other weather warnings to amateur quency can be adjusted by changing value of C2. cle gives circuit of low-pass filter that removes
RTTY stations. Crystals assure high precision in Outputs feed 74151 multiplexer. When all SE- harmonics from output to give pure sine wave
generating RTTY tones for 850-Hz shift, with LECT inputs are high (2.8-5 V), mark oscillator for modulating transmitter. — L. J. Fox, Dodge
extra crystals for 170-Hz shift and for narrow- frequency appears at multiplexer output. When That Hurricane!, 73 Magazine, Jan. 1978, p 62-
shift CW identification. Frequency tolerance is input B is low (0-0.8 V), multiplexer output 69.
±1 Hz and requires no calibration. Circuit uses changes to space frequency of 2975 kHz. Mul-
300- AND 1800-BAUD FSK DEMODULATOR—

Uses Exar XR-215 PLL 1C having frequency
range of 0.5 Hz to 35 MHz. When input fre-
quency is shifted by data bit, DC voltage be-
tween pins 2 and 3 reverses polarity. Opamp
section is connected as comparator for con-
verting DC level shift to binary output pulse. C,
300 Baud serves as PLL filter. C2 and C3 are postdetection
filters. Table gives typical values of components
Low Band: f] = 1070 Hz for two transmission speeds. — "Phase-Locked
R0= 5 kS2, C’o = 0. 1 7 /jF
Loop Data Book," Exar Integrated Systems,
f'2 = 1270 Hz Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 21-28.
Cf = C'2 = 0.047 juF,
C3 = 0.033 /jF
High Band: f| = 2025 Hz R0 = 8 kft, Co = 0.\ 11F
f'2 = 2225 Hz Ci = C2 = C3 = 0.033 jiF
1800 Baud
Rq = 2 kft, C0 = 0 1 2 ajF
fl = 1200 Hz C] = C3 = 0.003 /iF,

C2 = 0.01 n F
f2 = 2200 Hz
R-Y TEST GENERATOR — Uses ICs rather than generates codes for printing R and Y continu- 60 WPM. Adjust R1 so clock pulse generator U1
PROM for automatic generation of sequence of ously without regard for line length. Jumper J1 runs at 45.45 Hz. Article covers construction and
64 alternating Rs and Ys, plus Baudot codes for gives choice of normal or inverted output data operation. — J. Loughmiller, RTTY Test Gener-
carriage return and line feed, as used for testing for keying transmitter with either mark-high or ator, Ham Radio, Jan. 1978, p 64-66.
radioteletype equipment. Circuit in dashed lines space-high signal. Operates at slightly less than
1015
PLL RTTY TERMINAL — Uses 741 opamp as lim-

iter, followed by NE565 phase-locked loop, an-
other opamp U3 operating as voltage compar-
ator or slicer, and keying transistor. Terminal
requires no filters because incoming signal
locks onto VCO whose frequency is placed be-
tween those of mark and space tones. As these
tones alternate, output of PLL is made to pro-
duce plus and minus voltages by connecting
voltage comparator to output of NE565. Result-
ing plus voltage corresponds to mark tone and
minus voltage to space tone for use in keying
loop circuit of teleprinter. R1 is only adjustment
required; article covers adjustment for receiver
in SSB mode and in CW mode.— N. Stinnette,
Phase-Locked Loop RTTY Terminal Unit, Ham
Radio, Feb. 1975, p 36-37.
° o_6V
12 O-
+ ^ o+6 v
<
- [3^ a\Y
>
-r=“°— 5
FSK WITH SLOPE AND VOLTAGE DETECTION—
Motorola MC1545G gated video amplifier is
used with slope and differential voltage com-
parators to provide switching of output alter-
11 y» MC7479P 9 Q
nately between input signal fl at 2975 Hz and
f2 at 2125 Hz. With gate level on pin 1 of 12 T*peD 8
Q
MC1545G high (greater than 1.5 V), signal ap-

plied between pins 4 and 5 is passed and signal
between pins 2 and 3 is suppressed. With gate 6 Data "0" = fl
low (less than 0.5 V), situation is reversed. To Input "1" * f2
avoid generation of spurious frequencies and

noise, gate control voltage is allowed to change
only when rate of change of f 1 and f2 have same
sign and values of fl and f2 themselves have
same sign and equal magnitude within several
millivolts. Data rate is about 170 Hz. — "Gated
Video Amplifier Applications — the MC1545,"
VI = V2= 1 Vp.p
Motorola, Phoenix, A2, 1976, AN-491, p 12. Vo = 1 Vp.p
I 'Capacitors Used to Filter Out

I Possible Oscillation During
All capacitance in pF.
AV« 1
| Switching
FSK BAND COMPONENT VALUES

V+
300 Baud
C0 = 0.039 |iF Cp = 0.005 mF
C,=0.01/liF R0 = 1 8 KL2
f, = 1070 Hz
f2 = 1270 Hz R! = 100 Kf2
300 Baud
C0 = 0.022 mF Cf = 0.005 /jF
Cj = 0.0047 mF R0=18Kn
fl = 2025 Hz
f2 = 2225 Hz
1200 Baud Rj = 200 KH
C0 = 0.027 /jF Cp = 0.0022 yuF
Ci=0.01mF Rq = 1 8 Kfi
f, = 1200 Hz
f2 = 2200 Hz
R) = 30 KL2
FSK DECODER— R0 and C0 set PLL center fre- filter time constant and loop damping factor. CF used FSK bands.— "Phase-Locked Loop Data
quency for Exar XR-221 1 FSK demodulator/tone and RF form postdetection filter for FSK data Book," Exar Integrated Systems, Sunnyvale,
decoder. R, sets system bandwidth. C, sets loop output. Table gives values for most commonly CA, 1978, p 29-34.
KEYER FOR AFSK — Uses one center-tapped 88-

mH toroid tuned to desired RTTY space fre-
quency by suitable value of Cl (0.0628 for
2295 Hz). When relay is closed, suitable value
for C2 (0.0156 tiF for 2125 Hz) is paralleled with
Cl to give desired space frequency. Output is
perfect sine wave. Plug output into audio input
jack of transmitter. Plug relay coil directly into
150-V 60-mA loop of teleprinter. When loop cur-
rent is turned on, relay closes and AFSK is on
mark. Space frequency occurs when relay is
opened by teleprinter keyboard. — J. B. Dillon,
Audio-Frequency Shift Keyer, Ham Radio, Sept.
1976, p 45.
BAUDOT TO ASCII— Used with Baudot RTTY

codes on amateur bands, to drive Teletype ma-
chine requiring ASCII code. Separate 555 timers
are used as clocks running at 727 Hz and at 1760
Hz. Provides only one-way conversion for re-
ceiving capability, but article gives companion
circuit for two-way code conversion as required
for transmission with ASCII Teletype. On U13,
pins 12, 13, 15, 22, and 23 all go to +5 V along
with pin 17; only pin 14 is grounded. — J. G.
*5
Mills, Baudot to ASCII Converter, 73 Magazine,
Sept. 1977, p 80-85.
O + SV
2200
TEST-CODE GENERATOR — RTTY characters for

R and Y are generated alternately in long series
for checking system performance. (These let-
ters give widest bandwidth of all character com-
binations.) Clock pulse at 45.5 Hz is generated
by 2SC943 astable MVBR Q1-Q2. 74107 flip-
flops U1A-U2B are connected as binary dividers
for modulo-8 counter, so any bit between 0 and
7 is available for use with Signetics 8416A
gates U3-U5 to feed desired character to
2SC372 output transistor. Automatic start/stop
circuit using Fairchild 9945 clocked flip-flop U6 ends with Y. Q4 conducts on mark and is cut off Sekine, A Simple RY Code Generator for TTY,
ensures that sequence always starts with R and on space, for feeding frequency-shift keyer. — K. QST, Dec. 1974, p 20-24.
1017
CLOCK FOR TEST MESSAGES — Generates neg-

ative-going pulse train at choice of four baud
rates, to control RTTY test-message generator
at four different speeds. — K. Ebneter and J. Ro-
metfanger, RTTY Test-Message Generator,
Ham Radio, Nov. 1976, p 30-32.
BANDPASS FOR 850-Hz RTTY SHIFT— Three-

stage active Butterworth input filter passes
2125- and 2975-Hz tones plus modulation side-
bands and allowance for drift in RTTY receiver.
Inset shows how 741 opamps are biased when
used with single power supply. Article gives
step-by-step design and alignment proce-
dures.— P. A. Stark, Design an Active RTTY Fil-
ter, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1977, p 38-43.
GENERATOR FOR 170-Hz SHIFT— Provides pre- priate divider chains gives output frequencies divide ratio is 25 to give 2295 Hz. When input is
cise 2125- and 2295-Hz audio tones without re- accurate within 2 Hz while preserving 170-Hz high, divide ratio is 27 to give 2125 Hz. Pin 1 1 of
quiring counter to establish correct frequency. relative shift within 0.1 Hz. For even greater ac- U 1-U4 and pin 7 of U5 are grounded. — H. Nurse,
Used for adjusting AFSK oscillator. Crystal can curacy, order crystal that has been adjusted to Crystal Controlled AFSK Generator, Ham Radio,
be 459.259 kHz (channel 48), which with appro- exactly 459.000 kHz. When input is grounded. Dec. 1973, p 14-17.
+ I2V
AFSK GENERATOR — Uses phase-continuous

frequency shift to prevent out-of-band tran-
sients while generating radio frequencies of
1450 and 1620 Hz. Second harmonic is outside
passband of modern SSB equipment. Fre-
quency of sine wave is determined by Cl and
total resistance connected to pin 7 or 8 of Exar
XR2206. — E. Kirchner, Serial Converter for 8-
Level Teleprinters, Ham Radio, Aug. 1977, p 67-
73.
FSK FOR NRZ INPUT — Crystal-controlled fre-

quency-shift keyer accepts nonreturn-to-zero
digital input and generates 5-V P-P FSK output
signal having less than 3% total harmonic dis-
tortion, at standard 2.125- and 2.975-kHz radio-
teletype frequencies. When input is low,
counter A divides by seven; for high or logic 1
input, counter divides by five. Counter B divides
by eight to produce required output frequen-
cies. EXCLUSIVE-OR gates G, and G2 generate
first approximation to desired sine-wave out-
put, for filtering by three-pole active Butter-
worth low-pass filter having 4.75-kHz cutoff. —
K. Erickson, Frequency-Shift Keyer Features
Rock-Steady Operation, EDN Magazine, Jan. 5,
1977, p 44.
2N3438 IN645
170- OR 850-Hz SHIFT— Simple AF RTTY keyer serves as 1-turn output link. Outer shield is signal and noise pickup from circuit. — E. Noll,
uses 2N5823 silicon PNP transistor switch in- grounded only at coaxial connector so braid Circuits and Techniques, Ham Radio, April 1976,
stead of optical coupler. Short piece of coax acts as Faraday shield, eliminating capacitive
p 40-43.
1019
SELF-GENERATING FSK — Dual oscillators in

Motorola MC1545G gated video amplifier are
used with external frequency-determining com-
ponents R1C1 and R2C2 to give 1.6 kHz for fl
and 1.35 kHz for f2. Logic switching network
compares output to reference and updates gate
input with each cycle of output. Circuit gives
smaller switching transients than are possible
with separate oscillators because one oscillator
is driven at frequency of the other while first
oscillator is off. R3 sets transition to any level
desired. — "Gated Video Amplifier Applica-
tions— the MC1545," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z,
1976, AN-491, p 13.
IN270 I AFSK
CR4RI.0UT
AFSK WITH PLL — Complete terminal unit and resulting in symmetrical 2975-Hz square wave
AFSK tone generator for VHF bands synthesizes at pin 12 of U8. Programmable counter U7 di-
tones digitally for 170-Hz narrow shift and 850- vides 59.5 kHz down to 4250 Hz. Other half of
Hz standard shift found in VHF amateur RTTY U8 divides this by 2, to give symmetrical 2125- signals when they are identical. Internal oscil-
bands. Additional feature is PLL circuit that fol- Hz square wave at pin 9 of U8. Square waves lator is locked to incoming signal if within de-
lows drifting signal and copies signals from are converted to trapezoids, with tops tection bandwidth of about 220 Hz for 2125 Hz
which mark or space information is missing. smoothed by CR3 and CR4, to give 1 V P-P quasi- with 170-Hz shift. At 2975 Hz, detection band-
Precision AFSK generator consists of 5.95-MHz sine waves at output. Demodulator LI1 com- width is about ±135 Hz. — J. Loughmiller, Digi-
crystal oscillator U3, divide-by-100 ICs U4 and pares incoming frequencies to its internal cur- ratt — RTTY AFSK Generator and Demodulator,
U5, divide-by-10 1C U6, and divide-by-2 1C U8, rent-controlled oscillator and generates digital Ham Radio, Sept. 1977, p 26-28.
+ I2V
STOP FOR AUTOSTART— Uses 555 timer 1C to

make ST-6 autostart turn off motor of tele-
printer ifcopying commercial station that does
not drop its carrier when no text is being trans-
mitted. Values shown for Cl and R1 give time
of 15 s which, added to 25 s of ST-6 delay, gives
about 40 s to turn off in presence of steady mark
tone (carrier only). Useful when copying
weather and press reports. — R. Bourgeois, Stop
That Autostart, 73 Magazine, May 1977, p 47.
CRT TUNING INDICATOR— Crossed-ellipse dis- cies reversed). Tuned for maximum amplitude to center signal so it can swing equal amounts
play on CRT aids in tuning receiver to RTTY sig- of major axis of each ellipse; if transmitting sta- on either side. Adjust RH similarly. — R. R. Parry,
nal. Display shows at a glance if station is nar- tion is wide or narrow, tune for equal ampli- RTTY CRT Tuning Indicator, 73 Magazine, Sept.
row or wide, or if other station is transmitting tudes even though they are not maximized. Try
different values of RV until T.P.1 voltage is 65 V, 1977, p 118-120.
upside-down signals (mark and space frequen-
1021
TONE
20 OUTPUT
mV P-P
TO 2V
RL>IK
AFSK TONES — Generates tones needed for
either 170- or 850-Hz frequency shift in auto-
matic frequency-shift keying of RTTY equip-
CONTROL
R3 ADJUSTMENT ment. Independent adjustments are provided
Rl 2125 Hz TONE
R8 2225 Hz TONE for each tone. Sine-wave output has constant
R2
2975 Hz TONE amplitude, with excellent tone frequency sta-
R4 2295 Hz TONE
TONE OUTPUT LEVEL bility. Circuit permits plug-in operation in any
IN4003 RTTY loop, independent of loop polarity or
IN4003
OR
grounding. Article covers construction and ad-
IN 647
IN647 justment.— J. C. Roos, Universal AFSK Gener-
RTTY LOOP ,14) _ , _ - - - K24 VOLTS (4)
44-46.ator, 73 Magazine, July 1974, p 37-40, 42, and
f=fjf3Q
CURRENT r :— • '
OR
INPUT BRIDGE
USE METAL FILM FIXED RESISTORS

WIREWOUND TRIMPOTS
RAM FOR RTTY— Erasable MC2102 1024-bit quently used code messages such as CQ calls. turned off. For permanent storage, use ROM in
RAM stores two Teletype lines (128 characters) Values shown with IC1 timer are for 728-Hz place of RAM. — H. P. Fischer, RTTY Scratchpad
of Baudot code for readout at machine speed. master clock (16 x 45.45 bauds). Stored mes- Memory, 73 Magazine, June 1977, p 54-55.
Can also serve in place of tape loop for fre- sage is volatile, disappearing when power is
PLL FOR RTTY — Complete phase-locked loop

uses all four sections of LM3900 quad linear
opamp. Variable capacitor is set to give center
frequency of 2.2 kHz for VCO. Once in lock, loop
will maintain lock over range of 1.55 to 2.9 kHz,
to cover tones normally used in RTTY. Addi-
tional keying circuit for TTY selector magnets
and more filtering of output completes setup for
driving printer. Q1 is 2N706, with 33K resistor
in base circuit. — C. Sondgeroth, More PLL
Magic, 7 3 Magazine, Aug. 1976, p 56-59.
60mA
input /Cy, +12V
FSK DEMODULATOR— Uses 1C originally de-

veloped for stereo multiplex decoders, contain-
ing phase-locked loop suitable for demodulat-
ing teleprinter FSK signals. Circuit shown
requires only small input signal for phase lock,
gives visual indication with lamp when phase
lock has occurred, and requires only pair of
2N3055 drive transistors between outputs A-B
and teleprinter receiving solenoids. Article also
gives this output circuit and setup procedure. —
K. S. Beddoe, Teleprinter Terminal Unit Uses
Phase-Locked Loop, Wireless World, Dec. 1973,
p 605.
UPWARD-SHIFT RTTY DEMODULATOR— PLL from LM741 comparator on mark/hold as scale minus (left) reading on mark/hold signal.
demodulator serves for copying AFSK/FSK up- needed for smooth upward-shift copy. Works Meter may not be needed on AFSK. — N. Stin-
ward-shift RTTY signals. 2N706 switches equally well on wide-shift or narrow-shift sig- nette. Update of the Phase-Locked Loop RTTY
2N5655 on and off, reversing polarity of voltage nals. Zero-center tuning meter will show full- Demodulator, Ham Radio, Aug. 1976, p 16-17.
TELEPRINTER CIRCUITS 1023
CLOCK
IN
QUICK BROWN FOX GENERATOR— TTL ICs and FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 1234567890
supplies, for +5 V and ±12 V. — K. Ebneter and
National MM5220DF preprogrammed MOS DE. Requires external clock providing sharp J. Romelfanger, RTTY Test-Message Generator,
read-only memory chip together generate stan- negative-going pulse train at frequency corre- Ham Radio, Nov. 1976, p 30-32.
dard RTTY test message: THE QUICK BROWN sponding to RTTY speeds desired. Requires two
K
|3
CHAPTER 92
Television Circuits
Covers circuits for black-and-white, color, industrial, and slow-scan amateur

TV receivers, including infrared remote control, microprocessor interface, and
test equipment. See also Cathode-Ray, Game, and Microprocessor chapters.
s _ 660
0^0
T)-â^0
_ 560
HSUB0575 7404
560
@-vW^-©
0-v\vm2)
_ 560
6.8k
'hW- COMPOSITE
SYNC
560
(i) © 0.05m F 0.05p F O

xrAL1 00800 MHz ,2 4k.
-0*0 — iQl vw
s,aOvfo
I
»3k'
•SELECT FOR 7V p-p

SINE WAVE AT Q
EMITTER.
* ADJUST SLUG Lv FOR

1.008 MHz WITH VFO
CAPACITOR AT MID ROTATION
jPOWER |
CRYSTAL/VFO SYNC GENERATOR— With crys- range of sweep oscillators in TV sets and VTR input of Hughes HSUB0525 sync generator.
tal, can be used as system sync generator or as decks. Clock-pulse section uses Q, and Q2 as Each output of sync generator feeds one of in-
drive for staircase generators, custom pattern 1.00800-MHz Butler oscillator. On VFO opera- verters in 7404, providing 3.3 V P-P signal into
generators, and special TV test equipment. tion, oscillator frequency can be varied ±3.5% 75-ohm load for each output. — M. J. Salvati,
When VFO-controlled, circuit provides variable- from mean. Sine-wave output of Q2 is converted VFO Adds Versatility to TV Sync generator,
frequency sync needed for determining pull-in to square wave by Q3 for application to clock EDN Magazine, May 20, 1974, p 70 and 72.
1024
TELEVISION CIRCUITS 1025
OUTPUT
FIXED 180°
0° TO SIGNAL
OUTPUT 170°
OUTPUT
A F PHASE SHIFTER — Developed for testing from one channel and 50K variable resistor from
. FIXED 0°
chroma demodulator in color TV receiver. Audio other channel. 90° phases are judged by posi-
oscillator is used as source of sine waves. First tion of sine waves on screen of CRO; 90° is
stage is phase inverter, followed by two emit- halfway between 0° and 180°. — C. Babcoke, SSTV DEFLECTION DRIVE— Developed for use
ter-followers. Resulting output signals of op- Waveforms Explain Chroma Demodulators, in line time-base amplifier of 4-Hz slow-scan TV
posite phase are combined through a small ca- Electronic Servicing, Sept. 1972, p 22-23, 26- system. Emitter-follower in driver stage is used
pacitor (0.022 /iF. selected for frequency used) 28, and 30. with first transistor to match output impedance
of U JT sawtooth oscillator. Will drive deflection
coils of 17-inch CRT (coil resistance about 5
Current
ohms). — M. Hadley, Deflection Coil Driver for
Slow-Scan Television, Wireless World, March
1974, p. 18.
25-MHz VIDEO PREAMP— Uses Optical Elec-

tronics 9724 opamp for input stage and 9412 input opamp minimizes effects of stray capaci-
opamp for output stage. Current input can be tance. Values shown give 1-V output for 1-pA
from vidicon or image orthicon camera tube. input. — "A 25 MHz Video Preamplifier — Line
Input compensation can be adjusted to provide Driver," Optical Electronics, Tucson, AZ, Appli-
aperture correction. Feedback network for cation Tip 10195.
PP/UT£D POINTED /SO
LOW-NOISE UHF PREAMP— Special push-pull after amplifier to transform push-pull output to viously having no watchable pictures. — J. E.
input stage using low-noise UHF transistors input of single-ended second stage without de- Kluge, Advanced Antenna Design and an Ultra-
gives average preamp noise figure as low as 2.2 grading noise figure. Developed for use with low-Noise Preamplifier Extend UHF Viewing
dB. Can be used with 300-ohm line of broad- new deep-fringe-area UHF TV antenna having Area, IEEE Transactions on Broadcasting,
band UHF antenna without usual balun trans- three flat in-line director elements, for over-the- March 1977, p 17-22.
former or differential input stage. Baiun is used air reception of UHF TV programs in areas pre-
CHROMA PROCESSOR — Combination of RCA

CA3121E chroma amplifier/demodulator and
CA3070 chroma signal processor provides au-
tomatic chroma control and color killer sensing
along with other functions required for high-
level B - Y, R - Y, and G - Y color difference
signals having low impedances for driving high-
level R, G, and B output amplifiers. — "Linear In-
tegrated Circuits and MOS/FET's," RCA Solid
State Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 359-360.
2 7 M o 01
TV TURNOFF WITH WARNING BEEP— Timer

providing turnoff delays up to 1 h gives warning
beep about 30 s before turnoff to permit reset-
ting rfdesired for watching remainder of partic-
ular program. Can be mounted inside TV set or
in small chairside box connected to set by cable.
Photocell can be substituted for ON/OFF switch
to permit remote control with flashlight while
leaving entire circuit in TV set. Can be operated
from 9-V battery if this voltage is not available
in receiver. Momentary closing of switch turns
on TV and initiates timing cycle. With 3.6-
megohm pot for R, maximum delay is 1 h. For
30-min delay, use 1.3 megohms. Setting of R
determines exact delay. — J. Sandler, 9 Projects
under $9, Modern Electronics, Sept. 1978, p 35-
39.
COMPOSITE COLOR SIGNAL GENERATOR— 0-4 V red, green, and blue inputs. Subcarrier and video games. — L. T rattier and B. Matic, Sig-
Single LM1889 encoder chip produces standard should be 1-5 V P-P. Modulated RF output can nal Encoder Generates Composite Color, EDN
composite color video signal from separate go to cable input of TV set through 75-ohm Magazine, Aug. 20, 1978, p 148 and 150.
sync, burst flag, 3.579545-MHz subcarrier, and cable. Applications include TV mixing effects
SSTV VERTICAL SYNC INDICATOR— Retrigger-

able mono MVBR using SN74123 is triggered by
l/BHz
B.l SEC 0.125-Hz vertical sync pulse of amateur televi-
VERT sion system. Absence of pulse allows mono to
SYNC
time out and change state of LED from green to
red. Vertical reset switch must then be used to
restart vertical sweep and reset LED. Uses Mon-
santo MV5491 dual red/green LED, with 220
RESET
SWITCH
ohms in upper lead to +5 V supply and 100
ohms in lower +5 V lead because red and green
LEDs in parallel back-to-back have different
voltage requirements. Drivers for LEDs are
SN75454. — K. Powell, Novel Indicator Circuit,
LINEAR AMPLIFIER— Motorola MHW-710

power module boosts 1-W output of VHF En-
gineering TX-432B crystal-controlled solid-
state exciter to about 10 W for simple amateur
TV transmitter. Interconnections are made with
short lengths of RG-174 coax. Input jack J1 is
connected to exciter by 50 ft of RG-174, and
length is gradually reduced until proper drive
level is obtained for linear operation. RFC uses
8 turns No. 22 enamel on 1-megohm 1-W resis-
tor. To cover 400-440 MHz, use MHW-710-1; for
440-470 MHz, use MHW-710-2. — R. E. Taggart,
Interested in Television?, 73 Magazine, Oct.
1977, p 164-174.
SYNCHRONOUS VIDEO DETECTOR— RCA ing voltage (AFT) for DC control of tuner, ad- noninverting output terminal for sound IF. Re-
CA3136E serves as video IF PLL synchronous justment ofzero-carrier DC level at video output quires single 12-V supply. — "Linear Integrated
detector for color TV receivers. Phase-locked terminal, amplifier arrangement for inverting Circuits and MOS/FET's," RCA Solid State Divi-
oscillator demodulates 45.75-MHz video IF sig- noise impulses toward black level, and separate sion, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 374.
COMPARATOR SEPARATES SYNC PULSES—

By setting DC reference input of 710 comparator
at 0.15 VDC, only horizontal sync pulses are ex-
tracted from composite black-negative video
signal to appear at comparator output. Setting
reference level at 0.35 VDC gives only blanking
pulses at output. — R. G. Groom, 1C Comparator
Separates Sync Pulses, EDN Magazine, Sept.
15, 1970, p 53-54.
® » * (0
B+ TO ALL
> 2W
47ft
VIDEO MODULATOR — Developed for use be-

STAGES EXCEPT
tween solid-state TV camera and VHF Engi- 100 FINAL
neering TX-432B crystal-controlled solid-state

exciter to give simple amateur TV transmitter.
VIDEO
For tube-type cameras, add 1N914 or other
INPUT
small-signal silicon diodes in series with input
£
HEP S5004
until modulator provides proper video swing.

Article gives construction details. — R. E. Tag- 8+ TO TX432B
gart, Interested in Television?, 73 Magazine, FINAL OUTPUT

TRANSISTOR
Oct. 1977, p 164-174.
VHF VARACTOR TUNER— DC bias voltages are varactor diode, tuning voltage ranges from 4.3
range of 4-5 dB. — J. Hopkins, "Printed Circuit
used in place of mechanical switches for chan- V for channel 2 to 23 V for channel 13. Corre-
VHF TV Tuners Using Tuning Diodes," Moto-
nel selection. Values for tuned circuit’s depend sponding voltages for low-capacitance varactor rola, Phoenix, A Z, 1972, AN-544A, p 4.
on varactor diode used. With high-capacitance are 2.2 V and 20.4 V. Tuner noise figure is in
SHORT PIECE OF COAX WITH PICKUP LOOP
CRO AS TV MONITOR — Permits monitoring

transmitted amateur television signals with os-
A IN 34 A HEP802 cilloscope, for such applications as checking
iomf sync levels and sync-pulse shape. Outgoing sig-
50/aH — (+12 VDC
►TO SCOPE
i i
nal can be monitored while adjusting modula-
: io pF tor.— Circuits, 73 Magazine, March 1977, p 152.
! 4.7-)l—
K
8 20H
OPTIONAL
SOUND SUBSYSTEM— RCA CA3134 combines

sound IF and audio output stages in single 1C for
use in TV receivers. Input is taken from sound
IF output of receiver. Provides electronic vol-
ume control with improved taper. Alternate cir-
cuit shown provides unattenuated audio out-
put.— "Linear Integrated Circuits and MOS/
NJ, 1977, p 368.
generate up to six characters of amateur call. and IM5600/5610. Two 7493 binary counters ad- Positive-going horizontal drive pulses reset 5-
Squares in matrix are numbered 1-32 horizon- dress all 32 words in ROM, with clock rate (2-3 bit word counters, while positive-going vertical
tally and 1-8 vertically starting from upper left, MHz) determining length of characters on drive pulses reset 3-bit line counters, to make
and black squares forming call letters are pro- screen. 74151 multiplexer advances to next characters appear in same position on screen
grammed as Is in PROM. Pin connections ROM output once per scan line, under control for all fields. — J. Pulice, Amateur Television
shown for PROM are valid for AMI 27508/27509, of 7493 3-bit counter clocked by horizontal drive Cal Isign Generator, Ham Radio, Feb. 1 977, p 34-
82S23/82S123, MM5330/MM5331 , HPROM 8256, pulses from sync generator of ATV transmitter.
35.
SYNC SEPARATOR — Input video having nega-

tive synchronizing pulses is applied to Q,
through 3.58-MHz notch filter L,-C, to remove
color subcarrier components. Circuit is set up to
conduct only on negative peaks, when Q„ Q2,
and CR, are all on, so feedback is 100% at this
time. Negative peaks of output then follow
input exactly. C2 acts as memory for negative
peaks, storing their level between sync
pulses. — W. Jung, An Operational Approach to
Sync Separation, EDNIEEE Magazine, July 15,
1971, p 48-49.
IMPROVING TV SOUND— AF signal from vol-

ume control of TV receiver is converted to FM
signal by using BC107 transistor to frequency-
modulate tunnel-diode oscillator operating
within FM broadcast band. Oscillator output is
fed through air-core transformer and coaxial
line to FM receiver of high-fidelity sound sys-
tem. Arrangement eliminates most of distor-
tion introduced in power amplifier and loud-
speaker ofaverage TV set. Use shielding to keep
unwanted FM radiation at minimum. — A. J.
Smith, Improving Television Sound, Wireless
World, Aug. 1973, p 373.
+ 15
SWEEP FOR SSTV MONITOR— Uses two 555 pulses. When sync is lost, oscillator runs very erates from horizontal sync pulses for use as
timers, one as oscillator and other as linear saw- close to correct frequency and locks in again in- tuning indicator. — R. L. Anderson, 555 Timer
tooth generator. Adjust R4 so oscillator period stantly on first good sync pulse. Circuit also has Sweep Circuit for SSTV, 73 Magazine, May
is slightly longer than interval between sync pulse stretcher, along with lamp driver that op-
1976, p 134-136.
+15 V OPEN
GENERAL-PURPOSE VIDEO SWITCH— When

used for switching TV cameras, DG200 CMOS
analog switch provides 45-dB isolation at 10
MHz between on and off cameras. Insertion loss
of switch is 0.5 dB. For greater isolation, use ad-
ditional analog switch in each camera line. —
"Analog Switches and Their Applications," Sil-
iconix, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 7-70.
' "POWER" INDICATOR

POWER x | ,
Note 4: SW 2 and 10k resistor on pins 16 and 1 are needed only if scope trigger pulse is desired.
Note 5: SW 2 selects "H" or "V" trigger output pulses.

Note 6: A 27k resistor in series with a 100k trimpot may be used in place of 82k resistor for variable vertical line width.
Note 7: Modulation level adjusted' for best patterns as viewed on TV screen.

COLOR BAR GENERATOR— National MM5322 ing, sync, and video information required for terns. Separate output is provided for precise
chip forms complete dot-bar and color hue gen- aligning color TV receivers. Composite video
gating of 3.56-MHz cplor bursts. — "MOS/LSI
eration system. Chip divides internal crystal- output serves for complete black-and-white Databook," National Semiconductor, Santa
controlled oscillator frequency to provide tim- dot-bar operation to give variety of screen pat- Clara, CA, 1977, p 4-18-4-22.
+VCc
1033
TELEVISION CIRCUITS
FET LINEAR MODULATOR — Circuit developed

for closed-circuit industrial color television sys-
tem uses linear portion of operating character-
istic for 2N4931 FET to provide linear response
at modulation frequencies from 1 MHz down to
near zero. Article gives design equations. — G.
R. Shapiro, Analog Multipliers Offer Solutions
to Video Modulation Problems, EDN Magazine,
Sept. 1, 1972, p 40-41.
IR TRANSMITTER FOR TV SOUND— Mono

audio output of TV receiver is fed to infrared
modulator using Intersil 8038 1C and transistor,
to provide pulse-frequency-modulated infrared
output that can be picked up by compact re-
ceiver built into headphones. S/N ratio is 58 dB
in daylight in average living room having light
walls and ceiling, but drops to 40 dB when re-
ceiver faces away from transmitter. Used in
German TV receivers displayed at 1975 Berlin
Exhibition. — International Radio and Television
Exhibition, Wireless World, Nov. 1975, p 521-
524 and 539.
VARIABLE DELAY UP TO 7 ns — Used in televi- composite signal. — C. M. Wong, Sync-Pulse

sion broadcasting when longer delay is required Delay, Wireless World, Feb. 1977, p 46.
than can be achieved with passive elements for
AFT SUBSYSTEM— RCA CA3139 automatic fine

tuning 1C combined with intercarrier mixer/am-
plifier for color and monochrome receivers pro-
vides AFT voltage for tuner correction and am-
plified 4.5-MHz intercarrier sound signal for
external FM sound detector of receiver. Input is
taken from output of IF amplifier in receiver. —
p 381.
RGB OUTPUT — Motorola MDS21 high-voltage

silicon transistors serve as output stages for
red, green, and blue channels of color TV re-
ceiver, to provide video amplitude require-
ments for color picture tube. T ransistors can be
driven directly by most types of chroma de-
modulators.— "NPN Silicon Annular High Volt-
age Amplifier Transistors," Motorola, Phoenix,
AZ, 1978, DS 3364.
THUMBWHEEL SWITCHES
DIGITAL LINE-SELECTING SWITCHES— Three field. Line-gate pulse injects into looped- in each television field. Article describes oper-
thumbwheel switches connected in binary through video for brightening selected line to ation in detail. — H. F. Stearns, Build a Thumb-
mode control three 74192 counters, for selec- make it visible on display. Circuit can also be wheel-Switched Television Line Selector, EDN
tion of any desired line up to 999 in television used to determine exact number of active lines Magazine, June 20, 1976, p 124.
VERTICAL SYNC SEPARATOR — Arrangement

uses controlled clocking sequence of JK flip-flop
to detect presence of vertical sync interval in
standard EIA television composite sync wave-
form. Complementary sync waveforms J and K
are fed to J and K inputs of 7473 flip-flop, which
is clocked by 1-/tis pulse that is delayed slightly
longer than 10-/is horizontal sync interval. First
clock pulse after 1 1-/us interval changes flip-flop
output Q to 1, where it stays for six clock pe-
riods before reverting to 0 state after vertical
sync interval has passed. — W. G. Jung, Vertical
Sync Separator Has No Integrating Network,
, _n njnjHjnj~T_n_TL_
clock _j n n n_n
2 OUTPUT
jwsecj
[J
n_jLJLJi_
|
33
AA/V— ► V*«24 V
OUTPUT
B-Y
T| UNIVERSAL WINDING, No 36 WIRE,

62 TURNS WITH TAP AT 8 FROM GRD
L* 25 5 fiH,Qa 30
T2 UNIVERSAL WINDINGS, No 36 WIRE

PRIMARY: 77 TURNS, L»ll.8/iH,0«40
SECONDARY 34 TURNS , CT, L*9 MH,0- 20
HORlZ. KEY PULSE

+ 4V,4.5m S
INPUT
other requirement is 4-V 4.5-îs horizontal key-
CHROMA SYSTEM Uses RCA CA3070 as sub- stage of color TV receiver. Outputs from system ing pulse centered on color burst. Crystal oscil-
carrier regenerator, CA3071 as chroma ampli- are color difference signals for driving high-level lator generates 3.579545 MHz.— "Linear Inte-
fier, and CA3072 as chroma demodulator. Input amplifiers. Operates from single 24-V supply grated Circuits and MOS/FET's," RCA Solid
can be taken from either first or second video that should be maintained within 3 V. Only State Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 345-346.
+Vcc
MODULATOR/MULTIPLIER— Balanced direct-

coupled FET modulator/multiplier was devel-
oped for closed-circuit industrial color televi-
sion system. Opamps handle modulation
frequencies up to 1 MHz while providing linear
response down to near zero modulation. — G.R.
Shapiro, Analog Multipliers Offer Solutions to
Video Modulation Problems, EDN Magazine,
Sept. 1, 1972, p 40-41.
MICROPROCESSOR-SSTV INTERFACE— Digi-

tal-to-analog-to-frequency converter for slow-
scan television permits direct generation of
simple graphic and alphameric characters by
microprocessor, without use of camera. U1 is
CD4051 CMOS analog multiplexer, and U2A is
one section of 74LS124 TTL dual voltage-con-
trolled oscillator. Picture format uses 64 differ-
ent lines, repeated once to give total of 128
lines, with maximum of 64 different picture ele-
ments per horizontal line each having one of
four shades of gray. Separate pot is provided for
setting each of five different levels so VCO os-
cillates atproper frequencies: sync — 1200 Hz;
black— 1500 Hz; dark— 1767 Hz; light— 2033
Hz; white — 2300 Hz. Article covers operation in
detail and gives flow diagrams for microproces-
sor subroutines required. — B. Sanderson, SSTV
Pictures from Your Microcomputer, QST, Oct.
1978, p 25-29.
SOUND IF SUBSYSTEM— Single RCA

CA1190GQ 1C combines sound IF, FM detector,
and complete audio amplifier for driving 8-,
16-, or 32-ohm loudspeaker in TV receiver. Nom-
inal power output is 3 W. Electronic volume con-
trol on chip provides improved taper with single
15K wirewound control. — "Linear Integrated
Circuits and MOS/FET's," RCA Solid-State Di-
vision, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 301.
cal deflection in high-resolution video display of constant voltage across zener D,. Period of to R5. Sync range is wide enough so external
requiring highly linear ramp summed with sec- integration is limited by UJT Q, that resets in- vertical hold can be eliminated. Amount of
ond integral of ramp to give S shaping of de- tegrating capacitor C, when negative-going shaping can be adjusted with pot.— L. G.
flection so sweep is linear on flat screen. Opamp sync signal is applied to base 2 of Q,. Sawtooth Smeins, "S"-Shaped Sawtooth Oscillator, EDN
A, is connected as integrator that takes integral linearity can be trimmed by adjusting ratio of R4 Magazine, Feb. 20, 1974, p 83 and 85.
*M R9 18 selected to 1400V
power than more conventional circuit using
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM FOR 19-INCH COLOR— regulation at 25 kV. Vertical yoke current is also SCR half-wave regulated supply. — R. J. Valen-
Self-regulating scan system includes short-cir- stabilized since it is powered from auxiliary fly- tine, "A Self-Regulating Horizontal Scan Sys-
cuit protection. Provides excellent high-voltage back winding. System consumes 30% less tem," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, AN-750, p 7.
RF MODULATOR — First section of free-running

7413 Sch mitt-trigger oscillator runs at one- third
of desired TV-channel carrier frequency (about
20 MHz for channel 3) and drives buffer section
whose output is square wave at oscillator fun-
damental. Q1 modulates RF output by varying
effective supply voltage to 1C. Since standard
video is 1 V P-P, modulation depth is about 20%
with 5-V supply. Capacitive connection is made
to TV set, using short lengths of 300-ohm line
after removing regular antenna leads from set
used as experimental display terminal for mi-
croproces or. R1 determines frequency of os-
cillation; adjust for best reception. — W. Banks,
The Waterloo RF Modulator, BYTE, Jan. 1978,
p 94.
• 94 dB ISOLATION AT 10 MHz OFF

CAMERA TO ON CAMERA
• 80 dB ISOLATION AT 10 MHz LOAD
FROM EACH CAMERA WHEN BOTH
CAMERAS ARE OFF
• 1.0 dB ON INSERTION LOSS
LOW = SELECT
TV CAMERA
75 SI 2
_
TWO-CAMERA VIDEO SWITCH— DG200 CMOS

switches with built-in drivers provide 94-dB iso-
lation at 10 MHz between on and off cameras.
Desired camera is turned on by applying low
Z-
logic level to select line for that camera. — "An-
alog Switches and Their Applications," Silico-
nix, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 7-26.
INTERLACED SYNC— Uses Sylvania 15-37701-1 camera. Required 31.5-kHz input is obtained
1C made by Texas Instruments for 1974Sylvania from 6300-kHz crystal oscillator and three flip-
color TVs, where it serves to generate sync sig- flops that divide by 200. With 74121 mono and
nals whenever off-the-air sync is temporarily 7400 gate connected as shown, interlaced sync
lost. 1C has divide-by-2, divide-by-25, and mono outputs are obtained. — R. Suding, Master Sync
MVBR stages. Used in circuit shown to provide Generator, 73 Magazine, July 1975, p 96.
interlaced sync for black and white amateur TV
CHAPTER 93
Temperature Control Circuits

Variety of circuits maintain temperature at desired preset value to within as
little as 0.0000033°C. Special features include overshoot compensation,
anticipation control, differential control, and proportioning control. See also
Power Control and Temperature Measuring chapters.
115 VAC
HOT
k IW
COOKER CONTROL — Uses Model K600A ther-

'T' 25VDC -
mistor (Allied Electronics) placed in slow cooker
m 7
to maintain ideal cooking temperature. Pot can
ft
>
m /■ be adjusted to provide triggering for ON/OFF
control of heating element for cooker. Use po-
f IOV
larized power plug for proper operation. — Cir-
ut
27K 2.2K 150 \ LOAD
|flTH 2N3904 2.2K - RI725
cuits, 73 Magazine, May 1977, p 19. AC
- HEP
2N3904 ’
10
:
2N3904
50K
2.2K 117V
m n n
PROPORTIONING CONTROLLER— National

LM122 timer is used as proportioning temper-
ature controller with optical isolation and syn-
chronized zero-crossing. R2 is used to set tem-
perature to be controlled by thermistor R1 . SCR
used for 02 is chosen to handle required load.
D3 is rated at 200 V. R12, R13, and D2 implement
synchronized zero-crossing feature.— C. Nel-
son, "Versatile Timer Operates from Microsec-
onds to Hours," National Semiconductor, Santa
Clara, CA, 1973, AN-97, p 8.
1039
CONTACTS- IK1)
40 AMPS
SWITCH
OVEN CONTROL — Simple circuit using RCA
HIGH TEMP
CA3059 zero-crossing switch regulates ON and L - LIMIT SWITCH
OFF intervals of low-current SCR that controls
solenoid in electric or gas oven. Sensor resistor
has negative temperature coefficient. R„ is set
for desired control temperature. — E. M. Noll,
"Linear 1C Principles, Experiments, and Proj-
p 323.
■28V
75— 250°C OVEN CONTROL — Provides propor-

tional temperature control of small oven to
within 1°C over temperature range. Uses 823B
voltage regulator operating from same 28-V
source as oven. Temperature-setting pot
should be 10-turn wirewound. Power transistor
Q, operates either saturated or almost cut off,
so no heatsink is required. — R. L. Wilbur, Pro-
portional Oven-Temperature Controller,
EDNIEEE Magazine, Sept. 15, 1971, p 45.
ON/OFF HEATER CONTROL— Uses Texas In- crossing of AC line voltage is either inhibited or
triggering characteristics of triac used. — "The
struments SN72440 zero-voltage switch to trig- permitted by action of differential amplifier and Linear and Interface Circuits Data Book for De-
ger triac that turns AC heater on and off in ac- resistance bridge circuit in 1C. Width of output sign Engineers," Texas Instruments, Dallas, TX,
cordance with demands of 8K resistance-type pulse at pin 10 is controlled by trigger pot R20
1973, p 7-37.
temperature sensor. One output pulse per zero as given in table and should be varied to suit
1041
TEMPERATURE CONTROL CIRCUITS
SENSE B
DIODE
SILICON-DIODE SENSOR — Ordinary silicon current corresponding to presettable tempera-

diode having temperature coefficient of about ture offset range. Low output voltage of bridge
-2 mV/°C over wide temperature range serves is amplified by opamp such as Motorola
for sensing temperature differentials up to MCI 741 which gives output swing of 30 V for
±10°F with resolution of about 0.3°F. Two input change of 0.3 mV. Buffer transistor is
diodes connected in resistor bridge provide added for handling load such as motor control
voltage proportional to temperature difference relay. — "Industrial Control Engineering Bulle- PROPORTIONAL CONTROL FOR OVEN— Ther-
at terminals A and B. Pot supplies variable offset tin," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1973, EB-4. mistor RV1 and resistor-pot combination form
voltage divider across 10-V zener, with output
< 28 V
applied to UJT. Voltage across capacitor is
ramp during positive half-cycles of AC line,
slope of which is function of temperature and
setting of 5K pot. When ramp reaches firing
voltage of UJT, it turns on SCR and applies
power to load. Negative half of AC input turns
off SCR and cycle repeats. When oven temper-
ature islow, SCR fires early in cycle to give more
heat. When preset temperature is reached, SCR
fires very late in cycle to compensate for heat
lost by oven. Designed for 100°F environmental
test chamber. — I. Math, Math's Notes, CQ,
Sept. 1978, p 63 and 82-83.
0.001°C ACCURACY — Simple design using ther-

mistor bridge and two opamps controls tem-
perature with high precision and has wide dy-
namic response as required for fast-changing
ambient conditions. Circuit will not oscillate
about desired temperature. Article covers de-
sign and operation of circuit in detail. — L. Ac-
cardi. Universal Temperature Controller, EDN
Magazine, Dec. 1, 1972, p 53 and 55.
TIME-PROPORTIONAL CONTROL— Provides function elements are included in Mullard cides with zero crossings of AC line voltage.
synchronous ON/OFF switching of resistive load TCA280A trigger module. Values shown are for Repetition time of internally generated saw-
under control of temperature-sensitive bridge triac requiring gate current of 100 mA; for other tooth is about 30 s and can be adjusted by
formed by R4, R5, and negative temperature triacs, values of Rd, Rg, and C, may need to be changing C2. — "TCA280A Trigger 1C for Thy-
coefficient thermistor R6 in one bridge branch, changed. Proportional band can be adjusted by ristors and Triacs," Mullard, London, 1975,
with R9 and RIO in other branch. All required Technical Note 19, TP1490, p 10.
changing value of R12. Triac triggering coin-
DIFFERENTIAL TO 10°F — Simple circuit senses

difference between temperatures of two ob-
jects, as required for such control applications
vW as turning on fans, turning off heaters, or op-
erating mixing valves. Inexpensive 1N4001 sili-
5k con diode is used as sensor; with two such
2k
diodes in resistance bridge as shown, voltage
proportional to temperature difference be-
tween reference and sensor diodes is applied to
SENSE
pins 4 and 7 of opamp. High-gain opamp is re-
DIODE quired because bridge output is only about 2
mV/°C of temperature differential. If output re-
quires more than about 10 mA, buffer transistor
is needed. — J. Barnes, Differential-Tempera-
ture Sensor is Very Inexpensive. EDN Maga-
zine, April 5, 1973, p 90-91.
CRYSTAL OVEN CONTROL— Unbalance volt-

age produced in thermistor bridge when tem-
perature drops below set point is sensed by dif-
ferential opamp that feeds buffer Q1 and power
amplifier 02. Power dissipated in 02 and its
load R1 1 heats oven. Thermistor R4 has nominal
resistance of 3600 ohms at 50°C (GE 1D53 or
National Lead 1D053). Voltage divider R1-R2 re-
duces U1 input to safe level and makes ther-
mistor operate at low current, minimizing self-
heating effects. All arms of thermistor bridge
except R7 (vernier temperature adjustment) are
in oven. — R. Silberstein, An Experimental Fre-
quency Standard Using ICs, QST, Sept. 1974, p
14-21 and 167.
2 x 1 N660
PHASE-FIRED SCR CONTROL— Can provide lin- opamp amplifies bridge output for biasing oven heater. Possible drawback is RF noise gen-
ear thermal control to 0.001°C at high power 2N2907 transistor which in turn controls 60-Hz erated because SCR chops in middle of wave-
with good efficiency. Band-gap voltage refer- synchronized UJT oscillator that drives gate of form.— J. Williams, Designer's Guide to: Tem-
ence of AD580 1C temperature transducer fur- SCR through isolation transformer. Biasing ac- perature Control, EDN Magazine, June 20, 1977,
nishes power to bridge circuit, while platinum tion makes SCR fire at different points on AC
sensor provides sensing function. AD504 waveform as required for precise control of
p 87-95.
Q, TEMPERATURE CONTROL CIRCUITS
1043
",
COMPONENT ON DISSIPATION
"»
0.001W.
0.064 W. I fyt * 2N5884
R, £R.
1.540 W. ► Ik <47 XT
R. 0.660 W.
0.688 W. (
0.003 W.
0.019 W.
\K5t/2 N 5406
TOTAL : 2.975 W. >2W il
LOW-DISSIPATION SWITCH— Logic-controlled
power switch for 150-W instrument heater uses
tap on heating element to force switch Q3 and
driver Q2 into saturation and keep dissipation
low. When input goes positive, Q, turns on and
drives Q2 and Q3 on. Collector current of Q2 and
HEATER
\°3 base drive of Q3 are determined by R2. Voltage
TOTAL) drop across R2 is proportional to supply voltage
(5 SI so drive for Q3 is at optimum level over wide
voltage range. — M. Strange, Increase Electronic
Power Switch Efficiency, EDN Magazine, Aug.
20, 1975, p 78.
2N2222
28V DC NOMINAL @5.6 A.
THERMOCOUPLE WITH ZERO-VOLTAGE

SWITCH — Differential input connection of RCA
CA3080A operational transconductance ampli-
fier is used with thermocouple to drive CA3079
zero-voltage switch serving as trigger for triac
handling AC load. Choose triac to match load
being controlled. Supply voltage for opamps is
not critical. — "Linear Integrated Circuits and
MOS/FET's," RCA Solid State Division, Somer-
ville, NJ, 1977, p 165-170.
ROOM-HEATER CONTROL — Use of phase con- temperature decreases, resistance of sensor RT dicate alternate connections for controlling
trol for triac provides gradual reduction in increases and transistors initiate firing of triac. motor with constant load such as blower
heater load current as desired temperature is If RT continues to increase. Cl charges faster motor. For cooling applications, interchange RT
approached, eliminating large overshoots. R2 is and triac is triggered earlier in each half-cycle, and R2. — "Circuit Applications for the Triac,"
adjusted so Q1 is off at desired temperature, delivering more power to load. Dashed lines in- Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1971, AN-466, p 9.
turning Q2 off and preventing firing of triac. If
75°C CRYSTAL OVEN — Proportional tempera-

ture controller using National LM3911 1C holds
crystal oven temperature constant within 0.1°C
of 75°C, to improve stability of oscillator used in
frequency synthesizers and digital counters.
Duty cycle of square-wave output of 1C (ratio of
OFF to ON time) varies with temperature of sen-
sor in 1C and with voltage at inverting input ter-
minal. Duty cycle change makes average heater
current change as required to bring tempera-
ture back to desired value. Square-wave fre-
quency is determined by R4 and Cl. 4N30 op-
tocoupler drives power transistor having oven
heater in collector circuit. During ON intervals
of square wave, power transistor is driven to
saturation, and during OFF intervals is cut off. —
F. Schmidt, Precision Temperature Control for NOTES
Crystal Ovens, Ham Radio, Feb. 1978, p 34-37. I- ALL RESISTORS 1/2 WATT COMPOSITION. EXCEPT Rl AND R3. WHICH SHOULD
METAL FILM OR WIREWOUND
BE
2 VALUES OF Rl. R2 AND R3 ARE FOR OVEN TEMPERATURE OF 75C

3. FOR
+V SHOULD BE 5-6
HOME BREW VOLTS FOR 6.3 VOLT SURPLUS OVEN; 9-12 VOLTS
OVEN.
0.000075°C BATH CONTROL— Will hold oven or

bath at 37.5°C with high stability. Bridge offset
is sensed by AD605 instrumentation opamp
having high common-mode rejection, low drift,
and balanced inputs. Opamp drives Darlington
pair providing current gain to heater. Pass tran-
sistor must dissipate all power not delivered to
heater; to overcome this, large servo circuit is
connected between points A and B to maintain
constant 3 V across pass transistor regardless
of heater power demands. Output of 741 opamp
is compared with 400-Hz line-synchronized
ramp by AD301A amplifier serving as pulse-
width modulator that drives 2N2219-2N6246
transistor switch. Switch delivers phase-con-
trolled power to 100-jtF integrating capacitor
and pass transistor of temperature controller. —
J. Williams, Designer's Guide to: Temperature
Control, EDN Magazine, June 20, 1977, p 87-95.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL CIRCUITS 1045
ENII-FREE PHASE CONTROL OF HEATER—

Modulated triac zero-point switch eliminates
electromagnetic interference generated by
phase control while providing proportional ON/
OFF switching for accurate temperature regu-
lation of heater load. Circuit at right of dashed
line is basic zero-point switch that turns triac on
almost immediately after each zero crossing
between half-cycles. R7 is set so bridge in con-
trol circuit is balanced at desired temperature.
When temperature overshoots, thermistor RT
decreases in resistance and 02 turns on to pro-
vide gate drive for SCR Q3. 03 then turns on and
shunts gate signal away from triac Q4, to re-
move power from load. When temperature
drops, Q2 and 03 turn off and full-wave power
is applied to load. Modulation is achieved by
superimposing sawtooth voltage from Q1 on
one arm of bridge through R3, With sawtooth
period equal to 12 cycles of linef requency. From
1 to 12 of these cycles can be applied to load for
modulating power in 8% steps from 0% to
100% duty cycle. — "Circuit Applications for the
Triac,” Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1971, AN-466, p
13.
To Programming
Drive Source
100
To
Programming
Drive
Motor
,Q2 - NPN Transistor, 2N2222 or Equivalent S3 - SPST Toggle Switch

,D2 - Diodes, 1N4 148 or Equivalent PL1 ,PL2 - 10V, 14 m Pilot Lights
,K2 - DPDT Relays, 24Vdc Coil R3,R„- 1 0011 , 10-Turn, Wire-Wound Potentiometers
■ 3 PDT Relay, HOVac Coil
nal is then compared in A, and A2 to continu-
THERMAL CYCLER — Circuit allows operator to When relay is energized, motor runs in forward ously variable reference voltage from 0 to 5 V
preselect upper and lower temperature limits direction to increase temperature; when de- preselected by 10-turn pots R3 and R,. Q, is cut
for controller used in determining effect of con- energized, motor is reversed. Condition of K3 off when input is below reference. When input
tinuous thermal cycling on properties of mate- depends on which of limit relays K, or K3 was exceeds reference, Q goes on and energizes
rials. Switching arrangement gives choice of most recently energized. Control circuit sam- upper-limit relay K,. Article gives initial setup
modes ranging from manual to fully automatic ples output of temperature programmer; this procedure. — W.J. Dobbin, Variable Limit
continuous cycling. Operation of programming DC input signal is reduced to 5 V maximum by Switch Permits Hands-Off Equipment Cycling,
drive motor is controlled by contacts of relay K3. Ri-R2 and amplified by voltage follower A3. Sig- EDN Magazine, Jan. 20, 1973, p 66-67.
TEMPERATURE-DIFFERENCE DETECTOR— Pair

of National LX5700 temperature transducers
delivers output voltage proportional to temper-
ature difference between transducers, as re-
quired for sensing temperature gradient in
chemical processes, detecting failure of cooling
fan, detecting movement of cooling oil, and
monitoring other heat-absorbing phenomena.
With sensing transducer in hot condition (out of
liquid or in still air for 2 min), adjust 50-ohm pot
to setting that just turns power output off. Next,
with transducer in cool condition (in liquid or in
moving air for 30 s), find setting that just turns
output on. These settings overlap, but final set-
ting between them will provide stable opera-
tion.— P. Lefferts, "A New Interfacing Concept;
the Monolithic Temperature Transducer," Na-
AN-132, p 7.
Output "OFF" if sensing unit becomes hot, i.e., out of liquid or airstream
Reference unit is 1 inch from the sensing unit in airstreams, and below the
sensor in liquid sensing systems.
0. 000003 3°C CHOPPER-STABILIZED OVEN to five digits. Use of floating power supply for driving Darlington pair that provides up to 30 V
CONTROL — Uses chopper-stabilization tech- bridge allows single-ended noninverting chop- across heater of oven. Article also gives circuit
niques to provide ultimate in temperature con- per-stabilized AD741J amplifier to take differ- of 30-V regulated supply required for output
trol for laboratory oven. Multiranging bridge ential measurement and eliminates common-
transistors. — J. Williams, Designer's Guide to:
accommodates sensors from 10 ohms to 1 mode voltage error. Passive 60-Hz notch filter Temperature Control, EDN Magazine, June 20,
megohm, with Kelvin-Varley divider being used eliminates pickup noise at input of AD261K am-
1977, p 87-95.
to dial sensor resistance control point directly plifier which in turn feeds 2N2222A transistor
TEMPERATURE CONTROL CIRCUITS 1047
F 6V
THERMISTOR BRIDGE — Bridge is formed by

thermistor with R„ R4, R5, and Re. Unbalance is
sensed by CA3046 1C having two matched pairs
of transistors, with additional output transistor
in 1C. Positive feedback through R7 prevents
chatter as switching point is approached. R5
sets switching temperature precisely. Relay
comes on when temperature drops below pre-
determined point; for opposite function, re-
verse positions of thermistor and R, . Value of R,
is chosen to give approximately the desired
control point. — D. E. Waddington, Thermistor
Controlled Thermostat, Wireless World, July
1976, p 36.
ANTICIPATING CONTROLLER— Circuit adds se-

lected amount of phase leading signal to normal
amplified output of National LX5700 tempera-
ture sensor to compensate at least partially for
sensing lags. DC gain of LM216 opamp is set at
10 by 10-megohm and 100-megohm resistors to
give opamp output of 1 MI C. Output of opamp
energizes optoisolator that feeds conventional
temperature control system. — P. Lefferts, "A
New Interfacing Concept; the Monolithic Tem-
perature Transducer," National Semiconduc-
tor, Santa Clara, CA, 1975, AN-132, p 7.
POWER - OFF") (NOTE 2)
OVERSHOOT COMPENSATION— Used to con-

trol temperature of industrial gas-fired heater
having very high thermal capacity. When AD31 1
opamp comparator trips at set-point tempera-
ture, 555 mono makes transistors turn on gas
solenoid and light burner. When mono times
out, burner goes off regardless of opamp output
condition. Time constant of 555 compensates
for lags in system by turning off heater before
AD590 sensor reaches cutoff value. Thermistor
across 555 mono compensates for changes in
ambient temperature. During start-up, AD741
opamp and associated circuit effectively by-
passes mono, and also turns on heater if mono
fails to fire for any reason. — J. Williams, De-
signer's Guide to: Temperature Control, EDN
Magazine, June 20, 1977, p 87-95.
CRYSTAL OVEN — All components for propor-

tional temperature control circuit are mounted
on crystal, so total power of 2 W maximum
serves for maintaining crystal temperature.
Thermistor is about IK at room temperature.
Transistor types are not critical but should have
low leakage currents. Thermistor current of
about 1 mA should be much more than 0.1-mA
base current of Q1 . If Q2 is silicon, increase 1 50-
ohm resistor to 680 ohms. — P. H. Mathieson,
Simple Crystal Oven, Ham Radio, April 1976, p
66.
0.01°C CONTROL WITH OPAMP COMPARA-

TOR— Uses platinum sensor in bridge configu-
ration, with opamp connected across bridge dif-
ferentially. When cold, sensor resistance is less
than 500 ohms so opamp saturates to give pos-
itive output that turns on power transistor and
heater. As oven warms, sensor resistance in-
creases, bridge balance shifts, and heater is cut
off. — J. Williams, Designer's Guideto: Temper-
ature Control, EDN Magazine, June 20, 1977, p
87-95.
CHAPTER 94
Temperature Measuring Circuits

Convert temperature to frequency, voltage, or other parameter for driving
meter or digital display that gives temperature value with desired accuracy.
Includes wind-chill meter, air-velocity meter, position sensor, thermoco
uple
multiplexer, integrator for soldering-energy pulses, and differential drive
for
strip-chart recorder.
THERMOCOUPLE AMPLIFIER— Precision Mon- differential signals from low-impedance

olith ics OP-07A opamp has high common-mode sources must be accurately amplified in pres-
rejection ratio and long-term accuracy required ence of large common-mode voltages. — D. 70— 80°C THERMOMETER — Uses National
for use with thermocouples having full-scale Soderquist and G. Erdi, "The OP-07 Ultra-Low LM391 1 1C having built-in temperature sensor.
outputs under 50 mV, frequently located in Offset Voltage Op Amp — a Bipolar Op Amp If no thermometer is available for calibration,
high-noise industrial environments. CMRR is That Challenges Choppers, Eliminates Nulling," set pot R7 to its midpoint. Article gives equa-
100 dB over full ±13 V range when ratios R2/R1 Precision Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1975, tions for calculating resistance values for other
and R4/R3 are matched within 0.01%. Circuit is AN-13, p 11.
temperature and meter ranges. Applications in-
useful in many other applications where small clude monitoring of temperature in crystal
oven. If permanently connected meter is not re-
quired, terminals can be provided for checking
temperature with multimeter. — F. Schmidt,
Precision Temperature Control for Crystal
Ovens, Ham Radio, Feb. 1978, p 34-37.
-125 to +200°C WITH 1° ACCURACY— Use of

factory-trimmed AD590 1C temperature sensor
gives wide temperature range with minimum
number of parts. Other temperature scales can
TRANSISTOR SENSOR — Use of bipolar supply and gain by R6. — C. J . Koch, Diode or T ransistor be obtained by offsetting AD301 buffer
for opamp makes electronic thermometer cir- Makes Fully Linear Thermometer, Electronics,
opamp. — J. Williams, Designer's Guide to:
cuit fully linear even at low temperatures. Ac- May 13, 1976, p 110-112. Temperature Measurement, EDN Magazine,
curacy iswithin 0.05°C. Zero point is set by R„ May 20, 1977, p 71-77.
1049
THERMISTOR THERMOMETER— Thermistor

for desired temperature range is one leg of
Wheatstone bridge driving microammeter
through transistor to provide direct indication
of temperature. Can also be used for control
purposes if suitable amplifier and relay are used
in place of meter. Thermistor cable can be or-
dinary parallel or twisted wires. To calibrate,
immerse thermistor in water at various tem-
peratures and measure water temperature with
conventional high-accuracy thermometer. Cal-
ibration graph can then be prepared as guide for
marking meter scale. — F. M. Mims, 'Transistor
1977, 2nd Ed., p 86-93.
PE 3843
Q* 15V
*7
DISPL AV MEWL f T 1 PACKARD 50e? 7300
/.
3 r J 1
I
7490
7490
7490
I
7490 }-«
| 7490 ]•« £
_/
74121
HI dition to providing 0-10 V feed (for 0-100°C) to
voltage-to-frequency circuit that drives display.
5-DIGIT THERMOMETER — Temperature-to-fre- inverting input of AD521J instrumentation am- Readout is updated at 2-s intervals. — J. Wil-
quency converter drives digital display provid- plifier, while noninverting input is driven from
liams,_/Designer's Guide to: Temperature Mea-
ing 0.001°C resolution with 0.15°C absolute ac- same reference. Output can be fed directly to surement, EDN Magazine, May 20, 1977, p 71-
curacy. Linearized thermistor network biases analog strip-chart recorder or computer, in ad- 77.
TEMPERATURE MEASURING CIRCUITS 1051
RED/GREEN LED MONITOR — Set points are ad-

justed by trimming resistor shunted across
FOUR-THERMOCOUPLE MULTIPLEXING— Low switched differentially to instrumentation am- thermistor, to give one color when desired tem-
power dissipation in DG306 analog switches plifier driving meter, in order to cancel thermal perature has been reached and other color
means lower offset voltages added to thermo- offsets due to switch. — "Analog Switches and when temperature is low. Uses Monsanto
couple voltages by silicon in contact with alu- Their Applications," Siliconix, Santa Clara, CA, MV5491 dual red/green LED, with 220 ohms in
minum in switches. Thermocouples are 1976, p 7-87. upper lead to +5 V supply and 100 ohms in
quirements. LED drivers are SN75452 and
SN75451. — K. Powell, Novel Indicator Circuit,
bilizes against supply changes. Output network

0— 100°F GIVES 0-1 kHz OUTPUT— Circuit pro- using 680 pF and 2.2K differentiates 400-ns reset
vides direct temperature-to-frequency conver- edge of negative-going output ramp of opamp
sion at low cost for applications where digital and drives single-transistor inverter to provide ZERO SUPPRESSION — Opamp is used in in-
output is desired. Temperature sensor is TTL output. Accuracy is within 0.3°F. — J. Wil- verting configuration at output of temperature-
1N4148 diode having -2.2 mV/°C temperature sensing bridge, so noninverting input of opamp
liams, Designer's Guide to: Temperature Mea-
shift, controlling AD301 opamp in relaxation os- surement, EDN Magazine, May 20, 1977, p 71- can be used for suppressing meter zero when
cillator circuit. Compensated 1N821 zener sta- 77.
temperature range for application is 29 to 42°C.
Calibration control is set for gain of about 17.2
to make meter direct-reading. Article gives op-
+ 15 V
eration details and methods of improving tem-
TEMPERATURE-TO-FREQUENCY CONVERT- ±0.3°C. Opamp is used as integrator, with Output frequency is then 10 times Celsius tem-
ER— Frequency of relaxation oscillator varies 1N821 temperature-compensated diode provid- perature.— J. Williams and T. Durgavich, Direct-
linearly with temperature-dependent voltage ing voltage reference that determines firing Reading Converter Yields Temperature, Elec-
across 1N914 diode sensor, with range of 0- point of U JT. Circuit functions as voltage-to-fre- tronics, April 3, 1975, p 101 and 103; reprinted
1000 Hz for 0-100°C. Frequency meter at output quency converter. Calibrate at 100°C and 0°C, in "Circuits
tronics, 1977,for Electronics Engineers," Elec-
p 366.
shows temperature directly with accuracy of repeating until adjustments cease to interact.
1C FOR DIFFERENTIAL THERMOCOUPLE—

Amount of heat sensed by differential thermo-
couple isproportional to voltage between pins
2 and 3 of CA3094A programmable power
switch/amplifier. Input swing of ±26 mV gives
single-ended output current range of ±8.35
mA. — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C Principles, Experi-
anapolis, IN, 1974, p 314.
TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCER INTERFACE—

Output of National LX5600 temperature-sen-
sing transducer is inverted, level-shifted, and
given extra voltage gain of 4 to give required
output of 0 to +5 V for telemetry system or in-
strumentation recorder. Q1 furnishes constant
current to thermometer, and 02 provides in-
verting function. Resulting output signal is rein-
verted by LM201A opamp connected through
zero-adjust divider to pin 3 which provides volt-
age reference. — P. Lefferts, "A New Interfacing
Concept; the Monolithic Temperature Trans-
ducer," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
CA, 1975, AN-132, p 3.
HEAT-ENERGY INTEGRATOR— Pulses of heat ple as input sensor. Temperature derived from Article describes operation of circuit in detail
energy applied to solder preforms by tips of area under time/temperature curve is indicated and gives timing diagram. — C. Brogado, Heat-
pulsed soldering machine are metered by inte- momentarily on output meter, as guide for op- Energy Pulse Measured and Displayed, EON
gratefhold-to-indicate circuit using thermocou- erator when size of solder preform is changed. Magazine, Sept. 15, 1970, p 61-62.
1053
TEMPERATURE MEASURING CIRCUITS
♦ 15V
THERMOCOUPLE AMPLIFIER— Combination of

LM321 preamp and LM308A opamp forms pre-
cision low-drift amplifier that includes compen-
sation for ambient temperature variations.
LM113 zener provides temperature-stable ref-
erence for offsetting output to read thermocou-
ple temperature directly in degrees C. R4, R6,
and R7 should be wirewound. — R. C. Dobkin,
"Versatile 1C Preamp Makes Thermocouple Am-
plifier with Cold Junction Compensation," Na-
LB-24.
TEMPERATURE-TO-FREQUENCY CONVERT-
ER— Temperature sensor on chip of AD537 volt-
age-to-frequency converter 1C minimizes num-
ber of external parts needed. Output frequency
changes 10 Hz for each degree (kelvin or Cel-
sius) change in temperature. — J. Williams, De-
signer's Guide to: Temperature Measurement,
EDN Magazine, May 20, 1977, p 71-77.
PROBE
0.1 °C PRECISION — Temperature sensor is 4.5-V output of A, is reference point for other adjusting R10 for full-scale or other convenient
LM113 diode in probe, with sections A, and Aa opamps. Changes in output voltage of diode are reading at desired upper temperature limit. Use
of LM324 quad opamp maintaining constant reflected in output of A„ through buffer A3. Cal- 1-mA meter movement. — Y. Nezer, Accurate
current to diode to ensure that voltage changes ibration involves adjusting Rs for zero output Thermometer Uses Single Quad Op Amp, Elec-
across diode are direct result of temperature. voltage at low end of temperature range, then tronics, May 26, 1977, p 126.
Vcc (5 - 15 Vdc)
THERMISTOR-CONTROLLED TIMER— Thermis-

tor and two transistors in charging network of
555 timer give output frequency that varies with
temperature over 78°F range with accuracy of
±1 Hz. — "Signetics Analog Data Manual," Sig-
DIGITAL THERMOMETER — Diode D2 serves as ciated with amplifiers. Can be calibrated over 1°. — H. Wurzburg and M. Hadley, Digital Ther-
sensor for driving A/D converter directly, elimi- temperature range of -199 to 199° in either mometer Circumvents Drift, Electronics, Jan. 5,
nating temperature-drift errors normally asso- Fahrenheit or Celsius scales. Accuracy is about
1978, p 176-177.
1055
TEMPERATURE MEASURING CIRCUITS
FULLY LINEAR DIODE SENSOR— First opamp

acts as constant-current source for tempera-
ture-sensing diode, making voltage drop across
diode depend only on temperature. Second
opamp offsets diode voltage to whatever tem-
perature range is desired and provides gain that
is adjustable with R6. R„ is used to set output at
zero for selected temperature such as for 0°C.
Circuit can then be adjusted to give 1 V at
50°C. — C. J. Koch, Diode or Transistor Makes
Fully Linear Thermometer, Electronics, May 13,
1976, pi 10-1 12.
DIFFERENTIAL THERMOMETER — Temperature ing gain of AD261K chopper-stabilized null describes other measuring modes as well, includ-
is directly dialed out on five-decade Kelvin-Var- tector which drives both meter and AD275J iso- ing techniques for measuring 200-nanodegree
ley voltage divider, and differences between lation amplifier used to drive strip-chart temperature shifts.— J. Williams, Designer's
dialed temperature and that of YSI 44018 sensor recorder. Circuit can also be used to measure Guide to: Temperature Measurement, EON
are read directly on meter. Full-scale sensitivity temperature difference between two sensors Magazine, May 20, 1977, p 71-77.
of meter is varied from 0.001 to 50°C by adjust- with 100-microdegree accuracy. Article de-
+ 15V
0-100°C WITH 1° ACCURACY— Low-cost diode

serves as temperature sensor. To calibrate,
place diode in 0°C environment and adjust zero
pot for 0-V output, then place diode in 100°C
environment and adjust full-scale pot for 10-V
output. Repeat procedure until interaction be-
tween adjustments ceases. — J. Williams, De-
signer's Guide to: Temperature Measurement,
Q,== AD
Q- AD 810
813 EDN Magazine, May 20, 1977, p 71-77.
TRANSISTOR SENSOR — Current-ratio differ-

put with better than 1°C accuracy over 300°C
ential-pair temperature sensor uses dual tran- temperature range. Analog Devices AD 590 1C
sistor Q,. Difference between base-emitter volt- version of differential pair will operate over wire
ages of QtA and Q1B varies linearly with line thousands of feet away from instrumenta-
temperature, when dual transistor Q2 provides tion opamp, for remote sensing. — J. Williams,
10/xA through Q1A and 5j»A through Qle. Instru- Designer's Guide to: Temperature Sensing,
mentation opamp provides single-ended out- EDN Magazine, May 5, 1977, p 77-84.
120 k (1%)
THERMOMETER — Sensor is 391 1 1C whose out-

ABSOLUTE-TEMPERATURE SENSING— Silicon ries, operating from regulated output of put is 10 mV/K (keivin temperature scale). At
temperature sensor (MTS102, MTS103, or MC7812 regulator. Opamp types are not critical. 0°C, output is 2.73 V. Output swing is amplified
MTS105! provides precise temperature-sensing With Q1 at known temperature, adjust 50K pot
by 741 opamp to 0.1 V/°C for driving volt-ohm-
accuracy over range of -40°C to + 1 50°C. Sensor to give output voltage equal to TEMP x 10 mV. milliammeter or sensitive milliammeter. R2 ad-
is essentially a transistor with base and collec- Output voltage is then 10 mV per degree in de- justs scaling factor, for readout in °C or °F as de-
tor leads connected together externally; base- sired temperature scale. — "Silicon Tempera- sired.— J. Sandler, 9 Projects under $9, Modern
emitter voltage drop then decreases linearly ture Sensors," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1978, DS Electronics, Sept. 1978, p 35-39.
with temperature over operating range. Volt- 2536.
age change is amplified by two opamps in se-
TEMPERATURE TO PULSE WIDTH— Tempera-

ture-dependent current through thermistor TH,
develops voltage across R, that is compared
with fraction of increasing voltage across C, by
741 opamp. When output of opamp goes neg-
ative, it triggers 555 1C connected as mono
MVBR, to turn transistor on for about 100 gs
and discharge C,. Circuit is based on similarity
between resistance-temperature curve of ther-
mistor and inverse function of voltage across
capacitor charging through resistor. For values
shown, circuit gives 650-ps pulse width at 0°C,
increasing 20 gs per degree with accuracy of
±1.2°C up to 60°C. If 1C output is used to gate
clock oscillator, number of oscillator output
pulses will be directly proportional to temper-
ature.— T. P. Y. Sander, Temperature to Pulse-
Length Converter, Wireless World, Jan. 1977, p
76.
HOT-COLD METER — Output of unreferenced

thermocouple drives meter through opamp
that provides required gain, for monitoring tem-
perature inside furnace when exact tempera-
ture value is not required. Meter is simply cali-
brated in terms of hot and cold. — J. Williams,
Designer's Guide to: Temperature Measure-
ment, EDN Magazine, May 20, 1977, p 71-77.
MATCHED-TRANSISTOR SENSOR— Precision

Monolithics MAT-01H matched-transistor pair
Q1 senses temperature over range of -55°C to
+ 125°C with inherent linearity and long-term
stability. Matched transistors Q2 (MAT-01GH)
are current sources for sensing transistors.
Transistor combination provides differential
voltage output that is directly proportional to
absolutetemperature. Amplifier using OP-IOCY
changes this voltage difference to single-ended
signal that can be used for measurement or con-
trol. Circuit will drive 10-V full-scale digital
panel meter to give digital thermometer. — J.
Simmons and D. Soderquist, "Temperature
Measurement Method Based on Matched Tran-
sistor Pair Requires No Reference," Precision
WIND-CHILL METER — Circuit measures and tion with arithmetic-logic units to generate out- contents.— V. R. Clark, PROM Converts
displays wind-chill equivalent temperature by put values corresponding to those of wind-chill Weather Data for Wind-Chill Index Display,
combining air temperature and wind speed temperature chart adopted by National Electronics, Jan. 5, 1978, p 158-159.
data. PROM is programmed to act in combina- Weather Service. Article gives listing of PROM
125-470 K GIVES 125-470 Hz— Use of AD590

current-ratioed differential-pair 1C temperature
transducer gives low parts count for tempera-
ture-to-frequency converter. Sensor controls
AD301 opamp in relaxation oscillator, with neg-
ative-going output ramp being differentiated
for driving single-transistor inverter giving TTL
output. — J. Williams, Designer's Guide to:
Temperature Measurement, EDN Magazine,
May 20, 1977, p 71-77.
— 9 5/8" —
POSITION SENSOR — Position of small heating Thin wall brass tube with an LX5700 soldered on
element sliding inside thin-wall brass tube is
7/8" from each end. Mount horizontally in still an
sensed by National LX5700 temperature trans-
ducer mounted outside of tube. With heater at
0.22/jF
center, transducers at both ends reach same
temperature. With heater at one end of pipe,
that transducer is about 50°C above ambient
and other is near ambient. As heater moves to-
ward one end, one thermometer becomes more
sensitive and the other less. Circuit regulates
heater power to keep position "gain" constant.
Digital voltmeter gives average position. Appli-
cations include measuring average truck spring
deflection while moving on rough road. — P. Lef-
ferts, "A New Interfacing Concept; the Mono-
lithic Temperature Transducer," National Semi-
Signal conditioning To reduce

circuit
ôutput ripple
10 Vdc —
'T
-H t K
2.4V
juul ovîtn.
V/F AND F/V CONVERTERS FOR DPM— Signal perature value sensed by 100-ohm resistive amplifier can be Datel AM201 or equivalent.—
transmitted as variations in frequency in 0-10 thermal device (RTD) in bridge. V/F and F/V con- E. L. Murphy, Sending Transducer Signals over
kHz range is converted back to voltage for driv- verters can be almost any commercial models 100 Feet?, Instruments & Control Systems,
ing digital panel meter to give indication of tem- designed for 0-10 V and 0-10 kHz. Instrument June 1976, p 35-39.
AIR VELOCITY METER— Uses National LX5600

air temperature reference, connected in unity-
gain mode, in combination with LX5700 self-
heated velocity sensor to convert wind velocity
or airspeed to differential between heated and
unheated transducers. As wind velocity rises,
heating current required to hold velocity sensor
predetermined number of degrees above am-
bient is measured. Calibration curve is drawn to
show correlation between current and air-
speed.— P. Lefferts, "A New Interfacing Con-
cept; the Monolithic
AN-132, Temperature T ransducer,"
MICROPOWER THERMOMETER— Low power able. Thermometer is pulsed at low duty cycle R9. Cl and R3 control OFF time, and Cl, R1, R4,
consumption makes circuit attractive for bat- to reduce power consumption, with sample and and R7 control ON time. Q3 is sample transistor.
tery-operated equipment. Uses National hold used to obtain continuous output between Output is 0-50 ftA for 50— 100°F temperature
LX5600 temperature transducer covering — 55 C pulses. Supply range is 8-12 V; 8.4-V mercury change. Formulas in box give values for other
to -*-125 C, whose output is directly propor- battery will give over 1 year of operational life. ranges. — R. C. Dobkin, "Micropower Thermom-
tional to absolutetemperature at 10 mV/K. Both Output can be used to drive meter for direct eter," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
zero and scale factor are independently select- readout. MVBR Q1-Q2 drives LX5600 through CA, 1974, LB-27.
11V 15V
TEMPERATURE-TO-FREQUENCY CONVERT-
ER— Transistors Q1-Q5 in National LM3046
transistor array form oscillator and ramp that
together convert varying output voltages of
■ TANT LX5600 temperature transducer to proportional
• LOW v*
changes in frequency of square-wave pulses for
22|:F
feed to pulse counter. — P. Lefferts, "A New In-
terfacing Concept; the Monolithic Temperature
LEAKAGE
Transducer," National Semiconductor, Santa
Clara, CA, 1975, AN-132, p 4.
MATERIAL B
DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE SENSOR— Re- both sensors at same temperature, 100K pot is heit measurements. — "Silicon Temperature
sponds to difference in temperatures of adjusted so output voltage is 0.000 V. Opamp Sensors," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1978, DS
MTS102 silicon high-precision temperature types are not critical. R1 is 27K for measure- 2536.
sensors having range of -40°C to +150°C. With ments in Celsius or kelvin and 15K for Fahren-
+ 15 V -15V
THERMOCOUPLE MULTIPLEXER— Under con- plifier driving digital or other readout. To de- room temperature, but this arrangement will be
trol of logic input, DG509 four-channel differ- couple sensors from instrumentation amplifier, sensitive to changes in ambienttemperature. —
ential analog multiplexer connects selected one reference junction at 0°C can be used as shown. "Analog Switches and Their Applications," Sil-
of four thermocouples to instrumentation am- Alternatively, bucking voltage can be set at iconix, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 7-77-7-78.
1/2 MM74C76
FAHRENHEIT/CENTIGRADE LED THERMOME- ing 3-digit LED display indicating temperature plications, Vol. 2," National Semiconductor,
TER — National LX5700 temperature transducer range from -40°Cto +100°C or -40°Fto +199°F Santa Clara, CA, 1976, LB-30,
provides input for code conversion circuit driv- under control of ganged switch. — "Linear Ap-
BRIDGE-TYPE SENSOR — CA3094 programma-

ble opamp is connected as level-triggered
MVBR at output of bridge, d riving triac for tem-
perature monitor or control applications. Sen-
sor can be any temperature-dependent device.
Load can be lamp, horn, or bell. For control ap-
plications, load is appropriate temperature-con-
trolling device connected in feedback relation-
ship to sensor. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear
ICs," RCA Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ,
1977, p 10.
VOLTAGE-REFERENCE THERMOMETER— Pre-

cision Monolithics comparator CMP-02 turns on
heating-element driver Q1 when temperature
drops below set point determined by ratio of R1
to R2, as sensed by +5 V voltage reference REF-
02 serving as thermometer. Circuit also pro-
vides adjustable hysteresis, determined by R6
and R7, if this feature is desired. Values in pa-
rentheses are for 60°C set point. REF-02 should
be thermally connected to substance being
heated. Design equations are given. — "Linear
& Conversion I.C. Products," Precision Mono-
lithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1977-1978, p 15-4.
SERVOED SHIELD FOR PROBE— Used when

only part of temperature sensor can touch sur-
face being measured. LM195H power transistor
is main power amplifier and at same time serves
as 23-W heater that is used to make copper
shield track actual temperature of surface to be
measured. Uses National LX5700 sensors.
Diode in series with ground leg of one sensor
permits adjusting pin 3 of that sensor over
range of 40-80 mV to make it track with servo
thermometer. Digital voltmeter is used to read
temperature directly in degrees C. — P. Lefferts,
"A New Interfacing Concept; the Monolithic
Temperature Transducer," National Semicon-
44018 SENSOR
0-100°C WITH 0.15° ACCURACY— Low-cost YSI

44018 temperature sensor in feedback loop of
741 J opamp gives accuracy approaching that of
platinum sensors. Opamp is driven by AD580
band-gap reference. Voltage output of A, feeds
similar opamp that provides zeroing and sets
desired output gain.— J. Williams, Designer's
Guide to: Temperature Measurement, EDN
Magazine, May 20, 1977, p 71-77.
SENSING PAIR
(ATTACH WITH THERMAL EPOXYI
UP TO 100 FEET
SHIELDEDPAIR CABLE
(CONDUCTOR =22 OR LARGER!
-o R,
10mV/°K
= (5.973 X 10" 5 II -p— + II T
DIFFERENTIAL
AMPLIFIER
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
-15V 1. SHORT THE DIFFERENTIAL

AMPLIFIER (CONNECT A TO B). ADJUST
OFFSET
REMOVE POTENTIOMETER
THE INPUT SHORTFOR OV OUTPUT.'
2. WITH SENSING PAIR AT KNOWN
0.01%, GENERAL RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE (e.g. ROOM TEMP.), ADJUST
ECONISTOR RATIO POTENTIOMETER FOR CORRECT
0.1%. GENERAL RESISTANCE ECONISTOR OUTPUT READING.
10%, BOURNS TYPE 3006P
1%, TYPE RN55C Output voltage is +2.18 V at -55°C (218 K), in-
is easy to calibrate, has long-term stability, and creasing to +3.98 V at +125°C (398 K).— J. Sim-
±1 K ACCURACY FOR -55 to + 125°C— can operate with sensor transistor pair up to mons and D. Soderquist, Temperature Mea-
Matched transistor pairs and opamps give high- 100 feet from rest of circuit. Common-mode re- surement Method Requires No Reference, EDN
accuracy temperature-measuring system that jection at amplifier input is greater than 100 dB. Magazine, Aug. 5, 1974, p 78 and 80.
V/F CONVERTER FOR TRANSDUCER— Output quency with almost any commercially available show analog value. Instrument amplifier can be
of low-level transducer such as temperature V/F converter. Typical converter has 0-10 V full- Datel AM201 or equivalent. — E. L. Murphy,
bridge can be transmitted reliably over long scale analog input and 0-10 kHz output. If 5 V Sending Transducer Signals over 100 Feet?, In-
wires (100 feet or more) in serial form if changes is applied to input, output pulse train will have struments & Control Systems, June 1976, p 35-
in 100-ohm resistive thermal device (RTD) are rate of 5 kHz ± 0.5 Hz, which can be counted for 39.
converted to corresponding changes in fre- 1 s or less and displayed on digital readout to
CHAPTER 95
Test Circuits
Includes variety of circuits for checking diodes, transistors, opamps, ICs, coils,
crystals, filters, and power supplies, along with curve tracers, signal injectors,
signal tracers, power peak meter, printed-circuit ammeter, and
pseudorandom digital generator.
— WV— T
200 O
AF SIGNAL INJECTOR — Can be built into pen-

light housing, using single penlight cell or 1 ,5-V
mercury cell for power. Output probe for feed-
ing signal to audio circuit under test is about 1-
inch length of stiff wire, pointed. For more out-
put, run ground lead to equipment under test.
Q, can be HEP253, 2N519, 2N741A, 2N2929, or
equivalent. Q2 can be HEP3, 2N1280, 2N2273,
SK3005, or equivalent. Adjust R, and R2for good
output, and adjust R3 as required for good tone.
To use, touch probe to input of any receiver or
high-fidelity audio circuit. Tone should be heard
from loudspeaker if circuit is good between
probe and loudspeaker. — C. J. Schauers, Tran-
sistorized Signal Tracer, CQ, Sept. 1973, p 12
and 14.
JFET CURVE TRACER — Quad opamp and J176

JFET switch form basis of simple curve tracer
that can be used with any CRO. Circuit displays
drain current versus gate voltage for both P-
channel and N-channel JFETs at constant drain
voltage. Sweep time is 10 ms. Sweep rate is 0.5
V/mswith maximum gate voltage of ±5 V. Drain
current is fed to vertical input and gate voltage
to horizontal input. — "FET Databook," National
1W NPN, PNP 6-51.
1064
1065
TEST CIRCUITS
CHECKING DIODES WITH CRO— Simple oscil-

loscope setup checks and matches diodes. Sort
diodes according to type, set potto give desired
trace size for good diode, then note relative
sizes of traces obtained for unknown diodes.
Reject diodes showing fuzz or ripple on oscil-
loscope trace.— Novice Q & A ,73 Magazine,
March 1977, p 187.
transistor r3
socket
TRANSISTOR/DIODE TESTER— Checks for po- verse, and unbiased in turn for one-third of a
larity, shorts, and opens in one measurement, cycle. Current flowing into device turns on red
using six LEDs as indicators. Circuit derives LED, and current flowing out turns on green
three- phase waveform from 2-kHz ring-of-three LED, to indicate polarity and position of base
oscillator for application to device under test lead. — N. E. Thomas, Semiconductor Tester,
120k
through LEDs. Oscillator waveform serves to Wireless World, March 1977, p 43.
make each pair of device terminals forward, re-
470K 18k
CRYSTAL CHECKER — Simple oscillator circuit

checks crystal activity and resonant frequency,
as required when choosing matched crystals for
filters. For frequency check, signal from oscil-
lator is injected into frequency counter. Values
shown are for crystals around 5.5 MHz. For
matching purposes, higher accuracy is obtained
by reading harmonics of oscillator. — J. Perolo,
source, such as 20-V Variac. Three-terminal de- Practical Considerations in Crystal-Filter De-
DIODE CURVE-TRACER — Circuit is designed to vices may be traced if suitable external bias is sign, Ham Radio, Nov. 1976, p 34-38.
produce voltage-current characteristic curve of provided. Opamps are 741.— S. Cahill, Diode
diode or other two-terminal device on oscillo- Curve Tracer for Oscilloscope, Wireless World,
Feb. 1976, p 76.
scope. Sweep input can be any low-voltage AC
SEALED-COIL TESTER — Permits rapid nonde-

structive testing of hermetically sealed coils for
shorted or open turns, coil-to-core shorts, and
reversed polarity of connections. Can be used
for simultaneous testing of all coils in recording
heads for up to 18 tracks. Circuit develops test
pulse having predetermined polarity, ampli-
tude, and duration. Article gives details of cir-
cuit operation and test procedures. With mul-
tiple-coil units, lamp and detector circuit must
be provided for each coil.— D. L. Uhls, Novel
Method Nondestructive^ Tests Sealed Coils,
EDN Magazine, March 20, 1976, p 102 and 104.
‘Motorola type Silicon Control Rectifier (SCR) or equivalent.

‘Any SCR that can handle lamp-current requirements.
SIGNAL INJECTOR — Circuit is basically 1-kHz sistors can be used. Article gives troubleshoot-
MVBR having high harmonic output through 50 ing techniques for all types of equipment. — M.
MHz. Used with signal tracer for troubleshoot- James, Basic Troubleshooting, Ham Radio, Jan. TRANSISTOR-TESTING OSCILLATOR— With
ing audio equipment. Practically any NPN tran- 1976, p 54-57. any good general-purpose transistor, circuit de-
livers steady AF tone to earphone. To test an-
other transistor, substitute it in appropriate
socket. No tone means it is bad. Low tone or
chirp indicates questionable condition. If type
(PNP or NPN) is unknown, try in both sockets.
If leads of unknown cannot be identified, try all
three possible positions in socket. — Circuits, 73
Magazine, July 1977, p 35.
i
Z
I
i FET (2N4220)
MATCHING OPAMPS — Simple circuit checks point voltages will agree within about 2 mV. If £
condition of quad Norton opamps (National one section of amplifier is damaged, associated
6
LM3900 or Motorola MC3401). Can also be used LED will glow very brightly or not at all. Wide
to match or select devices for similar DC char- variations between test-point voltages indicate
acteristics in critical applications. Amplifier partial damage. For critical applications, select
under test is plugged into socket connected as amplifiers by matching average test-point volt-
shown. Good unit makes all four LEDs glow ages.— R. Tenny, Check Norton Amplifiers
with about same brightness, and all four test- Quickly, EDN Magazine, March 5, 1974, p 72.
DIODE AND FET LEAKAGE— FET under test is

connected with 22K resistor as source follower,
with capacitor C across input from gate to
ground. Leakage of FET charges capacitor at
rate directly proportional to leakage and in-
versely proportional to capacitance. With 0.01
gf for C, each volt of change across C indicates
stored charge of 10 “ coulomb. This can be in-
terpreted as current in amperes if time for volt-
age on capacitor to rise 1 V is measured with
stopwatch or timer while watching voltmeter.
To test diode, connect as shown by dashed line
and use good FET in circuit as shown. Article
gives design equations; if voltage across C rises
1 V in 38.7 s, leakage current is 0.258 nA. — D.
Dilatush, Leakage Testing of Diode and JFETs,
EDN Magazine, May 5, 1973, p 72-73.
RF TRANSISTOR TESTER — Tells if unknown bi-

polar or FET transistor is AF, RF, or VHF and
whether it is NPN or PNP. Transistor to be
tested is placed in frequency-switchable oscil-
lator circuit, and amplitude of oscillation is
noted on meter. Highest oscillation frequency
corresponds to highest amplification fre-
quency. Six switch positions cover frequency
range of 1 to 190 MHz. — F. Brown, An R.F. Tran-
sistor Testor, CQ, April 1975, p 35-36 and 66.
TEST CIRCUITS
1067
SINGLE-OPAMP TRANSISTOR TESTER— Meter

scale is calibrated to read transistor gain di-
rectly for NPN devices. Addition of switch for
reversing supply and meter polarities permits
testing PNP devices as well. When reference
voltage of 741 opamp is 5.3 V, circuit passes suf-
ficient base current to make collector current 1
mA. Gain of transistor is then 1 mA divided by
base current in microamperes; thus, 50-/xA
point on meter scale is marked for gain of 20
(1,000 divided by 50). Gain is 400 at 2.5 jtA. — A.
Rigby, Direct-Reading Transistor Tester, Wire-
less World, Aug. 1976, p 52.
10 II 12 13 IA 15 16 17
ooooo oooo v o o 9
BOTH SWITCHES -MOMENTARY PUSHBUTTONS
test (DUT) and receives six lines of output.

When TEST switch is closed, binary counter input of clock oscillator flip-flop is driven low,
driving DUT input lines is cleared and flip-flop and further counts are inhibited until TEST but-
PROGRAMMABLE 1C TESTER — Provides auto- driving GO/NO-GO light is set. Upon release of ton ispushed again. If GO/NO-GO light stays on,
matic, instantaneous, and exhaustive tests of switch, counter increments through all 256 component passes test. To program, hold PRO-
most small-scale integration gates, inverters, input conditions. Between counts, data on out- GRAM button down while testing known good
flip-flops, etc, and medium-scale integration put lines is compared with data stored in mem- device. Article gives examples of various appli-
counters, latches, shift registers, etc. Circuit ories IC9-IC14. If mismatch exists, GO/NO-GO cations.— M. Thorson, A. Programmable 1C
sends eight lines of input data to device under flip-flop is cleared at terminal count, CLEAR Tester, BYTE , June 1978, p 28, 30, 32, and 35.
AF LINE TESTER — Gives complete check of

shielded twisted-pair cable in one operation, in-
dicating short-circuits between conductors and
providing positive continuity check of each con-
ductor. Tester using polarity-sensitive bicoior
LEDs is connected to one end of cable under
test, and two-diode plug is patched in at other
end. If cable is good, only green LEDs come on.
If a conductor in cable is open, one or both green
LEDs will be off. One or both red LEDs will light
for short between any combination of conduc-
tors or if cable is wired incorrectly. Signal diode
types are not critical. — W. L. Mahood, Tester for
Balanced Audio Lines, EDN Magazine, April 5,
1974, p 80 and 82.
HIGH-ACCURACY CURVE TRACER— Can be

used with any calibrated CRO, for matching and
testing transistors or diodes by comparing per-
formance curves. All opamps are 709C. Triangle
wave generated by IC,-IC2 is fed to Schmitt trig-
ger Q,-Q2, which generates square wave having
transitions at zero voltage crossings of input tri-
angle. Q3 clamps square wave to 6.3 V P-P. Flip-
flop Q4-Q5 generates same square wave but at
half the frequency of triangle wave. Combining
square waves gives three-step staircase voltage
having steps precisely in phase with zero signal
crossings of triangle wave. T, is UTC A-20 audio
transformer, and T2 is Stancor P-6411 15-W 1:1
isolation transformer. Article covers construc-
tion, alignment, and use, and gives circuit of
suitable regulated supply operating from ±110
and ±6.3 V available in AN/USM-140C military
version of Hewlett-Packard 170 CRO. — A. J.
Klappenberger, An Accurate Solid State Com-
ponent Curve Tracer, CQ, July 1974, p 20-24
and 82.
1069
TEST CIRCUITS
TIDI25 DIODE ARRAY
R I
5K-I50K
TRANSISTOR PIN-FINDER — Simple audio oscil-

lator is assembled as shown and values of R1
and Cl adjusted for desired tone. General-pur-
1C TEST CLIP — Provides in-circuit testing for all needed. Position of clip on 1C is unimportant. On pose transistor to be tested is then substituted
types of 16-pin ICs. LED array indicates logic sta- 14-pin ICs, disregard LEDs for two unused pins. in circuit (NPN for Q1 or PNP for 02) and rotated
tus of each 1C pin. Circuit uses Texas Instru- Circuit can be expanded for 24- or 40-pin ICs, in socket until oscillator works again; pins then
ments TID125 diode arrays on test clip to deter- although adding LEDs makes clip more difficult correspond to those of the good transistor. If
mine pin with highest voltage (Vcc) and pin with to use. — J. Errico and R. Baker, Powerless 1C oscillator will not work in any of three possible
lowest voltage (GND). These pins are then used Test Clip, BYTE, Dec. 1975, p 26-27. positions, transistor under test is bad. — Cir-
to supply power to LEDs. No batteries are cuits, 73 Magazine, July 1977, p 34.
GENERATOR
BASIC l-V
TRANSISTOR CURVE TRACER— When fed with trolled-gain amplifier U6 can be eliminated if Knight 54A3800 or equivalent variable auto-
staircase waveform of base-current generator, correct sense of current indication is not essen- transformer rated 1 A. T3 is Knight 54A1410 or
circuit generates series of current-voltage (l-V) tial. S11 switches multiplier R9 in and out; R9 equivalent power transformer with 125-V 15-
curves as function of base current, for transis- is 18 megohms (about 9 times input resistance mA and 6.3-V 0.6-A secondaries. — R. P. Ulrich,
tors and other three-terminal semiconductor of CRO) . Cl is 7-13 pF mica trimmer. Diodes are A Semiconductor Curve Tracer for the Amateur,
devices. Cathodefollower U5 and inverting con- 1N4822. U5 and U6 are Fairchild 741. T2 is QST, Aug. 1971, p 24-28.
2.5mH
RLIMIT
DIODE CHECKER — Requires only one resistor,

two LEDs, and any small power transformer
POCKET-SIZE CRYSTAL CHECKER— Provides dication at about half scale when test button is providing 3 to 25 VAC. If diode under test is
quick check of condition when shopping for pushed, if crystal is oscillating properly. — Cir- open, neither LED lights. If diode is shorted,
used or surplus crystals. Meter gives steady in- cuits, 73 Magazine, April 1977, p 164. LED1 lights on one half-cycle and LED2 on other
half-cycle, so both appear lit continuously. If
diode is good, LED1 will light if anode of diode
is toward transformer, and LED2 will light for
other polarity of diode. Choose resistor to limit
current through LEDs to about 10 mA. — M. D.
Kitchens, Ultra Simple Diode Checker, 73 Mag-
azine, Oct. 1977, p 44-46.
VR TUBE CHECKER — Increase output voltage of fire at their rated voltage and current values.
Variac gradually until VR tube fires, then read Circuits, 73 Magazine, May 1977, p 31.
milliammeter and voltmeter. Good tubes will
CRYSTALS
+ 180V
TRANSISTOR BREAKDOWN TESTER— Simple

circuit measures breakdown voltages of most
types of small-signal and power transistors, re-
verse breakdown voltages of small power
diodes, and zener diode voltages. Two small 90-
V batteries in series provide power. R, biases
upper transistor into conduction. When voltage
is applied to diode or transistor junction under
test, junction breaks down and current flows
through R2. This makes lower transistor con-
duct, thereby dropping base voltage of upper
PORTABLE CRYSTAL TESTER— Pierce oscilla- crystals to be tested. With known good crystal, transistor. R2 may be used to set breakdown
tor using 2N4124, MPS3563, or HEP53 NPN tran- circuit can also be used for checking bipolar current over wide range. Voltmeter reads
sistor gives indication of crystal activity on Ml, transistors, with S3 providing correct polarity. breakdown voltage of junction, since drop
from upper HF range down to at least 455 kHz. Diodes are 1N34A germanium or equivalent. — across R2 is negligibly small. — J. W. Brown,
Increasefeedback capacitance with SI for lower D. DeMaw and C. Greene, A Pair of Handy Test- Simple Breakdown Voltage Meter, Wireless
frequency. Choose sockets J1-J4 for types of ers, QST, May 1973, p 24-27. World, July 1973, p 337.
1071
TEST CIRCUITS
Applied Load Voltage
POWER PEAK METER — Optical Electronics

5897 four-quadrant multiplier generates prod-
uct of load voltage and load current, while 5030
peak sense-and-hold module holds peak power
for display on panel meter or other readout. Ap-
plications include measuring peak power ap-
plied to transistor, motor, lamp, or squib. If
power peak at particular moment is required,
such as that of transistor failure or squib deto-
nation, 5020 sample-and-hold moduleis used in
addition to or in place of 5030. Hold command
can be obtained from flip-flop connected for
triggering by abrupt change in power level. —
"A Peak Reading/Sampled Reading Power
Meter," Optical Electronics, Tucson, AZ, Appli-
cation Tip 10083.
TTL TESTER — Used to check quality, identify in-

ternal sections, and identify terminals of un-
marked TTL ICs. Operates from 5-VDC source,
which should have current-limited output for
fuse protection against shorts. Used with ordi-
nary CRO, for which horizontal and vertical
jacks are shown on diagram. Article tells how
eight different oscilloscope displays are inter-
preted, and gives procedure for identifying ter-
minals of chip one by one as test probe is held
on pins.— S. S. Smith, Jr., A TTL Tester, 73 Mag-
azine, Oct. 1976, p 110-111.
O CD 0 O
5E 5F 5G 5H
BANDPASS-FILTER TESTER — Measures center Output of filter serves as input for PLL compar- measurements in AF range.— M. P. Prongue,
frequency of active bandpass filter by measur- ator. When VCO and filter signals are in phase, Phase-Lock Loops Test Bandpass Filters, EDN
ing phase angle as function of frequency. Out- PLL locks at center frequency of filter, corre- Magazine, June 20, 1974, p 76 and 78.
put of VCO excites bandpass filter under test. sponding to 0° phase shift. Accuracy is 1% for
FREQUENCY SWEEPER— Sawtooth output of

UJT varies sinusoidal output frequency of Op- To Osci 1 lo-
tical Electronics 3370 voltage-to-frequency
transducer, as required for checking frequency
response of active and passive networks. R, de-
termines sweep width. Center frequency of
sweep output can be changed by adding volt-
age to sawtooth or adjusting 3370. Sweep using a Voltage-to-Frequency Transducer," Op-
speed can be increased by reducing value of 1- tical Electronics, Tucson, AZ, Application Tip
10059.
gF tantalum capacitor. — "Sweep Generator
TRANSISTOR TESTER — Will test conventional

bipolar transistors, JFETs, MOSFETs, Darling-
tons and UJTs. Audible note between 1000 and
5000 Hz from connected loudspeaker indicates
that device is functioning as amplifier and gives
relative indication of gain and noise figure. Most
devices can be tested in-circuit. Among similar
JFETs or MOSFETs, those producing lowest
tone pitch have lowest noise figure. Among
similar devices of any type, those producing
loudest tone have highest gain. Tester feeds
back audio signal through two transformers to
create sustained oscillation when amplifying
device is connected to proper terminals. SI ap-
plies positive or negative voltage through audio
output transformer T2 to device under test. C3
and 04 must be nonpolarized electrolytics be-
cause R1 and R2 may produce either positive or
negative voltage depending on device being
tested. T1 and T2 have 1200-ohm primary and
8-ohm secondary (Calectro DI-724). Note above
1 0,000 Hz means device has some gain but does
not meet specifications or is connected incor-
rectly. For MOSFETs, source and substrate are
both connected to source terminal. — W. E. An-
derson, A Universal Transistor Tester, QST,
Dec. 1975, p 26-28.
PSEUDORANDOM DIGITAL GENERATOR—

Uses two Am687 dual sampling comparators to
implement 200-Mb/s pseudorandom digital-se-
quence generator for checking and measuring
performance of high-speed digital communica-
tion equipment. Produces sequence length of
127 bits, but delay-line length can be changed
to give any desired other sequence length. Cir-
cuit accepts from 195 to 203 Mb/s, which is more
than adequate for systems using crystal clock
having ±0.1% frequency variation. Article de-
scribes operation and gives timing diagram. —
G. L. Meyer, Sampling Comparators — They Sub
for High-Speed Logic and Produce Power, Cost
and Space Savings, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5,
1977, p 71-74.
♦ 9v TEST CIRCUITS
1073
0-20A
POWER-SUPPLY TESTER— Serves as high-cur-

where L is in henrys and f is in hertz. If desired, rent solid-state resistor load for testing power
INDUCTANCE METER — When used with varia- calibration graph can be prepared to eliminate supplies before use, to determine voltage and
ble-frequency audio oscillator, FET circuit calculations. High input impedance of FET min- current under load. Darlington configuration of
checks any inductance between 60 *iH and imizes oscillator loading. Adjust R1 for full-scale transistors reduces power-dissipating require-
60,000 H by resonance method. With unknown deflection of meter at resonance, to give maxi- ments of pot. Use large heatsink for 2N3055S
coil connected to terminals XX, external oscil- because they must dissipate almost 200 W
mum sensitivity. — R. P. Turner, "FET Circuits,"
lator is tuned for peak deflection of Ml. Induc- Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, 2nd
when power supply is delivering 15 A at 15 V.—
tance isthen calculated from L = 1/(395x10 9 f2) Ed., p 138-140. E. Fruitman, The Smoke Tester, 73 Magazine ,
Nov. 1976, p 159.
CRYSTAL TESTER — JFET Pierce oscillator will

test any crystal from 50 kHz through 25-MHz
upper frequency limit of fundamental-mode
crystals without tuning, and drive counter for
measuring crystal frequency. Will test overtone
VHF crystals on their fundamental frequency.
T1 is small output transformer from tube-type
radio, having about 33: 1 turns ratio, or 6.3-V fil-
ament transformer if 1N645 rectifiers are used
in place of 50-/xF filter capacitors to give full-
wave voltage doubler providing required 9 V.
RFC1 is 2.5 mH, and RFC2 is 1 50- mH miniature
toroid. — F. Brown, A Universal Crystal Oscilla-
tor, QST, Feb. 1978, p 15-16.
d.c.
response
y±.
t
transient
response
TRANSIENT RESPONSE OF REGULATED SUP- oscilloscope oscilloscope Y input

earth trigger
PLIES— Developed for testing transient re-
sponse of 12-V regulated power supply at load- show only small leading-edge peaks, as in voltage swings in switching cycle. Square-wave
ing of either 100 mA or 1 A, depending on switch upper waveform. Any tendency of power sup- output is used for oscilloscope trigger and fed
position. Load resistors can be changed for ply toward instability degrades waveform to other three transistors that provide load for
other voltages and currents. Transients gener- much more, as in lower diagram. Circuit con- power supply under tesj — H. Macdonald, Tran-
ated by supply may be observed on AC-coupled sists of multivibrator using series diodes in base sient Response Testing, Wireless World, July
oscilloscope. Good transient response will circuits to protect transistors from excessive 1973, p 338.
TRANSISTOR AND DIODE TESTER— Four pairs

of AA penlight cells provide power for testing
transistors and diodes quickly for opens and
shorts. Circuit also distinguishes between PNR
and NPN transistors and shows diode polarity.
Leads of diode are inserted into base and col-
lector jacks (B and C), and switches are pressed
in succession. If LED 1 glows, diode is good and
its anode lead is in collector jack. If LED 3 glows
when S2 is pressed, anode of diode is in base
jack. If both LEDs glow, diode is shorted. If nei-
ther LED glows, diode is open. With transistor
in tester, unit is PNP if LED 1 and LED 2 glow. If
LEO 2 LED 3 and LED 4 glow, unit is NPN. If one or no
LED 4
LEDs glow, transistor is open. If three or more
Bl, B2, B3. B4 - 3 VOLTS LEDs glow, transistor has shorted junction. Any
LEDs can be used. — F.M. Mims, "Transistor
1975, p 87-93.
N-CHANNEL
FET TESTER — Can be used for measuring JFET

pinchoff voltage, matching FETs of same ge-
neric type, and measuring bias range of FET.
Opamps sense source current of FET under test.
First 741 is buffer, while second is preset to 1 V
and its output used to drive device under test
(DUT) until source current is 100 /x A. Polarity of
VP is opposite that of VDD. — Circuits, 73 Mag-
azine, June 1977, p 49.
CRI-CR4
IN400I
CURVE TRACER — Displays on CRO a family of

six collector characteristics for transistors and
voltage/current characteristics of diodes. Circuit
varies base voltage in discrete steps while
sweeping collector voltage from zero to maxi-
mum at each step. Collector voltage is 120-Hz
rectified sine wave from bridge rectifier CR10-
CR13, varied by R36. S5 selects proper polarity.
Base voltage steps are synchronized to 120-Hz
collector voltage by adjusting R6 in mono
MVBR Q2-Q3 driven by Q1. RIO adjusts voltage
between steps. Programmable UJT Q5 resets
staircase generator to zero. R12 adjusts gate
voltage. Staircase voltage is coupled to bias re-
sistors R1 5-R32 for test transistor by Q6 and Q7,
with bias polarity and value selected by S2 and
S3. Connect device under test to points B, C, and
E. Connect points A, and A2 together. R15-R35
should have 5% accuracy. — D. Wright, Transis-
tor Curve Tracer, Ham Radio, July 1973, p 52-
55.
TEST CIRCUITS 1075
IMPEDANCE METER — External AF voltage is

applied to unknown impedance through input
transformer T1 and calibrated variable resistor
R1 . Voltage drops across impedance and R1 are
checked separately with electronic voltmeter
while R1 is varied. When drops are equal, un-
known impedance is equal to setting of R1, read
directly from its calibrated dial. Voltmeter uses
FET followed by two-diode rectifier X1-X2 and
microammeter Ml. With S2 in position A, volt-
meter reads drop across R1; in position B, volt-
meter reads drop across unknown impedance.
Adjust R5 so meter deflection is near full scale
to increase comparison accuracy. Common test
frequencies used are 400, 500, and 1000 Hz. — R.
P. Turner, "FET Circuits," Howard W. Sams, In-
dianapolis, IN, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 143-144.
DIODE TESTER — Developed to demonstrate

how 0.002-juF shunt capacitor increases effi-
ciency of diode detector. Can also be used to
compare performance of different diodes. Input
terminates AM signal generator. 1C with asso-
ciated capacitors and resistors forms low-pass
filter having cutoff at 2 kHz. R1 is detector load.
Resistor at output of U1 prevents oscillation of
opamp when using coax feed to VTVM. For
higher input signal levels, shunt capacitor in-
creases AF output up to 10 dB.— H. Olson, Diode
Detectors, Ham Radio, Jan. 1976, p 28-34.
fc = 2 kHz
PORTABLE TRANSISTOR TESTER— Go/no-go

tester shows relative condition of NPN and PNP
transistors, junction FETs, and dual-gate MOS-
FETs. Not suitable for checking audio or high-
power RF transistors. Crystal for upper range of
HF spectrum is permanently wired; any HF crys-
tal cut for fundamental-mode operation can be
used. Rectified RF from oscillator is monitored
on Ml. SI selects negative ground for testing
N-channel FETs and NPN bipolars and provides
positive ground for P-channel and PNP devices.
If device is open, shorted, or extremely leaky,
circuit will not oscillate and meter will not de-
flect. The higher the meter reading, the higher
the gain of transistor at operating frequency.
When testing MOSFETs that are not gate-pro-
tected, keep transistor leads shorted until de-
vice is in socket and replace short before re-
moving device. Diodes are 1N34A or
equivalent. — D. DeMaw and C. Greene, A Pair
of Handy Testers, QST, May 1973, p 24-27.
O
AF SIGNAL TRACER — High-gain audio amplifier

with loudspeaker output serves for trouble-
shooting AF stages. With normal input to am-
plifier under test, presence of AF signal is tested
in each stage in turn. If AF signal appears at
input of stage but not at output, that stage has
a defect. Signal source may also be signal injec-
tor having broadband output from audio
through VHF. — M. James, Basic Troubleshoot-
ing, Ham Radio, Jan. 1976, p 54-57.
POWER
TRANSFORMER STACK
| H.V. RECTIFIER
DIODE SECTION
I UNDER TEST
POWER DIODE TESTER — Provides reverse-volt- is increased from 0 until Cl is charged to 1000 R1. Initial setup is made with good diode sec-
age test of individual sections of rectifier stack V as indicated by voltmeter. If diode or capacitor tion. Open SI before changing diode because
at 1000 VDC. With test leads El and E2 clipped in section under test is defective, meter will
voltage is lethal.— R. K. Dye, Testing "Dye-
across diode section under test, Variac setting read low because of extra voltage loss across Odes," QST, Feb. 1976, p 44.
— CKujbJ >500
%/
COUPLE
o o o o o o
o o o o o o
3000
5%
> V
750 < <220
ir«ru ni n
> i
>A
VO O-
TTL GO/NO-GO TESTER — Test panel provides to make flip-flop and for setting up other simple
fast static test of surplus 7400 series TTL ICs. circuits. Input voltage control allows plotting of 2N2926. U1 is SN7404 hex inverter, and U2 is
Each contact of 16-pin DIP socket has lead that transfer functions and study of circuit operation SN7400 quad two-input NAND gate. Tester is
can be plugged into array of seven other sockets under different signal-level conditions. External not suitable for complementary MOS devices
carrying various supply voltages, loads, etc. test meter can be connected when necessary. requiring protection from static charges. Article
Switches provide pulses of input current for HI and LO indicators are LEDs that show level gives detailed instructions for testing each type
toggling or clocking, counting, and resetting. of terminal connected to output socket. Tran- of TTL device. — J. S. Worthington, A Simple
Leads also serve for cross-coupling gates in 1C sistors are general-purpose NPN such as TTL Test Panel, QST, Dec. 1976, p 25-27.
1077
TEST CIRCUITS
TO PSUT +5V
POWER-SUPPLY TESTER— Circuit switches

power supply on or off either at peak or zero of
line voltage while supply is connected to CRO.
Spikes on trace then indicate supply defect. De-
veloped for testing unknown power supplies
before being placed in use on home computer
systems, to ensure safe and reliable computer
operation. Article gives detailed instructions for
using circuit to check for transients, DC regu-
lation, heat rise, and output impedance. — R.
Tenny, Power Supply Testing, 73 Magazine,
July 1976, p 112-114 and 116-117.
DYNAMIC LOAD — R1 sets load current drawn

from power supply under test to desired value,
after R2 is chosen to give about 1-V output at
maximum load current to be drawn from power
supply under test (PSUT). Modulation input to
Cl is obtained from external pulse generator,
and serves to make load current increase and
decrease over small range.— R. Tenny, Power
Supply Testing, 73 Magazine, July 1976, p 1 12-
114 and 116-117.
<=> INTERFACE
^ 1- H TESTER
3- T CLARE
PICOREED1A012
4- SSL 212 GE
QUAD OPAMP TESTER — Interface circuit and IC2 supply input signals to sections of de- output monitoring circuits of tester. LEDs indi-
shown permits use of single-opamp tester for vice under test (DUT). Gate control signals are cate section under test. Interface can be used
testing quads without major modification of supplied by section selector S,; switch can be with LM124, CA124, and MC3503 series of quad
tester's original function. Interface operates automated by using two-line BCD selection. opamps. — A. C. Svoboda, Use a Single Op-Amp
power available from tester, which can on
be Same switch also activates reed relay that con- TesterforQuads, EDN Magazine, March 5, 1975,
Teledyne/Philbrick 5102 or current Tektronix or nects respective amplifier section to load and
ESI testers. CMOS input transmission gates 1C,
p 76.
OPAMP TESTER — Developed for quick testing

of 741 and 301 opamps. For good opamp, LEDs
Flash alternately with 1-s period. No flashing
and no illumination indicate opamp output
fault. If one of LEDs glows continuously, one of
inputs is faulty. Asymmetrical blinking indi-
cates leakage in opamp. — Circuits, 73 Maga-
zine, March 1977, p 152.
v.
TRANSISTOR TESTER — Determines maximum

frequency at which unknown transistor will still
maintain reasonable current gain, and tells
whethertransistor is NPN or PNP. Based on fact
that emitter-base junction of transistor is equiv-
alent to crystal diode, conducting in one direc-
tion only. Direction depends on transistor type.
Setting of S2 which gives meter reading iden-
tifies transistor type. Frequency-limit circuit is
self-excited oscillator in which frequency de-
pends on plug-in coil. If meter reads when 60-
MHz coil is used, transistor is capable of
handling 60 MHz; if no reading, change to
lower-frequency coils one by one until reading 12
is obtained. To check battery, press S4; lamp
should have full brilliance. CR1 is 1N34A. — H. 25
Frequency LI U
Hanson, How High Will It Go?, QST, April 1974, iwy
12 12 (Turns)
p 32-33 and 39. (Turns) 103 (Turns)
3 3 25
31 7 6 4
7 6 Cl
80
603 22 9 1000
270
1 20 8
Note: Above coils close-wound, 3/4-inch
(19 mm) diameter.
'
(MHz) 34
TEMPERATURE-COEFFICIENT COMPUTER— temperature probe into high-level analog volt- and A3. Outputs of these opamps can be posi-
Circuit automatically measures and calculates tive or negative, but are made positive by unity-
age that varies 325 mV/°Cfrom -10 V at +55°C
temperature coefficients of analog circuits or to 10 V at -5°C. Output of A, is applied to sam- gain absolute-value opamps A„ and A5. From
devices. Silicon diode CR, is used as tempera- ple-and-hold circuit, while analog voltage from these outputs, analog divider calculates tem-
ture probe having forward drop of about 2 mV/ device under test is applied to second sample- perature coefficient. — R. C. Gerdes, Tempera-
°C. R adjusts output scale factor. FET-input and-hold. Momentary closing of S, causes volt- ture-Coefficient Measuring Circuit, EDNIEEE
opamp A, converts forward voltage drop of age and temperature data to be stored in sam- Magazine, Feb. 1, 1972, p 54.
TEST CIRCUITS 1079
IN-CIRCUIT TESTER — Eliminates need for re-

moving components one by one for testing.
Voltages and currents used are low enough for
almost any transistorized circuit. Will test for
SCOPE
shorts and opens. Shows forward-reverse ra-
tios on junction transistors and diodes. Lissa-
jous figures and other combination displays on
CRO facilitate analysis of circuits having reac-
tive components, transistors, and ICs. Will de-
tect high-resistance solder joint and check con-
tinuity of switches, fuses, lamps, and printed
wiring. Displays form hands of clock or ovals.
Vertical line indicates short, horizontal means
open, slant indicates resistance, vertical oval is
inductance, horizontal oval is capacitance,
diode and highest-merit transistor show 3
o'clock, fair transistor shows 4 o'clock, and poor
transistor shows 5 o'clock. For other patterns,
compare with those obtained with known good
components. — D. L. Ludlow, The Octopus,
QST, Jan. 1975, p 40-42.
AF SIGNAL TRACER — Motorola MC1306P com-

plementary power amplifier delivers 'k W into
loudspeaker for 3-mVRMS input to preamp, for
troubleshooting all types of audio equipment.
Zero-signal current drain is only 4 mA with 9-V
supply. For RF tracing of modulated AM or SSB lnpo'

signal, use demodulator probe at input. — W. M. -ooi
Scherer, High-Gain Signal Tracer, CO. July
1972, p 12 and 14. o
POPCORN NOISE TESTER — Developed at Inter- inhibited by Q3. At end of preselected test time test period, fail lamp is turned on by Q2. Q4 pre-
sil to test opamps for erratic low-frequency (typically 5 s), one of lamps will come on. If out- vents triggering of latch by spurious signals
jumps between two or more stable states. After put from difference amplifier exceeds preset fail after end of test time. — T. P. Rigoli, 1C Op Amps,
start-up switch S is closed, pass/fail lamps are level at inverting input of comparator during EDN Magazine, May 1, 1971, p 23-33.
R2
TRANSISTOR TESTER — Useful for trouble- current, emitter open). Discard transistor if rent gain (beta) of device. Modern silicon tran-
shooting and for checking small-signal transis- reading is highfor either positionof SI; modern sistors may give no reading here. For final beta
tors having no markings. Set four-pole five-po- transistors pass only nanoamperes, but older test, older types show 100 or less and modem
sition rotary switch S2 to SHORT (lowest types may give noticeable reading, particularly transistors like 2N3391 have beta readings be-
position) before inserting transistor, then flip SI if germanium. Repeat test for lCE0 (collector- tween 300 and 400. CR1 is 1N4603— D. Cheney,
back and forth. If meter shows any reading at emitter current, base open), which should be Shirt Pocket Transistor Tester, Ham Radio, July
all, reject transistor without further tests. If greater than lCB0 by factor approximating cur-
1976, p 40-42.
meter stays at zero, set S2 to lCB0 (collector-base
+2V
D8 - D11
IN 914
w? V77?
4 x 1N914 ZERO AD J.
AMMETER FOR PRINTED-CIRCUIT WIRING— Opamp can be 741, but higher-cost 725C will im- feedback loop in conductor, opamp input volt-
Permits measurement of current in single con- prove performance. When all four wires of age will return to zero when outgoing current
ductor on board without cutting it. Article gives probe make contact, voltage drop appears at is equal to that of unknown current passing
design of probe having four projecting wires input of differential amplifier. Outer wires of through printed-circuit conductor. — F. An-
that are pressed on conductor being measured, probe carry current of opposite polarity passing drews, P.C.B. Ammeter, Wireless World, July
and describes operation of circuit in detail. 1976, p 34.
through ammeter; because there is negative
CHAPTER 96
Timer Circuits
Includes circuits that give elapsed time between two events, produce desired
switching action after predetermined adjustable delay, or perform switching
actions at preset times. Time-of-day circuits are given in Digital Clock chapter.
See also Burglar Alarm and Photography chapters.
TIME COMPARATOR — Digital circuit compares set period of time. Second set of comparators circuit driving triac, with optoisolator providing
time that has been preset on one set of BCD can be used to turn device off when time of day required isolation from AC line. Supply is +5
input switches to multiplexed BCD output of equals preset time. Only hour and minute digits V.— D. Aldridge and A. Mouton, "Industrial
basic 24-h industrial clock. When time of day are compared, using Motorola MC14519 4-bit Clock/Timer Featuring Back-Up Power Supply
corresponds to preset time, output circuit of AND/OR select ICs. Q output of FI can be used 718A, p 6. Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
Operation," 1974, AN-
comparator turns controlled device on for pre- to control load power through output control
1081
5k 3W
SOLID-STATE TURNOFF DELAY— Designed for

applications where machine must remain en- current via MDA920-4diode bridge fortriac. Val-
ergized for certain period of time after some ues shown keep solid-state relay circuit on for REPEAT-CYCLE — RCA CA555 is connected for
other operation has stopped, as when pump about 5 s after pushbutton is released. Resistor astable operation in which total period is sum
motor must run long enough to clear pipes in and capacitor values can be changed to obtain of individual peridst, and t2, where t, = 0.693(R,
chemical plant. When switch is closed, LED of different delay. — T. Mazur, Solid-State Relays + R2)Ct and t2 = 0.693R2CT. With 5-V supply, out-
optoisolator is forward-biased and turned on, Offer New Solutions to Many Old Problems, put voltage has rectangular pulses with interval
making photo-SCR conduct and provide gate EDN Magazine, Nov. 20, 1973, p 26-32. t, separated by interval t2. With optional capac-
itor connected, voltage across capacitor is saw-
tooth that rises for interval t, and decays for in-
terval t2.— "Linear Integrated Circuits and MOS/
NJ, 1977, p 56.
10-min DELAY — MPF103 JFET makes charging

current of C, constant regardless of degree of
charge, to give longer charging time and longer
time delay. After delay determined by setting of
10-megohm pot, UJT conducts and discharges
C, through 27-ohm resistor, triggering SCR and
energizing relay. Open S, to reset circuit. — I.
Math, Math's Notes, CQ, April 1974, p 64-65
and 91-92.
APPLIANCE TIMER — Controls intervals up to 1 goes low to start timing cycle. Relay driver A„
h in 1-s increments as programmed by thumb- holds relay K, closed for application of AC
wheel switches S, and S2. Circuit is basically power to device being controlled and energiz-
two-stage programmed counter driven by 1-s ing of LED to indicate active timing cycle. Ap-
clock derived from 60-Hz power line. A, is con- plications include uses as kitchen and darkroom 10-h FET — Long duration timer gives adjustable
nected as divide-by-60 counter triggered by 60- timers. — W. G. Jung, "1C Timer Cookbook," delays up to 10 hours before turning Q3 on to
Hz signal developed across D2. 1-Hz output from Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 214- give output voltage. — Circuits, 73 Magazine,
218. Feb. 1974, p 101.
A, triggers A2 which in turn triggers A3, all pro-
*2 1083
TIMER CIRCUITS
RADIO TURNOFF — Time-delay control R2 can who fall asleep to music. K, is 12-V relay draw-
be set to turn off radio, TV, or other appliance ing 200 mA or less. — P. Walton, An Electronic
at any desired interval between about 3 and 60 Timer for Less than $5.00, CQ, Aug. 1973, p 42
min after start button is pushed. Ideal for those and 82.
10-min ID TIMER — Red pilot lamp comes on at
end of timing period, adjustable with R1 from
7 to 11 min, as reminder for amateur radio op-
eratorto make station identification required by
120 VAC
FCC every 10 minutes. Green lamp indicates
that timer is on and timing. Lamps should draw
no more than 100 mA, to avoid overloading
NE555 timer. Any 9-12 VDC supply can be
used. — D. Backys, Identification Timer, Ham
Radio, Nov. 1974, p 60-61.
C, -0 5f»F R4 = 44 Mil
R5« 15 Kil
0 | * IN9I4
R | * 0 51 Mil Rg = 50 Kil
R 7 * 5.1 Kil
R2* 51 Mil
R 3 1 22 Mil R 8* I 5 Kil
S2 SET TO R4
PRESETTABLE ANALOG TIMER— Switch S2 plifier. Pot R6 is required for initial time set. —
gives choice of four delay intervals between "Linear Integrated Circuits and MOS/FET's,"
closing of S, and triggering of triac by RCA RCA Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977,
CA3094A programmable power switch and am-
p 192-196.
FLASHING-LED EGG TIMER— UJT oscillator

controlled by FET timer makes LED flash after
timedelay determined by value of R,. When 100-
on /off p F capacitor charges to about 1 V after switch
is turned on, MPF112 FET switches on and
forms part of charging circuit for 2N2646 UJT
oscillator which then pulses LED at about 200
mA peak. Although developed as inexpensive
egg timer, circuit has many other
applications. — J. Jeffrey, Simple Flashing-
L.E.D. Timer, Wireless World, Oct. 1974, p 381.
TRANSISTOR RADIO TURNOFF— Circuit with collector currents of 10 to 100 mA; 2N3706 1.5-min DELAY — When S is closed, C, begins
switches radio off after delay of about 30 min, can be used here and for Tr5. Other transistors charging. After delay determined by setting of
if ganged switch is set to other position and should have current gain above 50, as in 10-megohm pot, UJT conducts and makes C,
radio switch itself is left on. Current drain of 2N3702. For operation from 4.5 to 9 V, omit discharge through 27-ohm resistor, triggering
timer circuit is negligible in both positions. Ar- diode and cut values of R„-R7 in half.— S. Lamb, SCR C106 and energizing relay. Open S, to reset
ticle describes timing action of transistors in Delayed Switch Off for Transistor Radios, Wire- circuit.— I. Math, Math's Notes, CQ, April 1974,
detail. Tr, should have current gain above 25 less World, Aug. 1973, p 373.
p 64-65 and 91-92.
CASCADED TIMER — Two NE555 timers give se-

quential timing intervals for two separate loads.
Time for U1 is set by R1 and Cl, and for U2 by
R2 and C2. Grounding pin 2 momentarily with
switch starts timing. Once started, it cannot be
retriggered. With pin 2 connected to reset input
transistor array drives indicator lamp that 4, both functions are obtained with one push of
comes on at end of timing interval. Q5 is one of RCA Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977, switch. If reset function is not wanted, connect
PNP transistors in array connected as diode. — 4 to 8. When pin 3 of U1 goes low at end of tim-
p 205-210. ing interval, negative pulse generated by 0.001-
/*F capacitor and 27K resistor goes to pin 2 of
U2 to trigger second timer. With 15-V supply,
each timer can handle 200-mA load. — H. Vor-
denbaum. Automatic Reset Timer, Ham Radio,
Oct. 1974, p 50-51.
BATTERY SWITCH-OFF — Can be added to any manual switch off and then on again. When cir- silicon; Tr4 and Trs are 2N3819; D, is any small
battery-operated device to eliminate unneces- cuit has switched off, only battery drain is cur- silicon diode; R6 is 4.7K for 9-V or 12-V battery,
sary running down of costly batteries when rent through 10-megohm resistor R, and leak- and 10K for 15-V to 27 -V battery. R2 is chosen to
someone forgets to turn switch off manually. age through transistors. Time of switch-off can suit working current and battery voltage; suit-
Circuit shown gives operating time of about 10 be changed by altering C2 or R7. Tr, and Tr2 are able value is 15 VAut — D. T. Smith, Automatic
hours, permitting use of equipment for full 2N4061, BC478, or similar PNP silicon; Tr3 is Battery Switch-Off Circuit, Wireless World,
April 1976, p 76.
working day without interruption. Normal op- 2N3053, BC142, or similar medium-power NPN
eration can be restored after shut-off by turning
MINIMUM-DRAIN TIMER— National LM122

timer is connected to reduce supply drain to
zero between timing cycles. External PNP tran-
so CT is initially held in discharged state by tran- independent of supply voltage variations. Ap sistor Q1 serves as latch between V+ terminal
sistor in 1C. When start switch is closed, internal plying negative pulse simultaneously to rese of timer and power supply. Between timing pe-
flip-flop clears short across CT, driving output pin 4 and trigger pin 2 by closing both switch e riods, Q1 is off and no current is drawn. Arrival
voltage high and energizing relay. Voltage during timing cycle causes timing cycle to re of 5-V or larger trigger pulse turns Q1 on for du-
across capacitor then increases exponentially start. Momentary closing of reset switch onli ration of timing period set by R, and C„ which
with time constant R,CT. When capacitor volt- serves to discharge CT without restartim can range from microseconds to hours. — C. Nel-
age equals two-thirds of V+, flip-flop resets and timer.— "Linear Integrated Circuits and MOS son, "Versatile Timer Operates from Microsec-
discharges capacitor rapidly, driving output low FET's," RCA Solid State Division, Somerville onds to Hours," National Semiconductor, Santa
and releasing relay. Timing interval is relatively NJ, 1977, p 56. Clara, CA, 1973, AN-97, p 10.
+VCC
TIMER CIRCUITS 108S
*SEE TEXT
for Cl, C3, and C5. R1, R3, and R5 values also
SEQUENCED TIMERS — Cascading of three 555 affect time delays; use pots if 1 /iF is used for all
timers, each driving LED, gives sequenced three capacitors. — F. M. Mims, "Integrated Cir- STABLE FOUR-TRANSISTOR TIMER— Circuit
flashes with individually adjustable durations. cuit Projects, Vol. 5," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, has good immunity to impulse noise because
Times of timers are determined by values used TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 64-75. normal state of all transistors is on. This elim-
inates spurious timing cycles that sometimes
vcc VCC VCC vcc vcc occur in 1C timers. At switch-on, C begins charg-
ing until its voltage makes Tr2 start conducting;
this in turn makes other three transistors switch
on. Regeneration action then discharges C to
about 0.6 V. Timer is started either by applying
Vcc or opening S,. Timing period depends on
value of Vcc. — J. L. Linsley Hood, One-Shot
Timer Circuit, Wireless World, Nov. 1975, p 520.
~ half of timer is started by connecting pin 6 mo-

SEQUENTIAL TIMER — Output of first half of 556 mentarily toground. After interval determined
dual timer is fed to input of second half through by I.IR,C„ second timer starts its delay deter-
0.001-pF coupling capacitor to give total delay mined by 1.1R2C2. — "Signetics Analog Data
equal to sum of individual timer delays. First Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 724.
Vcc *5V
LONG TURNOFF DELAY — Combination of pin 2 of timer below 'k Vcc, making timer output output is reset to low state and motor thereby
timer, optoisolator, and bridge-triggered triac go high and thus turn LED on. At same time, turned off.— T. Mazur, Solid-State Relays Offer
keeps AC motor or other device energized for capacitor at pin 7 begins charging. Output re- New Solutions to Many Old Problems, EDN
up to 1 h after control switch is depressed mo- mains high until capacitor reaches % Vcc, when Magazine, Nov. 20, 1973, p 26-32.
mentarily. Closing of switch drops voltage at
10-h DELAYS — Long duration is achieved by

separating peak current of timer from charging
current. Q, and R,-R2-R3 form constant-current
10-s TIMER — CA3096 transistor array provides current to lamp load to indicate end of timing source whose charging current can be adjusted
all needed active devices. 5-/iF capacitor interval. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," to as low as several nanoamperes. Q2 acts as
charges through (X, until it turns on bistable RCA Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977, source follower to supply current flowing in
switch Q,-Q2, which then triggers Q3 to deliver emitter lead prior to firing of U JT Q3. Diode-con-
nected transistor Q, provides low-impedance
discharge path for timing capacitor CE. Delay
time varies linearly with setting of R3. — "Uni-
p8. junction Transistor Timers and Oscillators,"
CASCADE WITH AUTOMATIC RETRIG- second timer can be set to control ON time of
GERING— Two timers, each controlling own first timer. With 15-V supply, each timer can
load and having own time intervals (determined handle 200-mA load. — H. Vordenbaum, Auto-
by R1C1 and R2C2), recycle automatically when matic Reset Timer, Ham Radio, Oct. 1974, p 50-
start switch is closed momentarily. If desired. TIME DELAY USES POWER TRANSISTOR IC—
SI. Load is energized when switch is closed. Cl
charges until voltage across R1 drops below 0.8
V, opening LM195 and deenergizing load. Long
time delays can be obtained with small capaci-
tor values since high resistance can be used. —
IC, LH221 1
TJME-TO-VOLTAGE CONVERTER— Dual com- and VREF2 allow time measurements of signal voltages. With S, open, IC2 holds final voltage
parator, solid-state switch, and fast FET opamp having either positive or negative voltage levels value. Measurement range is from 1 /us to sev-
provide flexibility, range, and accuracy required or both. Floating output stages of comparators eral hours. — C. Wojslaw, Wide Range Time
for using converter in computer-controlled test provide voltage translation for FET switch S,. Measurements Simplified, EDN Magazine, Feb.
system. IC2 operates as integrator and sample- With S, closed, IC2 integrates for time period 5, 1974, p 95-96.
and-hold circuit. Reference voltages of IC,, VREF1, during which input signal is below reference
TIMER CIRCUITS 1087
1-s HIGH-PRECISION — Accuracy is comparable to divide by 3. LED then flashes at precise 1-s
to that of 60-Hz power-line frequency. After intervals, staying on about 100 ms. T1 is 6.3-V
Radio Shack 276-561 6-V zener divides power- filament transformer. — F. M. Mims, "Integrated
line frequency by 2, 7490 decade counter pro- Circuit Projects, Vol. 5," Radio Shack, Fort
vides division by 10 to give 3 Hz. 555 timer con- Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 21-29.
nected as mono MVBR is then adjusted with R4
30-s NONRETRIGGERABLE— With values

shown, mono 1C gives delay period of 30 s after
triggering by input pulse and ignores other
input pulses during timing period. Delay time in
seconds is RC/3, where R is in ohms and C in
farads. Delay can be reduced to as little as 10 ms
by reducing R to 30 kilohms and C to 1 gF. Max-
imum delay is about 1 min, with 560 kilohms for
R — F. R. Shirley, Thirty-Second Timer Uses 1C
One-Shot, EDNIEEE Magazine, Jan. 1, 1972, p
73-74.
BATTERY-SAVER — Turns off battery-powered

1C VTVM automatically about 3.5 min after turn-
ing on with SI, to prolong battery life even
though user forgets to turn off instrument. Cir-
cuit can be retriggered at any time in timing
cycle by switching SI off and then on again. Q1
is programmable UJT that drives latch using
two gates of CD4001AE quad NOR gate U1.
With pin 3 high and pin 4 low, timing circuit and
load are both turned off; battery drain by U1 is
then only 0.001 gA. Values of R1 and Cl deter-
mine time interval. T1 is air-core pulse trans-
former having 600 turns (No. 36 to 40) enamel
for primary and same number wound over pri-
mary for secondary.— R. Hardesty, Turn-Off
Timer for Portable Equipment, Ham Radio,
Sept. 1976, p 42-44.
LONG TIME COUNTER

(HOURS. DAYS. WEEKS, ETC )
second section determines amount of delay in-

4-h SEQUENTIAL TIMER— Use of N8281 divider erates as oscillator having period of 1/f. Oscil- troduced bydivider. Cascading of additional di-
network between sections of 556 dual timer lator output is applied to divide-by-/V network viders increases maximum delay to days or
gives extremely long time delays without costly to give output with period of N/f for triggering even weeks.— "Signetics Analog Data
large low-leakage capacitors. First section op- second half of timer. Connection of divider to Manual," Signetics, Sunnyvale, CA, 1977, p 724.
1-YEAR TIMER — Cascaded operation of Exar tive-going transition. Cascading additional

XR-2242 long-range timers provides ultralong timer with unit 2 extends time delay to 1.065 T = 100 RtC,
time delays, up to 1 year. Cascading of counter x 109RC. With Revalues giving 0.1 s, time delay
sections provides 32,640 clock cycles before becomes 3.4 years. — "Timer Data Book," Exar
output pin 3 of unit 2 changes state. Common Integrated Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 19-
pull-up resistor makes counter section of unit 2 22. IAS SHOWN T » 1 HR.)
trigger each time output of unit 1 makes posi-
MICROSECONDS TO HOURS — Timing range of
555 is increased 100 times by using 3140 FET-
input opamp in circuit that effectively multiplies
values of timing components and buffers timing
network. Pin 7 of 555 switches applied voltage
of timing network between V+ and ground.
Ratio selected for R2-R3 can be varied over wide
range to change multiplying ratio, provided
square-wave voltage across R3 is at least 50 mV.
Output is essentially pure square wave. Supply
voltage is not critical.— W. G. Jung, Take a Fresh
Look at New 1C Timer Applications, EDN Mag-
azine, March 20, 1977, p 127-135.
1 h WITH END-CYCLE SWITCH— National change in output state. Moving S2 down resets
LM1 22 timer is connected with manual controls timing capacitor to 0 V without changing out-
for start, reset, and intermediate termination of put; releasing S2 starts new timing cycle. — C.
1-h timing cycle started by closing SI . Once tim- Nelson, "Versatile Timer Operates from Micro-
ing starts, SI has no further effect. Moving S2 seconds to Hours," National Semiconductor,
up ends cycle prematurely with appropriate Santa Clara, CA, 1973, AN-97, p 9.
. 15 pf 6.5536 MHz
STOPWATCH — Intersil 7045 1C provides capa-

bility for driving digital display of time in hun-
dredths of a second up through hours in four
different operating modes selected by lower
switches: sequential, standard, split, or rally.
Grounding pin 9 momentarily with start switch
initiates timing action. Repeated pressings of
switch activate operating modes as selected.
Grounding reset pin 16 clears stopwatch. 1C can
be connected directly to LED display, without
drivers or resistors.— D. Lancaster, "CMOS
1977, pi 59.
Locations TOP VIEW

TIMER CIRCUITS
1089
TALK TIMER — Switch gives choice of intervals

from 0.5 to 5 min after going on air, before time-
out alarm tone sounds. Circuit includes field-
strength meter and on-the-air light. Releasing
mike button for about 1 s resets timer, which
consists of MC14049 hex inverter and MC14040
12-bit ripple counter. LI is 3 turns No. 20 wire
on 5/ie-in form. Timing resistor values are 47K for
0.5 min, 100K for 1, 220K for 2, 390K for 3, and
510K for 5 min — B. Fette, An FM Gadget, 73
Magazine, April 1977, p 154-155.
12V
90-s TALKING-LIMIT WARNING— Developed
for AM radio transceivers making use of re-
peaters, to limit length of individual transmis-
sion so as to avoid being timed out at repeater. 400 K
Uses NE-555 connected as timer, with Cl and
R1 chosen to set timing at about 90 s. Point A
is connected to terminal of TR switch that goes
300K
from neutral or ground on receive to 12 V on
transmit. Timing cycle begins on transmit;
when IC1 times out, it activates IC2 connected
as 1000-Hz astable oscillator driving transceiver
connected to B. Tone sounds until microphone
button is released to reset timer. — S. Kraman,
Try the Mini-Timer, 73 Magazine, June 1977, p
48.
IL (V
TRIAC
200
y ...
.JIXIUIXILIL,^
CD4048A
OUTPUT h for IT, 2T, 4T, . . . , 128T. Thus, for delay of 1
,J~
min (about 112T), use 64T + 32T, + 16T with
0.5333-136 s WITH LINE-FREQUENCY ACCU- each zero crossing of line. First six stages of ICj
AND-gate programming interconnections e-E,
RACY— Provides time delays in selected incre- determine basic timing period IT. These stages f-F, and g-G. Tie all unused AND-gate inputs to
ments of 0.5333 s with accuracy essentially that produce pulse train with periodicity of 0.5333 s VDD bus. — A. C. N. Sheng, Line-Operated Timer
of AC line frequency. 1C, develops 120 pulses per at input of seventh counter stage. Binary-or- Couples High Accuracies with Long Time De-
second having 100-/us width at pins 4 and 6 for dered output signals are available at outputs a- lays, EDN Magazine, Jan. 5, 1976, p 37-40.
IT
IT
TT
clock IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
OUTPUTS
SEQUENTIAL TIMER— Second Exar XR-2242 goes low for duration T2 = 128R,C, correspond-
long-range timer is triggered when first timer ing to timing interval of unit 2. Circuit then re-
completes its cycle, length of which is equal to c
verts to rest state. — "Timer Data Book," Exar
128R1C1. Output of second timer thus stays high Integrated Systems, Sunnyvale, CA, 1978, p 19-
for T, = 128R,C, after trigger is applied, then
22.
EVENT REGISTER — Inputs from sequential
7490 744i NIXIE timer provide pulsed output and operate de-
vices which stay on until next timed event.
When an input goes low, output of four-input
positive-NAND 7420 goes high, enabling the
clock for 74175 4-bit D-type register. Since
event-timer clock signal is used, outputs of reg-
ister are coincident with clock. All outputs re-
main until one or more inputs goes low. — J.
Glaab, Time Events with a Pulse Output Con-
troller, EDN Magazine, Jan. 5, 1977, p 43.
10 min WITH BLINKING — Station-identification

timer uses single Nixie display to indicate
elapsed time in minutes. After 9 min, numeral
9 blinks for 60 s before resetting to zero as visual
reminder that amateur radio station identifica-
tion should be made. Transistor can be GE X10
or 2N2646. Diodes are 1N4001 or equivalent.
Numeral 9 or Nixie is connected as relaxation
oscillator, flash rate of which can be changed by
changing value of 100K resistor connected to
pin 9. — W. Pinner, ID Timer, 73 Magaiine, Aug.
1974, p 95-96.
18V iW
FAIL-SAFE TIMER FOR TRAINS— Provides de- developed by ML Engineering to provide appro- period of delay. — W. E. Anderton, Computers,
lays up to 4 min, adjustable in 2-s steps, with priate automatic braking or other action if en- Communication and High Speed Railways,
accuracy better than 5%. Patented circuit was gineer on train fails to respond to signal within Wireless World, Aug. 1975, p 348-353.
TIMER CIRCUITS 1091
ON OR OFF CONTROL — Circuit shows two

ways of connecting 555 timer 1C, for switching
load on or switching load off at end of timing
interval determined by setting of 5-megohm
pot (1 to 60 s) and initiated by manual start
switch. If desired, both loads can be connected
to circuit for simultaneous switching. — E. R.
Hnatek, Put the 1C Timer to Work in a Myriad of
Ways, EDN Magazine, March 5, 1973, p 54-58.
INPUT
MICROSECONDS TO HOURS— Simple CMOS

circuit serves as time-delay switch and general-
purpose timer. Gated oscillator and latch are
obtained from CD4001 quad two-input NOR
gate, and 14-stage counter uses CD4020. T0N is
function of oscillator frequency as determined
by RxC* and proper 2N output from counter.
Pulse applied to latch input enables oscillator
and counter. Latch output remains high until
counter resets latch at end of count selected by
switch. Further decoding is required for count
or time variations finer than power of 2. — J.
Chin, Low-Power Counter Is Programmable
over Wide Range, EDN Magazine, March 20,
1974, p 83.
INPUT _n
OUTPUT
“
_F
0—5 min DELAY — Value of resistor R controls mum delay of 5 min is obtained when R is 60 60 V. Use any SCR capable of handling triac trig-
duration of time delay provided by RCA 40841 megohms (IRC type CGH or equivalent resistor). ger current, rated 60 V.— "Linear Integrated Cir-
dual-gate FET in SCR trigger circuit, with SCR Timing is accurate within 10% over tempera- cuits and MOS/FET's," RCA Solid State Division,
in turn serving to trigger triac for handling high- ture range of -25°C to +60°C. D3 should be rated Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 435-437.
current resistive or inductive AC loads. Maxi-
RESET
0-10 min WITH 1-s ACCURACY— After calibra-

tion, accuracy is independent of battery voltage
because source voltage affects charging volt-
age of C and threshold of comparator A2 equally.
Time delay t for timer is CR,R3/R2. — M. Strange,
Simple Electronic Timer is Compact and Accu-
rate, EDN Magazine, April 20, 1973, p 89 and 91.
LONG INTERVALS WITH SMALL C— Use of two tervals of several hours are required. For 4-h eri. Precision Level Detector 1C Simplifies Con-
CA3098 dual-input precision level detectors timer, CT is only 16 /iF if Rc is 22 megohms and trol Circuit Design, EDN Magazine, Oct. 5, 1975,
eliminates need for expensive high-capacitance Rd is 100 kilohms. Article traces circuit opera-
low-leakage timing capacitors when delay in- tion and gives design equations. — G. J. Grani-
p 69-72.
TIMER CIRCUITS 1093
1 MHz
PROGRAM TIMER — Measures time between
two points in microprocessor program while
program is running. Gated 1-MHz crystal oscil-
lator feeds Fluke 1941A counter used in totalize
mode. Gate input is connected to unused bit of
output port on microprocessor system. Instruc-
tions are then inserted in program under test to
gate counter on at beginning of desired step
and turn it off at end. Display then shows num-
ber of microseconds required by microproces-
sor to execute instructions.— M. M. Dodd,
Benchmark Timer Eliminates Need to Total In-
dividual Execution Times, EDN Magazine, Oct.
20, 1975, p 91-92.
Rl
1-h HOUSEHOLD TIMER — NE555 timer circuit

turns off television set or other device at any
desired time up to about 1 h after start switch
is closed. Use IRC MR312C relay having coil re-
sistance of212 ohms, or other 12-V relay draw-
ing less than 200 mA. With values shown, R2
gives time delay range of 3 to 58 min. For other
ranges, change values of R2 and Cl. Clockwise
from top, pins on NE555 are 8, 3, 4, 2, 1, 7, and
6 — P- C. Walton, Build This $5 Timer, 73 Mag-
azine, Jan. 1976, p 129.
Diode needed only in FREE RUN MODE

10-INTERVAL TIMER — Ten independently pre-
determined time intervals run in sequence, with cally. Values of R -R, and C determine time in- pA, but increases to 40 mA during beep. Reset
audible beep at end of each interval. Timer tervals. Ifsame time is used for more than one button can be depressed at any time, to restart
holds after each interval until start button is step, diode outputs of those steps may be tied timing at first interval.— T. Henry, Ten Step Se-
pressed to initiate next interval. If jumper is in- together to use same resistor. Supply can be in quential Interval Timer, EDN Magazine, March
serted, succeeding intervals start automati- range of 5 to 18 V. Current drain is less than 100 20, 1974, p 78 and 80.
vcc (B-15VDC)
1M
(20 TURN) RESET
100k
a,"F
±c
2-5 min STARTING DELAY— Energizing of load
is delayed up to 5 min after start button is
350 /jF
pushed, as required in some CMOS circuits and
digital control systems. Uses pair of 555 timers,
with A operating in straightforward timing
mode and B connected as set-reset flip-flop.
Pushing reset button initializes system, placing
A in low state and making pin 3 of B high, leav-
ing load unenergized. When start button is
pushed, A goes high and begins timing out.
After delay interval, output of B goes low, en-
ergizing load until system is reset. LED can be
added to indicate that timing is in progress. — J.
C. Nichols, Versatile Delay-on-Energize Timer
Uses Two 555's, EDN Magazine, Oct. 5, 1975, p
76 and 78.
NOTES:
ALL RESISTORS ARE 5%. '/4W

DIODES USED FOR D,- D,
WERE 1 N4004. HOWEVER,
ANY SILICON DIODE
CAPABLE OF HANDLING A
FEW MILLIAMPERES
SHOULD BE SUFFICIENT.
THUMBWHEEL-SET TO 99 min— Developed for speakers. Audible alarm indicates end of time switch turns on display for about 4 s. Article de-
timing events and for limiting event to prede- interval. Flashing decimal point indicates scribes operation of circuit in detail. — R. A. Fair-
termined interval that can be set up with 2-digit counter is working. Designed for operation man, CMOS Lowers Timer Power Consump-
BCD-encoded thumbwheel switches. Digital from two C cells. To conserve power, display is tion, EDN Magazine, Oct. 5, 1975, p 78 and 80.
display shows time remaining, as guide for normally blanked; pressing display-enable
1095
TIMER CIRCUITS
ts TO +25V dc
BATTERY-SAVING TIMER — Developed for use

with alarms, remote controls, or unattended
electronic equipment, to turn off battery auto-
Bi-
matically atpredetermined interval after circuit
is actuated by control logic or switch. Turn-on
applies positive pulse that triggers SCR on,
grounding load and UJT timer Q2. After delay
interval determined by values of C, and R„ Q2
fires and discharges C,, producing pulse across
R3 that turns on Q3. This in turn shunts SCR and
commutates it off. Circuit is thus turned off,
after which only very small leakage currents
through reverse SCR junction will be drain on
battery. — D. Weigand, Battery Saver Has Au-
tomatic Turn-Off, EDN Magazine, April 20, 1973,
p 91.
+VCC(5 TO 15V)
TEST SEQUENCING — Uses 555 timers con- cycle, second circuit runs for 50 ms before trig- quencing of automatic tester.— E. R. Hnatek,
nected sequentially. With values shown, first gering third circuit having 10-ms delay. Each Put the 1C Timer to Work in a Myriad of Ways,
timer runs for 10 ms after starting with pulse at timer controls its own load, as required for se- EDN Magazine, March 5, 1973, p 54-58.
terminal 2 or by grounding 2. At end of timing
MVBR generating pulses at 4-s intervals. U2 and put pulse lasting 20 s that turns on Q1 for driv- operator to make 10-min station identification.
U3 divide pulse train by 144 to give period of 576 ing keyer, sidetone oscillator, lamp, or other sig- R1 adjusts timing.— H. Seeger, Ten-Minute
s. U4 is then turned on, producing positive out- naling device as reminder for amateur radio Timer, Ham Radio, Nov. 1976, p 66.
1096
*5 VOLTS
10 s TO 10 min — Array of ten LEDs serves for

measuring time intervals up to 10 min, for tim-
ing phone calls, photographic exposures, and
cooking. Pulse output rate of UJT oscillator Q1
is determined by value of Cl and setting of R1.
Pulses are counted by 7490 which gives total
count in binary form. 7490 recycles after each 10
counts. 7441 converts binary signals from 7490
to decimal outputs driving LED indicators. Each
LED glows in sequence as count advances from
0 through 9 and repeats. For 10-min timer, ad-
just R1 until first LED stays on for exactly 1 min.
For 10-s timer, adjust R1 for blink rate of 1 sper
LED. — F. M. Mims, "Optoelectronic Projects,
Vol. 1," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd
Ed., p 67-78.
UJT-SCR TIMER — Use of large capacitance for

Cl in simple UJT relaxation oscillator provides
time delay action for triggering SCR controlling
relay. R1 provides convenient adjustment of
delay. SCR can be 6-A 50-V Radio Shack 276-
1089. Relay is 275-004. — F. M. Mims, "Semicon-
ductor Projects, Vol. 2," Radio Shack, Fort
Worth, TX, 1976, p 50-61.
OR OTHER INDICATOR.
FAIL-SAFE LIGHT TIMER— National MM5309 plications include control of lights in unoccu- digit stops multiplex scanning, and BCD out-
clock 1C is used as timer in circuit that maintains pied home. Timing action turns on lights for 4- puts present data from selected digit as control
timing with adequate accuracy during periods h period every 24 h. When power is applied, in- waveform whose edges determine timer
of power-line failure and returns automatically ternal multiplex circuit strobes each digit until data. — "MOS/LSI Databook," National Semi-
to 60-Hz line as soon as power is restored. Ap- digit with connected diode is accessed. This conductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 1-74-1-77.
TIMER CIRCUITS
1097
4-h CONTROL FOR TRIAC — Time at which triac

is triggered by 1C after momentarily pressing
start switch is determined by resistor values
used. When switch is released, charging capac-
itor Cl begins its long discharge interval. When
voltage E, becomes less than E2, pin 2 draws
current and serves to reverse polarity of output
at pin 6 for triggering triac. Diode limits maxi-
mum differential input voltage. — E. M. Noll,
ects," Howard W. Sams, Indianpolis, IN, 1974,
p 316-317.
R1 * 0.51 meg 3 MIN R5 « 2.7K 40529 TURNS "OFF" AFTER
EXPIRATION OF TIME DELAY
R2 * 5.1 meg 30 MIN R6 • 50K
R3 * 22 meg 2 HRS R7 * 2.7K
R4 * 44 meg 4 HRS R8 • 1.5K
3 min TO 4 h — Presettable analog timer

achieves long time intervals by discharging C ,
into input terminal 3 of CA3094 programmable
opamp, which provides sufficient output cur-
rent for driving thyristors and other control de-
vices.—"Circuit Ideas for RCA Linear ICs," RCA TIME
Solid State Division, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 8. TRIAC TURNSOF "OFF"
EXPIRATION TIME AFTER
DELAY
R| = 0 51 Mfl- 3 MIN. R5 = 2.7 Kfl

R2s 5.1 Mfl - 30 MIN. Rg = 50 Kfl
R7=27 Kfl
R3 = 22 Mfl - 2 HRS.
R4 = 44Mfl - 4 HRS. R8a 1-5 Kfl
* TRIAC = T2302B FOR 120- V OPERATION

= T2302D FOR 240-V OPERATION
LONG-DELAY 555 MONO— FET-input 3140 standard 555 mono except that timing equation to any voltage from 0 to + 15 V. Pin 4 is between
opamp is used to multiply effective values of is T = 100R,C, (for condition wherein division pins 6 and 8 on 555 — W. G. Jung, Take a Fresh
timing components Rt and C„ eliminating need resistors R, and R2 are chosen for 91-to-1 oper- Look at New 1C Timer Applications, EDN Mag-
for high-value precision resistor and large low- ation). Circuit has uncommitted open-collector azine, March 20, 1977, p 127-135.
leakage capacitor. Combination performs as output from pin 7 of 555, which can be referred
+ 22.5 V - t 4.5V _
FET TIMER WITH RELAY— With values shown,

circuit gives delay of several seconds. Increas-
ing Cl by shunting with 20-îF capacitor delays
energizing of relay to over 1 min. Cl is charged
to -4.5 V when switch SI is closed, biasing gate
to cutoff and deenergizing relay. When SI is
open, capacitor begins discharging at rate de-
termined by RC time constant of circuit. When
Rj
voltage across capacitor drops to point at which
Q1 conducts, relay is energized and power is
applied to load. — E. M. Noll, "FET Principles,

Indianapolis, IN, 2nd Ed„ 1975, p 215-216.
120 k
OVER 1 min — Circuit provides delays well over

1 min even with low operating voltages of ICs.
When start pulse is applied to RS flip-flop A,-A2,
Qj turns off and allows RT to provide charging
current for timing capacitor CT. When voltage
across CT gets high enough, Q, turns on and re-
sets flip-flop, terminating delay period. A3 pro-
vides buffered complementary output. — R. W.
Hilsher, Long-Delay Timer, EEE Magazine, Aug.
1970, p 79.
16
INPUT
CONTROL
LINES
32
64
128
REMOTE DIGITAL PROGRAMMING OF TIMER— tap is activated when corresponding digital ensures valid output logic levels. Although cir-
input control line is high and deactivated when cuit will operate over supply range indicated,
Either binary or BCD logic can be used* for se-
lecting delay interval of monostable timer A„ control is low. Programmable timing range is 1 operation is optimum for supply of lOto 15 V. —
with delays being integral multiples of shortest to 255 ms for 2240, and 1 to 99 ms for 2250 or W. G. Jung, Take a Fresh Look at New 1C Timer
time. Timing is programmed by pair of 4016 8250 timer. Basic interval can be changed to suit Applications, EDN Magazine, March 20, 1977, p
127-135.
CMOS analog switches, A2 and A3. Given timing other applications. CMOS output buffer stage
TIMER CIRCUITS 1099
+6 V
1 min WITH TRANSISTOR ARRAY— Circuit uses

RCA CA3096AE five-transistor array in combi-
nation with dual-gate MOSFET to provide tim-
ing action that maintains accuracy within 7%
for supply voltage variations of ± 1 0%. Qs is one
of PNP transistors connected as diode. — "Lin-
ear Integrated Circuits and MOS/FET's," RCA
205-210.
TWO INDEPENDENT DELAYS— Each timer sec-

tion of Exar XR-2556 dual timer operates inde-
pendently inmono MVBR mode to provide de-
lays shown above output waveforms. Supply
voltage range is 4.5 to 16 V. — "Timer Data
CA, 1978, p 23-30.
WIRES /- BETWEEN
W YEL YELINVERTERS AND LEDS
( W 1 WHITE FOR ALL )
RUN/READ 2- W BLK gry
4 - W BRN RED
BLU BRN 8- W BLU GRY
GROUNDED AT ONE POINT
TIMER WITH MEMORY — Time elapsed since in- times can be stored for later readout. Free-run- and opamp types are not critical. — M. Jose,
itial triggering at start of event is shown on 2- ning mode counts off seconds or tenths of sec- Event Timer with Memory, 73 Magazine, June
digit MAN-1 display in seconds or tenths of seconds on display. Article covers construction and
1977, p 72-74.
onds and written into memory. Up to 16 event operation. Circuit was Science Fair winner. Gate
Vcc
S closes momentarily at t = 0.
Rb • 100 kn
end of this interval, output B goes to 5 V for 0.5
THREE-STEP SEQUENCE TIMER— Provides SN72555 timers which are interchangeable s, after which output C goes to 5 V for 1 .5 s to
three different outputs at predetermined time with other 555 timers. Values of R and C at out- complete sequence. Supply can be 5-15 V. —
intervals for initializing conditions during startput of each timer determine delays (T = 1.1RC). 'The Linear and Interface Circuits Data Book for
up or for activating test signals in sequence. With values shown below timers, output A is 5 Design Engineers," Texas Instruments, Dallas,
Uses three Texas Instruments SN52555 or V for interval of 1.1 s after switch is closed. At
TX, 1973, p 7-53-7-61.
TENS COLON AND

TENTHS SECONDS TENS SECONDS MINUTES DECIMAL POINT
DIGITAL STOPWATCH — Provides 4’A-digit liq-

uid crystal display for up to 19 min 59.9 s, after
which tens of minutes stays at 1 and unit digit
recycles from 0 to 9. Gives over 600 hours con-
tinuous operation from 5-V mercury battery.
Accuracy is determined by 100-kHz crystal os-
cillator, output of which is divided in two dual
decade counters to provide 50-Hz display drive
and 10-Hz timing signal. ICs 1, 2, 3, 4, 16, and 17
are CD4518; 5-8 are CD4019; 9-13 are CD4056;
1 8 and 1 9 are CD401 1 . Article gives construction
and operation details.— P. A. Birnie, Digital
EventTimer, Wireless World, Part 1— Dec. 1976,
p 32-34 (Part 2— Jan. 1977, p 65-68). split|— o >» i o
v, ( STROBE
CHAPTER 97
Touch-Switch Circuits
Includes circuits activated by skin resistance between two touch plates, by
small AC voltage picked up by body and applied to single touch plate, or by
changing of capacitance. Many circuits include debouncing.
R, 8.2M
TO LED DRIVER
TO MASTER RESET
TOGGLING TOUCH SWITCH— Uses half of Mo- bouncing if finger is carelessly applied. — V. Gre-
torola MC14013 as flip-flop that changes state gory, CMOS Touch Switches — Convenient, DEBOUNCE FOR TOUCH SWrTCH— Two CMOS
each time contacts are bridged by resistance of Less $ and Sexy, EDN Magazine, May 5, 1976, inverters respond to high-impedance path be-
finger. For status display, LED driven by 2N3903 tween electrodes of touch switch to provide fin-
transistor can be added. Possible drawback is ger-touch sensitivity and positive switching ac-
p 112. tion with minimum components. Large time
constant of R,C, requires wait of about 4 s be-
fore attempting to retrigger circuit. C2 prevents
oscillation from 60-Hz pickup when electrodes
are touched. — H. Manell, CMOS Inverters Im-
Jan. 5, 1978,plementpFinger-Touch
90. ON-OFF, EDN Magazine,
ON
TOGGLE SWITCH — Touching one 0.5-inch-

square copper-clad pattern on printed-circuit
board turns switch circuit on by giving high out-
ADJUSTABLE-ODDS LOTTERY— Odds for lot- put. Touching other plate turns switch off. LED
tery are set by diode matrix connected to output buzzer. For 50-50 odds, connect only diode at between output and ground shows status of
of 4040 counter. Range is from 1:2 to 1:1024. To output Q1. For odds of 1 in 10, connect diodes switch. For proper switching, circuit must con-
use, close scramble switch for a second or two only to outputs Q2 and Q4 for binary 1010 or 10. nect to line-operated DC power supply. — R. D.
to make free-running oscillator drive counter at With all diodes connected as shown, odds are Wood, Replace Bulky Mechanical Switches with
high rate, then let contestant hit touch plate to 1:1024. — J. Sandler, Play 'Random Chance,' Touch Controls, EDN Magazine, April 20, 1978,
trigger flip-flop that advances counter one step. Modern Electronics, Oct. 1978, p 42-43 and 88.
p 132-133. 1101
TOUCH SWITCH— Uses NE-77 neon lamp, remains energized until S2 is opened to reset
which is similar to NE-2 but has third electrode circuit. Adjust R1 so voltage applied to center
for triggering. When person touches metal sen- electrode of VI is just below trigger point. — J.
sor plate of switch, AC voltage picked up by P. Shields, "How to Build Proximity Detectors
body is applied to trigger electrode of neon, & Metal Locators," Howard W. Sams, Indian-
making it fire and energize 5000-ohm relay K1 apolis, IN, 2nd Ed., 1972, p 52-55. TOUCH SWITCH — Performs function of switch
(Potter & Brumfield RS5D or equivalent). Relay by means of relay contacts when SCR is trig-
gered by placing finger on touch plate. Values
shown keep relay energized for 5-10 s after
touch. Developed as replacement for switch-
GO type controls on amateur radio receiver. Once
SCR has fired, it conducts until charge on 1000-
gF capacitor decreases enough to drop SCR cur-
rent below minimum for conduction. — J. J.
Schultz, Rapid Receiver Control Switching, 73
Magazine, Dec. 1973, p 67-69.
DATA ENTRY — Touch of operator's finger on head having comparable area. For proper
input button produces CMOS output. Addition switching, circuit must connect to line-operated
of one opamp section gives TTL output. Touch DC power supply. — R. D. Wood, Replace Bulky
button can be 0.5-inch-square copper-clad pat- Mechanical Switches with Touch Controls, EDN
tern on printed-circuit board or machine-screw Magazine, April 20, 1978, p 132-133.
TOUCH-PLATE RELAY— When 2-inch diameter

disk of sheet metal or foil is firmly touched with
finger, stray noise picked up by body and cou-
pled into 10-megohm gate circuit of FET is suf-
ficient to boost drain current to about 1.7 mA
and close relay. Delayed dropout can be ob-
tained by placing capacitor in parallel with relay
coil; delay is about 0.8 s per 1000 gF of parallel
LATCHING TOUCH SWITCH— Uses LED as sta- comes on while output changes to high state. — capacitance. — R. P. Turner, "FET Circuits,"
tus display that substitutes for tactile feel of or- V. Gregory, CMOS Touch Switches — Conve- Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, 2nd
dinary pushbutton switch. In reset state, LED is nient, Less $ and Sexy, EDN Magazine, May 5,
off. When touch contacts are bridged by resis- 1976, p 112. Ed , p 104-105.
tance of finger, flip-flop changes state and LED
330 Touch here

LOGIC SWITCH — Can be used with battery-
powered circuits because CMOS touch switch
does not require body pickup of AC line hum for
switching action. Schmitt trigger 1C, forms 100-
kHz oscillator. IC2a amplifies oscillator output
and charges C, through diode. When sensor is
touched, oscillator output is severely atten-
uated, making C, discharge and thereby chang-
ing output state of level detector IC2b. Sensor is
1-inch-square of double-sided printed-circuit
board with lower side divided into two equal
sections. — N. Sunderland, C.M.O.S. Touch
Switch, Wireless World, May 1978, p 69.
1103
TOUCH-SWITCH CIRCUITS
PROXIMITY SWITCH — Hand brought near sen-

sor plate induces 60-Hz power-line hum in sec-
tion of quad two-input NOR gate. Hum is
squared by gate and used to trip section of 4013
connected as retriggerable mono MVBR. Out-
put of mono is clean from instant of first prox-
imity until several milliseconds after moving
hand away. Sensitivity depends on size of metal
plate and on number of permissible false alarms
from other noise sources nearby. — D. Lancas-
ter, "CMOS Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, In-
TV GAME CONTROL — Developed for use in

game in which first person to recognize musical
tune places finger on touch plate to energize his
lamp. Action stops cassette player and locks out
touch plates of other players. After 5-s delay,
lockout is disabled so different player can have
try at con-ect answer if first is wrong. After ad-
ditional 5-s delay, relay is deenergized and
music resumes. Additional reset switch is pro-
vided to reactivate all touch plates indepen-
dently of delay. Supply is 12 V, and lamps are
12 V. — J. Sandler, Name That Tune, Modern
Electronics, Dec. 1978, p 66 and 69-70.
♦ 12 V
COIN TOSSER — Finger on touch plate TR1

feeds stray 60-Hz sine wave (picked up by body
capacitance) to high-impedance Darlington pair
Q1-Q2 for squaring. Output drives flip-flop Q3-
04. LED conducts only when 03 is on. Removal
of finger leaves LED either on or off with random
probability. Players can try in turn to match,
play odd-man-buys, or play odd-man-out. For
faster results, circuit can be duplicated so each
player has own touch plate. Practically any tran-
sistor types can be used, as circuit is not criti-
cal.— J. H. Everhart, The Coffee Flipper, 73 Mag-
azine, Nov. 1976, p 162-163.
at 3 mA)
TOUCH SWITCH USES TIMER— Free-running or Mrr (+4 TO +16V dc
mono capabilities of Signetics 555 timer can be
controlled through choice of trigger and reset
inputs. Characteristics of output pulses can be
adjusted over timing periods ranging from mi-
croseconds tohours. With 5-V supply, output is
TTL-compatible and current drain of only 3 mA
permits battery operation. Circuit is easily trig-
gered by voltage differential between floating
(ungrounded) human body and timer itself.
Touch plate can be any conducting material,
with virtually no size limitation. Once triggered
by momentary touch, device cannot be retrig-
gered until it has timed out. Duration of output
pulse depends on RC time constant and on con-
trol voltage. Applications include switchless
keyboards, burglar alarms, and bounce-free
switches. — J. C. Heater, Monolithic Timer
Makes Convenient Touch Switch, EDN Maga-
zine, Dec. 1, 1972, p 55.
PROTECTION RESISTORS ANALOG SWITCH
TOUCH
INPUTS
C MOSICs: RCA OR EQUIVALENT

LATCHES: CD4044
BUFFER/INVERTERS: CD4009
ANALOG SWITCHES: CD4016
LEDs: LITRONIX RL 2
RESISTORS: ’/.W, 5%
TOUCH
POINTS SWITCH
CONTACTS
slight conduction between contacts will assure

ANALOG SIGNAL CONTROL— CMOS logic plates can be metal squares or disks up to 2 cm triggering. — M. W. Hauser, C-MOS Touch-
gives bounceless operation of CD4016 analog wide. If used in remote locations where power Switch Array Controls Analog Signals, Elec-
switches by sensing of ambient signals at fin- lines or other electromagnetic-field sources are tronics, March 7, 1974, p 113-114; reprinted in
gertip of operator. Connections for quadruple not present, it may be necessary to provide "Circuits for Electronics Engineers," Electron-
touch-switch array are shown below. Touch grounded second contact at each sensor so ics, 1977, p 357-358.
1105
TOUCH-SWITCH CIRCUITS
TOUCH BUTTONS — Based on detecting skin re-

sistance between two contacts built into each
touch button. Contact going to 0 V would nor-
mally be metal front panel of control. Any num-
ber of sections like that in dashed lines can be
cascaded to handle more buttons. A particular
button always comes on when power is ap-
plied, and is canceled by next button touched.
LED identifies button currently activated; use
any LED rated at 20 mA. Supply can be 20 to 30
V. Outputs may be used to drive FET analog
switches, varactor tuning diodes, or relays. — P.
G. Hinch, Self-Cancelling Touch Button Control,
TOUCH-CONTROLLED RELAY — Basic circuit

uses Signetics 555 timer to make LED flash each
time input is touched with finger. Replace LED OUTPUT
CONTROL
with flip-flop (any type) and three sections of
8T90 hex power inverter to drive DC relay. Sili-
con diode suppresses voltage spikes generated
when magneticfield of relay collapses. Use only
as many paralleled sections of inverter as are
required to operate relay. Input can be brass or
copper plate at least 2 inches square. — G.
Young, Voltage, Current, and Power Supplies, INPUT
Kilobaud, Nov. 1977, p 76-78 and 80-82.
CMOS digital 1C by finger contact that drives is turned on. Clock frequency is not critical and Molen, Touch-Tune for F.M. Receivers, Wireless
clock inhibit line low. 401 7B then counts clock can range from 100 Hz to 19 kHz. For 120-Hz World, Jan. 1978, p 60.
CONTINUE
gv
AUTOMATIC TURNOFF — Circuit removes bias

from power Darlington about 15 s after both
CONTINUE and BUSY signals go low, to con-
serve battery life in portable electronic equip-
ment. Interleaved copper patterns on printed-
circuit board form touch switch that must be
reactivated every 15 s or kept closed by finger
contact while equipment is being used. — R. D.
Wood, Replace Bulky Mechanical Switches with
Touch Controls, EDN Magazine, April 20, 1978,
p 132-133.
CONTACTLESS KEYBOARD— Touching one of

16 metal pads at inputs of 74150 multiplexer
produces corresponding 4-bit BCD output from
74194 shift register. During scanning of multi-
plexer inputs by counter, output is produced
only when finger of operator is on correspond-
ing fingertip-size touch pad. Requires 10-kHz
pulse from external source to strobe multi-
plexer and serve as clock for counter. Duration
of clock pulse must be more than 20 ns so un-
touched pads charge up to threshold voltage
but not long enough to let touched pad
charge. — D. Cockerell, TTL 1C Serves as Touch
Keyboard, Electronics, Feb. 20, 1975, p 108-
109.
50 ns, 10 kHz
PIN NO.
VOLTAGE
EXCURSION
7 Oto < 1/3 o V+

<
8
1/2(V+) - Vac
TOUCH SWITCH — Small AC signal momentar- flop in 1C, making voltage high at pin 5. Voltage ger is removed. Shorter touch energizes load,
ily introduced by finger contact on touch plate at pin 7 then increases exponentially to V+ in placing pin 7 at V+. Next touch of plate turns
causes voltage at pin 8 of CA3098 dual-input about 10 s. This 10-s delay is maximum that but- circuit off. — G. J. Granieri, OtPrecisiono V+ Level De-
precision level detector to be greater than high ton can be touched; longertouch makes system tector 1C Simplifies Control Circuit Design, EDN
reference voltage. This toggles memory flip- oscillate between ON and OFF states until fin- Magazine, Oct. 5, 1975, p 69-72.
TOUCH-SWITCH CIRCUITS 1107
PROXIMITY SWITCH — Based on coupling of

human body to 60-Hz power line. Hand held
close to sensor plate induces hum into 4001B
gate. This is squared and used to trip 4013 re-
triggerable mono MVBR. Output is clean from
instant of first proximity until several millise-
conds after release. Sensitivity depends on size
of plate. — D. Lancaster, Clocked Logic, Kilo-
baud, May 1977, p 24-30.
ELECTRICAL OR
WATER PIPE
GROUND RETURN
TOUCH SWITCH FOR MUSIC KEYBOARD—

Touching metal sensor plate adds about 300 pF
of capacitance between plate and ground,
changing RC delay network that slows down
clock waveform reaching D input of 4013 dual
D flip-flop, making flip-flop output high for du-
ration of contact. Circuit is repeated for each key
in electronic music system. — D. Lancaster,
apolis, IN, 1977, p 278-282.
DEBOUNCING TOUCH SWITCH— Foolproof de-

bouncing for touch switch using toggling flip-
flop (half of Motorola MC14013) is provided by
two gates connected as monostable pulse
stretcher. Time constant of pulse stretcher is
selected to match needs of application. For sta-
tus display, LED driven by 2N3903 transistor can
be connected to Q terminal of flip-flop. — V. Gre-
gory, CMOS Touch Switches — Convenient,
Less $ and Sexy, EDN Magazine, May 5, 1976,
p 112.
TOUCH SWITCH — Finger on insulated metal thyristor. C4 is discharged at about 10-ms inter- a finger is held on touch switch, the greater is
plate applies small AC voltage (picked up by vals by Tr6 which operates from rectified AC the voltage across R, and the more current there
body) to FET Tr, for amplification, to produce line. For high voltage across Rs, such as 4 V, is through load. Removing finger turns off load,
line-frequency square wave across R„ for appli- thyristor is triggered early in AC cycle and max- which can be lamps or other electric equip-
cation to memory section Tr3-T r5. Charging of C3 imum power is supplied to load. Diodes D„-D; ment.— R. Kreuzer, Touch-Switch Controller,
through Tr3 and R5 produces DC output voltage ensure that control is provided over both posi- Wireless World, Aug. 1971, p 389.
across R8 that is fed to UJT Tre for triggering tive and negative half-cycles of line. The longer
CHAPTER 98
Transceiver Circuits
Used in combined transmitters and receivers for amateur, CB, and other two-
way communication applications. Includes voice-actuated TR switches,
scanners, varactor tuners, and remote tuning systems. See also Antenna,
Squelch, Receiver, and Transmitter chapters.
active filter pair provides equivalent of 300- output of about 3 VRMS. Next two sections of Schmitt trigger U3 sharpens pulse and makes
3000 Hz bandpass filter with 40 dB rolloff per quad opamp U1 are active filters, and last sec- it compatible with CMOS logic. Inverter Q2
decade at each edge, to discriminate against tion of U1 is active diode detector in which turns on analog gate U4 when audio signal is
ambient noise. Q1 is FET constant-current opamp linearizes detector CR1-CR2. Rectified present. — H. Olson, Voice-Operated Gate to Re-
source for carbon microphone, feeding preamp audio is averaged by U2 to give smoothed long place Voice-Operated Relays for Carbon Micro-
U1 that provides voltage gain of about 100 and positive pulse with duration of audio burst. phones, Ham Radio, Dec. 1977, p 35-37.
1108
1109
TRANSCEIVER CIRCUITS
13 6 V
13.6 V
3.5-W TRANSMITTER — Class D circuit using is being down-modulated, to make 100% mod- MATCHING LOW-Z MIKE— Single-transistor
economical plastic transistors operates from ulation easy to obtain. All coils are wound on 'k- microphone impedance-matching circuit for
12-V auto battery. 100% amplitude modulation inch coil forms with No. 22 wire, with Carbonyl low-impedance microphone feeds high-imped-
requires about 2.5-W audio input. Modulator "J" 'A x 3s inch cores in each. 2-turn secondaries ance input of amateur SSB transceiver. Circuit
uses MSD6100 dual diode in modulated power are wound over bottom of primaries. LI is 12 also boosts gain enough to meet transmitter
supply system, with one diode in series with turns, L2 is 18, L3 is 7, and L4 is 5. — G. Young, input requirements. — C. Drumeller, Active Mi-
modulated supply voltage to MPS8000 driver to "A Class D Citizen's Band Transmitter Using crophone Impedance Match, Ham Radio, Sept.
prevent driver from being down-modulated. Low-Cost Plastic Transistors,” Motorola, Phoe- 1973, p 67-68.
Other diode maintains drive to final while final nix, Z,
A 1975, AN-596.
ci
XMTR (50 OHMS)
+12 VDC
SW CONTROL
RCVR (50 OHMS)
+ 12 VDC
SW CONTROL
DIODE TR SWITCH — Microwave Associates choice of circuit constants. Measured insertion

MA8334 solid-state TR switch replaces conven- loss is 0.25 dB, and SWR is 1.23:1 when oper- END-OF-TRANSMISSION BEEPER— Release of
tional relays for switching antenna back and ated at 50 ohms. — T. Reddeck, Solid-State VHF- push-to-talk (PIT) switch at end of radio con-
forth between transmitter and receiver. Han- UHF Transmit/Receive Switch, Ham Radio, Feb. versation activates time delay for antenna
dles up to 50 W CW at 144 MHz, and can be used 1978, p 54. changeover relay, keeping transmitter on air
at other frequencies up to 1000 MHz by proper long enough to transmit 800-Hz tone burst in-
dicating transmission termination. Tone is gen-
erated in simple one-transistor phase-shift os-
cillator powered by voltage present between
+ 5V PTT terminal and ground in receive mode of
transceiver, which may be any voltage between
6 and 30 VDC. T ransistor can beany small-signal
NPN silicon with gain of at least 300 at 1 mA,
such as 2N930. Parts marked with asterisk must
be matched within 5%. — E. Hornbostel, Auto-
matic Beeper for Station Control, Ham Radio,
Sept. 1976, p 38-39.
SCANNING ADAPTER — Developed for use with

2-meter transceiver having frequency synthe-
sizer to provide automatic scanning that is dis-
abled when transmitting and when receiver
squelch is opened by transmission on one of
channels being scanned. Will hang on to chan-
nel about 5 s after scanning is disabled, to allow
starting of other side of communication. Scan
rate is about 250 ms per channel. U1 A generates
0 output when squelch is open, producing out-
put of 1 for U1B that disables oscillator U1C-
U1D. Oscillator drives D flip-flop that turns on
Q1 and Q2 alternately. When Q1 is on, LED1 is
lit to indicate that secondary channel is enabled.
Article covers method of increasing number of
scanned channels. — B. McNair, Add-a-Scanner,
73 Magazine, Nov. 1978, p 116-119.
antenna
TUNE-UP AID — Superregenerative receiver cir-

cuit is modified to bring quenching frequency
FOUR-DIODE TR SWITCH — Circuit requires only receiver direction so all incoming power from down into audio range, thereby giving many
two pairs of high-frequency switching diodes antenna goes into receiver. When transmitter is closely spaced carriers in region of 27 MHz. RF
having current ratings appropriate for transmit- on, D3 and D ; conduct and power flows toward level across frequency range is essentially con-
ter power. With diode pairs spaced as shown, antenna, while D, and Dz also conduct and place stant. Signal simplifies tune-up of front ends of
impedance at T junction looking toward trans- short-circuit across receiver input. — A. Lieber, CB units. Antenna is 6 feet of wire connected to
mitter isinfinite during reception because there Passive Solid-State Antenna Switch, Wireless emitter side of RFC, with 9 feet of wire on bat-
is open circuit half a wavelength away created World, Jan. 1975, p 12. tery side of RFC as counterpoise. Combination,
by nonconducting D3 and D„. Line is matched in with circuit in center, can be hung vertically in
tree if means can be provided for turning it off
or removing battery when not in use. Drain is
about 0.5 mA from 9-V battery. — E. A. Law-
rence, Citizens Band Alignment Aid, 73 Maga-
zine, April 1973, p 87-88.
former T2. Second transistor is not operational

because it now has cutoff bias between gate
and source. When switch position is reversed,
incoming signal is applied to transistor at right
through T2 and removed from left side of circuit
to give changeover in signal direction. First
transistor is inactive now. — E. M. Noll, "FET
BILATERAL AMPLIFIER — When switch is in po- plified by first transistor and fed from its drain W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 2nd Ed., 1975, p 198-
sition shown, signal entering through T1 is am- terminal to output through resonant trans- 199.
MIC PREAMP.
COMPARATOR
~X
VOX FOR SSB— Uses LM3900 quad Norton summed resistively by R6 and R7 for application closed between words. If K1 drops out for frac-
opamp and NE555 timer operating from single to inverting input of voltage comparator U1D. tion of second at end of timing cycle even
supply. U1A and U1B amplify microphone sig- Positive microphone signal drives comparator though audio is present, add 2N5139 transistor
nal. U1C amplifies audio sample obtained from output low and triggers NE555, which in turn to NE555 input as shown. — D. A. Blakeslee, A
station loudspeaker. Outputs of both a mpiifiers energizes 12-V relay K1 after delay set at about VOX for a Very Small Box, QST, March 1976, p
are converted to varying DC voltages by recti- 10 ms by R8 to avoid losing first syllable. Same 24-26.
fiers in detector stages. Rectifier outputs are delay applies to relay dropout, to hold relay
1111
VOLTS
+ 12 TO 15
UJT-TRIGGERED CROWBAR— Circuit is used bar operates. Fuse is blown within microsec-
between transceiver and regulated 12-V power onds of overvoltage. Crowbar can be built into
supply to protect transceiver from overvoltage transceiver.— Circuits, 73 Magazine, July 1977,
or reverse polarity. UJT permits precise setting
of overvoltage level at which 2N4441 SCR crow-
p 35.
15-W ADD-ON — Increases usual 1-W audio out-

put of transceiver to up to 15 W. Loudspeaker
can be 8-ohm unit, but output will be somewhat
9- MHz CRYSTAL — Used in transmitter section Carrier level can be adjusted with slug-tuned reduced.— P. Bunnell, More Fun with the IC-230,
of 80-meter 10-W SSB transceiver. Value of Cl coil or with 30K trimpot.— D. Hembling, Solid- 73 Magazine, May 1975, p 45-46 and 48.
is 50-330 pF, chosen for desired output range. State 80-Meter SSB Transceiver, Ham Radio,
10-CHANNEL SCANNER— Designed for Re- readout. Diodes D1-D10 prevent transceiver not monitored. Wires going
to chokes in HR-212
gency HR-212 2-meter transceiver but can be voltages from reaching scanner circuit. Squelch should be connected to
adapted for other transceivers. Features include choke leads going to
voltage input of 2N3053 is taken from trans- channel switch.— A. Little, 10-Channel
Scanner
automatic stop, start, and large LED 7-segment ceiver. S1-S10 are used to switch out channels for the Regency HR-212,
QST, Feb. 1978, p 37.
CRl
L1 IN4I54
1-10 pF concentric piston trimmer 2-23 MHz UNTUNED OSCILLATOR— Two dual-
0.3-3 pF concentric piston trimmer gate MOSFETs operate in untuned Colpitts
crystal oscillator. Used in SSB transceiver made
1N4154 high-speed switching diode by Sideband Associates for radiomarine com-
munication in2-23 MHz range. Oscillator feeds
2 turns no. 20, 0.1" (2.5 mm) diam- isolating amplifier. Small capacitor can be used
eter, 0.25" (6 mm) long for netting individual crystal to precise assigned
micro-stripline, 0.3” (7.5 mm) wide, frequency. — E. Noll, MOSFET Circuits, Ham
L2
0.865” (22 mm) long, grounded at Radio, Feb. 1975, p 50-57.
bottom, tapped 0.20" (5 mm) from
ground end
L3
Same as L2 but tapped 0.25” (6 mm)
from ground end
50-ohm micro-stripline, 0.1" (2.5 mm)

L4
wide, any length
R 1
20k, 10-turn trimpot
TRIPLING TO 1267.2 MHz— Diode tripler and fil- to GE 1N4154 high-speed switching diode
ter combination is designed for double-clad through L network. Harmonic comb at output
glass epoxy printed-circuit board to simplify of diode passes only desired frequency to out-
construction. Developed for use in 1296-MHz put terminal going to mixer of transceiver. — H.
SSB transceiver for amateur 23-cm band. RF en- P. Shuch, Easy-to-Build SSB Transceiver for
ergy from 422.4-MHz power amplifier is applied 1296 MHz, Ham Radio, Sept. 1974, p 8-23.
APPROPRIATE
FUSE
12-V CROWBAR — Uses overvoltage-sensing

IN5243-IN5245
zener to trigger SCR and place it across power-
r2N444l
supply line, blowing fuse within microseconds
POWER Î0m
F |
i
to protect transceiver. Optional diode provides
i ,3-|5V
SUPPLY OPTIONAL TRANSCEIVER
REVERSE protection from accidental reversal of supply
POLARITY
1
PROTECTION polarity. — Circuits, 73 Magazine, July 1977, p
1
1 35.
4-CHANNEL VHF FM SCANNER— Discrete com-

ponents permit simpler readout, with any num-
ber of channels and any desired scan rate. Op-
erates directly from 10-15 V power supply
without regulation, and has low current drain.
Can be used with either positive or negative
logic from squelch circuit, so scanning can be
stopped with either positive or ground signal.
Any voltage from a few volts up will stop scan-
ning. Q3 and Q4 form astable MVBR operating
at about 10 pulses per second. Q2 turns on to
stop MVBR when base of Q2 is high. Inverter Q1
provides proper polarity of signal to operate Q2.
Q6-Q13 form 4-stage ring counter. Pulsing by
Q5 serves to pass high output from stage to
stage in endless ring pattern. When squelch
stops pulsing action, counter stops stepping
and output of one counter stage stays high, pro-
viding 5-V output for enabling corresponding
oscillator and driving LED for that channel. Ar-
ticle gives connections to oscillator for almost
any FM transceiver or receiver, along with mod-
ifications for changing scan speed and number
of channels. — J. Vogt, Improved Channel Scan-
ner for VHF FM, Ham Radio, Nov. 1974,p26-31.
1113
Cl 3-35 pF trimmer
C2 8-60 pF trimmer
tooth output is attenuated and applied to input comparator. When key is closed, 2.2-pF capac- C6-C11 10-pF concentric piston trimmers
of two-transistor audio amplifier. Transmitter itor isdischarged, making opamp output switch 2 turns no. 18, wound on 1/4” (6
LI
keying is done with series switch using 2N4036 to high state and saturate 2N3904 relay driver, mm) mandrel, 1/8” (3 mm) long
silicon transistor. Antenna relay applies +12 V pulling in relay for transmit operation. When L2.L4 brass strip, 0.5" (12.5 mm) wide,
appropriately to transceiver stages used during key is released, capacitor begins to charge; at 1.5” (38 mm) long, mounted
transmit (+12T) and receive (+12R), and pro- 6-V point (about 0.5 s with 220K timing resistor), 1/8" (3 mm) above ground plane
vides switching of antenna between transmit- opamp changes state again and relay opens for L3 2 turns 1/8” (3 mm) wide brass
ter power chain and receiver RF amplifier. Use receiving. — W. Hayward, Low-Power Single- strip, 0.1” (2.5 mm)
0.5” (12.5 mm) long
diameter,
DPDT relay with 800-ohm 12-V coil. Transmit- Band CW Transceiver, Ham Radio, Nov. 1974, p
8-17.
receive logic uses/*A741C opamp as differential
422.4-MHz POWER AMPLIFIER— Used in local
— oscillator chain of 1296-MHz SSB transceiver to
eIOO 5 MHz ± 500 kHz — Developed for use as sepa-
boost 1 0-mW output of chain to 500 mW as re-
o,i iev
33K
rate VFO control for transmitting and receiving
frequencies in amateur transceiver. Capacitors quired for driving final diode-type tripier stage.
Sections are connected together with miniature
— jh55- marked M should be mica. Fine-tuning control
:ioo covers ±20 kHz range. Will operate almost any- 50-ohm coax. — H. P. Shuch, Easy-to-Build SSB
4.7K
33K V“s Transceiver for 1296 MHz, Ham Radio, Sept.
MPS65I4
where in HF range with appropriate change in
4
65I
OOI " ^MP
S
coil. Output is 4 V P-P.— An Accessory VFO - the 1974, p 8-23.
/ 470 Easy Way, 73 Magazine, Aug. 1975, p 103 and
F )| 01
106-108.
'8T A," At MAIN SOURCE
0
4^22
FOLLOWER PUSH-PUSH DOUBLER
R1
C1,C3 subminiature PC-board-mount 500-ohm PC-board-mount control

air trimmers (John-
son 189-507-5 or T-9-5)
C2 toroidal transformer. Primary, 2 jUH. Use 23 turns
100 pF miniature air variable T 1
(large gang of Miller
2109 suitable) no. 24 (0.5mm) enamelled wire on Amidon T-50-6
LI toroidal core. Secondary is 20 turns no. 24
7.6 mH toroidal inductor. 37 turns no. 24 (0.5mm) (0.5mm) enamelled wire (center tapped) over pri-
enamelled wire on Amidon T-68-2 toroidal core winding
mary winding. Observe same rotation sense when
(see text)
Z1
L2 1 toroidal inductor. 14 turns no. 22 (0.6mm)
enamelled wire on Amidon T-50-6 toroidal core 9.1 volt, 1 watt, zener-diode regulator
14-MHz VFO USING DOUBLER— Developed for drift series-tuned Colpitts oscillator operating and SM are silver mica. Article stresses impor-
use with 20-meter low-power (QRP) trans- at 7 MHz, with source-follower buffer separat- tance of choosing and using components that
ceiver. Push-push doubler avoids instability ing it from doubler. Adjust dynamic balance minimize drift.— D. DeMaw, VFO Design Tech-
problems of 14-MHz oscillator and minimizes control R1 of doubler for best output waveform niques for Improved Stability, Ham Radio, June
chirp during CW transmit periods. Uses low- purity. Capacitors marked P are polystyrene.
1976, p 10-17.
6.545-6.845 MHz VFO — Covers 40-meter ama-

teur band of transceiver for SSB and CW with
stable incremental tuning circuit using Moto-
rola MV1654 varactor diode CR3. Tuner permits
up to 10-kHz offset above or below VFO fre-
quency. Varactor control voltage is set by offset
tuning control R3. R4 compensates for differ-
ences in varactors and adjusts VFO for zero off-
set. Output buffering is provided by Q6 and Q7,
with Q7 also serving as power amplifier for bal-
+I2V anced mixer used in companion exciter of trans-
mitter. S2 activates receiver offset. Relay K1 au-
INCREMENTAL T tomatically turns off offset when receiver is in
TUNING I • 1L 470k
R4
transmit or standby mode. Offset feature is
iR3 >4TC needed only if there is frequency difference be-

tween transmitted and received signals. L4 has
A0JUST
/77 A? 5 turns No. 22 on 4-inch slug-tuned ceramic
form. — W. J. Weiser, Simple SSB Transmitter
and Receiver for 40 Meters, Ham Radio, March
1974, p 6-20.
3 GO
by malicious or accidental interference. Re-

places first crystal oscillator in FM transceiver
and tunes over required range, generally one-
third of first injection frequency. Operates at
about 45 MHz for most transceivers, but fre-
quency can easily be changed. Tuning pot (10-
turn 5K with digital dial is best) can be placed
remotely. VFO uses FET oscillator tuned by tun-
ing diode (also known as Varicap, varactor, or
variable-capacitance diode). Source-follower
output stage buffers oscillator. Supply is regu-
lated by zener. Q1 and Q2 can be MPF102 FETs,
but 2N5668 or 2N5669 are better. LI is 4 turns
No. 16 'k inch in diameter. Article covers con-
struction, testing, and installation in trans-
ceiver.— P. Franson, Simple Tunable Receiver
Modification for VHF FM, Ham Radio, Oct. 1974,
p 40-43.
L3
C6.C15 20-pF trimmer (JFD DJV 300) 12 turns no. 28 on Micrometals

T-25-13 toroid core
C8 50-pF trimmer (JFD DVJ 305)
6 turns no. 24, close wound on
C9.C22 10-pF trimmer (JFD DVJ 302)
C14.C19, 6-pF trimmer (JFD DVJ 301) 0.1” (2.5 mm) diameter form
L4
L5.L6
IV2 turn no. 22, 1/8” (3 mm)
C21
diameter, 1/4” (6 mm) long
C20 0.5-pF ceramic (two 1-pF capaci- RFC1 0.39 jUH miniature inductor
tors in series)
VI
(Nytronics Deci-Ductor)
10 turns no. 28 on Micrometals
LI 5th overtone crystal, series reso-
T-25-13 toroid core
nant, HC-18/U holder, 105.600
4 turns no. 28 on cold end of LI MHz for 28.8-MHz i-f
L2
422.4-MHz CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR — Uses for driving external diode-type tripler for which band. — H. P. Shuch, Easy-to-Build SSB Trans-
105.6-MHz crystal oscillator followed by fre- circuit is also given in article. Developed for use ceiver for 1296 MHz, Ham Radio, Sept. 1974, p
quency-doubling stages to givedesired output in 1296-MHzSSBtransceiverfor23-cmamateur 8-23.
TRANSCEIVER CIRCUITS 1115
DOUBLE-BALANCED MIXER— Used in 80-

meter SSB transceiver on both transmit and re-
ceive. Local oscillator input of 5-5.5 MHz is pro-
vided by VFO. SSB signal for receive comes
from two-stage MOSFET RF amplifier. — D.
Hembling, Solid-State 80-Meter SSB Trans-
ceiver, Ham Radio, March 1973, p 6-17.
5—5.55 MHz VFO — Controls both receiver and

transmitter of low-power transceiver for 20-
meter amateur band. LI is 3.5 /uH wound on 6-
mm ceramic form without tuning slug. Number
of turns is adjusted to obtain exact inductance.
JFET can also be 2N4416 or Motorola MPF102.
VFO is buffered with single-stage feedback am-
plifier using pair of 2N3904 transistors (transis-
tor type is not critical). Article also gives other
circuits of transceiver. — W. Hayward, Low-
Power Single-Band CW Transceiver, Ham
Radio, Nov. 1974, p 8-17.
■©)
180
WV
- SOOk * Li£|sN74/J P
>- 430S 04 fcl
2N4808
cm.
HU 06 07
,3I— -' |a || 2N4888 2N3384 2N3584
08
♦ 5V
H.Hsjr IsJ 3 *"*'» “I 05

(D1©)
i 2-
%)
SYLLABIC VOX — Provides instantaneous radio-
telephone speech communication without con- words go on air, there are no VOX RF transients are 1N914 or equivalent. RF choke is 2.5 mH
ventional VOX relays. Switching transistors and no extraneous local noise. Operating bias rated 100 mA. Article describes operation in de-
eliminate contact-bounce problems of relays. for final amplifier is applied only during trans- tail and gives installation and setup proce-
Designed for use with Drake T-4XB and R-4B mis ion at
; other times, final amplifier tubes are dures.— R. W. Hitchcock, Syllabic VOX System
transmitter and receiver. Also gives true break- completely cut off. Diodes CR4-CR7, CR9, and for Drake Equipment, Ham Radio, Aug. 1976, p
CR11 are 1N4004 or equivalent. All other diodes 24-29.
in CW keying. Since only words and syllables of
■HIT
TRANSMIT MIXER — Used in low-power trans-

ceiver for 20-meter amateur band. VFO input,
tunable from 5 to 5.55 MHz, is combined with
9-MHz output of crystal oscillator in Motorola
MC1496G double-balanced modulator to give
14-MHz output for transmitter power chain.
Supply voltage (+12 V) is applied only when
transmitting. Transformers are wound on Ami-
don T-50-6 toroids or equivalent. Balance is
maintained in mixer with center-tapped tuned
circuit in output, made by putting 15-turn brfilar
winding on toroid core and tuning series com-
bination. Article gives all other circuits of trans-
ceiver.— W. Hayward, Low-Power Single-Band
CW Transceiver, Ham Radio, Nov. 1974, p 8-17.
PUSH-BUTTON
TR SWITCH — Consists of driver transistors Q1

and 02 and reed relays K1-K3. K1 switches an-
tenna from receiver to transmitter, K2 grounds
receiver input, and K3 keys transmitter. Coil of
K1 has 400 turns No. 32 enamel, while K2 and
K3 each have 120 turns. Coils are wound directly
on glass of reed relays and covered with epoxy
cement. LED normally glows dimly, with bright-
ness increasing when character is keyed. — J. H.
Fox, An Integrated KeyeriTR Switch, QST, Jan.
1975, p 15-20.
— 1—
'T"' DOWN 10k
-O" f XMTR GND /

/
m cillator frequency for interval of about 3.81 Hz tegrator R3-C3 into range manually after circuit
WARM-UP DRIFT COMPENSATOR— Warm-up determined by 1-MHz reference crystal oscilla- switch-on. — K. Spaargaren, Drift-Correction
drift of transceiver VFO is automatically cor- tor and divider chain U4-U5. Switches labeled Circuit for Free-Running Oscillators, Ham
rected by using binary counter U1 to count os- UP and DOWN are used to bring output of in- Radio, Dec. 1977, p 45-47.
1117
7-7.1 MHz VFO — JFET Q1 serves as oscillator,

with frequency determined by C2, L2, CR2, and
CR3; diodes operate in reverse-bias regions as
voltage-variable capacitors. Amount of reverse
bias applied by R2 determines capacitance and
frequency. VFO operates on both transmit and
receive; on transmit, no voltage is applied to
VFO offset circuit R1-C1-CR1 so it has little ef-
fect on oscillator. On receive, +12 V applied to
R1 makes CR1 conduct and places Cl across fre-
quency-determining network to shift VFO
about 100 kHz away from operating frequency
so receiver will not be blocked. Q2 is buffer be-
tween oscillator and transmitter. VR1 provides
regulated 9.1 V for oscillator and buffer. (Project
was named after chopped beef can in which it
CR1-CR4 — Small-signal silicon diodes, L3 - Rf choke (Radio Shack 273-102).
1 N914 or equiv. L5 — 1 turn no. 28 enam. wire over L4. was mounted.) — J. Rusgrove, The CB Slider,
J1 -J3 — Phono jack. Q1, Q2 — JFET (Radio Shack RS 2036 QST, March 1977, p 15-17.
LI - Modified rf choke (Radio Shack 273 or equiv.).
102). Remove original turns and replace R2 - Slide potentiometer, 20 kft (from
with approximately 100 turns no. 28 Radio Shack 271-1601).
enam. wire. VR1 — Zener diode, 9.1 V, 1 W.
L2, L4 — Rf choke (Radio Shack 273-101 ).
500-kHz SCAN ON 2 METERS— Circuit added to

2-meter transceiver sweeps 500-kHz segment
of 2-meter band at 2-s intervals. When incoming
signal is strong enough to trip receiver squelch,
sweep stops and receiver locks on station. R4
and C3 determine scan rate. Adjust R1 for best
lock-on. When signal is sensed, squelch is
greater than 9 V on R3, driving output of U2 low,
turning on LED, and removing charging voltage
from R4. When signal disappears, output of U2
goes high and scanning continues. — W. Sward,
Add Frequency Scan to a Receiver for $10, QST,
March 1977, p 48.
MICROTRAN
NO. SMT 26 FB
600 CT TO 600CT
W. E CO. CARBON
TELEPHONE MIKE
mobile transceiver. Required excitation voltage put of 0.25 mV from mike-filter combination is
CARBON MIKE FOR MOBILE SERVICE— Filter of 3.5 V for mike is reduced from 12 V of car bat- reduced by 100K pot to value needed for trans-
enhances desirable characteristics of ordinary tery by resistor network having hash filter to mitter.— S. Olberg, The Carbon Marvel, 73 Mag-
carbon mike taken from telephone, for use with keep alternator whine out of audio system. Out- azine, April 1977, p 120.
SCANNER WITH SEARCHBACK— Combines

scanning between two repeater channels with
periodic searchback, to prevent scanner from
locking on one of channels during long periods
of use. NE555 timer is added to squelch recog-
nition circuit to provide automatic control of
scanner so both frequencies are checked at
least every 15 s. If scanner is extended to mon-
itor four channels, none are unguarded for more
than 1 min. Article shows how receiver section
of transceiver is modified for diode switching by
scanner of oscillator crystals for individual
channels. — P. Shreve, Two-Channel Scanner
for Repeater Monitoring, Ham Radio, Oct. 1976,
p 48-51.
of transmitter-receiver functions improves on- diode-biased antenna gate in which actual by same author (see author index). — H. R. Hil-
the-air effectiveness of SSB station. Conversa- switching takes place 200 s before RF appears, dreth, Syllabic VOX System for the Collins S-
tion is essentially the same as when using tel- being accomplished by forward-biasing diode Line, Ham Radio, Oct. 1977, p 29-33.
ephone. Each set of contacts that would open with DC voltage. Input to LM3900 is through
1119
3—3.5 kHz VARACTOR TUNER — Variable oscil- 001 FEEOTHRU

lator for 80-meter SSB transceiver is tuned by
1N594 diode. MPF102 FET serves as source-fol-
lower buffer. With values shown, full excursion
of R8 tunes oscillator from 3.045 to 3.545 MHz.
Use well-regulated 12-V source. R9 allows syn-
chronization ofreceive and transmit frequen-
cies. K1 is 4PDT relay used for switching supply
voltage and antenna from transmit to receive.
L8 is 40 turns No. 32 on 'A-in slug-tuned form. —
W. J. Weiser, Integrated Circuit SSB Transceiver
for 80 Meters, Ham Radio, April 1976, p 48-52.
TR SWITCH — Simple transmit-receive switch

uses 74122 retriggerable mono MVBR with
clear and one NAND gate. When input of gate
goes low (during key down or speech), transis-
tor conducts and closes relay. Relay stays
closed for period determined by delay pot, to
maintain transmit condition between dots or
dashes or between other pauses. Switch may
be removed and any other TTL-compatible
♦ 5V input applied at point X.— B. Voight, The TTL
One Shot, 73 Magazine, Feb. 1977, p 56-58.
♦ 5V
n
IK
14 5 I
Jon
Y5 THRU YIO 05 THRU 010
SCANNER FOR 2 METERS— Developed for use \ i

with frequency synthesizer to scan transmit VFO operating between 1 1.255 and 12.255 MHz. 5 s after channel goes off air. Article covers cir-
and receive frequencies of four receivers plus QI-QIOcan be 2N3638 or equivalent; Q11 is any cuit operation, gives construction details, and
six other channels in 2-meter amateur band. Pin NPN silicon such as 2N2102; and Q12 is 2N2102. tells how to calculate crystal frequency for each
connections at left go to socket provided on LEDs operate from +12 V. In operation, scanner channel desired.— C. A. Kollar, Two Meter Scan-
Icom IC-230 synthesizer for connecting external stops on active channel, and resumes scanning ner, 73 Magazine, June 1977, p 46-48.
TO
ANTENNA
PIN-DIODE TR SWITCH— Solid-state TR switch

operates at very high keying speeds and han-
dles up to 100 W while transferring antenna be-
tween receiver and transmitter in accordance
with transmitter keying demands. Uses Uni-
trode UM4004 PIN diodes to provide about 0.2-
dB insertion loss when forward-biased and
about 30-dB isolation when reverse-biased. CR1
is forward-biased for about 45 mA DC and CR2
is reverse-biased by 124 V during transmit, for
minimum loss in CR1 and maximum isolation in
CR2. Circuit is designed to operate from collec-
tor of keying-circuit transistor in Touchcoder II
(in dotted lines at lower left), but any source
providing required T (transmit) and R (receive)
DC voltages shown on diagram will key circuit.
Article covers construction in detail. — J. K.
Boomer, PIN Diode Transmit/Receive Switch for
80-10 Meters, Ham Radio, May 1976, p 10-15.
6
Id 2c 11® 7A
8 SN7447 l6
-
II 14
SQUELCH
CONTROLLED
AUDIO
AMPLIFIER <-
SCANNER — Provides eight combinations of
four transmit and four receive frequencies
RECEIVER B
under digital control using same four wires " 25V
going to control head originally in four-channel

commercial FM mobile transceiver. Also pro-
vides scanning of up to eight receive channels.
Uses SN7442 BCD-to-decimal decoder. Switch
in original control head is rewired to count in IOOmF
BCD format. Carrier-operated circuit stops clock

when signal is received during scanning, and T 2QOOmF
readout device displays number of channel varying scanning rate. Article covers construc- for FM Transceivers, 73 Magazine, April 1973, p
being received. Clock is UJT Q2 with 500K pot 73-78.25V
tion and testing. — C. Durst, Scanning Adapter
T.05uF C4
TRANSCEIVER CIRCUITS 1121
REMOTE TUNING — Simple sweep generator

and 5-5.5 MHz VCO provide remote manual or
automatic electronic tuning of 6-meter trans-
ceiver, for quick check of possible band open-
ings a few kilohertz from frequency to which
receiver is normally tuned. To adjust, set SI on
MANUAL and turn R2 fully counterclockwise. If
signal at lowest received frequency is applied to
antenna jack, signal can be centered within IF
passband of receiver by adjusting Cl. Next, turn
R2 fully clockwise, apply signal at highest fre-
quency to be received, and center signal within
passband again by adjusting C2. With SI in
AUTO position, R1 determines highest fre-
quency tuned. If sweep rate is too low, reduce
value of C3. Point A is used to drive CRO through
FET buffer stage, for displaying signals present
within sweep range as pips on screen. — J. R.
Bingham, Sweep 6 Meters and Really Clean Up!
QST, April 1977, p 27-28.
76.25 AND 81.6 MHz— MC10102 ECL quad NOR

gate provides convenient switching between
two crystal oscillators, as required for change
from receive to transmit in transceiver. Output
level of about 0.8 V P-P can easily drive 50-ohm
load and is fully buffered from oscillator sec-
tions. Gate A provides bias for oscillator gates
B and C. Use 270 ohms for R,-R3. Crystals are
fifth overtone; YB is 81.6 MHz with 97 nH for LB
and 39 pF for CB, and Yc is 76.25 MHz with 104
nH for Lc and 39 pF for Cc. — G. Griesmyer,
Clocked CMOS One-Shot Has No RC Time Con-
stant, EDN Magazine, May 20, 1978, p 164 and
172.
Q2
{ UNI JUNCTION)
2029 OR 2N4871 ( NPN )
OR EQUIV. 2016 OR
2-METER SCANNER — Designed for use with

KDK-144 amateur 2-meter transceiver to pro-
vide automatic scanning between 146 and
147.990 MHz. When transceiver is switched to
priority position, +5 VDC is applied to 7490 de-
cade counters U1, U2, and U3 to activate scan-
ner. Scanning stops when signal strong enough
to open squelch turns on Darlington-connected
transistors Q1 and Q2, shorting UJT timing ca-
pacitor Cl which is 1-2 gF. — R. W. Shoemaker,
Jr., A Scanner for KDK, QST, Oct. 1978, p 36-37.
PRIORITY SWITCH
TURNS ON SCAN
RF-SENSING TR SWITCH— System detects

presence of RF at output of transmitter and
changes antenna connection from receiver to
transmitter instantly and automatically. No
modifications are required for transmitter or re-
ceiver. RF voltage divider R1 permits use with
transmitters of any power. Broadband amplifier
Q1 feeds voltage doubler CR1-CR2 through
broadband toroidal step-down transformer T1.
CR6, R7, and R6form adjustable timing network
that governs hold-in time of relay K1. Inverting
amplifier U1 turns on 02 for energizing K1 and
switching antenna to transmitter when RF is
sensed. When no rectified RF reaches U1, 02 is
cut off and antenna is changed over to receiver.
RFC1 and RFC2 have 42 turns No. 28 enamel on
Amidon FT-50-43 core. T1 uses Amidon FT-50-
43 core, with 25 turns No. 28 enamel for primary
and 5 turns No. 28 over this for secondary. — D.
DeMaw and J. Rusgrove, An RF-Sensed An-
tenna Changeover Relay, QST, Aug. 1976, p 21-
23.
down to 25 kHz. 3-20 pF trimmer is adjusted to

MARKER GENERATOR — Crystal-controlled fre- kHz markers. SI activates circuit by completing zero-beat crystal against receiver tuned to
quency marker for 80-meter SSB transceiver source circuit of FET momentarily. Two /< L923 WWV. — D. Hembiing, Solid-State 80-Meter SSB
provides front-panel control of either 25- or 100- JK flip-flops divide 100-kHz crystal frequency Transceiver, Ham Radio, March 1973, p 6-17.
CHAPTER 99
Transmitter Circuits
Covers circuits specifically developed for use in AM, FM, and CW
communication transmitters for amateur, aircraft, marine, satellite relay, long-
wave, and other applications. Power ratings range from fractions of watt for
QRP low-power CW transmitters up to 2 kW for moonbounce transmitter.
Circuits for measuring RF output power are included.
C- 125 MFD/450V (FP-155A)

D* (4) M2. 5 (MALLORY)
1000 PtV RECT
R|'I00K/2W COMP
4250 V
3 kV AT 2 kW — Developed as supply for 1-kW

linear amplifier used in 2-meter moonbounce
communication. Article covers construction,
with emphasis on insulation requirements, and
gives circuit of 1-kW amplifier using Eimac 5-
500A pentode. — R. W. Campbell, Kilowatt Lin-
ear Amplifier for 2 Meters, 73 Magazine, Dec.
1973, p 29-35.
TRANSISTORS FOR OSCILLATOR AND IF
TUBES — Article covers replacement of tubes in
Drake T-4XB transmitter with solid-state equiv-
alent circuits mounted in 7-pin and 9-pin mini-
ature plugs. V4 uses dual-cascode MOSFET,
with CR2 and zeners providing high-voltage
protection from keyed grid. Carrier oscillator
V5B uses single low-voltage high-p JFET with
zener voltage regulator in original grounded
"plate" oscillator circuit. High keyed-ground
voltages are isolated by CR3 and R16. Auto-
PIV, 1 N645 or equivalent. Qi3 - N-channel JFET 30 V/ooi, 2N5246 matic level control amplifier V5A is single high-
Q10 — N-channel dual-gate MOSFET, 25 or equiv. voltage transistor. R14 synthesizes 12AX7 plate
VfBflT 3N206 or equiv. VR1 - Zener diode, 12 V, 400 mW, 1 N759 resistance, to maintain same audio time re-
Q1 1 - Npn transistor, 300 V(br), Texas VR2 - Zener diode, 3.3 V, 1 W, 1 N746.
Inst., TIS131. VR3 - Zener diode, 15 V, 400 mW, 1N965.
sponse.— H. J. Sartori, Solid-Tubes — a New Life
Q12 — Npn transistor, 300 V (BR), Texas for Old Designs, QST, April 1977, p 45-50.
1123
Ml
iok :
CRYSTAL a WHIP
ANTE
7
(f
NNA
390fl
^100
v68
144-MHz LOW-POWER— Used as weak-signal
source for tuning circuits of 2-m receiver or
preamp when no stations are on air. — C. Sond-
5-W FET TRANSMITTER — Values shown give ples, Experiments, and Projects," Howard W. geroth. Really Soup Up Your 2m Receiver, 73
operation in 40-meter amateur band. Drain of Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 2nd Ed., 1975, p 188- Magazine, Feb. 1976, p 40-42.
power FET 02 is connected to tap on primary of 189.
resonant tank circuit. — E. M. Noll, "FET Princi-
06
N7
^2
4-W LINEAR — Produces power output of 4 W

across high-frequency RF range from 300 kHz to
30 MHz, for output of low-power QRP transmit-
ter or as driver for final amplifier of higher-
power transmitter. Gain is only 3 dB down at
frequency limits and is still useful at 6 meters.
Amplifier output may be shorted or left open in-
definitely even with full drive. Stability and
wide frequency response are achieved by add-
ing considerable negative feedback to other-
wise conventional broadband amplifier. T1 and
T2 are wound on two-hole balun cores as found
in TV sets, such as Phillips 4322-020-31520. Two
lengths of No. 22 enamel are twisted about 3
times per inch and then wound through core as
shown. One end of one wire is connected to op-
posite end of other wire to serve as center tap
for transformer. Transformers are responsible
for wide frequency response of amplifier. — J. A.
Koehler, Four-Watt Wideband Linear Amplifier,
Ham Radio, Jan. 1976, p 42-44.
ah jp> nmn <&>

50.TLANT.
T< (350 MW)
TO RCVR.
EXCEPT AS INDICATED, DECIMAL VALUES ©•35

OF mA
CAPACITANCE ARE IN MICROFARADS ( jjF > ;
OTHERS ARE IN PICOFARADS ( pF OR jijiF 1;
I 000, M= 1 000 000.
Shack choke 273-101 and filling form with No. from 100-ftH Radio Shack choke 273-102 and
250 mW FOR 40-METER CW — Two-transistor 28 or 30 enamel to give 24 /aH. Similar choke is wind 25 turns No. 22 or 24 enamel over these.
circuit is easily assembled on circular printed- unwound so only 11 turns remain (1.36 #aH), Supply can be nine Penlite, C, or D cells in series
circuit board small enough to fit into tunafish with turns spaced one wire thickness apart for or 12-V or 13-V regulated DC supply. Q1 and Q2
can, for low-power (QRP) operation. Simple L2. Adjust spacing of turns for maximum output are 2N2222A or equivalent. Y1 is 7-MHz funda-
Pierce crystal oscillator Q1 feeds class C ampli- during final tune-up with transmitter operating mental crystal. — D. DeMaw, Build a Tuna-Tin 2,
fier Q2. LI is made by unwinding 10-/aH Radio into 50-ohm load. For T1, remove all but 50 turns QST, May 1976, p 14-16.
TRANSMITTER CIRCUITS 1125
Cl 1-10 pF concentric piston trimmer

C2,C3 0.3-3 pF concentric piston trimmer
CR1 1N4154 high-speed switching diode
LI
C4 2 turns no. 20, 0.1" (2.5 mm) diam-
eter, 0.25" {6 mm) long
L2 micro-stripline, 0.3” (7.5 mm) wide,
0.865” (22 mm) long, grounded at
bottom, tapped 0.20" (5 mm) from
ground end
L3 same as L2 but tapped 0.25" (6 mm)
from ground end
L4 50-ohm micro-stripline, 0.1" (2.5 mm)
wide, any length
R1 20k, 10-turn trimpot
Cl = 33 pF Dipped Mica R7
RFC1 = 100 n 1/4 W Resistor 100 W AT 432 MHz — Two-transistor 100-W PEP
C2 = 9 Ferroxcube Beads on #18 AWG Wire solid-state linear amplifier can be used for SSB
= 18 pF Dipped Mica
C3 D1 = 1N4001 activity in satellite relay service or for linear,
= 10 nF 35 Vdc for AM operation.
100 ixF 35 Vdc for SSB operation. D2 = 1N4997 CW, or FM service. Circuit uses Motorola
C4 = .1 /iF Erie D3 = 1N914 MRF306 28-V 60-W 225-400 MHz power tran-
C5 = 10 nf 35 Vdc Electrolytic Q1, Q2 = 2N4401 sistors in narrow-band parallel amplifier oper-
C6 Q3, 4 = MRF454 ating in class AB linear mode. Drive level is
= 1 juF Tantalum
C7 = 16: 1 Transformers about 10W PEP. Article covers construction and
= .001 fiF Erie Disc T1..T2
C8, 9 = 330 pF Dipped Mica C20 =
910 pF Dipped Mica tune-up.— R. K. Olsen, 100-Watt Solid-State
R1
= 100 k£2 1/4 W Resistor C21 = Power Amplifier for 432 MHz, Ham Radio, Sept.
1 100 pF Dipped Mica
R2, 3 = 10 kn 1/4 W Resistor CIO =
24 pF Dipped Mica 1975, p 36-43.
R4 C22 =
= 33 £2 5 W Wire Wound Resistor 500 /lxF 3 Vdc Electrolytic
R5, 6 = 10 H 1/2 W Resistor K1 = Potter & Brumfield
KT1 1A 12 Vdc Relay or Equivalent
2—30 MHz 140-W LINEAR — Uses two Motorola sink of Q3-Q4 for temperature tracking. Circuit
MRF454 transistors Q3-Q4 in circuit providing includes carrier-operated relay driven by Q1 and
relatively flat gain over frequency band, as re- 02. — T. Bishop, "140W (PEP) Amateur Radio
quired for power amplifier of amateur SSB Linear Amplifier 2-30MHz," Motorola, Phoenix,
transmitter. Bias diode D2 is mounted on heat- AZ, 1976, EB-63.
AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER DRIVER
1.4-W BROADBAND LINEAR FOR 7 AND 14 is 2N4037. RF chokes use 18 turns No. 28 enamel amel for primary and 4 turns for secondary
MHz — Requires about 10-mW driving power. on FT-37-43 ferrite toroid core. Primary of T2 is looped through BLN-43-302 ferrite core. Article
Frequency response is essentially flat over 7-14 30 turns of No. 28 enamel on FT-50-43 ferrite to- gives test procedure. — D. DeMaw, Transmitter
MHz frequency range. Diodes are 1N4003. Q8 is roid core, with 4 turns No. 28 wound over cold Design — Emphasis on Anatomy, QST, July
2N2222A, Q9 is 2N3866, Q10 is 2N2270, and Q1 1 end for secondary. T3 has 16 turns of No. 28 en-
1978, p 23-25.
+12 VDC KEY ANT

Ml C3
2-METER QRP — Can supply up to 1 W of RF out-

put on CW for portable or low-power (QRP) am-
ateur radio operation. Provides chirpless keying
<A-W CW TRANSMITTER— Low-power two- No. 24 enamel on 13/ie-in Permacor 57-1541 core) with negligible backwave. Operates from 12-V
stage FET transmitter for 80-meter amateur and two series-connected trimmers. Milliam- car battery or lantern batteries. Oscillator uses
band uses Pierce crystal oscillator that requires meter is connected across C8 when level of RF 7-MHz fundamental crystal and 40080 transistor
no output resonant circuit. DC milliammeter output voltage is to be measured. — E. M. Noll, Q1, with 40081 in final stage. LI is 20 turns No.
can be connected across 150-ohm resistor in "FET Principles, Experiments, and Projects," 28 on Ik-inch slug-tuned form. L3 is 28 turns No.
gate circuit of second transistor to indicate Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 2nd Ed., 28 on Vinch slug-tuned form, with 5 turns No.
strength of oscillator output signal. Resonant 24 wound on it for L2 and the same for L4. Ar-
1975, p 204-207.
circuit of RF amplifier Q2 uses toroid L2 (56 turns ticle covers construction and operation. — C. Kli-
nert. Simple QRP Transmitter, 73 Magazine,
Aug. 1973, p 65-67.
10 W ON 2 METERS— Single TRW PT5757 tran-

sistor provides 10-W output when operating
from 12.5-V auto battery. LI is 4 turns No. 20
enamel and L2 is 10 turns No. 20, both with %2-
inch inner diameter. T1 is 4:1 transmission-line
transformer made from 3-inch length of
twisted-pair No. 20 enamel. — J. Fisk, Two-
Meter Power Amplifier, Ham Radio, Jan. 1974,
p 67.
80-W LINEAR FOR MOBILE SSB— Designed for

operation from 12.5-V supply, using driver
stage to provide total power gain of about 30
Cl, C 1 4. C 18 - 0.1 jjF ceramic. LI - 0.22 ph molded choke dB for 3-30 MHz band. Negative collector-to-
C2, C7 , C 1 3, C20 - 0.001 /iF feed Through. L2. L7, L8 — 10fJh molded choke base feedback provides gain compensation in
C3 - 100 pF/3V. L5. L6 - 0.15 ph
C4, C6 - 0.033 mF mylar L3 - 25 t, #26 vi i 100 Si, 2 W resistor. ( 1.0 ph)
both driver and output stages. Low circuit
i beads each.
C5 - 0.0047 pF mylar L4, L9 3 ferrit impedances make layout and construction
C8, C9 - 0.015 and 0.033 jiF mylars in parallel.
CIO - 470 pF mica. more critical than with higher-voltage
- 2 twisted pairs of #26 wire, 8 twists per inch. A = 4 turns,
Cl 1, C12 - 560 pF mica.
C.1 5 - 1000 pF/3 V
8=8 turns. Core Stack pole 57 9322-1 1 . Indiana General
F627-8Q1 or equivalent
circuits. — H. Granberg, "Broadband Linear
Cl 6, C17 - 0.015 juF mylar T2 - 2 twisted pairs of #24 wire. 8 twists per inch, 6 turns. Power Amplifiers Using Push-Pull Transistors,"
C19 - 10 pF 15 V (Core as above.) Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974, AN-593, p 7.
C21 , C22 - two 0.068 pF mylars in parallel
C23 - 330 pF mica T3 - 2 twisted pairs of #20 wire, 6 twists per inch, 4 turns.
(Core as above.)
C24 - 39 pF mica
C25 - 680 pF mica T4 — A and B = 2 twisted pairs of #24 wire, 8 twists per inch.
C26 - .01 pF ceramic 5 turns each. C = 1 twisted pair of #24 wire, 8 tui ns.
Core Stack pole 57 9074 11, Indiana General F624 19Q1
R 1 . R6, R 7 - 10 Si, 1/2 W carbon. or equivalent.
R2 - 51 S2, 1/2 W carbon
R3 - 240 Si, 1 wire W Q 1 2N6367
R4, R5 - 18 S2, 1 W carbon
Q2, Q3 - 2N6368
R8 , R9 - 27 Si, 2 W carbon
R10 - 33 S 2 , 6 W wireW - 1N4001
1N4997
J1 , J2 - BNC connectors
20-METER VFO — Tunes from 14.0 to 14.2 MHz,

using stable Vackar design. Protective diode
CR1 can be any silicon rectifier. Clamping diode
CR3 improves stability by preventing conduc-
tion in gate of JFET oscillator Q1. — C. E. Gal-
breath, Low-Power Solid-State VFO Transmit-
ter for 20 Meters, Ham Radio, Nov. 1973, p 6-
11.
Cl 50-pF, N750 temperature coefficient RFC1 1-mH rf choke (Millen J300-1000)

ceramic RFC2 50-;uH rf choke (Millen 3 00-50)
300-mW 25-MHz AMPLIFIER — Uses quarter-

wavelength transmission line T3 in place of par-
allel-tuned traps to pass even-harmonic current
freely while blocking odd harmonics. Circuit can
be adapted to 300-mW walkie-talkie for 6 or 10
meters. At 25 MHz, efficiency is 73%. — F. H.
Raab, High-Efficiency RF Power Amplifiers,
Ham Radio, Oct. 1974, p 8-29.
C2 78-pF variable (E.F. Johnson 158-4) T1.T2 11 turns no. 26 twisted pair on Perma-
LI 2.2 /!H rf choke (Delevan 1025-28) core 57-2656 or Micrometals T30-6 core
L2 106 nH (4 turns no. 26 wire on Perma- T3 piece of 125-ohm coaxial cabl«* (RG-
core 57-2656 or Micrometals T30-6 core) 63B/U), 112.2” (2.85 meters) long
D1 — 36-V, 1-W Zener diode. L5 — 12-jiH inductor (Radio Shack 273-101 with T1 — Broadband transformer (Radio Shack
J1-J4, incl. — Single-hole mount phono jack. 4 turns no. 26 enam. wire added). 273-101 for primary, with 5-turn secondary of
L6 — 8.9-jiH inductor (Radio Shack 273-101 no. 26 enam. wire over C6 end of primary).
LI — 100-^H choke (Radio Shack 273-102).
L2-L4, incl. — 10-^H choke (Radio Shack with 3 turns removed). Y1 — 80-meter fundamental type of crystal
273-101). SI — Miniature SDdt toaale or slide switch. (crystal socket optional).
80-METER CW FOR QRP — Low-power transmit- Q3 by clamping on RF voltage peaks in excess ing. — D. DeMaw, Build This "Sardine Sender,"
ter can be mounted on small can for operation of 36 V. Output tank of Q3 gives satisfactory QSTr Oct. 1978, p 15-17 and 38.
143-156 MHz 80-W AMPLIFIER— Single transis-

tor mounted on heavy heatsink provides about
9.4-dB gain. 8-W drive at 13.5 VDC produces full
output power. Series tuning inductors are
printed striplines with ground plane removed
beneath them; report gives designs for photo-
masks. Transistor will withstand 20:1 VSWR at
all phase angles. — T. Bishop, "A Single-Device,
80-Watt, 50-Ohm VHF Amplifier," Motorola, LI — 1.2 X 0.3 cm Airline Inductor
Phoenix, AZ, 1978, EB-46. Cl, 11 - 500 pF Dipped mica
C2, 9 - 10 pF UNELCO L2 - 3.5 X 0.3 cm Airline Inductor
C3 - 60 pF UNELCO L3 - 4.0 X 0.3 cm Airline Inductor
C4. 5 - 250 pF UNELCO L4, L5 - 0.3 X 0.3 cm Airline Inductor
C6, 7 - 250 pF UNELCO L6 — 2.7 X 0.3 cm Airline Inductor
C8 - 80 pF UNELCO L7 - 0.8 X 0.3 cm Airline Inductor
CIO - 40 pF UNELCO L8 - 3.0 X 0.3 cm Airline Inductor
C12 - 0.1 /iF Erie Redcap
Board: G10, cr = 5, t = 0.16 cm, 57 gm, Copper-Clad
C13 — 1 /iF Tantalum
Cl 4 - 680 pF Allen Bradley Feed Thru connectors = BNC
RFC1 -0. 15/iH Molded choke

RFC 2 - 10 T NO. 18 AWG Enameled Wire, 1/4" I.D.
Ferroxcube Bead 56-590-65, 3 Beads
R F In -p ^
T1 & T2 — Baiun, Unbalanced to Balanced RG-58, I= 2

R1 - 1 k. 1/2 W
R2 - 10 n, 1/2 W
R3 - 10 n, 1/2 w
R4 - 5.6 n, 1 W
R5 - 5.6 n, 1 W
C21, 24 — Underwood 10 pF
R6 - 2.7 n, 1/4 W
C2,6 - Arco 403
Z1 & Z3 — Microstrip — W = 200 mils, I = 1.8” C17, 19 - Underwood J102, 1000 pF Feed Thru
Z2 & Z4 — Microstrip — W = 200 mils, I = 300 mils C25, 26 — 0.1 /iF, Erie Red Cap
Z5 & Z6 — Microstrip — W = 150 mils, I = 300 mils
LI - 24 nH, #14 Wire, I = 1.2"
Z6 & Z8 — Microstrip — W = 150 mils, I = 1.4"
L2 - 12 nH, #14 Wire, I = 0.6”
RFC1, 4 — Ferroxcube Bead 56-590-65-3B
L3 - 24 nH, #14 Wire, I= 1.2”
RFC2.3 - 0.15 pH Cambion Molded Coil
Board - G10, eR « 5, t = 0.062", I = 8.0”, W = 4.0”
Q1 - 2N5192
RFC5, 6 — 1 Turn #20 Enameled Wire Wound on 5/16'
RFC7, 8 - VK200 20/4B Q2 - 2N5194
Cl ,3,4, 5, 7, 8, 1 1 , 1 5 — Underwood 40 pF Q3 - M R F 309

C12, 16 — Underwood 25 pF Q4 - M R F 309
Cl 3, 14, 22, 23 - Underwood 15 pF D 1 - 1N4001

C9, 10, 18,20 - 1 pF Tantalum
420-450 MHz 100-W LINEAR— Two Motorola ent in push-pull operation is enhanced by 3-inch lengths and prepare 'A inch at each end
MRF309 transistors in push-pull require only 16- seven-element low-pass filter at output. Q1 and to give total transformer length of 2'k inches. —
W drive to deliver 100 W for transmitter appli- Q2 are bias resistors and must be insulated from
H. Swanson and B. Tekniepe, "A 100-Watt PEP
cations. Circuit provides 8 dB of power gain at heatsink with mica washers. T1 and T2 are
420-450 MHz Push-Pull Linear Amplifier," Mo-
efficiency greater than 40% when operating transformers constructed from RG58 coax. Use torola, Phoenix, AZ, 1978, EB-67.
from 28-V supply. Harmonic suppression inher-
1129
TRANSMITTER CIRCUITS
BAND-SWITCHED
A-MI25 - 35V
SCREEN
TANK CIRCUIT 220V
250V
TRANSISTORS FOR DRIVER TUBES— Solid-

state replacement for 12BY7A power amplifier
runs much cooler than tube. Shield is required
between input and output circuits. Gate 2 is
biased very high and gate 1 is close to source
voltage, to permit maximum signal range with-
out changing parameters. Bypassed zener VR9
prevents 100-V collector signal swing from ex-
ceeding transistor breakdown voltage. Solid-
state replacements for other tube types in
Drake T-4XB transmitter are also given in arti-
cle.— H. J. Sartori, Solid-Tubes — a New Life for
Old Designs, QST, April 1977, p 45-50.
Q1 7 — N-channel dual-gate MOSFET, 25 VK8 - Zener diode, 1 5 V, 400 mW, 1 N965.

V(BR) 3N206. VR9 - Zener diode, 100 V, 5 W, 1 N5378.
Q18 - Npn transistor, 300 V (BR), TIS1 31 .
10-V TEMPERATURE-STABILIZED— Self-regu- Q2 and diode-connected transistor Q, together as chip heater. Opamp A2 (,xA741G) and asso-
lation of substrate temperature of CA3046 five- provide temperature compensation by sensing ciated components (including Q,-Q2 in feedback
transistor chip allows 10-V reference output voltage across Q, (Ds) and comparing it with path) act as self-regulating (zener-current) volt-
voltage to rise only 0.5 mV when temperature temperature-reference voltage produced age reference — M. J. Shah, A Self-Regulating
increases from 27 to 62°C. Circuit requires only across R, by /xA741G opamp A,. Opamp drives Temperature-Stabilized Reference, EDN Maga-
single 15-V supply. Zener-connected transistor Qs to control current through Q4 which serves zine, May 20, 1974, p 74 and 76.
SECONDARY
OF FILAMENT
TRANSFORMER
432-450 MHz — Crystal oscillator stage operat- wound to 8-mm diameter. L3 is 3 turns No. 20
ing at 48-50 MHz puts out enough power to air-wound to 5-mm diameter, with center tap.
drive pair of triplers. All transistors are HEP-75. Article covers construction, adjustment, and
'audio TRANSISTOR
LI is 20 turns No. 24 on 5-mm form, tapped 8 uses. — B. Hoisington, Getting Started on 450 150-90 WATT NPN
turns from cold end. L2 is 5 turns No. 20 air- MHz, 73 Magazine, Nov. 1973, p 21-24.
rr
AMPLIFIED ZENER — Combination of 1-W zener
and 50-90 W audio transistor replaces 50-W
zener<33
in developing bias for high-power tube-
type linear amplifier. Voltage rating of zener
should be about 0.3 V less than desired bias
voltage if using germanium transistor and
about 0.7 V less for silicon transistor. Connec-
tions are shown for PNP and NPN transistors.
Use chassis as heatsink for transistor, with mica
insulating washer for NPN. Ferrite beads dis-
courage parasitic oscillations. — An Alternative
to High-Wattage Zener Diodes, QST, June 1975,
+30V
with 0.062-in beryllium oxide insulators. Effi-

10W ON 2 METERS — Linear power amplifierfor are 8 turns, and L3 and L4 are 5 turns, all close- p 45. ciency isabout 40%. — L. Leighton, Two-Meter
2-meter transverter delivers 10 W PEP using wound with No. 20 enamel on 3-mmform. Tran- Transverter Using Power FETs, Ham Radio,
two Siliconix VMP1 Mospower FETs. LI and L2 sistor requires heatsink, insulated from chassis
Sept. 1976, p 10-15.
Cl - 100 pF
C2
C2, C3 - 5600 pF
C4, C5 - 680 pF
C11 - 470
C6, C7 - .10pF /iF
Cl 2, Cl 3 - .33 gf
C14 - 10 gF - 50 V electrolytic
Cl 65 - 500
1000 gfpF - 3 V electrolytic
Cl 7 - .1 j/F
R 1 , R2 - 2 X 3.3ft, 1/2-W in parallel

R3, - R4
R5 - 2 5 XW 3.9ft, 1/2-W in parallel
47ft,
R6 - 1.0ft , 1/2 W
R7 - 1.0 k, 1/4 W
R8 - 100ft , 1/4 W
R9 - 18 k, 1/4 W
R10 - 8.2 k, 1/4 W
R1 1 - 1 .0 k T rimpot
R12 - 180ft , 1/4 W
LI , L2 - Ferroxcube
VK200 20/4B
L3, L4 - 6 ferrite beads

each, Ferroxcube
56590 65/3B
— 1N4997
sink. Since average base current of transistors balun ferrite core 57-1845-24B. T2 has 5 turns of
2-30 MHz 300-W LINEAR— Motorola MRF422 is less than 500 mA, however, regulator can be two twisted pairs No. 22 enamel wound on
high-power transistors connected in push-pull used without heatsink. T1 and T3 have 9:1
Stackpole 57-9322 toroid. — H. Granberg, "Get
provide 300 W of PEP or CW output power impedance ratio, obtained with 's-inch copper- 300 Watts PEP Linear Across 2 to 30 MHz from
across band. Uses MPC1000 regulator rated for braid secondary through which 3 turns of No. This Push-Pull Amplifier," Motorola, Phoenix,
10 A and dissipation of 100 W with proper heat- 22 are wound for primary on Stackpole dual
AZ, 1978, EB-27.
2-METER POWER AMPLIFIER— Provides 10-dB

gain with full 30-W output at 160 MHz and about
0.5-dB more gain at 150 MHz, using Motorola
MRF238 transistor. C1-C4 are Arco 463, 464, or
424. RFC1 is 10 turns No. 20 on 270-ohm 'a-W
resistor. C5 is three 90-pF silver mica in parallel.
RFC2is6to8turnsNo. 18 on toroid. LI is ’A turn
No. 14 Vk inch long. L2 is 4 turns No. 14 spaced
on ’A inch diameter. L3 is 1 'A- inch curve of No.
14. D1-D8 are 1N4148. T1 and T2 are one
quarter-wavelength of RG-174 or similar 50-
ohm coax. D9 is 2-A silicon rectifier. — D. J.
Lynch, Build a 2m Power Amp, 73 Magazine,
Nov. 1977, p 96-97.
L9
C2, C3 — 0.01 txF mylar

C4 — 620 pF dipped mica T1 —4:1 T ransformer, 6 turns, 2 twisted pairs of #26 AWG
enameled wire (8 twists per inch)
C5, C7, C16 — 0.1 Ilf ceramic
C6 — 100 ^tF/15 V electrolytic T2 — 1:1 Baiun, 6 turns, 2 twisted pairs of #24 AWG
C8 — 500 (jlF/6 V electrolytic enameled wire (6 twists per inch)
C9, CIO, C15, C22 — 1000 pF feed through T3 — Collector choke, 4 turns, 2 twisted pairs of #22 AWG
Cl 1 , Cl 2 - 0.01 mF enameled wire (6 twists per inch)
Cl 3, Cl 4 - 0.015 juF mylar
T4 — 1:4 Transformer Baiun, A&B — 5 turns, 2 twisted pairs
C17 — 10 nF/35 V electrolytic
of #24, C — 8 turns, 1 twisted pair of #24 AWG enameled
C18, C19, C21 — Two 0.068 fjF mylars in parallel
wire (All windings 6 twists per inch). (T4 — Indiana
C20 —0.1 juF disc ceramic
General F624-19Q1, — All othersare Indiana General
C23 — 0.1 /jF disc ceramic
F627-8Q1 ferrite toroids or equivalent.)
R 1 - 220 il, 1/4 W carbon
R2 - 47 a, 1/2 W carbon PARTS LIST
R 3 - 820 a, 1 W wire W
R4 - 35 a, 5 W wire W LI — .33 /iH, molded choke Q1 - 2N6370
R5, R6 — Two 150 a, 1/2 W carbon in parallel L2, L6, L7 — 10 /iH, molded choke Q4 -Q32N5190
Q2, - 2N5942
R7 , R8 - 10 a, 1/2 W carbon L3 - 1.8 /iH (Ohmite 2 144)
R9 , R 1 1 - 1 k, 1/2 W carbon L4, L5 — 3 ferrite beads each D1 - 1N4001
R10 — 1 k, 1/2 W potentiometer L8, L9 — .22 /iH, molded choke D2 - 1N4997
R12 — 0.85 a (6 5.1 a or 4 3.3 a 1/4 W resistors in parallel,
divided equally between both emitter leads)
J1, J2 — BNC connectors
160-W LINEAR SSB — Designed for operation at sinks are used, cooling fans are not normally re- Granberg, "Broadband Linear Power Amplifiers
fixed land location, using 28-VDC supply. Circuit quired because average power for speech
Using Push-Pull Transistors," Motorola, Phoe-
covers 3-30 MHz band, using driver stage to operation is about 15 dB below peak levels. — H. nix, Z,
A 1974, AN-593, p 3.
provide total power gain of about 30 dB. If heat-
VMOS 8-W BROADBAND — Linear power am-

plifier provides 15-dB gain over entire range of
2 to 100 MHz. Negative feedback stabilizes gain
and gives 50-ohm resistive input and output
impedances. VSWR is 2:1 or less over frequency
range. Can be used as low-power amplifier or
driver for amateur radio transmitters, for boost-
ing power level of standard signal generators,
and as CB amplifier (with reduced supply volt-
age). Q, and Q2 (Siliconix VMP1) combine with
feedback resistors R, and R2 to form separate
broadband amplifiers, each delivering up to 5 W
with 15-dB gain. — G.D. Frey, VMOS Power Am-
plifiers— This Broadband Circuit Outputs 8W
with a 15 dB Gain, EDN Magazine, Sept. 5, 1977,
p 83-85.
NOTES: T, FE R ROXCUBE 0 375 1 N O.D 3E 2A FE R RITE TOflOl D.

WIND SEVEN TURNS TRIFILAR =30, UNWIND ONE
TURN FROM EACH END OF RED AND GREEN WINDINGS.
CROSS CONNECT "FINISH" RED TO "START" GREEN
WIRE FOR CENTER TAP, USE CENTER "GOLD" WINDING FOR
5012 UNBALANCED PORT.
T2 STACKPOLE 57 9130 SLEEVE BALUN CORE CERAMAG

GRADE 1 1. SIMILAR CONSTRUCTION TO T, (COUNT TURNS
AS ONE PASS THROUGH BOTH HOLES - ONE TURN)
RFC STACKPOLE 57-9130 5T =30 WIRE (L = 7.0 /jH)
RFC4
- lOpF
|
Cl, C3 LI, L2
1-1/2 T, #16 AWG Wire, 0.25" I.D. (30 nH)
C5, C6 — 56 pF I Dipped Silvered L3 1-1/2 T, #16 AWG Wire, 0.30" I.D. (35 nH)
C8 -— 36 pF
22 pF > Mica 3 T, #16 AWG Wire, Wound on 100 Ohm Resistor (45 nH)
Cl 5
L5 #16 AWG Wire, 0.8" Long, "U" Shaped (12 nH)
Cl 9
- 33 pF J
L4 #16 AWG Wire, 1.1" Long, Formed Around 0.6" Dia. Cyl.
C9, CIO — 0.001 mF Ceramic Disc RFC1, 2 (15 nH)
Cl 1 — 0.01 #F Ceramic Disc 0. 1 5 #H Molded Choke with Ferroxcube 5659065/3B Ferrite
L7
Cl 2, C 1 3 — 1 .0 #F, 35 V, Tantalum Bead on Ground Lead
RFC3
RFC4, 5
Cl 4 R 1
— 10 /iF, 25 V, Aluminum Electrolytic 7 T, #20 AWG Wire, Wound on ‘R3 ( 1 00 nH)
C2, C4, C7 R2 Ferroxcube VK200 19/4B Ferrite Choke
— 8-60 pF Compression Mica Trimmer
ARCO #404 or Equivalent 91 Ohm, 2 W, ±5% Carbon Resistor
R3 100 Ohm, 0.25 W, Potentiometer, CTS Type R101 B or
Equivalent
560 Ohm, 1 W, ±10% Carbon Resistor
R4 100 Ohm, 1 W, ±10% Carbon Resistor
10-W MARINE-BAND — Power amplifier oper- or less. Tuning range of 144-175 MHz makes ficiency is44.5%. — J. Hatchett, "25-Watt and
ating in class C from 12.5-VDC supply is de- amplifier suitable for other applications such as 10-Watt Marine Band Transmitters," Motorola,
signed for 152-162 MHz VHF marine band. amateur 2-meter and land-mobile radio. Power Phoenix, AZ, 1978, AN-595, p 4.
Switch permits reducing power output to 1 W input is 180 mW, power gain is 17.4 dB, and ef-
1133
RF WATTMETER — Calibration is accurate on all

HF bands because circuit is not frequency-sen-
sitive. Sensitivity depends on meter movement,
number of turns in primary coil, and resistive
voltage divider. With values shown, pots can be
adjusted for full-scale values from 1-14 W. C,
and C2 are 3-20 pF. Diodes are 1 N34A, 1 N60, or
equivalent. L, is 46 turns No. 28 on Amidon T-
50-2 toroid, with 2 turns No. 22 between ends
of L, for L2. To adjust, connect resistive dummy
load to one coax receptacle and RF power
source to other, with R2 at maximum resistance.
Place upper switch in position providing high-
est meter reading, and make that the FWD po-
sition. Switch to other position, which becomes
REF, and adjust C, for null reading. Reverse RF
source and load, leaving switch at FWD, and ad-
just C2 for null. Wattmeter can now be cali-
brated.— A. Weiss, QRP Low-Low Power Oper-
ating, CO, Jan. 1974, p 42-44 and 80.
20-MHz PHONE — Colpitts oscillator using HEP

53 provides excellent stability with third-over-
tone crystal. Power amplifier stage uses 2N4427
in class C common-emitter stage modulated
through collector circuit, to develop about 1.25-
W output at 28 MHz. HEP 801 FET microphone
amplifier provides high-impedance input for
crystal microphone and drives HEP 593 1C to
give about 1-W AF output. Article covers con-
struction and tune-up. — 8. Johnston, Little Bill,
73 Magazine, July 1974, p 63-64 and 66-67.
1.8-1. 9 MHz VFO — Series-tuned Clapp oscilla- able Cl provides frequency spread of exactly 23A155RPC). — D. DeMaw, More Basics on
tor using high-impedance JFET Q1 has good fre- 100 kHz. LI is 25-58 pH slug-tuned (Miller Solid-State Transmitter Design, QST, Nov.
quency stability. Diode stabilizes bias. Air vari- 43A475CBI). L2 is 10-18.7 pH slug-tuned (Miller 1974, p 22-26 and 34.
430-450 MHz 430-450 MHz
60-W LINEAR FOR 432 MHz— Suitable for mak-

ing DX contacts through Oscar satellite, as well
as for tropo and local contacts, using CW or
SSB. Motorola MRF5176 transistor provides
drive to MRF306 output stage, giving sufficient
output over range of 430-450 MHz. Requires 1-
3 W RF input. Microstrip conductors W1-W3,
each 0.077 wavelength long, provide wideband
matching and high efficiency. Article gives di-
mensioned layout for printed-circuit board and
all construction details. — J. Buscemi, A 60-Watt
Solid-State UHF Linear Amplifier, QST, July
1977, p 42-45.
Elmenco 402 or equivalent. R4 — Wirewound or carbon potentiometer,
03 — Ceramic trimmer, 100 pF; Elmenco 423 100 ohms, 2 watts, linear taper.
or equivalent. R7 — Wirewound potentiometer, 100 ohms,
C4 — Ceramic trimmer, 60 pF; Elmenco 404 10 watts.
or equivalent. RFC1 — 4 turns no. 20 enameled wire, close-
C5 — Ceramic trimmer, 40 pF; Elmenco 422 o wound. 1 /8-inch diameter.
or equivalent. RFC2, RFC4 — 6 turns no. 20 enameled wire,
CR1, CR2 — Germanium rectifier, 50 PIV, 1 1 /8-inch diameter.
A; Motorola 1N4719 or equivalent. RFC3 — 100-/xH ferrite-core choke, 500 mA.
El — Ferrite bead placed over the lead of R1 ; Two J. W. Miller 73F224AF in parallel
Amidon FT-73 or equivalent. or equivalent.
Q1 — Uhf silicon power transistor, Motorola VR1 , VR2 — Silicon Zener diode, 5.1 volts,
MRF5176. 5 watts dissipation; Motorola 1N5338 or
Q2 — Uhf silicon power transistor, Motorola equivalent.
MRF306. W1 , W2, W3 — Printed-circuit stripline. See
R3, R6 — Wirewound resistor, 1 ohm, 1 watt. text.
C4 _
S-6 RFci
-LI 1
^
50 a C7
' £
C5 — R F C2>
-L2 “ ^
1
1 ~
T > i
} rH
< r-N
x
C2
*
r~
L6- #12 AWG Wire,
-Amplifier Constructed on 0.062”
Single S ided , G 10 Circuit Board — Approximately 1.1 " Long.
I.D. (60 nH) RFC 1,2

LI ,L2-2VaT, #16 AWG Wire, 0.2' |^_0. 7"-J (10 nH)
Cut From 0.15 /iH Molded Choke with Ferroxcube 5659065/3B
L3.L4- \ 0.031 " Single Sided Ferrite Bead on Ground Lead
G10 Circuit Board (5 nH)
RFC3- 10 T, #14 AWG Wire Wound on R3
0.35F'erroxcube R1, R2- 10 Ohm, 1 W, Carbon Resistor

Ferrite Bead, 5659065/3B
R3- 10 Ohm, 2 W, Carbon Resistor
3T, #14 AWG Wire, 0.25” I.D. (50 nH) Cl ,C3,C 1 0- #462 ARCO Trim Caps (5 80 pF)
L8- C2- 15 pF
L7- Cut From 0.031 ”
Single Sided C4,C5,C6,C7 125 pF
L5- G10 Circuit Board [ Underwood Electric Co.
C8 250 pF
(8 nH To Center Tap) C9- 40 pF
Type J 101
C11 30 pF
Center T ap
C12- 0.1 , 75 V, Ceramic Disc
C13.C14- 680 pF, Allen Bradley Type FA5C
C15- 5.0 juF Tantalum
144-175 MHz 80-W SINGLE-STAGE FM MO- Uses Motorola 2N6084 land-mobile transistors
ting coils. — J. Hatchett, "VHF Power Amplifiers
BILE— Provides rated output into 50-ohm load. optimized for 12.5-V FM operation. Transistors
—
Using Paralleled Output Transistors," Moto-
Can withstand open and shorted loads for all are used inj-parallel with single-ended input and rola, Phoenix, AZ, 1972, AN-585, p 2.
load phase angles without transistor damage. output, isolated from each other by signal-split-
1135
80 W ON 2 METERS — Single-stage design using

two 2N6084 transistors combined with simple
LC components can be tuned from 144 to 175
MHz. Typical input is 20 W for 80-W output at
144 MHz. Article shows how to add 2N6083
driver stage that reduces input drive require-
C1.C3.C10 5-80 pF trimmers (ARCO 462) cut from 0.031” single-sided ment to 2.5 W. Power gain at 144 MHz is 6 dB.
G10 circuit board (5 nH)
C2 15 pF metal clad (Underwood Article covers construction and adjustment. —
Electric type J-101 *) J. Hatchett, A Solid 80 Watts for Two Meters,
cut from 0.031” single-sided
C4,C5,C6,C7 125 pF metal clad (Underwood G10 circuit
center tap) board (8 nH to Ham Radio, Dec. 1973, p 6-12.
Electric type J-101)
C8 250 pF metal clad (Underwood
Electric type J-101) number-12 wire, approximately
1.1" long (10 nH)
C9 40 pF metal clad (Underwood
Electric type J-101) 3 turns number 14, 0.25” ID
Cll 30 pF metal clad (Underwood (50 nH)
Electric type J-101)
ferrite bead (Ferrcxcube
C12 0.1 /IF, 75 V ceramic disc 5659065/3B)
C13.C14 680 pF feedthrough (Allen

RFC1.RFC2 0.15 /iH molded choke with
Bradley type FA5C)
Ferroxcube 5659065/3B ferrite
C15 5.0 /IF, 25v, aluminum elec- bead on ground lead
trolytic
10 turns number-14 wire wound
L1.L2 21/2 turns number-16, 0.2" ID
around R3
(60 nH)
1-8
c3
750pf
sb
20 METERS .
TPs TPs
350pf 350pf
40 meter
20 meters 40 meters
Amidon T-50-2 core, enameled copper wire
Li = 5.5 turns. No. 22 over !4 core circumference -L5-L6-L7 L4-L5 L6 - !_■>
L2 = 34 turns, No. 24 T-50-2 cores, enameled copper
“
L3 ~ 2.6 turns. No. 22 over % core circumference XlT
L4 = 1.5 turns. No. 24 L4 = 2 turns. No. 24
Ls = T-50-2core, 9 turns, No. 22 spaced evenly
over circumference of core L5 = 10 turns. No. 22 L5 = 14 turns. No. 22
Ls = 7 turns. No. 22 L6 = 11 turns, No. 22
RFCi = 15 turns, No. 28, Amidon FB -73 -801 jumbo bead
L? = 2 turns, No. 24 L? = 2 turns, No. 24
1-W EXCITER FOR 7 AND 14 MHz— Developed 7-MHz VFO that develops 0.45 VRMS across ler on 14 MHz (20 m). Q, is MPS6514. Q2 is
for use in simple solid-state VFO transmitter 1000-ohm load. Circuit consists of class A buffer/ 2N3906 or equivalent. Q3 is MPS-U31. All trans-
covering 40 and 20 meters for low-power op- amplifier Q, and keying switch Q2. Q3 is class C former cores are Amidon T-50-2. — A. Weiss,
eration. Adequate drive can be provided by any amplifier on 7 MHz (40 m) and frequency doub- QRP, CQ, Nov. 1977, p 54-58 and 88.
TO
s ft
LI , L2 — Rf choke (Ferroxcube VK200-19/4B Stackpole 57-9322 or Indiana General

or equiv.) F627-8Q1 toroid core.
500 mW ON 180 kHz — Meets FCC requirement
L3, L4 — Rf choke (Ferroxcube 56-590-65/3B T3 — 14 turns Microdot 260-41 18-000 25- for amateur radio operation in 160-190 kHz
or equiv.) ohm submin. coax cable (or equiv.)
wound on each of two toroid cores. Cores band with 1 -W maximu m plate input power and
T1 — Broadband 9:1 transformer on ferrite
core (Stackpole 57-1845-24B or Fair-Rite are Stackpole 57-9074 or Indiana General antenna up to 50 feet long including lead-in.
Prod. 2973000201, or equiv. See text). F624-19Q1, or equiv. Working range is about 1 mile. Uses electron-
T2 — 7 bifilar turns of No. 20 enam wire on coupled oscillator to minimize frequency shift
during modulation. RF amplifier is self-biased.
300-W LINEAR SOLID-STATE— Class A circuit design procedure for amplifier. Second part of 40-mH choke in amplifier plate circuit is nearly
using two MRF428A transistors is emitter-bal- article (May 1976, p 28-30) tells how to combine self-resonant to 180 kHz. — C. Landahl, QRP on
lasted to ensure even current-sharing. Requires four 300-W amplifiers to get 1-kW output for 180 kHz, 73 Magazine, May 1973, p 93-95.
separate 0.5-1 V regulated bias voltage source, 1.8-30 MHz — H. O. Granberg, One KW— Solid-
circuit for which is given in article along with State Style, QST, April 1976, p 11-14.
+ 13.6 V +13.6 V (MODULATED!
2.5-W AIRCRAFT AM TRANSMITTER— Oper- ohm input and output terminations. Only three
lation is95%. Supply drain is 345 mA. — "A 13-
ates from 13.6-V supply, covers frequency range transistor stages are required. Diodes limit W Broadband AM Aircraft Transmitter," Moto-
of 118-136 MHz without tuning, and has 50- downward modulation to Q2. Upward modu- rola, Phoenix, A Z, 1974, AN-507, p 5.
1137
1
1
» LI
-qrs
SM
iGGpF
* 365pF
IO-IOOpF
TRIMMER
2000pF
-SM
I47K O'
u CRI
1
9.1V
( so :
7 W FOR QRP — Operates at 7-W peak power for
cutting through interference when operating on
low power on any CW band from 80 to 10 me-
1=
TUNING
N 470pF ters with typical inefficient antenna systems of
_ SM
1200 pF^^ y portable operation. Q1 is 2N709 VFO feeding
2N697 amplifier Q3 through 2N697 buffer Q2.
Q4 is GE63 driver for Motorola HEP53001 final
amplifier Q5. Keying can be introduced at Q2,
03, or Q4. Article gives coil-winding data for all
bands and covers construction and operation in
detail. — J. Huffman, The Mini-Mite Allband QRP
Rig, 73 Magazine, July 1976, p 30-32 and 34-
35.
MEASURING PEAK POWER— Addition of am-

plifier and rectifier circuits to Heath HM-102 or
other similar RF wattmeter permits measure-
ment of transmitter peak power output. DPDT
toggle switch S2 is added to wattmeter to give
choice of measurement desired. Circuit uses
LM1458 or equivalent dual opamp. Current
passing through 1N914 diode charges 0.1-#tF
capacitor at pin 3 of U1A, delaying meter return
to zero long enough for reading of peak. When
pointer just starts moving downward, next spo-
ken word kicks it back up to peak value. To cal-
ibrate, set 10K pot so peak reading (S2 at PEP)
is equal to normal reading (S2 at NORMAL)
while using CW output of transmitter as test
signal. CR1 is 2-A 50-PIV bridge rectifier. T1 has
12.6-V center-tap 100-mA secondary.— G. D.
Rice, PEP Wattmeter— a la Heath, QST, Dec.
1976, p 30-31.
450—470 MHz AT 25 W — Power amplifier for gain at 470 MHz is 19.5 dB, and overall efficiency
Utilizing G-10 Epoxy-Glass Laminate," Moto-
land-mobile 12.5-V transmitter is constructed is 47%. — G. Young, "UHF Microstrip Amplifiers rola, Phoenix, AZ, 1976, AN-578, p 4.
on double-sided microstrip substrate. Power
ilOOpF
I KHz
SILICON DIODE
40-METER CW — Delivers about 250 mW of RF can be monitored with high-impedance head- inal frequency of 40-meter crystal. — Circuits, 73
output, operating from 6-V battery. Sidetone phones or small loudspeaker. Carrier frequency Magazine, July 1977, p 34.
NOTES: 1. All resistors in Ohms

2. All capacitors in pt unless noted otherwise 4. All trimmer capacitors are ARCO compression mica or equivalent.
3. All fixed value capacitors from 10 to 125 pF are Underwood T ype J -101 . 5. Constructed on 0.062”, single sided, G10, circuit board
VDc 12.5 V
0'7”*
i 1
RFC1, 2,3,4 - 0.15/iH, molded choke with Ferroxcube

5659065/3B ferrite bead on ground lead
0.15/iH molded choke
RFC5 -
Ferroxcube VK-200 19/4B ferrite choke 0.031 ", single f
RFC6.7 -
RFC8 - 4T #16 awg wire, wound on 10012 1 W resistor (75 nH) Formed from ' 1 | '
2T #15 awg wire, wound on 10012 2 W resistor (45 nH)
RFC9 - circuit board
10T #14 awg wire wound on 1012 2 W resistor sided, G 1 0, 0.25"
RFC10 -
IT #18 awg, dia, %" L (25 nH) 1. 4" 1.4"
!=□
LI ,2,3 -
2T #15 awg wire, V *" dia, Va" L (30 nH)
L4,6 - See outline diagram.
L5, 7 - l
#12 awg wire approximately 1 " Long (9 nH) L5
680 pF, Allen Bradley Type F A5C
Cl
L8 1,12,13
- - Outline Diagrams for Coils L5 and L7
470 pF, Allen Bradley Type SS5D
Cl 4 — 5 pF, Dipped Silvered Mica 0.25"
C 15 - L7
175-MHz 80-W MOBILE FM— Uses Motorola of power output stage minimize problems of 1
sign Techniques for an 80 7Watt, 175 MHz Trans-
transistors optimized for 12.5-V FM operation. unequal load sharing and of matching to ex- mitter for 12.5 Volt Operation," Motorola, Phoe-
All stages are class C. Signal-splitting tech- tremely low impedance levels. Overall gain is 26 nix, AZ, 1972, AN-577, p 2.
Hr
niques in input and output matching networks dB, and efficiency is 49.5%. — J. Hatchett, "De-
'
0.5'
1139
100-W LINEAR FOR 432 MHz— Medium-pow-

ered amplifier using 8560A conduction-cooled
tetrode provides extra power needed for use of
Oscar satellite in mode B on 432.15 MHz, with
drive of only 7 W. Half-wave grid is fabricated
from double-sided printed-circuit board. Capa-
citive probe to grid line serves for input cou-
pling. Half-wave plate line is capacitively tuned
by movable vanes. Article covers construction
in detail. — T. McMullen, A Tramplifier for 432
MHz, QST, Jan. 1976, p 11-15.
LI — 1-3/4 X 4-inch double-sided pc board, C3,C4 — Spring-brass flapper type tuning

spaced 7/8-inch from chassis. capacitors.
L2 — 3-1/2 X 6-1 /4-inch double-sided pc C5 — 2-1/2 X 4-inch pc board, single-
board or aluminum strip. Length from tip sided, with .01 -inch thick Teflon sheet for
of line to tube center is 7-1 /8 inches. insulation to chassis. Copper-foil side
Cl — 1 .8- to 5.1 -pF air variable, E. F. John- mounted toward the chassis wall.
son 160-0205-001. Mount on phenolic CR1 — 1/4-inch dia LED.
bracket. R1 — 27 ohm, 1-W resistor, 6 in parallel.
C2 — 1 /2-inch dia disk on center conductor R2 lel.
— 100-kli 1-W resistor 3 in paral-
of coaxial extension.
RFCi = 25t No. 28, Amidon FB 43-801 "jumbo bead” (or 100ph, Miller 4632 E)
RFC2 = 14t No. 28, Amidon FB 43-801
RFC3 = 22t No. 28, Amidon FB 43 801
Di - 1N456, 1N914 or similar switching diode
D2 = 6.8/9. 1v. Zener, 1N4736/1N4739 or 1N757
DC voltage applied to varactor tuning diode. with desired incoming signal, switching SI to
VFOFOR7 AND 14 MHz — Drift rate of Seiler var- Developed for use with 1-W exciter as solid- RECEIVE puts R4 in circuit to move oscillator
iable-frequency oscillator can be less than 100 state transmitter for low-power (QRP) opera- from operating frequency. Offset resistor R„ can
Hz if reasonable care is taken in board design tion in 40-meter and 20-meter bands. VFO runs also serve for improving bandspread on 20 me-
and parts selection. Oscillator Q, is followed by continuously to enhance stability; if oscillator ters.—A. Weiss, QRP, CO, Dec. 1977, p 88-92
buffer stages Q2 and Qa. Tuning control R, varies signal leaks through receiver and interferes and 112.
10 W AT 450 MHz— Uses Motorola MHW-710

sealed power module drawing 2.7 A on 13.8
VDC. Developed for use with fast-scan amateur
TV transmitter having audio on video carrier
and TR switching. Relay K1 is Archer (Radio
Shack) 275-206. LI is Ferroxcube VK200-20/
4B. — B. J. Brown, Super Simple 450 MHz Rig,
73 Magazine, Aug. 1976, p 72-75.
VMOS 5-W BROADBAND— Single-transistor

broadband linear amplifier uses Siliconix VMP1
to provide 15-dB gain over entire frequency
range of 2 to 100 MHz. — G. D. Frey, VMOS
Power Amplifiers — This Broadband Circuit Out-
puts 8W with a 15 dB Gain, EDN Magazine,
Sept. 5, 1977, p 83-85.
NOTE: T3 6T BIFILAR "30 ON STACKPOLE

S7 9130 SLEEVE BALUN (OBSERVE
DOTS "START WINDING"!
1200-W PEP POWER AMPLIFIER — Ceramic tet- oped through 33K cathode resistor that is band. LI and L2 are 0.15 pH, L3 and L4 are 0.31
rodes are operated as low-mu triodes, with con- shorted out by relay during operation. In pH, and L5 is 1.3 pH. PC-1 and PC-2 are 3 turns
trol grids tied to cathodes. Amplifier takes standby mode, plate current is virtually zero. No. 16 enamel wound on 50-ohm 2-W carbon
about 200-W drive. Tuned-cathode input circuit Article covers construction and operation, with resistor. — S. W. Hochman, The Ample Ampli-
presents better load to exciter. Bias is devel- emphasis on proper cooling of tubes. Separate fier, 73 Magazine, March 1973, p 50-54.
1141
L5
450-470 MHz AT 10 W — Power amplifier for

land-mobile 12.5-V transmitter is constructed
on double-sided microstrip substrate. Power
gain at 470 MHz is 14.5 dB, and overall efficiency
is 55%. — G. Young, "UHF Microstrip Amplifiers
Utilizing G-10 Epoxy-Glass Laminate," Moto-
Cl, 2, 3, 5, 6 — 1.5-20 pF, Arco 402 or equiv. LI, 2 - 5 turns #20 AWG Closewound 3/16" I.D.
C4 — 10 pf dipped mica L3, 4 — 3.9 jUhy molded choke w/ferrite core
C7, 8—0.1 juF ceramic L5 — Ferroxcube VK200 20/4B or equiv.
C9, 10 — 470 pf Feed thru Board is 1/16" thick epoxy-glass
Cl 1, 12 — 1 /if Tantalum "G-10" Dielectric with loz copper on both sides
1-kW GROUNDED GRID — Class B linear ampli- exceed 200-mA grid drive, and do not apply full tion and adjustment. — E. Hartz, 4-1000 A
fier for amateur transmitter can be switched to excitation without plate voltage. Tube requires Grounded Grid Linear, 73 Magazine, July 1974,
any band from 80 through 10 meters. Do not blower for air cooling. Article covers construc- p 17, 19-20, 22-24, and 26.
5 TURNS NO. 22 WOUND
OUTPUT
50-750 TO
ANTENNA
5 W ON 80 OR 40 m — Single 6AQ5 operating

from 200-V supply can cover all states and some
DX with CW on 40 meters as low-power ama-
teur radio station. Antenna can be simple dipole
8 feet high. LI is 15 turns No. 22 enamel on Vk-
inch plastic form, with 3 turns of insulated wire
wound around cold end of LI for L2. Article cov-
ers construction and operation and gives suit-
able 200-V voltage-doubling power supply cir-
cuit.— S. Dunn, QRP Fun on 40 and 80, 73
Magazine, Oct. 1976, p 44-46.
+13.6 VDC
MICROPHONE AMPLIFIER LIMITER ACTIVE FILTER INPUT

BATTERY
2-METER FM EXCITER— Includes both deviation and frequency synthesizers. Oscillator uses to drive new TRW and Motorola RF power mod-
tion and microphone gain controls. Low-pass 12-MHz series-resonant crystals. Voltage regu- ules. Article gives construction and alignment
filter following limiter eliminates raspy voice lator for oscillator, modulator, and audio stages details. — J. Vogt, High-Performance Two-
signal. Input takes either carbon or transistor- minimizes effects of line-voltage variation and Meter FM Exciter, Ham Radio, Aug. 1976, p 10-
amplified dynamic microphones. Phase modu- noise. Output power of 150-200 mW is enough 15.
lation used is suitable for multichannel opera-
1143
2 W FOR 20-METER CW— Motorola 2N4124

driver operates as class B amplifier. With no sig-
nal, collector current is near zero, minimizing
current drain when key is up. Tank circuit of RCA
2N5189 final is similar to that of driver. Double-
pi network in output assures good harmonic
attenuation. RMS values of RF voltages are
marked with asterisks. Protective diode CR1 is
any silicon rectifier. For portable use, supply can
C5 14-pF air variable F. Johnson L3 16 turns no. 20 enamelled on Amidon be lantern battery. — C. E. Galbreath, Low-
160-0107-001) T-68-2 toroid core, tapped 3 turns from Power Solid-State VFO Transmitter for 20 Me-
(E. B+ end
Cll 32-pF air variable F. Johnson ters, Ham Radio, Nov. 1973, p 6-11.
160-0130-001) L4 3 turns small insulated wire wound over
LI 16 turns no. 24 (E.
enamelled on Amidon B+ end of L3
T-50-2 toroid core, tapped 6 turns from L5 11 turns no. 20 enamelled on Amidon
B+ end L6 T-50-2 core
L2 2 turns small insulated wire wound over RFC1 25-/JH rf choke (Millen J300-25)
B+ end of LI
50-W PUSH-PULL — Single RF power amplifier load impedances, and produces 50 W peak en- roid transformers. — W. P. O'Reilly, Transmitter
stage uses broadband transmission-line trans- velope power from 28-V supply over band of 2- Power Amplifier Design, Wireless World, Sept.
formers, operates between 50-ohm source and 30 MHz. Article gives design equations for to-
1975, p 417-422.
CR1-CR4, inet . — 400
PRV, 1-A Silicon
diode.
LI — Slug-tuned induc-
tor, 0.5 to 3 mH {J.
W. Miller No. 9003).
L2 — Slug-tuned induc-
tor, 2 to 8 mH {J.
W. Miller No. 9004).
T1 — Power trans-
former, 250 V ct
and 6.3 V ac (Stan-
cor PS-8416 or
equiv.).
VR1, diode,
Zener VR2, 100
VR3volt.-
Y1 - 160 to 190 kHz
-320V FIL. PLATE
1 W ON 175 kHz — Simple one-tube circuit with onance with crystal used, then adjust coupling mast insulated from ground, with transmitter
zener-regulated power supply provides ama- between them until meter between plate and directly at its base.— J. V. Hagan, A Crystal-Con-
teur CW operation in 30-kHz segment of long- ground reads correct current for legal limit of 1- trolled Converter and Simple Transmitter for
wave (VLF) spectrum. Adjust LI and L2 to res- W power input to final stage. Antenna is vertical 1750-Meter Operation, QST, Jan. 1974, p 19-22.
10W FOR 220 MHz — Class C RF power amplifier

for VHF FM transmitter has stable gain of 20 dB
for operating bandwidth of 40 MHz. Article
gives design procedure using Smith chart and
ci
covers construction and tune-up. — J. DuBois,
20-pF metal-clad mica capacitor LI 1 turn number 24 wire, 1/4” ID 220-MHz RF Power Amplifier for VHF FM, Ham
(El Menco MCM 01/002/-
CA200DO) L2 copper strap, 0.032" thick, 0.25” Radio, Sept. 1973, p 6-8.
wide x 0.75” long
C2,C6 0.001-/L4F metal-clad mica capaci-
L3 0.8” lead of capacitor C6
tor (El Menco MCM 01/002/-
CA103DO) (0.001-/1F disc)
RFC1.RFC4 low-Q rf choke (Ferroxcube
C3,C5 40-pF metal-clad mica capacitor RFC5 VK200-20/4B)
CA400DO) RFC2 2 turns no. 24 wound around
390-ohm, 1/4-watt resistor RFC 5
C6 100-pF metal-clad mica capacitor
RFC3 2 turns no. 20 wound around
CA102DO) 390-ohm, 1-watt resistor
C1ili f3.6V
F\ZVl
n/y;
L8 L9
140-180 MHz AT 30 W — Two-transistor ampli-

fier provides gain of over 20 dB for VHF marine,
amateur, and commercial transmitters. Trim-
mers are tuned for peak output at center fre-
quency in10-MHz range of interest. Will operate Ql - MRF237
Q2 - MRF238
into 30:1 mismatch without damage. — H. RFC 2 — 10 turns. No. 20 AWG, Enameled on 470-ohm,
Cl - 0.001 (if, 50 V, Erie Disc 1/2 W Resistor with Ferrite Bead Ferroxcube
Burger and T. Bishop, "Two VHF Highband Gain C2 - 39 pF Dipped MICA 5659065/4B
C3 — 24 pF Dipped MICA
Blocks Form 20-dB, 30-Watt Amplifier Chain," C4 - 91 pF Dipped MICA
RFC 3 — 10 turns, No. 20 AWG, Enameled on 270-ohm,
1/2-W Resistor with Ferrite Bead Ferroxcube
Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, EB-53. C5 — 8.0—60 pF ARCO 404 Trimmer 5659065/4B
C6, CIO - 15-115 pF ARCO 406 Trimmer RFC 5 - Ferroxcube VK20020/4B
C7 - 250 pF and 100 pF UNELCO in Parallel
LI - 1.3" X 0.1" (3.30 X 0.254 cm) Airline Inductor
C8, 12, 14 - 0.1 jiF, 50-Vdc, Erie Disc
C9 - 82- pF Dipped MICA L2 — 0.6" X 0.1" (1.52 X 0.254 cm) Airline Inductor
C 1 1 — 500-pF Dipped MICA L3 Base Lead Ql
L4 - Collector Lead Ql
C13 - 0.018 /jF Chip
C15 — 1-/iF, 35-Vdc, Tantalum L5 - Airline Inductor and 1-turn, No. 18 AWG, 0.25" (0.64 cm) I
C16 - 680-pF Allen-Bradley Feedthrough L6 - 1,9" X 0.1" (4.83 X 0.254 cm) Airline Inductor
C17 - 100-pF Dipped MICA L7 - 0.7" X 0.1" (1.78 X 0.254 cm) Airline Inductor
R1 - 150-ohm, 1 /2-Watt L8 — 0.9" X 0.1" (2.29 X 0.254 cm) Airline Inductor
RFC 1,4- 0. 15-jiH Molded Choke with Ferrite Bead L9 - 1.4" X 0.1" (3.56 X 0.254 cm) Airline Inductor
Ferroxcube 5659065/48
L10 - 10 turns, No. 20 AWG. Enameled Wire 0.62" (0.159 cm) I.D
4: i BALUN
PAGE 162 ARRL
HANDBOOK 1975
ROTARY SWITCH
ADJUSTABLE
FOR
LOADING
to give 4: 1 ratio. Article covers construction and

400-W PUSH-PULL — Grounded-grid linear can feed either one-band or all-band tuner for adjustment. — B. Baird, Build This Inexpensive
push-pull power amplifier requires no neutral- amateur radio bands. Balun is 8 turns of 72-ohm 400 Watt Amplifier, 73 Magazine, Holiday issue
izing, uses balun for push-pull excitation, and twin-line wound on Amidon 2-inch toroid core
1976, p 22-23.
1.6-30 MHz 20-W HIGH-GAIN DRIVER— Broad-

band amplifier operating from 12-V supply uses
Motorola MRF433 power transistors for class
AB operation and MHW591 as predriver. For
class A operation, power transistors should be
MRF426. Q2 does not require heatsink because
its peak dissipation is under 1 W. Power gain is
55 dB well beyond four-octave band of ampli-
fier, and input VSWR is under 1.2.— H. O. Gran-
berg, "Low-Distortion 1 .6 to 30 MHz SSB Driver
Designs," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z, 1977, AN-779,
Q1 - M JE 240
R3 — Optional
R4, R5 - 5. 6 Ohm*, 1/4 W Q2, Q3 - MRF433
HI - MHW591
R6, R7 - 47 Ohms, 1/4 W p7.
Cl, C2, C5, C6, C7 - 0.01 HF Chip T1, T2 — 4:1 and 1:4 Impedance Transformers, respectively.
C3, C4 - 1800 pF Chip (See discussion on transformers.) Ferrite Beads are
C8 — 10pF/35V Electrolytic Fair-Rite #2643006301 or equivalent)
12V
CR1 — General-purpose silicon diode, 300 Q2, Q3, Q5, Q8 - N-channel JFET, 300
PI V, 1 N645 or equiv. Q7, equiv.
Q9 — Npn transistor, 300 \f(BR). Texas
V (br), Texas Inst., A5T6449.
Q1, Q4 - N -channel JFET, 30 \/(br). 2N5246 Q6 — N-channel JFET, 30 V (BR)> 2N5950 or Inst., A5T5058.
or equiv.
identify original tube pins. VIA and V2A use justing R9. Circuit includes first and second
TRANSISTORS FOR AF TUBES — Article covers dual-cascode JFETs, while voice-operated audio stages. Voltages indicate proper operat-
replacement of tubes in Drake T-4XB transmit- transmitter relay control V2B and AM modula- ing points. Source resistors may require adjust-
ter with solid-state equivalent circuits mounted tor V3 use high-voltage Darlington. Q9 collector ment.— H. J. Sartori, Solid-Tubes — a New Life
in 7-pin and 9-pin miniature plugs. Numbers voltage is set at 150 V during standby by ad- for Old Designs, QST, April 1977, p 45-50.
CIO 15-W POWER AMPLIFIER FOR 440 MHz— Power

gain of 10 dB increases effective range of ama-
RFC i 680
teur transmitter. Narrow-band amplifier using
Motorola MRF618 internally matched 12.5-V
controlled-Q transistor can be tuned from 430
to 450 MHz. Multiple L sections using 50-ohm
microstrip line and mica compression variable
capacitors provide input-match and collector-
load transformations. Article gives printed-cir-
cuit board layout for U-shaped 0.112-inch-wide
stripline inductors W1 and W2. RFC1 is ferrite
bead, RFC2 is 8 turns No. 22 enamel closewound
on '/b-inch form, and RFC3 is 4 turns No. 22
enamel closewound on 'i-inch form. — R. Olsen,
Build This Solid-State PA for 440 MHz, QST,
Feb. 1977, p 37-38.
PTT LATCH — Eliminates need for holding down

microphone switch continuously while trans-
mitting. U1 is inverting hex buffer, and U2 is
dual CMOS D flip-flop. When SI is depressed,
input to U1 A goes low and its output goes high,
making U2A and U1B together turn on Q2 and
energize relay K1 . Q3-Q5 serve as optional silent
power switch for use when relay noise is objec-
tionable.— B. Lambing, DC Latch Circuit, Ham
Radio, Aug. 1975, p 42-44.
V6
*
BAND-SWITCHED BAND-SWITCHED
TUNED CIRCUITS SCREEN TUNED CIRCUITS SCREEN
250V 150V
PREM
IXER
6HS
6*
CR4-CR5 — General-purpose silicon diode, Q15 - Npn transistor 300 \/(BR) TIS131. VR6 — Zener diode, 1 5 V, 400 mW, 1 N965
300 PIV (1N645I. Q16 — N-channel JFET 30 v/gp) 2N5950. VR7 — Zener diode, 150 V, 5 W, Motorola
1N5383B.
Q14 - N -channel dual-gate MOSFET, 25 VR4 - Zener diode, 12 V, 400 mW, 1N759.
VR5 - Zener diode, 6.8 V, 400 mW, 1N754.
V/BRI 3N206.
TRANSISTORS FOR MIXER AND VR TUBES— High-level mixer V7 operates over large dy- LI isolate JFET from high-voltage tube
Premixer V6 in Drake T-4XB transmitter is re- namic range of signals coming from IF stage. circuit.— H. J. Sartori, Solid-Tubes— a New Life
placed by dual-cascode MOSFETs, with CR4 Output of mixer is low level, about 4 VRMS for Old Designs, QST, April 1977, p 45-50.
protecting MOSFET from keyed-ground circuit. maximum. Decoupling capacitor C9 and choke
1147
35-W CLASS D ON 40, 80, OR 160 m— Can be

used on any of three bands by changing values
as set forth in parts table. Article gives circuit
design procedure in detail. Power gain is about
27 dB. Almost any type of RF amplifier providing
about 100 mW can be used as driver. Vs is 25 V
or less, and Vcc is 28 V.— F. H. Raab, High-Effi-
ciency RF Power Amplifiers, Ham Radio , Oct.
1974, p 8-29.
core 57-1753 core (30.5 /iH) Secondary windings are each 25 turns
80 meters 44 turns no. 26 on Perma- no. 26 on same core
core 57-1753 core (15A/1H) primary is 8 turns no. 20 enamelled wire
40 meters 36 turns no. 26 on Perma- wound through 6 Ceramic Magnetics
core 57-1677 core (8.1 /1H )
CN-20 cores (two parallel stacks).
L2 16 turns no. 26 on Permacore 56-3596 Secondary is 4 turns no. 20, center-
ferrite core (1.0 fJ.y\) tapped, through same cores
L3 160 meters 52 turns no. 26 on Perma- primary is 4 turns no. 20 enamelled wire,
core 57-1753 core (20.9 /!H) center-tapped to C5, wound through 12
80 meters 42 turns no. 26 on Perma- Ceramic Magnetics CN-20 cores (two
core 57-1677 core (10.6^H) parallel stacks). Secondary is 4 turns no.
40 meters 30 turns no. 26 on Perma- 20 through same cores
core 57-1677 core (5.6 fdH )
C26 — 24Q-pF polystyrene. L10 — 12 turns No. 24 enam. wire, center tapped,
wound over L9.
C27 — 47-pF NP0 type.
C28 — 4.5 to 25-pF ceramic trimmer (Centralab L1 1 — 24 turns No. 24 enam. wire on an Amidon
T-80-2 toroid core.
822-CN or equiv.).
C29 — 4 to 53.5-pF variable (Millen 22050 or Q5, Q6 - Motorola MPF102 JFET or equiv.
equiv.). Q7, Q8 - 2N2222 transistor.
C30, C31 — .002-^F polystyrene. R21 — 500-ohm control (Radio Shack 271-226 or
C32, C35, C40 - 0.1 nF. equiv.).
C33 — 47-pF silver mica. RFC8, RFC9 - 1-mH rf choke (Millen J300-1000
or equiv.).
C34, C41, C42 — .001 jiF silver mica
C36, C37, C38, C39, C43 - .01 nF. VR3 - Zener diode, 9.1 volt, 1 watt.
push class C doubler amplifier stage. Doubling
80-METER VFO — Used in place of crystal-con- 160-meter band. Colpitts oscillator uses JFET gives desired 80-meter output.— D. DeMaw and
trolled oscillator in low-power (QRP) amateur Q5 with series-tuned tank for good stability. Q6 J. Rusgrove, Learning to Work with Semicon-
transmitter. Tuning range is 1750-1875 kHz in provides isolation between oscillator and push- ductors, QSTf Oct. 1975, p 38-42.
1148
1 kW ON 2 METERS — Developed for moon-

bounce communication. Article covers con-
struction, with emphasis on insulation and
cooling, and gives circuit of 3-kV power supply
required. — R. W. Campbell, Kilowatt Linear Am-
29-35. plifier for 2 Meters, 73 Magazine, Dec. 1973, p
LI — 6.05- to 12.5-jliH adjustable coil (Miller L5 — 5 turns No. 28 enam. wire wound over Amidon T-50-6 core. Tap 7 turns above
42A105CBI or equiv.). L4. C26 end.
L2 — 1 7 turns No. 28 enam. wire on Amidon L6 — 30 turns No. 28 enam. wire on an L9 — 3 turns No. 28 enam. wire wound over
T-50-6 core.
Amidon T-50-6 core. Tap 10 turns above L8.
1-3 — 10 turns No. 28 enam. wire, center C23 end. L10 — 20 turns No. 22 enam. wire on an
tapped, wound over L2. L7 —L6.4 turns No. 28 enam. wire wound over Amidon T-68-6 core.
L4 — 1 7 turns No. 28 enam. wire on an L1 1 — 29 turns No. 22 enam. wire on an
Amidon T-50-6 core. L8 — 30 turns No. 28 enam. wire on an Amidon T-68-6 core.
21—21.25 MHz with VFO — Developed for low- must be shifted away from operating frequency 22, each on Amidon FT- 50-61 core. Article cov-
power CW work in 15-meter amateur band. Col- during receive periods. Supply is 12 V at 1.3 A. ers construction and tune-up. — J. Rusgrove, A
pitts oscillator Q1 runs continuously at 10.5- C6 is 4—53.5 pF. RFC4 is 16 turns No. 28 enamel, 15-Meter Goober Whistle, QST, Jan. 1976, p 16-
10.625 MHz during transmit and receive, for RFC5 is 1 1 turns No. 22, and RFC6 is 6 turns No. 19.
good frequency stability, so VFO frequency
1149
BIAS SWITCH — Automatic electronic bias

TO NEGATIVE switching improves efficiency of negatively
BIAS POINT
biased linear class B RF power amplifier such as
Heath SB-200 because no power is dissipated
under no-signal conditions. Transistors are cho-
sen to withstand maximum negative voltages
switched, about -150 VDC. Capacitor across
collector-base junction of Q1 can be adjusted to
reduce turn-on time of switch. With no RF drive
from transmitter, amplifier is biased to cutoff
and plate current is zero. Switch will operate at
RF threshold of about 2 V and apply class B bias
voltage to amplifier. As RF drive is increased,
plate current increases. With transmitter in SSB
mode, plate current is zero with no speech. For
speech, plate current increases with RF driving
voltage. — F. E. Hinkle, Electronic Bias Switch
for Negatively Biased Amplifiers, Ham Radio,
Nov. 1976, p 27-29.
2—30 MHz SSB DRIVER — Two-stage comple-

mentary-symmetry amplifier combines single-
ended impedance matching with high-gain
push-pull design to provide up to 25 W PEP for
driver applications. Provides good harmonic re-
jection and low intermodulation distortion.
Supply voltage range is 22-30 V. Low-imped-
ance windings of T1 and T2 use 1 turn of copper
braid, with 2 turns No. 22 for primary of T1 and
4 turns No. 22 for secondary of T2. — H. Gran-
berg, "A Complementary Symmetry Amplifier
for 2-30 MHz SSB Driver Applications," Moto- Cl 1 — 2000 pF Q1, Q3 - MRF432
rola, Phoenix, AZ, 1975, EB-32. C13 - 100 pF (Typ.) Q2, Q4 - MRF433
R1, R4, R5 — 22 ohms/1/4 W

T1, T2 — See text
R2, R3 - 330 ohms/1/2 W
R6 - 15 ohms/1/4 W All capacitors are ceramic chips. Union Carbide
R8, R9 - 220 ohms/1 W type 1225 or 1813 or Varadyne size 18 or 14
R10, R11 - 6.8 ohms/1/2 W or equivalent.
R7 — 560—680 ohms/2 W All resistors are carbon composite.
50-W RF — Direct-reading RF wattmeter devel- transferred to mismatched loads. RF line cur- Average product of voltage and current appears
oped for use at 27.12 MHz is accurate to within rent and voltage are sensed by current trans- as DC reading on microammeter. — F. C. Gabriel,
1% of full scale. Circuit can be adapted for other former and voltage divider that cap be remotely Compact RF Wattmeter Measures up to 50
frequencies up to about 100 MHz. Does not re- located. Meter is driven by 1C balanced mixer Watts, Electronics, Nov. 8, 1973, p 122.
quire subtraction of two readings to find power functioning as four-quadrant analog multiplier.
1.6-30 MHz 20-W LINEAR DRIVER— Broadband

amplifier using inexpensive plastic RF power
transistors provides total power gain of about
25 dB for driving SSB transmitter power ampli-
fiers to levels up to several hundred watts. Sup-
ply is 13.6 V. Circuit is stable even with load
mismatches of 10:1. — H. O. Granberg, "Low-
Distortion 1.6 to 30 MHz SSB Driver Designs,"
R12 — 130 Ohms, 1/4 W

B - Ferrite Beads (Fair-Rite Prod. Corp. #2643000101 c
Ferroxcube #56 590 65/3B)
Cl — 39 pF Dipped Mica
C2, C3 - 680 pF Ceramic Disc D1 , D2 - 1N4001
C4, CIO — 220 #F , 4 V, T antalum
C5, C7, Cl 1 , C13 - 0.1 fiF Ceramic Dis Q1 , Q2 — MRF476
C6 — 56 pF Dipped Mica Q3, Q4 - MRF475
C8, C9 — 1200 pF Ceramic Disc pedance Transformer
T1 , T2 — 4:1
C12, C14 - 10 #F. 25 V Tantalum pedance T ransformer
rmn
OHMS
50
I OUTPUT
J2
B
RF
,0c K
IN MICROFARADS (jiF) ; OTHERS

ARE IN PICOFARADS { pF OR jjJjF
RESISTANCES ARE IN OHMS', CASE TO -39

k -1000. M» I 000 000
- 12V DC +
C8, CIO - 500 pF. L2 — 3 turns No. 22 insulated wire wound L5, L6 — 18 turns No. 18 or 20 enamel wire
C9 - 1000 pF. over L3. Q1
wound on a 5/16-inch diameter plastic
LI — 1 1 turns No. 30 enamel wire spaced L3 — Radio Shack choke (273-101 ). form. Space turns so that the length of
to occupy an entire Miller 4500-4 coil L4 — 5 turns No. 22 insulated wire wound each coil is 1-1/4 inches.
form. over ground end of L3. Q1 — Radio Shack transistor (RS2038).
40-METER 3.5-W AMPLIFIER — Designed for use conditions are poor. Requires about 350-mW ics low. Use heatsink for Q1. — T. Mula, Codzila
with low-power (QRP) transmitter when band input. Half-wave filter at output keeps harmon- 1, QST, Feb. 1977, p 14-15.
CHAPTER 100
Voltage-Controlled Oscillator Circuits
Includes two-phase and quadrature oscillators, start-up control, reactance

switching, remote fine tuning, and other methods of using DC control voltage
to vary oscillator frequency over various portions of range from 5 Hz to 150
MHz. See also Frequency Synthesizer, Function Generator, Oscillator, Pulse
Generator, Servo, and Sweep chapters.
LOCKED 90° OUTPUTS — Delivers two-phase tiplier 1C driving 8038 ICs serving as VCOs. Tri- inally zero, whereas with conventional phase-
(sine and cosine) outputs locked together. Fre- angular outputs of oscillators are fed to multi- locked loop circuitry the capture range may be
quency can be varied over wide range by alter- plier inputs for phase control. Lower-cost 566 exceeded or phase error can be large. — J. M.
ing bias current with 10K pot that produces VCO can be used if sinusoidal outputs are not Worley,
Dec. 1976,Two-Phase
p 41. V.C.O., Wireless World,
common-mode output voltage in NE5596 mul- needed. Phase error over tuning range is nom-
1151
REMOTE FINE TUNING — Addition of voltage-

variable capacitance diode to crystal feedback
path provides capacitance range of 50 to 12 pF
with tuning voltage range of 0-30 V. Diode sup-
plements 2-60 pF trimmer capacitor that ad-
justs oscillator frequency with respect to con-
trol-voltage input. Inverting input of A,
connects to reference voltage VBB. which is
available on pin of MC10116 and is center volt-
age of output signal swing of amplifier. A2 is
connected as Schmitt trigger to give high-speed
rise and fall times. Frequency deviation on
either side of center is function of crystal fre-
quency and ranges from ±50 to ±300 PPM for
crystals between 1 and 20 MHz. — B. Blood,
Fine-Tune This Oscillator with Voltage, EDN
100:1 FREQUENCY RANGE— Circuit provides

good stability and excellent linearity over wide
operating range. For values shown and +15 V
supply, circuit transfer function is about 1 kHz/
V over 100:1 frequency range, with linearity
error less than 0.5%. Although circuit does not
have sine-wave output, triangle output is easily
converted to sine wave by filtering to remove
harmonics. Article traces circuit operation. — G.
Bank, A Wideband, Linear VCO, EDNIEEE Mag-
azine, July 15, 1971, p 49-50.
FAST SYNCHRONIZING— Combination of Phase relationship between outputs of IC3 de- IC6. If VCO frequency is low, IC6 counts up at rate
phase splitter and DAC provides accurate syn- pends on whether VCO is higher or lower than proportional to frequency difference and deliv-
chronization ofhigh-stability VCO with external reference, while frequency of IC3 outputs de- ers increasing control voltage to VCO as re-
reference frequency. 1C, divides reference fre- pends on difference between oscillator and ref- quired for increasing oscillator frequency. — H.
quency by4 and provides two signals 90° apart, erence frequencies. Schmitt triggers IC„ and 1C, W. Cooper, Oscillator Synchronizer Is Fast Act-
while IC2 divides VCO frequency similarly by 4. supply clock and up/down control to counter ing, EDN Magazine, July 20, 1973, p 83-84.
1153
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS
OUTPUT OF
SYNCHRONIZING
LINEAR VCO — Two sections of LM3900 quad

linear opamp provide linear response for inputs
of 2-12 VDC. Circuit can be adjusted with 1-
megohm pot so 4-V input produces 400-Hz
square wave at output, 5 V gives 500 Hz, etc.
First opamp is connected as integrator and sec-
ond as Schmitt trigger. When Schmitt output is
high, transistor is turned on and diverts current
away from noninverting input so integrator out-
put ramps down toward ground. — C. Sond-
geroth. More PLL Magic, 73 Magazine, Aug.
1976, p 56-59.
START-UP CONTROL — Simple, smooth start-

up circuit for phase-locked oscillator maintains
synchronism with AC line despite presence of
large transients, and maintains phase-angle
limits as required for controlling firing angle of
SCR. Article describes how two separate loops
are used in circuit to achieve required locking
with line. Values of R6, R7, Rs, C5, and C6 are cho-
sen to meet system response time. Other un-
marked values depend on operating factors; for
60-Hz line and 6X frequency multiplication by
VCO, typical values are R, 39K, R2 27K, R3 47K,
C, 0.1 gf, and C2 0.22 /xF. — J. C. Hanisko, Five
10's Make Ainsworth Oscillator with Start-Up
Control, EDN Magazine, March 5, 1977, p 113
and 115.
+ 15 V
(As shown, f is variable from 5 Hz to 5 kHz.)

1 Ground unused CMOS switch terminals.
LINEAR VCO — Operates over control-voltage

t*, = R2.
range of +10 mV to +10 V to provide either Can be used for instrumentation or electronic Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
square or triangle outputs from 5 Hz to 5 kHz.
music applications.— W. G. Jung, "1C Timer 1977, p 174-179.
1-kHz VCO — Changes in control voltage input

are used to vary nominal 1-kHz output of
CD4007 CMOS voltage-controlled oscillator
proportionately. Values of R and C can be
changed to obtain other nominal frequencies. —
W. J. Prudhomme, CMOS Oscillators, 73 Mag-
azine, July 1977, p 60-63.
0-10 kHz WITH 0-10 V CONTROL— CA3130

MVBR generates pulses of constant amplitude
V and width T2. Average output voltage is ap-
plied to noninverting input of comparator
through integrating network R3-C2. Compara-
tor output signal from pin 6 is fed through R4
and D4 to inverting terminal 2 of A1 for adjust-
ing MVBR interval T3 so EAVG is equal to control
voltage. — "Linear Integrated Circuits and MOS/
NJ, 1977, p 269.
R, +15V
EXPONENTIAL VCO — Can be driven with linear Values shown give timing-current range of 10 allow higher and more practical value for actual
time base of voltage and used with logarithmic nA to 100 fiA, yielding frequency range of 1 Hz input voltage to circuit. — W. G. Jung, "1C Timer
frequency display, as in frequency-response to 10 kHz. Input voltage range of 60 mV per Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
tests. Useful range of circuit is four decades. decade is obtained from voltage divider R,-Rj to
1977, p 174-179.
1155
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS
TUNING BY REACTANCE SWITCHING— Tuning

voltage VT in range of 0 to 7 V changes effective
capacitance during peak positive portion of col-
lector voltage cycle, to provide tuning over
range of about 90 to 150 MHz. Reactance-
switching HP 5082-3188 diode CR1 switches in
additional capacitance for oscillator using Mo-
torola 2N5208 transistors. — C. Weber, VCO Re-
actance Switching Provides Broad TuningR2
D1
Range, EON Magazine, March 20, 1977, p 151
and 153.
MV 2 108
— 100
Wv—k
-Hh1
0.1 mF xc < 10
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED CRYSTAL— Voltage-

variable capacitance tuning diode in series with
crystal feedback path of Motorola MC10116 1C
gives frequency deviation of about ±50 PPM for
1-MHz crystal when using tuning voltage range
A/W
of 0-25 VDC. Deviation is greater at higher crys-
510
tal frequencies. — B. Blood, "1C Crystal Con-
trolled Oscillators," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z,
1977, AN-41 7B, p 6.
Rp = 510 fl to Vg£ or 50 fl to V-py.
FAST-SLEW VCO DRIVER— High-performance small-signal bandwidths up to 86 MHz. Input high gain. RE is 250 ohms, R, is 100, R3 is 4.3K,
circuit slews at 4000 Wigs when operating from opamp can be M. S. Kennedy Model 770 or other R5 is 170, and Ra is 90. — H. Bunin, Low Cost VCO
80-V supply and provides output levels up to fast-input unit having -6 dB per octave rolloff. Driver Amplifiers Really Perform If Designed
+30 VDC. Circuit handles large-signal modula- Operation in transimpedance configuration Right, EDN Magazine, Oct. 5, 1974, p 51-55.
tion rates up to 20 MHz for 60-V varactors and means associated buffer amplifier can have
L
2
52 -MHz WITH WC FM— Voltage-variable ca-

50 a
pacitor C0 provides ±75 kHz modulation of
basic 52-MHz transistor oscillator operating
from 15-V supply. Modulation linearity is good
for voltage inputs up to ±200 mV, making cir-
cuit suitable for commercial FM use. — "FM
Modulation Capabilities of Epicap WC's," Mo-
torola, Phoenix, A Z, 1973, AN-210, p 2.
1 .5-2.5 kHz SINE-WAVE — Three-section phase-

shift oscillator is linear over its frequency range
and has good sine waveform. Phase-shifting
network is included in feedback loop of ampli-
fier to give voltage-controlled oscillator ac-
tion.— "Low Frequency Applications of Field-
Effect Transistors," Motorola, Phoenix, A Z,
1976, AN-51 1A,p 8.
synthesizers. Can be synchronized to another square-wave signal having 5-10 V peak can be output level to 0 V. R2 and R3 serve as coarse and
oscillator. Uses 555 timer in astable mode, with fed in at R19 for differentiation, and resulting fine frequency controls. Tr, can also be BFX11
Trla supplying constant current to C2. R12 and R13 spikes used to control threshold voltage of 555. or BFX36. — T. W. Stride, Voltage Controlled Os-
should be multiturn pots. Synchronizing R4 sets minimum frequency. R22 sets average cillator, Wireless World, Oct. 1977, p 66.
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR 1157
CIRCUITS
SIMPLE VCO DRIVER — Provides full output of

60 V P-P up to 1 MHz. Slew rate is 200 V//xs, and
small-signal bandwidth is 5 MHz. Uses fast-
input opamp, voltage buffer, and simple com-
pensation technique. C2 is trimmed for stability,
while C, is adjusted to increase slew rate and
bandwidth. — H. Bunin, Low Cost VCO Driver
Amplifiers Really Perform If Designed Right,
EDN Magazine, Oct. 5, 1974, p 51-55.
DOUBLING CONTROL RANGE— Circuit doubles

frequency-deviation ratio of given VCO. Control
voltage of MC1658 VCO, with range of 0 to -2
V, is attenuated and then applied to AM685
opamp comparator. When control voltage
reaches an extreme and crosses over amplifier's
reference voltage, detector switches to oppo-
site state. Circuit output is thus either that of
VCO or VCO divided by 2. Article describes op-
eration in detail. — E. Kane, Expander Doubles
VCO Frequency Deviation, EDN Magazine, Jan.
20, 1977, p 94.
QUADRATURE OSCILLATOR USES MULTI- readjusted for best compromise between dis-
PLIERS—4214 differential multipliers eliminate tortion and speed of amplitude buildup. — Y. J.
need for opamps in quadrature oscillator in while R„ R2, and C, provide positive feedback to Wong, Design a Low Cost, Low-Distortion, Pre-
which frequency is controlled by external DC sustain oscillation. R, should be about equal to cision Sine-Wave Oscillator, EDN Magazine,
voltage. R3, R4, R5, and D, form diode limiter. R, R2 about 20R, and C, about 10C. R2 can be Sept. 20, 1978, p 107-113.
CHAPTER 101
Voltage-Level Detector Circuits

Includes undervoltage, overvoltage, voltage-window, peak, trough, zero-
crossing, and pulse-period-window detectors. See also Battery-Charging,
Instrumentation, Power Control, Switching, and Voltage Measuring chapters.
FAIL-SAFE TTL INTERFACE— Diode and FET loss of operating speed. D, should be high-
protect SN74121 high-speed level detectorfrom speed germanium diode with breakdown volt-
excessive opamp output voltage. If input of age above highest positive output of amplifier
opamp goes too far negative, positive-going (usually about 15 V). — K. I. Wolfe, A Safer Ana-
output will cause breakdown of TTL input. Pro- log-to-Digital Interface, EON Magazine, March
V*
tective interface makes circuit fail-safe without 5, 1974, = p1274.
V
12-V MONITOR — Voltage-limit sensor gives
visual indication that voltage in auto or boatR>
electric system is satisfactory for operation of
critical electronic equipment. Combination of
zener diodes D1 and D2 acting with base-emit-
I1 ter voltage drops of Q1 and 03 makes any volt-
age less than 13.5 V turn on amber No. 330 pilot
lamp (14 V at 80 mA|, while voltage above 15.2
V turns on red pilot lamp of same type. Transis-
tors are Motorola MPS 3704. D1 is 1N5243B 13-
V zener, and D2 is 1N5245B 15-V zener. — M. J.
Moss, Voltage Limit Sensor, 73 Magazine, May
v+
1973, p 53-54.
' 3905 io kn
LTR
8 V A' V+c
Alarm
Output:
2 6
R/C E 7 Undervoltage
L 4
GND High =
1 4.0»E,n>0 0
UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM — 3905 timer output
2 8 0 > E|N >4 o goes high when power supply drops below pre-
3 E,n>8 +12 determined voltage level. Timer is connected as
2 8-0 > E|n >4 +12
1 4.0»E(N>0 0 inverting comparator that compares fraction of
supply voltage (as set by R,) with fixed voltage-
4-8 V WINDOW— CA3098 dual-input precision current can be up to 150 mA.— G. J. Granieri, comparison threshold of 2 V for timer. Output
level detector tells if data input signal is above Precision Level Detector 1C Simplifies Control can be used to drive suitable alarm indicator. —
or below preset levels of 4 and 8 V. Table gives Circuit Design, EDN Magazine, Oct. 5, 1975, p W. G. Jung, "1C Timer Cookbook," Howard W.
output states for various input levels. Output 69-72. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, p 230-231.
1158
V+ 1159
VOLTAGE-LEVEL DETECTOR CIRCUITS
Di
POWER-FAILURE ALARM — Buzzer sounds and diode. B, is 1.5-6 VDC Radio Shack 273-004 or
red LED D3 comes on when AC power fails, as equivalent buzzer, and K,-o is Radio Shack 275-
reminder that clocks will need resetting. Green 211 or equivalent 117-VAC SPDT relay. — C. R.
LED D, indicates that alarm is plugged in. D2 is Graf, The Powerlarm, CQ, Feb. 1977, p 47 and
Radio Shack 276-1103 or equivalent silicon 73.
u
10k
-yW—
OVERVOLTAGE ALARM — Connection shown
D 1/2 Q
CD4013AE OUTPUT -o for 3905 timer makes output go high for ener-
CLOCK DRIVE gizing suitable alarm when supply voltage rises
R above predetermined level. Timer is connected
CHANNEL 1
as noninverting comparator that compares its
fixed voltage-comparison threshold of 2 V with
fraction of supply voltage determined by set-
SELECT q_ 10k
ting of R,. Optional resistor R4 can be added if
D 1/2 Q some hysteresis is desirable to prevent tripping
V//-
CD4013AE
CHANNEL 2^ DRIVE of alarm by momentary fluctuations of
CLOCK OUTPUT
C D Q CHANNEL 2
supply. — W. G. Jung, "1C Timer Cookbook,"
COMMON 231.
COMMON COMMON
alarmO SET 6 ORESETetc
MULTI CHANNEL ALARM— Half of CD4013AE and either LED or audio alarm. Alarm condition
flip-flop serves as latching AND gate in each is held until operator resets system by applying
'j i VZ-VCC-3 VOLTS
channel being monitored for overvoltage, voltage to common set terminal. Article shows
overtemperature, or any other out-of-tolerance how to obtain additional flexibility by adding RCL- 400
condition that can be represented by logic 1 NAND and AND gates to each select input and
level applied to terminal that connects to clock to common alarm input. — I. C. Nichols, CMOS
inputs of all flip-flops. Any number of additional "D" Flop Makes Latching "AND" Gate, EDN
channels can be paralleled to common termi- Magazine, April 20, 1974, p 89 and 91.
nals. Each channel has own transistor driver LED VOLTAGE MONITOR— Uses Litronix RCL-
400 current-controlled LED having built-in volt-
age-sensing 1Cthat turns on LED at 3 V and
turns it off at 2 V. Use suitable zener or string
of forward-biased silicon diodes to make VZ
equal to 3 V less that VCC. Thus, for 4.5-V bat-
tery, put two silicon diodes in series with LED
to make VZ 1.5 V across them. — S. W. Hawk-
inson, A Battery Voltage Monitor, 73 Magazine,
July 1977, p 52.
0-
OUT-OF-LIMIT VOLTAGE SENSOR— High

switching speed, low offset current, and low
offset voltage of Harris HA-4900/4905 precision
quad comparator make circuit well suited for
VCO SENSES VOLTAGE LIMITS— Used to in- input pulses to preset maximum and minimum industrial process control applications requir-
dicate when pulse voltage goes outside preset limits. Output at Y goes low whenever input ing fast, accurate decision-making based on
limits for pulse period. Output pu Ise rate of volt- pulse rate is outside limits, which are deter- voltage levels. Outputs can be used to drive
age-controlled MVBR is monitored to imple- mined by R,C, and R2C2 time constants. — B. alarm indicator or initiate corrective action. —
ment double-ended limit detector consisting of Brandstedt, Double-Ended Limit Detector Sen- 2-96.
"Linear 8t Data Acquisition Products," Harris
2-bit shift register, two monos, inverter, and ses Voltage with VCO, EDN Magazine, Nov. 15, Semiconductor, Melbourne, FL, Vol. 1, 1977, p
two NAND gates. Circuit compares period of
1972, p 47-48.
Reset Switch
LOW-VOLTAGE ALARM — UJT relaxation oscil-

POSITIVE-PEAK DETECTOR— Circuit responds diode leakage current, opamp bias currents, lator produces audio tone from loudspeaker
to and remembers peak positive excursions of and slight loading effect of voltage follower. when battery voltage drops below breakdown
input signal over period of time with first half of Closing reset switch momentarily discharges voltage of zener. For 9-V battery, zener can be
082 dual opamp. Other half of opamp serves as capacitor in readiness for storing new peak 6-V unit (Radio Shack 276-561). When input
voltage follower for isolating peak detector value. — R. Melen and H. Garland, "Understand- voltage drops below zener breakdown, zener
from output. Memory time is typically several ing 1C Operational Amplifiers," Howard W. stops conducting and Cl begins charging, as re-
minutes, depending on rate at which capacitor Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 2nd Ed., 1978, p 96-97. quired for oscillation. When battery is replaced,
discharges due to its own leakage current. zener breaks down and prevents Cl from charg-
ing.— F. M. Mims, "Semiconductor Projects,
Vol. 2," Radio Shack, Fort Worth, TX, 1976, p
43-49.
PEAK AND TROUGH DETECTOR— Uses only

two opamps to detect peak and valley voltages
of nonsymmetrical waveform. During valley pe-
riod, Dz conducts and discharges C2 rapidly to
lowest value of signal amplitude. C2 charges
only slightly through D, and R2 during positive
peaks, thus retaining minimum voltage. — C.
Spain, Precision Peak and Trough Detector,
♦ 15V
ZERO DETECTOR WITH HYSTERESIS— Circuit

using one section of Harris HA-4900/4905 pre-
cision quad comparator as Schmitt trigger has
100-mV hysteresis. Suitable for applications re-
ZERO-POINT WITH OVERVOLTAGE PROTEC- power from load. As long as overvoltage con- quiring fast transition times at output even
TION— Used to protect voltage-sensitive load dition exists, Q1 is turned on each half-cycle and though input signal approaches zero crossing
from excessive line voltage. Switch section op- C2 is unable to charge enough to turn 02 on. slowly. Hysteresis loop also reduces false trig-
erates conventionally to turn on triacalmost im- When overvoltage condition ceases, C2 charges gering by input noise. Output jumps to 4.2 V at
mediately after each zero crossing between to voltage set by D8 in about 20 ms, saturating instant when input reaches -100 mV after drop-
half-cycles. For normal line voltages, SCR 03 is 02 so 03 turns off and Q4 turns on. R2 can be ping to 0 V. Output drops from 4.2 V to 0 V when
off. When overvoltage condition is sensed dur- set to allow line voltage variations from almost input passes through 0 V in positive direction
ing any half-cycle, SCR Q1 is turned on, dis- 0 to 11 V. — "Circuit Applications for the Triac," and reaches +100 mV.— "Linear 8i Data Acqui-
charging C2 and turning 02 off. This allows 03 Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1971, AN-466, p 14. sition Products," Hanis Semiconductor, Mel-
to turn on and divert triac gate drive, removing bourne, FL, Vol. 1, 1977, p 2-96.
VOLTAGE-LEVEL DETECTOR CIRCUITS 1161
BUFFERED PEAK DETECTOR— Discharge cur-

rent through C, is minimized by using low-
input-current voltage follower A2. R3 allows A,
to be clamped in OFF state by D2 to give faster
recovery. Circuit operates much like ideal diode,
but with C, storing DC voltage equal to peak
input voltage value. When input signal crosses
zero. A, drives D, on and circuit output follows
rising signal slope. When input signal reaches
peak and reverses, C, is left charged. Reverse
diode connections to detect negative peaks.
Value of R, should be increased to 2.7 megohms
if C, is increased to 1 /nF to improve stability. —
LOGAMP ZERO-CROSSING DETECTOR— Feed-

back current for A, creates logarithmic output
voltage due to diodes D, and D2. A, is connected
in feedforward mode to optimize speed and
minimize phase error at high frequencies. Out-
put voltage is nominally ±V(, where V, is for-
ward voltage drop of either diode. Dynamic
range of circuit is about 70 dB. If higher or con-
stant output voltages are required, add optional
connection of saturated switch that delivers 0-
5 V output. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cook-
p 229-230.
0 TO ±10 V PROGRAMMABLE PEAK DETEC- CMP-01 BYPASS CAPACITORS LESS THAN 0.5 INCH FROM PACKAGE
TOR — Principal components are Precision Mon- within 5 mV at zero scale and within 10 mV at held by sample-and-hold amplifier. If input ex-
olithics CMP-01CJ voltage comparator, SMP- full scale. Resistors and diodes provide input ceeds held value, new input is held. — D. Sod-
81FY sample-and-hold amplifier, SN74LS136N overvoltage protection for comparator. Com- erquist, "Polarity Programmable Peak Detec-
open-collector EXCLUSIVE-OR gate package, parator continuously examines difference be- tor," Precision Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA,
and DG201 quad analog switch. DC accuracy is tween analog input voltage and voltage peak
1978, AN-27.
Timing Diagram
WINDOW DETECTOR — Connections shown for

322 comparators give high output only when
input voltage is between thresholds set by R2
and R3 (within voltage window). Output of cir-
cuit goes low whenever input is below thresh-
old 1 or above threshold 2. — W. G. Jung, "1C
Timer Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianap-
olis, IN, 1977, p 153.
22 kn
DUAL-LIMfT DETECTOR — Provides 12-V output

when applied DC input signal exceeds reference
high limit established by setting of R1 or falls
below reference low limit established by setting
of R2. When input drops below low limit,
CA3080 changes CA3094 to high-output condi-
tion. Output is low in voltage window between
limits (dead zone). — E. M. Noll, "Linear 1C Prin-
LEVEL INDICATOR — Visual indication of volt-

age level is achieved with two TIL203 LEDs,
three resistors, and any opamp that can provide
15-mA output current. If input voltage momen-
tarily or permanently exceeds most positive ref-
erence level, LED, is switched on. If voltage falls
below negative or least positive reference level,
VOLTAGE-LEVEL LATCH — Circuit uses compar- collector output of 1C, and removing latch con- LED, goes off and LED2 comes on. Article gives
ator to latch after input reaches predetermined dition. Comparator will operate on supplies design equations for determining values of R,
threshold level. Output of 1C, then goes high ranging from single 5-V level to dual ±15 V.— and R2. For levels of +2 V to turn LED, on and
and enables input of strobe Q2 to prevent output M. W. Bair, 1C Comparator Doubles as a Latch, -1.2 V to turn LED2on,both R, and R2are 10K. —
from going low. High level on reset input will EDN Magazine, April 20, 1975, p 72. E. J. Richter, Op Amp Makes Visual Level Indi-
turn off Q„ removing supply voltage from open cator, EDN Magazine, May 5, 1974, p 73.
1163
5-V PEAKS UP TO 2 MHz — Peak-to-peak detec-

torusing Optical Electronics 9412 opamps gives
DC output voltage equal to peak-to-peak am-
plitude of sine-wave input voltage. Opamp
charges memory capacitor Cm during negative
half of input cycle and performs DC clamp (res-
toration) on positive half. Circuit has high input
impedance. With 0.1-ftF memory capacitor, 10-
V pulse is acquired in 10 /is. For 5-V sine-wave
input, maximum frequency is 0.8 MHz, but 0.01-
/r F memory capacitor boosts frequency capa-
bility to 2 MHz. — "A Wideband Peak-to-Peak
Detector," Optical Electronics, Tucson, AZ, Ap-
plication Tip 10176.
LED INDICATES SIGNAL LEVEL— Circuit is ad-

justed so opamp turns on LED at desired signal
level as set by R1. Opamp is operated without
feedback resistor to have maximum gain, so
small input signal produces very large output
signal. Values shown for R2 and R3 give turn-on
voltage of 0.9 V for LED. — F. M. Mims, "Inte-
grated Circuit Projects, Vol. 4," Radio Shack,
SYSTEM POWER-MONITOR
DC POWER SUPPLY LATCH
systems having multiple DC bias voltages, to supplies by adding resistive dividers, Schmitt latch. System then operates normally as long as
prevent damage when one supply voltage goes triggers, diodes, and latches as required. Clos- all D inputs to monitor latch stay at logic 0. If
down while others remain normal. Control cir- ing system power switch activates solid-state one supply fails, logic 1 appears at its latch input
cuit includes its own independent AC/DC supply relay for applying AC line voltage to main power and next clock pulse initiates shutdown of sys-
that ensures protection even when equipment supplies. Half of 556 dual timer and 74LS174 hex tem. LED identifies supply that has failed. — J.
containing RAMs and MOS devices is turned off. D latch inhibit voltage monitor until all supplies E. Draut, Voltage Monitor Protects Against
Failure of AC supply for monitor shuts down have stabilized, about 500 ms later. Other half Power-Supply Failures, EDN Magazine, Nov. 20,
entire system. Can be applied to any number of of 556 then clocks 74LS175 power-monitor
1977, p 239-240.
56k °2 4k7
555 TRIGGER — Low-cost 555 timer provides

AC LINE ZERO-CROSSING DETECTOR— Posi- negative half-cycles. Transistorand diode types ON/OFF and proportional-control switching of
tive-going half-cycles forward-bias D„ allowing are not critical, except that D, must withstand AC loads without generating RFI or voltage
capacitortochargethrough D,to 14 V. Negative full reverse voltage of AC line. — R. J. Torrens, spikes. Timer is used in monostable mode, re-
half-cycles forward-bias D, to turn on Tr, and Zero Crossing Detector, Wireless World, Jan. triggering every half-cycle when voltage at pin
discharge capacitor. Output is about 1 V less on 1977, p 78. 2 falls below about 1.67 V. R3 and C, fix pulse
width at about 1 ms, long enough to ensure fir-
ing SCR in next half-cycle yet short enough to
turn SCR off at next zero-crossing without tim-
ing-cycle pulse. Pin 4 serves as ON/OFF control
input. Varying duty cycle of square wave here
gives proportional control for heating and other
uses. — M. E. Anglin, Low Cost Zero-Cross Thy-
ristor Trigger Uses a 555 1C, EDN Magazine,
Sept. 5, 1977, p 180-181.
INSTANT ULTIMATE VALUE — Circuit instantly tronics 9406 opamp. Circuit values are com-
computes ultimate value of logarithmically in- puted from Eu = E„ = -R2E|/R, - R2Cde/dt —
creasing input signal E| by performing aug- "Derivative Circuit Indicates Ultimate Value In-
mented differentiation that gives step function stantly," Optical Electronics, Tucson, AZ, Appli-
equal to ultimate value E„. Uses Optical Elec- cation Tip 10179.
V1
V
2
V
INPUT 3
NOMINAL
CONFIDENCE- VOL rAGE LAMP:
-4.9V
-5V
VOLTAGE TURNS OFF AT: TURNS ON AT:
V4 -4.8V
-5V
-4.3V -4.4V
-12 V -11.5V
-11.3V
+8V +6.7V
+6.6V
LOW-VOLTAGE ALARM — Simple indicator cir- nection). Because lamp-driving inverter has FREEZER FAILURE ALARM — Loudspeaker is en-
cuit uses hex inverter 1C to monitor several dif- logic 0 at its input, lamp goes out as no-go sig- ergized by 4011 audio oscillator and 2N2222
ferent input voltages. Technique is flexible and nal. When positive input V, falls below prede- transistor operating from 9-V battery when ice
easily modified for different voltage values termined value, logic 0 again causes no-go in- melts and allows permanent magnet to drop on
(either positive or negative) and additional indication.— R. J. Buonocore, Under-Voltage reed switch and close it. Magnet is bonded to
puts. When negative input (V„ V2, or V3) falls Sensing Circuit, EDNIEEE Magazine, Dec. 1, wall inside of freezer with mixture of antifreeze
below breakdown voltage of its zener, logic 0 and water. — J. A. Sandler, 11 Projects under
1971, p 48-49.
appears at inverter output (at wired-OR con- $11, Modem Electronics, June 1978, p 54—58.
1165
±1.5 TO ±7.5 V THRESHOLD— Precise timing

and accurate threshold levels are assured by
stable characteristics of input differential am-
plifier in CA 3080 variable opamp used to drive
one of inverter/amplifier transistors in CA3600E
array. For values shown, threshold voltage for
given polarity is half of supply voltage used, in
range of 3 to 15 V. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA Lin-
ear ICs," RCA Solid State Division, Somerville,
NJ, 1977, pi 6.
WINDOW DETECTOR — Unique voltage-range

sensing circuit provides positive indications of
high, low or acceptable input levels for voltage
and includes adjustments for both threshold
and hysteresis levels. R, and R2 adjust upper and
lower thresholds, while R3 and R„ adjust upper
and lower hysteresis levels. If acceptable input
range is 4.5 V to 5.5 V, output of opamp A, goes
negative when eln is greater than 5.5 V. This sat-
urates Q, and Q2, making Q2 output go from 5
V to 0. TTL then indicates that input has ex-
ceeded 5.5 V. Upper hysteresis keeps A, output
negative until input has dropped to setting of
R3, which might be 5.3 V. Similarly, when input
drops below 4.5 V, output of A2 goes positive
and saturates Q3. — I. Krell, Analog Monitor Has
Threshold and Hysteresis Controls, EDN Mag-
azine, Aug. 1, 1972, p 58.
v+
ZERO-CROSSING DETECTOR— Output 1 of 322

comparator A, is high when input signal is
above zero and low when input is below zero.
Output of comparator A, is thus square wave in
phase with zero crossings of input. When R, is
22K, input can be up to ±10 V amplitude. A2 is
mono MVBR connected to fire when output 1 of
A, goes high (at zero crossings). Resulting neg-
ative-going narrow pulses at output 2 are useful
for time marks. — W. G. Jung, "1C Timer Cook-
Timing Diagram
p 152.
Output 2 1 IT
CHAPTER 102
Voltage Measuring Circuits

Gives voltmeter, multimeter, and electrometer circuits for measuring
absolute, peak, RMS, or other values of AC, DC, and RF voltages. Indicators
include meters, digital displays, loudspeakers, bar-graph displays, and
frequency counter. Also includes automatic polarity circuits and voltage-null
detectors. See also Audio Measuring, Logic Probe, Multiplier, Test, and
Voltage-Level Detector chapters.
R13
Cl 5-20 pF ceramic trimmer (Erie 2-3 megohm trimmer (Mallory
type 503). (Do not use a 26L1 or 26L4)
compression-type trimmer R14.R16
here.) 100 ohm, 10% carbon
R15.R17 470k, 10% carbon

50-380 pF compression trim- R18 text)
C2 465k, film-type preferable
mer (Elmenco type 465)
R19 465k, approximately (see
J1 BNC connector (Amphenol
UG-657/U) R20
50k, 10-turn potentiometer
R 1 , R2 to total 1000 megohms, 1%
R21 220k, 10% carbon
(matched pair)
SI 2-pole, 3-position ceramic
R3,R4 to total 500 megohms, 1%
wafer rotary switch
(matched pair)
R5-R9 values as required for balance 3-pole, 3-position ceramic BAR GRAPH READOUT VOLTMETER— Sections
wafer rotary switch
(see text) of RS339 quad comparator each drive LED to
S2
S3
R10.R11.R12 to total 33 megohms, 5% dpdt toggle switch give indications of four different input voltage
levels, while LED 1 is connected to ground for
1-TERAOHM INPUT — High-accuracy meter-in- voltage divider used. Three ranges provided use as zero indicator. Resistors shown are for
terface amplifier for AC and DC voltage mea- have full-scale values of 10, 30, and 300 V. AC Radio Shack 276-041 red LEDs; change R6-R9to
surements has input resistance of 1,000,000 RMS inputs are limited to 70% of DC ranges. 270 ohms and R10 to 470 ohms for green LEDs.
megohms. Amplifier eliminates voltmeter er- Two voltage regulators are used with battery Pot R1 is used to calibrate voltage divider R2-
rors due to loading by using special 2N5909 dual supply to permit use of batteries exceeding 18- R5. With R1 set at low resistance, comparators
FET with exceptionally low gate leakage cur- V voltage rating of opamp, so battery voltages turn on at intervals of 1 V or more. With high
rent. FET and opamp are connected as voltage can drop considerably before replacement is re- resistance for R1, comparators turn on at frac-
follower with gain of 1. Accuracy on 0—10 V quired. Article covers construction and adjust- tional-volt intervals. — F. M. Mims, "Integrated
range is 0.1% or better. For higher voltage ment.— J. R. Laughlin, High-Impedance Meter Circuit Projects, Vol. 4," Radio Shack, Fort
ranges, accuracy depends on that of resistive Interface, Ham Radio, Jan. 1974, p 20-25. Worth, TX, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 76-85.
1166
VOLTAGE MEASURING CIRCUITS 1167
POSITIVE-PEAK DETECTOR — Combination of circuit is such that most positive analog input
Siliconix triple L144 opamp and DG181 analog is stored. SW2 serves as reset switch. — "Analog
switch eliminates errors of conventional diode
circuits. Third opamp acts as comparator pro- Santa Clara, CA, 1976, p 4-9.
viding logic drive for operating SW,. Action of ELECTROMETER — Can be used for picoampere
leakage measurements and nonloading voltage
measurements. Bridge circuit has three pots for
three ranges of sensitivity. Adjust for 0.5, 1.5,
INPUT and 5 V full scale with appropriate input volt-
IMPEDANCE ages. With 1000-megohm resistance between
10 meg
point 5 and probe tip, picoammeter gives full-
scale deflection on 500 pA. For nonloading volt-
meter, apply unknown voltage across same
1000-megohm resistor; now 0.5 V will give full-
scale reading.— I. Math, Math's Notes, CQ, Oct.
1974, p 26-27.
= 15K. 5W WIREWOUND POTENTIOMETER
EXPANDED-RANGE AC VM — Line voltage is ap-

plied to D1, and resulting DC is filtered by Cl. R1
delivers equivalent of RMS voltage to 100-V
FET MILLIVOLTMETER — Eight-range meter ation can be balanced with 5K zero-adjust zener D2 through R2. Voltage is developed
uses pair of JFETs in bridge arrangement driv- pot. — E. M. Noll, "FET Principles, Experiments, across R2 only when voltage applied by R1 ex-
ing meter through opamp. FETs should be rea- and Projects," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, ceeds 100 V, for reading with 1000-ohm-per-volt
sonably well matched, even though their oper- IN, 2nd Ed., 1975, p 212-213. meter. To calibrate, measure AC line voltage
with accurate AC voltmeter, then adjust R1 so
meter across R2 reads 100 V less than this
value. — W. P. Turner, Expanded Range Line
INPUT
♦5V BUFFER AC TO DC CONVERTER RIPPLE FILTER Voltage Meter, 7 3 Magazine, March 1974, p 54.
LINE-VOLTAGE MONITOR— 0C3 (VR-105) volt-

age-regulator tube provides voltage offset that
permits greater sensitivity in voltage range of
AC/DC CONVERTER — Used for measuring AC nect pin 4 of LM324 to +5 V and pin 11 to -5 interest. Meter scale covers 20-V range cen-
voltage with digital DC voltmeter. Resulting sig- V. — S. Ciarcia, Add More Zing to the Cocktail, tered on about 1 15 VAC. Accuracy is much bet-
nal is equal to average RMS value of applied BYTE, Jan. 1978, p 37-39, 44, 46, 48, 50-52, and ter than with AC range of ordinary multimeter.
input signal. When 1-V peak 60-Hz is applied to CR1 is 500-PIV 1-A silicon diode. — N. Johnson,
converter, output should be +0.707 VDC. Con- 54. An AC Line Monitor, QST, Jan. 1976, p 27.
0- 30 V
ZENER PROTECTS METER— Simple overvol-
tage protection circuit makes 10-V zener con-
El duct when voltage El being measured goes
4’4-DIGIT VOLTOHMMETER— National type
over 20-V full-scale limit of voltmeter using mil-
MM5330 1C provides logic circuits for imple-
liammeter movement with multiplier resistor
menting low-cost 4’4-digit voltohmmeter. Dis- R2. This turns on Q1, drawing current through
play interface consists of TTL 7-segment de-
coder driver and four 2N4403 transistors. LED to give visual indication of overvoltage,
Operation is based on counting of up to 80,000 while providing protective shunt path around
clock pulses. Circuit provides sign digit, either meter. — H. Olson, Sensitive Meters Saved, 73
Magazine, Oct. 1977, p 153.
plus or minus, and numeral 1 for 10,000 to give
full display of ±19,999 with decimal point. —
"MOS/LSI Databook," National Semiconductor,
Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 5-23-5-29.
0-19g.99kl!
TERMINALS
10k
-WV— O *5V
O <5V
RA07 100N
1169
VOLTAGE MEASURING CIRCUITS
LINE-VOLTAGE MONITOR — AC line voltage is

rectified by D1 and filtered by Cl. R2 and R3
ABSOLUTE VALUES — Positive output signal 1 N914. For gain of 2.5, R, and R3 are 1 000 ohms, form voltage divider that holds one meter ter-
level is proportional to absolute value of input R2 is 2500, and R4 is 2333. For unity gain, R4 is minal at half of rectified line voltage. DC is also
signal level, regardless of input polarity. Circuit infinity and can be omitted. R2 and R3 are equal- applied to low-voltage calibration pot R6
combines simplicity with high input imped- value precision resistors. Value of R, is not crit- through 3-W 117-V lamp or equivalent resistor
ance, low output impedance, and greater than ical at any gain. — R. Hofheimer, A Simple Ab- PL1 which limits zener current. Any increase in
unity gain. Opamps A, and A2 should have good solute-Value Amplifier, EDN Magazine, June line voltage increases voltage at R2-R3 junction
CMRR and low offset and drift. D, and D2 can be 20, 1974, p 78 and 80. while voltage at slider of R6 remains constant,
so bridge unbalances and meter reads upscale.
Zener is 70 to 100 V at 10 W. R2 and R3 are equal
and are from 8.2K to 15K. Cl is 50 to 100 /-tF at
200 V, and diodes are power silicon with PIV
above 200 and 100-mA rating. — W. P. Turner,
Expanded Range Line Voltage Monitor, 73 Mag-
azine, Jan. 1974, p 39.
20-VDC FET VOLTMETER— Has high input

impedance as required for accurate measure-
ments in solid-state circuit. Uses Motorola
MPF102, HEP802, or equivalent N-channel JFET.
If meter cannot be zeroed, change R7 to 10,000
ohms for greater zeroing range. 2-V range gives
extra flexibility. Half-wave RF probe using
1N914 or equivalent high-speed switching
diode responds to peak RF voltage being mea-
sured. R11 reduces peak value to RMS value.
Connect probe to known 10-VRMS source, then
adjust R1 1 so meter reads 1 0 V. — D. DeMaw and
L. McCoy, Learning to Work with Semiconduc-
tors, QST, April 1974, p 20-25 and 41.
1N4005
WIDE-RANGE VOLTAGE PROBE— Indicates

presence of AC or DC voltages from 3 to 350 V
with no range switching, using LED as indicator.
1C MODERNIZES VTVM— LM310H voltage-fol- LM310H high-impedance unity-gain voltage fol- Transistors serve essentially as constant-cur-
lower 1C converts VTVM into battery-operated lower replaces original 12AU7. C105 and C106 rent supply for LED Voltage capability can be
1C voltmeter. Input impedance and scale accu- bypass battery supply and should be connected increased to 450 V by adding suitable base-
racy are unchanged. Conversion shown is for directly to U100. CR102 and CR103 provide emitter resistor RK; typical value is 60 ohms,
Heathkit IM-11 VTVM but will apply to most overvoltage protection.— M. Kaufman, How to which somewhat impairs low-voitage opera-
other VTVMs. Semiconductor diodes CR100 Convert Your VTVM to an 1C Voltmeter, Ham tion.— G. Jones, Voltage Probe, Wireless
and CR101 replace original 6AL5 detector and Radio, Dec. 1974, p 42-44. World, Aug. 1976, p 52.
- 200mv
50M.AX4KO
METER OVERLOAD — When used with basic

meter movement, circuit ensures that over-
loads merely make pointer run off scale in either
direction in controlled manner and press gently
against stop pin instead of winding around pin.
o Values shown will suit most meter movements,
<9-15)V
is noninverting. Maximum input voltage range but article gives complete design procedure. If
CALIBRATED-GAIN AMPLIFIER— Used to ex- is ±10 V. Dual battery supply must be used. To voltage being measured is between 350 and 700
tend low range of VOM or CRO and provide very calibrate, short input test leads and adjust 1- mV, use two diodes in series in each position.
high input impedance (above 1000 megohms). megohm pot for zero on VOM or other indicat- For voltages between 700 mV and 1 V, use three
Gain of amplifier from DC up to several hundred ing instrument. — J. J. Schultz, Versatile Test diodes in series. Diode types are not critical. —
kilohertz is determined by ratio of 10K feedback Equipment Range Extender, 73 Magazine, Nov. C. Shenton, Meter Protection Circuit, Wireless
resistor to 200- or 2000- ohm preset pot. Action World, Oct. 1972, p 475.
1973, p 59-62.
OUTPUT
PEAK-TO-PEAK VOLTMETER— Two Optical
Electronics opamps and two peak sense-and-
hold modules form positive-peak-sense mem-
ory that adds negative peak amplitude to entire
signal so as to bias negative peak to zero. Input
must be restricted to ±5 V full scale (10 V P-P).
Output is 0 V for -5 V input and +10 V for +5
V input. Unsymmetrical signals such as +2 V to
-8 V still give +10 V output. — "Using Peak
Sense Memories as Peak-to-Peak Detectors," It may be necessary to
Optical Electronics, Tucson, AZ, Application Tip OA - 9?38 , 98 1 8 , etc. add a 1-iOMeg ohm resistor
10275. PSH - 5C3C, 5031 , 5893 , etc from the C pin of the PSH
x
modules to ground.
100k cmii«
NOTE 3: ALL DICDES ARE 1N914
NOTE 4: SUPPLY VOLTAGE ■ L5V
TRUE RMS DETECTOR — Circuit using National Direct coupling of input provides true RMS 10-VDC input signal is applied and R10 is ad-
LM118 opamps provides DC output equal to equivalent of combined DC and AC signals. Ab- justed for 10-VDC output. Transistors should be
RMS value of sine, triangle, square, or other solute-value amplifier A1 provides positive matched and mounted on common heatsink if
input waveform with 2% accuracy for 20 V P-P input current to A2 and A4 independent of sig- possible. — R. C. Dobkin, "True RMS Detector,"
inputs from 50 Hz to 100 kHz. Circuit is usable nal polarity. Amplifiers A2-A5 and transistors National Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1973,
LB-25.
up to about 500 kHz but with lower accuracy. Q1-Q4 form log multiplier/divider. To calibrate.
1171
DC VOLTMETER — Opamp connected for

closed-loop gain of 100 is used with attenuator
network and 100-juA microammeter to serve as
general-purpose multirange laboratory volt-
meter. Additional full-scale output of ±10 V is
provided for driving chart recorder. Low-pass
filter Ri-Rs-O-Ci prevents amplifier from over-
loading on large AC input signals while allowing
circuit to read DC component. Filter acting with
diodes protects amplifier from input overloads
up to 1000 V. — R. S. Burwen, Simple DC Volt-
meter Uses Single Op Amp, EDNIEEE Magazine,
Dec. 15, 1971, p 57.
1.5
1C MILLIVOLTMETER — Provides switched

ranges of 5 mV to 500 V. Use 2% resistors. Push-
button connection to positive supply gives in-
ternal calibration check on 5-V and 50-V ranges.
Adjust meter initially with Rm to read 1.4 V on
5-V range. Back-to-back signal diodes provide
overload protection. Power drain is so low that
battery life is essentially shelf life. — D. A. Bun-
dey. Where Is Your Simplified, Sensitive, Milli-
voltmeter?, 73 Magazine, Sept. 1975, p 49-50.
ADJUSTMENTS
R, - INPUT OFFSET
R2 - OUTPUT OFFSET
R3 - GAIN
R„ - GAIN
Rs - INPUT OFFSET
R. - OUTPUT OFFSET
*Cf determined by lowest input frequency
2-1 0 V P-P TRUE RMS TO 600 kHz — Input wave- which has capacitor in feedback path to perform ing true RMS value. Accuracy is within 1% over
form is squared by first Motorola MC1594 mul- averaging function. Second opamp is used with input voltage range.— K. Huehne and D. Al-
tiplier, and current output is converted to volt- second multiplier as feedback element to pro- dridge, "Multiplier/Op Amp Circuit Detects True
age by opamp for driving second multiplier duce square-root configuration required for giv- RMS," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ, 1974, EB-20.
91 on
AC PEAKS — Optical Electronics 5893 peak

sense-and-hold analog memory module senses
input peaks of AC waveforms and produces
smooth DC output voltage for driving 2'k -digit
digital voltmeter. Output of 5893 is divided by
about 10 to give 1-V full-scale output for meter.
External capacitor used with parallel resistor
provides time constant required for steady dis-
play on DVM. Response time is 4 s for input
change from 10 V to 0 and less than 1 s for rise
from 0 to 10 V. Useful bandwidth is 20 Hz to 2
MHz. HOLD switch is operated when peak read-
ing on meter is to be held several minutes. —
"Digital Peak Reading AC Voltmeter," Optical
110 VAC
DIFFERENTIAL INPUTS GIVE GROUND-REFER-

ENCED OUTPUT — Circuit consists of differen-
tial-input controlled-current rectifying source
A,-A2 and level-shifting voltage-to-current con-
verter A3. Feedback current of appropriate po-
larity is conducted to output opamp, while
other feedback current is absorbed. Possible
drawbacks are switching offset and bandwidth
limitations common to precision rectifiers. Ar-
ticle gives design equations and theory of op-
eration.— J. Graeme, Measure Differential AC
Signals Easily with Precision Rectifiers, EDN
Magazine, Jan. 20, 1975, p 45-48.
WAVEFORM PEAKS AND TROUGHS— Used in signal goes through active low-pass filter and V to input and adjust R3 for + 5 V at TP„ adjust
data-logging systems to measure, limits of inversion amplifier whose output at TP2 is the R,for-5V at TP2, and adjust R5for +5 Vat Max.
waveform superimposed on DC level. Requires mean value. Differential amplifier A2 subtracts output terminal. — K. R. Brooks, Peak and
two LM747CN (dual 741) ICs. Measurements are maximum from mean to give minimum value of Trough Detector, Wireless World, Feb. 1977, p
made with conventional DC voltmeter. Input input. For setup, short input and adjust R, for 0 45.
signal isfed to precision peak detector A,. Same V at TP,, adjust R2 for 0 V at TP2, then apply +5
1173
GAIN
TUNED VOLTMETER — Optical Electronics ac-

tive filter (3704 up to 5 kHz, 3705 up to 50 kHz,
or 3706 up to 500 kHz) provides proper scale fac-
tor, impedance buffering, and isolation for mea-
suring AC voltages at specific frequency. Circuit
provides 100K input impedance and up to 10-
mA drive for 10-V meter. 1C provides indepen-
dent gain (scale factor or sensitivity), tuning,
and Q (selectivity) adjustments. — “Tuned Volt-

meter," Optical Electronics, Tucson, AZ, Appli-
cation Tip 10248.
o o
3k3
AC MILUVOLTMETER — Combination of diode

bridge and opamp forms basis for precise mea-
surement of AC input voltages so small that
they would be in nonlinear range of diodes
alone. Article discusses linearity problems and
gives output waveforms. — G. B. Clayton, Ex-
less World, June 1973, p 275-276.
screen of device r f. input
PEAK-READING RF PROBE FOR DC METER—

Converts RF peaks of 1 mV to about 4 V, at any
frequency up to over 100 MHz, to proportional
DC voltage that can be fed to any multirange DC
meter. Uses single CA3046 1C connected as two
symmetrical Darlington pairs. Circuit must be
mounted in small shielded housing with short
probe tip and no 1C socket. Temperature stabil-
ity is excellent. Requires no DC offset adjust-
ments.— Peak Reading R. F. Probe, Wireless
World, Dec. 1976, p 42.
d.c output
to meter
BATTERY
TEST
of proper output voltage for feedback to ter- cury battery and draws about 500 /uA plus meter vision, Somerville, NJ, 1977, p 14.
OPAMP ELECTROMETER— Use of FET input

keeps input bias current down to 20 femtoam-
peres, with common-mode input resistance of
1015 ohms. Uses Analog Devices AD 832 dual
JFET Q,-Q2 in source-follower connection, with
low-cost general-purpose AD 3958 dual FET
generating operating current and providing
bootstrapping for Q,-Q2. Article covers guarding
techniques used to minimize leakage
currents. — J. Dostal, "Electrometer" Boasts
Low Bias Current, EDN Magazine, Jan. 20, 1977,
p 90 and 92.
ABSOLUTE VALUES — Opamps A, and A2 act

with PNP transistors Q„ and Q5 to form opera-
tional rectifier having current-mode output.
Current-to-voltage converter A3 uses R2 as scale
factor. Input voltage range is determined by
common-mode range of opamp and breakdown
ratings of components. Circuit shown handles
±10 V signal. — S. Smith, Full-Wave Rectifier
Needs Only Two Precision Resistors, EDN Mag-
azine, Jan. 5, 1975, p 56.
NOTES:
D1 2= 1N9140R EQUIVALENT
A, 2 3= SILICONIX LI 44
ALL
Q, 2 3RESISTORS EXCEPT R, AND
4 5= RCA CA3096AE R2MAY BE ±10% TYPES
AUDIBLE VM — Voltage-controlled audio oscil- has input impedance of 100,000 ohms per volt. scale produces proportionately lower fre-
lator A2 serves for rough measurements of up Separate input jacks provide full-scale ranges of quency. Article describes circuit operation in
to 10 VDC, allowing user to keep eyes on test 0.1, 1, and 10 V, with full-scale voltage for each detail. — S. Johnson, An Audible Voltmeter, 73
probe during troubleshooting. Voltmeter circuit producing 1000-Hz tone. Voltage less that full- Magazine, Aug. 1974, p 55 and 57-59.
DVM 1C DRIVES METER— Uses Siliconlx LD111

1C analog processor section of digital voltmeter
1C pair to combine desirable features of digital
voltmeter with signal-averaging advantages of
ordinary meter. Input range covered is 10 mV to
3 V, with resistive divider being required for
larger input voltage. Differential inputs each
have 1-gigohm input impedance. Circuit re-
quires only two 9-V batteries. Article describes
operation in detail. — B. Harvey, Digital Volt-
meter 1C Drives Analog Meter, EDN Magazine,
June 20, 1977, p 113.
DVM POLARITY INDICATOR— Designed for use

in low-cost digital voltmeters. With input polar-
ity as indicated, arrows on connections indicate
direction of current flow. When NPN Q, is on,
LED 2 will be on; with PNP Q2 on, LED 1 will be
on. Darlingtons Q,-Q2 draw very little current,
so choice of type is not critical. AC supply is usu-
ally available in lab but can be replaced by in-
ternal clock of DVM driving small transformer
to give required floating AC source. A, B, C, and
D identify nodes of bridge. — R. A. Snyder, Po-
larity Indicator Minimizes Parts Count, EDN
Magazine, Feb. 20, 1977, p 121.
(COM ANODE)
ohm input impedance, driving Hewlett-Packard reversed to read negative voltages. Article gives transpose connections to pins 1 and 2 of IC3. —
HP5082 multiplexed digital display, with LED construction and calibration details. Errata: G. McClellan, DVMs Get Simpler and Simpler,
serving as decimal point. Input leads must be move C3 upper connection to pin 9 of IC2, and 73 Magazine, Feb. 1977, p 60-63.
NULL INDICATOR — Opamp is driven open-loop

so change of only 1 mV in input voltage makes
output switch polarity. This is indicated by one
of lamps. Both lamps go out to indicate null. If
LEDs are used in place of lamps, diodes are not
needed; adjust series resistance as required for
full brilliance of LEDs. — B. P. Cowan, Miniature
Null Indicator, Wireless World, June 1973, p
284.
PRECISION SIGNAL RECTIFIER— High input

impedance at one of differential inputs of pre-
cision rectifier is achieved with opamp A,
whose output is switched between inputs of in-
strumentation amplifier Az by diodes. This
switching reverses polarity of gain provided by
A2 when signal polarity changes, so output sig-
nal is always positive. — J. Graeme, Measure
Differential AC Signals Easily with Precision
Rectifiers, EDN Magazine, Jan. 20, 1975, p 45-
48.
: BB 3660 K
: 1N4154
DATA OUTPUT END OF CONVERSION AND CONVERSION

STATUS
START
EIGHT-CHANNEL COMPUTERIZED 3'i-DIGIT applied to integrator having defined integration same 1999 count represent 199.9 mV full scale.
VM — Displays up to eight different DC voltages time constant for predetermined time limit, to IC1 performs about 25 conversions per second.
on CRT terminal of microprocessor under key- give output voltage proportional to unknown IC3 and IC4 are output buffers. IC5 is 7474 used
board control, using BASIC commands and voltage. Computer program substitutes -2.000 as set-reset flip-flop. IC6 is eight-input CMOS
BASIC routine given in article. Uses Motorola V reference from IC2, and circuit keeps track of multiplexer input. — S. Ciarcia, Try an 8 Channel
MC14433 modified dual-lamp integrating ana- time for integrator output to move back toward DVM Cocktail!, BYTE, Dec. 1977, p 76, 78, 80, 92,
log-to-digital converter. Unknown voltage is zero. Changing reference to 0.200 V makes
94, 96, and 98-103.
STRIP-CHART TIMING MARKS— Drives two

galvanometers for generating three decades of
timing marks in identical patterns on edges of
chart. 10-ms marks are twice as long as 1-ms
marks, and 100-ms marks are 3 times length of
1-ms marks. By placing ruler across equivalent
marks on edges, exact time for any point on re-
corded pattern is easily and accurately deter-
mined.— S. Rummel, TTL Circuit Aids Evalua-
tion of Oscillograph Data, EDN Magazine, Dec.
5, 1973, p 86.
3’2-DIGIT DVM — Combination of National Counter drives LED display with multiplexed 7- for every conversion cycle. Analog circuit draws
LF11300 dual-slope analog building block and segment information under control of internal 1.5 mA from each 12.5-V battery. Digital circuit
MM74C928 CMOS 3Vdecade counter with 7- free-running oscillator. Interface circuits pro- draws about 40 mA from 6-V supply. — "CMOS
segment outputs gives automatic-zeroing au- vide nonoverlapping control signals to LF11300 Databook," National Semiconductor, Santa
tomatic-polarity 3Vdigit digital voltmeter. for polarity determination and offset correction Clara, CA, 1977, p 5-36-5-37.
PRECISION RECTIFIER— Used in digital volt-

meters to convert AC waveform to full-wave-
rectified DC equivalent. First 3130 opamp is
used as polarity separator, with negative-going
signals appearing across upper 10K resistor and
positive-going signals across lower 10K resis-
tor. Output of opamp exceeds these voltage
drops by exactly diode voltage drop. Second
opamp stage recombines positive and negative
peaks. 5K trimming pot is adjusted so both
peaks are equal height. Output of second
©\
opamp is negative-going full-wave replica of
input signal. After filtering, output is average
DC value in range from 0 to -1.5 V for 0-3 V P-
P input. — D. Lancaster, "CMOS Cookbook,"
© R3K4Mfi
5V@
rr3t> © @ 346.
AAV
-oRANGE
lOV 1 MO
K
(R4)>500 — o50 V
'CALIBRATION BALANCED-FET DC VOLTMETER— Factory-
0-50 DC matched FETs are connected in resistance
K
(r5)>400
SHIELDED MICROAMMETER
bridge that is balanced by R14 to make meter
CABLE read zero for 0-V input voltage. Voltage divider
(M2) provides eight ranges, using 1% resistors for
(rh)^* @^10K
accuracy. Some must be made up by using two
(R/R40K or more resistors in series. Balanced circuit has
ZERO-SET
1.2 mA very low temperature drift, reducing number of
1 MO (r14)T5K WIREWOUND
times rebalancing is needed. — R. P. Turner,
GND "FET Circuits," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis,
IN, 1977, 2nd Ed., p 119-122.
9V -
2%-DIGIT VOLTMETER — Closed-loop system are generated at 330 kHz by two cross-coupled Different full-scale values can be obtained by
designed around Motorola MC1408 8-bit DfA NAND gates in MC7400. UJT oscillator resets using input voltage dividers or by replacing
converter uses clocked binary counter feeding both sets of counters so unknown voltage is re- unity-gain input buffer with suitable fixed-gain
converter to produce staircase ramp function. sampled every 0.5 s. MC7448 BCD to 7-segment buffer. — D. Aldridge, "DAC Key to Inexpensive
Output of converter is compared to unknown decoders convert outputs of BCD counters to 2Hs Digit Voltmeter," Motorola, Phoenix, AZ,
input signal, and clock pulse is terminated when format for LED displays. With values shown,
1975, EB-21.
levels being compared are equal. Clock pulses meter can measure up to 2.55 V in 10-mV steps.
FET VOLTMETER— With FET in one leg of

Wheatstone bridge, meter has input impedance
of over 1 megohm. With no input voltage, adjust
R4 so meter reads zero. With 9-V battery, R1 can
be adjusted for full-scale meter reading of 8 V.
With 12-V battery, meter range is 0-10 V. — F.
M. Mims, "Transistor Projects, Vol. 2," Radio
S 0-1 mA
METER
(BOTTOM)
01 G
METER AMPLIFIER — Meter in feedback path of

opamp is connected in bridge circuit for mea-
suring both AC and DC voltages. Input voltage
is equal to meter current in amperes multiplied
by 3 times value of R1 in ohms; with 3.3K and
0.1 mA, input is 0.99 V. Multiplying milliampere
reading of meter by 10,000 thus gives input volt-
age. Iflong supply leads cause oscillation, con-
nect 0.1-/xF capacitors between ground and
supply pins 4 and 7 as shown. — F. M. Mims,
+12V
PIN 4 PIN 7
V/F CONVERTER — Can be used with any fre-

quency counter. Only last three digits of display
are read for voltage. VCO U22 runs at 1000 Hz
when input is grounded and R3 is 56K. Counter
is preset to 9000. For 0 V, count starts from 9000
and goes up to 10,000 on display, except that 1
at left overflows so reading is 0 V. If input is
+ 1 V, U22goesupto 2000 Hz, appearing as 1000
on display. Voltage divider ahead of input is
needed to divide full-scale voltages of 10, 100,
and 1000 V down to basic 0-1 V range. Range
switch is wired to place decimal in appropriate
position. Use 2.7K for R2. DC voltages are in cir-
cles; upper value is for input probe of electronic
voltmeter on +12 V, and lower value for input
probe grounded. Terminal A goes to overrange
and reverse polarity indicators using 5558 dual
opamp U23 and Archer (Radio Shack) 276-041
or equivalent LEDs. R4 and R5 depend on input-
signal excursion range and exact value of sup-
ply; start with 2700 ohms for R4 and 18K for
R5. — J. Hall and C. Watts, Learning to Work
with Integrated Circuits, QST, June 1976, p 20-
24; revised circuit in June 1977, p 20-21.
ELECTROSCOPE♦v — Gate of FET floats, being

connected only to smooth metal rod tipped
with polished brass ball. Rod is insulated from
housing with polystyrene washer in large hole.
Static drain current of FET is balanced out of
meter with R2 when ball is clear of operator's
body or other object. Meter deflection then is
proportional to intensity of charge on body
brought near ball and on separation. Electro-
scope will respond to vigorously stroked paper
or just-used comb. — R. P. Turner, "FET Cir-
cuits," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977,
3V
2nd Ed , p 153-154.
HIGH INPUT IMPEDANCE — All transistors are

on RCA CA 3095 transistor array. Q1-Q4 are con-
nected to form bridge, with voltage to be mea-
sured applied to base 9. Circuit balance and cal-
ibration are achieved by varying DC voltage
applied to base of Q2. Q7 and 08 serve as con-
stant-current source for cascode differential
amplifier connection of Q1-Q4. Differential out-
put of bridge is applied to differential input of
CA3748 opamp driving meter. Switch gives
choice of three voltage ranges. — E. M. Noll,
p 327.
2M o.6V
vw
1M
3.3M 9V
FET VOLTMETER — Performance is comparable

to that of vacuum-tube voltmeter without re-
quirement ofAC supply. Drift rate is far superior
to that of tubes, allowing 0.5-V full-scale range.
Uses low-leakage low-noise NPD8303 dual
JFET. — "FET Databook," National Semiconduc-
NULL VOLTMETER — Logarithmic voltmeter

using Optical Electronics 9818 opamp and
2245C four-decade bipolar logarithmic function
can serve as output indicator of Wheatstone
bridge, as solid-state galvanometer, or as indi-
cator for differential voltmeter or comparison
bridge. Meter scale values are relative; basic
sensitivity of circuit corresponds to 1 on scale,
representing 100 nV. With this sensitivity, 1 mV
gives full-scale reading. Other three positions of
range switch give 100 mV, 10 V, and 1000 V for
full scale, when using 10-0-10 V meter. Inher-
ent limiting of opamp protects circuit from ov-
ervoltage damage. — "A Logarithmic Null-Volt-
meter Design," Optical Electronics, Tucson, AZ,
2.2V
ANALOG
DIGITAL
GND
GND
V full-scale ranges. Inverters are MM74C14 hex
41/!-DIGIT METER— National MM5330 BCD with sign bit that is valid during overrange and Schmitt triggers. Two-letter NAND gates are
building block is used with LF13300 analog sec- 10,000-count numeral 1. LF13300 has automatic MM74C00 CMOS quad NAND gates. One-letter
tion of A/D converter to provide ±19,999 counts zeroing of all offset voltages. Operation is based NAND gates (A, B, etc) are DM7400 TTL quad
on NSB5917 display. Circuit contains counters, on code conversion of number of counts made 5-22.
NAND gates. — "MOS/LSI Databook," Nation-
latches, and multiplexing system for four full by MM5330 before comparator crossing is de- al Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, p 5-2-
digits of display with one decoder/driver, along tected. Switch gives choice of 2-, 20-, and 200-
1183
POLARITY INDICATOR— Q, and Q2 at input

should be Darlington transistors to minimize
loading on input signal. With no input, current
flows through R,D, and R2D2 networks on alter-
nate half-cycles. Positive signal at input 1 turns
on Q,, shunting sum of current through D3 and
lighting positive-indicating LED in diode bridge.
Similarly, negative voltage on 1 turns on other
LED. Supply requirement of 6.3 VAC can usually
be obtained from digital multimeter with which
indicator is used. — R. A. Snyder, Simple Polarity
Indicator Suits DMM's or DPM's, EDN Maga-
zine, Nov. 5, 1977, p 110.
DIFFERENTIAL AC SIGNALS— Precision full-

wave rectification of differential voltage is
achieved by transforming to current for rectifi- A,
cation and reconversion to output voltage. One
opamp serves as voltage-to-current converter
o,
and the other as rectifying current-to-current
converter. Circuit is suitable for applications in
which lower input impedance and lower fre-
quency response are acceptable. Article gives
design equations. — J. Graeme, Measure Differ-
ential AC Signals Easily with Precision Recti-
fiers, EDN Magazine, Jan. 20, 1975, p 45-48.
0.4-200 MHz VM — Battery-operated RF volt-

meter has full-scale ranges from 0.03 V to 10 V
and flat frequency response from 40 kHz to over
200 MHz. Circuit uses voltage-doubling recti-
fier-type probe CR1-CR2 followed by high-gain
DC amplifier driving milliammeter. Article cov-
ers construction and calibration in detail. — J. M.
Lomasney, Sensitive RF Voltmeter, 73 Maga-
zine, Dec. 1973, p 53-62.
vW —
AC LINE POLARITY METER— Used to determine
correctness of ground wiring in receptacle. Cir-
cuit compares voltage waveform on line con- whether gate voltage of JFET is positive with ground. With properly grounded receptacle,
ductors with AC potential of 10-40 V at 60 Hz respect to source or drain. Zero-center DC mil- meter swings full scale in either direction. — T.
rO=
picked up by antenna which can be human liammeter serves as readout. If plug is inserted Gross, Indicator Shows Correct Wiring Polarity,
body. Circuit is synchronous demodulator that into receptacle having balanced power line, mil- EDN Magazine, Oct. 20, 1978, p 150 and 152.
conducts on alternate half-cycles depending on liammeter stays at center to indicate lack of
FET VOLTMETER — Voltage divider provides 22-

megohm resistance for FET version of VTVM.
JFET Q, is used as source follower. Meter is con-
nected in bridge that is balanced with IK zero-
adjust pot. With proper selection of R, pot can
also be used to set zero point of circuit to half
scale. Accuracy depends primarily on divider
chain. Total current drain rarely exceeds 1 mA,
giving long lifeforalmostany type of battery. —
I. Math, Math's Notes, CQ, Oct. 1974, p 26-27.
33A-DIGIT METER — National MM5863 12-bit bi-

nary building block is used with LF13300 analog
section of A/D converter to provide ±8191
counts on NSB3881 display. MM74C926 CMOS
counter is connected to count clock pulses dur-
ing ramp reference cycle of LF13300. Counts are
latched into display when comparator output
trips and goes low. Operates from single 15-V
supply with aid of DC/DC converter. LM555
serves as clock and generates required negative
supply voltages. All diodes are 1N914.— "MOS/
LSI Databook," National Semiconductor, Santa
Clara, CA, 1977, p 5-2-5-22.
1185
FET AC VOLTMETER— Covers 0-1000 VRMS in

eight ranges. Frequency response referred to 1
kHz is down 3.5 dB at 50 Hz and down 2 dB at
50 kHz. Meter deflection is proportional to av-
erage value of AC signal voltage, but meter can
be calibrated to read RMS voltages on sine-
wave basis. Use 1% resistors for voltage di-
vider. Useful for audio and ultrasonic measure-
ments and tests. — R. P. Turner, "FET Circuits,"
Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1977, 2nd
Ed., p 122-124.
+ 9V
AUTOMATIC POLARITY SWITCHING— Can be

added to almost any high-impedance voltmeter
to give automatic reversal of polarity as re-
quired during measurements. Additional con-
tacts on relay can be used to switch polarity in-
dicators. FET input prevents meter shunting.
Feedback is used in opamp comparator to
speed switching action. — H. Wedemeyer, Auto
Polarity Switching for Voltmeters, Wireless
World, Oct. 1974, p 380.
*to meter amplifier output

CHAPTER 103
Voltage Reference Circuits

Provides variety of fixed and variable positive and negative voltages up to 30
V for use in regulators and other circuits requiring highly stable reference
voltage. Some of circuits can be used as exact replacements for standard
cells. See also Regulated Power Supply, Regulator, and Voltage-Level
Detector chapters.
1.5-12 V FOUR-OUTPUT— Single LM113 1.22-V Use cermet trimmers and metal-oxide fixed re- ±5 V USING OPAMP — Precision Monolithics
stable reference is driven by 1-mA FET constant- sistors in opamp feedback circuits to achieve REF-02 voltage reference provides +5 V di-
current source to provide highly stable low- stabilities of several millivolts over 0 to 70°C rectly, while OP-02 inverting opamp provides
voltage standard driving four adjustable-gain range. — H. Olson, Two IC's and FET Provide -5 V. — "+5 V Precision Voltage Reference/
opamps. Gain of each is set to give desired out- Quad Stable Reference, EDN Magazine, Jan. 20, Thermometer," Precision Monolithics, Santa
put reference voltage in range from 1.5 to 12 V. 1974, p 82. Clara, CA, 1978, REF-02, p 6.
1186
1187
VOLTAGE REFERENCE CIRCUITS
50k
10-turn pot. Opamp operates as inverter for ADJUSTABLE REFERENCE— Two-transistor

-6.9 V TO +6.9 V VARIABLE— National LM199 negative outputs but is noninverting for posi- equivalent of zener is combined with Gulton
temperature-stabilized 6.95-V reference is con- tive outputs. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," 35TF1 thermistor to give voltage stability
verted to continuously variable bipolar output National Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, within 0.5% over 0-50°C range, with output
AN-161, p 6.
by LM108A opamp. Use precision wirewound voltage adjustable from 3.5 to 15.5 V with R2.
Dynamic impedance is only 1 ohm. Developed
for regulator service in battery-powered MOS
instruments. — R. Tenny, Compensated Adjust-
able Zener, EDN Magazine, May 5, 1973, p 72.
BAND-GAP PRECISION REFERENCE— Uses dent of temperature. — "Circuit Ideas for RCA
diodes from CA3086 array and CA3078 micro- Linear ICs," RCA Solid State Division, Somer- +5, +15, AND +25 V — Stacking of Precision
power opamp to develop 2.35-V precisely con- ville, NJ, 1977, p 18. Monolithics REF-02 5-V reference with two REF-
01 10-V references gives outputs increasing in
steps of 10.000 V from 5.000 V. Any number of
additional references can be stacked in same
way up to line-voltage limit of 130 V for refer-
OUTPUT ences, provided total load current does not ex-
ceed about 21 mA. Input change from 27 to 55
V produces output change less than noise volt-
age of devices in circuit shown. — "+5 V Preci-
sion Voltage Reference/Thermometer," Preci-
sion Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1978, REF-02,
0-10.0000 V IN lOO-juV STEPS— Constant cur-

rent from AD506 opamp drives zener, with
5.16K resistor providing optimum current
through zener for temperature-drift cancella-
P 7.
tion. Chopper-stabilized opamp scales output
of zener over full range. Offset-voltage pot
serves for zero calibration. Reference voltage is
stable to about 11 PPM per year. — J. Williams,
Don't Bypass the Voltage Reference That Best
Suits Your Needs, EDN Magazine, Oct. 5, 1977,
p 53-57.
cr3
1N3064
5 V AT 7.5 mA — Circuit uses single pot with

SELF-STABILIZING ZENER— Current through standard opamp to adjust output voltage and si-
7.5-mA zener CR, is independent of supply volt- multaneously set current of 6.2-V zener at op-
age, which may be as low as 10 V. Negative ref- timum value for temperature stability. With
erence is 1.1 times zener rating, or -6.8 V for some opamps, emitter-follower may be needed
zener shown. Article describes circuit operation at opamp output to supply necessary zener cur-
and gives design equations. — L. Accardi, Super- rent. Technique eliminates need for separate
Stable Reference-Voltage Source, EDNIEEE zener current adjustment or permits use of
Magazine, Oct. 1, 1971, p 41-42. lower-cost zener. — K. Hanna, Single Control
Adjusts Voltage Reference, EDN Magazine,
<-V.„ June 5, 1976, p 117.
R2 R3
+ 1 5 V AT 1 00 mA — Boost tran sistor Q, is added

inside feedback loop to amplify output current
of A, to 100mA at scaled-up reference of +15 V
from 6.6-V value of zener. R4 and Q2 provide pro-
tection against load shorts. — W. G. Jung, "1C
Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indi-
anapolis, IN, 1974, p 152-155.
10-V MICROPOWER — Low-drift voltage refer-

ence has standby current less than 100 gA,
using LM4250 opamp to convert zero-temper-
10 V USING STANDARD CELL— Low drift and shielded from air currents. When power is not ature-coefficient current to desired reference
low input current of National LM121 differential applied, disconnect standard cell to prevent it voltage output. Adjust PI for low output tem-
amplifier provide buffering for standard cell from discharging through internal protection perature coefficient, and adjust P2 for exact ref-
with high accuracy. Typical long-term drift for diodes. — "Linear Applications.Vol. 2," National erence desired. — "Linear Applications, Vol. 2,"
LM121 operating at constant temperature is Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-79, National Semiconductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976,
LB-34.
less than 2 ' V per 1000 h. Circuit should be
p8.
1189
*15 VOLTS
METAL FILM
3.4-V RADIATION-HARDENED— Two-stage reg- 0.3% change in output voltages. Article covers
ulator iscombined with special filter design that procedure for designing and testing circuits
helps keep output voltage free of gamma-pro- that are to be operated in high-radiation envi-
duced transients and RFI. Voltage divider using ronment.— A. J. Sofia, Designing a Radiation-
wirewound resistors provides 2-V output. Stable Voltage Reference, EDN Magazine, Sept. +10.000 V — Uses LM301A opamp with 1N825
Gamma radiation of 1,000,000 rads caused only 15, 1970, p 39-41. 6. 2-V zener reference diode (not zener regulator
diode) to maintain stable DC voltage under se-
vere combinations of temperature, shock, and
vibration. Gain resistors R2 and R3 should have
same 0.01%/°C temperature coefficients as ref-
erence diode. R1 is RN55 511-ohm metal-film
resistor, R2 is RN55E 6.04K metal-film resistor,
and R3 is RN55E 3.57K metal-film resistor. R4
and R5 are gain trim resistors. R6 should equal
parallel combination of R2 and R5. R8 is 10K cer-
met pot. with R7 (optional) 100K to 1 megohm.
Article tells how to trim circuit for desired out-
put and howto calculate values of resistors and
temperature coefficients for other output volt-
ages.— D. W. Ishmael, Precision +10.000 V DC
Voltage Reference Standard, 73 Magazine,
Sept. 1975, p 124-126.
low-noise opamp is used to scale and buffer ref-

BUFFERED 10 V — Reference voltage developed erence to give required output of 10 V. Regula-
by National LM199 temperature-stabilized 1C is tion of 15-V supply need be only about 1%. —
6.95 V with very low temperature drift and ex- "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," National Semi-
cellent long-term stability. LH0044 precision conductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-161, p 5.
10-V HIGH-PRECISION— Use of LM399 ther- range of 0 to 70°C. Article gives design equation errors. — W. G. Jung, Precision Reference
mally stabilized subsurface zener in state-of- and covers procedures for optimizing stability Source Features Minimum Errors, EDN Maga-
the-art reference circuit keeps temperature and minimizing power-supply rejection-ratio zine, Aug. 5, 1976, p 80 and 82.
error well under 2 PPM/ C over temperature
Rj R>
Eo2 Scaled Reference Vollage
Eoi - 6.6 V Reference Voltage
VARIABLE 2.5-10 V — General-purpose opamp -6.6 V WITH 741 OPAMP — Reference output of
and zener, operating from single 15 V supply, -6.6 V, determined by breakdown voltage of
serve as stable buffered voltage reference zener, is scaled to more negative level at output
source that is readily adapted to wide range of of A,. If 1558 dual opamp is used in place of 741,
output voltages and currents. R4 applies some other section can be connected to zener as
fraction of zener's 2.5 V to opamp, which am- buffer that rases output current to 5 mA and
plifies itby factor of 4 to give 2.5 to 1 0 V output. lowers output impedance. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-
Output current rating depends on opamp and Amp Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianap-
is about 10 mA for general-purpose types. 759 olis, IN, 1974, p 151.
will handle up to 350 mA, and other devices can
be buffered with NPN emitter-follower stage.
For greater output range, use higher supply
voltage and adjust R2 accordingly. R3 should be
chosen to maintain about 1 mA in zener. — W.
Jung, An 1C Op Amp Update, Ham Radio, March
1978, p 62-69.
+ V,„
+6.6 V AT 5 mA — Half of 1558 dual opamp is put impedance. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp
used as buffer for basic opamp-zener voltage Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, Indianapolis, IN,
reference to raise output current and lower out-
1974, p 150-151.
+ 15 + 10, +20, AND +30 V — Simple stacking ar-

rangement of Precision Monolithics REF-01
voltage references gives near-perfect line reg-
ulation for inputs of 32 to 60 V, with output
changes less than noise voltage of devices for
input extremes. Any number of units can be
stacked to obtain additional output voltages. —
"+10 V Precision Voltage Reference," Precision
Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1977, REF-01, p 7.
1-V HIGH-PRECISION— Drift is less than 1 mV

over 20°C temperature range, and voltage di-
vider reduces this to ±0.1 mV for 1.00-V refer-
ence required in 4'i-digit meter. All three pots
should be wirewound. Current of reference
zener is regulated by opamp gain and zener
voltage. — S. Kelley, "Applications of MC1405/
MC14435 in Digital Meters," Motorola, Phoenix,
AZ, 1975, AN-748, p 19.
VOLTAGE REFERENCE CIRCUITS 1191
+6.6 V WITH 741 OPAMP — Uses combination

of negative and positive feedback to maintain LOW-DRIFT MICROPOWER— Uses JFET biased
constant current of 2 mA in D„ independent of slightly below pinchoff in combination with
variations in ambient temperature and un- micropower opamp to convert zero-tempera-
regulated input. Reference voltage of 6.6 V, de- ture-coefficient drain current to correspond-
termined by breakdown voltage of 1N4611 ingly stable reference voltage. Additional JFET
zener, is scaled up to more positive level at out- J2 makes operation independent of value of un-
put of A, . Scaled output has low impedance and regulated input. Output impedance is low. For
can supply appreciable current without affect- higher output impedance, reference voltage can
ing reference voltage accuracy. Supply must be be taken from wiper of R2, but buffering could
single-ended for reliable starting. — W. G. Jung, then be required. R, is adjusted to compensate
"1C Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard W. Sams, In- for temperature coefficient arising from opamp
dianapolis, IN,1974, p 141-143. supply current. — N. Sevastopoulos and J.
Moyer, Micropower Reference Stays Stable,
EDN M agazine, Sept. 5, 1978, p 158.
6.5-V REFERENCE — Reference amplifier uses

mirror characteristic of noninverting input of
current-mode opamp to determine zener cur-
rent. Resulting voltage drop across zener pro-
vides, through R2, current reference for other
opamps or compensated voltage reference. — R.
W. Fergus, Use Current-Mode Op Amps in Ref-
erence Circuits, EDN Magazine, June 20, 1974,
p 80 and 83.
15V O
?0.2%
OUTPUT
•1 ppm TRACKING
10V, ±1 ppm/°C
10 V WITH TC TRIMMING— Provides tempera- current. Low-drift combination of LM121 and

ture-compensation trimming to give lowest LM108A has drift predictably proportional to used during temperature runs. — R. C. Dobkin,
possible reference-voltage drift for A/D con- offset voltage, permitting use of potentiome- Don't Forget Reference Stability When Design-
verter. Reference zener is LM199A having 0.5 ters for trimming to better than 1 PPM/°C. Arti- ing A-to-D Converters, EDN Magazine, June 20,
PPM/°C drift that is independent of operating cle gives details of trimming procedure to be
1977, p 105-108.
10 V WITH MODERATE DRIFT— Suitable for A/D

converter applications in which output voltage
can drift as much as 20 PPM/°C. Temperature-
drift error is divided equally between zener and
amplifier, permitting use of moderately low-
drift components. — R. C. Dobkin, Don't Forget
Reference Stability When Designing A-to-D
Converters, EDN Magazine, June 20, 1977, p
105-108.
5V
±2.5 V — Precision Monolithics REF-02 voltage

reference and OP-02 inverting opamp provide
desired references when used with supply volt-
ages shown. — "+5 V Precision Voltage Refer-
ence/Thermometer," Precision Monolithics,
Santa Clara, CA, 1978, REF-02, p 6.
Vo ■ R,*'R2(V«Ef) V» ' rT^(V«Ef)
1.01-V STANDARD-CELL REPLACEMENT— Na- LM321 preamp to give standard-cell replace- proper output voltage. — "Linear Applications,
tional LM199 temperature-stabilized 6.95-V ref- ment that can be adjusted to output of exactly Vol. 2," National Semiconductor, Santa Clara,
erence is applied to LM3308 opamp through 1 .01 V. Null offset of opamp before adjusting for CA, 1976, AN-161, p 5.
1193
±7 V REFERENCE — Developed for analog ap-

plications requiring dual-polarity references.
Both voltages are generated from single /xA723
1C voltage regulator chip. Chief requirement is
keeping inputs and outputs within dynamic
range of amplifier, which is +2 to +9 V; this is
done by shifting output voltage level upward
with zener D, and shifting input error voltage
with divider R,-R2. Changing ratio of R3 to R„
changes negative reference value. — D. Wei-
gand. Dual Ri7V Reference Developed from a Sin-
R*
gle juA723, EDN Magazine, Nov. 1, 1972, p 47.
+15 V HIGH-PRECISION — Uses 725 opamp hav-

ing low offset drift and high common-mode re-
jection incombination with low-drift version of
1 N461 1 zener to give highly stable operation at
output currents up to 100 mA. Close-tolerance
low-temperature-coefficient film or wirewound
resistors are required for R„ R2, and R3. Remote
sensing at load corrects for wiring voltage
drops. — W. G. Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook,"
155.
"Adjust tor minimum input offset of A,.
5 V FROM 15 V — Used as reference for A/D con-

verter when reference voltage required is below
that of zener, permitting simplified circuit de-
sign. Zener drift contributes proportionally to
output temperature drift, while opamp offset
drift contributes at greater rate. Opamp is un-
neces ary ifhigh output impedance can be tol-
erated.— R. C. Dobkin, Don't Forget Reference
Stability When Designing A-to-D Converters,
EDN Magazine, June 20, 1977, p 105-108.
10.000 V WITH ZENER — Circuit provides stable

current biasing of zener and adjustable output
voltage by bootstrapping excitation current off
output voltage. Commercial version of circuit
(Analog Devices AD2700) achieves temperature
drift of only 3 PPMrC— J. Williams, Don't By- -15V
pass the Voltage Reference That Best Suits
Your Needs, EDN Magazine, Oct. 5, 1977, p 53-
57.
1194 MODERN
+v„ ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS REFERENCE MANUAL
OPAMP AS MILLIVOLT REFERENCE— High-per-

formance bipolar-input Precision Monolithics
0-6.6 V AT 5 mA — R4 at input of voltage-fol- mon to permit linear output operation down to OP-05CJ instrumentation opamp is connected
lower opamp permits varying reference voltage 0 V. If additional load current is required, NPN as unity-gain buffer. Output is adjusted to de-
from 0 up to limit of zener. A2 compensates for booster transistor can be used with A2. — W. G. sired reference voltage with pot connected to
loading of zener by R4. Dual opamp cannot be Jung, "1C Op-Amp Cookbook," Howard W. offset nulling terminals. Reference range is -3.5
used because negative supply terminal of A2 Sams, Indianapolis, IN, 1974, p 155-157. mV to +3.5 mV, and long-term drift of zenerless
must be slightly more negative than —3 V com- source is less than 3.5 g\i per month. — D. Sod-
erquist, "Simple Precision Millivolt Reference
Uses No Zeners," Precision Monolithics, Santa
Clara, CA, 1975, AN-10.INPUT
+8.2 V — Regulation is 0.01 mV/V for inputs of

10.3-22 V, and temperature stability is ±0.05%
from -55°C to 125°C. Short-circuit protection
for reference is provided internally. Uses Na-
tional LM101, LM301A, or equivalent opamp. —
WIDE INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE— Power for resistor is used in unregulated input to make D. W. Nelson, Introduction to Operational Am-
LM199 temperature-stabilized voltage refer- circuit start properly when power is applied. — plifiers, Ham Radio, March 1978, p 48-60.
ence is obtained from output of LM108A buffer "Linear Applications, Vol. 2," National Semi-
conductor, Santa Clara, CA, 1976, AN-161, p 6. R I
opamp, to permit use with 10-25 V supply. 80K
+ 10 V WITH BOOTSTRAPPED OPAMP— High-

stability Precision Monolithics OP-07A bipolar-
input opamp with ultralow offset voltage pro-
vides precise 10 V virtually independent of
changes in supply voltage, ambient tempera-
ture, and output loading. Choose value of R1 to
maintain zener current at exactly 2 mA, using 5
PPM/°C resistor. All resistor values are deter-
UPWARD SCALING— Output of AD580 three- output range is from 5 V up to voltage limit of mined from exact zener voltage Vz, as given by
terminal voltage regulator is multiplied in shunt opamp used. If desired, reference value can be equations alongside circuit. — D. Soderquist
regulator loop using opamp A,. Resulting ref- programmed via R,. LED lights to show proper and G. Erdi, "The OP-07 Ultra-Low Offset Volt-
erence voltage VReF is scaled upward by recip- operation of circuit. — W. G. Jung, Programma- age Op Amp — a Bipolar Op Amp That Chal-
rocal of feedback divider R,/R2. Resulting refer- ble Voltage Reference Is Stable, yet Simple,
lenges Choppers, Eliminates Nulling," Precision
ence is immune to input variations. Reference EDN Magazine, Nov. 5, 1975, p 98 and 100. Monolithics, Santa Clara, CA, 1975, AN-13, p 8.
Name Index
Accardi, L., 1041 , 1188 Baldwin, E. E., 778 Bobker, G. A., 583
Adamian, A. , 855 Balph, T., 132, 357 Bohan, J. L., 140, 767, 775
Bank, G., 188, 1 152 Bohlken, R., 701
Ady, R. R . , 530
Agnew, J . A. , 808 Bank, W., 464 Bohn, D., 647, 707
Ahmon , M. , 879 Banks, W., 1038
Bong, B. , 616
Ahrens, T. , 1 005 Banthorpe, C. H., 828 Bonnet, D. S., 747
Ainley, J . H . , 640 Barnes, E. E., 497 Boomer, J. K., 1120
Barnes, J., 178, 209, 213, 1042 Boothe, B. , 18
Aldridge, D., 178, 179, 182, 184, 186, 200,
265, 276, 355, 359, 364, 370, 497, 602, Barrington, B. , 914 Bordelon, J. H., 360
667, 728, 747, 748, 813, 1081, 1 171, Bartram, C., 289 Boreham, N. G., 469, 574
1 179 Bartram , C . P. , 7 Borsa , A . , 78
Alexander, P., 736 Batie, H. F., 82, 153, 518, 525 Bourdeau, D. R., 557
Alfke, P., 255 Baughan, L. J., 830 Bourgeois, R., 1020
Allen, G. R., 408, 409, 718 Baylis, P. E . , 57 1 Bowen, J . H . , 25
Altemose, G. A., 137, 514 Beard , G . , 995 Bower, K., 953
Alterman, M. , 95 Beauchamp, P. , 96 Bowman, D. R. , 453
Ames, A., 340 Becciolini, B., 7
Boyd, M., 555, 557
Anderson, D. T. , 774 Beckwitt, D. J., 876 Bozorth, A. S., 642
Anderson, G. L., 136 Beddoe, K. S., 1022 Bram, M. , 1 000
Anderson, R. L., 157, 620, 621, Begault, G. R. , 421 Brandstedt, B., 140, 172, 313, 1159
1031 Belanger, D., 648 Brannan, S. G. , 138
Anderson, S., 772 Bell, A. P., 758 Breazzano, R. R., 756
Anderson, W., 395 Bell, L. J., 614 Breese, J . , 164
Anderson, W. E., 1072 Beltrami, G. , 357 Breeze, E . , 594
Anderton, C., 824 Bendrot, H . R . , 553 Brehm, B. , 484
Anderton, W. E., 1090 Bennett, R. N., 541 Breimeir, J., 988, 991
Andreasen, C. W. , 54, 152, 516, 520, 809 Bepko, S. J, 338 Bretz, B., 1001
Andren, C . , 6 Berg, T. , 319 Brice, J. L., 951
Andrews, F., 1080 Berglund, S. , 5 1 Brickner, D . , 554
Anglin, M. E., 455, 490, 1164 Berlin, H., 810 Bright, P. S. , 838
Apfel, R. J., 37, 475, 710, 727, 806, 853, Berlin, H. M., 310, 315, 321, 413, 522, 606, Briody, P. J . , 43, 50
893, 895, 966, 968, 971, 973, 974, 975, 607, 610, 744, 761, 769, 867, 998 Broadway, R., 192
977, 1 186 Bernstein, J . , 2 1 Broeker, B . , 510
Armanino, E. H., 873 Bessant, M. F., 859, 863, 891

Brogado, C., 766, 832, 843, 844, 1052
Armit, A. , 244 Best, P. J., 607 Brokaw, A. P. , 165
Armstrong, D. R., 617 Biancomano, V., 564 Brokaw, P. , 63, 675
Arnett, D. , 538 Billings, A. , 663 Brooks, K. R., 404, 1172
Arnett, D. B., 620 Bingham, J . R . , 1121 Brown, B. J. , 11 40
Arnold, J . , 144 Bird, C. G., 530 Brown, F., 920, 1066, 1073
Arnold, J. D., 101 Birkwood, L., 371 Brown, J. W., 1070
Arnold, M., 221 Birnie, P. A . , 11 00 Brown, P. , Jr., 1 94
Assard, G. L., 761 Bishop, T., 1 125, 1 128, 1 144 Bruin, F. , 381
Atkins, D. H., 532 Bismarck, O. , 541 Brunner, D., 540
Atmar, W., 529 Blair, B . , 416 Brunner, R. G. , 908

Attenborough, C., 366, 865 Blakeslee, D. A., 121, 1110 Brush, R. J., 571
Blechman, F. , 437 Buchanan, J . E . , 693
Bleher, W., 570, 575 Buehler, E . R . , 45
Babcoke, C., 1025 Bliss, J . , 346 Bundey, D. A. , 1171

Backys, D., 1083 Blood, B., 540, 639, 681, 687, 1152, 1155 Bunin, H., 1 155, 1 157
Bader, C. J . , 156 Blood, W. R., Jr., 361, 363 Bunnell, P., 1111
Bailey, M. , 668 Bloom , A . , 230 Buonocore, R. J., 1160

Bair, M. W., 1162 Bloom, A. R. , 495 Burger, H . , 1144
Baird, B., 1144 Bloom, G. E., 534, 961 Burhans, R. W. , 983
Baker, M. G. , 246 Bober, R., 574 Burkhardt, J. H., Jr., 237
Baker, R. , 1 069 Bober, R. E., 569, 570, 71 1, 752, 884, 888 Burney, J . , 143
1195
Burrows, B. J., 708 Cook, L. , 54 Douds, C. F. , 555
Burton, L. T. , 310, 313 Cooper, H. W. , 1152 Dow, R . , 188
Burwasser, A. J., 800 Downs, R. F., 191
Copes, E. , 481
Burwen, E., 565, 740 Cormack, S. J . , 773
Doyle, T. E . , 870
Burwen, R . , 670 Cornell, K., 27, 28, 227 Drake, L., 607, 823
Burwen, R. S., 208, 422, 498, 885, 1 171 Coulbourn, D. W., 409 Draut, J. E., 1163
Buscemi , J . , 811, 1134 Counts, L., 501, 506, 596, 597 Dressel, G. , 832
Buss, R. R., 632 Cowan, B. P. , 1177 Drumeller, C. , 1109
Butcher, G. F. , 672 Cowie, G. , 628 Drummond-Murray, A., 119
Butler, F., 568, 573 Cox, R., 513 DuBois, J., 1144
Buus, B . , 916 Craig, O. W., 725 Dujmich, P. J . , 785
Bywaters, S. F., 281, 704 Crampin, L. , 1105 Dull, W., 724
Crawford, J., 109
Dunaja, R., 740
Crawford, J. W., 825, 924 Dunn, S. , 1142
Caggiano, A. C., 646 Crawford, T. R., 142, 151 Dunne, J . , 399
Cahill, S., 1065 Creason, S., 366 Durgavich, T. , 1051
Calbo, W. R., 854 Critchfield, M. , 545 Duris, R., 454, 531, 549
Calvert, A. H . , 43 Crittenden, W. B., 674 Durst, C., 1 120
Calvin, N., 822 Cross, H., 412 Dusina, E . , 32, 478
Campbell, R. W., 11 23, 1148 Cross, H. H., 817, 818 Dwyer, T. , 545
Carinalli, C., 271, 280, 284 Crovella, E . , 470
Dye, R. K., 1076
Carpenter, C. R., 540 Crowther, J . F. , 262
Carpenter, H. C., 462 Crutcher, L., 226
Carr, J., 903 Cullings, C . , 443 Eaton, M., 135, 140
Carr, J. J., 32, 904, 905, 909 Culter, R. G., 166 Ebneter, K., 1017, 1023
Carroll, C. , 811 Currell, R. W. , 950, 951 Eccleston, J . , 120
Carter, J . P. , 610 Currie, N. C., 747 Edrington, J. , 517
Carter, R., 328 Cuthbert, L. G., 122, 937, 954 Eisenberg, D. M., 219, 231, 233, 237, 445,
Carter, R. M. , 190 Czebiniak, J . F. , 481 800, 821, 929
Cartwright, R. F., 559 Elias, J., 546
Caso, L. F., 755 Ellis, J. N., 64
Cate, T., 212, 319, 377 Dabbs, M. D., 560 Ellison, J. H., 384, 876
Cater, J. P., 215 Dance, J. B., 383, 762 Emi liani , G . , 67 1
Cattermolen, F. H., 896 Dantuono, D., 954

Engle, J. L., 615
Counter, J . M. , 373 Dauben, D., 929, 932
Cavcey, K. H., 113 Davis, C. , 608 Epp, V.,
Erdi, G., 395
199, 464, 649, 653, 658, 1049,
Cawthon, R . , 935 Davisson, E. R., 777 1194
Cerat, M. , 466 Dawson, J . , 54, 71 Erickson, B. K. , 480
Chamberlin, H., 623, 634 Day, A., 103, 150 Erickson, K., 257, 1018
Chance, R. J., 104, 202 Day, P. I., 706 Errico, J . , 1 069
Chang, S. , 615 Deboo, G. J . , 314 Evans, A. G., 99, 764
Chapel, J. C., 912 Debowey, B. , 416 Everhart, J . , 870
Chapman, M. A., 73, 139, 31 1, 331, 799, DeKold, D., 467 Everhart, J. H., 926, 1 104
81 1
Delagrange, A. , 976
Cheek, T. F. , Jr. , 13 DeLaune, J . , 1 004
Cheney, D., 1080 DeLaune, J. M., 249, 259 Fairman, R . A. , 1 094
Chetty, P. R., 94, 509, 51 1 DeMaw, D., 10, 16, 20, 23, 24, 27, 39, 76, Fallenbeck, G. K., 998
Chetty, P. R. K., 972 143, 146, 221, 223, 225, 330, 337, 402, Fanstini, C., 763
Chin, J., 1091 444, 447, 451, 681, 683, 692, 778, 785, Farel, C. A., 724
Chiu, V. J. H., 730 786, 787, 791, 792, 794, 898, 1070, Farr, T. M., Jr., 237
Chladek, I. M., 113 1075, 1 122, 1124, 1 125, 1 127, 1 133, Farrell, J., 552, 556
Christner, K. W. , 517 1 147, 1 169 Faulkner, M., 759, 972
Ciarcia, S., 182, 192, 193, 194, 195, 196, De Monstoy, H., 436 Fergus, R. W., 29, 1 191
200, 435, 436, 438, 443, 547, 550, 551, Dendinger, S., 161, 883 Fette, B., 190, 191 , 1089
858, 860, 1167, 1 177 Denison, W. , 98 Fichtenbaum, M. L., 453
Clapp, C., 379 Derfler, F. J., 870 Fickle, D. M., 724

Clark, B., 374 DeWath, E. J., 210 Finger, R. J . , 551
Clark, V. R., 1057 Dickerson, J. A., 735 Firth, J. M., 370
Clarke, A. M., 815, 829 Dickson, G. M., 866 Fischer, H. P., 158, 1021
Clayton, G. B., 207, 212, 213, 499, 500, Dighe, K. D., 510, 608, 620 Fisher, H. P., 428
501, 502, 596, 599, 606, 607, 618, 619, Dilatush, D., 1066 Fisk, J., 64, 129, 159, 693, 739, 833, 938,
653, 657, 701, 1 174 Dillon, J. B., 1016 1126
Clement, R. D., 683, 684 Di Mario, D . , 643 Fleischer, K . H . , 76
Dimitrios, J . , 294 Flindell, I., 754
Clower, P. , 86
Coan, R. N., 232 Dixon, L., 965, 966, 968, 969, 970, 975 Flower, J . C. , 516
Cochrane, P. , 937 Dobbin, W. J., 1045 Flynn, E. A., 291
Cockerell, D. , 1106 Dobkin, R., 247, 351, 657, 661, 836, 848 Foot, N . J . , 4, 455
Coers, G., 122 Dobkin, R. C., 418, 431, 433, 434, 558, 562, Forbes, C. R. , 894
Cohen, J., 959, 960, 962 758, 821, 827, 831, 835, 849, 850, Ford, G. C., 736
Cohen, M. I., 410, 412 1053, 1059, 1 170, 1191, 1 192, 1 193 Fox, J. H., 147, 1116
Cole, J. B., 74, 698 Dodd, M. M., 1093 Fox, L. J., 335, 1013
Colson, J . D. , 781 Doone, T., 630 Franco, S. , 423
Cone, H., 817, 928 Dorman, A. , 438 Frank, R. , 549
Conklin, B., 170, 173 Dostal, J., 647, 1 175 Fransen, R. H . , 521
Connelly, J. A., 452, 747 Doting, A. F., 28 Franson, P., 42, 828, 1 1 14
Cook, J., 666 Dotson, R. N. , 662 Frantz, R., 58, 63, 216, 430, 595, 598
1196
Frederiksen, T. , 404, 436 Haines, C., Jr., 871 Hileman, D. , 911
Freeborn, J. C., 299, 302, 304, 672 Hall, C., 34, 115, 121, 332, 334, 337, 474, Hileman, L. , 911
Freeman, W. , 175 647, 689, 694, 789, 898, 902 Hill, T. W., 172
Frey, G. D., 1132, 1 140 Hall, J., 1180 Hilsher, R. W., 512, 1098
Friton, G. E., 190, 191, 804 Hall, M. G., 754 Hinch, P. G., 1105
Frost, B. J., 119, 123 Halligan, J . , 259 Hinkle, F. E., 592, 91 2, 1 149
Frost, J . B . , 176 Hamill, J. W., 517 Hinkle, F. E., Jr., 156
Fruitman, E., 1073 Handel, T. , 96
Hinkle, G., 18, 25, 49, 95, 97, 99, 108, 148,
Furlow, B., 1 , 270, 647, 680 Haney, R. J., 661 380, 872
Hanisko, J. C., 700, 843, 1 153 Hinshaw, J., 356
Hanna, K . , 1188 Hiscocks, P. D., 423
Gabriel, F. C., 1 149 Hansen, P., 756 Hitchcock, R. W., 815, 1115
Galbreath, C. E., 1 127, 1 143 Hanson, H., 1078 Hnatek, E. R., 670, 969, 1091, 1095
Gallagher, M. J., 508 Hardcastle, J. A., 336 Hoare, R. A. , 524
Gangi , J . , 841 Hardek, T. W., 759 Hobbs, J. N., Jr., 365
Garrett, J., 118, 132, 145 Hardesty, R., 1087 Hochman, S. W., 1140
Garthwaite, E. T. , 74 Hardy, C. W., 365, 368, 369 Hodgson, H., 395
Gehrke, F. E . , 16 Hardy, H. L., 712 Hoegerl, J . , 482
Gellender, E . , 677 Hargrove, A. H., 78, 698 Hoff, M. E., 533, 538
George, F. E., 757 Harris, H. E., 353, 354, 356, 363 Hoffman, D. C., 667
George, R. E., 525 Harris, R., 932 Hofheimer , R., 771 ,1169
Gephart, R. L. , 617 Harris, R . C . , 931 Hoge, W. J. J., 37
Gerdes, R. C., 1078 Harris, R. J., 323, 783 Hogenson, J . , 287
Getz, F. C., 918 Harrison, R., 683, 685, 688, 689, 690, 692,
Hogg, D., 572, 575, 578
Giboney, D., 764 693, 694, 915, 917 Hoisington, B., 9, 227, 230, 387, 390, 395,
Gilbert, C., 608 Harrold, R. A. , 508 401, 447, 450, 680, 688, 779, 781, 783,
Gilder, J. H., 723 Harry, R. J., 640
907, 1130
Gilmore, M. E . , 88 Hart, B., 289, 298
Hojberg, K. S. , 533
Glaab, J., 1090 Hart, R. P., 669 Holden, A. S. , 386
Gnauden, H. , 132 Hartmann, C . S. , 13 Holm, J. P., 709
Holman, T., 705
Godbole, V. R., 368, 749 Hartopp, R. V., 724
Goldstein, L., 969 Hartson, T. E., 638 Hotter, N. K., 20
Goldstein, M. , 30 Hartz, E., 28, 31 , 1141 Hood, J. M., 869
Goodwin, A. , 87 Hartz, E. H., 743 Hood, W. E., 721
Gorski, C., 1001 Hartzell, R. E., Jr., 83 Hoose, R . D . , 136
Gottlieb, I. M., 2, 4, 6, 459, 460, 475 Harvey, B . , 1176 Hopkins, J . , 1 029
Graeme, J., 165, 431, 648, 656, 657, 775, Harvey, C . A. , 696 Hopkins, J. C., 616
1 172, 1173, 1 177, 1 183 Harvey, R. S. , 104 Hopkins, T., 255, 260
Graf, C. R., 527, 1 159 Hatchett, J., 388, 398, 691, 1 132, 1 134, Hopkins, T. P. , 510
Graf, R. F., 275, 344 1135, 1138 Hornbostel , E . , 1109
Hauck, L. T., 172 Horton, R . , 118

Graham, G. A., 192, 196, 197
Graham, R . , 484 Hauser, M. W. ,1104 Horwitz, C., 523, 606, 609
Granberg, H., 1126, 1130, 1131, 1149 Haver, R. J., 94, 366, 489, 490, 731, 737, Hosking, M. W., 110
Granberg, H. O., 836, 1 136, 1 145, 742, 953, 966, 967, 975, 979 Hosking, W., 149, 865
1 150 Haver, R. L., 853 Hosking, W. J., 536, 863, 868, 999, 1006
Granieri, G. J., 340, 1092, 1 106, 1158 Hawker, P., 391 Hrivnak, E. E., 130, 139, 171, 241
Grappel, R. D., 154, 556 Hawkins, W. J . , 862 Hubbs, R. A., 28
Grater, B . , 765 Hawkinson, S. W., 1159 Huber, M. F. , 441
Gray, E. W., 293 Haydon, T. H . , 641 Hudor, A. M., Jr., 193, 795
Greeb, F. J . , 483 Hayek, T. , 543 Huehne, K., 200, 502, 505, 535, 602, 1171
Green, C., 1 16, 786 Hays, R. M. , Jr. , 13 Huffman, J., 822, 1 137
Green, S. I., 269, 275 Hayward, W., 74, 329, 334, 337, 497, 642, Hughes, P. , 820
Greene, C., 1070, 1075 783, 1113, 1115, 1116 Hughes, R. S. , 78
Gregoire, W. A., Jr., 686 Hulick, T. P., 19
Healy, P. C., 675
Gregory, V., 245, 1 101, 1 102, 1 107 Heater, J . C . , 1104 Hutchinson, T. E., 605
Heckman, D. B., 741 Hutchison, A. B., Jr., 6

Gregory, V. C., 581
Grenlund, W., 666 Heckt, N., 67 Hutton, L. I . , 825
Griesmyer, G. , 1121 Hedgeland, D. R., 49

Griffee, F. M., 323, 905 Hedlund , R. C., 314
lliffe, J. L., 31
Griffiths, K., 895 Heiserman, D., 922
Grimes, J., 288, 297 He jha 11, R., 400, 401, 560, 561, 789, 920 Imhof, K. J., 616
Grocock, J . A. , 11 Helfrick, A., 179, 750
Ingram, D., 1003
Groom, R. G., 1029 Helfrick, A. D., 143, 385 Isaacs, R. J., 646, 1051
Gross, T. , 1184 Hellwarth, G. A., 7, 14 Isenring, H., 354, 358
Gross, T. A., 568 Helmers, C., 545, 552 Isenson, R. S., 268
Guentzler, R. E., 780 Hembling, D., 562, 1111, 1 1 15, 1122 Ishmael, D. W. , 1189
Guerri, E., 362 Hemenway, J., 154, 992
Gulledge, B., 1009 Hennick, R., 700
Gunderson, R., 673 Henry, T., 1 84, 202, 1093 Jackson, W. R . , 680
Gupta, Y. M., 138 Heptig, R. C., 868, 869 Jacobs, R. W., 180, 182
Herbert, J. W., 779 Jacoby, B. F. , 425
Herbst, C. A., 136, 699, 713 Jaeger, R. C. , 7, 14
Hadley, M., 94, 1025, 1054 Hibbert, G., 830, 834, 947 Jaffe, M. , 604
Hagan, J. V., 220, 1 143 Hickey, W. A. , 146 James, D. , 201
Hahn, M. C., 697 Hildreth, D. E., 159 James, K. D., 40, 804
Hailey, W. H., 487 Hildreth, H. R., 1118 James, M., 1066, 1076
1197
Janicke, J . M. , 911 Koehler, J . A. , 1124 Lovelock, P. A., 315, 316, 323, 332, 931
Janikowski, R., 339, 691 Kollar, C. A., 1119 Lowe, B . , 448
Jarrett, B . R . , 303 Kopec, G. E . , 56 Lucas, J . S. , 671
Jarvis, W. H . , 42 Ludlow, D. L., 1079
Kopp, A. R., 595
Jeffrey, J . , 1 083 Korth, B., 946 Lue, J. T., 697
Jensen, S. A. , 650 Kothari, H. S. , 101 Lukoff, H., 902
Jewell, G. C., 556 Kotras, W. A., 1012 Lundberg, M. B., 452

Jochem, W., 766 Kraengel, W. D., Jr., 1007
Lynch, D . J . , 1131
Joerger, R. B., 148, 819, 820 Kraman, S., 1089
Joffe, A. S., 1 15 Kramer, R . F. , 116
Johnson, F., 75, 989 Kraul, D. R., 584 Maas, S. A. , 801
Johnson, J. C., 731 Kraus, K., 206, 464, 671 McAlister, J. E. , 606
Johnson, J. R. , 229 Krause, V. R. , 804 McClellan, G., 816, 1 176

Johnson, L., 767 Krell, I., 1165 McCoy, L., 22, 447, 681, 816, 1169
Johnson, N., 336, 1167 Kreuzer, R. , 1107 McDermott, T. C., 1009
Johnson, R. A. , 519 Kufchak, G. W., 541 Macdonald, H., 1073
Johnson, S. , 1175 Kusko, A., 724 Macdonald, N., 884

Johnston, B. , 1133 Kvochick, J. A., 872 McDowell, J., 962
Johnston, G. A., 122, 125 MacDowel I, W., 1003
Jones, D. B., 966, 968, 971, 973, 974, 975, MacDowell , W. L., 294, 353, 874
977 Lacefield, M. M., 938 MacFarlane, I. , 359
Jones, F. B . , 418 Laidman, H. S., 403 McGahee, T. , 548
Jones, F. C., 638 Lalitha, M. K., 509, 51 1 McGee, A. E., Jr., 739
Jones, G., 152, 1 169 Lamb, S., 758, 1083 McGillivray, R., 572
Jones, R. W., 26 Lambing, B. , 11 46 McKellips, W. K., 287

Jordan, B. D. , 996 Lammers, U. H., 21, 22 McLachlan, A. S., 640
Jose, M., 1099 Lancaster, D., 88, 546, 550, 554, 1107 McLaughlin, D., 763
Jung, W., 38, 57, 67, 72, 246, 611, 678, Landahl, C. , 1136 MacLean, A., 294, 349, 477, 685
748, 876, 1031, 1190 Landefeld, E . , 114 Macli, F., 670, 681
Jung, W. G., 12, 56, 59, 60, 64, 65, 130, Lang, R. J . , 761 McMullen, T. , 221, 1 139
217, 296, 430, 559, 584, 612, 615, 673, Lange, R., 252 McNair, B., 488, 1 109
675, 676, 680, 702, 762, 849, 1035, Langford, A. K., 666 McPherson, H. , 427
1088, 1097, 1098, 1189, 1194 Laster, C. , 637 Maddever, R. S., 523
Laughlin, E. G., 753 Maddison, P. D., 762

Laughlin, J. R., 196, 1 166 Magee, J . , 132
Kahhan, L. P., 402, 770 Lawless, P. A. , 403 Maginniss, C. L., 370
Kalanit, G., 42, 279 Lawrence, E . , 816 Mahood, W. L., 1068
Kalin, E., 823 Lawrence, E . A. , 1110 Maidment, H., 87
Kane, E., 1157 Lawrence, T. , 824 Malarkey, T. , 83, 579

Kanter, E., 783, 872 Mandell, L. J., 214
Lay, E . C . , 679
Karash, K., 751 Leach, W. M., 703 Manell, H., 1101
Karpiej, D., 898 Lear, M. A. , 760 Mann, L. A. , 370
Kasevich, L. S. , 424 Learner, K. O. , 1012 Manners, D. E . , 769
Katz, M., 100 Leavey, M. I., 529, 717 Marcel, M., 677
Kaufman, M. , 1169 Lefferts, P., 162, 244, 344, 345, 346, 348, Marco, C., 77
Kaufmann, J. E. , 56 350, 833, 845, 874, 898, 923, 926, Marshall, R. C., 639, 878
Keil, R. E., 458 1046, 1047, 1052, 1058, 1059, 1060, Martin, M. G., 290
Kelley, A. A., 91 1 1062 Martin, P. G., 24, 30, 31
Kelley, B., 157, 687, 812, 900 Lehman, J . A. , 484 Martin, S. R. , 642
Kelley, S., 178, 179, 181, 182, 186, Leighton, L. , 1130 Marvel, O. E., 299, 302, 304
1190 Lewart, C. R., 150, 712 Masson, C . R . , 827
Kelly, R. E., 893 Lewis, G. , 608 Math, I., 172, 301, 302, 356, 386, 394, 768,
Kelly, S., 93, 219, 669, 793 Lewis, R., 715, 719, 720 784, 798, 805, 892, 1002, 1041, 1082,
Kenney, D. J . , 814 Ley, H. L., Jr., 799 1083, 1 167, 1 184
Keppel, M. E. , 486 Li, T. H., 207 Mathieson, P. H., 114, 1048
Kesner, D., 698 Libenschek, R. S., 150 Matic, B., 1027
Kilpatrick, A. H., 988 Licata, W. H., 421 Matteson, B. , 438
Kim, S., 991 Lieber, A. , 1110 Mauro, R., 639

Kim, S. N., 278 Liebman, R., 429 Maxwell, J., 654, 746, 834
Kincaid, R., 400 Lincoln, T. , 351 , 520
May, L., 448
King, B., 690 Linsley Hood, J. L., 71, 387, 570, 762, 803, Mayhugh, T. , 17, 19
King, R., 782 804, 903, 984, 986, 987, 988, 989, Mayo, M. J., 717
1085
Kingsbury, J . F. , 714 Mazur, T. , 567, 573, 575, 576, 723, 729,
Kirchner, E. , 1018 Lisle, L., 683, 688
732, 733, 1082, 1085
Kirkwood, B. , 67 Little, A., 1 11 1 Megirian, R., 197, 228, 229, 445, 447, 449,
Kish, J., Jr., 771 Little, C. M., 741 739, 786, 794, 797, 925
Mele, V., 91
Kissinger, K. W., 744 Lo, C. C., 90, 819
Kitchens, M. D., 1070 Lo, H., 578, 580 Mendelson, R. M., 352
Kitchin, C., 945 Locher, B. , 155 Merkowitz, F. L., 660, 665
Klappenberger, A. J., 337, 1068 Lomasney, J. M., 1183 Merry, F. J . , 232
Klinert, C., 230, 789, 1 126 Long, J. D., Ill Messick, R. L., 378
Kluge, J. E., 1025 Loomis, S. S., 548, 553 Meyer, B. , 810
Knott, K. F., 305, 322 Lorona, A. , 813
Meyer, G. L., 1072
Knutrud, T. , 724 Loughmiller, J., 1014, 1019 Meyer, H. , 391
Koch, C. J., 1049, 1055 Lovell, M. L., 823
Meyer, L., 868
Kochen, D., 805, 810 Lovelock, P. , 643 Mickle, D. D., 494, 729, 732, 733
1198
Milberger, W. E., 193 Pike, A., 815
Nugues, J . , 687
Miller, C. G., 376 Nurse, H. , 1017 Pike, J. M., 194
Miller, D., 814 Pike, W. S., 623, 633
Miller, D. A., 647 Pinner, W., Ill, 120, 1090
Miller, J. T., 151 O'Brien, J. T. , 301 Pinner, W. W., 807

Mills, J. G., 1016 Ogilvie, A. G. , 703 Pinter, P., 91, 297, 667
Mills, J. L., Jr., 715 Okolowicz, J . , 89 Pinto, S. G. , 758
Milo, W. C., 665 Olberg , S., 1117 Pippenger, D. , 259

Piraino, F. J . , 98
Misra, R. K., 856 Olberg , S. M., 82, 448
Pirkle, S. J., 857
Mitchell, C. E., 171, 664 Oldfield, M. L., 707, 817
Mitchell, K. W., 838 Oliver, R. , 664 Plavcan, A. , 767
Moell, J., 411 Olschewski, B. , 532 Pluess, A. , 147
Mollinga, T. , 796 Olsen, R., 1146

Pogge, R. D., 80
Moneysmith, W. G., 867 Olsen, R. K., 1125 Pollock, J., 144, 808
Monstall, A. D., 650 Olson, H., 7, 36, 92, 93, 95, 96, 97, 99, Pollock, J. W., 145
Moon, D. L., 930 Pollock, N . , 40
154, 171, 225, 393, 404, 405, 410, 417,
Morgan, B. , 388 493, 690, 772, 789, 791, 793, 805, 807, Poore, J. W., 373
Morgan, D. R., 109, 504, 950 810, 812, 819, 822, 828, 830, 831, 832, Porat, D. , 371
Morgan, H. L., 2 833, 835, 836, 837, 844, 901, 904, 915, Porter, W. A., 761
Morin, P. B., 164 951, 1075, 1 108, 1 168, 1 186 Post, R. D., 396
Potter, E . , 639
Moroni, P., 224, 688 O'Neil, B., 134, 135, 282, 363
Morris, E. E., 938 Potter, K. E., 755
O'Neil, P., 491, 551, 662, 722, 723, 724,
Morris, J. E., 638 725, 733, 864 Powell, K., 164, 274, 285, 296, 298, 375,
Morrow, R. K., Jr., 932 Opal, C. B., 154 507, 518, 522, 820, 1028, 1051
Mortensen, H., 976 O'Reilly, W. P., 1143 Powis, W. C., 229
Prazak, P., 523
Mortensen, H. H., 790, 798 Orozco, R . , Jr. , 384
Moseley, R. C., 666 Orr, T., 312, 624, 625, 626, 628, 629, 630, Price, R. L., 781
Priebe, D., 169
Moss, M. J., 1158 631, 634, 636, 809
Mount, R. D., 290 Osgood, S., 260 Priel , U., 217
Mouton, A., 234, 261, 265, 266, 267, 276, O'Toole, T., 282 Prior, P. V., 293
728, 1081 Outlaw, C . J . , 627 Prioste, J. E., 538
Owen, T. R. , 280 Pritchard, N., 168

Moyer, J., 1 191
Moynahan, G. F., 901 Owings, E. J., Jr., 674 Prongue, M. P. , 1071
Muench, M., 224 Oxner, E., 12, 779, 784, 788, 792, 799 Prudhomme, W. J., 81, 107, 127, 264, 272,
Mula, T., 1 150 276, 590, 606, 609, 684, 758, 1 154
Munn, J., 549 Pryor, L., 736
Murphy, E. L., 1058, 1063 Pacholok, D. R., 531, 806 Pshaenich, A., 279, 284, 285, 286, 288, 293,
Murthi, E., 258, 396, 1004 Pacyna, E., 780 295, 338, 339, 340, 341, 342, 493, 51 1,
Murugesan, S., 745 Padmanabhan, K., 613, 952 512, 513, 571, 576, 579, 725, 726, 729,
Mussell, C. B. , 68 Paine, J. N., 429 731 , 732, 891, 892, 893, 894
Musto, D. J., 963 Paiva, M. O., 205, 472 Pulice, J., 1030
Myers, R., 495 Palm, W. A., 9, 512, 606

Myers, R. M., 336, 740 Pontic, D. , 613
Papanicolaou, E. S., 168, 790, 798 Quay, W. E., 372

Paquette, J . S. , 861 Queen, I., 688
Parker, W. E., 21 Quick, D. L., 10, 563
Naai jer, G. J . , 442 Parks, D., 439 Quinlivan, F. R. , 539
Nagle, J. J., 950 Parron, N., 83
Quong, R., 247
Nappe, J . , 982 Parry, R. R., 738, 815, 1020
Nash, G., 248, 544 Parsonage, P. C., 95
Negoro, K., 899 Pasaric, B., 151 Raab, F. H., 1127, 1 147
Nelson, C., 373, 512, 686, 965, 1039, 1084, Patel, R., 965, 966, 968, 969, 970, 975 Raina, H. S., 856
1088 Paterson, A., 672, 826 Rampil, I. , 988, 991
Nelson, C. T. , 821, 828, 829, 831, 832, 833, Pawlan, J . , 103 Ramprakash, V., 879
838 Pearl, B., 769
Rappold, S. T. , 641
Nelson, D., 525, 526, 528, 529 Pearson, R. H., 41, 372, 806 Rau, R. S. N., 374
Nelson, D. W., 1194 Pease, R., 537 Rawson-Harris, D., 2
Nelson, J . R. , 756 Pease, R. A., 318, 322, 651, 654 Rayer, F. G., 1 18, 120
Nelson, P. , 554 Peck, D., 357 Read, D. C., 33, 309, 667
Nelson-Jones, L., 389, 818 Peltzman, E . S. , 171 Reddeck, T., 1109
Nesbitt, F. E . , 615 Perkins, D., 735

B 001 001 132

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B 001 001 132

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B 001 001 132

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MODERN

COMMUNICATIONS CIRCUITS READY-REFERENCE

ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MANUAL

ELECTRONICS PROJECTS READY-REFERENCE

ESSENTIAL CIRCUITS REFERENCE GUIDE

GUIDEBOOK OF ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS

MODERN ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS REFERENCE MANUAL

POPULAR CIRCUITS READY-REFERENCE

SPECIAL CIRCUITS READY REFERENCE

McGRAW-HILL BOOK COMPANY

Markus, John, date.

“Over 3630 modem electronic circuits, each complete

and convenient browsing.”

TK7867.M345 621.3815'3 79-22096

Copyright © 1980 by McGraw-Hill, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed

91011121314 KPKP 99876543210

Printed and bound by The Kingsport Press.

NMOS N-channel MOS

Abbreviations on Diagrams. Some foreign publica-

TRANSISTORS: N-CHANNEL MT = MAIN TERMINAL

'€1 PNP P-CHANNEL

POWER CONTROL DEVICES:

Includes general-purpose RF amplifiers covering various portions of spectrum

0.25—400 MHz CASCADE — Three hybrid mod-

are IK, and R3 is 300 ohms. — "Wideband Hybrid

AC WITH IMMUNITY TO LARGE DC OFFSET—

SUMMING/SCALING VIDEO— With Motorola

500 kHz TO 500 MHz — Two-stage general-pur-

2304-MHz PREAMP — Narrow-band stage using

MULTIPURPOSE MODULE — Flexible circuit

FET-BIPOLAR SOURCE FOLLOWER— Used

HIGH-VOLTAGE BUFFER — Circuit shown for I, is proportional to l„ and output voltage V„ is

2k 390 20k WIDEBAND VARIABLE GAIN— FET serves as

6 MODERN ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS REFERENCE MANUAL

CASCODE — Combination of unipolar and bi-

HIGH-Z PREAMP — Provides up to 20 megohms

10-dB GAIN AT 0.01-100 MHz— High-gain

BIAS SUPPLY FOR CLASS AB— Two-transistor

VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED GAIN— 2N5457 FET

give maximum possible reduction in input ca-

100 W FOR DC TO 500 kHz — Circuit using Op-

* VARIABLE CAPACITANCE <0.5-1.0pF) ADJUSTMENT

DELIVERS FOLLOWING PEAK

VIDEO ATTENUATOR— FETs in T attenuator

20k 1% STABILIZED BIAS — Simple voltage-feedback

resistor values, DC voltage feedback from emit-

POLARITY-IGNORING VOLTAGE FOLLOWER— input to voltage follower through D,. Output

HIGH-IMPEDANCE VIDEO — Compound series-

2.5-MHz BANDWIDTH LOW-NOISE— Paralleled

50-dB BROADBAND VIDEO— RCA CA3018 four-

RC-COUPLED DIFFERENTIAL— Input signal is

FET CASCODE VIDEO— Use of 2N5485 FETs

70-dB VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED GAIN— Ampli-

168-MHz BANDPASS — Gain stage provides

CASCODE RF/IF— Uses half of Signetics 511

WIDEBAND BUFFER — Low input capacitance of

80 MHz WITH INPUT PEAKING— Response of 1974, p 91-92.

DIFFERENTIAL CASCODE — Direct-coupled

LADDER ATTENUATOR — Inserted in series